Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Product and Software Release 9.4 July 2012
Retour à l'accueil, cliquez ici
Téléchager le pdf : http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/optical/15000r9_4/dwdm/configuration/guide/454d94_config.pdf
Voir également :
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/text.gif)
Cisco-Telephones-IP-..> 01-Jun-2013 10:28 2.4M
Cisco-UCS-C200-Serve..> 01-Jun-2013 10:27 2.6M
Cisco-ONS-15454-DWDM..> 01-Jun-2013 10:27 4.8M
Cisco-ONS-15454-Refe..> 01-Jun-2013 10:26 3.0M
Cisco-Unified-IP-Pho..> 01-Jun-2013 08:01 2.3M
Cisco-Meraki-Cloud-C..> 01-Jun-2013 07:55 2.3M
Cisco-IPSec-Negotiat..> 01-Jun-2013 07:52 2.1M
Cisco-ASA-5500.htm 01-Jun-2013 07:45 2.1M
CiscoSecurityApplian..> 01-Jun-2013 07:35 2.0M
Cisco-Manuel-du-tele..> 03-Apr-2013 15:45 2.0M
Cisco-836-Router-and..> 03-Apr-2013 15:38 1.6M
Cisco-837-Router-and..> 03-Apr-2013 15:38 1.6M
Cisco-Manuel-du-tele..> 03-Apr-2013 15:37 1.8M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 10:04 4.1M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:44 3.5M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:40 3.0M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:34 2.9M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:29 2.7M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:24 3.7M
CiscoPrimeNetworkCon..> 04-Sep-2012 09:17 3.0M
XML-Schema-Object-Do..> 03-Sep-2012 18:55 2.1M
XML-Schema-Object-Do..> 03-Sep-2012 18:35 4.9M
Cisco-IOS-XR-XML-API..> 03-Sep-2012 18:29 4.7M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:25 5.0M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:20 5.7M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:15 5.9M
Cisco-IOS-XR-Carrier..> 03-Sep-2012 17:10 4.5M
Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:07 4.3M
Cisco-Introduction-t..> 03-Sep-2012 16:57 4.2M
Cisco-Security-Appli..> 03-Sep-2012 16:54 4.2M
liendocumentationcis..> 28-Jan-2012 10:29 5.2K
white_paper_c11-4621..> 28-Jan-2012 10:24 55K
cisco.htm 26-Jan-2012 17:35 1.5M
liendocumentationcis..> 26-Jan-2012 17:32 5.2K
liensdocumentationci..> 26-Jan-2012 17:31 5.0K
CiscoASA5500.htm 01-Jan-2012 22:26 3.3M
ciscoVPNClientAdmini..> 01-Jan-2012 12:56 223K
Cisco7600SeriesRoute..> 01-Jan-2012 12:51 2.7M
Americas Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 527-0883
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide
Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6
Product and Software Release 9.4
July 2012
Text Part Number: 78-20254-02
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT
NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT
ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR
THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE
INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU
ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A
COPY.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate
radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed in accordance with Cisco’s installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television
reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in
part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Modifying the equipment without Cisco’s written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class
A or Class B digital devices. In that event, your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations, and you may be required to correct
any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense.
You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco
equipment or one of its peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by
using one or more of the following measures:
• Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.
• Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio.
• Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio.
• Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equipment and the television
or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.)
Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as
part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE
PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of
Cisco trademarks, go to this URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners.
The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R)
Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses. Any examples, command display output, and
figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and
coincidental.
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
Copyright © 2004–2012 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
iii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
CONTENTS
Preface xliii
Revision History xliv
Document Objectives xlv
Audience xlv
Document Organization xlv
Related Documentation xlviii
Document Conventions xlviii
Obtaining Optical Networking Information liv
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information liv
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM liv
Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelines lv
Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for Release 9.4 lvii
CHAPTER 1
Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf 1-1
CHAPTER 2
Connecting the PC and Logging into the GUI 2-1
CHAPTER 3
Install the Control Cards 3-1
3.1 Card Overview 3-2
3.1.1 Common Control Cards 3-2
3.1.2 Card Compatibility 3-2
3.1.3 Front Mount Electrical Connections (ETSI only) 3-3
3.2 Safety Labels 3-3
3.3 TCC2 Card 3-3
3.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-4
3.3.2 TCC2 Card Functions 3-5
3.3.3 Related Procedures for TCC2 Card 3-6
3.4 TCC2P Card 3-6
3.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-7
3.4.2 TCC2P Card Functions 3-8
3.4.3 Related Procedures for TCC2P Card 3-9
3.5 TCC3 Card 3-9
3.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-10
Contents
iv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
3.5.2 TCC3 Card Functions 3-11
3.5.3 Related Procedures for TCC3 Card 3-12
3.6 TNC and TNCE Card 3-12
3.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-13
3.6.2 TNC and TNCE Card Functions 3-15
3.6.3 Related Procedures for TNC and TNCE Cards 3-16
3.7 TSC and TSCE Cards 3-16
3.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-17
3.7.2 TSC and TSCE Card Functions 3-18
3.7.3 Related Procedures for TSC and TSCE Cards 3-19
3.8 Digital Image Signing 3-20
3.8.1 DIS Identification 3-20
3.8.2 Related Procedures for DIS 3-20
3.9 AIC-I Card 3-20
3.9.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-21
3.9.2 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators 3-22
3.9.3 External Alarms and Controls 3-23
3.9.4 Orderwire 3-23
3.9.5 Power Monitoring 3-25
3.9.6 User Data Channel 3-25
3.9.7 Data Communications Channel 3-25
3.9.8 Related Procedures for AIC-I Card 3-26
3.10 MS-ISC-100T Card 3-26
3.10.1 Faceplate Diagram 3-27
3.10.2 MS-ISC-100T Card-Level Indicators 3-28
3.10.3 Related Procedures for MS-ISC-100T Card 3-28
3.11 Front Mount Electrical Connections 3-29
3.11.1 MIC-A/P FMEC 3-29
3.11.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-29
3.11.3 MIC-C/T/P FMEC 3-32
3.11.4 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-32
3.12 Procedures for Control Cards 3-33
3.12.1 Before You Begin 3-33
NTP- G15 Install the Common Control Cards 3-34
DLP- G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card 3-35
DLP- G34 Install the AIC-I Card 3-38
DLP- G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card 3-39
NTP- G313 Install and Configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card 3-41
DLP- G604 Install the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card 3-42
Contents
v
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC and TNCE Cards 3-45
DLP- G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC and TNCE Cards 3-45
CHAPTER 4
Setup Optical Service Channel Cards 4-1
4.1 Card Overview 4-1
4.1.1 Card Summary 4-2
4.1.2 Card Compatibility 4-2
4.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels 4-3
4.3 OSCM Card 4-3
4.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4-4
4.3.2 OSCM Card Functions 4-5
4.3.2.1 OSCM Card Power Monitoring 4-5
4.3.3 Related Procedures for the OSCM Card 4-5
4.4 OSC-CSM Card 4-6
4.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4-8
4.4.2 OSC-CSM Card Functions 4-10
4.4.2.1 OSC-CSM Card Power Monitoring 4-10
4.4.3 Related Procedures for the OSC-CSM Card 4-11
CHAPTER 5
Provision Optical Amplifier Cards 5-1
5.1 Card Overview 5-2
5.1.1 Applications 5-2
5.1.2 Card Summary 5-3
5.1.3 Card Compatibility 5-5
5.1.4 Optical Power Alarms and Thresholds 5-7
5.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels 5-7
5.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card 5-7
5.3.1 OPT-PRE Faceplate Ports and Block Diagram 5-8
5.3.2 OPT-PRE Card Functions 5-10
5.3.2.1 OPT-PRE card Power Monitoring 5-11
5.3.3 Related Procedures for OPT-PRE Card 5-11
5.4 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card 5-11
5.4.1 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Faceplate Ports and Block diagram 5-12
5.4.2 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Card Functions 5-14
5.4.2.1 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards Power Monitoring 5-14
5.4.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Cards 5-15
5.5 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card 5-15
5.5.1 OPT-BST-L Faceplate Ports and Block Diagram 5-16
Contents
vi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
5.5.2 OPT-BST-L Card Functions 5-18
5.5.2.1 OPT-BST-L Card Power Monitoring 5-19
5.5.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST-L Card 5-19
5.6 OPT-AMP-L Card 5-20
5.6.1 OPT-AMP-L Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-21
5.6.2 OPT-AMP-L Card Functions 5-24
5.6.2.1 OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C cards Power Monitoring 5-24
5.6.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-L Card 5-24
5.7 OPT-AMP-17-C Card 5-25
5.7.1 OPT-AMP-17-C Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-26
5.7.2 OPT-AMP-17-C Card Functions 5-28
5.7.2.1 OPT-AMP-17-C card Power Monitoring 5-29
5.7.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-17-C Card 5-29
5.8 OPT-AMP-C Card 5-30
5.8.1 OPT-AMP-C Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-31
5.8.2 OPT-AMP-C Card Functions 5-34
5.8.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-C Card 5-34
5.9 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 5-34
5.9.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-35
5.9.2 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Functions 5-38
5.9.2.1 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Power Monitoring 5-38
5.9.3 Related Procedures for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 5-39
5.10 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards 5-39
5.10.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-40
5.10.2 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards Power Monitoring 5-43
5.10.3 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Card Functions 5-44
5.10.4 Related Procedures for RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards 5-44
5.11 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards 5-45
5.11.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-46
5.11.2 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards Power Monitoring 5-49
5.11.3 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Functions 5-49
5.11.4 Related Procedures for OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards 5-49
CHAPTER 6
Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 6-1
6.1 Card Overview 6-1
6.1.1 Card Summary 6-2
6.1.2 Card Compatibility 6-2
6.1.3 Interface Classes 6-3
6.1.4 Channel Allocation Plan 6-6
Contents
vii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
6.2 Safety Labels 6-9
6.3 32MUX-O Card 6-9
6.3.1 32MUX-O Card Functions 6-9
6.3.2 32MUX-O Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 6-9
6.3.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 32MUX-O Cards 6-11
6.3.3 Channel Plan 6-12
6.3.4 Power Monitoring 6-13
6.3.5 Related Procedures for the 32MUX-O Card 6-13
6.4 32DMX-O Card 6-14
6.4.1 32DMX-O Card Functions 6-14
6.4.2 32DMX-O Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 6-15
6.4.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 32DMX-O Cards 6-17
6.4.3 Power Monitoring 6-17
6.4.4 Related Procedures for the 32DMX-O Card 6-18
6.5 4MD-xx.x Card 6-19
6.5.1 4MD-xx.x Card Functions 6-19
6.5.2 4MD-xx.x Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 6-19
6.5.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 4MD-xx.x Cards 6-22
6.5.3 Wavelength Pairs 6-22
6.5.4 Power Monitoring 6-22
6.5.5 Related Procedures for the 4MD-xx.x Card 6-23
CHAPTER 7
Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units 7-1
7.1 Card Overview 7-1
7.1.1 Card Summary 7-2
7.2 Safety Labels 7-2
7.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 7-2
7.3.1 Key Features 7-3
7.3.2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Faceplate Diagram 7-3
7.3.3 Functioning of Optical Ports 7-4
7.3.4 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Block Diagram 7-5
7.3.5 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards Functions 7-5
7.4 Monitoring Optical Performance 7-5
7.4.1 Related Procedures for TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 7-6
CHAPTER 8
Provision Protection Switching Module 8-1
8.1 PSM Card Overview 8-1
8.1.1 Key Features 8-2
8.1.2 PSM Block Diagram 8-2
Contents
viii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
8.1.3 PSM Faceplate Ports 8-3
8.1.4 PSM Card-Level Indicators 8-4
8.1.5 PSM Bidirectional Switching 8-4
8.1.6 Related Procedures for PSM Card 8-5
CHAPTER 9
Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards 9-1
9.1 Card Overview 9-1
9.1.1 Card Summary 9-2
9.1.2 Card Compatibility 9-3
9.1.3 Interface Classes 9-4
9.1.4 DWDM Card Channel Allocation Plan 9-7
9.2 Safety Labels 9-9
9.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card 9-9
9.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 9-9
9.3.2 Power Monitoring 9-11
9.3.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card Functions 9-12
9.3.4 Related Procedures for AD-1C-xx.x Card 9-12
9.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card 9-12
9.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 9-13
9.4.2 Wavelength Pairs 9-14
9.4.3 Power Monitoring 9-15
9.4.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card Functions 9-15
9.4.5 Related Procedures for AD-2C-xx.x Card 9-16
9.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card 9-16
9.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 9-16
9.5.2 Wavelength Sets 9-18
9.5.3 Power Monitoring 9-19
9.5.4 AD-4C-xx.x Card Functions 9-19
9.5.5 Related Procedures for AD-4C-xx.x Card 9-19
9.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card 9-20
9.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 9-20
9.6.2 Power Monitoring 9-22
9.6.3 AD-1B-xx.x Card Functions 9-23
9.6.4 Related Procedures for AD-1B-xx.x Card 9-23
9.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card 9-23
9.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 9-24
9.7.2 Power Monitoring 9-25
9.7.3 AD-4B-xx.x Card Functions 9-26
9.7.4 Related Procedures for AD-4B-xx.x Card 9-26
Contents
ix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
CHAPTER 10
Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 10-1
10.1 Card Overview 10-2
10.1.1 Card Summary 10-2
10.1.2 Card Compatibility 10-4
10.1.3 Interface Classes 10-6
10.1.4 Channel Allocation Plans 10-12
10.2 Safety Labels 10-15
10.3 32WSS Card 10-16
10.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-16
10.3.2 32WSS ROADM Functionality 10-20
10.3.3 32WSS Power Monitoring 10-20
10.3.4 32WSS Channel Allocation Plan 10-21
10.3.5 32WSS Card Functions 10-22
10.3.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS Card 10-22
10.4 32WSS-L Card 10-22
10.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-23
10.4.2 32WSS-L ROADM Functionality 10-27
10.4.3 32WSS-L Power Monitoring 10-27
10.4.4 32WSS-L Channel Plan 10-27
10.4.5 32WSS-L Card Functions 10-29
10.4.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS-L Card 10-29
10.5 32DMX Card 10-29
10.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-29
10.5.2 32DMX ROADM Functionality 10-31
10.5.3 32DMX Power Monitoring 10-32
10.5.4 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan 10-32
10.5.5 32DMX Card Functions 10-33
10.5.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX Card 10-33
10.6 32DMX-L Card 10-34
10.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-34
10.6.2 32DMX-L ROADM Functionality 10-36
10.6.3 32DMX-L Power Monitoring 10-37
10.6.4 32DMX-L Channel Plan 10-37
10.6.5 32DMX-L Card Functions 10-38
10.6.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX-L Card 10-38
10.7 40-DMX-C Card 10-39
10.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-39
10.7.2 40-DMX-C ROADM Functionality 10-41
10.7.3 40-DMX-C Power Monitoring 10-42
Contents
x
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
10.7.4 40-DMX-C Channel Plan 10-42
10.7.5 40-DMX-C Card Functions 10-43
10.7.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-C Card 10-43
10.8 40-DMX-CE Card 10-44
10.8.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-44
10.8.2 40-DMX-CE Card ROADM Functionality 10-46
10.8.3 40-DMX-CE Card Power Monitoring 10-47
10.8.4 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan 10-47
10.8.5 40-DMX-CE Card Functions 10-48
10.8.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-CE Card 10-48
10.9 40-MUX-C Card 10-49
10.9.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-49
10.9.2 40-MUX-C Card Power Monitoring 10-51
10.9.3 40-MUX-C Card Channel Plan 10-52
10.9.4 40-MUX-C Card Functions 10-53
10.9.5 Related Procedures for 40-MUX-C Card 10-53
10.10 40-WSS-C Card 10-54
10.10.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-54
10.10.2 40-WSS-C ROADM Functionality 10-57
10.10.3 40-WSS-C Power Monitoring 10-57
10.10.4 40-WSS-C Channel Plan 10-58
10.10.5 40-WSS-C Card Functions 10-59
10.10.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-C Card 10-60
10.11 40-WSS-CE Card 10-60
10.11.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-60
10.11.2 40-WSS-CE Card ROADM Functionality 10-64
10.11.3 40-WSS-CE Card Power Monitoring 10-64
10.11.4 40-WSS-CE Card Channel Plan 10-65
10.11.5 40-WSS-CE Card Functions 10-66
10.11.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-CE Card 10-67
10.12 40-WXC-C Card 10-67
10.12.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-68
10.12.2 40-WXC-C Power Monitoring 10-70
10.12.3 40-WXC-C Channel Plan 10-71
10.12.4 40-WXC-C Card Functions 10-73
10.12.5 Related Procedures for 40-WXC-C Card 10-73
10.13 80-WXC-C Card 10-73
10.13.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-74
10.13.2 80-WXC-C Power Monitoring 10-76
Contents
xi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
10.13.3 80-WXC-C Channel Plan 10-77
10.13.4 80-WXC-C Card Functions 10-79
10.13.5 Related Procedures for 80-WXC-C Card 10-80
10.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards 10-80
10.14.1 SMR-C Card Key Features 10-80
10.14.2 40-SMR1-C Card 10-81
10.14.2.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-81
10.14.2.2 40-SMR1-C Power Monitoring 10-84
10.14.2.3 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan 10-84
10.14.3 40-SMR2-C Card 10-85
10.14.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-86
10.14.3.2 40-SMR2-C Power Monitoring 10-88
10.14.3.3 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan 10-88
10.14.4 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Functions 10-90
10.14.5 Related Procedures for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card 10-90
10.15 MMU Card 10-90
10.15.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-90
10.15.2 MMU Power Monitoring 10-93
10.15.3 MMU Card Functions 10-93
10.15.4 Related Procedures for MMU Card 10-93
CHAPTER 11
Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards 11-1
11.1 Card Overview 11-3
11.1.1 Card Summary 11-3
11.1.2 Card Compatibility 11-6
11.2 Safety Labels 11-10
11.3 TXP_MR_10G Card 11-10
11.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-12
11.3.2 TXP_MR_10G Functions 11-13
11.3.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10G Card 11-14
11.4 TXP_MR_10E Card 11-14
11.4.1 Key Features 11-14
11.4.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-15
11.4.3 TXP_MR_10E Functions 11-15
11.4.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E Card 11-16
11.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards 11-16
11.5.1 Key Features 11-16
11.5.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-17
11.5.3 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Functions 11-18
Contents
xii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
11.5.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards 11-18
11.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 11-18
11.6.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-20
11.6.2 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Functions 11-22
11.6.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 11-23
11.7 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards 11-23
11.7.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-24
11.7.2 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Functions 11-24
11.7.3 Related Procedures for 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards 11-25
11.8 MXP_2.5G_10G Card 11-25
11.8.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-26
11.8.2 MXP_2.5G_10G Functions 11-28
11.8.3 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10G Card 11-28
11.9 MXP_2.5G_10E Card 11-28
11.9.1 Key Features 11-29
11.9.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-30
11.9.3 MXP_2.5G_10E Functions 11-31
11.9.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-32
11.9.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E Card 11-32
11.10 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards 11-32
11.10.1 Key Features 11-33
11.10.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-34
11.10.3 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Functions 11-35
11.10.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-36
11.10.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards 11-38
11.11 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 11-39
11.11.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-41
11.11.2 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Functions 11-43
11.11.3 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 11-44
11.12 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards 11-44
11.12.1 Key Features 11-46
11.12.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-48
11.12.3 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Functions 11-49
11.12.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-49
11.12.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards 11-51
11.13 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards 11-52
11.13.1 Key Features 11-53
11.13.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-56
11.13.3 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Functions 11-56
Contents
xiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
11.13.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-57
11.13.4 Related Procedures for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards 11-58
11.14 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11-58
11.14.1 Key Features 11-60
11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list 11-62
11.14.3 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-62
11.14.4 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Functions 11-65
11.14.4.1 Client Interface 11-65
11.14.4.2 DWDM Trunk Interface 11-66
11.14.4.3 Configuration Management 11-66
11.14.4.4 Security 11-67
11.14.4.5 Card Protection 11-67
11.14.5 IGMP Snooping 11-67
11.14.5.1 IGMP Snooping Guidelines and Restrictions 11-68
11.14.5.2 Fast-Leave Processing 11-68
11.14.5.3 Static Router Port Configuration 11-69
11.14.5.4 Report Suppression 11-69
11.14.5.5 IGMP Statistics and Counters 11-69
11.14.5.6 Related Procedure for Enabling IGMP Snooping 11-69
11.14.6 Multicast VLAN Registration 11-70
11.14.6.1 Related Procedure for Enabling MVR 11-70
11.14.7 MAC Address Learning 11-70
11.14.7.1 Related Procedure for MAC Address Learning 11-71
11.14.8 MAC Address Retrieval 11-71
11.14.8.1 Related Procedure for MAC Address Retrieving 11-71
11.14.9 Link Integrity 11-71
11.14.9.1 Related Procedure for Enabling Link Integrity 11-72
11.14.10 Ingress CoS 11-72
11.14.10.1 Related Procedure for Enabling Ingress CoS 11-72
11.14.11 CVLAN Rate Limiting 11-72
11.14.11.1 Related Procedure for Provisioning CVLAN Rate 11-73
11.14.12 DSCP to CoS Mapping 11-73
11.14.12.1 Related Procedure for Provisioning CoS Based on DSCP 11-73
11.14.13 Link Aggregation Control Protocol 11-73
11.14.13.1 Advantages of LACP 11-74
11.14.13.2 Functions of LACP 11-74
11.14.13.3 Modes of LACP 11-74
11.14.13.4 Parameters of LACP 11-74
11.14.13.5 Unicast Hashing Schemes 11-75
11.14.13.6 LACP Limitations and Restrictions 11-75
Contents
xiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
11.14.13.7 Related Procedure for LACP 11-75
11.14.14 Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management 11-75
11.14.14.1 Maintenance Domain 11-76
11.14.14.2 Maintenance Association 11-76
11.14.14.3 Maintenance End Points 11-76
11.14.14.4 Maintenance Intermediate Points 11-76
11.14.14.5 CFM Messages 11-77
11.14.14.6 CFM Limitations and Restrictions 11-77
11.14.14.7 Related Procedure for Ethernet CFM 11-77
11.14.15 Ethernet OAM 11-77
11.14.15.1 Components of the Ethernet OAM 11-78
11.14.15.2 Benefits of the Ethernet OAM 11-78
11.14.15.3 Features of the Ethernet OAM 11-78
11.14.15.4 Ethernet OAM Limitations and Restrictions 11-79
11.14.15.5 Related Procedure for Ethernet OAM 11-79
11.14.16 Resilient Ethernet Protocol 11-79
11.14.16.1 REP Segments 11-79
11.14.16.2 Characteristics of REP Segments 11-80
11.14.16.3 REP Port States 11-80
11.14.16.4 Link Adjacency 11-80
11.14.16.5 Fast Reconvergence 11-80
11.14.16.6 VLAN Load Balancing 11-81
11.14.16.7 REP Configuration Sequence 11-81
11.14.16.8 REP Supported Interfaces 11-81
11.14.16.9 REP Limitations and Restrictions 11-81
11.14.16.10 Related Procedure for Managing the REP Settings 11-82
11.14.17 Related Procedures for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11-82
11.15 ADM-10G Card 11-83
11.15.1 Key Features 11-83
11.15.2 ADM-10G POS Encapsulation, Framing, and CRC 11-84
11.15.2.1 POS Overview 11-84
11.15.2.2 POS Framing Modes 11-85
11.15.2.3 GFP Interoperability 11-85
11.15.2.4 LEX Interoperability 11-85
11.15.3 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-85
11.15.4 Port Configuration Rules 11-86
11.15.5 Client Interfaces 11-87
11.15.6 Interlink Interfaces 11-88
11.15.7 DWDM Trunk Interface 11-88
11.15.8 Configuration Management 11-88
Contents
xv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
11.15.9 Security 11-90
11.15.10 Protection 11-90
11.15.10.1 Circuit Protection Schemes 11-90
11.15.10.2 Port Protection Schemes 11-90
11.15.11 Circuit Provisioning 11-90
11.15.12 ADM-10G CCAT and VCAT Characteristics 11-91
Available Circuit Sizes 11-92
11.15.12.1 Related Procedure for VCAT Circuit 11-93
11.15.13 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring 11-93
11.15.13.1 Related Procedure for IPPM 11-93
11.15.14 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring 11-93
11.15.15 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions 11-94
11.15.16 ADM-10G Functions 11-96
11.15.17 Related Procedures for ADM-10G Card 11-96
11.16 OTU2_XP Card 11-97
11.16.1 Key Features 11-97
11.16.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-99
11.16.3 OTU2_XP Card Interface 11-101
11.16.3.1 Client Interface 11-101
11.16.3.2 Trunk Interface 11-101
11.16.4 Configuration Management 11-102
11.16.5 OTU2_XP Card Configuration Rules 11-103
11.16.6 Security 11-104
11.16.7 ODU Transparency 11-104
11.16.8 OTU2_XP Functions 11-105
11.16.9 Related Procedures for OTU2_XP Card 11-105
11.17 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card 11-105
11.17.1 Key Features 11-106
11.17.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-106
11.17.3 TXP_MR_10EX_C Functions 11-107
11.17.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10EX_C Card 11-108
11.18 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card 11-108
11.18.1 Key Features 11-108
11.18.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-109
11.18.3 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Functions 11-110
11.18.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-111
11.18.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card 11-112
11.19 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card 11-112
11.19.1 Key Features 11-114
Contents
xvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
11.19.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-115
11.19.3 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Functions 11-116
11.19.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-117
11.19.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card 11-118
11.20 AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards 11-119
11.20.1 Key Features 11-121
11.20.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-123
11.20.3 Multiple Operating Modes 11-126
TXP_MR (Unprotected Transponder) 11-126
TXPP_MR (Protected Transponder) 11-128
MXP_DME (Unprotected Data Muxponder) 11-129
MXPP_DME (Protected Data Muxponder) 11-130
MXP_MR (Unprotected Multirate Muxponder) 11-131
MXPP_MR (Protected Multirate Muxponder) 11-133
MXP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Unprotected Muxponder) 11-134
MXPP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Protected Muxponder) 11-135
REGEN (OTU1/OTU2 Regenerator) 11-135
MXP-VD-10G (Video Muxponder) 11-137
11.20.4 Scenarios of Different Operational mode Configurations on an AR_MXP or AR_XP Card 11-137
Scenario 1 11-137
Scenario 2 11-138
Scenario 3 11-139
Scenario 4 11-139
Scenario 5 11-140
Scenario 6 11-141
11.20.5 AR_MXP and AR_XP Functions and Features 11-141
11.20.6 Related Procedures for AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards 11-141
11.21 MLSE UT 11-142
11.21.1 Error Decorrelator 11-142
11.22 SFP and XFP Modules 11-142
11.23 Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards 11-142
11.23.1 Before You Begin 11-142
NTP- G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules 11-144
DLP- G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode 11-146
DLP- G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode 11-147
DLP- G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode 11-149
DLP- G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port 11-150
DLP- G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode 11-151
Contents
xvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G277 Provision a Multirate PPM 11-152
DLP- G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services 11-153
DLP- G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate 11-155
DLP- G280 Delete a PPM 11-161
NTP- G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group 11-162
NTP- G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card 11-166
NTP- G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-168
NTP- G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-169
NTP- G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-171
DLP- G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 11-172
DLP- G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 11-173
DLP- G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 11-176
DLP- G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 11-177
DLP- G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings 11-178
DLP- G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads 11-181
DLP- G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-182
DLP- G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-184
DLP- G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 11-188
NTP- G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 11-191
DLP- G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate 11-192
DLP- G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate 11-193
DLP- G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 11-193
DLP- G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 11-195
DLP- G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 11-200
DLP- G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 11-201
DLP- G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy 11-202
DLP- G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy Payloads 11-205
DLP- G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-209
DLP- G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-210
DLP- G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 11-212
NTP- G292 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 11-217
DLP- G656 Provision the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Data Rate 11-218
DLP- G657 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 11-218
DLP- G658 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 11-219
Contents
xviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G659 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder SONET, SDH, or Ethernet Line Settings 11-221
DLP- G660 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 11-225
DLP- G692 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder OTU Settings 11-226
DLP- G661 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 40G Ethernet WAN Phy 11-228
DLP- G663 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-230
DLP- G664 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-231
DLP- G665 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 11-232
NTP- G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 11-237
DLP- G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group 11-238
DLP- G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings 11-239
DLP- G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings 11-240
DLP- G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings 11-245
DLP- G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads 11-247
DLP- G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload 11-251
DLP- G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-254
DLP- G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-255
DLP- G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings 11-256
NTP- G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-261
DLP- G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings 11-262
DLP- G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings 11-264
DLP- G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings 11-266
DLP- G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings 11-268
DLP- G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 11-269
DLP- G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings 11-271
DLP- G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-273
DLP- G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-275
DLP- G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings 11-277
NTP- G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-282
DLP- G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings 11-283
DLP- G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings 11-285
DLP- G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings 11-287
DLP- G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings 11-289
DLP- G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 11-291
DLP- G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 11-292
DLP- G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads 11-294
DLP- G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-296
DLP- G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-297
Contents
xix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
NTP- G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-300
DLP- G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings 11-301
DLP- G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings 11-303
DLP- G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 11-305
DLP- G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings 11-306
DLP- G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings 11-308
DLP- G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 11-309
DLP- G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 Payloads 11-311
DLP- G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-314
DLP- G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-315
DLP- G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings 11-319
NTP- G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-322
DLP- G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings 11-323
DLP- G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings 11-324
DLP- G667 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings 11-326
DLP- G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings 11-328
DLP- G691 Change the 40G Muxponder OTU Settings 11-329
DLP- G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 11-331
DLP- G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC Payloads 11-333
DLP- G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-337
DLP- G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-338
DLP- G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings 11-342
NTP- G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings 11-345
DLP- G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC 11-346
DLP- G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC 11-347
DLP- G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC 11-351
Before You Begin 11-352
DLP- G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC 11-352
DLP- G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC 11-353
DLP- G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-354
DLP- G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-355
DLP- G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-355
NTP- G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings 11-356
DLP- G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC 11-357
DLP- G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC 11-358
Contents
xx
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 11-359
Before You Begin 11-359
DLP- G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 11-360
DLP- G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 11-361
DLP- G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 11-362
DLP- G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 11-362
DLP- G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 11-363
DLP- G629 Create a MEP Using CTC 11-364
DLP- G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC 11-365
DLP- G631 Create a MIP Using CTC 11-365
DLP- G632 Delete a MIP Using CTC 11-366
DLP- G633 Ping MEP Using CTC 11-367
DLP- G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC 11-367
NTP- G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings 11-368
DLP- G639 Enable or Disable EFM for Each Port Using CTC 11-369
Before You Begin 11-369
DLP- G640 Configure EFM Parameters Using CTC 11-370
DLP- G641 Configure EFM Link Monitoring Parameters Using CTC 11-371
DLP- G642 Enable Remote Loopback for Each Port Using CTC 11-373
NTP- G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings 11-373
DLP- G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC 11-374
DLP- G645 Create a Segment Using CTC 11-375
Before You Begin 11-375
DLP- G646 Edit a Segment Using CTC 11-377
DLP- G647 Activate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC 11-378
DLP- G648 Deactivate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC 11-379
NTP- G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and PM Thresholds 11-379
DLP- G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings 11-381
DLP- G684 Provision the GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings 11-389
DLP- G685 Provision the GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings 11-391
DLP- G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection Settings 11-393
DLP- G507 Enable a Different GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master Card 11-395
DLP- G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI Ports 11-396
DLP- G383 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service Settings 11-397
Contents
xxi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G470 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Class of Service (CoS) Settings 11-398
DLP- G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings 11-399
DLP- G221 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-401
DLP- G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-401
DLP- G385 Provision the MAC Filter Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 11-402
NTP- G237 Retrieve and Clear MAC Addresses on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-403
DLP- G546 View Card MAC Addresses on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-404
NTP- G311 Provision the Storm Control Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-405
NTP- G205 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-406
DLP- G509 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-407
NTP- G289 Provision CVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 11-408
NTP- G208 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 11-409
DLP- G515 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC 11-409
DLP- G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile 11-410
NTP- G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-411
DLP- G511 Enable IGMP Snooping, IGMP Fast Leave and IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-412
NTP- G206 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 11-413
DLP- G513 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC 11-413
DLP- G386 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-414
DLP- G387 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-416
DLP- G388 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card RMON Thresholds 11-417
DLP- G389 Change the Gigabit Ethernet Optical Transport Network Settings 11-420
NTP- G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring 11-423
DLP- G687 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Facing Master Card on a FAPS Ring 11-424
DLP- G688 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Between the Slave Cards on a FAPS Ring 11-425
NTP- G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 11-426
DLP- G453 Change the OTU2_XP Card Settings 11-427
DLP- G454 Change the OTU2_XP Line Settings 11-428
DLP- G455 Change the OTU2_XP Line Section Trace Settings 11-432
DLP- G456 Change the OTU2_XP Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads 11-433
DLP- G457 Provision the OTU2_XP Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-435
Contents
xxii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G462 Change the OTU2_XP Line RMON Thresholds for the 10G Ethernet and 10G FC Payloads 11-437
DLP- G458 Change the OTU2_XP OTN Settings 11-440
DLP- G523 Change the OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings 11-446
DLP- G524 Provision the OTU2_XP Path Settings for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Configuration 11-447
NTP- G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings 11-448
NTP- G192 Force FPGA Update 11-450
NTP- G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group 11-451
NTP- G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator 11-452
NTP- G315 Enable or Disable the Wavelength Drifted Channel Automatic Shutdown Feature 11-452
NTP- G316 Enable REP and FAPS on the same port 11-453
NTP- G321 Provision Multiple Operating Modes on AR_MXP or AR_XP Cards 11-454
NTP- G322 Modify the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-454
DLP- G695 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line Settings 11-456
DLP- G696 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Ethernet Settings 11-458
DLP- G697 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card SONET/SDH Settings 11-459
DLP- G698 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Section Trace Settings 11-462
DLP- G699 Enable Auto Sensing for AR_MXP or AR_XP Cards 11-464
DLP- G700 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card SONET/SDH Line Thresholds 11-464
DLP- G701 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line RMON Thresholds 11-467
DLP- G702 Provision the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card with Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-471
DLP- G703 Provision the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-472
DLP- G704 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card OTN Settings 11-476
CHAPTER 12
Node Reference 12-1
12.1 DWDM Node Configurations 12-2
12.1.1 Terminal Node 12-2
12.1.2 OADM Node 12-9
12.1.3 ROADM Node 12-11
12.1.4 Hub Node 12-31
12.1.5 Anti-ASE Node 12-35
12.1.6 Line Amplifier Node 12-36
12.1.7 OSC Regeneration Node 12-40
12.2 Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 12-41
12.2.1 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in an Add/Drop Node 12-43
12.2.2 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in a Line Site Node with Booster Amplification 12-43
12.2.3 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in a Line Site Node Without Post - Amplification 12-45
12.3 Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card 12-46
Contents
xxiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
12.3.1 Channel Protection 12-47
12.3.2 Multiplex Section Protection 12-48
12.3.3 Line Protection 12-49
12.3.4 Standalone 12-49
12.4 Multishelf Node 12-50
12.4.1 Multishelf Node Layout 12-51
12.4.2 DCC/GCC/OSC Terminations 12-51
12.5 Connecting Passive Modules to a ONS 15454 M2 or ONS 15454 M6 Node 12-52
12.6 Optical Sides 12-52
12.6.1 Optical Side Stages 12-52
12.6.1.1 Fiber Stage 12-53
12.6.1.2 A/D Stage 12-55
12.6.2 Side Line Ports 12-56
12.6.3 Optical Side Configurations 12-56
12.7 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks 12-61
12.7.1 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 40-WXC-C Cards 12-61
12.7.1.1 40-Channel Omni-directional n-degree ROADM Node 12-66
12.7.1.2 40-Channel Colorless n-Degree ROADM Node 12-66
12.7.1.3 40-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional n-Degree ROADM Node 12-67
12.7.2 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 80-WXC-C Cards 12-69
12.7.2.1 80-Channel Omni-directional n-degree ROADM Node 12-71
12.7.2.2 80-Channel Colorless n-degree ROADM Node 12-72
12.7.2.3 80-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional n-Degree ROADM Node 12-73
12.7.3 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-75
12.7.4 XC Termination Mesh Node 12-77
12.7.5 Mesh Patch Panels and Shelf Layouts 12-78
12.7.6 Using a Mesh Node With Omni-Directional Add/Drop Section 12-81
12.8 DWDM Node Cabling 12-82
12.8.1 OSC Link Termination Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-82
12.8.2 Hub Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-85
12.8.3 Terminal Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-87
12.8.4 Line Amplifier Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-87
12.8.5 OSC Regeneration Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-89
12.8.6 Amplified or Passive OADM Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-91
12.8.7 ROADM Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-96
12.9 Automatic Node Setup 12-98
12.9.1 ANS Parameters in a Raman Node With Post-Amplifiers 12-102
12.9.2 ANS Parameters in a Raman Node Without Post-Amplifiers 12-103
12.9.3 Raman Setup and Tuning 12-103
Contents
xxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
12.9.4 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Card Start Up and Fiber Link Turn Up 12-106
12.10 DWDM Network Functional View 12-108
12.10.1 GMPLS Control Plane 12-108
12.10.1.1 Card Support 12-110
12.10.1.2 Acceptance Thresholds 12-110
12.10.1.3 Validation Modes 12-110
12.10.2 DWDM Network Functional View (NFV) 12-110
12.10.2.1 Graphical View Pane 12-111
12.10.2.2 Overview Pane 12-113
12.10.2.3 Network Data Pane 12-113
12.10.3 DWDM Network Functional View (GMPLS) 12-114
12.10.3.1 GMPLS View Toolbar Options 12-114
12.10.3.2 GMPLS Path Constraints 12-114
12.10.3.3 Source and Destination Port Configuration 12-115
12.10.3.4 Wavelength Rerouting 12-117
12.10.3.5 Fiber Attributes and Alien Wavelength Provisioning 12-118
12.10.4 Related Procedures 12-119
NTP- G231 View Optical Power Values and Alarms Using Network Functional View 12-119
DLP- G529 Export Network Functional View Reports 12-120
NTP- G319 Connect a Passive Module to the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Node 12-122
12.11 Not-DWDM Networks (Enhancements) 12-123
CHAPTER 13
Network Reference 13-1
13.1 Network Applications 13-2
13.2 Network Topologies 13-2
13.2.1 Ring Networks 13-2
13.2.1.1 Hubbed Traffic Topology 13-2
13.2.1.2 Multihubbed Traffic Topology 13-3
13.2.1.3 Any-to-Any Traffic Topology 13-4
13.2.1.4 Meshed Traffic Topology 13-5
13.2.2 Linear Networks 13-6
13.2.3 Mesh Networks 13-7
13.3 Interconnected Rings 13-9
13.3.1 Interconnected Ring Scenarios 13-11
13.3.1.1 Scenario A: Interconnect Traffic from Tributary Ring to Main Ring without Local Add/Drop in the Tributary Ring 13-11
13.3.1.2 Scenario B: Interconnect Traffic from Tributary Ring to Main Ring with Local Add/Drop in the Tributary Ring 13-13
13.3.1.3 Scenario C: Interconnect Traffic Between Tributary Rings Using the Main Ring 13-14
Contents
xxv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
13.4 Spur Configuration 13-16
13.4.1 Spur Configuration Scenarios 13-16
13.4.1.1 Scenario A: Spur Configuration without 15454 Chassis in Remote Terminal T 13-16
13.4.1.2 Scenario B: Spur Configuration with Passive MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T 13-17
13.4.1.3 Scenario C: Spur Configuration with Active MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T 13-18
13.5 Network Topologies for the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 13-18
13.6 Network Topologies for the PSM Card 13-19
13.7 Optical Performance 13-19
13.8 Automatic Power Control 13-20
13.8.1 APC at the Amplifier Card Level 13-20
13.8.2 APC at the Shelf Controller Layer 13-21
13.8.3 APC in a Raman Node with Post-Amplifiers 13-23
13.8.4 APC in a Raman Node without Post-Amplifiers 13-24
13.8.5 Managing APC 13-24
13.9 Power Side Monitoring 13-26
13.10 Span Loss Verification 13-28
13.10.1 Span Loss Measurements on Raman Links 13-29
13.11 Network Optical Safety 13-30
13.11.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown 13-30
13.11.2 Automatic Power Reduction 13-31
13.11.3 Network Optical Safety on OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 13-32
13.11.3.1 RAMAN-TX Settings on Raman Pump 13-32
13.11.3.2 COM-TX Safety Setting on EDFA 13-32
13.11.4 Fiber Cut Scenarios 13-33
13.11.4.1 Scenario 1: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E Cards 13-33
13.11.4.2 Scenario 2: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OSC-CSM Cards 13-35
13.11.4.3 Scenario 3: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-BST-L Cards 13-37
13.11.4.4 Scenario 4: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C (OPT-LINE Mode), 40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards 13-38
13.11.4.5 Scenario 5: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using DCN Extension 13-40
13.11.4.6 Scenario 6: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 13-42
13.11.4.7 Scenario 7: Fiber Cut in Optical Line Amplifier Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 13-44
13.11.4.8 Fiber Cut Recovery in Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 13-49
13.11.5 Network Optical Safety on RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards 13-49
13.12 Network-Level Gain—Tilt Management of Optical Amplifiers 13-50
13.12.1 Gain Tilt Control at the Card Level 13-51
13.12.2 System Level Gain Tilt Control 13-52
Contents
xxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
13.12.2.1 System Gain Tilt Compensation Without ROADM Nodes 13-53
13.12.2.2 System Gain Tilt Compensation With ROADM Nodes 13-54
13.13 Optical Data Rate Derivations 13-55
13.13.1 OC-192/STM-64 Data Rate (9.95328 Gbps) 13-55
13.13.2 10GE Data Rate (10.3125 Gbps) 13-55
13.13.3 10G FC Data Rate (10.51875 Gbps) 13-55
13.13.4 ITU-T G.709 Optical Data Rates 13-56
13.13.4.1 OC-192 Packaged Into OTU2 G.709 Frame Data Rate (10.70923 Gbps) 13-57
13.13.4.2 10GE Packaged Into OTU2 G.709 Frame Data Rate (Nonstandard 11.0957 Gbps) 13-57
13.13.4.3 10G FC Packaged Into OTU2 G.709 Frame Data Rate (Nonstandard 11.31764 Gbps) 13-57
13.14 Even Band Management 13-57
13.15 Wavelength Drifted Channel Automatic Shutdown 13-61
CHAPTER 14
Turn Up a Node 14-1
Before You Begin 14-1
NTP- G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files 14-3
NTP- G22 Verify Common Card Installation 14-4
NTP- G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information 14-6
NTP- G144 Provision a Multishelf Node 14-8
NTP- G23 Create Users and Assign Security 14-10
DLP- G54 Create a New User on a Single Node 14-11
DLP- G55 Create a New User on Multiple Nodes 14-12
NTP- G24 Set Up Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information 14-13
NTP- G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds 14-15
NTP- G26 Set Up CTC Network Access 14-16
DLP- G56 Provision IP Settings 14-17
DLP- G439 Provision the Designated SOCKS Servers 14-21
DLP- G57 Set the IP Address, Default Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD 14-22
DLP- G264 Enable Node Security Mode 14-24
DLP- G58 Create a Static Route 14-26
DLP- G59 Set Up or Change Open Shortest Path First Protocol 14-27
DLP- G60 Set Up or Change Routing Information Protocol 14-30
NTP- G194 Set Up EMS Secure Access to the ONS 15454 14-31
NTP- G27 Set Up the ONS 15454 for Firewall Access 14-31
NTP- G28 Create FTP Host 14-32
DLP- G61 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 15454 14-33
Contents
xxvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G62 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the CTC Computer 14-34
NTP- G132 Provision OSI 14-35
DLP- G283 Provision OSI Routing Mode 14-36
DLP- G284 Provision the TARP Operating Parameters 14-37
DLP- G285 Add a Static TID-to-NSAP Entry to the TARP Data Cache 14-39
DLP- G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry 14-40
DLP- G288 Provision OSI Routers 14-41
DLP- G289 Provision Additional Manual Area Addresses 14-42
DLP- G290 Enable the OSI Subnet on the LAN Interface 14-42
DLP- G291 Create an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel 14-43
NTP- G29 Set Up SNMP 14-45
NTP- G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File 14-47
DLP- G351 Delete a Card in CTC 14-51
DLP- G353 Preprovision a Slot 14-53
NTP- G320 Configure the Node as a Non-DWDM Network 14-57
DLP- G693 Configure the Amplifier 14-57
DLP- G694 Configure the PSM 14-58
NTP- G328 Add, Modify, or Delete ANS Parameters 14-59
DLP- G541 Add an ANS Parameter 14-60
DLP- G681 Modify an ANS Parameter 14-61
DLP- G542 Delete an ANS Parameter 14-63
NTP- G30 Install the DWDM Cards 14-64
DLP- G348 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Shelf Layout Report 14-67
NTP- G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units 14-68
NTP- G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards 14-69
DLP- G63 Install an SFP or XFP 14-72
DLP- G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot 14-73
DLP- G64 Remove an SFP or XFP 14-74
NTP- G123 Install the Filler Cards 14-75
NTP- G239 Add and Delete Passive Units 14-76
DLP- G543 Add Passive Units Manually 14-76
DLP- G544 Delete a Passive Unit 14-77
NTP- G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs 14-78
DLP- G349 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report 14-80
NTP- G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes 14-82
DLP- G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray 14-85
Contents
xxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G316 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray 14-89
DLP- G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray 14-90
DLP- G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 14-93
DLP- G428 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE Cards in an Expanded ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 14-95
DLP- G357 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray or 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 14-97
DLP- G530 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or 80-WXC-C Cards in a ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 15216-MD-40 or 15216-MD-48 Patch Panel Tray 14-99
NTP- G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes 14-101
DLP- G430 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards in a Mesh Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 14-102
DLP- G431 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards in a Mesh Node to a Mesh Patch Panel Tray 14-104
NTP- G191 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on Passthrough ROADM Nodes 14-105
NTP- G141 Install Fiber-Optic Cables for Y-Cable Protection Modules 14-108
DLP- G375 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf 14-109
DLP- G376 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the Y-Cable Module Tray 14-110
NTP- G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords 14-113
NTP- G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually 14-114
DLP- G354 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Trunk to Trunk (L2) Option 14-115
DLP- G547 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter Option 14-116
DLP- G548 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter Option 14-118
DLP- G549 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OTS to OTS Option 14-120
DLP- G531 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Optical Path Option 14-122
DLP- G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord 14-123
NTP- G209 Create, Edit, and Delete Optical Sides 14-123
DLP- G491 Create an Optical Side 14-124
DLP- G492 Edit an Optical Side 14-125
DLP- G480 Delete an Optical Side 14-125
NTP- G38 Provision OSC Terminations 14-126
NTP- G37 Run Automatic Node Setup 14-127
NTP- G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power 14-129
DLP- G314 Verify OSCM Transmit Power 14-130
NTP- G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode 14-131
NTP- G210 Provision Node for SNMPv3 14-133
NTP- G211 Provision Node to Send SNMPv3 Traps 14-134
Contents
xxix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
NTP- G212 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3 14-135
NTP- G213 Automatically Provision a GNE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3 14-136
NTP- G214 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE using SNMPv3 14-136
NTP- G215 Automatically Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE Using SNMPv3 14-137
DLP- G496 Create an SNMPv3 User 14-138
DLP- G497 Create MIB Views 14-139
DLP- G498 Create Group Access 14-139
DLP- G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination 14-140
DLP- G500 Delete SNMPv3 Trap Destination 14-141
DLP- G501 Create Notification Filters 14-142
DLP- G502 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table 14-142
DLP- G503 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table 14-143
DLP- G504 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table 14-144
DLP- G505 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table 14-145
CHAPTER 15
Turn Up a Network 15-1
Before You Begin 15-1
NTP- G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up 15-2
NTP- G52 Verify Node-to-Node Connections 15-3
NTP- G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link 15-4
DLP- G468 Configure the Raman Pump Using the Installation Wizard 15-5
DLP- G690 Configure the Raman Pump Using Manual Day-0 Installation 15-19
DLP- G474 Configure the Raman Pump by Importing the CTP XML File 15-25
DLP- G489 Configure the Raman Pump by Setting the ANS Parameters Manually 15-25
DLP- 490 Restore Raman Link After a Fiber Cut Occurs 15-26
NTP- G53 Set Up Timing 15-27
DLP- G95 Set Up External or Line Timing 15-27
DLP- G96 Set Up Internal Timing 15-30
DLP- G350 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report 15-31
NTP- G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network 15-33
NTP- G56 Verify the OSNR 15-37
NTP- G142 Perform a Protection Switch Test 15-38
NTP- G164 Configure Link Management Protocol 15-40
DLP- G372 Enable LMP 15-41
DLP- G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels 15-42
DLP- G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links 15-45
DLP- G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links 15-46
Contents
xxx
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
NTP- G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node 15-47
NTP- G234 Automatically Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node 15-48
NTP- G207 Manually Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node 15-49
DLP- G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters 15-50
DLP- G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration 15-51
DLP- G510 Create a Task Group, User Group, and User Account on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Series Router 15-52
DLP- G482 Configure a Static Route 15-55
DLP- G483 Configure Local and Remote TE Links 15-56
DLP- G484 Enable the LMP Message Exchange 15-58
DLP- G511 Configure the Wavelength on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router 15-59
DLP- G494 Configure the RADIUS Server 15-61
DLP- G485 Enable Index Persistency on an SNMP Interface 15-62
DLP- G486 Configure the LMP Router ID 15-63
DLP- G487 Configure the 10 Gigabit Ethernet (GE) or POS Interface 15-64
DLP- G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information 15-65
NTP- G303 Configure Virtual links on the Cisco 7600 and Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node 15-66
DLP- G711 Configure SSH Server on Cisco 7600 Series Nodes 15-67
NTP- G57 Create a Logical Network Map 15-69
NTP- G325 View the Power Levels of Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Nodes 15-69
NTP- G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Network 15-70
DLP- G540 View SRLG Reports 15-71
CHAPTER 16
Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords 16-1
16.1 Optical Channel Circuits 16-1
16.1.1 OCHNC Circuits 16-2
16.1.2 OCHCC Circuits 16-3
16.1.3 OCH Trail Circuits 16-3
16.1.4 Administrative and Service States 16-5
16.1.5 Creating and Deleting OCHCCs 16-7
16.1.6 OCHCCs and Service and Communications Channels 16-7
16.1.7 Related Procedures 16-7
16.2 Virtual Patchcords 16-7
16.2.1 PPC Provisioning Rules 16-12
16.3 End-to-End SVLAN Circuit 16-13
Contents
xxxi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
16.3.1 End-to-End SVLAN Provisioning Rules 16-14
16.3.2 Before You Begin 16-14
NTP- G151 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Client Connections 16-15
DLP- G104 Assign a Name to a Port 16-16
DLP- G345 Verify OCHCC Client Ports 16-17
DLP- G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections 16-17
DLP- G705 Provision GMPLS Optical Channel Client Connections 16-24
DLP- G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections 16-26
DLP- G424 Edit an OCHCC Circuit Name 16-27
DLP- G394 Change an OCHCC Administrative State 16-28
DLP- G437 Set OCH Circuit Attributes 16-28
DLP- G438 Set OCH Routing Preferences 16-30
DLP- G706 Perform Optical Validation of GMPLS Circuits 16-31
DLP- G707 Upgrade a Non-GMPLS Circuit to a GMPLS Circuit 16-32
NTP- G178 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Trails 16-33
DLP- G395 Create an Optical Channel Trail 16-34
DLP- G708 Create a GMPLS Optical Channel Trail 16-36
DLP- G418 Delete an Optical Channel Trail 16-37
DLP- G425 Edit an OCH Trail Circuit Name 16-38
DLP- G419 Change an OCH Trail Administrative State 16-39
NTP- G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections 16-40
DLP- G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections 16-41
DLP- G709 Provision GMPLS Optical Channel Network Connections 16-43
DLP- G493 Provision Protected Optical Channel Network Connections 16-44
DLP- G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections 16-46
DLP- G426 Edit an OCHNC Circuit Name 16-47
DLP- G420 Change an OCHNC Administrative State 16-48
DLP- G710 Reroute Wavelength of GMPLS Circuits 16-48
NTP- G200 Create, Delete, and Manage STS or VC Circuits for the ADM-10G Card 16-49
DLP- G463 Create an Automatically Routed STS or VC Circuit 16-50
DLP- G464 Create a Manually Routed STS or VC Circuit 16-53
DLP- G465 Provision Path Protection Selectors 16-56
DLP- G466 Delete an STS or VC Circuit 16-57
DLP- G467 Edit an STS or VC Circuit Name 16-58
NTP- G150 Upgrade Optical Channel Network Connections to Optical Channel Client Connections 16-59
DLP- G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords 16-61
NTP- G183 Diagnose and Fix OCHNC and OCH Trail Circuits 16-63
NTP- G58 Locate and View Optical Channel Circuits 16-65
DLP- G100 Search for Optical Channel Circuits 16-65
Contents
xxxii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G101 View Optical Channel Circuit Information 16-66
DLP- G102 Filter the Display of Optical Channel Circuits 16-69
DLP- G103 View Optical Channel Circuits on a Span 16-71
NTP- G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord 16-72
NTP- G181 Manage GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card SVLAN Databases 16-78
DLP- G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database 16-79
DLP- G422 Load or Merge an SVLAN Database 16-80
NTP- G60 Create and Delete Overhead Circuits 16-81
DLP- G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations 16-81
DLP- G97 Provision a Proxy Tunnel 16-84
DLP- G98 Provision a Firewall Tunnel 16-85
DLP- G108 Change the Service State for a Port 16-85
DLP- G109 Provision Orderwire 16-86
DLP- G110 Create a User Data Channel Circuit 16-88
DLP- G112 Delete Overhead Circuits 16-89
NTP- G62 Create a J0 Section Trace 16-89
NTP- G203 Create End-to-End SVLAN Circuits 16-90
DLP- G472 Edit the End-to-End SVLAN Circuit 16-92
NTP- G229 Provision DCN Extension for a Network Using GCC/DCC 16-93
DLP- G472 Merge two OCHNC DCN Circuits 16-94
NTP- G245 Create an Automatically Routed VCAT Circuit 16-94
NTP- G246 Create a Manually Routed VCAT Circuit 16-98
NTP- G247 Enable or disable Path Performance Monitoring on Intermediate Nodes 16-100
DLP- G551 Provision ADM-10G Ethernet Ports 16-101
DLP- G553 Create a Server Trail 16-102
DLP- G554 Repair Server Trails 16-103
DLP- G555 Provision a VCAT Circuit Source and Destination 16-105
DLP- G556 Provision an Open VCAT Circuit Source and Destination 16-105
DLP- G557 Provision a VCAT Circuit Route 16-106
CHAPTER 17
Monitor Performance 17-1
CHAPTER 18
Manage the Node 18-1
CHAPTER 19
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management 19-1
CHAPTER 20
Change DWDM Card Settings 20-1
Before You Begin 20-1
Contents
xxxiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
NTP- G90 Modify OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-2
DLP- G199 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line Settings 20-3
DLP- G200 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line SONET/SDH Thresholds 20-5
DLP- G201 Change Optical Line Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards 20-7
DLP- G202 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM Optical Line Threshold Settings 20-8
DLP- G203 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM ALS Maintenance Settings 20-12
NTP- G91 Modify OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-13
DLP- G204 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 20-14
DLP- G205 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 20-15
DLP- G206 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 20-19
DLP- G207 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 20-21
DLP- G322 Change the OPT-BST ALS Maintenance Settings 20-25
NTP- G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-27
DLP- G323 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers 20-28
DLP- G324 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers 20-30
DLP- G325 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers 20-34
DLP- G326 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers 20-36
DLP- G538 Change Optical Raman Line Settings for OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP Amplifiers 20-41
DLP- G539 Change Optical Raman Line Threshold Settings for OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP Amplifiers 20-42
DLP- G327 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings of OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards 20-44
NTP- G202 Modify PSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-47
DLP- G514 Change the PSM Card Mode 20-47
DLP- G476 Change Optical Line Settings for the PSM Card 20-48
DLP- G477 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for the PSM Card 20-49
DLP- G478 Change the PSM ALS Maintenance Settings 20-52
NTP- G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds 20-54
DLP- G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 20-55
Contents
xxxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 20-57
DLP- G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 20-59
DLP- G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 20-62
NTP- G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-65
DLP- G212 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel Parameters 20-66
DLP- G213 Change the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel Thresholds 20-69
DLP- G214 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line Parameters 20-73
DLP- G215 Change the 32WSS, 32-WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line Thresholds 20-74
NTP- G240 Modify TDC-CC and TDC-FC Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-76
DLP- G545 Modify the Chromatic Dispersion Value for the TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 20-77
DLP- G528 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for TDC-CC or TDC-FC Card 20-78
NTP- G174 Modify the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-79
DLP- G603 Change the 80-WXC-C Card Mode 20-80
DLP- G406 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card Optical Channel Parameters 20-81
DLP- G407 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Thresholds 20-84
DLP- G408 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Parameters 20-87
DLP- G409 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Thresholds 20-89
DLP- G413 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card WXC Line Parameters 20-91
DLP- G429 Multiplex a Single Wavelength on 40-WXC-C Card 20-93
NTP- G241 Modify the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-94
DLP- G532 Change Optical Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 20-95
DLP- G533 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 20-97
DLP- G534 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 20-101
DLP- G535 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 20-103
DLP- G536 Change 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Parameters 20-108
DLP- G537 Change the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Optical Channel Thresholds 20-110
NTP- G149 Modify the MMU Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-114
DLP- G342 Change MMU Optical Line Parameters 20-114
DLP- G343 Change the MMU Optical Line Thresholds 20-116
NTP- G101 Modify Alarm Interface Controller–International Settings 20-117
DLP- G245 Change External Alarms Using the AIC-I Card 20-118
DLP- G246 Change External Controls Using the AIC-I Card 20-119
Contents
xxxv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G247 Change AIC-I Card Orderwire Settings 20-119
NTP- G102 Change Card Service State 20-120
NTP- G280 Modify Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE Cards 20-121
DLP- G609 Modify Optical Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE Cards 20-121
DLP- G610 Modify Line Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE cards 20-123
CHAPTER 21
Perform Node Acceptance Tests 21-1
Before You Begin 21-1
NTP- G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance Test 21-3
DLP- G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power 21-5
DLP- G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power 21-6
DLP- G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power 21-7
DLP- G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power 21-7
NTP- G168 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 21-8
NTP- G42 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test 21-10
DLP- G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power 21-14
NTP- G167 Perform the Terminal Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 21-15
NTP- G153 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test 21-20
DLP- G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing 21-24
DLP- G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power 21-25
DLP- G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power 21-25
DLP- G361 Verify the 32DMX-L Power 21-26
NTP- G43 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test 21-27
DLP- G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels with 32WSS and 40-WSS-C Cards 21-29
DLP- G311 Verify the Side A or Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS and 40-WSS-C Cards 21-34
NTP- G154 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test 21-39
DLP- G362 Verify ROADM Node L-Band Pass-Through Channels 21-44
DLP- G363 Verify the Side B ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels 21-52
DLP- G364 Verify the Side A ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels 21-57
NTP- G180 Perform the ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 21-62
NTP- G276 Perform the 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node Acceptance Tests 21-67
NTP- G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test 21-71
NTP- G45 Perform the C-Band and L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test 21-74
NTP- G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 21-78
NTP- G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 21-82
Contents
xxxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
NTP- G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 21-86
NTP- G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 21-90
NTP- G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards 21-94
DLP- G85 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards 21-96
DLP- G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Express Power 21-97
DLP- G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Express Power 21-97
DLP- G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Common Power 21-98
DLP- G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Common Power 21-98
DLP- G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections 21-99
DLP- G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power 21-100
DLP- G90 Verify an AD-xB-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power 21-101
DLP- G91 Verify an AD-xC-xx.x Pass-Through Connection 21-102
DLP- G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power 21-103
DLP- G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards 21-104
NTP- G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards 21-106
DLP- G86 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards 21-108
DLP- G83 Verify the OSC-CSM Power on OADM Nodes 21-109
DLP- G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards 21-110
NTP- G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards 21-112
NTP- G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel Acceptance Test 21-114
DLP- G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength 21-124
DLP- G433 Record Transponder Optical Power 21-125
NTP- G187 Perform the Multiring Site Acceptance Test 21-126
DLP- 434 Record the OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value 21-131
DLP- 435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters 21-132
DLP- 436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value 21-133
NTP- G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test 21-134
NTP- G189 Perform the Node Upgrade Acceptance Test 21-139
NTP- G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards Acceptance Test 21-147
NTP- G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test 21-151
CHAPTER 22
Management Network Connectivity 22-1
22.1 IP Networking Overview 22-2
22.2 IP Addressing Scenarios 22-2
Contents
xxxvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
22.2.1 Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet 22-3
22.2.2 Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454s Connected to a Router 22-3
22.2.3 Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 Gateway 22-4
22.2.4 Scenario 4: Default Gateway on CTC Computer 22-7
22.2.5 Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs 22-8
22.2.6 Scenario 6: Using OSPF 22-10
22.2.7 Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 Proxy Server 22-12
22.2.8 Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on a Subnet 22-17
22.2.9 Scenario 9: IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled 22-19
22.2.9.1 Secure Mode Behavior 22-19
22.2.9.2 Secure Node Locked and Unlocked Behavior 22-22
22.3 DCN Case Studies 22-23
22.3.1 SOCKS Proxy Settings 22-23
22.3.2 OSPF 22-23
22.3.3 Management of Non-LAN Connected Multishelf Node 22-24
22.3.4 DCN Case Study 1: Ring Topology with Two Subnets and Two DCN Connections 22-24
22.3.4.1 DCN Case Study 1 IP Configuration 22-25
22.3.4.2 DCN Case Study 1 Limitations 22-27
22.3.5 DCN Case Study 2: Linear Topology with DCN Connections on Both Ends 22-28
22.3.5.1 DCN Case Study 2 IP Configurations 22-28
22.3.5.2 DCN Case Study 2 Limitations 22-30
22.3.6 DCN Case Study 3: Linear Topology with DCN Connections on Both Ends Using OSPF Routing 22-30
22.3.6.1 DCN Case Study 3 IP Configurations 22-31
22.3.6.2 DCN Case Study 3 Limitations 22-34
22.3.7 DCN Case Study 4: Two Linear Cascaded Topologies With Two DCN Connections 22-34
22.3.7.1 DCN Case Study 4 IP Configurations 22-35
22.3.7.2 DCN Case Study 4 Limitations 22-37
22.4 DCN Extension 22-37
22.4.1 Network Using OSC 22-38
22.4.2 Network Using External DCN 22-38
22.4.3 Network Using GCC/DCC 22-39
22.5 Routing Table 22-39
22.6 External Firewalls 22-41
22.7 Open GNE 22-42
22.8 TCP/IP and OSI Networking 22-45
22.9 Link Management Protocol 22-49
22.9.1 Overview 22-49
22.9.1.1 MPLS 22-50
Contents
xxxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
22.9.1.2 GMPLS 22-50
22.9.2 Configuring LMP 22-51
22.9.2.1 Control Channel Management 22-51
22.9.2.2 TE Link Management 22-52
22.9.2.3 Link Connectivity Verification 22-52
22.9.2.4 Fault Management 22-52
22.9.3 LMP WDM 22-53
22.9.4 LMP Network Implementation 22-53
22.10 IPv6 Network Compatibility 22-54
22.11 IPv6 Native Support 22-54
22.11.1 IPv6 Enabled Mode 22-56
22.11.2 IPv6 Disabled Mode 22-56
22.11.3 IPv6 in Non-secure Mode 22-56
22.11.4 IPv6 in Secure Mode 22-56
22.11.5 IPv6 Limitations 22-56
22.12 Integration with Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Routers 22-57
22.12.1 Card Compatibility 22-58
22.12.2 Node Management 22-59
22.12.2.1 Physical Connections 22-60
22.12.2.2 CTC Display 22-60
22.12.3 Circuit Management 22-61
22.12.3.1 LMP Provisioning 22-61
22.12.3.2 Virtual Link Provisioning 22-62
22.12.3.3 OCH Trail Circuit Provisioning 22-62
22.12.4 Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Management from CTC 22-63
22.13 Photonic Path Trace 22-64
22.14 Shared Risk Link Group 22-65
22.15 Proactive Protection Regen 22-65
CHAPTER 23
Upgrade, Add, and Remove Cards and Nodes 23-1
CHAPTER 24
Maintain the Node 24-1
Before You Begin 24-1
NTP- G103 Back Up the Database 24-2
NTP- G104 Restore the Database 24-3
NTP- G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration 24-4
DLP- G248 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (Windows) 24-6
Contents
xxxix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
DLP- G249 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (UNIX) 24-8
NTP- G133 View and Manage OSI Information 24-10
DLP- G298 View IS-IS Routing Information Base 24-10
DLP- G299 View ES-IS Routing Information Base 24-11
DLP- G300 Manage the TARP Data Cache 24-12
NTP- G106 Reset Cards Using CTC 24-13
DLP- G250 Reset the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE Card 24-13
DLP- G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC 24-14
NTP- G108 Viewing the Audit Trail Records 24-15
NTP- G109 Off-Load the Audit Trail Record 24-16
NTP- G110 Off-Load the Diagnostics File 24-17
NTP- G112 Change the Node Timing Reference 24-18
DLP- G259 Manual or Force Switch the Node Timing Reference 24-18
DLP- G260 Clear a Manual or Force Switch on a Node Timing Reference 24-19
NTP- G113 View the ONS 15454 Timing Report 24-20
NTP- G135 Edit Network Element Defaults 24-23
NTP- G136 Import Network Element Defaults 24-24
NTP- G137 Export Network Element Defaults 24-25
NTP- G166 View the Facilities 24-26
NTP- G119 Power Down the Node 24-27
Contents
xl
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
CHAPTER 25
Security Reference 25-1
CHAPTER 26
Timing Reference 26-1
CHAPTER 27
SNMP 27-1
APPENDIX A
CTC Operation, Information, and Shortcuts A-1
APPENDIX B
Hardware Specifications B-1
APPENDIX C
Administrative and Service States C-1
APPENDIX D
Configuring GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI D-1
APPENDIX E
Pseudo Command Line Interface Reference E-1
APPENDIX F
Fiber and Connector Losses in Raman Link Configuration F-1
APPENDIX G
Card Features G-1
G.1 Safety Labels G-1
G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards G-1
G.1.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Label G-2
G.1.1.2 Hazard Level 1 Label G-2
G.1.1.3 Laser Source Connector Label G-2
G.1.1.4 FDA Statement Labels G-3
G.1.1.5 Shock Hazard Label G-3
G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards G-4
G.1.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement G-4
G.1.2.2 Hazard Level 1M Label G-4
G.1.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label G-5
G.1.2.4 FDA Statement Labels G-5
G.1.2.5 Shock Hazard Label G-5
G.1.2.6 Burn Hazard Label G-6
G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown G-6
G.3 Card-Level Indicators G-7
G.4 Port-Level Indicators G-9
G.5 Client Interface G-14
G.6 DWDM Interface G-15
Contents
xli
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface G-15
G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature G-16
G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes G-16
G.10 Client-to-Trunk Mapping G-17
G.11 Timing Synchronization G-17
G.12 Multiplexing Function G-18
G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing G-19
G.14 Client Interface Monitoring G-19
G.15 Jitter G-19
G.16 Lamp Test G-19
G.17 Onboard Traffic Generation G-19
G.18 Performance Monitoring G-20
G.19 Distance Extension G-20
G.20 Slot Compatibility G-20
G.21 Interoperability with Cisco MDS Switches G-20
G.22 Client and Trunk Ports G-20
G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards G-20
G.23.1 TCC2 Card G-21
G.23.2 TCC2P/TCC3 Card G-21
G.23.3 TNC and TNCE Cards G-21
G.23.4 TSC and TSCE Cards G-22
G.24 Interface Ports G-22
G.25 External Alarms and Controls G-23
G.26 Digital Image Signing (DIS) G-24
G.27 Database Storage G-24
G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation G-24
G.29 Optical Service Channel G-25
G.30 MultiShelf Management G-25
G.31 Protection Schemes G-25
G.32 Cards Supported by TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE G-26
G.33 Automatic Power Control G-26
G.34 Alarms and Thresholds G-26
G.35 Card Protection G-27
G.35.1 Y-Cable and Splitter Protection G-27
G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection G-27
G.35.1.2 Splitter Protection G-30
Contents
xlii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
G.35.2 1+1 Protection G-30
G.35.3 Layer 2 Over DWDM Protection G-31
G.36 Far-End Laser Control G-32
G.37 Jitter Considerations G-32
G.38 Termination Modes G-33
APPENDIX H
Network Element Defaults H-1
INDEX
xliii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Note The terms “Unidirectional Path Switched Ring” and “UPSR” may appear in Cisco literature. These terms
do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as “Path Protected Mesh Network” and “PPMN”, refer generally to Cisco's
path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not
recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This section explains the objectives, intended audience, and organization of this publication and
describes the conventions that convey instructions and other information.
This section provides the following information:
• Revision History
• Document Objectives
• Audience
• Document Organization
• Related Documentation
• Document Conventions
• Obtaining Optical Networking Information
• Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelines
xliv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Revision History
Date Notes
December 2011 • Updated the procedure “DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations” in
the chapter “Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable
Patchcords”.
• Updated the section “Termination Modes” in the chapter “Card Features”.
• Added a caution to the section, “Related Procedures for RAMAN-CTP and
RAMAN-COP Cards” in the chapter, “Provision Optical Amplifier Cards”.
January 2012 • Added a note to step 3 in NTP-G144 in the chapter, “Turn Up a Node”.
• Updated the card description for the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP
cards in the chapter, “Provision Optical Amplifier Cards”.
• Updated the section “GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
Cards” with pluggable limitations in the chapter Transponder and
Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the section “Create a Segment Using CTC” in the chapter
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
February 2012 • Updated the procedure “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” in the chapter “Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Removed the autonegotiation support statement for ADM-10G card from
the “Key Features” section and updated the Mode parameter in the table
“ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings” in the chapter “Provision Transponder
and Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the procedure “DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate” in the
chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
March 2012 • Updated the bandwidth parameter in the procedure, “DLP-G383 Provision
the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service
Settings”.
• Updated the section, “Multishelf Node” in the chapter, “ Node Reference”.
• Added a note in the procedure “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord
Manually” in the chapter “Turn Up a Node”.
April 2012 • Updated the table “DWDM NFV Toolbar Options” in the chapter,
“Node Reference”.
• Updated the "Faceplate and Block Diagram" section of "GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards" in the chapter,“Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Added a note in the procedure “DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate
Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings” in the chapter “Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Added a new procedure "DLP-G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for
Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC" and updated "DLP-G384 Provision
the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings" in the
chapter, "Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards".
xlv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Document Objectives
The Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide includes content previously found in two separate
guides—Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual and Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide.
The new Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.3 and later releases will now include
background and reference material, installation, turn up, provisioning, and maintenance procedures for
the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS M2, and Cisco ONS M6 dense wavelength division (DWDM)
systems. Use this document in conjunction with the appropriate publications listed in the Related
Documentation section.
Audience
To use this publication, you should be familiar with Cisco or equivalent optical transmission hardware
and cabling, telecommunications hardware and cabling, electronic circuitry and wiring practices, and
preferably have experience as a telecommunications technician
Document Organization
May 2012 • Updated the section “RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards” in the
chapter “Provision Optical Amplifier Cards”.
• Added a note in the procedure “DLP-G507 Enable a Different GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master Card” in the
chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the section “Optical Channel Circuits” in the chapter “Create
Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords”.
• Updated the “Set Up SNMP” procedure in the chapter “Turn Up a Node”.
June 2012 Updated the section “OTU2_XP Card Configuration Rules” in the chapter
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
July 2012 • Document Part Number revisioned to 78-19694-02 and a full length
book-PDF was generated.
• Updated the table “Gigabit Ethernet RMON Variables” in the chapter
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
August 2012 Updated the table “Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Control
Cards” in the chapter “Install the Control Cards”.
Date Notes
Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Configuration Guide Chapters
Title Summary
"Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for
Release 9.4"
Provides a link to quickly access publications of Cisco ONS Release 9.4.
Chapter 1, “Install the Cisco ONS 15454,
ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf”
Explains how to install the Cisco ONS 15454 ETSI, Cisco ONS 15454 ANSI,
Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies.
xlvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Chapter 2, “Connecting the PC and Logging
into the GUI”
Explains how to connect Windows PCs and Solaris workstations to the
Cisco ONS 15454 and how to log into Cisco Transport Controller (CTC)
software.
Chapter 3, “Install the Control Cards” Explains how to install the control cards needed for the Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies.
Chapter 4, “Setup Optical Service Channel
Cards”
Includes descriptions of OSCM and OSC-CSM cards. Also provides
references to related procedures.
Chapter 5, “Provision Optical Amplifier
Cards”
Includes descriptions of the optical amplifier cards. Also provides references
to related procedures.
Chapter 6, “Provision Multiplexer and
Demultiplexer Cards”
Includes descriptions of the 32-MUX-O, 32DMX-O, and 4MD-xx.x cards.
Also provides references to related procedures.
Chapter 7, “Setup Tunable Dispersion
Compensating Units”
Explains the Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units (T-DCU) used in Cisco
ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks.
Also provides references to related procedures.
Chapter 8, “Provision Protection Switching
Module”
Includes descriptions of the Protection Switching Module (PSM) card used in
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM networks. Also provides references to related
procedures.
Chapter 9, “Provision Optical Add/Drop
Cards”
Includes descriptions of the AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x,
AD-1B-xx.x, and AD-4B-xx.x cards. Also provides references to related
procedures.
Chapter 10, “Provision Reconfigurable
Optical Add/Drop Cards”
Includes descriptions of the ROADM cards. Also provides references to
related procedures.
Chapter 11, “Provision Transponder and
Muxponder Cards”
Includes descriptions of transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), Xponder
(GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE), and ADM-10G cards. Also
provides references to related procedures.
Chapter 12, “Node Reference” Explains the DWDM node types available for the ONS 15454. The DWDM
node type is determined by the type of amplifier and filter cards that are
installed in an ONS 15454. Also explains the DWDM automatic power
control (APC), reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexing (ROADM)
power equalization, span loss verification, and automatic node setup (ANS)
functions.
Chapter 13, “Network Reference” Explains the DWDM network applications and topologies. Also provides
network-level optical performance references.
Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node” Explains how to provision a single Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node and turn
it up for service.
Chapter 21, “Perform Node Acceptance
Tests”
Provides test procedures to verify that installed cards are operating correctly
in a Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node.
Chapter 15, “Turn Up a Network” Explains how to turn up and test a Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM network.
Chapter 16, “Create Optical Channel Circuits
and Provisionable Patchcords”
Explains how to create Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM optical channel client
connections (OCHCCs), optical channel network connections (OCHNCs),
and optical trail circuits.
Chapter 17, “Monitor Performance” Explains how to enable and view performance monitoring (PM) statistics for
the Cisco ONS 15454.
Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Configuration Guide Chapters (continued)
Title Summary
xlvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Chapter 18, “Manage the Node” Explains how to modify node provisioning for the Cisco ONS 15454 and
perform common management tasks such as monitoring the DWDM
automatic power control (APC) and span loss values.
Chapter 19, “Alarm and TCA Monitoring and
Management”
Contains the procedures for viewing and managing the alarms and conditions
on a Cisco ONS 15454.
Chapter 20, “Change DWDM Card Settings” Explains how to change line, performance monitoring (PM), and threshold
settings on Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM cards.
Chapter 22, “Management Network
Connectivity”
Provides an overview of ONS 15454 data communications network (DCN)
connectivity. Cisco Optical Networking System (ONS) network
communication is based on IP, including communication between Cisco
Transport Controller (CTC) computers and ONS 15454 nodes, and
communication among networked ONS 15454 nodes. The chapter shows
common Cisco ONS 15454 IP network configurations and includes detailed
data communications network (DCN) case studies.
Chapter 23, “Upgrade, Add, and Remove
Cards and Nodes”
Provides procedures for adding and removing DWDM cards and nodes
Chapter 24, “Maintain the Node” Provides procedures for maintaining the Cisco ONS 15454, including
database backup and restoration, removing and replacing cards, viewing the
ONS 15454 audit trail, and hardware maintenance procedures.
Chapter 25, “Security Reference” Provides information about Cisco ONS 15454 users and security.
Chapter 26, “Timing Reference” Provides information about Cisco ONS 15454 users and node timing.
Chapter 27, “SNMP” Explains Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) as implemented by
the Cisco ONS 15454.
Appendix A, “CTC Operation, Information,
and Shortcuts”
Describes the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) views, menus options, tool
options, shortcuts, and table display options.
Appendix B, “Hardware Specifications” Contains hardware specifications for the ONS 15454 ANSI and ETSI shelf
assemblies and cards.
Appendix C, “Administrative and Service
States”
Describes the administrative and service states for Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
cards, optical payload ports, out-of-band optical service channel (OSC) ports,
optical channel network connections (OCHNCs), and
transponder/muxponder cards and ports.
Appendix D, “Configuring GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI”
Describes how to provision GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
cards using Pseudo Command Line Interface (PCLI).
Appendix E, “Pseudo Command Line
Interface Reference”
Describes Pseudo-IOS command line interface (PCLI) for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Appendix F, “Fiber and Connector Losses in
Raman Link Configuration”
Describes guidelines to be followed when configuring a Raman link.
Appendix G, “Card Features” Describes the card features.
Appendix H, “Network Element Defaults” Describes the defaults for the network element settings for Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms.
Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Configuration Guide Chapters (continued)
Title Summary
xlviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Related Documentation
Use the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide in conjunction with the following referenced
Release 9.4 publications:
• Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 DWDM, Release 9.4
• Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
• Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Quick Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 for Beginners
• Cisco ONS SDH TL1 Command Guide
• Cisco ONS SDH TL1 Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS SDH TL1Command Quick Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS SDH TL1 for Beginners
• Cisco Transport Planner – DWDM Operations Guide
• Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
• Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
For an update on End-of-Life and End-of-Sale notices, refer to
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/optical/ps2006/prod_eol_notices_list.html.
Document Conventions
This publication uses the following conventions:
Convention Application
boldface Commands and keywords in body text.
italic Command input that is supplied by the user.
[ ] Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional.
{ x | x | x } A choice of keywords (represented by x) appears in braces separated by
vertical bars. The user must select one.
Ctrl The control key. For example, where Ctrl + D is written, hold down the
Control key while pressing the D key.
screen font Examples of information displayed on the screen.
xlix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the
document.
Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, the user might do something that could result in equipment
damage or loss of data.
boldface screen font Examples of information that the user must enter.
< > Command parameters that must be replaced by module-specific codes.
Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you
work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar
with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of
each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this
device. Statement 1071
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Waarschuwing BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSINSTRUCTIES
Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan
veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij
elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van de standaard
praktijken om ongelukken te voorkomen. Gebruik het nummer van de verklaring onderaan de
waarschuwing als u een vertaling van de waarschuwing die bij het apparaat wordt geleverd, wilt
raadplegen.
BEWAAR DEZE INSTRUCTIES
Varoitus TÄRKEITÄ TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA
Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Tilanne voi aiheuttaa ruumiillisia vammoja. Ennen kuin
käsittelet laitteistoa, huomioi sähköpiirien käsittelemiseen liittyvät riskit ja tutustu
onnettomuuksien yleisiin ehkäisytapoihin. Turvallisuusvaroitusten käännökset löytyvät laitteen
mukana toimitettujen käännettyjen turvallisuusvaroitusten joukosta varoitusten lopussa näkyvien
lausuntonumeroiden avulla.
SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET
Convention Application
l
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Attention IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SÉCURITÉ
Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant
entraîner des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez
conscient des dangers liés aux circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures
couramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents. Pour prendre connaissance des traductions des
avertissements figurant dans les consignes de sécurité traduites qui accompagnent cet appareil,
référez-vous au numéro de l'instruction situé à la fin de chaque avertissement.
CONSERVEZ CES INFORMATIONS
Warnung WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE
Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu Verletzungen führen
kann. Machen Sie sich vor der Arbeit mit Geräten mit den Gefahren elektrischer Schaltungen und
den üblichen Verfahren zur Vorbeugung vor Unfällen vertraut. Suchen Sie mit der am Ende jeder
Warnung angegebenen Anweisungsnummer nach der jeweiligen Übersetzung in den übersetzten
Sicherheitshinweisen, die zusammen mit diesem Gerät ausgeliefert wurden.
BEWAHREN SIE DIESE HINWEISE GUT AUF.
Avvertenza IMPORTANTI ISTRUZIONI SULLA SICUREZZA
Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle
persone. Prima di intervenire su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre essere al corrente dei pericoli
relativi ai circuiti elettrici e conoscere le procedure standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.
Utilizzare il numero di istruzione presente alla fine di ciascuna avvertenza per individuare le
traduzioni delle avvertenze riportate in questo documento.
CONSERVARE QUESTE ISTRUZIONI
Advarsel VIKTIGE SIKKERHETSINSTRUKSJONER
Dette advarselssymbolet betyr fare. Du er i en situasjon som kan føre til skade på person. Før du
begynner å arbeide med noe av utstyret, må du være oppmerksom på farene forbundet med
elektriske kretser, og kjenne til standardprosedyrer for å forhindre ulykker. Bruk nummeret i slutten
av hver advarsel for å finne oversettelsen i de oversatte sikkerhetsadvarslene som fulgte med denne
enheten.
TA VARE PÅ DISSE INSTRUKSJONENE
Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você está em uma situação que poderá ser causadora de
lesões corporais. Antes de iniciar a utilização de qualquer equipamento, tenha conhecimento dos
perigos envolvidos no manuseio de circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas habituais de
prevenção de acidentes. Utilize o número da instrução fornecido ao final de cada aviso para
localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham este dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES
li
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
¡Advertencia! INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
Este símbolo de aviso indica peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física. Antes de manipular
cualquier equipo, considere los riesgos de la corriente eléctrica y familiarícese con los
procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes. Al final de cada advertencia encontrará el
número que le ayudará a encontrar el texto traducido en el apartado de traducciones que acompaña
a este dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES
Varning! VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSANVISNINGAR
Denna varningssignal signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada.
Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och
känna till vanliga förfaranden för att förebygga olyckor. Använd det nummer som finns i slutet av
varje varning för att hitta dess översättning i de översatta säkerhetsvarningar som medföljer denna
anordning.
SPARA DESSA ANVISNINGAR
lii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você se encontra em uma situação em que há risco de lesões
corporais. Antes de trabalhar com qualquer equipamento, esteja ciente dos riscos que envolvem os
circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas padrão de prevenção de acidentes. Use o
número da declaração fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de
segurança traduzidos que acompanham o dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES
Advarsel VIGTIGE SIKKERHEDSANVISNINGER
Dette advarselssymbol betyder fare. Du befinder dig i en situation med risiko for
legemesbeskadigelse. Før du begynder arbejde på udstyr, skal du være opmærksom på de
involverede risici, der er ved elektriske kredsløb, og du skal sætte dig ind i standardprocedurer til
undgåelse af ulykker. Brug erklæringsnummeret efter hver advarsel for at finde oversættelsen i de
oversatte advarsler, der fulgte med denne enhed.
GEM DISSE ANVISNINGER
liii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
liv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Obtaining Optical Networking Information
This section contains information that is specific to optical networking products. For information that
pertains to all of Cisco, refer to the Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security
Guidelines section.
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
For safety and warning information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for
Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document that accompanied the product. This publication
describes the international agency compliance and safety information for the Cisco ONS 15454 system.
It also includes translations of the safety warnings that appear in the ONS 15454 system documentation.
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM
Optical networking-related documentation, including Cisco ONS 15xxx product documentation, is
available in a CD-ROM package that ships with your product. The Optical Networking Product
Documentation CD-ROM is updated periodically and may be more current than printed documentation.
lv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelines
For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional
information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and
revised Cisco technical documentation.
Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed
and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free
service and Cisco currently supports RSS Version 2.0.
lvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Preface
lvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for Release 9.4
To quickly access publications of Cisco ONS Release 9.4, see the
Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for Release 9.4
lviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-18908-01
Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for Release 9.4
CH A P T E R
1-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
1
Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf
For information on installing the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 shelf, refer:
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
1-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 1 Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf
CH A P T E R
2-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
2
Connecting the PC and Logging into the GUI
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See Connect the PC and Log into the GUI document
for information on how to connect Windows PCs and Solaris workstations to the Cisco ONS 15454 and
how to log into Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software, the ONS 15454 Operation, Administration,
Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P) user interface.
2-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 2 Connecting the PC and Logging into the GUI
CH A P T E R
3-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
3
Install the Control Cards
Note The terms “Unidirectional Path Switched Ring” and “UPSR” may appear in Cisco literature. These terms
do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as “Path Protected Mesh Network” and “PPMN”, refer generally to Cisco's
path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not
recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This chapter describes the common-control cards needed for the Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms and provides installation and card turn up
procedures.
For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco
ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Chapter topics include:
• 3.1 Card Overview, page 3-2
• 3.3 TCC2 Card, page 3-3
• “3.3.3 Related Procedures for TCC2 Card” section on page 3-6
• 3.4 TCC2P Card, page 3-6
• “3.4.3 Related Procedures for TCC2P Card” section on page 3-9
• 3.5 TCC3 Card, page 3-9
• 3.5.3 Related Procedures for TCC3 Card, page 3-12
• 3.6 TNC and TNCE Card, page 3-12
• 3.6.3 Related Procedures for TNC and TNCE Cards, page 3-16
• 3.7 TSC and TSCE Cards, page 3-16
• 3.7.3 Related Procedures for TSC and TSCE Cards, page 3-19
3-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Card Overview
• 3.8 Digital Image Signing, page 3-20
• 3.8.2 Related Procedures for DIS, page 3-20
• 3.9 AIC-I Card, page 3-20
• 3.9.8 Related Procedures for AIC-I Card, page 3-26
• 3.10 MS-ISC-100T Card, page 3-26
• 3.10.3 Related Procedures for MS-ISC-100T Card, page 3-28
• 3.11 Front Mount Electrical Connections, page 3-29
• 3.12 Procedures for Control Cards, page 3-33
3.1 Card Overview
The card overview section lists the cards described in this chapter.
Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see
the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
3.1.1 Common Control Cards
The following common control cards are needed to support the functions of the DWDM, transponder,
and muxponder cards on ONS 15454 shelf:
• TCC2 or TCC2P or TCC3
• AIC-I (optional)
• MS-ISC-100T (multishelf configurations only)
The TNC, TNCE, TSC, and TSCE cards are used to support the functions of DWDM, transponder, and
muxponder cards on the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelves.
3.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 3-1 lists the platform and software release compatibility for the control cards.
Table 3-1 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Control Cards
TCC2 TCC2P AIC-I MS-ISC-100T TCC31 TNC TSC TNCE TSCE
R4.5 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R4.6 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R4.7 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R5.0 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R6.0 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R7.0 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R7.2 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R8.0 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
3-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Safety Labels
3.1.3 Front Mount Electrical Connections (ETSI only)
The following Front Mount Electrical Connections (FMECs) are needed to support the functions of the
DWDM, transponder, and muxponder cards:
• MIC-A/P
• MIC-C/T/P
3.2 Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1.
3.3 TCC2 Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For TCC2 card specifications, see the “TCC2 Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
R8.5 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R9.0 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R9.1 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No
R9.2
15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
No No
R9.2.1
15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
No No
R9.3
15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454
-M2
and
15454
-M6
R9.4
15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454-
M2 and
15454-
M6
15454
-M2
and
15454
-M6
1. The TCC3 card is backward compatible with software Release 9.1 and earlier releases. In the Release 9.1 and earlier releases, the TCC3 card boots up as
the TCC2P card in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM systems.
Table 3-1 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Control Cards (continued)
TCC2 TCC2P AIC-I MS-ISC-100T TCC31 TNC TSC TNCE TSCE
3-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC2 Card
The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control (TCC2) card performs system initialization,
provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET
section overhead (SOH) data communications channel/generic communications channel (DCC/GCC)
termination, optical service channel (OSC) DWDM data communications network (DCN) termination,
and system fault detection for the ONS 15454. The TCC2 also ensures that the system maintains
Stratum 3 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system.
Note The LAN interface of the TCC2 card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable
length of 328 ft. (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees Celsius).
Install TCC2 cards in Slots 7 and 11 for redundancy. If the active TCC2 fails, traffic switches to the
protect TCC2.
3.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-1 shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC2 card.
3-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC2 Card
Figure 3-1 TCC2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3.3.2 TCC2 Card Functions
The functions of the TCC2 card are:
• G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards, page G-20
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
FAIL
A
PWR
B
ACT/STBY
ACO
CRIT
MIN
REM
SYNC
RS-232
TCP/IP
MAJ
ACO
TCC2
LAMP
BACKPLANE
Ethernet
Repeater
Mate TCC2
Ethernet Port
Backplane
Ethernet Port
(Shared with
Mate TCC2)
SDRAM Memory
& Compact Flash
FPGA
TCCA ASIC
SCL Processor
Serial
Debug
Modem
Interface
RS-232 Craft
Interface
Backplane
RS-232 Port
(Shared with
Mate TCC2)
Faceplate
RS-232 Port
Note: Only 1 RS-232 Port Can Be Active -
Backplane Port Will Supercede Faceplate Port
Faceplate
Ethernet Port
SCL Links to
All Cards
HDLC
Message
Bus
Mate TCC2
HDLC Link
Modem
Interface
400MHz (Not Used)
Processor
Communications
Processor
SCC3
MCC1
FCC1
MCC2
SCC4 FCC2
SCC1 SCC2
DCC
Processor
System
Timing
BITS Input/
Output
Ref Clocks
-48V PWR (all I/O Slots)
Monitors
Real Time
Clock
137639
3-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC2P Card
• G.24 Interface Ports, page G-22
• G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation, page G-24
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Network level indicators—Table G-13 on page G-13
3.3.3 Related Procedures for TCC2 Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TCC2 card:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34
• NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454
• NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
• NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
• NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8
• NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15
• NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access
• NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
• NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3
• NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13
• NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4
3.4 TCC2P Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For TCC2P card specifications, see the”TCC2P Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control Plus (TCC2P) card is an enhanced version of the
TCC2 card. The primary enhancements are Ethernet security features and 64K composite clock BITS
timing.
The TCC2P card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance,
diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET SOH DCC/GCC termination, and system fault
detection for the ONS 15454. The TCC2P also ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3
(Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system.
3-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC2P Card
The TCC2P card supports multi-shelf management. The TCC2P card acts as a shelf controller and node
controller for the ONS 15454. The TCC2P card supports up to 12 subtended shelves through the
MSM-ISC card or external switch. In a multi-shelf configuration, the TCC2P card allows the ONS 15454
node to be a node controller if an M6 shelf is subtended to it.
The TCC2P card is compliant to the following standards:
• The LAN interface of the TCC2P card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a
cable length of 328 ft. (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees
Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft. (10 m) maximum at temperatures
from –40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to 0 degrees Celsius).
• The TCC2P card is Restriction of Use of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) complaint. The RoHS
regulations limit or ban the specific substances such as lead, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl
(PBB), mercury, hexavalent chromium, and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE) flame retardants
in a new electronic and electric equipment.
Install TCC2P cards in Slots 7 and 11 for redundancy. If the active TCC2P card fails, traffic switches to
the protect TCC2P card. All TCC2P card protection switches conform to protection switching standards
when the bit error rate (BER) counts are not in excess of 1 * 10 exp – 3 and completion time is less than
50 ms.
3.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-2 shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC2P card.
3-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC2P Card
Figure 3-2 TCC2P Faceplate and Block Diagram
3.4.2 TCC2P Card Functions
The functions of the TCC2P card are:
• G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards, page G-20
FAIL
A
PWR
B
ACT/STBY
ACO
CRIT
MIN
REM
SYNC
RS-232
TCP/IP
MAJ
ACO
TCC2P
LAMP
BACKPLANE
Ethernet Switch
Mate TCC2
Ethernet Port
Backplane
Ethernet Port
(Shared with
Mate TCC2)
SDRAM Memory
& Compact Flash
FPGA
TCCA ASIC
SCL Processor
Serial
Debug
Modem
Interface
EIA/TIA 232
Craft Interface
Backplane
EIA/TIA 232 Por
(Shared with
Mate TCC2)
Faceplate
EIA/TIA 232 Port
Note: Only 1 EIA/TIA 232 Port Can Be Active -
Backplane Port Will Supercede Faceplate Port
Faceplate
Ethernet Port
SCL Links to
All Cards
HDLC
Message
Bus
Mate TCC2
HDLC Link
Modem
Interface
400MHz (Not Used)
Processor
Communications
Processor
SCC3
MCC1
FCC1
MCC2
SCC4 FCC2
SMC1 SCC2
DCC
Processor
System
Timing BITS Input/
Output
Ref Clocks
-48V PWR (all I/O Slots)
Monitors
Real Time
Clock
Ethernet
Phy
SCC1
3-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC3 Card
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.24 Interface Ports, page G-22
• G.27 Database Storage, page G-24
• G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation, page G-24
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 l
• Network level indicators—Table G-13 on page G-13
• Power level indicators—Table G-11 on page G-12
3.4.3 Related Procedures for TCC2P Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TCC2P card:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34
• NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454
• NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
• DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows)
• DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris)
• DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups
• DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group
• NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
• NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8
• NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15
• NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access
• NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
• NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3
• NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13
• NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4
3.5 TCC3 Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
3-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC3 Card
Note For TCC3 card specifications, see the “TCC3 Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The Timing Communications Control Three (TCC3) card is an enhanced version of the TCC2P card. The
primary enhancements include the increase in memory size and compact flash space. The TCC3 card
boots up as TCC2P card in older releases and as TCC3 card from Release 9.2 onwards.
The TCC3 card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics,
IP address detection/resolution, SONET SOH DCC/GCC termination, and system fault detection for the
ONS 15454. The TCC3 also ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE)
timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system.
The TCC3 card supports multi-shelf management. The TCC3 card acts as a shelf controller and node
controller for the ONS 15454. The TCC3 card supports up to 30 subtended shelves through the
MSM-ISC card or external switch. In a multi-shelf configuration, the TCC3 card allows the ONS 15454
node to be a node controller if an M6 shelf is subtended to it. We recommend the use of TCC3 card as a
node controller when the number of subtended shelves exceeds four.
The TCC3 card is compliant with the following standards:
• The LAN interface of the TCC3 card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a
cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures ranging from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65
degrees Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at
temperatures from –40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to 0 degrees Celsius).
• The TCC3 card is Restriction of Use of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) compliant. The RoHS
regulations limit or ban the specific substances such as lead, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl
(PBB), mercury, hexavalent chromium, and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE) flame retardants
in a new electronic and electric equipment.
3.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-3 shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC3 card.
3-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TCC3 Card
Figure 3-3 TCC3 Faceplate and Block Diagram
3.5.2 TCC3 Card Functions
The functions of the TCC3 card are:
• G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards, page G-20
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.24 Interface Ports, page G-22
• G.27 Database Storage, page G-24
• G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation, page G-24
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
FAIL
A
PWR
B
ACT/STBY
ACO
CRIT
MIN
REM
SYNC
RS-232
TCP/IP
MAJ
ACO
TCC3
LAMP
BACKPLANE
Ethernet Switch
Mate TCC
Ethernet Port
Backplane
Ethernet Port
(Shared with
Mate TCC)
SDRAM Memory
& Compact Flash
FPGA
TCCA FPGA
SCL Processor
Serial
Debug
Modem
Interface
EIA/TIA 232
Craft Interface
Backplane
EIA/TIA 232 Port
(Shared with
Mate TCC)
Faceplate
EIA/TIA 232 Port
Note: Only 1 EIA/TIA 232 Port Can Be Active -
Backplane Port Will Supercede Faceplate Port
Faceplate
Ethernet Port
SCL Links to
All Cards
HDLC
Message
Bus
Mate TCC
HDLC Link
Modem
Interface
(Not Used)
400MHz
Processor
Communications
Processor
SCC3
MCC1
FCC1
MCC2
SCC4 FCC2
SMC1 SCC2
DCC
Processor
System
Timing BITS Input/
Output
Ref Clocks
-48V PWR (all I/O Slots)
Monitors
Real Time
Clock
Ethernet
Phy
SCC1
248663
3-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TNC and TNCE Card
• Network level indicators—Table G-13 on page G-13
• Power level indicators—Table G-12 on page G-13
3.5.3 Related Procedures for TCC3 Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TCC3 card:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34
• NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454
• NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
• DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows)
• DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris)
• DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups
• DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group
• NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
• NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8
• NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15
• NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access
• NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
• NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3
• NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13
• NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4
3.6 TNC and TNCE Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
The TNC and TNCE cards combine the functions of multiple cards such as TCC2P, OSCM, ISC, and
AIC-I cards. The card has a similar look and feel to TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards.
Note For TNC and TNCE card specifications, see the “TNC and TNCE Card Specifications (Cisco ONS
15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6)” section in the Hardware Specifications document.
3-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TNC and TNCE Card
The TNC and TNCE cards are provisioned as master and slave in the 15454-M6 shelf, and as a
stand-alone card in the 15454-M2 shelf. The TNC and TNCE cards serve as the processor card for the
node.
On the 15454-M6 shelf, install redundant TNC and TNCE cards in slots 1 and 8. If the active TNC or
TNCE card fails, system traffic switches to the redundant TNC or TNCE card. The card supports line
cards from slots 2 to 7.
On the 15454-M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TNC and TNCE cards in slot 1. The TNC and TNCE
cards support line cards in slots 2 and 3.
The TNC and TNCE cards monitor both the supply voltage inputs on the 15454-M6 shelf. The TNC and
TNCE cards raise an alarm if one of the supply voltage inputs has a voltage out of the specified range.
The 15454-M2 shelf has dual power supply.
You can insert and remove the TNC and TNCE cards even when the system is online, without impacting
the system traffic.
You can upgrade the TSC or TSCE card to a TNC or TNCE card. During the upgrade, the TNC and
TNCE cards do not support OSC functions such as UDC, VoIP, DCC, and timing function. However, you
can still provision the SFP ports on the TNC and TNCE cards during the upgrade. The TNC/TNCE and
TSC/TSCE cards cannot be inserted in the same shelf.
The TNC and TNCE cards support all the alarms supported by the TCC2P and AIC-I cards. The card
adjusts the fan speed according to the temperature and reports a fan failure alarm.
Note The LAN interface of the TNC and TNCE cards meet the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting
a cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees
Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at temperatures from
-40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (-40 to 0 degrees Celsius).
3.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
The faceplate design of the TNC and TNCE cards allow sufficient space to insert or remove cables while
accessing the Ethernet and SFP ports.
The TNC and TNCE cards can be installed only in slots 1 or 8 of the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and in slot 1
of the ONS 15454 M2 shelf. The TNC and TNCE cards have an identifier on the faceplate that matches
with an identifier in the shelf. A key is also provided on the backplane interface connectors as identifier
in the shelf.
The TNC and TNCE cards support field-programmable gate array (FPGA) for the backplane interface.
The TNC cards have two FPGA: TCCA, SYNTIDE and FRAMPOS
The TNCE cards have one FPGA: VEGA and FRAMPOS
Figure 3-4 illustrates the faceplate and block diagram for the TNC card.
3-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TNC and TNCE Card
Figure 3-4 TNC Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-5 illustrates the faceplate and block diagram for the TNCE card.
HAZARD
LEVEL 1
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
TNC
FAIL
ACT/STBY
ACO
SFP2
PWR
A B
LAMP TEST
SFP1
LINK
EIA/TIA-232
ACT
LINK
TCP/IP
ACT
LINK
ACT
TX
RX
TX
RX
CRIT REM
MAJ SYNC
MIN ACO
1GB DDR2
Mini-DIMM
CPU
MPC8568E
GE Phy GE Phy GE Phy
SFP1
SFP2
BusMux
CPLD
Ethernet
Switch
Local
Ethernet
Switch
External
Glue
Logic
CPLD
SYNTIDE
FPGA
Boot
Flash
USB
Controller
FRAMPOS
FPGA
TCCA
FPGA
T1/E1
Framers
LOG
NVRAM
FE
Phy
4GB
Compact
Flash
277855
3-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TNC and TNCE Card
Figure 3-5 TNCE Faceplate and Block Diagram
3.6.2 TNC and TNCE Card Functions
The functions of the TNC and TNCE cards are:
• G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards, page G-20
• G.29 Optical Service Channel, page G-25
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.30 MultiShelf Management, page G-25
• G.27 Database Storage, page G-24
• G.24 Interface Ports, page G-22
• G.25 External Alarms and Controls, page G-23
• G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19
• G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation, page G-24
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Network level indicators—Table G-13 on page G-13
• Power level indicators—Table G-12 on page G-13
• Port level indicators—Table G-14 on page G-14
• TNC and TNCE SFP indicators—Table G-15 on page G-14
HAZARD
LEVEL 1
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
TNCE
FAIL
ACT/STBY
ACO
SFP2
PWR
A B
LAMP TEST
SFP1
LINK
EIA/TIA-232
ACT
LINK
TCP/IP
ACT
LINK
ACT
TX
RX
TX
RX
CRIT REM
MAJ SYNC
MIN ACO
1GB DDR2
Mini-DIMM
CPU
MPC8568E
GE Phy GE Phy GE Phy
SFP1
SFP2
BusMux
CPLD
Ethernet
Switch
Local
Ethernet
Switch
External
Glue
Logic
CPLD
Boot
Flash
USB
Controller
FRAMPOS
FPGA
FPGA FPGA
T1/E1
Framers
LOG
NVRAM
FE
Phy
CPU
8378
1588 FE
PHY
4GB
Compact
Flash
236696
3-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TSC and TSCE Cards
• G.31 Protection Schemes, page G-25
• G.32 Cards Supported by TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE, page G-26
3.6.3 Related Procedures for TNC and TNCE Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TNC and TNCE cards:
• NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card, page 3-41
• NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
• DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows)
• DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris)
• DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups
• DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group
• DLP-G41 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Automatic Host
Detection
• NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection to the ONS 15454
• NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
• NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information, page 14-6
• NTP-G279 Monitor TNC and TNCE Card Performance
• NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8
• NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15
• NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access
• NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
• NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3
• NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13
• NTP-G277 Provision Alarms and Controls on the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card
• NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4
3.7 TSC and TSCE Cards
(Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
The TSC and TSCE cards combine the functions of multiple cards such as TCC2P, ISC, and AIC-I cards.
The card has a similar look and feel to TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards.
3-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TSC and TSCE Cards
Note For TSC and TSCE cards specification, see the “TSC and TSCE Card Specifications (ONS 15454 M2
and ONS 15454 M6)” section in the Hardware Specifications document.
The TSC and TSCE cards are provisioned as master and slave in the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, and as a
stand-alone card in the ONS 15454 M2 shelf. The TSC and TSCE cards serve as the processor card for
the node.
On the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, install redundant TSC and TSCE cards in slots 1 and 8. If the active TSC
or TSCE card fails, system traffic switches to the redundant TSC or TSCE card. The TSC and TSCE
cards support line cards from slots 2 to 7.
On the ONS 15454 M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TSC and TSCE cards in slot 1. The TSC and TSCE
cards support line cards in slots 2 and 3.
The TSC and TSCE cards monitor both the supply voltage inputs on the 15454-M6 shelf. The TSC and
TSCE cards raise an alarm if one of the supply voltage inputs has a voltage out of the specified range.
The 15454-M2 shelf has dual power supply.
You can insert and remove the TSC and TSCE cards even when the system is online, without impacting
the system traffic.
The TSC and TSCE cards do not support optical service channel (OSC) and SFP ports.
You can upgrade the TSC or TSCE card to a TNC or TNCE card. During the upgrade, the TNC and
TNCE cards do not support OSC functions such as UDC, VoIP, DCC, and timing function. However, you
can still provision SFP ports on the TNC and TNCE cards during the upgrade. The TNC, TNCE, TSC,
and TSCE cards cannot be inserted in the same shelf.
The TSC and TSCE cards support all the alarms supported by the TCC2P and AIC-I cards. The card
adjusts the fan speed according to the temperature and reports a fan failure alarm.
Note The LAN interface of the TSC and TSCE cards meet the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting
a cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees
Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at temperatures from
-40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (-40 to 0 degrees Celsius).
3.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
The faceplate design of the TSC and TSCE cards allow sufficient space to insert or remove cables while
accessing the Ethernet ports.
The TSC and TSCE cards can be installed only in slots 1 or 8 of the 15454-M6 shelf and in slot 1 of the
15454-M2 shelf. The TSC and TSCE cards have an identifier on the faceplate that matches with an
identifier in the shelf. A key is also provided on the backplane interface connectors as identifier in the
shelf.
The TSC and TSCE cards support field-programmable gate array (FPGA) for the backplane interface.
The TSC cards have two FPGA: TCCA and SYNTIDE
The TSCE cards have one FPGA: VEGA
Figure 3-6 illustrates the faceplate and block diagram for the TSC card.
3-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TSC and TSCE Cards
Figure 3-6 TSC Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-7 illustrates the faceplate for the TSCE card.
Figure 3-7 TSCE Faceplate
3.7.2 TSC and TSCE Card Functions
The functions of the TSC and TSCE cards are:
• G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards, page G-20
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.30 MultiShelf Management, page G-25
• G.27 Database Storage, page G-24
• G.24 Interface Ports, page G-22
• G.25 External Alarms and Controls, page G-23
• G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19
• G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation, page G-24
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
TSC
FAIL
ACT/STBY
CRIT REM
MAJ SYNC
MIN ACO
ACO
PWR
A B
LAMP TEST
EIA/TIA-232
TCP/IP
ACT
LINK
256MB DDR2
Mini-DIMM
CPU
MPC8568E
GE Phy GE Phy
BusMux
CPLD
Ethernet
Switch
Local
Ethernet
Switch
External
Glue
Logic
CPLD
SYNTIDE
FPGA
Boot
Flash
USB
Controller
TCCA
FPGA
T1/E1
Framers
LOG
NVRAM
256MB
Compact
Flash
277856
TSCE
FAIL
ACT/STBY
CRIT REM
MAJ SYNC
MIN ACO
ACO
PWR
A B
LAMP TEST
EIA/TIA-232
TCP/IP
ACT
LINK
246795
3-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
TSC and TSCE Cards
• Network level indicators—Table G-13 on page G-13
• Power level indicators—Table G-12 on page G-13
• Port level indicators—Table G-14 on page G-14
• G.31 Protection Schemes, page G-25
• G.32 Cards Supported by TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE, page G-26
3.7.3 Related Procedures for TSC and TSCE Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TSC and TSCE cards:
• NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card, page 3-41
• NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
• DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows)
• DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris)
• DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups
• DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group
• DLP-G41 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Automatic Host
Detection
• NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection to the ONS 15454
• NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
• NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information, page 14-6
• NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8
• NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15
• NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access
• NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
• NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3
• NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13
• NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
• NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3
• NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13
• NTP-G277 Provision Alarms and Controls on the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card
• NTP-G280 Modify Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE Cards, page 20-121
• NTP-G278 Upgrade the TSC or TSCE Card to the TNC or TNCE Card
3-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Digital Image Signing
• NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4
3.8 Digital Image Signing
(Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
The DIS feature complies with the new U.S. Government Federal Information Processing Standard
(FIPS) 140-3 to provide security for all software provided on the Cisco ONS 15454 M6 and ONS 15454
M2 platforms. This standard requires software to be digitally signed and verified for authenticity and
integrity prior to load and execution.
DIS feature automatically provides increased protection. DIS focuses on software security and provides
increased protection from attacks and threats to Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 products.
DIS verifies software integrity and provides assurance that the software has not been tampered with or
modified. Digitally signed Cisco software provides counterfeit protection.
New controller cards, such as TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE, provide services that authenticate the origin of
the software running on the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms. The signage and
verification process is transparent until verification fails.
3.8.1 DIS Identification
Digitally signed software can be identified by the last three characters appended to the working version
and protected version field in CTC. The DIS conventions can be viewed under the working version
displayed in the Maintenance > Software tab in CTC. For example, 9.2.0 (09.20-X10C-29.09-SDA)
and 9.2.0 (09.20-010C-18.18-SPA).
The significance of the three characters appended to the software version is explained in Table:
3.8.2 Related Procedures for DIS
To verify DIS, see NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information, page 14-6.
3.9 AIC-I Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Table 3-2 DIS Conventions in the Software Version
Character Meaning
S (first character) Indicates that the package is signed.
P or D (second character) Production (P) or Development (D) image. Production image—Software
approved for general release. Development image—development software
provided under special conditions for limited use.
A (third character) This third character indicates the version of the key used for signature
generation. The version changes when a key is revoked and a new key is
used. The values of the version key varies from A to Z.
3-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
AIC-I Card
Note For hardware specifications, see the “AIC-I Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications
document.
The optional Alarm Interface Controller–International (AIC-I) card provides customer-defined
(environmental) alarms and controls and supports local and express orderwire. It provides
12 customer-defined input and 4 customer-defined input/output contacts. The physical connections are
via the backplane wire-wrap pin terminals. If you use the additional alarm expansion panel (AEP), the
AIC-I card can support up to 32 inputs and 16 outputs, which are connected on the AEP connectors. The
AEP is compatible with ANSI shelves only. A power monitoring function monitors the supply voltage
(–48 VDC).
3.9.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-8 shows the AIC-I faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
3-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
AIC-I Card
Figure 3-8 AIC-I Faceplate and Block Diagram
3.9.2 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators
Table G-2 lists the card-level LEDs on the card.
AIC-I
Fail
Express orderwire
Local orderwire
EEPROM
LED x2 AIC-I FPGA
SCL links
4 x
IN/OUT
Power
Monitoring
12/16 x IN
Ringer
Act
Ring
Ring
Input
Output
78828
FAIL
ACT
ACC
INPUT/OUTPUT
EOW
LOW
RING
AIC-1
(DTMF)
(DTMF)
UDC-A
UDC-B
DCC-A
DCC-B
ACC
PWR
A B
RING
DCC-B
DCC-A
UDC-B
UDC-A
3-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
AIC-I Card
3.9.3 External Alarms and Controls
The AIC-I card provides input/output alarm contact closures. You can define up to 12 external alarm
inputs and 4 external alarm inputs/outputs (user configurable). The physical connections are made using
the backplane wire-wrap pins or FMEC connections. For information about increasing the number of
input/output contacts, see the “ONS 15454 ANSI Alarm Expansion Panel” section in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
LEDs on the front panel of the AIC-I indicate the status of the alarm lines, one LED representing all of
the inputs and one LED representing all of the outputs. External alarms (input contacts) are typically
used for external sensors such as open doors, temperature sensors, flood sensors, and other
environmental conditions. External controls (output contacts) are typically used to drive visual or
audible devices such as bells and lights, but they can control other devices such as generators, heaters,
and fans.
You can program each of the twelve input alarm contacts separately. You can program each of the sixteen
input alarm contacts separately. Choices include:
• Alarm on Closure or Alarm on Open
• Alarm severity of any level (Critical, Major, Minor, Not Alarmed, Not Reported)
• Service Affecting or Non-Service Affecting alarm-service level
• 63-character alarm description for CTC display in the alarm log
You cannot assign the fan-tray abbreviation for the alarm; the abbreviation reflects the generic name of
the input contacts. The alarm condition remains raised until the external input stops driving the contact
or you provision the alarm input.
The output contacts can be provisioned to close on a trigger or to close manually. The trigger can be a
local alarm severity threshold, a remote alarm severity, or a virtual wire:
• Local NE alarm severity: A hierarchy of Not Reported, Not Alarmed, Minor, Major, or Critical
alarm severities that you set to cause output closure. For example, if the trigger is set to Minor, a
Minor alarm or above is the trigger.
• Remote NE alarm severity: Same as the local NE alarm severity but applies to remote alarms only.
• Virtual wire entities: You can provision any environmental alarm input to raise a signal on any
virtual wire on external outputs 1 through 4 when the alarm input is an event. You can provision a
signal on any virtual wire as a trigger for an external control output.
You can also program the output alarm contacts (external controls) separately. In addition to
provisionable triggers, you can manually force each external output contact to open or close. Manual
operation takes precedence over any provisioned triggers that might be present.
Note For ANSI shelves, the number of inputs and outputs can be increased using the AEP. The AEP is
connected to the shelf backplane and requires an external wire-wrap panel.
3.9.4 Orderwire
Orderwire allows a crafts person to plug a phone set into an ONS 15454 and communicate with crafts
people working at other ONS 15454s or other facility equipment. The orderwire is a pulse code
modulation (PCM) encoded voice channel that uses E1 or E2 bytes in section/line overhead.
3-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
AIC-I Card
The AIC-I allows simultaneous use of both local (section overhead signal) and express (line overhead
channel) orderwire channels on a SONET/SDH ring or particular optics facility. Express orderwire also
allows communication via regeneration sites when the regenerator is not a Cisco device.
You can provision orderwire functions with CTC similar to the current provisioning model for
DCC/GCC channels. In CTC, you provision the orderwire communications network during ring turn-up
so that all NEs on the ring can reach one another. Orderwire terminations (that is, the optics facilities
that receive and process the orderwire channels) are provisionable. Both express and local orderwire can
be configured as on or off on a particular SONET/SDH facility. The ONS 15454 supports up to four
orderwire channel terminations per shelf. This allows linear, single ring, dual ring, and small
hub-and-spoke configurations. Orderwire is not protected in ring topologies such as bidirectional line
switched ring (BLSR), multiplex section-shared protection ring (MS-SPRing), path protection, or
subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) ring.
Caution Do not configure orderwire loops. Orderwire loops cause feedback that disables the orderwire channel.
The ONS 15454 implementation of both local and express orderwire is broadcast in nature. The line acts
as a party line. Anyone who picks up the orderwire channel can communicate with all other participants
on the connected orderwire subnetwork. The local orderwire party line is separate from the express
orderwire party line. Up to four OC-N/STM-N facilities for each local and express orderwire are
provisionable as orderwire paths.
The AIC-I supports selective dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) dialing for telephony connectivity,
which causes one AIC-I card or all ONS 15454 AIC-I cards on the orderwire subnetwork to “ring.” The
ringer/buzzer resides on the AIC-I. There is also a “ring” LED that mimics the AIC-I ringer. It flashes
when a call is received on the orderwire subnetwork. A party line call is initiated by pressing *0000 on
the DTMF pad. Individual dialing is initiated by pressing * and the individual four-digit number on the
DTMF pad.
Table 3-3 shows the pins on the orderwire connector that correspond to the tip and ring orderwire
assignments.
When provisioning the orderwire subnetwork, make sure that an orderwire loop does not exist. Loops
cause oscillation and an unusable orderwire channel.
Figure 3-9 shows the standard RJ-11 connectors used for orderwire ports.
Table 3-3 Orderwire Pin Assignments
RJ-11 Pin Number Description
1 Four-wire receive ring
2 Four-wire transmit tip
3 Two-wire ring
4 Two-wire tip
5 Four-wire transmit ring
6 Four-wire receive tip
3-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
AIC-I Card
Figure 3-9 RJ-11 Connector
3.9.5 Power Monitoring
The AIC-I card provides a power monitoring circuit that monitors the supply voltage of –48 VDC for
presence, under voltage, and over voltage.
3.9.6 User Data Channel
The user data channel (UDC) features a dedicated data channel of 64 kbps (F1 byte) between two nodes
in an ONS 15454 network. Each AIC-I card provides two user data channels, UDC-A and UDC-B,
through separate RJ-11 connectors on the front of the AIC-I card. Each UDC can be routed to an
individual optical interface in the ONS 15454.
The UDC ports are standard RJ-11 receptacles. Table 3-4 lists the UDC pin assignments.
3.9.7 Data Communications Channel
The DCC features a dedicated data channel of 576 kbps (D4 to D12 bytes) between two nodes in an
ONS 15454 network. Each AIC-I card provides two data communications channels, DCC-A and
DCC-B, through separate RJ-45 connectors on the front of the AIC-I card. Each DCC can be routed to
an individual optical interface in the ONS 15454.
The DCC ports are synchronous serial interfaces. The DCC ports are standard RJ-45 receptacles.
Table 3-5 lists the DCC pin assignments.
61077
Pin 1 Pin 6
RJ-11
Table 3-4 UDC Pin Assignments
RJ-11 Pin Number Description
1 For future use
2 TXN
3 RXN
4 RXP
5 TXP
6 For future use
3-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
MS-ISC-100T Card
3.9.8 Related Procedures for AIC-I Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AIC-I card:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34
• NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
• NTP-G60 Create and Delete Overhead Circuits, page 16-81
• NTP-G72 Provision External Alarms and Controls on the Alarm Interface Controller-International
Card
• NTP-G101 Modify Alarm Interface Controller–International Settings, page 20-117
3.10 MS-ISC-100T Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For hardware specifications, see the “MS-ISC-100T Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The Multishelf Internal Switch Card (MS-ISC-100T) is an Ethernet switch used to implement the
multishelf LAN. It connects the node controller shelf to the network and to subtending shelves. The
MS-ISC-100T must always be equipped on the node controller shelf; it cannot be provisioned on a
subtending controller shelf.
The recommended configuration is to implement LAN redundancy using two MS-ISC-100T cards: one
switch is connected to the Ethernet front panel port of the TCC2/TCC2P card in Slot 7, and the other
switch is connected to the Ethernet front panel port of the TCC2/TCC2P card in Slot 11. The Ethernet
configuration of the MS-ISC-100T card is part of the software package and is automatically loaded. The
MS-ISC-100T card operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 on the node controller shelf; the recommended
slots are Slot 6 and Slot 12.
Table 3-6 lists the MS-ISC-100T port assignments.
Table 3-5 DCC Pin Assignments
RJ-45 Pin Number Description
1 TCLKP
2 TCLKN
3 TXP
4 TXN
5 RCLKP
6 RCLKN
7 RXP
8 RXN
3-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
MS-ISC-100T Card
Caution Shielded twisted-pair cabling should be used for inter-building applications.
3.10.1 Faceplate Diagram
Figure 3-10 shows the card faceplate.
Table 3-6 MS-ISC-100T Card Port Assignments
Port Description
DCN 1and DCN 2 Connection to the network
SSC1 to SSC7 Connection to subtending shelves
NC Connection to TCC2/TCC2P using a cross-over cable
PRT Connection to the PRT port of the redundant MS-ISC-100T
3-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
MS-ISC-100T Card
Figure 3-10 MS-ISC-100T Faceplate
3.10.2 MS-ISC-100T Card-Level Indicators
Table G-3 lists the card-level LEDs on the card.
3.10.3 Related Procedures for MS-ISC-100T Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the MS-ISC-100T card:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34
FAIL
ACT
MS ISC
100T
CONSOLE
145274
DC2 SSC1 SSC2 SSC3 SSC4 SSC5 SSC6 SSC7 NC PRT DCN1
3-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Front Mount Electrical Connections
• NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
• NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8
• NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131
• NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node
• NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node
3.11 Front Mount Electrical Connections
This section describes the MIC-A/P and MIC-C/T/P FMECs, which provide power, external alarm, and
timing connections for the ONS 15454 ETSI shelf.
3.11.1 MIC-A/P FMEC
Note For hardware specifications, see the “MIC-A/P FMEC Specifications (ETSI only)” section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
The MIC-A/P FMEC provides connection for the BATTERY B input, one of the two possible redundant
power supply inputs. It also provides connection for eight alarm outputs (coming from the TCC2/TCC2P
card), sixteen alarm inputs, and four configurable alarm inputs/outputs. Its position is in Slot 23 in the
center of the subrack Electrical Facility Connection Assembly (EFCA) area.
The MIC-A/P FMEC has the following features:
• Connection for one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs
• Connection for eight alarm outputs (coming from the TCC2/TCC2P card)
• Connection for four configurable alarm inputs/outputs
• Connection for sixteen alarm inputs
• Storage of manufacturing and inventory data
For proper system operation, both the MIC-A/P and MIC-C/T/P FMECs must be installed in the
ONS 15454 ETSI shelf.
3.11.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-11 shows the MIC-A/P faceplate.
Figure 3-11 MIC-A/P Faceplate
Figure 3-12 shows a block diagram of the MIC-A/P.
MIC-A/P
ALARM
IN/OUT
CLEI CODE BARCODE
POWER RATING
GND
BATTERY B
CAUTION
TIGHTEN THE FACEPLATE
SCREWS WITH 1.0 NM TORQUE
271305
3-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Front Mount Electrical Connections
Figure 3-12 MIC-A/P Block Diagram
Table 3-7 shows the alarm interface pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 connector.
Inventory Data
(EEPROM)
61332
Backplane
3W3
Connector
Alarms
DB62
Connector
Power
16 Alarm inputs
4 Alarm in/outputs
Table 3-7 Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector
Pin No. Signal Name Signal Description
1 ALMCUTOFF N Alarm cutoff, normally open ACO pair
2 ALMCUTOFF P Alarm cutoff, normally open ACO pair
3 ALMINP0 N Alarm input pair 1, reports closure on connected wires
4 ALMINP0 P Alarm input pair 1, reports closure on connected wires
5 ALMINP1 N Alarm input pair 2, reports closure on connected wires
6 ALMINP1 P Alarm input pair 2, reports closure on connected wires
7 ALMINP2 N Alarm input pair 3, reports closure on connected wires
8 ALMINP2 P Alarm input pair 3, reports closure on connected wires
9 ALMINP3 N Alarm input pair 4, reports closure on connected wires
10 ALMINP3 P Alarm input pair 4, reports closure on connected wires
11 EXALM0 N External customer alarm 1
12 EXALM0 P External customer alarm 1
13 GND Ground
14 EXALM1 N External customer alarm 2
15 EXALM1 P External customer alarm 2
16 EXALM2 N External customer alarm 3
17 EXALM2 P External customer alarm 3
18 EXALM3 N External customer alarm 4
19 EXALM3 P External customer alarm 4
20 EXALM4 N External customer alarm 5
21 EXALM4 P External customer alarm 5
22 EXALM5 N External customer alarm 6
23 EXALM5 P External customer alarm 6
24 EXALM6 N External customer alarm 7
25 EXALM6 P External customer alarm 7
3-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Front Mount Electrical Connections
26 GND Ground
27 EXALM7 N External customer alarm 8
28 EXALM7 P External customer alarm 8
29 EXALM8 N External customer alarm 9
30 EXALM8 P External customer alarm 9
31 EXALM9 N External customer alarm 10
32 EXALM9 P External customer alarm 10
33 EXALM10 N External customer alarm 11
34 EXALM10 P External customer alarm 11
35 EXALM11 N External customer alarm 12
36 EXALM11 P External customer alarm 12
37 ALMOUP0 N Normally open output pair 1
38 ALMOUP0 P Normally open output pair 1
39 GND Ground
40 ALMOUP1 N Normally open output pair 2
41 ALMOUP1 P Normally open output pair 2
42 ALMOUP2 N Normally open output pair 3
43 ALMOUP2 P Normally open output pair 3
44 ALMOUP3 N Normally open output pair 4
45 ALMOUP3 P Normally open output pair 4
46 AUDALM0 N Normally open Minor audible alarm
47 AUDALM0 P Normally open Minor audible alarm
48 AUDALM1 N Normally open Major audible alarm
49 AUDALM1 P Normally open Major audible alarm
50 AUDALM2 N Normally open Critical audible alarm
51 AUDALM2 P Normally open Critical audible alarm
52 GND Ground
53 AUDALM3 N Normally open Remote audible alarm
54 AUDALM3 P Normally open Remote audible alarm
55 VISALM0 N Normally open Minor visual alarm
56 VISALM0 P Normally open Minor visual alarm
57 VISALM1 N Normally open Major visual alarm
58 VISALM1 P Normally open Major visual alarm
59 VISALM2 N Normally open Critical visual alarm
60 VISALM2 P Normally open Critical visual alarm
Table 3-7 Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector (continued)
Pin No. Signal Name Signal Description
3-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Front Mount Electrical Connections
3.11.3 MIC-C/T/P FMEC Note For hardware specifications, see the “MIC-C/T/P FMEC Specifications (ETSI only)” section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
The MIC-C/T/P FMEC provides connection for the BATTERY A input, one of the two possible
redundant power supply inputs. It also provides connection for system management serial port, system
management LAN port, modem port (for future use), and system timing inputs and outputs. Install the
MIC-C/T/P in Slot 24.
The MIC-C/T/P FMEC has the following features:
• Connection for one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs
• Connection for two serial ports for local craft/modem (for future use)
• Connection for one LAN port
• Connection for two system timing inputs
• Connection for two system timing outputs
• Storage of manufacturing and inventory data
For proper system operation, both the MIC-A/P and MIC-C/T/P FMECs must be installed in the shelf.
3.11.4 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 3-13 shows the MIC-C/T/P FMEC faceplate.
Figure 3-13 MIC-C/T/P Faceplate
Figure 3-14 shows a block diagram of the MIC-C/T/P.
61 VISALM3 N Normally open Remote visual alarm
62 VISALM3 P Normally open Remote visual alarm
Table 3-7 Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector (continued)
Pin No. Signal Name Signal Description
MIC-C/T/P
CLEI CODE BARCODE
POWER RATING
GND
BATTERY A
TIMING A
IN TIMING B OUT
CAUTION
TIGHTEN THE FACEPLATE
SCREWS WITH 1.0 NM TORQUE
271306
LAN
AUX
TERM
ACT
LINK
3-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
Figure 3-14 MIC-C/T/P Block Diagram
The MIC-C/T/P FMEC has one pair of LEDs located on the RJ45 LAN connector. The green LED is on
when a link is present, and the amber LED is on when data is being transferred.
3.12 Procedures for Control Cards
The procedures described below explain how to install the control cards needed for the
Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms.
3.12.1 Before You Begin
Before performing any of the following procedures, investigate all alarms and clear any trouble
conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide as necessary.
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34—Complete this procedure to install the
control cards needed for the ONS 15454 platform.
• NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card, page 3-41—Complete this
procedure to install the control cards needed for the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 platforms.
Inventory Data
(EEPROM)
61334
Backplane
3W3
connector
Power
RJ-45
connectors
System management serial ports
RJ-45
connectors
System management LAN
4 coaxial
connectors Timing 2 x in / 2 x out
3-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. For detailed
instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding
Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms.
Note If protective clips are installed on the backplane connectors of the cards, remove the clips before
installing the cards.
Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously.
Step 1 (ONS 15454 only) Complete the “DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card” task on page 3-35.
Note If you install the wrong card in a slot, see the “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and
Replace DWDM Cards”.
Step 2 (ONS 15454 only) Complete the “DLP-G34 Install the AIC-I Card” task on page 3-38, if necessary.
Step 3 (ONS 15454 only) Complete the “DLP-G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card” task on page 3-39, if
necessary.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure describes how to install the control cards needed for the
ONS 15454 platform.
Tools/Equipment Redundant TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards on ONS 15454 shelf (required)
AIC-I card (optional)
MS-ISC-100T (optional; for multishelf node configurations)
Prerequisite Procedures Following procedures in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide:
• “NTP-G7 Install the Power and Ground”
• “NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment”
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
3-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card Caution Do not remove a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card during the software transfer process, which is indicated by
alternate flashing FAIL and ACT/STBY LEDs. Removing a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 during the software
transfer process will corrupt the system memory.
Note Allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card.
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors of the first TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card that you will install.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails until the card plugs into the
receptacle at the back of the slot (Slot 7 or 11).
Note In Step 4, you will be instructed to watch the LED activity (sequence) on the front of the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. This activity begins immediately after you close the latches in Step 3.
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the back
panel of the shelf. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any farther.
If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Step 4 As needed, go to Step a to verify the LED activity on the TCC2 card. For the TCC2P go to Step b. For
the TCC3 card go to Step c.
a. For the TCC2 card:
• All LEDs turn on briefly. The red FAIL LED and the yellow ACT/STBY LED turn on for about
15 seconds. (For TCC3 card it takes around 20 to 25 seconds)
• The red FAIL LED and the green ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 40 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds. All LEDs turn on for about 3 seconds before
turning off for about 3 seconds.
• Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds. The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes
before going to steady green.
Purpose This task installs redundant TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards. The first card you
install in the ONS 15454 must be a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card, and it must
initialize before you install any cross-connect or traffic cards. Cross-connect
cards are only required in hybrid nodes.
Tools/Equipment Two TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
3-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
• While the PWR LEDs are red for two to three minutes, the ACT/STBY turn on.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the ACT/STBY remains
on. (The ACT/STBY LED will be green if this is the first TCC2 card installed, and amber if this
is the second TCC2 card installed.)
Note It might take up to four minutes for the A and B power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Note If you are logged into CTC, the SFTWDOWN alarm might appear as many as two times while
the TCC2 card initializes. The alarm should clear after the card completely boots.
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TCC2 card automatic upload.
b. For the TCC2P card:
• All LEDs turn on briefly. The red FAIL LED, the yellow ACT/STBY LED, the green SYNC
LED, and the green ACO LED turn on for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED and the green ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 30 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 3 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 10 seconds and then becomes solid.
• All LEDs (including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs) blink once and turn
off for about 5 seconds.
• Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds. The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes
before going to steady green. During this time, the ACT/STBY, MJ, and MN LEDs might turn
on, followed by the SNYC LED briefly.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the yellow ACT/STBY
remains on. (The ACT/STBY LED will be green if this is the first TCC2P card installed, and
yellow if this is the second TCC2P card installed.)
Note It might take up to three minutes for the A and B power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Note If you are logged into CTC, the SFTWDOWN alarm might appear as many as two times while
the TCC2P card initializes. The alarm should clear after the card completely boots.
3-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TCC2P card automatic
upload.
c. For the TCC3 card:
• All LEDs turn on briefly. The red FAIL LED, the yellow ACT/STBY LED, the green SYNC
LED, and the green ACO LED turn on for about 25 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED and the green ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 3 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 60 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 15 seconds and then becomes solid (the LED is turned on
for about 20 seconds).
• All LEDs (including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs) blink once and turn
off for about 5 seconds.
• Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds. The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes
before going to steady green. During this time, the ACT/STBY, MJ, and MN LEDs might turn
on, followed by the SNYC LED briefly.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the yellow ACT/STBY
remains on. (The ACT/STBY LED will be green if this is the first TCC3 card installed, and
yellow if this is the second TCC3 card installed.)
Note It might take up to three minutes for the A and B power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Note If you are logged into CTC, the SFTWDOWN alarm might appear as many as two times while
the TCC3 card initializes. The alarm should clear after the card completely boots.
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TCC3 card automatic upload.
Step 5 Verify that the ACT/STBY LED is green if this is the first powered-up TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card
installed, or yellow for standby if this is the second powered-up TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3. The IP address,
temperature of the node, and time of day appear on the LCD. The default time and date is 12:00 AM,
January 1, 1970.
Step 6 The LCD cycles through the IP address (the default is 192.1.0.2), node name, and software version.
Verify that the correct software version is shown on the LCD. The software text string indicates the node
type (SDH or SONET) and software release. (For example: SDH 09.20-05L-20.10 indicates it is an SDH
software load, Release 9.2. The numbers following the release number do not have any significance.)
Step 7 If the LCD shows the correct software version, continue with Step 8. If the LCD does not show the
correct software version, refer to your next level of technical support, upgrade the software, or remove
the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card and install a replacement card.
3-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
Refer to the release-specific software upgrade document to replace the software. To replace the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the redundant TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. If both TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards
are already installed, proceed to Step 9.
Tip If you install a standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card that has a different software version than the
active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card, the newly installed standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card
automatically copies the software version from the active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. You do not
need to do anything in this situation. However, the loading TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card does not
boot up in the normal manner. When the standby card is first inserted, the LEDs follow most of
the normal boot-up sequence. However, after the red FAIL LED turns on for about 5 seconds,
the FAIL LED and the ACT/STBY LED begin to flash alternately for up to 30 minutes while the
new software loads onto the active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. After loading the new software,
the upgraded TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card’s LEDs repeat the appropriate bootup sequence, and the
amber ACT/STBY LED turns on.
Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G34 Install the AIC-I Card
Note When installing cards, allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card.
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors on the card.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails in Slot 9 until the card plugs into
the receptacle at the back of the slot.
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Purpose This task installs the AIC-I card. The AIC-I card provides connections for
external alarms and controls (environmental alarms).
Tools/Equipment AIC-I card
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card, page 3-35
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
3-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the
backplane. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any further.
Step 4 Verify the following:
• The red FAIL LED blinks for up to 10 seconds.
Note If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power.
• The PWR A and PWR B LEDs become red, the two INPUT/OUTPUT LEDs become amber, and the
ACT LED turns green for approximately 5 seconds.
• The PWR A and PWR B LEDs turn green, the INPUT/OUTPUT LEDs turn off, and the green ACT
LED remains on.
Note It might take up to 3 minutes for the PWR A and PWR B LEDs to update.
Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, no LEDs turn on.
Note If the red FAIL LED is on continuously or the LEDs act erratically, the card is not installed
properly. Remove the card and repeat Steps 1 to 4.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card Note When installing cards, allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card.
Purpose This task installs redundant MS-ISC-100T cards. The MS-ISC-100T card
is required for a multishelf node configuration. It provides LAN redundancy
on the node controller shelf. An alternative to using the MS-ISC-100T
card is the Cisco Catalyst 2950, although Cisco recommends using the
MS-ISC-100T. For more information on the Catalyst 2950 installation,
refer to the Catalyst 2950 product documentation.
Tools/Equipment MS-ISC-100T card (2)
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card, page 3-35
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
3-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
Note The MS-ISC-100T is not supported in a subtended shelf.
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors on the card.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails into the appropriate slot in the node
controller shelf until the card plugs into the receptacle at the back of the slot. The card can be installed
in any slot from Slot 1 to 6 or 12 to 17. Cisco recommends that you install the MS-ISC-100T cards in
Slot 6 and Slot 12.
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the
backplane. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any further.
Step 4 Verify the LED activity:
• The red FAIL LED blinks for 35 to 45 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for 15 to 20 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for approximately 3 minutes.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for approximately 6 minutes.
• The green ACT or ACT/STBY LED turns on. The SF LED can persist until all card ports connect
to their far end counterparts and a signal is present.
Note If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power.
Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the redundant MS-ISC-100T card.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
3-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454
M6 shelf assemblies. For detailed instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the
Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms.
Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G604 Install the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card” task on page 3-42.
Note If you install the wrong card in a slot, see the “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and
Replace DWDM Cards”.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC and TNCE Cards” task on page 3-45.
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC and TNCE Cards” task on page 3-45.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure describes how to install and configure the TNC, TNCE,
TSC, or TSCE card. TNC, TNCE, TSC, and TSCE cards are the control
cards needed for the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 platforms.
Tools/Equipment Redundant TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards on ONS 15454 M6 shelf (required)
Stand-alone TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card on ONS 15454 M2 shelf (required)
Prerequisite Procedures Following procedures in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide:
• “NTP-G271 Install the Power and Ground to the ONS 15454 M2
Shelf”
• “NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment”
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
3-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
DLP-G604 Install the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card
Caution Do not remove the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards during the software installation process, which is
indicated by alternate flashing FAIL and ACT/STBY LEDs. Removing the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
cards during the software installation process will corrupt the system memory.
Note Allow each TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card to boot completely before installing the redundant
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
Note On the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, install the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards in slots 1 and 8 for redundancy.
On the ONS 15454 M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card in slot 1. For more
information, see the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide.
Note You cannot insert the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards in other slots due to mechanical constraints. To
identify the card slot, match the symbol placed on the lower side of the card front panel with the symbol
in the shelf.
Caution To achieve redundancy, two TNC and TNCE cards or two TSC and TSCE cards must be installed in the
ONS 15454 M6 shelf. Do not install one TNC or TNCE card and a redundant TSC or TSCE card in the
same shelf.
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors of the first TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card that you will install.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card horizontally along the guide rails until the card plugs
into the receptacle at the back of the slot (slot 1 or 8 in the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and slot 1 in the ONS
15454 M2 shelf).
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly, and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Purpose (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) This task installs redundant
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards on the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and a
stand-alone TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card on the ONS 15454 M2 shelf.
Install and initialize the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card before installing any
other line cards into the shelf assemblies. On the ONS 15454 M6 shelf,
install the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards in slots 1 and 8 for redundancy.
On the ONS 15454 M2 shelf, install the stand-alone
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card in slot 1.
Tools/Equipment Two TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards for the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and one
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card for the ONS 15454 M2 shelf
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
3-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
If you insert a card into a slot assigned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Step 4 As needed, verify the LED activity on the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
• The red FAIL LED, PWR LED turn on briefly.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 10 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED and the amber ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 30 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 10 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds.
• All the LEDs including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs blink once and
turn off for about 10 seconds.
• ACT/STBY LED blinks for about 1 second.
• All the LEDs including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs turn off for about
10 seconds.
• The ACT/STBY, ACO, and PWR LEDs turn on.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the amber ACT/STBY
remains on. The ACT/STBY LED turns green if this is the first TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card
installed, and amber if this is the second TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card installed.
Note It might take up to four minutes for the power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on. After completing the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card installation, log in
to CTC and click the Alarms tab to display the alarms raised on the card. For procedure to clear
the alarm, see the Cisco ONS DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Note During the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card initialization, the SFTWDOWN alarm appears twice.
The alarm clears after the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card boots completely.
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card
automatic upload.
Figure 3-15 illustrates the installation of TNC and TNCE cards on ONS 15454 M6 shelf.
3-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
Figure 3-15 Installing TNC and TNCE Cards on ONS 15454 M6 Shelf
Step 5 Verify that the ACT/STBY LED is green if this is the first powered-up TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card
installed or amber if this is the second powered-up TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE. The IP address, temperature
of the node, and time of day appear on the LCD. The default time and date is 12:00 AM, January 1, 1970.
Step 6 The LCD cycles through the IP address (the default is 192.1.0.2), node name, and software version.
Verify that the correct software version is shown on the LCD. The software text string indicates the node
type (SDH or SONET) and software release. (For example: SDH 09.20-05L-20.10 indicates it is an SDH
software load, Release 9.2. The numbers following the release number do not have any significance.)
Step 7 If the LCD shows the correct software version, continue with Step 8. If the LCD does not show the
correct software version, refer to your next level of technical support, upgrade the software, or remove
the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card and install a replacement card. Refer to the release-specific software
upgrade document to replace the software.
Step 8 (ONS 15454 M6 shelf only) Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the redundant TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
Tip If you install a standby TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card that has a different software version than
the active TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card, the standby TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card copies the
software version from the active TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. When the standby card is first
inserted, the LEDs follow the normal boot-up sequence. However, after the red FAIL LED turns
on for about 5 seconds, the FAIL LED and the ACT/STBY LED begin to flash alternately for up
to 30 minutes. After loading the new software, the upgraded TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards
LEDs repeat the appropriate bootup sequence, and the amber ACT/STBY LED turns on.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
279119
1 2
TNC card
Guide rail
3-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC and TNCE Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TNC and TNCE cards
where you want to provision PPM and port settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose 1 or 2 from the PPM drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Displays the PPM associated with the chosen PPM in the above step.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Port Modules area becomes white when the PPM is inserted and the Actual Equipment Type column lists
the name of PPM.
Step 6 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Port dialog box appears.
Step 7 In the Create Ports dialog box, complete the following:
• Port—Choose the port you want to configure from the Port drop-down list.
• Port Type—Choose the port type, such as OC-3, FE, or ONE-GE from the Port Type drop-down list.
Note OC-3 can be configured only on PPM port 1. FE and ONE-GE can be configured on both the ports.
Step 8 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Ports area. The port type you provisioned is
listed in the Rate column.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 3 through 8 to provision another PPM and port on the TNC and TNCE cards.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC and TNCE Cards
Purpose (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) This task provisions a PPM and
port on TNC and TNCE cards. PPMs are created to support the OSC
function.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None
Purpose (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) This task configures UDC and
VoIP traffic for the TNC and TNCE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
3-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards
Procedures for Control Cards
Note Each TNC and TNCE cards support UDC/VoIP configuration. You can configure UDC or VoIP on the
two SFP ports present on the TNC and TNCE cards. The TNC and TNCE cards support the UDC/VoIP
configuration only when OSC is provisioned on the SFP ports.
Note If two nodes are connected through the fiber and if the TNC and TNCE cards in one node has UDC
configuration, the TNC and TNCE cards in the other node must also have UDC configuration. The same
rule applies to VoIP configuration.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TNC and TNCE cards
where you want to configure UDC and VoIP.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > UDC / VOIP tabs.
Step 3 From the Service Type drop-drop list, choose UDC or VOIP.
Note You can configure UDC or VoIP on only one SFP port at a time per TNC or TNCE card. If you want to
configure UDC or VoIP on the second SFP port, choose NONE from the Service Type drop-down list for
the first port and then choose UDC or VoIP for the second port.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC and TNCE Cards,
page 3-45
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None
CH A P T E R
4-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
4
Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
This chapter describes the optical service channel (OSC) cards for Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength
division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document.
Note Unless noted otherwise, the cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco
ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Chapter topics include:
• 4.1 Card Overview, page 4-1
• 4.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels, page 4-3
• 4.3 OSCM Card, page 4-3
• 4.3.3 Related Procedures for the OSCM Card, page 4-5
• 4.4 OSC-CSM Card, page 4-6
• 4.4.3 Related Procedures for the OSC-CSM Card, page 4-11
4.1 Card Overview
This section provides card summary and compatibility information.
Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see
the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
An optical service channel (OSC) is a bidirectional channel connecting two adjacent nodes in a DWDM
ring. For every DWDM node (except terminal nodes), two different OSC terminations are present, one
for the west side and another for the east side. The channel transports OSC overhead that is used to
manage ONS 15454 DWDM networks. An OSC signal uses the 1510-nm wavelength and does not affect
4-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
Card Overview
client traffic. The primary purpose of this channel is to carry clock synchronization and orderwire
channel communications for the DWDM network. It also provides transparent links between each node
in the network. The OSC is an OC-3/STM-1 formatted signal.
There are two versions of the OSC modules: the OSCM, and the OSC-CSM, which contains the OSC
wavelength combiner and separator component in addition to the OSC module.
The Mesh/Multiring Upgrade (MMU) card is used to optically bypass a given wavelength from one
section of the network or ring to another one without requiring 3R regeneration.
Note On 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves, the TNC and TNCE cards include the functions of the OSCM
card. OSC can be created on the OC3 port (SFP-0) of the TNC and TNCE cards.
The TNC and TNCE cards support two optical service channels (OSC): primary OSC and secondary
OSC.
The primary optical service channel (SFP-0) supports the following interfaces:
• OC-3/STM-1
• Fast Ethernet (FE)
• Gigabit Ethernet (GE).
The secondary optical service channel (SFP-1) supports the following interfaces:
• Fast Ethernet (FE)
• Gigabit Ethernet (GE).
4.1.1 Card Summary
Table 4-1 lists and summarizes the functions of each card.
4.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 4-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for the OSC and OSCM cards.
Table 4-1 OSCM, and OSC-CSM Card Summary
Card Port Description For Additional Information
OSCM The OSCM has one set of optical ports and one
Ethernet port located on the faceplate. It
operates in Slots 8 and 10.
See the “4.3 OSCM Card”
section on page 4-3.
OSC-CSM The OSC-CSM has three sets of optical ports
and one Ethernet port located on the faceplate.
It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “4.4 OSC-CSM Card”
section on page 4-6.
Table 4-2 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Service Channel Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
OSCM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
OSC-CSM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
4-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
Class 1 Laser Safety Labels
4.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1.
4.3 OSCM Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For OSCM card specifications, see the OSCM Card Specifications document.
Note On 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves, the TNC and TNCE cards include the functions of the OSCM
card.
The OSCM card is used in amplified nodes that include the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L
booster amplifier. The OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L cards include the required OSC
wavelength combiner and separator component. The OSCM cannot be used in nodes where you use
OC-N/STM-N cards, electrical cards, or cross-connect cards. The OSCM uses Slots 8 and 10, which are
also cross-connect card slots.
The OSCM supports the following features:
• OC-3/STM-1 formatted OSC
• Supervisory data channel (SDC) forwarded to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing
• Distribution of the synchronous clock to all nodes in the ring
• 100BaseT far-end (FE) User Channel (UC)
• Monitoring functions such as orderwire support and optical safety
The OC-3/STM-1 section data communications channel (SDCC or RS-DCC) overhead bytes are used
for network communications. An optical transceiver terminates the OC-3/STM-1, then it is regenerated
and converted into an electrical signal. The SDCC or RS-DCC bytes are forwarded to the active and
standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing through the system communication link (SCL) bus on
the backplane. Orderwire bytes (E1, E2, F1) are also forwarded via the SCL bus to the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 for forwarding to the AIC-I card.
The payload portion of the OC-3/STM-1 is used to carry the fast Ethernet UC. The frame is sent to a
packet-over-SONET/SDH (POS) processing block that extracts the Ethernet packets and makes them
available at the RJ-45 connector.
The OSCM distributes the reference clock information by removing it from the incoming OC-3/STM-1
signal and then sending it to the DWDM cards. The DWDM cards then forward the clock information to
the active and standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards.
4-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSCM Card
4.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 4-1 shows the OSCM card faceplate and block diagram.
Figure 4-1 OSCM Card Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “4.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels” section on
page 4-3.
Figure 4-2 shows the block diagram of the variable optical attenuator (VOA) within the OSCM.
The OSCM has one OC-3/STM-1 optical port located on the faceplate. One long-reach OSC transmits
and receives the OSC to and from another DWDM node. Both DCN data and FE payload are carried on
this link.
OSCM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
TX
96464
ASIC
OC3-ULR
Optical
transceiver
OSC
Line OC-3
FPGA
OC-12
POS
OC-3
MII
145944
Processor
VOA
Physical
Interface
DC/DC
19.44 MHz
Line Ref clock
Power supply
Input filters
MT CLKt BAT A&B
0 Slot
1-6
MT CLKt
0 Slot
12-17
6
M P
SCL Bus
to TCCs
FE FE User
Channel
6
TOH &
Cell Bus
4-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSCM Card
Figure 4-2 OSCM VOA Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
4.3.2 OSCM Card Functions
The functions of the OSCM card are:
• 4.3.2.1 OSCM Card Power Monitoring
• Card level indicators—Table G-5 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
4.3.2.1 OSCM Card Power Monitoring
Physical photodiode P1 monitors the power for the OSCM card. The returned power level value is
calibrated to the OSC TX port (Table 4-3).
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
4.3.3 Related Procedures for the OSCM Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OSCM card:
• NTP-G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power, page 14-129
• NTP-G45 Perform the C-Band and L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 21-74
• NTP-G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 21-86
P1
P1
OSC TX
Physical photodiode
OSC Variable optical attenuator
Control
Module
OSC RX
Control
Interface
124968
Table 4-3 OSCM VOA Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1 Output OSC OSC TX
4-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSC-CSM Card
• NTP-G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 21-90
• NTP-G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards,
page 21-94
• DLP-G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards, page 21-104
• DLP-G139 View PM Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards
• NTP-G90 Modify OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-2
4.4 OSC-CSM Card
Note For OSC-CSM card specifications, see the OSC-CSM Card Specifications document.
The OSC-CSM card is used in unamplified nodes. This means that the booster amplifier with the OSC
wavelength combiner and separator is not required for OSC-CSM operation. The OSC-CSM can be
installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. To operate in hybrid mode, the OSC-CSM cards must be
accompanied by cross-connect cards. The cross-connect cards enable functionality on the OC-N/STM-N
cards and electrical cards.
The OSC-CSM supports the following features:
• Optical combiner and separator module for multiplexing and demultiplexing the optical service
channel to or from the wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) signal
• OC-3/STM-1 formatted OSC
• SDC forwarded to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing
• Distribution of the synchronous clock to all nodes in the ring
• 100BaseT FE UC
• Monitoring functions such as orderwire support
• Optical safety: Signal loss detection and alarming, fast transmitted power shut down by means of an
optical 1x1 switch
• Optical safety remote interlock (OSRI), a feature capable of shutting down the optical output power
• Automatic laser shutdown (ALS), a safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. For details on
ALS provisioning for the card, see the DLP-G203 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM ALS
Maintenance Settings, page 20-12. For information on using the card to implement ALS in a
network, see the “13.11 Network Optical Safety” section on page 13-30.
The WDM signal coming from the line is passed through the OSC combiner and separator, where the
OSC signal is extracted from the WDM signal. The WDM signal is sent along with the remaining
channels to the COM port (label on the front panel) for routing to the OADM or amplifier units, while
the OSC signal is sent to an optical transceiver.
The OSC is an OC-3/STM-1 formatted signal. The OC-3/STM-1 SDCC or RS-DCC overhead bytes are
used for network communications. An optical transceiver terminates the OC-3/STM-1, and then it is
regenerated and converted into an electrical signal. The SDCC or RS-DCC bytes are forwarded to the
active and standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing via the SCL bus on the backplane.
Orderwire bytes (E1, E2, F1) are also forwarded via the SCL bus to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 for
forwarding to the AIC-I card.
4-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSC-CSM Card
The payload portion of the OC-3/STM-1 is used to carry the fast Ethernet UC. The frame is sent to a
POS processing block that extracts the Ethernet packets and makes them available at the RJ-45 front
panel connector.
The OSC-CSM distributes the reference clock information by removing it from the incoming
OC-3/STM-1 signal and then sending it to the active and standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards. The clock
distribution is different from the OSCM card because the OSC-CSM does not use Slot 8 or 10
(cross-connect card slots).
Note S1 and S2 (Figure 4-5 on page 4-10) are optical splitters with a splitter ratio of 2:98. The result is that
the power at the MON TX port is about 17 dB lower than the relevant power at the COM RX port, and
the power at the MON RX port is about 20 dB lower than the power at the COM TX port. The difference
is due to the presence of a tap coupler for the P1 photodiode.
4-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSC-CSM Card
4.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 4-3 shows the OSC-CSM faceplate.
Figure 4-3 OSC-CSM Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “4.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels” section on
page 4-3.
The OSC-CSM has a OC3 port and three other sets of ports located on the faceplate.
Figure 4-4 shows a block diagram of the OSC-CSM card.
96465
OSC
CSM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
LINE
TX
ASIC
OC3-ULR
Optical
transceiver
OSC
combiner
separator
OSC
Line
COM
OC-3
FPGA
OC-12
POS
OC-3
MII
TOH &
Cell Bus
145943
Processor
Physical
Interface
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
MPMP BAT A&B
SCL Bus
to TCCs
RxClkRef
FE User
Channel
4-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSC-CSM Card
Figure 4-4 OSC-CSM Block Diagram
ASIC
OC3-ULR
Optical
transceiver
OSC
combiner
separator
OSC
Line
COM
OC-3
FPGA
OC-12
POS
OC-3
MII
TOH &
Cell Bus
96477
Processor
Physical
Interface
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
MPMP BAT A&B
SCL Bus
to TCCs
RxClkRef
FE User
Data
Channel
4-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSC-CSM Card
Figure 4-5 shows the OSC-CSM optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 4-5 OSC-CSM Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
4.4.2 OSC-CSM Card Functions
The functions of the OSC-CSM card are:
• 4.4.2.1 OSC-CSM Card Power Monitoring
• G.34 Alarms and Thresholds, page G-26
• Card level indicators—Table G-5 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
4.4.2.1 OSC-CSM Card Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, and P5 monitor the power for the OSC-CSM card. Their function is as
follows:
P P
P
P
P
V
V
124897
MON RX
MON TX
COM TX
OSC RX
LINE TX COM RX
LINE RX
DROP
section
ADD
section
OSC TX
Control
Interface
Filter
Filter
S1
P1
P2
P5
P4
PV1
PV2
P3
HW Switch
Control
Opt. Switch S2
Virtual photodiode
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
P
V
Optical splitter
Control
4-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSC-CSM Card
• P1: The returned power value is calibrated to the LINE RX port, including the insertion loss of the
previous filter (the reading of this power dynamic range has been brought backward towards the
LINE RX output).
• P2: The returned value is calibrated to the LINE RX port.
• P3: The returned value is calibrated to the COM RX port.
• P5: The returned value is calibrated to the OSC TX port, including the insertion loss of the
subsequent filter.
The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 4-4.
The OSC power on the LINE TX is the same as the power reported from P5.
The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions
document.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
4.4.3 Related Procedures for the OSC-CSM Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OSC-CSM card:
• NTP-G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test,
page 21-78
• NTP-G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test,
page 21-82
• NTP-G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 21-86
• NTP-G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 21-90
• NTP-G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards, page 21-106
• NTP-G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards, page 21-112
• DLP-G139 View PM Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards
• NTP-G90 Modify OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-2
Table 4-4 OSC-CSM Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameters
P1 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported
OSC Power
P2 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported
P3 Input Com COM RX Channel Power Supported
P5 Output OSC OSC TX OSC Power Supported
4-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards
OSC-CSM Card
CH A P T E R
5-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
5
Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
This chapter describes the optical amplifier cards used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) networks and related procedures.
For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document.
Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6,
Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Note In this chapter, “RAMAN-CTP” refers to the 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP card. “RAMAN-COP” refers to
the 15454-M-RAMAN-COP card.
Chapter topics include the nine types of ONS 15454 DWDM amplifiers:
• 5.1 Card Overview, page 5-2
• 5.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels, page 5-7
• 5.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card, page 5-7
• 5.3.3 Related Procedures for OPT-PRE Card, page 5-11
• 5.4 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card, page 5-11
• 5.4.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Cards, page 5-15
• 5.5 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card, page 5-15
• 5.5.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST-L Card, page 5-19
• 5.6 OPT-AMP-L Card, page 5-20
• 5.6.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-L Card, page 5-24
• 5.7 OPT-AMP-17-C Card, page 5-25
• 5.7.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-17-C Card, page 5-29
• 5.8 OPT-AMP-C Card, page 5-30
• 5.8.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-C Card, page 5-34
5-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
Card Overview
• 5.9 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards, page 5-34
• 5.9.3 Related Procedures for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards, page 5-39
• 5.10 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards, page 5-39
• 5.10.4 Related Procedures for RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards, page 5-44
• 5.11 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards, page 5-45
• 5.11.4 Related Procedures for OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards, page 5-49
5.1 Card Overview
This section provides summary and compatibility information for the optical amplifier cards.
Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
Cards should be installed in slots that have the same symbols. See the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide for a list of slots and symbols.
Optical amplifier card architecture includes an optical plug-in module with a controller that manages
optical power, laser current, and temperature control loops. An amplifier also manages communication
with the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card and operation, administration, maintenance,
and provisioning (OAM&P) functions such as provisioning, controls, and alarms.
5.1.1 Applications
The following amplifiers can be configured as booster or preamplifiers:
• OPT-AMP-C
• OPT-AMP-17C
• OPT-AMP-L
• OPT-BST-E
• OPT-BST
• OPT-EDFA-17
• OPT-EDFA-24
The amplifier functions as a booster amplifier by default. The amplifier role is automatically configured
when the CTP NE update configuration file is loaded in CTC. The amplifier role can also be manually
modified.
Note The OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E amplifiers are supported as preamplifiers in sites that are equipped with
the OPT-RAMP-C card. In any other configuration, the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards must be
configured as a booster amplifier.
For more information about the supported configurations and network topologies, see Chapter 12, “Node
Reference” and Chapter 13, “Network Reference.”
5-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
Card Overview
5.1.2 Card Summary
Table 5-1 lists and summarizes the functions of each optical amplifier card.
Table 5-1 Optical Amplifier Cards for the ONS 15454
Card Port Description For Additional Information
OPT-PRE The OPT-PRE amplifier has five optical ports (three sets)
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12
to 17.
See the “5.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier
Card” section on page 5-7.
OPT-BST The OPT-BST amplifier has four sets of optical ports located
on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “5.4 OPT-BST and
OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card” section on
page 5-11.
OPT-BST-E The OPT-BST-E amplifier has four sets of optical ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12
to 17.
See the “5.4 OPT-BST and
OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card” section on
page 5-11.
OPT-BST-L The OPT-BST-L L-band amplifier has four sets of optical
ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and
12 to 17.
See the “5.5 OPT-BST-L Amplifier
Card” section on page 5-15.
OPT-AMP-L The OPT-AMP-L L-band preamplifier has five sets of optical
ports located on the faceplate. It is a two-slot card that
operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “5.6 OPT-AMP-L Card”
section on page 5-20.
OPT-AMP-17-C The OPT-AMP-17-C C-band low-gain preamplifier/booster
amplifier has four sets of optical ports located on the
faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “5.7 OPT-AMP-17-C Card”
section on page 5-25.
OPT-AMP-C The OPT-AMP-C C-band high-gain, high-power
preamplifier/booster amplifier has five sets of optical ports
located on the faceplate. It operates as a preamplifier when
equipped and provisioned in Slots 2 to 6 and 11 to 16 or as a
booster amplifier when equipped and provisioned in Slot 1
and 17.
See the “5.8 OPT-AMP-C Card”
section on page 5-30.
OPT-RAMP-C The OPT-RAMP-C C-band amplifier has five sets of optical
ports located on the faceplate and operates in Slots 1 to 5 and
12 to 16.
See the “5.9 OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE Cards” section on
page 5-34.
OPT-RAMP-CE The OPT-RAMP-CE C-band amplifier has five sets of optical
ports located on the faceplate and operates in Slots 1 to 5 and
12 to 16.
See the “5.9 OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE Cards” section on
page 5-34.
RAMAN-CTP The RAMAN-CTP amplifier is a single-slot card and has six
optical ports located on the faceplate. The RAMAN-CTP and
RAMAN-COP units must be installed in adjacent slots (Slots
2 and 3, 4 and 5, or 6 and 7) in the ONS 15454 M6 chassis
and Slots 2 and 3 in the ONS 15454 M2 chassis.
See the “5.10 RAMAN-CTP and
RAMAN-COP Cards” section on
page 5-39.
RAMAN-COP The RAMAN-COP amplifier has one optical port located on
the faceplate. It is a single-slot card and works in conjunction
with the RAMAN-CTP amplifier.
See the “5.10 RAMAN-CTP and
RAMAN-COP Cards” section on
page 5-39.
5-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
Card Overview
OPT-EDFA-17 The OPT-EDFA-17 amplifier has four sets of optical ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12
to 17.
See the “5.11 OPT-EDFA-17 and
OPT-EDFA-24 Cards” section on
page 5-45
OPT-EDFA-24 The OPT-EDFA-24 amplifier has four sets of optical ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12
to 17.
See the “5.11 OPT-EDFA-17 and
OPT-EDFA-24 Cards” section on
page 5-45
Table 5-1 Optical Amplifier Cards for the ONS 15454 (continued)
Card Port Description For Additional Information
5-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
Card Overview
5.1.3 Card Compatibility
Table 5-2 lists the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software compatibility for each optical amplifier
card.
Table 5-2 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Amplifier Cards up to Release 5.0
Card Type R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0
OPT-PRE 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM
OPT-BST 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM
OPT-BST-E No No 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM
OPT-BST-L No No No No
OPT-AMP-L No No No No
OPT-AMP-17-C No No No No
OPT-AMP-C No No No No
OPT-RAMP-C No No No No
OPT-RAMP-CE No No No No
RAMAN-CTP No No No No
RAMAN-COP No No No No
OPT-EDFA-17 No No No No
OPT-EDFA-24 No No No No
5-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
Card Overview
Table 5-3 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Amplifier Cards Release 6.0 and Later
Card Type R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R 9.2 R 9.2.1 R 9.3 R 9.4
OPT-PRE 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
OPT-BST 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
OPT-BST-E 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
OPT-BST-L No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM
OPT-AMP-L No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM
OPT-AMP-17-C No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
OPT-AMP-C No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
OPT-RAMP-C No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
OPT-RAMP-CENo No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M6
RAMAN-CTP No No No No No No No No No 15454-M2,
15454-M6
15454-M2,
15454-M6
RAMAN-COP No No No No No No No No No 15454-M2,
15454-M6
15454-M2,
15454-M6
OPT-EDFA-17 No No No No No No No No No ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
OPT-EDFA-24 No No No No No No No No No ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
ONS 15454,
15454-M2,
15454-M6
5-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
Class 1M Laser Safety Labels
5.1.4 Optical Power Alarms and Thresholds
Table 5-4 lists the alarms and related thresholds for the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L,
OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, and OPT-AMP-C cards.
5.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1.
5.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card
Note For OPT-PRE card specifications, see the OPT-PRE Amplifier Card Specifications section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
Note For OPT-PRE card safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
The OPT-PRE is a C-band, DWDM, two-stage erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) with midamplifier
loss (MAL) that can be connected to a dispersion compensating unit (DCU). The OPT-PRE is equipped
with a built-in variable optical attenuator (VOA) that controls the gain tilt and can also be used to pad
the DCU to a reference value. You can install the OPT-PRE in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card is
designed to support up to 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing. The OPT-PRE features include:
• Fixed gain mode with programmable tilt
• True variable gain
• Fast transient suppression
• Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function
• Settable maximum output power
• Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning)
Table 5-4 Alarms and Thresholds
Port Alarms Thresholds
LINE RX LOS None
LOS-P LOS-P Fail Low
LOS-O LOS-O Fail Low
LINE TX OPWR-FAIL OPWR Fail Low
OSC TX None None
OSC RX None None
COM TX None None
COM RX LOS-P LOS-P Fail Low
5-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-PRE Amplifier Card
• MAL for fiber-based DCU
• Amplified spontaneous emissions (ASE) compensation in fixed gain mode
• Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds
• Four signal photodiodes to monitor the input and output optical power of the two amplifier stages
through CTC
• An optical output port for external monitoring
Note The optical splitter has a ratio of 1:99, resulting in about 20 dB-lower power at the MON port than at the
COM TX port.
5.3.1 OPT-PRE Faceplate Ports and Block Diagram
The OPT-PRE amplifier has five optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON is the output monitor port
• COM RX (receive) is the input signal port
• COM TX (transmit) is the output signal port
• DC RX is the MAL input signal port
• DC TX is the MAL output signal port
5-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-PRE Amplifier Card
Figure 5-1 shows the OPT-PRE amplifier card faceplate.
Figure 5-1 OPT-PRE Faceplate
Figure 5-2 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-PRE card’s features.
OPT
PRE
FAIL
ACT
SF
MON
RX
COM
TX
RX
DC
TX
96466
5-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-PRE Amplifier Card
Figure 5-2 OPT-PRE Block Diagram
Figure 5-3 shows the a block diagram of how the OPT-PRE optical module functions.
Figure 5-3 OPT-PRE Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
5.3.2 OPT-PRE Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-PRE card are:
• 5.3.2.1 OPT-PRE card Power Monitoring
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
Optical
module
COM RX
DC RX
96478
Processor
DC TX
COM TX
MON
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
98298
DCU
COM RX COM TX
DC TX DC RX
MON
P1 P2 P3 P4
P Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
5-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card
5.3.2.1 OPT-PRE card Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, and P4 monitor the power for the OPT-PRE card. Table 5-5 shows the
returned power level values calibrated to each port.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
5.3.3 Related Procedures for OPT-PRE Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-PRE card:
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
5.4 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card
Note For OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E hardware specifications, see the OPT-BST Amplifier Card Specifications
and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card Specifications sections in the Hardware Specifications document.
Note For OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards”
section on page G-4.
Table 5-5 OPT-PRE Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1 Input Com COM RX
P2 Output DC DC TX
P3 Input DC DC RX
P4 Output COM (Total Output) COM TX
Output COM (Signal Output)
5-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card
The OPT-BST is designed to ultimately support up to 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing. The
OPT-BST-E amplifier card is a gain-enhanced version of the OPT-BST card. It is designed to support up
to 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing. Both the cards are C-band, DWDM EDFA with optical
service channel (OSC) add-and-drop capability. When an OPT-BST or an OPT-BST-E is installed in the
an ONS 15454, an OSCM card is also needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-BST and
OPT-BST-E cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card’s features include:
• Fixed gain mode (with programmable tilt)
• Gain range of 5 to 20 dB in constant gain mode and output power mode for an OPT-BST card
• Gain range of 8 to 23 dBm with the tilt managed at 0 dBm in constant gain mode and output power
mode for an OPT-BST-E card
• Enhanced gain range of 23 to 26 dBm with unmanaged tilt with OPT-BST-E card
• True variable gain
• Built-in VOA to control gain tilt
• Fast transient suppression
• Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function
• Settable maximum output power
• Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning)
• ASE compensation in fixed gain mode
• Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds
• Optical Safety Remote Interlock (OSRI), a CTC software feature capable of shutting down optical
output power or reducing the power to a safe level (automatic power reduction)
• Automatic laser shutdown (ALS), a safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. For
information about using the card to implement ALS in a network, see the “13.11 Network Optical
Safety” section on page 13-30.
Note The optical splitters each have a ratio of 1:99. The result is that MON TX and MON RX port power is
about 20 dB lower than COM TX and COM RX port power.
5.4.1 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Faceplate Ports and Block diagram
The OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E amplifier has eight optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section).
• MON TX is the output monitor port.
• COM RX is the input signal port.
• LINE TX is the output signal port.
• LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• COM TX is the output signal port (receive section).
• OSC RX is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX is the OSC drop output port.
5-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card
Figure 5-4 shows the OPT-BST amplifier card faceplate.
Figure 5-4 OPT-BST Faceplate
The OPT-BST-E card faceplate is the same as that of the OPT-BST card.
Figure 5-5 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E card’s features.
OPT
BST
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
96467
5-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card
Figure 5-5 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Block Diagram
Figure 5-6 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E optical module functions.
Figure 5-6 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
5.4.2 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards are:
• 5.4.2.1 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards Power Monitoring
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
5.4.2.1 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, and P4 monitor the power for the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards.
Table 5-6 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port.
Optical
module
Line RX
Monitor Line RX
96479
Processor
Line TX
COM TX
Com RX
OSC TX
Monitor Line TX OSC RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
98300
MON TX OSC RX
MON RX OSC TX
OSC
COM RX P1 P2
P3 P4
COM TX
LINE TX
APR
signal
LINE RX
in RX
P Physical photodiode
5-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card
The power on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to the
power reported from P3 and P4.
The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions
document.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
5.4.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-BST and
OPT-BST-E cards:
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
5.5 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Table 5-6 Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter
P1 Input Com COM RX Channel
Power
Supported
P2 Output Line (Total
Output)
LINE TX Channel
Power
Supported
Output Line (Signal
Output)
P3 Input Line LINE RX Channel
Power
Supported
P4 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported
5-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card
Note For OPT-BST-L card specifications, see the OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card Specifications section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
Note For OPT-BST-L safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
The OPT-BST-L is an L-band, DWDM EDFA with OSC add-and-drop capability. The card is well suited
for use in networks that employ dispersion shifted (DS) fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber. The
OPT-BST-L is designed to ultimately support 64 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing, but in
Software R9.0 and earlier it is limited to 32 channels at 100-GHz spacing.When an ONS 15454 has an
OPT-BST-L installed, an OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-BST-L in
Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card’s features include:
• Fixed gain mode (with programmable tilt)
• Standard gain range of 8 to 20 dB in the programmable gain tilt mode
• True variable gain
• 20 to 27 dB gain range in the uncontrolled gain tilt mode
• Built-in VOA to control gain tilt
• Fast transient suppression
• Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function
• Settable maximum output power
• Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning)
• ASE compensation in fixed gain mode
• Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds
• OSRI
• ALS
Note The optical splitters each have a ratio of 1:99. The result is that MON TX and MON RX port power is
about 20 dB lower than COM TX and COM RX port power.
5.5.1 OPT-BST-L Faceplate Ports and Block Diagram
The OPT-BST-L amplifier has eight optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section).
• MON TX is the output monitor port.
• COM RX is the input signal port.
• LINE TX is the output signal port.
• LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• COM TX is the output signal port (receive section).
• OSC RX is the OSC add input port.
5-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card
• OSC TX is the OSC drop output port.
Figure 5-7 shows the OPT-BST-L card faceplate.
Figure 5-7 OPT-BST-L Faceplate
Figure 5-8 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-BST-L card’s features.
OPT
BST-L
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
180929
5-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card
Figure 5-8 OPT-BST-L Block Diagram
Figure 5-9 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-BST-L optical module functions.
Figure 5-9 OPT-BST-L Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
5.5.2 OPT-BST-L Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-BST-L card are:
• 5.5.2.1 OPT-BST-L Card Power Monitoring
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
Optical
module
Line RX
Monitor Line RX
180930
Processor
Line TX
COM TX
COM RX
OSC TX
Monitor Line TX OSC RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
134976
MON TX OSC RX
MON RX OSC TX
OSC
COM RX P1 P2
P4 P5
COM TX
LINE TX
APR
signal
LINE RX
in RX
P Physical photodiode
P3
5-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card
5.5.2.1 OPT-BST-L Card Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5 monitor the power for the OPT-BST-L card. Table 5-7
shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port.
The power values on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to
the power values reported from P4 and P5.
The OSC power on the LINE TX is calculated by adding the IL to the power reported from P3.
The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions
document.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
5.5.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST-L Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-BST-L card:
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
Table 5-7 OPT-BST-L Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter
P1 Input COM COM RX Channel Power Supported
P2 Output Line (Total
Output)
LINE TX Channel Power Supported
Output Line (Signal
Output)
P3 Input OSC OSC RX OSC Power Supported
P4 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported
P5 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported
5-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-L Card
5.6 OPT-AMP-L Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For OPT-AMP-L card specifications, see the OPT-AMP-L Preamplifier Card Specifications section in
the Hardware Specifications document.
Note For OPT-AMP-L card safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
The OPT-AMP-L is an L-band, DWDM optical amplifier card consisting of a two-stage EDFA with
midstage access loss (MSL) for an external DCU and OSC add-and-drop capability. Using CTC, the card
is provisionable as a preamplifier (OPT-PRE) or booster amplifier (OPT-BST), and is well suited for use
in networks that employ DS or SMF-28 fiber. The amplifier can operate up to 64 optical transmission
channels at 50-GHz channel spacing in the 1570 nm to 1605 nm wavelength range.
When an OPT-AMP-L installed, an OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the
two-slot OPT-AMP-L in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
The card has the following features:
• Maximum power output of 20 dBm
• True variable gain amplifier with settable range from 12 to 24 dBm in the standard gain range and
24 dBm to 35 dbM with uncontrolled gain tilt
• Built-in VOA to control gain tilt
• Up to 12 dBm MSL for an external DCU
• Fast transient suppression; able to adjust power levels in hundreds of microseconds to avoid bit
errors in failure or capacity growth situations
• Nondistorting low frequency transfer function
• Midstage access loss for dispersion compensation unit
• Constant pump current mode (test mode)
• Constant output power mode (used during optical node setup)
• Constant gain mode
• Internal ASE compensation in constant gain mode and in constant output power mode
• Full monitoring and alarm handling capability
• Optical safety support through signal loss detection and alarm at any input port, fast power down
control (less than one second), and reduced maximum output power in safe power mode. For
information on using the card to implement ALS in a network, see the “13.11 Network Optical
Safety” section on page 13-30.
Note Before disconnecting any OPT AMP-L fiber for troubleshooting, first make sure the OPT AMP-L card
is unplugged.
5-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-L Card
5.6.1 OPT-AMP-L Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams
The OPT-AMP-L amplifier card has ten optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section).
• MON TX is the output monitor port.
• COM RX is the input signal port.
• LINE TX is the output signal port.
• LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• COM TX is the output signal port (receive section).
• OSC RX is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX is the OSC drop output port.
• DC TX is the output signal to the DCU.
• DC RX is the input signal from the DCU.
5-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-L Card
Figure 5-10 shows the OPT-AMP-L card faceplate.
Figure 5-10 OPT-AMP-L Faceplate
Figure 5-11 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-AMP-L card’s features.
OPT-AMP-L
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
RX
DC
TX
180931
5-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-L Card
Figure 5-11 OPT-AMP-L Block Diagram
Figure 5-12 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-AMP-L optical module functions.
Figure 5-12 OPT-AMP-L Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
Optical
module
Monitor Line RX
Line RX
DC RX
Processor
Line TX
DC TX
COM TX
COM RX
OSC TX
Monitor Line TX OSC RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
180932
MON TX
OSC RX
OSC TX
COM RX
COM TX
MON RX
LINE TX
LINE RX
P1
P Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
P2 P3
P6
P4
DC TX
DC RX
External Mid-Stage
Loss
OSC
Add
OSC
Drop
P7
P5
Transmit Section
Receive Section
145256
5-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-L Card
5.6.2 OPT-AMP-L Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-AMP-L card are:
• 5.6.2.1 OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C cards Power Monitoring
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
5.6.2.1 OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C cards Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P7 monitor the power for the OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C cards.
Table 5-8 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port.
The power values on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to
the power values reported from P5 and P6.
The power values on the LINE TX port is calculated by adding the IL to the power value reported from
P7.
The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions
document.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
5.6.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-L Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-AMP-L card:
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
Table 5-8 Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter
P1 Input COM COM RX Channel Power Supported
P2 Output DC (total power) DC TX Channel Power Supported
Output DC (signal power)
P3 Input DC (input power) DC RX Channel Power Supported
P4 Output Line (total power) LINE TX Channel Power Supported
Output Line (signal power)
P5 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported
P6 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported
P7 Input OSC OSC RX OSC Power Supported
5-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-17-C Card
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
5.7 OPT-AMP-17-C Card
Note For OPT-AMP-17-C card specifications, see the OPT-AMP-17-C Amplifier Card Specifications section
in the Hardware Specifications document.
Note For OPT-AMP-17-C safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
The OPT-AMP-17-C is a 17-dB gain, C-band, DWDM EDFA amplifier/preamplifier with OSC
add-and-drop capability. It supports 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing in the C-band (that is, the
1529 nm to 1562.5 nm wavelength range). When an ONS 15454 has an OPT-AMP-17-C installed, an
OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-AMP-17-C in Slots 1 to 6 and
12 to 17.
The card’s features include:
• Fixed gain mode (no programmable tilt)
• Standard gain range of 14 to 20 dB at startup when configured as a preamplifier
• Standard gain range of 20 to 23 dB in the transient mode when configured as a preamplifier
• Gain range of 14 to 23 dB (with no transient gain range) when configured as a booster amplifier
• True variable gain
• Fast transient suppression
• Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function
• Settable maximum output power
• Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning)
• ASE compensation in fixed gain mode
• Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds
• OSRI
• ALS
5-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-17-C Card
5.7.1 OPT-AMP-17-C Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams
The OPT-AMP-17-C amplifier card has eight optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section).
• MON TX is the output monitor port.
• COM RX is the input signal port.
• LINE TX is the output signal port.
• LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• COM TX is the output signal port (receive section).
• OSC RX is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX is the OSC drop output port.
5-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-17-C Card
Figure 5-13 shows the OPT-AMP-17-C amplifier card faceplate.
Figure 5-13 OPT-AMP-17-C Faceplate
Figure 5-14 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-AMP-17C card’s features.
OPT
-AMP
17-C
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
159520
5-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-17-C Card
Figure 5-14 OPT-AMP17-C Block Diagram
Figure 5-15 shows how the OPT-AMP-17-C optical module functions.
Figure 5-15 OPT-AMP-17-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
5.7.2 OPT-AMP-17-C Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-AMP-17-C card are:
• G.33 Automatic Power Control, page G-26
• 5.7.2.1 OPT-AMP-17-C card Power Monitoring
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
Optical
module
Line RX
Monitor Line RX
180928
Processor
Line TX
COM TX
COM RX
OSC TX
Monitor Line TX OSC RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
MON TX OSC RX
MON RX OSC TX
OSC
COM RX
P1
P2
P4
P5
COM TX
LINE TX
APR
signal
LINE RX
in RX
P Physical photodiode
P3
OSC
add
OSC
drop
159519
5-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-17-C Card
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
5.7.2.1 OPT-AMP-17-C card Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5 monitor power for the OPT-AMP-17-C card. Table 5-9
shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port.
The power on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to the
power reported from P3 and P4.
The OSC power on the LINE TX is calculated by adding the IL to the power reported from P5.
The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions
document.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
5.7.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-17-C Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-AMP-17-C card:
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
Table 5-9 OPT-AMP-17-C Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter
P1 Input COM COM RX Channel Power Supported
P2 Output Line (Total
Output)
LINE TX Channel Power Supported
Output Line (Signal
Output)
P3 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported
P4 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported
P5 Input OSC OSC RX OSC Power Supported
5-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-C Card
• NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
5.8 OPT-AMP-C Card
Note For OPT-AMP-C card specifications, see the OPT-AMP-C Amplifier Card Specifications section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
Note For OPT-AMP-C card safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
The OPT-AMP-C card is a 20-dB output power, C-band, DWDM EDFA amplifier/preamplifier. It
contains mid-stage access loss for a Dispersion Compensation Unit (DCU). To control gain tilt, a VOA
is used. The VOA can also be used to attenuate the signal to the DCU to a reference value. The amplifier
module also includes the OSC add (TX direction) and drop (RX direction) optical filters.
The OPT-AMP-C card supports 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing in the C-band (that is, the 1529
nm to 1562.5 nm wavelength range). When an ONS 15454 has an OPT-AMP-C card installed, an OSCM
card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-AMP-C card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
Slots 2 to 6 and Slots 12 to 16 are the default slots for provisioning the OPT-AMP-C card as a
preamplifier, and slots 1 and 17 are the default slots for provisioning the OPT-AMP-C card as a booster
amplifier.
The card’s features include:
• Fast transient suppression
• Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function
• Mid-stage access for DCU
• Constant pump current mode (test mode)
• Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning)
• Constant gain mode
• ASE compensation in Constant Gain and Constant Output Power modes
• Programmable tilt
• Full monitoring and alarm handling capability
• Gain range with gain tilt control of 12 to 24 dB
• Extended gain range (with uncontrolled tilt) of 24 to 35 dB
• Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds
• OSRI
• ALS
5-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-C Card
5.8.1 OPT-AMP-C Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams
The OPT-AMP-C amplifier card has 10 optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section).
• MON TX is the output monitor port.
• COM RX is the input signal port.
• COM TX is the output signal port (receive section).
• DC RX is the input DCU port.
• DC TX is the output DCU port.
• OSC RX is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX is the OSC drop output port.
• LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• LINE TX is the output signal port.
5-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-C Card
Figure 5-16 shows the OPT-AMP-C amplifier card faceplate.
Figure 5-16 OPT-AMP-C Card Faceplate
Figure 5-17 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-AMP-C card features.
OPT
-AMP
-C
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
DC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
274510
5-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-AMP-C Card
Figure 5-17 OPT-AMP-C Block Diagram
Figure 5-18 shows how the OPT-AMP-C optical module functions.
Figure 5-18 OPT-AMP-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
Optical
module
Line RX
Monitor Line RX
240356
Processor
COM TX
COM RX
Line TX OSC TX
Monitor Line TX
DCU TX
DCU RX
OSC RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
MON TX
OSC RX
OSC TX
COM RX
COM TX
MON RX
LINE TX
LINE RX
P1
P Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
P2 P3
P6
P4
DC TX
DC RX
External Mid-Stage
Loss
OSC
Add
OSC
Drop
P7
P5
Transmit Section
Receive Section
145256
5-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
5.8.2 OPT-AMP-C Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-AMP-C card are:
• 5.6.2.1 OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C cards Power Monitoring
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
5.8.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-C Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-AMP-C card:
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
5.9 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE specifications, see the OPT-RAMP-C Amplifier Card
Specifications and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifier Card Specifications sections in the Hardware
Specifications document.
Note For OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards”
section on page G-4.
The OPT-RAMP-C card is a double-slot card that improves unregenerated sections in long spans using
the span fiber to amplify the optical signal. Different wavelengths in C-band receive different gain
values. To achieve Raman amplification, two Raman signals (that do not carry any payload or overhead)
5-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
are required to be transmitted on the optical fiber because the gain generated by one signal is not flat.
The energy of these Raman signals transfer to the higher region of the spectrum thereby amplifying the
signals transmitted at higher wavelengths. The Raman effect reduces span loss but does not compensate
it completely.
When the Raman optical powers are set correctly, a gain profile with limited ripple is achieved. The
wavelengths of the Raman signals are not in the C-band of the spectrum (used by MSTP for payload
signals). The two Raman wavelengths are fixed and always the same. Due to a limited Raman gain, an
EDFA amplifier is embedded into the card to generate a higher total gain. An embedded EDFA gain
block provides a first amplification stage, while the mid stage access (MSA) is used for DCU loss
compensation.
The OPT-RAMP-CE card is a 20 dBm output power, gain-enhanced version of the OPT-RAMP-C card
and is optimized for short spans. The OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards can support up to 80
optical transmission channels at 50-GHz channel spacing over the C-band of the optical spectrum
(wavelengths from 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm). To provide a counter-propagating Raman pump into the
transmission fiber, the Raman amplifier provides up to 500 mW at the LINE-RX connector. The
OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card can be installed in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16, and supports all
network configurations. However, the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card must be equipped on both
endpoints of a span.
The Raman total power and Raman ratio can be configured using CTC. The Raman configuration can be
viewed on the Maintenance > Installation tab.
The features of the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE card include:
• Raman pump with embedded EDFA gain block
• Raman section: 500 mW total pump power for two pump wavelengths
• EDFA section:
– OPT-RAMP-C: 16 dB gain and 17 dB output power
– OPT-RAMP-CE: 11 dB gain and 20 dB output power
• Gain Flattening Filter (GFF) for Raman plus EDFA ripple compensation
• MSA for DC units
• VOA for DC input power control
• Full monitoring of pump, OSC, and signal power
• Fast gain control for transient suppression
• Low-FIT (hardware-managed) optical laser safety
• Hardware output signals for LOS monitoring at input photodiodes
• Optical service channel add and drop filters
• Raman pump back-reflection detector
5.9.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams
The OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards have ten optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section).
• MON TX is the output monitor port.
• COM RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• COM TX is the output signal port.
5-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
• DC RX is the input DCU port.
• DC TX is the output DCU port.
• OSC RX is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX is the OSC drop output port.
• LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• LINE TX is the output signal port.
Figure 5-19 shows the OPT-RAMP-C card faceplate.
Figure 5-19 OPT-RAMP-C Faceplate
The OPT-RAMP-CE card faceplate is the same as that of the OPT-RAMP-C card.
Figure 5-20 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE card features.
270710
LINE OSC DC COM MOM
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
FAIL
ACT
DF
OPT-RAMP-C
5-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
Figure 5-20 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Block Diagram
Figure 5-21 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE card functions.
Figure 5-21 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Functional Block Diagram
Optical
module
Line RX
Monitor Line RX
240356
Processor
COM TX
COM RX
Line TX OSC TX
Monitor Line TX
DCU TX
DCU RX
OSC RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
270709
OSC-TX
W to E
section
E to W
section
Line-TX
Line-RX
COM-RX
COM-TX
OSC
Drop
OSC
Add
Pump 1
Pump 2
PD
8
PD
9
PD
11
PD
10
PD
12
PD
7
PD
5
PD
6
PD
1
PD
2
PD
3
PD
4
Pump
Drop
Pump
Add
PD Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
5-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
Two Raman pump lasers are combined internally and launched in-fiber at the LINE-RX port, thereby
counter-propagating with the DWDM signal. An EDFA gain block provides further amplification of the
DWDM signal, which allows regulated output power entry in the mid stage access and acts upon the
VOA attenuation. While the optical filters are present for the OSC add and drop functions, the OSC
signal counter-propagates with the DWDM signal. Two monitor ports, MON-RX and MON-TX, are
provided at the EDFA input and output stages and are used to evaluate the total gain ripple. A total of 12
photodiodes (PDs) are provided, allowing full monitoring of RP power, DWDM power, and OSC power
in each section of the device. In particular, PD12 allows the detection of the remnant Raman pump power
at the end of the counter-pumped span, while PD11 detects the amount of Raman pump power back
scattered by the LINE-RX connector and transmission fiber.
The EDFA section calculates the signal power, considering the expected ASE power contribution to the
total output power. The signal output power or the signal gain can be used as feedback signals for the
EDFA pump power control loop. The ASE power is derived according to the working EDFA gain. PD2,
PD3, and PD4 provide the total power measured by the photodiode and the signal power is derived by
calculating the total power value. The insertion loss of the main optical path and the relative optical
attenuation of the two monitor ports are stored into the card’s not-volatile memory.
5.9.2 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE card are:
• 5.9.2.1 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Power Monitoring, page 5-38
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
5.9.2.1 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes PD1 through PD12 monitor the power for the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE
cards (see Table 5-10).
Table 5-10 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
PD1 EDFA DWDM Input Power LINE-RX
PD2 EDFA Output Power (pre-VOA
attenuation)
DC-TX (port with 0 dB VOA attenuation)
PD3 DCU Input Power DC-TX
PD4 DCU Output Power DC-RX
PD5 DWDM Input Power COM-RX
PD6 OSC ADD Input Power OSC-RX
PD7 OSC DROP Output Power OSC-TX
PD8 Pump 1 in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX
PD9 Pump 2 in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX
PD10 Total Pump in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX
5-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
5.9.3 Related Procedures for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE cards:
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link, page 15-4
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
5.10 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
(Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For hardware specifications, see the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Card Specifications section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
Note For RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product
Cards” section on page G-4.
PD11 Back-Reflected Pump Power LINE-RX
PD12 Remnant Pump Power LINE-TX
Table 5-10 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Port Calibration (continued)
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
5-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
The 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP cards are supported on
Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Release 9.4.01 and later releases only. These cards do
not operate on systems running earlier versions.
After installing Release 9.4.01 software, reinstall the 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP and
15454-M-RAMAN-COP cards.
The single-slot RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards support counter and co-propagating Raman
amplification on very long unregenerated spans.
The cards manage up to 96 ITU-T 50-GHz spaced channels over the C-band of the optical spectrum
(wavelengths from 1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm). The counter-propagating RAMAN-CTP card is the
master unit. The co-propagating RAMAN-COP card is the slave unit and can be used only when the
counter-propagating unit is present. The RAMAN-CTP card and the RAMAN-COP card must be
installed in adjacent slots (Slots 2 and 3, 4 and 5, or 6 and 7) in the Cisco ONS 15454 M6 chassis and
Slots 2 and 3 in the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 chassis. However, these adjacent slots must not be used to
install two RAMAN-CTP or two RAMAN-COP cards.
The RAMAN-CTP card is provided with three E-2000 PS PC connectors for the LINE-TX, LINE-RX,
and RAMAN-COP-RX ports and three LC-UPC-II connectors for the COM-TX, COM-RX, and
MON-TX ports. The RAMAN-COP card is provided with one E-2000 PS PC connector. The E2000 PS
PC patchcord is used to connect the RAMAN-COP card to the RAMAN-COP-RX port on the
RAMAN-CTP card.
Note The RAMAN-CTP card is shipped with two E-2000 PS PC to F-3000s SM PC patchcords and the
RAMAN-COP card is shipped with one E-2000 PS PC to E-2000 PS PC patchcord. The F-3000s SM PC
connector is mechanically and optically compatible with the LC PC connectors and the LC PC mating
adapters. The standard connectors and the F-3000s SM PC connectors can be used for optical power of
250 mW and higher, if the connectors are absolutely clean.
The features of the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards include:
• Raman section: 1000 mW total pump power for four pumps and two wavelengths
• Embedded distributed feedback (DFB) laser at 1568.77 nm to be used for optical safety and link
continuity (in RAMAN-CTP card only)
• Photodiodes to enable monitoring of Raman pump power
• Photodiodes to enable monitoring of the DFB laser and signal power (in RAMAN-CTP card only)
• Hardware managed automatic laser shutdown (ALS) for optical laser safety
• Hardware output signals for loss of signal (LOS) monitoring at input photodiodes
• Raman pump back reflection detector to check for excessive back reflection
5.10.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams
The RAMAN-CTP card has six optical ports located on the faceplate:
– MON TX is the output monitor port
– COM RX is the input signal port (receive section)
– COM TX is the output signal port
– RAMAN-COP RX is the Raman co-propagating input port
– LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section)
5-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
– LINE TX is the output signal port
Figure 5-22 shows the RAMAN-CTP card faceplate.
Figure 5-22 RAMAN-CTP Faceplate
The RAMAN-COP card has only one optical port located on the faceplate. RAMAN-TX is the Raman
co-propagating output port.
Figure 5-23 shows the RAMAN-COP card faceplate.
Figure 5-23 RAMAN-COP Faceplate
Figure 5-24 shows a block diagram of how the RAMAN-CTP card functions.
246593
HAZARD
LEVEL
1M
SKIN EXPOSURE
NEAR APERTURE
MAY CAUSE BURNS
RX
MON COM RAMAN COP RX LINE TX LINE RX
TX TX COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
FAIL ACT SF
RAMAN-CTP
246594
HAZARD
LEVEL
1M RAMAN TX
SKIN EXPOSURE
NEAR APERTURE
MAY CAUSE BURNS
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
FAIL ACT SF
RAMAN-COP
5-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
Figure 5-24 RAMAN-CTP Functional Block Diagram
Four Raman pump lasers (two for each wavelength) are combined internally and launched in-fiber at the
LINE-RX port, thereby counter-propagating with the DWDM signal. The two pump lasers at the same
nominal central wavelength, power, and polarization are made orthogonally polarized by the polarization
beam combiner (that rotates one of the laser beams) and then coupled, resulting in a depolarized beam.
A DFB laser at 1568.77 nm is used for optical safety. Optical filters for DFB add and drop are present.
The DFB signal generated by the DFB laser is transmitted in-fiber, co-propagating with the DWDM
signal. A MON-TX port monitors the DWDM signal at the COM-TX port. A total of ten photodiodes are
provided, allowing monitoring of Raman pump (RP) power, DWDM signal power, and DFB signal
power in each section of the card. In particular, P8 measures the co-propagating Raman pump power
in-fiber (when the RAMAN-COP unit is present), while P6 detects the amount of Raman pump power
back scattered by the LINE-RX connector and transmission fiber. P1 measures the DFB signal power
transmitted in-fiber while P9 and P10 measure the DFB signal and ASE power respectively, which is
received from the other line site. The insertion loss of the main optical path and the relative optical
attenuation of the monitor port is stored in non-volatile memory of the card.
Figure 5-25 shows a block diagram of how the RAMAN-COP card functions.
246596
MON-TX
LINE-RX COM-TX
P8
P7
P1
P5 P6
P3 P4
P2
P1+ P2
P1 P2
PBC PBC
PUMP
COUNTER
ADD
LINE-TX COM-RX
RAMAN-COP-RX
DFB
P9 P10
VOA_DFB
DFB and ASE
DROP
PUMP
CO
ADD
DFB
ADD
PUMP1 PUMP2 PUMP3 PUMP4
P Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
5-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
Figure 5-25 15454-M-RAMAN-COP Functional Block Diagram
Four Raman pump lasers (two for each wavelength) are combined internally and launched in-fiber at the
LINE-TX port of the counter-propagating unit, thereby co-propagating with the DWDM signal. The two
pump lasers at the same nominal central wavelength, power, and polarization are made orthogonally
polarized by the polarization beam combiner (that rotates one of the laser beams) and then coupled,
resulting in a depolarized beam. A total of four photodiodes are provided, allowing the monitoring of RP
power. In particular, P6 detects the amount of Raman pump power back scattered by the LINE-RX
connector and transmission fiber.
5.10.2 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P10 monitor the power for the RAMAN-CTP card (see Table 5-11).
246595
RAMAN-TX
P1+
P5
P6
P3 P4
P2
P1 P2
VOA1
PBC
PUMP1 PUMP2 PUMP3 PUMP4
VOA2
PBC
P Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
Table 5-11 RAMAN-CTP Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1 DFB in-fiber Output Power LINE-TX
P2 DWDM RX Input Power LINE-RX
P3 Pump 1 in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX
P4 Pump 2 in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX
P5 Total Pump in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX
5-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
Physical photodiodes P3 through P6 monitor the power for the RAMAN-COP card (see Table 5-12).
The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions
document.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, see the “CTC Port
Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.4.
5.10.3 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Card Functions
The functions of the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards are:
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
• G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19
5.10.4 Related Procedures for RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
Caution During a software upgrade, do not unplug the RAMAN-CTP or RAMAN-COP card fibers or connectors.
The ends of unterminated fibers or connectors emit invisible laser radiation.
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the RAMAN-CTP and
RAMAN-COP cards:
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
P6 Back-Reflected Pump Power LINE-RX
P7 DWDM TX Input Power COM-RX
P8 Total Co-Pump in-fiber Output
Power
LINE-TX
P9 DFB Input Power LINE-RX
P10 ASE Input Power LINE-RX
Table 5-11 RAMAN-CTP Port Calibration (continued)
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
Table 5-12 RAMAN-CTP Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P3 Pump 1 in-fiber Output Power RAMAN-TX
P4 Pump 2 in-fiber Output Power RAMAN-TX
P5 Total Pump in-fiber Output Power RAMAN-TX
P6 Back-Reflected Pump Power RAMAN-TX
5-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link, page 15-4
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27
• NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord, page 16-72
• DLP-G690 Configure the Raman Pump Using Manual Day-0 Installation
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
5.11 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
Note For OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 card specifications, see the OPT-EDFA-17 Amplifier Card
Specifications and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifier Card Specifications sections in the Hardware
Specifications document.
Note For OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 card safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards”
section on page G-4.
The OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are C-band, DWDM EDFA amplifiers/preamplifiers with
20-dBm output powers. These cards do not contain mid-stage access loss for a Dispersion Compensation
Unit (DCU). The OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards provide a noise-figure optimized version of
the EDFA amplifiers to cope with new modulation formats like PM-DQPSK, which do not need
dispersion compensation. To control gain tilt, a VOA is used. The amplifier module also includes the
OSC add (TX direction) and drop (RX direction) optical filters.
The OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards share the same hardware platform and firmware
architecture but differ in their operative optical gain range, which is 17 dB and 24 dB respectively.
The OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are true variable gain amplifiers, offering an optimal
equalization of the transmitted optical channels over a wide gain range. They support 96 channels at
50-GHz channel spacing in the C-band (that is, 1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm wavelength range). When an
ONS 15454 has an OPT-EDFA-17 or OPT-EDFA-24 card installed, an OSCM card is needed to process
the OSC. You can install the OPT-EDFA-17 or OPT-EDFA-24 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Slots
2 to 6 and Slots 12 to 16 are the default slots for provisioning the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24
cards as a preamplifier. Slots 1 and 17 are the default slots for provisioning the OPT-EDFA-17 and
OPT-EDFA-24 cards as a booster amplifier. You can install the OPT-EDFA-17 or OPT-EDFA-24 card in
Slots 2 and 3 in an ONS 15454 M2 chassis, and Slots 2 to 7 in an ONS 15454 M6 chassis.
The main functionalities of the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are:
5-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
• Amplification of the input signal at COM-RX port towards LINE-TX port through a true-variable
gain EDFA block
• Multiplexing the OSC to the LINE-TX port
• Demultiplexing the OSC from LINE-RX port
• Monitoring of the LINE input or output signal with 1% TAP splitters
The features of the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are:
• Embedded Gain Flattening Filter
• Constant pump current mode (test mode)
• Constant output power mode
• Constant gain mode
• Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function
• ASE compensation in Constant Gain and Constant Output Power modes
• Fast transient suppression
• Programmable tilt
• Full monitoring and alarm handling capability
• Gain range with gain tilt control of 5 to 17 dB (for OPT-EDFA-17 card) and 12 to 24 dB (for
OPT-EDFA-24 card)
• Extended gain range (with uncontrolled tilt) of 17 to 20 dB (for OPT-EDFA-17 card) and 24 to 27
dB (for OPT-EDFA-24 card)
• Optical Safety Remote Interlock (OSRI)
• Automatic Alarm Shutdown (ALS)
5.11.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams
The OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards have eight optical ports located on the faceplate:
• MON RX is the input monitor port (receive section).
• MON TX is the output monitor port.
• COM RX is the input signal port.
• COM TX is the output signal port (receive section).
• LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section).
• LINE TX is the output signal port.
• OSC RX is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX is the OSC drop output port.
5-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
Figure 5-26 shows the OPT-EDFA-17 card faceplate.
Figure 5-26 OPT-EDFA-17 Card Faceplate
The OPT-EDFA-24 card faceplate is similar to that of the OPT-EDFA-17 card.
Figure 5-27 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 card features.
FAIL
ACT
SF
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
RX RX RX RX
MON COM OSC LINE
TX TX TX TX
OPT-EDFA
XX
246681
5-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
Figure 5-27 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Block Diagram
Figure 5-28 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 optical modules
function.
Figure 5-28 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Optical Modules Function
246683
SCL Bus
TCCi M
Line RX
Optical module
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi P
BAT A&B
Monitor Line RX
Line TX
Monitor Line TX
COM TX
COM RX
OSC TX
OSC RX
Processor DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
246682
OSC-TX
MON-RX
P5
P6
P Physical photodiode
LINE-RX COM-TX
PASSIVE
Section
ACTIVE
Section
OSC
1% TAP DROP
OSC-RX
MON-TX
P4
P3 P2 P1
LINE-TX COM-RX
OSC
1% TAP ADD
True Variable Gain
EDFA
5-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
5.11.2 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes PD1 through PD6 monitor the power for the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24
cards (see Table 5-13).
5.11.3 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Functions
The functions of the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are:
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9
5.11.4 Related Procedures for OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
The list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24
cards are:
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards
• NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control
• NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
Table 5-13 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1 EDFA Input Power COM-RX
P2 EDFA Output Power LINE-TX
P3 EDFA Output Power LINE-TX
P4 OSC ADD Input Power OSC-RX
P5 OSC DROP Output Power LINE-RX
P6 COM-TX Output Power LINE-RX
5-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards
OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
CH A P T E R
6-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
6
Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
This chapter describes legacy multiplexer and demultiplexer cards used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense
wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks and related procedures.
For card safety and compliance information, see the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for
Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Chapter topics include:
• 6.1 Card Overview, page 6-1
• 6.2 Safety Labels, page 6-9
• 6.3 32MUX-O Card, page 6-9
• 6.3.5 Related Procedures for the 32MUX-O Card, page 6-13
• 6.4 32DMX-O Card, page 6-14
• 6.4.4 Related Procedures for the 32DMX-O Card, page 6-18
• 6.5 4MD-xx.x Card, page 6-19
• 6.5.5 Related Procedures for the 4MD-xx.x Card, page 6-23
Note For a description of the 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 40-MUX-C, 40-WSS-C,
40-WSS-CE, and 40-WXC-C cards, see the “Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards”
chapter.
6.1 Card Overview
The card overview section contains card summary, compatibility, interface class, and channel allocation
plan information for legacy multiplexer and demultiplexer cards.
Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see
the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
6-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Overview
6.1.1 Card Summary
Table 6-1 lists and summarizes the functions of the 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, and 4MD-xx.x cards.
6.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 6-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for the legacy cards.
Table 6-1 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Port Description For Additional Information
32MUX-O The 32MUX-O has five sets of ports located on the
faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “6.3 32MUX-O Card”
section on page 6-9.
32DMX-O The 32DMX-O has five sets of ports located on the
faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
“6.4 32DMX-O Card” section on
page 6-14
4MD-xx.x The 4MD-xx.x card has five sets of ports located on
the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and
12 to 17.
See the “6.5 4MD-xx.x Card”
section on page 6-19.
Table 6-2 Software Compatibility for Legacy Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Release
Cards
32MUX-O 32DMX-O 4MD-xx.x
R4.5 Yes Yes Yes
R4.6 Yes Yes Yes
R4.7 Yes Yes Yes
R5.0 Yes Yes Yes
R6.0 Yes Yes Yes
R7.0 Yes Yes Yes
R7.2 Yes Yes Yes
R8.0 Yes Yes Yes
R8.5 Yes Yes Yes
R9.0 Yes Yes Yes
R9.1 Yes Yes Yes
R9.2 Yes Yes Yes
R9.2.1 Yes Yes Yes
R9.3 Yes Yes Yes
R9.4 Yes Yes Yes
6-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Overview
6.1.3 Interface Classes
The 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, and 4MD-xx.x cards have different input and output optical channel signals
depending on the interface card where the input signal originates. The input interface cards have been
grouped in classes listed in Table 6-3. The subsequent tables list the optical performance and output
power of each interface class.
Table 6-5 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards that provide signal input to
multiplexer and demultiplexer cards.
Table 6-3 ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes
Input Power Class Card
A 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) with forward error correction (FEC)
enabled, 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L) with FEC enabled, 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C,
and 40ME-TXP-C), and 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C,
and 40ME-MXP-C)
B 10-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_10G) without FEC, 10-Gbps
muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L), 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C), 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C), and ADM-10G cards with FEC disabled
C OC-192 LR ITU cards (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L)
without FEC
D 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and
unprotected, with FEC enabled
E OC-48 100-GHz DWDM muxponder card (MXP_MR_2.5G) and 2.5-Gbps
multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected, with FEC
disabled and retime, reshape, and regenerate (3R) mode enabled
F 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected,
in regenerate and reshape (2R) mode
G OC-48 ELR 100 GHz card
H 2/4 port GbE transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz)
I TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L, 40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C cards with enhanced FEC (E-FEC) and the MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards with
E-FEC enabled
6-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Overview
Table 6-5 lists the optical performance parameters that provide signal input for the 40-Gbps multiplexer
and demultiplexer cards.
Table 6-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance
Parameter Class A Class B Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Maximum bit rate 40 Gbps 40 Gbps 40 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes No Yes (E-FEC)
Threshold Optimum Average Optimum
Maximum BER2
2. BER = bit error rate
10–15 10–12 10–15
OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB
Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm
Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm
Transmitted Power Range3
3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM
cards.
40-Gbps multirate
transponder/40-Gbps
EC transponder
(40E-TXP-C and
40ME-TXP-C)
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm +2.5 to 3.5 dBm —
OC-192 LR ITU — — —
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
+/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm
Table 6-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameters
Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes No No Yes (E-FEC)
Threshold Optimum Average Average Optimum
Maximum BER2 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–15
OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB
Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –22 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm
6-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Overview
Table 6-6 lists the optical interface performance parameters for 2.5-Gbps cards that provide signal input
to multiplexer and demultiplexer cards.
Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –9 dBm –8 dBm
Transmitted Power Range3
10-Gbps multirate
transponder/10-Gbps
FEC transponder
(TXP_MR_10G)
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm +2.5 to 3.5 dBm — —
OC-192 LR ITU — — +3.0 to 6.0
dBm
—
10-Gbps multirate
transponder/10-Gbps
FEC transponder
(TXP_MR_10E)
+3.0 to 6.0 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
+/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–1,000
ps/nm
+/–800 ps/nm
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
2. BER = bit error rate
3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards.
Table 6-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameters (continued)
Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Table 6-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance
Parameter Class D Class E Class F Class G Class H Class J
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 1.25 Gbps 2.5 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 2R 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes No No No No No
Threshold Average Average Average Average Average Average
Maximum BER 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12
OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 6 dB 14 dB 10 dB 15 dB 14 dB 11 dB 13 dB 8 dB 12 dB
Power sensitivity –31
dBm
–25
dBm
–30
dBm
–23
dBm
–24 dBm –27
dBm
–33
dBm
–28 dBm –18 dBm –26 dBm
Power overload –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –7 dBm –17dBm
6-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Overview
6.1.4 Channel Allocation Plan
ONS 15454 DWDM multiplexer and demultiplexer cards are designed for use with specific channels in
the C band and L band. In most cases, the channels for these cards are either numbered (for example,
1 to 32 or 1 to 40) or delimited (odd or even). Client interfaces must comply with these channel
assignments to be compatible with the ONS 15454 system.
Table 6-7 lists the channel IDs and wavelengths assigned to the C-band DWDM channels.
Note In some cases, a card uses only one of the bands (C band or L band) and some or all of the channels listed
in a band. Also, some cards use channels on the 100-GHz ITU grid while others use channels on the
50-GHz ITU grid. See the specific card description or the “Hardware Specifications” document for more
details.
Transmitted Power Range1
TXP_MR_2.5G –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to
1.0 dBm
–2.0 to 0 dBm
TXPP_MR_2.5G –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to
–2.5 dBm
MXP_MR_2.5G — +2.0 to +4.0 dBm —
MXPP_MR_2.5G — –1.5 to +0.5 dBm —
2/4 port GbE
Transponder (GBIC
WDM 100GHz)
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm —
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
–1200 to
+5400 ps/nm
–1200 to
+5400 ps/nm
–1200 to
+3300
ps/nm
–1200 to
+3300 ps/nm
–1000 to +3600
ps/nm
–1000 to
+3200
ps/nm
1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards.
Table 6-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued)
Parameter Class D Class E Class F Class G Class H Class J
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
Table 6-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
6-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Overview
Table 6-8 lists the channel IDs and wavelengths assigned to the L-band channels.
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
Table 6-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band) (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
6-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Card Overview
Table 6-8 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (L Band)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46
2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88
3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30
4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73
5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15
6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57
7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99
8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41
9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83
10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26
11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68
12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10
13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52
14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95
15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37
16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79
17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22
18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64
19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06
20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49
21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91
22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34
23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76
24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19
25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62
26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04
27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47
28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89
29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32
30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75
31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17
32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60
33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03
34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46
35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88
6-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
Safety Labels
6.2 Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1”.
6.3 32MUX-O Card
Note For 32MUX-O card specifications, see the “32MUX-O Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The 32-Channel Multiplexer (32MUX-O) card multiplexes 32 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in
the channel plan. The 32MUX-O card takes up two slots in an ONS 15454 and can be installed in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
6.3.1 32MUX-O Card Functions
The 32MUX-O functions include:
• Arrayed waveguide grating (AWG) device that enables full multiplexing functions for the channels.
• Each single-channel port is equipped with VOAs for automatic optical power regulation prior to
multiplexing. In the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for
safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is also available.
• Each single-channel port is monitored using a photodiode to enable automatic power regulation.
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
An additional optical monitoring port with 1:99 splitting ratio is available.
6.3.2 32MUX-O Card Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 6-1 shows the 32MUX-O faceplate.
36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31
37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74
38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17
39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60
40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03
Table 6-8 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (L Band) (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
6-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32MUX-O Card
Figure 6-1 32MUX-O Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1”.
Figure 6-2 shows a block diagram of the 32MUX-O card.
54.1 - 60.6 46.1 - 52.5 38.1 - 44.5 30.3 - 36.6
32MUX-0
COM
TX
RX
MON
FAIL
ACT
SF
96468
6-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32MUX-O Card
Figure 6-2 32MUX-O Block Diagram
The 32MUX-O card has four receive connectors that accept multifiber push-on (MPO) cables on its front
panel for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The 32MUX-O
card also has two LC-PC-II optical connectors, one for the main output and the other for the monitor port.
Figure 6-3 shows the 32MUX-O optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 6-3 32MUX-O Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
6.3.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 32MUX-O Cards
The 32MUX-O card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. COM TX is the line output. COM
MON is the optical monitoring port. The xx.x to yy.y RX ports represent the four groups of eight
channels ranging from wavelength xx.x to wavelength yy.y, according to the channel plan.
Optical
module
30.3 to 36.6
8 CHS RX
38.1 to 44.5
8 CHS RX
46.1 to 52.5
8 CHS RX
54.1 to 60.6
8 CHS RX
134413
Processor
MON
COM TX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
98301
1
32
Control
Control
interface
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
MON
COM TX
Inputs
P32
P31
P30
P29
P4
P3
P2
P1
P
6-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32MUX-O Card
6.3.3 Channel Plan
The 32MUX-O is typically used in hub nodes and provides the multiplexing of 32 channels, spaced at
100 GHz, into one fiber before their amplification and transmission along the line. The channel plan is
shown in Table 6-9.
Table 6-9 32MUX-O Channel Plan
Channel Number1 Channel ID Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
1 30.3 195.9 1530.33
2 31.2 195.8 1531.12
3 31.9 195.7 1531.90
4 32.6 195.6 1532.68
5 34.2 195.4 1534.25
6 35.0 195.3 1535.04
7 35.8 195.2 1535.82
8 36.6 195.1 1536.61
9 38.1 194.9 1538.19
10 38.9 194.8 1538.98
11 39.7 194.7 1539.77
12 40.5 194.6 1540.56
13 42.1 194.4 1542.14
14 42.9 194.3 1542.94
15 43.7 194.2 1543.73
16 44.5 194.1 1544.53
17 46.1 193.9 1546.12
18 46.9 193.8 1546.92
19 47.7 193.7 1547.72
20 48.5 193.6 1548.51
21 50.1 193.4 1550.12
22 50.9 193.3 1550.92
23 51.7 193.2 1551.72
24 52.5 193.1 1552.52
25 54.1 192.9 1554.13
26 54.9 192.8 1554.94
27 55.7 192.7 1555.75
28 56.5 192.6 1556.55
29 58.1 192.4 1558.17
30 58.9 192.3 1558.98
6-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32MUX-O Card
6.3.4 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P32 monitor the power for the 32MUX-O card. The returned power
level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 6-10.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
6.3.5 Related Procedures for the 32MUX-O Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32MUX-O card:
• “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on page 14-53
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” task on page 14-64
• “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” task on page 14-47
• “NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs” task on page 14-78
• “NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes” task on
page 14-82
• “DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards
to the Standard Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-85
• “DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards
to the Deep Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-90
• “NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord” task on page 16-72
• “NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords” task on page 14-113
• “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually” task on page 14-114
• “NTP-G86 Convert a Pass-Through Connection to Add/Drop Connections”
• “NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance
Test” task on page 21-3
• “NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test” task on page 21-71
• “NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance”
31 59.7 192.2 1559.79
32 60.6 192.1 1560.61
1. The Channel Number column is only for reference purposes. The channel ID is consistent with
the ONS 15454 and is used in card identification.
Table 6-9 32MUX-O Channel Plan
Channel Number1 Channel ID Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
Table 6-10 32MUX-O Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P32 ADD COM TX
6-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32DMX-O Card
• “DLP-G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards”
• “NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds” task on page 20-54
• “DLP-G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-55
• “DLP-G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-57
• “DLP-G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-59
• “DLP-G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-62
• “DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7
• “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7
• “DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord” task on page 14-123
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-13
• “DLP-G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-14
• “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Card”
• “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC” task on page 14-51
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” task on page 24-27
6.4 32DMX-O Card
Note For 32DMX-O card specifications, see the “32DMX-O Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The 32-Channel Demultiplexer (32DMX-O) card demultiplexes 32 100-GHz-spaced channels identified
in the channel plan. The 32DMX-O takes up two slots in an ONS 15454 and can be installed in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
6.4.1 32DMX-O Card Functions
The 32DMX-O functions include:
• AWG that enables channel demultiplexing functions.
• Each single-channel port is equipped with VOAs for automatic optical power regulation after
demultiplexing. In the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation
for safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is also available.
• The 32DXM-O has four physical receive connectors that accept MPO cables on its front panel for
the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables.
6-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32DMX-O Card
Note In contrast, the single-slot 32DMX card does not have VOAs on each drop port for optical power
regulation. The 32DMX optical demultiplexer module is used in conjunction with the 32WSS
card in ONS 15454 Multiservice Transport Platform (MSTP) nodes.
• Each single-channel port is monitored using a photodiode to enable automatic power regulation.
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
6.4.2 32DMX-O Card Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 6-4 shows the 32DMX-O card faceplate.
6-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32DMX-O Card
Figure 6-4 32DMX-O Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1”.
Figure 6-5 shows a block diagram of the 32DMX-O card.
32DMX-0
FAIL
ACT
SF
46.1 - 52.5 38.1 - 44.5 30.3 - 36.6
TX
54.1 - 60.6
RX
COM
MON
145935
6-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32DMX-O Card
Figure 6-5 32DMX-O Block Diagram
Figure 6-6 shows the 32DMX-O optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 6-6 32DMX-O Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
6.4.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 32DMX-O Cards
The 32DMX-O card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. MON is the output monitor port. COM
RX is the line input. The xx.x to yy.y TX ports represent the four groups of eight channels ranging from
wavelength xx.x to wavelength yy.y according to the channel plan.
6.4.3 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P33 monitor the power for the 32DMX-O card. The returned power
level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 6-11.
Optical
module
30.3 to 36.6
8 CHS TX
38.1 to 44.5
8 CHS TX
46.1 to 52.5
8 CHS TX
54.1 to 60.6
8 CHS TX
96480
Processor
MON
COM RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
98302
1
32
Control
Control
interface
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
COM RX DROP TX
P32
P31
P30
P29
P4
P3
P2
P1
P
P33
6-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
32DMX-O Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
6.4.4 Related Procedures for the 32DMX-O Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32DMX-O card:
• “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on page 14-53
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” task on page 14-64
• “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” task on page 14-47
• “NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs” task on page 14-78
• “NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes” task on
page 14-82
• “DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards
to the Standard Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-85
• “DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards
to the Deep Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-90
• “NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord” task on page 16-72
• “NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords” task on page 14-113
• “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually” task on page 14-114
• “NTP-G86 Convert a Pass-Through Connection to Add/Drop Connections”
• “NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test” task on page 21-71
• “NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance
Test” task on page 21-3
• “NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance”
• “DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7
• “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7
• “DLP-G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards”
• “NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds” task on page 20-54
• “DLP-G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-55
• “DLP-G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-57
Table 6-11 32DMX-O Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P32 DROP DROP TX
P33 INPUT COM COM RX
6-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
4MD-xx.x Card
• “DLP-G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-59
• “DLP-G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-62
• “DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord” task on page 14-123
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-13
• “DLP-G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-14
• “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Card”
• “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC” task on page 14-51
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” task on page 24-27
6.5 4MD-xx.x Card
Note For 4MD-xx.x card specifications, see the section “4MD-xx.x Card Specifications” section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
The 4-Channel Multiplexer/Demultiplexer (4MD-xx.x) card multiplexes and demultiplexes four
100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan. The 4MD-xx.x card is designed to be used with
band OADMs (both AD-1B-xx.x and AD-4B-xx.x).
The card is bidirectional. The demultiplexer and multiplexer functions are implemented in two different
sections of the same card. In this way, the same card can manage signals flowing in opposite directions.
There are eight versions of this card that correspond with the eight sub-bands specified in Table 6-12 on
page 6-22. The 4MD-xx.x can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
6.5.1 4MD-xx.x Card Functions
The 4MD-xx.x has the following functions implemented inside a plug-in optical module:
• Passive cascade of interferential filters perform the channel multiplex/demultiplex function.
• Software-controlled VOAs at every port of the multiplex section regulate the optical power of each
multiplexed channel.
• Software-monitored photodiodes at the input and output multiplexer and demultiplexer ports for
power control and safety purposes.
• Software-monitored virtual photodiodes at the common DWDM output and input ports. A virtual
photodiode is a firmware calculation of the optical power at that port. This calculation is based on
the single channel photodiode reading and insertion losses of the appropriated paths.
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
6.5.2 4MD-xx.x Card Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 6-7 shows the 4MD-xx.x faceplate.
6-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
4MD-xx.x Card
Figure 6-7 4MD-xx.x Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1”.
Figure 6-8 shows a block diagram of the 4MD-xx.x card.
4MD
-X.XX
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
COM
TX
96470
6-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
4MD-xx.x Card
Figure 6-8 4MD-xx.x Block Diagram
Figure 6-9 shows the 4MD-xx.x optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 6-9 4MD-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
The optical module shown in Figure 6-9 is optically passive and consists of a cascade of interferential
filters that perform the channel multiplexing and demultiplexing functions.
VOAs are present in every input path of the multiplex section in order to regulate the optical power of
each multiplexed channel. Some optical input and output ports are monitored by means of photodiodes
implemented both for power control and for safety purposes. An internal control manages VOA settings
and functionality as well as photodiode detection and alarm thresholds. The power at the main output
Optical
Module
Channel
Inputs
96482
Processor
COM TX
COM RX
Channel
Outputs
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCC M
SCL Bus
TCC P
DC/DC
converter
Power supply
input filters
BAT A&B
98303
Virtual photodiode
COM TX COM RX
Demux
RX channels TX channels
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
Control
Control
interface
V1
V
Mux
P1 P2 P3 P3
P5 P6 P7 P8
P
V2
6-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
4MD-xx.x Card
and input ports is monitored through the use of virtual photodiodes. A virtual photodiode is implemented
in the firmware of the plug-in module. This firmware calculates the power on a port, summing the
measured values from all single channel ports (and applying the proper path insertion loss) and then
providing the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card with the obtained value.
6.5.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 4MD-xx.x Cards
The 4MD-xx.x card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. COM RX is the line input. COM TX
is the line output. The 15xx.x TX ports represent demultiplexed channel outputs 1 to 4. The 15xx.x RX
ports represent multiplexed channel inputs 1 to 4.
6.5.3 Wavelength Pairs
Table 6-12 shows the band IDs and the add/drop channel IDs for the 4MD-xx.x card.
6.5.4 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P8 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the
4MD-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 6-13.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
Table 6-12 4MD-xx.x Channel Sets
Band ID Add/Drop Channel IDs
Band 30.3 (A) 30.3, 31.2, 31.9, 32.6
Band 34.2 (B) 34.2, 35.0, 35.8, 36.6
Band 38.1 (C) 38.1, 38.9, 39.7, 40.5
Band 42.1 (D) 42.1, 42.9, 43.7, 44.5
Band 46.1 (E) 46.1, 46.9, 47.7, 48.5
Band 50.1 (F) 50.1, 50.9, 51.7, 52.5
Band 54.1 (G) 54.1, 54.9, 55.7, 56.5
Band 58.1 (H) 58.1, 58.9, 59.7, 60.6
Table 6-13 4MD-xx.x Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P4 ADD COM TX
P5–P8 DROP DROP TX
V1 OUT COM COM TX
V2 IN COM COM RX
6-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
4MD-xx.x Card
6.5.5 Related Procedures for the 4MD-xx.x Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 4MD-xx.x card:
• “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on page 14-53
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” task on page 14-64
• “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” task on page 14-47
• “NTP-G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards”
task on page 21-94
• “DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections” task on page 21-99
• “DLP-G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power” task on page 21-100
• “DLP-G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards” task on
page 21-104
• “NTP-G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards” task on page 21-106
• “DLP-G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on
page 21-110
• “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-40
• “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-41
• “NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs” task on page 14-78
• “NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes” task on
page 14-82
• “DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards
to the Standard Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-85
• “DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards
to the Deep Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-90
• “NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord” task on page 16-72
• “NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords” task on page 14-113
• “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually” task on page 14-114
• “NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance
Test” task on page 21-3
• “NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test” task on page 21-71
• “NTP-G86 Convert a Pass-Through Connection to Add/Drop Connections”
• “NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance”
• “DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7
• “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7
• “DLP-G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards”
• “NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds” task on page 20-54
6-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
4MD-xx.x Card
• “DLP-G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-55
• “DLP-G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-57
• “DLP-G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-59
• “DLP-G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-62
• “DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord” task on page 14-123
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-13
• “DLP-G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-14
• “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Card”
• “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC” task on page 14-51
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” task on page 24-27
CH A P T E R
7-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
7
Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units
This chapter explains the Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units (T-DCU) used in Cisco ONS 15454
dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For card safety and compliance
information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS
Platforms document.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
The T-DCU unit compensates for chromatic dispersion (CD) of the transmission fiber. The T-DCU
provides two line cards with varied set of tunable wavelengths to compensate for CD.
This chapter includes:
• 7.1 Card Overview, page 7-1
• 7.2 Safety Labels, page 7-2
• 7.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards, page 7-2
• 7.4 Monitoring Optical Performance, page 7-5
• 7.4.1 Related Procedures for TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards, page 7-6
7.1 Card Overview
The T-DCU card provides a selectable set of discrete negative chromatic dispersion values to compensate
for chromatic dispersion of the transmission line. The card operates over the entire C-band (in the range
of 1529.0 nm to 1562.5 nm) and monitors the optical power at the input and the output ports. The two
types of T-DCU line cards are:
• TDC-CC (Coarse T-DCU)
• TDC-FC (Fine T-DCU)
Note Each T-DCU card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf
assembly. Cards should be installed in slots that have the same symbols. See the “Card Slot
Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
7-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units
Safety Labels
7.1.1 Card Summary
Table 7-1 lists and summarizes the information about the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards.
7.2 Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
7.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards
The TDC-CC card provides 16 values of CD ranging from 0 to -1650 ps/nm with a granularity of
110 ps/nm in the C-band spectrum.
The TDC-FC card provides 16 values of CD ranging from 0 to -675 ps/nm with a granularity of 45 ps/nm
in the C-band spectrum.
You can configure the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards for the CD value listed in Table 7-2.
Table 7-1 T-DCU Cards
Card Port Description For Additional Information
TDC-CC The TDC-CC has one set of optical ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in slots 1
to 6 and slots 12 to 17.
See the 7.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC
Cards section.
TDC-FC The TDC-FC has one set of optical ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in slots 1
to 6 and slots 12 to 17.
Table 7-2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Tunable CD Value
Unit Configuration TDC-CC [ps/nm] TDC-FC [ps/nm]
0 0 1 02
1 -110 -45
2 -220 -90
3 -330 -135
4 -440 -180
5 -550 -225
6 -660 -270
7 -770 -315
8 -880 -360
9 -990 -405
10 -1100 -450
11 -1210 -495
12 -1320 -540
7-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units
TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards
7.3.1 Key Features
The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards provide the following features:
• Single slot card with three LEDs on the front panel.
• Two LC-PC-II optical connectors on the front panel.
• Operates in slots from slot 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
• Operates over the C-band (wavelengths from 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm) of the optical spectrum.
• Allows upto 16 provisionable CD values for chromatic dispersion compensation.
• Connects to OPT-PRE, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE amplifiers and
40-SMR-1 and 40-SMR-2 cards.
• Supports performance monitoring and alarm handling for selectable thresholds.
• Allows monitoring and provisioning using CTC, SNMP, or TL1.
7.3.2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Faceplate Diagram
Figure 7-1 shows the TDC-CC and TDC-FC faceplate diagram. The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards can be
installed or pulled out of operation from any user interface slot, without impacting other service cards
operating within that shelf.
13 -1430 -585
14 -1540 -630
15 -1650 -675
1. The default value of the TDC-CC CD value for Coarse Unit is 0.
2. The default value of the TDC-FC value for Fine Unit is 0.
Table 7-2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Tunable CD Value
Unit Configuration TDC-CC [ps/nm] TDC-FC [ps/nm]
7-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units
TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards
Figure 7-1 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Faceplates
Note The coarse T-DCU is identified with the card label as TDC-CC and the fine T-DCU with TDC-FC in the
faceplate of the T-DCU card.
7.3.3 Functioning of Optical Ports
The T-DCU unit contains the DC-RX (input) and DC-TX (output) ports. The optical signal enters the
DC-RX port, compensates the chromatic dispersion and then exits from the DC-TX port.
TDC-CC
FAIL
ACT
SF
DC
RX
TX
TDC-FC
FAIL
ACT
SF
DC
RX
TX
Any of the 12
general purpose slots
276444
7-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units
Monitoring Optical Performance
7.3.4 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Block Diagram
The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards embed an optical module with four spools (D1, D2, D3, and D4) of
dispersion compensating fiber that connects through the 2x2 bypass switches (Figure 7-2). Each bypass
switch allows the corresponding dispersion compensation fiber spools to connect to the optical path from
the DC-RX (input port) to the DC-TX (output port). The switch configuration selects the requested CD
value and combines the four spools based on the 16 chromatic dispersion compensation values fetched.
The photo diodes PD1 and PD2 are used to monitor the input and output ports respectively.
Figure 7-2 Block Diagram of TDC-CC and TDC-FC
7.3.5 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards Functions
The functions of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards are:
• G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
7.4 Monitoring Optical Performance
The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards monitor the optical input power and optical output power of the fiber.
It monitors the insertion loss from the input (DC-RX) to the output (DC-TX) port, with the help of the
two photodiodes PD1 and PD2. The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards report the minimum, average, and
maximum power statistics of each of the monitored ports or channels in the specific card. To view the
optical power statistics of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards, refer to the Monitor Performance document.
The performance data is recorded at 15 minutes and 24 hours intervals.
Note You can view the performance monitoring (PM) data of the card using CTC, SNMP, and TL1 interfaces.
Note The PM data is stored on a wrap-around basis at 32 x 15 min. and 2 x 24 hour intervals.
276445
2x2
Switch
D1
2x2
Switch
D2
2x2
Switch
D3
2x2
Switch
D4
S1
S2
S3
S4
DC-RX
DC-TX
PD1 PD2
7-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units
Monitoring Optical Performance
7.4.1 Related Procedures for TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TDC-CC and
TDC-FC cards:
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• DLP-G525 View Optical Power Statistics for TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards
• NTP-G240 Modify TDC-CC and TDC-FC Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-76
• NTP-G242 Modify the CD setting of TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards
• NTP-G119 Power Down the Node, page 24-27
CH A P T E R
8-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
8
Provision Protection Switching Module
This chapter describes the Protection Switching Module (PSM) card used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense
wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For card safety and compliance information, refer
to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms
document.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Chapter topics include:
• 8.1 PSM Card Overview
• 8.1.6 Related Procedures for PSM Card, page 8-5
8.1 PSM Card Overview
The PSM card performs splitter protection functions. In the transmit (TX) section of the PSM card (see
Figure 8-1), the signal received on the common receive port is duplicated by a hardware splitter to both
the working and protect transmit ports. In the receive (RX) section of the PSM card (Figure 8-1), a
switch is provided to select one of the two input signals (on working and protect receive ports) to be
transmitted through the common transmit port.
The PSM card supports multiple protection configurations:
• Channel protection—The PSM COM ports are connected to the TXP/MXP trunk ports.
• Line (or path) protection—The PSM working (W) and protect (P) ports are connected directly to the
external line.
• Multiplex section protection—The PSM is equipped between the MUX/DMX stage and the
amplification stage.
• Standalone—The PSM can be equipped in any slot and supports all node configurations.
The PSM card is a single-slot card that can be installed in any node from Slot 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The
PSM card includes six LC-PC-II optical connectors on the front panel. In channel protection
configuration, the PSM card can be installed in a different shelf from its peer TXP/MXP card.
8-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 8 Provision Protection Switching Module
PSM Card Overview
Note It is strongly recommended that you use the default layouts designed by Cisco Transport Planner,
which place the PSM card and its peer TXP/MXP card as close as possible to simplify cable
management.
For more information on the node configurations supported for the PSM card, see the 12.3 Supported
Node Configurations for PSM Card, page 12-46.
For more information on the network topologies supported for the PSM card, see the 13.6 Network
Topologies for the PSM Card, page 13-19.
8.1.1 Key Features
The PSM card provides the following features:
• Operates over the C-band (wavelengths from 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm) and L-band (wavelengths from
1570.5 nm to 1604 nm) of the optical spectrum.
• Implements bidirectional non-revertive protection scheme. For more details on bidirectional
switching, see the “8.1.5 PSM Bidirectional Switching” section on page 8-4.
• Supports automatic creation of splitter protection group when the PSM card is provisioned.
• Supports switching priorities based on ITU-T G.873.1.
• Supports performance monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds.
• Supports automatic laser shutdown (ALS), a safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. ALS
is applicable only in line protection configuration. For information about using the card to
implement ALS in a network, see the 13.11 Network Optical Safety, page 13-30.
8.1.2 PSM Block Diagram
Figure 8-1 shows a simplified block diagram of the PSM card.
8-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 8 Provision Protection Switching Module
PSM Card Overview
Figure 8-1 PSM Block Diagram
8.1.3 PSM Faceplate Ports
The PSM card has six optical ports located on the faceplate:
• COM-RX (receive) is the input signal port.
• COM-TX (transmit) is the output signal port.
• W-RX is the working input signal port (receive section).
• W-TX is the working output signal port (transmit section).
• P-RX is the protect input signal port (receive section).
• P-TX is the protect output signal port (transmit section).
All ports are equipped with photodiodes to monitor optical power and other related thresholds. The
COM-RX port is equipped with a virtual photodiode (firmware calculations of port optical power) to
monitor optical power. The W-RX, P-RX, W-TX, and P-TX ports have optical power regulation, which
are provided by variable optical attenuators (VOA). All VOAs equipped within the PSM card work in
control attenuation mode.
Figure 8-2 shows the PSM card faceplate.
270910
TX Section
RX Section
COM-RX
W-TX
P-TX
W-RX
P-RX
COM-TX
PD5
VOA3
1x2
Switch
50/50
Splitter
PD2
PD4
PD3
VOA1 PD1
VOA2
Virtual
PD
8-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 8 Provision Protection Switching Module
PSM Card Overview
Figure 8-2 PSM Card Faceplate
8.1.4 PSM Card-Level Indicators
Table G-1 describes the card-level indicators on the card.
8.1.5 PSM Bidirectional Switching
A VOA is equipped after the hardware splitter within the PSM card. The VOA implements bidirectional
switching when there is a single fiber cut in a protection configuration involving two peer PSM cards.
Figure 8-3 shows a sample configuration that explains the bidirectional switching capability of the PSM
card.
270911
PSM
FAIL
ACT
SF
COM P
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
W 1345567
Any of the 12
general purpose slots
8-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 8 Provision Protection Switching Module
PSM Card Overview
Figure 8-3 PSM Bidirectional Switching
In this example, there is a fiber cut in the working path from Station A to Station B as shown in
Figure 8-3. As a result of the fiber cut, an LOS alarm is raised on the W-RX port of Station B and it
immediately switches traffic on to its P-RX port. Station B simultaneously also stops transmission (for
approximately 25 milliseconds) on its W-TX port, which raises an LOS alarm on the W-RX port of
Station A. This causes Station A to also switch traffic to its P-RX port. In this way, PSM implements
bidirectional switching without any data exchange between the two stations.
Since the two stations do not communicate using signaling protocols (overhead bytes), a Manual or
Force protection switch on the PSM card is implemented by creating a traffic hit. For example, consider
that you perform a Manual or Force protection switch on Station A. The TX VOA on the active path is
set to automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) state for 25 milliseconds. This causes Station B to switch traffic
to the other path because it cannot differentiate between a maintenance operation and a real fail. After
25 milliseconds, the VOA in Station A is automatically reset. However, Station B will not revert back by
itself because of nonrevertive switching protection scheme used in the PSM card.
To effectively implement switching, the Lockout and Force commands must be performed on both the
stations. If these commands are not performed on both the stations, the far-end and near-end PSMs can
be misaligned. In case of misalignment, when a path recovers, traffic might not recover automatically.
You might have to perform a Force protection switch to recover traffic.
Note The order in which you repair the paths is important in the event of a double failure (both the working
and protect paths are down due to a fiber cut) on the PSM card in line protection configuration when the
active path is the working path. If you repair the working path first, traffic is automatically restored.
However, if you repair the protect path first, traffic is not automatically restored. You must perform a
Force protection switch to restore traffic on the protect path.
8.1.6 Related Procedures for PSM Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the PSM card:
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G202 Modify PSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-47
• NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually, page 14-114
270915
TX Section
RX Section
COM-RX
W-TX
P-TX
W-RX
P-RX
W-RX
P-RX
W-TX
P-TX
COM-TX
PD5
RX Section
TX Section
COM-TX
COM-RX
PD3
PD4
PD2
PD1
A B
PD3
PD4
PD2
PD1
PD5
8-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 8 Provision Protection Switching Module
PSM Card Overview
• DLP-G493 Provision Protected Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-44
• DLP-G479 View Optical Power Statistics for the PSM Card
• DLP-G176 Modify a Splitter Protection Group
• DLP-G459 Delete a Splitter Protection Group
CH A P T E R
9-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
9
Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
This chapter describes optical add/drop cards used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Regulatory
Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document.
Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco
ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Chapter topics include:
• 9.1 Card Overview, page 9-1
• 9.2 Safety Labels, page 9-9
• 9.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card, page 9-9
• 9.3.4 Related Procedures for AD-1C-xx.x Card
• 9.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card, page 9-12
• 9.4.5 Related Procedures for AD-2C-xx.x Card
• 9.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card, page 9-16
• 9.5.5 Related Procedures for AD-4C-xx.x Card
• 9.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card, page 9-20
• 9.6.4 Related Procedures for AD-1B-xx.x Card
• 9.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card, page 9-23
• 9.7.4 Related Procedures for AD-4B-xx.x Card
9.1 Card Overview
The card overview section contains card overview, software compatibility, interface class, and channel
allocation information for optical add/drop cards.
9-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see
the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
Optical add/drop cards are divided into two groups: band optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) cards
and channel OADM cards. Band OADM cards add and drop one or four bands of adjacent channels. The
cards in this chapter, including the 4-Band OADM (AD-4B-xx.x) and the 1-Band OADM (AD-1B-xx.x)
are utilized only in the C band. Channel OADM cards add and drop one, two, or four adjacent channels;
they include the 4-Channel OADM (AD-4C-xx.x), the 2-Channel OADM (AD-2C-xx.x), and the
1-Channel OADM (AD-1C-xx.x).
Note For information about L band add and drop capability, see Chapter 10, “Provision Reconfigurable
Optical Add/Drop Cards.”
9.1.1 Card Summary
Table 9-1 lists and summarizes the functions of the optical add/drop cards.
Table 9-1 Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Port Description For Additional Information
AD-1C-xx.x The AD-1C-xx.x card has three sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots
1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “9.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card”
section on page 9-9.
AD-2C-xx.x The AD-2C-xx.x card has four sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots
1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “9.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card”
section on page 9-12.
AD-4C-xx.x The AD-4C-xx.x card has six sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots
1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “9.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card”
section on page 9-16.
AD-1B-xx.x The AD-1B-xx.x card has three sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots
1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “9.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card”
section on page 9-20.
AD-4B-xx.x The AD-4B-xx.x card has six sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots
1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “9.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card”
section on page 9-23.
9-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
9.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 9-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for each optical add/drop card.
Table 9-2 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card
Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
AD-1C
-xx.x
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
AD-2C
-xx.x
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
AD-4C
-xx.x
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
AD-1B
-xx.x
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
AD-4B
-xx.x
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
9-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
9.1.3 Interface Classes
The AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x, and AD-4B-xx.x cards have different input
and output optical channel signals depending on the interface card where the input signal originates
from. The input interface cards have been grouped in classes listed in Table 9-3. The subsequent tables
list the optical performances and output power of each interface class.
Table 9-4 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards that provide signal input to the
optical add/drop cards.
Table 9-3 ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes
Input Power Class Card
A 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) with forward error correction (FEC)
enabled, 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L) with FEC enabled, 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C,
and 40ME-TXP-C), and 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C,
and 40ME-MXP-C)
B 10-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_10G) without FEC and the
10-Gbps muxponder card (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L), 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C), and 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C), and ADM-10G cards with FEC disabled
C OC-192 LR ITU cards (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L)
without FEC
D 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and
unprotected, with FEC enabled
E OC-48 100-GHz DWDM muxponder card (MXP_MR_2.5G) and 2.5-Gbps
multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and unprotected,
with FEC disabled and retime, reshape, and regenerate (3R) mode enabled
F 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and
unprotected, in regenerate and reshape (2R) mode
G OC-48 ELR 100 GHz card
H 2/4 port GbE transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz)
I TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L, 40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C cards with enhanced FEC (E-FEC) and the MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards with
E-FEC enabled
9-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
Table 9-5 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards that provide signal input to the
optical add/drop cards.
Table 9-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance
Parameter Class A Class B Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
(if appl.)
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Maximum bit rate 40 Gbps 40 Gbps 40 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes No Yes (E-FEC)
Threshold Optimum Average Optimum
Maximum BER2
2. BER = bit error rate
10–15 10–12 10–15
OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB
Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm
Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm
Transmitted Power Range3
3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM
cards.
40-Gbps multirate
transponder/40-Gbps
FEC transponder
(40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C)
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm +2.5 to 3.5 dBm —
OC-192 LR ITU — — —
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
+/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm
Table 9-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance
Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes No No Yes (E-FEC)
Threshold Optimum Average Average Optimum
Maximum BER2 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–15
OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB
9-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
2.5-Gbps cards that provide signal input to the optical add/drop cards have the interface performance
parameters listed in Table 9-6.
Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –22 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm
Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –9 dBm –8 dBm
Transmitted Power Range3
10-Gbps multirate
transponder/10-Gbps
FEC transponder
(TXP_MR_10G)
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm +2.5 to 3.5 dBm — —
OC-192 LR ITU — — +3.0 to 6.0
dBm
—
10-Gbps multirate
transponder/10-Gbps
FEC transponder
(TXP_MR_10E)
+3.0 to 6.0 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
+/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–1,000
ps/nm
+/–800 ps/nm
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
2. BER = bit error rate
3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards.
Table 9-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued)
Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Table 9-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance
Parameter Class D Class E Class F Class G Class H Class J
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if
appl.)
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 1.25 Gbps 2.5 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 2R 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes No No No No No
Threshold Average Average Average Average Average Average
Maximum BER 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12
OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 6 dB 14 dB 10 dB 15 dB 14 dB 11 dB 13 dB 8 dB 12 dB
Power sensitivity –31
dBm
–25
dBm
–30
dBm
–23
dBm
–24 dBm –27
dBm
–33
dBm
–28 dBm –18 dBm –26 dBm
Power overload –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –7 dBm –17dBm
9-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
9.1.4 DWDM Card Channel Allocation Plan
ONS 15454 DWDM channel OADM and band OADM cards are designed for use with specific channels
in the C band. In most cases, the channels for these cards are either numbered (for example, 1 to 32) or
delimited (odd or even). Client interfaces must comply with these channel assignments to be compatible
with the ONS 15454 system.
Table 9-7 lists the channel IDs and wavelengths assigned to the C-band DWDM channels.
Note In some cases, a card uses only some or all of the channels listed in a band. Also, some cards use channels
on the 100-GHz ITU-T grid while others use channels on the 50-GHz ITU-T grid. See specific card
descriptions in Appendix B, “Hardware Specifications,” for more details.
Transmitted Power Range1
TXP_MR_2.5G –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to
1.0 dBm
–2.0 to 0 dBm — —
TXPP_MR_2.5G –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to
–2.5 dBm
MXP_MR_2.5G — +2.0 to +4.0 dBm —
MXPP_MR_2.5G — –1.5 to +0.5 dBm —
2/4 port GbE
Transponder (GBIC
WDM 100GHz)
— — — — +2.5 to 3.5 dBm —
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
–1200 to
+5400 ps/nm
–1200 to
+5400 ps/nm
–1200 to
+3300
ps/nm
–1200 to
+3300 ps/nm
–1000 to +3600
ps/nm
–1000 to
+3200
ps/nm
1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards.
Table 9-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued)
Parameter Class D Class E Class F Class G Class H Class J
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if
appl.)
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
Table 9-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
9-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
Table 9-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band) (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
9-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
Safety Labels
9.2 Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
9.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card
Note For AD-1C-xx.x card specifications, see the “AD-1C-xx.x Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The 1-Channel OADM (AD-1C-xx.fx) card passively adds or drops one of the 32 channels utilized
within the 100-GHz-spacing of the DWDM card system. Thirty-two versions of this card—each
designed only for use with one wavelength—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. Each
wavelength version of the card has a different part number. The AD-1C-xx.x can be installed in Slots 1
to 6 and 12 to 17.
The AD-1C-xx.x has the following internal features:
• Two cascaded passive optical interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions.
• One software-controlled variable optical attenuator (VOA) regulates the optical power of the
inserted channel.
• Software-controlled VOA regulates the insertion loss of the express optical path.
• VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds, are internally controlled.
• Virtual photodiodes (firmware calculations of port optical power) at the common DWDM output and
input ports are monitored within the software.
9.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
Figure 9-1 shows the AD-1C-xx.x faceplate.
9-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-1C-xx.x Card
Figure 9-1 AD-1C-xx.x Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “9.2 Safety Labels” section on page 9-9.
Figure 9-2 shows a block diagram of the AD-1C-xx.x card.
AD-1C
-X.XX
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
EXP
TX
RX
COM
TX
96473
9-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-1C-xx.x Card
Figure 9-2 AD-1C-xx.x Block Diagram
Figure 9-3 shows the AD-1C-xx.x optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 9-3 AD-1C-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
9.3.2 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P4 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the
AD-1C-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-8.
Optical
Module
COM RX
COM TX
124074
uP8260
processor
DC/DC
converter
EXP TX
EXP RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCC M
SCL Bus
TCC P
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
Add Rx Drop Tx
98304
Control
Control
interface
Virtual photodiode
COM
RX
EXP
RX
EXP
TX
TX
Channel 15xx.xx
Physical photodiode RX
Variable optical attenuator
V1
P
COM
TX
P1
P3
P5 P4
V2 P2
V
Table 9-8 AD-1C-xx.x Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1 ADD DROP RX
P2 DROP DROP TX
9-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-2C-xx.x Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
9.3.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
9.3.4 Related Procedures for AD-1C-xx.x Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AD-1C-xx.x card:
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64
• “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127
• “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” procedure on
page 16-40
• “NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up” procedure on page 15-2
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” procedure on page 24-13
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” procedure on page 24-27
9.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card
Note For AD-2C-xx.x card specifications, see the “AD-2C-xx.x Card Specifications” section in theHardware
Specifications document.
The 2-Channel OADM (AD-2C-xx.x) card passively adds or drops two adjacent 100-GHz channels
within the same band. Sixteen versions of this card—each designed for use with one pair of
wavelengths—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card bidirectionally adds and drops in
two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both directions. Each version of the
card has a different part number.
The AD-2C-xx.x has the following features:
• Passive cascade of interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions.
P3 IN EXP EXP RX
P4 OUT EXP EXP TX
V1 IN COM COM RX
V2 OUT COM COM TX
Table 9-8 AD-1C-xx.x Port Calibration (continued)
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
9-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-2C-xx.x Card
• Two software-controlled VOAs in the add section, one for each add port, regulate the optical power
of inserted channels.
• Software-controlled VOAs regulate insertion loss on express channels.
• VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds are internally controlled.
• Virtual photodiodes (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common DWDM output and
input ports are monitored within the software.
9.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
Figure 9-4 shows the AD-2C-xx.x faceplate.
Figure 9-4 AD-2C-xx.x Faceplate
AD-2C
-X.XX
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
EXP
TX
RX
COM
TX
96474
9-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-2C-xx.x Card
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “9.2 Safety Labels” section on page 9-9.
Figure 9-5 shows a block diagram of the AD-2C-xx.x card.
Figure 9-5 AD-2C-xx.x Block Diagram
Figure 9-6 shows the AD-2C-xx.x optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 9-6 AD-2C-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
9.4.2 Wavelength Pairs
The AD-2C-xx.x cards are provisioned for the wavelength pairs listed in Table 9-9. In this table, channel
IDs are given rather than wavelengths. To compare channel IDs with the actual wavelengths they
represent, see wavelengths in Table 9-7 on page 9-7.
Optical
Module
COM RX
COM TX
98305
uP8260
processor
DC/DC
converter
EXP TX
EXP RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCC M
SCL Bus
TCC P
Power supply
input filters
BAT A&B
Add RX Drop TX Add RX Drop TX
CH 1 CH 2
98306
Control
Control
interface
Virtual photodiode
COM
RX
EXP
RX
EXP
TX
TX
Second
channel
TX RX RX
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
V
V1
V2
COM
TX
First
channel
P1
P
P3 P4
P2
P5
P7 P6
9-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-2C-xx.x Card
9.4.3 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P10 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the
AD-2C-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-10.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
9.4.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
Table 9-9 AD-2C-xx.x Channel Pairs
Band ID Add/Drop Channel ID
Band 30.3 (A) 30.3, 31.2
31.9, 32.6
Band 34.2 (B) 34.2, 35.0
35.8, 36.6
Band 38.1 (C) 38.1, 38.9
39.7, 40.5
Band 42.1 (D) 42.1, 42.9
43.7, 44.5
Band 46.1 (E) 46.1, 46.9
47.7, 48.5
Band 50.1 (F) 50.1, 50.9
51.7, 52.5
Band 54.1 (G) 54.1, 54.9
55.7, 56.5
Band 58.1 (H) 58.1, 58.9
59.7, 60.6
Table 9-10 AD-2C-xx.x Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P2 ADD COM TX
P3–P4 DROP DROP TX
P5 IN EXP EXP RX
P6 OUT EXP EXP TX
V1 IN COM COM RX
V2 OUT COM COM TX
9-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4C-xx.x Card
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
9.4.5 Related Procedures for AD-2C-xx.x Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AD-2C-xx.x card:
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64
• “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127
• “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” procedure on
page 16-40
• “NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up” procedure on page 15-2
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” procedure on page 24-13
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” procedure on page 24-27
9.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card
Note For AD-4C-xx.x card specifications, see the “AD-4C-xx.x Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The 4-Channel OADM (AD-4C-xx.x) card passively adds or drops all four 100-GHz-spaced channels
within the same band. Eight versions of this card—each designed for use with one band of
wavelengths—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card bidirectionally adds and drops in
two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both directions. There are eight versions
of this card with eight part numbers.
The AD-4C-xx.x has the following features:
• Passive cascade of interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions.
• Four software-controlled VOAs in the add section, one for each add port, regulate the optical power
of inserted channels.
• Two software-controlled VOAs regulate insertion loss on express and drop path, respectively.
• Internal control of the VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds.
• Software-monitored virtual photodiodes (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common
DWDM output and input ports.
9.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
Figure 9-7 shows the AD-4C-xx.x faceplate.
9-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4C-xx.x Card
Figure 9-7 AD-4C-xx.x Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “9.2 Safety Labels” section on page 9-9.
Figure 9-8 shows a block diagram of the AD-4C-xx.x card.
AD-4C
-X.XX
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
EXP
TX
RX
COM
TX
96475
9-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4C-xx.x Card
Figure 9-8 AD-4C-xx.x Block Diagram
Figure 9-9 shows the AD-4C-xx.x optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 9-9 AD-4C-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
9.5.2 Wavelength Sets
The AD-4C-xx.x cards are provisioned for the sets of four 100-GHz-spaced wavelengths shown
Table 9-11 on page 9-19.
Optical
Module
COM RX
COM TX
124075
uP8260
processor
DC/DC
converter
EXP TX
EXP RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCC M
SCL Bus
TCC P
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 1
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 2
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 3
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 4
98299
Control
Control
interface
4Ch OADM module
Virtual photodiode
COM
RX
COM
TX EXP RX
EXP TX
TX Channels RX Channels
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
V
V1
V2
P1
P9
P11 P10
P12
P2 P3 P4
P5 P6 P7 P8
P
9-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4C-xx.x Card
9.5.3 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P10 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the
AD-4C-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-12.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
9.5.4 AD-4C-xx.x Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
9.5.5 Related Procedures for AD-4C-xx.x Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AD-4C-xx.x card:
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64
• “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127
Table 9-11 AD-4C-xx.x Channel Sets
Band ID Add/Drop Wavelengths
Band 30.3 (A) 1530.3, 1531.2, 1531.9, 1532.6
Band 34.2 (B) 1534.2, 1535.0, 1535.8, 1536.6
Band 38.1 (C) 1538.1, 1538.9, 1539.7, 1540.5
Band 42.1 (D) 1542.1, 1542.9, 1543.7, 1544.5
Band 46.1 (E) 1546.1, 1546.9, 1547.7, 1548.5
Band 50.1 (F) 1550.1, 1550.9, 1551.7, 1552.5
Band 54.1 (G) 1554.1, 1554.9, 1555.7, 1556.5
Band 58.1 (H) 1558.1, 1558.9, 1559.7, 1560.6
Table 9-12 AD-4C-xx.x Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P4 ADD COM TX
P5–P8 DROP DROP TX
P9 IN EXP EXP RX
P10 OUT EXP EXP TX
V1 IN COM COM RX
V2 OUT COM COM TX
9-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-1B-xx.x Card
• “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” procedure on
page 16-40
• “NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up” procedure on page 15-2
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” procedure on page 24-13
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” procedure on page 24-27
9.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For AD-1B-xx.x card specifications, see the “AD-1B-xx.x Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The 1-Band OADM (AD-1B-xx.x) card passively adds or drops a single band of four adjacent
100-GHz-spaced channels. Eight versions of this card with eight different part numbers—each version
designed for use with one band of wavelengths—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card
bidirectionally adds and drops in two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both
directions. This card can be used when there is asymmetric adding and dropping on each side (east or
west) of the node; a band can be added or dropped on one side but not on the other.
The AD-1B xx.x can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to17 and has the following features:
• Passive cascaded interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions.
• Two software-controlled VOAs regulate the optical power flowing in the express and drop OADM
paths (drop section).
• Output power of the dropped band is set by changing the attenuation of the VOA drop.
• The VOA express is used to regulate the insertion loss of the express path.
• VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds are internally controlled.
• Virtual photodiode (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common DWDM output are
monitored within the software.
9.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
Figure 9-10 shows the AD-1B-xx.x faceplate.
9-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-1B-xx.x Card
Figure 9-10 AD-1B-xx.x Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “9.2 Safety Labels” section on page 9-9.
Figure 9-11 shows a block diagram of the AD-1B-xx.x card.
AD-1B
-X.XX
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
XX.X
TX
RX
EXP
TX
RX
COM
TX
96471
9-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-1B-xx.x Card
Figure 9-11 AD-1B-xx.x Block Diagram
Figure 9-12 shows the AD-1B-xx.x optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 9-12 AD-1B-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
9.6.2 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P4 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the
AD-1B-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-13.
Optical
Module
COM RX
COM TX
124073
uP8260
processor
DC/DC
converter
EXP TX
EXP RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCC M
SCL Bus
TCC P
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
Band xx.x
Rx
Band xx.x
Tx
98307
Control
Control
interface
Virtual photodiode
COM
RX
EXP
RX
EXP
TX
TX
Band xx.x
Physical photodiode RX
Physical photodiode
V
V2
V1
COM
TX P1 P3
P5 P4
P2
P
Table 9-13 AD-1B-xx.x Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1 ADD BAND RX
P2 DROP BAND TX
9-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4B-xx.x Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
9.6.3 AD-1B-xx.x Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
9.6.4 Related Procedures for AD-1B-xx.x Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AD-1B-xx.x card:
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64
• “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127
• “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” procedure on
page 16-40
• “NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up” procedure on page 15-2
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” procedure on page 24-13
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” procedure on page 24-27
9.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The 4-Band OADM (AD-4B-xx.x) card passively adds or drops four bands of four adjacent
100-GHz-spaced channels. Two versions of this card with different part numbers—each version
designed for use with one set of bands—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card
bidirectionally adds and drops in two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both
directions. This card can be used when there is asymmetric adding and dropping on each side (east or
west) of the node; a band can be added or dropped on one side but not on the other.
The AD1B-xx.x can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and has the following features:
• Five software-controlled VOAs regulate the optical power flowing in the OADM paths.
• Output power of each dropped band is set by changing the attenuation of each VOA drop.
P3 IN EXP EXP RX
P4 OUT EXP EXP TX
V1 IN COM COM RX
V2 OUT COM COM TX
Table 9-13 AD-1B-xx.x Port Calibration (continued)
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
9-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4B-xx.x Card
• The VOA express is used to regulate the insertion loss of the express path.
• VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds are internally controlled.
• Virtual photodiode (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common DWDM output port
are monitored within the software.
9.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
Figure 9-13 shows the AD-4B-xx.x faceplate.
Figure 9-13 AD-4B-xx.x Faceplate
For information on safety labels for the card, see the “9.2 Safety Labels” section on page 9-9.
Figure 9-14 shows a block diagram of the AD-4B-xx.x card.
AD-4B
-X.XX
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
XX.X
TX
RX
XX.X
TX
RX
XX.X
TX
RX
XX.X
TX
RX
EXP
TX
RX
COM
TX
96472
9-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4B-xx.x Card
Figure 9-14 AD-4B-xx.x Block Diagram
Figure 9-15 shows the AD-4B-xx.x optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 9-15 AD-4B-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
9.7.2 Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P11 and virtual photodiode V1 monitor the power for the AD-4B-xx.x
card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-14.
Optical
Module
COM RX
COM TX
124075
uP8260
processor
DC/DC
converter
EXP TX
EXP RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCC M
SCL Bus
TCC P
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 1
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 2
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 3
Add
Rx
Drop
Tx
Channel 4
Virtual photodiode
COM
RX
TX
B30.3 or B46.1
RX
Control
Control
interface
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
V
V1
EXP
RX
EXP
TX
COM
TX
TX
B34.2 or B50.1
RX TX
B38.1 or B54.1
RX TX RX
B42.1 or B58.1
98308
P1
P
P2 P3 P4 P9
P11 P12 P10
P5 P6 P7 P8
9-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards
AD-4B-xx.x Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
9.7.3 AD-4B-xx.x Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
9.7.4 Related Procedures for AD-4B-xx.x Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AD-4B-xx.x card:
• “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64
• “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127
• “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” procedure on
page 16-40
• “NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up” procedure on page 15-2
• NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance
• “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” procedure on page 24-13
• NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards
• “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” procedure on page 24-27
Table 9-14 AD-4B-xx.x Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P4 ADD COM TX
P5–P8 DROP DROP TX
P9 IN EXP EXP RX
P10 OUT EXP EXP TX
P11 IN COM COM RX
V1 OUT COM COM TX
CH A P T E R
10-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
10
Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
This chapter describes the Cisco ONS 15454 cards deployed in reconfigurable optical add/drop
(ROADM) networks. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance
and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document.
Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco
ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Chapter topics include:
• 10.1 Card Overview, page 10-2
• 10.2 Safety Labels, page 10-15
• 10.3 32WSS Card, page 10-16
• 10.3.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS Card, page 10-22
• 10.4 32WSS-L Card, page 10-22
• 10.4.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS-L Card, page 10-29
• 10.5 32DMX Card, page 10-29
• 10.5.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX Card, page 10-33
• 10.6 32DMX-L Card, page 10-34
• 10.6.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX-L Card, page 10-38
• 10.7 40-DMX-C Card, page 10-39
• 10.7.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-C Card, page 10-43
• 10.8 40-DMX-CE Card, page 10-44
• 10.8.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-CE Card, page 10-48
• 10.9 40-MUX-C Card, page 10-49
• 10.9.5 Related Procedures for 40-MUX-C Card, page 10-53
• 10.10 40-WSS-C Card, page 10-54
10-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
• 10.10.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-C Card, page 10-60
• 10.11 40-WSS-CE Card, page 10-60
• 10.11.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-CE Card, page 10-67
• 10.12 40-WXC-C Card, page 10-67
• 10.12.5 Related Procedures for 40-WXC-C Card, page 10-73
• 10.13 80-WXC-C Card, page 10-73
• 10.13.5 Related Procedures for 80-WXC-C Card, page 10-80
• 10.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards, page 10-80
• 10.14.5 Related Procedures for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card, page 10-90
• 10.15 MMU Card, page 10-90
• 10.15.4 Related Procedures for MMU Card, page 10-93
Note This chapter contains information about cards that perform mesh topology functions. Multiplexer and
demultiplexer cards that do not perform these functions are described in Chapter 6, “Provision
Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards.”
10.1 Card Overview
The ROADM cards include six add drop cards utilized in the C-band (32WSS, 32DMX, 32DMX-C,
40-MUX-C, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, and MMU), two add drop cards utilized for the L-band (32WSS-L,
and 32DMX-L), and two single module ROADM (SMR) cards utilized in the C-band (40-SMR1-C and
40-SMR2-C).
This section provides card summary, compatibility, channel allocation, and safety information.
Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots that have the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see the
“Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
10.1.1 Card Summary
Table 10-1 lists and summarizes information about each ROADM card.
Table 10-1 ROADM Card Summary
Card Port Description For Additional Information
32WSS The 32WSS card has seven sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “10.3 32WSS Card”
section on page 10-16
32WSS-L The 32WSS-L card has seven sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “10.4 32WSS-L Card”
section on page 10-22
10-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
32DMX The 32DMX has five sets of ports located on
the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and
12 to 17.
See the “10.5 32DMX Card”
section on page 10-29
32DMX-L The 32DMX-L has five sets of ports located
on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6
and 12 to 17.
See the “10.6 32DMX-L Card”
section on page 10-34
40-DMX-C The 40-DMX-C has six sets of ports located
on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6
and 12 to 17.
See the “10.7 40-DMX-C Card”
section on page 10-39
40-DMX-CE The 40-DMX-CE has six sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
See the “10.8 40-DMX-CE
Card” section on page 10-44
40-MUX-C The 40-MUX-C has six sets of ports located
on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6
and 12 to 17.
See the “10.9 40-MUX-C Card”
section on page 10-49.
40-WSS-C The 40-WSS-C card has eight sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “10.10 40-WSS-C
Card” section on page 10-54
40-WSS-CE The 40-WSS-CE card has eight sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “10.11 40-WSS-CE
Card” section on page 10-60
40-WXC-C The 40-WXC-C card has five sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “10.12 40-WXC-C
Card” section on page 10-67
80-WXC-C The 80-WXC-C card has 14 ports located on
the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and
12 to 16.
See the “10.13 80-WXC-C
Card” section on page 10-73.
40-SMR1-C The 40-SMR1-C card has six sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “10.14 Single Module
ROADM (SMR-C) Cards”
section on page 10-80
40-SMR2-C The 40-SMR2-C card has six sets of ports
located on the faceplate. It operates in
Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16.
See the “10.14 Single Module
ROADM (SMR-C) Cards”
section on page 10-80
MMU The MMU card has six sets of ports located
on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6
and 12 to 17.
See the “10.15 MMU Card”
section on page 10-90
Table 10-1 ROADM Card Summary (continued)
Card Port Description For Additional Information
10-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
10.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 10-2 lists the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software compatibility for the ROADM cards.
Table 10-2 Software Release Compatibility for ROADM Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
32WSS No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
32WSS-L No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
40-WSS-C No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40-WSS-CE No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
32DMX No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
32DMX-L No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
40-DMX-C No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40-DMX-C
E
No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40-MUX-C No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40-WXC-C No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
10-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
80-WXC-C No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40-SMR1-CNo No No No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40-SMR2-CNo No No No No No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MMU No No No No No 15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
Table 10-2 Software Release Compatibility for ROADM Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
10-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
10.1.3 Interface Classes
The input interface cards have been grouped in classes listed in Table 10-3. The subsequent tables list
the optical performance and output power of each interface class.
Table 10-3 Cisco ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes
Input Power Class Card
A 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L), 10-Gbps muxponder cards
(MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L) with
forward error correction (FEC) enabled, 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C,
and 40ME-TXP-C), and 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40G-MXP-C,
40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C)
B 10-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_10G) and muxponder card
(MXP_2.5G_10G) without FEC
C OC-192 LR ITU cards without FEC, 10-Gbps multirate transponder
(TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) and muxponder
(MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_MR_10DME_L) cards with
FEC disabled
D 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and
unprotected, with FEC enabled
E OC-48 100-GHz dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) muxponder
card (MXP_MR_2.5G) and 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card
(TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected; FEC disabled; and retime, reshape,
and regenerate (3R) mode enabled
F 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected,
in regenerate and reshape (2R) mode
G OC-48 ELR 100 GHz card
H 2/4 port GbE transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz)
I 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and
TXP_MR_10E_L) and 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_MR_10DME_L) with enhanced FEC (E-FEC)
enabled, 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C), and
40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C)
K OC-192/STM-64 LR ITU cards without FEC, 100GHz 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder
(GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G),
OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC disabled
L 40Gbps Duobinary CRS-1 DWDM ITU-T line card
M 2.5 Gbps DWDM ITU-T SPF
N 10Gbps enhanced full tunable transponder (TXP_MR_10E_C) and muxponder
(MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_MR_10DME_C) with E-FEC enabled
O 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), 10Gbps
Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC
enabled
10-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
Table 10-4 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards.
P 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), 10Gbps
Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with E-FEC
enabled
T 40Gbps DPSK CRS-1 DWDM ITU-T line card
V OC-192/STM-64 LR ITU cards without FEC, full tunable 10Gbps Ethernet
Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), Sonet/SDH add/drop
(ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC disabled, full tunable
W 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE),
Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC
enabled, full tunable
X 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE),
Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with E-FEC
enabled, full tunable
Y 10Gbps enhanced full tunable transponder (TXP_MR_10EX_C) and muxponder
(MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, MXP_MR_10DMEX_C), with FEC enabled and
maximum likelihood sequence estimator (MLSE) correction
Z 10Gbps enhanced full tunable transponder (TXP_MR_10EX_C) and muxponder
(MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, MXP_MR_10DMEX_C), with E-FEC enabled and MLSE
correction
Table 10-3 Cisco ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes (continued)
Input Power Class Card
Table 10-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance
Parameter Class A Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R
FEC Yes Yes (E-FEC)
Threshold Optimum Optimum
Maximum BER2 10–15 10–15
OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 20 dB 8 dB
Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm
Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm
Transmitted Power Range3
40-Gbps multirate
transponder/40-Gbps
FEC transponder
(40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C)
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm —
10-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
Table 10-5, Table 10-6, and Table 10-7 lists the optical performance parameters for 10-Gbps cards.
OC-192 LR ITU — —
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
+/–800 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
2. BER = bit error rate
3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input
power values for the OADM cards.
Table 10-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued)
Parameter Class A Class I
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
(if appl.)
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
(if appl.)
Table 10-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class A, B, C, I, and K)
Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I Class K
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limit
ed
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limite
d
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Maximum
bit rate
10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps
Regeneratio
n
3R 3R 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes No No Yes (E-FEC) No
Threshold Optimum Average Average Optimum Average
Maximum
BER2
10–15 10–12 10–12 10–15 10–12
OSNR1
sensitivity
23 dB 8.5 dB 23 dB 19 dB 19 dB 19 dB 20 dB
6 dB
23 dB3 16 dB3
23 dB4 17 dB4
23 dB5 17 dB5
Power
sensitivity
–24
dBm
–18
dBm
–21
dBm
–20
dBm
–22
dBm
–22
dBm
–26 dBm –18
dBm
–24
dBm3
–17
dBm3
–23
dBm4
–18
dBm4
–23
dBm5
–17
dBm5
Power
overload
–8 dBm –8 dBm –9 dBm –8 dBm –7 dBm
10-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
Transmitted Power Range6
10-Gbps
multirate
transponder/
10-Gbps
FEC
transponder
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm
(for
TXP_MR_10G)
+3.0 to 6.0 dBm
(for
TXP_MR_10E)
+2.5 to 3.5 dBm +3.0 to 6.0
dBm
+3.0 to 6.0 dBm —
OC-192 LR
ITU
— — +3.0 to 6.0
dBm
— –1.0 to +3.0 dBm
10-Gbps
Ethernet
Xponder,
Sonet/SDH
Add/Drop,
OTU2
Xponder
— — — — –1.0 to +3.0 dBm
Dispersion
compensatio
n tolerance
+/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm –400 to +800 ps/nm
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
2. BER = bit error rate
3. This value is for Xen Pak XFP used with Catalyst card.
4. This value is for XFP used with Catalyst, Xponder, and ADM-10G cards.
5. This value is for X2 XFP used with Catalyst card.
6. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the optical add drop multiplexer
(OADM) cards.
Table 10-6 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class N, O, P, and V)
Parameter Class N Class O Class P Class V
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes (E-FEC) Yes Yes (E-FEC) No
Threshold Optimum Optimum Optimum Average
Maximum BER2 10–15 10–15 10–15 10–12
OSNR1 sensitivity 19 dB 5 dB 11 dB 11 dB 23 dB 8 dB 23 dB 16 dB
Power sensitivity –27
dBm
–20
dBm
–18 dBm –18
dBm
–27 dBm –18
dBm
–24 dBm –18
dBm
Table 10-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class A, B, C, I, and K) (continued)
Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I Class K
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limit
ed
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limite
d
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
10-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
Power overload –8 dBm –7 dBm –7 dBm –7 dBm
Transmitted Power Range3
10-Gbps multirate
transponder/10-Gbp
s FEC transponder
+3.0 to 6.0 dBm — — —
OC-192 LR ITU — — — 0 to +3.0 dBm
10-Gbps Ethernet
Xponder,
Sonet/SDH
Add/Drop, OTU2
Xponder
— –1.0 to +3.0 dBm –1.0 to +3.0 dBm 0 to +3.0 dBm
Dispersion
compensation
tolerance
+/–800 ps/nm –500 to +1100 ps/nm –500 to +1100 ps/nm –500 to +1600 ps/nm
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
2. BER = bit error rate
3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the optical add drop multiplexer (OADM)
cards.
Table 10-7 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class W, X, Y, and Z)
Parameter Class W Class X Class Y Class Z
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R
FEC Yes Yes (E-FEC) Yes Yes (E-FEC)
Threshold Optimum Optimum Optimum Optimum
Maximum BER2 10–15 10–15 10–15 10–15
OSNR1 sensitivity 8.5 dB 8.5 dB 19 dB 5 dB 23 dB 8 dB 19 dB 5.5 dB
Power sensitivity –18
dBm
–18
dBm
–27 dBm –20
dBm
–24 dBm –20
dBm
–27 dBm –20
dBm
Power overload –7 dBm –7 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm
Transmitted Power Range3
10-Gbps multirate
transponder/10-Gbps FEC
transponder
— — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm
OC-192 LR ITU — — — —
Table 10-6 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class N, O, P, and V) (continued)
Parameter Class N Class O Class P Class V
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
10-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
Table 10-8 and Table 10-9 lists the optical interface performance parameters for 2.5-Gbps cards.
10-Gbps Ethernet Xponder,
Sonet/SDH Add/Drop, OTU2
Xponder
0 to +3.0 dBm 0 to +3.0 dBm — —
Dispersion compensation
tolerance
–500 to +1100
ps/nm
–500 to +1300 ps/nm –800 to +1600 ps/nm –2200 to +3700 ps/nm
1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio
2. BER = bit error rate
3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the optical add drop multiplexer (OADM) cards.
Table 10-7 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class W, X, Y, and Z) (continued)
Parameter Class W Class X Class Y Class Z
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR1
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Table 10-8 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class D, E, and F)
Parameter Class D Class E Class F
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 2R
FEC Yes No No
Threshold Average Average Average
Maximum BER 10–15 10–12 10–12
OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 5 dB 14 dB 10 dB 15 dB 15 dB
Power sensitivity –31 dBm –25 dBm –30 dBm –23 dBm –24 dBm –24 dBm
Power overload –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm
Transmitted Power Range1
1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards.
TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G
–1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm
MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G
— +2.0 to +4.0 dBm —
OC-48 ELR 100 GHz — — —
2/4 port GbE Transponder
(GBIC WDM 100GHz)
— — —
2.5 Gbps DWDM ITU-T
SPF
— — —
Dispersion compensation
tolerance
–1200 to
+5400 ps/nm
–1200 to
+5400 ps/nm
–1200 to +3300 ps/nm
10-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
10.1.4 Channel Allocation Plans
ONS 15454 DWDM ROADM cards are designed for use with specific channels in the C band and
L band. In most cases, the channels for these cards are either numbered (for example, 1 to 32 or 1 to 40)
or delimited (odd or even). Client interfaces must comply with these channel assignments to be
compatible with the ONS 15454 system.
. The following cards operate in the C-band:
• 32WSS
• 32DMX
• 32DMX-C
• 40-MUX-C
• 40-WXC-C
Table 10-9 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class G, H, and M)
Parameter Class G Class H Class M
Type
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Power
Limited
OSNR
Limited
Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 1.25 Gbps 2.5 Gbps
Regeneration 3R 3R 3R
FEC No No No
Threshold Average Average Average
Maximum BER 10–12 10–12 10–12
OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 11 dB 13 dB 8 dB 14 dB 9 dB
Power sensitivity –27 dBm –23 dBm –28 dBm –18 dBm –28 dBm –22 dBm
Power overload –9 dBm –7 dBm –9 dBm
Transmitted Power Range1
1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards.
TXP_MR_2.5G — — —
TXPP_MR_2.5G —
MXP_MR_2.5G –2.0 to 0 dBm
MXPP_MR_2.5G —
OC-48 ELR 100 GHz — — —
2/4 port GbE
Transponder (GBIC
WDM 100GHz)
–1200 to +3300 ps/nm 0 to +3 dBm —
2.5 Gbps DWDM
ITU-T SPF
— 0 to +4 dBm
Dispersion
compensation tolerance
–1000 to +3600 ps/nm –800 to +2400 ps/nm
10-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
• 80-WXC-C
• 40-SMR1-C
• 40-SMR2-C
• MMU
Table 10-10 lists the C-band channel IDs and wavelengths at ITU-T 50-GHz intervals. This is a
comprehensive C-band channel table that encompasses present and future card capabilities.
.
Table 10-10 DWDM C-Band1 Channel Allocation Plan with 50-GHz Spacing
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz) Wavelength (nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
10-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Card Overview
The following add drop cards utilize the L-band DWDM channels:
• 32WSS-L
• 32DMX-L
Table 10-11 lists the L-band channel IDs and wavelengths at ITU-T 50-GHz intervals. This is a
comprehensive L-band channel table that encompasses present and future card capabilities.
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
1. Channels on the C-band are 4-skip-1, starting at 1530.33 nm.
Table 10-10 DWDM C-Band1 Channel Allocation Plan with 50-GHz Spacing (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz) Wavelength (nm)
Table 10-11 DWDM L-band1 Channel Allocation Plan at 50 GHz Spacing
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz) Wavelength (nm)
1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46
2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88
3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30
4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73
5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15
6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57
7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99
8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41
9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83
10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26
11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68
12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10
13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52
10-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Safety Labels
10.2 Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4.
14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95
15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37
16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79
17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22
18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64
19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06
20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49
21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91
22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34
23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76
24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19
25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62
26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04
27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47
28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89
29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32
30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75
31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17
32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60
33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03
34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46
35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88
36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31
37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74
38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17
39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60
40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03
1. Channels on the L-band are contiguous, starting at 1577.86 nm. The channels listed in this table begin with 1570.83 nm for
backward compatibility with other ONS products.
Table 10-11 DWDM L-band1 Channel Allocation Plan at 50 GHz Spacing (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz) Wavelength (nm)
10-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS Card
10.3 32WSS Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For 32WSS card specifications, see the “32WSS Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The two-slot 32-Channel Wavelength Selective Switch (32WSS) card performs channel add/drop
processing within the ONS 15454 DWDM node. The 32WSS card can be installed in the following pairs
of slots:
• Slots 1 and 2
• Slots 3 and 4
• Slots 5 and 6
• Slots 12 and 13
• Slots 14 and 15
• Slots 16 and 17
10.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 32WSS has six types of ports:
• ADD RX ports (1 to 32): These ports are used for adding channels (listed in Table 10-13 on
page 10-21). Each add channel is associated with an individual switch element that selects whether
that channel is added. Each add port has optical power regulation provided by a variable optical
attenuator (VOA). The 32WSS has four physical receive connectors that accept multifiber push-on
(MPO) cables on its front panel for the client input interfaces. Each MPO cable breaks out into eight
separate cables.
• EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 32WSS card in the same
network element (NE).
• EXP TX port: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 32WSS card within the NE.
• COM TX port: The COM TX (line input) port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster
amplifier card (for example, OPT-BST) for transmission outside of the NE.
• COM RX port: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the
OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter.
• DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split-off optical signal containing drop channels to
the 32DMX card, where the channels are further processed and dropped.
Figure 10-1 shows the 32WSS card front panel and identifies the traffic flow through the ports.
10-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS Card
Figure 10-1 32WSS Faceplate and Ports
Figure 10-2 provides a high-level functional block diagram of the 32WSS card and Figure 10-3 shows
how optical signals are processed on the EXP RX and COM RX ports.
115291
FAIL
ACT
SF
54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6
DROP
TX TX
RX
EXP
RX
TX
COM
RX
TX
ADD RX
32WSS
32 Add Ports
Add 1-8
Add 9-16
Add 17-24
Add 25-32
DROP TX
EXP RX
EXP TX
COM RX
COM TX
10-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS Card
Figure 10-2 32WSS Block Diagram
Aggregate optical signals that enter the EXP RX and COM RX port are processed in two ways: Add
channel/pass-through and optical splitter processing. The optical processing stages are shown in
Figure 10-3, which provides a detailed optical functional diagram of the 32WSS card.
EXP RX port
(In from other 32WSS
within the network element)
EXP TX port
(To the other 32WSS
within the network element)
DROP TX port
dropped channels
(To COM RX port
of 32DMX)
COM RX port
(In from preamplifier,
OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM)
COM TX port
(To OPT-BST or
OSC-CSM)
115293
32 add ports
Add 1 Add 2 Add 32
Optical
splitter
Add channel
or pass-through
Wavelength
selective switch
10-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS Card
Figure 10-3 32WSS Optical Block Diagram
The EXP RX PORT and COM RX PORT operate as follows:
• EXP RX Port Add Channel/Pass-through Processing
The incoming optical signal is received at the EXP RX port from the other 32WSS card within the
NE. The incoming aggregate optical signal is demultiplexed into 32 individual wavelengths, or
channels. Each channel is then individually processed by the optical switch, which performs
add/pass-through processing. By using software controls, the switch either selects the optical
channel coming in from the demultiplexer (that is, the pass-through channel) or it selects the
external ADD channel. If the ADD port channel is selected this channel is transmitted and the
optical signal coming from the demultiplexer is blocked.
After the optical switch stage, all of the channels are multiplexed into an aggregate optical signal,
which is sent out on the COM TX port. The output is typically connected to an OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E card (in the event a booster amplifier is needed) or to an OSC-CSM card (if no
amplification is needed).
• COM RX Port Optical Splitter Processing
The COM RX port receives the incoming optical signal and directs it to the 32WSS card’s optical
splitter. The splitter optically diverts channels that are designated to be dropped to the DROP TX
port. The DROP TX port is typically connected to the COM RX port of the 32DMX where the drop
channels are being dropped. Channels that are not dropped pass-through the optical splitter and flow
out of the 32WSS card EXP TX port. Typically, this optical signal is connected to the other 32WSS
module within the NE.
• COM TX Port Monitoring
1
2
32
Add 32
32
1 pass-through
EXP RX port
(In from 32WSS)
EXP TX port
(To 32WSS)
DROP TX port
(To 32DMX)
2 pass-through
32 pass-through
Optical
splitter
Dropped
channels
2
Photodiode
VOA
COM RX port
(In from OPT-PRE
preamplifier or
OSC-CSM)
COM TX port
(To OPT-BST
or OSC-CSM)
Add 2
2
Add 1
1
115292
Optical
DMUX
(AWG)
Optical
MUX
(AWG)
Optical switch
(Add channel or
pass-through)
P1 P33
P2 P34
P32 P64
P65
P66
P67
P69 P68
10-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS Card
The COM TX value can be measured by either a physical or a virtual photodiode of the
15454-32WSS card. If the vendor ID of the 15454-32WSS card is between 1024 (0x400) and
2047 (0x800) the COM TX value is measured by physical photodiode. If the vendor ID of the
15454-32WSS card is greater than 2048 (0x800), the COM TX value is measured by the virtual
photodiode. For COM TX values measured by virtual photodiode, check the values at the RX port
in the downstream of the COM TX port (COM-RX port on OPT-BST or OSC-CSM card).
10.3.2 32WSS ROADM Functionality
The 32WSS card works in combination with the 32DMX card to implement ROADM functionality. As
a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical channels using
CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and Cisco Transport Manager (CTM). ROADM functionality using the
32WSS card requires two 32DMX single-slot cards and two 32WSS double-slot cards (totalling six slots
needed in the ONS 15454 chassis).
For other cards’ ROADM functionality, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a
typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11.
Note A terminal site can be configured using only a 32WSS card and a 32DMX card plugged into the east or
west side of the shelf.
10.3.3 32WSS Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P69 monitor the power for the 32WSS card. Table 10-12 shows how
the returned power level values are calibrated to each port.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
Table 10-12 32WSS Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P32 ADD (Power ADD) ADD RX
P33–P641
1. P33–P64 monitor either ADD or PASSTHROUGH power, depending on the state
of the optical switch
PASS THROUGH COM TX
ADD (Power) COM TX
P65 OUT EXP EXP TX
P66 IN EXP EXP RX
P67 OUT COM COM TX
P68 IN COM COM RX
P69 DROP DROP TX
10-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS Card
10.3.4 32WSS Channel Allocation Plan
The 32WSS Card’s channel labels, frequencies, and wavelengths are listed in Table 10-13.
Table 10-13 32WSS Channel Allocation Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.1 195.1 1536.61
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.87
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.46
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
10-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS-L Card
10.3.5 32WSS Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.3.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32WSS card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM
Thresholds, page 20-65
10.4 32WSS-L Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For 32WSS-L card specifications, see the “32WSS-L Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The two-slot 32-Channel Wavelength Selective Switch L-Band (32WSS-L) card performs channel
add/drop processing within the ONS 15454 DWDM node. The 32WSS-L card is particularly well suited
for use in networks that employ DS fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber.The 32WSS-L card can be
installed in the following pairs of slots:
• Slots 1 and 2
• Slots 3 and 4
• Slots 5 and 6
• Slots 12 and 13
• Slots 14 and 15
• Slots16 and 17
10-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS-L Card
10.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 32WSS-L card faceplate has six types of ports:
• ADD RX ports (1 to 32): These ports are used for adding channels (which are listed in Table 10-15
on page 10-28). Each add channel is associated with an individual switch element that selects
whether the channel is added. Each add port has optical power regulation provided by a VOA.
• EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 32WSS-L card in the same
NE.
• EXP TX port: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 32WSS-L card within the NE.
• COM TX port: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for
example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE.
• COM RX port: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the
OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter.
• DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split-off optical signal with drop channels to the
32DMX-L card, where the channels are further processed and dropped.
Figure 10-4 shows the 32WSS-L module front panel and identifies the traffic flow through the ports.
10-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS-L Card
Figure 10-4 32WSS-L Faceplate and Ports
Figure 10-5 provides a high-level functional block diagram of the 32WSS-L card and Figure 10-6 on
page 10-26 shows how optical signals are processed on the EXP RX and COM RX ports.
134973
FAIL
ACT
SF
98.0-04.0 91.2-97.1 84.5-90.4 77.8-83.6
DROP
TX TX
RX
EXP
RX
TX
COM
RX
TX
ADD RX
32WSS-L
32 Add Ports
Add 1-8
Add 9-16
Add 17-24
Add 25-32
DROP TX
EXP RX
EXP TX
COM RX
COM TX
10-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS-L Card
Figure 10-5 32WSS-L Block Diagram
Aggregate optical signals that enter the EXP RX and COM RX ports are processed in two ways: add
channel/pass-through and optical splitter processing. The optical processing stages are shown in
Figure 10-6, which provides a detailed optical functional diagram of the 32WSS-L card.
EXP RX port
(In from other 32WSS-L
within the network element)
EXP TX port
(To the other 32WSS-L
within the network element)
DROP TX port
dropped channels
(To COM RX port
of 32DMX)
COM RX port
(In from OPT-AMP-L preamplifier
or OSC-CSM)
COM TX port
(To OPT-AMP-L booster
or OSC-CSM)
134971
32 add ports
Add 1 Add 2 Add 32
Optical
splitter
Add channel
or pass-through
Wavelength
selective switch
10-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS-L Card
Figure 10-6 32WSS-L Optical Block Diagram
The EXP RX PORT and COM RX PORT operate as follows:
• EXP RX Port Add Channel/Pass-through Processing
The incoming optical signal is received at the EXP RX port from the other 32WSS-L card within
the NE. The incoming aggregate optical signal is demultiplexed into 32 individual wavelengths, or
channels. Each channel is then individually processed by the optical switch, which performs
add/pass-through processing. By using software controls, the switch either selects the optical
channel coming in from the demultiplexer (that is, the pass-through channel) or it selects the
external ADD channel. If the ADD port channel is selected this channel is transmitted and the
optical signal coming from the demultiplexer is blocked.
After the optical switch stage, all of the channels are multiplexed into an aggregate optical signal,
which is sent out on the COM TX port. The output is typically connected to an OPT-AMP-L or
OPT-BST-E card (in the event a booster amplifier is needed) or to an OSC-CSM card (if no
amplification is needed).
• COM RX Port Optical Splitter Processing
The COM RX port receives the incoming optical signal and directs it to the 32WSS-L card’s optical
splitter. The splitter optically diverts channels that are designated to be dropped to the DROP TX
port. The DROP TX port is typically connected to the COM RX port of the 32DMX-L where the
drop channels are being dropped. Channels that are not dropped pass-through the optical splitter and
flow out of the 32WSS-L card EXP TX port. Typically, this optical signal is connected to the other
32WS-L module within the NE.
1
2
32
Add 32
32
1 pass-through
EXP RX port
(In from 32WSS-L)
EXP TX port
(To 32WSS-L)
DROP TX port
(To 32DMX-L)
2 pass-through
32 pass-through
Optical
splitter
Dropped
channels
2
Photodiode
VOA
Add 2
2
Add 1
1
134972
Optical
DMUX
(AWG)
Optical
MUX
(AWG)
Optical switch
(Add channel or
pass-through)
P1 P33
P2 P34
P32 P64
P65
P66
P67
P69 P68
COM RX port
(In from OPT-AMP-L
preamplifier
or OSC-CSM)
COM TX port
(To OPT-AMP-L
booster
or OSC-CSM)
10-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS-L Card
10.4.2 32WSS-L ROADM Functionality
The 32WSS-L works in combination with the 32DMX-L to implement L-band (1570 to 1620 nm)
functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical
channels using CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 32WSS-L
card requires two 32DMX-L single-slot cards and two 32WSS-L double-slot cards (totalling six slots
needed in the ONS 15454 chassis).
For other cards’ ROADM functionality, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a
typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11.
Note A terminal site can be configured using a 32WSS-L card and a 32DMX-L card plugged into the east or
west side of the shelf.
10.4.3 32WSS-L Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P69 monitor the power for the 32WSS-L card. Table 10-14 shows the
returned power level values calibrated to each port.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
10.4.4 32WSS-L Channel Plan
The 32WSS-L card uses 32 banded channels on the ITU-T 100-GHz grid, as shown in Table 10-15.
Table 10-14 32WSS-L Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P32 ADD (Power ADD) ADD RX
P33–P641
1. P33–P64 monitor either ADD or PASSTHROUGH power, depending on the state
of the optical switch
PASS THROUGH COM TX
ADD (Power) COM TX
P65 OUT EXP EXP TX
P66 IN EXP EXP RX
P67 OUT COM COM TX
P68 IN COM COM RX
P69 DROP DROP TX
10-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32WSS-L Card
Table 10-15 32WSS-L Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
B77.8 77.8 190 1577.86
78.6 189.9 1578.69
79.5 189.8 1579.52
80.3 189.7 1580.35
B81.1 81.1 189.6 1581.18
82.0 189.5 1582.02
82.8 189.4 1582.85
83.6 189.3 1583.69
B84.5 84.5 189.2 1584.53
85.3 189.1 1585.36
86.2 189 1586.20
87.0 188.9 1587.04
B87.8 87.8 188.8 1587.88
88.7 188.7 1588.73
89.5 188.6 1589.57
90.4 188.5 1590.41
B91.2 91.2 188.4 591.26
92.1 188.3 1592.10
92.9 188.2 1592.95
93.7 188.1 1593.79
B94.6 94.6 188 1594.64
95.4 187.9 1595.49
96.3 187.8 1596.34
97.1 187.7 1597.19
B98.0 98.0 187.6 1598.04
98.8 187.5 1598.89
99.7 187.4 1599.75
00.6 187.3 1600.60
B01.4 01.4 187.2 1601.46
02.3 187.1 1602.31
03.1 187 1603.17
04.0 186.9 1604.03
10-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX Card
10.4.5 32WSS-L Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.4.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS-L Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32WSS-L card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM
Thresholds, page 20-65
10.5 32DMX Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For 32DMX card specifications, see the “32DMX Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The single-slot 32-Channel Demultiplexer (32DMX) card is an optical demultiplexer. The card receives
an aggregate optical signal on its COM RX port and demultiplexes it into to (32) ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced
channels. The 32DMX card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and in Slots 12 to 17.
10.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 32DMX card has two types of ports:
• COM RX port: COM RX is the input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed. This
port is supported by a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for optical power
monitoring.
• DROP TX ports (1 to 32): On its output, the 32DMX provides 32 drop ports (listed in Table 10-17
on page 10-32) that are typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node. These ports
are connected using four 8-fiber MPO ribbon connectors. The incoming optical signal to the
demultiplexer comes into the COM RX port. This input port is connected using a single LC duplex
optical connector.Each drop port has a photodiode for optical power monitoring. Unlike the two-slot
10-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX Card
32DMX-O demultiplexer, the drop ports on the 32DMX do not have a VOA per channel for optical
power regulation. For a description of the 32DMX-O card, see the “6.4 32DMX-O Card” section
on page 6-14.
Figure 10-7 shows the 32DMX card front panel and the basic traffic flow through the ports.
Figure 10-7 32DMX Faceplate and Ports
A block diagram of the 32DMX card is shown in Figure 10-8.
145936
32DMX
FAIL
ACT
SF
54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6
COM
RX
TX MON
32 Drop Port Outputs 32 Drop Ports
Logical View
Drop 1-8
Drop 9-16
Drop 17-24
Drop 25-32
COM RX
(Receives Drop-TX from
32WSS on COM RX)
COM-RX
Drop-1
Drop-2
Drop-32
10-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX Card
Figure 10-8 32DMX Block Diagram
Figure 10-9 shows the 32DMX optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-9 32DMX Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.5.2 32DMX ROADM Functionality
The 32DMX card works in combination with the 32WSS card to implement ROADM functionality. As
a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical channels using
CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 32DMX card requires two
32DMX single-slot cards and two 32WSS double-slot cards (for six slots total in the ONS 15454
chassis).
Optical
module
30.3 to 36.6
8 CHS TX
38.1 to 44.5
8 CHS TX
46.1 to 52.5
8 CHS TX
54.1 to 60.6
8 CHS TX
96480
Processor
MON
COM RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
1
32
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
COM RX
20 dB max
attenuation
DROP TX
P4
P3
P2
P1
P32
P31
P30
P29
P33 P34
P
124967
10-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX Card
For information about the ROADM functionality for other cards, see that card’s description in this
chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on
page 12-11.
Note A terminal site can be configured using only a 32WSS card and a 32DMX card plugged into the east or
west side of the shelf.
10.5.3 32DMX Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P33 monitor the power for the 32DMX card. The returned power level
values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 10-16.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
10.5.4 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan
The 32DMX card’s channel labels, frequencies, and wavelengths are listed in Table 10-17.
Table 10-16 32DMX Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P32 DROP DROP TX
P33 INPUT COM COM RX
Table 10-17 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.1 195.1 1536.61
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.87
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.46
10-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX Card
10.5.5 32DMX Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.5.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32DMX card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
Table 10-17 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)
10-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX-L Card
• NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54
10.6 32DMX-L Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
Note For 32DMX-L card specifications, see the “32DMX-L Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The single-slot 32-Channel Demultiplexer L-Band card (32DMX-L) is an L-band optical demultiplexer.
The card receives an aggregate optical signal on its COM RX port and demultiplexes it into to (32)
100-GHz-spaced channels. The 32DMX-L card is particularly well suited for use in networks that
employ DS fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber. The 32DMX-L card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and
in Slots 12 to 17.
10.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 32DMX-L card has two types of ports:
• COM RX port: COM RX is the input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed. This
port is supported by both a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for optical power
monitoring.
• DROP TX ports (1 to 32): On its output, the 32DMX-L card provides 32 drop ports (listed in
Table 10-21 on page 10-42) that are typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node.
These ports are connected using four 8-fiber MPO ribbon connectors. Each drop port has a
photodiode for optical power monitoring. Unlike the two-slot 32DMX-O demultiplexer, the drop
ports on the 32DMX-L do not have a VOA per channel for optical power regulation. For a
description of the 32DMX-O card, see the “6.4 32DMX-O Card” section on page 6-14.
Figure 10-10 shows the 32DMX-L card front panel and the basic traffic flow through the ports.
10-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX-L Card
Figure 10-10 32DMX-L Faceplate and Ports
Figure 10-11 shows a block diagram of the 32DMX-L card.
145940
32DMX
FAIL
ACT
SF
98.0-04.0 91.2-97.1 84.5-90.4 77.8-83.6
COM
RX
TX
32 Drop Port Outputs 32 Drop Ports
Logical View
Drop 1-8
Drop 9-16
Drop 17-24
Drop 25-32
COM RX
(Receives Drop-TX from
32WSS-L on COM RX)
COM-RX
Drop-1
Drop-2
Drop-32
MON
10-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX-L Card
Figure 10-11 32DMX-L Block Diagram
Figure 10-12 shows the 32DMX-L optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-12 32DMX-L Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.6.2 32DMX-L ROADM Functionality
The 32DMX-L card works in combination with the 32WSS-L card to implement ROADM functionality.
AS a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical channels using
CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 32DMX-L card requires two
32DMX-L single-slot cards and two 32WSS-L double-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the
ONS 15454 chassis).
Optical
module
77.8 to 83.6
8 CHS TX
84.5 to 90.4
8 CHS TX
91.2 to 97.1
8 CHS TX
98.0 to 04.0
8 CHS TX
134969
Processor
MON
COM RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
1
32
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
COM RX
20 dB max
attenuation
DROP TX
P4
P3
P2
P1
P32
P31
P30
P29
P33 P34
P
124967
10-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX-L Card
For information about ROADM functionality for other cards, see that card’s description in this chapter.
For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on
page 12-11.
Note A terminal site can be configured using only a 32WSS-L card and a 32DMX-L card plugged into the east
or west side of the shelf.
10.6.3 32DMX-L Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P33 monitor the power for the 32DMX-L card. The returned power
level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 10-18.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
10.6.4 32DMX-L Channel Plan
The 32DMX-L card uses 32 banded channels on the ITU-T 100-GHz grid, as shown in Table 10-19.
Table 10-18 32DMX-L Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P32 DROP DROP TX
P33 INPUT COM COM RX
Table 10-19 32DMX-L Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)
B77.8 77.8 190 1577.86
78.6 189.9 1578.69
79.5 189.8 1579.52
80.3 189.7 1580.35
B81.1 81.1 189.6 1581.18
82.0 189.5 1582.02
82.8 189.4 1582.85
83.6 189.3 1583.69
B84.5 84.5 189.2 1584.53
85.3 189.1 1585.36
86.2 189 1586.20
87.0 188.9 1587.04
10-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
32DMX-L Card
10.6.5 32DMX-L Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.6.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX-L Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32DMX-L card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
B87.8 87.8 188.8 1587.88
88.7 188.7 1588.73
89.5 188.6 1589.57
90.4 188.5 1590.41
B91.2 91.2 188.4 1591.26
92.1 188.3 1592.10
92.9 188.2 1592.95
93.7 188.1 1593.79
B94.6 94.6 188 1594.64
95.4 187.9 1595.49
96.3 187.8 1596.34
97.1 187.7 1597.19
B98.0 98.0 187.6 1598.04
98.8 187.5 1598.89
99.7 187.4 1599.75
00.6 187.3 1600.60
B01.4 01.4 187.2 1601.46
02.3 187.1 1602.31
03.1 187 1603.17
04.0 186.9 1604.03
Table 10-19 32DMX-L Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)
10-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-C Card
• NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54
10.7 40-DMX-C Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For 40-DMX-C card specifications, see the “40-DMX-C Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The single-slot 40-Channel Demultiplexer C-band (40-DMX-C) card demultiplexes 40 100-GHz-spaced
channels identified in the channel plan (Table 10-21 on page 10-42), and sends them to dedicated output
ports. The overall optical power can be adjusted using a single VOA that is common to all channels. The
40-DMX-C card is unidirectional, optically passive, and can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
10.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 40-DMX-C has two types of ports:
• COM RX port: COM RX is the line input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed.
This port is supported by a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for per channel
optical power monitoring.
Note By default, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes (for example,
electrical power failure). A manual VOA setting is also available.
• DROP TX ports (1 to 40): On its output, the 40-DMX-C card provides 40 drop ports that are
typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node. These ports are connected using five
physical connectors on the front panel that accept MPO client input cables. (MPO cables break out
into eight separate cables.) The 40-DMX-C card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the
main input.
Figure 10-13 shows the 40-DMX-C card faceplate.
10-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-C Card
Figure 10-13 40-DMX-C Faceplate
Figure 10-14 shows a block diagram of the 40-DMX-C card.
159554
40-DMX-C
55.7 - 61.4 49.3 - 54.9 42.9 - 48.5 36.6 - 42.1 30.3 - 35.8
COM TX
RX
FAIL
ACT
SF
40 Drop Ports
Drop 1-8
Drop 9-16
Drop 17-24
Drop 25-32
Drop 33-40
40 Drop Port Outputs
Logical View
COM-RX
Drop-1
Drop-2
Drop-40
COM RX
(Receives Drop-TX from
40-WSS-C on COM RX)
10-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-C Card
Figure 10-14 40-DMX-C Block Diagram
Figure 10-15 shows the 40-DMX-C optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-15 40-DMX-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.7.2 40-DMX-C ROADM Functionality
The 40-DMX-C card works in combination with the 40-WSS-C card to implement ROADM
functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using
CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-DMX-C card requires two
single-slot 40-DMX-C cards and two 40-WSS-C double-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the
ONS 15454 chassis).
Optical
module
151971
Processor
COM RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
36.6 to 42.1
8 CHS RX
30.3 to 35.8
8 CHS RX
42.9 to 48.5
8 CHS RX
49.3 to 54.9
8 CHS RX
55.7 to 61.4
8 CHS RX
1
40
Control
Control
interface
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
COM RX DROP TX
P40
P39
P38
P37
P4
P3
P2
P1
P
P41
151972
10-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-C Card
For other cards’ ROADM functionality, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a
typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11.
10.7.3 40-DMX-C Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P40 monitor the power at the outputs of the 40-DMX-C card. P41
monitors the total multiplexed power at the input, calibrated to the COM-RX port. Table 10-20 shows
the returned power level values calibrated to each port.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
10.7.4 40-DMX-C Channel Plan
Table 10-21 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are
demultiplexed by the 40-DMX-C card.
Table 10-20 40-DMX-C Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P40 DROP DROP TX
P41 INPUT COM COM RX
Table 10-21 40-DMX-C Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz)
Wavelength
(nm)
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
33.4 195.5 1533.47
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.6 195.1 1536.61
37.4 195 1537.40
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.98
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.56
41.3 194.5 1541.35
10-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-C Card
10.7.5 40-DMX-C Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.7.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-C Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-DMX-C card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
45.3 194 1545.32
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
49.3 193.5 1549.32
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
53.3 193 1553.33
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
57.3 192.5 1557.36
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
61.4 192 1561.42
Table 10-21 40-DMX-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz)
Wavelength
(nm)
10-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-CE Card
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54
10.8 40-DMX-CE Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For 40-DMX-CE card specifications, see the “40-DMX-CE Card Specifications” section in the
Hardware Specifications document.
The single-slot 40-Channel Demultiplexer C-band, even channels (40-DMX-CE) card demultiplexes 40
100-GHz-spaced even-numbered channels identified in the channel plan (Table 10-23 on page 10-47),
and sends them to dedicated output ports. The overall optical power can be adjusted using a single VOA
that is common to all channels. The 40-DMX-CE card is unidirectional, optically passive, and can be
installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
10.8.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 40-DMX-CE card has two types of ports:
• COM RX port: COM RX is the line input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed.
This port is supported by a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for per channel
optical power monitoring.
Note By default, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes (for example,
electrical power failure). A manual VOA setting is also available.
• DROP TX ports (1 to 40): On its output, the 40-DMX-CE card provides 40 drop ports that are
typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node. These ports are connected using five
physical connectors on the front panel that accept MPO client input cables. (MPO cables break out
into eight separate cables.) The 40-DMX-CE card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the
main input.
Figure 10-16 shows the 40-DMX-CE card faceplate.
10-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-CE Card
Figure 10-16 40-DMX-CE Card Faceplate
Figure 10-17 shows a block diagram of the 40-DMX-CE card.
240642
40-DMX-C
56.2 - 61.8 49.7 - 55.3 43.3 - 48.9 37.0 - 42.5 30.7 - 36.2
COM TX
RX
FAIL
ACT
SF
40 Drop Ports
Drop 1-8
Drop 9-16
Drop 17-24
Drop 25-32
Drop 33-40
40 Drop Port Outputs
Logical View
COM-RX
Drop-1
Drop-2
Drop-40
COM RX
(Receives Drop-TX from
40-WSS-CE on COM RX)
10-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-CE Card
Figure 10-17 40-DMX-CE Card Block Diagram
Figure 10-18 shows the 40-DMX-CE card optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-18 40-DMX-CE Card Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.8.2 40-DMX-CE Card ROADM Functionality
The 40-DMX-CE card works in combination with the 40-WSS-CE card to implement ROADM
functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using
CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-DMX-CE card requires
two single-slot 40-DMX-CE cards and two 40-WSS-CE double-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the
ONS 15454 chassis).
Optical
module
240641
Processor
COM RX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
37.0 to 42.5
8 CHS RX
30.7 to 36.2
8 CHS RX
43.3 to 48.9
8 CHS RX
49.7 to 55.3
8 CHS RX
56.1 to 61.8
8 CHS RX
1
40
Control
Control
interface
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
COM RX DROP TX
P40
P39
P38
P37
P4
P3
P2
P1
P
P41
151972
10-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-CE Card
For the ROADM functionality of other cards, see the description of that card in this chapter. For a
diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11.
10.8.3 40-DMX-CE Card Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P40 monitor the power at the outputs of the 40-DMX-CE card. P41
monitors the total multiplexed power at the input, calibrated to the COM-RX port. Table 10-22 shows
the returned power level values calibrated to each port.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
10.8.4 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan
Table 10-23 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are
demultiplexed by the 40-DMX-CE card.
Table 10-22 40-DMX-CE Card Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P40 DROP DROP TX
P41 INPUT COM COM RX
Table 10-23 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
B30.7 30.7 195.85 1530.72
31.5 195.75 1531.51
32.3 195.65 1532.29
33.1 195.55 1533.07
33.9 195.45 1533.86
B34.6 34.6 195.35 1534.64
35.4 195.25 1535.43
36.2 195.15 1536.22
37.0 195.05 1537.00
37.8 194.95 1537.79
B38.6 38.6 194.85 1538.58
39.4 194.75 1539.37
40.1 194.65 1540.16
40.9 194.55 1540.95
41.8 194.45 1541.75
10-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-DMX-CE Card
10.8.5 40-DMX-CE Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.8.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-CE Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-DMX-CE card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
B42.5 42.5 194.35 1542.54
43.3 194.25 1543.33
44.1 194.15 1544.13
44.9 194.05 1544.92
45.7 193.95 1545.72
B46.5 46.5 193.85 1546.52
47.3 193.75 1547.32
48.1 193.65 1548.11
48.9 193.55 1548.91
49.7 193.45 1549.72
B50.5 50.5 193.35 1550.52
51.3 193.25 1551.32
52.1 193.15 1552.12
52.9 193.05 1552.93
53.7 192.95 1553.73
B54.4 54.4 192.85 1554.54
55.3 192.75 1555.34
56.1 192.65 1556.15
56.9 192.55 1556.96
57.8 192.45 1557.77
B58.6 58.6 192.35 1558.58
59.4 192.25 1559.39
60.2 192.15 1560.20
61.0 192.05 1561.01
61.8 191.95 1561.83
Table 10-23 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
10-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-MUX-C Card
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54
10.9 40-MUX-C Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For 40-MUX-C card specifications, see the “40-MUX-C Card Specification” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The single-slot 40-Channel Multiplexer C-band (40-MUX-C) card multiplexes forty ITU-T
100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan in Table 10-21 on page 10-42. The 40-MUX-C
card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The 40-MUX-C card is typically used in hub nodes.
10.9.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 40-MUX-C card has two types of ports:
• COM TX port: COM TX is the line output port for the aggregate optical signal being multiplexed.
This port is supported by both a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for per channel
optical power monitoring.
Note By default, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes (for example,
electrical power failure). A manual VOA setting is also available.
• DROP RX ports (1 to 40): The 40-MUX-C card provides 40 input optical channels. These ports are
connected using five physical receive connectors on the card’s front panel that accept MPO cables
for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The 40-DMX-C card
also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main output. For the wavelength range, see
Table 10-21 on page 10-42.
Figure 10-19 shows the 40-MUX-C card faceplate.
10-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-MUX-C Card
Figure 10-19 40-MUX-C Card Faceplate
Figure 10-20 shows a block diagram of the 40-MUX-C card.
40-MUX-C
55.7 - 61.4 49.3 - 54.9 42.9 - 48.5 36.6 - 42.1 30.3 - 35.8
COM RX
TX
FAIL
ACT
SF
159555
Client ports 1-8
Client ports 9-16
Client ports 17-24
Client ports 25-32
Client ports 33-40
Logical View
COM TX
Client-1
Client-2
Client-40
40 Client Channel Inputs
40 Client Ports
COM TX
Sends combined signal
to OPT- BST
10-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-MUX-C Card
Figure 10-20 40-MUX-C Card Block Diagram
Figure 10-21 shows the 40-MUX-C optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-21 40-MUX-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.9.2 40-MUX-C Card Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P40 monitor the power of the individual input ports to the 40-MUX-C
card. P41 monitors the total multiplexed output power, calibrated to the COM-TX port. Table 10-24
shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port.
Optical
module
36.6 to 42.1
8 CHS RX
30.3 to 35.8
8 CHS RX
42.9 to 48.5
8 CHS RX
49.3 to 54.9
8 CHS RX
55.7 to 61.4
8 CHS RX
Processor
COM TX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
SCL Bus
TCCi M
SCL Bus
TCCi P
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
151974
1
40
Control
Control
interface
Physical photodiode
Variable optical attenuator
Inputs COM TX
P40
P39
P38
P37
P4
P3
P2
P1
P
151975
10-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-MUX-C Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
10.9.3 40-MUX-C Card Channel Plan
Table 10-25 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are multiplexed
by the 40-MUX-C card.
Table 10-24 40-MUX-C Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1–P40 ADD ADD RX
P41 OUTPUT COM COM-TX
Table 10-25 40-MUX-C Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz)
Wavelength
(nm)
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
33.4 195.5 1533.47
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.6 195.1 1536.61
37.4 195 1537.40
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.98
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.56
41.3 194.5 1541.35
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
45.3 194 1545.32
10-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-MUX-C Card
10.9.4 40-MUX-C Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.9.5 Related Procedures for 40-MUX-C Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-MUX-C card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
49.3 193.5 1549.32
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
53.3 193 1553.33
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
57.3 192.5 1557.36
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
61.4 192 1561.42
Table 10-25 40-MUX-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz)
Wavelength
(nm)
10-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-C Card
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54
10.10 40-WSS-C Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For 40-WSS-C card specifications, see the “40-WSS-C Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The double-slot 40-channel Wavelength Selective Switch C-Band (40-WSS-C) card switches 40 ITU-T
100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan (Table 10-21 on page 10-42) and sends them to
dedicated output ports. The 40-WSS-C card is bidirectional and optically passive. The card can be
installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17
The 40-WSS-C features include:
• Receipt of an aggregate DWDM signal into 40 output optical channels from the Line receive port
(EXP RX) in one direction and from the COM-RX port in the other direction.
• Per-channel optical power monitoring using photodiodes.
• Signal splitting in a 70%-to-30% ratio, sent to the 40-DMX-C for dropping signals, then to the other
40-WSS-C card.
• Aggregate DWDM signal monitoring and control through a variable optical attenuator (VOA). In
the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes.
A manual VOA setting is also available.
Within the 40-WSS-C card, the first AWG opens the spectrum and each wavelength is directed to one of
the ports of a 1x2 optical switch. The same wavelength can be passed through or stopped. If the
pass-through wavelength is stopped, a new channel can be added at the ADD port. The card’s second
AWG multiplexes all of the wavelengths, and the aggregate signal is output through the COM-TX port.
10.10.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 40-WSS-C has eight types of ports:
• ADD RX ports (1 to 40): These ports are used for adding channels. Each add channel is associated
with an individual switch element that selects whether an individual channel is added. Each add port
has optical power regulation provided by a VOA. The five connectors on the card faceplate accept
MPO cables for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The
40-WSS-C card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main input.
• COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE)
and sends it to the optical splitter.
• COM TX: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for
example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE.
10-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-C Card
• EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 40-WSS-C card in the same
NE.
• EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 40-WSS-C card within the NE.
• DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains drop channels to
the 40-DMX-C card, where the channels are further processed and dropped.
Figure 10-22 shows the 40-WSS-C card faceplate.
Figure 10-22 40-WSS-C Faceplate
Figure 10-23 shows a block diagram of the 40-WSS-C card.
159394
40-WSS-C
55.7 - 61.4 49.3 - 54.9 42.9 - 48.5 36.6 - 42.1 30.3 - 35.8
ADD RX
COM
RX
TX
EXP
RX
TX
DROP
TX
FAIL
ACT
SF
10-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-C Card
Figure 10-23 40-WSS-C Block Diagram
10-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-C Card
Figure 10-24 shows the 40-WSS-C optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-24 40-WSS-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.10.2 40-WSS-C ROADM Functionality
The 40-WSS-C card works in combination with the 40-DMX-C card to implement ROADM
functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using
CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-WSS-C card requires two
40-WSS-C double-slot cards and two 40-DMX-C single-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the
ONS 15454 chassis).
For information about ROADM functionality for other cards, see that card’s description in this chapter.
For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on
page 12-11.
10.10.3 40-WSS-C Power Monitoring
The 40-WSS-C has physical diodes that monitor power at various locations on the card. Table 10-26 lists
the physical diode descriptions.
Optical
module
159392
uP8260
COM RX
COM TX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
2xSCL Buses
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
EXP RX
ADD RX
LC connector
MPO connector
EXP TX
DROP TX
10-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-C Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
Additionally, the 40-WSS-C has two virtual diodes. Virtual diodes are monitor points for each physical
photodiode; they are identified with a physical diode relative to the way that the physical diode is
identified with one of the two interlink (ILK) ports. Table 10-27 lists the virtual diodes.
10.10.4 40-WSS-C Channel Plan
Table 10-28 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are switched by
the 40-WSS-C card.
Table 10-26 40-WSS-C Physical Photodiode Port Calibration
Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
P1 DROP DROP TX
P2 EXP EXP RX
PDi31
1. i indicates any channel from 01 through 40.
RX Add i RX ports (that is, channel input Add i RX
power), up to 40 ports and therefore 40 PDs1
PDi41 TX COM TX port (that is, per channel output COM TX
power) up to 40 channels and therefore 40 PDs
PD5 COM COM TX port (that is, total output COM TX power)
Table 10-27 40-WSS-C Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration
Virtual Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
VPD1 COM COM RX port (total input COM RX power)
VPD2 EXP EXP TX port (total output EXP TX power)
Table 10-28 40-WSS-C Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
33.4 195.5 1533.47
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.6 195.1 1536.61
37.4 195 1537.40
10-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-C Card
10.10.5 40-WSS-C Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.98
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.56
41.3 194.5 1541.35
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
45.3 194 1545.32
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
49.3 193.5 1549.32
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
53.3 193 1553.33
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
57.3 192.5 1557.36
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
61.4 192 1561.42
Table 10-28 40-WSS-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
10-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-CE Card
10.10.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-C Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-WSS-C card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM
Thresholds, page 20-65
10.11 40-WSS-CE Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For 40-WSS-CE card specifications, see the “40-WSS-CE Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The double-slot 40-channel Wavelength Selective Switch Even-Channel C-Band (40-WSS-CE) card
switches 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan (Table 10-31 on page 10-65)
and sends them to dedicated output ports. The 40-WSS-CE card is bidirectional and optically passive.
The card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
The 40-WSS-CE features include:
• Receipt of an aggregate DWDM signal into 40 output optical channels from the Line receive port
(EXP RX) in one direction and from the COM-RX port in the other direction.
• Per-channel optical power monitoring using photodiodes.
• Signal splitting in a 70-to-30 percent ratio, sent to the 40-DMX-CE card for dropping signals, then
to the other 40-WSS-CE card.
• Aggregate DWDM signal monitoring and control through a VOA. In the case of electrical power
failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is
also available.
Within the 40-WSS-CE card, the first AWG opens the spectrum and each wavelength is directed to one
of the ports of a 1x2 optical switch. The same wavelength can be passed through or stopped. If the
pass-through wavelength is stopped, a new channel can be added at the ADD port. The card’s second
AWG multiplexes all of the wavelengths, and the aggregate signal is output through the COM-TX port.
10.11.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams
The 40-WSS-CE card has eight types of ports:
10-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-CE Card
• ADD RX ports (1 to 40): These ports are used for adding channels. Each add channel is associated
with an individual switch element that selects whether an individual channel is added. Each add port
has optical power regulation provided by a VOA. The five connectors on the card faceplate accept
MPO cables for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The
40-WSS-CE card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main input.
• COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE)
and sends it to the optical splitter.
• COM TX: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for
example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE.
• EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 40-WSS-CE card in the
same NE.
• EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 40-WSS-CE card within the NE.
• DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains drop channels to
the 40-DMX-C card, where the channels are further processed and dropped.
Figure 10-25 shows the 40-WSS-CE card faceplate.
10-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-CE Card
Figure 10-25 40-WSS-CE Faceplate
Figure 10-26 shows a block diagram of the 40-WSS-CE card.
240643
40-WSS-C
56.2 - 61.8 49.7 - 55.3 43.3 - 48.9 37.0 - 42.5 30.7 - 36.2
ADD RX
COM
RX
TX
EXP
RX
TX
DROP
TX
FAIL
ACT
SF
10-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-CE Card
Figure 10-26 40-WSS-CE Block Diagram
10-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-CE Card
Figure 10-27 shows the 40-WSS-CE optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-27 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.11.2 40-WSS-CE Card ROADM Functionality
The 40-WSS-CE card works in combination with the 40-DMX-CE card to implement ROADM
functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using
CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-WSS-CE card requires
two 40-WSS-CE double-slot cards and two 40-DMX-CE single-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the
ONS 15454 chassis).
For information about ROADM functionality for another cards, see the description of that card in this
chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on
page 12-11.
10.11.3 40-WSS-CE Card Power Monitoring
The 40-WSS-CE card has physical diodes that monitor power at various locations on the card.
Table 10-29 lists the physical diode descriptions.
Optical
module
159392
uP8260
COM RX
COM TX
FPGA
For SCL Bus
management
2xSCL Buses
DC/DC
Power supply
Input filters
BAT A&B
EXP RX
ADD RX
LC connector
MPO connector
EXP TX
DROP TX
10-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-CE Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
Additionally, the 40-WSS-CE card has two virtual diodes. Virtual diodes are monitor points for each
physical photodiode; they are identified with a physical diode relative to the way that the physical diode
is identified with one of the two interlink (ILK) ports. Table 10-30 lists the virtual diodes.
10.11.4 40-WSS-CE Card Channel Plan
Table 10-31 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are switched by
the 40-WSS-CE card.
Table 10-29 40-WSS-CE Physical Photodiode Port Calibration
Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
P1 DROP DROP TX
P2 EXP EXP RX
PDi31
1. i indicates any channel from 01 through 40.
RX Add i RX ports (that is, channel input Add i RX
power), up to 40 ports and therefore 40 PDs1
PDi41 TX COM TX port (that is, per channel output COM TX
power) up to 40 channels and therefore 40 PDs
PD5 COM COM TX port (that is, total output COM TX power)
Table 10-30 40-WSS-CE Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration
Virtual Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
VPD1 COM COM RX port (total input COM RX power)
VPD2 EXP EXP TX port (total output EXP TX power)
Table 10-31 40-WSS-CE Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
B30.7 30.7 195.85 1530.72
31.5 195.75 1531.51
32.3 195.65 1532.29
33.1 195.55 1533.07
33.9 195.45 1533.86
B34.6 34.6 195.35 1534.64
35.4 195.25 1535.43
36.2 195.15 1536.22
37.0 195.05 1537.00
37.8 194.95 1537.79
10-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WSS-CE Card
10.11.5 40-WSS-CE Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
B38.6 38.6 194.85 1538.58
39.4 194.75 1539.37
40.1 194.65 1540.16
40.9 194.55 1540.95
41.8 194.45 1541.75
B42.5 42.5 194.35 1542.54
43.3 194.25 1543.33
44.1 194.15 1544.13
44.9 194.05 1544.92
45.7 193.95 1545.72
B46.5 46.5 193.85 1546.52
47.3 193.75 1547.32
48.1 193.65 1548.11
48.9 193.55 1548.91
49.7 193.45 1549.72
B50.5 50.5 193.35 1550.52
51.3 193.25 1551.32
52.1 193.15 1552.12
52.9 193.05 1552.93
53.7 192.95 1553.73
B54.4 54.4 192.85 1554.54
55.3 192.75 1555.34
56.1 192.65 1556.15
56.9 192.55 1556.96
57.8 192.45 1557.77
B58.6 58.6 192.35 1558.58
59.4 192.25 1559.39
60.2 192.15 1560.20
61.0 192.05 1561.01
61.8 191.95 1561.83
Table 10-31 40-WSS-CE Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
10-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WXC-C Card
10.11.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-CE Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-WSS-CE card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM
Thresholds, page 20-65
10.12 40-WXC-C Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
Note For 40-WXC-C card specifications, see the “40-WXC-C Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The double-slot 40-channel Wavelength Cross-Connect C-band (40-WXC-C) card selectively sends any
wavelength combination coming from nine input ports to a common output port. The device can manage
up to 41 channels spaced at 100GHz on each port according to the channel grid in Table 10-10 on
page 10-13. Each channel can be selected from any input. The card is optically passive and provides
bidirectional capability. It can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
.The 40-WXC-C card provides the following features:
• Demultiplexing, selection, and multiplexing of DWDM aggregate signal from input ports to
common output port.
• Aggregate DWDM signal monitoring and control through a VOA.
• VOAs are deployed in every channel path in order to regulate the channel’s optical power. In the case
of an electrical power failure, VOAs are set to their maximum attenuation value, or to a fixed and
configurable one. The VOA can also be set manually.
• Per-channel optical power monitoring using photodiodes.
The 40-WXC-C card acts as a selector element with the following characteristics:
• It is able to select a wavelength from one input port and pass the wavelength through to the common
out port. Simultaneously, the card can block the same wavelength coming from the other eight input
ports.
• It is able to stop wavelengths from all nine inputs.
• It is able to monitor optical power and control path attenuation using per channel VOA
independently of the wavelength input-to-out port connection.
10-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WXC-C Card
10.12.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
The 40-WXC-C card has six types of ports:
• COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE)
and sends it to the optical splitter.
• COM TX: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for
example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE.
• EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 40-WXC-C card within the NE.
• MON TX: The optical service channel (OSC) monitor.
• ADD/DROP RX: The 40-WXC-C card provides 40 input optical channels. For the wavelength
range, see Table 10-34 on page 10-72.
• ADD/DROP TX: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains drop channels
to the 40-WXC-C card, where the channels are further processed and dropped.
Figure 10-28 shows the 40-WXC-C card faceplate.
10-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WXC-C Card
Figure 10-28 40-WXC-C Faceplate
Figure 10-29 shows the 40-WXC-C optical module functional block diagram.
159396
40-WXC
EXP
COM
RX
TX
EXP
TX
ADD DROP
RX
TX
MON
TX
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
EXP RX Ports (from 1 to 8): fibres
come FROM Mesh PP
Monitor Port: monitors the traffic
transmitted on COM TX Port
DROP TX: fibre connected to 40-DMX for
local chs drop
ADD RX: fibre connected to 40-
MUX or xx-WSS for local chs Add
EXP TX: internal
connection TO Mesh PP
COM RX: line RX interface
FROM Pre-Amplifier
COM TX: line TX interface
TO Booster Amplifier
10-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WXC-C Card
Figure 10-29 40-WXC-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
10.12.2 40-WXC-C Power Monitoring
The 40-WXC-C has 83 physical diodes (P1 through P40) that monitor power at the outputs of the card.
Table 10-32 describes the physical diodes.
WXC optical module
COM
TX
ADD RX
Virtual
PDi3
P5
Table 10-32 40-WXC-C Physical Photodiode Port Calibration
Physical
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
P1 DROP DROP TX
P2 EXP EXP RX
PDi31
1. i indicates any channel from 01 through 40.
RX Add i RX ports (that is,
channel input Add i RX
power), up to 40 ports and
therefore 40 PDs1
PDi41 TX COM TX port (that is, per
channel output COM TX
power) up to 40 channels and
therefore 40 PDs
PD5 COM COM TX port (that is, total
output COM TX power)
10-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WXC-C Card
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
Additionally, the 40-WXC-C has two virtual diodes. Virtual diodes are monitor points for each physical
photodiode; they are identified with a physical diode relative to the way that the physical diode is
identified with one of the two interlink (ILK) ports. Table 10-33 lists the virtual diodes.
The usage of WXC and mesh PP power readings to troubleshoot a LOS-P in WXC COM TX port in Side
A is described in the following example. The example is explained assuming a single wavelength
1558.17 in the setup that comes from Side H to Side A. If there is more than one wavelength, then there
is a risk of dropping traffic when pulling common fibers. The example is explained below:
When the wavelength from side H is 1558.17, you can check the power reading at WXC EXP TX port
of the WXC card and verify the consistency with side H pre output power and WXC COMRX-EXPTX
port loss. You can also check with a power meter connected to the 8th fiber (since it is from side H) of
an MPO-FC (or LC) cable connected to the TAP-TX port of the MESH-PP. This value should be
consistent with the previous reading, less than the insertion loss of the installed PP-MESH. If it is
consistent, the issue is with the MPO between side A WXC and PP-MESH. If it is not consistent, the
issue is with the PP-MESH or the LC-LC from side H. With only the PP-MESH already tested during
installation, the only issue can be with the patch cord b.
You can check if the 1558.17 wavelength from side H is unequalized (that is, if the channel is not aligned
with the linear fit of the power values of the other channels) by keeping the DMX COM-RX port of side
H in maintenance, and checking both the signal and ASE levels of CHAN-TX ports of the DMX card. If
the channel is equalized (that is, if the channel is aligned with the linear fit of the power values of the
other channels), then the issue is in the WXC side A that cannot properly regulate the VOA for such
channel. If the channel is unequalized, then the issue is on a remote node.
Note With an OSA or a spare 40 DMX, you can see the light coming from all the sides from TAP-TX of the
PP-MESH.
10.12.3 40-WXC-C Channel Plan
Table 10-34 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are cross
connected by the 40-WXC-C card.
Table 10-33 40-WXC-C Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration
Virtual
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
VPD1 COM COM RX port (total input
COM RX power)
VPD2 EXP EXP TX port (total output
EXP TX power)
10-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
40-WXC-C Card
Table 10-34 40-WXC-C Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Ch. 01 29.5 196 1529.55
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
33.4 195.5 1533.47
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.6 195.1 1536.61
37.4 195 1537.40
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.98
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.56
41.3 194.5 1541.35
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
45.3 194 1545.32
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
49.3 193.5 1549.32
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
53.3 193 1553.33
10-73
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
80-WXC-C Card
10.12.4 40-WXC-C Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.12.5 Related Procedures for 40-WXC-C Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-WXC-C card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes, page 14-101
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G174 Modify the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-79
10.13 80-WXC-C Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only)
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
57.3 192.5 1557.36
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
61.4 192 1561.42
1. This channel is unused by the 40-WXC-C
Table 10-34 40-WXC-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz)
Wavelength
(nm)
10-74
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
80-WXC-C Card
Note For 80-WXC-C card specifications, see the “80-WXC-C Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
The double-slot 80-channel Wavelength Cross-Connect C-band (80-WXC-C) card manages up to 80
ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan (Table 10-10 on page 10-13) and sends
them to dedicated output ports. Each channel can be selected from any input port to any output port. The
card is optically passive, and provides bidirectional capability. It can be installed in Slots 1 to 5 and
12 to 16 the ONS 15454 chassis and Slots 2 to 6 in the ONS 15454 M6 chassis.
The 80-WXC-C card provides the following functionalities:
• When used in the multiplexer or bidirectional mode, the 80-WXC-C card allows selection of a single
wavelength or any combination of wavelengths from any of the nine input ports to the common
output port.
• When used in the bidirectional mode, the output wavelength from the COM-RX port is split to
manage the express and drop wavelengths.
• When used in the demultiplexer mode, the 80-WXC-C card, allows selection of a single wavelength
or a combination of wavelengths from the common input port to any of the nine output ports.
• Automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) blocking state on each wavelength and port.
• Per-channel (closed loop) power regulation on the output port based on OCM block feedback.
• Per-channel (open loop) attenuation regulation on the output port which is not based on the OCM
feedback.
The OCM unit provides per-channel optical power monitoring on the following ports:
• COM port in output direction
• COM port in input direction
• DROP-TX port in output direction
• Eight Express/Add/Drop (EAD) ports and one Add/Drop (AD) port in both input and output
directions
10.13.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
The 80-WXC-C card has 14 types of ports:
• MON: The MON port monitors power on the COM T/R port.
• COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE)
and sends it to the optical splitter.
• DROP TX: In the bidirectional mode, the DROP TX port sends the optical signal to the
demultiplexer.
• EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains pass-through channels to the
other side of the NE.
• COM T/R: The COM port is bidirectional. It functions as a COM TX port in the multiplexer mode
and as a COM RX port in the demultiplexer mode.
• AD T/R: The AD port functions as ADD RX port in bidirectional and multiplexer modes and as a
DROP port in the demultiplexer mode.
10-75
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
80-WXC-C Card
• EAD T/R i (where i = 1 to 8): The EAD ports function as EXP ports in the bidirectional mode, as
ADD ports in the multiplexer mode, and as DROP ports in the demultiplexer mode.
Figure 10-30 shows the 80-WXC-C card faceplate and the optical module functional block diagram.
Figure 10-30 80-WXC-C Faceplate and the Optical Module Functional Block Diagram
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
5
6
7
ADD / DROP
8
3
4
EXP DROP
TX
RX
COM
TX
1
2
R/T
COM
T/R
MON
FAIL
ACT
SF
80-WXC-C
EXP / ADD / DROP
R/T R/T R/T R/T
249126
VPD4
VPD3
VOA DROP_TX
OCM 12
PD2
EAD 1...8
OCM 1...9
AD
DROP TX
EXP TX
COM RX
MON
COM
LC connectors
Variable optical attenuator
OUT
OCM 10
OCM 11
1
10
PD1
9
40/60
12x1
Optical
Switch OCM
WXC
10-76
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
80-WXC-C Card
The different units of the 80-WXC-C card are:
• 40/60 splitter with VOA on drop path—The preamplifier output signal from the preamplifier is split
in a 40%-to-60% ratio; 40% is sent on the drop path (DROP-TX port) and 60% is sent on the
pass-through path (EXP-TX port). The VOA equipped on the drop path is used to match the power
range of the receiver photodiode without the need for bulk attenuation. If a channel is expected to
be dropped in the 80-WXC-C card, the pass-through channel is stopped after the EXP-TX port either
by a 40-WSS-C or a 40-WXC-C card.
• 50 Ghz 10 port WXC—The WXC block is optically passive and has bidirectional capability. The
WXC block can selectively send any wavelength combination coming from the eight input EAD
ports and one AD port to a common (COM) output port, when used as a multiplexer, whereas it can
selectively send any wavelength combination coming from its common (COM) input port to any of
the eight output EAD ports and one AD port, when used as a demultiplexer. The WXC block can
manage (on each port) up to 80 channels according to the channel grid reported in Table 10-37. Each
channel can be selected from any input and routed to any output.
• 50 Ghz Optical Channel Monitor (OCM)—The OCM provides per channel power monitoring on the
COM T/R, DROP-TX, AD, and EADi (i=1 to 8) ports. The power value for each wavelength is
refreshed after a variable timer depending on the port and card activity.
10.13.2 80-WXC-C Power Monitoring
The 80-WXC-C has two physical photodiodes and an OCM unit that monitors power at the different
ports of the card. Table 10-35 describes the physical photodiodes.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, see the “CTC Port
Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in the Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
Table 10-35 80-WXC-C Port Calibration
Physical
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
PD1 COM Total Power COM
PD2 EXP-TX Total Power EXP-TX
OCM1 EAD 1 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-1
OCM2 EAD 2 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-2
OCM3 EAD 3 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-3
OCM4 EAD 4 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-4
OCM5 EAD 5 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-5
OCM6 EAD 6 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-6
OCM7 EAD 7 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-7
OCM8 EAD 8 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-8
OCM9 AD Per-Channel and Total Power AD
OCM10 Output Per-Channel and Total Power COM
OCM11 Input Per-Channel and Total Power COM
OCM12 Drop Per-Channel and Total Power DROP-TX
10-77
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
80-WXC-C Card
Additionally, the 80-WXC-C has two virtual photodiodes. Table 10-36 lists the virtual photodiodes.
10.13.3 80-WXC-C Channel Plan
Table 10-37 shows the 80 ITU-T 50-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are cross
connected by the 80-WXC-C card.
Table 10-36 80-WXC-C Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration
Virtual
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
VPD3 DROP-TX Total Power DROP-TX
VPD4 COM-RX Total Power COM-RX
Table 10-37 80-WXC-C Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Ch. 01 - 196 1529.55
30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
30.7 195.85 1530.72
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.5 195.75 1531.51
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.3 195.65 1532.29
32.7 195.6 1532.68
33.1 195.55 1533.07
33.5 195.5 1533.47
33.9 195.45 1533.86
34.3 34.3 195.4 1534.25
34.6 195.35 1534.64
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.4 195.25 1535.43
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.2 195.15 1536.22
36.6 195.1 1536.61
37.0 195.05 1537
37.4 195 1537.40
37.8 194.95 1537.79
10-78
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
80-WXC-C Card
38.2 38.2 194.9 1538.19
38.6 194.85 1538.58
39.0 194.8 1538.98
39.4 194.75 1539.37
39.8 194.7 1539.77
40.2 194.65 1540.16
40.6 194.6 1540.56
41.0 194.55 1540.95
41.3 194.5 1541.35
41.7 194.45 1541.75
42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.5 194.35 1542.94
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.3 194.25 1543.33
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.1 194.15 1544.13
44.5 194.1 1544.53
44.9 194.05 1544.92
45.3 194 1545.32
45.7 193.95 1545.72
46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.5 193.85 1546.52
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.3 193.75 1547.32
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.1 193.65 1548.11
48.5 193.6 1548.51
48.9 193.55 1548.91
49.3 193.5 1549.32
49.7 193.45 1549.72
Table 10-37 80-WXC-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
10-79
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
80-WXC-C Card
10.13.4 80-WXC-C Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.5 193.35 1550.52
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.3 193.25 1551.32
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.1 193.15 1552.12
52.5 193.1 1552.52
52.9 193.05 1552.93
53.3 193 1553.33
53.7 192.95 1553.73
54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.5 192.85 1554.54
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.3 192.75 1555.34
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.2 192.65 1556.15
56.6 192.6 1556.55
57.0 192.55 1556.96
57.4 192.5 1557.36
57.8 192.45 1557.77
58.2 58.2 192.4 1558.17
58.6 192.35 1558.58
59.0 192.3 1558.98
59.4 192.25 1559.39
59.8 192.2 1559.79
60.2 192.15 1560.20
60.6 192.1 1560.61
61.0 192.05 1561.01
61.4 192 1561.42
61.8 191.95 1561.83
1. This channel is unused by the 80-WXC-C
Table 10-37 80-WXC-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
10-80
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
10.13.5 Related Procedures for 80-WXC-C Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 80-WXC-C card:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes, page 14-101
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G174 Modify the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-79
10.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
Note For the 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C card specifications, see the “40-SMR1-C Card Specifications” or
“40-SMR2-C Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document.
Note For 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C safety label information, see the “10.2 Safety Labels” section on
page 10-15.
The single-slot 40-channel single module ROADM (SMR-C) cards integrate the following functional
blocks onto a single line card:
• Optical preamplifier
• Optical booster amplifier
• Optical service channel (OSC) filter
• 2x1 wavelength cross-connect (WXC) or a 4x1 WXC
• Optical channel monitor (OCM)
The SMR-C cards are available in two versions:
• 10.14.2 40-SMR1-C Card
• 10.14.3 40-SMR2-C Card
The SMR-C cards can manage up to 40 channels spaced at 100GHz on each port according to the channel
grid in Table 10-10. The cards can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
10.14.1 SMR-C Card Key Features
The optical amplifier units in the SMR-C cards provide the following features:
• Embedded gain flattening filter
10-81
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
• Mid-stage access for dispersion compensation unit (only applicable for preamplifier erbium-doped
fiber amplifier [EDFA])
• Fixed output power mode
• Fixed gain mode
• Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function
• Amplified spontaneous emissions (ASE) compensation in fixed gain and fixed output power mode
• Fast transient suppression
• Programmable tilt (only applicable for preamplifier EDFA)
• Full monitoring and alarm handling capability
• Optical safety support through signal loss detection and alarm at any input port, fast power down
control, and reduced maximum output power in safe power mode.
• EDFA section calculates the signal power, by taking into account the expected ASE power
contribution to the total output power. The signal output power or the signal gain can be used as
feedback signals for the EDFA pump power control loop.
The 1x2 WXC unit (40-SMR1-C card) provides the following features:
• Selection of individual wavelength of the aggregated 100GHz signal from either the EXP-RX or
ADD-RX ports
• Automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) blocking state on each wavelength and port
• Per-channel power regulation based on external OCM unit
• Open loop path attenuation control for each wavelength and port
The 1x4 WXC unit (40-SMR2-C card) provides the following features:
• Selection of individual wavelength of the aggregated 100GHz signal from either the EXPi-RX
(where i = 1, 2, 3) or ADD-RX ports
• Automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) blocking state on each wavelength and port
• Per-channel power regulation based on external OCM unit
• Open loop path attenuation control for each wavelength and port
The OCM unit provides per channel optical power monitoring at EXP-RX, ADD-RX, DROP-TX, and
LINE-TX ports.
10.14.2 40-SMR1-C Card
The 40-SMR1-C card includes a 100Ghz 1x2 WXC unit with integrated preamplifier unit (single EDFA).
10.14.2.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
The 40-SMR1-C card has the following types of ports:
• MON RX: The MON RX port monitors power on the EXP-TX output port.
• MON TX: The MON TX port monitors power on the LINE-TX output port.
• DC RX: The DC RX port receives the optical signal from the dispersion compensating unit (DCU)
and sends it to the second stage preamplifier input.
• DC TX: The DC TX port sends the optical signal from the first stage preamplifier output to the DCU.
10-82
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
• OSC RX: The OSC RX port is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX: The OSC TX port is the OSC drop output port.
• ADD/DROP RX: The ADD RX port receives the optical signal from the multiplexer section of the
NE and sends it to the 1x2 WXC unit.
• ADD/DROP TX: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal to the demultiplexer section
of the NE.
• LINE RX: The LINE RX port is the input signal port.
• LINE TX: The LINE TX port is the output signal port.
• EXP RX: The EXP RX port receives the optical signal from the other side of the NE and sends it to
the 1x2 WXC unit.
• EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains pass-through channels to
the other side of the NE.
Figure 10-31 shows the 40-SMR1-C card faceplate.
Figure 10-31 40-SMR1-C Faceplate
Figure 10-32 shows a block diagram of the 40-SMR1-C card.
HAZARD
LEVEL 1M
OSC DC EXP MON
RX
TX
ADD & DROP
RX
TX
LINE
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
FAIL
ACT
SF
40-SMR
1-C
COMPLIES WITH
21 CFR 1040.10 AND
1040.11 EXCEPT
FOR DEVIATIONS
PURSUANT TO LASER
NOTICE No.50, DATED
JUNE 24, 2007
276440
10-83
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
Figure 10-32 40-SMR1-C Block Diagram
The different units of the 40-SMR1-C card are:
• OSC filter—The OSC filter allows to add an OSC channel to the C-band in the transmission path
and to drop an OSC channel on the receiving path. The OSCM card that is connected to the OSC-TX
and OSC-RX ports generates the OSC channel.
• Double-stage variable gain EDFA preamplifier—The double-stage preamplifier allows the insertion
of a DCU between the DC-TX and DC-RX ports to compensate for chromatic dispersion. It is also
equipped with built-in variable optical attenuator (VOA) and gain flattening filter (GFF) that
provides tilt compensation and enables the use of this device over an extended range of span losses
(5 dB to 35 dB).
• 70/30 splitter and VOA—The output signal from the preamplifier is split in a 70%-to-30% ratio,
70% is sent on the pass-through path (EXP-TX port) and 30% is sent on the drop path (DROP-TX
port). The VOA equipped on the drop path is used to match the power range of the receiver photo
diode without the need for bulk attenuation. If a channel is expected to be dropped in the
40-SMR1-C card, the pass-through channel is stopped after the EXP-TX port either by a 40-WSS-C,
40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C card.
• 1x2 WXC—The 1x2 WXC aggregates on its output port a 100-GHz-spaced optical channel received
from either its ADD-RX or EXP-RX port. In addition to the switching function, the 1x2 WXC
allows to set a different per channel power for each of the managed wavelengths and also monitor
the optical power.
• OCM—The OCM provides per channel power monitoring on the DROP-RX, EXP-RX, ADD-RX,
and LINE-TX ports. The power value for each wavelength is refreshed after a variable timer
depending on the port and card activity.
OSC-TX DC-TX DC-RX DROP-TX
OSC-RX ADD-RX
OCM
Block
OCM4
OCM3 OCM2
OCM1
VOA3
VOA2
LINE TX
LINE RX
MON-TX
EXP-RX
EXP-TX
MON-RX
EDFA 1
(variable Gain
VOA1 30%
70%
OSC
DROP PD2
PD3 PD4
TAP PD5 TAP
TAP PD8
OSC
TAP ADD TAP
TAP
276446
TAP
PD6
WXC
Block
PD1
LC connector
10-84
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
10.14.2.2 40-SMR1-C Power Monitoring
The 40-SMR1-C card has seven physical diodes (PD1 through PD6 and PD8) and an OCM unit that
monitors power at the input and output ports of the card (see Table 10-38).
10.14.2.3 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan
Table 10-39 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) supported by the
40-SMR1-C card.
Table 10-38 40-SMR1-C Port Calibration
Physical
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
PD1 LINE LINE-RX
PD2 LINE LINE-RX
PD3 DC DC-TX
PD4 DC DC-RX
PD5 EXP EXP-TX
PD6 OSC OSC-RX
PD8 LINE LINE-TX
OCM1 LINE OCH LINE-TX
OCM2 DROP OCH DROP-TX
OCM3 ADD OCH ADD-RX
OCM4 EXP OCH EXP-RX
Table 10-39 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
33.4 195.5 1533.47
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.6 195.1 1536.61
37.4 195 1537.40
10-85
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
10.14.3 40-SMR2-C Card
The 40-SMR2-C card includes a 100Ghz 1x4 WXC unit with integrated preamplifier and booster
amplifier units (double EDFA).
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.98
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.56
41.3 194.5 1541.35
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
45.3 194 1545.32
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
49.3 193.5 1549.32
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
53.3 193 1553.33
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
57.3 192.5 1557.36
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
61.4 192 1561.42
Table 10-39 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
10-86
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
10.14.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
The 40-SMR2-C card has the following types of ports:
• MON RX: The MON RX port monitors power on the EXP-TX output port.
• MON TX: The MON TX port monitors power on the LINE-TX output port.
• DC RX: The DC RX port receives the optical signal from the dispersion compensating unit (DCU)
and sends it to the second stage preamplifier input.
• DC TX: The DC TX port sends the optical signal from the first stage preamplifier output to the DCU.
• OSC RX: The OSC RX port is the OSC add input port.
• OSC TX: The OSC TX port is the OSC drop output port.
• ADD/DROP RX: The ADD RX port receives the optical signal from the multiplexer section of the
NE and sends it to the 1x4 WXC unit.
• ADD/DROP TX: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal to the demultiplexer section
of the NE.
• LINE RX: The LINE RX port is the input signal port.
• LINE TX: The LINE TX port is the output signal port.
• EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains pass-through channels to
the other side of the NE.
• EXPi-RX (where i = 1, 2, 3): The EXPi-RX port receives the optical signal from the other side of
the NE and sends it to the 1x4 WXC unit.
Figure 10-31 shows the 40-SMR2-C card faceplate.
Figure 10-33 40-SMR2-C Faceplate
Figure 10-32 shows a block diagram of the 40-SMR2-C card.
276441
EXP
OSC DC
RX
TX
ADD & DROP
RX
TX
LINE
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
MON
FAIL
ACT
SF
40-SMR
2-C
COMPLIES WITH
21 CFR 1040.10 AND
1040.11 EXCEPT
FOR DEVIATIONS
PURSUANT TO LASER
NOTICE No.50, DATED
JUNE 24, 2007
HAZARD
LEVEL 1M
10-87
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
Figure 10-34 40-SMR2-C Block Diagram
The different units of the 40-SMR2-C card are:
• OSC filter—The OSC filter allows to add an OSC channel to the C-band in the transmission path
and to drop an OSC channel on the receiving path. The OSCM card that is connected to the OSC-TX
and OSC-RX ports generates the OSC channel.
• Double-stage variable gain EDFA preamplifier—The double-stage preamplifier allows the insertion
of a DCU between the DC-TX and DC-RX ports to compensate for chromatic dispersion. It is also
equipped with built-in variable optical attenuator (VOA) and gain flattening filter (GFF) that
provides tilt compensation and enables the use of this device over an extended range of span losses
(5 dB to 35 dB).
• 70/30 splitter and VOA—The output signal from the preamplifier is split in a 70%-to-30% ratio,
70% is sent on the pass-through path (EXP-TX port) and 30% is sent on the drop path (DROP-TX
port). The VOA equipped on the drop path is used to match the power range of the receiver photo
diode without the need for bulk attenuation. If a channel is expected to be dropped in the
40-SMR2-C card, the pass-through channel is stopped after the EXP-TX port by a 40-WSS-C,
40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C card.
• 1x4 WXC—The 1x4 WXC aggregates on its output port a 100-GHz-spaced optical channel received
from either its ADD-RX or EXPi-RX (where i = 1, 2, 3) port. In addition to the switching function,
the 1x4 WXC allows to set a different per channel power for each of the managed wavelengths and
also monitor the optical power.
OSC-TX DC-TX DC-RX DROP-TX
OSC-RX ADD-RX
LINE TX
LINE RX
MON-TX
EXP1-RX
EXP2-RX
EXP3-RX
MON-RX
EDFA 1
(Variable Gain)
EDFA 2
(Fixed Gain)
30%
70%
OSC
DROP PD2
PD3 PD4
TAP PD5 TAP
TAP PD8 PD7
OSC
TAP ADD
TAP
276447
TAP
PD6
4x1
WXC
Block
PD1
TAP
TAP
LC connector
MPO connector
EXP-TX
6 ports
OCM Block
10-88
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
• Single-stage fixed gain EDFA booster amplifier—The booster amplifier amplifies the output signal
from the 1x4 WXC unit before transmitting it into the fiber. Since it is a fixed gain (17 dB) amplifier,
it does not allow gain tilt control.
• OCM—The OCM provides per channel power monitoring on the DROP-RX, EXPi-RX (where i =
1, 2, 3), ADD-RX, and LINE-TX ports. The power value for each wavelength is refreshed after a
variable timer depending on the port and card activity.
10.14.3.2 40-SMR2-C Power Monitoring
The 40-SMR2-C card has eight physical diodes (PD1 through PD8) and an OCM unit that monitors
power at the input and output ports of the card (see Table 10-40).
10.14.3.3 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan
Table 10-41 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) supported by the
40-SMR2-C card.
Table 10-40 40-SMR2-C Port Calibration
Physical
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s)
PD1 LINE LINE-RX
PD2 LINE LINE-RX
PD3 DC DC-TX
PD4 DC DC-RX
PD5 EXP EXP-TX
PD6 OSC OSC-RX
PD7 Not reported on CTC Internal port
PD8 LINE LINE-TX
OCM1 LINE OCH LINE-TX
OCM2 DROP OCH DROP-TX
OCM3 ADD OCH ADD-RX
OCM4 EXP-1 OCH EXP1-RX
OCM5 EXP-2 OCH EXP2-RX
OCM6 EXP-3 OCH EXP3-RX
Table 10-41 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33
31.1 195.8 1531.12
31.9 195.7 1531.90
32.6 195.6 1532.68
33.4 195.5 1533.47
10-89
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards
B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25
35.0 195.3 1535.04
35.8 195.2 1535.82
36.6 195.1 1536.61
37.4 195 1537.40
B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19
38.9 194.8 1538.98
39.7 194.7 1539.77
40.5 194.6 1540.56
41.3 194.5 1541.35
B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14
42.9 194.3 1542.94
43.7 194.2 1543.73
44.5 194.1 1544.53
45.3 194 1545.32
B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12
46.9 193.8 1546.92
47.7 193.7 1547.72
48.5 193.6 1548.51
49.3 193.5 1549.32
B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12
50.9 193.3 1550.92
51.7 193.2 1551.72
52.5 193.1 1552.52
53.3 193 1553.33
B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13
54.9 192.8 1554.94
55.7 192.7 1555.75
56.5 192.6 1556.55
57.3 192.5 1557.36
B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17
58.9 192.3 1558.98
59.7 192.2 1559.79
60.6 192.1 1560.61
61.4 192 1561.42
Table 10-41 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan (continued)
Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
10-90
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
MMU Card
10.14.4 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.14.5 Related Procedures for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-SMR-1C and
40-SMR-2C cards:
• NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82
• NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes, page 14-101
• NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards
Acceptance Test, page 21-147
• NTP-G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test,
page 21-151
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards
• NTP-G241 Modify the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-94
10.15 MMU Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The single-slot Mesh Multi-Ring Upgrade Module (MMU) card supports multiring and mesh upgrades
for ROADM nodes in both the C-band and the L-band. Mesh/multiring upgrade is the capability to
optically bypass a given wavelength from one section of the network or ring to another one without
requiring 3R regeneration. In each node, you need to install one east MMU and one west MMU. The
card can be installed in Slots 1 through 6 and 12 through 17.
Note For MMU card specifications, see the “MMU Card Specifications” section in the Hardware
Specifications document.
10.15.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
The MMU has six types of ports:
• EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives the optical signal from the ROADM section available on
the NE.
10-91
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
MMU Card
• EXP TX port: The EXP TX port sends the optical signal to the ROADM section available on the NE.
• EXP-A RX port: The EXP-A RX port receives the optical signal from the ROADM section available
on other NEs or rings.
• EXP-A TX port: The EXP-A TX port sends the optical signal to the ROADM section available on
other NEs or rings.
• COM TX port: The COM TX port sends the optical signal to the fiber stage section.
• COM RX port: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from the fiber stage section.
Figure 10-35 shows the MMU card faceplate.
10-92
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
MMU Card
Figure 10-35 MMU Faceplate and Ports
Figure 10-36 provides a high-level functional block diagram of the MMU card.
145190
ACT
FAIL
MMU
SF
RX
TX
EXP A
RX
TX
EXP
RX
TX
COM
10-93
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
MMU Card
Figure 10-36 MMU Block Diagram
10.15.2 MMU Power Monitoring
Physical photodiodes P1 through P3 monitor the power for the MMU card. The returned power level
values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 10-42. VP1 to VP3 are virtual photodiodes that have
been created by adding (by software computation) the relevant path insertion losses of the optical
splitters (stored in the module) to the real photodiode (P1 to P3) measurement.
For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC
Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1.
10.15.3 MMU Card Functions
• Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9
• “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9
10.15.4 Related Procedures for MMU Card
The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the MMU card:
145191
COM TX
VPD2 75/25 PD1
EXP RX
PD2
EXP A RX
COM RX
VPD3 95/5 VPD1 95/5
EXP TX
Legend
LC PC II Connector
Optical splitter/coupler
Real photodiode
Virtual photodiode
PD3
EXP A TX
Table 10-42 MMU Port Calibration
Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port
P1 1 (EXP-RX) EXP RX
P2 5 (EXP A-RX) EXP A RX
P3 6 (EXP A-TX) EXP A TX
VP1 2 (EXP-TX) EXP TX
VP2 4 (COM-TX) COM TX
VP3 3 (COM-RX) COM RX
10-94
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards
MMU Card
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G149 Modify the MMU Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-114
CH A P T E R
11-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
11
Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note The terms “Unidirectional Path Switched Ring” and “UPSR” may appear in Cisco literature. These terms
do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as “Path Protected Mesh Network” and “PPMN,” refer generally to Cisco’s
path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not
recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This chapter describes Cisco ONS 15454 transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, and AR_XP cards, as well as their associated
plug-in modules (Small Form-factor Pluggables [SFPs or XFPs]). For card safety and compliance
information, see the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS
Platforms.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco
ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Chapter topics include:
• 11.1 Card Overview, page 11-3
• 11.2 Safety Labels, page 11-10
• 11.3 TXP_MR_10G Card, page 11-10
• 11.3.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10G Card, page 11-14
• 11.4 TXP_MR_10E Card, page 11-14
• 11.4.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E Card, page 11-16
• 11.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards, page 11-16
• 11.5.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards, page 11-18
• 11.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards, page 11-18
11-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• 11.6.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards, page 11-23
• 11.7 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards, page 11-23
• 11.7.3 Related Procedures for 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards, page 11-25
• 11.8 MXP_2.5G_10G Card, page 11-25
• 11.8.3 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10G Card, page 11-28
• 11.9 MXP_2.5G_10E Card, page 11-28
• 11.9.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E Card, page 11-32
• 11.10 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards, page 11-32
• 11.10.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards, page 11-38
• 11.11 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards, page 11-39
• 11.11.3 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards, page 11-44
• 11.12 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards, page 11-44
• 11.12.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards,
page 11-51
• 11.13 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards, page 11-52
• 11.13.4 Related Procedures for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards, page 11-58
• 11.14 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards, page 11-58
• 11.14.17 Related Procedures for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards, page 11-82
• 11.15 ADM-10G Card, page 11-83
• 11.15.17 Related Procedures for ADM-10G Card, page 11-96
• 11.16 OTU2_XP Card, page 11-97
• 11.16.9 Related Procedures for OTU2_XP Card, page 11-105
• 11.17 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card, page 11-105
• 11.17.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10EX_C Card, page 11-108
• 11.18 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card, page 11-108
• 11.18.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card, page 11-112
• 11.19 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card, page 11-112
• 11.19.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card, page 11-118
• 11.20 AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards, page 11-119
• 11.21 MLSE UT, page 11-142
• 11.22 SFP and XFP Modules, page 11-142
Note Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM supports IBM's 5G DDR (Double Data Rate) InfiniBand1 interfaces.
1. 5G DDR InfiniBand is referred to as IB_5G.
11-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Overview
11.1 Card Overview
The card overview section lists the cards described in this chapter and provides compatibility
information.
Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly.
The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see
the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
The purpose of a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP,
AR_MXP, or AR_XP card is to convert the “gray” optical client interface signals into trunk signals that
operate in the “colored” dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) wavelength range.
Client-facing gray optical signals generally operate at shorter wavelengths, whereas DWDM colored
optical signals are in the longer wavelength range (for example, 1490 nm = violet; 1510 nm = blue; 1530
nm = green; 1550 nm = yellow; 1570 nm = orange; 1590 nm = red; 1610 nm = brown). Some of the newer
client-facing SFPs, however, operate in the colored region. Transponding or muxponding is the process
of converting the signals between the client and trunk wavelengths.
An MXP generally handles several client signals. It aggregates, or multiplexes, lower rate client signals
together and sends them out over a higher rate trunk port. Likewise, it demultiplexes optical signals
coming in on a trunk and sends them out to individual client ports. A TXP converts a single client signal
to a single trunk signal and converts a single incoming trunk signal to a single client signal. GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can be provisioned as TXPs, as MXPs, or as Layer 2
switches.
All of the TXP and MXP cards perform optical to electrical to optical (OEO) conversion. As a result,
they are not optically transparent cards. The reason for this is that the cards must operate on the signals
passing through them, so it is necessary to do an OEO conversion.
On the other hand, the termination mode for all of the TXPs and MXPs, which is done at the electrical
level, can be configured to be transparent. In this case, neither the Line nor the Section overhead is
terminated. The cards can also be configured so that either Line or Section overhead can be terminated,
or both can be terminated.
Note The MXP_2.5G_10G card, by design, when configured in the transparent termination mode, actually
does terminate some of the bytes. See Table G-17 on page G-33 for details.
11.1.1 Card Summary
Table 11-1 lists and summarizes the functions of each TXP, TXPP, MXP, MXPP, AR_MXP, AR_XP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP card.
Table 11-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Port Description For Additional Information
TXP_MR_10G The TXP_MR_10G card has two sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.3 TXP_MR_10G Card” section on
page 11-10.
TXP_MR_10E The TXP_MR_10E card has two sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.4 TXP_MR_10E Card” section on
page 11-14.
11-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Overview
TXP_MR_10E_C and
TXP_MR_10E_L
The TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L
cards have two sets of ports located on the
faceplate.
See the “11.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and
TXP_MR_10E_L Cards” section on page 11-16.
TXP_MR_2.5G The TXP_MR_2.5G card has two sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 11-18.
TXPP_MR_2.5G The TXPP_MR_2.5G card has three sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 11-18.
40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C
The 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards have
two ports located on the face plate.
See the “11.7 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C
Cards” section on page 11-23.
MXP_2.5G_10G The MXP_2.5G_10G card has nine sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.8 MXP_2.5G_10G Card” section on
page 11-25.
MXP_2.5G_10E The MXP_2.5G_10E card has nine sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.9 MXP_2.5G_10E Card” section on
page 11-28.
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L
cards have nine sets of ports located on the
faceplate.
See the “11.10 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards” section on page 11-32.
MXP_MR_2.5G The MXP_MR_2.5G card has nine sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.11 MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 11-39.
MXPP_MR_2.5G The MXPP_MR_2.5G card has ten sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.11 MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 11-39.
MXP_MR_10DME_C
and
MXP_MR_10DME_L
The MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L cards have eight sets of
ports located on the faceplate.
See the “11.12 MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards” section on
page 11-44.
40G-MXP-C
40E-MXP-C
and
40ME-MXP-C
The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C and
40ME-MXP-C cards have five ports located on
the faceplate.
See the “11.13 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C Cards” section on page 11-52.
AR_MXP and
AR_XP
The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards have ten ports
located on the faceplate.
See the 11.20 AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards,
page 11-119.
GE_XP and GE_XPE The GE_XP and GE_XPE cards have twenty
Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit
Ethernet trunk ports.
See the “11.14 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-58.
10GE_XP and
10GE_XPE
The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards have two 10
Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit
Ethernet trunk ports.
See the “11.14 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-58.
ADM-10G The ADM-10G card has 19 sets of ports located
on the faceplate.
See the “11.15 ADM-10G Card” section on
page 11-83.
OTU2_XP The OTU2_XP card has four ports located on the
faceplate.
See the “11.16 OTU2_XP Card” section on
page 11-97.
TXP_MR_10EX_C The TXP_MR_10EX_C card has two sets of ports
located on the faceplate.
See the “11.17 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card” section
on page 11-105.
Table 11-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Transponder and Muxponder Cards (continued)
Card Port Description For Additional Information
11-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Overview
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card has nine sets of
ports located on the faceplate.
See the “11.18 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card” section
on page 11-108.
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card has eight sets
of ports located on the faceplate.
See the “11.19 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card”
section on page 11-112.
Table 11-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Transponder and Muxponder Cards (continued)
Card Port Description For Additional Information
11-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Overview
11.1.2 Card Compatibility
Table 11-2 lists the platform and Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software compatibility for each TXP, TXPP, MXP, MXPP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP card.
Table 11-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
TXP_MR_10G 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
TXP_MR_10E No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
TXP_MR_10E_C No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
TXP_MR_10E_L No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
TXP_MR_2.5G 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
TXPP_MR_2.5G 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXP_2.5G_10G 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
11-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Overview
MXP_2.5G_10E No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXP_2.5G_10E_C No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXP_2.5G_10E_L No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
MXP_MR_2.5G No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXPP_MR_2.5G No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXP_MR_10DME_C No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXP_MR_10DME_L No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
15454-
DWDM
Table 11-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
11-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Overview
GE_XP No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
10GE_XP No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
GE_XPE No No No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
10GE_XPE No No No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
ADM-10G No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
OTU2_XP No No No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
Table 11-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
11-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Overview
TXP_MR_10EX_C No No No No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C No No No No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
MXP_MR_10DMEX_
C
No No No No No No No No No No 1545
4-DW
DM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40E-TXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40ME-TXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40G-MXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
Table 11-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
11-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Safety Labels
11.2 Safety Labels
For information about safety labels, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1.
11.3 TXP_MR_10G Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The TXP_MR_10G processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides
one 10-Gbps port per card that can be provisioned for an STM-64/OC-192 short reach (1310-nm) signal, compliant with ITU-T
G.707, ITU-T G.709, ITU-T G.691, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE, or a 10GBASE-LR signal compliant with IEEE 802.3.
40E-MXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
40ME-MXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
AR_MXP No No No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
AR_XP No No No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454-
M2,
15454-
M6,
15454-
DWDM
Table 11-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4
11-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10G Card
The TXP_MR_10G card is tunable over two neighboring wavelengths in the 1550-nm, ITU 100-GHz
range. It is available in 16 different versions, each of which covers two wavelengths, for a total coverage
of 32 different wavelengths in the 1550-nm range.
Note ITU-T G.709 specifies a form of forward error correction (FEC) that uses a “wrapper” approach. The
digital wrapper lets you transparently take in a signal on the client side, wrap a frame around it and
restore it to its original form. FEC enables longer fiber links because errors caused by the optical signal
degrading with distance are corrected.
The trunk port operates at 9.95328 Gbps (or 10.70923 Gbps with ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC)
and at 10.3125 Gbps (or 11.095 Gbps with ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC) over unamplified
distances up to 80 km (50 miles) with different types of fiber such as C-SMF or dispersion compensated
fiber limited by loss and/or dispersion.
Caution Because the transponder has no capability to look into the payload and detect circuits, a TXP_MR_10G
card does not display circuits under card view.
Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10G card in a
loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the TXP_MR_10G card. Using direct
fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the TXP_MR_10G card.
You can install TXP_MR_10G cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision this card in a linear
configuration. TXP_MR_10G cards cannot be provisioned as a bidirectional line switched ring
(BLSR)/Multiplex Section - Shared Protection Ring (MS-SPRing), a path protection/single node control
point (SNCP), or a regenerator. They can only be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing and 1+1 spans
when the card is configured for transparent termination mode.
The TXP_MR_10G port features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk port and a 1310-nm laser for the for the
client port and contains two transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate.
The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port
interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client port
to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting.
The TXP_MR_10G card has the following available wavelengths and versions:
• ITU grid blue band:
– 1538.19 to 1538.98 nm, 10T-L1-38.1
– 1539.77 to 1540.56 nm, 10T-L1-39.7
– 1530.33 to 1531.12 nm, 10T-L1-30.3
– 1531.90 to 1532.68 nm, 10T-L1-31.9
– 1534.25 to 1535.04 nm, 10T-L1-34.2
– 1535.82 to 1536.61 nm, 10T-L1-35.8
– 1542.14 to 1542.94 nm, 10T-L1-42.1
– 1543.73 to 1544.53 nm, 10T-L1-43.73
• ITU grid red band:
– 1554.13 to 1554.94 nm, 10T-L1-54.1
11-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10G Card
– 1555.75 to 1556.55 nm, 10T-L1-55.7
– 1546.12 to 1546.92 nm, 10T-L1-46.1
– 1547.72 to 1548.51 nm, 10T-L1-47.7
– 1550.12 to 1550.92 nm, 10T-L1-50.1
– 1551.72 to 1552.52 nm, 10T-L1-51.7
– 1558.17 to 1558.98 nm, 10T-L1-58.1
– 1559.79 to 1560.61 nm, 10T-L1-59.7
11.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-1 shows the TXP_MR_10G faceplate and block diagram.
11-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10G Card
Figure 11-1 TXP_MR_10G Faceplate and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
11.3.2 TXP_MR_10G Functions
The functions of the TXP_MR_10G card are:
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-7 on page G-10
uP bus
Serial bus
uP
Flash RAM
Optical
transceiver
145948
Framer/FEC/DWDM
processor
Client
interface
DWDM
trunk
(long range)
Optical
transceiver
Client interface
STM-64/OC-192
SR-1 optics modules
or 10GBASE-LR
Backplane
DWDM trunk
STM-64/OC-192
10G MR
TXP
1530.33 -
1531.12
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
TX
RX
CLIENT
1530.33
1531.12
DWDM
TX
RX
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
- 8 dBm
11-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10E Card
11.3.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10G Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TXP_MR_10G card:
• NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 11-191
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.4 TXP_MR_10E Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The card is fully backward compatible with the TXP_MR_10G card. It processes one 10-Gbps signal
(client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side) that is tunable over four wavelength
channels (spaced at 100 GHz on the ITU grid) in the C band and tunable over eight wavelength channels
(spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid) in the L band. There are eight versions of the C-band card, with each
version covering four wavelengths, for a total coverage of 32 wavelengths. There are five versions of the
L-band card, with each version covering eight wavelengths, for a total coverage of 40 wavelengths.
You can install TXP_MR_10E cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision the cards in a linear
configuration, BLSR/MS-SPRing, path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The card can be used in the
middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent termination mode.
The TXP_MR_10E card features a 1550-nm tunable laser (C band) or a 1580-nm tunable laser (L band)
for the trunk port and a separately orderable ONS-XC-10G-S1 1310-nm or ONS-XC-10G-L2 1550-nm
laser XFP module for the client port.
Note When the ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP is installed, the TXP_MR_10E card must be installed in Slots 6, 7, 12
or 13)
On its faceplate, the TXP_MR_10E card contains two transmit and receive connector pairs, one for the
trunk port and one for the client port. Each connector pair is labeled.
11.4.1 Key Features
The key features of the TXP_MR_10E card are:
• A tri-rate client interface (available through the ONS-XC-10G-S1 XFP, ordered separately)
– OC-192 (SR1)
– 10GE (10GBASE-LR)
– 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L)
• OC-192 to ITU-T G.709 OTU2 provisionable synchronous and asynchronous mapping
• The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port
interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client
port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting.
11-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10E Card
11.4.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-2 shows the TXP_MR_10E faceplate and block diagram.
Figure 11-2 TXP_MR_10E Faceplate and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10E card in a
loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the TXP_MR_10E card. Using direct
fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the TXP_MR_10E card.
11.4.3 TXP_MR_10E Functions
The functions of the TXP_MR_10E card are:
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10
• G.5 Client Interface, page G-14
• G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface, page G-15
uP bus
Serial bus
uP
Flash RAM
Optical
transceiver
131186
Framer/FEC/DWDM
processor
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
10 Gb/s
TP
1538.19
1538.98
Client
interface
DWDM
trunk
(long range)
Optical
transceiver
Client interface
STM-64/OC-192
or 10GE (10GBASE-LR)
or 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L)
Backplane
TX RX
RX
TX
DWDM trunk
STM-64/OC-192
4 tunable channels (C-band) or
8 tunable channels (L-band) on
the 100-GHz ITU grid
11-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards
• G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16
• G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16
• G.10 Client-to-Trunk Mapping, page G-17
11.4.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TXP_MR_10E card:
• NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 11-191
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards
TXP_MR_10E_L: (Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards are multirate transponders for the ONS 15454
platform. The cards are fully backward compatible with the TXP_MR_10G and TXP_MR_10E cards.
They processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side).
The TXP_MR_10E_C is tunable over the entire set of C-band wavelength channels (82 channels spaced
at 50 GHz on the ITU grid). The TXP_MR_10E_L is tunable over the entire set of L-band wavelength
channels (80 channels spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid) and is particularly well suited for use in
networks that employ DS fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber.
The advantage of these cards over previous versions (TXP_MR_10G and TXP_MR_10E) is that there is
only one version of each card (one C-band version and one L-band version) instead of several versions
needed to cover each band.
You can install TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision
the cards in a linear configuration, BLSR/MS-SPRing, path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The cards
can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the cards are configured for
transparent termination mode.
The TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards feature a universal transponder 2 (UT2) 1550-nm
tunable laser (C band) or a UT2 1580-nm tunable laser (L band) for the trunk port and a separately
orderable ONS-XC-10G-S1 1310-nm or ONS-XC-10G-L2 1550-nm laser XFP module for the client
port.
Note When the ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP is installed, the TXP_MR_10E_C or TXP_MR_10E-L card is required
to be installed in a high-speed slot (slot 6, 7, 12, or 13)
On its faceplate, the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards contain two transmit and receive
connector pairs, one for the trunk port and one for the client port. Each connector pair is labeled.
11.5.1 Key Features
The key features of the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards are:
• A tri-rate client interface (available through the ONS-XC-10G-S1 XFP, ordered separately):
11-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards
– OC-192 (SR1)
– 10GE (10GBASE-LR)
– 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L)
• A UT2 module tunable through the entire C band (TXP_MR_10E_C card) or L band
(TXP_MR_10E_L card). The channels are spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid.
• OC-192 to ITU-T G.709 OTU2 provisionable synchronous and asynchronous mapping.
• The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port
interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client
port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting.
11.5.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-3 shows the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L faceplates and block diagram.
Figure 11-3 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Faceplates and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
uP bus
Serial bus
uP
Flash RAM
Optical
transceiver
134975
Framer/FEC/DWDM
processor
Client
interface
DWDM
trunk
(long range)
Optical
transceiver
Client interface
STM-64/OC-192
or 10GE (10GBASE-LR)
or 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L)
Backplane
DWDM trunk
STM-64/OC-192
82 tunable channels (C-band) or
80 tunable channels (L-band) on
the 50-GHz ITU grid
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
10E MR
TXP L
TX RX
RX
TX
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
10E MR
TXP C
TX RX
RX
TX
11-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10E_C or
TXP_MR_10E_L card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards.
Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the cards.
11.5.3 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Functions
The functions of the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards are:
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10.
• G.5 Client Interface, page G-14
• G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface, page G-15
• G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16
• G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16
• G.10 Client-to-Trunk Mapping, page G-17
11.5.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration for both TXP_MR_10E_C
and TXP_MR_10E_L:
• NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 11-191
• DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing,
page 21-24
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
The TXP_MR_2.5G card processes one 8-Mbps to 2.488-Gbps signal (client side) into one 8-Mbps to
2.5-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides one long-reach STM-16/OC-48 port per
card, compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE.
The TXPP_MR_2.5G card processes one 8-Mbps to 2.488-Gbps signal (client side) into two 8-Mbps to
2.5-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signals (trunk side). It provides two long-reach STM-16/OC-48 ports per
card, compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE.
The TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards are tunable over four wavelengths in the 1550-nm,
ITU 100-GHz range. They are available in eight versions, each of which covers four wavelengths, for a
total coverage of 32 different wavelengths in the 1550-nm range.
11-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
Note ITU-T G.709 specifies a form of FEC that uses a “wrapper” approach. The digital wrapper lets you
transparently take in a signal on the client side, wrap a frame around it, and restore it to its original form.
FEC enables longer fiber links because errors caused by the optical signal degrading with distance are
corrected.
The trunk/line port operates at up to 2.488 Gbps (or up to 2.66 Gbps with ITU-T G.709 Digital
Wrapper/FEC) over unamplified distances up to 360 km (223.7 miles) with different types of fiber such
as C-SMF or higher if dispersion compensation is used.
Caution Because the transponder has no capability to look into the payload and detect circuits, a TXP_MR_2.5G
or TXPP_MR_2.5G card does not display circuits under card view.
The TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards support 2R (retime, regenerate) and 3R (retime,
reshape, and regenerate) modes of operation where the client signal is mapped into a ITU-T G.709 frame.
The mapping function is simply done by placing a digital wrapper around the client signal. Only
OC-48/STM-16 client signals are fully ITU-T G.709 compliant, and the output bit rate depends on the
input client signal. Table 11-45 shows the possible combinations of client interfaces, input bit rates, 2R
and 3R modes, and ITU-T G.709 monitoring.
Note ITU-T G.709 and FEC support is disabled for all the 2R payload types in the TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Table 11-3 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface
Client Interface Input Bit Rate 3R vs. 2R ITU-T G.709
OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gbps 3R On or Off
DV-6000 2.38 Gbps 2R —
2 Gigabit Fibre Channel (2G-FC)/fiber
connectivity (FICON)
2.125 Gbps 3R1
1. No monitoring
On or Off
High-Definition Television (HDTV) 1.48 Gbps 2R —
Gigabit Ethernet (GE) 1.25 Gbps 3R On or Off
1 Gigabit Fibre Channel (1G-FC)/FICON 1.06 Gbps 3R On or Off
OC-12/STM-4 622 Mbps 3R On or Off
OC-3/STM-1 155 Mbps 3R On or Off
Enterprise System Connection (ESCON) 200 Mbps 2R —
SDI/D1/DVB-ASI video 270 Mbps 2R —
ISC-1 Compat 1.06 Gbps 2R Off
ISC-3 1.06 or
2.125 Gbps
2R —
ETR_CLO 16 Mbps 2R —
11-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
The output bit rate is calculated for the trunk bit rate by using the 255/238 ratio as specified in
ITU-T G.709 for OTU1. Table 11-4 lists the calculated trunk bit rates for the client interfaces with
ITU-T G.709 enabled.
For 2R operation mode, the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards have the ability to pass data
through transparently from client side interfaces to a trunk side interface, which resides on an ITU grid.
The data might vary at any bit rate from 200-Mbps up to 2.38-Gbps, including ESCON, DVB-ASI,
ISC-1, and video signals. In this pass-through mode, no performance monitoring (PM) or digital
wrapping of the incoming signal is provided, except for the usual PM outputs from the SFPs. Similarly,
this card has the ability to pass data through transparently from the trunk side interfaces to the client side
interfaces with bit rates varying from 200-Mbps up to 2.38-Gbps. Again, no PM or digital wrapping of
received signals is available in this pass-through mode.
For 3R operation mode, the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards apply a digital wrapper to the
incoming client interface signals (OC-N/STM-N, 1G-FC, 2G-FC, GE). PM is available on all of these
signals except for 2G-FC, and varies depending upon the type of signal. For client inputs other than
OC-48/STM-16, a digital wrapper might be applied but the resulting signal is not ITU-T G.709
compliant. The card applies a digital wrapper that is scaled to the frequency of the input signal.
The TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards have the ability to take digitally wrapped signals in
from the trunk interface, remove the digital wrapper, and send the unwrapped data through to the client
interface. PM of the ITU-T G.709 OH and SONET/SDH OH is implemented.
11.6.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-4 shows the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G faceplates.
Table 11-4 Trunk Bit Rates With ITU-T G.709 Enabled
Client Interface ITU-T G.709 Disabled ITU-T G.709 Enabled
OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gbps 2.66 Gbps
2G-FC 2.125 Gbps 2.27 Gbps
GE 1.25 Gbps 1.34 Gbps
1G-FC 1.06 Gbps 1.14 Gbps
OC-12/STM-3 622 Mbps 666.43 Mbps
OC-3/STM-1 155 Mbps 166.07 Mbps
11-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
Figure 11-4 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Faceplates
For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Figure 11-5 shows a block diagram of the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
CLIENT
2.5G MR
TXP-P
1530.33 -
1532.68
2.5G MR
TXP
1530.33 -
1532.68
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
HAZARD
LEVEL 1M
RX TX
DWDM A
TX
RX
DWDM B
TX
RX
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
- 8 dBm
CLIENT
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
- 8 dBm
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
HAZARD
LEVEL 1M
TX RX TX
RX
DWDM
145946
11-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
Figure 11-5 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Block Diagram
Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to
the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
You can install TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can
provision this card in a linear configuration. TXP_MR_10G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards cannot be
provisioned as a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. They can be used in the
middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans only when the card is configured for transparent termination
mode.
The TXP_MR_2.5G card features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm laser for the
client port. It contains two transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card
uses dual LC connectors for optical cable termination.
The TXPP_MR_2.5G card features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm or 850-nm
laser (depending on the SFP) for the client port and contains three transmit and receive connector pairs
(labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors for optical cable termination.
11.6.2 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Functions
The functions of the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards are:
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10 (for TXP_MR_2.5G)
• Port level indicators—Table G-8 on page G-11 (for TXPP_MR_2.5G)
SFP Client Switch
Switch Driver
Tunable
Laser
Switch Cross
Switch
Limiting
Amp
Limiting
Amp
Main
APD+TA
Protect
APD+TA
Mux
Demux Mux
Demux
Mux
Demux
CPU
Main
ASIC
Protect
FPGA ASIC
SCL
FPGA
SCL BUS
2R Tx path
Trunk
Out
2R Rx path
CELL BUS
CPU
I/F
CELL
BUS DCC
CPU to
GCC
96636
11-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
11.6.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration for both TXP_MR_2.5G
and TXPP_MR_2.5G:
• NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter
Thresholds, page 11-171
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 (TXP_MR_2.5G only)
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.7 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
The 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards process a single 40-Gbps signal (client side) into a single
40-Gbps, 50-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides one 40-Gbps port per card that can be
provisioned for an OC-768/STM-256 very short reach (1550-nm) signal compliant with ITU-T G.707,
ITU-T G.691, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE, 40G Ethernet LAN signal compliant with IEEE 802.3ba,
or OTU3 signal compliant with ITU-T G.709.
The trunk port of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards are tunable between 1529.55 nm through
1561.83 nm, ITU 50-GHz range.
ITU-T G.709 specifies a form of forward error correction (FEC) that uses a “wrapper” approach. The
digital wrapper lets you transparently take in a signal on the client side, wrap a frame around it and
restore it to its original form. FEC enables longer fiber links because errors caused by the optical signal
degrading with distance are corrected.
Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the 40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C cards in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the
40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the
these cards.
You can install and provision the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards in a linear configuration in:
• Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 in ONS 15454 DWDM chassis
• Slot 2 in ONS 15454 M2 chassis
• Slots 2 to 6 in ONS 15454 M6 chassis
When a protection switch occurs on the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards, the recovery from PSM
protection switch takes about 3 to 4 minutes.
Note The maximum ambient operating temperature for 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards is 500 Celsius.
11-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
11.7.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-6 shows the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C faceplate and block diagram.
Figure 11-6 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Faceplate and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
11.7.2 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Functions
The functions of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards are:
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6 (supported on a client interface)
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10.
278758
40G-TXP-C
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
TRUNK
CLIENT
CLIENT
HAZARD
LEVEL 1
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED
JUNE 24, 2007
40 G
FEC/EF EC
OC7 G8/
OTUS
VSR
Trunk module
TDC
EDFA
Tx
Rx Trunk
Rx
Tx
SFI 5.1
interface
SFI 5.1
interface
Threshold
control
Client
TRUNK
TX
MX
RX
TX
MX
RX
11-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10G Card
11.7.3 Related Procedures for 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of 40E-TXP-C and
40ME-TXP-C:
• NTP-G292 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 11-217
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.8 MXP_2.5G_10G Card
(Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The MXP_2.5G_10G card multiplexes/demultiplexes four 2.5-Gbps signals (client side) into one
10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides one extended long-range STM-64/OC-192
port per card on the trunk side (compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia
GR-253-CORE) and four intermediate- or short-range OC-48/STM-16 ports per card on the client side.
The port operates at 9.95328 Gbps over unamplified distances up to 80 km (50 miles) with different types
of fiber such as C-SMF or dispersion compensated fiber limited by loss and/or dispersion.
Client ports on the MXP_2.5G_10G card are also interoperable with SONET OC-1 (STS-1) fiber optic
signals defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE. An OC-1 signal is the equivalent of one DS-3 channel
transmitted across optical fiber. OC-1 is primarily used for trunk interfaces to phone switches in the
United States. There is no SDH equivalent for SONET OC-1.
The MXP_2.5G_10G card is tunable over two neighboring wavelengths in the 1550-nm, ITU 100-GHz
range. It is available in 16 different versions, each of which covers two wavelengths, for a total coverage
of 32 different wavelengths in the 1550-nm range.
Note ITU-T G.709 specifies a form of FEC that uses a “wrapper” approach. The digital wrapper lets you
transparently take in a signal on the client side, wrap a frame around it and restore it to its original form.
FEC enables longer fiber links because errors caused by the optical signal degrading with distance are
corrected.
The port can also operate at 10.70923 Gbps in ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC mode.
Caution Because the transponder has no capability to look into the payload and detect circuits, an
MXP_2.5G_10G card does not display circuits under card view.
Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the MXP_2.5G_10G card in a
loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the MXP_2.5G_10G card. Using
direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the MXP_2.5G_10G card.
You can install MXP_2.5G_10G cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
11-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10G Card
Caution Do not install an MXP_2.5G_10G card in Slot 3 if you have installed a DS3/EC1-48 card in Slots 1or 2.
Likewise, do not install an MXP_2.5G_10G card in Slot 17 if you have installed a DS3/EC1-48 card in
Slots 15 or 16. If you do, the cards will interact and cause DS-3 bit errors.
You can provision this card in a linear configuration. MXP_2.5G_10G cards cannot be provisioned as a
BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. They can be used in the middle of
BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans only when the card is configured for transparent termination mode.
The MXP_2.5G_10G port features a 1550-nm laser on the trunk port and four 1310-nm lasers on the
client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The
card uses a dual LC connector on the trunk side and SFP connectors on the client side for optical cable
termination.
Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A
4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode. This is necessary to provision
a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit.
11.8.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-7 shows the MXP_2.5G_10G faceplate.
11-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10G Card
Figure 11-7 MXP_2.5G_10G Faceplate
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section on
page G-1.
Figure 11-8 shows a block diagram of the MXP_2.5G_10G card.
CLIENT
DWDM
1
2
4x 2.5G
10G MXP
1530.33 -
1531.12
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
TX
RX
TX
RX
3
TX
RX
4
TX
RX
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
- 8 dBm
TX
RX
1530.33
1531.12
145945
11-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E Card
Figure 11-8 MXP_2.5G_10G Card Block Diagram
11.8.2 MXP_2.5G_10G Functions
The functions of the MXP_2.5G_10G card are:
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators— Table G-7 on page G-10
11.8.3 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10G Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of MXP_2.5G_10G:
• NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-261
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.9 MXP_2.5G_10E Card
The faceplate designation of the card is “4x2.5G 10E MXP.” The MXP_2.5G_10E card is a DWDM
muxponder for the ONS 15454 platform that supports full transparent termination the client side. The
card multiplexes four 2.5 Gbps client signals (4 x OC48/STM-16 SFP) into a single 10-Gbps DWDM
optical signal on the trunk side. The MXP_2.5G_10E provides wavelength transmission service for the
four incoming 2.5 Gbps client interfaces. The MXP_2.5G_10E muxponder passes all SONET/SDH
overhead bytes transparently.
uP bus
uP
Flash RAM
ASIC
Optical
STM-64 / OC-192 Transceiver
9.953,
10.3125,
10.709, or
11.095 Gbps
SCI
83659
Backplane
Optical
STM-64 / OC-192 Transceiver
9.95328 or
10.70923 Gbps
Framer/FEC/DWDM
Processor
DWDM (Trunk)
Client
11-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E Card
The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be
used to set up generic communications channels (GCCs) for data communications, enable FEC, or
facilitate performance monitoring.
The MXP_2.5G_10E works with optical transport network (OTN) devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The
card supports ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping
a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing Function”
section on page G-18.
The MXP_2.5G_10E card is not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support full
transparent termination. You can install MXP_2.5G_10E cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can
provision this card in a linear configuration, as a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a
regenerator. The card can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is
configured for transparent termination mode.
The MXP_2.5G_10E features a 1550-nm laser on the trunk port and four 1310-nm lasers on the client
ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses
a dual LC connector on the trunk side and uses SFP modules on the client side for optical cable
termination. The SFP pluggable modules are short reach (SR) or intermediate reach (IR) and support an
LC fiber connector.
Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A
4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode. This is necessary to provision
a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit.
11.9.1 Key Features
The MXP_2.5G_10E card has the following high level features:
• Four 2.5 Gbps client interfaces (OC-48/STM-16) and one 10 Gbps trunk. The four OC-48 signals
are mapped into a ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing.
• Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard Reed-Solomon (RS, specified in
ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant
extension of the transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the
correction capability of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower
OSNR compared to the standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. A new block code (BCH)
algorithm implemented in E-FEC allows recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3.
• Pluggable client interface optic modules: The MXP_2.5G_10E card has modular interfaces. Two
types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These include an OC-48/STM 16 SR-1
interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and intra-office applications) and an
IR-1 interface with a range up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE
and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1
(ITU-T G.957).
• High level provisioning support: The MXP_2.5G_10E card is initially provisioned using
Cisco TransportPlanner software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using
CTC software.
• Link monitoring and management: The MXP_2.5G_10E card uses standard OC-48 OH (overhead)
bytes to monitor and manage incoming interfaces. The card passes the incoming SDH/SONET data
stream and its overhead bytes transparently.
11-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E Card
• Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The card is provisionable to terminate
regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It
can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network.
• Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_2.5G_10E normally synchronizes from the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. If for some reason, such as maintenance or
upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE is not available, the
MXP_2.5G_10E automatically synchronizes to one of the input client interface clocks.
• Configurable squelching policy: The card can be configured to squelch the client interface output if
there is LOS at the DWDM receiver or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the
card manages multiplex section alarm indication signal (MS-AIS) insertion.
11.9.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-9 shows the MXP_2.5G_10E faceplate.
Figure 11-9 MXP_2.5G_10E Faceplate
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section on
page G-1.
145937
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
4x2.5
10 E
MxP
530.33-
1550.12
RX
TX
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
Client LEDs
DWDM LED
11-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E Card
Figure 11-10 shows a block diagram of the MXP_2.5G_10E card.
Figure 11-10 MXP_2.5G_10E Block Diagram
11.9.3 MXP_2.5G_10E Functions
The functions of the MXP_2.5G_10E card are:
• G.5 Client Interface, page G-14
• G.6 DWDM Interface, page G-15
• G.12 Multiplexing Function, page G-18
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16
• G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16
• G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19
• G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19
• G.14 Client Interface Monitoring, page G-19
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• G.15 Jitter, page G-19
• G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19
• G.17 Onboard Traffic Generation, page G-19
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10.
uP bus
Serial bus
Processor
Onboard
Flash
memory
RAM
Optical
transceiver
115357
FEC/
Wrapper
Processor
(G.709 FEC)
E-FEC
DWDM
(trunk)
10GE
(10GBASE-LR)
SR-1
(short reach/intra-office)
or
IR-1
(intermediate range)
SFP client
optics modules
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver Backplane
11-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
11.9.3.1 Wavelength Identification
The card uses trunk lasers that are wave-locked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU
grid effectively. Table 11-5 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths. The laser is tunable
over eight wavelengths at 50-GHz spacing or four at 100-GHz spacing.
11.9.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of MXP_2.5G_10E Card:
• NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-261
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.10 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_L: (Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards are DWDM muxponders for the ONS 15454
platform that support transparent termination mode on the client side. The faceplate designation of the
cards is “4x2.5G 10E MXP C” for the MXP_2.5G_10E_C card and “4x2.5G 10E MXP L” for the
MXP_2.5G_10E_L card. The cards multiplex four 2.5-Gbps client signals (4 x OC48/STM-16 SFP) into
Table 11-5 MXP_2.5G_10E Trunk Wavelengths
Band
Wavelength
(nm) Band
Wavelength
(nm)
30.3 1530.33 46.1 1546.12
30.3 1531.12 46.1 1546.92
30.3 1531.90 46.1 1547.72
30.3 1532.68 46.1 1548.51
34.2 1534.25 50.1 1550.12
34.2 1535.04 50.1 1550.92
34.2 1535.82 50.1 1551.72
34.2 1536.61 50.1 1552.52
38.1 1538.19 54.1 1554.13
38.1 1538.98 54.1 1554.94
38.1 1539.77 54.1 1555.75
38.1 1540.56 54.1 1556.55
42.1 1542.14 58.1 1558.17
42.1 1542.94 58.1 1558.98
42.1 1543.73 58.1 1559.79
42.1 1544.53 58.1 1560.61
11-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
a single 10-Gbps DWDM optical signal on the trunk side. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards provide wavelength transmission service for the four incoming 2.5 Gbps client
interfaces. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L muxponders pass all SONET/SDH overhead
bytes transparently.
The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be
used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM.
The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards work with OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709.
The cards support ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously
mapping a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing
Function” section on page G-18.
The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards are not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G
card, which does not support transparent termination mode.
You can install MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can
provision a card in a linear configuration, as a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a
regenerator. The cards can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the cards are
configured for transparent termination mode.
The MXP_2.5G_10E_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is
tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. The
MXP_2.5G_10E_L features a tunable 1580-nm L-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable
across 80 wavelengths on the ITU grid, also with 50-GHz spacing. Each card features four 1310-nm
lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card
faceplate. The cards uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and use SFP modules on the client side
for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC fiber
connector.
Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A
4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode. This is necessary to provision
a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit.
11.10.1 Key Features
The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards have the following high level features:
• Four 2.5 Gbps client interfaces (OC-48/STM-16) and one 10 Gbps trunk. The four OC-48 signals
are mapped into a ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing.
• Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and
E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the
transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability
of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the
standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. A new BCH algorithm implemented in E-FEC allows
recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3.
• Pluggable client interface optic modules: The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards
have modular interfaces. Two types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These include
an OC-48/STM 16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and
intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is
defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia
GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957).
11-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
• High level provisioning support: The cards are initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner
software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software.
• Link monitoring and management: The cards use standard OC-48 OH (overhead) bytes to monitor
and manage incoming interfaces. The cards pass the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its
overhead bytes transparently.
• Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The cards are provisionable to terminate
regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It
can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network.
• Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards
normally synchronize from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. If for some reason, such as maintenance
or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 is not available, the cards automatically synchronize
to one of the input client interface clocks.
• Configurable squelching policy: The cards can be configured to squelch the client interface output
if there is LOS at the DWDM receiver or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the
card manages MS-AIS insertion.
• The cards are tunable across the full C band (MXP_2.5G_10E_C) or full L band
(MXP_2.5G_10E_L), thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each card to provide
tunability across specific wavelengths in a band.
11.10.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-11 shows the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L faceplates and block diagram.
11-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
Figure 11-11 MXP_2.5G_10E _C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Faceplates and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-1.
11.10.3 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Functions
The functions of the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards are:
• G.5 Client Interface, page G-14
• G.6 DWDM Interface, page G-15
• G.12 Multiplexing Function, page G-18
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16
• G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16
• G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19
• G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19
• G.14 Client Interface Monitoring, page G-19
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
4x2.5
10 E
MXP C
RX
TX
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
4x2.5
10 E
MXP L
RX
TX
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
RAM Processor
145941 Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Backplane
FEC/
Wrapper
E-FEC
Processor
(G.709 FEC)
Serial bus
uP bus
Onboard
Flash
memory
Client LEDs
DWDM LED
SR-1
(short reach/intra-office)
or IR-1
(intermediate range)
SFP client
optics modules
DWDM
(trunk)
10GE
(10GBASE-LR)
11-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• G.15 Jitter, page G-19
• G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19
• G.17 Onboard Traffic Generation, page G-19
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10.
11.10.3.1 Wavelength Identification
The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU
grid effectively. Both the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards implement the UT2 module.
The MXP_2.5G_10E_C card uses a C-band version of the UT2 and the MXP_2.5G_10E_L card uses an
L-band version.
Table 11-6 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_2.5G_10E_C card. The
laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid.
Table 11-6 MXP_2.5G_10E_C Trunk Wavelengths
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
11-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
Table 11-7 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_2.5G_10E_L card. The
laser is fully tunable over 80 wavelengths in the L band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid.
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
Table 11-6 MXP_2.5G_10E_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Table 11-7 MXP_2.5G_10E_L Trunk Wavelengths
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46
2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88
3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30
4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73
5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15
6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57
7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99
8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41
9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83
10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26
11-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
11.10.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of MXP_2.5G_10E_C and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards:
11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68
12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10
13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52
14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95
15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37
16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79
17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22
18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64
19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06
20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49
21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91
22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34
23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76
24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19
25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62
26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04
27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47
28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89
29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32
30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75
31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17
32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60
33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03
34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46
35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88
36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31
37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74
38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17
39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60
40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03
Table 11-7 MXP_2.5G_10E_L Trunk Wavelengths (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
11-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
• NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-261
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.11 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
The MXP_MR_2.5G card aggregates a mix and match of client Storage Area Network (SAN) service
client inputs (GE, FICON, Fibre Channel, and ESCON) into one 2.5 Gbps STM-16/OC-48 DWDM
signal on the trunk side. It provides one long-reach STM-16/OC-48 port per card and is compliant with
Telcordia GR-253-CORE.
Note In Software Release 7.0 and later, two additional operating modes have been made available to the user:
pure ESCON (all 8 ports running ESCON), and mixed mode (Port 1 running FC/GE/FICON, and Ports
5 through 8 running ESCON). When the card is part of a system running Software Release 6.0 or below,
only one operating mode, (FC/GE) is available for use.
The 2.5-Gbps Multirate Muxponder–Protected–100 GHz–Tunable 15xx.xx-15yy.yy (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
card aggregates various client SAN service client inputs (GE, FICON, Fibre Channel, and ESCON) into
one 2.5 Gbps STM-16/OC-48 DWDM signal on the trunk side. It provides two long-reach
STM-16/OC-48 ports per card and is compliant with ITU-T G.957 and Telcordia GR-253-CORE.
Because the cards are tunable to one of four adjacent grid channels on a 100-GHz spacing, each card is
available in eight versions, with 15xx.xx representing the first wavelength and 15yy.yy representing the
last wavelength of the four available on the card. In total, 32 DWDM wavelengths are covered in
accordance with the ITU-T 100-GHz grid standard, G.692, and Telcordia GR-2918-CORE, Issue 2. The
card versions along with their corresponding wavelengths are shown in Table 11-8.
The muxponders are intended to be used in applications with long DWDM metro or regional
unregenerated spans. Long transmission distances are achieved through the use of flat gain optical
amplifiers.
The client interface supports the following payload types:
• 2G FC
Table 11-8 Card Versions
Card Version Frequency Channels at 100 GHz (0.8 nm) Spacing
1530.33–1532.68 1530.33 nm 1531.12 nm 1531.90 nm 1532.68 nm
1534.25–1536.61 1534.25 nm 1535.04 nm 1535.82 nm 1536.61 nm
1538.19–1540.56 1538.19 nm 1538.98 nm 1539.77 nm 1540.56 nm
1542.14–1544.53 1542.14 nm 1542.94 nm 1543.73 nm 1544.53 nm
1546.12–1548.51 1546.12 nm 1546.92 nm 1547.72 nm 1548.51 nm
1550.12–1552.52 1550.12 nm 1550.92 nm 1551.72 nm 1552.52 nm
1554.13–1556.55 1554.13 nm 1554.94 nm 1555.75 nm 1556.55 nm
1558.17–1560.61 1558.17 nm 1558.98 nm 1559.79 nm 1560.61 nm
11-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
• 1G FC
• 2G FICON
• 1G FICON
• GE
• ESCON
Note Because the client payload cannot oversubscribe the trunk, a mix of client signals can be accepted, up to
a maximum limit of 2.5 Gbps.
Table 11-9 shows the input data rate for each client interface, and the encapsulation method. The current
version of the ITU-T Transparent Generic Framing Procedure (GFP-T) G.7041 supports transparent
mapping of 8B/10B block-coded protocols, including Gigabit Ethernet, Fibre Channel, and FICON.
In addition to the GFP mapping, 1-Gbps traffic on Port 1 or 2 of the high-speed serializer/deserializer
(SERDES) is mapped to an STS-24c channel. If two 1-Gbps client signals are present at Port 1 and Port 2
of the SERDES, the Port 1 signal is mapped into the first STS-24c channel and the Port 2 signal into the
second STS-24c channel. The two channels are then mapped into an OC-48 trunk channel.
Table 11-10 shows some of the mix and match possibilities on the various client ports. The table is
intended to show the full client payload configurations for the card.
Table 11-9 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation
Client Interface Input Data Rate ITU-T GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation
2G FC 2.125 Gbps Yes
1G FC 1.06 Gbps Yes
2G FICON 2.125 Gbps Yes
1G FICON 1.06 Gbps Yes
GE 1.25 Gbps Yes
ESCON 0.2 Gbps Yes
Table 11-10 Client Data Rates and Ports
Mode Port(s) Aggregate Data Rate
2G FC 1 2.125 Gbps
1G FC 1, 2 2.125 Gbps
2G FICON 1 2.125 Gbps
1G FICON 1, 2 2.125 Gbps
GE 1, 2 2.5 Gbps
1G FC
ESCON
(mixed mode)
1
5, 6, 7, 8
1.06 Gbps
0.8 Gbps
1.86 Gbps total
11-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
11.11.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-12 shows the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G faceplates.
1G FICON
ESCON
(mixed mode)
1
5, 6, 7, 8
1.06 Gbps
0.8 Gbps
1.86 Gbps total
GE
ESCON
(mixed mode)
1
5, 6, 7, 8
1.25 Gbps
0.8 Gbps
Total 2.05 Gbps
ESCON 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 1.6 Gbps
Table 11-10 Client Data Rates and Ports (continued)
Mode Port(s) Aggregate Data Rate
11-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
Figure 11-12 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Faceplates
For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Figure 11-13 shows a block diagram of the MXP_MR_2.5G card. The card has eight SFP client
interfaces. Ports 1 and 2 can be used for GE, FC, FICON, or ESCON. Ports 3 through 8 are used for
ESCON client interfaces. There are two SERDES blocks dedicated to the high-speed interfaces (GE, FC,
FICON, and ESCON) and two SERDES blocks for the ESCON interfaces. A FPGA is provided to
support different configurations for different modes of operation. This FPGA has a Universal Test and
Operations Physical Interface for ATM (UTOPIA) interface. A transceiver add/drop multiplexer
MXP_MR_2.5G MXPP_MR_2.5G
124077
MXP
MR
2.5G
15xx.xx
15xx.xx
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
MXPP
MR
2.5G
15xx.xx
15xx.xx
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TXRX TX RX TX
DWDMB DWDMA
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
RX TX RX TX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TXRX TX RX TX
DWDM
RX TX
11-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
(TADM) chip supports framing. Finally, the output signal is serialized and connected to the trunk front
end with a direct modulation laser. The trunk receive signal is converted into an electrical signal with an
avalanche photodiode (APD), is deserialized, and is then sent to the TADM framer and FPGA.
The MXPP_MR_2.5G is the same, except a 50/50 splitter divides the power at the trunk interface. In the
receive direction, there are two APDs, two SERDES blocks, and two TADM framers. This is necessary
to monitor both the working and protect paths. A switch selects one of the two paths to connect to the
client interface.
Figure 11-13 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Block Diagram
Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards in a loopback configuration on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks
with the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable
damage to the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
11.11.2 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Functions
The functions of the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards are:
• G.18 Performance Monitoring, page G-20
• G.19 Distance Extension, page G-20
• G.20 Slot Compatibility, page G-20
• G.21 Interoperability with Cisco MDS Switches, page G-20
• G.22 Client and Trunk Ports, page G-20
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
SFP 1
SFP 6
SFP 5
SFP 4
SFP 3
SFP 2
SFP 8
SERDES
FPGA
(for
FC,
GE,
FICON,
ESCON,
PCS,
B2B,
GFP-T)
SERDES
SFP 7
High-speed
SERDES
QDR
SRAM
TADM
framer
Laser
APD
Serializer
Deserializer
ESCON
ESCON
ESCON
ESCON
ESCON
ESCON
Trunk
interface
134986
GE, FC,
FICON,
ESCON
GE, FC,
FICON,
ESCON
11-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-10 on page G-12
11.11.3 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards:
• NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-282
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 (MXP_MR_2.5G only)
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.12 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards MXP_MR_10DME_L: (Cisco ONS 15454 only)
The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards aggregate a mix of client SAN service client
inputs (GE, FICON, and Fibre Channel) into one 10.0 Gbps STM-64/OC-192 DWDM signal on the trunk
side. It provides one long-reach STM-64/OC-192 port per card and is compliant with Telcordia
GR-253-CORE and ITU-T G.957.
The cards support aggregation of the following signal types:
• 1-Gigabit Fibre Channel
• 2-Gigabit Fibre Channel
• 4-Gigabit Fibre Channel
• 1-Gigabit Ethernet
• 1-Gigabit ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)
• 2-Gigabit ISC-Peer (ISC-3)
Note On the card faceplates, the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards are displayed as
10DME_C and 10DME_L, respectively.
Caution The card can be damaged by dropping it. Handle it safely.
The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponders pass all SONET/SDH overhead
bytes transparently.
The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be
used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM. The MXP_MR_10DME_C
and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards work with the OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The cards support
ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH
payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing Function” section on page G-18.
11-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
Note Because the client payload cannot oversubscribe the trunk, a mix of client signals can be accepted, up to
a maximum limit of 10 Gbps.
You can install MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
Note The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards are not compatible with the
MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support transparent termination mode.
The MXP_MR_10DME_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is
tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. The
MXP_MR_10DME_L features a tunable 1580-nm L-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable
across 80 wavelengths on the ITU grid, also with 50-GHz spacing. Each card features four 1310-nm
lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card
faceplate. The cards uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and use SFP modules on the client side
for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC fiber
connector.
Table 11-11 shows the input data rate for each client interface, and the encapsulation method. The
current version of the GFP-T G.7041 supports transparent mapping of 8B/10B block-coded protocols,
including Gigabit Ethernet, Fibre Channel, ISC, and FICON.
In addition to the GFP mapping, 1-Gbps traffic on Port 1 or 2 of the high-speed SERDES is mapped to
an STS-24c channel. If two 1-Gbps client signals are present at Port 1 and Port 2 of the high-speed
SERDES, the Port 1 signal is mapped into the first STS-24c channel and the Port 2 signal into the second
STS-24c channel. The two channels are then mapped into an OC-48 trunk channel.
There are two FPGAs on each MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L, and a group of four
ports is mapped to each FPGA. Group 1 consists of Ports 1 through 4, and Group 2 consists of Ports 5
through 8. Table 11-12 shows some of the mix and match possibilities on the various client data rates for
Ports 1 through 4, and Ports 5 through 8. An X indicates that the data rate is supported in that port.
Table 11-11 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Client Interface Data Rates and
Encapsulation
Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation
2G FC 2.125 Gbps Yes
1G FC 1.06 Gbps Yes
2G FICON/2G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/
2G ISC-Peer (ISC-3)
2.125 Gbps Yes
1G FICON/1G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/
1G ISC-Peer (ISC-3)
1.06 Gbps Yes
Gigabit Ethernet 1.25 Gbps Yes
Table 11-12 Supported Client Data Rates for Ports 1 through 4 and Ports 5 through 8
Port (Group 1) Port (Group 2) Gigabit Ethernet 1G FC 2G FC 4G FC
1 5 X X X X
2 6 X X — —
11-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
GFP-T PM is available through RMON and trunk PM is managed according to Telcordia GR-253-CORE
and ITU G.783/826. Client PM is achieved through RMON for FC and GE.
A buffer-to-buffer credit management scheme provides FC flow control. With this feature enabled, a port
indicates the number of frames that can be sent to it (its buffer credit), before the sender is required to
stop transmitting and wait for the receipt of a “ready” indication The MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L cards support FC credit-based flow control with a buffer-to-buffer credit
extension of up to 1600 km (994.1 miles) for 1G FC, up to 800 km (497.1 miles) for 2G FC, or up to
400 km (248.5 miles) for 4G FC. The feature can be enabled or disabled.
The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards feature a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line
port and a 1310-nm or 850-nm laser (depending on the SFP) for the client ports. The cards contains eight
12.5 degree downward tilt SFP modules for the client interfaces. For optical termination, each SFP uses
two LC connectors, which are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. The trunk port is a dual-LC connector
with a 45 degree downward angle.
The throughput of the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards is affected by the
following parameters:
• Distance extension—If distance extension is enabled on the card, it provides more throughput but
more latency. If distance extension is disabled on the card, the buffer to buffer credits on the storage
switch affects the throughput; higher the buffer to buffer credits higher is the throughput.
Note For each link to operate at the maximum throughput, it requires a minimum number of buffer
credits to be available on the devices which the link connects to. The number of buffer
credits required is a function of the distance between the storage switch extension ports and
the link bandwidth, that is, 1G, 2G, or 4G. These buffer credits are provided by either the
storage switch (if distance extension is disabled) or by both the storage switch and the card
(if distance extension is enabled).
• Forward Error Correction (FEC)—If Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) is enabled on the trunk port of the
card, the throughout is significantly reduced in comparison to standard FEC being set on the trunk
port.
Note If distance extension is enabled on the card, the FEC status does not usually affect the
throughput of the card.
• Payload size—The throughput of the card decreases with decrease in payload size.
The resultant throughput of the card is usually the combined effect of the above parameters.
11.12.1 Key Features
The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards have the following high-level features:
3 7 X X X —
4 8 X X — —
Table 11-12 Supported Client Data Rates for Ports 1 through 4 and Ports 5 through 8 (continued)
Port (Group 1) Port (Group 2) Gigabit Ethernet 1G FC 2G FC 4G FC
11-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
• Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and
E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the
transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability
of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the
standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. A new BCH algorithm implemented in E-FEC allows
recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3.
• Pluggable client interface optic modules: The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L
cards have modular interfaces. Two types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These
include an OC-48/STM 16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and
intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is
defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia
GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957).
• Y-cable protection: Supports Y-cable protection between the same card type only, on ports with the
same port number and signal rate. See the “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page G-27 for
more detailed information.
• High level provisioning support: The cards are initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner
software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software.
• ALS: A safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. For details regarding ALS provisioning
for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards, see the “NTP-G162 Change the
ALS Maintenance Settings” section on page 11-448.
• Link monitoring and management: The cards use standard OC-48 OH bytes to monitor and manage
incoming interfaces. The cards pass the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its OH bytes
transparently.
• Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The cards are provisionable to terminate
regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It
can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network.
• Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L
cards normally synchronize from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. If for some reason, such as
maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 is not available, the cards automatically
synchronize to one of the input client interface clocks.
Note MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards cannot be used for line timing.
• Configurable squelching policy: The cards can be configured to squelch the client interface output
if there is LOS at the DWDM receiver or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the
card manages MS-AIS insertion.
• The cards are tunable across the full C band (MXP_MR_10DME_C) or full L band
(MXP_MR_10DME_L), thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each card to provide
tunability across specific wavelengths in a band.
• You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to
create a link association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
• From Software Release 9.0, the fast switch feature of MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L cards along with the buffer-to-buffer credit recovery feature of MDS
switches, prevents reinitialization of ISL links during Y-cable switchovers.
11-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
11.12.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram
Figure 11-14 shows the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L faceplates and block diagram.
Figure 11-14 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Faceplates and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the cards in a loopback on the
trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes
irreparable damage to the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
10DME-C
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
145767
RX TX
1
RX TX
2
RX TX
3
RX TX
4
RX TX
1
RX TX
2
RX TX
3
RX TX
DWDM 4
RX TX
10DME-L
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
RX TX
1
RX TX
2
RX TX
3
RX TX
4
RX TX
1
RX TX
2
RX TX
3
RX TX
DWDM 4
RX TX
SPF 1/1
4G FC
SerDes
1 x QDR
2M x 36bit Burst4
1/2/4G-FC
B2B
Credit
Mgt
FPGA Framer G.709/FEC
OTN MXP UT2
Data path
5x I/O
5x I/O
SPF 2/1
SPF 3/1
CPU
Core
FPGA
Power supply
DCC/GCC
CPUC bus
SPF 4/1
SPF 6/1
4G FC
SerDes
1/2/4G-FC
B2B
Credit
Mgt
FPGA
5x I/O
5x I/O
SPF 7/1
SPF 8/1
SPF 9/1
Client
ports
Group 1
Group 2
11-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
11.12.3 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Functions
The functions of the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards are:
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-9 on page G-11
11.12.3.1 Wavelength Identification
The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU
grid effectively. Both the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards implement the UT2
module. The MXP_MR_10DME_C card uses a C-band version of the UT2 and the
MXP_MR_10DME_L card uses an L-band version.
Table 11-13 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_MR_10DME_C card.
The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid.
Table 11-13 MXP_MR_10DME_C Trunk Wavelengths
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
11-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
Table 11-14 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_MR_10DME_L card.
The laser is fully tunable over 80 wavelengths in the L band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid.
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
Table 11-13 MXP_MR_10DME_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Table 11-14 MXP_MR_10DME_L Trunk Wavelengths
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46
2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88
3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30
4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73
5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15
6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57
7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99
8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41
9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83
10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26
11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68
11-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
11.12.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of MXP_MR_10DME_C
and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards:
12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10
13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52
14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95
15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37
16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79
17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22
18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64
19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06
20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49
21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91
22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34
23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76
24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19
25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62
26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04
27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47
28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89
29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32
30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75
31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17
32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60
33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03
34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46
35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88
36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31
37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74
38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17
39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60
40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03
Table 11-14 MXP_MR_10DME_L Trunk Wavelengths (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
11-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
• NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-300
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.13 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards aggregate a variety of client service inputs
(GigabitEthernet, fibre channel, OTU2, OTU2e, and OC-192) into a single 40-Gbps OTU3/OTU3e
signal on the trunk side. You can either have 40E-MXP-C, or 40ME-MXP-C card based on your
requirement, though the CTC name 40E-MXP-C is common for both. The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C,
and 40ME-MXP-C cards support aggregation of the following signals:
• With overclock enabled on the trunk port:
– 10-Gigabit Fibre Channel
– OTU2e
• With overclock disabled on the trunk port:
– 8-Gigabit Fibre Channel
– 10-GigabitEthernet LAN-Phy (GFP framing)
– 10-GigabitEthernet LAN-Phy (WIS framing)
– OC-192/STM-64
– OTU2
Caution Handle the card with care. Dropping or misuse of the card could result in permanent damage.
The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C muxponders pass all SONET/SDH overhead bytes
transparently, section, or line termination.
The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be
used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate performance monitoring. The
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C and 40ME-MXP-C cards work with the OTN devices defined in
ITU-T G.709. The card supports ODTU23 multiplexing, an industry standard method for
asynchronously mapping client payloads into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing
Function” section on page G-18.
You can install and provision the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards in a linear
configuration in:
• Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 in ONS 15454 DWDM chassis
• Slot 2 in ONS 15454 M2 chassis
• Slots 2 to 6 in ONS 15454 M6 chassis
The client ports of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards interoperates with all the
existing TXP/MXP (OTU2 trunk) cards.
The client port of 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards does not interoperate with
OTU2_XP card when the signal rate is OTU1e (11.049 Gbps) and the “No Fixed Stuff” option is enabled
on the trunk port of OTU2_XP card.
11-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
For OTU2 and OTU2e client protocols, Enhanced FEC (EFEC) is not supported on Port 1 of the
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards. Table 11-15 lists the FEC configuration supported
on OTU2/OTU2e protocol for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards.
When setting up the card for the first time, or when the card comes up after clearing the LOS-P condition
due to fiber cut, the trunk port of the 40G-MXP-C card takes about 6 minutes to lock a signal. The trunk
port of the 40G-MXP-C card raises an OTUK-LOF alarm when the card is comes up. The alarm clears
when the trunk port locks the signal.
When a protection switch occurs on the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards, the recovery from
PSM protection switch takes about 3 to 4 minutes.
The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards is tunable over C-band on the trunk port. The
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards support pluggable XFPs on the client ports on the
card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side, and XFP modules on the client side
for optical cable termination. The XFP pluggable modules are SR, LR, MM, DWDM, or CWDM and
support an LC fiber connector. The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards contains four
XFP modules for the client interfaces. For optical termination, each XFP uses two LC connectors, which
are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. The trunk port is a dual LC connector facing downward at
45 degrees.
Table 11-16 shows the input data rate for each client interface.
11.13.1 Key Features
The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards provides the following key features:
• The 40G-MXP-C card uses the RZ-DQPSK 40G modulation format.
Table 11-15 Client Interface Data Rates for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C
and 40ME-MXP-C Client
Port
FEC Configuration Supported on
OTU2/OTU2e Client Protocol
Port 1 Only Standard FEC
Port 2 Standard and Enhanced FEC
Port 3 Standard and Enhanced FEC
Port 4 Standard and Enhanced FEC
Table 11-16 Client Interface Input Data Rates for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Client Interface Input Data Rate
8-Gigabit Fibre Channel 8.48 Gbps
10-Gigabit Fibre Channel 10.519 Gbps
10-GigabitEthernet LAN-Phy 10.312 Gbps
10-GigabitEthernet WAN-Phy 9.953 Gbps
OC-192/STM-64 9.953 Gbps
OTU2 10.709 Gbps
OTU2e 11.096 Gbps
11-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
• The 40E-MXP-C and 40ME-MXP-C cards uses the CP-DQPSK modulation format.
• Onboard E-FEC processor—The E-FEC functionality improves the correction capability of the
transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the standard
RS (239,255) correction algorithm. A new BCH algorithm implemented (according to G.975.1 I.7)
in E-FEC allows recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3. The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C cards support both the standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC standard,
which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the transmission
range on these interfaces.
• Y-cable protection—Supports Y-cable protection only between the same card type on ports with the
same port number and signal rate. For more information on Y-cable protection, seethe
“G.35.1 Y-Cable and Splitter Protection” section on page G-27.
Note Y-cable cannot be created on a 10 GE port when WIS framing is enabled on the
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards.
• Unidirectional regeneration—The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards supports
unidirectional regeneration configuration. Each 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C card
in the configuration regenerates the signal received from another 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C card in one direction.
Note When you configure the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards in the
Unidirectional Regen mode, ensure that the payload is not configured on the pluggable port
modules of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C card.
11-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Figure 11-15 shows a typical unidirectional regeneration configuration.
Figure 11-15 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards in Unidirectional Regeneration
Configuration
• High level provisioning support—The cards are initially provisioned using Cisco Transport Planner
software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software.
• Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)—A safety mechanism, Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS), is
used in the event of a fiber cut. The Auto Restart ALS option is supported only for OC-192/STM-64
and OTU2 payloads. The Manual Restart ALS option is supported for all payloads. For more
information on provisioning ALS for the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards, see
the “NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings” section on page 11-448.
• Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead—The cards are provisionable to terminate
regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It
can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network.
• Automatic timing source synchronization—The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C
cards synchronize to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards. Because of a
maintenance or upgrade activity, if the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards are not
available, the cards automatically synchronize to one of the input client interface clocks.
• Squelching policy—The cards are set to squelch the client interface output if there is LOS at the
DWDM receiver, or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the card manages
MS-AIS insertion.
• The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards are tunable across the full C-band
wavelength.
278759
Client
DWDM
System
DWDM
System
40G-MXP-C 40G-MXP-C
40G-MXP-C
40G-MXP-C
Client
DWDM
Trunk
DWDM
Trunk
DWDM
Trunk
DWDM
Trunk
11-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
11.13.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-16 shows the faceplate and block diagram of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C cards.
Figure 11-16 Faceplate and Block Diagram of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the cards in a loopback on the
trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes
irreparable damage to the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards.
11.13.3 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Functions
The functions of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards are:
278757
XFP
XFP
XFP
XFP
MSA
100
40 G
FEC/EF EC Trunk module
TDC
EDFA
XFP Child card
Tx
Rx Trunk
4x XFI
SFI 5.1
interface
Threshold
control
40G-MXP-C
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
XFP1
XFP2
XFP3
XFP4
TRUNK
RX 2 TX RX 1 TX
RX 4 TX RX 3 TX
TRUNK
TX
MX
RX
HAZARD
LEVEL 1
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED
JUNE 24, 2007
11-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-9 on page G-11
11.13.3.1 Wavelength Identification
The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards use trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which
allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. These cards implement the UT2
module; they use a C-band version of the UT2.
Table 11-17 lists the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C cards. The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C-band at 50-GHz spacing on the
ITU grid.
Table 11-17 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Trunk Wavelengths
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
11-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.13.4 Related Procedures for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of 40G-MXP-C,
40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards:
• NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-322
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.14 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards are Gigabit Ethernet Xponders for the ONS 15454
ANSI and ETSI platforms.
Note GE_XPE card is the enhanced version of the GE_XP card and 10GE_XPE card is the enhanced version
of the 10GE_XP card.
The cards aggregate Ethernet packets received on the client ports for transport on C-band trunk ports that
operate on a 100-GHz grid. The trunk ports operate with ITU-T G.709 framing and either FEC or E-FEC.
The GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards are designed for bulk point-to-point transport over 10GE LAN PHY
wavelengths for Video-on-Demand (VOD), or broadcast video across protected 10GE LAN PHY
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
Table 11-17 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Trunk Wavelengths (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
11-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
wavelengths. The GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards are designed for bulk GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE
point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, multipoint-to-multipoint transport over 10GE LAN PHY
wavelengths for Video-on-Demand (VOD), or broadcast video across protected 10GE LAN PHY
wavelengths.
You can install and provision the GE_XP, and GE_XPE cards in a linear configuration in:
• Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 in ONS 15454 DWDM chassis
• Slot 2 in ONS 15454 M2 chassis
• Slots 2 to 6 in ONS 15454 M6 chassis
The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards can be installed in Slots 1 through 6 or 12 through 17. The GE_XP
and GE_XPE are double-slot cards with twenty Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet
trunk ports. The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE are single-slot cards with two 10 Gigabit Ethernet client
ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. The client ports support SX, LX, and ZX SFPs and SR
and 10GBASE-LR XFPs. (LR2 XFPs are not supported.) The trunk ports support a DWDM XFP.
11-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
The RAD pluggables (ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW= and ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW=) do not support:
• No loopbacks (Terminal or Facility)
• RAI (Remote Alarm Indication) alarm
• AIS and LOS alarm
Caution A fan-tray assembly (15454E-CC-FTA for the ETSI shelf, or 15454-CC-FTA for the ANSI shelf) must
be installed in a shelf where a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed.
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can be provisioned to perform different Gigabit
Ethernet transport roles. All the cards can work as Layer 2 switches. However, the 10GE_XP and
10GE_XPE cards can also perform as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet transponders (10GE TXP mode), and the
GE_XP and GE_XPE can perform as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet or 20 Gigabit Ethernet muxponders (10GE
MXP or 20GE MXP mode). Table 11-18 shows the card modes supported by each card.
Note Changing the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card mode requires the ports to be in a
OOS-DSBL (ANSI) or Locked, disabled (ETSI) service state. In addition, no circuits can be provisioned
on the cards when the mode is being changed.
11.14.1 Key Features
The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards have the following high-level features:
• Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) that allows you to bundle several physical ports together
to form a single logical channel.
• Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) protocol that facilitates proactive connectivity
monitoring, fault verification, and fault isolation.
Table 11-18 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes
Card Mode Cards Description
Layer 2
Ethernet
switch
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
Provides capability to switch between any two ports irrespective of
client or trunk port. Supported Ethernet protocols and services include
1+1 protection, QoS (Quality of Service), CoS (Class of Service),
QinQ, MAC learning, MAC address retrieval, service provider
VLANs (SVLANs), IGMP snooping and Multicast VLAN
Registration (MVR), link integrity, and other Ethernet switch
services.
10GE TXP 10GE_XP
10GE_XPE
Provides a point-to-point application in which each 10 Gigabit
Ethernet client port is mapped to a 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk port.
10GE MXP
20GE MXP
GE_XP
GE_XPE
Provides the ability to multiplex the twenty Gigabit Ethernet client
ports on the card to one or both of its 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports.
The card can be provisioned as a single MXP with twenty Gigabit
Ethernet client ports mapped to one trunk port (Port 21) or as two
MXPs with ten Gigabit Ethernet client ports mapped to a trunk port
(Ports 1 to 10 mapped to Port 21, and Ports 11-20 mapped to Port 22).
11-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
• Ethernet Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) protocol that facilitates link
monitoring, remote failure indication, and remote loopback.
• Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) that controls network loops, handles link failures, and improves
convergence time.
• Configurable service VLANs (SVLANs) and customer VLANs (CVLANs).
• Ingress rate limiting that can be applied on both SVLANs and CVLANs. You can create SVLAN
and CVLAN profiles and can associate a SVLAN profile to both UNI and NNI ports; however, you
can associate a CVLAN profile only to UNI ports.
• CVLAN rate limiting that is supported for QinQ service in selective add mode.
• Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) to class of service (CoS) mapping that you can configure
for each port. You can configure the CoS of the outer VLAN based on the incoming DSCP bits. This
feature is supported only on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
• Ports, in Layer 2 switch mode, can be provisioned as network-to-network interfaces (NNIs) or
user-network interfaces (UNIs) to facilitate service provider to customer traffic management.
• Broadcast drop-and-continue capability for VOD and broadcast video applications.
• Gigabit Ethernet MXP, TXP, and Layer 2 switch capability over the ONS 15454 DWDM platform.
• Compatible with the ONS 15454 ANSI high-density shelf assembly, the ONS 15454 ETSI shelf
assembly, ONS 15454 ETSI high-density shelf assembly, ONS 15454 M2, and the ONS 15454 M6
shelf assemblies. Compatible with TCC2, TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, TNCE, TSC, and TSCE cards.
• Far-End Laser Control (FELC) that is supported on copper SFPs from Release 8.52 and later
releases. For more information on FELC, see the “G.36 Far-End Laser Control” section on
page G-32.
• Layer 2 switch mode that provides VLAN translation, QinQ, ingress CoS, egress QoS, Fast Ethernet
protection switching, and other Layer 2 Ethernet services.
• Interoperable with TXP_MR_10E and TXP_MR_10E_C cards. Also interoperable with
Cisco Catalyst 6500 and Cisco 7600 series Gigabit Ethernet, 10 GE interfaces and CRS-1 10GE
interfaces.
• The GE_XP and GE_XPE cards have twenty Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit
Ethernet trunk ports. The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards have two 10 Gigabit Ethernet client ports
and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. The client Gigabit Ethernet signals are mapped into an
ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing when configured in one of the
MXP modes (10GE MXP or 20GE MXP).
• ITU-T G.709 framing with standard Reed-Soloman (RS) (255,237) FEC. Performance monitoring
and ITU-T G.709 Optical Data Unit (ODU) synchronous and asynchronous mapping. E-FEC with
ITU-T G.709 ODU and 2.7 Gbps with greater than 8 dB coding gain.
• IEEE 802.3 frame format that is supported for 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. The minimum frame
size is 64 bytes. The maximum frame size is user-provisionable.
• MAC learning capability in Layer 2 switch mode.
• MAC address retrieval in cards provisioned in the L2-over-DWDM mode.
• When a port is in UNI mode, tagging can be configured as transparent or selective. In transparent
mode, only SVLANs in the VLAN database of the node can be configured. In selective mode, a
CVLAN- to-SVLAN relationship can be defined.
• Layer 2 VLAN port mapping that allows the cards to be configured as multiple Gigabit Ethernet
TXPs and MXPs.
• Y-cable protection is configurable in TXP and MXP modes.
11-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
• Two protection schemes are available in Layer 2 mode. They are:
– 1+1 protection—Protection scheme to address card, port, or shelf failures for client ports.
– Fast Automatic Protection—Protection scheme to address card, port, or shelf failures for trunk
ports.
• End-to-end Ethernet link integrity.
• Pluggable client interface optic modules (SFPs and XFPs)—Client ports support tri-rate SX, LX,
and ZX SFPs, and 10-Gbps SR1 XFPs.
• Pluggable trunk interface optic modules; trunk ports support the DWDM XFP.
• Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping that restricts the flooding of multicast
traffic by forwarding multicast traffic to those interfaces where a multicast device is present.
• Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) for applications using wide-scale deployment of multicast
traffic across an Ethernet ring-based service provider network.
• Ingress CoS that assigns a CoS value to the port from 0 (highest) to 7 (lowest) and accepts CoS of
incoming frames.
• Egress QoS that defines the QoS capabilities for the egress port.
• MAC address learning that facilitates switch processing.
• Storm Control that limits the number of packets passing through a port. You can define the
maximum number of packets allowed per second for the following types of traffic: Broadcast,
Multicast, and Unicast. The threshold for each type of traffic is independent and the maximum
number of packets allowed per second for each type of traffic is 16777215.
11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list
Table 11-19 lists the protocol compatibility for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
11.14.3 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-17 shows the GE_XP faceplate and block diagram. The GE_XPE faceplate and block diagram
looks the same.
Table 11-19 Protocol Compatibility List for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Protocol L1 1+1 FAPS IGMP REP LACP CFM EFM
L1 No Yes Yes No No Yes No
1+1 No Yes Yes No No Yes No
FAPS Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No
IGMP Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No
REP No No No Yes No Yes No
LACP No No No No No No No
CFM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
EFM No No No No No No No
11-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Figure 11-17 GE_XP and GE_XPE Faceplates and Block Diagram
The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards have two trunk ports. The GE_XP and GE_XPE
trunk ports are displayed as follows:
• Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 on the faceplate
• 21-1 and 22-1 on CTC
• 21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk) on the Optics Thresholds table
Figure 11-18 shows the 10GE_XP faceplate and block diagram. The 10 GE_XPE faceplate and block
diagram looks the same.
FAIL
ACT
SF
GE-XP
1
RX TX
2
RX TX
3
RX TX
4
RX TX
5
RX TX
6
RX TX
7
RX TX
8
RX TX
9
RX TX
10
RX TX
11
RX TX
12
RX TX
13
RX TX
14
RX TX
15
RX TX
16
RX TX
17
RX TX
18
RX TX
19
RX TX
20
RX TX
RX TX
2 TRUNK 1
CONSOLE
T2 T1
RX TX
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
CLIENT: +3dBm
TRUNK: +1dBm
HAZARD
LEVEL 1
159052
12GE
Client
ports
CONN
8GE
Client
ports
XAUI
to
SF14
XAUI
to
SF14
FEC SERDES XFP WDM
FEC SERDES XFP WDM
MPC8270 core Power supply Clocking
BCM
5650x SCL FPGA
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JULY 26, 2001
Client
Ports 9-14
Client GE
Ports 1-8
GE
Client
Ports 15-20
Trunk GE
Ports 1-2
10GE
BCM 5650x with
Ethernet ASIC
11-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Figure 11-18 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE Faceplates and Block Diagram
The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE card trunk ports are displayed as follows:
• Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 on the faceplate
• 3-1 and 4-1 on CTC
• 3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk) on the Optics Thresholds table
For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the cards in a loopback on the
trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes
irreparable damage to the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
!
MAX INPUT
POWER LEVEL
CLIENT: +3dBm
TRUNK: +1dBm
HAZARD
LEVEL 1
10GE
XP
RX 2 TX TRUNK RX 1 TX RX 2 TX CLIENT RX 1 TX
COMPLIES WITH
21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11
EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS
PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE
No.50, DATED
JULY 26, 2001
FAIL
ACT
SF
CONSOLE
159053
159053 XFP XAUI
SERDES
XFP XAUI
SERDES
XAUI
to
SF14
XAUI
to
SF14
FEC SERDES XFP WDM
FEC SERDES XFP WDM
MPC8270 core Power supply Clocking
BCM 5650x
with
Ethernet ASIC
SCL FPGA
Client
Ports 1-2
10GE
Trunk
Ports 1-2
10GE
11-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.4 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Functions
The functions of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards are:
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-9 on page G-11
11.14.4.1 Client Interface
The client interface is implemented with separately orderable SFP or XFP modules. The client interfaces
support the following tri-rate SFPs and XFPs using dual LC connectors and multimode fiber:
• SFP - GE/1G-FC/2G-FC - 850 nm - MM - LC (PID ONS-SE-G2F-SX)
• SFP - GE/1G-FC/2G-FC 1300 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-G2F-LX)
• SFP - GE/1G-FC/2G-FC 1300 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-G2F-ZX)
• SFP - 10/100/1000Base-T - Copper (PID ONS-SE-ZE-EL) Intra office up to 100;
Cable: RJ45 STP CAT5, CAT5E, and CAT6
• SFP - 1000Base BX D/Gigabit Ethernet 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-GE-BXD)
• SFP - 1000Base BX U/Gigabit Ethernet 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-GE-BXU)
• SFP - Fast Ethernet 1310 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SI-100-LX10)
• SFP - Fast Ethernet 1310 nm - MM - LC (PID ONS-SI-100-FX)
• SFP - Fast Ethernet over DS1/E1 - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-EOP1) (GE_XPE only)
• SFP - Fast Ethernet over DS3/E3 - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-EOP3) (GE_XPE only)
• SFP - E1/DS1 over Fast Ethernet - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW) (GE_XPE only)
• SFP - E3/DS3 PDH over Fast Ethernet - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW) (GE_XPE only)
Note The recommended topology for using ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW and ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW SFPs is shown in
Figure 11-19.
Figure 11-19 Recommended Topology for Using ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW and ONS -SC-E3-T3-PW SFPs
The client interfaces support the following dual-rate XFP using dual LC connectors and single-mode
fiber:
249504
Network A with
Internal Timing
Network B with
LoopbackTiming
Node A
Ethernet
Network
ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or
ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW
on Port n of GE_XPE Card
in Node A with Loopback Timing
ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or
ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW
on Port n of GE_XPE Card
in Node B with AdaptiveTiming
Node B
11-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
• XFP - OC-192/STM-64/10GE/10-FC/OTU2 - 1310 SR - SM LC (PID: ONS-XC-10G-S1)
• XFP - 10GE - 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-XC-10G-L2)
• XFP - 10GE - 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-XC-10G-C)
Note If ONS-XC-10G-C XFP is used on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards on
client port 1, the maximum temperature at which the system qualifies is +45 degree Celsius.
The client interfaces support the following multimode XFP using dual LC connectors and multi-mode
fiber:
• XFP - OC-192/10GFC/10GE - 850 nm MM LC (PID ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM)
11.14.4.2 DWDM Trunk Interface
The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards have two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports
operating at 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10.3125 Gbps) or 10 Gigabit Ethernet into OTU2 (nonstandard
11.0957 Gbps). The ports are compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE
standards. The ports are capable of carrying C-band and L-band wavelengths through insertion of
DWDM XFPs. Forty channels are available in the 1550-nm C band 100-GHz ITU grid, and forty
channels are available in the L band.
11.14.4.3 Configuration Management
The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards support the following configuration
management parameters:
• Port name—User-assigned text string.
• Admin State/Service State—Administrative and service states to manage and view port status.
• MTU—Provisionable maximum transfer unit (MTU) to set the maximum number of bytes per
frames accepted on the port.
• Mode—Provisional port mode, either Autonegotiation or the port speed.
• Flow Control—Flow control according to IEEE 802.1x pause frame specification can be enabled or
disabled for TX and RX ports.
• Bandwidth—Provisionable maximum bandwidth allowed for the port.
• Ingress CoS—Assigns a CoS value to the port from 0 (highest) to 7 (lowest) and accepts CoS of
incoming frames.
• Egress QoS—Defines the QoS capabilities at the egress port.
• NIM—Defines the port network interface management type based on Metro Ethernet Forum
specifications. Ports can be defined as UNI or NNI.
• MAC Learning—MAC address learning to facilitate switch processing.
• VLAN tagging provided according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
Note When the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards are provisioned in a MXP or TXP mode,
only the following parameters are available: Port Name, State, MTU, Mode, Flow control, and
Bandwidth.
11-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.4.4 Security
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card ports can be provisioned to block traffic from a
user-defined set of MAC addresses. The remaining traffic is normally switched. You can manually
specify the set of blocked MAC addresses for each port. Each port of the card can receive traffic from a
limited predefined set of MAC addresses. The remaining traffic will be dropped. This capability is a
subset of the Cisco IOS “Port Security” feature.
11.14.4.5 Card Protection
The following card protection schemes are available for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards.
• Y-Cable Protection—See the “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page G-27.
• 1+1 Protection—See the “G.35.2 1+1 Protection” section on page G-30.
• Layer 2 Over DWDM Protection—See the “G.35.3 Layer 2 Over DWDM Protection” section on
page G-31.
11.14.4.5.1 Related Procedures for Card Protection
The following are the related procedures for creating card protection on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
and 10GE_XPE cards:
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards,
page 11-168
• DLP-G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection Settings,
page 11-393
11.14.5 IGMP Snooping
As networks increase in size, multicast routing becomes critically important as a means to determine
which segments require multicast traffic and which do not. IP multicasting allows IP traffic to be
propagated from one source to a number of destinations, or from many sources to many destinations.
Rather than sending one packet to each destination, one packet is sent to the multicast group identified
by a single IP destination group address. GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can learn
up to a maximum of 1024 multicast groups. This includes groups on all the VLANs.
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping restricts the flooding of multicast traffic by
forwarding multicast traffic to those interfaces where a multicast device is present.
When the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card receives an IGMP leave group message from
a host, it removes the host port from the multicast forwarding table after generating group specific
queries to ensure that no other hosts interested in traffic for the particular group are present on that port.
Even in the absence of any “leave” message, the cards have a timeout mechanism to update the group
table with the latest information. After a card relays IGMP queries from the multicast router, it deletes
entries periodically if it does not receive any IGMP membership reports from the multicast clients.
In a multicast router, general queries are sent on a VLAN when Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM)
is enabled on the VLAN. The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card forwards queries to all
ports belonging to the VLAN. All hosts interested in this multicast traffic send Join requests and are
11-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
added to the forwarding table entry. The Join requests are forwarded only to router ports. By default,
these router ports are learned dynamically. However, they can also be statically configured at the port
level in which case the static configuration overrides dynamic learning.
For information about interaction of IGMP with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol
Compatibility list” section on page 11-62.
11.14.5.1 IGMP Snooping Guidelines and Restrictions
The following guidelines and restrictions apply to IGMP snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards:
• IGMP snooping V2 is supported as specified in RFC 4541.
• IGMP snooping V3 is not supported and the packets are flooded in the SVLAN.
• Layer 2 multicast groups learned through IGMP snooping are dynamic.
• GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards support IGMP snooping on 128 stacked VLANs and GE_XPE and
10GE_XPE cards support up to 256 stacked VLANs that are enabled.
• IGMP snooping can be configured per SVLAN or CVLAN. By default, IGMP snooping is disabled
on all SVLANs and CVLANs.
• IGMP snooping on CVLAN is enabled only when:
– MVR is enabled.
– UNI ports are in selective add and selective translate modes. For each UNI port, a CVLAN must
be specified for which IGMP snooping is to be enabled.
• IGMP snooping can be enabled only on one CVLAN per port. If you enable IGMP snooping on
CVLAN, you cannot enable IGMP snooping on the associated SVLAN and vice versa. The number
of VLANs that can be enabled for IGMP snooping cannot exceed 128.
• When IGMP snooping is enabled on double-tagged packets, CVLAN has to be the same on all ports
attached to the same SVLAN.
• When IGMP snooping is working with the Fast Automatic Protection Switch (FAPS) in a ring-based
setup, it is advisable to configure all NNI ports as static router ports. This minimizes the multicast
traffic hit when a FAPS switchover occurs.
The following conditions are raised from IGMP snooping at the card:
• MCAST-MAC-TABLE-FULL—This condition is raised when the multicast table is full and a new
join request is received. This table is cleared when at least one entry gets cleared from the multicast
table after the alarm is raised.
• MCAST-MAC-ALIASING—This condition is raised when there are multiple L3 addresses that map
to the same L2 address in a VLAN. This is a transient condition.
For more information on severity level of these conditions and procedure to clear these alarms, refer to
the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide.
11.14.5.2 Fast-Leave Processing
Note Fast-Leave processing is also known as Immediate-Leave.
11-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
IGMP snooping Fast-Leave processing allows the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE to
remove an interface that sends a leave message from the forwarding table without first sending group
specific queries to the interface. When you enable IGMP Fast-Leave processing, the card immediately
removes a port from the IP multicast group when it detects an IGMP, version 2 (IGMPv2) leave message
on that port.
11.14.5.3 Static Router Port Configuration
Multicast-capable ports are added to the forwarding table for every IP multicast entry. The card learns
of such ports through the PIM method.
11.14.5.4 Report Suppression
Report suppression is used to avoid a storm of responses to an IGMP query. When this feature is enabled,
a single IGMP report is sent to each multicast group in response to a single query. Whenever an IGMP
snooping report is received, report suppression happens if the report suppression timer is running. The
Report suppression timer is started when the first report is received for a general query. Then this time
is set to the response time specified in general query.
11.14.5.5 IGMP Statistics and Counters
An entry in a counter contains multicasting statistical information for the IGMP snooping capable
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card. It provides statistical information about IGMP
messages that have been transmitted and received. IGMP statistics and counters can be viewed via CTC
from the Performance > Ether Ports > Statistics tab.
This information can be stored in the following counters:
• cisTxGeneralQueries—Number of general queries transmitted through an interface.
• cisTxGroupSpecificQueries—Total group specific queries transmitted through an interface.
• cisTxReports—Total membership reports transmitted through an interface.
• cisTxLeaves—Total Leave messages transmitted through an interface.
• cisRxGeneralQueries—Total general queries received at an interface.
• cisRxGroupSpecificQueries—Total Group Specific Queries received at an interface.
• cisRxReports—Total Membership Reports received at an interface.
• cisRxLeaves—Total Leave messages received at an interface.
• cisRxValidPackets—Total valid IGMP packets received at an interface.
• cisRxInvalidPackets—Total number of packets that are not valid IGMP messages received at an
interface.
11.14.5.6 Related Procedure for Enabling IGMP Snooping
To enable IGMP snooping on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the
“NTP-G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards” section on
page 11-411.
11-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.6 Multicast VLAN Registration
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is designed for applications using wide-scale deployment of
multicast traffic across an Ethernet-ring-based service provider network (for example, the broadcast of
multiple television channels over a service-provider network). MVR allows a subscriber on a port to
subscribe and unsubscribe to a multicast stream on the network-wide multicast VLAN. It allows the
single multicast VLAN to be shared in the network while subscribers remain in separate VLANs. MVR
provides the ability to continuously send multicast streams in the multicast VLAN, but to isolate the
streams from the subscriber VLANs for bandwidth and security reasons.
MVR assumes that subscriber ports subscribe and unsubscribe (“Join” and “Leave”) these multicast
streams by sending out IGMP Join and Leave messages. These messages can originate from an IGMP
version-2-compatible host with an Ethernet connection. MVR operates on the underlying mechanism of
IGMP snooping. MVR works only when IGMP snooping is enabled.
The card identifies the MVR IP multicast streams and their associated MAC addresses in the card
forwarding table, intercepts the IGMP messages, and modifies the forwarding table to include or remove
the subscriber as a receiver of the multicast stream, even though the receivers is in a different VLAN
than the source. This forwarding behavior selectively allows traffic to cross between different VLANs.
Note When MVR is configured, the port facing the router must be configured as NNI in order to allow the
router to generate or send multicast stream to the host with the SVLAN. If router port is configured as
UNI, the MVR will not work properly.
11.14.6.1 Related Procedure for Enabling MVR
To enable MVR on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G206 Enable
MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card” section on page 11-413.
11.14.7 MAC Address Learning
The GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards support 32K MAC addresses. MAC address learning can be enabled
or disabled per SVLAN on GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards. The cards learn the MAC address of packets
they receive on each port and add the MAC address and its associated port number to the MAC address
learning table. As stations are added or removed from the network, the GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards
update the MAC address learning table, adding new dynamic addresses and aging out those that are
currently not in use.
MAC address learning can be enabled or disabled per SVLAN. When the configuration is changed from
enable to disable, all the related MAC addresses are cleared. The following conditions apply:
• If MAC address learning is enabled on per port basis, the MAC address learning is not enabled on
all VLANs, but only on VLANs that have MAC address learning enabled.
• If per port MAC address learning is disabled then the MAC address learning is disabled on all
VLANs, even if it is enabled on some of the VLAN supported by the port.
• If the per port MAC address learning is configured on GE-XP and 10 GE-XP cards, before upgrading
to GE-XPE or 10 GE-XPE cards, enable MAC address learning per SVLAN. Failing to do so
disables MAC address learning.
11-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.7.1 Related Procedure for MAC Address Learning
To enable MAC address learning on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the
“DLP-G221 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-401.
11.14.8 MAC Address Retrieval
MAC addresses learned can be retrieved or cleared on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
cards provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode. The MAC addresses can be retrieved using the CTC or TL1
interface.
GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards support 32K MAC addresses and GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards support
16K MAC addresses. To avoid delay in processing requests, the learned MAC addresses are retrieved
using an SVLAN range. The valid SVLAN range is from 1 to 4093.
The MAC addresses of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can also be retrieved.
The card MAC addresses are static and are used for troubleshooting activities. One MAC address is
assigned to each client, trunk, and CPU ports of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card.
These internal MAC addresses can be used to determine if the packets received on the far-end node are
generated by GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
For MAC address retrieval, the following conditions apply:
• The cards must be provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode.
• MAC address learning must be enabled per SVLAN on GE_XPE or 10 GE_XPE cards.
• MAC address learning must be enabled per port on GE_XP or 10 GE_XP cards.
11.14.8.1 Related Procedure for MAC Address Retrieving
To retrieve and clear MAC addresses on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the
“NTP-G237 Retrieve and Clear MAC Addresses on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-403.
11.14.9 Link Integrity
The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card support end-to-end Ethernet link integrity. This
capability is integral to providing an Ethernet private line service and correct operation of Layer 2 and
Layer 3 protocols on the attached Ethernet devices.
The link integrity feature propagates a trunk fault on all the affected SVLAN circuits in order to squelch
the far end client interface. Ethernet-Advanced IP Services (E-AIS) packets are generated on a
per-port/SVLAN basis. An E-AIS format is compliant with ITU Y.1731.
Note E-AIS packets are marked with a CoS value of 7 (also called .1p bits). Ensure that the network is not
overloaded and there is sufficient bandwidth for this queue in order to avoid packet drops.
When link integrity is enabled on a per-port SVLAN basis, E-AIS packets are generated when the
following alarms are raised;
• LOS-P
11-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
• OTUKLOF/LOM
• SIGLOSS
• SYNCHLOSS
• OOS
• PPM not present
When link integrity is enabled, GE_XP and 10 GE_XP card supports up to128 SVLANs and GE_XPE,
10 GE_XPE can support up to 256 SVLANs.
11.14.9.1 Related Procedure for Enabling Link Integrity
To enable link integrity on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G205
Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-406.
11.14.10 Ingress CoS
Ingress CoS functionality enables differentiated services across the GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards. A
wide range of networking requirements can be provisioned by specifying the class of service applicable
to each transmitted traffic.
When a CVLAN is configured as ingress CoS, the per-port settings are not considered. A maximum of
128 CVLAN and CoS relationships can be configured.
11.14.10.1 Related Procedure for Enabling Ingress CoS
To enable Ingress CoS on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the:
• “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings”
section on page 11-381
• “DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC” section on page 11-347
11.14.11 CVLAN Rate Limiting
CVLAN rate limiting is supported on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. CVLAN rate
limiting is supported for QinQ service in selective add mode. The following limitations and restrictions
apply to CVLAN rate limiting:
• CVLAN rate limiting is not supported for the following service types:
– Selective translate mode
– Transparent mode
– Selective double add mode
– Selective translate add mode
– Untagged packets
– CVLAN range
– Services associated with the channel group
• CVLAN rate limiting and SVLAN rate limiting cannot be applied to the same service instance.
11-73
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
• Pseudo-IOS command line interface (PCLI) is not supported for CVLAN rate limiting.
• A VLAN profile with Link Integrity option enabled cannot be used to perform CVLAN rate limiting.
• On GE_XP and 10 GE_XP cards, CVLAN rate limiting can be applied to up to 128 services.
However, the number of provisionable CVLAN rate limiting service instances is equal to 192 minus
the number of SVLAN rate limiting service instances present on the card (subject to a minimum of
64 CVLAN rate limiting service instances).
• On GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards, CVLAN rate limiting can be applied to up to 256 services.
However, the number of provisionable CVLAN rate limiting service instances is equal to 384 minus
the number of SVLAN rate limiting service instances present on the card (subject to a minimum of
128 CVLAN rate limiting service instances).
11.14.11.1 Related Procedure for Provisioning CVLAN Rate
To provision CVLAN rate on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the
“NTP-G289 Provision CVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card”
section on page 11-408.
11.14.12 DSCP to CoS Mapping
DSCP to CoS mapping can be configured for each port. You can configure the CoS of the outer VLAN
based on the incoming DSCP bits. This feature is supported only on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
PCLI is not supported for DSCP to CoS mapping.
DSCP to CoS mapping is supported for the following service types:
– Selective add mode
– Selective translate mode
– Transparent mode
– Selective double add mode
– Selective translate add mode
– Untagged packets
– CVLAN range
– Services associated with the channel group
11.14.12.1 Related Procedure for Provisioning CoS Based on DSCP
To provision CoS based on DSCP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the
“DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings” section on
page 11-399.
11.14.13 Link Aggregation Control Protocol
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of the IEEE802.3ad standard that allows you to
bundle several physical ports together to form a single logical channel. LACP allows a network device
such as a switch to negotiate an automatic bundling of links by sending LACP packets to the peer device.
11-74
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
LACP allows you to form a single Layer 2 link automatically from two or more Ethernet links. This
protocol ensures that both ends of the Ethernet link are functional and agree to be members of the
aggregation group before the link is added to the group. LACP must be enabled at both ends of the link
to be operational.
For more information on LACP, refer to the IEEE802.3ad standard. For information about interaction of
LACP with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list” section on page 11-62.
11.14.13.1 Advantages of LACP
LACP provides the following advantages:
• High-speed network that transfers more data than any single port or device.
• High reliability and redundancy. If a port fails, traffic continues on the remaining ports.
• Hashing algorithm that allows to apply load balancing policies on the bundled ports.
11.14.13.2 Functions of LACP
LACP performs the following functions in the system:
• Maintains configuration information to control aggregation.
• Exchanges configuration information with other peer devices.
• Attaches or detaches ports from the link aggregation group based on the exchanged configuration
information.
• Enables data flow when both sides of the aggregation group are synchronized.
11.14.13.3 Modes of LACP
LACP can be configured in the following modes:
• On — Default. In this mode, the ports do not exchange LACP packets with the partner ports.
• Active — In this mode, the ports send LACP packets at regular intervals to the partner ports.
• Passive — In this mode, the ports do not send LACP packets until the partner sends LACP packets.
After receiving the LACP packets from the partner ports, the ports send LACP packets.
11.14.13.4 Parameters of LACP
LACP uses the following parameters to control aggregation:
• System Identifier—A unique identification assigned to each system. It is the concatenation of the
system priority and a globally administered individual MAC address.
• Port Identification—A unique identifier for each physical port in the system. It is the concatenation
of the port priority and the port number.
• Port Capability Identification—An integer, called a key, that identifies the capability of one port to
aggregate with another port. There are two types of keys:
– Administrative key—The network administrator configures this key.
– Operational key—The LACP assigns this key to a port, based on its aggregation capability.
• Aggregation Identifier—A unique integer that is assigned to each aggregator and is used for
identification within the system.
11-75
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.13.5 Unicast Hashing Schemes
LACP supports the following unicast hashing schemes:
• Ucast SA VLAN Incoming Port
• Ucast DA VLAN Incoming Port
• Ucast SA DA VLAN Incoming port
• Ucast Src IP TCP UDP
• Ucast Dst IP TCP UDP
• Ucast Src Dst IP TCP UDP
Note Unicast hashing schemes apply to unicast traffic streams only when the destination MAC address is
already learned by the card. Hence, MAC learning must be enabled to support load balancing as per the
configured hashing scheme. If the destination MAC address is not learned, the hashing scheme is Ucast
Src Dst IP TCP UDP.
11.14.13.6 LACP Limitations and Restrictions
The LACP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following limitations and
restrictions:
• Hot standby link state is not supported on the channel group.
• Marker protocol generator is not supported.
• ALS cannot be configured on the channel group.
• Loopback configuration cannot be applied on the channel group.
11.14.13.7 Related Procedure for LACP
To provision Channel Group using LACP, see the “NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings” section on page 11-345.
11.14.14 Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management
Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) is part of the IEEE 802.1ag standard. The Ethernet
CFM is an end-to-end per service instance that supports the Ethernet layer Operations, Administration,
and Management (OAM) protocol. It includes proactive connectivity monitoring, link trace on a per
service basis, fault verification, and fault isolation for large Ethernet metropolitan-area networks
(MANs) and WANs.
CFM is disabled on the card by default. CFM is enabled on all the ports by default.
For more information on CFM, refer to the IEEE 802.1ag standard. For information about interaction of
CFM with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list” section on page 11-62. The
following sections contain conceptual information about Ethernet CFM.
11-76
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.14.1 Maintenance Domain
A maintenance domain is an administrative domain that manages and administers a network. You can
assign a unique maintenance level (from 0 to 7) to define the hierarchical relationship between domains.
The larger the domain, the higher the maintenance level for that domain. For example, a service provider
domain would be larger than an operator domain and might have a maintenance level of 6, while the
operator domain maintenance level would be 3 or 4.
Maintenance domains cannot intersect or overlap because that would require more than one entity to
manage it, which is not allowed. Domains can touch or nest if the outer domain has a higher maintenance
level than the nested domain. Maintenance levels of nesting domains must be communicated among the
administrating organizations. For example, one approach would be to have the service provider assign
maintenance levels to operators.
The CFM protocol supports up to eight maintenance domains on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards.
11.14.14.2 Maintenance Association
A maintenance association identifies a service within the maintenance domain. You can have any number
of maintenance associations within each maintenance domain. The CFM protocol supports up to 1500
maintenance associations on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Note Each maintenance association is mapped to a maintenance domain. This mapping is done to configure a
Maintenance End Point (MEP). The CFM protocol supports up to 1000 mappings on GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
11.14.14.3 Maintenance End Points
Maintenance End Points (MEPs) reside at the edge of the maintenance domain and are active elements
of the Ethernet CFM. MEPs transmit Continuity Check messages at periodic intervals and receive similar
messages from other MEPs within a domain. MEPs also transmit Loopback and Traceroute messages at
the request of the administrator. MEPs confine CFM messages within the boundary of a maintenance
domain through the maintenance level. There are two types of MEPs:
• Up (Inwards, towards the bridge)
• Down (Outwards, towards the wire).
You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up
to 500 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
The MEP continuity check database (CCDB) stores information that is received from other MEPs in the
maintenance domain. The card can store up to 4000 MEP CCDB entries.
11.14.14.4 Maintenance Intermediate Points
Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIPs) are internal to the maintenance domain and are passive
elements of the Ethernet CFM. They store information received from MEPs and respond to Linktrace
and Loopback CFM messages. MIPs forward CFM frames received from MEPs and other MIPs, drop all
CFM frames at a lower level, and forward all CFM frames at a higher level.
You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up
to 500 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
11-77
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
The MIP CCDB maintains the information received for all MEPs in the maintenance domain. The card
can store up to 4000 MIP CCDB entries.
11.14.14.5 CFM Messages
The Ethernet CFM on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards supports the following
messages:
• Continuity Check—These messages are exchanged periodically among MEPs. They allow MEPs to
discover other MEPs within a domain and allow MIPs to discover MEPs. These messages are
confined to a domain.
• Loopback—These messages are unicast messages that a MEP transmits, at the request of an
administrator, to verify connectivity to a specific maintenance point. A reply to a loopback message
indicates whether a destination is reachable.
• Traceroute—These messages are multicast messages that a MEP transmits, at the request of an
administrator, to track the path to a destination MEP.
11.14.14.6 CFM Limitations and Restrictions
The CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following limitations and
restrictions:
• CFM is not supported on channel groups.
• CFM is not enabled on protected ports running REP, FAPS, and 1+1.
• Y.1731 enhancements including AIS, LCK, and performance monitoring messages along with CFM
are not supported.
• IEEE CFM MIB is not supported.
• L1 and CFM are mutually exclusive on a SVLAN because LI and CFM use the same MAC address.
• MAC security and CFM are mutually exclusive on the card due to hardware resource constraints.
11.14.14.7 Related Procedure for Ethernet CFM
For information about the supported Ethernet CFM features on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card
CFM Settings” section on page 11-356.
11.14.15 Ethernet OAM
The Ethernet OAM protocol is part of the IEEE 802.3ah standard and is used for installing, monitoring,
and troubleshooting Ethernet MANs and Ethernet WANs. This protocol relies on an optional sublayer in
the data link layer of the OSI model. The Ethernet OAM protocol was developed for Ethernet in the First
Mile (EFM) applications. The terms Ethernet OAM and EFM are interchangeably used and both mean
the same.
Normal link operation does not require Ethernet OAM. You can implement Ethernet OAM on any
full-duplex point-to-point or emulated point-to-point Ethernet link for a network or part of a network
(specified interfaces). OAM frames, called OAM Protocol Data Units (OAM PDUs), use the slow
protocol destination MAC address 0180.c200.0002. OAM PDUs are intercepted by the MAC sublayer
and cannot propagate beyond a single hop within an Ethernet network.
11-78
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Ethernet OAM is disabled on all interfaces by default. When Ethernet OAM is enabled on an interface,
link monitoring is automatically turned on.
For more information on Ethernet OAM protocol, refer to IEEE 802.3ah standard. For information about
interaction of Ethernet OAM with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list” section
on page 11-62.
11.14.15.1 Components of the Ethernet OAM
Ethernet OAM consists of two major components, the OAM Client and the OAM Sublayer.
11.14.15.1.1 OAM Client
The OAM client establishes and manages the Ethernet OAM on a link. The OAM client also enables and
configures the OAM sublayer. During the OAM discovery phase, the OAM client monitors the OAM
PDUs received from the remote peer and enables OAM functionality. After the discovery phase, the
OAM client manages the rules of response to OAM PDUs and the OAM remote loopback mode.
11.14.15.1.2 OAM Sublayer
The OAM sublayer presents two standard IEEE 802.3 MAC service interfaces:
• One interface facing toward the superior sub-layers, which include the MAC client (or link
aggregation).
• Other interface facing toward the subordinate MAC control sublayer.
The OAM sublayer provides a dedicated interface for passing OAM control information and OAM PDUs
to and from the client.
11.14.15.2 Benefits of the Ethernet OAM
Ethernet OAM provides the following benefits:
• Competitive advantage for service providers
• Standardized mechanism to monitor the health of a link and perform diagnostics
11.14.15.3 Features of the Ethernet OAM
The Ethernet OAM protocol has the following OAM features:
• Discovery—Identifies devices in the network and their OAM capabilities. The Discovery feature
uses periodic OAM PDUs to advertise the OAM mode, configuration, and capabilities. An optional
phase allows the local station to accept or reject the configuration of the peer OAM entity.
• Link Monitoring—Detects and indicates link faults under a variety of conditions. It uses the event
notification OAM PDU to notify the remote OAM device when it detects problems on the link.
• Remote Failure Indication—Allows an OAM entity to convey the failure conditions to its peer
through specific flags in the OAM PDU.
• Remote Loopback—Ensures link quality with a remote peer during installation or troubleshooting.
11-79
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.15.4 Ethernet OAM Limitations and Restrictions
The Ethernet OAM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following
limitations and restrictions:
• CFM, REP, link integrity, LACP, FAPS, IGMP on SVLAN and L2 1+1 protection are not supported
with EFM.
• IEEE EFM MIB is not supported.
• EFM cannot be enabled or disabled at the card level.
• Unidirectional functionality is not supported.
• Errored Symbol Period, Rx CRC errors, Tx CRC errors are not supported.
• OAM PDUs are limited to 1 frame per second.
• Dying Gasp and critical events are not supported.
Note Dying Gasp RFI is not generated on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. However, if
the peer device sends a dying gasp RFI, the card detects it and raises an alarm.
11.14.15.5 Related Procedure for Ethernet OAM
For information about the supported Ethernet OAM features on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card
EFM Settings” section on page 11-368.
11.14.16 Resilient Ethernet Protocol
The Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) is a protocol used to control network loops, handle link failures,
and improve convergence time.
REP performs the following tasks:
• Controls a group of ports connected in a segment.
• Ensures that the segment does not create any bridging loops.
• Responds to link failures within the segment.
• Supports VLAN load balancing.
For information about interaction of REP with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility
list” section on page 11-62.
11.14.16.1 REP Segments
A REP segment is a chain of ports connected to each other and configured with a segment ID. Each
segment consists of regular segment ports and two edge ports. A GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE card can have up to 2 ports that belong to the same segment, and each segment port can have
only one external neighbor port.
A segment protects only against a single link failure. Any more failures within the segment result in loss
of connectivity.
11-80
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.16.2 Characteristics of REP Segments
REP segments have the following characteristics:
• If all the ports in the segment are operational, one port blocks traffic for each VLAN. If VLAN load
balancing is configured, two ports in the segment control the blocked state of VLANs.
• If any port in the segment is not operational, all the other operational ports forward traffic on all
VLANs to ensure connectivity.
• In case of a link failure, the alternate ports are immediately unblocked. When the failed link comes
up, a logically blocked port per VLAN is selected with minimal disruption to the network.
11.14.16.3 REP Port States
Ports in REP segments take one of three roles or states: Failed, Open, or Alternate.
• A port configured as a regular segment port starts as a failed port.
• When the neighbor adjacencies are determined, the port transitions to the alternate port state,
blocking all the VLANs on the interface. Blocked port negotiations occur and when the segment
settles, one blocked port remains in the alternate role and all the other ports become open ports.
• When a failure occurs in a link, all the ports move to the failed state. When the alternate port receives
the failure notification, it changes to the open state, forwarding all VLANs.
11.14.16.4 Link Adjacency
Each segment port creates an adjacency with its immediate neighbor. Link failures are detected and acted
upon locally. If a port detects a problem with its neighbor, the port declares itself non-operational and
REP converges to a new topology.
REP Link Status Layer (LSL) detects its neighbor port and establishes connectivity within the segment.
All VLANs are blocked on an interface until the neighbor port is identified. After the neighbor port is
identified, REP determines the neighbor port that must be the alternate port and the ports that must
forward traffic.
Each port in a segment has a unique port ID. When a segment port starts, the LSL layer sends packets
that include the segment ID and the port ID.
A segment port does not become operational if the following conditions are satisfied:
• No neighbor port has the same segment ID or more than one neighbor port has the same segment ID.
• The neighbor port does not acknowledge the local port as a peer.
11.14.16.5 Fast Reconvergence
REP runs on a physical link and not on per VLAN. Only one hello message is required for all VLANs
that reduces the load on the protocol.
REP Hardware Flood Layer (HFL) is a transmission mechanism that floods packets in hardware on an
admin VLAN. HFL avoids the delay that is caused by relaying messages in software. HFL is used for
fast reconvergence in the order of 50 to 200 milliseconds.
11-81
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
11.14.16.6 VLAN Load Balancing
You must configure two edge ports in the segment for VLAN load balancing. One edge port in the REP
segment acts as the primary edge port; the other edge port as the secondary edge port. The primary edge
port always participates in VLAN load balancing in the segment. VLAN load balancing is achieved by
blocking certain VLANs at a configured alternate port and all the other VLANs at the primary edge port.
11.14.16.7 REP Configuration Sequence
You must perform the following tasks in sequence to configure REP:
• Configure the REP administrative VLAN or use the default VLAN 1. The range of REP admin
VLAN is 1 to 4093. VLAN 4094 is not allowed.
• Add ports to the segment in interface configuration mode.
• Enable REP on ports and assign a segment ID to it. REP is disabled on all ports by default. The range
of segment ID is 1 to 1024.
• Configure two edge ports in the segment; one port as the primary edge port and the other as the
secondary edge port.
• If you configure two ports in a segment as the primary edge port, for example, ports on different
switches, REP selects one of the ports to serve as the primary edge port based on port priority. The
Primary option is enabled only on edge ports.
• Configure the primary edge port to send segment topology change notifications (STCNs) and VLAN
load balancing to another port or to other segments. STCNs and VLAN load balancing
configurations are enabled only for edge ports.
Note A port can belong to only one segment. Only two ports can belong to the same segment. Both the ports
must be either regular ports or edge ports. However, if the No-neighbor port is configured, one port can
be an edge port and another port can be a regular port.
11.14.16.8 REP Supported Interfaces
REP supports the following interfaces:
• REP is supported on client (UNI) and trunk (NNI) ports.
• Enabling REP on client ports allows protection at the access or aggregation layer when the cards are
connected to the L2 network.
• Enabling REP on trunk ports allows protection at the edge layer when the cards are connected in a
ring.
11.14.16.9 REP Limitations and Restrictions
The REP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following limitations and
restrictions:
• Fast re-convergence and VLAN load balancing are not supported on UNI ports in transparent mode.
• Native VLAN is not supported.
• CFM, EFM, link integrity, LACP, FAPS, and L2 1+1 protection are not supported on ports that are
configured as part of REP segment and vice versa.
11-82
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
• NNI ports cannot be configured as the primary edge port or blocking port at the access or
aggregation layer.
• Only three REP segments can be configured on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
• Consider the following configuration:
More than one REP closed segment is configured on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards and the same HFL admin VLAN is enabled on the switches.
If two different segments are configured on more than one common switch, the following
consequences happen.
– Layer 1 loop
– Flooding of HFL packets across segments if one REP segment fails
– Segment goes down due to LSL time out even if the segment does not have faults
Hence, it is recommended not to configure two different segments on more than one common switch.
• Consider the following configuration:
– VLAN Load Balancing is configured on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards by
specifying the VLB preempt delay.
– Primary and secondary edge ports are configured on the same switch.
– HFL or LSL is activated.
This configuration leads to high convergence time during manual premption, VLB activation, and
deactivation (400 to 700 milliseconds).
11.14.16.10 Related Procedure for Managing the REP Settings
To manage the REP settings on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the
“NTP-G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings” section on
page 11-373.
11.14.17 Related Procedures for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards:
• NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line
Settings, and PM Thresholds, page 11-379
• NTP-G311 Provision the Storm Control Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards, page 11-405
• NTP-G208 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Card, page 11-409
• NTP-G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring, page 11-423
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11-83
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
11.15 ADM-10G Card
The ADM-10G card operates on ONS 15454 SONET, ONS 15454 SDH, ONS 15454 M2,
ONS 15454 M6, and DWDM networks to carry optical signals and Gigabit Ethernet signals over DWDM
wavelengths for transport. The card aggregates lower bit-rate client SONET or SDH signals
(OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, OC-48/STM-16, or Gigabit Ethernet) onto a C-band tunable DWDM
trunk operating at a higher OC-192/STM-64 rate. In a DWDM network, the ADM-10G card transports
traffic over DWDM by mapping Gigabit Ethernet and SONET or SDH circuits onto the same wavelength
with multiple protection options.
You can install and provision the ADM-10G card in a linear configuration in:
• Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 in standard and high-density ONS 15454 ANSI shelves (15454-SA-ANSI
or 15454-SA-HD), the ETSI ONS 15454 standard shelf assembly, or the ONS 15454 ETSI
high-density shelf assembly
• Slot 2 in ONS 15454 M2 chassis
• Slots 2 to 6 in ONS 15454 M6 chassis
Caution Fan-tray assembly 15454E-CC-FTA (ETSI shelf)/15454-CC-FTA (ANSI shelf) must be installed in a
shelf where the ADM-10G card is installed.
The card is compliant with ITU-T G.825 and ITU-T G.783 for SDH signals. It supports concatenated
and non-concatenated AU-4 mapped STM-1, STM-4, and STM-16 signals as specified in ITU-T G.707.
The card also complies with Section 5.6 of Telcordia GR-253-CORE and supports synchronous
transport signal (STS) mapped OC-3, OC-12, and OC-48 signals as specified in the standard.
The client SFP and trunk XFP are compliant with interface requirements in Telcordia GR-253-CORE,
ITU-T G.957 and/or ITU-T G.959.1, and IEEE 802.3.
11.15.1 Key Features
The ADM-10G card has the following high-level features:
• Operates with the TCC2, TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE.
• Interoperable with TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10EX_C, and OTU2_XP cards.
• Has built-in OC-192/STM-64 add/drop multiplexing function including client, trunk, and STS
cross-connect.
• Supports both single-card and double-card (ADM-10G peer group) configuration.
• Supports path protection/SNCP on client and trunk ports for both single-card and double-card
configuration. The card does not support path protection/SNCP between a client port and a trunk
port. Path protection/SNCP is supported only between two client ports or two trunk ports.
• Supports 1+1 protection on client ports for double-card configuration only.
• Supports SONET, SDH, and Gigabit Ethernet protocols on client SFPs.
• Supports XFP DWDM trunk interface single wavelengths.
• Returns zero bit errors when a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card switches from
active to standby or when manual or forced protection switches occur.
• Has 16 SFP-based client interfaces (gray, colored, coarse wavelength division multiplexing
(CWDM), and DWDM optics available).
11-84
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
• Supports STM1, STM4, STM16, and Gigabit Ethernet client signals (8 Gigabit Ethernet maximum).
• Has one XFP-based trunk interface supporting E-FEC/FEC and ITU-T G.709 for double-card
configuration.
• Has two XFP-based trunk interface supporting E-FEC/FEC and ITU-T G.709 for single-card
configuration.
• Has two SR XFP interlink interfaces supporting redundancy connection with protection board and
pass-through traffic for double-card configuration.
• Supports frame-mapped generic framing procedure (GFP-F) and LEX mapping for Ethernet over
SONET or SDH.
• Can be installed or pulled from operation, in any slot, without impacting other service cards in the
shelf.
• Supports client to client hairpinning, that is, creation of circuits between two client ports for both
single-card and double-card configuration. See the “11.15.11 Circuit Provisioning” section on
page 11-90 for more detailed information.
11.15.2 ADM-10G POS Encapsulation, Framing, and CRC
The ADM-10G card supports Cisco EoS LEX (LEX) and generic framing procedure framing (GFP-F)
encapsulation on 8 POS ports corresponding to 8 GigE ports (Port 1 to Port 8) in both single-card and
double-card (ADM-10G peer group) configuration.
You can provision framing on the ADM-10G card as either the default GFP-F or LEX framing. With
GFP-F framing, you can configure a 32-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) or none (no CRC) (the
default). LEX framing supports 16-bit or 32-bit CRC configuration. The framing type cannot be changed
when there is a circuit on the port.
On the CTC, navigate to card view and click the Provisioning > Line> Ethernet Tab. To see the various
parameters that can be configured on the ethernet ports, see the “CTC Display of ethernet Port
Provisioning Status” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet Card
Software Feature and Configuration Guide. Parameters such as, admin state, service state, framing type,
CRC, MTU and soak time for a port can be configured.
It is possible to create an end-to-end circuit between equipment supporting different kinds of
encapsulation (for example, LEX on one side and GFP-F on other side). But, under such circumstances,
traffic does not pass through, and an alarm is raised if there is a mismatch.
11.15.2.1 POS Overview
Ethernet data packets need to be framed and encapsulated into a SONET/SDH frame for transport across
the SONET/SDH network. This framing and encapsulation process is known as packet over
SONET/SDH (POS).
The Ethernet frame comes into the ADM-10G card on a standard Gigabit Ethernet port and is processed
through the card’s framing mechanism and encapsulated into a POS frame. When the POS frame exits,
the ADM-10G card is in a POS circuit, and this circuit is treated as any other SONET circuit (STS) or
SDH circuit (VC) in the ONS node. It is cross-connected and rides the SONET/SDH signal out the port
of an optical card and across the SONET/SDH network.
The destination of the POS circuit is a card or a device that supports the POS interface. Data packets in
the destination card frames are removed and processed into ethernet frames. The Ethernet frames are
then sent to a standard Ethernet port of the card and transmitted onto an Ethernet network.
11-85
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
11.15.2.2 POS Framing Modes
A POS framing mode is the type of framing mechanism employed by the ADM-10G card to frame and
encapsulate data packets into a POS signal. These data packets were originally encapsulated in Ethernet
frames that entered the standard Gigabit Ethernet interface of the ADM-10G card.
11.15.2.2.1 GFP-F Framing
The GFP-F framing represent standard mapped Ethernet over GFP-F according to ITU-T G.7041. GFP-F
defines a standard-based mapping of different types of services onto SONET/SDH. GFP-F maps one
variable length data packet onto one GFP packet. GFP-F comprises of common functions and payload
specific functions. Common functions are those shared by all payloads. Payload-specific functions are
different depending on the payload type. GFP-F is detailed in the ITU recommendation G.7041.
11.15.2.2.2 LEX Framing
LEX encapsulation is a HDLC frame based Cisco Proprietary protocol, where the field is set to values
specified in Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) RFC 1841. HDLC is one of the most popular Layer
2 protocols. The HDLC frame uses the zero insertion/deletion process (commonly known as bit stuffing)
to ensure that the bit pattern of the delimiter flag does not occur in the fields between flags. The HDLC
frame is synchronous and therefore relies on the physical layer to provide a method of clocking and
synchronizing the transmission and reception of frames. The HDLC framing mechanism is detailed in
the IETF’s RFC 1662, “PPP in HDLC-like Framing.”
11.15.2.3 GFP Interoperability
The ADM-10G card defaults to GFP-F encapsulation that is compliant with ITU-T G.7041. This mode
allows the card to operate with ONS 15310-CL, ONS 15310-MA, ONS 15310-MA SDH, or ONS 15454
data cards (for example, ONS 15454 CE100T-8 or ML1000-2 cards). GFP encapsulation also allows the
ADM-10G card to interoperate with other vendors Gigabit Ethernet interfaces that adhere to the
ITU-T G.7041 standard.
11.15.2.4 LEX Interoperability
The LEX encapsulation is compliant with RFC 1841. This mode allows the card to operate with
ONS 15310-CL, ONS 15310-MA, ONS 15310-MA SDH, or ONS 15454 data cards (for example,
G1000-4/G1K-4 cards, CE-1000-4, ONS 15454 CE100T-8 or ML1000-2 cards).
11.15.3 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-20 shows the ADM-10G card faceplate.
11-86
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
Figure 11-20 ADM-10G Card Faceplate and Block Diagram
11.15.4 Port Configuration Rules
ADM-10G card client and trunk port capacities are shown in Figure 11-21.
FAIL
ACT
SF
ADM-10G
ILK1
TRK2/ILK2
TRK1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RX TX RX TX RX TX
16 15 14 13
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE No.50,
DATED JULY 26, 2001
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
10G SONET/SDH
framer-pointer
processor
10xGE MAC
10G GFP-over
SONET/SDH
framer
10G SONET/SDH
framer-pointer
processor 2
G.709-FEC
framer 1
G.709-FEC
framer 2
XFP
DWDM
TRUNK
ILK
XFP
ILK
XFP
VCAT
RLDR
switch
SCL CPU-Core
FPGA
alarm
cpld
alarm
cpld
Main board
Daughter card
4 x OC48/STM16
4 x OC3/OC12 or
4 x STM1/STM4
12 x OC3/OC12
or 12 x STM1/STM4
10G SONET/SDH
framer-pointer
processor 3
10G SONET/SDH
framer-pointer
processor 4
13 SFP
14
15
16
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SFP
SFP
SFP
switch
STS-1
cross-connect
HAZARD
LEVEL 1
250482
19
17 18
11-87
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
Figure 11-21 ADM-10G Card Port Capacities
Port 17 acts as trunk2 or ILK1 interface based on single-card or double-card configuration.
11.15.5 Client Interfaces
The ADM-10G card uses LC optical port connectors and, as shown in Figure 11-21, supports up to
16 SFPs that can be utilized for OC-N/STM-N traffic. Eight of the SFPs can be used for Gigabit Ethernet.
The interfaces can support any mix of OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, OC-48/STM-16, or Gigabit
Ethernet of any reach, such as SX, LX, ZX, SR, IR, or LR. The interfaces support a capacity of:
• 4 x OC-48/STM-16
• 16 x OC-12/STM-4
• 16 x OC-3/STM-1
• 8 x GE
The supported client SFPs and XFPs are:
• Gray SFPs
– 1000Base-SX SFP 850 nm (ONS-SE-G2F-SX=)
– 1000Base-LX SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SE-G2F-LX=)
– OC48/STM16 IR1, OC12/STM4 SR1, OC3/STM1 SR1, GE-LX multirate SFP 1310 nm
(ONS-SE-Z1=)
– OC3/STM1 IR1, OC12/STM4 IR1 multirate SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SI-622-I1=)
– OC48/STM16 SR1 SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SI-2G-S1=)
– OC48/STM16 IR1 SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SI-2G-I1=)
– OC48/STM16, 1550 LR2, SM LC (ONS-SE-2G-L2=)
GE G r a y SFP 1
13
14
15
16
ILK1/
TRK2(17)
ILK2/
TRK2(18)
TRK1
(19)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
GE G r a y SFP
GE G r a y SFP
GE OC48/OC12/OC3
OC48/OC12/OC3
OC48/OC12/OC3
OC48/OC12/OC3
STM16/STM4/STM1
STM16/STM4/STM1
STM16/STM4/STM1
STM16/STM4/STM1
G r a y SFP G r a y SFP
G r a y XFP
*Gray/
DWDM XFP
D WDM XFP O TU2/OC192/STM64
*OTU2/OC192/STM64
G r a y SFP
G r a y SFP
G r a y SFP
GE G r a y SFP
GE G r a y SFP
GE G r a y SFP
GE G ra y SFP
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
G r a y SFP
G r a y SFP
G r a y SFP
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
OC12/OC3
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1
STM4/STM1 G r a y SFP
OC192/STM64
243481
*DWDM XFP and OTU2 is supported only when
Port 18 is configured as a trunk interface.
11-88
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
• Colored DWDM SFPs
– 1000Base-ZX SFP 1550 nm (ONS-SI-GE-ZX=)
– OC3/STM1 LR2 SFP 1550 nm (ONS-SI-155-L2=)
– OC48/STM16 LR2 SFP 1550 nm (ONS-SI-2G-L2=)
– OC48/STM16 SFP (ONS-SC-2G-xx.x)
Note xx.x = 28.7 to 60.6. ONS-SC-2G-28.7, ONS-SC-2G-33.4, ONS-SC-2G-41.3,
ONS-SC-2G-49.3, and ONS-SC-2G-57.3 are supported from Release 8.5 and later.
• CWDM SFPs
– OC48/STM16/GE CWDM SFP (ONS-SC-Z3-xxxx)
• XFPs
– OC-192/STM-64/10GE XFP 1550 nm (ONS-XC-10G-I2)
11.15.6 Interlink Interfaces
Two 2R interlink interfaces, called ILK1 (Port 17) and ILK2 (Port 18), are provided for creation of
ADM-10G peer groups in double-card configurations. In a single-card configuration, Port 17
(OC-192/STM-64) and Port 18 (OC-192/STM-64 or OTU2 payload) must be configured as trunk
interfaces. In a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group), Ports 17 and 18 must be configured
as ILK1 and ILK2 interfaces, respectively. Physically cabling these ports between two ADM-10G cards,
located on the same shelf, allows you to configure them as an ADM-10G peer group.The ILK ports carry
10 Gb of traffic each.
The interlink interfaces support STM64 SR1 (ONS-XC-10G-S1=) XFP and 10GE BASE SR
(ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM=) XFPs.
11.15.7 DWDM Trunk Interface The ADM-10G card supports OC-192/STM-64 signal transport and ITU-T G.709 digital wrapping
according to the ITU-T G.709 standard.The ADM-10G card supports three trunk XFPs:
• Two DWDM trunks, and one trunk interface in a single-card configuration.
• One DWDM trunk XFP in a double-card configuration.
The supported DWDM trunk XFPs are:
• 10G DWDM (ONS-XC-10G-xx.x=) (colored XFP)
• STM64 SR1 (ONS-XC-10G-S1=) (gray XFP)
11.15.8 Configuration Management
When using OC-48/STM-16 traffic, some contiguous port configurations, listed in Table 11-20, are
unavailable due to hardware limitations. This limitation does not impact the Gigabit Ethernet payload.
11-89
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
Note The ADM-10G card cannot be used in the same shelf with SONET or SDH cross-connect cards.
Note The total traffic rate for each trunk cannot exceed OC-192/STM-64 on each ADM-10G card, or for each
ADM-10G peer group.
Note Gigabit Ethernet is supported on Ports 1 through 8. Ports 9 through Port 12 support only OC-3/STM-1
or OC-12/STM-4.
Additionally, the following guidelines apply to the ADM-10G card:
• Trunk Port 17 supports OC-192/STM-64.
• Trunk Ports 18 and 19 support OC-192/STM-64 and OTU2.
• The interlink port supports OC-192/STM-64.
• Up to six ADM-10G cards can be installed in one shelf.
• Up to 24 ADM-10G cards can be installed per network element (NE) regardless of whether the card
is installed in one shelf or in multiple shelves.
• The card can be used in all 15454-SA-ANSI and 15454-SA-HD shelves as well as ETSI ONS 15454
standard and high-density shelves.
• A lamp test function can be activated from CTC to ensure that all LEDs are functional.
• The card can operate as a working protected or working non-protected card.
• In a redundant configuration, an active card hardware or software failure triggers a switch to the
standby card. This switch is detected within 10 ms and is completed within 50 ms.
• ADM-10G cards support jumbo frames with MTU sizes of 64 to 9,216 bytes; the maximum is 9,216.
• After receiving a link or path failure, the ADM-10G card can shut down only the downstream
Gigabit Ethernet port.
Note In ADM-10G cards, the Gigabit Ethernet port does not support flow control.
Table 11-20 OC-48/STM-16 Configuration Limitations
OC-48/STM-16 Port Number Ports Restricted from Optical Traffic
OC-48/STM-16 on Port 13 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 1 through Port 3
OC-48/STM-16 on Port 14 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 4 through Port 6
OC-48/STM-16 on Port 15 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 7 through Port 9
OC-48/STM-16 on Port 16 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 10 through Port 12
11-90
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
11.15.9 Security
The ADM-10G card that an SFP or XFP is plugged into implements the Cisco Standard Security Code
Check Algorithm that keys on the vendor ID and serial number.
If a pluggable port module (PPM) is plugged into a port on the card but fails the security code check
because it is not a Cisco PPM, a minor NON-CISCO-PPM alarm is raised.
If a PPM with an unqualified product ID is plugged into a port on this card—that is, the PPM passes the
security code as a Cisco PPM but it has not been qualified for use on the ADM-10G card— a minor
UNQUAL-PPM alarm is raised.
11.15.10 Protection
The ADM-10G card supports 1+1 and SONET path protection and SDH SNCP protection architectures
in compliance with Telcordia GR-253-CORE, Telcordia GR-1400-CORE, and ITU-T G.841
specifications.
11.15.10.1 Circuit Protection Schemes
The ADM-10G card supports path protection/SNCP circuits at the STS/VC4 (high order) level and can
be configured to switch based on signal degrade calculations. The card supports path protection/SNCP
on client and trunk ports for both single-card and double-card configuration.
Note The ADM-10G card supports path protection/SNCP between client ports and trunk port 17. The card
does not support path protection/SNCP between client ports and trunk ports 18 or 19. The card does not
support path protection/SNCP between port 17 and trunk ports 18 and 19.
The card allows open-ended path protection/SNCP configurations incorporating other vendor
equipment. In an open-ended path protection/SNCP, you can specify one source point and two possible
endpoints (or two possible source points and one endpoint) and the legs can include other vendor
equipment. The source and endpoints are part of the network discovered by CTC.
11.15.10.2 Port Protection Schemes
The ADM-10G card supports unidirectional and bidirectional 1+1 APS protection schemes on client
ports for double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group) only. 1+1 APS protection scheme is not
supported in single-card configuration. For 1+1 optical client port protection, you can configure the
system to use any pair of like facility interfaces that are on different cards of the ADM-10G peer group.
11.15.11 Circuit Provisioning
The ADM-10G card supports STS circuit provisioning both in single-card and double-card (ADM-10G
peer group) configuration. The card allows you to create STS circuits between:
• Client and trunk ports
• Two trunk ports
• Two client ports (client-to-client hairpinning)
11-91
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
Note Circuits between two trunk ports are called pass-through circuits.
For an ADM-10G card in single-card configuration, if you are creating STS circuits between two client
ports, the following limitation must be considered:
• Gigabit Ethernet to Gigabit Ethernet connections are not supported.
For an ADM-10G card that is part of an ADM-10G peer group, if you are creating STS circuits between
two client ports or between client and trunk ports, the following limitations must be considered:
• Gigabit Ethernet to Gigabit Ethernet connections are not supported.
• Optical channel (OC) to OC, OC to Gigabit Ethernet, and Gigabit Ethernet to OC connections
between two peer group cards are supported. Peer group connections use interlink port bandwidth,
hence, depending on the availability/fragmentation of the interlink port bandwidth, it may not be
possible to create an STS circuit from the Gigabit Ethernet/OC client port to the peer card trunk port.
This is because, contiguous STSs (that is, STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-24c, and so on) must be available
on the interlink port for circuit creation.
Note There are no limitations to create an STS circuit between two trunk ports.
11.15.12 ADM-10G CCAT and VCAT Characteristics
The ADM-10G card supports high-order (HO) contiguous concatenation (CCAT) and HO virtual
concatenation (VCAT) circuits on 8 GigE ports (Port 1 to Port 8) in both single-card and double-card
(ADM-10G peer group) configuration.
To enable end-to-end connectivity in a VCAT circuit that traverses through a third-party network, you
can use Open-Ended VCAT circuit creation.
The ADM-10G card supports flexible non-LCAS VCAT groups (VCGs). With flexible VCGs, the
ADM-10G can perform the following operations:
• Add or remove members from groups
• Put members into or out of service, which also adds/removes them from the group
• Add or remove cross-connect circuits from VCGs
Any operation on the VCG member is service effecting (for instance, adding or removing members from
the VCG). Adding or removing cross-connect circuits is not service-affecting, if the associated members
are not in the group
The ADM-10G card allows independent routing and protection preferences for each member of a VCAT
circuit. You can also control the amount of VCAT circuit capacity that is fully protected, unprotected, or
uses Protection Channel Access (PCA) (when PCA is available). Alarms are supported on a per-member
as well as per virtual concatenation group (VCG) basis.
The ADM-10G card supports both automatic and manual routing for VCAT circuit, that is, all members
are manually or automatically routed. Bidirectional VCAT circuits are symmetric, which means that the
same number of members travel in each direction. With automatic routing, you can specify the
constraints for individual members; with manual routing, you can select different spans for different
members. Two types of automatic and manual routing are available for VCAT members: common fiber
routing and split routing.
11-92
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
The ADM-10G card supports VCAT common fiber routing and VCAT split fiber (diverse) routing. With
VCAT split fiber routing, each member can be routed independently through the SONET or SDH or
DWDM network instead of having to follow the same path as required by CCAT and VCAT common
fiber routing. This allows a more efficient use of network bandwidth, but the different path lengths and
different delays encountered may cause slightly different arrival times for the individual members of the
VCG. The VCAT differential delay is this relative arrival time measurement between members of a
VCG. The maximum tolerable VCAT split fiber routing differential delay for the ADM-10G card is
approximately 55 milliseconds. A loss of alignment alarm is generated if the maximum differential delay
supported is exceeded.
The differential delay compensation function is automatically enabled when you choose split fiber
routing during the CTC circuit configuration process. CCAT and VCAT common fiber routing do not
enable or need differential delay support.
Caution Protection switches with switching time of less than 60 milliseconds are not guaranteed with the
differential delay compensation function enabled. The compensation time is added to the switching time.
Note For TL1, EXPBUFFERS parameter must be set to ON in the ENT-VCG command to enable support for
split fiber routing.
Available Circuit Sizes
Table 11-21 and Table 11-22 show the circuit sizes available for the ADM-10G card.
Table 11-21 Supported SONET Circuit Sizes of ADM-10G card on ONS 15454
CCAT VCAT High Order
STS-1 STS-1-1nV (n= 1 to 21)
STS-3c STS-3c-mv (m= 1 to 7)
STS-6c
STS-9c
STS-12c
STS-24c
Table 11-22 Supported SDH Circuit Sizes of ADM-10G card on ONS 15454 SDH
CCAT VCAT High Order
VC-4 VC-4-mv (m= 1 to 7)
VC-4-2c
VC-4-3c
VC-4-4c
VC-4-8c
11-93
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
11.15.12.1 Related Procedure for VCAT Circuit
The following is the list of procedures related to creating VCAT circuits:
• NTP-G245 Create an Automatically Routed VCAT Circuit, page 16-94
• NTP-G246 Create a Manually Routed VCAT Circuit, page 16-98
11.15.13 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring
Intermediate path performance monitoring (IPPM) allows a node to monitor the constituent channel of
an incoming transmission signal. You can enable IPPM for STS/VC-4s payload on OCn and Trunk ports
of ADM-10G card. The IPPM is complaint with GR253/G.826.
Software Release 9.2 and higher enables the ADM-10G card to monitor the near-end and far-end PM
data on individual STS/VC-4 payloads by enabling IPPM. After provisioning IPPM on the card, service
providers can monitor large amounts of STS/VC-4 traffic through intermediate nodes, thus making
troubleshooting and maintenance activities more efficient. IPPM occurs only on STS/VC-4 paths that
have IPPM enabled, and TCAs are raised only for PM parameters on the selected IPPM paths.
For a CCAT circuit, you can enable IPPM only on the first STS/VC-4 of the concatenation group. For a
VCAT circuit, you can enable IPPM independently on each member STS/VC-4 of the concatenation
group.
11.15.13.1 Related Procedure for IPPM
To enable IPPM on the ADM-10G card, see the “NTP-G247 Enable or disable Path Performance
Monitoring on Intermediate Nodes” section on page 16-100.
11.15.14 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring
Pointers are used to compensate for frequency and phase variations. Pointer justification counts indicate
timing errors on SONET networks. When a network is out of synchronization, jitter and wander occur
on the transported signal. Excessive wander can cause terminating equipment to slip.
Slips cause different effects in service. Voice service has intermittent audible clicks. Compressed voice
technology has short transmission errors or dropped calls. Fax machines lose scanned lines or experience
dropped calls. Digital video transmission has distorted pictures or frozen frames. Encryption service
loses the encryption key, causing data to be transmitted again.
Pointers provide a way to align the phase variations in STS and VC4 payloads. The STS payload pointer
is located in the H1 and H2 bytes of the line overhead. Clocking differences are measured by the offset
in bytes from the pointer to the first byte of the STS synchronous payload envelope (SPE) called the J1
byte. Clocking differences that exceed the normal range of 0 to 782 can cause data loss.
There are positive (PPJC) and negative (NPJC) pointer justification count parameters. PPJC is a count
of path-detected (PPJC-PDET-P) or path-generated (PPJC-PGEN-P) positive pointer justifications.
NPJC is a count of path-detected (NPJC-PDET-P) or path-generated (NPJC-PGEN-P) negative pointer
justifications depending on the specific PM name. PJCDIFF is the absolute value of the difference
between the total number of detected pointer justification counts and the total number of generated
pointer justification counts. PJCS-PDET-P is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more
PPJC-PDET or NPJC-PDET. PJCS-PGEN-P is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or
more PPJC-PGEN or NPJC-PGEN.
11-94
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
A consistent pointer justification count indicates clock synchronization problems between nodes. A
difference between the counts means that the node transmitting the original pointer justification has
timing variations with the node detecting and transmitting this count. Positive pointer adjustments occur
when the frame rate of the SPE is too slow in relation to the rate of the STS-1.
You must enable PPJC and NPJC performance monitoring parameters for ADM-10Gcard. In CTC, the
count fields for PPJC and NPJC PMs appear white and blank unless they are enabled on the card view
Provisioning tab.
11.15.15 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions
This section describes the STS and VC-4 path performance monitoring parameters that ADM-10G card
support.
Table 11-23 lists the STS near-end path performance monitoring parameters.
Table 11-23 STS Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters
Parameter Definition
CV-P Near-End STS Path Coding Violations (CV-P) is a count of BIP errors
detected at the STS path layer (that is, using the B3 byte). Up to eight BIP
errors can be detected per frame; each error increments the current CV-P
second register.
ES-P Near-End STS Path Errored Seconds (ES-P) is a count of the seconds when
at least one STS path BIP error was detected. An AIS Path (AIS-P) defect (or
a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or a Loss of Pointer Path
(LOP-P) defect can also cause an ES-P.
SES-P Near-End STS Path Severely Errored Seconds (SES-P) is a count of the
seconds when K (2400) or more STS path BIP errors were detected. An
AIS-P defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-P
defect can also cause an SES-P.
UAS-P Near-End STS Path Unavailable Seconds (UAS-P) is a count of the seconds
when the STS path was unavailable. An STS path becomes unavailable when
ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Ps, and continues to be
unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as
SES-Ps.
FC-P Near-End STS Path Failure Counts (FC-P) is a count of the number of
near-end STS path failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-P
failure, an LOP-P failure, a UNEQ-P failure, or a Section Trace Identifier
Mismatch Path (TIM-P) failure is declared. A failure event also begins if the
STS PTE that is monitoring the path supports Three-Bit (Enhanced) Remote
Failure Indication Path Connectivity (ERFI-P-CONN) for that path. The
failure event ends when these failures are cleared.
PPJC-PDET-P Positive Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Detected (PPJC-PDET-P) is a
count of the positive pointer justifications detected on a particular path in an
incoming SONET signal.
PPJC-PGEN-P Positive Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Generated (PPJC-PGEN-P) is
a count of the positive pointer justifications generated for a particular path
to reconcile the frequency of the SPE with the local clock.
11-95
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
Table 11-24 gives the VC-4 near-end path performance monitoring parameters definition that ADM-10G
card support.
NPJC-PDET-P Negative Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Detected (NPJC-PDET-P) is
a count of the negative pointer justifications detected on a particular path in
an incoming SONET signal.
NPJC-PGEN-P Negative Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Generated (NPJC-PGEN-P)
is a count of the negative pointer justifications generated for a particular path
to reconcile the frequency of the SPE with the local clock.
PJCDIFF-P Pointer Justification Count Difference, STS Path (PJCDIFF-P) is the
absolute value of the difference between the total number of detected pointer
justification counts and the total number of generated pointer justification
counts. That is, PJCDiff-P is equal to (PPJC-PGEN-P - NPJC-PGEN-P) -
(PPJC-PDET-P - NPJC-PDET-P).
PJCS-PDET-P Pointer Justification Count Seconds, STS Path Detect (NPJCS-PDET-P) is a
count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PDET or
NPJC-PDET.
PJCS-PGEN-P Pointer Justification Count Seconds, STS Path Generate (PJCS-PGEN-P) is
a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PGEN or
NPJC-PGEN.
Table 11-23 STS Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters
Parameter Definition
Table 11-24 VC-4 Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters
Parameter Definition
HP-EB High-Order Path Errored Block (HP-EB) indicates that one or more bits are
in error within a block.
HP-BBE High-Order Path Background Block Error (HP-BBE) is an errored block not
occurring as part of an SES.
HP-ES High-Order Path Errored Second (HP-ES) is a one-second period with one
or more errored blocks or at least one defect.
HP-SES High-Order Path Severely Errored Seconds (HP-SES) is a one-second period
containing 30 percent or more errored blocks or at least one defect. SES is a
subset of ES.
HP-UAS High-Order Path Unavailable Seconds (HP-UAS) is a count of the seconds
when the VC path was unavailable. A high-order path becomes unavailable
when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as HP-SESs, and it
continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not
qualify as HP-SESs.
HP-BBER High-Order Path Background Block Error Ratio (HP-BBER) is the ratio of
BBE to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval.
The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.
HP-ESR High-Order Path Errored Second Ratio (HP-ESR) is the ratio of errored
seconds to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement
interval.
11-96
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ADM-10G Card
11.15.16 ADM-10G Functions
The functions of the ADM-10G card are:
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-11 on page G-12
11.15.17 Related Procedures for ADM-10G Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the ADM-10G card:
• NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM
Parameters, and Thresholds, page 11-237
• NTP-G200 Create, Delete, and Manage STS or VC Circuits for the ADM-10G Card, page 16-49
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
HP-SESR High-Order Path Severely Errored Second Ratio (HP-SESR) is the ratio of
SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval.
HP-PPJC-PDET High-Order, Positive Pointer Justification Count, Path Detected
(HP-PPJC-Pdet) is a count of the positive pointer justifications detected on
a particular path on an incoming SDH signal.
HP-NPJC-PDET High-Order, Negative Pointer Justification Count, Path Detected
(HP-NPJC-Pdet) is a count of the negative pointer justifications detected on
a particular path on an incoming SDH signal.
HP-PPJC-PGEN High-Order, Positive Pointer Justification Count, Path Generated
(HP-PPJC-Pgen) is a count of the positive pointer justifications generated for
a particular path.
HP-NPJC-PGEN High-Order, Negative Pointer Justification Count, Path Generated
(HP-NPJC-Pgen) is a count of the negative pointer justifications generated
for a particular path.
HP-PJCDIFF High-Order Path Pointer Justification Count Difference (HP-PJCDiff) is the
absolute value of the difference between the total number of detected pointer
justification counts and the total number of generated pointer justification
counts. That is, HP-PJCDiff is equal to (HP-PPJC-PGen - HP-NPJC-PGen)
- (HP-PPJC-PDet - HP-NPJC-PDet).
HP-PJCS-PDET High-Order Path Pointer Justification Count Seconds (HP-PJCS-PDet) is a
count of the one-second intervals containing one or more HP-PPJC-PDet or
HP-NPJC-PDet.
HP-PJCS-PGEN High-Order Path Pointer Justification Count Seconds (HP-PJCS-PGen) is a
count of the one-second intervals containing one or more HP-PPJC-PGen or
HP-NPJC-PGen.
Table 11-24 VC-4 Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters
Parameter Definition
11-97
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
11.16 OTU2_XP Card
The OTU2_XP card is a single-slot card with four ports with XFP-based multirate (OC-192/STM-64,
10GE, 10G FC, IB_5G) Xponder for the ONS 15454 ANSI and ETSI platforms. The OTU2_XP card
supports multiple configurations.
Table 11-25 describes the different configurations supported by the OTU2_XP card and the ports that
must be used for these configurations.
All the four ports are ITU-T G.709 compliant and support 40 channels (wavelengths) at 100-GHz
channel spacing in the C-band (that is, the 1530.33 nm to 1561.42 nm wavelength range).
The OTU2_XP card can be installed in Slots 1 through 6 or 12 through 17. The OTU2_XP card supports
SONET SR1, IR2, and LR2 XFPs, 10GE BASE SR, SW, LR, LW, ER, EW, and ZR XFPs, and 10G FC
MX-SN-I and SM-LL-L XFPs.
Caution Fan-tray assembly 15454E-CC-FTA (ETSI shelf)/15454-CC-FTA (ANSI shelf) must be installed in a
shelf where the OTU2_XP card is installed.
11.16.1 Key Features
The OTU2_XP card has the following high-level features:
• 10G transponder, regenerator, and splitter protection capability on the ONS 15454 DWDM
platform.
• Compatible with the ONS 15454 ANSI high-density shelf assembly, the ETSI ONS 15454 shelf
assembly, and the ETSI ONS 15454 high-density shelf assembly. Compatible with TCC2/TCC2P/
TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards.
• Interoperable with TXP_MR_10E and TXP_MR_10E_C cards.
Table 11-25 OTU2_XP Card Configurations and Ports
Configuration Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
2 x 10G transponder Client port 1 Client port 2 Trunk port 1 Trunk port 2
2 x 10G standard regenerator
(with enhanced FEC (E-FEC)
only on one port)
Trunk port 1 Trunk port 2 Trunk port 1 Trunk port 2
10 GE LAN Phy to WAN Phy Client port Client port in
transponder or
trunk port in
regenerator
configuration
Trunk port Trunk port in
transponder or
regenerator
configuration
1 x 10G E-FEC regenerator
(with E-FEC on two ports)
Not used Not used Trunk port Trunk port
1 x 10G splitter protected
transponder
Client port Not used Trunk port
(working)
Trunk port
(protect)
11-98
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
• Four port, multirate (OC-192/STM-64, 10G Ethernet WAN Phy, 10G Ethernet LAN Phy, 10G Fibre
Channel, IB_5G) client interface. The client signals are mapped into an ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal
using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing.
• ITU-T G.709 framing with standard Reed-Soloman (RS) (255,237) FEC. Performance monitoring
and ITU-T G.709 Optical Data Unit (ODU) synchronous mapping. Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) with
ITU-T G.709 ODU with greater than 8 dB coding gain.
• The trunk rate remains the same irrespective of the FEC configuration. The error coding
performance can be provisioned as follows:
– FEC—Standard ITU-T G.709.
– E-FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975.1 (subclause I.7)
• IEEE 802.3 frame format supported for 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. The minimum frame size is
64 bytes. The maximum frame size is user-provisionable.
• Supports fixed/no fixed stuff mapping (insertion of stuffing bytes) for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
signals (only in transponder configuration).
• Supports 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to 10G Ethernet WAN Phy conversion on Ports 1 (client port) and
3 (trunk port).
• Supports 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion using CTC and TL1. When enabled on
the OTU2_XP card, the first Channel (Ports 1 and 3) supports LAN to WAN conversion. The second
channel carries normal 10GE, 10G FC, and OC192/STM64 traffic.
• The LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion functions in accordance to WAN Interface Sublayer (WIS)
mechanism as defined by IEEE802.3ae (IEEE Std 802.3ae-2002, Amendment to CSMA/CD).
• Default configuration is transponder, with trunk ports configured as ITU-T G.709 standard FEC.
• In transponder or regenerator configuration, if one of the ports is configured the corresponding port
is automatically created.
• In regenerator configuration, only Ports 3 and 4 can be configured as E-FEC. Ports 1 and 2 can be
configured only with standard FEC.
• When port pair 1-3 or 2-4 is configured as regenerator (that is, card mode is standard regenerator),
the default configuration on Ports 3 and 4 is automatically set to standard FEC.
• When Ports 3 and 4 are configured as regenerator (that is, card mode is E-FEC regenerator), the
default configuration on both these ports is automatically set to E-FEC.
• In splitter protected transponder configuration, the trunk ports (Ports 3 and 4) are configured as
ITU-T G.709 standard FECor E-FEC.
• Supports protection through Y-cable protection scheme.
Note When enabled, the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature does not support
Y-cable protection on the LAN to WAN interface (ports 1 and 3).
• Client ports support SONET SR1, IR2, and LR2 XFPs, 10GE BASE SR, SW, LR, LW, ER, EW, and
ZR XFPs, and 10G FC MX-SN-I and SM-LL-L XFPs.
• Following are the OTU2 link rates that are supported on the OTU2_XP trunk port:
– Standard G.709 (10.70923 Gbps) when the client is provisioned as “SONET” (including 10G
Ethernet WAN PHY) (9.95328 Gbps).
11-99
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
– G.709 overclocked to transport 10GE as defined by ITU-T G. Sup43 Clause 7.2 (11.0491 Gbps)
when the client is provisioned as “10G Ethernet LAN Phy” (10.3125 Gbps) with “No Fixed
Stuff” enabled.
– G.709 overclocked to transport 10GE as defined by ITU-T G. Sup43 Clause 7.1 (11.0957 Gbps)
when the client is provisioned as “10G Ethernet LAN Phy” (10.3125 Gbps) with “No Fixed
Stuff” disabled.
– G.709 proprietary overclocking mode to transport 10G FC (11.3168 Gbps) when the client is
provisioned as “10G Fiber Channel” (10.518 Gbps).
– Proprietary rate at the trunk when the client is provisioned as IB_5G.
• The MTU setting is used to display the ifInerrors and OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk
and client port interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops,
from the client port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting.
11.16.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-22 shows the OTU2_XP card faceplate and block diagram.
11-100
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
Figure 11-22 OTU2_XP Card Faceplate and Block Diagram
Note The Swan FPGA is automatically loaded when the LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature is enabled
on the OTU2_XP card. The Barile FPGA is automatically loaded when the LAN Phy to WAN Phy
conversion feature is disabled on the OTU2_XP card.
241984
SERDES G.709-FEC framer SERDES
Barile
FPGA
SWAN
FPGA
XFP 1 XFP 3
SERDES G.709-FEC framer SERDES
MPC8360 core Power supply Clocking
XFP 2
SCL
FPGA
XFP 4
11-101
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
11.16.3 OTU2_XP Card Interface
The OTU2_XP card is a multi-functional card that operates in different configurations, such as
transponder, standard regenerator, E-FEC regenerator, and 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy
conversion mode. The OTU2_XP card acts as a protected transponder, when the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
to WAN Phy is in splitter protected transponder configuration mode.
Depending on the configuration of the OTU2_XP card, the ports act as client or trunk ports (see
Table 11-25). This following section describes the client and trunk rates supported on the OTU2_XP
card for different card configurations:
11.16.3.1 Client Interface
In transponder and 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy card configurations, Ports 1 and 2 act as client
ports and in splitter protected transponder configuration, Port 1 acts as a client port. For these card
configurations, the client rates supported are:
• OC-192/STM-64
• 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
• 10G Fibre Channel
• IB_5G
11.16.3.2 Trunk Interface
In transponder, 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy, and splitter protected transponder card
configurations, Ports 3 and 4 act as trunk ports. For these card configurations, the trunk rates supported
are:
• OC-192/STM-64
• 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
• 10G Fibre Channel
• OTU2 G.709
• Proprietary rate at the trunk when the client is provisioned as IB_5G.
In standard regenerator card configuration, all four ports act as trunk ports and in E-FEC regenerator
configuration, Ports 3 and 4 act as the trunk ports. For these card configurations, the trunk rate supported
is OTU2 G.709
Note The above mentioned OTU2 signal must be an OC-192/STM-64, 10G Ethernet WAN Phy,
10G Ethernet LAN Phy, or 10G Fibre Channel signal packaged into an OTU2 G.709 frame.
Additionally, the standard regenerator and E-FEC regenerator configuration supports an OTU2 signal
that is OTU2 has been generated by multiplexing four ODU1 signals.
11-102
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
11.16.4 Configuration Management
The OTU2_XP card supports the following configuration management parameters:
• Card Configuration—Provisionable card configuration: Transponder, Standard Regen, Enhanced
FEC, or Mixed, or 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy.
• Port Mode—Provisionable port mode when the card configuration is set as Mixed. The port mode
can be chosen as either Transponder or Standard Regen for each port pair (1-3 and 2-4). For card
configurations other than Mixed, CTC automatically sets the port mode depending on the selected
card configuration. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, CTC automatically selects the
port pair (1-3) as 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy. Port pair (2-4) in
10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode is selected as Transponder or Standard Regen.
• Termination Mode—Provisionable termination mode when the card configuration is set as either
Transponder or Mixed. The termination mode can be chosen as Transparent, Section, or Line. For
Standard Regen and Enhanced FEC card configurations, CTC automatically sets the termination
mode as Transparent. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, CTC automatically selects the
Termination Mode of port pair (1-3) as Line. You cannot provision the Termination Mode parameter.
• AIS/Squelch—Provisionable AIS/Squelch mode configuration when the card configuration is set as
either Transponder, Mixed, or Standard Regen. The AIS/Squelch mode configuration can be chosen
as AIS or Squelch. For Enhanced FEC card configuration, CTC automatically sets the AIS/Squelch
mode configuration as AIS. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, the CTC automatically
selects the AIS/Squelch of port pair (1-3) as Squelch. You cannot provision the AIS/Squelch
parameter.
Note When AIS/Squelch is enabled in Standard Regen configuration with port pairs (1-3) and (2-4),
Squelch is supported on ports 1 and 2 and AIS on ports 3 and 4.
Note When you choose the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion, the Termination mode is
automatically set to LINE. The AIS/Squelch is set to SQUELCH and ODU Transparency is set to Cisco
Extended Use for Ports 1 and 3.
• Regen Line Name—User-assigned text string for regeneration line name.
• ODU Transparency—Provisionable ODU overhead byte configuration, either Transparent Standard
Use or Cisco Extended Use. See the “11.16.7 ODU Transparency” section on page 11-104 for more
detailed information. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, CTC automatically selects the
ODU Transparency as Cisco Extended Use. You cannot provision the ODU Transparency parameter.
• Port name—User-assigned text string.
• Admin State/Service State—Administrative and service states to manage and view port status.
• ALS Mode—Provisionable ALS function.
• Reach—Provisionable optical reach distance of the port.
• Wavelength—Provisionable wavelength of the port.
• AINS Soak—Provisionable automatic in-service soak period.
11-103
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
11.16.5 OTU2_XP Card Configuration Rules
The following rules apply to OTU2_XP card configurations:
• When you preprovision the card, port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 come up in the default Transponder
configuration.
• The port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 can be configured in different modes only when the card configuration is
Mixed. If the card configuration is Mixed, you must choose different modes on port pairs 1-3 and
2-4 (that is, one port pair in Transponder mode and the other port pair in Standard Regen mode).
• If the card is in Transponder configuration, you can change the configuration to Standard Regen or
Enhanced FEC.
• If the card is in Standard Regen configuration and you have configured only one port pair, then
configuring payload rates for the other port pair automatically changes the card configuration to
Mixed, with the new port pair in Transponder mode.
• If the card is in Standard Regen configuration, you cannot directly change the configuration to
Enhanced FEC. You have to change to Transponder configuration and then configure the card as
Enhanced FEC.
• If the card is in Enhanced FEC configuration, Ports 1 and 2 are disabled. Hence, you cannot directly
change the configuration to Standard Regen or Mixed. You must remove the Enhanced FEC group
by moving the card to Transponder configuration, provision PPM on Ports 1 and 2, and then change
the card configuration to Standard Regen or Mixed.
• If the card is in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC configuration, you cannot change the payload rate
of the port pairs. You have to change the configuration to Transponder, change the payload rate, and
then move the card configuration back to Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC.
• If any of the affected ports are in IS (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI) state, you cannot change
the card configuration.
• If IB_5G payload has to be provisioned, the NE Default should match the values listed in the
Table 11-26. For more information on editing the NE Default values, see the “NTP-G135 Edit
Network Element Defaults” task on page 24-23.
• If the card is changed to 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy, the first PPM port is deleted and
replaced by a 10G Ethernet port; the third PPM port is deleted and automatically replaced with
OC192/STM64 (SONET/SDH) port. The third PPM port is automatically deleted and the third PPM
port is replaced with OC192/STM64 (SONET/SDH).
Table 11-27 provides a summary of transitions allowed for the OTU2_XP card configurations.
Table 11-26 OTU2_XP Card Configuration for IB_5G Payload Provisioning
Parameter NE Default Name Value
FEC OTU2-XP.otn.otnLines.FEC Standard
ITU-T G.709 OTN OTU2-XP.otn.otnLines.G709OTN Enable
Termination Mode OTU2-XP.config.port.TerminationMode Transparent
ODU Transparency OTU2-XP.config.port.OduTransparency Cisco Extended Use
AIS/Squelch OTU2-XP.config.port.AisSquelchMode Squelch
11-104
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
OTU2_XP Card
11.16.6 Security
The OTU2_XP card, when an XFP is plugged into it, implements the Cisco Standard Security Code
Check Algorithm that keys on vendor ID and serial number.
If a PPM is plugged into a port on the card but fails the security code check because it is not a Cisco
PPM, a NON-CISCO-PPM Not Reported (NR) condition occurs.
If a PPM with a non-qualified product ID is plugged into a port on this card, that is, the PPM passes the
security code as a Cisco PPM but it has not been qualified for use on the OTU2_XP card, a
UNQUAL-PPM NR condition occurs.
11.16.7 ODU Transparency
A key feature of the OTU2_XP card is the ability to configure the ODU overhead bytes (EXP bytes and
RES bytes 1 and 2) using the ODU Transparency parameter. The two options available for this parameter
are:
• Transparent Standard Use—ODU overhead bytes are transparently passed through the card. This
option allows the OTU2_XP card to act transparently between two trunk ports (when the card is
configured in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC).
• Cisco Extended Use—ODU overhead bytes are terminated and regenerated on both ports of the
regenerator group.
Table 11-27 Card Configuration Transition Summary
Card
Configuration
Transition To
Transponder Standard Regen Enhanced FEC Mixed 10G Ethernet LAN
Phy to WAN Phy
Transponder — Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standard Regen Yes — No Yes Yes
Enhanced FEC Yes No — No No
Mixed Yes Yes No — Yes
10G Ethernet
LAN Phy to
WAN Phy
Yes Yes No The 10G Ethernet
LAN Phy to WAN
Phy to Mixed is
supported if the
Port pair 1-3 is
chosen as
Transponder.
The 10G Ethernet
LAN Phy to WAN
Phy to Mixed is
not supported if
the Port pair 1-3
is chosen as
Standard Regen.
—
11-105
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10EX_C Card
The ODU Transparency parameter is configurable only for Standard Regen and Enhanced FEC card
configuration. For Transponder card configuration, this parameter defaults to Cisco Extended Use and
cannot be changed.
Note The Forward Error Correction (FEC) Mismatch (FEC-MISM) alarm will not be raised on OTU2_XP card
when you choose Transparent Standard Use.
11.16.8 OTU2_XP Functions
The functions of the OTU2_XP card are:
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• G.35.1 Y-Cable and Splitter Protection, page G-27
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-11 on page G-12
11.16.9 Related Procedures for OTU2_XP Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OTU2_XP card:
• NTP-G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds,
page 11-426
• NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162
• NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card, page 11-166
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.17 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card
The TXP_MR_10EX_C card is a multirate transponder for the ONS 15454 platform. The card is fully
backward compatible with TXP_MR_10E_C cards (only when the error decorrelator is disabled in the
CTC on the TXP_MR_10EX_C card). It processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps,
100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). The TXP_MR_10EX_C card is tunable over the 82 channels of
C-band (82 channels spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid).
You can install TXP_MR_10EX_C card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card can be provisioned in
linear, BLSR/MS-SPRing, path protection/SNCP configurations or as a regenerator. The card can be
used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent
termination mode. The TXP_MR_10EX_C card features an MLSE-based Universal Transponder
1550-nm tunable laser and a separately orderable ONS-XC-10G-S1 1310-nm or ONS-XC-10G-L2
1550-nm laser XFP module for the client port.
Note The PRE FEC BER performance of the TXP_MR_10EX_C card may be significantly low when
compared to the TXP_MR_10E card. However, this does not affect the Post FEC BER performance, but
could possibly affect any specific monitoring application that relies on the PRE FEC BER value (for
example, protection switching). In this case, the replacement of TXP_MR_10E card with the
TXP_MR_10EX_C may not work properly.
11-106
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10EX_C Card
Note When the ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP is installed, the TXP_MR_10EX_C card must be installed in a
high-speed slot (slot 6, 7, 12, or 13)
On its faceplate, the TXP_MR_10EX_C card contains two transmit and receive connector pairs, one for
the trunk port and one for the client port. Each connector pair is labeled.
11.17.1 Key Features The key features of the TXP_MR_10EX_C card are:
• A multi-rate client interface (available through the ONS-XC-10G-S1 XFP, ordered separately):
– OC-192 (SR1)
– 10GE (10GBASE-LR)
– 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L)
– (ONS-XC-10G-S1 version 3 only) IB_5G
• An MLSE-based UT module tunable through 82 channels of C-band. The channels are spaced at
50 GHz on the ITU grid.
• OC-192 to ITU-T G.709 OTU2 provisionable synchronous and asynchronous mapping.
• Proprietary rate at the trunk when the client is provisioned as IB_5G.
• The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port
interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client
port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting.
11.17.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-23 shows the TXP_MR_10EX_C faceplate and block diagram.
11-107
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
TXP_MR_10EX_C Card
Figure 11-23 TXP_MR_10EX_C Faceplate and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10EX_C card in
a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with this card, because they can cause
irreparable damage to the card.
11.17.3 TXP_MR_10EX_C Functions
The functions of the TXP_MR_10EX_C card are:
• G.5 Client Interface, page G-14
• G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface, page G-15
• G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16
• G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16
• G.10 Client-to-Trunk Mapping, page G-17
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
uP bus
Serial bus
uP
Flash RAM
Optical
transceiver
247063 Framer/FEC/DWDM
processor
Client
interface
DWDM
trunk
(long range)
Optical
transceiver
Backplane
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
10E MR
TXP L
TX RX
RX
TX
DWDM trunk
STM-64/OC-192
82 tunable channels (C-band)
on the 50-GHz ITU
Client interface
STM-64/OC-192
or 10GE (10GBASE-LR)
or 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L)
11-108
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10.
11.17.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10EX_C Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TXP_MR_10EX_C
card:
• NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 11-191
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.18 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card
The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card is a DWDM muxponder for the ONS 15454 platform that supports
transparent termination mode on the client side. The faceplate designation of the card is “4x2.5G
10EX MXP.” The card multiplexes four 2.5-Gbps client signals (4xOC48/STM-16 SFP) into a single
10-Gbps DWDM optical signal on the trunk side. The card provides wavelength transmission service for
the four incoming 2.5-Gbps client interfaces. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder passes all
SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently.
The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be
used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM.
The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card works with OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The card supports
ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH
payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing Function” section on page G-18.
The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card is not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support
transparent termination mode.
You can install the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card in slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can provision a card in a
linear configuration, a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The card can be
used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent
termination mode.
The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is
tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. The card
features four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs
(labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and SFP modules on
the client side for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC
fiber connector.
Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A
4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode, which are necessary to
provision the 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit.
11.18.1 Key Features
The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card has the following high-level features:
11-109
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card
• Four 2.5-Gbps client interfaces (OC-48/STM-16) and one 10-Gbps trunk. The four OC-48 signals
are mapped into an ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing.
• Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and
E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the
transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability
of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the
standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm.
• Pluggable client-interface optic modules: The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card has modular interfaces.
Two types of optic modules can be plugged into the card. These modules include an OC-48/STM-16
SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and intra-office applications)
and an IR-1 interface with a range of up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is defined in Telcordia
GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in
S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957).
• High-level provisioning support: The card is initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner
software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software.
• Link monitoring and management: The card uses standard OC-48 OH (overhead) bytes to monitor
and manage incoming interfaces. The card passes the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its
overhead bytes transparently.
• Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The card is provisionable to terminate
regenerator section overhead, which eliminates forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help
reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network.
• Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card normally synchronizes
from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. If for some reason, such as
maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE is not available,
the card automatically synchronize to one of the input client-interface clocks.
• Configurable squelching policy: The card can be configured to squelch the client interface output if
LOS occurs at the DWDM receiver or if a remote fault occurs. In the event of a remote fault, the
card manages MS-AIS insertion.
• The card is tunable across the full C-band, thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each
card to provide tunability across specific wavelengths in a band.
11.18.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-24 shows the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C faceplate and block diagram.
11-110
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card
Figure 11-24 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Faceplate and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section on
page G-1.
11.18.3 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Functions
The functions of the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card are:
• G.5 Client Interface, page G-14
• G.6 DWDM Interface, page G-15
• G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16
• G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16
• G.12 Multiplexing Function, page G-18
• G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19
• G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19
• G.14 Client Interface Monitoring, page G-19
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
4x2.5
10 E
MXP L
RX
TX
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
RAM Processor
247064
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Optical
transceiver
Backplane
FEC/
Wrapper
E-FEC
Processor
(G.709 FEC)
Serial bus
uP bus
Onboard
Flash
memory
SR-1
(short reach/intra-office)
or IR-1
(intermediate range)
SFP client
optics modules
DWDM
(trunk)
10GE
(10GBASE-LR)
11-111
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card
• G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6
• G.15 Jitter, page G-19
• G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19
• G.17 Onboard Traffic Generation, page G-19
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10
11.18.3.1 Wavelength Identification
The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU
grid effectively. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card implements the MLSE-based UT module. The
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card uses a C-band version of the UT2.
Table 11-28 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card.
The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C-band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid.
Table 11-28 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Wavelengths
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
11-112
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
11.18.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
card:
• NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-261
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
11.19 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card aggregates a mix of client SAN service-client inputs (GE, FICON, and
Fibre Channel) into one 10-Gbps STM-64/OC-192 DWDM signal on the trunk side. It provides one
long-reach STM-64/OC-192 port per card and is compliant with Telcordia GR-253-CORE and ITU-T
G.957.
The card supports aggregation of the following signal types:
• 1-Gigabit Fibre Channel
• 2-Gigabit Fibre Channel
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
Table 11-28 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
11-113
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
• 4-Gigabit Fibre Channel
• 1-Gigabit Ethernet
• 1-Gigabit ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)
• 2-Gigabit ISC-Peer (ISC-3)
Caution The card can be damaged by dropping it. Handle it carefully.
The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder passes all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently.
The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be
used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM. The
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card works with the OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The card supports
ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH
payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing Function” section on page G-18.
Note You cannot disable ITU-T G.709 on the trunk side. If ITU-T G.709 is enabled, then FEC cannot be
disabled.
Note Because the client payload cannot oversubscribe the trunk, a mix of client signals can be accepted, up to
a maximum limit of 10 Gbps.
You can install the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card in slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
Note The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card is not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not
support transparent termination mode.
The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser
is tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. Each card
features four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs
(labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and SFP modules on
the client side for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC
fiber connector.
Table 11-29 shows the input data rate for each client interface, and the encapsulation method. The
current version of the GFP-T G.7041 supports transparent mapping of 8B/10B block-coded protocols,
including Gigabit Ethernet, Fibre Channel, ISC, and FICON.
In addition to the GFP mapping, 1-Gbps traffic on Port 1 or 2 of the high-speed SERDES is mapped to
an STS-24c channel. If two 1-Gbps client signals are present at Port 1 and Port 2 of the high-speed
SERDES, the Port 1 signal is mapped into the first STS-24c channel and the Port 2 signal into the second
STS-24c channel. The two channels are then mapped into an OC-48 trunk channel.
Table 11-29 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation
Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation
2G FC 2.125 Gbps Yes
1G FC 1.06 Gbps Yes
11-114
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card includes two FPGAs, and a group of four ports is mapped to each
FPGA. Group 1 consists of Ports 1 through 4, and Group 2 consists of Ports 5 through 8. Table 11-30
shows some of the mix and match possibilities on the various client data rates for Ports 1 through 4, and
Ports 5 through 8. An X indicates that the data rate is supported in that port.
GFP-T PM is available through RMON and trunk PM is managed according to Telcordia GR-253-CORE
and ITU G.783/826. Client PM is achieved through RMON for FC and GE.
A buffer-to-buffer credit management scheme provides FC flow control. With this feature enabled, a port
indicates the number of frames that can be sent to it (its buffer credit), before the sender is required to
stop transmitting and wait for the receipt of a “ready” indication. The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card
supports FC credit-based flow control with a buffer-to-buffer credit extension of up to 1600 km (994.1
miles) for 1G FC, up to 800 km (497.1 miles) for 2G FC, or up to 400 km (248.5 miles) for 4G FC. The
feature can be enabled or disabled.
The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm or
850-nm laser (depending on the SFP) for the client ports. The card contains eight 12.5-degree
downward-tilt SFP modules for the client interfaces. For optical termination, each SFP uses two LC
connectors, which are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. The trunk port is a dual-LC connector with
a 45-degree downward angle.
11.19.1 Key Features
The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card has the following high-level features:
• Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and
E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the
transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability
of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the
standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm.
2G FICON/2G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/
2G ISC-Peer (ISC-3)
2.125 Gbps Yes
1G FICON/1G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/
1G ISC-Peer (ISC-3)
1.06 Gbps Yes
Gigabit Ethernet 1.25 Gbps Yes
Table 11-29 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation (continued)
Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation
Table 11-30 Supported Client Data Rates for Ports 1 through 4 and Ports 5 through 8
Port (Group 1) Port (Group 2) Gigabit Ethernet 1G FC 2G FC 4G FC
1 5 X X X X
2 6 X X — —
3 7 X X X —
4 8 X X — —
11-115
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
• Pluggable client-interface optic modules: The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card has modular interfaces.
Two types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These modules include an
OC-48/STM-16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and
intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range of up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is
defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia
GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957).
• Y-cable protection: The card supports Y-cable protection between the same card type only, on ports
with the same port number and signal rate. See the “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on
page G-27 for more detailed information.
• High-level provisioning support: The card is initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner
software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software.
• ALS: This safety mechanism is used in the event of a fiber cut. For details regarding ALS
provisioning for the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card, see the “NTP-G162 Change the ALS
Maintenance Settings” section on page 11-448.
• Link monitoring and management: The card uses standard OC-48 OH (overhead) bytes to monitor
and manage incoming interfaces. The card passes the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its
OH (overhead) bytes transparently.
• Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The card is provisionable to terminate
regenerator section overhead, which eliminates forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help
reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network.
• Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card normally synchronizes
from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. If for some reason, such as
maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE is not available,
the card automatically synchronizes to one of the input client-interface clocks.
Note MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card cannot be used for line timing.
• Configurable squelching policy: The card can be configured to squelch the client-interface output if
LOS occurs at the DWDM receiver or if a remote fault occurs. In the event of a remote fault, the
card manages MS-AIS insertion.
• The card is tunable across the full C-band, thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each
card to provide tunability across specific wavelengths in a band.
• You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link association
between that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
11.19.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-25 shows the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C faceplate and block diagram.
11-116
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
Figure 11-25 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Faceplate and Block Diagram
For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section
on page G-4.
Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the card in a loopback on the
trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the card, because they can cause irreparable damage
to the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card.
11.19.3 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Functions
The functions of the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card are:
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-9 on page G-11
10DME-C
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
247065
RX TX
1
RX TX
2
RX TX
3
RX TX
4
RX TX
1
RX TX
2
RX TX
3
RX TX
DWDM 4
RX TX
SPF 1/1
4G FC
SerDes
1 x QDR
2M x 36bit Burst4
1/2/4G-FC
B2B
Credit
Mgt
FPGA Framer G.709/FEC
OTN MXP UT2
5x I/O
5x I/O
SPF 2/1
SPF 3/1
CPU
Core
FPGA
Power supply
SPF 4/1
SPF 6/1
4G FC
SerDes
1/2/4G-FC
B2B
Credit
Mgt
FPGA
5x I/O
5x I/O
SPF 7/1
SPF 8/1
SPF 9/1
Client
ports
Group 1
Group 2
11-117
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
11.19.3.1 Wavelength Identification
The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. The
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card uses a C-band version of the MLSE-based UT module.
Table 11-31 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card. The laser is tunable over
82 wavelengths in the C-band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid.
Table 11-31 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Trunk Wavelengths
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72
2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119
3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518
4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917
5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316
6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715
7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115
8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515
9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915
10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32
11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71
12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116
13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517
14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918
15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319
16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721
17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122
18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524
19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926
20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33
21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73
22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134
23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537
11-118
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
11.19.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card:
• NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-300
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance
24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940
25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343
26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747
27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151
28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555
29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959
30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36
31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77
32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173
33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578
34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983
35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389
36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794
37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200
38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606
39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013
40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42
41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83
Table 11-31 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
11-119
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
11.20 AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
The AR_MXP (Any-Rate Muxponder) and AR_XP (Any-Rate Xponder) cards are supported on ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and
ONS 15454 M6 platforms. The AR_MXP card supports a trunk bandwidth of up to 10 Gbps, and the AR_XP card supports a trunk
bandwidth of up to 20 Gbps. The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards aggregate a mix of client SAN services (FC or FICON 1G/2G/4G/8G,
ESCON and ISC3-STP 1G/2G), Ethernet (GE, FE), OCn (OC3/STM-1, OC12/STM-4, and OC48/STM-16), OTU (OTU1,
OTU2e/1e), and Video (SD-SDI, HD-SDI, and 3G-SDI) into one 10 Gbps signal on the trunk side.
The cards support aggregation of the following signal types:
• SONET/SDH:
– STM-1/OC-3
– STM-4/OC-12
– STM-16/OC-48
11-120
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
• OTN:
– OTU-1
– OTU-2 (OTU1E/OTU2E)
• Ethernet:
– Fast Ethernet (FE)
– Gigabit Ethernet (GE)
• SAN:
– Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON)
– 1 Gigabit Fiber Channel or fiber connectivity (FICON)
– 2 Gigabit Fiber Channel or FICON
– 4 Gigabit Fiber Channel or FICON
– 8 Gigabit Fiber Channel or FICON
– 1G ISC3-STP
– 2G ISC3-STP
• Video:
– SD-SDI (270 Mbps)
– HD-SDI (1.485 Gbps)
– Third-generation SDI (3G-SDI) (2.970 Gbps)
The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards pass all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently.
Caution The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards can be damaged if dropped. Handle it safely.
Table 11-32 shows the input data rate for each client interface, and the encapsulation method. The digital
wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set
up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM. The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards work
with the OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The client can be OTU1 with standard G.975 FEC or
disabled FEC. The cards provide standard 4 x OTU1 to OTU2 multiplexing. The OTU2 card is equipped
with standard G.709 FEC, E-FEC I.4, E-FEC I.7 and disabled FEC. The cards support ODU1 to OTU1
or OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH
payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. For more details on multiplexing, see “G.12 Multiplexing
Function” section on page G-18.
Table 11-32 AR_MXP and AR_XP Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation
Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP Encapsulation
OC3/ STM1 155.52 Mbps —
OC12/STM4 622.08 Mbps —
OC48/STM16 2.488 Gbps —
FE 100 Mbps GFP-F
GE 1.125 Gbps GFP-F
1GFC 1.06 Gbps GFP-T
11-121
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
11.20.1 Key Features
The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards support the following key features:
• Multiple Operating Modes—The AR_MXP or AR_XP cards can be configured into multiple
operating modes. The cards are equipped with pluggables for client and trunk options, and offer a
large variety of configurations. For more information about multiple operating modes, see
11.20.3 Multiple Operating Modes, page 11-126.
• Operating Mode to Client Payload Mapping—Each operating mode supports a specific set of client
payloads. Table 11-33 and Table 11-34 lists the supported payloads for each operating mode.
Table 11-33 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card Supported Client-Payload Mapping—SONET/SDH, Ethernet, OTU1, and FC
2GFC 2.125 Gbps GFP-T
4GFC 4.25 Gbps GFP-T
8GFC 8.5 Gbps GFP-T
OTU1 2.66 Gbps —
OTU2 10.7 Gbps —
ESCON 200 Mbps GFP-T
1G ISC3-STP 1.06 Gbps GFP-T
2G ISC3-STP 2.125 Gbps GFP-T
HD-SDI 1.485 Gbps GFP-F
SD-SDI 270 Mbps GFP-F
3G-SDI 2.970 Gbps GFP-F
Table 11-32 AR_MXP and AR_XP Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation
Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP Encapsulation
Card Mode Rate
SONET/SDH Ethernet OTU FC
OC3/
STM1
OC12/
STM4
OC48/
STM16 FE GE OTU1 OTU2e
FICON1G/
FC1G
FICON2G/
FC2G
FICON4G/
FC4G
TXP_MR LOW Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
HIGH No No No No No No Yes No No No
TXPP_MR LOW N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
HIGH N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
MXP_DME HIGH No No No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
MXPP_DME HIGH No No No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
MXP_MR LOW Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No No
HIGH Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
MXPP_MR LOW Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No No
HIGH Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
MXP-4x2.5-10G HIGH No No Yes No No Yes No No No No
11-122
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Table 11-34 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card Supported Client-Payload Mapping—ISC and Video
• Auto Sensing—The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards support auto sensing of client payloads. The line
card analyzes the received client signal and configures the payload on the client port automatically
without user intervention.
Auto sensing feature is supported on the Gigabit Ethernet, OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and
OC-48/STM-16 payloads. Following operating card modes support the autosensing feature:
– TXP (low rate)
– TXPP (low rate)
– MXP_MR (low and high Rate)
– MXPP_MR (low and high rate)
CTC supports the configuration of all the provisioning parameters supported by the autosensed
payload. However, creation and deletion of the
MXPP-4x2.5-10G HIGH No No Yes No No Yes No No No No N
MXP-VD-10G HIGH No No No No No No No No No No N
REGEN HIGH No No No No No No Yes No No No N
LOW No No No No No Yes No No No No N
ISC Video
Card Mode Rate ISC-1
ISC3_S
TP_1G
ISC3_S
TP_2G SD-SDI HD-SDI 3G-SDI
TXP_MR LOW No Yes Yes No No No
HIGH No No No No No No
TXPP_MR LOW N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
HIGH N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
MXP_DME HIGH No No No No No No
MXPP_DME HIGH No No No No No No
MXP_MR LOW No No No No No No
HIGH No No No Yes Yes No
MXPP_MR LOW No No No No No No
HIGH No No No Yes Yes No
MXP-4x2.5-10G HIGH No No No No No No
MXPP-4x2.5-10G HIGH No No No No No No
MXP-VD-10G HIGH No No No No No Yes
REGEN HIGH No No No No No No
LOW No No No No No No
Card Mode Rate
SONET/SDH Ethernet OTU FC
OC3/
STM1
OC12/
STM4
OC48/
STM16 FE GE OTU1 OTU2e
FICON1G/
FC1G
FICON2G/
FC2G
FICON4G/
FC4G
FI
FC
11-123
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
circuits are the only configurations supported on the “AUTO” payload.
• Video Multiplexing—The AR_XP cards support the capability to multiplex SD-SDI, HD-SDI, and
3G-SDI signals over the OTU2 trunk interface allowing to maximize the wavelength bandwidth,
maintain full transparency for uncompressed signals, and reduce latency. The video multiplexing of
3G-SDI signal is not supported on the AR_MXP card.
• Regenerator Mode—This mode regenerates the OTU2e or OTU1 signals with ODU transparent or
CISCO Extended Use options. For OTU2e, FEC can be Disabled, Standard G.975, EFEC I.4 or
EFEC I.7, and for OTU1, FEC can be Standard G.975 or Disabled.
• High Speed GCCs—The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards support the provisioning of GCC channel on
OTN (OTU1/OTU2) enabled client and trunk ports. A maximum of five GCC channels on the
Cisco ONS 15454 shelf and ten GCC channels on Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or Cisco ONS 15454 M6
shelf can be created. The high speed GCC enables you to create the GCC when both the NE and FE
line cards are in Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf. The legacy GCC on
Cisco ONS 15454 shelf can be selected on one side and the Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf on the other side.
• Y-cable protection—Y-cable protection between the same card type is supported only on ports with
the same port number and signal rate. For more detailed information, see “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable
Protection” section on page G-27.
• Licensing—The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards offer you an unprecedented flexibility. The cards
support a wide range of different applications and configurations. To help you take advantage of
such flexibility to lower capital expenditures (CapEx) on your network, Cisco provides a licensing
model for AR_MXP and AR_XP cards. For more information on licensing, see the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Licensing Configuration Guide.
11.20.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram
Figure 11-26 shows the AXP_MXP and AR_XP faceplates.
The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards have eight SFP and two XFP ports. The client and trunk ports are either
SFP (2.5 G) or XFP (10 G) based ports.
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be tuned to any wavelength over the C-band by inserting the required
DWDM SFP or XFP on client or trunk ports. For optical termination, each XFP/SFP uses two LC
connectors, which are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate.
11-124
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-26 AR_MXP and AR_XP Faceplates
Figure 11-27 shows the AXP_MXP and AR_XP block diagram.
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR
1040.10 AND 1040.11
EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS
PURSUANT
TO LASER
NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
AR-MXP
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
TX RX
9 10
TX RX
1 2 3 4 9 10 5 6 7 8
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR
1040.10 AND 1040.11
EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS
PURSUANT
TO LASER
NOTICE No.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
AR-XP
FAIL
ACT/STBY
SF
TX RX
9 10
TX RX
1 2 3 4 9 10 5 6 7 8
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
246868
11-125
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-27 AR_MXP and AR_XP Block Diagram
For information on safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on
page G-4.
Caution A 15 to 20 dB fiber attenuator must be used when working with the cards in a loopback on the trunk port.
Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage
to the DWDM/CWDM XFP/SFPs plugged in AXP_MXP or AR_XP card.
The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards can be installed in Slot 1 to Slot 6 and Slot 12 to Slot 17 in the
Cisco ONS 15454 chassis, the Slot 2 to Slot 7 in the Cisco ONS 15454 M6 chassis, and Slot 2 and Slot 3
in the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 chassis. The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards do not interoperate with all the
existing TXP or MXP cards. The AR_MXP card allows you to configure only one high rate XFP port.
This can be a muxponder mode where N [N= 1 to 8] client ports goes out via 1 trunk XFP port or in a
transponder mode where client and trunk are XFP ports. There is no limitation in the AR_XP card, where
you can use both high rate trunk ports simultaneously.
The AR_XP card allows you to configure two high rate operational modes, where as you can configure
only one high rate operational mode on the AR_MXP card.
246867 Backplane
Switch L2
PROTO Only
Arrow
PROTO Only
OTN
Framer/ASIC
PCIe
Switch Soliera
Flash FPGA
FE PHY FE PHY
TNC
Main
RMII
MII MII RGMII
SCC
Optional ASIC
Control Channel
TNC
Protect
Local Bus eTSEC1 DDR2
Controller
DDR2
1Gbit
DDR2
1Gbit
Log Flash
Flash
16bit
PCIe SPI
16bit
SGMII
32bit
Pallerone
FPGA
GTX0
GTX1
16bit
UCC3
TNC
DMA controller e500 Core MPC8568E
UCC1
SCL
UCC7 UCC5
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
11-126
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
11.20.3 Multiple Operating Modes
A single AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured into multiple operating modes. Criteria for
selecting a particular operational mode are defined by the network level design. CTP helps you to choose
the appropriate operational mode. Each operating mode is divided into two categories based on the trunk
rate:
– Low rate (trunk rate < 5G)
– High rate (trunk rate > 5G)
When you configure the AR_MXP or AR_XP card in to multiple operational modes, make sure that the
following tasks are completed:
• The OCHCC circuit should be created for Any-rate mode.
• Same operational mode is configured at both ends and ensure the port numbers are same on both
ends.
• The OCHCC circuit should be created between the same client port numbers at the near and far end.
• Ensure ODU and TS are matching on both ends.
• For auto sensing payloads created on auto ports, you should check the Auto Sensing checkbox in the
provisioning pane.
• Check the Auto Sensing checkbox in the provisioning pane on the auto provisioned ports for the auto
sensing payload.
• WSON circuits cannot be created for AR_MXP and AR_XP cards.
• PPMs must be provisioned on all ports before configuring the operational mode.
The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards support the following operating modes:
• TXP_MR (Unprotected Transponder), page 11-126
• TXPP_MR (Protected Transponder), page 11-128
• MXP_DME (Unprotected Data Muxponder), page 11-129
• MXPP_DME (Protected Data Muxponder), page 11-130
• MXP_MR (Unprotected Multirate Muxponder), page 11-131
• MXPP_MR (Protected Multirate Muxponder), page 11-133
• MXP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Unprotected Muxponder), page 11-134
• MXPP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Protected Muxponder), page 11-135
• REGEN (OTU1/OTU2 Regenerator), page 11-135
• MXP-VD-10G (Video Muxponder), page 11-137
TXP_MR (Unprotected Transponder)
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate or a high-rate TXP_MR card mode.
Note OTN cannot be enabled for 4GFC trunk ports.
11-127
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
• Low Rate—A maximum of four TXP_MR configurations can be provisioned on a single AR_MXP
or AR_XP card (Figure 11-28). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate
TXP_MR card by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. Two SFP ports must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, 1-5, 2-6, 3-7,
and/or 4-8.
2. Ports 2, 4, 5, 6, 8, or 7 can be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 7 can be configured as client ports.
Note The trunk port is not created when the low-rate TXP_MR card operating mode is configured. It is created
after the client payload is created.
Figure 11-28 Low-Rate TXP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration
• High Rate—Only one TXP_MR configuration can be provisioned on a single AR_MXP or AR_XP
card (Figure 11-29). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate TXP_MR card
by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. XFP ports 9 and 10 must be grouped.
2. Port 10 must be configured as a trunk port.
3. Port 9 must be configured as a client port.
11-128
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-29 High-Rate TXP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration
TXPP_MR (Protected Transponder)
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate TXPP_MR card mode. A maximum of
two TXPP_MR configurations can be provisioned on a single AR_MXP or AR_XP card (Figure 11-30).
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate TXPP_MR card by adhering to the
following provisioning rules:
1. Three SFP ports must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are 1-5-6 or 2-7-8, or both.
2. Ports 5 and 6, and 7 and 8 must be configured as trunk ports, where 6 and 8 are the protect trunk
ports for 5 and 6 respectively.
3. Ports 1 and 2 must be configured as client ports.
Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 5-6 and 7-8.
11-129
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-30 Low-Rate TXPP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration
MXP_DME (Unprotected Data Muxponder)
The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate 4:1 or 8:1 MXP_DME card mode. The AR_MXP card
can be configured as a high rate 8:1 MXP_DME card mode.
• 4:1 MXP_DME mode—A maximum of two MXP_DME configurations can be provisioned on a
single AR_XP card (Figure 11-31). The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate 4:1
MXP_DME card by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. Four SFP ports and one XFP port must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are 1-2-3-4-9 or
5-6-7-8-10, or both.
2. Ports 9 and 10 must be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1, 2, 3, and 4, and 5, 6, 7, and 8 must be configured as client ports.
• 8:1 MXP_DME mode—Only one MXP_DME configuration can be provisioned on a single
AR_MXP or AR_XP card (Figure 11-31). The AR_MXP or AR_XP can be configured card as a
high-rate 8:1 MXP_DME card by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. Eight SFP ports and one XFP port must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are
1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9.
2. Port 9 must be configured as a trunk port.
3. Ports 1 to 8 must be configured as client ports.
11-130
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-31 High-Rate MXP_DME Card Operating Mode Configuration
MXPP_DME (Protected Data Muxponder)
The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate 4:2 or 8:2 MXPP_DME card mode.
• 4:2 MXP_DME mode—Only one MXPP_DME configuration can be provisioned on a single
AR_XP card (Figure 11-32). The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate 4:2 MXPP_DME
card by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. Four SFP ports and two XFP ports must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are 1-2-3-4-9-10 or
5-6-7-8-9-10.
2. Ports 9 and 10 must be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1, 2, 3, and 4, or 5, 6, 7, and 8 must be configured as client ports.
Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 9 and 10. Port 10 will be the protected trunk
port for port 9.
• 8:2 MXPP_DME mode—Only one MXPP_DME configuration can be provisioned on a single
AR_XP card (Figure 11-32). The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate 8:2 MXPP_DME
card by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. Eight SFP ports and two XFP ports must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are
1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10.
2. Ports 9 and 10 must be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1 to 8 must be configured as client ports.
Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 9 and 10. Port 10 will be the protected trunk
port for port 9.
11-131
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-32 High-Rate MXPP_DME Card Operating Mode Configuration
MXP_MR (Unprotected Multirate Muxponder)
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate or a high-rate MXP_MR card mode.
• Low Rate—A maximum of two MXP_MR configurations can be provisioned depending on the
availability of client ports (Figure 11-33). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a
low-rate MXP_MR card by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. N:1 muxponder must be created, where N varies from client ports 2 to 7.
2. Only ports 5, 6, 7, or 8 can be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1 to 8 can be configured as client ports, if they are not configured as trunk ports.
Any client port can be added or deleted, if the trunk bandwidth supports the new payload without
impacting the traffic on the existing services. Minimum of two client ports should be part of the
operational mode group.
11-132
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-33 Low-Rate MXP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration
• High Rate—A maximum of two MXP_MR configurations can be provisioned on an AR_XP card
and only one such configuration can be provisioned on an AR_MXP card (Figure 11-34). The
AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate MXP_MR card by adhering to the
following provisioning rules:
1. N:1 muxponder must be created, where N varies from client ports 2 to 8.
2. Only ports 9 and 10 can be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1 to 8 can be configured as client ports.
Any client payload can be added or deleted, if the trunk bandwidth supports the new payload without
impacting the traffic on the existing services.
Figure 11-34 High-Rate MXP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration
11-133
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
MXPP_MR (Protected Multirate Muxponder)
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate or a high-rate MXPP_MR card mode.
• Low Rate—A maximum of two MXPP_MR configurations can be provisioned depending on the
availability of client ports (Figure 11-35). Any client payload can be added or deleted, if the trunk
bandwidth supports the new payload without impacting the traffic on the existing services.
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate MXPP_MR card by adhering to the
following provisioning rules:
1. N:2 muxponder must be created, where N varies from client ports 2 to 6.
2. Only ports 5 and 6 or 7 and 8, or both can be configured as trunk port.
3. Ports 1 to 8 can be configured as client ports, if ports are not configured as a trunk ports and are
not part of another muxponder.
Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 5 and 6 or 7 and 8.
Figure 11-35 Low-Rate MXPP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration
• High Rate—A maximum of one MXPP_MR configuration can be provisioned on an AR_XP card
(Figure 11-36). Any client payload can be added or deleted, if the trunk bandwidth supports the new
payload without impacting the traffic on the existing services.
The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate MXPP_MR card by adhering to the following
provisioning rules:
1. N:2 muxponder must be created, where N varies from client ports 2 to 8.
2. Only ports 9 and 10 can be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1 to 8 can be configured as client ports.
Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 9 and 10. Port 10 will be the protected trunk
port for port 9.
11-134
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-36 High-Rate MXPP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration
MXP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Unprotected Muxponder)
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate MXP-4x2.5-10G card mode. Only one
MXP-4x2.5-10G configuration can be provisioned on an AR_MXP card and a maximum of two on an
AR_XP card (Figure 11-37).
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be provisioned as MXP-4x2.5-10G card by adhering to the following
provisioning rules:
1. The allowed port pairs are 1-2-3-4-9 or 5-6-7-8-10, or both.
2. Ports 9 and 10 can be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1-2-3-4 or 5-6-7-8 can be configured as client ports.
Figure 11-37 High-Rate MXP-4x2.5-10G Card Operating Mode Configuration
11-135
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
MXPP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Protected Muxponder)
The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate MXPP-4x2.5-10G card mode. Only one
MXPP-4x2.5-10G configuration can be provisioned on an AR_XP card (Figure 11-38).
The AR_XP card can be configured as MXPP-4x2.5-10G card by adhering to the following provisioning
rules:
1. Four SFP ports and two XFP ports must be configured. The allowed port pair is 1-2-3-4-9-10 or
5-6-7-8-9-10, or both.
2. Only ports 9 and 10 can be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1-2-3-4 or 5-6-7-8 can be configured as client ports.
Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 9 and 10. Port 10 will be the protected trunk
port for port 9.
Figure 11-38 High-Rate MXPP-4x2.5-10G Card Operating Mode Configuration
REGEN (OTU1/OTU2 Regenerator)
The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate or high-rate REGEN card mode.
11-136
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
• Low Rate—A maximum of four REGEN configurations can be provisioned on a single AR_MXP
or AR_XP card (Figure 11-39). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate
REGEN card by adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. The allowed port pairs are 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 or 1-5, 2-6, 3-7, 4-8.
Figure 11-39 Low-Rate REGEN Card Operating Mode Configuration
• High Rate—Only one REGEN configuration can be provisioned on an AR_MXP or AR_XP card
(Figure 11-40). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a high rate REGEN card by
adhering to the following provisioning rules:
1. The allowed port pairs are 9-10.
Figure 11-40 High-Rate REGEN Card Operating Mode Configuration
The 10 GE over OTU2e/OTU1e signal with disabled FEC, standard FEC, I.4 or I.7 EFEC mode can be
regenerated. The ODU transparency can either be CISCO Extended or Use or Transparent Standard Use.
Note Payload PMs are not supported in this operating mode.
11-137
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
MXP-VD-10G (Video Muxponder)
The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate MXP-VD-10G card mode. A maximum of two
MXP-VD-10G configurations can be provisioned on an AR_XP card (Figure 11-41).
The AR_XP card can be configured as MXP-VD-10G card by adhering to the following provisioning
rules:
1. The allowed port pairs are 1-2-3-9 or 5-6-7-10.
2. Only ports 9 and 10 can be configured as trunk ports.
3. Ports 1-2-3 and 5-6-7 can be configured as client ports.
Figure 11-41 High-Rate MXP-VD-10G Card Operating Mode Configuration
11.20.4 Scenarios of Different Operational mode Configurations on an AR_MXP or AR_XP Card
The following section provides a few sample scenarios of different operational modes that can be
configured on an AR_MXP or AR_XP card:
Scenario 1
In this example (Figure 11-44), the following three operational modes are configured on the AR_MXP
card:
• Low-rate TXP_MR (Cl=1;Tr=5)
• Low-rate MXP_MR (Cl=3,4;Tr=7)
• High-rate 3:1 MXP_MR (Cl=2,6,8;Tr=9)
11-138
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-42 Scenario 1
Scenario 2
In this example (Figure 11-43), high-rate MXP_DME (8:1) operational mode is configured on the
AR_MXP card.
Figure 11-43 Scenario 2
300201
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OC48
FC4
FC1
GE
OTU1
OTU2
OC48
OTU1
GE
300202
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OC48
FC1
FC2
FE
GE
OTU2
FC1
GE
FC2
11-139
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Scenario 3
In this example (Figure 11-44), the following four operational modes are configured on the AR_XP card:
• Low-rate TXP_MR (Cl=1;Tr=2)
• 8G FC TXP (Cl=9;Tr=10)
• Low-rate MR_MXP (Cl=4,7;TR=8)
• Low-rate MR_MXP (Cl=3,6;TR=5)
Figure 11-44 Scenario 3
Scenario 4
In this example (Figure 11-45), the following two operational modes are configured on the AR_XP card:
• High-rate MXP-4x2.5-10G (Cl=1,2,3,4;Tr=9)
• High-rate 4:1 MXP_DME (Cl=5,6,7,8;Tr=10)
300203
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FC2
OTU1
OC12
FC4
OTU1
FC8
OTU2
FE
FC4
FC4
11-140
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Figure 11-45 Scenario 4
Scenario 5
In this example (Figure 11-46), the following three operational modes are configured on the AR_XP
card:
• Low-rate MXP_MR (Cl=1,2,3;Tr=5)
• Low-rate MXP_MR (Cl=3,6,8;Tr=7)
• REGEN(Cl=9;Tr=10)
Figure 11-46 Scenario 5
300204
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OTU1
OC48
OC48
OTU1
FC4
OTU2
OTU2
FC1
GE
FC2
300205 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
STM4
FE
STM1
STM4
OTU1
OTU2
OTU2
STM4
OTU1
STM4
11-141
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
Scenario 6
In this example (Figure 11-47), the following two operational modes are configured on the AR_XP card:
• Low-rate MXPP_MR (Cl=1,3,4;Tr=5,6)
• High-rate MXPP_MR (Cl=2,7,8;Tr=9,10)
Figure 11-47 Scenario 6
11.20.5 AR_MXP and AR_XP Functions and Features
The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards have the following functions and features:
• Client Interface—G.5 Client Interface, page G-14
• DWDM Interface—G.6 DWDM Interface, page G-15
• DWDM Trunk Interface—G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface, page G-15
• Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature—G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16
• Timing Synchronization—G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17
• Y-Cable Protection—G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection, page G-27
• Jitter Considerations—G.37 Jitter Considerations, page G-32
• Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7
• Port level indicators—Table G-9 on page G-11
11.20.6 Related Procedures for AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards
The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AR_MXP and AR_XP
cards:
300206
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OC3
OTU1
OC12
FE
OTU1
OTU2
OTU2
OTU1
FC4G
OTU1
11-142
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MLSE UT
• “NTP-G321 Provision Multiple Operating Modes on AR_MXP or AR_XP Cards” section on
page 11-454.
• “NTP-G322 Modify the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds”
section on page 11-454.
• NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance.
11.21 MLSE UT
The maximum likelihood sequence estimation (MLSE) based universal transponder (UT) modules are
added to the TXP_MR_10EX_C, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards to support
the error decorrelator functionality to enhance system performance.
11.21.1 Error Decorrelator
The MLSE feature uses the error decorrelator functionality to reduce the chromatic dispersion (CD) and
polarization mode dispersion (PMD), thereby extending the transmission range on the trunk interface.
You can enable or disable the error decorrelator functionality using CTC or TL1. The dispersion
compensation unit (DCU) is also used to reduce CD and PMD. The MLSE-based UT module helps to
reduce CD and PMD without the use of a DCU.
11.22 SFP and XFP Modules
SFPs and 10-Gbps SFPs (XFPs) are integrated fiber optic transceivers that provide high-speed serial
links from a port or slot to the network. For more information on SFPs/XFPs and for a list of SFPs/XFPs
supported by the transponder and muxponder cards, see the Installing the GBIC, SFP, SFP+, and XFP
Optical Modules in Cisco ONS Platforms.
In CTC, SFPs/XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). To provision SFPs/XFPs and change the
line rate for multirate PPMs, see the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” section on page 11-152.
11.23 Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
The procedures described below explain how to provision transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP),
Xponder (GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE), and ADM-10G cards. The provisioning must
be performed before you provision the dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) network and
create circuits.
11.23.1 Before You Begin
Before performing any of the following procedures, investigate all alarms and clear any trouble
conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide as necessary.
Caution Provisioning TXP and MXP cards can be service affecting. You should make all changes during a
scheduled maintenance window.
11-143
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules, page 11-144—Complete this procedure to provision a
multirate pluggable port module (PPM), provision or change the optical line rate of a PPM, or delete
a PPM. PPMs provide the fiber interface to the TXP, MXP, and ADM-10G cards. With the exception
of the TXP_MR_10G card, all TXPs, MXPs, and ADM-10G cards accept PPMs.
2. NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162—As needed, complete this procedure
for TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards that will be protected
with Y-cable protection.
3. NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card, page 11-166—As needed,
complete this procedure to create a splitter protection group for an OTU2_XP card.
4. NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards,
page 11-168—As needed, complete this procedure to create 1+1 protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
5. NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter
Thresholds, page 11-171—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings
for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
6. NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 11-191—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings
for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C
cards.
7. NTP-G292 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 6-72—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards.
8. NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM
Parameters, and Thresholds, page 11-237—As needed, complete this procedure to provision the
transmission settings for ADM-10G cards.
9. NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-261—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
10. NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-282—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
11. NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-300—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards.
12. NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 11-322—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards.
13. NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group
Settings, page 11-345—As needed, complete this procedure to change the channel group settings
for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
14. NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings,
page 11-356—As needed, complete this procedure to change the CFM settings for GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
11-144
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
15. NTP-G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings,
page 11-368—As needed, complete this procedure to change the EFM settings for GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
16. NTP-G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings,
page 11-373—As needed, complete this procedure to change the REP settings for GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
17. NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line
Settings, and PM Thresholds, page 11-379—As needed, complete this procedure to change the
transmission settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
18. NTP-G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring, page 11-423—As needed, complete
this procedure to add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring.
19. NTP-G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds,
page 11-426—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
OTU2_XP cards.
20. NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings, page 11-448—As needed, complete this
procedure to change the automatic laser shutdown settings for a TXP or MXP card.
21. NTP-G192 Force FPGA Update, page 11-450—As needed, complete this procedure to force an
upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards.
22. NTP-G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group, page 11-451—As
needed, complete this procedure to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards when the card is
part of a protection group.
23. NTP-G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator, page 11-452—As needed, complete this procedure to
enable error decorrelator on a TXP_MR_10EX_C, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, or
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card.
NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules
Note If a single-rate PPM is installed, the PPM screen will autoprovision and no further steps are necessary.
Note When you autoprovision a PPM, initial alarm and TCA defaults are supplied by Cisco Transport
Controller (CTC) depending on your port and rate selections and the type of PPM. These default values
can be changed after you install the PPM.
Purpose Complete this procedure to provision a multirate PPM, provision the
optical line rate of a multirate PPM, or delete a single-rate or multirate
PPM.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-145
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a
Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules
(PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable I/O devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information
about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on page 11-142.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task to log into an ONS 15454 on the network. If you are already
logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Click the Alarms tab:
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not turned on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as
necessary.
b. Verify that no unexplained conditions appear. If unexplained conditions appear, resolve them before
continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card, complete the “DLP-G235 Change
the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode” task on page 11-146. If not, continue with Step 4
Step 4 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
card, complete the “DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode” task on page 11-147. If
not, continue with Step 5.
Step 5 If you are provisioning a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card, complete the “DLP-G379
Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149. If not,
continue with Step 6.
Step 6 If you are provisioning a OTU2_XP card, complete the “DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode”
task on page 11-151. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 If you are provisioning a PPM on an ADM-10G card, complete the “DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G
PPM and Port” task on page 11-150. If not, continue with Step 9.
Step 8 If you are provisioning a PPM on an AR_MXP or AR_XP card, complete the “NTP-G321 Provision
Multiple Operating Modes on AR_MXP or AR_XP Cards” task on page 11-454. If not, continue with
Step 9.
Step 9 Complete the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on page 11-152 for TXP, MXP, AR_MXP,
AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP ports with multirate PPMs. If you
already preprovisioned the multirate PPM (DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot, page 14-73),
skip this step and continue with Step 10.
Step 10 If you are provisioning an IBM ETR_CLO (External Time Reference – Control Link Oscillator) or
InterSystem Coupling Link (ISC) service on the PPM, complete “DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for
ETR_CLO and ISC Services” task on page 11-153. Otherwise, continue with Step 11.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate” task on page 11-155 to assign a line rate to
a TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, or OTU2_XP port after the PPM is provisioned. (This task is not
performed for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.)
Step 12 If you need to delete a PPM at any point in this procedure, complete the “DLP-G280 Delete a PPM” task
on page 11-161.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
11-146
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If the service state is correct, continue with Step 6. If not,
complete the following steps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance
(ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs.
Step 5 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If the service state is correct, continue with Step 6. If not,
complete the following steps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance
(ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 7 Change the Card Mode as needed:
• FC-GE—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports
1-1 and 2-1 only), FC2G (Port 1-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only), FICON2G (Port 1-1
only), and ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 8-1).
• Mixed—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G and
ONE_GE (Port 1–1 only), ESCON (Ports 5–1 through 8-1 only)
• ESCON—Choose this option if you will provision the ESCON PPM on Ports 1-1 through 8-1.
Note The Provisioning > Card tab also has the display-only Tunable Wavelengths field. This field shows the
supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed in the format:
first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths.
For example, 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Purpose This task changes the card mode for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards. The card mode determines which
PPMs can be provisioned for the card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-147
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode
Note The MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards have two port
mode groups, one for Ports 1 through 4, and the second for Ports 5 through 8. To change the port mode,
all ports within the selected port group must be in OOS (out-of-service) service state. Ports in the second
port group do not need to be in OOS service state if you are not changing the port mode for the second
port group. Before you change the port mode, you must also ensure that any PPM port rate provisioned
for the selected port group is deleted (see the “DLP-G280 Delete a PPM” task on page 11-161).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to
change the port mode.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Change the port mode as described in Table 11-35.
Note The PPM port rates are provisioned in the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on
page 11-152.
Purpose This task changes the port mode for the MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards.
The port mode determines which PPMs can be provisioned on the ports.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-148
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note The Provisioning > Cards tab also has a display-only Tunable Wavelengths field which shows the
wavelengths supported by the card. If a MXP_MR_10DME_C card is installed, the 32 C-band
wavelengths appear. If the MXP_MR_10DME_L card is installed, the 32 L-band wavelengths appear. If
the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card is installed, the 82 C-band wavelengths appear.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Note Loopbacks on MXP-MR-10DME are not applicable when Fiber Channel switches are present.
Note If the Fiber Channel switch version is not present then the Distance Extension settings are not supported.
Table 11-35 10G Data Muxponder Card Port Modes
Parameter Description Options
Port 1-4 Mode Sets the mode of
operation for Ports
1-1 through 4-1.
Chose one of the following:
• FC-GE_ISC—Choose this option if you will provision any
of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 1-1 through
4-1), FC2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1
through 4-1), FICON2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only),
ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports
1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1),
and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only).
• FC4G—Choose this option if you will provision an FC4G
or FICON4G PPM (Port 1-1 only).
Port 5-8 Mode Sets the mode of
operation for
Ports 5-1 through
8-1.
Chose one of the following:
• FC-GE_ISC—choose this option if you will provision any
of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 5-1 through
8-1), FC2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 5-1
through 8-1), FICON2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only),
ONE_GE (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports
5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1),
and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only).
• FC4G—choose this option if you will provision an FC4G
or FICON4G PPM port rate (Port 5-1 only).
11-149
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the card mode.
Step 2 In card view, click Provisioning > Ether Ports > Ports.
Step 3 Verify that any provisioned client or trunk ports have an OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state in the Service State column. If so, continue with Step 4.
If not, complete the following substeps.
a. For the first port that is not out of service, in the Admin State column, choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI)
or Locked,disabled (ETSI).
b. Repeat Step a for each port that is not out of service.
c. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 5 Choose one of the card modes shown in Table 11-36.
:
Purpose This task changes the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card
mode. 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards can be provisioned as a Layer 2
Ethernet switch or a 10G Ethernet TXP. GE_XP and GE_XPE cards can be
provisioned as a Layer 2 Ethernet switch, 10G Ethernet MXP, or 20G
Ethernet MXP.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-36 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes
Mode Cards Description
L2 over DWDM GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
Provisions the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE as
a Layer 2 switch.
10GE TXP 10GE_XP
10GE_XPE
Provisions the 10GE_XP or 10GE_XPE as a 10 Gigabit
Ethernet transponder. Traffic received on the 10GE client Port
1-1 is sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 3-1, and traffic
received on 10 Gigabit Ethernet client Port 2-1 is sent to
10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 4-1.
11-150
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
The GE-XP and GE-XPE cards operating in 10GE MXP mode and configured for 100% traffic flow, do
not drop frames when up to nine ports are in use. However, when all the ten ports are in use, some frames
are dropped. When the tenth port is to be used, configure the Committed Info Rate (CIR) at 55% on any
one of the ports. For more information about configuring the CIR, see the “DLP-G380 Provision the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 11-381.
Step 6 Click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to provision PPM settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose the SFP you want to install from the drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one
port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 6 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Ports dialog box appears.
10GE MXP GE_XP
GE_XPE
Provisions the GE_XP or GE_XPE as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet
muxponder. Traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports
1-1 through 10-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit
Ethernet trunk Port 21-1, and traffic received on Gigabit
Ethernet client Ports 11-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent
to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 22-1.
20GE MXP GE_XP
GE_XPE
Provisions the GE_XP or GE_XPE as a 20 Gigabit Ethernet
muxponder. Traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports
1-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit
Ethernet trunk Port 21-1. Trunk port 22-1 is not used.
Table 11-36 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes
Mode Cards Description
Purpose This task provisions a fixed-rate PPM and port on an ADM-10G PPM card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-151
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 7 In the Create Ports dialog box, complete the following:
• Port—Choose the port you want to configure from the drop-down list.
• Port Type—Choose the port type, such as OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or ONE-GE from the drop-down
list.
– Ports 1 - 8 can only be OC-3, OC-12, or ONE_GE
– Ports 9 - 12 can on be OC-3 or OC-12
– Ports 13 - 16 can only be OC-3, OC-12, or OC-48
Step 8 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Ports area. The port type you provisioned is
listed in the Rate column.
Step 9 If you want to provision a PPM or another port, repeat Steps 4 through 8.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode
Caution Changing the card configuration to 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy automatically replaces the
current port configurations (Ports 1 and 3) to 10G Ethernet and OC192. This resets and reboots the
OTU2_XP card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where
you want to change the card mode.
Step 2 In card view, click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tab.
Step 3 Verify that all provisioned client or trunk ports have an OOS-MA, DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,
disabled (ETSI) service state in the Service State column. If so, continue with Step 4. If not, complete
the following substeps.
a. For the first port that is not out of service, in the Admin State column, choose OOS, DSBLD (ANSI)
or Locked, disabled (ETSI).
b. Repeat Step a for each port that is not out of service.
c. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Card tab.
Step 5 Change the Card Configuration as needed:
• Transponder—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a transponder. Port pairs 1-3
and 2-4 are both configured as transponders. This is the default card configuration.
Purpose This task changes the OTU2_XP card mode. The card mode determines
which PPMs can be provisioned for the card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-152
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• Standard Regen—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a standard regenerator
(with E-FEC only on one port). Port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 are both configured as regenerators.
• Enhanced FEC—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as an E-FEC regenerator
(with E-FEC on two ports). Port pair 3-4 is configured as enhanced regenerator. Ports 1 and 2 are
not used.
• Mixed—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a transponder and a standard
regenerator (mixed configuration). One of the port pair (1-3 or 2-4) is configured as a transponder
and the other port pair as a standard regenerator.
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card to
enable the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion. Port pair 1-3 supports LAN Phy to WAN
Phy conversion. Port pair 2-4 can be configured either as a transponder or a standard regenerator.
Note If you revert to the previous release (release earlier than 9.10), be sure to disable the 10G
Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature. If you do not disable the 10G Ethernet LAN
Phy to WAN Phy feature, an error message stating that the user needs to disable 10G Ethernet
LAN Phy to WAN Phy feature before reverting to the previous release is displayed.
Note Table 11-174 on page 11-439 lists the Ethernet variables supported on Ports 1 and 3 of the
OTU2_XP card that has the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy enabled. When the card is in
the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, no 10G FC RMONS are supported on Ports 2
and 4.
For more information on OTU2_XP card configuration rules, see the “11.16.5 OTU2_XP Card
Configuration Rules” section on page 11-103.
Step 6 Click Apply. Then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM
Note If the PPM was preprovisioned using the “DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot” task on
page 14-73 this task is unnecessary, unless the PPM has an Out-of-Service and Autonomous
Management, Unassigned (OOS-AUMA,UAS) (ANSI) or unlocked-disabled, or unassigned (ETSI)
service state.
Purpose This task provisions a multirate PPM on a TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-153
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP,
AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to
provision PPM settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose the PPM slot number where the SFP is installed from the drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one
port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 6 If you want to provision a PPM on another port, repeat Steps 3 through 5. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services
Step 1 Display your site plan in Cisco TransportPlanner.
Step 2 Verify that the topology where you plan to run the ETR_CLO or ISC service can support the service.
The following topologies support ETR_CLO or ISC:
• Single span—Two terminal sites with no intermediate sites in between and one of the following sets
of cards installed:
– 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
– 32WSS and 32DMX cards
– 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
– 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
– 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Figure 11-48 shows a single-span topology as displayed in Cisco TransportPlanner.
Purpose This task verifies that the DWDM network topology can support the IBM
ETR_CLO and ISC services.
Tools/Equipment Cisco TransportPlanner site plan
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-154
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Figure 11-48 Single-Span Topology
• Point-to-Point—Two terminal sites with one of the following sets of cards installed:
– 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
– 32WSS and 32DMX cards
– 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
– 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
– 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Line amplifiers can be installed between the terminal sites, but intermediate (traffic terminating)
sites cannot be installed. Figure 11-49 shows a point-to-point topology as shown in
Cisco TransportPlanner.
Figure 11-49 Point-to-Point Topology
• Two hubs—Two hub nodes in a ring with one of the following sets of cards installed:
– 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
– 32WSS and 32DMX cards
– 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
– 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
– 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Line amplifiers can be installed between the hubs. Figure 11-50 shows two hub nodes with no line
amplifier nodes installed. Figure 11-51 shows two hub nodes with line amplifier nodes installed.
134361
Site 1 Site 4
W E
134360
Site 1 Site 4
Site 2
E W
E
W
Site 3
E
W
11-155
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Figure 11-50 Hubs with No Line Amplifiers
Figure 11-51 Hubs with Line Amplifiers
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
Site 1
Site 2
W
E
E
W
134358
Purpose This task provisions the line rate for TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP
cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152
DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services,
page 11-153, if you are provisioning an ETR_CLO service.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
134359
Site 1 Site 2
Site 2
W
E
E
W
W E
E W
Site 4
11-156
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note The optical line rate for cards with single-rate PPMs is provisioned automatically when you complete
the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on page 11-152 if the trunk port is out of service. If
the optical line rate was provisioned automatically, you do not need to complete this task for the
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card. If the trunk port was in-service when you
provisioned the PPM, complete this task to provision the optical line rate manually for those cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP,
AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card where you want to provision PPM
ports. If the data rate that you are provisioning is DV-6000, HDTV, ESCON, SDI/D1 Video, ISC1, ISC3
(for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards), or ETR_CLO, complete the following steps.
Otherwise, continue with Step 4.
a. Click the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tabs.
b. In the ITU-T G.709 OTN field for the respective PPM, choose Disable.
c. In the FEC field for the respective PPM, choose Disable.
d. Click Apply.
Step 2 For the TXP_MR-10G card, click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs. For all other cards, go
to Step 4.
Step 3 In the Data Rate Selection area, click Create and choose the type of port from the drop-down list. The
supported port types are SONET (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy) and 10G Ethernet LAN Phy.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 5 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Port dialog box appears.
Step 6 In the Create Port dialog box, complete the following:
• Port—Choose the port and port number from the drop-down list. The first number indicates the PPM
in the Pluggable Port Modules area, and the second number indicates the port number on the PPM.
For example, the first PPM with one port appears as 1-1 and the second PPM with one port appears
as 2-1. The PPM number can be 1 to 4, but the port number is always 1.
• Port Type—Choose the type of port from the drop-down list. The port type list displays the
supported port rates on your PPM. See Table 11-37 on page 11-157 for definitions of the supported
rates on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, or AR_XP
card.
Step 7 Click OK. The row in the Pluggable Ports area turns white if the physical SFP is installed and light blue
if the SFP is not installed.
If the optical parameter values differ from the NE Default settings, change the port state to In-Service
(for ANSI) or Unlocked (for ETSI) to synchronize the values with the NE Default settings.
Step 8 Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to configure the rest of the port rates as needed.
11-157
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-37 PPM Port Types
Card Port Type
TXP_MR_2.5G
TXPP_MR_2.5G
• OC-3/STM1—155 Mbps
• OC-12/STM4—622 Mbps
• OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps
• ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM
signal)
• DV6000—Proprietary signal from video vendor
• SDI_D1_VIDEO—Serial Digital Interface and Digital Video
signal type 1
• HDTV—High Definition Television
• PASS-THRU—Not specified
• FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps
• FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps
• FICON1G—Fiber connectivity1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
• FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal)
• ETR_CLO—External Time Reference–Control Link Oscillator
• ISC compat—InterSystem Coupling Link 1 (ISC1)
• ISC peer—InterSystem Coupling Link 3 (ISC3)
• DVB-ASI — Proprietary signal from video vendor. Digital
Video Broadcast - Asynchronous Serial Interface
• ISC1— InterSystem Channel 1 Gbps (IBM signal)
MXP_2.5G_10G
MXP_2.5G_10E
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
• OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps1
TXP_MR_10G2 • SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet
WAN Phy
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
• SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet
WAN Phy—10 Gbps
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy—10 Gbps Ethernet
• 10G Fibre Channel—10 Gbps Fibre Channel
• (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
11-158
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
40E-TXP-C
40ME-TXP-C
• SONET (OC-768)/SDH (STM-256)
• 40G Ethernet LAN Phy
• OTU3
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
If the card mode is FC_GE:
• FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and 2-1)
• FC2G ISL—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
• FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
(Ports 1-1 and 2-1)
• FICON2G ISL—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal)
(Port 1-1 only)
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and
2-1 only)
If the card mode is Mixed:
• FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
• FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
(Port1-1 only)
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
• ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM
signal) (Ports 5-1 through 8-1)
If the card mode is ESCON:
• ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM
signal) (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
Table 11-37 PPM Port Types (continued)
Card Port Type
11-159
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
If the port mode is FC_GE_ISC:
• FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
• FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1
only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1,
6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
• FICON1G—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports
1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port
that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1
through 8-1)
• ISC COMPAT (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
• ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
• ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not
available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a
PPM provisioned.)
If the port mode is FC4G:
• FC4G—Fibre Channel 4.25 Gbps (Ports 1-1 or 5-1 only; ports
are not available if any of the three ports that follow has a PPM
provisioned.)
• FICON4G—Fiber connectivity 4.25 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports
1-1 or 5-1 only; ports are not available if any of the three ports
that follow has a PPM provisioned.)
40G-MXP-C
40E-MXP-C
40ME-MXP-C
• SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64)
• FC8G
• FC10G
• TEN_GE
• OTU2
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
• GE_XP and GE_XPE client ports1
• 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE client and trunk ports; GE_XP and
GE_XPE trunk ports1
Table 11-37 PPM Port Types (continued)
Card Port Type
11-160
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
OTU2_XP • SONET (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)—10 Gbps
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy—10 Gbps Ethernet
• 10G Fiber Channel—10 Gbps Fibre Channel
• IB_5G—InfiniBand 5 Gbps
Note If you have an OTU2 signal in which the OPU2 has been
generated by multiplexing four ODU1 signals, choose
SONET as the port rate. This allows the OTU2 signal to be
transported transparently in standard or E-FEC regenerator
configuration.
AR_MXP
AR_XP
• OC-3/STM1—155 Mbps
• OC-12/STM4—622 Mbps
• OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps
• Gigabit Ethernet—1.125 Gbps
• Fast Ethernet—100 Mbps
• ESCON-Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal)
• FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps
• FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps
• FC4G—Fibre Channel 4.25 Gbps
• FC8G—Fibre Channel 8.5 Gbps
• FICON1G—Fiber connectivity1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
• FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal)
• FICON4G—Fiber connectivity 4.25 (IBM signal)
• FICON8G—Fiber connectivity 8.5 Gbps (IBM signal)
• SD-SDI—270 Mbps
• HD-SDI—1.485 Gbps
• Third-generation SDI (3G-SDI)—2.970 Gbps
• OTU2E —11.09 Gbps
• OTU1—2.66 Gbps
1. Automatically provisioned when the PPM is created if the trunk port is out of service.
2. Provisioned on the Data Rate Selection tab.
Table 11-37 PPM Port Types (continued)
Card Port Type
11-161
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G280 Delete a PPM
Note Before deleting a PPM, delete the PPM from the provisioning pane.
Note This task does not apply to the TXP_MR_10G card. To change the TXP_MR_10G data rate, complete
the “DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate” task on page 11-192.
Note You cannot delete a PPM if the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card is part of a regenerator group. For OTU2_XP card, you cannot delete a
PPM if the card configuration is in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC mode.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP,
AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to
delete PPM settings.
Step 2 Verify that the PPM port Service State is OOS,DSBLD. If the PPM port is OOS,DSBLD, go to Step 3.
If it is not OOS,DSBLD, follow the tasks in NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules, page 11-144,
to change the Service State of the PPM port to OOS,DSBLD.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 4 To delete a PPM and the associated ports:
a. In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click the PPM that you want to delete. The highlight changes
to dark blue.
b. Click Delete. The Delete PPM dialog box appears.
c. Click Yes. The PPM provisioning is removed from the Pluggable Port Modules area and the
Pluggable Ports area.
Purpose This task deletes PPM provisioning for SFPs or XFPs installed on TXP,
MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72 or
• DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot, page 14-73
• DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-162
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note You cannot delete a PPM until its port is in the OOS,DSBLD state. You cannot delete a client
port if the client is in the In Service and Normal (IS-NR) (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled
(ETSI) service state, is in a protection group, has a generic communications channel (GCC)
or data communications channel (DCC), is a timing source, has circuits or overhead circuits,
or transports Link Management Protocol channels or links. You can delete a client port
(except the last port) if the trunk port is in service and the client port is in the
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state. You can delete the
last client port only if the trunk port is in a OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state for all cards except the MXP_MR_2.5G,
MXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards. For more information about port states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
Step 5 Verify that the PPM provisioning is deleted:
• In the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP card view, CTC shows an empty port after the PPM is deleted.
• If the SFP or XFP is physically present when you delete the PPM provisioning, CTC transitions to
the deleted state, the ports (if any) are deleted, and the PPM is represented as a gray graphic in CTC.
The SFP or XFP can be provisioned again in CTC, or the equipment can be removed. If the
equipment is removed, the graphic disappears.
Step 6 If you need to remove the PPM hardware (the SFP or XFP), complete the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or
XFP” task on page 14-74.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group
Purpose This procedure creates a Y-cable protection group between the client ports
of two TXP, MXP, AR_XP, AR_MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards. For additional information about Y-cable
protection, see “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page G-27.
Tools/Equipment • Installed TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card.
• Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix
Prerequisite Procedures In the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards
• NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment
• DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files,
page 14-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-163
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note Y-cable protection is available for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when they are
provisioned in 10GE MXP, 20GE MXP, or 10GE TXP mode. Y-cable protection cannot be provisioned
for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when they are provisioned in
L2-over-DWDM mode. Y-cable protection is available for the OTU2_XP card when it is provisioned in
the TXP card mode.
Note If you are provisioning Y-cable protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, the
Ethernet mode must be set to 1000 and 10000 Mbps respectively. To provision the Ethernet mode, see
the “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings”
task on page 11-381.
Note There is a traffic hit of up to a couple hundred milliseconds on the MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXP_MR_10DME cards in Y-cable configuration when a fiber cut or SFP failure occurs on one of the
client ports.
Note The OTU2-XP and 40E-MXP-C card cannot implement Y-cable protection for the client ports in 10 GE
LAN PHY mode. Hence, a pair of OTU2_XP cards is used at each end in pass-through mode
(Transponder mode with G.709 disabled) to implement Y-cable protection. The 40E-MXP-CE card can
implement Y-cable protection without the OTU2-XP card for the client ports in LAN PHY GFP mode.
However, the 40E-MXP-CE card cannot implement Y-cable protection without the OTU2-XP card for
the client ports in LAN PHY WIS mode.
Note For SONET or SDH payloads, Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) alarms can occur on a split signal if the
ports are not in a Y-cable protection group.
Step 1 View the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix (see the Table 14-1 on page 14-4) for your site. Verify
the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards that
need Y-cable protection groups. (Cards requiring Y-cable protection are indicated with “Y-Cable” in the
Traffic Matrix table Protection Type column. For more information, see to the Cisco TransportPlanner
DWDM Operations Guide.)
Step 2 Verify that the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP
cards are installed according to the requirements specified in Table 14-7 on page 14-109. Table 11-38
lists the protection types available in the ONS 15454 for DWDM client cards.
11-164
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-38 Protection Types
Protection Type Cards Description and Installation Requirements
Y-cable MXP_2.5_10G
MXP_2.5_10E
MXP_2.5_10E_C
MXP_2.5_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
TXP_MR_10G
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_2.5G
40E-TXP-C
40ME-TXP-C
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
40G-MXP-C
40E-MXP-C
40ME-MXP-C
GE_XP1
10GE_XP2
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
OTU2_XP
AR_MXP
AR_XP
Pairs a working transponder or muxponder card or port with a protect
transponder or muxponder card or port. The protect port must be on a
different card than the working port and it must be the same card type as
the working port. The working and protect port numbers must be the
same, that is, Port 1 can only protect Port 1, Port 2 can only protect Port
2, and so on.
Note The working and protect card must be in the same shelf for a
multishelf node.
11-165
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 3 Verify that pluggable ports are provisioned for the same payload and payload rate on the TXP, MXP,
AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards where you want to
create the Y-cable protection group:
a. Display the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP
card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module tab.
c. Verify that a pluggable port is provisioned in the Pluggable Port Module area, and the payload type
and rate is provisioned for it in the Pluggable Ports area. If they are not the same, for example, if the
pluggable port and rate are not the same, you must either delete the provisioned rate and create a
new rate to match using the “DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot” task on page 14-73 or
replace the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) using the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP” task on
page 14-74.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > Protection
tabs.
Step 5 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 6 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric
(a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use
question mark (?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters.
• Type—Choose Y Cable from the drop-down list.
• Protect Port—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port to
the active port. The list displays the available transponder or muxponder ports. If transponder or
muxponder cards are not installed, no ports appear in the drop-down list.
Splitter TXPP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
AR_MXP
AR_XP
A splitter protection group is automatically created when a
TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, AR_MXP, or AR_XP card is
installed. You can edit the splitter protection group name.
OTU2_XP A splitter protection group is configurable for the OTU2_XP card. You
can create a splitter protection group on ports 3 and 4 of the OTU2_XP
card using the “NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the
OTU2_XP Card” procedure on page 11-166.
1+1 GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
In the Layer 2 (L2) card mode 1+1 protection is provided to protect the
card against client port and card failure.
1. When provisioned in 10GE MXP or 20GE MXP card mode.
2. When provisioned in 10GE TXP card mode.
Table 11-38 Protection Types
Protection Type Cards Description and Installation Requirements
11-166
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Ports list. If
no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you can not complete this task until you install the
physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on
page 14-53.
Step 7 From the Available Ports list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in
Protect Ports. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Ports list.
Step 8 Complete the remaining fields:
• Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure
conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
• Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range
is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will
elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions
causing the switch are cleared.
Note The bidirectional switching option is available for Y-cable protection groups only in the following cases:
• On the MXP_MR_10DME card when ISC3_PEER_1G/ISC3_PEER_2G is the client payload.
• On the MXP_MR_10DME and MXP_MR_2.5G cards when Fibre Channel is the client payload. In
this case bidirectional switching is:
– Automatically enabled when Distance Extension is enabled.
– Automatically disabled when Distance Extension is disabled.
The bidirectional switching option is available for all SONET and SDH 1+1 protection groups.
Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat this procedure for every Y-cable protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic
Matrix.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card
Purpose This procedure creates a splitter protection group between the trunk ports
of an OTU2_XP card. For additional information about splitter protection,
see the “G.35.1.2 Splitter Protection” section on page G-30.
Tools/Equipment Installed OTU2_XP card
Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix
11-167
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note A splitter protection group is automatically created when a TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, or PSM
card is installed. You can edit the splitter protection group name for these cards. The splitter protection
group is deleted when you delete the TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, or PSM card.
Note Splitter protection is available for the OTU2_XP card when it is provisioned in Transponder
configuration only. In a splitter-protected Transponder configuration, Port 1 is the client port, Port 3 is
the working trunk port, and Port 4 is the standby trunk port.
Note For SONET or SDH payloads, Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) alarms can occur on a split signal if the
ports are not in a splitter protection group.
Step 1 View the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix (see the Table 14-1 on page 14-4) for your site. Verify
which OTU2_XP card needs a splitter protection group. (Cards requiring splitter protection are indicated
with “Splitter” in the Traffic Matrix table Protection Type column. Refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner
DWDM Operations Guide for more information.)
Step 2 Verify that the OTU2_XP card is installed according to the requirements specified in Table 14-7 on
page 14-109.
Step 3 Verify that the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is provisioned for the same payload rate as the pluggable
port on the OTU2_XP card where you will create the splitter protection group:
a. Display the OTU2_XP card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module tabs.
c. Verify that a pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is provisioned in the Pluggable Port Module area, and
that the payload rate of the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is same as the payload rate of the
pluggable port on the OTU2_XP card provisioned in the Pluggable Ports area. If they are not the
same, you must either delete the provisioned rate and create a new rate to match using the
“DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot” task on page 14-73 or replace the pluggable port
(SFP or XFP) using the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP” task on page 14-74.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), click the Provisioning > Protection
tabs.
Step 5 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 6 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
Prerequisite Procedures In the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards
• NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-168
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z,
0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark
(?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters.
• Type—Choose Splitter from the drop-down list.
• Protect Card—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port
to the active port. The list displays the available OTU2_XP ports. If transponder or muxponder cards
are not installed or if the trunk ports of the card are part of a regenerator group, no ports appear in
the drop-down list.
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Cards list. If
no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you cannot complete this task until you install the
physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on
page 14-53.
Step 7 From the Available Cards list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in
Protect Cards. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Cards list.
Step 8 Complete the remaining fields:
• Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure
conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
• Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range
is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will
elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions
causing the switch are cleared.
Note The Bidirectional Switching option is not applicable for splitter protection groups.
Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat this procedure for every splitter protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic
Matrix.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Purpose This procedure creates a 1+1 protection group to protect against client port
and card failure of GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE cards. For
additional information about 1+1 protection, see the “G.35.2 1+1
Protection” section on page G-30.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures In the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide:
• NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards
• NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
11-169
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to protect the card against
client port and card failure. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed according to the
requirements specified in Table 14-7 on page 14-109.
Step 3 Complete the NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually, page 14-114 by selecting the Trunk to
Trunk (L2) option, at the trunk port where you want to create 1+1 protection.
Step 4 Complete the “NTP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Cards” task on page 11-169 to create a protection group.
Step 5 Configure the standby port behavior, by setting the Protection Action to None or Squelch. For detailed
information on how to configure the standby port behavior, see the, “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 11-381.
Note Do not enable squelch in a 1 + 1 protection group, if the 100FX, 100LX SFP, and
ONS-SE-ZE-EL SFP is used in the protection group and is connected to the peer via the parallel
cable (not Y-cable)
Note When you configure L2 1 + 1 protection on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, set the Protection
Action to None on the client ports. Setting the Protection Action as Squelch results in
unexpected switching behavior.
Step 6 Configure the standby and active port speed, by setting the mode parameter to Auto or 1000 or any other
values. For detailed information on how to configure the standby port behavior, see the “DLP-G380
Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on
page 11-381.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure creates a 1+1 protection group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE slots where internal patchcords were created.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords, page 16-61
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-170
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Protection tabs.
Step 2 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z,
0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark
(?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters.
• Type—Choose L2 1+1 (port) from the drop-down list.
• Protect Port—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port
for the active port. The list displays the available transponder or muxponder ports. If transponder or
muxponder cards are not installed, no ports appear in the drop-down list.
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Ports list. If
no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you cannot complete this task until you install the
physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on
page 14-53.
Step 4 From the Available Ports list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in the
Protected Port drop-down list. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Ports list.
Step 5 Complete the remaining fields:
• Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure
conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
• Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range
is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will
elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions
causing the switch are cleared.
The bidirectional switching option is available for SONET and SDH 1+1 protection groups.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Repeat this procedure for every 1+1 protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic
Matrix.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
11-171
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the transponder card
settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings, page 11-172
• DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings, page 11-173
• DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings, page 11-176
• DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings,
page 11-178
• DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G
FC/FICON Payloads, page 11-181
• DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-182
• DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-184
• DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings, page 11-188
• DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 11-177
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G
and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-172
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-39.
Note The Card subtab Framing Type and Tunable Wavelengths fields are display-only. Framing Type
shows the card framing type, either SONET or SDH, depending on whether the card is installed
in an ANSI or ETSI chassis. The Tunable Wavelengths field shows the tunable wavelengths for
the physical TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G that is installed.
Purpose This task changes the card settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-173
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Table 11-39 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Settings
Parameter Description Options
Termination
Mode
Sets the mode of operation (option only
supported for SONET/SDH payloads).
• Transparent
• Section (ANSI) or Regeneration
Section (ETSI)
• Line (ANSI) or Multiplex Section
(ETSI)
Regeneration
Peer Slot
Sets the slot containing another
TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card
to create a regeneration peer group. A
regeneration peer group facilitates the
management of two TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are needed to
perform a complete signal regeneration.
The regeneration peer group
synchronizes provisioning of the two
cards. Payload type and ITU-T G.709
optical transport network (OTN) changes
made on one TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card are reflected on the
peer TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G
card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot
be created on TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are in
a regeneration peer group.
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
• 17
Regeneration
Group Name
Sets the regeneration peer group name. User defined
Purpose This task changes the line settings for the client port of the TXP_MR_2.5G
and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-174
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-40.
Note The 2.5G multirate transponder trunk settings are provisioned in the “DLP-G305 Provision the
2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds” task on page 11-182.
Table 11-40 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G card only)
Port Name The user can assign a logical name for each of the
ports shown by filling in this field.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task
on page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network conditions
prevent the change. For more information about
administrative states, see the Administrative and
Service States document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For
more information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal
fail bit error rate.
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal
degrade bit error rate.
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
11-175
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
ALS Mode Sets the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. • Disabled (default)
• Auto Restart
• Manual Restart
• Manual Restart for Test
Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the client port. Options: ANSI/ETSI
• Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default)
• SR
• SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance
• IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km
distance
• IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km
distance
• LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
• LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
• LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through
1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse
wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)
spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked by
asterisks (**)
AINS Soak (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the
automatic in-service soak period.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Type (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) The optical
transport type.
• SONET
• SDH
Table 11-40 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-176
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Note This task only applies to SONET services.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-41.
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-41 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Section Trace
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm
arises because of a J0 overhead string
mismatch, no alarm indication signal is
sent to downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
11-177
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-42.
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this display updated automatically.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked (default)
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_2.5G
and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-41 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Section Trace
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-178
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in Table 11-43.
Table 11-42 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T, C-band spacing. If the card is
installed, the wavelengths it carries
are identified with two asterisks.
Other wavelengths have a dark grey
background. If the card is not
installed, all wavelengths appear
with a dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying OC-3/STM-1,
OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-179
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note Some parameters and options in Table 11-43 do not apply to all TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. If a parameter or option does not apply, that parameter or option does
not appear in CTC.
Table 11-43 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Thresholds Settings
for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Payloads
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
• 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-180
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 11-43 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Thresholds Settings
for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Payloads (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI
11-181
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
Step 1 In card view, display the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line
threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 11-44 for a list of available
Ethernet variables.
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Purpose This task changes the line remote monitoring (RMON) threshold settings
for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying the
1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-44 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card 1G Ethernet and 1G FC/FICON
Thresholds
Variable Description
ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing
them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
8b10bStatsEncodingDispErrors Number of IETF 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel
line side.
8b10bIdleOrderedSets Number of received packets containing idle ordered sets.
8b10bNonIdleOrderedSets Number of received packets containing non-idle ordered sets.
8b10bDataOrderedSets Number of received packets containing data ordered sets.
11-182
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Enter the appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Note In this task, trunk port refers to Port 2 for TXP_MR_2.5G cards, and to Ports 2 and 3 for
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Pluggable Port Modules tab. Under Pluggable Ports, record the Rate that is provisioned.
Step 3 Look up the rate in Table 11-45 and note whether it is 2R or 3R.
Purpose This task changes the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G trunk port
alarm and threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-183
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 5 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 11-46, verify the trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High and RX Power Low
depending on whether the rate is 2R or 3R. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-45 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface
Client Interface Input Bit Rate 3R vs. 2R ITU-T G.709
OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gbps 3R On or Off
DV-6000 2.38 Gbps 2R —
2 Gigabit Fibre Channel (2G-FC)/fiber
connectivity (FICON)
2.125 Gbps 3R1
1. No monitoring
On or Off
High-Definition Television (HDTV) 1.48 Gbps 2R —
Gigabit Ethernet (GE) 1.25 Gbps 3R On or Off
1 Gigabit Fibre Channel (1G-FC)/FICON 1.06 Gbps 3R On or Off
OC-12/STM-4 622 Mbps 3R On or Off
OC-3/STM-1 155 Mbps 3R On or Off
Enterprise System Connection (ESCON) 200 Mbps 2R —
SDI/D1 video 270 Mbps 2R —
ISC-1 Compact 1.06 Gbps 3R Off
ISC-3 1.06 or
2.125 Gbps
2R —
ETR_CLO 16 Mbps 2R —
Table 11-46 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Signal TCA RX Power Low TCA RX Power High
3R –23 dBm –9 dBm
2R –24 dBm –9 dBm
11-184
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 9 Verify the trunk port Alarm thresholds for RX Power High is –7 dBm, and for RX Power Low is
–26 dBm. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to
change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 10 Click Apply.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 11-47, verify the Port 1 (client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low,
TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-185
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-47 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA RX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
OC-3 15454-SFP3-1-IR –23 –8 –21 –2
STM-1 15454E-SFP-L.1.1 –24 –10 –21 –2
OC-12 15454-SFP12-4-IR –28 –7 –21 –2
STM-4 15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –28 –8 –21 –2
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –18 –3 –16 3
15454-SFP-OC48-IR –18 0 –11 6
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
–18 –3 –16 3
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ESCON 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–21 –14 –35 –8
DV6000 15454-SFP-OC48-IR –18 0 –11 6
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 –18 –3 –16 3
SDI_D1_
VIDEO
15454-SFP12-4-IR –28 –7 –21 –2
15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –28 –8 –21 –2
HDTV 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
PASS-THRU 2R MODE
(not specified)
— — — —
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–15 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
11-186
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 11-48, verify the Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power
High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as
needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and
hitting Enter.
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–15 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ETR_CLO 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–17 0 –16 3
ISC compat 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ISC peer 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
Table 11-48 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
OC-3 15454-SFP3-1-IR –26 –5 –17 –6
STM-1 15454E-SFP-L.1.1 –27 –7 –17 –6
OC-12 15454-SFP12-4-IR –31 –4 –17 –6
STM-4 15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –31 –5 –17 –6
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –21 0 –12 –1
15454-SFP-OC48-IR –21 3 –7 2
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
–21 0 –12 –1
Table 11-47 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds (continued)
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA RX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
11-187
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
ESCON 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–24 –11 –31 –12
DV6000 15454-SFP-OC48-IR –21 3 –7 2
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 –21 0 –12 –5
SDI_D1_
VIDEO
15454-SFP12-4-IR –31 –4 –17 –6
15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –31 –5 –17 –6
HDTV 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
PASS-THRU 2R MODE
(not specified)
— — — —
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
Table 11-48 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds (continued)
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
11-188
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709
Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-49 through 11-52.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM settings
independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-49 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
ETR_CLO 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–20 3 –12 –2
ISC compat 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
ISC peer 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
Purpose This task changes the OTN settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-48 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds (continued)
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
11-189
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-50 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 11-51 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 11-49 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines to forward error
correction (FEC).
• Enable
• Disable
SF BER (Display only) The signal fail bit error
rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Table 11-50 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port1
1. Latency for a 1G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 4 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 40 microseconds. Latency
for a 2G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 2 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 20 microseconds. Consider these
values when planning a FC network that is sensitive to latency.
(Display only) Port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
11-190
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-52 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 11-51 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
Bit Errors
Corrected
Sets the value for bit errors corrected. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Sets the value for uncorrectable words. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Table 11-52 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable FDI on
TIM
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm
arises because of a J0 overhead string
mismatch, no alarm indication signal is
sent to downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
11-191
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Note The TXP_MR_10G card does not support PPMs.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the transponder card
settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a TXP_MR_10G card, complete the “DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G
Data Rate” task on page 11-192, and if you are provisioning a TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C
card, complete the “DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate” task on
page 11-193. If not, continue with Step 4.
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for 10G multirate
transponder cards including the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-52 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-192
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings, page 11-193
• DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings, page 11-195
• DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings, page 11-200
• DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads
Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy, page 11-202
• DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN
Phy Payloads, page 11-205
• DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-209
• DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-210
• DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings, page 11-212
• DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 11-201
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G card
where you want to change the card data rate settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs.
Step 3 Click Create.
Step 4 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates:
• SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
Step 5 Click Ok.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure.
Purpose This task changes the TXP_MR_10G card data rate.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-193
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10E or
TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the card data rate settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose the SFP you want to install from the drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one
port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Step 6 Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 7 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Ports dialog box appears.
Step 8 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates:
• SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
• 10G FIBER Channel
• (TXP-MR-10EX_C card only) IB_5G
Step 9 Click Ok.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure.
DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Purpose This task changes the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C card data rate.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task changes the card settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-194
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the card
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-53.
Table 11-53 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options
Termination
Mode
Sets the mode of operation. (This option is
only available for SONET/SDH payloads).
• Transparent
• Section (TXP_MR_10E
only)
• Line
• Transparent
• Regeneration Section
(TXP_MR_10E only)
• Multiplex Section
AIS/Squelch
Configuration
(TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C,
TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
only) Sets the transparent termination mode
configuration.
• Squelch
• AIS
• Squelch
• AIS
Regeneration
Peer Slot
Sets the slot containing another
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or
TXP_MR_10EX_C card to create a
regeneration peer group. A regeneration peer
group facilitates the management of two
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or
TXP_MR_10EX_C cards that are needed to
perform a complete signal regeneration.
The regeneration peer group synchronizes
provisioning of the two cards. Payload type
and ITU-T G.709 optical transport network
(OTN) changes made on one TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C,
TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card
are reflected on the peer TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C,
TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot be
created on TXP cards that are in a
regeneration peer group.
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
• 17
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
• 17
11-195
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET/SDH/Ethernet tabs. SONET is the option for ANSI shelves
when 10G Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, SDH is the option for ETSI shelves when 10G
Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, and Ethernet is the option for ANSI or ETSI shelves when
10GE LAN Phy is the Pluggable Port Rate.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-54.
Regeneration
Group Name
(Display only) The regeneration peer group
name.
— —
Tunable
Wavelengths
(Display only) Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is
installed. For the TXP_MR_10E_C, or
TXP_MR_10E_L cards, the first and last
supported wavelength, frequency spacing, and
number of supported wavelengths are shown in
the format: first wavelength-last
wavelength-frequency spacing-number of
supported wavelengths. For example, the
TXP_MR_10E_C card would show:
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. The
TXP_MR_10E show the four wavelengths
supported by the card that is installed. The
TXP_MR_10G show the two wavelengths
supported by the card that is installed.
— —
Purpose This task changes the line settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-53 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options
11-196
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note In Table 11-54, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards.
If a tab does not apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Table 11-54 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only)
Displays the port
number.
• 1 (OC192) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy) (if TXP_MR_10G)
• 1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10G
card)
• 1-1 (OC192) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy on the TXP_MR_10E card)
• 1-1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E
card)
• 1-1 (FC10G) (if 10G fiber channel
is provisioned on the
TXP_MR_10E card)
• 2 (Trunk)
• (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
• 1 (STM-64) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy) (if TXP_MR_10G)
• 1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10G
card)
• 1-1 (STM-64) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy on the TXP_MR_10E card)
• 1-1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E
card)
• 1-1 (FC10G) (if 10G fiber channel is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E
card)
• 2 (Trunk)
• (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
Port Name Provides the ability to
assign the specified
port a name.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/special characters.
Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a
Port” task on page 16-16.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/special characters.
Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a
Port” task on page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service
state. For more
information about
administrative states,
see the
Administrative and
Service States.
• IS
• IS,AINS
• OOS,DSBLD
• OOS,MT
• Unlocked
• Unlocked,automaticInService
• Locked,disabled
• Locked,maintenance
11-197
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Service State (Display only)
Identifies the
autonomously
generated state that
gives the overall
condition of the port.
Service states appear
in the format:
Primary
State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more
information about
service states, see the
Administrative and
Service States.
• IS-NR
• OOS-AU,AINS
• OOS-MA,DSBLD
• OOS-MA,MT
• Unlocked-enabled
• Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• Locked-enabled,disabled
• Locked-enabled,maintenance
SF BER (SONET [ANSI] or
SDH [ETSI]
including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy
only) Sets the signal
fail bit error rate.
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER (SONET [ANSI] or
SDH [ETSI]
including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy
only) Sets the signal
degrade bit error rate.
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Type (SONET [ANSI] or
SDH [ETSI]
including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy
only) The optical
transport type.
• SONET
• SDH
• SONET
• SDH
Table 11-54 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-198
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function
mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports
ALS according to
ITU-T G.644
(06/99). ALS can be
disabled, or it can be
set for one of three
mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the
laser is not automatically shut
down when traffic outages (LOS)
occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when
traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the
conditions that caused the outage
are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the
laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be
manually restarted when
conditions that caused the outage
are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually
restarts the laser for testing.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the
laser is not automatically shut down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when
traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the
conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when
traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually
restarted when conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually
restarts the laser for testing.
AINS Soak (SONET [ANSI] or
SDH [ETSI]
including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy
only) Sets the
automatic in-service
soak period.
Double-click the time
and use the up and
down arrows to
change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in
hh.mm format, after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
• Duration of valid input signal, in
hh.mm format, after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
ProvidesSync (TXP_MR_10E,
OC192 only) Sets the
ProvidesSync card
parameter. If
checked, the card is
provisioned as a
network element
(NE) timing
reference.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Table 11-54 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-199
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
SyncMsgIn (TXP_MR_10E,
OC192 only) Sets the
EnableSync card
parameter. Enables
synchronization
status messages (S1
byte), which allow
the node to choose
the best timing
source.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Max Size (TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10G LAN
Phy only) Sets the
maximum Ethernet
packet size.
• 1548 bytes
• Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
• 1548 bytes
• Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
Incoming
MAC Address
(TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10G LAN
Phy only) Sets the
incoming MAC
address.
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in
hexadecimal format.
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in
hexadecimal format.
Wavelength Displays the
wavelength of the
client port.
• First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 1310 nm
through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz
ITU spacing; coarse wavelength
division multiplexing (CWDM)
spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are
marked by asterisks (**)
• First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 1310 nm
through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU
spacing; coarse wavelength division
multiplexing (CWDM) spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked
by asterisks (**)
Reach Displays the optical
reach distance of the
client port.
The Reach options depend on the traffic
type that has been selected.
The Reach options depend on the traffic
type that has been selected.
Table 11-54 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-200
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Note The Section Trace tab is available for the 10G Multirate Transponder cards only if no PPMs are
provisioned, or the OC192 PPM is provisioned. The tab is not available if a 10G Ethernet LAN Phy or
10G Fibre Channel PPM is provisioned.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-55.
Purpose This task changes the line section trace settings for the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-55 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options Options — ONS 15454 SDH
Port Sets the port number. • 1-1 (OC192)
• 2—Trunk
• 1-1 (STM64)
• 2—Trunk
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
• Off/None
• Manual
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a
new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. Click Hex to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises
because of a J0 overhead string mismatch,
no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
11-201
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Note Before modifying the wavelength settings, change the port state to OOS,DSBLD (for ANSI) or
Locked,disabled (for ETSI) and delete the circuit and patchcord provisioning present on the port.
Payload or communication channel provisioning can be retained.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-56.
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a
new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. Click Hex to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received
string. You can click Refresh to manually
refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep
this panel updated.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked (default) Checked/unchecked (default)
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-55 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options Options — ONS 15454 SDH
11-202
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
Table 11-56 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. Port 2 (Trunk)
Band Indicates the wavelength band that can be
provisioned. If the physical
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L,
and TXP_MR_10EX_C is installed, this
field is display-only.
• C—The C-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
• L—The L-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning for TXP_MR_10E_C, and
TXP_MR_10E_L cards. (This field does
not apply to TXP_MR_10G or
TXP_MR_10E cards.)
• Even—Displays even C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
• Odd—Displays odd C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T C-band or L-band spacing,
depending on the card that is
installed. For TXP_MR_10G and
TXP_MR_10E cards, the
wavelengths carried by the card are
identified with two asterisks. If the
card is not installed, all wavelengths
appear with a dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards carrying SONET or SDH payloads,
including the physical 10G Ethernet WAN Phy payload.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-203
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-57.
Note Parameters shown in Table 11-57 do not apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards. If the
parameter or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC.
Table 11-57 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold
Settings
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1-1 (OC192)
• 2 (Trunk)
• 1-1 (STM64)
• 2 (Trunk)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-204
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
OFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Out of frame
seconds
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 11-57 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI
11-205
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy Payloads
Step 1 Display the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or
TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards carrying the physical 10G Ethernet
LAN payload.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-57 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI
11-206
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 11-58 for a list of available
Ethernet variables.
Table 11-58 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card GE LAN Phy Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing
characters.
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
ifInMulticastPkts Number of multicast frames received error free.
ifInBroadcastPkts Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to an higher sublayer,
that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.
ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them
from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
ifInErrorBytePkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of receive error bytes.
ifInFramingErrorPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of receive framing error counters.
ifInJunkInterPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of receive interpacket junk counters.
ifOutOctets
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.
txTotalPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of transmit packets.
ifOutMulticastPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of multicast frames transmitted error free.
ifOutBroadcastPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted, and that were addressed to a broadcast address at this
sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
dot3StatsFCSErrors Number of frames with frame check errors, that is, there is an
integral number of octets, but an incorrect Frame Check Sequence
(FCS).
dot3StatsFrameTooLong
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of received frames that were larger than the maximum size
permitted.
etherStatsUndersizePkts Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were
otherwise well formed.
11-207
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
etherStatsFragments Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had
either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or
a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to
increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal
occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
etherStatsPkts64Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that
were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsBroadcastPkts Total number of good packets received that were directed to the
broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast
packets.
etherStatsMulticastPkts Total number of good packets received that were directed to a
multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets
directed to the broadcast address.
etherStatsOversizePkts The total number of packets received that were longer than
1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and
were otherwise well formed.
etherStatsJabbers Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either
a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
etherStatsOctets Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets)
received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
Table 11-58 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card GE LAN Phy Variables (continued)
11-208
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of packets received that had a length (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and
1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad FCS with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral
number of octets (Alignment Error).
rxPauseFrames
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of received IETF 802.x pause frames.
rxControlFrames Number of MAC control frames passed by the MAC sublayer to the
MAC control sublayer.
rxUnknownOpcodeFrames
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of MAC control frames received that contain an opcode
that is not supported by the device.
Table 11-58 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card GE LAN Phy Variables (continued)
11-209
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-59, verify the trunk port (Port 2) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter,
then click Apply.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Purpose This task provisions the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C trunk port
alarm and threshold cross alert (TCA) thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-59 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Card
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TXP_MR_10G –8 dBm –18 dBm 7 dBm –1 dBm
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_
C
–9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
11-210
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 7 Referring to Table 11-60, verify the trunk port (Port 2) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter,
then click Apply.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Table 11-60 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Card
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
TXP_MR_10G –8 dBm –20 dBm 4 dBm 2 dBm
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_
C
–8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-211
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-61, verify the Port 1 (Client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low,
TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing
value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter, then click Apply.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 11-62, provision the Port 1 (Client) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Table 11-61 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Pluggable Port
Rate
Pluggable Port
Module (XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
SONET (or SDH) TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
–1 –11 –1 –6
10G Ethernet
LAN Phy
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
0.5 –14.4 –1 –6
10G Fibre
Channel
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
0.5 –14.4 –1 –6
IB_5G1
1. Only the TXP_MR_10EX_C card supports IB_5G.
TXP_MR_10EX_C
uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
Version 3
1.0 –14.0 5.0 12.0
11-212
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the OTN settings.
Table 11-62 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
Pluggable Port
Rate
Pluggable Port
Module (XFP)
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
SONET (or SDH) TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
3 –16 1 –8
10G Ethernet
LAN Phy
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
3 –16 1 –8
10G Fibre
Channel
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
3 –16 1 –8
IB_5G1
1. Only the TXP_MR_10EX_C card supports IB_5G.
TXP_MR_10EX_C
uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
Version 3
3.0 –16 1.0 –8
Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings for the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-213
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-63 through 11-66.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and
SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-63 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 11-64 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 11-63 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card OTN Lines Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709. Check the box to enable.
For TXP-MR-10EX_C cards, the G.709
OTN should be enabled.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode
can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the
TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can
be enabled to provide greater range and
lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E
cards, Standard is the same as enabling
FEC. For TXP-MR-10EX_C cards, the
FEC should be enabled.
• Enable—(TXP_MR_10G only) FEC
is on.
• Disable—FEC is off.
• Standard—(TXP_MR_10E only)
Standard FEC is on.
• Enhanced—(TXP_MR_10E only)
Enhanced FEC is on.
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
SF BER (Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
Asynch/Synch
Mapping
(TXP_MR_10E only) Sets how the
ODUk (client payload) is mapped to the
optical channel (OTUk).
• Asynch mapping
• Synch mapping
11-214
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-64 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
ES Severely errored seconds. Two types of
thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the
SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC,
overhead management, and PM using
OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button
selects path PM using ODUk.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709
optical channel transport unit
order of k overhead frame used
for management and performance
monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the
ITU-T G.709 optical channel data
unit order of k overhead frame
unit used for path performance
monitoring.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-215
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-65 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 11-66 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 11-64 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 11-65 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
Bit Errors
Corrected
Displays the number of bit errors
corrected during the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Displays the number of uncorrectable
words in the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or one-day intervals.
Table 11-66 10G Multirate Transponder Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1
• 2
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
11-216
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to
the downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)
Table 11-66 10G Multirate Transponder Trail Trace Identifier Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-217
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G292 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Note The 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards does not support PPMs.
Note The maximum ambient operating temperature for 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards is 500 Celsius.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the transponder card
settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a 40E-TXP-C or 40ME-TXP-C card, complete the “DLP-G656 Provision the
40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Data Rate” task on page 11-218. If not, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G657 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Settings, page 11-218
• DLP-G658 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Settings, page 11-219
• DLP-G659 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder SONET, SDH, or Ethernet Line Settings,
page 11-221
• DLP-G660 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings, page 11-225
• DLP-G661 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads
Including 40G Ethernet WAN Phy, page 11-228
• DLP-G663 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-230
• DLP-G664 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-231
• DLP-G665 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings, page 11-232
Purpose This procedure changes the line settings, PM parameters, and threshold
settings for 40G multirate transponder cards (40E-TXP-C, 40ME-TXP-C).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards,
page 14-69
• DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
• DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if
necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-218
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G656 Provision the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Data Rate
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the card data rate settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs.
Step 3 Click Create.
Step 4 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates:
• SONET (ANSI) OC-768 or SDH (ETSI) STM-256
• 40G Ethernet LAN Phy (only when overclock mode is ON)
• OTU3
Step 5 Click Ok.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure.
DLP-G657 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-67.
Purpose This task changes the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C card data rate.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task changes the card settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C
cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-219
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G658 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the line settings.
Table 11-67 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Card Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454(ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH(ETSI)
Options
Regeneration
Peer Slot
Sets the slot containing another 40E-TXP-C
or 40ME-TXP-C card to create a regeneration
peer group. A regeneration peer group
facilitates the management of two
40E-TXP-C or 40ME-TXP-C cards that are
needed to perform a complete signal
regeneration.
The regeneration peer group synchronizes
provisioning of the two cards. Payload type
and ITU-T G.709 optical transport network
(OTN) changes made on one 40E-TXP-C or
40ME-TXP-C card is reflected on the peer
40E-TXP-C or 40ME-TXP-C card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot be
created on TXP cards that are in a
regeneration peer group.
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
Regeneration
Group Name
(Display only) The regeneration peer group
name.
— —
Trunk
Wavelengths
(Display only) Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is
installed. The 40E-TXP-C, or 40ME-TXP-C
that is installed shows the C-band
wavelengths that it supports.
— —
Purpose This task changes the line settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C
cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-220
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in Table 11-68.
Table 11-68 Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 1 and 2
Port Name Assigns a logical name for each of the ports
shown by filling in this field.
User-defined. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or
special characters, or both. The port name is blank by default.
For information about assigning a port name, see the
“DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall
condition of the port. Service states appear
in the format: Primary State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary State. For more
information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance
(ETSI)
ALS Mode (Client port only) Sets the ALS function
mode.
• Disabled (default)—ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outage or loss of
signal (LOS) occurs.
• Auto Restart: (OC-768/STM-256/OTU-3 only) ALS is on;
the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions
that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart—ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts
down when traffic outage or LOS occurs. However, the
laser must be manually restarted when conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test—Manually restarts the laser for
testing.
Reach (Display only) Displays the optical reach
distance of the port.
• Autoprovision—(trunk port only) The system
automatically provisions the reach.
• VSR—(client port only) The system provisions very short
reach (VSR) for the port.
Wavelength Provisions the wavelength for the port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T C-band spacing.
The wavelengths carried by the card are identified with
two asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths
appear with a dark grey background.
11-221
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G659 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder SONET, SDH, or Ethernet Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the SONET, SDH, or Ethernet line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET/SDH/Ethernet tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-69.
Squelch (Display only) Applicable only to
client port 1. When the termination mode is
set to transparent, squelch is enabled. For
section/line termination mode, AIS is
enabled.
For trunk port, squelch is disabled.
• Squelch
• AIS
• Disable
Note Both Squelch and AIS options are supported when the
selected Termination Mode is Transparent. If the
Termination Mode selected is Section or Line, then
only AIS is supported. This is applicable for
OC-192/STM-64 and OC-768/STM-256.
For OTN payloads, both Squelch and AIS options are
supported.
Overclock Enables or disables overclock mode on
trunk port.
• OFF (default)
• ON
Rx Wavelength Provisions the wavelength of the trunk port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T C-band spacing.
The wavelengths carried by the card are identified with
two asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths
appear with a dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the SONET, SDH, or Ethernet line settings for
40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-68 Line Settings (continued)of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
11-222
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note In Table 11-69, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all 40G multirate transponder cards.
If a tab does not apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Table 11-69 SONET, SDH Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number.
• 1 (OC-768)
• 1 (40G Ethernet LAN Phy)
• 1 (OTU3)
• 1 (STM-256)
• 1 (40G Ethernet LAN
Phy)
• 1 (OTU3)
SF BER (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI]
only) Sets the signal fail bit error
rate.
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI]
only) Sets the signal degrade bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
ProvidesSync (OC-768/STM-256 only) Sets the
ProvidesSync card parameter. If
checked, the card is provisioned as
a network element (NE) timing
reference.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgIn (OC-768/STM-256 only) Sets the
EnableSync card parameter.
Enables synchronization status
messages (S1 byte), which allow
the node to choose the best timing
source.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Admin SSM
In
Overrides the synchronization
status message (SSM) and the
synchronization traceability
unknown (STU) value. If the node
does not receive an SSM signal, it
defaults to STU.
• PRS—Primary Reference Source
(Stratum 1)
• STU—Sync traceability unknown
• ST2—Stratum 2
• ST3—Stratum 3
• SMC—SONET minimum clock
• ST4—Stratum 4
• DUS—Do not use for timing
synchronization
• RES—Reserved; quality level set
by user
• G811—Primary reference
clock
• STU—Sync traceability
unknown
• G812T—Transit node clock
traceable
• G812L—Local node clock
traceable
• SETS—Synchronous
equipment
• DUS—Do not use for
timing synchronization
11-223
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Send
DoNotUse
(OC-768/STM-256 only) Sets the
Send DoNotUse card state. When
checked, sends a do not use (DUS)
message on the S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Type (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI]
only) Indicates the optical transport
type.
• SONET
• SDH
• SONET
• SDH
Termination
Mode
(OC-768/STM-256 only) Sets the
mode of operation.
Note This option is only
available for SONET/SDH
payloads.
• Transparent
• Section
• Line
• Transparent
• Regeneration Section
(RS)
• Multiplex Section (MS)
Table 11-70 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number.
• 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
• 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are
trunk ports that support
OC192 payload in a
single-card configuration.
These ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration (ADM-10G
peer group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM16/GE
)
• 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are
trunk ports that
support STM64
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the
specified port a name.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
User-defined. Name can be up
to 32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Table 11-69 SONET, SDH Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
11-224
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Admin State Sets the port service state. For more
information about administrative
states, see the Administrative and
Service States document.
• IS
• IS,AINS
• OOS,DSBLD
• OOS,MT
• Unlocked
• Unlocked,automaticInServic
e
• Locked,disabled
• Locked,maintenance
Service State (Display only) Identifies the
autonomously generated state that
gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the
format: Primary State-Primary
State Qualifier, Secondary State.
For more information about service
states, see the Administrative and
Service States document.
• IS-NR
• OOS-AU,AINS
• OOS-MA,DSBLD
• OOS-MA,MT
• Unlocked-enabled
• Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• Locked-enabled,disabled
• Locked-enabled,maintenanc
e
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The
DWDM transmitter supports ALS
according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99).
ALS can be disabled, or it can be set
for one of three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off;
the laser is not automatically
shut down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the
laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS)
occur. However, the laser must
be manually restarted when
conditions that caused the
outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the laser for
testing.
• Disabled (default): ALS is
off; the laser is not
automatically shut down
when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Manual Restart: ALS is
on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must
be manually restarted
when conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the laser
for testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak
period. Double-click the time and
use the up and down arrows to
change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal,
in hh.mm format, after which
the card becomes in service
(IS) automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service state is
not supported on interlink
ports.
• Duration of valid input
signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service state
is not supported on
interlink ports.
Reach Displays the optical reach distance
of the client port.
The Reach options depend on the
traffic type that has been selected.
The Reach options depend on
the traffic type that has been
selected.
Table 11-70 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-225
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G660 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the line section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-71.
Purpose This task changes the line section trace settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-71 Section Trace Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1 (OC-768)
• 2 (OC-768)
• 1 (STM-256)
• 2 (STM-256)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
• Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If a TIM on Section overhead alarm is raised
because of a J0 overhead string mismatch,
no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
11-226
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click Default to restore default values.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G692 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder OTU Settings
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a
new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. In Transmit String Type, click
Hex Mode to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex Mode).The
supported range for 1 bit Hex TX trace is 20
to 7E. If TX trace is provisioned outside this
range, client transmits 00.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a
new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. In Expected String Type, click
Hex Mode to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex Mode).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received
string. You can click Refresh to manually
refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep
this panel updated.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Auto-refresh Refreshes the display automatically every 5
seconds, if checked.
Checked or unchecked
(default)
Checked or unchecked
(default)
Purpose This task changes the OTU settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C
transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-71 Section Trace Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-227
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C or
40ME-TXP-C card where you want to change the OTU settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > OTU tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-72.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-72 OTU Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number that is applicable only for
OC-192/STM-64 payloads.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
SyncMsgIn (Display only) (OC-768/STM-256
only) Sets the EnableSync card
parameter. Enables synchronization
status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best
timing source.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Admin SSM Overrides the synchronization status
message (SSM) and the
synchronization traceability
unknown (STU) value. If the node
does not receive an SSM signal, it
defaults to STU.
• PRS—Primary Reference
Source (Stratum 1)
• STU—Sync traceability
unknown
• ST2—Stratum 2
• ST3—Stratum 3
• SMC—SONET minimum
clock
• ST4—Stratum 4
• DUS—Do not use for
timing synchronization
• RES—Reserved; quality
level set by user
• G811—Primary reference
clock
• STU—Sync traceability
unknown
• G812T—Transit node clock
traceable
• G812L—Local node clock
traceable
• SETS—Synchronous
equipment
• DUS—Do not use for timing
synchronization
ProvidesSync (Display only) (OC-768/STM-256
only) Sets the ProvidesSync card
parameter. If checked, the card is
provisioned as a network element
(NE) timing reference.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
11-228
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G661 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 40G Ethernet WAN Phy
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-73.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings of 40E-TXP-C and
40ME-TXP-C transponder cards carrying SONET or SDH payloads,
including the physical 40G Ethernet WAN Phy payload.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-73 Line Threshold Settings for the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1 (OC-768)
• 2 (OC-768)
• 1 (STM-256)
• 2 (STM-256)
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-229
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
—
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Table 11-73 Line Threshold Settings for the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-230
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G663 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types area, verify that the TCA radio button is selected. If not, click it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-74, verify the trunk port (Port 2) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Press Enter,
then click Apply.
Step 5 Under Intervals area, select 15 Min or 1 Day, then click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Under Types area, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 8 Referring to Table 11-74, verify the trunk port (Port 2) alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Press Enter,
then click Apply.
Step 9 Under Intervals area, select 15 Min or 1 Day, then click Refresh.
Purpose This task provisions the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C trunk port alarm
and threshold cross alert (TCA) thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-74 Trunk Port TCA Thresholds of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Card
TCA RX Power
High (dbm)
TCA RX Power
Low (dbm)
TCA TX Power
High (dbm)
TCA TX Power
Low (dbm)
40E-TXP-C
40ME-TXP-C
–9.0 –22.0 9.0 0.0
11-231
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 10 Click Apply.
Step 11 Click Default to restore default values.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G664 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Under Types area, verify that the TCA radio button is selected. If not, click it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-76, verify the client port (Port 1) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing
value, and entering the new value. Press Enter, then click Apply.
Step 5 Under Intervals area, select 15 Min or 1 Day, then click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 11-75 Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Card
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
40E-TXP-C
40ME-TXP-C
–9.0 –22.0 9.0 0.0
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-232
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Under Types area, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 8 Referring to Table 11-77, provision the client port (Port 1) alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX
Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Step 9 Under Intervals area, select 15 Min or 1 Day, then click Refresh.
Step 10 Click Apply.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G665 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card
where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
ITU-T G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Table 11-76 Client Interface TCA Thresholds of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Pluggable Port
Rate
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
40G Ethernet LAN
Phy
3.0 –6.0 6.0 –3.0
OC-768/STM-256 3.0 –6.0 6.0 –3.0
OTU3 3.0 –6.0 6.0 –3.0
Table 11-77 Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Pluggable Port
Rate
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
40G Ethernet
LAN Phy
5.0 –8.0 4.0 –1.0
OC-768/STM-256 5.0 –8.0 4.0 –1.0
OTU3 5.0 –8.0 4.0 –1.0
Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and
40ME-TXP-C transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-233
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-78 through 11-81.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End, 15 Min and 1 Day, and SM and PM independently. To
do so, select the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-78 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 11-79 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 11-78 OTN Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
• 1 (only when data rate is set to
OTU3)
• 2
ITU-T G.709
OTN
(Display only) Displays the OTN lines
according to ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN line FEC mode. FEC mode
can be Standard or Enhanced. Standard is
the same as enabling FEC. Enhanced FEC
mode can be enabled to provide greater
range and lower bit error rate.
• Standard
Standard FEC is on.
• Enhanced
Enhanced FEC is on.
SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
11-234
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-79 ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
ES Severely errored seconds. Two types of
thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the
SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC,
overhead management, and PM using
OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button
selects path PM using ODUk.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709
optical channel transport unit
order of k overhead frame used
for management and performance
monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the
ITU-T G.709 optical channel data
unit order of k overhead frame
unit used for path performance
monitoring.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
11-235
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-80 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 11-81 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Table 11-79 ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Table 11-80 FEC Threshold Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
Bit Errors
Corrected
Displays the number of bit errors
corrected during the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or one-day intervals.
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Uncorrectable
Words
Displays the number of uncorrectable
words in the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or one-day intervals.
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
11-236
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click Default to restore default settings.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-81 Trail Trace Identifier Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1 (OTU3)
• 2 (Trunk)
• 1 (OTU3)
• 2 (Trunk)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
• Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If a TIM on Section overhead alarm is raised
because of a J0 overhead string mismatch,
no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a
new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. In Transmit String Type, click
Hex Mode to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex Mode).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a
new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. In Transmit String Type, click
Hex Mode to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex Mode).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received
string. You can click Refresh to manually
refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep
this panel updated.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Auto-refresh Refreshes the display automatically every 5
seconds, if checked.
Checked or unchecked
(default)
Checked or unchecked
(default)
11-237
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the ADM-10G card
settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 To provision a peer group, complete the “DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group” task on
page 11-238.
Step 4 To provision Ethernet settings, complete the “DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet
Settings” task on page 11-239.
Step 5 To change line settings, complete the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings, page 11-240
• DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings, page 11-245
• DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads, page 11-247
• DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload,
page 11-251
Step 6 To change thresholds, complete the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-254
• DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-255
• DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings, page 11-256
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure creates an ADM-10G peer group and changes line settings,
PM parameters, and threshold settings for ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port, page 11-150 (if
necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-238
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group
Note You cannot perform this task on a single ADM-10G card; it is only available if a second ADM-10G card
can be accessed through the interlink ports (Port 17 and Port 18).
Note Due to a hardware limitation, you cannot provision the SDCC/LDCC on Port 17.
Note Perform this task on only one of the two peer cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 In the ADM Group Peer drop-down list, choose the slot number (for example, 14) where the companion
ADM-10G card is located.
Step 4 In the ADM Peer Group field, enter a group name.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Note The Card Parameters Tunable Wavelengths area is read-only and does not contain any
wavelengths until circuits are separately provisioned for the card.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task creates peer group protection for two ADM-10G cards within the
same node, located on the same shelf.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69, for
two ADM-10G cards (located on the same shelf) for which a peer group is
desired.
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-239
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the Ethernet settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ethernet tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Ethernet tab as described in Table 11-82. The parameters that appear
depend on the card mode.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the Ethernet settings for the ADM-10G card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-82 ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) The Port number (n-n) and
rate.
—
MTU The maximum size of the Ethernet frames
accepted by the port.
Jumbo. Default: 64 to 9216
Numeric: 1548
Mode Sets the Ethernet mode. 1000 Mbps
Framing Sets the framing type. • GFP-F
• HDLC
CRC Encap Sets the CRC encap values for the framing
type.
CRC encap value for GFP-F:
• None (default)
• 32-Bit
CRC encap value for HDLC:
• 16-Bit
• 32-Bit (default)
AINS Soak Automatic in-service soak time. The duration
of time that must pass with an uninterrupted
signal before the traffic/termination
transitions to the IS-NR (ANSI) or
unlocked-enabled (ETSI) service state.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after
which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
11-240
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-83 as needed.
Note In Table 11-83, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all ADM-10G cards. If a tab does
not apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the line settings for ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-241
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-83 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port (Display only) Displays
the port number.
• 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
• 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support OC192
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM16/G
E)
• 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support STM64
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
Port Name Provides the ability to
assign the specified port
a name.
User-defined. Name can be
up to
32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
User-defined. Name can be
up to
32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin
State
Sets the port service
state. For more
information about
administrative states,
see the Administrative
and Service States
document.
• IS
• IS,AINS
• OOS,DSBLD
• OOS,MT
• Unlocked
• Unlocked,automaticInServ
ice
• Locked,disabled
• Locked,maintenance
11-242
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Service
State
(Display only)
Identifies the
autonomously
generated state that
gives the overall
condition of the port.
Service states appear in
the format: Primary
State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more
information about
service states, see the
Administrative and
Service States
document.
• IS-NR
• OOS-AU,AINS
• OOS-MA,DSBLD
• OOS-MA,MT
• Unlocked-enabled
• Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• Locked-enabled,disabled
• Locked-enabled,maintenan
ce
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function
mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports
ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99).
ALS can be disabled, or
it can be set for one of
three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS
is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down
when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: (Not
applicable for Gigabit
Ethernet client
interfaces) ALS is on;
the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts
when the conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is
on; the laser
automatically shuts
down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must
be manually restarted
when conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
• Disabled (default): ALS
is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down
when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: (Not
applicable for Gigabit
Ethernet client
interfaces) ALS is on;
the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts
when the conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is
on; the laser
automatically shuts
down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must
be manually restarted
when conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
Table 11-83 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
11-243
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET or SDH tabs.
Step 6 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-84 as needed.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic
in-service soak period.
Double-click the time
and use the up and down
arrows to change
settings.
• Duration of valid input
signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service
state is not supported
on interlink ports.
• Duration of valid input
signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service
state is not supported
on interlink ports.
Reach Displays the optical
reach distance of the
client port.
The Reach options depend on
the traffic type that has been
selected.
The Reach options depend on
the traffic type that has been
selected.
Wavelength Tunable wavelength. Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port
after the card is installed in
the format: first
wavelength-last
wavelength-frequency
spacing-number of supported
wavelengths. For example,
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50g
Hz-8 are supported
wavelengths.
Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port
after the card is installed in
the format: first
wavelength-last
wavelength-frequency
spacing-number of supported
wavelengths. For example,
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50g
Hz-8 are supported
wavelengths.
Table 11-83 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
11-244
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-84 ADM-10G Line SONET or SDH Tab Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port (Display only) Displays
the client and trunk port
number.
• 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
• 17-1 (OC192)
• 18-1 (OC192/Interlink)
• 19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support OC192
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM16/G
E)
• 17-1(STM64)
• 18-1 (STM64/Interlink)
• 19-1 (STM64)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support STM64
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
ProvidesSync When checked, the card is
provisioned as an NE
timing reference.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgIn Enables synchronization
status messages (S1 byte),
which allow the node to
choose the best timing
source.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
SF BER Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
Send
DoNotUse
When checked, sends a
DUS message on the S1
byte.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
11-245
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings Note The Section Trace tab is available for ports configured as OC-N (Ports 1 through 16, Ports 17 and 18
[only in a single-card configuration] and Port 19). Section trace is not available on interlink ports.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the section trace settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-85.
Type (Display only) Type of
node.
• SONET
• SDH
• SDH
Admin SSM
In
Overrides the
synchronization status
message (SSM)
synchronization
traceability unknown
(STU) value. If the node
does not receive an SSM
signal, it defaults to STU.
• PRS—Primary Reference
Source (Stratum 1)
• ST2—Stratum 2
• TNC—Transit node clock
• ST3E—Stratum 3E
• ST3—Stratum 3
• SMC—SONET minimum
clock
• ST4—Stratum 4
• DUS—Do not use for
timing synchronization
• RES—Reserved; quality
level set by user
• G811—Primary reference
clock
• STU—Sync traceability
unknown
• G812T—Transit node clock
traceable
• G812L—Local node clock
traceable
• SETS—Synchronous
equipment
• DUS—Do not use for
timing synchronization
Purpose This task changes the line section trace settings for the ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-84 ADM-10G Line SONET or SDH Tab Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
11-246
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-85 ADM-10G Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/G
E)
• 17-1 (OC 192)
• 18-1 (OC192)
• 19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port
18 are trunk ports
that support
OC192 payload in
a single-card
configuration.
These ports are
interlink ports in a
double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM1
6/GE)
• 17-1 (STM64)
• 18-1 (STM64)
• 19-1 (STM64)
Note Port 17 and Port
18 are trunk ports
that support
STM64 payload
in a single-card
configuration.
These ports are
interlink ports in a
double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
Received
Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
• Off/None
• Manual
Transmit
Section
Trace
String
Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 64 byte
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 64 byte
Current Current Transmit String
displays the current
transmit string; New
Transmit String sets a
new transmit string.
Current String Type
allows you to choose
between ASCII or
Hexadecimal format.
Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal
(button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to
change the display to
ASCII (button changes to
Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
11-247
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the line threshold settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET or SDH Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-86.
Received (Display only) Current
Received String displays
the current received
string. You can click
Refresh to manually
refresh this display, or
check the Auto-refresh
every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Auto-refr
esh
If checked, automatically
refreshes the display
every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked
(default)
Checked/unchecked
(default)
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for ADM-10G cards carrying
SONET payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-85 ADM-10G Section Trace Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
11-248
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-86 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
• 17-1 (OC 192)
• 18-1 (OC192)
• 19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support OC192
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM16/GE)
• 17-1 (STM 64)
• 18-1 (STM64)
• 19-1 (STM64)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are
trunk ports that support
STM64 payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink ports
in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer group).
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section
or Regeneration Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
11-249
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section
or Regeneration Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
FC (Line Section only)
Failure count
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
Table 11-86 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-250
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
PSC Protection Switching
Count
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
PSD Protection Switching
Duration
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
UAS (Line Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Table 11-86 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-251
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload
Note This task can only be performed if the ADM-10G card has at least one PPM port provisioned for Gigabit
Ethernet.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the line RMON thresholds. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose the applicable Ethernet variable. See Table 11-87 for a list of
available Ethernet variables.
Purpose This task changes the line RMON threshold settings for an ADM-10G card
carrying the 1G Ethernet payload.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port, page 11-150
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-87 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds
Variable Description
ifInOctets Total number of octets received on the interface, including
framing characters.
ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing
them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
ifOutOctets Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.
ifInMulticastPkts Number of multicast frames received error-free.
ifInBroadcastPkts Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to a higher layer or
sublayer, that were addressed to a broadcast address at this
sublayer.
ifInErrorBytePkts Number of receive error bytes.
dot3StatsFCSErrors Number of frames with frame check errors; that is, there is an
integral number of octets, but there is also an incorrect frame
check sequence (FCS).
dot3StatsFrameTooLong Number of received frames that were larger than the permitted
maximum size.
11-252
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
dot3ControlInUnknownOpcodes A count of MAC control frames received on this interface that
contain an opcode not supported by this device.
dot3InPauseFrames A count of MAC control frames received on this interface with an
opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
dot3OutPauseFrames A count of MAC control frames transmitted on this interface with
an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
etherStatsUndersizePkts Total number of packets received that were well-formed and less
than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits and including FCS
octets).
etherStatsFragments Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had
either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or
a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (alignment error).
Note It is normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is
because it counts both runts (which are normal
occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
etherStatsPkts64Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were 64 octets in length (excluding
framing bits and including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 65 and 127 octets in
length, inclusive.
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were between 128 and 255
octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including
FCS octets.
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 256 and 511 octets in
length, inclusive.
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 512 and 1023 octets
in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS
octets.
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 1024 and 1518 octets
in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS
octets.
etherStatsBroadcastPkts Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were directed to the broadcast address.
Note Multicast packets are not included.
Table 11-87 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds (continued)
11-253
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
etherStatsMulticastPkts Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were directed to a multicast address.
Note This number does not include packets directed to the
broadcast address.
etherStatsOversizePkts Total number of packets transmitted and received by the interface
that were well-formed and longer than 1518 octets, excluding
framing bits and including FCS octets.
etherStatsJabbers Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets), and had
a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or a bad
FCS with a non-integral number of octets (alignment error).
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmit packets.
Table 11-87 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds (continued)
11-254
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the interlink or trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-88, verify the interlink or trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX
Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking
the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 11-89, verify the interlink or trunk port alarm thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by
double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing
Enter.
Purpose This task provisions the ADM-10G interlink or trunk port alarm and
threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-88 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Port
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
17-1 and 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
–7.0 dBm –27.0 dBm 6.0 dBm –4.0 dBm
19-1 (Trunk) –7.0 dBm –27.0 dBm 6.0 dBm –4.0 dBm
11-255
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-47 on page 11-185 and Table 11-48 on page 11-186, verify the Port 1 to 16
(Client) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low
based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking
the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter.
Table 11-89 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Port
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 17 is a trunk port in single-card
configuration and an interlink port in
double-card configuration (ADM-10G
peer group).
1.0 dBm –13.0 dBm 1.0 dBm –8.0 dBm
18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card
configuration and an interlink port in
double-card configuration (ADM-10G
peer group).
–5.0 dBm –30.0 dBm 5.0 dBm –3.0 dBm
19-1 (Trunk) –5.0 dBm –30.0 dBm 5.0 dBm –3.0 dBm
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
ADM-10G card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-256
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 11-47 and Table 11-48 on page 11-186, verify the interlink ports 17-1 and 18-1 for
RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low settings. Provision new thresholds
as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value,
and pressing Enter.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
ITU-T G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-90 through 11-93.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio buttons and click Refresh.
Table 11-90 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings for the ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-257
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-91 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > ITU-T G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 11-90 ADM-10G Card OTN Lines Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
ITU-TG.709
OTN
Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode
can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the
TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can
be enabled to provide greater range and
lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E
cards, Standard is the same as enabling
FEC.
• Disable—FEC is off.
• Standard—Standard FEC is on.
• Enhanced—Enhanced FEC is on.
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
SF BER (Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
Synch
Mapping
Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is
mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
Synch mapping
11-258
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-91 ADM-10G Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
ES Errored seconds. Selecting the SM
(OTUk) radio button selects FEC,
overhead management, and PM using
OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button
selects path PM using ODUk.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709
optical channel transport unit
order of k overhead frame used
for management and performance
monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the
ITU-T G.709 optical channel data
unit order of k overhead frame
unit used for path performance
monitoring.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-259
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-92 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 11-93 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 11-91 ADM-10G Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 11-92 ADM-10G Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
Bit Errors
Corrected
Displays the number of bit errors
corrected during the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or 1 day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Displays the number of uncorrectable
words in the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or 1 day intervals.
11-260
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-93 ADM-10GTrail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. • 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on
Section/Path overhead alarm arises
because of a J0/J1 overhead string
mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication
(FDI) signal is sent to the downstream
nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Transmit Current Transmit String displays the
current transmit string; New sets a new
transmit string. You can click the button
on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display
mode. In Transmit String Type, click Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex).
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Expected Current Expected String displays the
current expected string; New sets a new
expected string. You can click the button
on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display
mode. In Expected String Type, click Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Current Received String
displays the current received string. You
can click Refresh to manually refresh this
display, or check the Auto-refresh every
5 sec check box to keep this panel
updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh
(every 5 sec)
If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked (default)
11-261
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card
settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings, page 11-262
• DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings, page 11-264
• DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 11-266
• DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings, page 11-268
• DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings, page 11-271
• DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-273
• DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-275
• DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings, page 11-277
• DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 11-269
Step 4 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69.
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-262
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-94.
Note Parameters shown in Table 11-94 do not apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder cards. If the parameter
or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the card settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards, including payload type,
termination mode, and wavelength.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-263
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-94 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Settings
Parameter Description Options
Termination
Mode
Sets the mode of operation. Options that
do not apply to a card do not display.
The MXP_2.5G_10G card is based on
SONET/SDH multiplexing. The
transparent mode terminates and rebuilds
the B1 byte (as well as other bytes) of the
incoming OC-48/STM-16 signal. The B2
byte is not touched.
The MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L,
and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards are fully
transparent in transparent mode based on
the OTN/ITU-T G.709 multiplexing
scheme. It does not terminate the B1 byte
or other bytes.
It encapsulates OC-48/STM-16 bytes into
ODU1 first, then multiplexes them into an
OTU2.
For ANSI platforms:
• Transparent
• Section (MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only)
• Line (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
For ETSI platforms:
• Transparent
• Multiplex Section (MXP_2.5G_10G,
only)
• Regeneration Section
(MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only)
AIS/Squelch (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only) Sets the
transparent termination mode
configuration.
• Ais
• Squelch
Tunable
Wavelengths
(Display only) Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port after the
card is installed. For the
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or
MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards, the first and
last supported wavelength, frequency
spacing, and number of supported
wavelengths are shown in the format: first
wavelength-last wavelength-frequency
spacing-number of supported
wavelengths. For example, the
MXP_2.5G_10E_C card would show:
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. The
MXP_2.5G_10G and MXP_2.5G_10E
show the four wavelengths supported by
the card that is installed.
—
11-264
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Note The SONET tab appears only if you have created a PPM for a given port.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-95.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the line settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-95 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. Ports 1 to 4 are client
ports (OC-48/STM-16). Port 5 is the DWDM trunk
(OC-192/STM-64) that provides wavelength
services. Client ports will not appear of the
pluggable port module is not provisioned for it.
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (Trunk) (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
logical name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
11-265
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more information about service states,
see the Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can
be set for one of three mode options.
• Disable (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually restarted
when conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Type Sets the optical transport type. • SONET
• SDH
SyncMsgIn Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte),
which allow the node to choose the best timing
source. (This parameter does not appear for the
MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.)
Checked or unchecked
Table 11-95 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-266
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Note The Section Trace tab appears only if you have created a PPM for the card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the section trace settings.
ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked,
the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
(This parameter does not appear for the
MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.)
Checked or unchecked
Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the client
port.
Options: ANSI/ETSI
• Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default)
• SR
• SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance
• IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km
distance
• IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km distance
• LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
• LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
• LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 850 nm through 1560.61 nm
100-GHz ITU spacing CWDM spacing
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-95 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-267
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-96.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Table 11-96 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (Trunk; MXP_2.5G_10G only)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm
arises because of a J0 overhead string
mismatch, no alarm indication signal is
sent to downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. Select either
radio button.
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)
11-268
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings
Note This task does not apply to the MXP_2.5G_10G card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the
trunk settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Trunk tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-97.
Purpose This task provisions the trunk settings for the MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-97 MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. Port 5 is
the DWDM trunk (OC-192/STM-64) that provides
wavelength services.
5 (Trunk)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
logical name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task
on page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network conditions
prevent the change. For more information about
administrative states, see the Administrative and
Service States document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI)
11-269
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For
more information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644
(06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of
three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur. However, the laser must be
manually restarted when conditions that caused
the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
AINS Soak (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the
automatic in-service soak period.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-97 MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
11-270
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-98.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-98 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 5 (Trunk)
Band (Display only) Indicates the wavelength
band available from the card that is
installed. If the card is preprovisioned,
the field can be provisioned to the band of
the card that will be installed.
• C—The C-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
• L—The L-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. (This field
does not apply to MXP_2.5G_10G or
MXP_2.5G_10E cards.)
• Even—Displays even C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
• Odd—Displays odd C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T C-band or L-band spacing,
depending on the card that is
installed. For MXP_2.5G_10G and
MXP_2.5G_10E cards, the
wavelengths carried by the card are
identified with two asterisks. If the
card is not installed, all wavelengths
appear with a dark grey background.
11-271
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-99.
Note In Table 11-99, some parameter tabs or selections do not always apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder
cards. If the tabs or selections do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) line threshold
settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-99 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-272
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
Table 11-99 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
11-273
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C trunk
port alarm and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Table 11-99 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
11-274
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Select TCA (if not already selected), a 15 Min or 1 Day PM interval radio button and then click Refresh.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-100, verify the trunk port (Port 5) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 11-101, verify the trunk port (Port 5) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by
double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-100 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Card
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
MXP_2.5G_10G –8 dBm –18 dBm 7 dBm –1 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E –9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_C –9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_L –9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10EX_
C
–9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
11-275
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 11-102, verify the client Port N (where N = 1 through 4) TCA thresholds for RX
Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the
other end. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to
change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Table 11-101 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Card
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
MXP_2.5G_10G –8 dBm –20 dBm 4 dBm 2 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E –8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_C –8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_L –8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10EX_
C
–8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-276
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Step 4 Repeat Step 3 to provision each additional client port.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 11-103, verify the client Port N (where N = 1 through 4) Alarm thresholds for RX
Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is
provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to
change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to provision each additional client port.
Table 11-102 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –3 –18 3 –16
15454-SFP-OC48-IR 0 –18 6 –11
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –3 –18 3 –16
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 0 –18 6 –11
Table 11-103 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Client
Interfaces Alarm Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 0 –21 0 –13
15454-SFP-OC48-IR 3 –21 3 –8
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1 0 –21 0 –13
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 3 –21 3 –8
11-277
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the line OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
OTN G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-104 through 11-107.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and
SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-104 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Note In Table 11-104, some parameter tabs or values do not always apply to all MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. If the tabs or values do not
apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings for MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-104 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line OTN Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number.
5 (Trunk)
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
11-278
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-105 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN G.709 Thresholds tab.
FEC Sets the OTN line FEC mode. FEC
mode can be Disabled or Enabled.
With the MXP_2.5G_10E card,
Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) mode can be
enabled to provide greater range and
lower bit error rate. E-FEC applies
only to the MXP_2.5G_10E card.
• Enable—(MXP_2.5G_10G only)
FEC is on.
• Disable—FEC is off.
• Standard—(MXP_2.5G_10E only)
FEC is on.
• Enhanced—(MXP_2.5G_10E only)
Enhanced FEC is on.
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
Asynch/Synch
Mapping
(MXP_2.5G_10E only) The
MXP_2.5G_10E can perform
standard ODU multiplexing
according to ITU-T G.709. The card
uses this to aggregate the four OC-48
client signals.
• ODU Multiplex
Table 11-104 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line OTN Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-279
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-105 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number 5 (Trunk)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709
optical channel transport unit
order of k overhead frame used
for management and performance
monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the
ITU-T G.709 optical channel data
unit order of k overhead frame
unit used for path performance
monitoring.
SES Severely errored seconds. Two types of
thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the
SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC,
overhead management, and PM using
OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button
selects path PM using ODUk.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-280
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-106 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 11-107 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 11-105 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 11-106 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 5 (Trunk)
Bit Errors
Corrected
Displays the number of bit errors
corrected during the interval selected.
The interval can be set for 15 minutes or
one day.
Numeric
Uncorrectable
Words
Displays the number of uncorrectable
words during the interval selected. The
interval can be set for 15 minutes or one
day.
Numeric
11-281
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-107 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. The trail trace
identifier is applicable only to the trunk
interface, which handles ITU-T G.709
frames.
5 (Trunk)
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to
the downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec box to keep
this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)
11-282
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card
settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings, page 11-283
• DLP-G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings, page 11-285
• DLP-G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings,
page 11-287
• DLP-G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 11-289
• DLP-G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds, page 11-292
• DLP-G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON
Payloads, page 11-294
• DLP-G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-296
• DLP-G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-297
• DLP-G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 11-291
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see the
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management document.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-283
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM
provisioning.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in Table 11-108.
Purpose This task changes the client line settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-108 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 1
• 2
Port Name The user can assign a logical name for
each of the ports shown by filling in this
field.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16.
Note You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber
channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards, which allows the MDS Fabric
Manager to create a link association between that SAN port
and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
Admin
State
Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states,
see the Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
11-284
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Service
State
Identifies the autonomously generated
state that gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information
about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically
shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: (MXP_MR_2.5G only) ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the
outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be
manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
Table 11-108 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-285
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the
client port.
The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list depend on the
card:
• Autoprovision—The system to automatically provision the
reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on
the hardware.
• SX—Short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable
for a maximum length of 550 meters. The operating
wavelength range is 770-860 nm.
• LX—Long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a
maximum length of 10 km. The operating wavelength range is
1270-1355 nm.
• CX—Two pairs of 150-ohm shielded twisted pair cable for a
maximum length of 25 meters.
• T—Four pairs of Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair cable
for a maximum length of 100 meters.
• DX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1430-1580 nm.
• HX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1280-1335 nm.
• ZX—Extended wavelength single-mode optical fiber for up to
100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.
• VX—Single mode up to 100 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1500-1580 nm.
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:850 nm through 1560.61 nm; 100-GHz
ITU spacing; CWDM spacing
Purpose This task changes the distance extension settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-108 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-286
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note Distance extension settings can be changed only if the facilities are out of service (OOS,DSBLD).
Note The distance extension parameters only apply to client ports (Ports 1 to 8) and not to the trunk ports
(Port 9 for MXP_MR_2.5G card or Ports 9 and 10 for the MXPP_MR_2.5G card).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the distance extension settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. A client port must be provisioned for the tab to be present.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Step 3 Locate the Client port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If yes, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the following
substeps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance
(ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Line > Distance Extension tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according
to PPM provisioning.
Step 5 Modify any of the settings for the Distance Extension tab as described in Table 11-109.
Table 11-109 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Distance Extension Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number • 1
• 2
Enable
Distance
Extension
Allows end-to-end distances of up to
1600 km for FC1G and up to 800 km for
FC2G. If Distance Extension is enabled,
set the connected Fibre Channel switches
to Interop or Open Fabric mode,
depending on the Fibre Channel switch.
By default, the MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G card will interoperate
with the Cisco Multilayer Director
Switch (MDS) storage products.
Checked or unchecked
Auto Detect
Credits
Allows automatic detection of buffer
credits for Fibre Channel flow control.
Checked or unchecked
11-287
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings
Note SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) settings apply only to the trunk ports (Port 9 for the MXP_MR_2.5G
card and Ports 9 and 10 for the MXPP_MR_2.5G card.)
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the OC-48/STM-64 settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameter selections vary
according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the SONET or SDH tab as described in Table 11-110.
Credits
Available
(Display only) Displays the number of
buffer credits available.
Numeric (range depends on the client
equipment attached to the card)
Autoadjust
GFP Buffer
Threshold
Allows the threshold of the generic
framing procedure (GFP) buffer between
two MXP_MR_2.5G or two
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards to be
automatically adjusted.
Checked or unchecked
GFP Buffers
Available
Displays the number of GFP buffers
available between two MXP_MR_2.5G
or two MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Numeric
Purpose This task changes the SONET (OC-48) or SDH (STM-16) settings for
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-109 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Distance Extension Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-288
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-110 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 9 (trunk for MXP_MR_2.5G) or 9 and 10 (trunks for
MXPP_MR_2.5G)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information about
service states, see the Administrative and Service
States document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER1 Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER1 Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or
can be set for one of three mode options.
• Disable (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS)
occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually restarted when
conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser
for testing.
11-289
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to
PPM provisioning.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Type The optical transport type. • SONET (ANSI)
• SDH (ETSI)
SyncMsgIn Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables
synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked
Send
DoNotUse
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When
checked, sends a DUS message on the S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked
ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If
checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing
reference.
Checked or unchecked
1. SF BER and SD BER thresholds apply only to trunk ports (Port 9 for MXP_MR_2.5G and Ports 9 and 10 for MXPP_MR_2.5G).
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-110 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line SONET or SDH Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-290
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Section Trace tab as described in Table 11-111.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-111 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 9 (trunk port for MXP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 and 10 (trunk ports for
MXPP_MR_2.5G)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the received trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to
change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to
Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to
change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to
Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. You can
click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. Checked/unchecked (default)
11-291
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-112.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_MR_2.5G
and MXPP_MR_2.5G.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-112 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 9 (Trunk)
10 (Trunk) (MXPP_MR_2.5G only)
Band (Display only) Indicates the wavelength
band that can be provisioned.
C—Only the C band is available
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning. This field does not apply to
MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G
cards
—
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T, C-band spacing. If the card is
installed, the wavelengths it carries
are identified with two asterisks.
Other wavelengths have a dark grey
background. If the card is not
installed, all wavelengths appear
with a dark grey background.
11-292
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as shown in Table 11-113.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note In Table 11-113, some parameters or options do not apply to all MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. If the parameters or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-113 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Threshold Settings
Field Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options
Port (Display only)
Port number
• 9 (MXP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 and 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 (MXP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 and 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
EB Path Errored
Block indicates
that one or
more bits are in
error within a
block
— Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
CV Coding
violations
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
—
11-293
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ES Errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
SES Severely
errored seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
BBE Background
block errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
SEFS (Section or
Regeneration
Section only)
Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
—
FC (Line or
Multiplex
Section only)
Failure count
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
—
UAS (Line or
Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Regeneration Section (only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Table 11-113 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Field Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options
11-294
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
Step 1 Display the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold
settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 11-114 for a list of available
Ethernet variables.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for MXP_MR_10G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying the 1G Ethernet or
1G FC/FICON payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-114 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR 2.5G Card 1G Ethernet or 1G, 2G FC/FICON Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInDiscards Number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded
even though no errors had been detected to prevent their
being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
ifOutDiscards Number of outbound packets that were chosen to be
discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent
their being transmitted.
11-295
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of high-level data link control (HDLC)
and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the maximum
transmission unit (MTU). This value is part of HDLC and
GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) errors when HDLC framing is
used.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSets Number of 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel
line side.
8b10bStatsEncodingDispErrors Number of 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel
line side.
Table 11-114 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR 2.5G Card 1G Ethernet or 1G, 2G FC/FICON Variables
(continued)
11-296
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Note Throughout this task, trunk port refers to Port 9 (MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G) and Port 10
(MXPP_MR_2.5G only).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 3 Verify the trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High is –9 dBm and for RX Power Low is –23 dBm.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 4 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Verify the trunk port Alarm thresholds for RX Power High is –7 dBm and for RX Power Low is –26 dBm.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G trunk port
alarm and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-297
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 11-115, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) TCA thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-298
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision each additional client port.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 11-116, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is
provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to
change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Table 11-115 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port
Module (XFP)
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA RX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–15 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ESCON ONS-SE-200-MM –21 –14 –32 –11
11-299
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision each additional client port. When you have finished provisioning client
ports, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-116 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port
Module (XFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
ESCON ONS-SE-200-MM –24 –11 –35 –8
11-300
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card
settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings, page 11-301
• DLP-G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings, page 11-303
• DLP-G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 11-305
• DLP-G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings,
page 11-306
• DLP-G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 11-308
• DLP-G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds, page 11-309
• DLP-G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON,
or ISC/ISC3 Payloads, page 11-311
• DLP-G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-314
• DLP-G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-315
• DLP-G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings, page 11-319
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see the
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management document.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-301
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to
change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM
provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in Table 11-117.
Purpose This task changes the line settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-117 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Client Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 1 through 8
Port Name The user can assign a logical name for each
of the ports shown by filling in this field.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16.
Note You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber
channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards,
which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link
association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a
Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
Admin
State
Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see
the Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Service
State
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall
condition of the port. Service states appear
in the format: Primary State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary State. For more
information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
11-302
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically
shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be
manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
Reach Sets the optical reach distance of the client
port.
The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list depend on the
card:
• Autoprovision—The system to automatically provision the
reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on
the hardware.
• SX—Short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable
for a maximum length of 550 meters. The operating
wavelength range is 770-860 nm.)
• LX—Long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a
maximum length of 10 km. The operating wavelength range is
1270-1355 nm.)
• CX—Two pairs of 150-ohm shielded twisted pair cable for a
maximum length of 25 meters.)
• T—Four pairs of Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair cable
for a maximum length of 100 meters.)
• DX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1430-1580 nm.)
• HX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1280-1335 nm.)
• ZX—Extended wavelength single-mode optical fiber for up to
100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.)
• VX—Single mode up to 100 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1500-1580 nm.)
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
850 nm through 1560.61 nm
100-GHz ITU spacing
CWDM spacing
Squelch Shuts down the far-end laser in response to
certain defects. (Squelch does not apply to
ISC COMPACT payloads.)
• Squelch
• Disable
Table 11-117 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-303
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
Note The distance extension parameters only apply to client ports (Ports 1 to 8) and not to the trunk port
(Port 9).
Note The client port must be in the OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) state in order to change
the distance extension settings. If a Y-cable is provisioned on the client port, both the working and
protect client ports must be in OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) state before you change
the distance extension settings.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to
change the distance extension settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Distance Extension tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-118.
Purpose This task changes the distance extension settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder card ports provisioned for Fibre
Channel or FICON payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-118 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Distance
Extension Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. Up to eight
ports might appear based on the number
of pluggable port modules that are
provisioned.
—
11-304
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Enable
Distance
Extension
Allows end-to-end distances of up to
1600 km for FC1G and up to 800 km for
FC2G. If Distance Extension is enabled,
set the connected Fibre Channel switches
to Interop or Open Fabric mode,
depending on the Fibre Channel switch.
By default, the MXP_MR_10DME_C
and MXP_MR_10DME_L card will
interoperate with the Cisco MDS storage
products.
Checked or unchecked
Fast Switch If unchecked, the end-to-end fiber
channel link is reinitialized every time a
Y-cable protection switch occurs. If
checked, reinitialization of the link is
avoided when a Y-cable protection switch
occurs, thus reducing the traffic hit
considerably.
This feature is supported for FC1G,
FC2G, FC4G, FICON1G, FICON2G, and
FICON4G trunk failures as well as
user-initiated Y-cable protection switch
such as, Manual, Force, or Lockout. It is
recommended that you do not enable the
Fast Switch option as the link may not
come up after a Y-cable protection switch
in certain cases.
Note This option can be used only if
you have unchecked Enable
Distance Extension option.
Checked or unchecked (default)
Table 11-118 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Distance
Extension Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-305
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the trunk wavelength
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Wavelength Trunk Settings tab as described in Table 11-119.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-119 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. Port 9 (Trunk)
Band Indicates the wavelength band that can be
provisioned. The field is display-only
when a physical MXP_MR_10DME_C or
MXP_MR_10DME_L is installed. If the
card is provisioned in CTC only, you can
provision the band for the card that will
be installed.
• C—The C-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
• L—The L-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning.
• Even—Displays even C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
• Odd—Displays odd C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU
spacing
11-306
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the SONET
(OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameter selections vary
according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-120.
Purpose This task changes the OC-192 (ANSI)/STM-64 (ETSI) settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-120 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 9 (Trunk)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information about
service states, see the Administrative and Service
States document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER1 Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
11-307
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
SD BER1 Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Type The optical transport type. • SONET (ANSI)
• SDH (ETSI)
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or
can be set for one of three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS)
occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually restarted when
conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser
for testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If
checked, the card is provisioned as a NE timing
reference.
Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgIn Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables
synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked
Send
DoNotUse
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When
checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on
the S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked
1. SF BER and SD BER thresholds apply only to trunk ports (Port 9 for MXP_MR_2.5G and Ports 9 and 10 for MXPP_MR_2.5G).
Table 11-120 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line SONET or SDH Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-308
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the section trace
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to
PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Section Trace tab as described in Table 11-121.
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C
and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-121 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 9 (trunk only)
Received
Trace Mode
Sets the received trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If a TIM on section overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change
the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change
the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click
Refresh to manually refresh this display, or select the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. Checked/unchecked (default)
11-309
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the line threshold
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as shown in Table 11-122.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note In Table 11-122, some parameters and options do not apply to all MXP_MR_10DME cards. If
the parameter or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-122 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 9 (Trunk) • 9 (Trunk)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-310
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 11-122 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
11-311
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 Payloads
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), display the MXP_MR_10DME_C or
MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port, either the payload port, for example “1-1
(ONE_GE)”, or the equivalent ITU-T G.7041 GFP (Generic Frame Procedure) port.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L cards carrying Ethernet, FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3
payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-122 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
11-312
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet, FC, FICON, or ISC variable. See Table 11-123
for a list of available Ethernet variables, Table 11-124 for a list of FC and FICON variables,
Table 11-125 for a list of ISC and ISC3 variables, and Table 11-126 for a list of GFP variables.
Table 11-123 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Ethernet Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This
value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC
errors when HDLC framing is used.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSu
m
Number of code violations/running disparity errors in the
8b/10b encoded characters received.
Table 11-124 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L FC/FICON Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
ifOutOversizePkts Total number of oversized packets output from the
interface.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This
value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.
11-313
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC
errors when HDLC framing is used.
fcStatsZeroTxCredits This is a count that increments when the FC/FICON Tx
credits go from a non-zero value to zero.
fcStatsRxRecvrReady Number of received RDY (Receive Ready) order set.
fcStatsTxRecvrReady Number of transmitted RDY (Receive Ready) order set.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSu
m
Number of Code Violations/Running Disparity errors in
the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
Table 11-125 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L ISC and ISC3Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSu
m
Number of Code Violations/Running Disparity errors in
the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
Table 11-126 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L GFP RMON Variables
Variable Description
gfpStatsRxSBitErrors Received generic framing protocol (GFP) frames with
single bit errors in the core header (these errors are
correctable).
gfpStatsRxTypeInvalid Received GFP frames with invalid type (these are
discarded). For example, receiving GFP frames that
contain Ethernet data when we expect Fibre Channel data.
gfpStatsRxSblkCRCErrors Total number of superblock CRC errors with the receive
transparent GFP frame. A transparent GFP frame has
multiple superblocks which each contain Fibre Channel
data.
gfpStatsCSFRaised Number of Rx client management frames with Client
Signal Fail indication.
gfpStatsLFDRaised The number of Core HEC CRC Multiple Bit Errors.
Note This count is only for cHEC multiple bit error
when in frame. It is a count of when the state
machine goes out of frame.
Table 11-124 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L FC/FICON Variables (continued)
Variable Description
11-314
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and
TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Purpose This task changes the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L
trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-315
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Verify the trunk port (Port 9) TCA thresholds are set at the values shown as follows. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and press Enter.
• RX Power High: –9 dBm
• RX Power Low: –18 dBm
• TX Power High: 9 dBm
• TX Power Low: 0 dBm
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify the trunk port (Port 9) Alarm thresholds are set at the values shown as follows. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and press Enter.
• RX Power High: –8 dBm
• RX Power Low: –20 dBm
• TX Power High: 7 dBm
• TX Power Low: 3 dBm
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
11-316
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the client port alarm
and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 11-127, verify the client ports (Ports 1 through 8) TCA thresholds for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-127 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –17 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –16
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –15 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –16
11-317
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision each additional client port.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 11-128, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is
provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to
change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –17 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –16
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –17 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –16
ISC3
PEER 1G
ISC3
PEER 2G
ONS-SE-G2F-SX 0 –17 3 –16
ONS-SE-G2F-LX 0 –20 3 –16
FC4G ONS-SE-4G-MM 0 –12 4 –15
ONS-SE-4G-SM –1 –15 4 –15
FICON4G ONS-SE-4G-MM 0 –12 4 –15
ONS-SE-4G-SM –1 –15 4 –15
Table 11-128 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
Table 11-127 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
11-318
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision each additional client port.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
ISC3
PEER 1G
ISC3
PEER 2G
ONS-SE-G2F-SX –20 3 –13 –1
ONS-SE-G2F-LX –23 0 –13 0
FC4G ONS-SE-4G-MM –15 3 –11 –1
ONS-SE-4G-SM –18 2 –11 0
FICON4G ONS-SE-4G-MM –15 3 –11 –1
ONS-SE-4G-SM –18 2 –11 0
Table 11-128 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds (continued)
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
11-319
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709
Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-129 through 11-132.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM independently. To
do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-129 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 11-130 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Purpose This task changes the OTN settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-129 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 9 (Trunk)
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines to forward error
correction (FEC).
• Standard
• Enhanced
SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Asynch/Synch
Mapping
Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is
mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
• Asynch mapping
• Synch mapping
11-320
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-131 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 11-132 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 11-130 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port1
1. Latency for a 1G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 4 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 40 microseconds. Latency
for a 2G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 2 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 20 microseconds. Consider these
values when planning a FC network that is sensitive to latency.
(Display only) Port number. 9 (Trunk)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
Table 11-131 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 2
Bit Errors
Corrected
Sets the value for bit errors corrected. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Sets the value for uncorrectable words. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Table 11-132 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 2
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
11-321
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to
the downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Table 11-132 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-322
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card
settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to save the existing settings
before modifying.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings, page 11-323
• DLP-G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings, page 11-324
• DLP-G667 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings, page 11-326
• DLP-G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 11-328
• DLP-G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds, page 11-331
• DLP-G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC
Payloads, page 11-333
• DLP-G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-337
• DLP-G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-338
• DLP-G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings, page 11-342
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see the
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management document.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and parameter threshold settings of the
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards,
page 14-69
• DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (Optional)
• DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (Optional)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-323
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify either of the settings described in Table 11-133.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the card settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-133 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Card Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Card Mode Sets the card mode. • Muxponder
• Unidirectional Regen
Set the mode to
Unidirectional Regen
under the following
conditions:
– Trunk port is in
OOS,DSBLD state.
– Pluggable port
modules of the card
must not be
configured for
payload.
– Regeneration peer
slot must be set to
None.
• Muxponder
• Unidirectional Regen
Set the mode to
Unidirectional Regen
under the following
conditions:
– Trunk port is in
locked,disabled
state.
– Pluggable port
modules of the card
must not be
configured for
payload.
– Regeneration peer
slot must be set to
None.
Trunk
Wavelengths
(Display only) Shows supported wavelengths
of the trunk port after the card is installed. The
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C card that is installed shows the
C-band wavelengths that it supports.
— —
11-324
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs. Tabs and parameters vary according to the PPM
provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-134.
Purpose This task changes the line settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-134 Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 1 through 4 (client)
• 5 (trunk)
Port Name Assigns a logical name for each of the port. User-defined. This can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special
characters, or both. The port name is blank by default.
For information about assigning a port name, see the
“DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16.
Note You can assign a port name for each fiber
channel/FICON interface on the 40G-MXP-C,
40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C card, enabling the
MDS Fabric Manager to associate the SAN port and a
SAN port on the Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information, see the Administrative and
Service States document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Shows the general condition
of the port. Service states appear in the
format: Primary State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary State. For more
information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance
(ETSI)
11-325
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ALS Mode (Client ports only) Activates the ALS
mode.
• Disabled (default)—ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outage or loss of
signal (LOS) occurs.
• Auto Restart—(OC-192/STM-64 only) ALS is on; the
laser automatically shuts down during LOS. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the
outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart—ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts
down when traffic outage or LOS occurs. However, the
laser must be manually restarted when conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test—Manually restarts the laser for
testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and
down arrows to the change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after
which the card status changes to in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Reach Sets the optical reach distance of the client
port.
• Autoprovision—The system automatically provisions the
reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value
on the hardware.
• EW
• LW
• SW
• LRM
• ER
• LR
• SR
• ZR
• IR 2
• LR 2
• DWDM
• CWDM40km
Wavelength Provisions the port wavelength. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band
spacing. The card wavelengths are marked by asterisks. If
the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a
dark grey background.
Table 11-134 Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
11-326
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G667 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the SONET (OC-192) or SDH (STM-64) settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameters vary according
to the PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-135.
Squelch Shuts down the far-end laser in response to
certain defects.
• Squelch
Note Squelch does not apply to ISC COMPACT payloads.
• Disable
Note Both Squelch and AIS options are supported when the
selected Termination Mode is Transparent. If the
Termination Mode selected is Section or Line, then
only AIS is supported. This is applicable for
OC-192/STM-64 and OC-768/STM-256.
For OTN payloads, both Squelch and AIS options are
supported.
Overclock (Trunk port only) Enables or disables
overclock mode on the trunk port.
• OFF (default)
• ON
Rx Wavelength (Trunk port only) Provisions the trunk port
wavelength.
• First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band
spacing. The card wavelengths are marked by asterisks. If
the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a
dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the SONET OC-192 or SDH STM-64 settings for the
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-134 Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
11-327
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-135 Line SONET or SDH Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 5 (Trunk)
Port Name Assigns a logical name assigned to a port. This
field is blank by default.
User-defined. This can be up to 32 alphanumeric or
special characters, or both. The port name is blank by
default.
For information about assigning a port name, see the
“DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
SF BER Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
ProvidesSync (Display only) Displays the ProvidesSync card
parameter state.
Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgIn Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables
synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked
Send
DoNotUse
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When
checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on
the S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked
Type Indicates the optical transport type. • SONET (ANSI)
• SDH (ETSI)
Termination
Mode
(Display-only for Standard Regeneration and
Enhanced FEC card configurations) Sets the
mode of operation.
• Transparent
• Section (ANSI) or Regeneration Section (RS)
(ETSI)
• Line (ANSI) or Multiplex Section (MS) (ETSI)
11-328
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to
the PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-136.
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings of the 40G-MXP-C,
40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-136 Line Section Trace Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number that is applicable only
for OC-192/STM-64 payloads.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
Received
Trace Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
Disables the alarm indication signal. • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays and sets the current transmit string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. In Transmit String
Type, click Hex Mode to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to
ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode). The supported range for 1
bit Hex TX trace is 20 to 7E. If TX trace is provisioned outside
this range, client transmits 00.
Transmit string size
11-329
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G691 Change the 40G Muxponder OTU Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the OTU settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > OTU tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to the PPM
provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-137.
Expected Displays and sets the current expected string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. In Expected String
Type, click Hex Mode to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to
ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode). The supported range for 1
bit Hex TX trace is 20 to 7E. If TX trace is provisioned outside
this range, client transmits 00.
Expected string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. Click
Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
Received string size
Auto-refresh Automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. • Checked
• Unchecked (default)
Purpose This task changes the OTU settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-136 Line Section Trace Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
11-330
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-137 OTU Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number that is applicable only for
OC-192/STM-64 payloads.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
SyncMsgIn (Display only) (OC-768/STM-256
only) Sets the EnableSync card
parameter. Enables synchronization
status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best
timing source.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Admin SSM Overrides the synchronization status
message (SSM) and the
synchronization traceability
unknown (STU) value. If the node
does not receive an SSM signal, it
defaults to STU.
• PRS—Primary Reference
Source (Stratum 1)
• STU—Sync traceability
unknown
• ST2—Stratum 2
• ST3—Stratum 3
• SMC—SONET minimum
clock
• ST4—Stratum 4
• DUS—Do not use for
timing synchronization
• RES—Reserved; quality
level set by user
• G811—Primary reference
clock
• STU—Sync traceability
unknown
• G812T—Transit node clock
traceable
• G812L—Local node clock
traceable
• SETS—Synchronous
equipment
• DUS—Do not use for timing
synchronization
ProvidesSync (Display only) (OC-768/STM-256
only) Sets the ProvidesSync card
parameter. If checked, the card is
provisioned as a network element
(NE) timing reference.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
11-331
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings shown in Table 11-138.
Note In Table 11-138, some parameters and options do not apply to all 40-G-MXP-C cards. If the
parameter or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings of the
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-138 Line Threshold Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Port
number.
Applicable for only
OC-192/STM-64
payloads.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
—
11-332
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
—
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Table 11-138 Line Threshold Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-333
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC Payloads
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), display the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the line threshold settings in the card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the payload port— for example “1-1 (TEN_GE)”, or the equivalent
ITU-T G.7041 GFP (Generic Frame Procedure) port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet or FC variable. See Table 11-139 for a list of
available Ethernet variables, Table 11-140 for a list of FC, and Table 11-140 for a list of GFP variables.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings of 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card carrying Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-139 Ethernet Variables of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
ifInUcastPkts Number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher
sub-layer, which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast
address at this sub-layer.
inInMulticastPkts Number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher
sub-layer, which were addressed to a multicast address at this
sub-layer. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group
and Functional addresses.
ifInBroadcastPkts Number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher
sub-layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this
sub-layer.
ifInErrors Total number of received errors.
ifOutOctets Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
11-334
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
dot3StatsFCSErrors Count of frames received on a particular interface that are an
integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) check.
dot3StatsFrameTooLong Count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed
the maximum permitted frame size.
dot3StatsInPauseFrames Count of frames received on this interface with an opcode
indicating the PAUSE operation.
dot3StatsOutPauseFrames Count of MAC control frames transmitted on this interface with
an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
etherStatsUndersizePkts Total number of packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing
bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
etherStatsFragments Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets
in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and
had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral
number of octets.
etherStatsPkts Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast
packets, and multicast packets) transmitted and received by the
interface.
etherStatsPkts64Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were 64 octets in length
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets Total number of packets (including error packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were between 65 and 127
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets Total number of packets (including error packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were between 128 and 255
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets Total number of packets (including error packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were between 256 and 511
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets Total number of packets (including error packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were between 512 and 1023
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
Table 11-139 Ethernet Variables of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Variable Description
11-335
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octet
s
Total number of packets (including error packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were between 1024 and 1518
octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
etherStatsBroadcastPkts Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were directed to the broadcast address.
etherStatsMulticastPkts Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were directed to a multicast address. Note that
this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast
address.
etherStatsOversizePkts Total number of packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing
bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
etherStatsJabbers Total number of packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing
bits, but including FCS octets), and were not an integral number
of octets in length or had a bad FCS.
etherStatsOctets Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets)
transmitted and received by the interface on the network
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Table 11-140 FC Variables of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
ifInErrors Total number of received errors.
ifOutOctets Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
ifOutErrors Number of outbound packets or transmission units that
could not be transmitted because of errors.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This
value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC
errors when HDLC framing is used.
Table 11-139 Ethernet Variables of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Variable Description
11-336
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, choose an alarm type. The alarm type indicates whether or not an
event is triggered by the type of threshold.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Enter the number of Sample Period occurrences.
Step 9 Enter the number of Rising Threshold occurrences.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesTooLong Total number of transmitted data frames that are less than
5 bytes. This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port
statistics.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesTruncated Number of transmitted data frames that exceed the MTU.
This value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
Table 11-141 GFP RMON Variables of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Variable Description
gfpStatsRxFrame Total number of received data frames.
gfpStatsTxFrame Total number of transmitted data frames.
gfpStatsRxSblkCRCErrors Total number of superblock CRC errors with the receive
transparent GFP frame. A transparent GFP frame has
multiple superblocks where each contains Fibre Channel
data.
gfpStatsRxOctets Total number of GFP data octets received.
gfpStatsTxOctets Total number of GFP data octets transmitted.
gfpStatsRxSBitErrors Received GFP frames with single bit errors in the core
header (these errors can be corrected).
gfpStatsRxMBitErrors Received GFP frames with multiple bit errors in the core
header (these errors cannot be corrected).
gfpStatsRxTypeInvalid Received GFP frames with invalid type (these are
discarded). For example, receiving GFP frames that
contain Ethernet data when we expect Fibre Channel data.
gfpStatsLFDRaised Count of core HEC CRC multiple bit errors.
Note This count is only of eHec multiple bit errors when
in frame. This can be looked at as a count of when
the state machine goes out of frame.
gfpRxCmfFrame —
gfpTxCmfFrame —
Table 11-140 FC Variables of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Variable Description
11-337
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
To trigger the alarm, the measured value of a threshold must always move from below the falling
threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network moves from below a rising threshold
of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds to 1001 collisions.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences for the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the exact opposite of a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above
the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded.
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, select the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Verify the trunk port (Port 5) TCA thresholds are set at the values shown as follows:
• Laser Bias High (%): 95.0
• RX Power High (dBm): –9.0
• RX Power Low (dBm): –22.0
• TX Power High (dBm): 9.0
Purpose This task changes the trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds of the
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-338
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• TX Power Low (dBm): 0.0
Provision new thresholds as needed by replacing the old values with new ones.
Step 5 Under Types area, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify the trunk port (Port 5) alarm thresholds are set at the values shown as follows:
• Laser Bias High (%): 98.0
• RX Power High (dBm): –8.0
• RX Power Low (dBm): –24.0
• TX Power High (dBm): 7.0
• TX Power Low (dBm): 3.0
Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Referring to Table 11-142, verify the client ports (Ports 1 through 4) TCA thresholds for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Provision new thresholds as needed by replacing the old values with new ones.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds of the
40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-339
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, select the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Table 11-142 Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C
Cards
PPM Port Rate
Pluggable Port Module1
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
FC8G ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM –9 –22 9.0 0.0
FC10G ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 2.0 –15.8 8.0 –7.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 1.0 –14.0 5.0 –12.0
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM 0.0 0.0 6.0 –6.0
10GE ONS-XC-10G-30.3
through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-SR-M
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 2.0 –15.8 8.0 –7.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –7.0 –24.0 6.5 –2.5
11-340
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision the additional client ports.
Step 7 Under Types area, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 8 Referring to Table 11-143, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is
provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
OC-192 ONS-XC-10G-30.3
through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –9.0 –26.0 8.0 –8.0
ONS-XC-10G-S1 –1.0 –11.0 5.0 –12.0
OTU2 ONS-XC-10G-30.3
through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-L2
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
1. In CTC, SFPs, and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). For more information about SFPs and XFPs, see the
“11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on page 11-142.
Table 11-142 Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C
Cards
PPM Port Rate
Pluggable Port Module1
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
11-341
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-143 Client Interface Alarm Thresholds of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C
Cards
PPM Port Rate
Pluggable Port Module1
(XFP)
1. In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). For more information about SFPs and XFPs, see the
“11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on page 11-142.
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
FC8G ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
FC10G ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 4.5 –18.3 4.5 –3.5
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –4.5 –26.5 6.5 –2.5
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM 2.0 –2.0 2.0 –2.0
10GE ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-S1
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 4.5 –18.3 4.5 –3.5
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –4.5 –26.5 6.5 –2.5
OC-192 ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –7.0 –28.0 4.0 –4.0
ONS-XC-10G-S1 –1.0 –13.0 1.0 –8.0
OTU2 ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-S1
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-L2
ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
11-342
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision additional client ports.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C, or
40E-MXP-C card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
ITU-T G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-144 through 11-147.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End, 15 Min and 1 Day, and SM and PM independently. To
do so, select the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-144 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Purpose This task changes the OTN settings for the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and
40ME-MXP-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-144 OTN Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with
OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
ITU-T G.709
Thresholds
Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines to forward error
correction (FEC).
• Standard
• Enhanced
11-343
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-145 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Table 11-144 OTN Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Table 11-145 ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C
Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the
port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and
ports with OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select the radio button individually and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default values.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select the radio button individually and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select the radio button individually and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select the radio button individually and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select radio button individually and
click Refresh.
11-344
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-146 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 11-147 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 11-146 FEC Threshold Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with
OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
Bit Errors
Corrected
Sets the value for bit errors corrected. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Sets the value for uncorrectable words. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Table 11-147 Trail Trace Identifier Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with
OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
Disables alarm indication signal. • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays and sets the current transmit
string.
You can click the button on the right to
change the display. Its title changes,
based on the current display mode. In
Transmit String Type, click Hex Mode to
change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex Mode).
Transmit string size
11-345
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the channel group
settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Expected Displays and sets the current expected
string.
You can click the button on the right to
change the display. Its title changes,
based on the current display mode. In
Expected String Type, click Hex Mode to
change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex Mode).
Expected string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. Click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box
to keep this panel updated.
Received string size
Auto-refresh Refreshes the display automatically every
5 seconds.
• Checked
• Unchecked (default)
Purpose This procedure changes the channel group settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards,
page 14-69
• “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-147 Trail Trace Identifier Settings of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards
Parameter Description Options
11-346
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC, page 11-346
• DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC, page 11-347
• DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC, page 11-351
• DLP-G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC, page 11-352
• DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC, page 11-353
• DLP-G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
Cards Using CTC, page 11-354
• DLP-G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC, page 11-355
• DLP-G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC, page 11-355
• DLP-G619 Create a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI
• DLP-G620 Add Ports to a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI
Step 3 Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC
Note You can create up to 11 channel groups on the GE_XP and GE_XPE cards and up to 2 channel groups
on the 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards. You can create a channel group with ports only when the ports
do not have any UNI QinQ settings or NNI SVLAN settings. Otherwise, the channel group will be
created with empty ports.
For information about interaction of LACP with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol
Compatibility list” section on page 11-62.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to create a channel group. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed according to the
requirements specified in Table 14-7 on page 14-109.
Purpose This task creates a channel group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-347
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 3 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 4 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 5 Click Create. The Channel Group Creation dialog box appears.
Step 6 Enter the name of the channel group in the Name field.
Step 7 From the Stand Alone list, choose the ports that will belong to this channel group and click the right
arrow button to move the selected ports to the Bundled list.
Step 8 From the LACP Mode drop-down list, choose the LACP mode as needed:
• On—Default mode. In this mode, the ports will not exchange LACP packets with the partner ports.
• Active—In this mode, the ports will send LACP packets at regular intervals to the partner ports.
• Passive—In this mode, the ports will not send LACP packets until the partner ports send LACP
packets. After receiving the LACP packets from the partner ports, the ports will send LACP packets.
Step 9 From the LACP Hashing drop-down list, select the LACP hashing algorithm that the protocol uses to
perform the load balancing task between the bundled ports.
The following hashing algorithms are supported:
• Ucast SA VLAN Incoming Port
• Ucast DA VLAN Incoming Port
• Ucast SA DA VLAN Incoming port
• Ucast Src IP TCP UDP
• Ucast Dst IP TCP UDP
• Ucast Src Dst IP TCP UDP
Step 10 Click Create.
A new row is added in the LACP table and all the other parameters in the channel group are set to default
values. The default values of these parameters are taken from the first port that is attached to the channel
group.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC
Purpose This task modifies the parameters of the channel group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-348
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note Ports cannot be added or removed using this procedure. For adding or removing the ports, see the
“DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC” task on
page 11-351.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task the node where you want to modify the parameters of the
channel group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to modify the parameters of the channel group.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 4 Choose a channel group from the existing channel groups.
Step 5 Modify the channel group settings as described in Table 11-148.
Table 11-148 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options
Channel Group (Display only) ID and name of the channel group. N.A.
Name Sets the name of the channel group. —
Ports (Display only) Port number (n-n) and rate (GE or
TEN_GE of the channel group).
N.A.
LACP Mode Sets the LACP mode. The channel group must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• On
• Active
• Passive
Hashing Sets the LACP hashing algorithm. The channel
group must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• Ucast SA VLAN
Incoming Port
• Ucast DA VLAN
Incoming Port
• Ucast SA DA VLAN
Incoming port
• Ucast Src IP TCP
UDP
• Ucast Dst IP TCP
UDP
• Ucast Src Dst IP
TCP UDP
Admin State Sets the administrative state on the channel group. • IS
• OOS, DSBLD
Service State (Display only) Sets the service state that indicates
the operational state of the channel group.
• IS-NR
• OOS-MA, DSBLD
11-349
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MTU Sets the maximum transfer unit (MTU), which sets
the maximum number of bytes per frame accepted
on the port. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state. The default MTU value
in the channel group is taken from the default
settings in the node.
Numeric. Default: 9700
Range: 64 to 9700
Mode Sets the provisional port mode. If the port mode is
Auto, the Expected Speed field determines which
ports can belong to the bundle. The member ports
must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• Auto
• 1000 Mbps
Expected Speed Sets the expected speed of ports of the channel
group. The channel group must be in OOS-DSBLD
admin state.
• 10 Mbps
• 100 Mbps
• 1000 Mbps
Duplex (Display only) Expected duplex capability of ports
of the channel group.
• Full
Committed Info
Rate
Sets the guaranteed information rate as per the service
provider service-level agreement. The channel group
must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
Numeric. Default: 100
Range: 0 to 100%
Committed
Burst Size
Sets the maximum number of bits transferred per
second. The channel group must be in OOS-DSBLD
admin state.
• 4k (default)
• 8k
• 16k
• 32k
• 64k
• 128k
• 256k
• 512k
• 1M
• 2M
• 4M
• 8M
• 16M
Table 11-148 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options
11-350
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Excess Burst
Size
Sets the maximum number of bits credited for later
transfer if the committed burst rate cannot be
transmitted. The channel group must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• 4k (default)
• 8k
• 16k
• 32k
• 64k
• 128k
• 256k
• 512k
• 1M
• 2M
• 4M
• 8M
• 16M
NIM Sets the network interface mode (NIM) for the
channel group. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
The channel group NIM is set to UNI or NNI based
on the mode of the first port that is added to the
channel group.
• UNI Mode
(Default)—provisions
the port as a
User-Network
Interface (UNI). This
is the interface that
faces the subscriber.
• NNI
Mode—provisions
the port as a
Network-to-Network
Interface (NNI). This
is the interface that
faces the service
provider network.
Ingress CoS Provisions the IEEE 802.1p ingress class of service
(CoS). Ingress CoS is used to set the priority of the
Ethernet frame in the service provider network. The
member ports must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• 0
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 7
• Trust
• CVLAN
• DSCP
Table 11-148 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options
11-351
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note When you set the Committed Info Rate above 40% on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, the Committed
Burst Size and Excess Burst Size must be set to at least 32K. The Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst
Size can be increased based on the packet size and Committed Info Rate value.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC
Inner Ethertype
(Hex)
Defines the inner Ethertype field. The Ethertype
field indicates which protocol is being transported
in an Ethernet frame. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state to modify the Inner
Ethertype value to a non-default value.
Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE Std
802.1Q customer VLAN
tag type)
Range: 0x600 to 0xffff.
Outer Ethertype
(Hex)
Defines the outer Ethertype field. The Ethertype
field identifies which protocol is being transported
in an Ethernet frame. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE
standard 802.1Q service
provider VLAN tag type)
Range: 0x600 to 0xffff
MAC Learning Enables or disables MAC learning for the port on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
cards. MAC learning is used by Layer 2 switches to
learn the MAC addresses of network nodes so that
the Layer 2 switches send traffic to the right
location. In GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE cards, enable
MAC address learning per SVLAN.
• Checked—MAC
learning is enabled
for this port.
• Unchecked—(Default)
MAC learning is
disabled for this port.
Table 11-148 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options
Purpose This task adds or removes ports to or from an existing channel group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-352
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
• You can assign up to eight ports to a channel group on GE_XP and GE_XPE cards and up to three
ports on the 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards.
• You can assign the ports to a channel group only if the ports are in OOS-DSBLD admin state. The
ports must not have any UNI QinQ rule or NNI SVLAN configuration.
• If the channel group is configured in UNI mode, only the UNI ports can be added to the channel
group. If the channel group is configured in NNI mode, only the NNI ports can be added to the
channel group.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want add ports to an existing channel
group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to add ports to an existing channel group.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 4 Choose a channel group from the existing channel groups.
Step 5 Click Add/Remove Ports. The Add/Remove Ports dialog box appears.
Step 6 To add ports to an existing channel group, complete the following:
From the Stand Alone list, choose the required ports and click the right arrow button to move the selected
ports to the Bundled list.
Step 7 To remove ports from an existing channel group, complete the following:
From the Bundled list, choose the required ports and click the left arrow button to move the selected ports
to the Stand Alone list.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to delete the channel group. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XP card where you want to delete the channel group.
Purpose This task deletes a channel group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-353
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 4 Choose a channel group that you want to delete.
Step 5 Click Delete.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to view and retrieve
information on the channel group, REP, CFM, and EFM. If you are already logged in, continue with Step
2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Maintenance > Show Commands tabs.
Step 4 From the Command drop-down list, choose a command.
The following commands are supported:
• ETH LACP—Displays detailed LACP information from the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards.
• REP TOPO—Displays the topology information for a specific REP segment.
• REP TOPO ARCHIVE—Displays the previous topology information for a specific REP segment.
• REP INTERFACE—Displays information on the REP interface status and configuration. You can
retrieve detailed information for each segment by selecting Detailed from the Level drop-down list
and providing the segment ID.
• OAM DISCOVERY—Displays discovery information for all the EFM interfaces or for a specific
EFM interface.
• OAM SUMMARY—Displays the active EFM sessions on a device.
• OAM STATISTICS—Displays detailed information about the EFM packets.
Purpose This task enables you to view and retrieve information on the channel
group, Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP), Connectivity Fault
Management (CFM), and Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-354
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• OAM STATUS—Displays information about the EFM configurations for all the EFM interfaces or
for a specific interface.
For more information, see the Pseudo Command Line Interface Reference document.
Step 5 From the Level drop-down list, choose Normal or Detailed.
Step 6 Click Show. Depending on the command, the appropriate output appears in the text area.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to view the channel group PM
counts on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to view the channel group statistics. The card view
appears.
Step 3 Click the Performance > Channel Groups > Statistics tabs.
Step 4 Click Refresh. Performance monitoring statistics for each channel group on the card appear in the
Statistics tab.
View the PM parameter names in the Param column. The current PM parameter values appear in the Port
# (CHGRP) column. For PM parameter definitions, see the Monitor Performance document.
Note To refresh, reset, or clear PM counts, see the “NTP-G73 Change the PM Display” procedure.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task enables you to view current statistical performance monitoring
(PM) counts on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards
and channel groups to detect possible performance problems.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-355
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to view the channel group
utilization PM parameters on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 2 In node view, double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to view
the channel group utilization. The card view appears.
Step 3 Click the Performance > Channel Groups > Utilization tabs.
Step 4 Click Refresh. The utilization percentages for each channel group on the card appear in the Utilization
tab.
View the Port # column to find the channel group you want to monitor.
The transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) bandwidth utilization values, for the previous time intervals, appear
in the Prev-n columns. For PM parameter definitions, see the Monitor Performance document.
Note To refresh, reset, or clear PM counts, see the “NTP-G73 Change the PM Display” procedure.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Purpose This task enables you to view line utilization PM counts on the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards and channel groups to detect
possible performance problems.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This task enables you to view historical PM counts at selected time
intervals on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards and
channel groups to detect possible performance problems.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-356
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to view the channel group
history PM parameters on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card where you want to view the channel group history PM data. The card
view appears.
Step 3 Click the Performance > Channel Groups > History tabs.
Step 4 From the Port field, choose a channel group.
Step 5 Click Refresh. Performance monitoring statistics for each channel group on the card appear in the
History tab.
View the PM parameter names that appear in the Param column. The PM parameter values appear in the
Prev-n columns. For PM parameter definitions, see the Monitor Performance document.
Note To refresh, reset, or clear PM counts, see the “NTP-G73 Change the PM Display” procedure.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the CFM settings.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC, page 11-357
• DLP-G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC, page 11-358
• DLP-G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC, page 11-359
• DLP-G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC, page 11-360
Purpose This procedure changes the CFM settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards,
page 14-69
• “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-357
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• DLP-G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC, page 11-361
• DLP-G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC, page 11-362
• DLP-G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC, page 11-362
• DLP-G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC,
page 11-363
• DLP-G629 Create a MEP Using CTC, page 11-364
• DLP-G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC, page 11-365
• DLP-G631 Create a MIP Using CTC, page 11-365
• DLP-G632 Delete a MIP Using CTC, page 11-366
• DLP-G633 Ping MEP Using CTC, page 11-367
• DLP-G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC, page 11-367
• DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC, page 11-353
• DLP-G635 Enable CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI
• DLP-G636 Create a Maintenance Domain on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI
• DLP-G637 Create a Maintenance Intermediate Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI
• DLP-G638 Create a Maintenance End Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards Using PCLI
Step 3 Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC
Note CFM is disabled on the card by default. CFM must be enabled at both card and port levels for the CFM
service to work.
For information about interaction of CFM with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility
list” section on page 11-62.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to enable or disable CFM on
the card. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This task allows you to enable or disable CFM on GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-358
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Security tab.
Step 4 Uncheck the MAC security check box to disable MAC security.
Step 5 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Global Settings tabs.
Step 6 Check the Enable CFM check box that is present at the bottom of the screen.
Step 7 Choose the value for CC Timer field. The value can be 1 second, 10 seconds, or 1 minute.
Note Continuity Check (CC) messages are periodically exchanged between maintenance end points (MEPs).
The CC Timer field is used to set the time frequency for transmission of CC messages.
Step 8 Click Apply to enable CFM on the card.
Note Uncheck the Enable CFM check box to disable CFM on the card.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC
Note CFM must be enabled at both card and port levels for the CFM service to work. However, CFM is
enabled on all the ports by default.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to enable or disable CFM for
each port. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Global Settings tabs.
Step 4 If you want to enable CFM on a specific port, check the Enable CFM check box against that port.
Step 5 Choose the value for CC Timer field. The value can be 1 second, 10 seconds, or 1 minute.
Purpose This task allows you to enable or disable CFM for each port on GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-359
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note Continuity Check (CC) messages are periodically exchanged between MEPs. The CC Timer field is used
to set the time frequency for transmission of CC messages.
Step 6 Click Apply to enable CFM on the port.
Note Uncheck the Enable CFM check box against the port to disable CFM on the port.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
Before You Begin
• You can create up to eight maintenance domain profiles on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards.
• The maximum number of characters for the maintenance domain profile and the maintenance
association profile must not exceed 43 characters.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to create a maintenance domain
profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Domain Profiles tabs or in
node/network view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > Domain Profiles tabs.
Note Use the network view to store the domain profile on multiple nodes.
Step 4 Click Add row(s).
Step 5 Enter the name of the domain in the Domain Name field.
Purpose This task allows you to create a maintenance domain profile on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-360
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 Enter the level of the domain profile in the Level field. The range of the domain profile level is from 0
to 7.
Step 7 Click Store.
Step 8 Choose the card slot where you want to store this domain profile and click OK.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to delete a maintenance domain
profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Domain Profiles tabs or in
node/network view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > Domain Profiles tabs.
Step 4 Select the domain profiles that you want to delete.
Step 5 Check the on Node check box.
Step 6 Click Delete Sel. row(s). The CFM Profile Deleting dialog box appears.
Step 7 Choose the card slot where you want to delete this profile and click OK. The Deleting Profile dialog
box appears.
Step 8 In the Deleting Profile dialog box, click Yes.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to delete a maintenance domain profile on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-361
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
Note You can create up to 1500 maintenance association profiles on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to create a maintenance
association profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA Profiles tabs or in node/network
view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > MA Profiles tabs.
Note Use the network view to store the maintenance association profile on multiple nodes.
Step 4 Click Add row(s).
Step 5 Enter the name of the maintenance association in the Maintenance Profile Name field.
Step 6 Enter the VLAN ID in the VLAN ID field. The range of the VLAN ID is from 1 to 4093.
Step 7 Check the CC Enable check box to receive Continuity Check messages.
Step 8 Click Store.
Step 9 Choose the card slot where you want to store this maintenance association profile and click OK.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to create a maintenance association profile on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-362
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
Note Ensure that the maintenance association profile you want to modify is not associated with a maintenance
domain profile.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to modify a maintenance
association profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA Profiles tabs or in node/network
view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > MA Profiles tabs.
Step 4 Select the maintenance association profiles that you want to modify.
Step 5 Click Modify Selected Profile(s). The Modify MA Profile dialog box appears.
Step 6 Modify the values as required and click OK.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
Note Ensure that the maintenance association profile you want to delete is not associated with a maintenance
domain profile.
Purpose This task allows you to modify a maintenance association profile on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This task allows you to delete a maintenance association profile on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-363
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to delete a maintenance
association profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA Profiles tabs or in node/network
view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > MA Profiles tabs.
Step 4 Select the maintenance association profiles that you want to delete.
Step 5 Check the on Node check box.
Step 6 Click Delete Sel. row(s). The CFM Profile Deleting dialog box appears.
Step 7 Choose the card slot where you want to delete this profile and click OK. The Deleting Profile dialog
box appears.
Step 8 In the Deleting Profile dialog box, click Yes.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
Note Ensure that you have already created maintenance domain profiles and maintenance association profiles.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to map a maintenance
association profile to a maintenance domain profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA-Domain Mapping tabs.
Step 4 From the main drop-down list, choose a maintenance domain profile.
Step 5 Click Link MA Profiles. The Link MA Profiles dialog box appears.
Step 6 From the Available Profiles list, choose the required MA profiles and click the right arrow button to
move the MA profiles to the Linked Profiles list and click OK.
Purpose This task allows you to map a maintenance association profile to a
maintenance domain profile on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-364
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note The maintenance association profiles that are mapped with a specific maintenance domain
profile must have a unique SVLAN ID.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G629 Create a MEP Using CTC
Note You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up to 500
MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to create a MEP. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MEP tabs.
Step 4 Click Create. The Create MEP dialog box appears.
Step 5 From the Port drop-down list, choose a port where you want to create the MEP.
Note CFM must be enabled on the port to create a MEP. The port must not belong to a channel group.
Step 6 From the Domain drop-down list, choose a maintenance domain.
Step 7 Enter the SVLAN ID in the Vlan Id field.
Note The specified VLAN must be configured on the selected port. The specified VLAN must also appear in
the MA-Domain Mapping table.
Step 8 Enter the MP ID (identifier of the maintenance end point) in the MPID field and click OK. The range of
the MP ID is from 1 to 8191.
The MP ID must not be the same between the maintenance end points.
Purpose This task allows you to create a Maintenance End Point (MEP) for a
given VLAN range on a specific maintenance domain.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-365
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to delete a MEP. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MEP tabs.
Step 4 Select the MEPs that you want to delete.
Step 5 Click Delete.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G631 Create a MIP Using CTC
Note You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up to 500
MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to create a MIP. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This task allows you to delete a MEP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This task allows you to create a Maintenance Intermediate Point (MIP)
for a given VLAN range with a specific maintenance level.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-366
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MIP tabs.
Step 4 Click Create. The Create MIP dialog box appears.
Step 5 From the Port drop-down list, choose a port where you want to create the MIP.
Note The port must not belong to a channel group.
Step 6 From the Level drop-down list, choose a maintenance level. The range of the maintenance level is from
0 to 7.
Step 7 Enter the SVLAN range in the Vlan range field. The range of the SVLAN is from 1 to 4093.
Note The specified SVLAN must be configured on the selected port.
Step 8 Click OK.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G632 Delete a MIP Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to delete a MIP. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MIP tabs.
Step 4 Select the MIPs that you want to delete.
Step 5 Click Delete.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to delete a MIP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-367
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G633 Ping MEP Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to ping MEP. If you are already
logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Ping tabs.
Step 4 Enter the MP ID value in the MPID field. The range of the MP ID is from 1 to 8191.
Note Remote MP ID user cannot ping local MP ID.
Step 5 (Optional) Enter the MAC address of the remote maintenance point in the Mac Addr field. The format
of MAC address is abcd.abcd.abcd.
Step 6 Enter the SVLAN ID in the VLAN ID field. The range of the SVLAN ID is from 1 to 4093.
Step 7 Enter the domain name in the Domain Name field.
Step 8 Enter the size of the ping packet in the DataGram Size field. The default value is 100.
Step 9 Enter the number of ping packets in the No of Requests field. The default value is 5.
Step 10 Click Ping. The output of the ping command appears in the Ping Response area.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC
Purpose This task allows you to display the output of the ping command on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This task allows you to display the output of the traceroute command on
the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-368
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to view the output of the
traceroute command. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Traceroute tabs.
Step 4 Enter the remote MP ID value in the MPID field. The range of the MP ID is from 1 to 8191.
Step 5 (Optional) Enter the MAC address of the remote maintenance point in the Mac Addr field. The format
of MAC address is abcd.abcd.abcd.
Step 6 Enter the SVLAN ID in the VLAN ID field. The range of the SVLAN ID is from 1 to 4093.
Step 7 Enter the domain name in the Domain Name field.
Step 8 Click TraceRoute Response.
The output of the traceroute command appears in the TraceRoute Response area.
• Verify the RlyHit message is shown in the traceroute display and LTM reaches a maintenance point
whose MAC address matches the target MAC address.
• Verify the RlyFDB message is shown in the traceroute display when the next hop address is found
in the forwarding database.
• Verify the RlyMPDB message is shown in the traceroute display when the next hop address is found
in the CCDN.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the EFM settings.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This procedure changes the EFM settings of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards,
page 14-69
• “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-369
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G639 Enable or Disable EFM for Each Port Using CTC, page 11-369
• DLP-G640 Configure EFM Parameters Using CTC, page 11-370
• DLP-G641 Configure EFM Link Monitoring Parameters Using CTC, page 11-371
• DLP-G642 Enable Remote Loopback for Each Port Using CTC, page 11-373
• DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC, page 11-353
• DLP-G643 Enable EFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI
• DLP-G644 Configure the EFM Mode on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G639 Enable or Disable EFM for Each Port Using CTC
Before You Begin
• You can enable EFM on both UNI and NNI ports.
• You cannot enable or disable EFM for ports that belong to a channel group.
• For information about interaction of EFM with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol
Compatibility list” section on page 11-62.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to enable or disable EFM for
each port. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > EFM > Configuration tabs. The EFM details appear for each
port.
Step 4 From the EFM State drop-down list, choose Enabled.
Step 5 Click Apply to enable EFM for that port.
Purpose This task allows you to enable or disable EFM for each port on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-370
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note From the EFM State drop-down list, choose Disabled to disable EFM for that port.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G640 Configure EFM Parameters Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to configure EFM parameters.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > EFM > Configuration tabs.
Step 4 Modify the EFM parameter settings as described in Table 11-149.
Purpose This task allows you to configure EFM parameters on the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Table 11-149 EFM Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number (n-n) and rate (GE or
TEN_GE).
—
EFM State Sets the state of the EFM protocol for each port. • Enabled
• Disabled
Mode Sets the operating mode of the port. If the mode is
Active, the port sends OAM Protocol Data Units
(OAMPDUs) at regular intervals to the partner
ports. If the mode is Passive, the port will not send
OAMPDUs until the partner ports send OAMPDUs.
• Active
• Passive
11-371
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 5 Click Apply to save the changes.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G641 Configure EFM Link Monitoring Parameters Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to configure EFM link
monitoring parameters. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > EFM > Link Monitoring tabs.
Link Fault Sets the Remote Failure Indication (RFI) action. If
the link is down on a port, the link fault RFI is sent
to the partner port through OAMPDU. An alarm
indicating the remote failure indication link fault
(RFI-LF) is raised. The alarm is cleared after you
clear the link fault condition.
You can specify the following actions for link fault
RFI:
• Error Block—The interface is placed in the
error-block state and the RFI-LF alarm is
raised.
• None—Only the RFI-LF alarm is raised.
Note Dying Gasp and critical events are not
supported.
• Error Block
• None
Session Timer Sets the duration up to when the EFM session is
retained with the partner port without receiving
OAMPDUs.
Default: 5 seconds
Range: 2 to 30 seconds
Table 11-149 EFM Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
Purpose This task allows you to configure EFM link monitoring parameters for
each port on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-372
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Modify the EFM link monitoring parameter settings as described in Table 11-150.
Step 5 Click Apply to save the changes.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-150 EFM Link Monitoring Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number (n-n) and rate (GE or
TEN_GE).
—
EF Max Sets the threshold value for the maximum number
of errored frames to detect during a specific period.
Range: 1 to 65535
EF Min Sets the threshold value for the minimum number of
errored frames to detect during a specific period.
Range: 0 to 65535
EF Action Specifies that when the parameter value exceeds the
maximum threshold value, the applicable action is
None.
When the parameter value falls below the minimum
threshold value, a threshold crossing alert (transient
condition) is generated.
• None
• Squelch
EF Window Period in which the errored frame parameters are
monitored.
Range: 10 to 600
EFP Max Sets the threshold value for the maximum number
of errored frames within the last n frames.
Range: 1 to 65535
EFP Min Sets the threshold value for the minimum number of
errored frames within the last n frames.
Range: 0 to 65535
EFP Action Specifies that when the parameter value exceeds the
maximum threshold value, the applicable action is
None.
When the parameter value falls below the minimum
threshold value, a threshold crossing alert (transient
condition) is generated.
• None
• Squelch
EFP Window Period in which the EFP parameters are monitored. Range: 1 to 65535
EFSS Max Sets the threshold value for the maximum number
of errored seconds within the last m seconds.
Range: 1 to 900
EFSS Min Sets the threshold value for the minimum number of
errored seconds within the last m seconds.
Range: 0 to 900
EFSS Action Specifies that when the parameter value exceeds the
maximum threshold value, the applicable action is
None.
When the parameter value falls below the minimum
threshold value, a threshold crossing alert (transient
condition) is generated.
• None
• Squelch
EFSS Window Specifies the period when the EFSS parameters are
monitored.
Range: 100 to 9000
11-373
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G642 Enable Remote Loopback for Each Port Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to enable the remote loopback
for each port. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > EFM > Loopback tabs.
The remote loopback type details appear for each port.
Step 4 From the Remote Loopback Type drop-down list, choose Remote Loopback.
Step 5 Click Apply to save the changes.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings
Purpose This task allows you to enable remote loopback for each port on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This procedure changes the REP settings for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards,
page 14-69
• “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-374
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the REP settings. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC, page 11-374
• DLP-G645 Create a Segment Using CTC, page 11-375
• DLP-G646 Edit a Segment Using CTC, page 11-377
• DLP-G647 Activate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC, page 11-378
• DLP-G648 Deactivate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC, page 11-379
• DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC, page 11-353
• DLP-G649 Create a Segment on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI
• DLP-G650 Configure STCN on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI
• DLP-G651 Configure Preemption Delay on the Primary Edge Port Using PCLI
• DLP-G652 Configure VLAN Load Balancing on the Primary Edge Port Using PCLI
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC
Note One administrative CVLAN and one administrative SVLAN can be provisioned for each card. The REP
segments using NNI ports send Hardware Flood Layer (HFL) messages using the administrative
SVLAN. The REP segments using UNI ports send HFL messages using the administrative CVLAN. The
two VLANs need not be the same.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to provision administrative
VLAN. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > REP > Admin VLAN Configuration tabs.
Step 4 To provision administrative VLAN for NNI ports in a REP segment, perform the following steps:
a. From the SVLAN drop-down list, choose a SVLAN.
b. Click Apply.
Purpose This task allows you to provision administrative VLAN for NNI and
UNI ports in a REP segment on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-375
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
c. To associate the chosen SVLAN with the NNI ports, see “DLP-G382 Add and Remove SVLANS
to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI Ports” task on page 11-396.
Step 5 To provision administrative VLAN for UNI ports in a REP segment, perform the following steps:
a. Enter the CVLAN in the CVLAN field.
b. Click Apply.
c. To associate the CVLAN with the UNI ports, see “DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings” task on page 11-399.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G645 Create a Segment Using CTC
Before You Begin
• You can create up to three segments on a card. Each segment can have up to two ports on the same
switch.
• You must configure the REP administrative VLAN to activate the Hardware Flood Layer (HFL).
• Before creating REP segments, you must configure the administrative VLAN or use the default
VLAN 1 and add the ports to the segment. Only one SVLAN can be configured per card for all the
three segments. REP uses the administrative VLAN to flood its own control traffic.
• The administrative CVLAN is required if a REP port is configured as a UNI port. However, the REP
ports are configured as NNI ports in many configurations, and hence the administrative CVLAN is
not required in these configurations. The option to configure the administrative CVLAN is present
in CTC.
• You must configure two edge ports in the segment. A segment has only one primary edge port. If
you configure two ports in a segment as the primary edge port, for example, ports on different
switches, REP selects one of the ports to serve as the primary edge port based on port priority.
• If REP is enabled on two ports on a switch, both the ports must be either regular ports or edge ports.
However, if the No-neighbor port is configured, one port can be an edge port and another port can
be a regular port.
• You can also optionally configure where to send segment topology change notifications (STCNs)
and VLAN load balancing (VLB). STCNs are enabled only for primary edge ports. VLB
configurations are enabled on any edge ports.
Purpose This task allows you to create a segment on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-376
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• For information about interaction of REP with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol
Compatibility list” section on page 11-62.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to create a segment. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > REP > Segment tabs.
Step 4 Click Create. The Create Segment wizard appears.
Step 5 Enter the segment ID in the Segment field. The range of the segment ID is from 1 to 1024.
Step 6 From the Port drop-drown list, choose a REP port that must belong to this segment.
Note A REP port can belong to only one segment.
Step 7 From the Port Role area, choose whether you want to configure the port as an edge port or a regular port.
The options are:
a. Edge—The port is configured as an edge port.
• Check the Primary check box to configure the edge port as a primary edge port. A segment can
have only one primary edge port.
Note If an edge port is configured as primary edge port, the other edge port in the ring
automatically becomes secondary edge port. If neither edge port is configured as primary
edge port, one edge port is automatically selected as primary edge port, and the other edge
port is secondary edge port. Configuring an edge port as a primary edge port is not
mandatory. However, it is recommended since VLAN load balancing must be configured on
the node with the primary edge port.
• Uncheck the Primary check box to configure the edge port as a secondary edge port.
• (Optional) Check the Preferred check box to configure the regular or edge port as a preferred
alternate port (alternate to primary edge port). This port blocks a range of SVLANs for VLAN
load balancing. There is no limit on the number of preferred ports in a REP ring. The preferred
port, if configured, is relevant even without VLAN load balancing, as it takes priority over
non-preferred ports for alternate port election.
Note Configuring a port as preferred does not ensure that it becomes the alternate port; it only
gets preference over the other ports that are not configured as preferred when an alternate
port is elected.
• Check the NoNeighbor check box if the edge port must not have a neighbor port. REP does not
check for neighbor adjacency.
Note When the NoNeighbor check box is checked, ensure that only one segment is created.
11-377
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
b. None—The port is configured as a regular port. If you choose this option, Segment Topology
Change Notifications (STCN) and VLAN Load Balancing (VLB) configurations are disabled.
Check the Preferred check box to configure the regular port as a preferred alternate port.
Step 8 From the STCN area, configure the destination of STCN messages:
a. Check the Enable check box to enable sending STCN messages.
b. From the Port drop-down list, choose the STCN port to send STCN messages or enter the segment
ID in the Segment field to send STCN messages. The STCN port and REP port must be unique.
Step 9 From the VLAN Load Balancing area, configure VLAN Load Balancing on the primary edge port:
a. Check the Enable check box to enable VLB.
b. Enter a single SVLAN or range of SVLANs in the SVLAN field. These SVLANs are blocked at the
alternate ports. The primary edge port blocks the remaining VLANs.
c. Enter the Rep PortId in the Rep PortId field to identify the VLAN blocking alternate port. This
unique port ID is automatically generated when REP is enabled.
d. Check the Preferred check box to select the segment port previously identified as the preferred
alternate port for VLAN load balancing.
When you check Preferred under VLAN Load Balancing area, you configure VLAN load balancing
to use one of the previously configured preferred ports (under the Port Role area) to be the load
balancing port. This restricts the load balancing port to be one among the preferred ports, but you
cannot select a specific preferred port.
Step 10 From the VLB Preempt Delay area, enter the trigger delay for automatic VLB activation. The range is
15 to 300 seconds.
Step 11 Click Next.
Step 12 Enter the details of the second port to add it to the segment.
Repeat Step 6 to 10 when the first port is configured as a regular port and the second port is configured
as a primary edge port. Repeat Step 6 to 7 when the first port is configured as a primary edge port and
the second port is configured as a regular port.
Step 13 Click Finish.
Step 14 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G646 Edit a Segment Using CTC
Purpose This task allows you to edit a segment on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-378
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note You can edit only the STCN and VLB entries for a segment.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to edit a segment. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > REP > Segment tabs. The list of segments appear.
Step 4 Choose a segment from the list of segments.
Step 5 Click Edit.
Step 6 Modify the values as required and click Finish.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G647 Activate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC
Note When VLAN load balancing is activated, the default configuration is manual preemption with the delay
timer disabled.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to activate VLAN load
balancing. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > REP > Segment tabs. The list of segments appear.
Step 4 Choose a segment from the list of segments.
Step 5 Click Activate VLB.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to activate VLAN load balancing on the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
11-379
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G648 Deactivate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to deactivate VLAN load
balancing. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 11-149.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > REP > Segment tabs. The list of segments appear.
Step 4 Choose a segment from the list of segments.
Step 5 Click Deactivate VLB.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and PM Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the card settings. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Purpose This task allows you to deactivate VLAN load balancing on the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This procedure changes Ethernet, line, and PM threshold settings for the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-380
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 3 Verify the card mode:
a. Display the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
c. Verify that the card mode is set to the mode designated by your site plan:
– L2-over-DWDM (GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE)
– 10GE TXP (10GE_XP or 10 GE_XPE)
– 10GE MXP (GE_XP or GE_XPE)
– 20GE MXP (GE_XP or GE_XPE)
If the card mode is set correctly, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the “DLP-G379 Change the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet
Settings” task on page 11-381.
Step 5 If the ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW SFP is inserted in the GE_XPE card, complete the
following tasks, as needed.
• DLP-G684 Provision the GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings, page 11-389
• DLP-G685 Provision the GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings, page 11-391
Step 6 If the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card mode is L2-over-DWDM, complete the
following tasks, as needed. If the card mode is not L2-over-DWDM, continue with Step 7.
• DLP-G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection Settings,
page 11-393
• DLP-G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database, page 16-79
• DLP-G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI
Ports, page 11-396
• DLP-G383 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service Settings,
page 11-397
• DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings, page 11-399
• NTP-G205 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards,
page 11-406.
• DLP-G385 Provision the MAC Filter Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Card, page 11-402
• NTP-G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards,
page 11-411 or NTP-G220 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards Using PCLI.
• NTP-G206 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card, page 11-413 or
NTP-G224 Enable MVR on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI.
• DLP-G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
CTC, page 11-401 or NTP-G226 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI.
Step 7 Complete the following tasks, as needed:
• DLP-G386 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-414
• DLP-G387 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-416
11-381
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• DLP-G388 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card RMON Thresholds,
page 11-417
• DLP-G389 Change the Gigabit Ethernet Optical Transport Network Settings, page 11-420
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see the
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the Ethernet settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Ether Ports > Ethernet tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Ethernet tab as described in Table 11-151. The parameters that appear
depend on the card mode.
Purpose This task changes the Ethernet settings for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-151 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
Port (Display only) The Port number (n-n)
and rate (GE or TEN_GE).
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE TXP
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
—
MTU The maximum size of the Ethernet
frames accepted by the port. The port
must be in OOS/locked state.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE TXP
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
Numeric. Default: 9700
Range 64 to 9700 (for R9.1 and later) (jumbo
frame)
11-382
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Mode Sets the Ethernet mode. The port
must be in OOS/locked state before
setting the card mode.
Note For GE_XP and GE_XPE
cards that are in Y-cable
protection groups, Mode
must be set to 1000 Mbps for
those client ports that are
configured in Y-cable.
For 10GE_XP and
10GE_XPE cards that are in
Y-cable protection groups,
Mode must be set to 10000
Mbps.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE TXP
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
• Auto (default)
• Display Only
• 1000 Mbps
• 10000 Mbps
• Auto_Fdx (10Mbps Full). This option
applies to ONS-SE-ZE-EL copper SFP that
carries traffic from GE_XP and GE_XPE
cards.
Note If Mode is set to Auto on the GE_XP or
GE_XPE port, autonegotiation gets
enabled on the peer port.
Note On GE_XP card, the copper Pluggable
Port Module (PPM) interface can
auto-negotiate and carry traffic even
when the peer interface operates at
rates other than 1000 Mbps.
Flow Control Enables/disables flow control
messaging with its peer port. When
enabled, the port can send and
receive PAUSE frames when buffer
congestion occurs. When disabled,
no PAUSE frames are transmitted
and the PAUSE frames received are
discarded.
Note Flow control messaging is
symmetric and not
negotiated. When flow
control is enabled on one
port, the other end of the link
(peer port) is not considered.
That is, even if flow control is
disabled on the peer port, the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
card will send PAUSE
frames.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 10GE TXP
• 20GE MXP
• ON—Flow control is enabled.
• OFF (default)—Flow control is disabled.
• Display Only.
Table 11-151 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
11-383
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Media Type (GE_XPE card only) Sets the Media
Type.
Note PROV-MISMATCH alarm is
raised if the Media Type is
not set to Ethernet Over DS1
(ANSI) or Ethernet Over E1
(ETSI) for
ONS-SC-EOP1,Ethernet
Over DS3 (ANSI) or Ethernet
Over E3 (ETSI) for
ONS-SC-EOP3, or DS1 Over
Ethernet (ANSI) or E1 Over
Ethernet (ETSI) for
ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or DS3
Over Ethernet (ANSI) or E3
Over Ethernet (ETSI)
ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW. Set the
correct Media Type to clear
the PROV-MISMATCH
alarm.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
• Ethernet Over DS1 (ANSI) (for
ONS-SC-EOP1)
• Ethernet Over E1 (ETSI) (for
ONS-SC-EOP1)
• Ethernet Over DS3 (ANSI) (for
ONS-SC-EOP3)
• Ethernet Over E3 (ETSI) (for
ONS-SC-EOP3)
• DS1 over Ethernet (ANSI) (for
ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW)
• DS3 over Ethernet (ANSI) (for
ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW)
• E1 Over Ethernet (ETSI) (for
ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW)
• E3 Over Ethernet (ETSI) (for
ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW)
Committed
Info Rate
Sets the guaranteed information rate
as provided by the service provider
service-level agreement. The port
must be in OOS/locked state.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
Numeric. Default: 100
Range: 0 to 100%
Committed
Burst Size
Sets the maximum number of bits
that will be transferred per second.
The port must be in OOS/locked state
before the Committed Burst Size is
provisioned.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
• 4k (default)
• 8k
• 16k
• 32k
• 64k
• 128k
• 256k
• 512k
• 1MB
• 2MB
• 8MB
• 16MB
Table 11-151 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
11-384
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Excess Burst
Size
The maximum number of bits that are
credited for later transfer in the event
the committed burst rate cannot be
transmitted. The port must be in
OOS/locked state before the Excess
Burst Size is provisioned.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
• None
• 4k (default)
• 8k
• 16k
• 32k
• 64k
• 128k
• 256k
• 512k
• 1MB
• 2MB
• 8MB
• 16MB
NIM Sets the port network interface mode
(NIM). This parameter classifies port
types designed for the Metro
Ethernet market to simplify
deployment, management, and
troubleshooting. The port must be in
OOS/locked state before the NIM is
provisioned.
L2-over-DWDM • UNI Mode—provisions the port as a
user-to-network interface (UNI). This is
the interface that faces the subscriber.
• NNI Mode—provisions the port as a
network-to-network interface. This is the
interface that faces the service provider
network.
Egress QoS Enables Quality of Service (QoS) on
the port’s egress or output queues.
The port must be in OOS/locked state
before the Egress QoS is provisioned.
L2-over-DWDM • Checked—QoS is enabled on the port’s
egress queues.
• Unchecked—(Default) QoS is disabled on
the port’s egress queues.
Table 11-151 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
11-385
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
MAC
Learning
Enables or disables MAC learning
for the port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
MAC learning is used by Layer 2
switches to learn the MAC addresses
of network nodes so the Layer 2
switches send traffic to the right
location. Layer 2 switches, including
the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards in L2-over-DWDM
mode with MAC Learning
configured, maintain a MAC learning
table that associates the MAC
addresses and VLANs with a given
port.
Note MAC addresses on SVLANs
attached to the port must also
be enabled to provision MAC
address learning on GE_XPE
and 10GE_XPE cards.
Note MAC address table aging is
300 seconds. It cannot be
changed.
L2-over-DWDM • Checked—MAC learning is enabled for
this port.
• Unchecked—(Default) MAC learning is
disabled.
Table 11-151 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
11-386
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Ingress CoS Provisions the IEEE 802.1p ingress
Class of Service (CoS). The CoS .1p
bits set the Ethernet frame priority.
The port must be in OOS/locked state
before the Ingress CoS is
provisioned.
Ingress CoS is used to set the priority
of the Ethernet frame in the service
provider network, This parameter is
used to set the CoS .1p bits in the
SVLAN tag.
Ingress CoS applies only to ports
provisioned as UNI mode. It does not
apply to ports provisioned as NNI
mode.
L2-over-DWDM • 0—(default) All incoming frames on the
port will have the CoS .1p bits in the
SVLAN tag set to 0.
• 1—All incoming frames on the port will
have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set
to 1.
• 2—All incoming frames on the port will
have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set
to 2.
• 3—All incoming frames on the port will
have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set
to 3.
• 4—All incoming frames on the port will
have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set
to 4.
• 5—All incoming frames on the port will
have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set
to 5.
• 6—All incoming frames on the port will
have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set
to 6.
• 7—All incoming frames on the port will
have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set
to 7.
• Trust—Automatically copies customer
VLAN tag into the service provider VLAN
tag.
• CVLAN—CoS can be provisioned based
on CVLAN. For information on how CoS
can be provisioned on the IEEE 802.1QinQ
CVLAN tags, refer to the “DLP-G384
Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings”
task on page 11-399.
If CVLAN CoS is configured on a GE_XP
or a 10GE_XP card, a PROV-MISMATCH
alarm is raised. Until this alarm is cleared,
provisioning on the card is not possible.
The CVLAN CoS configuration takes
effect only after QinQ is configured.
Table 11-151 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
11-387
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Inner
Ethertype
(Hex)
Defines the inner Ethertype field.
The Ethertype field indicates which
protocol is being transported in an
Ethernet frame.
The inner Ethertype applies to ports
provisioned in UNI mode only. It
does not apply to ports provisioned as
NNI mode. The ports must be
OOS/locked before the inner
Ethertype is provisioned.
L2-over-DWDM Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE Std 802.1Q customer
VLAN tag type)
Range: 0x0600 to 0xFFFF
Outer
Ethertype
(Hex)
Defines the outer Ethertype field.
The Ethertype field identifies which
protocol is being transported in an
Ethernet frame. The ports must be
OOS/locked before the Outer
Ethertype is provisioned.
Note The PROV-MISMATCH
alarm is raised on GE_XPE
and 10GE_XPE cards if more
than four different Outer
Ethertype options are
configured per card.
L2-over-DWDM Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE 802.1Q customer VLAN
tag type)
Range: 0x0600 to 0xFFFF
IGMP Static
Router Port
Adds multicast-capable ports to the
forwarding table for every IP
multicast.
L2-over-DWDM • Checked—IGMP static router port is
enabled.
• Unchecked—(Default) IGMP static router
port is disabled.
AIS Action Defines the AIS action type
provisioned on the port.
L2-over-DWDM • None—No action.
• Squelch—When an AIS packet is received
on a SVLAN terminating on the UNI-port,
the UNI port is squelched.
Protection
Action
Configures the standby port behavior.
Set Protection Action to None if
Media Type is set to Ethernet Over
DS1 (ANSI) or Ethernet Over E1
(ETSI) for ONS-SC-EOP1, Ethernet
Over DS3 (ANSI) or Ethernet Over
E3 (ETSI) for ONS-SC-EOP3, or
DS1 Over Ethernet (ANSI) or E1
Over Ethernet (ETSI) for
ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or DS3 Over
Ethernet (ANSI) or E3 Over Ethernet
(ETSI) for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW.
L2-over-DWDM • None—No action.
• Squelch—The laser on the standby port in
a 1+1 protection group is squelched. This
setting has no effect if the port is not part
of the 1+1 protection group.
Table 11-151 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
11-388
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-152 shows the inner and outer Ethertype behavior based on the NIM setting (either NNI mode
or UNI mode). When the NIM is set to UNI, and the QinQ mode is set to Selective, the Ethertype
behavior depends on the SVLAN/CVLAN operation that is provisioned, either Add or Translate. (QinQ
parameters are provisioned in the “DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE QinQ Settings” task on page 11-399.)
Note A packet can exit out of any UNI/NNI port if the outermost tag in the packet matches with the SVLAN
provisioned on that port. In other words, in the egress path, the inner tags (even if present) of the packet
are not matched with the inner SVLAN or CVLAN provisioned on the port.
Note The Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst Size must be configured based on the expected packet size
to ensure that no packets are dropped when Flow Control is enabled. For example, if the CIR is 40% and
packet size is 1 KB, the Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst Size should be set to 1 MB.
Note When you set the Committed Info Rate above 40% on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, the Committed
Burst Size and Excess Burst Size must be set to at least 32K. The Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst
Size can be increased based on the packet size and Committed Info Rate value.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-152 Ethertype Behavior
Port Type/
Ethertype NNI Mode
UNI Mode
Transparent
Selective
Operation: Add
Selective
Operation: Translate
Inner
Ethertype
Not applicable: the
outer Ethertype
value is used.
Not applicable: all packets
are mapped over the SVLAN.
Working (card-based) Working (card-based)
Outer
Ethertype
Working (per port) Not applicable: the outer
Ethertype is contained in the
inner VLAN (same as UNI
Selective mode).
Not applicable: the outer
Ethertype is the one
contained in the inner VLAN.
This cannot be set by port,
only by card. The outer
Ethertype is automatically set
to the inner Ethertype.
11-389
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G684 Provision the GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings
Note The Provisioning > Ether Ports > PDH Ethernet Parameters tab is available in GE_XPE card view only,
provided the PPM for GE_XPE port is created in FE mode.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XPE card where
you want to change the PDH Ethernet settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Ether Ports > PDH Ethernet Parameters tabs. The PDH Ethernet Parameters
tab appear only when the ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW SFP is inserted.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the PDH Ethernet Parameters tab as described in Table 11-153.
Purpose This task changes the PDH Ethernet settings for the GE_XPE card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• Set the Media Type as DS1 Over Ethernet in Provisioning > Ether
Ports > Ethernet tab in DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings, page 11-381
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-153 GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
Port (Display only) The Port number (n-n)
and rate.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
—
Port Name (Display only) The port name. • L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
—
MPLS Inner
Label
Sets the MPLS Inner Label value. • L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
Default: 16
Range: 16-65535.
MPLS Outer
Label
Sets the MPLS Outer Label value. • L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
Default: 16
Range: 16-65535.
11-390
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Jitter Buffer Sets the jitter buffer value. • L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
Default: 1500
Range: 400-200000.
Table 11-154 provides jitter buffer values for
different payloads.
Note The traffic is down if the jitter buffer is
set to >=192000 when Media Type is
set to DS1 over Ethernet (ANSI) (for
ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW) and E1 Over
Ethernet (ETSI) (for
ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW).
RX
Sensitivity
(ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW only) Sets the
RX sensitivity value.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
Default: –36 (ANSI), –12 (ETSI)
Range: –36 to –15 (ANSI), –12 to –43 (ETSI)
Source IP
Address
Enter the source IP address. Only
Unicast IP addresses are accepted.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
—
Peer IP
Address
Enter the peer IP address. Only
Unicast IP addresses are accepted.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
—
Table 11-154 Jitter Buffer Values for Various Payload Types
Payload Type
Jitter Buffer Value
Lower Limit Upper Limit
T1 (DS1) 1500 20000
T3 (DS3) 400 4500
E1 1500 200000
E3 400 60000
Table 11-153 GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
11-391
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G685 Provision the GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings
Note The Provisioning > Ether Ports > Electrical Lines tab is available in GE_XPE card view only, provided
the PPM for GE_XPE port is created in FE mode.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XPE card where
you want to change the Electrical Lines settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Ether Ports > Electrical Lines tabs. The Electrical Lines tab appear only
when the ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW SFP is inserted.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Electrical Lines > DS1 or Electrical Lines > DS3 tab as described in
Table 11-155.
Purpose This task changes the Electrical Lines settings for the GE_XPE card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• Set the Media Type as DS1 Over Ethernet in Provisioning > Ether
Ports > Ethernet tab in DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings, page 11-381
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-155 GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
Port (Display only) The Port number (n-n)
and rate.
• L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
—
Port Name (Display only) The port name. • L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
—
Clock Source Sets the Clock Source • L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
Default:
• Internal (for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW)
• Adaptive (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW)
Options:
• Loopback Timing
• Internal
• Adaptive
11-392
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Line Type Sets the Line Type • L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
Default:
• C-BIT (for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW ANSI)
• Unframed (for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW ETSI)
• ESF (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW ANSI)
• Framed (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW ETSI)
Options:
• G.751 (ETSI)
• G.832 (ETSI)
• C-BIT (ANSI)
• ESF (ANSI)
• M23 (ANSI)
• Framed (ETSI)
• Unframed (ETSI)
Line Coding Sets the Line Coding • L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
Default:
• B3ZS (for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW ANSI)
• HDB3 (for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW ETSI)
• B8ZS (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW ANSI)
• HDB3 (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW ETSI)
Options:
• AMI (ETSI)
• B3ZS (ANSI)
• B8ZS (ANSI)
• HDB3 (ETSI)
Line Length (ANSI only) Sets the Line Length • L2-over-DWDM
• 10GE MXP
• 20GE MXP
Defaults:
• 0-225 ft (for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW ANSI)
• 266-399 ft (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW ANSI)
Options (ANSI only):
• 0-133 ft
• 0-225 ft
• 133-266 ft
• 225-450 ft
• 266-399 ft
• 399-533 ft
• 533-655 ft
Table 11-155 GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Card Mode Options
11-393
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection Settings
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM
mode. To change the card mode, complete the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149.
Note GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 protection settings must be planned for the entire
VLAN ring. One card in the ring is provisioned as the master card and one of its port is set to Blocking.
The master card coordinates the protection switching for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE in a VLAN ring.
Note You can choose to enable another card in the ring to be the master card. However, only one card in the
ring can be provisioned as master card. Make sure that the provisioning settings on the card that was
previously configured as the master are disabled as soon as another card is enabled as the master card.
To perform this task complete the “DLP-G507 Enable a Different GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Card as the Master Card” procedure on page 11-395
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the protection settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.
Step 3 In the Status column, modify the port protection status by clicking the appropriate table cell and
choosing one of the following from the drop-down list:
• Forwarding—Forwards the Ethernet packets that are received by the port.
• Blocking—Blocks the Ethernet packets that are received by the port.
Purpose This task provisions the Layer 2 protection settings for the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when the cards are provisioned
in L2-over-DWDM mode.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-394
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note One port of the master card within a VLAN ring must be set to Blocking. All other ports must
be set to Forwarding.
Step 4 Check the Master check box if you want the card to serve as the protection coordinator for the VLAN
ring. If not, continue with Step 5.
Step 5 From the Protection drop-down list, choose one of the following:
• Enabled—Enables protection.
• Disabled—Disables protection.
• Forced—Converts all the SVLANs to protected SVLANs irrespective of the SVLAN protection
configuration in the SVLAN database. This is applicable to a point-to-point linear topology. The
SVLAN protection must be forced to move all SVLANs, including protected and unprotected
SVLANs, to the protect path irrespective of provisioned SVLAN attributes.
Step 6 From the Hold Off Time drop-down list, choose one of the following:
• Disabled (default)—Disables Fast Automatic Protection Switch (FAPS) protection.
• 50 msec, 100 msec, 200 msec, 500 msec, 1 sec, 2 sec, or 5 sec—Holds off FAPS protection for the
selected duration.
Note To get consistent results ensure Hold Off Time values are the same throughout the ring.
Note FAPS is an Layer 2 protection enabled on a VLAN. When a fiber fault occurs, Layer 1 protection
is triggered immediately to restore the traffic. Setting the Hold Off Time option prevents Layer 2
FAPS protection from triggering at the same time as Layer 1 protection thereby avoiding traffic
hits.
Step 7 Set the following parameters for FAPS switching with CRC errors:
a. Switch with CRC Alarm—Check this check box to enable FAPS switching with CRC errors.
b. CRC Threshold—Threshold for CRC error count. The default CRC threshold value is 10(-e)2. The
available options are 10(-e)2, 10(-e)3, and 10(-e)4.
c. CRC Soak Count—Number of times the CRC error rate exceeds the CRC threshold value before
raising the DATA-CRC alarm. The default CRC Soak Count is 10. The valid range is from 3 to 10.
d. CRC Poll Interval—Time interval (in seconds) between the successive polls. The default CRC Poll
Interval is 60 seconds.
For example, if the CRC Threshold value = 10(-e)2, CRC Soak Count = 10, and CRC Poll Interval
= 60 seconds, then FAPS occurs when the incoming CRC error rate is more than 10(-e)2
continuously across 10 poll intervals (10*60 = 600 seconds).
e. Clear/Supress CRC Alarm—Uncheck the Clear/Supress CRC Alarm check box for FAPS to occur.
If you check this check box, the DATA-CRC alarm gets cleared and FAPS does not occur.
Note As along as the Clear/Supress CRC Alarm checkbox is checked, the DATA-CRC alarm is not
raised on that port and FAPS does not occur.
11-395
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note For consistent result, ensure that all the values that are set in Step 7 are same throughout the ring.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G507 Enable a Different GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master Card
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM
mode. To change the card mode, complete the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149.
Note Do not attempt to change the master card when there is a failure in the FAPS ring.
Note GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 protection must be enabled for the entire VLAN
ring. One card in the ring is provisioned as the master card and one of its port is set to Blocking. The
master card coordinates the protection switching for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
cards in a VLAN ring.
Note You can choose to enable another card in the ring to be the master card. However, only one card in the
ring can be provisioned as master card. Make sure that the provisioning settings on the card that was
previously configured as the master are disabled as soon as another card is enabled as the master card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card in a VLAN ring where you want to enable master card provisioning. The
card view appears. Perform the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.
Purpose This task provisions another GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
card on a stable VLAN ring, to be the master card when the cards are
provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
DLP-G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
Layer 2 Protection Settings, page 11-393
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-396
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
b. From the Status drop-down list, choose Blocking for a trunk port.
Note One port of the master card within a VLAN ring must be set to Blocking. All other ports must
be set to Forwarding.
c. Check the Master check box for the card that serves as the protection coordinator for the VLAN
ring.
d. From the Protection drop-down list, choose Enabled.
e. Click Apply.
Step 2 The master card provisioning on the other card must be disabled. Perform the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.
b. Uncheck the Master check box for the card where Master node provisioning must be disabled.
c. Click Apply.
d. From the Protection drop-down list, choose Disabled.
e. Click Apply.
Step 3 The protection on the card that was disabled in Step 2 must be enabled again. Perform the following
steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.
b. From the Protection drop-down list, choose Enabled.
c. Click Apply.
d. From the Status drop-down list, choose Forwarding on both ports.
e. Click Apply.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI Ports
Purpose This task adds or removes service provider VLAN (SVLAN) provisioning
to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE ports. This task
only applies to GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards in
L2-over- DWDM mode.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
DLP-G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database, page 16-79
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-397
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM
mode. To change the card mode, complete the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149.
Note This task can only be performed on ports provisioned as NNI. See the “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 11-381.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the SVLAN port settings. The card view
appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > SVLAN tabs.
Step 3 For each SVLAN shown in the table, click the check box under the Port [port name] table cell to include
the SVLAN in that port. If you do not want the SVLAN included, uncheck the check box.
Note If no SVLANs appear in the SVLAN tab, complete the “DLP-G421 Create and Store an SVLAN
Database” task on page 16-79.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G383 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service Settings
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM
mode and the port must have QoS enabled. Refer to the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149 and the “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 11-381, if needed.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the QoS settings.
Purpose This task provisions the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) value and
bandwidth for QoS Class of Service (CoS) egress queues on a GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card port.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-398
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > QoS tabs.
Step 3 In the Port field at the bottom of the window, choose the port where you want to provision the QoS
settings.
Step 4 For each CoS egress queue, 0 through 7, define the following:
• WRR weight—sets the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) level for the CoS egress queue. The default
is 1. The range is 0 to 15, where 0 is Strict Priority.)
Note The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE define a set of eight queues, one queue
for each CoS. Only one of the queues can be assigned the 0 WRR weight (Strict Priority).
• Bandwidth—sets the bandwidth allocated for the CoS egress queue, 100 is the default. This
bandwidth value is the percentage (%) of bandwidth with respect to the SFP, XFP, or port speed (100
Mbps for FE, 1 Gbps for GE, and 10 Gbps for 10GE) of the interface.
Step 5 Click Apply. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G470 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Class of Service (CoS) Settings
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM
mode and the port must be in OOS state.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the CoS settings.
Step 2 Complete the following task:
• Refer to Ingress CoS section in the “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 11-381
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task provisions Class of Service (CoS) settings on the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-399
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE must be in L2-over-DWDM mode.
To change the card mode, complete the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149.
Note This task can only be performed on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards UNI ports.
(To provision the port Ethernet parameters, see the “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 11-381.)
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the QinQ settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > QinQ tabs.
Step 3 Click the Port field and choose the port where you want to provision QinQ.
Channel groups configured in UNI mode appear in the Port field along with the physical ports.
Step 4 Click the Mode field and choose one of the following modes from the drop-down list:
• Selective—The incoming Ethernet packet is checked against the CVLAN and SVLAN table. If the
CVLAN is not found, the packet is dropped. If you choose Selective, add an entry in the QinQ tab
to map the administrative CVLAN to the SVLAN (if it is not same as the one used for data).
• Transparent—All incoming packets are transported with the additional VLAN chosen in the
SVLAN field. If you choose transparent, the traffic on administrative CVLAN will pass through.
Step 5 Click the BPDU field and choose one of the following bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) modes from the
drop-down list:
• Drop (default)—If checked, drops incoming packets with any of the following destination MAC
addresses. The BPDU default can be applied for any UNI port.
– 01-80-c2-00-00-00—IEEE 802.1D
– 01-80-c2-00-00-02—Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
Purpose This task provisions the IEEE 802.1QinQ VLAN tags on the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card UNI ports. QinQ tags expand the
VLAN capability by tagging the tagged packets to produce a
“double-tagged” Ethernet frame. For service providers the expanded
VLAN allows specific services to be provided on specific VLANs for
specific customers, while other types of services can be provided to other
customers on other VLANs.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
DLP-G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database, page 16-79
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-400
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
– 01-80-0c-cc-cc-cc—VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+)
– 01-00-c-cc-cc-cc—Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) type 0x2000, VLAN Trunk Protocol (VTP)
type 0x2003, Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP), type 0x0104, Uni-Directional Link Detection
(UDLD) type 0x111, Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) type 0x2004
• Tunnel—If checked, transparently sends any of the destination MAC addresses listed above.
Step 6 If the Mode was set to Selective, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 7.
a. To add a row, click Add.
b. Click the CVLAN table and type in the CVLAN range. You can enter a single value or a range using
“–” between the two ends of the range.
Note If you are using Software Release 8.5 or earlier, it is recommended that you do not specify
a CVLAN range due to certain limitations in the feature.
c. Click the SVLAN table cell and choose an SVLAN from the drop-down list.
d. Click the Operation table cell and choose an operation:
– Add (default)—Adds the SVLAN on top of the CVLAN. The operation default can be applied
for any UNI port.
– Translate—CVLAN is translated with the SVLAN value.
– Double Add—(GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards only) Adds an inner and an outer SVLAN to
double tagged packets only. CVLAN settings are not required. If this double tagged selective
operation is present on a port, no other selective operation can be present.
– Translate Add—(GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards only) CVLAN gets translated to inner
SVLAN and the SVLAN is added.
Note If Double Add and Translate Add are configured on a GE_XP or a 10GE_XP card, a
PROV-MISMATCH alarm is raised. Until this alarm is cleared, provisioning on the card is
not possible.
Note A CVLAN with a value of 0 means “untagged packet”.
Note Two or more CVLANs cannot be translated over the same SVLAN.
e. (GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards only) Click the COS table cell and choose a value from the drop
down list.
f. Click Apply.
g. Continue with Step 10.
Step 7 If the Mode was set to Transparent, in the SVLAN field, choose the SVLAN to be added to incoming
packets.
Step 8 Click DSCP-Cos mapping Table to provision CoS based on DSCP for each port.
Step 9 For each DSCP, choose a CoS value from 0 to 7 and click OK.
11-401
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G221 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to enable MAC Address
Learning. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the following tasks, as needed:
• DLP-G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
CTC, page 11-401
• NTP-G226 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Note To perform this task, the GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM mode. Refer to the
“DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149
if needed.
Purpose This task enables MAC address learning on SVLANS for GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures VLANs must already be created on the selected card.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task enables MAC address learning on SVLANs attached to the port
of a GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card
Mode, page 11-149
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-402
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note MAC address learning is applicable only for GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards. If MAC address learning
is configured on a GE_XP or a 10GE_XP card, a PROV-MISMATCH alarm is raised. Until this alarm is
cleared, provisioning on the card is not possible.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XPE or
10GE_XPE card where you want to enable MAC address learning.
Step 2 Enable MAC address learning on the port. Perform the following steps:
a. Click Provisioning > Ethernet.
b. Check the MAC Learning check box.
Note If the per port MAC address learning is configured on a GE_XP or 10 GE_XP cards, before upgrading
to a GE_XPE or 10 GE_XPE card, enable MAC address learning per SVLAN. Not doing so disables
MAC address learning.
Step 3 Enable MAC address learning on the SVLAN attached to the port. Perform the following steps:
a. Click SVLAN > SVLAN DB tabs.
b. Click Load. This loads an SVLAN database from a network node or local file and replaces any
SVLANs that are in the network view VLAN DB table.
c. Check the MAC Learning check box related to the SVLAN (one or more than one SVLAN) to be
configured with MAC address learning.
d. Click Store. This records and enables the new configuration.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G385 Provision the MAC Filter Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM
mode. To change the card mode, complete the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149.
Purpose This task provisions the MAC address filter for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards when the cards are provisioned in
L2-over-DWDM mode. The MAC address filter is a list of MAC addresses
whose packets should be accepted or dropped.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-403
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the MAC filter settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Security > MAC Filter tabs.
Step 3 Click the port for which you want to create a MAC filter.
Step 4 Click Edit.
Step 5 In the Edit MAC Address dialog box, click Add. A new table entry appears with the MAC address
00-00-00-00-00-00.
Step 6 In the MAC Address Port field, type in the MAC address you want to filter over the default
00-00-00-00-00-00 address.
Step 7 If you want to add more MAC addresses, repeat Steps 5 and 6. (Up to eight MAC addresses can be added
for each port.) If not, click OK.
Step 8 On the MAC Filter table, provision the Allowed check box:
• Checked—All MAC addresses different from the address(es) entered in the table will be dropped.
• Unchecked—All MAC addresses matching the address(es) entered in the table will be dropped.
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 3 through 9 for each port of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card that you
want to set up.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G237 Retrieve and Clear MAC Addresses on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Caution Retrieving and clearing learned MAC addresses are CPU intensive and traffic affecting. You must clear
the MAC addresses only during a scheduled maintenance window.
Purpose This procedure retrieves and clears MAC addresses learned on GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
Card Mode, page 11-149
• DLP-G221 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards, page 11-401
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-404
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note It is not possible to simultaneously retrieve learned MAC addresses from both CTC and TL1 interfaces.
Step 1 In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to retrieve the MAC addresses.
Step 2 To retrieve the MAC addresses learned, perform the following steps:
a. Click Maintenance > MAC Addresses > Learned.
b. In the SVLAN field, type a valid SVLAN range. The SVLAN range is from 1 to 4093.
c. Click Refresh.
The table displays the following fields:
– MAC Address—Displays the MAC address for the port.
– VLAN—Displays the VLAN identifier for the port.
– Port—Displays the port number.
Right-click the column heading to display the following options:
– Row Count—Displays the number of learned MAC addresses retrieved.
– Sort Column—Sorts the table by the column’s values.
– Hide Column—Hides the column from view.
– Reorder Columns Visibility—Displays all hidden columns.
Step 3 Click Refresh to refresh the list of MAC addresses learned.
Step 4 Click Clear to clear the MAC addresses learned on all the SVLANS of the card.
Note It is not possible to delete the MAC addresses learned on a per SVLAN basis.
Step 5 To view card MAC addresses, complete the “DLP-G546 View Card MAC Addresses on GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards” task on page 11-404.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G546 View Card MAC Addresses on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Purpose This task allows you to view the MAC addresses for each client and trunk
port and the CPU port of the card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-405
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 To view the card MAC addresses, click Maintenance > MAC Addresses > Card. The MAC addresses
for each client and trunk port and the CPU port are displayed.
The table displays the following fields:
• Port—Displays the port number.
• MAC Address—Displays the MAC address for the port.
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure.
NTP-G311 Provision the Storm Control Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM
mode. To change the card mode, complete the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the storm control settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Security > Storm Control tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-156.
Purpose This task provisions the storm control settings for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards when the cards are provisioned in
L2-over-DWDM mode.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-156 Storm Control Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) The Port number (n-n) and rate
(GE or TEN_GE).
DLF Storm Control Enables or disables DLF storm control on the
card.
• Checked—DLF storm
control is enabled.
• Unchecked—DLF
storm control is
disabled.
DLF Storm Control
Threshold (pps)
Threshold value to set the number of unknown
unicast packets per second.
Range: 0 to 16777215
packets per second
11-406
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G205 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to enable link integrity. If you
are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the following tasks, as needed:
• DLP-G509 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC,
page 11-407
• NTP-G216 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI
Mcast Storm Control Enables or disables Multicast storm control on the
card.
• Checked—Multicast
storm control is
enabled.
• Unchecked—Multicast
storm control is
disabled.
Mcast Storm Control
Threshold (pps)
Threshold value to set the number of multicast
packets per second.
Range: 0 to 16777215
packets per second
Bcast Storm Control Enables or disables Broadcast storm control on
the card.
• Checked—Broadcast
storm control is
enabled.
• Unchecked—Broadcast
storm control is
disabled.
Bcast Storm Control
Threshold (pps)
Threshold value to set the number of broadcast
packets per second.
Range: 0 to 16777215
packets per second
Table 11-156 Storm Control Settings
Parameter Description Options
Purpose This task enables link integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-407
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G509 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Create or load an SVLAN profile. To create a SVLAN profile see the DLP-G471 Create a SVLAN or
CVLAN Profile, page 11-410.
Note Make sure the Link Integrity check box is selected to enable link integrity for a profile and save it to
the node.
Step 3 Associate the SVLAN profile (with Link Integrity enabled) to a SVLAN on a port. To do this perform
the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card. The card view appears.
b. Click the Provisioning > Profiles Mapping > SVLAN tabs.
c. Enter the SVLANs or SVLAN range in the SVLAN to View text box.
A table appears that displays SVLANs and available ports. The SVLAN profiles that was created
must be applied to a SVLAN and a port. However, make sure the SVLAN has already been
associated with the port via the QinQ tab (For information on how to associate a SVLAN to a port,
see the “DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings”
task on page 11-399).
d. Select the SVLAN for a port and choose the available SVLAN profile from the drop-box.
e. Click Apply.
Step 4 AIS action must be set on a per-UNI port basis. Select None or Squelch from the AIS action drop-down
list. For detailed instructions, see the “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 11-381.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task enables link integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-408
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G289 Provision CVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card
Note You cannot provision CVLAN rate limiting on channel groups.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to provision CVLAN rate
limiting. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Create or load a CVLAN profile by setting Committed Info Rate, Committed Burst, Excess Info, Excess
Burst. To create a CVLAN Profile see the “DLP-G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile” task on
page 11-410.
Step 4 Associate the CVLAN profile to a CVLAN on a UNI port. To do this perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card. The card view appears.
b. Click the Provisioning > Profiles Mapping > CVLAN tabs.
c. Enter the CVLANs or CVLAN range in the CVLANS to View text box.
A table appears that displays CVLANs and available ports. The CVLAN profiles that were created
must be applied to a CVLAN and port. However, make sure the CVLAN has already been associated
with the port via the QinQ tab (For information on how to associate a CVLAN profile to a UNI port,
see the “DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings”
task on page 11-399).
d. Select the CVLAN for a given port and choose the available CVLAN profile from the drop-down
list.
e. Click Apply.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This task provisions CVLAN rate limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-409
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G208 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to enable SVLAN rate limiting.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the following tasks, as needed:
• DLP-G515 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Card Using CTC, page 11-409
• NTP-G225 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Card Using PCLI
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G515 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Create or load a SVLAN profile by setting Committed Info Rate, Committed Burst, Excess Info, Excess
Burst. To create a SVLAN Profile see the “DLP-G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile” task on
page 11-410.
Step 3 Associate the SVLAN profile to a SVLAN on a port. To do this, perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card. The card view appears.
Purpose This task provisions SVLAN rate limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task provisions SVLAN rate limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-410
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
b. Click the Provisioning > Profiles Mapping > SVLAN tabs.
c. Enter the SVLANs or SVLAN range in the SVLAN to View text box.
A table appears that displays SVLANs and available ports. The SVLAN profiles that were created
must be applied to a SVLAN and port. However, make sure the SVLAN has already been associated
with the port via the QinQ tab (For information on how to associate a SVLAN profile to a UNI port,
see the “DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings”
task on page 11-399 and to a NNI port see the “DLP-G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI Ports” task on page 11-396).
d. Select the SVLAN for a given port and choose the available SVLAN profile from the drop-down list.
e. Click Apply.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile
Note You cannot associate SVLAN or CVLAN profiles to channel groups. You can associate a CVLAN profile
only to a UNI port.
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > SVLAN > Profiles tabs.
Step 3 Click Add and a profile is added to the Profiles tab. Modify any of the settings as follows:
• Name—The profile name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters.
• Committed Info Rate—Sets the guaranteed information rate as provided by the service provider
service-level agreement. The default value is 100 and the range is 0 to 100 percent.
• Committed Burst—Sets the maximum number of bits that will be transferred per second.
• Excess Info—Sets the excess rate as provided by the service provider service-level agreement. The
default value is 100 and the range is 0 to 100 percent. However, the value must be greater or equal
to than the Committed Info Rate.
• Excess Burst—The maximum number of bits that are credited for later transfer in the event the
committed burst rate cannot be transmitted.
• Link Integrity—Enables link integrity for the SVLAN profile. Do not check this check box if you
are creating a CVLAN profile.
Purpose This task creates an SVLAN profile.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-411
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note When you set the Committed Info Rate above 40% on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, the Committed
Burst Size and Excess Burst Size must be set to at least 32K. The Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst
Size can be increased based on the packet size and Committed Info Rate value.
Step 4 Click Store.
Step 5 In the Store Profile(s) dialog box, choose one of the following:
• To Node(s)—Stores the SVLAN profile at one or more network nodes. Choose the network nodes
where you want to store the SVLAN profile. To choose more than one node, press the Shift key, or
click Select All.
• To File—Stores the SVLAN profile in a file. Enter a file name, then click Browse to navigate to a
local or network drive where you want to store the file.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to enable IGMP snooping. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the following tasks, as needed:
• “DLP-G511 Enable IGMP Snooping, IGMP Fast Leave and IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC” task on page 11-412.
• NTP-G220 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI.
• NTP-G217 Enable IGMP Fast-Leave Processing on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards Using PCLI.
• NTP-G219 Enable IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure enables Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
snooping on a per-SVLAN basis on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-412
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G511 Enable IGMP Snooping, IGMP Fast Leave and IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > SVLAN > SVLAN DB tabs. Click Load to load the SVLANs on the card
where IGMP must be enabled.
Step 3 For each SVLAN shown in the table, select the following:
• IGMP—Check the IGMP check box to enable IGMP for the selected SVLAN.
• IGMP Fast Leave—Checking the IGMP Fast Leave causes the switch to immediately remove a port
from the IP multicast group when it detects an IGMP, version 2 (IGMPv2) leave message on that
port.
• IGMP Suppression—Check the IGMP Suppression check box to enable a single IGMP report to be
sent to each multicast group in response to a single query.
Step 4 Click Store SVLAN DB.
Step 5 In the Store SVLAN DB dialog box, choose one of the following:
• To Node/Shelf/Card—Select the node and shelf. All the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards in L2 over DWDM mode are displayed. Select the card where you want to store
the SVLAN DB.
• Stores the SVLAN database at one or more network nodes. Choose the network nodes where you
want to store the SVLAN database. To choose more than one node, press the Shift key, or click
Select All.
• To File—Stores the SVLAN database in a file. Enter a file name, then click Browse to navigate to
a local or network drive where you want to store the file.
• Select the card on which you want to save the changes made in step 3.
Step 6 Click OK.
Note If you want to add the multicast-capable ports to the forwarding table for every IP multicast, select the
IGMP Static Router Port check box as described in the “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 11-381.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure explains how to enable IGMP snooping, IGMP fast leave
and IGMP report suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards using CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-413
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G206 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to enable IGMP snooping. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the following tasks, as needed:
• “DLP-G513 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC” task
on page 11-413.
• NTP-G224 Enable MVR on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G513 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to enable MVR. The card view appears.
Note At least one SVLAN must be configured on the card.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > MVR tabs. The MVR Settings tab appears.
Step 3 Check the Enabled check box and enter the following information:
Purpose This procedure enables Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) on GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure enables Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) on GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards using CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI Ports, page 11-396
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-414
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
• IGMP CVLAN—Check box to enable IGMP snooping on CVLAN. This check box is enabled only
when MVR is enabled through the Enabled check box.
• Multicast SVLAN—Select the MVR SVLAN ID. The default value is the SVLAN with the lowest
ID configured on the card. The drop box lists all the SVLANs on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
or 10GE_XPE card.
Note SVLAN selected here can not be used for UNI port, make sure that the corresponding SVLAN
on the NNI port is checked.
• Multicast Address—Sets the specified multicast group address as the MVR multicast group. The
default address is 239.255.255.255 and the range is 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Except the
subrange [224-239].[0/128].0.x.
• Count—Sets the range of any additional multicast group addresses. The default is 1, and range is
1 to 256.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G386 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Note The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards have two trunk ports. The GE_XP and GE_XPE
trunk ports are 21-1 and 22-1 on the card graphic and 21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk) on the Optics
Thresholds table. The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE card trunk ports are 3-1 and 4-1 on the card graphic
and 3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk) on the Optics Thresholds table.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Purpose This task changes the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card
trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-415
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on
page 11-142.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. When TCA is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Verify the trunk port TCA thresholds are provisioned as shown in Table 11-157. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify the trunk port alarm thresholds are provisioned as shown in Table 11-158. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to provision the second trunk port.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-157 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Trunk Interface TCA Thresholds
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
XFP WDM no FEC –7 –23 6 –4
XFP WDM standard FEC –7 –27 6 –4
XFP WDM Enhanced FEC –7 –27 6 –4
Table 11-158 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Trunk Interface Alarm Thresholds
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
XFP WDM no FEC –5 –26 5 –3
XFP WDM standard FEC –5 –30 5 –3
XFP WDM Enhanced FEC –5 –30 5 –3
11-416
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G387 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Note The GE_XP card has 20 client ports. The ports are 1-1 through 20-1 on the card graphic and 1 (Client)
through 20 (Client) on the Optics Thresholds table. The 10GE_XP card has 2 client ports. The ports are
1-1 and 2-1 on the card graphic and 1 (Client) and 2 (Client) on the Optics Thresholds table.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable
(SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are
hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network.
Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs,
see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on page 11-142.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. When TCA is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Verify the client port TCA thresholds are provisioned as shown in Table 11-159. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and hitting Enter.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-159 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
10GE LAN PHY 10GBASE-LR 1 –14 5 –12
1000Base-SX (1Gbps)1
1. Gigabit Ethernet client
0 –17 3 –16
1000Base-LX 1 –3 –20 3 –16
11-417
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify the client port Alarm thresholds are provisioned as shown in Table 11-160. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to provision each additional client port.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G388 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card RMON Thresholds Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), display the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the RMON thresholds.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose an individual port, or choose All to provision RMON thresholds
for all ports.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 11-161 for a list of available
Ethernet RMON variables.
Table 11-160 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
10GE LAN PHY 10GBASE-LR 3 –16 1 –8
1000Base-SX (1Gbps)1
1. Gigabit Ethernet client
3 –20 –2 –12
1000Base-SX (2Gbps)1 3 –18 –2 –12
1000Base-LX 1 0 –23 –1 –12
Purpose This task changes the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card
RMON threshold settings.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-418
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Note Variable descriptions were obtained from the following Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF)
Requests for Comment (RFCs): RFC 3635, RFC 2233, and RFC 1757. Refer to the RFCs for
additional information.
Table 11-161 Gigabit Ethernet RMON Variables
Variable Description
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInUcastPkts The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were
not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer.
ifInMulticastPkts The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were
addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. For a MAC layer protocol, this
includes both Group and Functional addresses.
ifInBroadcastPkts The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were
addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
ifInDiscards The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no
errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.
ifInOctets Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
ifOutOctets Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
ifOutMulticastPkts The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and
which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were
discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both group and functional
addresses.
ifOutBroadcastPkts The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and
which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were
discarded or not sent.
ifOutDiscards The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no
errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. One possible reason for
discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.
IfOutErrors Number of outbound packets or transmission units that could not be transmitted because
of errors.
dot3StatsFCSErrors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets
in length but do not pass the FCS check.
dot3StatsFrameTooLong A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted
frame size.
dot3ControlInUnknownOpCode A count of MAC control frames received on this interface that contain an opcode that is
not supported by this device.
dot3InPauseFrames A count of MAC control frames received on this interface with an opcode indicating the
PAUSE operation.
dot33StatsFCSErrors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets
in length but do not pass the FCS check.
11-419
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
dot3StatsFrameTooLong A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted
frame size.
dot3ControlInUnknownOpCode A count of MAC control frames received on this interface that contain an opcode that is
not supported by this device.
dot3InPauseFrames A count of MAC control frames received on this interface with an opcode indicating the
PAUSE operation.
dot3OutPauseFrames A count of MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface with an opcode indicating
the PAUSE operation.
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors Total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including
FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad FCS with an
integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets
(Alignment Error).
etherStatsUndersizePkts The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
etherStatsFragments The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral.
etherStatsPkts The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast
packets) received.
etherStatsPkts64Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 65 and
127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 128
and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 256
and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 512
and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 1024
and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts1519to1522Octets The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 1519
and 1522 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Note This variable is supported only on client ports.
etherStatsBroadcastPkts The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address
etherStatsMulticastPkts The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
etherStatsOversizePkts The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (for untagged
packets) or 1522 octets (for tagged packets) (excluding framing bits, but including FCS
octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Table 11-161 Gigabit Ethernet RMON Variables (continued)
Variable Description
11-420
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds. If not, continue with Step 12
Step 13 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G389 Change the Gigabit Ethernet Optical Transport Network Settings
etherStatsJabbers The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (for untagged
packets) or 1522 octets (for tagged packets) (excluding framing bits, but including FCS
octets), and were not an integral number of octets in length or had a bad FCS.
etherStatsOctets The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the
network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Table 11-161 Gigabit Ethernet RMON Variables (continued)
Variable Description
Purpose This task changes the optical transport network (OTN) settings for the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-421
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709
Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-162 through 11-165.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM independently. To
do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-162 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 11-163 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > ITU-T G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 11-162 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number and
description:
3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk). 10GE_XP and
10GE_XPE cards
21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk). GE_XP and
GE_XPE cards
ITU-T G.709
OTN
Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines to forward error
correction (FEC).
• Standard
• Enhanced
SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Table 11-163 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number
and description:
3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk). 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE
cards
21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk). GE_XP and GE_XPE
cards
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
11-422
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-164 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 11-165 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
Table 11-163 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Table 11-164 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number and
description:
3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk). 10GE_XP and
10GE_XPE cards
21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk). GE_XP and
GE_XPE cards
Bit Errors
Corrected
Sets the value for bit errors corrected. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Sets the value for uncorrectable words. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Table 11-165 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPECard Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 2
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
11-423
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to
the downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Table 11-165 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPECard Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Purpose This procedure adds a GE_XP or 10GE_XP card on a FAPS ring.
Tools/Equipment Installed GE_XP or 10GE_XP cards.
11-424
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP
card on a FAPS ring. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G687 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Facing Master Card on a FAPS Ring, page 11-424
• DLP-G688 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Between the Slave Cards on a FAPS Ring, page 11-425
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G687 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Facing Master Card on a FAPS Ring
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP
card on a FAPS ring.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card is installed according to the requirements specified in
Table 14-7 on page 14-109.
Step 3 Insert the new GE-XP card with XFP on the slot.
Step 4 Change the GE_XP card mode to L2-over-DWDM. See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149.
Step 5 Create and store an SVLAN database on the new GE_XP card. See the DLP-G421 Create and Store an
SVLAN Database, page 16-79.
Step 6 Enable FAPS protection on the new card.
Step 7 Attach SVLAN to the trunk ports of the new card.
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
“NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card
Mode, page 11-149
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure adds a GE_XP or 10GE_XP card that faces the master card
on a FAPS ring.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-425
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 8 Choose OOS,DSBLD from the Admin State column for port 22 on the master card that is facing toward
the new card. This action places port 22 in the blocking state and port 21 in the forwarding state.
FAPS configuration mismatch alarm is raised on the master card.
Step 9 Switch the traffic to the protect path.
Step 10 Choose OOS,DSBLD from the Admin State column for port 21 on the slave card that is facing toward
the new card.
Step 11 Connect the fiber from the slave card (that is facing toward the new card) to the new card in segment B.
Step 12 Connect the fiber from the master card to the new card in segment A.
Step 13 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 21 on the slave card that is facing toward the new card.
Step 14 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 22 on the new card to bring up segment B.
Step 15 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 21 on the new card.
Note The FAPS state of the new card will be in the forwarding state for both the ports and port 21 of
the slave card will be in the blocking state.
Step 16 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 22 on the master card to bring up segment A.
Note The FAPS state of port 21 on the master card will be in the blocking state and port 22 will be in
the forwarding state. The trunk ports of the remaining GE_XP cards will be in the forwarding
state. The port 21 of the slave card (that is facing toward the new card) will change to the
forwarding state.
Step 17 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G688 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Between the Slave Cards on a FAPS Ring
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP
card on a FAPS ring.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card is installed according to the requirements specified in
Table 14-7 on page 14-109.
Step 3 Insert the new GE-XP card with XFP on the slot.
Purpose This procedure adds a GE_XP or 10GE_XP card between the two slave
cards on a FAPS ring.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-426
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Change the GE_XP card mode to L2-over-DWDM. See the DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode, page 11-149.
Step 5 Create and store an SVLAN database on the new GE_XP card. See the DLP-G421 Create and Store an
SVLAN Database, page 16-79.
Step 6 Attach SVLAN to the trunk ports of the new card.
Step 7 Choose OOS,DSBLD from the Admin State column for port 22 on both the slave cards that are facing
toward the new card.
Step 8 Connect the fiber from the slave card to the new card in segment B.
Step 9 Connect the fiber from the master card to the new card in segment A.
Step 10 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 22 on the slave card.
Step 11 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 22 on the new card to bring up segment B.
Step 12 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 21 on the new card.
Step 13 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 21 on the slave card to bring up segment A.
Step 14 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the card settings. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card.
Step 4 Verify the card mode:
a. Display the OTU2_XP card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
c. Verify that the card mode is set to the mode designated by your site plan:
– Transponder
Purpose This procedure changes line settings, PM parameters, and threshold setting
for the OTU2_XP card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode, page 11-151
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-427
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
– Standard Regen
– Enhanced FEC
– Mixed
– 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy
If the card mode is set correctly, continue with Step 6. If not, complete the “DLP-G452 Change the
OTU2_XP Card Mode” task on page 11-151.
Step 5 Refer to the “11.16.5 OTU2_XP Card Configuration Rules” section on page 11-103 before performing
any task listed in Step 6.
Step 6 Perform any of the following tasks as needed.
• DLP-G453 Change the OTU2_XP Card Settings, page 11-427
• DLP-G454 Change the OTU2_XP Line Settings, page 11-428
• DLP-G455 Change the OTU2_XP Line Section Trace Settings, page 11-432
• DLP-G456 Change the OTU2_XP Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads, page 11-433
• DLP-G457 Provision the OTU2_XP Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-435
• DLP-G462 Change the OTU2_XP Line RMON Thresholds for the 10G Ethernet and 10G FC
Payloads, page 11-437
• DLP-G458 Change the OTU2_XP OTN Settings, page 11-440
• DLP-G523 Change the OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings, page 11-446
• DLP-G524 Provision the OTU2_XP Path Settings for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy
Configuration, page 11-447
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G453 Change the OTU2_XP Card Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where
you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tab.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-166.
Purpose This task changes the card settings for the OTU2_XP card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-428
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G454 Change the OTU2_XP Line Settings
Table 11-166 OTU2_XP Card Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Card
Configuration
Sets the card configuration. • Transponder
• Standard Regen
• Enhanced FEC
• Mixed
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
to WAN Phy
• Transponder
• Standard Regen
• Enhanced FEC
• Mixed
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
to WAN Phy
Port Mode Sets the port configuration when the card
configuration is set as Mixed. For card
configurations other than Mixed, this is a
display-only parameter. You can configure
Ports 2 and 4 as port mode, when the card is in
10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode.
• Transponder
• Standard Regen
• Transponder
• Standard Regen
Termination
Mode
Sets the mode of operation. (This option is
only available for SONET/SDH payloads). For
Standard Regen and Enhanced FEC card
configurations, this is a display-only
parameter.
• Transparent
• Section
• Line
• Transparent
• Regeneration Section
(RS)
• Multiplex Section (MS)
Framing Type (Display only) The card framing type, either
SONET or SDH.
— —
AIS/Squelch Sets the transparent termination mode
configuration.
• AIS
• Squelch
• AIS
• Squelch
Regen Line
Name
Sets the regeneration line name. — —
ODU
Transparency
Sets the ODU overhead byte configuration. For
Transponder card configuration, this is a
display-only parameter.
• Transparent Standard
Use
• Cisco Extended Use
• Transparent Standard
Use
• Cisco Extended Use
Proactive
Protection
Regen
Enables or disables the proactive protection
regen mode.
• Enable
• Disable
• Enable
• Disable
Purpose This task changes the line settings for OTU2_XP card.
Tools/Equipment None
11-429
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where
you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports/SONET/Ethernet tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-167.
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-167 OTU2_XP Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number.
• 1-1 (OC192/10G Ethernet WAN
Phy/10G Ethernet LAN
Phy/10G FC)
• 2-1 (OC192/10G Ethernet WAN
Phy/10G Ethernet LAN
Phy/10G FC)
• 3-1 (OC192/10G Ethernet WAN
Phy/10G Ethernet LAN
Phy/10G FC)
• 4-1 (OC192/10G Ethernet WAN
Phy/10G Ethernet LAN
Phy/10G FC)
• IB_5G
• 1-1 (STM-64/10G Ethernet
WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN
Phy/10G FC)
• 2-1 (STM-64/10G Ethernet
WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN
Phy/10G FC)
• 3-1 (STM-64/10G Ethernet
WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN
Phy/10G FC)
• 4-1 (STM-64/10G Ethernet
WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN
Phy/10G FC)
• IB_5G
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the
specified port a name.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/special characters.
Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name
to a Port” task on page 16-16.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service state. For
more information about
administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service
States document.
• IS
• IS,AINS
• OOS,DSBLD
• OOS,MT
• Unlocked
• Unlocked,automaticInService
• Locked,disabled
• Locked,maintenance
Service State (Display only) Identifies the
autonomously generated state
that gives the overall condition
of the port. Service states appear
in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more
information about service states,
see the Administrative and
Service States document.
• IS-NR
• OOS-AU,AINS
• OOS-MA,DSBLD
• OOS-MA,MT
• Unlocked-enabled
• Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• Locked-enabled,disabled
• Locked-enabled,maintenance
11-430
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The
DWDM transmitter supports
ALS according to ITU-T G.644
(06/99). ALS can be disabled, or
it can be set for one of three
mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off;
the laser is not automatically
shut down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the
laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS)
occur. It automatically restarts
when the conditions that caused
the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the
laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS)
occur. However, the laser must
be manually restarted when
conditions that caused the
outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the laser for
testing.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off;
the laser is not automatically
shut down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the
laser automatically shuts
down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur. It automatically
restarts when the conditions
that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on;
the laser automatically shuts
down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur. However, the
laser must be manually
restarted when conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the laser for
testing.
Reach Displays the optical reach
distance of the client/trunk ports.
The Reach options depend on the
traffic type that has been selected.
The Reach options depend on the
traffic type that has been selected.
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the
client/trunk ports.
• First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 850 nm
through 1610 nm, 100-GHz ITU
spacing; coarse wavelength
division multiplexing (CWDM)
spacing
Note Supported wavelengths are
marked by asterisks (**).
• First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 850 nm
through 1610 nm, 100-GHz
ITU spacing; CWDM spacing
Note Supported wavelengths are
marked by asterisks (**).
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service
soak period. Double-click the
time and use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in
hh.mm format, after which the
card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
• Duration of valid input signal,
in hh.mm format, after which
the card becomes IS
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
SF BER (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI]
only) Sets the signal fail bit error
rate.
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
Table 11-167 OTU2_XP Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-431
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
SD BER (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI]
only) Sets the signal degrade bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Type (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI]
only) The optical transport type.
• SONET
• SDH
Note When Type is set to SDH in a
SONET (ANSI)
provisioning, SDCC or
LDCC on OTU2_XP cards
cannot be provisioned.
• SONET
• SDH
MTU The maximum size of the
Ethernet frames accepted by the
port. The port must be in
OOS/locked state.
• 1548 bytes
• Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
• 1548 bytes
• Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
Incoming
MAC Address
Sets the incoming MAC address. Value of MAC address. Six bytes in
hexadecimal format.
Value of MAC address. Six bytes
in hexadecimal format.
Flow Control
(Only when
the card is in
10G Ethernet
LAN Phy to
WAN Phy
mode)
Enables/disables flow control
messaging with its peer port.
When enabled, the port can send
and receive PAUSE frames when
buffer congestion occurs. When
disabled, no PAUSE frames are
transmitted and the PAUSE
frames received are discarded.
• ON (default)—Flow control is
enabled.
• OFF—Flow control is disabled.
• ON (default)—Flow control is
enabled.
• OFF—Flow control is
disabled.
Client
Distance
(Only when
the card is in
10G Ethernet
LAN Phy to
WAN Phy
mode)
Sets the fiber distance between
the client of OTU2_XP card and
the LAN port that is connected to
the OTU2_XP client port.
• 10 km (default)
• 30 km
• 10 km (default)
• 30 km
Table 11-167 OTU2_XP Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-432
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G455 Change the OTU2_XP Line Section Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where
you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-168.
Purpose This task changes the line section trace settings for the OTU2_XP card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-168 OTU2_XP Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1-1 (OC192)
• 2-1 (OC192)
• 3-1 (OC192)
• 4-1 (OC192)
• 1-1 (STM-64)
• 2-1 (STM-64)
• 3-1 (STM-64)
• 4-1 (STM-64)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
• Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If a TIM on Section overhead alarm
arises because of a J0 overhead string
mismatch, no alarm indication signal
is sent to downstream nodes if this box
is checked.
This is a display-only parameter under
the following conditions:
• Received Trace Mode is Off/None
• Termination Mode is set to
Transparent or Section (see the
“DLP-G453 Change the
OTU2_XP Card Settings” task on
page 11-427)
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S
is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
11-433
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G456 Change the OTU2_XP Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where
you want to change the line threshold settings.
Transmit Displays the current transmit string;
sets a new transmit string. You can
click the button on the right to change
the display. Its title changes, based on
the current display mode. Click Hex to
change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string;
sets a new expected string. You can
click the button on the right to change
the display. Its title changes, based on
the current display mode. Click Hex to
change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh
to manually refresh this display, or
check the Auto-refresh check box to
automatically refresh the display every
5 seconds.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked (default) Checked/unchecked (default)
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for the OTU2_XP card
carrying SONET or SDH payload.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-168 OTU2_XP Section Trace Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-434
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Note If you have enabled 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy on the OTU2_XP card, the STS option is
automatically enabled.
Only near end STS thresholds are supported. No STS thresholds are support for Far End.
Step 3 Modify any of the OTU2_XP card path threshold settings on a LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, as seen in
Table 11-169.
Step 4 Modify any of the OTU2_XP Card Line Threshold settings described in Table 11-170
Table 11-169 OTU2_XP Card Path Threshold Settings on a 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Mode
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Port
number.
• Ports 3-1 (Trunk), STS-1
• Ports 4-1 (Trunk), STS-1
• Port 3-1 (Trunk), VC4-1
• Port 4-1 (Trunk), VC4-1
Table 11-170 OTU2_XP Card Line Threshold Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1-1 (OC192)
• 2-1 (OC192)
• 3-1 (OC192)
• 4-1 (OC192)
• 1-1 (STM-64)
• 2-1 (STM-64)
• 3-1 (STM-64)
• 4-1 (STM-64)
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—(Near end only) Line or
Section
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—(Near end only) Multiplex
Section or Regeneration Section
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—(Near end only) Line or
Section
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—(Near end only) Multiplex
Section or Regeneration Section
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-435
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G457 Provision the OTU2_XP Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—(Near end only) Line or
Section
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—(Near end only) Multiplex
Section or Regeneration Section
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—(Near end only) Line or
Section
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—(Near end only) Multiplex
Section or Regeneration Section
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—(Near end only) Line or
Section
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—(Near end only) Multiplex
Section or Regeneration Section
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Purpose This task provisions the OTU2_XP port alarm and threshold crossing alert
(TCA) thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-170 OTU2_XP Card Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
11-436
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where
you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, select it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Refer to Table 11-171 to provision the port TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX
Power High, and TX Power Low.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Refer to Table 11-172 to provision the port alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX
Power High, and TX Power Low.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Table 11-171 OTU2_XP Port TCA Thresholds
Port
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
1-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN
Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G
FC/IB_5G)
1.0 dBm –14.0 dBm 5.0 dBm –12.0 dBm
2-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN
Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G
FC/IB_5G)
1.0 dBm –14.0 dBm 5.0 dBm –12.0 dBm
3-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN
Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G
FC/IB_5G)
1.0 dBm –14.0 dBm 5.0 dBm –12.0 dBm
4-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN
Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G
FC/IB_5G)
1.0 dBm –14.0 dBm 5.0 dBm –12.0 dBm
11-437
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G462 Change the OTU2_XP Line RMON Thresholds for the 10G Ethernet and 10G FC Payloads
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where
you want to change the line threshold in the card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 11-173 and Table 11-174 for
a list of available Ethernet variables.
Table 11-172 OTU2_XP Port Alarm Thresholds
Port
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
1-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN
Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G
FC/IB_5G)
3.0 dBm –16.0 dBm 1.0 dBm –8.0 dBm
2-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN
Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G
FC/IB_5G)
3.0 dBm –16.0 dBm 1.0 dBm –8.0 dBm
3-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN
Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G
FC/IB_5G)
3.0 dBm –16.0 dBm 1.0 dBm –8.0 dBm
4-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN
Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G
FC/IB_5G)
3.0 dBm –16.0 dBm 1.0 dBm –8.0 dBm
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for OTU2_XP card carrying
the 10G Ethernet or 10G FC payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-173 OTU2_XP Card 10G Ethernet Variables
Variable Description
11-438
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ifInOctets Total number of octets received on the interface, including
framing characters.
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets. rxTotalPkts increments for 10G
FC payload packets with FCS errors. However, 10G Ethernet
LAN Phy payload packets with CRC errors are not counted.
ifInMulticastPkts Number of multicast frames received error free.
ifInBroadcastPkts Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to an higher sublayer,
that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.
ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them
from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
dot3StatsFCSErrors Number of frames with frame check errors, that is, there is an
integral number of octets, but an incorrect Frame Check Sequence
(FCS).
etherStatsUndersizePkts Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets
long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were
otherwise well formed.
etherStatsFragments Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had
either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or
a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment
Error). Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to
increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal
occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
etherStatsPkts64Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that
were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that
were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that
were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that
were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that
were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that
were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
Table 11-173 OTU2_XP Card 10G Ethernet Variables (continued)
11-439
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
etherStatsBroadcastPkts Total number of good packets received that were directed to the
broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast
packets.
etherStatsMulticastPkts Total number of good packets received that were directed to a
multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets
directed to the broadcast address.
etherStatsOversizePkts Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and
were otherwise well formed.
etherStatsJabbers Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had
either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or
a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment
Error).
etherStatsOctets Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets)
received on the network (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
rxControlFrames Number of MAC control frames passed by the MAC sublayer to
the MAC control sublayer.
Table 11-174 OTU2_XP Card 10G FC Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Total number of octets received on the interface, including
framing characters.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of fiber channel frames received that are less than
the minimum 36-byte frame. This is inclusive of header, SOF,
EOF, and CRC with no data bytes.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Total number of fiber channel frames received that exceed the
maximum 2148-byte frame. This is inclusive of header, SOF,
EOF, CRC, and data bytes.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Total number of fiber channel frames received with CRC errors.
ifInDiscards The number of inbound packets, which were chosen to be
discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent
their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. One possible
reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer
space.1
ifOutOctets Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.1
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.1
transmitPauseFrames Number of transmitted pause frames.1
Table 11-173 OTU2_XP Card 10G Ethernet Variables (continued)
11-440
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, choose the event triggers. The available options are rising
threshold, falling threshold, or rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Enter an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Enter in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G458 Change the OTU2_XP OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where
you want to change the OTN settings.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmit packets.1
1. This variable is supported when the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode is enabled on the OTU2_XP card.
Table 11-174 OTU2_XP Card 10G FC Variables (continued)
Purpose This task changes the OTN line settings for the OTU2_XP card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-441
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs. Then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
ITU-T G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, Trail Trace Identifier, or Proactive Protection Regen.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-63 through 11-66.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and
SM and PM independently. To do so, select the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-175 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tabs.
Table 11-176 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > ITU-T G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 11-175 OTU2_XP Card OTN Lines Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
—
ITU-T G.709
OTN
Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709. Check the box to enable.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. Enhanced
FEC mode can be enabled to provide
greater range and lower bit error rate.
• Disable—FEC is off.
• Standard—Standard FEC is on.
• Enhanced—Enhanced FEC is on.
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
SF BER (Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
No Fixed Stuff Sets the insertion of stuffing bytes. This
parameter only applies to 10G Ethernet
LAN Phy signals in transponder card
configuration. This is a display-only
parameter for all other card
configurations.
When the “No Fixed Stuff” parameter is
disabled, the bit rate is 11.09 Gbps.
When the “No Fixed Stuff” parameter is
enabled, the bit rate is 11.05 Gbps.
• Disable
• Enable
11-442
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-176 OTU2_XP Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
—
ES Severely errored seconds. Two types of
thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the
SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC,
overhead management, and PM using
OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button
selects path PM using ODUk.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709
optical channel transport unit
order of k overhead frame used
for management and performance
monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the
ITU-T G.709 optical channel data
unit order of k overhead frame
unit used for path performance
monitoring.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-443
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-177 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 11-178 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Note You cannot change the Path Trail Trace Identifier settings when the OTU2_XP card is in the Standard
Regen mode, and if the ODU transparency is set to “Transparent Standard Use”.
You can change the Path Trail Trace Identifier settings when the OTU2_XP card is in the Standard Regen
mode, and if the ODU transparency is set to “Cisco Extended Use”.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 11-176 OTU2_XP Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 11-177 OTU2_XP Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
—
Bit Errors
Corrected
Displays the number of bit errors
corrected during the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Displays the number of uncorrectable
words in the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or one-day intervals.
Table 11-178 OTU2_XP Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. —
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
11-444
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-179 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Proactive Protection Regen tabs.
Note Proactive protection regen is supported on ports of OTU2_XP only in Standard Regen and Enhanced
FEC mode.
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to
the downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
enabled)
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)
Table 11-178 OTU2_XP Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-445
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Table 11-179 OTU2_XP Card Proactive Protection Regen Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and name (optional).
—
Trigger
threshold
Sets the maximum BER threshold to
trigger proactive protection.
• 1E-3
• 9E-4 to 1E-4
• 9E-5 to 1E-5
• 9E-6 to 1E-6
• 9E-7 to 1E-7
Trigger
window (ms)
Sets the duration for which BER is
monitored before triggering the proactive
protection.
The trigger window value must be a
multiple of:
• 10 ms for trigger thresholds between
1E-3 and 6E-6
• 100 ms for trigger threshold between
5E-6 to 1E-7
Trigger window must be less than or
equal to 10000 ms.
Time in milliseconds.
Revert
Threshold
Sets the revert threshold value of BER.
Note Revert Threshold settings must be
less than the Trigger Threshold
values.
• 1E-4
• 9E-5 to 1E-5
• 9E-6 to 1E-6
• 9E-7 to 1E-7
• 9E-8 to 5E-8
Revert window
(ms)
Sets the duration for which BER is
monitored for settings that are less than
the revert threshold value before which
proactive protection provided to the
router is removed.
Revert Window value must be at least
2000ms and a multiple of:
• 10ms for a Revert Threshold of 1E-4
to 6E-7
• 100ms for a Revert Threshold of
5E-7 to 5E-8.
The revert window must be less than or
equal to 10000ms.
Time in milliseconds.
11-446
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G523 Change the OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where
you want to change the path trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Path> J1 Path Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-180.
Purpose This task changes the path trace settings for the OTU2_XP card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-180 OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port Sets the port number. • 3-1 (OC192)
• 4-1 (OC192)
• 3-1 (STM-64)
• 4-1 (STM-64)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
• Off/None
• Manual
Transmit Displays the current transmit
string; sets a new transmit
string. You can click the
button on the right to change
the display. Its title changes,
based on the current display
mode. Click Hex to change
the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
11-447
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G524 Provision the OTU2_XP Path Settings for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Configuration
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where
you want to change the path settings.
Expected Displays the current expected
string; sets a new expected
string. You can click the
button on the right to change
the display. Its title changes,
based on the current display
mode. Click Hex to change
the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the
current received string. You
can click Refresh to manually
refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh check box to
automatically refresh the
display every 5 seconds.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically
refreshes the display every 5
seconds.
Checked/unchecked
(default)
Checked/unchecked
(default)
Table 11-180 OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Purpose This task changes the path settings of the OTU2_XP card for 10G Ethernet
LAN Phy to WAN Phy configuration.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-448
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Path > SONET/SDH tab. You can now provision the SF BER and SD BER
values.
Step 3 Modify any of the OTU2_XP path settings described in Table 11-181.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings
Note The automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function is normally disabled for TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, and AR_XP cards. Enable ALS only when the cards are
directly connected to each other.
Note ALS is applicable only for OCn and OTN payloads.
Table 11-181 OTU2_XP Path Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port Sets the port number. • Port 3-1 (trunk)
• Port 4-1 trunk
• Port 3-1 (trunk)
• Port 4-1 trunk
SF BER Sets the signal fail bit
error rate (SONET [ANSI]
or SDH [ETSI]).
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit
error rate (SONET [ANSI]
or SDH [ETSI]).
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Purpose This procedure changes the ALS maintenance settings for the TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, and
AR_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-449
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, or AR_XP card where you want to change the
ALS maintenance settings.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-182. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table.
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message displays. Click Yes to complete the change.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Table 11-182 ALS Settings
Parameter Description Options
ALS Mode Automatic laser shutdown. ALS provides
the ability to shut down the TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, and
AR_XP TX laser when the card detects an
LOS.
From the drop-down list, choose one
of the following:
• Disable—Deactivates ALS.
• Auto Restart—(Default) ALS is
active. The power is
automatically shut down when
needed and automatically tries to
restart using a probe pulse until
the cause of the failure is
repaired.
• Manual Restart
• Manual Restart for Test
Recovery Pulse
Duration
(Display only) Displays the duration of
the optical power pulse that begins when
an amplifier restarts.
—
Recovery Pulse
Interval
(Display only) Displays the interval
between optical power pulses.
—
Currently
Shutdown
(Display only) Displays the current status
of the laser.
—
Request Laser
Restart
If checked, allows you to restart the laser
for maintenance.
Checked or unchecked
11-450
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G192 Force FPGA Update
Note Perform Step 1 through Step 4 if you are updating the node software. Otherwise continue with Step 5 to
force FPGA image upgrade on MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card.
Step 1 Close the CTC window, if open.
Step 2 Delete the CTC Cache from the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 3 Close the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 4 Relaunch the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card to be upgraded.
Step 6 For all ports being provisioned on the card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Disabled (ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 7 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 8 Change the Card Mode as needed:
• FC-GE_ISC—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G
(Ports 1-1 through 4-1), FC2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1),
FICON2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports 1-1
through 4-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only).
• FC4G—Choose this option if you will provision an FC4G or FICON4G PPM (Port 1-1 only).
Step 9 Click the Force FPGA Update button. This upgrades the FPGA image in the MXP_MR_10DME_C or
MXP_MR_10DME_L card, as appropriate. The MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card
reboots and the FPGA now contains the updated image.
Step 10 For all ports being provisioned on the card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure forces an upgrade of the FPGA image on the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-451
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group
Note This procedure applies to a near-end node that has two MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L
cards, one card acting as the working card and the other as the protect card. The far-end node has a
similar configuration. The near-end working card trunk port is connected to the far-end working card
trunk port. The near-end protect card trunk port is connected to the far-end protect card trunk port.
Note Perform Step 1 through Step 4 if you are updating the node software. Otherwise, continue with Step 5
to force FPGA image upgrade on MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card.
Step 1 Close the CTC window, if open.
Step 2 Delete the CTC Cache from the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 3 Close the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 4 Relaunch the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 5 Ensure traffic is running on the near-end and far-end working cards for each protection group on the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card.
Step 6 In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Protection tab.
Step 7 For each protection group, verify that the working card client port is reported as working/active and the
protect card client port is reported as protect/standby.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for the far-end node.
Step 9 For each protection group on the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the “DLP-G182 Apply a
Lockout” task to prevent traffic from switching to the protect card.
Step 10 At the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the “NTP-G192 Force FPGA Update” procedure on
page 11-450 to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the protect card.
Step 11 For each protection group on the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the “DLP-G183 Clear a Lock-On
or Lockout” task to remove a lockout and return a protection group to its usual switching method.
Step 12 For each protection group on the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the “DLP-G179 Apply a Force
Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch” task to move traffic from the working to the protect card.
Step 13 At the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the “NTP-G192 Force FPGA Update” procedure on
page 11-450 to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the working card.
Purpose This procedure forces an upgrade of the FPGA image on the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards when the card is
part of a protection group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-452
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 14 For each protection group on the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the “DLP-G180 Clear a Manual
or Force Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch” task to clear a Force protection switch on the working
card. If the protection group is revertive, this operation causes the traffic to revert to the working card.
If the protection group is non-revertive, this operation causes the traffic to remain on the protect card.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10EX_C,
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to enable error decorrelator.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line> Error Decorrelator Settings tabs.
Step 3 In the Error Decorrelator Settings area, Select Enable.
Note To inter-operate with other cards, disable the error decorrelator.
Click the Provisioning > Line> Error Decorrelator Settings tabs and then select Disable.
NTP-G315 Enable or Disable the Wavelength Drifted Channel Automatic Shutdown Feature
Step 1 In the node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Defaults tabs. The Node Defaults page opens.
Purpose This task enables error decorrelator on a TXP_MR_10EX_C,
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure allows you to enable or disable the wavelength drifted
channel automatic shutdown feature for 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C,
80-WXC-C, 40-WXC-C, and 40-WSS-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-453
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 2 Select the card from the Defaults Selector pane where you want to enable or disable the wavelength
drifted channel automatic shutdown feature.
Step 3 Select the .config.card.WavelengthDrift from the Default Name column. Choose Disable or
Enable from the Default Value drop-down list for the selected card.
For example, if you select 40-SMR2-C card from the Defaults Selector folder, the Default Name column
reads “40-SMR2-C.config.card.WavelengthDrift”.
Step 4 Click Apply to save changes.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G316 Enable REP and FAPS on the same port
Note The FAPS master node on the edge ring should never be the node that has a common FAPS and REP port.
You can configure REP and FAPS on port 22 and 21 for GE_XP cards, and port 4 and 3 for 10GE_XP
cards.
Step 1 To enable REP, complete the following procedures:
a. DLP-G645 Create a Segment Using CTC, page 11-375
b. DLP-G647 Activate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC, page 11-378
Step 2 To enable FAPS, complete the DLP-G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
Layer 2 Protection Settings, page 11-393.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This task allows you enable REP and FAPS on the same port for the
GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-454
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
NTP-G321 Provision Multiple Operating Modes on AR_MXP or AR_XP Cards
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > Cards tabs.
Step 2 In the Cards tab, click Create. The Operating Mode Configuration Creation window appears.
Step 3 From the Card Config Rate Selection section, select Low Rate Mode or High Rate Mode.
Step 4 In the Card Config Selection section:
a. Choose the Operating Mode from the drop-down list.
The Operating Mode options vary depending on the Card Type (AR_MXP or AR_XP) and Card
Config Rate Selection.
b. For MXP_DME and MXPP_DME card modes, choose the Client Trunk Mapping from the
drop-down list. For other card modes, CTC automatically selects the client trunk mapping.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 Select the appropriate trunk port that is available and click Next.
Step 7 Select the appropriate client port that is available and click Finish.
The selected operating mode is provisioned on the AR_MXP or AR_XP card.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G322 Modify the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Purpose This procedure enables you to provision multiple operating modes on the
AR_MXP or AR_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152
• DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure changes the line and PM parameter threshold settings of the
AR_MXP or AR_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
11-455
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to change the AR_MXP or
AR_XP card line and PM threshold settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G695 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line Settings, page 11-456
• DLP-G696 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Ethernet Settings, page 11-458
• DLP-G697 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card SONET/SDH Settings, page 11-459
• DLP-G698 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Section Trace Settings, page 11-462
• DLP-G699 Enable Auto Sensing for AR_MXP or AR_XP Cards, page 11-464
• DLP-G700 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card SONET/SDH Line Thresholds, page 11-464
• DLP-G701 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line RMON Thresholds, page 11-467
• DLP-G702 Provision the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card with Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-471
• DLP-G703 Provision the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 11-472
• DLP-G704 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card OTN Settings, page 11-476
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see the
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management document.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards,
page 14-69
• DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary)
• DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if
necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-456
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G695 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the AR_MXP or AR_XP
card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM
provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the line settings in the Ports tab as described in Table 11-183.
Purpose This task changes the line settings of the AR_MXP or AR_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-183 AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 1 through 10
Port Name Assigns a logical name for the specified
port.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special
characters, or both. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Note You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber
channel/FICON interface on the AR_MXP or AR_XP
card, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create
a link association between that SAN port and a SAN
port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see
the Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,AutomaticInService (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall
condition of the port. Service states appear
in the format: Primary State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary State. For more
information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance
(ETSI)
11-457
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. • Disabled (default)— ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outage or loss of
signal (LOS) occurs.
• Manual Restart— ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts
down when traffic outage or loss of signal (LOS) occurs.
However, the laser must be manually restarted when
conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test— Manually restarts the laser for
testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and
down arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after
which the card state changes to in service (IS)
automatically.
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments.
Reach Sets the optical reach distance of the client
port.
The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list depend
on the card:
• Autoprovision—The system automatically provisions the
reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value
on the hardware.
• I1—Intermediate reach
• S1—Short reach, up to 15-km distance
• S2—Short reach up to 40-km distance
• L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
• L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
• L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
• CWDM— CWDM Reach
• MM—
• ULH—Ultra long-haul (ULH)
• DWDM—DWDM Reach
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
– 850 nm through 1561.83 nm
– 100-GHz ITU spacing
– CWDM spacing
Squelch Shuts down the far-end laser in response to
certain defects. (Squelch does not apply to
ISC COMPACT payloads.)
• G AIS
• Squelch
• None
Termination
Mode
Sets the mode of operation. (This option is
only available for SONET/SDH payloads).
• Transparent
Table 11-183 AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-458
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G696 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Ethernet Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the AR_MXP or AR_XP
card where you want to change the Ethernet settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ethernet tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the Ethernet settings in the Ethernet tab as described in Table 11-184. The parameters that
appear depend on the card mode.
Purpose This task changes the Ethernet settings of the AR_MXP or AR_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-184 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card Ethernet Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number (n-n) and rate.
— —
Port Name (Display only) Displays the port
Name.
— —
MTU Sets the maximum size of the
Ethernet frames accepted by the port.
The port must be in OOS/locked
state.
Numeric. Default: 9700
Range 64 to 9700 (for R9.4 and later)
Numeric. Default: 9700
Range 64 to 9700 (for R9.4
and later)
Speed Sets the expected speed of the ports. 100 Mbps for FE ports and
1000 Mbps for GE ports
100 Mbps for FE ports and
1000 Mbps for GE ports
Duplex (Display only) Displays expected
duplex capability of ports.
Full Full
Auto
negotiation
If checked, enables autonegotiation
on the same port.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card
parameter. If checked, the card is
provisioned as a network element
(NE) timing reference.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
11-459
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G697 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card SONET/SDH Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the AR_MXP or AR_XP
card where you want to change the SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs. Tabs and parameter selections
vary according to PPM provisioning.
SyncMsgIn Sets the EnableSync card parameter.
Enables synchronization status
messages (S1 byte), which allow the
node to choose the best timing
source.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Admin SSM
In
Overrides the synchronization status
message (SSM) and the
synchronization traceability
unknown (STU) value. If the node
does not receive an SSM signal, it
defaults to STU.
• PRS—Primary Reference
Source (Stratum 1)
• ST2—Stratum 2
• TNC—Transit node clock
• ST3E—Stratum 3E
• ST3—Stratum 3
• SMC—SONET minimum clock
• ST4—Stratum 4
• DUS—Do not use for timing
synchronization
• RES—Reserved; quality level
set by user
• G811—Primary
reference clock
• STU—Sync traceability
unknown
• G812T—Transit node
clock traceable
• G812L—Local node
clock traceable
• SETS—Synchronous
equipment
• DUS—Do not use for
timing synchronization
Termination
Mode
(Display-only for Standard
Regeneration and Enhanced FEC
card configurations) Sets the mode of
operation.
— —
Send
DoNotUse
When checked, sends a DUS
message on the S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Video Type Video — —
Purpose This task changes the SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) settings of the
AR_MXP or AR_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-184 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card Ethernet Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
11-460
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-185.
Table 11-185 AR_MXP or AR_XP Card SONET/SDH Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 9 (Trunk)
Port Name Assign a name for the specified port. User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or
special characters, or both. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information about
service states, see the Administrative and Service
States document.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER1 Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER1 Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Type Sets the optical transport type. • SONET (ANSI)
• SDH (ETSI)
11-461
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or
enabled for one of the three mode options.
• Disabled (default)—ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outage or loss
of signal (LOS) occurs.
• Auto Restart—ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outage or loss of signal
(LOS) occurs. It automatically restarts when the
conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart—ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outage or loss of signal
(LOS) occurs. However, the laser must be manually
restarted when conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test—Manually restarts the laser
for testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card state changes to in service (IS)
automatically.
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments.
ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If
checked, the card is provisioned as a NE timing
reference.
Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgIn Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables
synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked
Admin SSM In Overrides the synchronization status message
(SSM) and the synchronization traceability
unknown (STU) value. If the node does not
receive an SSM signal, it defaults to STU.
STU
Table 11-185 AR_MXP or AR_XP Card SONET/SDH Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-462
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G698 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Section Trace Settings
Reach Sets the optical reach distance of the client port. The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list
depend on the card:
• Autoprovision—The system to automatically
provision the reach from the pluggable port module
(PPM) reach value on the hardware.
• I1/IR1—Intermediate Reach
• S1/SR1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km distance
• S2/SR2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km distance
• L1/LR1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
• L2/LR2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
• L3/LR3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
• CWDM—CWDM Reach
• MM
• SR—Short Reach
• ULH—Ultra long-haul (ULH)
• DWDM—DWDM Reach
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
– 850 nm through 1561.83 nm
– 100-GHz ITU spacing
– CWDM spacing
1. SF BER and SD BER thresholds apply only to trunk ports.
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings of the AR_MXP or AR_XP
cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-185 AR_MXP or AR_XP Card SONET/SDH Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-463
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the AR_MXP or AR_XP
card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to
PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Section Trace tab as described in Table 11-186.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 11-186 AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • Client Ports (1-8)
Received
Trace Mode
Sets the received trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If a TIM on section overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string or sets a new transmit string.
Click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change
the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string or sets a new expected string.
Click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change
the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
Note For OCn and OTU traces, the junk squares appear in the
New Expected String field when you click the default
button. Ignore the junk squares that appear in the New
Expected String field.
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. Click
Refresh to manually refresh this display, or select the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. Checked or unchecked (default)
11-464
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G699 Enable Auto Sensing for AR_MXP or AR_XP Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the AR_MXP or AR_XP
card where you want to enable auto sensing.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Auto Ports tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM
provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Auto Ports tab as described in Table 11-187.
DLP-G700 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card SONET/SDH Line Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the AR_MXP or AR_XP
card where you want to change the SONET/SDH line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as shown in Table 11-188.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Purpose This task enables the auto sensing for AR_MXP or AR_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-187 AR_MXP or AR_XP Auto Sensing Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. Client Ports (1-8)
Auto Sensing If checked, enables auto sensing. Checked or Unchecked
Actual Port
Type
Displays the auto-sensed signal type. —
Purpose This task changes the SONET/SDH line threshold settings of AR_MXP or
AR_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-465
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
I
Table 11-188 AR_MXP or AR_XP Card SONET/SDH Line Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
Port (Display only)
Displays the port
number.
• Client Ports (1-8) • Client Ports (1-8)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block.
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
11-466
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 11-188 AR_MXP or AR_XP Card SONET/SDH Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
11-467
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
DLP-G701 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line RMON Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the AR_MXP or AR_XP
card where you want to change the line RMON threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port, either the payload port, for example “1-1
(ONE_GE)”, or the equivalent ITU-T G.7041 GFP (Generic Frame Procedure) port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet, FC, FICON, or ISC variable. See Table 11-189
for a list of available Ethernet variables, Table 11-190 for a list of FC and FICON variables,
Table 11-191 for a list of ISC and ISC3 variables, and Table 11-192 for a list of GFP variables.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for AR_MXP or AR_XP cards
carrying Ethernet, FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-189 AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Ethernet Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
ifInUcastPkts Number of packets delivered by this sublayer to a higher
sublayer that are not addressed to a multicast or broadcast
address.
ifInMulticastPkts Number of packets delivered by this sublayer to a higher
sublayer that are addressed to a multicast address. For a
MAC layer protocol, this includes both group and
functional addresses.
ifInBroadcastPkts Number of packets delivered by this sublayer to a higher
sublayer that are addressed to a broadcast address.
ifInErrors Total number of received errors.
ifOutOctets Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
IfOutUcastPkts Total count of good frames transmitted to a unicast group
destination address.
11-468
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
ifOutMulticastPkts Total number of packets that higher-level protocols
requested to be transmitted, which were addressed to a
multicast address at this sublayer. These include packets
that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol,
this includes both group and functional addresses.
ifOutBroadcastPkts Total number of packets that higher-level protocols
requested to be transmitted, which were addressed to a
broadcast address at this sublayer. These include packets
that were discarded or not sent.
dot3StatsFCSErrors Number of frames received on a particular interface that
are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass
the FCS check.
dot3StatsFrameTooLong Number of frames received on a particular interface that
exceed the maximum permitted frame size.
dot3StatsSymbolErrors Number of frames received on an associated RX_ER
assertion during a data reception error event (MII) or data
reception error event, or carrier extension error (GMII)
from the PCS.
dot3StatsLayer1Errors Number of Layer 1 errors as defined within the following
conditions:
• During Packet Reception—Layer 1 errors are only
counted one time per packet. The Layer 1 error is
indicated as a direct result of a line side protocol
violation in which RX_DV is asserted. This is an
uncommon event from which may be the reason why
the device loses synchronization.
• During Interpacket Reception—The Layer 1 error is
indicated as a direct result of a line side protocol
violation in which RX_DV is de-asserted. This is an
uncommon event. The Layer 1 error is also asserted on
detection of a False Carrier indication and is asserted
on detection of Erred byte (interpacket) signal
encoding. When the Layer 1 error is asserted during
inter-packet reception, it is only statistically asserted
in the vector.
etherStatsUndersizePkts Total number of packets received that were less than 64
octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS
octets) and were otherwise well formed.
etherStatsFragments Total number of packets received that were less than 64
octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets) and had either a bad FCS with an integral number
of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral
number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that it is entirely
normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is
because it counts both runts (which are normal
occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
Table 11-189 AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Ethernet Variables (continued)
11-469
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
etherStatsPkts64Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsBroadcastPkts Total number of good packets received that were directed
to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include
multicast packets.
etherStatsMulticastPkts Total number of good packets received that were directed
to a multicast address. Note that this number does not
include packets directed to the broadcast address.
etherStatsOversizePkts Total number of packets received that were longer than
1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS
octets) and were otherwise well formed.
etherStatsJabbers Total number of packets received that were longer than
1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS
octets), and had either a bad FCS with an integral number
of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral
number of octets (Alignment Error).
etherStatsOctets Total number of octets of data (including those in bad
packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits,
but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts1519tomaxOctets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received
that were 1591 octets in length (excluding framing bits, but
including FCS octets).
mediaIndStatsTXShortPkts Number of transmitted frames containing less than the
minimum permitted frame size as programmed with the
transmit MAC Min Frame Length Configuration Register.
Table 11-189 AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Ethernet Variables (continued)
11-470
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-190 AR_MXP or AR_XP FC/FICON Variables
Variable Description
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of received data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC
errors when HDLC framing is used.
mediaIndStatsRxLcvErrors Number of L1 line code violations received for lower rate
FC, which equate to invalid 8b10b ordered sets.
mediaIndStatsTxLcvErrors Number of L1 line code violations transmitted for lower
rate FC, which equate to invalid 8b10b ordered sets.
rx8b10bWords Number of Code Violations/Running Disparity errors in
the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
tx8b10bWords Number of Code Violations/Running Disparity errors in
the 8b/10b encoded characters transmitted.
Table 11-191 AR_MXP and AR_XP ISC Variables
Variable Description
mediaIndStatsRxLcvErrors Number of L1 line code violations received for constant bit
rate protocols, which equate to invalid 8b10b ordered sets.
mediaIndStatsTxLcvErrors Number of L1 line code violations transmitted for constant
bit rate protocols, which equate to invalid 8b10b ordered
sets.
Table 11-192 AR_MXP and AR_XP GFP RMON Variables
Variable Description
gfpStatsRxCRCErrors Total number of CRC errors with the receive transparent
GFP frame.
gfpStatsRxSblkCRCErrors Total number of superblock CRC errors with the receive
transparent GFP frame. A transparent GFP frame has
multiple superblocks which each contain fiber channel
data.
gfpStatsCSFRaised Number of Rx client management frames with Client
Signal Fail indication.
gfpStatsLFDRaised Number of Core HEC CRC Multiple Bit Errors.
Note This count is only for cHEC multiple bit error
when in frame. It is a count of when the state
machine goes out of frame.
11-471
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
The available options are Rising Threshold, Falling Threshold, and Both Rising and Falling Threshold
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Enter the appropriate number of seconds in the Sample Period field.
Step 9 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Rising Threshold field.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G702 Provision the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card with Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
gfpStatscHecRxMBitErrors Number of received GFP frames with single bit errors in
the core header (these errors are uncorrectable).
gfpStatstHecRxMBitErrors Number of received GFP frames with single bit errors in
the tHec (these errors are uncorrectable).
Table 11-192 AR_MXP and AR_XP GFP RMON Variables (continued)
Purpose This task provisions the AR_MXP and AR_XP card with trunk port alarm
and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
11-472
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the AR_MXP or AR_XP
card where you want to provision the trunk port alarm and TCA threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 3 If TCA is not checked, check the TCA check box and then click Refresh. If it is checked, continue with
Step 4.
Step 4 Verify if the trunk port (Port 9) TCA thresholds are set. Provision new thresholds as needed by
double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing
Enter.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify if the trunk port (Port 9) Alarm thresholds are set. Provision new thresholds as needed by
double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing
Enter.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G703 Provision the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
AR_MXP and AR_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
11-473
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the AR_MXP and
AR_XP card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 11-127, verify the TCA thresholds for client ports (ports 1 through 8) for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a AR_MXP or AR_XP card faceplate to provide a fiber
interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and
XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable I/O devices that
plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable
port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and
XFP Modules” section on page 11-142.
Table 11-193 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
PPM Port Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
FC1G ONS-SE-4G-SM
ONS-SC-2G-XX.X
ONS-SC-4G-XX.X
0 –17 3 –16
FC2G ONS-SE-4G-SM
ONS-SC-2G-XX.X
ONS-SC-4G-XX.X
0 –15 3 –16
FICON1G ONS-SE-4G-SM
ONS-SC-2G-XX.X
ONS-SC-4G-XX.X
0 –17 3 –16
FICON2G ONS-SE-4G-SM
ONS-SC-2G-XX.X
ONS-SC-4G-XX.X
0 –17 3 –16
FC4G ONS-SE-4G-SM
ONS-SC-2G-XX.X
ONS-SC-4G-XX.X
0 –12 4 –15
FICON4G ONS-SE-4G-SM
ONS-SC-2G-XX.X
ONS-SC-4G-XX.X
0 –12 4 –15
FC8G ONS-XC-8G-MM
ONS-XC-8G-SM
0 –12 4 –15
11-474
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision each additional client port.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 11-194, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is
provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to
change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
FICON8G ONS-XC-8G-MM
ONS-XC-8G-SM
0 –12 4 –15
1GE ONS-SI-GE-SX
ONS-SI-GE-LX
ONS-SI-GE-ZX
ONS-SE-ZE-EL
FE ONS-SE-GE-BXU
ONS-SE-GE-BXD
ESCON ONS-SE-200-MM
OC3/STM1 ONS-SC-155-EL
ONS-SI-155-SR-MM
ONS-SI-155-I1
ONS-SI-155-L1
ONS-SI-155-L2
OC12 ONS-SI-622-SR-MM
OC12/STM4 ONS-SI-622-I1
ONS-SI-622-L1
ONS-SI-622-L2
OC48/STM16 ONS-SI-2G-S1
ONS-SI-2G-L1
ONS-SI-2G-L2
OTU1 ONS-SI-2G-S1
ONS-SE-Z1
ONS-SI-2G-L2
ONS-SC-2G-xxxx
3G-SDI,
HD-SDI,
SD-SDI
ONS-SC-HD3GV-RX=
Table 11-193 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds (continued)
PPM Port Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
11-475
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-194 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
FC1G ONS-SE-4G-SM
ONS-SC-2G-XX.X
ONS-SC-4G-XX.X
0 –17 3 –16
FC2G ONS-SE-4G-SM
ONS-SC-2G-XX.X
ONS-SC-4G-XX.X
0 –15 3 –16
FICON1G ONS-SE-4G-SM
ONS-SC-2G-XX.X
ONS-SC-4G-XX.X
0 –17 3 –16
FICON2G ONS-SE-4G-SM
ONS-SC-2G-XX.X
ONS-SC-4G-XX.X
0 –17 3 –16
FC4G ONS-SE-4G-SM
ONS-SC-2G-XX.X
ONS-SC-4G-XX.X
0 –12 4 –15
FICON4G ONS-SE-4G-SM
ONS-SC-2G-XX.X
ONS-SC-4G-XX.X
0 –12 4 –15
FC8G ONS-XC-8G-MM
ONS-XC-8G-SM
0 –12 4 –15
FICON8G ONS-XC-8G-MM
ONS-XC-8G-SM
0 –12 4 –15
1GE ONS-SI-GE-SX
ONS-SI-GE-LX
ONS-SI-GE-ZX
ONS-SE-ZE-EL
FE ONS-SE-GE-BXU
ONS-SE-GE-BXD
ESCON ONS-SE-200-MM
OC3/STM
1
ONS-SC-155-EL
ONS-SI-155-SR-MM
ONS-SI-155-I1
ONS-SI-155-L1
ONS-SI-155-L2
OC12 ONS-SI-622-SR-MM
OC12/ST
M4
ONS-SI-622-I1
ONS-SI-622-L1
ONS-SI-622-L2
OC48/ST
M16
ONS-SI-2G-S1
ONS-SI-2G-L1
ONS-SI-2G-L2
11-476
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision each additional client port.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G704 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the AR_MXP or AR_XP
card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, Trail Trace Identifier, or Proactive Protection Regen.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-195 through 11-199.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM independently. To
do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 11-195 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
OTU1 ONS-SI-2G-S1
ONS-SE-Z1
ONS-SI-2G-L2
ONS-SC-2G-xxxx
3G-SDI,
HD-SDI,
SD-SDI
ONS-SC-HD3GV-RX=
Purpose This task changes the OTN settings for the AR_MXP and AR_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 11-194 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds (continued)
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Table 11-195 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. All client and trunk ports
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
Enabled by default
11-477
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-196 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
FEC Sets the OTN lines to forward error
correction (FEC).
• Disable
• Standard
• Enhanced-I.4
• Enhanced-I.7
SF BER (Display only) Displays the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Asynch/Synch
Mapping
Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is
mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
• Asynch mapping
• Synch mapping
OTU Mapping Sets the client payload mapping to the
trunk
• ODU1e
• ODU2e
• CBR10G
• ODU1Mux
• ODU1
ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If
checked, the card is provisioned as a NE
timing reference.
Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgIn Sets the EnableSync card parameter.
Enables synchronization status messages
(S1 byte), which allow the node to choose
the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked
Admin SSM In Overrides the synchronization status
message (SSM) and the synchronization
traceability unknown (STU) value. If the
node does not receive an SSM signal, it
defaults to STU.
STU
Send
DoNotUse
If checked, sends a DUS message on the
S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked
ODU
Transparency
Sets the ODU overhead byte
configuration.
• Transparent Standard Use
• Cisco Extended Use
Proactive
Protection
Regen
Enables or disables the proactive
protection regen mode.
• Enable
• Disable
Table 11-195 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card OTN Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-478
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-197 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 11-198 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 11-196 AR_MXP and AR_XP ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port1
1. Latency for a 1G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 4 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 40 microseconds. Latency
for a 2G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 2 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 20 microseconds. Consider these
values when planning a FC network that is sensitive to latency.
(Display only) Displays the
port number.
9 (Trunk)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select an option and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select an option and click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select an option and click Refresh.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select an option and click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select an option and click Refresh.
Table 11-197 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 2
Bit Errors
Corrected
Sets the value for bit errors corrected. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Sets the value for uncorrectable words. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Table 11-198 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 2
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
11-479
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Table 11-199 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Proactive Protection Regen tabs.
Note Proactive protection regen is supported only when the AR_MXP or AR_XP card is in high-rate REGEN
card mode.
Transmit Displays the current transmit string or
sets a new transmit string. Click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to
the downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Expected Displays the current expected string or
sets a new expected string. Click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 seconds.
Checked
Unchecked (default)
Table 11-198 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
11-480
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 4 Click Apply.
Table 11-199 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card Proactive Protection Regen Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and name (optional).
—
Trigger
threshold
Sets the maximum BER threshold to
trigger proactive protection.
• 1E-3
• 9E-4 to 1E-4
• 9E-5 to 1E-5
• 9E-6 to 1E-6
• 9E-7 to 1E-7
Trigger
window (ms)
Sets the duration for which BER is
monitored before triggering the proactive
protection.
The trigger window value must be a
multiple of:
• 10 ms for trigger thresholds between
1E-3 and 6E-6
• 100 ms for trigger threshold between
5E-6 to 1E-7
Trigger window must be less than or
equal to 10000 ms.
Time in milliseconds.
Revert
Threshold
Sets the revert threshold value of BER.
Note Revert Threshold settings must be
less than the Trigger Threshold
values.
• 1E-4
• 9E-5 to 1E-5
• 9E-6 to 1E-6
• 9E-7 to 1E-7
• 9E-8 to 5E-8
Revert window
(ms)
Sets the duration for which BER is
monitored for settings that are less than
the revert threshold value before which
proactive protection provided to the
router is removed.
Revert Window value must be at least
2000ms and a multiple of:
• 10ms for a Revert Threshold of 1E-4
to 6E-7
• 100ms for a Revert Threshold of
5E-7 to 5E-8.
The revert window must be less than or
equal to 10000ms.
Time in milliseconds.
11-481
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
11-482
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards
CH A P T E R
12-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
12
Node Reference
This chapter explains the ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) node types that
are available for the ONS 15454. The DWDM node type is determined by the type of amplifier and filter
cards that are installed in an ONS 15454. The chapter also explains the DWDM automatic power control
(APC), reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexing (ROADM) power equalization, span loss
verification, and automatic node setup (ANS) functions.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Note In this chapter, “OPT-BST” refers to the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L cards, and to the
OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-17-C cards when they are provisioned in OPT-LINE (optical booster)
mode. “OPT-PRE” refers to the OPT-PRE card and to the OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-17-C cards
provisioned in OPT-PRE (preamplifier) mode.
Note In this chapter, “RAMAN-CTP” refers to the 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP card. “RAMAN-COP” refers to
the 15454-M-RAMAN-COP card.
Note In this chapter, the “NFV view” refers to the “DWDM Network Functional View (NFV)”. The “GMPLS
view” refers to the “DWDM Network Functional View (GMPLS)”.
Chapter topics include:
• 12.1 DWDM Node Configurations, page 12-2
• 12.2 Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards, page 12-41
• 12.3 Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card, page 12-46
• 12.4 Multishelf Node, page 12-50
• 12.6 Optical Sides, page 12-52
• 12.7 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks, page 12-61
• 12.8 DWDM Node Cabling, page 12-82
• 12.9 Automatic Node Setup, page 12-98
• 12.10 DWDM Network Functional View, page 12-108
12-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
12.1 DWDM Node Configurations
The ONS 15454 supports the following DWDM node configurations: hub, terminal, optical add/drop
multiplexing (OADM), reconfigurable OADM (ROADM), anti-amplified spontaneous emission
(anti-ASE), line amplifier, optical service channel (OSC) regeneration line, multishelf nodes, and node
configurations for mesh networks. All node configurations can be provisioned with C-band or L-band
cards except the OADM and anti-ASE nodes. These nodes require AD-xB-xx.x or AD-xC-xx.x cards,
which are C-band only. All node configurations can be single-shelf or multishelf.
Note The Cisco TransportPlanner tool creates a plan for amplifier placement and proper node equipment.
Note To support multiple optical sides in mesh DWDM networks, east and west are no longer used to reference
the left and right sides of the ONS 15454 shelf. If a network running a previous software release is
upgraded to this release, west will be mapped to A and east to B. In two-sided nodes, such as a hub or
ROADM node, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6 and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17. Terminal
nodes have one side labeled “A,” regardless of which slots have cards installed. For more information
about configuring the ONS 15454 in mesh DWDM networks, see the “12.7 Configuring Mesh DWDM
Networks” section on page 12-61.
12.1.1 Terminal Node
A terminal node is a single ONS 15454 node equipped with two
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards and one of the following combinations:
• One 32MUX-O card and one 32DMX-O card
• One 32WSS card and either a 32DMX or a 32DMX-O card
• One 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE card and one 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE card
• One 40-MUX-C and one 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE card
• One 80-WXC-C card, one 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch
panel, and one 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN
(ONS 15216 40 or 48-channel mux/demux patch panel), and 15216-MD-ID-50 or
15216-MD-48-CM
• One 40-SMR1-C and one 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch
panel
• One 40-SMR2-C and one 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch
panel
Note Although it is recommended that you use the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel along with the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards, you can
alternatively use the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards instead of the 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel.
Cards in the terminal nodes can be installed in Slots 1 through 6 or Slots 12 through 17. The side where
cards are installed is always assigned as Side A.
12-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-1 shows an example of a terminal configuration with a 2MUX-O card installed. The channel
flow for a terminal node is the same as the hub node (Figure 12-31).
Figure 12-1 Terminal Node Configuration With 32MUX-O Cards Installed
Figure 12-2 shows an example of a terminal configuration with a 40-WSS-C card installed.
OPT-BST
OPT-PRE
32MUX-O
DCU
Air ramp
Available
32DMX-O
Available
OSCM
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
Available
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
AIC-I
249095
12-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-2 Terminal Node Configuration with 40-WSS-C Cards Installed
Figure 12-3 shows an example of a terminal configuration with a 40-MUX-C card installed.
OPT-BST or OSC-CSM
OPT-PRE or TXP/MXP
40-WSS-C
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
40-DMX-C
Blank or TXP/MXP
Blank or TXP/MXP
Blank or TXP/MXP
Blank or TXP/MXP
Blank or TXP/MXP
OSCM or Blank
Blank
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
AIC-I
249104
Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T
Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T
12-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-3 Terminal Node with 40-MUX-C Cards Installed
Figure 12-4 shows an example of a terminal configuration with a 40-SMR1-C card installed.
OPT-BST or OSC-CSM
OPT-PRE or TXP/MXP
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
40-MUX-C
40-DMX-C
Blank or TXP/MXP
Blank or TXP/MXP
Blank or TXP/MXP
Blank or TXP/MXP
Blank or TXP/MXP
Blank or TXP/MXP
OSCM or Blank
Blank
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
AIC-I
249105
Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T
Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T
12-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-4 Terminal Node with 40-SMR1-C Card Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6
Figure 12-5 shows an example of a terminal configuration with 40-SMR1-C and booster amplifier cards
installed.
248993
ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Fan
tray
TNC/TSC
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
Available
Available
Available
40-SMR1-C
LCD
Cisco ONS 15454 Cisco ONS 15454 M6
Available
Available
Cable
guide
Air
filter
15216 Odd Patch Panel
Booster
40-SMR1-C
DCM-xxx
Air Ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
OSCM
Empty
TCC2
AIC-I
MS-ISC
MS-ISC
15216 Odd Patch Panel
Fan Tray
Fibre Routing Panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1
1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
12-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-5 Terminal Node with 40-SMR1-C and Booster Amplifier Cards Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS
15454 M6
Note When you use the 40-SMR1-C card along with a booster amplifier, the OSCM card must be connected
to the booster amplifier.
Figure 12-6 shows an example of a terminal configuration with a 40-SMR2-C card installed.
248992
ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan
tray
TNC/TSC
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
Available
Available
40-SMR1-C
Booster (A)
LCD
Cisco ONS 15454 M6
Available
Available
Cable
guide
Air
filter
15216 Odd Patch Panel
Cisco ONS 15454
Booster
40-SMR1-C
DCM-xxx
Air Ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
OSCM
Empty
TCC2
AIC-I
MS-ISC
MS-ISC
15216 Odd Patch Panel
Fan Tray
Fibre Routing Panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1
1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
12-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-6 Terminal Node with 40-SMR2-C Card Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6
Figure 12-7 shows an example of a 80-channel terminal configuration with RAMAN-CTP and
RAMAN-COP cards installed.
248994
ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Fan
tray
TNC/TSC
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
Available
Available
Available
40-SMR2-C
LCD
Cisco ONS 15454 M6
Available
Available
Cable
guide
Air
filter
15216 Odd Patch Panel
Cisco ONS 15454
40-SMR2-C
Available
DCM-xxx
Air Ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
OSCM
Empty
TCC2
AIC-I
MS-ISC
MS-ISC
15216 Odd Patch Panel
Fan Tray
Fibre Routing Panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1
1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
12-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-7 80-Channel Terminal Node with RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards Installed - Cisco
ONS 15454 M6
12.1.2 OADM Node
An OADM node is a single ONS 15454 node equipped with cards installed on both sides and at least one
AD-xC-xx.x (or FLD-4-xx.x) card or one AD-xB-xx.x card (plus their related 4MD-xx.x cards) and two
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards. This configuration supports 32 channels. In an
OADM node, channels can be added or dropped independently from each direction and then passed
through the reflected bands of all OADMs in the DWDM node (called express path). They can also be
passed through one OADM card to another OADM card without using a TDM ITU-T line card (called
optical pass-through) if an external patchcord is installed.
Unlike express path, an optical pass-through channel can be converted later to an add/drop channel in an
altered ring without affecting another channel. OADM amplifier placement and required card placement
is determined by the Cisco TransportPlanner tool or your site plan.
OADM nodes can be amplified or passive. In amplified OADMs, booster and preamplifier cards are
installed on bode sides of the node. Figure 12-8 shows an example of an amplified OADM node
configuration. In addition, OADM nodes can be asymmetric. Amplifiers may be installed in one side,
but not the other. Or preamplifiers may be installed in one side, and a booster in the other.
246703
ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan tray
15216 Even Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
TNC/TSC
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP (A)
Line amplifier (A)
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
15454-M-RAMAN-COP (A)
80-WXC-C (A)
LCD
Preamplifier (A) Cable
guide
Air
filter
1
2
1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
2 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel
12-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-8 Amplified OADM Node Configuration Example
Figure 12-9 shows an example of the channel flow on the amplified OADM node. Since the
32-wavelength plan is based on eight bands (each band contains four channels), optical adding and
dropping can be performed at the band level and/or at the channel level (meaning individual channels
can be dropped).
OPT-BST
OPT-PRE
OADM or mux/demux
DCU
Air ramp
DCU
OADM or mux/demux
OADM or mux/demux
OADM or mux/demux
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
OSCM
OSCM
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
OADM
OADM or mux/demux
OADM or mux/demux
OPT-PRE
OPT-BST
OADM
AIC-I
249096
12-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-9 Amplified OADM Node Channel Flow Example
Specifying the number of circuits that are currently present on an amplifier that is receiving the power
directly from the15216-FLD-4 passive units (in case of an OADM node with FLD-4 cards and when an
APC domain is in passive state) enables an accurate calculation of the power gain on the amplified port.
This also ensures that the amplifier works effectively when the number of circuits is lesser than the actual
circuits provisioned (where APC does not run in those domains.
To provision the number of active circuits, in CTC go to the card view, click > Maintenance >
Manual Gain Calc tabs and enter the number of circuits currently active and then click Apply.
Changing the value forces the system to recalculate the gain in order to obtain a more suitable output
power.
You can manually provision the number of active circuits only if one of the following conditions are
satisfied:
• The amplified port that belongs to the APC domain is in passive state (an APC domain involving the
OADM with 15216-FLD-4 passive modules and the APC is disabled).
• The APC in the active domain where the APC is temporarily disabled by an alarm.
12.1.3 ROADM Node
A ROADM node adds and drops wavelengths without changing the physical fiber connections. A
ROADM node is equipped with two TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards and one of the
following combinations:
• Two 32WSS cards and either, two 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards
OPT-PRE
4-ch
demux
4MD-xx.x
OPT-PRE
OPT-BST
Line Line
96427
OPT-BST
DCU
DCU
OSCM
TCC
TCC2
OSCM
AIC-I
AD-yB-xx.x AD-1C-xx.x AD-1C-xx.x AD-yB-xx.x
By Ch Ch By
4-ch
mux
4-ch
demux
4MD-xx.x
4-ch
mux
12-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
• Two 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE cards and either, two 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE cards
• Two 40-SMR1-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD
(ONS 15216 40 or 48-channel mux/demux) patch panels
• Two 40-SMR1-C cards, two line amplifiers (OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-AMP-C, or
OPT-AMP-17C cards), two OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards, and two 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panels
• Two 40-SMR2-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panels
• Two 80-WXC-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, 15216-MD-48-ODD,
15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panels
Note Although it is recommended that you use the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel along with the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards, you can
alternatively use the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards instead of the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel.
Transponders (TXPs) and muxponders (MXPs) can be installed in Slots 6 and 12 and, if amplification is
not used, in any open slot.
Note Although not required, 32DMX-O can be used in a ROADM node. Cisco TransportPlanner automatically
chooses the demultiplexer card that is best for the ROADM node based on the network requirements.
Figure 12-10 shows an example of an amplified ROADM node configuration with 32DMX cards
installed.
12-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-10 ROADM Node with 32DMX Cards Installed
Figure 12-11 shows an example of an amplified ROADM node configuration with 40-WSS-C cards
installed.
OPT-PRE
OPT-BST
32WSS
DCU W
Air ramp
DCU E
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
32DMX
32DMX
Available
Available
OSCM
OSCM
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
32WSS
OPT-BST
OPT-PRE
AIC-I
249098
12-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-11 ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C Cards Installed
Figure 12-12 shows an example of a ROADM node with 40-SMR1-C cards installed.
249103
OPT-BST or OSC-CSM
OPT-PRE or TXP/MXP
40-WSS-C
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
40-DMX-C
40-DMX-C
OSCM or Blank
OSCM or Blank
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
40-WSS-C
OPT-PRE or TXP/MXP
OPT-BST or OSC-CSM
AIC-I
Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T
Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T
12-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-12 ROADM Node with 40-SMR1-C Cards Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6
Figure 12-13 shows an example of a ROADM node with 40-SMR1-C and booster amplifier cards
installed.
248990
ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan
tray
TNC/TSC
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
Available
Available
Available
40-SMR1-C
LCD
Cisco ONS 15454 Cisco ONS 15454 M6
40-SMR1-C
Available
Cable
guide
Air
filter
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
40-SMR1-C
Available
DCM-xxx
Air Ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
40-SMR1-C
Available
OSCM
OSCM
TCC2
AIC-I
MS-ISC
MS-ISC
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
Fan Tray
Fibre Routing Panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1
1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
12-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-13 ROADM Node with 40-SMR1-C and Booster Amplifier Cards Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS
15454 M6
Note When you use the 40-SMR1-C card along with a booster amplifier, the OSCM card must be connected
to the booster amplifier.
Figure 12-14 shows an example of a ROADM node with 40-SMR1-C and OPT-RAMP-C cards installed.
248992 ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan
tray
TNC/TSC
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
Available
Available
40-SMR1-C
Booster (A)
LCD
Cisco ONS 15454 M6
Available
Available
Cable
guide
Air
filter
15216 Odd Patch Panel
Cisco ONS 15454
Booster
40-SMR1-C
DCM-xxx
Air Ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
OSCM
Empty
TCC2
AIC-I
MS-ISC
MS-ISC
15216 Odd Patch Panel
Fan Tray
Fibre Routing Panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1
1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
12-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-14 ROADM Node with 40-SMR1-C and OPT-RAMP-C Cards Installed
Figure 12-15 shows an example of a ROADM node with 40-SMR2-C cards installed.
245810
DCU-xxx
Air ramp
DCU-xxx
OPT-RAMP-C
OPT-RAMP-C
Booster
40-SMR1-C
Available
MS-ISC
TCC2P
OSCM
AIC-I
OSCM
TCC2P
MS-ISC
Available
40-SMR1-C
Booster
Fibre routing panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel 1
1
1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
12-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-15 ROADM Node with 40-SMR2-C Cards Installed - Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6
248991
ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan
tray
TNC/TSC
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
Available
Available
Available
40-SMR2-C
LCD
Cisco ONS 15454 Cisco ONS 15454 M6
40-SMR2-C
Available
Cable
guide
Air
filter
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
40-SMR2-C
Available
DCM-xxx
Air Ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
40-SMR2-C
OSCM
OSCM
TCC2
AIC-I
MS-ISC
MS-ISC
Fibre Routing Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan Tray
1
1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
12-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-16 shows an example of a colored two-degree ROADM node using 80-WXC-C cards with
booster and preamplifier cards. The 80-WXC-C cards are inserted in Slots 3 and 14, and function in the
bidirectional mode.
Figure 12-16 Colored Two-Degree ROADM Node with 80-WXC-C, Booster, and Preamplifier Cards
248861
Booster
Preamplifier
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2P
Available
Available
Preamplifier
Booster
Available
Available
OSCM
OSCM
TCC2P
AIC-I
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
Fiber routing panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
15216 Even Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Even Patch Panel
1 15216 Odd Patch Panel 1
2 2
1 1
2 2
1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
2 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel
12-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-17 shows an example of an ONS 15454 M6 80-channel colored two-degree ROADM node.
Figure 12-17 ONS 15454 M6 80-Channel Colored Two-degree ROADM Node
333812
Shelf 2
ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan tray
15216 Odd Patch Panel
Shelf 1
15216 Even Patch Panel
TNC/TSC
Booster
Preamplifier
80-WXC-C
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module LCD
Available
Available
ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan tray
15216-MD-40-ODD
15216-MD-40-EVEN
TNC/TSC
Preamplifier
Booster
80-WXC-C
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module LCD
Available
Available
Cable
guide
Cable
guide
Air
filter
Air
filter
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Even Patch Panel 1
2
1 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel
2 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
12-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-18 shows the layout of an 80-channel n-degree ROADM node with omni-directional side.
Figure 12-18 80-Channel n-degree ROADM node with Omni-directional Side
248865
Preamplifier
Preamplifier
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
Any other side
TCC2
OSCM
OSCM
TCC2
AIC-I
80-WXC-C
Fiber routing panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
15216 Even Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel 1
2
1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
2 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel
12-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-19 shows the layout of an ONS 15454 M6 80-channel n-degree ROADM node with
omni-directional side.
Figure 12-19 ONS 15454 M6 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node with Omni-directional Side
Figure 12-20 shows the layout of a 40-channel n-degree ROADM node with a 40-WXC-C based
colorless side.
248882
ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan tray
15216 Even Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
TNC/TSC
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
Preamplifier
Preamplifier
80-WXC-C
LCD
Available
Available
Cable
guide
Air
filter
1
2
1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
2 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel
12-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-20 40-Channel n-degree ROADM Node with 40-WXC-C Based Colorless Side
The 80-WXC-C cards are connected to the ADD/DROP ports of the 40-WXC-C card and function as
colorless multiplexer and demultiplexer units.
248858
Booster
Preamplifier
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2P
Available
Available
Available
Available
OSCM
Empty
TCC2P
AIC-I
80-WXC-C
40-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
Fiber routing panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
12-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-21 shows the layout of a 40-channel four-degree ROADM node with a 40-SMR2-C based
colorless side.
Figure 12-21 40-Channel Four-degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR2-C Based Colorless Side
The 80WXC-C (multiplexer) card is inserted in Slot 3 and the 80-WXC-C (demultiplexer) card is
inserted in Slot 5. The 80-WXC-C cards are connected to the ADD/DROP ports of the 40-SMR2-C card
and function as the colorless multiplexer and demultiplexer units.
248878
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2P
OSC-CSM
OSC-CSM
40-SMR2-C
40-SMR2-C
40-SMR2-C
40-SMR2-C
Available
Available
OSCM
OSCM
TCC2P
AIC-I
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
Fiber routing panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
1
1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
12-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-22 shows the layout for an 80-channel colorless ROADM node.
Figure 12-22 80-Channel Colorless ROADM Node
An 80 channel colorless two-degree ROADM node requires the following cards: 80-WXC-C,
15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, 15216-MD-48-ODD, 15216-MD-40-EVEN,
15216-EF-40-EVEN, 15216-MD-48-EVEN, preamplifiers, and boosters.
The 80-WXC-C cards can be used at two levels; level1 (L1) and level2 (L2).
The L1 80WXC-C (multiplexer) card is inserted in Slot 3 and the L1 80-WXC-C (demultiplexer) card is
inserted in Slot 5. The L2 80WXC-C (multiplexer) card is inserted in Slot 12 and the L2 80-WXC-C
(demultiplexer) card is inserted in Slot 14.
248863
Booster
Preamplifier
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2P
Available
Available
Empty
Empty
TCC2P
AIC-I
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
Fiber routing ranel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
Booster
Preamplifier
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2P
Available
Available
OSCM
OSCM
TCC2P
AIC-I
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
Fiber routing panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
Side B Side A
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Even Patch Panel
15216-MD-40-ODD
15216-MD-40-EVEN
15216Odd Patch Panel
15216 Even Patch Panel 1
2
1 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel
2 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
12-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-23 shows an example of the optical signal flow in an 80-channel colorless two-degree
ROADM node from Side A to Side B using 80-WXC-C cards. The optical signal flow from Side B to
Side A follows an identical path.
Figure 12-23 80-Channel Colorless Two-degree ROADM Node
1 The booster on Side A receives the composite optical signal. It separates the optical service channel from the optical
payload and sends the payload to the preamplifier on Side A.
2 The preamplifier compensates for chromatic dispersion, amplifies the optical payload and sends it to the L1 80-WXC-C
card (demultiplexer).
3 Up to eight colorless ports are available on the L1 80-WXC-C card if no colored wavelength is terminated. In
Figure 12-23, two EAD ports are connected to 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE cards, 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, 15216-MD-48-ODD, 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN units
where the colored odd and even wavelengths are dropped. The express wavelengths are sent to the L1 80-WXC-C card
(multiplexer) on Side B where the wavelengths are multiplexed with other colored or colorless wavelengths.
4 The L1-80-WXC-C card on Side B sends the composite signal to the booster on Side B.
5 The booster on Side B receives the composite optical signal, adds the optical service channel to the optical payload and
sends it to the transmission line.
6 It is possible to configure more colorless ports by cascading the 80-WXC-C cards at two levels. For example, to get 14
colorless ports connect one of the EAD ports of the L1 80-WXC-C card to another 80-WXC-C cards at level 2. There are
five colorless ports on the L1 80-WXC-C card and nine colorless ports on the L2 80-WXC-C card. To achieve an 80
channel colorless configuration, connect nine L2 80-WXC-C cards to the nine EAD ports of the L1 80-WXC-C card.
248860
1x9 DMX
L2
1x9 DMX
L1
1x9 MUX
L2
1x9 DMX
L2
1x9 MUX
L2
1x9 MUX
L1
1x9 MUX
L1
1x9 DMX
L1
P
Booster
Side A Side B
OSC
Booster
OSC
DMX-O DMX-E MUX-O MUX-E
DMX-E DMX-O MUX-E MUX-O
P
12-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-24 shows the layout for an 80-channel colorless ROADM node with OPT-RAMP-C cards.
Figure 12-24 80-Channel Colorless ROADM Node with OPT-RAMP-C Card
248874
Booster
Preamplifier
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2P
OSCM
OSCM
TCC2P
AIC-I
80-WXC-C
OPT-RAMP-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
Fiber routing panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
Side B Side A
15216-MD-40-ODD
15216-MD-40-EVEN
Booster
Preamplifier
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2P
OSCM
OSCM
TCC2P
AIC-I
80-WXC-C
OPT-RAMP-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
Fiber routing panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Even Patch Panel 15216 Even Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
1
2
1 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel
2 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
12-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-25 shows an example of an ONS 15454 M6 80-channel two degree colorless ROADM node.
Figure 12-25 ONS 15454 M6 80-Channel Two-degree Colorless ROADM Node
The L1 80WXC-C (multiplexer) card is inserted in Slot 4 and the L1 80-WXC-C (demultiplexer) is
inserted in Slot 6. The L2 80WXC-C (multiplexer) card is inserted in Slot 2 and the L2 80-WXC-C
(demultiplexer) is inserted in Slot 4.
248873
Shelf 2 Shelf 1
ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan tray
15216-MD-40-ODD
15216-MD-40-EVEN
TNC/TSC
Booster
Preamplifier
80-WXC-C
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
80-WXC-C
LCD
ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan tray
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Even Patch Panel
TNC/TSC
Preamplifier
Booster
80-WXC-C
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
80-WXC-C
LCD
Cable
guide
Air
filter
Cable
guide
Air
filter
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Even Patch Panel 1
2
1 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel
2 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
12-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-27 shows an example of a ROADM optical signal flow from Side A to Side B using the 32WSS
or 40-WSS-C cards. The optical signal flow from Side B to Side A follows an identical path through the
Side B OSC-CSM and 32WSS or 40-WSS-C cards. In this example, OSC-CSM cards are installed, hence
OPT-BSTs are not needed.
Figure 12-26 shows an example of an ONS 15454 M6 80-channel ROADM node with RAMAN-CTP
cards installed.
Figure 12-26 Cisco ONS 15454 M6 80-Channel ROADM Node Using RAMAN-CTP Cards
246702
Shelf 2
ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan tray
15216-MD-40-EVEN
Shelf 1
15216-MD-40-ODD
TNC/TSC
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP (A)
Line amplifier (A)
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
80-WXC-C (A)
LCD
TxP
Preamplifier (A)
Cable
guide
Air
filter
ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan tray
15216 Even Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
TNC/TSC
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP (B)
Line amplifier (B)
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
80-WXC-C (B)
LCD
TxP
Preamplifier (B)
Cable
guide
Air
filter
15216 Even Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel 1
2
1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
2 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel
12-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-27 ROADM Optical Signal Flow Example Using 32WSS or 40-WSS-C Card
Figure 12-28 shows an example of an ROADM optical signal flow from Side A to Side B using the
40-SMR1-C card. The optical signal flow from Side B to Side A follows an identical path through the
Side B booster and 40-SMR1-C card.
1 The OSC-CSM receives the optical signal. It separates the optical service channel from the optical payload and sends the
payload to the OPT-PRE module.
2 The OPT-PRE compensates for chromatic dispersion, amplifies the optical payload, and sends it to the 32WSS or
40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE.
3 The 32WSS or 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE splits the signal into two components. The 80 percent component is sent to the
DROP-TX port and the 20 percent component is sent to the EXP-TX port.
4 The drop component goes to the 32DMX card or 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE card where it is demultiplexed and dropped.
5 The express wavelength aggregate signal goes to the 32WSS or 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE on the other side where it is
demultiplexed. Channels are stopped or forwarded based upon their switch states. Forwarded wavelengths are merged
with those coming from the ADD path and sent to the OSC-CSM module.
6 The OSC-CSM combines the multiplexed payload with the OSC and sends the signal out the transmission line.
32-ch
demux
Side B
OSC-CSM
115228
Side A
OSC-CSM
OSC
Side B
32WSS
Side A
32WSS
80/20
Side B
32DMX
Add
Add
Drop
2 slots
1 slot
Side B
OPT-PRE
Side B
Line
Side A
OPT-PRE
Side A
Line
32-ch
demux
Side A
32DMX
Drop
1 slot
32R_OAM 80/20
2 slots
32R_OAM
1
1
2
2
3
3
5
5
6
6
4
4
OSC
12-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-28 ROADM Optical Signal Flow Example Using 40-SMR1-C Card
12.1.4 Hub Node
A hub node is a single ONS 15454 node equipped with two
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards and one of the following combinations:
• Two 32MUX-O cards and two 32DMX-O or 32DMX cards
• Two 32WSS cards and two 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards
1 The booster receives the optical signal. It separates the optical service channel from the optical payload and sends the
payload to the preamplifier module within the 40-SMR1-C card.
2 The preamplifier module compensates for chromatic dispersion, amplifies the optical payload, and sends it to the 70/30
splitter within the 40-SMR1-C card.
3 The 70/30 splitter splits the signal into two components. The 70 percent component is sent to the DROP-TX port and the
30 percent component is sent to the EXP-TX port.
4 The drop component goes to the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit where it is
demultiplexed and dropped.
5 The express wavelength aggregate signal goes to the 40-SMR1-C card on the other side where it is demultiplexed.
Channels are stopped or forwarded based upon their switch states. Forwarded wavelengths are merged with those coming
from the ADD path and sent to the booster module.
6 The booster combines the multiplexed payload with the OSC, amplifies it, and sends the signal out the transmission line.
276454
Side B
Booster
OSC
Side B
Line
Side B
40-SMR1-C
Side A
40-SMR1-C
Side A
Booster
OSC
Side A
Line
Side B MUX
15216-MD-40-ODD
70/30
70/30
Side A DMX
15216-MD-40-ODD
Side B DMX
15216-MD-40-ODD
Side A MUX
15216-MD-40-ODD
Drop
Drop
1
2
4
5
5
6
3
2
3
4
6
1
12-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
• Two 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE cards and two 40-DMX-C or 40DMX-CE cards
• Two 40-SMR1-C and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD
(ONS 15216 40 or 48-channel mux/demux patch panel)
• Two 40-SMR2-C and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD
Note Although it is recommended that you use the 15216-MD-40-ODD patch panel along with
the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards, you can alternatively use the 40-MUX-C and
40-DMX-C cards instead of the 15216-MD-40-ODD patch panel.
Note The configuration for a hub node using 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C cards is identical to the
ROADM node, except that there is no patchcord connecting the two 40-SMR1-C or
40-SMR2-C cards. For more details on the ROADM node configuration, see the
“12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11.
Note The 32WSS/40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 32DMX/32DMX-L/40-DMX-C/ 40-DMX-CE cards
are normally installed in ROADM nodes, but they can also be installed in hub and terminal
nodes. If the cards are installed in a hub node, the 32WSS/32WSS-L/ 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE
express ports (EXP RX and EXP TX) are not cabled.
A dispersion compensation unit (DCU) can also be added, if necessary. Figure 12-29 shows a hub node
configuration with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards installed.
12-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-29 Hub Node Configuration Example with 32-Channel C-Band Cards
Figure 12-30 shows a 40-channel hub node configuration with 40-WSS-C cards installed.
OPT-BST W
OPT-PRE W
32MUX-O
DCU
Air ramp
DCU
32DMX-O
32DMX-O
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
OSCM W
OSCM E
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
32MUX-O
OPT-PRE E
OPT-BST E
AIC-I
249094
12-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-30 Hub Node Configuration Example with 40-WSS-C Cards
Figure 12-31 shows the channel flow for a hub node. Up to 32 channels from the client ports are
multiplexed and equalized onto one fiber. Then, multiplexed channels are transmitted to the OPT-BST
amplifier. The OPT-BST output is combined with an output signal from the OSCM card and transmitted
to the other side.
Received signals are divided between the OSCM card and an OPT-PRE card. Dispersion compensation
is applied to the signal received by the OPT-PRE amplifier, and it is then sent to the 32DMX-O card,
which demultiplexes and attenuates the input signal.
OPT-BST or OSC-CSM
OPT-PRE or TXP/MXP
40-WSS-C
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
40-DMX-C
Blank or TXP/MXP
Blank or TXP/MXP
Blank or TXP/MXP
Blank or TXP/MXP
Blank or TXP/MXP
OSCM or Blank
Blank
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
AIC-I
249102
Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T
Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T
12-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-31 Hub Node Channel Flow Example
12.1.5 Anti-ASE Node
In a mesh ring network, the ONS 15454 requires a node configuration that prevents ASE accumulation
and lasing. An anti-ASE node can be created by configuring a hub node or an OADM node with some
modifications. No channels can travel through the express path, but they can be demultiplexed and
dropped at the channel level on one side and added and multiplexed on the other side.
The hub node is the preferred node configuration when some channels are connected in pass-through
mode. For rings that require a limited number of channels, combine AD-xB-xx.x and 4MD-xx.x cards,
or cascade AD-xC-xx.x cards. See Figure 12-9 on page 12-11.
Figure 12-32 shows an anti-ASE node that uses all wavelengths in the pass-through mode. Use
Cisco TransportPlanner to determine the best configuration for anti-ASE nodes.
Client
equipment
32DMX-0
32MUX-0
32MUX-0
32DMX-0
OPT-PRE
OPT-PRE OPT-BST
West side East side
OPT-BST
Line Line
96426
DCU
OSCM
TCC
TCC2
OSCM
AIC-I
DCU
12-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-32 Anti-ASE Node Channel Flow Example
12.1.6 Line Amplifier Node
A line amplifier node is a single ONS 15454 node that is used to amplify the optical signal in long spans.
The line amplifier node can be equipped with one of the following sets of cards:
• Two OPT-PRE cards, two OPT-BST cards, and two OSCM cards
• Two OPT-PRE cards and two OSC-CSM cards
• Two OPT-AMP-17-C cards and two OSCM cards
• Two OPT-AMP-C cards and two OSCM cards
Attenuators might also be required between each preamplifier and OPT-BST amplifier to match the
optical input power value and to maintain the amplifier gain tilt value.
Two OSCM cards are connected to the OPT-BST cards to multiplex the OSC signal with the pass-though
channels. If the node does not contain a booster card, OSC-CSM cards must be installed instead of
OSCM cards. Figure 12-33 shows an example of a line amplifier node configuration using OPT-BST,
OPT-PRE, and OSCM cards.
4-ch
demux
4MD-xx.x
Line Express path open Line
96429
DCU
DCU
OSCM
TCC
TCC2
OSCM
AIC-I
B1 Ch Ch B1
4-ch
mux
4-ch
demux
4MD-xx.x
4-ch
mux
12-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-33 Line Amplifier Node Configuration Example - Cisco ONS 15454 M6 and Cisco ONS 15454 M2
The line amplifier can be equipped with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards to achieve in fiber
amplification. Figure 12-34 shows an example of a line amplifier node with Raman amplification using
OPT-RAMP-C cards.
Figure 12-34 Line Amplifier Node with OPT-RAMP-C Cards
A node layout equipped with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards without post-amplifiers is used
when post-amplification of the optical signal is not required.
This layout is used in the following scenarios:
• The fiber is non-linear with high Raman gain (12.5 dB)
• The span length is 13 to 22 dB
248987
ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan
tray
TNC/TSC
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
Available
Available
Preamplifier (A)
Booster (A)
LCD
Cisco ONS 15454 M6
LCD
Booster (B)
Preamplifier (B)
Cable
guide
1 2 3
TNC/TSC
Preamplifier (B)
Preamplifier (A)
Cisco ONS 15454 M2
LCD
1 2 3
TNC/TSC
OPT-AMP-C (B)
OPT-AMP-C (A)
Air
filter
245811
DCU-xxx
Air ramp
DCU-xxx
OPT-RAMP-C
OPT-RAMP-C
Booster
Available
Available
Available
TCC2P
OSCM
AIC-I
OSCM
TCC2P
Available
Available
Available
Booster
Fibre routing panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
12-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
There are three node layouts without post-amplifiers:
1. Line amplifier node equipped with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards on Side A and Side B.
2. Line amplifier node equipped with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE and booster cards on Side A
and OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards on Side B and vice-versa.
3. Line amplifier node equipped with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE and booster cards on Side A
and OSC-CSM cards on Side B and vice-versa.
Figure 12-35 shows an example of a line amplifier node with OPT-RAMP-C cards on Side A and Side B.
Figure 12-35 Line Amplifier Node with OPT-RAMP-C Cards on Sides A and B
245809
ECU
Fan
tray
TNC/TSC
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
Available
Available
OPT-RAMP-C (A)
OPT-RAMP-C (B)
LCD
Cisco ONS 15454 Cisco ONS 15454 M6
Cable
guide
Air
filter
DCU-xxx
Air ramp
DCU-xxx
OPT-RAMP-C
OPT-RAMP-C
Available
Available
Available
Available
TCC2P
OSCM
AIC-I
OSCM
TCC2P
Available
Available
Available
Available
Fibre routing panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-36 shows an example of a line amplifier node with a standard Raman configuration
(OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE and booster cards) on Side A and a Raman only configuration
(OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards) on Side B.
Figure 12-36 Line Amplifier Node with OPT-RAMP-C and Booster Cards (Side A) and OPT-RAMP-C Cards (Side B)
245806
ECU
Fan
tray
TNC/TSC
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
Available
Booster (A)
OPT-RAMP-C (A)
OPT-RAMP-C (B)
LCD
Cisco ONS 15454 Cisco ONS 15454 M6
Cable
guide
Air
filter
DCU-xxx
Air ramp
DCU-xxx
OPT-RAMP-C
OPT-RAMP-C
Booster
Available
Available
Available
TCC2P
OSCM
AIC-I
OSCM
TCC2P
Available
Available
Available
Available
Fibre routing panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Configurations
Figure 12-37 shows an example of a line amplifier node with a standard Raman configuration
(OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE and booster cards) on Side A and an OSC-CSM configuration on
Side B.
Figure 12-37 Line Amplifier Node with OPT-RAMP-C and Booster Cards (Side A) and OSC-CSM Cards (Side B)
12.1.7 OSC Regeneration Node
The OSC regeneration node is added to the DWDM networks for two purposes:
• To electrically regenerate the OSC channel whenever the span links are 37 dB or longer and payload
amplification and add/drop capabilities are not present. Cisco TransportPlanner places an OSC
regeneration node in spans longer than 37 dB. The span between the OSC regeneration node and the
next DWDM network site cannot be longer than 31 dB.
• To add data communications network (DCN) capability wherever needed within the network.
OSC regeneration nodes require two OSC-CSM cards, as shown in Figure 12-38. The cards are installed
in each side of the shelf.
245804
ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan
tray
TNC/TSC
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
Available
Booster (A)
OPT-RAMP-C (A)
LCD
Cisco ONS 15454 Cisco ONS 15454 M6
Available
OSC-CSM (B)
Cable
guide
Air
filter
DCU-xxx
Air ramp
DCU-xxx
OPT-RAMP-C
Booster
Available
Available
Available
TCC2P
OSCM
AIC-I
OSCM
TCC2P
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
OSC-CSM
Fibre routing panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
12-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
Figure 12-38 OSC Regeneration Line Node Configuration Example - Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, and Cisco
ONS 15454 M2
Figure 12-39 shows the OSC regeneration line node signal flow.
Figure 12-39 OSC Regeneration Line Node Flow
12.2 Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
The OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards can be equipped in the following network element type
configurations:
248988 ECU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan
tray
TNC/TSC
TNC/TSC
Power module Power module
Available
Available
Available
OSC-CSM (A)
LCD
Cisco ONS 15454 M6
Cisco ONS 15454 M2
OSC-CSM (B)
Available
Cable
guide
LCD
1 2 3
TNC/TSC
OSC-CSM (B)
OSC-CSM-C (A)
Air
filter
Cisco ONS 15454
OSC-CSM
Available
DCU
Air Ramp
DCU
TCC2/TCC2P
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
OSC-CSM
Available
Available
Available
TCC2/TCC2P
AIC-I
Available
Available
Fan Tray
Fibre Routing Panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
115255
Fiber
Fiber
Fiber
Fiber
Side B
OSC-CSM
Side A
OSC-CSM
Side B Side A
COM-TX Line-TX
Side B Side A
COM-RX Line-RX
Side B Side A
COM-RX
Side B Side A
Side B Side A Side B Side A
COM-TX
12-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
• C-band odd systems:
– C-band terminal site with 32-MUX-O and 32-DMX-O cards
– C-band hub node with 32-MUX-O and 32-DMX-O cards
– C-band fixed OADM node
– C-band line site
– C-band 32-channel reconfigurable OADM (ROADM)
– C-band terminal site using a 32-WSS and 32-DMX cards
– C-band flexible terminal site using AD-xC cards
– C-band hub node using a 32-WSS and 32-DMX cards
– C-band 40-channel ROADM
– C-band terminal site using a 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards
– C-band terminal site using 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards
– C-band hub node using a 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards
– C-band up to 4 degree mesh node
– C-band up to 8 degree mesh node
– C-band multiring/mesh with MMU node
– C-band 4 degree multiring/mesh node (MMU based)
• C-band odd and even systems:
– C-band 64-channel terminal site
– C-band 72-channel terminal site
– C-band 80-channel terminal site
– C-band 64-channel hub site
– C-band 72-channel hub site
– C-band 80-channel hub site
– C-band 64-channel ROADM site
– C-band 72-channel ROADM site
– C-band 80-channel ROADM site
The following amplifier cards are defined as booster or preamplifiers:
• Booster:
– OPT-BST
– OPT-BST-E
– OPT-AMP-17-C
– OPT-AMP-C
• Preamplifier:
– OPT-PRE
– OPT-AMP-C
– OPT-BST
– OPT-BST-E
12-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
Note When the booster is not needed, it must be replaced with an OSC-CSM card.
The maximum number of shelves that can be aggregated in a multishelf node are:
• Eight, if the MS-ISC-100T switch card is used.
• Twelve, if an external Catalyst 2950 switch is used.
12.2.1 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in an Add/Drop Node
When the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card is equipped in an add/drop node, the booster amplifier
is mandatory and cannot be replaced by an OSC-CSM card. The preamplifier is an OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-AMP-C card, and must be cabled as an unidirectional card. Note that the COM-TX
and LINE-RX ports must not be used for any other connections. If a single module ROADM
40-SMR-1-C is used as an add/drop card, a preamplifier is not required. If a single module ROADM
40-SMR-2-C is used as an add/drop card, both the preamplifier and booster are not required.
Figure 12-40 shows the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card in an add/drop node.
Figure 12-40 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in an Add/Drop Node
When required, a DCN extension can be used on A/D Side (i) in Figure 12-40.
Side (i) in Figure 12-40 can be equipped with the following cards:
• WSS + DMX
• AD-xC
• 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C + MUX + DMX
• Single module ROADM
12.2.2 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in a Line Site Node with Booster Amplification
The OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card can be equipped in a line site node with a booster amplifier
in the following configurations:
OSCM
DCU
OPT-RAMP
A/D Side (i)
Side (i)
Booster
247380
DCU
Pump
Pre-amp
12-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
• OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E can be used as booster in a line site node with OPT-RAMP-C or
OPT-RAMP-CE. The booster cards need to be cabled as bidirectional units. Figure 12-41 shows the
OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card in a line site configuration.
Figure 12-41 OPT-RAMP-C Card or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in a Line Site Configuration
• The OPT-AMP-C can be used as a booster in a line site node with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE
and needs to be cabled as a bidirectional unit. An additional DCU unit can be equipped between the
OPT-AMP-C DC ports. Figure 12-42 shows a line site configured with OPT-AMP-C card and an
additional DCU unit.
Figure 12-42 Line Site Configured with OPT-AMP-C
• A line site can be configured with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on one side only.
Figure 12-43 shows the line site configured with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE on side A only.
The booster is configured on side B.
OSCM
DCU
OPT-RAMP
Side B
Booster Booster OPT-RAMP
247377
OSCM
DCU
Pump Pump
OSCM
DCU
OPT-RAMP
Side B
Booster OPT-RAMP
247378
OSCM
DCU DCU
Pump Pump
OPT-AMP-C
12-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
Figure 12-43 Line Site with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE On One Side
In all configurations, the booster amplifier facing the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card is
mandatory for safety reasons.
12.2.3 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in a Line Site Node Without Post - Amplification
The OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card can be equipped in a line site node in the following
configurations:
• A symmetric Raman configuration without post-amplifiers with an OPT-RAMP-C or
OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side A and Side B in a line site node (see Figure 12-44). In this
configuration, the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards do not support DCU units.
Figure 12-44 Symmetric Raman Configuration Without Post-Amplifiers
• An asymmetric configuration of a line site node where Side A is a standard Raman configuration
equipped with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE and booster cards and Side B is a Raman
configuration without post-amplifiers and is equipped with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards
(see Figure 12-45). Side B does not support DCU units.
OSCM
DCU
OPT-RAMP
Side A Side B
Booster
247379
DCU
Pump
OPT-AMP-C
OSCM
OSCM
DCU
OPT-RAMP-C
Side A Side B
245808
OSCM
DCU
Pump Pump
OPT-RAMP-C
12-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card
Figure 12-45 Asymmetric Configuration With Standard Raman on Side A and Raman Without
Post-Amplifier on Side B
• An asymmetric configuration of a line site node where Side A is a Raman configuration without
post-amplifier equipped with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards (without DCU units) and Side
B is configured with OSC-CSM cards (see Figure 12-46).
Figure 12-46 Asymmetric configuration With One Side Configured as Raman Without
Post-Amplifier
12.3 Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card
The PSM card supports the following node configurations:
• 12.3.1 Channel Protection
• 12.3.2 Multiplex Section Protection
• 12.3.3 Line Protection
• 12.3.4 Standalone
OSCM
DCU
OPT-RAMP-C
Side A Side B
Booster
245807
OSCM
DCU
Pump Pump
OPT-RAMP-C
OSCM
DCU
OPT-RAMP-C
Side A Side B
Booster
245805
Pump
OSC-CSM
12-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card
12.3.1 Channel Protection
In a channel protection configuration, the PSM card is used in conjunction with a TXP/MXP card. The
PSM card in a channel protection configuration can be used in any site apart from a terminal site.
Figure 12-47 shows the DWDM functional view of a PSM card in channel protection configuration.
Figure 12-47 PSM Channel Protection Configuration
In this configuration, the COM-RX and COM-TX ports of the PSM card are connected to the TXP/MXP
trunk ports. This configuration is applicable to an n-degree MSTP node, for example, a two-degree
ROADM, an n-degree ROADM, or an OADM node. The example block diagram shows a two-degree
node with Side A and Side B as the two sides. The Side A and Side B fiber-stage block can be DWDM
cards that are used to amplify transmitted or received signal (see the “12.6.1.1 Fiber Stage” section on
page 12-53 for the list of cards). The Side A and Side B add/drop stage block can be DWDM cards that
can add and drop traffic (see the “12.6.1.2 A/D Stage” section on page 12-55 for the list of cards).
In the transmit direction, the traffic originating from a TXP/MXP trunk port is split by the PSM card on
to the W-TX and P-TX ports. The W-TX and P-TX ports are connected to the ADD-RX ports of the
add/drop stage cards in Side A and Side B respectively. The add/drop stage cards multiplex traffic on
Side A and Side B line ports that become the working and protect paths respectively.
In the receive direction, the W-RX and P-RX ports of the PSM card are connected to the DROP-TX ports
of the add/drop stage cards on Side A and Side B respectively. The add/drop stage cards demultiplex
traffic received from Side A and Side B line ports that are the working and protect paths respectively.
The PSM card selects one of the two input signals on the W-RX and P-RX ports to be transmitted to the
COM-RX port of the PSM card.
Fiber stage
card
COM-RX
COM-TX
COM-TX
COM-RX
EXP-RX
DROP-TX ADD-RX
Fiber stage
card
Side A Side A Side B Side B
TXP/MXP
TX RX
Trunk port
Working path
Protect path
W-RX
PSM
LINE-RX
LINE-TX A/D stage
card
A/D stage
card
EXP-TX EXP-RX
EXP-TX COM-RX
COM-TX COM-RX
COM-TX LINE-RX
LINE-TX
ADD-RX DROP-TX
W-TX P-TX P-RX
COM-RX COM-TX
1X2 Switch
50/50 Splitter
243087
12-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card
Note All traffic multiplexed or demultiplexed by the two add/drop stage cards is not protected.
12.3.2 Multiplex Section Protection
The PSM card performs multiplex section protection when connected between a
multiplexer/demultiplexer card in a terminal site. The multiplexer/demultiplexer stage can be built using
WSS and DMX or 40MUX and 40DMX cards. The terminal sites can be 50/100 Ghz band. The number
of supported channels can therefore be 32/40 or 72/80.
Figure 12-48 shows the block diagram of a PSM card in multiplex section protection configuration.
Figure 12-48 PSM Multiplex Section Protection Configuration
In the transmit direction, the traffic originating from a TXP trunk port is multiplexed by the Side A
multiplexer. The PSM card splits traffic on to the W-TX and P-TX ports, which are independently
amplified by two separated booster amplifiers.
In the receive direction, the signal on the line ports is preamplified by two separate preamplifiers and the
PSM card selects one of the two input signals on the W-RX and P-RX ports to be transmitted to the
COM-RX port of the PSM card. The received signal is then demultiplexed to a TXP card.
The presence of a booster amplifier is not mandatory. However, if a DCN extension is used, the W-TX
and P-TX ports of the PSM card can be connected directly to the line. The presence of a preamplifier is
also not mandatory.
Note The PSM card cannot be used with Raman amplification in a line protection or section protection
configuration.
COM-TX
COM-RX ADD-RX
DROP-TX
Side A Mux/Demux
Working Path Amplifier
TXP/MXP
TX
RX
Trunk
port
Working path
Protect path
W-RX
PSM
COM-RX
COM-TX
LINE-RX
LINE-TX
W-TX
P-RX
P-TX
COM-TX
COM-RX
1X2
Switch
50/50
Splitter
Protect Path Amplifier
COM-RX
COM-TX
LINE-RX
LINE-TX
243088
12-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card
12.3.3 Line Protection
In a line protection configuration, the working and protect ports of the PSM card are connected directly
to the external line. This configuration is applicable to any MSTP node that is configured as a terminal
site. The multiplexer/demultiplexer stage can be built using WSS and DMX, 40MUX and 40DMX,
40-SMR1-C and 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD, or 40-SMR2-C and
15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD units. The terminal sites can be
50/100 Ghz band. The number of supported channels can therefore be 32/40 or 72/80.
Figure 12-49 shows the block diagram of a PSM card in line protection configuration.
Figure 12-49 PSM Line Protection Configuration
In the transmit direction, the traffic originating from a transponder trunk port is multiplexed by the Side
A multiplexer and amplified by a booster amplifier. The Line-TX port of the amplifier is connected to
the COM-RX port of the PSM card. The PSM card splits traffic received on the COM-RX port on to the
W-TX and P-TX ports, which form the working and protect paths.
In the receive direction, the PSM card selects one of the two input signals on the W-RX and P-RX ports
to be transmitted to the COM-RX port of the PSM card. The received signal is then preamplified and
demultiplexed to the TXP card.
The presence of a booster amplifier is not mandatory. However, if a DCN extension is used, the COM-RX
port of the PSM card is connected to the multiplex section. The presence of a preamplifier is also not
mandatory; the COM-TX port of the PSM card can be connected to the demultiplexer.
Note The PSM card cannot be used with Raman amplification in a line protection or section protection
configuration.
12.3.4 Standalone
In a standalone configuration, the PSM card can be equipped in any slot and supports all node
configurations. In this configuration, the PSM card provides only basic functionality, such as, protection
against a fiber cut, optical safety, and automatic laser shutdown (ALS). It does not provide other
functionalities such as, automatic power control (APC), automatic node setup (ANS), network and node
alarm correlation, circuit management, and so on.
COM-TX
COM-RX ADD-RX
DROP-TX
TXP/MXP Side A Mux/Demux
TX
RX
Trunk
port
Working path
Protect path
W-RX
PSM
W-TX
P-RX
P-TX
COM-TX
COM-RX
1X2
Switch
50/50
Splitter
LINE-RX
COM-TX LINE-TX
COM-RX
Side A Amplifier
243089
12-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Multishelf Node
12.4 Multishelf Node
In a multishelf configuration, the ONS 15454-M6 node or the ONS 15454-DWDM node with TCC3 card
as the node controller can manage up to 29 subtending shelves as a single entity. The subtending shelves
can be 15454-M6 or 15454-DWDM.
The node controller is the main shelf with the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards
running the multishelf functions. Each subtending shelf must be equipped with
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards, which run the shelf functions. For internal data
exchange between the node controller shelf and subtending shelves, the node controller shelf must be
equipped with redundant MS-ISC-100T cards or, as an alternative, the Catalyst 2950 switch. We
recommend that you use the MS-ISC-100T cards. If using the Catalyst 2950, it is installed on one of the
multishelf racks. All subtending shelves must be located in the same site at a maximum distance of
100 meters or 328 feet from the Ethernet switches used to support the communication LAN.
Figure 12-50 shows an example of a multishelf node configuration.
Figure 12-50 Multishelf Node Configuration
145236
Air Ramp
Storage
Air Ramp
PDP
Air Ramp
"Y" Cable 15216
"Y" Cable 15216
Storage
DCU 15216
Patch panel
Patch panel
MSTP - TXP/MXP
MSTP - DWDM
ETSI
MSTP - TXP/MXP
or MSPP
MSTP - TXP/MXP
Air Ramp
MSTP - TXP/MXP
Air Ramp
MSTP - TXP/MXP
ETSI
MSTP - TXP/MXP
or MSPP
MSTP - TXP/MXP
Air Ramp
MSTP - TXP/MXP
Air Ramp
MSTP - TXP/MXP
12-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Multishelf Node
A multishelf node has a single public IP address for all client interfaces (Cisco Transport Controller
[CTC], Transaction Language One [TL1], Simple Network Management Protocol [SNMP], and HTTP);
a client can only connect to the node controller shelf, not to the subtending shelves. The user interface
and subtending shelves are connected to a patch panel using straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cables.
The node controller shelf has the following functions:
• IP packet routing and network topology discovery at the node controller level.
• Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) centralized on the node controller shelf.
The subtending shelves have the following functions:
• Overhead circuits are not routed within a multishelf node but are managed at the subtending
controller shelf only. To use overhead bytes, the AIC-I must be installed on the subtending shelf
where it is terminated.
• Each subtending shelf will act as a single shelf node that can be used as a timing source line,
TCC/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE clock, or building integrated timing supply (BITS)
source line.
12.4.1 Multishelf Node Layout
Multishelf configurations are configured by Cisco TransportPlanner and are automatically discovered by
the CTC software. In a typical multishelf installation, all optical units are equipped on the node
controller shelf and TXP/MXP cards are equipped in the aggregated subtended shelves. In addition, all
empty slots in the node controller shelf can be equipped with TXP/MXP cards. In a DWDM mesh
network, up to eight optical sides can be configured with client and optical cards installed in different
shelves to support mesh and ring-protected signal output.
Note When a DWDM ring or network has to be managed through a Telcordia operations support system
(OSS), every node in the network must be set up as multi-shelf. OLA sites and nodes with one shelf must
be set up as “multi-shelf stand-alone” to avoid the use of LAN switches.
12.4.2 DCC/GCC/OSC Terminations A multishelf node provides the same communication channels as a single-shelf node:
• OSC links terminate on OSCM/OSC-CSM cards. Two links are required between each ONS 15454
node. An OSC link between two nodes cannot be substituted by an equivalent generic
communications channel/data communications channel (GCC/DCC) link terminated on the same
pair of nodes. OSC links are mandatory and they can be used to connect a node to a gateway network
element (GNE).
• GCC/DCC links terminate on TXP/MXP cards.
The maximum number of DCC/GCC/OSC terminations that are supported in a multishelf node is 48.
Note Optical Service Channel can be created on the OC3 port of the TNC and TNCE cards.
12-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Connecting Passive Modules to a ONS 15454 M2 or ONS 15454 M6 Node
12.5 Connecting Passive Modules to a ONS 15454 M2 or ONS 15454 M6 Node
The non-volatile flash memory of the passive optical modules store inventory and insertion loss (IL) data
of the optical paths. The stored data can be retrieved through the USB port of the passive optical module
by connecting it to the transport node controller card (TNC) of the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or
Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly.
You can connect the following passive modules to an USB port of the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or
Cisco ONS 15454 M6 node:
• 15216-FLD-4
• 15216-MD-40-EVEN
• 15216-EF-40-EVEN
• 15216-MD-48-EVEN
• 15216-MD-40-ODD
• 15216-EF-40-ODD
• 15216-MD-48-ODD
• 15216-MD-ID-50
• 15216-MD-48-CM
For the related procedure, see NTP-G319 Connect a Passive Module to the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or
Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Node, page 12-122.
12.6 Optical Sides
From a topological point of view, all DWDM units equipped in an MSTP node belongs to a side. A side
can be identified by a letter (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H), or by the ports (called as side line ports, see
12.6.2 Side Line Ports, page 12-56) that are physically connected to the spans. An MSTP node can be
connected to a maximum of 8 different spans. Each side identifies one of the spans the MSTP node is
connected to.
Note Side A and Side B replace “west” and “east” when referring to the two sides of the ONS 15454 shelf.
Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6 (formerly “west”), and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17 (formerly
“east”). The line direction port parameter, East-to-West and West-to-East, has been removed.
Sides are viewed and managed from the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Optical Sides tab in CTC.
12.6.1 Optical Side Stages
All MSTP nodes can be modelled according to Figure 12-51.
12-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Optical Sides
Figure 12-51 Interconnecting Sides Conceptual View
According to Figure 12-51, each MSTP node side includes DWDM units that can be conceptually
divided into three stages.
• Fiber stage—The set of DWDM cards with ports that directly or indirectly face the span.
• A/D stage—The add/drop stage.
• TXP/MXP stage—The virtual grouping of all TXP or MXP cards with signals multiplexed or
demultiplexed to and from the physical fiber stage.
12.6.1.1 Fiber Stage
The fiber stage includes DWDM cards that are used to amplify transmitted or received signals and cards
that are used to add optical supervision channels. The fiber stage cards are:
• Booster amplifier cards that directly connect to the span, such as:
– OPT-BST
– OPT-BST-E
– OPT-BST-L
– OPT-AMP-C, when provisioned in OPT-LINE (booster amplifier) mode
– OPT-AMP-L, when provisioned in OPT-LINE (booster amplifier) mode
– OPT-AMP-17-C, when provisioned in OPT-LINE (booster amplifier) mode
• Preamplifier cards, such as:
– OPT-PRE
– OPT-AMP-C, when provisioned in OPT-PRE (preamplifier) mode
159460
Fiber
Stage
Side A
A/D
Stage
Interconnecting Side E
sides I/F
TXP/MXP Stage
Side F Side B
Side G Side C
Side H Side D
12-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Optical Sides
– OPT-AMP-L, when provisioned in OPT-PRE (preamplifier) mode
– OPT-AMP-17-C, when provisioned in OPT-PRE (preamplifier) mode
• OSC cards, such as:
– OSCM
– OSC-CSM
• OPT-RAMP-C card
Table 12-1 shows the commonly deployed fiber stage layouts supported by DWDM mesh nodes. In the
table, OPT-BST includes the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L cards. OPT-AMP includes the
OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-17-C cards configured in either OPT-PRE or OPT-LINE mode.
Note In the table, L and C suffix is not reported because C-band and L-band amplifiers cannot be mixed in the
same layout.
Table 12-1 Supported Fiber Stage Configurations
Layout Cards Configurations
A OPT-BST <-> OPT-PRE/OPT-AMP
(OPT-PRE mode)
• OPT-BST OSC ports connected to OSCM OSC ports or
OSC-CSM LINE ports
• OPT-BST LINE ports connected to the span
• OPT-BST COM-TX ports connected to OPT-AMP (OPT-PRE
mode) or OPT-PRE COM-RX ports
• OPT-AMP (OPT-PRE mode) or OPT-PRE LINE-TX or
COM-TX ports connected to the next stage (for example, a
40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM-RX port in a ROADM node)
• OPT-BST COM-RX ports connected to the next stage (for
example, a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM-TX port in a
ROADM node)
B OPT-AMP (OPT-BST mode) <->
OPT-PRE/OPT-AMP (OPT-PRE mode)
• OPT-AMP (BST) OSC ports connected to OSCM OSC ports or
OSC-CSM LINE ports
• OPT-AMP (BST) LINE ports connected to the span
• OPT-AMP (BST) COM-TX ports connected to OPT-AMP
(PRE)/OPT-PRE COM-RX ports
• OPT-AMP (PRE)/OPT-PRE LINE-TX/COM-TX port
connected to the next stage (for example, a
40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM-RX port in a ROADM node)
• OPT-AMP (BST) COM-RX port connected to the next stage
(for example, a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM-TX port in a
ROADM node)
12-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Optical Sides
12.6.1.2 A/D Stage
The A/D stage includes DWDM cards that can add and drop traffic. The A/D stage is divided into three
node types:
• Mesh nodes—ONS 15454 nodes configured in multishelf mode can connect to eight different sides.
For more detail on mesh node, see 12.7 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks, page 12-61.
• Legacy—Half of a ROADM node or an OADM node with cascaded AD-xB-xx-x or AD-xC-xx.x
cards
• Non-A/D—A line node or a side that does not have A/D capability is included in the A/D stage
Stages are built by active cards and patchcords. However, the interconnecting sides are completed by the
mesh patch panels (four-degree patch panel or eight-degree patch panel) in mesh nodes, or by patchcords
connected to EXP-RX/EXP-TX ports in legacy nodes.
C OSC-CSM <->
OPT-PRE/OPT-AMP(OPT-PRE mode)
• OSC-CSM LINE ports connected to the span
• OSC-CSM COM-TX ports connected to OPT-AMP COM-RX
ports
• OPT-AMP(PRE)/OPT-PRE LINE-TX/COM-TX port
connected to the next stage (for example,
40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM-RX ports in ROADM)
• OSC-CSM COM-RX port connected to the next stage (for
example, a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM-TX port in a
ROADM node)
D OPT-BST • OPT-BST OSC ports connected to OSCM OSC ports or
OSC-CSM LINE ports
• OPT-BST LINE ports connected to the span
• OPT-BST COM ports connected to the next stage (for example,
a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM port in a ROADM node)
E OPT-AMP (OPT-BST mode) • OPT-AMP OSC ports connected to OSCM OSC ports or
OSC-CSM LINE ports
• OPT-AMP LINE ports connected to the span
• OPT-AMP COM ports connected to the next stage (for
example, a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM port in a ROADM
node)
F OSC-CSM • OSC-CSM LINE ports connected to the span
• OSC-CSM COM ports connected to the next stage (for
example, a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE COM port in a ROADM
node)
Table 12-1 Supported Fiber Stage Configurations (continued)
Layout Cards Configurations
12-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Optical Sides
12.6.2 Side Line Ports
Side line ports are ports that are physically connected to the spans. Side line ports can be:
• All ports terminating the fiber stage and physically labeled as LINE, such as ports on the following
cards:
– Booster amplifier (OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L cards, and the OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-AMP-L, or OPT-AMP-17-C cards when provisioned in OPT-LINE mode)
– OSC-CSM
– OPT-RAMP-C
• All ports that can be physically connected to the external span using DCN terminations, such as:
– Booster amplifier LINE-RX and LINE-TX ports
– OSC-CSM LINE-RX and LINE-TX ports
– 40-WXC-C COM-RX and COM-TX ports
– MMU EXP-A-RX and EXP-A-TX ports
• All ports that can be physically connected to the external span using DCN terminations in a line
node, such as:
– Preamplifier (OPT-PRE card and the OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-L, or OPT-AMP-17-C cards
when provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) COM-RX and COM-TX ports
– Booster amplifier COM-TX port
– OSC-CSM COM-TX port
• All ports that can be physically connected to the external span using DCN terminations in a
40-channel MUX/DMX terminal node, such as:
– 40-MUX-C COM-TX port
– 40-DMX-C COM-RX port
• All ports that can be physically connected to the external span when PSM cards implement line
protection:
– PSM W-TX and W-RX ports
– PSM P-TX and P-RX ports
Note PSM card will support two sides A(w) and A(p).
12.6.3 Optical Side Configurations
You can use the following Side IDs depending on the type of node layout:
• In legacy nodes (that is, a node with no provisioned or installed 40-WXC-C cards), the permissible
Side IDs are only A and B.
• In four-degree mesh nodes with four or less 40-WXC-C cards installed, the permissible Side IDs are
A, B, C, and D.
• In eight-degree mesh nodes with eight or less 40-WXC-C cards installed, the allowed Side IDs are
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H.
12-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Optical Sides
The system automatically assigns Side IDs when you import the CTP XML configuration file into CTC.
You can create a side manually using CTC or TL1 if the following conditions are met:
• You use a permissible side identifier, A through H.
• The shelf contains a TX and an RX side line port (see the “12.6.2 Side Line Ports” section on
page 12-56).
• The side line ports are not connected to an internal patchcord.
Note We do not recommend that you manually create or modify ONS 15454 optical sides.
The following tables show examples of how the system automatically assigns Side IDs for common
DWDM layouts.
Table 12-2 shows a standard ROADM shelf with Sides A and B provisioned. The shelf is connected to
seven shelves containing TXP, MXP, ADM-10G, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Table 12-3 shows a protected ROADM shelf. In this example, Side A and B are Slots 1 through 6 in
Shelves 1 and 2. 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE/40-DMX-C or 40-WSS-CE/40-DMX-CE cards are installed in
Sides A and B. Slots 12 through 17 in Shelves 1 and 2 contain TXP, MXP, ADM-10G, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
Table 12-2 Multishelf ROADM Layout Example
Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side
1 WSS+DMX A WSS+DMX B
2 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
3 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
4 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
5 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
6 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
7 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
8 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
Table 12-3 Multishelf Protected ROADM Layout Example
Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side
1 WSS+DMX A TXP/MXP —
2 WSS+DMX B TXP/MXP —
3 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP —
4 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP —
5 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP —
6 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP —
7 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP —
8 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP —
12-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Optical Sides
Table 12-4 shows a four-degree mesh node. Side A is Shelf 1, Slots 1 through 6. Side B and C are Shelf 2,
Slots 1 through 6 and 12 through 17, and Side D is Shelf 3, Slots 1 through 6. 40-WXC-C cards in line
termination mode are installed in Sides A through D.
Table 12-5 shows a protected four-degree mesh node example. In the example, Sides A through D are
assigned to Slots 1 through 6 in Shelves 1 through 4.
Table 12-6 shows a protected four-degree mesh node example. In the example, Sides A through D are
assigned to Slots 1 through 4 in Shelves 1 through 4, and TXP, MXP, ADM-10G, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards are installed in Shelves 1 through 4, Slots 12-17, and Shelves 5 through
8, Slots 1 through 6 and 12 through 17.
Table 12-4 Multishelf Four-Degree Mesh Node Layout Example
Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side
1 WXC Line
Termination
A TXP/MXP —
2 WXC Line
Termination
B WXC Line
Termination
C
3 WXC Line
Termination
D TXP/MXP —
4 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP —
5 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP —
6 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP —
7 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP —
8 TXP/MXP n/a TXP/MXP —
Table 12-5 Multishelf Four-Degree Protected Mesh Node Layout Example
Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side
1 WXC Line
Termination
A TXP/MXP —
2 WXC Line
Termination
B TXP/MXP —
3 WXC Line
Termination
C TXP/MXP —
4 WXC Line
Termination
D TXP/MXP —
5 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
6 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
7 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
8 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
12-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Optical Sides
Table 12-7 shows a four-degree mesh node provisioned as an upgrade. In the example, Sides A through
D are assigned to Slots 1 through 4. and 12 through 17 in Shelves 1and 2. 40-WXC-C cards in XC
termination mode are installed in Sides A and B, and 40-WXC-C cards in line termination mode are
installed in Sides C and D.
Table 12-8 shows an eight-degree mesh node. In the example, Sides A through H are assigned to Slots 1
through 6 in Shelf 1, Slots 1 through 6 and 12 through 17 in Shelves 2 through 4, and Slots 1 through 6
in Shelf 5. 40-WXC-C cards in line termination mode are installed in Sides A through H.
Table 12-6 Multishelf Four-Degree Protected Mesh Node Layout Example
Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side
1 WXC Line
Termination
A TXP/MXP —
2 WXC Line
Termination
B TXP/MXP —
3 WXC Line
Termination
C TXP/MXP —
4 WXC Line
Termination
D TXP/MXP —
5 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
6 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
7 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
8 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
Table 12-7 Multishelf Four-Degree Mesh Node Upgrade Layout Example
Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side
1 WXC XC
Termination
A WXC XC
Termination
B
2 WXC Line
Termination
C WXC Line
Termination
D
3 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
4 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
5 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
6 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
7 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
8 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
12-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Optical Sides
Table 12-9 shows another eight-degree mesh node. In the example, Sides A through H are assigned to
Slots 1 through 6 in all shelves (Shelves 1 through 8). 40-WXC-C cards in line termination mode are
installed in Sides A through H.
Table 12-10 shows a four-degree mesh node with a user-defined side. Because the software assigns sides
consecutively, and because the mesh node is four-degrees, the side assigned to Shelf 5, Slots 1 through 6
is “Unknown.”
Table 12-8 Multishelf Eight-Degree Mesh Node Layout Example
Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side
1 WXC Line
Termination
A TXP/MXP —
2 WXC Line
Termination
B WXC Line
Termination
C
3 WXC Line
Termination
D WXC Line
Termination
E
4 WXC Line
Termination
F WXC Line
Termination
G
5 WXC Line
Termination
H TXP/MXP —
6 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
7 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
8 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
Table 12-9 Multishelf Four-Degree Mesh Node Upgrade Layout Example
Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side
1 WXC Line
Termination
A TXP/MXP —
2 WXC Line
Termination
B TXP/MXP —
3 WXC Line
Termination
C TXP/MXP —
4 WXC Line
Termination
D TXP/MXP —
5 WXC Line
Termination
E TXP/MXP —
6 WXC Line
Termination
F TXP/MXP —
7 WXC Line
Termination
G TXP/MXP —
8 WXC Line
Termination
H TXP/MXP —
12-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
12.7 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
ONS 15454 shelves can be configured in mesh DWDM networks using the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C
wavelength cross-connect cards and four-degree patch panel or eight-degree patch panels. Mesh DWDM
networks can also be configured using the 40-SMR2-C cards and the four-degree patch panel.
ONS 15454 DWDM mesh configurations can be up to four degrees (four optical directions) when the
four-degree patch panel is installed, and up to eight degrees (eight optical directions) when the
eight-degree patch panel is installed. Two mesh node types are available, the line termination mesh node
and the cross-connect (XC) termination mesh node.
Note Mesh nodes using the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C card requires multishelf management.
12.7.1 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 40-WXC-C Cards
The line termination mesh node is installed in mesh networks. Line termination mesh nodes can support
between one and eight line terminations. Each line direction requires the following cards: 40-WXC-C,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE, a preamplifier and a booster. Within this configuration, the
following substitutions can be used:
• The 40-MUX-C cards can be replaced with 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE cards.
• The OPT-BST cards can be replaced with OPT-AMP-17-C (in OPT-BST mode) and/or OPT-BST-E
cards.
• The OPT-PRE can be replaced with an OPT-AMP-17-C (in OPT-LINE mode) card.
Each side of the line termination mesh node is connected as follows:
• The 40-WXC-C COM-RX port is connected to the preamplifier output port.
Table 12-10 Multishelf Four-Degree Mesh Node User-Defined Layout Example
Shelf Slots 1–6 Side Slots 12–17 Side
1 WXC Line
Termination
A TXP/MXP —
2 TXP/MXP — WXC Line
Termination
C1
1. User-defined
3 WXC Line
Termination
D TXP/MXP —
4 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
5 WXC Line
Termination
U2
2. Unknown
TXP/MXP —
6 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
7 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
8 TXP/MXP — TXP/MXP —
12-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
• The 40-WXC-C COM-TX port is connected to the booster amplifier COM-RX port.
• The 40-WXC-C DROP TX port is connected to the 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE COM-RX port.
• The 40-WXC-C ADD-RX port is connected to the 40-MUX-C COM-TX port.
• The 40-WXC-C EXP-TX port is connected to the mesh patch panel.
• The 40-WXC-C EXP-RX port is connected to the mesh patch panel.
Figure 12-52 shows one shelf from a line termination node.
Figure 12-52 Line Termination Mesh Node Shelf
Figure 12-53 shows a functional block diagram of one line termination side using 40-WXC-C and
40-MUX-C cards.
OPT-BST
OPT-PRE
40-WXC-C
DCU-xxx
Air ramp
DCU-xxx
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
40-MUX-C
40-MUX-C
40-DMX-C
40-DMX-C
OSCM
OSCM
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
40-WXC-C
OPT-PRE
OPT-BST
AIC-I
249101
12-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-53 Line Termination Mesh Node Side—40-MUX-C Cards
Figure 12-54 shows a functional block diagram line termination side using 40-WXC-C and 40-WSS-C
cards.
40WXC
40-DMX-C
Drop
Add
to/from
PP-MESH-4
or PP-MESH-8
OPT-PRE
AMP-BST
159332
OSCM DCM
40-MUX-C
70/30
12-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-54 Line Termination Mesh Node Side—40-WSS-C Cards
Figure 12-55 shows a functional block diagram of a node that interconnects a ROADM with MMU cards
with two native line termination mesh sides.
40-WXC-C
40-DMX-C
Drop
Add
OPT-PRE
AMP-BST
159333
OSCM DCM
40-WSS-C
70/30
70/30
to/from
PP-MESH-4
or PP-MESH-8
12-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-55 Line Termination Mesh Nodes—ROADM With MMU Cards
159336
ADD
OPT-PRE
OPT-BST
Line
OSCM DCM
xxWSS
MMU
70/30
xxDMX
DROP
xxDMX
DROP
40-DMX-C
DROP
40-DMX-C
DROP
40-MUX-C
ADD
40-MUX-C
ADD
ADD OPT-BST
Line
DCN
Extension
OSCM
TCC
TCC
OPT-PRE
DCM
xxWSS
MMU
70/30
OPT-PRE
OPT-BST
Line
OSCM DCM
OPT-BST
Line
OSCM
OPT-PRE
DCM
40-WXC-C
Node A
Node B
40-WXC-C
40-WXC-C
AMP-17-C
PP-MESH-4
AMP-17-C
70/30
40-WXC-C
70/30
12-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
12.7.1.1 40-Channel Omni-directional n-degree ROADM Node
Any side in the line termination mesh node can be configured as an omni-directional side. The side that
is configured as the omni-directional side is connected to a local multiplexer and demultiplexer that can
add or drop traffic to or from any of the node directions.
In Figure 12-56 side D is configured as the omni-directional side. Wavelengths from the local
multiplexer on side D is routed to sides A, B, or C by the patch panel. Wavelengths from sides A, B, or
C can be dropped on side D. The maximum number of omni-directional channels is 40.
Figure 12-56 40-Channel Omni-directional Four-Degree ROADM Node
12.7.1.2 40-Channel Colorless n-Degree ROADM Node
Any side in the line termination mesh node can be configured as a colorless side where any wavelength
can be added or dropped. The side that is configured as the colorless side is connected to two 80-WXC-C
cards configured as a multiplexer and demultiplexer respectively. In Figure 12-57 side D is configured
as the colorless side. The 80-WXC-C cards are connected to the add and drop ports of the 40-WXC-C
cards and function as a colorless multiplexer and demultiplexer.
A combination of wavelengths from any of the nine ports is sent to the common output port of the
80-WXC-C card (multiplexer) that is connected to the 40-WXC-C card. The wavelengths entering the
40-WXC-C card are sent to the common input port of the 80-WXC-C card (demultiplexer) and dropped
at any of the nine output ports.
40-WXC-C 40-WXC-C
40-WXC-C
40-WXC-C
PP-MESH-4
248859
A
C
D B
P
P
DMX
MUX
12-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-57 40-Channel Colorless Four-Degree ROADM Node
12.7.1.3 40-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional n-Degree ROADM Node
Any side in the line termination mesh node can be configured as a colorless and omni-directional side.
The side that is configured as the colorless and omni-directional side is connected to a multiplexer
(80-WXC-C) and demultiplexer (80-WXC-C) that can add or drop traffic to or from any of the node
directions.
Figure 12-58 shows the layout of a 40-channel n-degree ROADM node with colorless and
omni-directional side.
Colorless
side
40-WXC-C
40-WXC-C
40-WXC-C
40-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
PP-MESH-4
248856
A
C
D B
12-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-58 40-Channel n-Degree ROADM Node with Colorless and Omni-directional Side
In Figure 12-59 side D is configured as the colorless and omni-directional side.
A combination of wavelengths from any of the nine ports is sent to the common output port of the
80-WXC-C card (multiplexer) and then routed to the preamplifier. The preamplifier sends the
wavelengths to the 40-WXC-C card that is connected to the patch panel. The patch panel routes the
wavelengths to sides A, B, or C.
Wavelengths from sides A, B, or C are dropped on side D. The incoming wavelengths from the
40-WXC-C card are sent to the preamplifier. The preamplifier amplifies the signal and sends it to the
common input port of the 80-WXC-C card (demultiplexer). The wavelengths are then dropped at any of
the nine output ports.
248876
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2P
Available
Available
Available
Available
Preamplifier
Preamplifier
Empty
Empty
TCC2P
AIC-I
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
40-WXC-C
Fiber routing panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
12-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-59 40-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional Four-Degree ROADM Node
12.7.2 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 80-WXC-C Cards
Line termination mesh nodes using 80- WXC-C cards can support between one and eight line
terminations. Each line direction requires the following units: 80-WXC-C, 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD, and 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or
15216-MD-48-EVEN, 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM, a preamplifier, and a booster.
• The OPT-BST cards can be replaced with OPT-AMP-17-C (in OPT-BST mode) or OPT-BST-E
cards.
• The OPT-PRE can be replaced with an OPT-AMP-17-C (in OPT-LINE mode) card.
Each side of the line termination mesh node is connected as follows:
• The 80-WXC-C COM-RX port is connected to the preamplifier output port.
• The 80-WXC-C COM port is connected to the booster amplifier COM-RX port.
• The 80-WXC-C DROP TX port is connected to the COM-RX (ODD+EVEN-RX) port of
15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM. The ODD-TX port of the 15216-MD-ID-50 or
15216-MD-48-CM is connected to the COM-RX port of 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD,
or 15216-MD-48-ODD; and the EVEN-TX port of the 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM is
connected to the COM-RX port of 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or
15216-MD-48-EVEN.
• The 80-WXC-C AD port is connected to the COM-TX (ODD+EVEN-TX) port of 15216-MD-ID-50
or 15216-MD-48-CM. The ODD-RX port of the 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM is
connected to the COM-TX port of 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD; and the EVEN-RX port of the 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM is
connected to the COM-TX port of 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or
15216-MD-48-EVEN.
80-WXC-C
40-WXC-C 40-WXC-C
40-WXC-C
40-WXC-C
80-WXC-C PP-MESH-4
248857
A
C
D B
P
P
12-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
• The 80-WXC-C EXP-TX port is connected to the mesh patch panel.
Figure 12-60 shows the layout for a line termination node.
Figure 12-60 Line Termination Node
Figure 12-61 shows the functional block diagram of a four-degree line termination mesh node using
80-WXC-C, 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, 15216-MD-48-ODD, 15216-MD-40-EVEN,
15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN and a PP MESH-4. All the 80-WXC-C cards are in
bidirectional mode. Wavelengths entering from side(i) can be routed to any of the other n-1 sides where
n is defined by the PP MESH type.
248881
Booster
Preamplifier
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2P
Available
Available
Preamplifier
Booster
Available
Available
OSCM
OSCM
TCC2P
AIC-I
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
Fiber routing panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Even Patch Panel
15216 Even Patch Panel
PP-MESH-4
1
1
2
2
1 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel
2 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
12-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-61 Four-Degree Line Termination Mesh Node Functional Diagram
12.7.2.1 80-Channel Omni-directional n-degree ROADM Node
Any side in the line termination mesh node can be configured as a omni-directional side. The side that
is configured as the omni-directional side is connected to a local multiplexer and demultiplexer that can
add or drop traffic to or from any of the node directions.
In Figure 12-62, side D is configured as the omni-directional side. Wavelengths from the local
multiplexer on side D are routed to sides A, B, or C by the patch panel. Wavelengths from sides A, B, or
C are dropped on side D.
248880
PP-MESH-4
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C 80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
A
C
D B
12-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-62 80-Channel Omni-directional Four-Degree ROADM Node
12.7.2.2 80-Channel Colorless n-degree ROADM Node
Any side in the line termination mesh node can be configured as a colorless side where any wavelength
can be added or dropped. The side that is configured as the colorless side is connected to two 80-WXC-C
cards configured as a multiplexer and demultiplexer respectively. In Figure 12-63, side D is configured
as the colorless side. The 80-WXC-C cards are connected to the add and drop ports of the 80-WXC-C
cards as a colorless multiplexer and demultiplexer.
A combination of wavelengths from any of the nine ports is sent to the common output port of the
80-WXC-C card (multiplexer) that is connected to the 80-WXC-C card. The wavelengths entering the
80-WXC-C card is passed to the common input port of the 80-WXC-C card (demultiplexer) and dropped
at any of the nine output ports.
248864
DMX
MUX
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
PP-MESH-4
A
C
D B
P
P
12-73
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-63 80-Channel Colorless Four-Degree ROADM Node
12.7.2.3 80-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional n-Degree ROADM Node
Any side in the line termination mesh node can be configured as a colorless and omni-directional side.
The side that is configured as the colorless and omni-directional side is connected to a multiplexer
(80-WXC-C) and demultiplexer (80-WXC-C) that can add or drop traffic to or from any of the node
directions.
Figure 12-64 shows the layout of a 80-channel n-degree ROADM node with colorless and
omnidirectional side.
249086
PP-MESH-4
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
Colorless
side
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
A
C
D B
12-74
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-64 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node with Colorless and Omnidirectional Side
In Figure 12-65 side D is configured as the colorless and omni-directional side.
A combination of wavelengths from any of the nine ports is sent to the common output port of the
80-WXC-C card (multiplexer) and is then routed to the preamplifier. The preamplifier sends the
wavelengths to the 80-WXC-C card that is connected to the patch panel. The patch panel routes the
wavelengths to sides A, B, or C.
Wavelengths from sides A, B, or C can be dropped on side D. The incoming wavelengths from the
80-WXC-C card are sent to the preamplifier. The preamplifier amplifies the signal and sends it to the
common input port of the 80-WXC-C card (demultiplexer). The wavelengths are then dropped at any of
the nine output ports.
248875
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2P
Available
Available
Available
Available
Preamplifier
Preamplifier
OSCM
OSCM
TCC2P
AIC-I
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
Fiber routing panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan tray
12-75
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-65 80-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional Four-Degree ROADM Node
12.7.3 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 40-SMR2-C Cards
Line termination mesh nodes using the 40-SMR2-C cards can support between one and four line
terminations. Each line direction requires the 40-SMR2-C and 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD units. Although it is recommended that you use the
15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel along with the
40-SMR2-C card, you can alternatively use the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards instead of the
15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel.
Each side of the line termination mesh node is connected as follows:
• The 40-SMR2-C LINE-RX port is connected to the external line.
• The 40-SMR2-C LINE-TX port is connected to the external line.
• The 40-SMR2-C DROP TX port is connected to the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD (or 40-DMX-C) COM-RX port.
• The 40-SMR2-C ADD-RX port is connected to the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD (or 40-DMX-C) COM-TX port.
• The 40-SMR2-C EXP-TX port is connected to the mesh patch panel.
• The 40-SMR2-C EXPi-RX (where i = 1, 2, 3) port is connected to the mesh patch panel.
Figure 12-66 shows the layout for a line termination node.
PP-MESH-4
248862
A
C
D B
P
P
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
80-WXC-C
12-76
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-66 Line Termination Mesh Node Shelf
Figure 12-67 shows the functional block diagram of a four-degree line termination mesh node using
40-SMR2-C, 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD, and 15454-PP-4-SMR
patch panel.
276455
40-SMR2-C
40-SMR2-C
DCM-xxx DCM-xxx
TCC2
Available
OSC-CSM
Available
Available
OSC-CSM
40-SMR2-C
40-SMR2-C
Available
OSCM
OSCM
TCC2
AIC-I
MS-ISC
MS-ISC
Fibre Routing Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
15216 Odd Patch Panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Air Ramp
Fan Tray
1
1 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel
12-77
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-67 Four-Degree Line Termination Mesh Node Functional Diagram
12.7.4 XC Termination Mesh Node
The XC termination mesh node, shown in Figure 12-68, is the second mesh node type. It is used to
upgrade a non-mesh node to a mesh node or to interconnect two non-mesh nodes. The XC termination
mesh nodes contain the following cards:
• 40-WXC-C cards
• OPT-AMP-17-C cards configured in OPT-PRE mode
The XC termination mesh node is connected as follows:
• The 40-WXC-C COM-RX port is connected to the MMU EXP-A-TX port.
• The 40-WXC-C COM-TX port is connected to the MMU EXP-A-RX port.
• The 40-WXC-C EXP-TX port is connected to the OPT-AMP-17-C COM-RX port.
• The 40-WXC-C EXP-RX port is connected to the OPT-AMP-17-C COM-TX port.
• The 40-WXC-C EXP-TX port is connected to the mesh patch panel.
• The 40-WXC-C EXP-RX port is connected to the mesh patch panel.
276461
40-SMR2-C
40-SMR2-C
40-SMR2-C
40-SMR2-C
15454-PP-4-SMR
MUX
DDMUX
DCU
MUX
MUX
DCU
MUX
DDMUX
DCU
MUX
MUX
DCU
3
4
1
2
12-78
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-68 XC Termination Mesh Node Shelf
12.7.5 Mesh Patch Panels and Shelf Layouts
ONS 15454 mesh topologies require the installation of a four-degree patch panel, PP-MESH-4 (for
40-WXC-C cards) or 15454-PP-4-SMR (for 40-SMR2-C cards) or an eight-degree patch panel,
PP-MESH-8 (for 40-WXC-C cards). If the four-degree patch panel is installed, mesh topologies of up to
four degrees can be created. If the eight-degree patch panel is installed, mesh topologies of up to eight
degrees can be created. The four-degree patch panel contains four 1x4 optical splitters, and the
eight-degree patch panel contains eight 1x8 splitters. Each mesh patch panel contains a 2x8 splitter that
is used for the test access transmit and receive ports. Figure 12-69 shows a block diagram for the
PP-MESH-4 patch panel.
OPT-AMP-xx
OPT-AMP-xx
40-WXC-C
40-WXC-C
40-WXC-C
DCU-xxx
Air ramp
DCU-xxx
TCC2
Blank
Blank
TCC2
40-WXC-C
OPT-AMP-xx
OPT-AMP-xx
Blank
159700
12-79
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-69 PP-MESH-4 Patch Panel Block Diagram
At the mesh patch panel, the signal is split into four signals (if a four-degree patch panel is used) or eight
signals (if an eight-degree patch panel is used). Figure 12-70 shows the signal flow at the four-degree
PP-MESH-4 patch panel. 40-WXC-C cards connect to the four-degree patch panel at the EXP TX and
COM RX ports.
Figure 12-70 PP-MESH-4 Patch Panel Signal Flow
159335
EXP TX
to all
directions
COM RX
from all
directions
Test
Access
TX Ports
Test Access
RX Port
2x4
splitter
#4
1x4
splitters
LC connector
MPO connector
159334
40-WXC-C
Test Access
RX Port
Test Access
TX Ports
PP-MESH-4
EXP TX COM RX
40-WXC-C
EXP TX COM RX
40-WXC-C
EXP TX COM RX
40-WXC-C
EXP TX COM RX
12-80
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
The mesh patch panels interconnect 40-WXC-C cards to create mesh networks, including four-degree
and eight-degree mesh topologies. In addition, shelves with 40-WXC-C cards can be configured with
mesh patch panels to create multiring, MMU-based mesh nodes. 40-WXC-C cards can be installed in
ROADM nodes with MMU cards to upgrade a two-degree MMU-based ROADM node into four-degree
or eight-degree mesh nodes.
Figure 12-71 shows the block diagram of the four-degree 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel connected to
one 40-SMR2-C card. The 40-SMR2-C cards connect to the 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel at the EXP
RX ports.
Figure 12-71 15454-PP-4-SMR Patch Panel Block Diagram
You can use the 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel to connect up to four 40-SMR2-C cards in a four-degree
mesh node. The optical splitters inside the patch panel forward the output signal (EXP-TX port) of the
40-SMR2-C card on each side of the mesh node to the input port of the 40-SMR2-C cards on the other
three sides of the mesh node. The 4x1 WXC block inside the 40-SMR2-C card selects which wavelength
from which side must be propagated at the output of each side. Figure 12-70 shows the signal flow at the
four-degree 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel. 40-SMR2-C cards connect to the four-degree patch panel at
the EXP-TX and EXP-RX ports.
276456
OSC-TX DC-TX DC-RX DROP-TX
OSC-RX ADD-RX
6 ports
OCM Block
LINE
TX
LINE
RX
MONTX
EXP-D
EXP-B
EXP-C
EDFA 1
(Variable Gain)
EDFA 2
(Fixed Gain)
30%
70%
OSC
DROP PD2
PD3 PD4
TAP PD5 TAP
TAP PD8 PD7
OSC
TAP ADD TAP
TAP
TAP
PD6
4x1
WXC
Block
PD1
TAP
TAP
In
D
C
B
A
In
D
C
B
A
In
C
B
A
D
In
B
A
D
C
1x4 4x PP
1x4
1x4
1x4
EXP-A
12-81
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks
Figure 12-72 15454-PP-4-SMR Patch Panel Signal Flow
12.7.6 Using a Mesh Node With Omni-Directional Add/Drop Section
Normally, multidegree mesh node use four or eight 40-WXC-C cards and a four-degree or eight-degree
patch panel. Each of the 40-WXC-C cards uses a 40-MUX-C card to add wavelengths going to the span
and a 40-DMX-C card to drop wavelengths coming in from the span. The 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C
cards are connected to only one of the node directions. These cards can add/drop traffic only to/from the
side that is associated to the 40-WXC-C card. The omni-directional configuration allows you to install
a local multiplexer/demultiplexer that can add/drop traffic to/from any of the node directions.
Figure 12-73 shows an example of how to set up a omni-directional add/drop configuration.
By setting up a NE as shown in the figure, it is possible to connect the transmit ports of TXP or MXP
cards to a 40-MUX-C card and then connect the output of the 40-MUX-C card to an OPT-BST card. The
OPT-BST card then connects to a preferred 40-WXC-C card in the four-degree or eight-degree ROADM
node (40-WXC-C connected to port 4 of PP-MESH-4, as shown in the figure).
The patch panel splits the traffic coming from the OPT-BST card in all the node directions, through the
software configuration. The wavelengths entering the 40-WXC-C cards (ports 1, 2, and 3) can be
selectively sent out in any desired outbound direction. In the inbound direction, the patch panel on the
preferred 40-WXC-C card, splits any of the wavelengths entering the NE through the 40-WXC-C cards
(ports 1, 2, and 3). Through the software configuration, the wavelength can be passed to an OPT-PRE
card or stopped. This whole configuration can be managed using a single IP address
An example of using a mesh node for omni-directional add/drop section is shown in Figure 12-73.
276457
40-SMR2-C
Test Access
RX Port
Test Access
TX Ports
EXP A EXP B EXP C EXP D
40-SMR2-C 40-SMR2-C 40-SMR2-C
15454-PP-4-SMR
12-82
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
Figure 12-73 Mesh Node With Omni-Directional Add/Drop Section
12.8 DWDM Node Cabling
DWDM node cabling is specified by the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections table. The
following sections provide examples of the cabling that you will typically install for common DWDM
node types.
Note The cabling illustrations shown in the following sections are examples. Always install fiber-optic cables
based on the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections table for your site.
12.8.1 OSC Link Termination Fiber-Optic Cabling
OSC link termination cabling include the following characteristics:
• The OPT-BST and OSC-CSM cards are the only cards that directly interface with the line (span)
fiber.
• The OSCM card only carries optical service channels, not DWDM channels.
• The OSCM and OSC-CSM cards cannot both be installed on the same side of the shelf (Side B or
Side A). You can have different cards on each side, for example an OSCM card on Side A and an
OSC-CSM card on Side B.
• When an OPT-BST card and an OSC-CSM card are both used on the same side of the node, the
OPT-BST card combines the supervision channel with the DWDM channels and the OSC-CSM card
acts as an OSCM card; it does not carry DWDM traffic.
COM RX
EXP RX
EXP TX
COM TX
70/30
1
3
4 2
= MPO Connector
= LC Connector
To TXPs/
MXPs
From TXPs/
MXPs
40-DMX-C
40-MUX-C
DROP
ADD
OPT-BST
OPT-PRE
40-WXC-C
PP_MESH-4
40-WXC-C
40-WXC-C
40-WXC-C
184410
12-83
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
• If an OPT-BST and an OSCM card are installed on Side B, the Side B OPT-BST OSC RX port is
connected to the Side B OSCM TX port, and the Side B OPT-BST OSC TX port is connected to the
Side B OSCM RX port.
• If an OPT-BST and an OSC-CSM card are installed on Side B, the Side B OPT-BST OSC RX port
is connected to the Side B OSC-CSM LINE TX port, and the Side B OPT-BST OSC TX port is
connected to the Side B OSC-CSM LINE RX port.
• If an OPT-BST and an OSCM card are installed on Side A, the Side A OPT-BST OSC TX port is
connected to the Side A OSCM RX port, and the Side A OPT-BST OSC RX port is connected to the
Side A OSCM TX port.
• If an OPT-BST and an OSC-CSM card are installed on Side A, the Side A OPT-BST OSC TX port
is connected to the Side A OSC-CSM LINE RX port, and the Side A OPT-BST OSC RX port is
connected to the Side A OSC-CSM LINE TX port.
Figure 12-74 shows an example of OSC fibering for a hub node with OSCM cards installed.
12-84
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
Figure 12-74 Fibering OSC Terminations—Hub Node with OSCM Cards
1 Side A OPT-BST LINE RX to Side B OPT-BST or
OSC-CSM LINE TX on adjacent node
5 Side B OSCM TX to Side B OPT-BST OSC RX
115710
DCU-xxx West DCU-xxx East
FAIL
ACT
SF
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
RING
CALL
LOCAL OW
RING
CALL
EXPRESS OW
CONTACT
STATUS
OPT AIC
BST
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
OPT
PRE
FAIL
ACT
SF
MON
RX
COM
TX
RX
DC
TX
OPT
BST
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
OPT
PRE
FAIL
ACT
SF
MON
RX
COM
TX
RX
DC
TX
OSCM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
TX
OSCM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
TX
32DMX-0
FAIL
ACT
SF
46.1 - 50.1 38.1 - 42.1 30.3 - 34.2
TX
54.1 - 58.1
RX
COM
32DMX-0
FAIL
ACT
SF
46.1 - 50.1 38.1 - 42.1 30.3 - 34.2
TX
54.1 - 58.1
RX
COM
32MUX-0
FAIL
ACT
SF
46.1 - 50.1 38.1 - 42.1 30.3 - 34.2
RX
54.1 - 58.1
TX
COM
MON
32MUX-0
FAIL
ACT
SF
46.1 - 50.1 38.1 - 42.1 30.3 - 34.2
RX
54.1 - 58.1
TX
COM
MON
TCC2
FAIL
SF
PWR
A B
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP TEST
RS-232
TCP/IP
LINK
ACT
TCC2
FAIL
SF
PWR
A B
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP TEST
RS-232
TCP/IP
LINK
ACT
RX
TX
RX
TX
1
2
7
8
3
4
5
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
P P
+ +
12-85
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
12.8.2 Hub Node Fiber-Optic Cabling
The following rules generally apply to hub node cabling:
• The Side A OPT-BST or OSC-CSM card common (COM) TX port is connected to the Side A
OPT-PRE COM RX port or the Side A 32DMX-O/40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE COM RX port.
• The Side A OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the Side A 32DMX-O/40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE
COM RX port.
• The Side A 32MUX-O/32WSS/32WSS-L COM TX port is connected to the Side A OPT-BST or
Side A OSC-CSM COM RX port.
• The Side B 32MUX-O/32WSS/32WSS-L COM TX port is connected to the Side B OPT-BST or
Side B OSC-CSM COM RX port.
• The Side B OPT-BST or Side B OSC-CSM COM TX port is connected to the Side B OPT-PRE COM
RX port or the Side B 32DMX-O/32DMX COM RX port.
• The Side B OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the Side B 32DMX-O/32DMX COM RX port.
Figure 12-75 shows an example of a hub node with cabling. In the example, OSCM cards are installed.
If OSC-CSM cards are installed, they are usually installed in Slots 1 and 17.
2 Side A OPT-BST LINE TX to Side B OPT-BST or
OSC-CSM LINE RX on adjacent node
6 Side B OSCM RX to Side B OPT-BST OSC TX
3 Side A OPT-BST OSC TX to Side A OSCM RX 7 Side B OPT-BST LINE TX to Side A OPT-BST
or OSC-CSM LINE RX on adjacent node
4 Side A OPT-BST OSC RX to Side A OSCM TX 8 Side B OPT-BST LINE RX to Side A OPT-BST
or OSC-CSM LINE TX on adjacent node
12-86
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
Figure 12-75 Fibering a Hub Node
1 Side A DCU TX to Side A OPT-PRE DC RX1 6 Side B 32DMX-O COM RX to Side B OPT-PRE
COM TX
2 Side A DCU RX to Side A OPT-PRE DC TX1 7 Side B 32MUX-O COM TX to Side B OPT-BST
COM RX
115422
DCU-xxx West DCU-xxx East
FAIL
ACT
SF
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
RING
CALL
LOCAL OW
RING
CALL
EXPRESS OW
CONTACT
STATUS
OPT AIC
BST
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
OPT
PRE
FAIL
ACT
SF
MON
RX
COM
TX
RX
DC
TX
OPT
BST
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
OPT
PRE
FAIL
ACT
SF
MON
RX
COM
TX
RX
DC
TX
OSCM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
TX
OSCM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
TX
32DMX-0
FAIL
ACT
SF
46.1 - 50.1 38.1 - 42.1 30.3 - 34.2
TX
54.1 - 58.1
RX
COM
32DMX-0
FAIL
ACT
SF
46.1 - 50.1 38.1 - 42.1 30.3 - 34.2
TX
54.1 - 58.1
RX
COM
32MUX-0
FAIL
ACT
SF
46.1 - 50.1 38.1 - 42.1 30.3 - 34.2
RX
54.1 - 58.1
TX
COM
MON
32MUX-0
FAIL
ACT
SF
46.1 - 50.1 38.1 - 42.1 30.3 - 34.2
RX
54.1 - 58.1
TX
COM
MON
TCC2
FAIL
SF
PWR
A B
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP TEST
RS-232
TCP/IP
LINK
ACT
TCC2
FAIL
SF
PWR
A B
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP TEST
RS-232
TCP/IP
LINK
ACT
RX
TX
RX
TX
3
1
2
9
10
4 5 6 7
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
P P
+ +
12-87
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
12.8.3 Terminal Node Fiber-Optic Cabling
The following rules generally apply to terminal node cabling:
• A terminal site has only one side (as compared to a hub node, which has two sides). The terminal
side can be either Side B or Side A.
• The terminal side OPT-BST or OSC-CSM card COM TX port is connected to the terminal side
OPT-PRE COM RX port or the 32DMX-O/40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE COM RX port.
• The terminal side OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the terminal side
32DMX-O/40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE COM RX port.
• The terminal side 32MUX-O/40-MUX-C COM TX port is connected to the terminal side OPT-BST
or OSC-CSM COM RX port.
12.8.4 Line Amplifier Node Fiber-Optic Cabling
The following rules generally apply to line amplifier node cabling:
• The line amplifier node layout allows all combinations of OPT-PRE and OPT-BST cards and allows
you to use asymmetrical card choices in Side A-to-Side B and Side B-to-Side A configurations. For
a given line direction, you can configure the four following possibilities:
– Only preamplification (OPT-PRE)
– Only booster amplification (OPT-BST)
– Both preamplification and booster amplification (where a line amplifier node has amplification
in at least one direction)
– Neither preamplification nor booster amplification
• If a Side A OPT-PRE card is installed:
– The Side A OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM TX is connected to the Side A OPT-PRE COM RX
port.
– The Side A OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the Side B OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM
RX port.
• If a Side A OPT-PRE card is not installed, the Side A OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM TX port is
connected to the Side B OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM RX port.
• If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed:
– The Side B OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM TX port is connected to the Side B OPT-PRE COM
RX port.
3 Side A OPT-BST COM TX to Side A OPT-PRE
COM RX
8 Side B OPT-PRE COM RX to Side B OPT-BST COM
TX
4 Side A OPT-BST COM RX to Side A 32MUX-O
COM TX
9 Side B DCU TX to Side B OPT-PRE DC RX1
5 Side A OPT-PRE COM TX to Side A 32DMX-O
COM RX
10 Side B DCU RX to Side B OPT-PRE DC TX1
1. If a DCU is not installed, a 4-dB attenuator loop, +/– 1 dB must be installed between the OPT-PRE DC ports.
12-88
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
– The Side B OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the Side A OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM
RX port.
• If an Side B OPT-PRE card is not installed, the Side B OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM TX port is
connected to the Side A OSC-CSM or OPT-BST COM RX port.
Figure 12-76 shows an example of a line amplifier node with cabling.
Figure 12-76 Fibering a Line Amplifier Node
115423
DCU-xxx West DCU-xxx East
FAIL
ACT
SF
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
RING
CALL
LOCAL OW
RING
CALL
EXPRESS OW
CONTACT
STATUS
OPT AIC
BST
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
OPT
PRE
FAIL
ACT
SF
MON
RX
COM
TX
RX
DC
TX
OPT
BST
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
OPT
PRE
FAIL
ACT
SF
MON
RX
COM
TX
RX
DC
TX
OSCM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
TX
OSCM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
TX
TCC2
FAIL
SF
PWR
A B
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP TEST
RS-232
TCP/IP
LINK
ACT
TCC2
FAIL
SF
PWR
A B
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP TEST
RS-232
TCP/IP
LINK
ACT
RX
TX
RX
TX
1
2
7
8
4
5
3
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
P P
+ +
12-89
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
12.8.5 OSC Regeneration Node Fiber-Optic Cabling
The following rules generally apply to OSC regeneration node cabling:
• The Side A OSC-CSM COM TX port connects to the Side B OSC-CSM COM RX port.
• The Side A OSC-CSM COM RX port connects to the Side B OSC-CSM COM TX port.
• Slots 2 through 5 and 12 through 16 can be used for TXP and MXP cards.
Figure 12-77 shows an example of an OSC regeneration node with cabling.
1 Side A DCU TX to Side A OPT-PRE DC RX1
1. If a DCU is not installed, a 4-dB attenuator loop, +/– 1 dB, must be installed between the OPT-PRE DC ports.
5 Side A OPT-BST COM RX to Side B OPT-PRE
COM TX
2 Side A DCU RX to Side A OPT-PRE DC TX1 6 Side A OPT-BST COM RX to Side B OPT-PRE
COM TX
3 Side A OPT-BST COM TX to Side A OPT-PRE
COM RX
7 Side B DCU TX to Side B OPT-PRE DC RX1
4 Side A OPT-PRE COM TX to Side B OPT-BST
COM RX
8 Side B DCU RX to Side B OPT-PRE DC TX1
12-90
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
Figure 12-77 Fibering an OSC Regeneration Node
115484
FAIL
ACT
SF
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
RING
CALL
LOCAL OW
RING
CALL
EXPRESS OW
CONTACT
STATUS
TCC2 AIC
FAIL
SF
PWR
A B
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP TEST
RS-232
TCP/IP
LINK
ACT
TCC2
FAIL
SF
PWR
A B
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP TEST
RS-232
TCP/IP
LINK
ACT
OSC
CSM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
LINE
TX
OSC
CSM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
LINE
TX
1
2
5
6
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
P P
+ +
12-91
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
12.8.6 Amplified or Passive OADM Node Fiber-Optic Cabling
The two sides of the OADM node do not need to be symmetrical. On each side, Cisco TransportPlanner
can create one of the following four configurations:
• OPT-BST and OPT-PRE
• OSC-CSM and OPT-PRE
• Only OSC-CSM
• Only OPT-BST
Note Amplified OADM nodes contain OPT-PRE cards and/or OPT-BST cards. Passive OADM nodes do not.
Both contain add/drop channel or band cards.
The following rules generally apply for OADM node express path cabled connections:
• TX ports should only be connected to RX ports.
• EXP ports are connected only to COM ports in between AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x cards that all
belong to Side B (that is, they are daisy-chained).
• EXP ports are connected only to COM ports in between AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x cards that all
belong to Side A (that is, they are daisy-chained).
• The EXP port of the last AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x card on Side A is connected to the EXP port
of the first AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x card on Side B.
• The OPT-BST COM RX port is connected to the nearest (in slot position) AD-xC-xx.x or
AD-xB-xx.x COM TX port.
• The OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the nearest (in slot position) AD-xC-xx.x or
AD-xB-xx.x COM RX port.
• If OADM cards are located in adjacent slots, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card
assumes that they are connected in a daisy-chain between the EXP ports and COM ports as noted
previously.
• The first Side A AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x card COM RX port is connected to the Side A
OPT-PRE or OSC-CSM COM TX port.
• The first Side A AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x card COM TX port is connected to the Side A
OPT-BST or OSC-CSM COM RX port.
• The first Side B AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x card COM RX port is connected to the Side B
OPT-PRE or OSC-CSM COM TX port.
1 Side A OSC-CSM LINE RX to Side B
OSC-CSM or OPT-BST LINE TX on adjacent
node
4 Side A OSC-CSM COM RX to Side B OSC-CSM
COM TX
2 Side A OSC-CSM LINE TX to Side B
OSC-CSM or OPT-BST LINE RX on adjacent
node
5 Side B OSC-CSM LINE RX to Side A OSC-CSM or
OPT-BST LINE TX on adjacent node
3 Side A OSC-CSM COM TX to Side B
OSC-CSM COM RX
6 Side B OSC-CSM LINE TX to Side A OSC-CSM or
OPT-BST LINE RX on adjacent node
12-92
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
• The first Side B AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x card COM TX port is connected to the Side B
OPT-BST or OSC-CSM RX port.
• If a Side A OPT-PRE is present, the Side A OPT-BST or OSC-CSM COM TX port is connected to
the Side A OPT-PRE COM RX port.
• If a Side B OPT-PRE is present, the Side B OPT-BST or OSC-CSM COM TX port is connected to
the Side B OPT-PRE COM RX port.
The following rules generally apply for OADM node add/drop path cabled connections:
• AD-xB-xx.x add/drop (RX or TX) ports are only connected to the following ports:
– 4MD-xx.x COM TX or 4MD-xx.x COM RX ports
– Another AD-xB-xx.x add/drop port (a pass-through configuration)
• An AD-xB-xx.x add/drop band port is only connected to a 4MD-xx.x card belonging to the same
band.
• For each specific AD-xB-xx.x card, the add and drop ports for that band card are connected to the
COM TX and COM RX ports of the same 4MD-xx.x card.
• The AD-xB-xx.x and 4MD-xx.x cards are located in the same side (the connected ports all have the
same line direction).
The following rules generally apply for OADM node pass-through path cabled connections:
• Pass-through connections are only established between add and drop ports on the same band or
channel and in the same line direction.
• AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x add/drop ports must be connected to other AD-xC-xx.x or AD-xB-xx.x
add/drop ports (as pass-through configurations).
• Add (RX) ports must be connected to drop (TX) ports.
• 4MD-xx.x client input/output ports must be connected to other 4MD-xx.x client input/output ports.
• A Side A AD-xB-xx.x drop (TX) port is connected to the corresponding Side A 4MD-xx.x COM
RX port.
• A Side A AD-xB-xx.x add (RX) port is connected to the corresponding Side A 4MD-xx.x COM TX
port.
• An Side B AD-xB-xx.x drop (TX) port is connected to the corresponding Side B 4MD-xx.x
COM RX port.
• An Side B AD-xB-xx.x add (RX) port is connected to the corresponding Side B 4MD-xx.x COM TX
port.
Figure 12-78 shows an example of an amplified OADM node with AD-1C-xx.x cards installed.
Note Figure 12-78 is an example. Always install fiber-optic cables based on the
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections table for your site.
12-93
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
Figure 12-78 Fibering an Amplified OADM Node
1 Side A DCU TX to Side A OPT-PRE DC RX1 9 Side A AD-1C-xx.x EXP RX to Side B AD-1C-xx.x
EXP TX
2 Side A DCU RX to Side A OPT-PRE DC TX1 10 Side B TXP_MR_2.5G DWDM RX to Side B
AD-1C-xx.x (15xx.xx) TX
3 Side A OPT-BST COM TX to Side A OPT-PRE
COM RX
11 Side B TXP_MR_2.5G DWDM TX to Side B
AD-1C-xx.x (15xx.xx) RX
115424
DCU-xxx West DCU-xxx East
OPT
BST
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
OPT
PRE
FAIL
ACT
SF
MON
RX
COM
TX
RX
DCC
TX
OPT
BST
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
OPT
PRE
FAIL
ACT
SF
MON
RX
COM
TX
RX
DC
TX
OSCM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
TX
TCC2
FAIL
SF
PWR
A B
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP TEST
RS-232
TCP/IP
LINK
ACT
TCC2
FAIL
SF
PWR
A B
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP TEST
RS-232
TCP/IP
LINK
ACT
OSCM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
TX
TXP
MR
2.5G
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
DWDM CLIENT
TX
RX
TX
TXP
MR
2.5G
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
DWDM CLIENT
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
AD-1C
-XX.X
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
EXP
TX
RX
COM
TX
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
EXP
TX
RX
COM
TX
AD-1C
-XX.X
FAIL
ACT
INPUT/OUTPUT
AIC-I
PWR
A B
ACC
EOW
LOW
RING
RING
DCC-B
DCC-A
UDC-B
UDC-A
1
2
4
5
13
12
15
16
3
14
6
7
10
11
8
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
P P
+ +
12-94
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
Figure 12-79 shows an example of a passive OADM node with two AD-1C-xx.x cards installed.
4 Side A OPT-BST COM RX to Side A AD-1C-xx.x
COM TX
12 Side B AD-1C-xx.x COM RX to OPT-PRE COM TX
5 Side A OPT-PRE COM TX to Side A AD-1C-xx.x
COM RX
13 Side B AD-1C-xx.x COM TX to OPT-BST COM RX
6 Side A AD-1C-xx.x (15xx.xx) RX to Side A
TXP_MR_2.5G DWDM TX
14 Side B OPT-PRE COM RX to Side B OPT-BST
COM TX
7 Side A AD-1C-xx.x (15xx.xx) TX to Side A
TXP_MR_2.5G DWDM RX
15 Side B DCU TX to Side B OPT-PRE DC RX1
8 Side A AD-1C-xx.x EXP TX to Side B AD-1C-xx.x
EXP RX
16 Side B DCU RX to Side B OPT-PRE DC TX1
1. If a DCU is not installed, a 4-dB attenuator loop, +/ 1 dB, must be installed between the OPT-PRE DC ports.
12-95
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
Figure 12-79 Fibering a Passive OADM Node
1 Side A OSC-CSM COM TX to Side A AD-1C-xx.x
COM RX
4 Side A OSC-CSM EXP RX to Side B AD-1C-xx.x
EXP TX
2 Side A OSC-CSM COM RX to Side A AD-1C-xx.x
COM TX
5 Side B AD-1C-xx.x COM TX to Side B OSC-CSM
COM RX
3 Side A OSC-CSM EXP TX to Side B AD-1C-xx.x
EXP RX
6 Side B AD-1C-xx.x COM RX to Side B OSC-CSM
COM TX
115425
FAIL
ACT
SF
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
RING
CALL
LOCAL OW
RING
CALL
EXPRESS OW
CONTACT
STATUS
OSC AIC
CSM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
LINE
TX
OSC
CSM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
LINE
TX
TCC2
FAIL
SF
PWR
A B
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP TEST
RS-232
TCP/IP
LINK
ACT
TCC2
FAIL
SF
PWR
A B
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP TEST
RS-232
TCP/IP
LINK
ACT
AD-1C
-XX.X
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
EXP
TX
RX
COM
TX
AD-1C
-XX.X
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
15xx.xx
TX
RX
EXP
TX
RX
COM
TX
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
P P
+ +
12-96
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
12.8.7 ROADM Node Fiber-Optic Cabling
The following rules generally apply to ROADM node cabling:
• The Side A OPT-BST or OSC-CSM COM TX port is connected to the Side A OPT-PRE COM RX
port.
• The Side A OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the Side A 32WSS COM RX port.
• The Side A OPT-BST or OSC-CSM COM RX port is connected to the Side A 32WSS COM TX port.
• The Side A OPT-BST (if installed) OSC TX port is connected to the Side A OSCM RX port.
• The Side A OPT-BST (if installed) OSC RX port is connected to the Side A OSCM TX port.
• The Side A 32WSS EXP TX port is connected to the Side B 32WSS EXP RX port.
• The Side A 32WSS EXP RX port is connected to the Side B 32WSS EXP TX port.
• The Side A 32WSS DROP TX port is connected to the Side A 32DMX COM RX port.
• The Side A 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE DROP TX port is connected to the Side A 40-DMX-C or
40-DMX-CE COM RX port.
• The Side B OPT-BST or OSC-CSM COM TX port is connected to the Side B OPT-PRE COM RX
port.
• The Side B OPT-PRE COM TX port is connected to the Side B 32WSS COM RX port.
• The Side B OPT-BST or OSC-CSM COM RX port is connected to the Side B 32WSS COM TX port.
• The Side B OPT-BST (if installed) OSC TX port is connected to the Side B OSCM RX port.
• The Side B OPT-BST (if installed) OSC RX port is connected to the Side B OSCM TX port.
• The Side B 32WSS DROP TX port is connected to the Side B 32DMX COM RX port.
• The Side B 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE DROP TX port is connected to the Side B 40-DMX-C or
40-DMX-CE COM RX port.
Figure 12-80 shows an example of an amplified ROADM node with cabling.
Note Figure 12-80 is an example. Always install fiber-optic cables based on the
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections table for your site.
12-97
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Node Cabling
Figure 12-80 Fibering a ROADM Node
1 Side A DCU TX to Side A OPT-PRE DC RX1 8 Side A 32WSS EXP RX to Side B 32WSS EXP TX
2 Side A DCU RX to Side A OPT-PRE DC TX1 9 Side B 32DMX COM RX to Side B 32WSS DROP TX
3 Side A OPT-BST COM TX to Side A OPT-PRE
COM RX
10 Side B 32WSS COM RX to Side B OPT-PRE
COM TX
115473
DCU-xxx West DCU-xxx East
FAIL
ACT
SF
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
RING
CALL
LOCAL OW
RING
CALL
EXPRESS OW
CONTACT
STATUS
OPT AIC
BST
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
OPT
PRE
FAIL
ACT
SF
MON
RX
COM
TX
RX
DC
TX
OPT
BST
FAIL
ACT
SF
RX
MON
TX
RX
COM
TX
RX
OSC
TX
RX
LINE
TX
OPT
PRE
FAIL
ACT
SF
MON
RX
COM
TX
RX
DC
TX
OSCM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
TX
OSCM
FAIL
ACT
SF
UC
RX
TX
TCC2
FAIL
SF
PWR
A B
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP TEST
RS-232
TCP/IP
LINK
ACT
TCC2
FAIL
SF
PWR
A B
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
REM
SYNC
ACO
ACO
LAMP TEST
RS-232
TCP/IP
LINK
ACT
RX
TX
RX
TX
FAIL
ACT
SF
54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6
DROP
TX
EXP
RX
TX
COM
RX
TX
ADD RX
32WSS
FAIL
ACT
SF
54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6
DROP
TX
EXP
RX
TX
COM
RX
TX
ADD RX
32WSS
FAIL
ACT
SF
32DMX
54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6
COM
RX
TX
FAIL
ACT
SF
32DMX
54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6
COM
RX
TX
32DMX 3
1 2 13 14
7
8
4
5
11
10
6 9
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
P P
+ +
12-98
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Automatic Node Setup
12.9 Automatic Node Setup
Automatic node setup (ANS) is a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE function that adjusts
values of the variable optical attenuators (VOAs) on the DWDM channel paths to equalize the per
channel power at the amplifier input. This power equalization means that at launch, all channels have the
same amplifier power, independent of the input signal on the client interface and independent of the path
crossed by the signal inside the node. This equalization is needed for two reasons:
• Every path introduces a different penalty on the signal that crosses it.
• Client interfaces add their signal to the ONS 15454 DWDM ring with different power levels.
To support ANS, integrated VOAs and photodiodes are provided in the following cards:
• AD-xB-xx.x card express and drop paths
• AD-xC-xx.x card express and add paths
• 4MD-xx.x card add paths
• 32MUX-O card add paths
• 32WSS/40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE/40-WXC-C/80-WXC-C add, drop, and pass through paths
• 32DMX-O card drop paths
• 32DMX, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE card input port
• 40-MUX-C card output port
• 40-SMR1-C/40-SMR2-C add, drop, and pass through ports
• PSM card input and output ports (both working and protect path)
Optical power is equalized by regulating the VOAs. Based on the expected per channel power, ANS
automatically calculates the VOA values by:
• Reconstructing the different channel paths.
• Retrieving the path insertion loss (stored in each DWDM transmission element).
VOAs operate in one of three working modes:
• Automatic VOA Shutdown—In this mode, the VOA is set at maximum attenuation value. Automatic
VOA shutdown mode is set when the channel is not provisioned to ensure system reliability in the
event that power is accidentally inserted.
• Constant Attenuation Value—In this mode, the VOA is regulated to a constant attenuation
independent from the value of the input signal. Constant attenuation value mode is set on VOAs
associated to aggregated paths.
4 Side A 32WSS COM TX to Side A OPT-BST
COM RX
11 Side B 32WSS COM TX to Side B OPT-BST
COM RX
5 Side A 32WSS COM RX to Side A OPT-PRE
COM TX
12 Side B OPT-BST COM TX to Side B OPT-PRE
COM RX
6 Side A 32DMX COM RX to Side A 32WSS DROP TX 13 Side B DCU RX to Side B OPT-PRE DC TX1
7 Side A 32WSS EXP TX to Side B 32WSS EXP RX 14 Side B DCU TX to Side B OPT-PRE DC RX1
1. If a DCU is not installed, a 4-dB attenuator loop, +/–1 dB must be installed between the OPT-PRE DC ports.
12-99
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Automatic Node Setup
• Constant Power Value—In this mode, the VOA values are automatically regulated to keep a constant
output power when changes occur to the input power signal. This working condition is set on VOAs
associated to a single channel path.
ANS calculates the following VOA provisioning parameters:
• Target attenuation
• Target power
Optical patchcords are passive devices that are modeled by the two termination points, each with an
assigned slot and port. If user-provisioned optical patchcords exist, ANS checks if the new connection
is feasible according to internal connection rules. If the user connection violates one of the rules, ANS
returns a denied message. ANS requires the expected wavelength to be provisioned. When provisioning
the expected wavelength, the following rules apply:
• The card family generically characterizes the card name, and not the particular wavelengths
supported (for example, AD-2C-xx.x for all two-channel OADMs).
• At the provisioning layer, you can provision a generic card for a specific slot using CTC or TL1.
• Wavelength assignment is done at the port level.
• An equipment mismatch alarm is raised when a mismatch between the identified and provisioned
value occurs. The default value for the provisioned attribute is AUTO.
ONS 15454 ANS parameters set the values required for the node to operate successfully.
Cisco Transport Planner calculates the ANS parameters based on the requirements of a planned network.
Cisco Transport Planner exports the parameters to NE update file. When the NE update file is imported
in CTC, the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab is populated with the ANS parameters to
provision the node for the network. These ANS parameters can be modified even when the card port is
in IS state. All the ANS parameters are mapped to the physical ports of the cards. ANS parameters can
also be manually added, modified, or deleted in the Provisioning tab. ANS parameters cannot be deleted
when the port is in IS state and if any active circuit uses the ANS parameters. If the new or updated value
is not within the default range as shown in Table 12-11, an error message is displayed. For more
information on how to add, modify, or delete an ANS parameter, see the “NTP-G328 Add, Modify, or
Delete ANS Parameters” procedure on page 14-59.
Note The Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab in CTC is empty if the NE update file is not imported.
Note It is recommended that you use the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update file to provision the ANS
parameters instead of manually adding all the parameters in CTC. ANS provisioning parameters must
be manually changed by Cisco qualified personnel only. Setting incorrect ANS provisioning (either as
preamplifier or booster input power thresholds) may impact traffic.
Table 12-11 Ranges, Values, and Edit Options for the ANS Parameters
ANS Parameter Range/Value Editable with Port in IS
OSC LOS Threshold -50.0 to +30.0 dBm Yes
Channel LOS Threshold -50.0 to +30.0 dBm Yes
Amplifier Working Mode Control Power, Control Gain,
Fixed Gain
Yes1
12-100
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Automatic Node Setup
ANS parameters can be viewed in the node view Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab, as
shown in Figure 12-81.
Amplifier Gain 0.0 to 40.0 dB No
Amplifier Tilt -15.0 to +15.0 dB No
OSC Power -24.0 to 0.0 dBm No
Raman Ratio 0.0 to 100.0% Yes
Raman Total Power 100 to 450 mW Yes
Raman Expected Gain2 0.0 to 12.0 dB Yes
Power -30.0 to +50 dBm Yes3
WXC Dithering 0 to 33 No
Min Expected Span Loss 0.0 to 60.0 dB No
Max Expected Span Loss 0.0 to 60.0 dB No
VOA Attenuation 0 to 30 dB Yes4
Raman Installation Gain
(RAMAN-COP only)
30.0 to 8.0 dB Yes
DFB Power (RAMAN-CTP
only)
+6.0 to -5.0 dBm Yes
DFB LOS Optical Threshold
(RAMAN-CTP only)
-20.0 to -70.0 dBm Yes
1. Per-channel power and tilt can be edited when the Amplifier Working Mode is Control Gain or Control Power and
Fixed Gain when Amplifier Working Mode is Fixed Gain
2. Editable only on OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards.
3. The APC increases or decreases power by 0.5 dB till the new power setpoint is reached. The
APC-OUT-OF-RANGE alarm is raised if the updated power setpoint is outside the expected range.
4. VOA Attenuation associated with a single channel path can be edited when the working mode is
Constant Power Value; VOA Attenuation associated with aggregated paths can be edited when the working mode
is Constant Attenuation Value.
Table 12-11 Ranges, Values, and Edit Options for the ANS Parameters
ANS Parameter Range/Value Editable with Port in IS
12-101
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Automatic Node Setup
Figure 12-81 WDM-ANS Provisioning
The Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab presents the following information:
• Selector—Presents the ANS parameters in a tree view based on physical position. Clicking the + or
– expands or collapses individual tree elements. Clicking a tree element displays the element
parameters in the table on the right. For example, clicking the node name at the top displays all the
node ANS parameters or clicking Slot 1 (PSM) displays the PSM amplifier parameters only. The
ANS parameters can be sorted according to physical position.
• Parameter—Displays the ANS parameter name.
• Origin—Indicates how the parameter was calculated:
– Imported—The value was set by importing the CTP XML file.
– Provisioned—The value was manually provisioned.
– Automatic—The value is automatically calculated by the system using the Raman provisioning
wizard. For more information on how to provision using a wizard, see the “DLP-G468
Configure the Raman Pump Using the Installation Wizard” task on page 15-5.
• Value—Displays the ANS parameter value. The values can be modified manually, although
manually modifying the ANS parameters is not recommended.
• Note—Displays information for parameters that could not be calculated, that is, parameters with
Unknown appearing in the Value column.
• Port —Displays the port value. Port is represented as Slot.Port.
• Active Value —Displays the active parameter value. The active value cannot be modified manually.
When you modify the parameter value in the Value field, the active value is updated with the
modified value after you run ANS.
The Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Port Status tab presents the following information:
• Port—Displays the port value. The port is represented as Slot.Port.
12-102
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Automatic Node Setup
• Parameter—Displays the ANS parameter name.
• Result—After you run ANS, the status for each ANS parameter in the Results column is provided:
– Success - Changed—The parameter setpoint was recalculated successfully.
– Fail - Out of Range—The calculated setpoint is outside the expected range.
– Fail - Missing Input Parameter—The parameter could not be calculated because the required
provisioning data is unknown or unavailable.
– Not Applicable State—Ports are not in use.
• Value—Displays the parameter value.
• Set By—Displays the application that sets this parameter. This field can take the following values:
– ANS
– APC
– Circuit Creation
– Raman Wizard
A parameter could be set by more than one application. For example, VOA Attenuation parameter could
be set by both ANS and APC. In this case, individual entries will be displayed for ANS and APC.
• Last Change—Displays the date and time when the parameter was last modified.
12.9.1 ANS Parameters in a Raman Node With Post-Amplifiers
The following ANS parameters drive the node regulations in the Raman node:
• Power (DC-TX port)—It is the per channel output power level that is allowed on the embedded
erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) amplification stage of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE
card. The power can be measured accurately only when the value of the internal VOA is set to 0 dB.
During circuit creation, the Power (DC-TX port) setpoint is used to calculate the Gain of the
embedded EDFA(GEDFA) in the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card. The GEDFA setpoint has a
direct impact on the actual gain tilt that the embedded EDFA generates. If the value of the GEDFA is
greater than or less than the optimum Gain (G OPTIMUM) setpoint of the OPT-RAMP-C or
OPT-RAMP-CE card, the output spectrum is affected by a positive or negative gain tilt.
The G OPTIMUM setpoints for the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards are:
– OPT-RAMP-C —14 dB
– OPT-RAMP-CE —11 dB
The APC automatically calculates the gain tilt. The difference between the G OPTIMUM and GEDFA
values of every 1 dB causes a gain tilt of 0.7 dB. Setting an appropriate counter-tilt setpoint on the
first amplifier card that is present downstream of the embedded EDFA, compensates the gain tilt.
• Power (COM-TX port)—It is the per channel power level that is allowed on the COM-TX port of
the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card. The Power (COM-TX port) setpoint and the DCU
insertion loss is used to calculate the attenuation value of the internal VOA of the OPT-RAMP-C or
OPT-RAMP-CE card when the first circuit is provisioned. The Power (COM-TX port) setpoint
ensures that the power levels at the input port of the amplifier cards (configured in the OPT-PRE or
the OPT-LINE mode) downstream are stable. CTP generates the setpoint to suit the optimum Gain
range of the amplifier card used.
12-103
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Automatic Node Setup
• Power (LINE-TX port)—It is the per channel power setpoint that is allowed on the LINE-TX output
port. The amplifiers that are present downstream of the OPT-RAMP-C card can be configured as
OPT-PRE in ROADM nodes or as OPT-LINE in optical line amplifier (OLA) nodes. When the first
circuit is provisioned, the Power (LINE-TX port) setpoint is used to automatically calculate the
Gain.
• Amplifier Tilt (LINE-TX port)—It is the gain tilt (TILT CTP) that CTP calculates based on the output
power of the amplifier configured as OPT-PRE in ROADM nodes or as OPT-LINE in OLA nodes.
This is the target value to be reached after circuit creation. The APC dynamically adjusts the tilt
reference (TILT REFERENCE) value to meet the target taking into consideration the Raman tilt
(TILT RAMAN) that the Raman installation wizard calculates and the EDFA tilt (TILT EDFA) that is
calculated by the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card based on its GEDFA value:
TILT CTP setpoint = TILT RAMAN + TILT EDFA + TILT REFERENCE
12.9.2 ANS Parameters in a Raman Node Without Post-Amplifiers
The TCC automatically identifies the node layout as “Raman Only” and regulates the amplifiers and
VOA.
The following ANS parameters drive the node regulations in the Raman node without post-amplifiers:
• Amplifier Tilt (DC-TX port)—CTP configures a predefined tilt value in the range of +/- 1.5 dB on
the embedded EDFA, based on the optical characteristics of the fiber downstream of the
OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card. The embedded EDFA amplifier in OPT-RAMP-C or
OPT-RAMP-CE cards work in the fixed gain mode. The GEDFA is equal to the G OPTIMUM setpoint by
default and ensures a flat output spectrum.
The G OPTIMUM setpoints of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards are:
– OPT-RAMP-C—14 dB
– OPT-RAMP-CE—11 dB
If the tilt reference value is not equal to zero, it has a direct impact on the GEDFA. The APC changes
the tilt reference value and consequently the GEDFA by taking the system tilt contribution
accumulated along the transmission line.
• POWER (LINE-TX port)—It is the maximum per channel power level that is allowed on the
LINE-TX port of the OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, or OSC-CSM card in accordance to the node
layout. CTP calculates this setpoint to ensure that the system does not suffer from non-linear effects.
The APC can change the power levels based on the traffic pattern and fiber type but never exceeds
the setpoint value.
12.9.3 Raman Setup and Tuning
Raman amplification occurs in the optical fiber and the consequent Raman gain depends on the
characteristics of the span (attenuator presence, fiber type, junctions, etc.). As two Raman pumps at two
different wavelengths are used to stimulate the Raman effect, not only is the total signal power
calculation significant, but the right mix of power to ensure gain flatness is crucial. These set points of
the total Raman power and Raman ratio can be configured on the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card
in three ways:
• Raman installation wizard
• CTP XML file
12-104
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Automatic Node Setup
• CTC/TL1 interface
Raman amplification on OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards depends on the optical fiber installed.
Therefore, Raman total power and Raman ratio values calculated using the Raman installation wizard
via CTC is more accurate than the values provisioned by loading the CTP XML file. For this reason, the
value provisioned using the wizard cannot be overridden by the CTP XML file. However, the values
provisioned using the wizard or the CTP XML file can be overriden by manually provisioning the
parameters.
When the Raman installation is completed, a report of the status of Raman configuration on a node in
the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card can be viewed in the Maintenance > Installation tab when
you are in card view.
The Installation tab displays the following fields:
• User—Name of user who configured the Raman pump.
• Date—Date when the Raman pump was configured.
• Status
– Raman Not Tuned—The OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card was provisioned but ANS was
not launched.
– Tuned by ANS—ANS was run successfully and the basic ANS parameters were applied.
– Tuned by Wizard—The Raman installation wizard was run successfully without errors.
– Tuned by User Acceptance—The Raman installation wizard was completed with errors and the
user accepted the values that the wizard calculated.
– Raman is Tuning—The Raman installation wizard is running.
• S1Low (dBm)—See Table 12-12.
• S1High (dBm)—See Table 12-12.
• S2Low (dBm)—See Table 12-12.
• S2High (dBm)—See Table 12-12.
• Power (mW)—Total Raman power set points.
• Ratio—Raman pump ratio setpoint.
• Gain—Expected Raman gain that the wizard calculated.
• Actual Tilt—Expected Raman tilt that the wizard calculated.
• Fiber Cut Recovery—Status of the fiber cut restoration.
– Executed—The restore procedure was completed successfully.
– Pending—The restore procedure is not complete.
– Failed—The system failed to execute the procedure.
• Fiber Cut Date—Date when the fiber cut occured.
The Raman pump is equipped with two different Raman pumps transmitting powers (P1 and P2) at two
different wavelengths 1 and 2. During installation, the two pumps alternatively turn ON and OFF at
two different power values. 1 and 2 signals are used as probes at the end of spans to measure Raman
gain efficiency of the two Raman pumps separately.
The example in Figure 12-82 shows the Raman gain on an OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card in
Node B that was measured by setting the wavelength and power measurements as follows:
1=1530.33 nm signal probe at Node A
λ λ
λ λ
λ
12-105
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Automatic Node Setup
2=1560.61 nm signal probe at Node A
P1 = 1425 nm power at Node B
P2 = 1452 nm power at Node B
Plow = 100 mW
Phigh = 280 mW
Pmin = 8 mW
Pmax = 450 mW
Figure 12-82 Raman Gain on Node B
The S1low, S1high, S2low, and S2low values in the Maintenance > Installation tab are based on the
power values read on the LINE-RX port of Node B.
λ
247381
OSC
Add
Node A Node B
Pump
Add
OSC
Drop
Pump
Drop
Pump
Drop
OSC
LINE-RX Drop
RAMAN-TX
RAMAN-RX
RAMAN-RX
RAMAN-TX
COM-TX COM-RX
COM-RX COM-TX
DC-RX OSC-RX
OSC-TX OSC-RX
LINE-TX
Probe
signals
Raman
signals
Raman
Pump
Probe signal
power
LINE-RX
LINE-TX
DC-TX
DC-TX DC-RX
PD4
PD5
PD7 PD6 PD3 PD4
PD10
PD12
PD12
PD10
PD3
PD1
PD1
PD6
OSC-TX
PD7
PD5
Pump
Add
OSC
Add
Table 12-12 Example of Raman Power Measurements
Input P1 P2
Probe Signal Power
Received at Node B
1=1530.33 nm at
Node A
Plow = 100 mW Pmin = 8 mW S1low
Phigh = 250 mW Pmin = 8 mW S1high
2=1560.61 nm at
Node A
Pmin = 8 mW Plow = 100 mW S2low
Pmin = 8 mW Phigh = 250 mW S2low
λ
λ
12-106
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Automatic Node Setup
12.9.4 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Card Start Up and Fiber Link Turn Up
The local and remote nodes, equipped with RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards, must follow this
sequence to startup the card and complete the Raman link turn up.
1. The distributed feedback laser must be enabled—The RAMAN-CTP cards are equipped with
embedded distributed feedback (DFB) lasers that operate at 1568.77 nm. The DFB RX port is
capable of detecting very low power levels (-55 dBm or -60 dBm). By default, the DFB laser is
disabled and the DFB ports are in IS-AINS (ANSI)/Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) state. The
DFB ports are moved to IS (ANSI)/Unlocked (ETSI) state and the laser is enabled in pulse mode,
by performing either one of the following:
a. In a DCN Extension layout, ANS is launched. A side-to-side OTS provisionable patchcord
(PPC) is created on the side of the node where the RAMAN-CTP card is installed after the DFB
ports are successfully regulated (ports are in service). During the creation of the PPC, the TNC
card moves the following ports to the IS (ANSI)/Unlocked (ETSI) state:
– Ports included in the optical path—LINE ports of the RAMAN-CTP card
– RAMAN-TX and ASE-RX ports of the RAMAN-CTP card
– RAMAN-TX port of the RAMAN-COP card (if the card is installed)
Note At this stage, the RAMAN ports do not emit power pulses even though they are in
IS (ANSI)/Unlocked (ETSI) state.
b. In an OSC based layout, ANS is launched. An OSC termination is created on the side of the
node where the RAMAN-CTP card is installed after the DFB ports are successfully regulated.
During creation of the OSC termination, the TNC card moves the following ports to the
IS (ANSI)/Unlocked (ETSI) state:
– Ports included in the optical path—LINE and COM ports of the RAMAN-CTP card and the
LINE ports of the line amplifier
– RAMAN-TX and ASE-RX ports of the RAMAN-CTP card
– RAMAN-TX port of the RAMAN-COP card (if the card is installed)
Note At this stage, the RAMAN ports do not emit power pulses even though they are in
IS (ANSI)/Unlocked (ETSI) state.
The DFB laser from the local node emits a 5-second pulse every 100 seconds and waits for a similar
5-second pulse in response from the DFB laser on the remote node.
Note For short spans, the DFB optical power level must be regulated by the internal VOA (working in
constant power mode) using the provisioned value of the DFB power setpoint. The DFB power
setpoint is limited to a maximum of +3 dBm.
2. The DFB laser link continuity is checked—The acknowledgement mechanism between the peer
DFB modules works in the following manner:
– The DFB laser on the local node emits a 5-second pulse.
– The remote node detects a valid signal (value above the DFB LOS Optical Threshold) on the
DFB-RX port and responds with a 9-second DFB laser pulse.
12-107
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Automatic Node Setup
– The local node detects a signal from the remote DFB laser on the DFB-RX port and starts a
counter to check the duration of the remote pulse.
– If the signal is detected for at least 9 seconds, link continuity is verified and the local node
moves the DFB laser to steady (active) state.
– The remote node performs a similar signal validation and eventually the DFB link is active.
Note If the DFB-RX port detects a drop in the power below the threshold value before 9 seconds have
elapsed, the procedure to check DFB link continuity is restarted.
Note If one of the fibers is down, the DFB signal must be in OFF state in the opposite fiber too. The
acknowledgement mechanism automatically performs this action.
3. A check for short spans is performed—When the DFB signal is active, a point-to-point measurement
of the span loss is done. The node measures the loss on the incoming span because the DFB signal
is co-propagating. The insertion loss is the difference between the power value on the DFB-TX port
of the remote node and the power value on the DFB-RX port of the local node. If the span loss is
less than 20 dB, the RAMAN-CTP card raises the PWR-PROT-ON alarm on the RAMAN-TX port
and the Raman pumps stop the startup procedure.
4. Excessive back reflection on RAMAN-CTP cards is checked—After the span loss check is
complete, the Raman pumps on the RAMAN-CTP card on the local node are turned on in Automatic
Power Reduction (APR) mode at reduced power (10 mW) lasting for 200 ms. The RAMAN-CTP
cards perform a back reflection power test using an embedded fail threshold, which is configured
during card production. The back reflection test lasts for 500 ms at the maximum. If the back
reflection test is successful, the sequence continues with Step 5. If the check fails, the RAMAN-CTP
get stuck with the DFB laser in ON state and the Raman pumps do not switch to full power. A Raman
Laser Shutdown (RLS) alarm is raised on the RAMAN-TX port, where the failure is detected.
5. Excessive back reflection on RAMAN-COP cards is checked, if the RAMAN-COP cards are
installed—The Raman pumps on the RAMAN-CTP card on the local node must shut down after the
back reflection test is successful. This allows the same check to be executed by the RAMAN-COP
card on the local node without any interference from the RAMAN-CTP card remnant signal.
When the Raman pumps on the RAMAN-CTP card shut down, a specific command is sent through
the backplane lines to the RAMAN-COP card on the local node to turn on the Raman pumps on the
RAMAN-COP card to APR mode and perform a back reflection test on the internal connection
(RAMAN-TX port of the RAMAN-COP card to the RAMAN-RX port of the RAMAN-CTP card).
The back reflection test lasts for a maximum of 500 ms. If the back reflection test is successful, the
Raman pumps on RAMAN-COP cards are immediately moved from the APR state to full power
using the Total Power setpoint. If the back reflection check fails, the RAMAN-COP pumps get stuck
in APR state and a RLS alarm is raised on the RAMAN-TX port, where the failure is detected.
6. The Raman pumps of the RAMAN-CTP card on the local node are moved to full power after the
waiting time elapses—When the local RAMAN-CTP card, in Step 5 shuts down its Raman pumps
to initiate Raman pump startup of the RAMAN-COP card, it transitions to a waiting mode. After the
expiry of 12 seconds, the RAMAN-CTP card must turn up its Raman pumps and move them to full
power using the Total Power setpoint irrespective of any alarm that is raised by the RAMAN-COP
card in Step 5.
7. The Raman link is tuned—A manual Raman Day 0 tuning procedure must be executed before
creating the OCH circuits. The Raman link can also be tuned by the ANS parameters. The Raman
amplified span is now ready for traffic provisioning.
12-108
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Network Functional View
8. The OSC link is turned up and the ALS condition is removed on the line amplifiers—When the
RAMAN-CTP (and RAMAN-COP, if present) Raman pumps are tuned, the amplification provided
in the fiber is sufficient to detect a valid OSC signal, even in very long spans. The OSC detection
clears the LOS-O alarm and results in the removal of the ALS condition on the line amplifiers. If an
OSC signal is not available, the amplified spontaneous emission (ASE) Raman noise power received
at the LINE-RX port of the line amplifier is sufficient to remove the LOS-O alarm and enable the
line amplifier startup.
The RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP (if installed) cards on the remote node must perform the same
start up sequence (Steps 4 through 8) in asynchronous mode with respect to the local node.
12.10 DWDM Network Functional View
The DWDM network functional view displays a graphical representation of the DWDM cards, internal
connections, circuits, optical power, and alarms in the DWDM network. The DWDM network functional
view is similar to the DWDM functional view in its graphical layout and behavior at the node level.
The DWDM network functional view consists of two views:
• NFV view—Enables you to view the circuit connections and the flow of signals at the network level.
• GMPLS view—Enables you to create Generalized Multiprotocol Label Switching (GMPLS) circuits
that are optically feasible. These circuit connections can be viewed at the network level. The
GMPLS view also helps to reroute a circuit on an alternate path. For more information about
GMPLS circuits, see the “12.10.1 GMPLS Control Plane” section on page 12-108.
The DWDM network functional view offers dual options to view the network:
• Graphical view—Displays the circuit connections, optical power, and alarms on a circuit through a
graphical representation. To view the graphical display of the circuit connections, select the circuit
in the Circuits tab in the Network Data pane. In the toolbar, click the dB, SL, or PV tool to view the
optical power in the nodes, span loss values of the spans, or insertion loss of the patchcords,
respectively. For more information about the use of the graphical view, see the “12.10.2.1 Graphical
View Pane” section on page 12-111.
• Tabular format—Displays the circuit connections, optical power, and alarms of a circuit in a tabular
format in the Network Data pane. For more information about the Network Data pane, see the
“12.10.2.3 Network Data Pane” section on page 12-113.
For information on how to view optical power values and alarms of the circuit selected in the
Circuits tab of the Network Data pane, see the “NTP-G231 View Optical Power Values and Alarms
Using Network Functional View” task on page 12-119.
You can export the DWDM network functional view reports to .html, .csv, or .tsv format. For more
information on exporting the reports, see the “DLP-G529 Export Network Functional View Reports”
task on page 12-120.
12.10.1 GMPLS Control Plane
This section describes the GMPLS-based control plane. The GMPLS control plane can be used to
provision optical channels for the ONS 15454 DWDM platform.
When a circuit is created using the Circuit Creation wizard in CTC, the circuit gets provisioned but might
not be able to carry traffic due to optical signal degradation caused by optical impairments such as:
• Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio (OSNR)
12-109
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Network Functional View
• Chromatic Mode Dispersion (CMD)
• Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD)
• Four-Wave Mixing (FWM)
• Self-Phase Modulation (SPM)
• Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL)
• Xtalk
To overcome this problem, a GMPLS-based control plane is now supported that has the capability to
validate the optical channel feasibility before a circuit is provisioned. The GMPLS control plane is
available with the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM WSON package and is supported on the Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS 15454 M6, and Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms. A GMPLS circuit is provisioned only if the
optical feasibility is established ensuring transmission of client traffic on the network.
The optical plane uses the GMPLS routing and signalling protocols, such as
Open Shortest Path First - Traffic Engineering (OSPF-TE) and
Resource Reservation Protocol - Traffic Engineering (RSVP-TE) to determine available optical routes.
Bandwidth, network protection, traffic engineering, and optimal utilization of network resources are
taken into consideration during path computation, validation, and provisioning.
The functions of the GMPLS control plane are:
• Identifying network topology
• Discovering automatically resources, such as Network Elements (NEs), links, paths, wavelengths,
and OCH ports
• Calculating optical paths
• Validating optical circuits taking into account the optical impairments
• Provisioning optical channels (OCHCC, OCHNC, and OCH Trail)
• Rerouting wavelength for traffic restoration
In mesh networks consisting of omnidirectional and colorless ROADM nodes, it is possible to provision
a circuit using any path and wavelength, without recabling or physical intervention on the site. The
GMPLS control plane controls and provisions the DWDM optical interfaces installed on routers by
defining the appropriate wavelength.
When resources are added to or removed from the network, the control plane can reroute existing
connections through an alternate path having optical feasibility to make the best use of the newly
available resources.
These topics provide additional information on the usage of GMPLS control plane:
• 12.10.1.1 Card Support
• 12.10.1.2 Acceptance Thresholds
• 12.10.1.3 Validation Modes
12-110
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Network Functional View
12.10.1.1 Card Support
Table 12-13 lists the card supported by the GMPLS control plane.
12.10.1.2 Acceptance Thresholds
The GMPLS control plane validates the optical feasibility of an OCH circuit to ensure that the circuit is
operational after provisioning. The optical feasibility is determined based on the optical impairments.
The optical feasibility is represented by the following colors:
• Green—Indicates that the channel failure risk is 0%.
• Yellow—Indicates that the channel failure risk is between 0% and 16%.
• Orange—Indicates that the channel failure risk is between 16% and 50%.
• Red—Indicates that the channel failure risk is greater that 50%.
During circuit creation, you can define the acceptance threshold value in the Circuit Parameters pane of
the GMPLS view in CTC. The circuit is provisioned only if the evaluated feasibility is greater than or
equal to the user-defined threshold.
After the circuit is created, its acceptance threshold and optical feasibility is displayed in the
Acpt Threshold and the Opt Valid columns in the Circuits tab in CTC.
12.10.1.3 Validation Modes
In GMPLS view, the validation mode can be set during circuit creation. The validation modes are:
• Full—The circuit gets created when the circuit validation result is greater than or equal to the
acceptance threshold value.
• None—The circuit is created without considering the acceptance threshold value. The Opt Valid
column in the Circuits tab displays the value, “No Valid”.
12.10.2 DWDM Network Functional View (NFV)
This section describes the NFV view.
To navigate to the NFV view, go to the network view in CTC and click the FV icon in the toolbar. The
NFV view opens.
The NFV view has the following panes:
Table 12-13 Cards Supported by the GMPLS Control Plane
Unit Type Card Name
TXP/MXPs All the TXP/MXP cards except AR-MXP and AR-XP cards.
Amplifiers OPT_BST, OPT_BST_E, OPT_AMP_17_C, OPT_PRE, OPT_AMP_C,
OPT_RAMP_C, OPT_RAMP_E, OPT_EDFA_17, and OPT_EDFA_24
Filters DMX40, DMX32, MUX40, 15216-MD_40_ODD, and 15216-MD_40_EVEN
Deinterleavers MD_ID_50 and 15216_ID_50
ROADMs 32WSS, 40WSS-C, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C
Patch panels 15454-PP-4-SMR, PP-MESH-4, PP-MESH-8
12-111
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Network Functional View
• 12.10.2.1 Graphical View Pane
• 12.10.2.2 Overview Pane
• 12.10.2.3 Network Data Pane
12.10.2.1 Graphical View Pane
The graphical view displays all the nodes and devices in the network. Use the graphical view to gather
information on circuits, optical power, and alarms for nodes.
To expand a node, double-click the node in the network functional view map or right-click the node and
choose Open Node FV. The node opens and the sides of the nodes are displayed showing the various
cards and patch panels present on each side. To open only one side of a node, right-click the node and
choose Open Side > Side:x from the context menu.
Place the mouse over a card to view the card information. For example, when the mouse is placed over
the OPT-BST card of a side, the tooltip text displays OPT-BST: shelf1/s1, indicating that the OPT-BST
card is located in Shelf 1, Slot 1. Double-click a card to bring up the CTC card view.
To view the port information, place the mouse over a card port. For example, when the mouse is placed
over the first port of the 40-MUX card, the tooltip text displays CARD_PORT-BAND-1-RX, indicating
that the port is for the first band of wavelengths (wavelengths 1 to 8) to be added into the optical path on
the 40-MUX card. These wavelengths come into the 40-MUX card from a transponder (TXP) or
muxponder (MXP) on the patch panel.
Place the mouse over a patchcord to see the state of the output and input port associated with that
patchcord.
When you right-click inside a side view, a context menu appears with the options listed in Table 12-14.
Table 12-14 Side View Context Menu Options
Additionally, to zoom-in and zoom-out of the map, press Ctrl and scroll up and down with the scroll
wheel on your mouse. The keystroke commands provide the keyboard shortcuts for graphical control of
the NFV. To access the keystroke commands, click Help > Keystroke commands.
When you have multiple node functional views opened, you cannot view the graphical details of the
individual nodes due to overlapping. To avoid overlapping of the nodes:
1. Select the entire node by clicking on the title bar of the node and pressing Ctrl+A. Drag the node
away from other nodes.
2. Select the individual side of the node and drag it away from other sides.
Option Description
Close Node FV Closes the node functional view.
Node DoubleZoomIN Magnifies the node view to double its size.
Node DoubleZoomOUT Reduces the node view to half of its size.
Node Select all Selects the complete node.
Rotate Left Rotates the side 90 degrees counterclockwise (all connections are
maintained).
Rotate Right Rotates the side 90 degrees clockwise (all connections are maintained).
Close Side Closes the side view.
Open Side Opens the side view.
12-112
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Network Functional View
12.10.2.1.1 DWDM NFV Toolbar Options
Table 12-15 lists the tools available in the DWDM NFV toolbar.
Table 12-15 DWDM NFV Toolbar Options
Tool Description
Pan Enables you to select and move the whole network view.
Select Enables you to select entities by clicking on them or by dragging a rectangular area
around them.
Zoom in rect Enables you to zoom in the area defined by drawing a rectangle.
Zoom in Zooms in the circuit map.
Zoom out Zooms out the circuit map.
Reset Nodes
Zoom
Resets the graphical view to the default zoom size.
Fit to View Resizes the view to fit all the nodes in the graphical view.
Print Prints the functional view data.
Magnifier Displays a virtual magnifying glass which zooms in the area underneath. Hold the left
mouse button to see the magnifying glass.
dB
(Show Power)
Displays the optical power (dBm) for the card ports in the form of power balloons.
This information is available for the nodes that have the functional view open.
You can view the aggregated power only for those nodes that have the FV open. To
open the node FV, right-click the node and choose Open Node FV. Right-click the
internal patchcord link and select the Flip Power Balloons option to change the
position of power balloon on the selected patchcord. The power balloon is flipped and
you can see the power details of the selected patchcord without the power balloons
overlapping with each other.
SL (Show
Spanloss)
Displays the span loss value on the spans.
PV (Verify
Patchcords)
• Displays the insertion loss of the patchcord. The PV calculates the input and
output power of the patchcord. You can view the insertion loss of the patchchord
only for those nodes that have the FV open. To open the node FV, right-click the
node and choose Open Node FV. The insertion loss should not exceed 2 dBm.
The patchcord lines are colored to indicate the insertion loss:
– Red—Indicates that the insertion loss of the patchcords exceeded 2 dBm.
– White—Indicates that the system was not able to calculate the insertion loss
of the patchcord.
– Black—Indicates that the insertion loss of the patchcords is within the limit
and not more than 2 dBm.
Refresh Power
Info
Refreshes the optical power and span loss information. The optical power and span
loss information is calculated and is refreshed in the graphical display and optical
power table.
Close
Expanded
Nodes
Closes all the opened nodes in the functional view.
12-113
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Network Functional View
12.10.2.2 Overview Pane
The Overview pane displays the complete network. A rectangle is displayed in the Overview pane. The
area enclosed by the rectangle is enlarged and displayed in the graphical view. To view a specific area
of the network in the graphical view, move the rectangle to that location in the Overview pane. To zoom
in or zoom out the network in the graphical view, resize the rectangle by dragging its corners in the
Overview pane.
12.10.2.3 Network Data Pane
The Network Data pane displays the following three tabs that provide information about circuits:
• Circuits—Displays the list of circuits in the network. Choose the circuit from the list to view the
circuit information. A graphical display of the selected circuit and the associated span is visible in
the map. Additionally, you can view the general information (type, source, and destination), state
(IS,OOS [ANSI] or unlocked, locked [ETSI]), and physical connection details (wavelength,
direction, and span) of the selected circuit.
The circuit can be in any of the following status:
– DISCOVERED
– PARTIAL
– DISCOVERED_TL1
– PARTIAL_TL1
When you switch the selection between the circuits, and if both the circuits are in
DISCOVERED_TL1 status, the circuit details of the new selection may not be displayed as the
previously selected circuit details are not refreshed.
If you find that the current selection is not refreshed, do either of the following:
– Deselect the selected circuit before selecting the another circuit.
– Update all the selected circuits using the Reconfigure Circuit option. Go to CTC Tools >
Circuits > Reconfigure Circuits menu to reconfigure the selected circuits. During
reconfiguration, CTC reassembles all connections of the selected circuits and VCAT members
into circuits based on path size, direction, and alignment.
• Optical Power—Displays the optical link and span loss of the circuits. This tab lists the aggregated
power-in and power-out of all the internal patchcords for the nodes that have the functional view
open.
• Alarms—Displays all the alarms present on the network. If a card has one or more alarms (that is
part of the selected circuit), the node turns either yellow or red, depending on the severity of the
alarm. The alarm in red indicates a major alarm and yellow indicates a minor alarm. If there is an
alarm present in the card that is not part of the selected circuit, then the node appears gray.
If a node has alarms that is not part of the selected circuits, then the alarms are not listed in the table,
but the node is colored in the map.
Make node
invisible
Hides the nodes that are not part of the selected circuit.
Reset To
Default
Restores the panes in the network functional view to its default locations.
Tool Description
12-114
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Network Functional View
12.10.3 DWDM Network Functional View (GMPLS)
This section explains the GMPLS view.
The GMPLS view uses the GMPLS control plane to provision circuits. For more information about the
GMPLS control plane, see the “12.10.1 GMPLS Control Plane” section on page 12-108.
To navigate to the GMPLS view, go to the network view in the CTC and click the FV icon in the toolbar.
Choose GMPLS from the Perspective View drop-down list. The GMPLS view opens.
The GMPLS view has the following panes:
• 12.10.2.1 Graphical View Pane
• 12.10.2.2 Overview Pane
• 12.10.2.3 Network Data Pane
• Circuit Parameters Pane—Options in this pane are used to provision a GMPLS circuit.
• Working/Protect Port Parameters Pane—Options in this pane are used to provision working and
protect port parameters for the GMPLS circuit.
• Alien Wavelength Selection Pane—Options in this pane are used to provision the alien class
wavelength.
• Wavelength Re-route Pane—Options in this pane are used to reroute a GMPLS circuit on an
alternate path. For more information about wavelength rerouting, see the “12.10.3.4 Wavelength
Rerouting” section on page 12-117.
12.10.3.1 GMPLS View Toolbar Options
The GMPLS view has the same set of tools as the NFV view as listed in Table 12-15. The additional
toolbar options are described in Table 12-16.
Table 12-16 GMPLS View Toolbar Options
12.10.3.2 GMPLS Path Constraints
During GMPLS circuit creation or wavelength rerouting, it is possible to force specific nodes and links
to be included or excluded in the circuit path by applying specific constraints. The GMPLS circuit is
created if a feasible path is found that complies with the specified constraints.
Tools Description
W&P Constraints Config Displays the list of constraints to be applied on the nodes or links. For
information about path constraints, see the “12.10.3.2 GMPLS Path
Constraints” section on page 12-114.
S/D Configuration Displays the options to define the source or destination port during GMPLS
circuit creation. For more information about configuring the source and
destination ports, see the “12.10.3.3 Source and Destination Port
Configuration” section on page 12-115.
Wavelength re-routing Displays the Wavelength re-routing view that can be used to reroute a
GMPLS circuit on an alternate path. For more information about
wavelength rerouting, see the “12.10.3.4 Wavelength Rerouting” section on
page 12-117
12-115
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Network Functional View
In the GMPLS view, the W&P Constraints Config drop-down list in the toolbar provides the constraint
options listed in Table 12-17 during circuit creation. Choose the required option and select the node or
span in the graphical view to which the constraint must be applied.
Table 12-17 Working and Protect Path Constraint Options
In the Wavelength re-routing view, the Constraints Config drop-down list provides constraint options
listed in Table 12-18. Choose the required option and select the node or span in the graphical view to
which the constraint must be applied.
Table 12-18 Reroute Path Constraint Options
Note The constraint options can also be accessed by right-clicking the node or span.
12.10.3.3 Source and Destination Port Configuration
During GMPLS circuit creation, the source and destination ports at the circuit endpoints must be defined
in the map. The circuit endpoints can be channel ports (on line cards) or TXP/MXP ports depending on
the circuit type being created.
Use either of the following methods to define the source and destination ports:
Method 1:
1. From the S/D Configuration drop-down list, choose either of the following:
– Working S/D—The selected ports are defined as the source and destination ports on the working
path.
Option Description
exclude W Node The working path does not pass through the selected node.
exclude P Node The protect path does not pass through the selected node.
exclude W&P Node The working and protected path do not pass through the selected node.
include W Node The working path passes through the selected node.
include P Node The protect path passes through the selected node.
exclude W Link The working path does not use the selected span.
exclude P Link The protect path does not use the selected span.
exclude W&P Link The working and protected path do not use the selected span.
include W Link The working path uses the selected span.
include P Link The protect path uses the selected span.
Option Description
exclude Node The rerouted path does not pass through the selected node.
include Node The rerouted path passes through the selected node.
exclude Link The rerouted path does not use the selected span.
include Link The rerouted path uses the selected span.
12-116
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Network Functional View
– Protected S/D—The selected ports are defined as the source and destination ports on the protect
path.
2. Click a node in the map to open the node functional view. The sides of the nodes are displayed
showing the various cards and patch panel present on each side. To open only one side of the node,
right-click the node and choose Open Side > Side:x from the context menu.
3. Click the patch panel to open it. All the patchcords and cards connected to the patch panel are
displayed.
4. Use the zoom tools in the toolbar to manage the graphical view.
5. Click the card port that is associated with the wavelength for which the circuit is being created. A
pop-up menu displays the available options:
– If the port is on a TXP/MXP card, available client and trunk interfaces are displayed. Select the
required interface.
– If the port is an add/drop port, a list of supported wavelengths is displayed. Select the required
wavelength.
Method 2:
1. Open the node functional view on the map by using either one of the following:
– Double-click the node.
– Right-click the node and select Open Node FV from the context menu.
– The various cards and patch panel connected to each side are displayed.
2. Use the zoom tools in the toolbar to manage the graphical view.
3. Double-click the patch panel. The patch panel opens displaying all the patchcords and cards
connected to it.
4. Click the card port that is associated with the wavelength for which the circuit is being created. A
pop-up menu displays the available options:
– If the port is on a TXP/MXP card, available client and trunk interfaces are displayed. Select the
required interface.
– If the port is an add/drop port, a list of supported wavelengths is displayed. Select the required
wavelength.
5. A pop-up menu appears that displays one of the following pair of options:
– Work. Bid Src/Dst Port—The selected port is the bidirectional source and destination port on
the working path.
– Prot. Bid Src/Dst Port—The selected port is the bidirectional source and destination port on the
protect path.
– Work. Source Port—The selected port is the source port on the working path.
– Prot. Source Port—The selected port is the source port on the protect path.
– Work. Destination Port—The selected port is the destination port on the working path.
– Prot. Destination Port—The selected port is the destination port on the protect path.
– Select the required option.
12-117
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Network Functional View
After the port is defined as the source or destination, a balloon is displayed on the map. The balloon
indicates that the port is the source (S), destination (D), or both (S/D) for the circuit endpoint along with
the associated wavelength. If the port is on the working path, the balloon is light blue in color; if the port
is on the protect path, the balloon is deep blue in color.
Note During the creation of a Y-cable protected OCHCC circuit, the protected port gets selected automatically
when the working port is selected because both the ports are in the same protection group.
12.10.3.3.1 Working and Protect Port Parameters
After a port is selected in the map as the source or destination endpoint, the Working Port Parameters
pane, or Protected Port Parameters pane, or both are displayed depending on whether the selected ports
are on the working or protect path. Table 12-19 lists the port parameters relevant to the selected port that
are displayed in these panes.
Table 12-19 Working and Protect Port Parameters
The working and protect port parameters on the source and destination endpoints must match with each
other. Otherwise, the mismatched parameters are displayed in red in the port parameters pane. If feasible,
align the parameters by using the various drop-down lists available in this pane. Choose Apply to
confirm selection.
12.10.3.4 Wavelength Rerouting
A GMPLS circuit can be rerouted through an alternate path that adheres to all the parameters that were
defined during the circuit creation. Additional path constraints also must be specified based on which
alternate route is computed. For more information about reroute path constraints, see Table 12-18. The
Item Description
Client Port Displays the client port information.
ITU-T G709 Sets the ITU-T G.709 monitoring setting on the optical
transport network. The available options are Enable or Disable.
FEC Mode
(OCHCC and OCH trail only)
Sets the FEC mode for OTN lines. FEC mode can be Disabled,
Standard, or Enhanced (provides greater range and lower bit
error rate).
Mapping Type Sets the mapping for the card. The options available are Not
used, Asynchronous, Synchronous, ODU Multiplex (client
SONET/SDH payload), or No Fixed Stuff. The choices
available depend on the card.
MLSE Setting If checked, sets the maximum likelihood sequence estimation
(MLSE) parameter on the trunk port of the MXP_MR_10DME,
MXP_MR_10DMEX, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10EX,
MXP_2.5G_10E, and MXP_2.5G_10EX cards. The options
available are Enable and Disable.
Overclock Setting Enables or disables overclock mode on the trunk port.
12-118
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Network Functional View
wavelength re-routing feature provides an efficient solution for circuit restoration during path failure.
For more information on wavelength rerouting, see the “DLP-G710 Reroute Wavelength of GMPLS
Circuits” task on page 16-48.
12.10.3.5 Fiber Attributes and Alien Wavelength Provisioning
Choose the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > GMPLS/WSON tab to define and view fiber and alien
wavelength parameters to be used during GMPLS circuit creation or upgrade of a a non-GMPLS Circuit
to a GMPLS circuit. The GMPLS/WSON tab contains three subtabs, namely Fiber Attributes, Alien
Wavelength, and Alien Ports.
The parameters available in the Fiber Attributes, Alien Wavelength, and Alien Ports tabs are populated
in CTC after importing the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update configuration file. See “NTP-G143
Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” task on page 14-47 for more
information. If required, additional changes can be made to these parameters in the Fiber Attributes and
Alien Wavelength tabs.
The Fiber Attributes tab is used to view and define the fiber parameters, which are displayed in a tabular
format. Table 12-20 lists the fiber parameters available in the Fiber Attributes tab.
Table 12-20 Fiber Attributes Tab Parameters
Use the Side drop-down list to choose a side; the attributes of the fibers that are connected to that side
are displayed in the table. The Unit drop-down list enables you to choose the measurement unit for the
fiber length. If required, the fiber type and the fiber length can be modified in the table. Choose Apply
to apply the changes.
The Alien Wavelength tab is used to view and define the port and wavelength parameters for the alien
wavelength. Table 12-21 lists the options available in the Alien Wavelength tab. After making the
necessary settings, choose Apply to apply the changes.
Table 12-21 Alien Wavelength Tab Options
Option Description
Side Displays the optical side to which the fiber is connected.
Fiber Type Choose the fiber type from the drop-down list.
Topology direction Displays whether the link is entering or exiting the node.
Fiber number Displays the fiber sequence number. Useful when different types of fiber are
present on the span.
Length Allows to edit the fiber length.
Option Description
Type Select the type of card on which the alien wavelength is configured. The
available options are optical card and passive card. The Passive Card option is
available only if there are passive cards available on the network.
Shelf Choose the shelf in which the card resides.
Slot Choose the slot in which the card resides.
Port Choose the card port on which the alien wavelength is configured.
Alien Wavelength Choose the alien wavelength class.
12-119
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Network Functional View
The Alien Ports tab is used to view the port and wavelength parameters for the alien wavelength, which
is displayed in a tabular format. Table 12-22 lists the details displayed in the Alien Ports tab. Choose the
Refresh button to refresh the tab fields.
Table 12-22 Alien Ports Tab Parameters
12.10.4 Related Procedures
NTP-G151 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Client Connections, page 16-15
NTP-G178 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Trails, page 16-33
NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
NTP-G58 Locate and View Optical Channel Circuits, page 16-65
NTP-G231 View Optical Power Values and Alarms Using Network Functional View, page 12-119
NTP-G231 View Optical Power Values and Alarms Using Network Functional View
Lambda Displays the alien wavelength value.
FEC Sets the FEC mode on the alien wavelength channel. The available modes are:
• Disabled
• Standard
• Enhanced
• Enhanced I.4
• Enhanced I.7
Option Description
Option Description
Position Displays the shelf, slot, port information on which the alien wavelength is
configured.
Alien Wavelength Displays the alien wavelength class.
Lambda Displays the alien wavelength value.
FEC Displays the FEC mode.
Purpose This procedure enables you to view optical power values and alarms of the
circuit selected in the Network Functional View.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superusers only
12-120
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Network Functional View
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View and click the FV icon in the toolbar.
Step 2 Click the Circuits tab to view the list of circuits present in the network.
Step 3 Select the circuit from the list. A new pane with the Circuit:circuit name appears.
Step 4 View the following information in the Circuit:circuit name pane.
• General info—Displays circuit type, source, and destination information.
• Status—Displays the circuit protection type, administrative state, and circuit status.
• Physical—Displays the wavelength, number of spans, and circuit direction.
• Span and Power Level tab—Displays the span loss and node power level.
• Circuit Alarms tab—Displays alarms.
Step 5 To view the power, span loss, and insertion loss of a circuit in the map, click the following icons on the
toolbar:
• dB—Displays the power of the circuit.
• SL—Displays the loss of signal of the desired span.
• PV—Displays the insertion loss of the patch cord.
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G529 Export Network Functional View Reports” task on page 12-120, as needed.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G529 Export Network Functional View Reports
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View and click the FV icon in the toolbar.
Step 2 Click File > Export to open the Export dialog.
Step 3 You can export the files in any of the following formats:
• As HTML —The exported file is saved as an HTML file. Also, a .png file is saved that provides
graphical representation of the site layout.
• AS CSV—The file is saved in the Comma Separated Values (.csv) format. The circuit information
is saved in a text file where the data is separated with a comma.
• TSV—The file is saved in a Tab Separated Values (.tsv) file. The circuit information is saved in a
file where the data is separated by tabs.
Purpose This task exports the Network Functional View report in .html, .csv, and
.tsv formats.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superusers only
12-121
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Network Functional View
The exported file contains details about the aggregated power and alarms at the network level. If
specific circuits are selected in the network before exporting the file, the alarms and power of these
circuits are also exported.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Specify the file name and the folder to save the export data and click Save.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
12-122
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
DWDM Network Functional View
NTP-G319 Connect a Passive Module to the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Node
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or Cisco ONS 15454 M6 node where
you want to connect the passive module. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In the multishelf view (multishelf mode), click Provisioning > WDM-ANS tabs.
Step 3 Click the Passive Cards subtab.
Step 4 Click Create button. The Create Passive Card dialogue box appears.
Step 5 From the Card Type drop-down list, select the passive module that you want to connect to the USB port
of the ONS 15454 M2 or ONS 15454 M6 node. For each passive module, CTC displays a table listing
with Passive, Equipment Type, and Locations columns. Selecting the passive module from the
Equipment Type column displays the port list of the passive module and its associated wavelength, and
MPO.
Note Perform the above step (Step 5) only if the passive module has not been already provisioned by the
CTP xml files).
The available passive modules that can be connected to the USB port are:
• PASSIVE MD 40 ODD
• PASSIVE MD 40 EVEN
• PASSIVE EF 40 ODD
• PASSIVE EF 40 EVEN
• PASSIVE MD 48 ODD
• PASSIVE MD 48 EVEN
• PASSIVE MD ID 50
• PASSIVE 15216 48 CM
• MESH-PPR-SMR
• PASSIVE DCU
• PASSIVE PP MESH 4
• PASSIVE PP MESH 8
Purpose This procedure connects the passive module to the USB port of the
Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or Cisco ONS 15454 M6 node.
Tools/Equipment Either 15216-FLD-4, 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, 15216-MD-48-ODD, 15216-MD-40-EVEN,
15216-EF-40-EVEN, 15216-MD-48-EVEN, 15216-MD-ID-50, or
15216-MD-48-CM.
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
12-123
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Not-DWDM Networks (Enhancements)
• PASSIVE 15126 ID 50
• PASSIVE FLD4 30 3
• PASSIVE FLD4 33 4
• PASSIVE FLD4 36 6
• PASSIVE FLD4 39 7
• PASSIVE FLD4 42 9
• PASSIVE FLD4 46 1
• PASSIVE FLD4 49 3
• PASSIVE FLD4 52 5
• PASSIVE FLD4 55 5
• PASSIVE FLD4 58 9
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 In the Equipment Type column, select the passive module that you want to connect to the USB port and
click Associate to USB Port. The Associate USB Port dialogue box appears.
Step 8 From the USB Port drop-down list, select the USB port that is connected to the passive module and click
OK.
The USB is connected to the selected passive module. The insertion loss (IL) attribute, value, and units
values are displayed in a table.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
12.11 Not-DWDM Networks (Enhancements)
Not-DWDM (TDM) Networks take synchronous and asynchronous signals and multiplexes them to a
single higher bit rate for transmission at a single wavelength over fiber. When the node is configured as
a Not-DWDM Network, the supported MSTP cards are used in the standalone mode. MSTP applications
like Circuit Provisioning, NLAC and APC are not supported in amplified TDM networks. For more
information on how to configure a node as a Non-DWDM network, see the “NTP-G320 Configure the
Node as a Non-DWDM Network” procedure on page 14-57.
All DWDM cards can be installed in a network element configured as Not-DWDM. The cards must
complete the Software Boot and Default Provisioning operations successfully. In NOT-DWDM mode,
you must configure significant optical parameters and thresholds before launching the ANS application.
For information on how to configure the amplifier, see the “DLP-G693 Configure the Amplifier”
procedure on page 14-57. For information on how to configure the PSM behavior, see the “DLP-G694
Configure the PSM” procedure on page 14-58.
When the ANS application is launched, the supported cards become optically operative during service
and report all the proper alarms. The list of supported cards are:
• OPT-PSM
• All optical amplifiers
• All transponder and muxponder Cards
12-124
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 12 Node Reference
Not-DWDM Networks (Enhancements)
You can import a standard xml configuration file when the network type is Not-DWDM. Node Layout
and Card Parameters list must be populated. Software Patchcords and Optical Sides must not be
configured.
Note You cannot transition a node from Metro-Core network type to Not-DWDM, if the Software Patchcords
and Optical Sides have already been provisioned on the node.
ANS with ports in IS feature is not applicable to NOT-DWDM networks. For information on how to add,
modify, or delete the ANS Parameters, see the “NTP-G328 Add, Modify, or Delete ANS Parameters”
procedure on page 14-59. The available procedures in Not-DWDM networks for physical shutdown of
an active device (like Lasers and VOAs) inside a WDM card are:
• Removing the incoming signal
• Configuring optical thresholds (usually Input Power Fail) values suitable to keep the device off
• Forcing disable conditions (OSRI) via software commands.
For information on the procedure to erase the current card provisioning and to change port state to the
default state (IS-AINS), see the “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC” procedure on page 14-51. Once
deleted, the card can be removed or re-provisioned.
Note PSM Card must be moved to NORMAL state before deleting.
Note OPT-EDFA-17, OPT-EDFA-24, 40-SMR-1C, 40-SMR-2C cards have a different behavior associated to
IS-AINS state on input ports (COM-RX, LINE-RX). When the port is in IS-AINS, the amplifier is forced
to the OFF state despite the input power level (physical card shutdown).
If you revert the Network Type from NOT-DWDM to METRO-CORE with ports in IS state, TCC
recognizes the transition and sets all the ports (of Amplifiers and PSM) to IS-AINS state.
CH A P T E R
13-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
13
Network Reference
This chapter explains the Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) network
applications and topologies. The chapter also provides network-level optical performance references.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Note In this chapter, “OPT-BST” refers to the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L cards, and to the
OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, and OPT-AMP-17-C cards when they are provisioned in OPT-LINE (optical
booster) mode. “OPT-PRE” refers to the OPT-PRE card and to the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, and
OPT-AMP-17-C cards provisioned in OPT-PRE (preamplifier) mode.
Note OPT-BST-L, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-L, and OPT-AMP-L cards can be installed only in L-band compatible
nodes and networks. OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, 32WSS, 32DMX, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 40-MUX-C,
40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards can be installed only in C-band compatible
nodes and networks.
Note In this chapter, “RAMAN-CTP” refers to the 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP card. “RAMAN-COP” refers to
the 15454-M-RAMAN-COP card.
Chapter topics include:
• 13.1 Network Applications, page 13-2
• 13.2 Network Topologies, page 13-2
• 13.5 Network Topologies for the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards, page 13-18
• 13.6 Network Topologies for the PSM Card, page 13-19
• 13.7 Optical Performance, page 13-19
• 13.8 Automatic Power Control, page 13-20
• 13.9 Power Side Monitoring, page 13-26
• 13.10 Span Loss Verification, page 13-28
• 13.11 Network Optical Safety, page 13-30
13-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Applications
• 13.12 Network-Level Gain—Tilt Management of Optical Amplifiers, page 13-50
• 13.13 Optical Data Rate Derivations, page 13-55
• 13.14 Even Band Management, page 13-57
13.1 Network Applications
Cisco ONS 15454 nodes can be provisioned for metro core DWDM network applications. Metro core
networks often include multiple spans and amplifiers, so the optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) is the
limiting factor for channel performance.
Within DWDM networks, the ONS 15454 uses a communications protocol, called Node Services
Protocol (NSP), to communicate with other nodes. NSP automatically updates nodes whenever a change
in the network occurs. Each ONS 15454 DWDM node can:
• Identify other ONS 15454 DWDM nodes in the network.
• Identify the different types of DWDM networks.
• Identify when the DWDM network is complete and when it is incomplete.
13.2 Network Topologies
The ONS 15454 DWDM network topologies include ring networks, linear networks, mesh networks,
interconnected rings and spurs.
13.2.1 Ring Networks
Ring networks support hubbed, multi-hubbed, any-to-any, and mesh traffic topologies.
13.2.1.1 Hubbed Traffic Topology
In the hubbed traffic topology (Figure 13-1), a hub node terminates all the DWDM channels. A channel
can be provisioned to support protected traffic between the hub node and any node in the ring. Both
working and protected traffic use the same wavelength on both sides of the ring. Protected traffic can
also be provisioned between any pair of optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) nodes, except that either
the working or the protected path must be regenerated in the hub node.
Protected traffic saturates a channel in a hubbed topology, that is, no channel reuse is possible. However,
the same channel can be reused in different sections of the ring by provisioning unprotected multihop
traffic. From a transmission point of view, this network topology is similar to two bidirectional
point-to-point links with OADM nodes.
For more information about hub nodes, see the “12.1.4 Hub Node” section on page 12-31.
13-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Topologies
Figure 13-1 Hubbed Traffic Topology
13.2.1.2 Multihubbed Traffic Topology
A multihubbed traffic topology (Figure 13-2) is based on the hubbed traffic topology, except that two or
more hub nodes are added. Protected traffic can only be established between the two hub nodes.
Protected traffic can be provisioned between a hub node and any OADM node only if the allocated
wavelength channel is regenerated through the other hub node. Multihop traffic can be provisioned on
this ring. From a transmission point of view, this network topology is similar to two or more
point-to-point links with OADM nodes.
Hub
Amplified OADM
Passive OADM
Line amplifier
90995
Amplified OADM Passive OADM
Amplified OADM
OSC OSC
13-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Topologies
Figure 13-2 Multihubbed Traffic Topology
13.2.1.3 Any-to-Any Traffic Topology
The any-to-any traffic topology (Figure 13-3) contains only reconfigurable OADM (ROADM) nodes
(with or without optical service channel [OSC] regeneration) or optical amplifier nodes. This topology
potentially allows you to route every wavelength from any source to any destination node inside the
network.
See the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11 for more information.
Hub
Hub
Passive OADM
Line amplifier
90998
Amplified OADM Passive OADM
Amplified OADM
OSC OSC
13-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Topologies
Figure 13-3 Any-to-Any Traffic Topology
13.2.1.4 Meshed Traffic Topology
The meshed traffic topology (Figure 13-4) does not use hubbed nodes; only amplified and passive
OADM nodes are present. Protected traffic can be provisioned between any two nodes; however, the
selected channel cannot be reused in the ring. Unprotected multihop traffic can be provisioned in the
ring. A meshed ring must be designed to prevent amplified spontaneous emission (ASE) lasing. This is
done by configuring a particular node as an anti-ASE node. An anti-ASE node can be created in two
ways:
• Equip an OADM node with 32MUX-O cards and 32DMX-O cards. This solution is adopted when
the total number of wavelengths deployed in the ring is higher than ten. OADM nodes equipped with
32MUX-O cards and 32DMX-O cards are called full OADM nodes.
• When the total number of wavelengths deployed in the ring is lower than ten, the anti-ASE node is
configured by using an OADM node where all the channels that are not terminated in the node are
configured as “optical pass-through.” In other words, no channels in the anti-ASE node can travel
through the express path of the OADM node.
For more information about OADM nodes, see the “12.1.2 OADM Node” section on page 12-9. For
more information about anti-ASE nodes, see the “12.1.5 Anti-ASE Node” section on page 12-35.
ROADM
ROADM
ROADM
115730
ROADM ROADM
ROADM
OSC OSC
13-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Topologies
Figure 13-4 Meshed Traffic Topology
13.2.2 Linear Networks
Linear configurations are characterized by the use of two terminal nodes, east and west. The 32-channel
terminal nodes can be equipped with a 32MUX-O card and a 32DMX-O card, or with a 32WSS card and
a 32DMX or 32DMX-O card. The 40-channel terminal nodes can be equipped with a 40-MUX-C card
and a 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE card, a 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE card with a 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE
card, or a 40-SMR1-C/40-SMR2-C card with a 15216-MD-40-ODD card. OADM or line amplifier nodes
can be installed between the two terminal nodes. Only unprotected traffic can be provisioned in a linear
configuration. Figure 13-5 shows five ONS 15454 nodes in a linear configuration with an amplified and
a passive OADM node.
Figure 13-5 Linear Configuration with an OADM Node
Figure 13-6 shows five ONS 15454 nodes in a linear configuration without an OADM node. See the
“12.1.1 Terminal Node” section on page 12-2 for more information.
Anti-ASE
Amplified OADM
Passive OADM
Line amplifier
90997
Amplified OADM Passive OADM
Amplified OADM
OSC OSC
Line amplifier Passive OADM
90996
West terminal Amplified OADM East terminal
OSC
OSC
13-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Topologies
Figure 13-6 Linear Configuration without an OADM Node
A single-span link is a type of linear configuration characterized by a single-span link with
preamplification and post-amplification. A single-span link is also characterized by the use of two
terminal nodes, east and west. Only unprotected traffic can be provisioned on a single-span link.
Figure 13-7 shows two ONS 15454s in a single-span link. Eight channels are carried on one span.
Single-span link losses apply to OC-192/STM-64 LR ITU cards. The optical performance values are
valid assuming that the sum of the OADM passive node insertion losses and the span losses does not
exceed 35 dB.
Figure 13-7 Single-Span Link
13.2.3 Mesh Networks
A mesh network can be native or multiring. In a native mesh network (Figure 13-8), any combination of
four-degree and eight-degree mesh nodes can work together. Four-degree mesh nodes transmit an optical
signal in four directions, while an eight-degree mesh node transmits an optical signal in eight directions.
For additional information about mesh nodes, see the “12.7 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks”
section on page 12-61. The intermediate nodes are ROADM nodes. In a mesh node, all wavelengths can
be routed through four (four-degree mesh node) to eight (eight-degree mesh node) different optical line
termination ports using a 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C card without any
optical-electrical-optical (OEO) regeneration. It is possible to combine 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE,
40-WXC-C, 40-SMR2-C, and 32WSS cards in the same mesh network without impacting system
performance. For nodes equipped with 32WSS cards, the maximum system capacity is 32 channels.
Terminal sites are connected to the mesh network as a spur.
Line amplifier
96639
West terminal East terminal
OSC
OSC
Line amplifier Line amplifier
90999
West terminal East terminal
~130/150 km
OSC
OSC
13-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Topologies
Figure 13-8 Mesh Network
In a multiring mesh network (Figure 13-9), several rings are connected with four-degree or eight-degree
mesh nodes. The intermediate ROADM nodes are equipped with MMU cards. All wavelengths can be
routed among two or more rings using a 40-WXC-C or 40-SMR2-C card without any
optical-electrical-optical (OEO) regeneration. As in a native mesh network, it is possible to combine
40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 40-SMR2-C, and 32WSS cards in the same multiring network
without impacting system performance. For nodes equipped with 32WSS cards, maximum system
capacity is limited to 32 channels. A terminal node is connected to a multiring node as a spur.
For information on node configurations for both native mesh and multiring networks, see the
“12.7 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks” section on page 12-61.
159494
OLA
Terminal
N-degree
mesh
N-degree
mesh
N-degree
mesh
N-degree
mesh
N-degree
mesh
N-degree
mesh
N-degree
mesh
ROADM
ROADM
ROADM
ROADM Terminal
13-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Interconnected Rings
Figure 13-9 Multiring Network
13.3 Interconnected Rings
The interconnected ring configuration allows you to connect two different nodes using external ports to
allow traffic flow between different subnets. In Figure 13-10, the main ring consists of nodes R, R1, and
R2 and the tributary ring consists of nodes r, r1, and r2. It is possible to connect more than one tributary
ring to the main ring at the same point. Node R of the main ring can forward wavelengths to the node r
of the tributary ring and vice-versa.
Node R is either a colorless and omni-directional n-degree ROADM node (Figure 13-11) or a two-degree
colorless ROADM node (Figure 13-12) equipped with 80-WXC-C cards. See the “12.7 Configuring
Mesh DWDM Networks” section on page 12-61 for more information about colorless and
omni-directional n-degree ROADM nodes and two-degree colorless ROADM nodes.
Node r of the tributary ring is a two-degree ROADM node equipped with 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C,
40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE cards. OTS PPCs are provisioned between the EAD ports of the 80-WXC-C
card on node R and the EXP or ADD/DROP ports of the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, 40-WSS-C, or
40-WSS-CE cards on node r. All the nodes are managed by different IP addresses.
249103
OPT-BST or OSC-CSM
OPT-PRE or TXP/MXP
40-WSS-C
DCM-xxx
Air ramp
DCM-xxx
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
40-DMX-C
40-DMX-C
OSCM or Blank
OSCM or Blank
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
40-WSS-C
OPT-PRE or TXP/MXP
OPT-BST or OSC-CSM
AIC-I
Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T
Blank or TXP/MXP or MS-ISC-100T
13-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Interconnected Rings
Figure 13-10 Interconnected Rings
Figure 13-11 Colorless and Omni-directional n- Degree ROADM Node
248900
B
R1 R2
R1
r1 r2
r
A
C
c
D
d
a b
Main ring
Node
interconnections
Tributary ring
80-WXC-C
PP-MESH-4
249088
A
C
D B
P
P
Connection to
tributary ring node (r)
13-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Interconnected Rings
Figure 13-12 Colorless Two-Degree ROADM Node
13.3.1 Interconnected Ring Scenarios
In the following sections, three interconnected ring scenarios are given:
13.3.1.1 Scenario A: Interconnect Traffic from Tributary Ring to Main Ring without Local Add/Drop in the Tributary Ring
In scenario A-1(Figure 13-13), node R is a three-degree colorless and omni-directional ROADM node
and node r is a two-degree 40-SMR1-c based ROADM node. The EAD ports of the 80-WXC-C cards on
node R are connected to the ADD/DROP ports of the 40-SMR1-C card on node r. Traffic from node r
can be routed to side A or B of node R. Traffic from side a cannot be added or dropped at node r but can
be routed to side b using the express path.
249085
1x9 DMX
L2
1x9 DMX
L1
1x9 MUX
L2
1x9 DMX
L2
1x9 MUX
L2
1x9 MUX
L1
1x9 MUX
L1
1x9 DMX
L1
P
Booster
Connection to
tributary ring node (r)
Side A Side B
OSC
Booster
OSC
DMX-O DMX-E MUX-O MUX-E
DMX-E DMX-O MUX-E MUX-O
P
13-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Interconnected Rings
Figure 13-13 Interconnected Ring - Scenario A-1
In scenario A-2 (Figure 13-14), node R is a two-degree colorless ROADM node and node r is a
two-degree 40-SMR1-C based ROADM node. The EAD ports of the 80-WXC-C cards on node R are
connected to the ADD/DROP ports of the 40-SMR1-C card on node r. Traffic from node r can be routed
to one side of node R. For example, traffic can be routed from side a to side A or from side b to side B.
Traffic from side a cannot be added or dropped at node r but can be routed to side b using the express
path.
Figure 13-14 Interconnected Ring - Scenario A-2
PP-MESH-4
248896
A
A
R
r
B
C D
a b
c d
a b
B
R
r
P
P
C-rx D-rx
C-tx D-tx
Main Ring
Traffic
c-rx
d-tx
d-rx c-tx 248895
A A
R
r
B
C D
a b
c d
a b
B
R
r
C-tx D-rx
C-rx D-tx
d-tx
d-rx
c-rx
c-tx
Main Ring
Traffic Booster Booster
Tributary Ring
Traffic
P
P
13-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Interconnected Rings
13.3.1.2 Scenario B: Interconnect Traffic from Tributary Ring to Main Ring with Local Add/Drop in the Tributary Ring
In scenario B-1(Figure 13-15), node R is a three-degree colorless and omni-directional ROADM node
and node r is a hub node with two terminal sides equipped with 40-SMR1-C or 40-WSS-C cards. The
EAD ports of the 80-WXC-C cards on node R are connected to the EXP ports of the 40-SMR1-C
or40-WSS-C card on node r. Traffic from node r can be routed to side A or B of node R. Traffic local to
the tributary ring can be added or dropped at node r. For example, traffic from side a can be dropped at
node r but cannot be routed to side b since the EXP ports are not available.
Figure 13-15 Interconnected Ring - Scenario B-1
In scenario B-2 (Figure 13-16), node R is a two-degree colorless ROADM node and node r is a hub node
with two terminal sides equipped with 40-SMR1-C or 40-WSS-C cards. The EAD ports of the
80-WXC-C cards on node R are connected to the EXP ports of the 40-WSS-C card on node r. Traffic
from node r can be routed to one side of node R. For example, traffic can be routed from side a to side
A or from side b to side B. Traffic local to the tributary ring can be added or dropped at node r. For
example, traffic from side a can be dropped at node r but cannot be routed to side b since the EXP ports
are not available.
PP-MESH-4
248896
A
A
R
r
B
C D
a b
c d
a b
B
R
r
P
P
C-rx D-rx
C-tx D-tx
Main Ring
Traffic
c-rx
d-tx
c-tx d-rx
13-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Interconnected Rings
Figure 13-16 Interconnected Ring - Scenario B-2
13.3.1.3 Scenario C: Interconnect Traffic Between Tributary Rings Using the Main Ring
In scenario C-1(Figure 13-17), nodes R1 and R2 are n-degree colorless and omni-directional ROADM
nodes. Node r is a terminal site. The EXP ports of the 40-SMR-1C card in node r are connected to the
EAD ports of the 80-WXC-C card in nodes R1 and R2. Traffic from node r is routed to side A and B of
nodes R1 and R2. Traffic local to the tributary ring can be added or dropped at node r.
248897a b
r
c-rx
d-tx
c-tx d-rx
A B
R
C-tx D-rx
C-rx D-tx
Booster Booster
P
P
A
R
r
B
C D
a b
c d
Main Ring
Traffic
13-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Interconnected Rings
Figure 13-17 Interconnected Ring - Scenario C-1
In scenario C-2(Figure 13-18), node R is an n-degree colorless and omni-directional ROADM node with
2 omni-directional sides. Nodes r1 and r2 are hub sites. The ADD/DROP ports of 40-SMR-1-C cards in
node r1 and r2 are connected to the EAD ports of 80-WXC-C cards in node R. Traffic can be routed from
node r1 to node r2 through node R. Traffic local to the tributary ring can be added or dropped at node r1
and r2.
Figure 13-18 Interconnected Ring - Scenario C-2
PP-MESH-4
248898
A
A
A
R R
R1
r r
r
r
R2
B
C B
c
a
a
B
R
P
P
C-rx C-tx
c-rx
c-tx
Main Ring
Tributary Ring
r
PP-MESH-4
248899
A
a b
B
R
r1
P
P
C-rx D-rx
a b
r2
P
P
C-tx D-tx
F-rx F-rx
E-tx E-tx
A
R
r1
B
C
D E
F
a
b a r2 b
c
d c
d
Main Ring
Traffic
Tributary
Interring
Traffic
Tributary
Interring
Traffic
Traffic
Tributary
to Main
13-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Spur Configuration
13.4 Spur Configuration
Remote terminal sites can be connected to the main network using a spur. In a spur configuration, the
multiplexer (MUX) and demultiplexer (DMX) units associated with one of the sides of node R in the
main network (Figure 13-19) are moved to the remote terminal site T. This helps to aggregate traffic from
the terminal site. The MUX and DMX units in terminal site T are connected to node R with a single fibre
couple. Node R is a n-degree ROADM node equipped with 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or 80-WXC-C
cards. Traffic from terminal site T can be routed to side A or side B on node R. Amplification on the spur
link is not allowed. PSM is not supported on terminal site T.
Figure 13-19 Spur
13.4.1 Spur Configuration Scenarios
In the following sections, three spur scenarios are provided:
13.4.1.1 Scenario A: Spur Configuration without 15454 Chassis in Remote Terminal T
In Figure 13-20, node R is a two-degree ROADM node equipped with 40-SMR1-C card. The remote
terminal site T does not have a 15454 chassis and is not shown in the network map in CTC. The terminal
site is built using passive MUX and DMX units. All OCHNC circuits originating from 40-SMR1-C on
Side A of node R to the remote terminal site are terminated on 40-SMR1-C ADD/DROP ports.
A
T
B
Spur
249089
R
H
R
13-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Spur Configuration
Figure 13-20 Scenario A: Spur Without 15454 Chassis in Remote Terminal T
13.4.1.2 Scenario B: Spur Configuration with Passive MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T
In Figure 13-21, node R is a two-degree ROADM node equipped with 40-SMR1-C card. The terminal
site T is built with a 15454 chassis equipped with TXP units and passive MUX and DMX units. Terminal
site T is connected to node R on the network map in CTC. All OCHNC circuits originating from
40-SMR1-C on Side A of node R to the remote site are terminated on 40-SMR1-C ADD/DROP ports.
OCHCC and OCHTRAIL circuits are supported on the TXP units in terminal site T.
Figure 13-21 Scenario B: Spur With Passive MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T
249090
40-SMR-1-C
T
Side A node R
Booster
DMX MUX
249091
40-SMR-1-C
T
TXP
TXP
TXP
TXP
TXP
TXP
TXP
TXP
Side A node R
Booster
DMX MUX
13-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Topologies for the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
13.4.1.3 Scenario C: Spur Configuration with Active MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T
In Figure 13-22, node R is a two-degree ROADM node equipped with 40-SMR1-C card. The terminal
site T is built with a 15454 chassis equipped with TXP units and active MUX and DMX units. Terminal
site T is connected to node R on the network map in CTC. DCN extension is supported between the
ADD/DROP ports of 40-SMR1-C and the COM ports of the active MUX and DMX units. OCHNC
circuits are terminated on the CHAN ports of the MUX and DMX units of terminal site T. OCHCC and
OCHTRAIL circuits are supported on the TXP units in terminal site T.
Figure 13-22 Scenario C: Spur with Active MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T
13.5 Network Topologies for the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
The OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card can be equipped in any of the following network topologies:
• Open (hubbed) ring network
• Multi-hubbed ring network
• Closed (meshed) ring network
• Any-to-any ring network
• Linear network topology
• Point-to-point linear network topology
• Multi-ring network
• Mesh network
• Hybrid network
For more information about the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card, see Chapter 5, “Provision
Optical Amplifier Cards.”.
249091
40-SMR-1-C
T
TXP
TXP
TXP
TXP
TXP
TXP
TXP
TXP
Side A node R
Booster
DMX MUX
13-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Topologies for the PSM Card
13.6 Network Topologies for the PSM Card
The PSM card is supported in the following network topologies:
• The PSM card in a channel protection configuration is supported in all network topologies except
linear networks as it is not possible to configure a working and protect path.
• The PSM card in a multiplex section protection configuration is supported in linear point-to-point
network topologies.
• The PSM card in a line protection configuration is supported in the following network topologies:
– Linear point-to-point in a single span network (if the OSC card is used).
– Linear point-to-point multispan network when a DCN extension is used (on all spans). In this
case, the maximum number of span links can be divided into three according to the DCN
extension optical safety requirements.
• The PSM card in a standalone configuration is supported in all network topologies.
13.7 Optical Performance
This section provides optical performance information for ONS 15454 DWDM networks. The
performance data is a general guideline based upon the network topology, node type, client cards, fiber
type, number of spans, and number of channels. The maximum number of nodes that can be in an
ONS 15454 DWDM network is 16. The DWDM topologies and node types that are supported are shown
in Table 13-1.
Table 13-1 Supported Topologies and Node Types
Number of Channels Fiber Topologies Node Types
32 channels SMF-281
E-LEAF2
TW-RS3
1. SMF-28 = single-mode fiber 28.
2. E-LEAF = enhanced large effective area fiber.
3. TW-RS = TrueWave reduced slope fiber.
Ring
Linear
Linear without OADM
Hub
Active OADM
Passive OADM
Terminal
Line
OSC regeneration
16 channels SMF-28 Ring
Linear
Linear without OADM
Hub
Active OADM
Passive OADM
Terminal
Line
OSC regeneration
8 channels SMF-28 Linear without OADM Terminal
Line
13-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Automatic Power Control
13.8 Automatic Power Control
The ONS 15454 automatic power control (APC) feature performs the following functions:
• Maintains constant per channel power when desired or accidental changes to the number of channels
occur. Constant per channel power increases optical network resilience.
• Compensates for optical network degradation (aging effects).
• Simplifies the installation and upgrade of DWDM optical networks by automatically calculating the
amplifier setpoints.
Note APC algorithms manage the optical parameters of the OPT-BST, OPT-PRE, OPT-AMP-17-C, 32DMX,
40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, and
32DMX-L cards.
Amplifier software uses a control gain loop with fast transient suppression to keep the channel power
constant regardless of any changes in the number of channels. Amplifiers monitor the changes to the
input power and change the output power proportionately according to the calculated gain setpoint. The
shelf controller software emulates the control output power loop to adjust for fiber degradation. To
perform this function, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE needs to know the channel
distribution, which is provided by a signaling protocol, and the expected per channel power, which you
can provision. The TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card compares the actual amplifier
output power with the expected amplifier output power and modifies the setpoints if any discrepancies
occur.
13.8.1 APC at the Amplifier Card Level
In constant gain mode, the amplifier power out control loop performs the following input and output
power calculations, where G represents the gain and t represents time.
Pout (t) = G * Pin (t) (mW)
Pout (t) = G + Pin (t) (dB)
In a power-equalized optical system, the total input power is proportional to the number of channels. The
amplifier software compensates for any variation of the input power due to changes in the number of
channels carried by the incoming signal.
Amplifier software identifies changes in the read input power in two different instances, t1 and t2, as a
change in the traffic being carried. The letters m and n in the following formula represent two different
channel numbers. Pin/ch represents the input power per channel.
Pin (t1)= nPin/ch
Pin (t2) = mPin/ch
Amplifier software applies the variation in the input power to the output power with a reaction time that
is a fraction of a millisecond. This keeps the power constant on each channel at the output amplifier, even
during a channel upgrade or a fiber cut.
The per channel power and working mode (gain or power) are set by automatic node setup (ANS). The
provisioning is conducted on a per-side basis. A preamplifier or a booster amplifier facing Side i is
provisioned using the Side i parameters present in the node database, where i - A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H.
13-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Automatic Power Control
Starting from the expected per channel power, the amplifiers automatically calculate the gain setpoint
after the first channel is provisioned. An amplifier gain setpoint is calculated in order to make it equal
to the loss of the span preceding the amplifier itself. After the gain is calculated, the setpoint is no longer
changed by the amplifier. Amplifier gain is recalculated every time the number of provisioned channels
returns to zero. If you need to force a recalculation of the gain, move the number of channels back to
zero.
13.8.2 APC at the Shelf Controller Layer
Amplifiers are managed through software to control changes in the input power caused by changes in
the number of channels. The software adjusts the output total power to maintain a constant per channel
power value when the number of input channel changes.
Changes in the network characteristics have an impact on the amplifier input power. Changes in the input
power are compensated for only by modifying the original calculated gain, because input power changes
imply changes in the span loss. As a consequence, the gain to span loss established at amplifier start-up
is no longer satisfied, as shown in Figure 13-23.
Figure 13-23 Using Amplifier Gain Adjustment to Compensate for System Degradation
In Figure 13-23, Node 1 and Node 2 are equipped with booster amplifiers and preamplifiers. The input
power received at the preamplifier on Node 2 (Pin2) depends on the total power launched by the booster
amplifier on Node1, Pout1(n) (where n is the number of channels), and the effect of the span attenuation
(L) between the two nodes. Span loss changes due to aging fiber and components or changes in operating
conditions. The power into Node 2 is given by the following formula:
Pin2 = LPout1(n)
The phase gain of the preamplifier on Node 2 (GPre-2) is set during provisioning in order to compensate
for the span loss so that the Node 2 preamplifier output power (Pout-Pre-2) is equal to the original
transmitted power, as represented in the following formula:
Pout-Pre-2 = L x GPre-2 x Pout1(n)
In cases of system degradation, the power received at Node 2 decreases due to the change of span
insertion loss (from L to L'). As a consequence of the preamplifier gain control working mode, the
Node 2 preamplifier output power (Pout-Pre-2) also decreases. The goal of APC at the shelf controller
layer is simply to detect if an amplifier output change is needed because of changes in the number of
channels or to other factors. If factors other than changes in the number of channels occur, APC
provisions a new gain at the Node 2 preamplifier (GPre-2') to compensate for the new span loss, as shown
in the formula:
GPre-2' = GPre-2 (L/ L') = GPre-2 + [Pout-Pre-2 –Exp(Pout-Pre-2)]
Generalizing on the above relationship, APC is able to compensate for system degradation by adjusting
working amplifier gain or variable optical attenuation (VOA) and to eliminate the difference between the
power value read by the photodiodes and the expected power value. The expected power values are
calculated using:
• Provisioned per channel power value
159501
Node 1
G1
Node 2
G2
P P
L
out1 in2 P out2
13-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Automatic Power Control
• Channel distribution (the number of express, add, and drop channels in the node)
• ASE estimation
Channel distribution is determined by the sum of the provisioned and failed channels. Information about
provisioned wavelengths is sent to APC on the applicable nodes during circuit creation. Information
about failed channels is collected through a signaling protocol that monitors alarms on ports in the
applicable nodes and distributes that information to all the other nodes in the network.
ASE calculations purify the noise from the power level reported from the photodiode. Each amplifier can
compensate for its own noise, but cascaded amplifiers cannot compensate for ASE generated by
preceding nodes. The ASE effect increases when the number of channels decreases; therefore, a
correction factor must be calculated in each amplifier of the ring to compensate for ASE build-up.
APC is a network-level feature that is distributed among different nodes. An APC domain is a set of
nodes that is controlled by the same instance of APC at the network level. An APC domain optically
identifies a portion of the network that can be independently regulated. An optical network can be
divided into several different domains, with the following characteristics:
• Every domain is terminated by two node sides. The node sides terminating domains are:
– Terminal node (any type)
– ROADM node
– Hub node
– Cross-connect (XC) termination mesh node
– Line termination mesh node
• APC domains are shown in both Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) and Transaction Language One
(TL1).
• In CTC, domains are shown in the network view and reported as a list of spans. Each span is
identified by a node/side pair, for example:
APC Domain Node_1 Side A, Node_4 Side B
+ Span 1: Node_1 Side A, Node_2 Side B
+ Span 2: Node_2 Side A, Node_3 Side B
+ Span 3: Node_3 Side A, Node_4 Side B
• APC domains are not refreshed automatically; instead, they are refreshed using a Refresh button.
Inside a domain, the APC algorithm designates a master node that is responsible for starting APC hourly
or every time a new circuit is provisioned or removed. Every time the master node signals APC to start,
gain and VOA setpoints are evaluated on all nodes in the network. If corrections are needed in different
nodes, they are always performed sequentially following the optical paths starting from the master node.
APC corrects the power level only if the variation exceeds the hysteresis thresholds of +/– 0.5 dB. Any
power level fluctuation within the threshold range is skipped since it is considered negligible. Because
APC is designed to follow slow time events, it skips corrections greater than 3 dB. This is the typical
total aging margin that is provisioned during the network design phase. After you provision the first
channel or the amplifiers are turned up for the first time, APC does not apply the 3 dB rule. In this case,
APC corrects all the power differences to turn up the node.
To avoid large power fluctuations, APC adjusts power levels incrementally. The maximum power
correction is +/– 0.5 dB. This is applied to each iteration until the optimal power level is reached. For
example, a gain deviation of 2 dB is corrected in four steps. Each of the four steps requires a complete
APC check on every node in the network. APC can correct up to a maximum of 3 dB on an hourly basis.
If degradation occurs over a longer time period, APC compensates for it by using all margins that you
provision during installation.
13-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Automatic Power Control
If no margin is available, adjustments cannot be made because setpoints exceed the ranges. APC
communicates the event to CTC, Cisco Transport Manager (CTM), and TL1 through an APC Fail
condition. APC clears the APC fail condition when the setpoints return to the allowed ranges.
APC can be manually disabled. In addition, APC automatically disables itself when:
• An Hardware Fail (HF) alarm is raised by any card in any of the domain nodes.
• A Mismatch Equipment Alarm (MEA) is raised by any card in any of the domain nodes.
• An Improper Removal (IMPROPRMVL) alarm is raised by any card in any of the domain nodes.
• Gain Degrade (GAIN-HDEG), Power Degrade (OPWR-HDEG), and Power Fail (PWR-FAIL)
alarms are raised by the output port of any amplifier card in any of the domain nodes.
• A VOA degrade or fail alarm is raised by any of the cards in any of the domain nodes.
• The signaling protocol detects that one of the APC instances in any of the domain nodes is no longer
reachable.
The APC state (Enable/Disable) is located on every node and can be retrieved by the CTC or TL1
interface. If an event that disables APC occurs in one of the network nodes, APC is disabled on all the
other nodes and the APC state changes to DISABLE - INTERNAL. The disabled state is raised only by
the node where the problem occurred to simplify troubleshooting.
APC raises the following minor, non-service-affecting alarms at the port level in CTC, TL1, and Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP):
• APC Out of Range—APC cannot assign a new setpoint for a parameter that is allocated to a port
because the new setpoint exceeds the parameter range.
• APC Correction Skipped—APC skipped a correction to one parameter allocated to a port because
the difference between the expected and current values exceeds the +/– 3 dB security range.
• APC Disabled—APC is disabled, either by a user or internal action.
After the error condition is cleared, the signaling protocol enables APC on the network and the APC
DISABLE - INTERNAL condition is cleared. Because APC is required after channel provisioning to
compensate for ASE effects, all optical channel network connection (OCHNC) and optical channel client
connection (OCHCC) circuits that you provision during the disabled APC state are kept in the
Out-of-Service and Autonomous, Automatic In-Service (OOS-AU,AINS) (ANSI) or
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService (ETSI) service state until APC is enabled. OCHNCs and
OCHCCs automatically go into the In-Service and Normal (IS-NR) (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
service state only after APC is enabled.
13.8.3 APC in a Raman Node with Post-Amplifiers
After the Raman gain is calculated and the Raman and OSC links are turned up, APC performs the
following sequence of events:
1. The line amplifier that is downstream of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card is the first card
that the APC regulates. The line amplifier is configured as OPT-PRE in ROADM nodes or as
OPT-LINE in OLA nodes.
After Automatic Power Reduction (APR) is implemented, the working mode of the line amplifier is
forced to Control Power and remains in the same mode until all the node regulations are complete.
This ensures that the calculation of the Gain setpoint is accurate during Raman node internal
regulations. The amplifier signal output power is regulated using the Power (LINE-TX port)
setpoint.
13-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Automatic Power Control
2. The APC changes the Gain setpoint of the embedded EDFA to reach the value that is equal to Power
(DC-TX port) value multiplied by the number of active channels.
The APC can set the Gain setpoint of the embedded EDFA (GEDFA) in the following ranges:
– OPT-RAMP-C 10 dB < GEDFA < 18 dB
– OPT-RAMP-CE 7 dB < GEDFA < 13 dB
The internal VOA is set to 0 dB on the DC-TX port. The VOA attenuation is set to zero because the
actual DCU insertion loss is unknown until the optical payload is transmitted to the card. Therefore
a proper attenuation setpoint cannot be estimated. When the attenuation value is set to 0 dB, it
ensures that the system turns up in any circumstance.
3. After the GEDFA is set, APC regulates the power on the VOA (DC-TX port) of the OPT-RAMP-C or
OPT-RAMP-CE card to match the target Power (COM-TX port) value, and accounts for the actual
DCU loss.
4. After Steps 2 and 3 are completed, the optical power received on the line amplifier that is
downstream of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card becomes fully regulated and stable. The
Raman tilt and GEDFA tilt are fixed. The APC regulates the value of the Total Power on the LINE-TX
port of the line amplifier and accounts for the ASE noise contribution.
5. After the value of the total power on the line amplifier becomes a stable value, APC stops the
regulations and the automatic gain calculation procedure is completed on the line amplifier card.
The TCC checks if the gain setpoint is within range and eventually changes the working mode of
the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card to Gain Control mode.
Note If the value of the Raman Total Power was manually provisioned or set by ANS instead of the Raman
installation wizard, a fiber cut recovery procedure is automatically performed, before APC regulation.
13.8.4 APC in a Raman Node without Post-Amplifiers
After the Raman gain is calculated and the Raman and OSC links are turned up, APC performs the
following sequence of events:
1. The APC adjusts the VOA attenuation of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card if the Total
Power (LINE-TX port) does not match the expected value that is equal to the maximum power
multiplied by the number of active channels. The VOA attenuation value on the OPT-RAMP-C or
OPT-RAMP-CE cards is set to 15 dB. This value ensures that the system turns up in any
circumstance.
2. If a short span is used, the embedded EDFA in the downstream node receives excessive input power
and is unable to maintain proper per channel power value on its output port as the number of
channels increase. The APC detects output power saturation on the EDFA of the downstream node
and increases the value of the VOA attenuation on the upstream node thereby reducing the Power
(LINE-TX port) value.
13.8.5 Managing APC
The APC status is indicated by four APC states shown in the node view status area:
• Enabled—APC is enabled.
• Disabled—APC was disabled manually by a user.
13-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Automatic Power Control
• Disable - Internal—APC has been automatically disabled for an internal cause.
• Not Applicable—The node is provisioned to Not DWDM, which does not support APC.
You can view the APC information and disable and enable APC manually on the Maintenance >
DWDM > APC tab.
Caution When APC is disabled, aging compensation is not applied and circuits cannot be activated. Do not
disable APC unless it is required for specific maintenance or troubleshooting tasks. Always enable APC
as soon as the tasks are completed.
The APC subtab provides the following information:
• Position—The slot number, card, and port for which APC information is shown.
• Last Modification—Date and time APC parameter setpoints were last modified.
• Parameter—The parameter that APC last modified.
• Last Check—Date and time APC parameter setpoints were last verified.
• Side—The side where the APC information for the card and port is shown.
• State—The APC state.
A wrong use of maintenance procedures (for example, the procedures to be applied in case of fiber cut
repair) can lead the system to raise the APC Correction Skipped alarm. The APC Correction Skipped
alarm strongly limits network management (for example, a new circuit cannot be turned into IS). The
Force APC Correction button helps to restore normal conditions by clearing the APC Correction Skipped
alarm.
The Force APC Correction button must be used under the Cisco TAC surveillance since its misuse can
lead to traffic loss.
The Force APC Correction button is available in the Card View > Maintenance > APC tab pane in CTC
for the following cards:
• OPT-PRE
• OPT-BST-E
• OPT-BST
• OPT-AMP-C
• OPT-AMP-17C
• AD-xB
• AD-xC
• 40-SMR1-C
• 40-SMR2-C
This feature is not available for the TL1 interface.
13-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Power Side Monitoring
13.9 Power Side Monitoring
DWDM nodes allow you to view bar graphs of the input and output spectrum on each optical side of the
node in the Maintenance > DWDM > Side Power Monitoring tab. When you place the mouse over each
wavelength in the bar chart, the power level and wavelength type are displayed. This feature is available
on nodes that are installed with cards with Optical Channel Monitoring (OCM) capability.
The Side Power Monitoring panel is divided into Optical Side X subtabs, where X is the optical side. The
number of subtabs is equal to the number of optical sides in the node. Each subtab displays two bar
graphs.
The IN bar graph displays the optical spectrum at the input port (LINE-RX) of the side in the direction
from the fiber to the node provided the OCM functionality is available on this port else the graph displays
the aggregate signal spectral distribution on the first port in the signal flow (indicated in the title of the
bar chart) that is downstream of the LINE-RX port where an OCM measurement is available (For
example, in node using a booster and a 40-SMR1-C card, the measurement is done on the EXP port of
the 40-SMR1-C card).
The OUT bar graph displays the optical spectrum at the output port (LINE-TX) of the side in the
direction from the node to the fiber provided the OCM functionality is available on this port else the
graph displays the aggregate signal spectral distribution on the first port (indicated in the title of the bar
chart) that is upstream of the LINE-TX port where an OCM measurement is available.
Note Depending on the side layout, the LINE-TX port (output) and the LINE-RX port (input) of the card
facing the fiber cannot measure the optical spectrum in a reliable manner if the OCM functionality is not
available on these ports.
When you place the mouse over each wavelength in the bar chart, the power level and the wavelength
type (local ADD/DROP or EXPRESS) are displayed as a ScreenTip.
• IN graph: The Screen Tip displays the destination side of each wavelength. The wavelength is either
dropped locally or expressed to another side (see Figure 13-24).
• OUT graph: The Screen Tip displays the source side of each wavelength. The wavelength is either
added locally or expressed from another side (see Figure 13-25).
13-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Power Side Monitoring
Figure 13-24 Side Power Monitoring Subtab
13-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Span Loss Verification
Figure 13-25 Side Power Monitoring Subtab
13.10 Span Loss Verification
Span loss measurements can be performed from the Maintenance > DWDM > WDM Span Check tab.
The CTC span check compares the far-end OSC power with the near-end OSC power. A Span Loss Out
of Range condition is raised when the measured span loss is higher than the maximum expected span
loss. It is also raised when the measured span loss is lower than the minimum expected span loss and the
difference between the minimum and maximum span loss values is greater than 1 dB. The minimum and
maximum expected span loss values are calculated by Cisco TransportPlanner for the network and
imported into CTC. However, you can manually change the minimum and expected span loss values.
CTC span loss measurements provide a quick span loss check and are useful whenever changes to the
network occur, for example after you install equipment or repair a broken fiber. CTC span loss
measurement resolutions are:
• +/– 1.5 dB for measured span losses between 0 and 25 dB
• +/– 2.5 dB for measured span losses between 25 and 38 dB
For ONS 15454 span loss measurements with higher resolutions, an optical time domain reflectometer
(OTDR) must be used.
13-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Span Loss Verification
Note From Software Release 9.0 onwards, span loss measurement is performed using C-band channels
(whenever available), instead of OSC signals. Software Release 9.0 is not interoperable with earlier
releases that are only OSC-based. Therefore, span loss measurement cannot be done on a span if the
adjacent nodes are running different software releases; for example one node running Software Release
8.0 or an earlier release and the second node running Software Release 9.0 or a later release.
13.10.1 Span Loss Measurements on Raman Links
Span loss measurement when Raman amplification is active is less accurate than a standard link as it is
based on a mathematical formula that uses the Raman noise and Raman gain.
Span loss on a Raman link is measured in the following states:
• Automatically during Raman link setup (without Raman amplification)
• Automatically during fiber cut restore (without Raman amplification)
• Periodically or upon request (with Raman amplification)
CTC reports three values in the Maintenance > DWDM > WDM Span Check tab:
• Current Span Measure with Raman—Estimated span loss with Raman pump turned ON.
• Wizard Span Measure with Raman Off—Span loss with Raman pump turned OFF, during Raman
installation.
• Last Span Measure with Raman—Span loss after a fiber cut restoration procedure.
Measurements are performed automatically on an hourly basis.
A Span Loss Out of Range condition is raised under the following conditions:
• Span loss is greater than the maximum expected span loss + resolution
• Span loss is less than the minimum expected span loss – resolution
The minimum and maximum expected span loss values are calculated by Cisco Transport Planner for the
network and imported into CTC. However, you can manually change the minimum and maximum
expected span loss values.
Note During Raman installation using a wizard, the Span Loss Out of Range alarm is not raised when the out
of range condition is raised. In such a case, the wizard fails and an error message is displayed, and the
span is not tuned.
CTC span loss measurements provide a quick span loss check and are useful whenever changes to the
network occur, for example after you install equipment or repair a broken fiber. CTC span loss
measurement resolutions are:
• +/– 1.5 dB for span loss measurements between 0 and 26 dB
• +/– 2.0 dB for span loss measurements between 26 and 31 dB
• +/– 3.0 dB for span loss measurements between 31 and 34 dB
• +/– 4.0 dB for span loss measurements between 34 and 36 dB
13-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
13.11 Network Optical Safety
If a fiber break occurs on the network, automatic laser shutdown (ALS) automatically shuts down the
OSCM and OSC-CSM OSC laser output power and the optical amplifiers contained in the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-RAMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-CE, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C cards, and the TX VOA in the protect path of the PSM
card (in line protection configuration only). (Instead, the PSM active path will use optical safety
mechanism implemented by the booster amplifier or OSC-CSM card that are mandatory in the line
protection configuration.)
The Maintenance > ALS tab in CTC card view provide the following ALS management options for
OSCM, OSC-CSM, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C,
OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, and PSM (on the protect path, only in line
protection configuration) cards:
• Disable—ALS is off. The OSC laser transmitter and optical amplifiers are not automatically shut
down when a traffic outage loss of signal (LOS) occurs.
• Auto Restart—ALS is on. The OSC laser transmitter and optical amplifiers automatically shut down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the
outage are resolved. Auto Restart is the default ALS provisioning for OSCM, OSC-CSM, OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-RAMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-CE, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, and PSM (on the protect path, only in line protection
configuration) cards.
• Manual Restart—ALS is on. The OSC laser transmitter and optical amplifiers automatically shut
down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when
conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test—Manually restarts the OSC laser transmitter and optical amplifiers for
testing.
13.11.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown
When ALS is enabled on OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, PSM (on the protect path,
only in line protection configuration), OSCM, OSC-CSM, TNC, and TNCE cards, a network safety
mechanism will occur in the event of a system failure. ALS provisioning is also provided on the
transponder (TXP) and muxponder (MXP) cards. However, if a network uses ALS-enabled OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-RAMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-CE, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, PSM (on the protect path, only in line protection
configuration), OSCM, and OSC-CSM cards, ALS does not need to be enabled on the TXP cards or MXP
cards. ALS is disabled on TXP and MXP cards by default and the network optical safety is not impacted.
If TXP and MXP cards are connected directly to each other without passing through a DWDM layer,
ALS should be enabled on them. The ALS protocol goes into effect when a fiber is cut, enabling some
degree of network point-to-point bidirectional traffic management between the cards.
If ALS is disabled on the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, PSM (on the protect path,
only in line protection configuration), OSCM, and OSC-CSM cards (the DWDM network), ALS can be
enabled on the TXP and MXP cards to provide laser management in the event of a fiber break in the
network between the cards.
13-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
13.11.2 Automatic Power Reduction
Automatic power reduction (APR) is controlled by the software and is not user configurable. During
amplifier restart after a system failure, the amplifier (OPT-BST, for example) operates in pulse mode and
an APR level is activated so that the Hazard Level 1 power limit is not exceeded. This is done to ensure
personnel safety.
When a system failure occurs (cut fiber or equipment failure, for example) and ALS Auto Restart is
enabled, a sequence of events is placed in motion to shut down the amplifier laser power, then
automatically restart the amplifier after the system problem is corrected. As soon as a loss of optical
payload and OSC is detected at the far end, the far-end amplifier shuts down. The near-end amplifier
then shuts down because it detects a loss of payload and the OSC shuts down due to the far-end amplifier
shutdown. At this point, the near end attempts to establish communication to the far end using the OSC
laser transmitter. To do this, the OSC emits a two-second pulse at very low power (maximum of 0 dBm)
and waits for a similar two-second pulse in response from the far-end OSC laser transmitter. If no
response is received within 100 seconds, the near end tries again. This process continues until the near
end receives a two-second response pulse from the far end, indicating the system failure is corrected and
full continuity in the fiber between the two ends exists.
After the OSC communication is established, the near-end amplifier is configured by the software to
operate in pulse mode at a reduced power level. It emits a nine-second laser pulse with an automatic
power reduction to +8 dBm. (For 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards, the pulse is not +8 dBm but it is
the per channel power setpoint.) This level assures that Hazard Level 1 is not exceeded, for personnel
safety, even though the establishment of successful OSC communication is assurance that any broken
fiber is fixed. If the far-end amplifier responds with a nine-second pulse within 100 seconds, both
amplifiers are changed from pulse mode at reduced power to normal operating power mode.
For a direct connection between TXP or MXP cards, when ALS Auto Restart is enabled and the
connections do not pass through a DWDM layer, a similar process takes place. However, because the
connections do not go through any amplifier or OSC cards, the TXP or MXP cards attempt to establish
communication directly between themselves after a system failure. This is done using a two-second
restart pulse, in a manner similar to that previously described between OSCs at the DWDM layer. The
power emitted during the pulse is below Hazard Level 1.
APR is also implemented on the PSM card (on the protect path, only in line protection configuration).
In the PSM line protection configuration, when a system failure occurs on the working path (cut fiber or
equipment failure, for example), the ALS and APR mechanisms are implemented by the booster
amplifier or the OSC-CSM card. Alternately, when a system failure occurs on the protect path, and ALS
Auto Restart is enabled on the PSM card, a sequence of events is placed in motion to shut down the TX
VOA on the protect path, and then automatically restart it after the system failure is corrected. During
protect path restart, the TX VOA on the protect path operates in pulse mode and limits the power to
maximum +8 dBm so that the Hazard Level 1 power limit is not exceeded on protect TX path.
When ALS is disabled, the warning Statement 1056 is applicable.
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector. Do
not view directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments
(for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm may pose an eye
hazard. Statement 1056
Note If you must disable ALS, verify that all fibers are installed in a restricted location. Enable ALS
immediately after finishing the maintenance or installation process.
13-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
Note For the line amplifier to start up automatically, disable the ALS on the terminal node that is
unidirectional.
13.11.3 Network Optical Safety on OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
Optical safety on the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards is implemented in the RAMAN-TX and
COM-TX ports. RAMAN-TX will report safety settings associated to the Raman pump while the
COM-TX port will report safety settings associated with the embedded EDFA.
13.11.3.1 RAMAN-TX Settings on Raman Pump
The Raman pump is automatically turned off as soon as the LOS alarm is detected on the LINE-RX port.
The Raman pump is automatically turned on at APR power every 100 secs for a duration of 9 seconds at
a pulse power of at 8 dBm, as soon as the LINE-RX port is set to IS-NR/unlocked-enabled.
Note Optical safety cannot be disabled on the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards and cannot be
disabled on OSCM cards when connected to a OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card.
The system periodically verifies if the signal power is present on the LINE-RX port. If signal power is
present, the following occurs:
• Pulse duration is extended.
• Raman pumps are turned on at APR power, if the laser was shut down.
The Raman power is then moved to setpoint if power is detected for more than 10 seconds. During
Automatic Laser Restart (ALR) the safety is enabled. The laser is automatically shut down if LOS is
detected on the receiving fiber. In general Raman pump turns on only when Raman signals are detected.
However, the Raman pump can be configured to turn on to full power even when OSC power is detected
for more than 9 seconds on OSC-RX port.
13.11.3.2 COM-TX Safety Setting on EDFA
EDFA is shutdown automatically under the following conditions:
• The Raman pumps shut down.
• An LOS-P alarm is detected on the COM-RX port.
If EDFA was shut down because of Raman pump shut down, the EDFA restarts by automatically turning
on the EDFA lasers as soon as the Raman loop is closed.
• Pulse duration: 9 seconds
• Pulse power: 8 dB (maximum APR power foreseen by safety regulation)
• Exit condition: Received power detected on the DC-RX port at the end of APR pulse. If power is
detected on DC-RX (so DCU is connected) EDFA moves to set-point; otherwise, it keeps 9 dB as
the output power at restart
• EDFA moves to the power setpoint when power is detected on the DC-RX port.
If EDFA was shutdown because of an LOS-P alarm. The EDFA restarts by automatically turning on the
EDFA laser as soon as an LOS-P alarm on the COM-RX port is cleared, and the Raman loop is closed.
13-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
• Pulse duration: 9 seconds
• Pulse power: 8 dB (maximum APR power foreseen by safety regulation)
• Exit condition: Received power detected on the LINE-RX port at the end of the APR pulse
Warning All ONS 15454 users must be properly trained on laser safety hazards in accordance with IEC 60825-2,
or ANSI Z136.1.
13.11.4 Fiber Cut Scenarios
In the following paragraphs, four ALS scenarios are given:
• 13.11.4.1 Scenario 1: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E Cards, page 13-33
• 13.11.4.2 Scenario 2: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OSC-CSM Cards, page 13-35
• 13.11.4.3 Scenario 3: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-BST-L Cards, page 13-37
• 13.11.4.4 Scenario 4: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C
(OPT-LINE Mode), 40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards, page 13-38
• 13.11.4.5 Scenario 5: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using DCN Extension, page 13-40
• 13.11.4.6 Scenario 6: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards,
page 13-42
• 13.11.4.7 Scenario 7: Fiber Cut in Optical Line Amplifier Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or
OPT-RAMP-CE Cards, page 13-44
13.11.4.1 Scenario 1: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E Cards
Figure 13-26 shows nodes using OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E cards with a fiber cut between them.
13-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
Figure 13-26 Nodes Using OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E Cards
Two photodiodes at Node B monitor the received signal strength for the optical payload and OSC signals.
When the fiber is cut, an LOS is detected at both of the photodiodes. The AND function then indicates
an overall LOS condition, which causes the OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E transmitter, OPT-PRE transmitter,
and OSCM lasers to shut down. This in turn leads to an LOS for both the optical payload and OSC at
Node A, which causes Node A to turn off the OSCM, OPT-PRE transmitter, and OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E
transmitter lasers. The sequence of events after a fiber cut is as follows (refer to the numbered circles in
Figure 13-26):
1. Fiber is cut.
2. The Node B power monitoring photodiode detects a Loss of Incoming Payload (LOS-P) on the
OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E card. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
3. On the OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E card, the simultaneous LOS-O and LOS-P detection triggers a
command to shut down the amplifier. CTC reports an LOS alarm (loss of continuity), while LOS-O
and LOS-P are demoted. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
4. The OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E card amplifier is shut down within one second.
5. The OSCM laser is shut down.
6. The OPT-PRE card automatically shuts down due to a loss of incoming optical power.
7. The Node A power monitoring photodiode detects a LOS-O on the OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E card and
the OSCM card detects a LOS (OC3) at the SONET layer. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide.
8. The Node A power monitoring photodiode detects a LOS-P on the OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E card.
Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E
P
P
P
OSCM
P P
OSCM
= power monitoring photodiode
= logical AND function
Node A
Side B
Node B
Side A
X
11
1
7
13
10
9 8
12
6
2 3
4
5
2
8
120988
OPT-PRE
OPT-PRE
13-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
9. On the OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E, the simultaneous LOS-O and LOS-P detection triggers a command
to shut down the amplifier. CTC reports an LOS alarm (loss of continuity), while LOS-O and LOS-P
are demoted. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
10. The OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E card amplifier is shut down within one second.
11. The OSCM laser is shut down.
12. The Node A OPT-PRE card automatically shuts down due to a loss of incoming optical power.
When the fiber is repaired, either an automatic or manual restart at the Node A OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E
transmitter or at the Node B OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E transmitter is required. A system that has been shut
down is reactivated through the use of a restart pulse. The pulse is used to signal that the optical path has
been restored and transmission can begin. For example, when the far end, Node B, receives a pulse, it
signals to the Node B OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E transmitter to begin transmitting an optical signal. The
OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E receiver at Node A receives that signal and signals the Node A
OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E transmitter to resume transmitting.
Note During a laser restart pulse, APR ensures that the laser power does not exceed Class 1 limits. See the
“13.11.2 Automatic Power Reduction” section on page 13-31 for more information about APR.
13.11.4.2 Scenario 2: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OSC-CSM Cards
Figure 13-27 shows nodes using OSC-CSM cards with a fiber cut between them.
13-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
Figure 13-27 Nodes Using OSC-CSM Cards
Two photodiodes at the Node B OSC-CSM card monitor the received signal strength for the received
optical payload and OSC signals. When the fiber is cut, LOS is detected at both of the photodiodes. The
AND function then indicates an overall LOS condition, which causes the Node B OSC laser to shut down
and the optical switch to block traffic. This in turn leads to LOS for both the optical payload and OSC
signals at Node A, which causes Node A to turn off the OSC laser and the optical switch to block
outgoing traffic. The sequence of events after a fiber cut is as follows (refer to the numbered circles in
Figure 13-27):
1. Fiber is cut.
2. The Node B power monitoring photodiode detects a LOS-P on the OSC-CSM card. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
3. On the OSC-CSM, the simultaneous LOS-O and LOS-P detection triggers a change in the position
of the optical switch. CTC reports a LOS alarm (loss of continuity), while LOS-O and LOS-P are
demoted. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
4. The optical switch blocks outgoing traffic.
5. The OSC laser is shut down.
6. The Node A power monitoring photodiode detects a LOS-O on the OSC-CSM card. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
7. The Node A power monitoring photodiode detects a LOS-P on the OSC-CSM card. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
OSC-CSM
P
P
P
OSC
OSC-CSM
P P
OSC
= power monitoring photodiode
= logical AND function
Node A
Side B
Node B
Side A
X
11
1
9
8 7
10
6
2 3
4
5
2
7
120987
13-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
8. On the OSC-CSM, the simultaneous LOS-O and LOS-P detection triggers a change in the position
of the optical switch. CTC reports a LOS alarm (loss of continuity), while LOS-O and LOS-P are
demoted. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
9. The OSC laser is shut down.
10. The optical switch blocks outgoing traffic.
When the fiber is repaired, either an automatic or manual restart at the Node A OSC-CSM card OSC or
at the Node B OSC-CSM card OSC is required. A system that has been shut down is reactivated through
the use of a restart pulse. The pulse indicates the optical path is restored and transmission can begin. For
example, when the far-end Node B receives a pulse, it signals to the Node B OSC to begin transmitting
its optical signal and for the optical switch to pass incoming traffic. The OSC-CSM at Node A then
receives the signal and tells the Node A OSC to resume transmitting and for the optical switch to pass
incoming traffic.
13.11.4.3 Scenario 3: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-BST-L Cards
Figure 13-28 shows nodes using OPT-BST-L cards with a fiber cut between them.
Figure 13-28 Nodes Using OPT-BST-L Cards
Two photodiodes at Node B monitor the received signal strength for the optical payload and OSC signals.
When the fiber is cut, an LOS is detected at both of the photodiodes. The AND function then indicates
an overall LOS condition, which causes the OPT-BST-L transmitter and OSCM lasers to shut down. This
OPT-BST-L OPT-BST-L
P
P
P
OSCM
P P
OSCM
= power monitoring photodiode
= logical AND function
Node A
Side B
Node B
Side A
X
11
1
7
13
10
9 8
12
6
2 3
4
5
2
8
145950
OPT-AMP-L
OPT-AMP-L
13-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
in turn leads to an LOS for both the optical payload and the OSC at Node A, which causes Node A to
turn off the OSCM OSC transmitter and OPT-BST-L amplifier lasers. The sequence of events after a fiber
cut is as follows (refer to the numbered circles in Figure 13-28):
1. Fiber is cut.
2. The Node B power monitoring photodiode detects an LOS-P on the OPT-BST-L card. For more
information on alarms, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
3. On the OPT-BST-L card, the simultaneous LOS-O and LOS-P detection triggers a command to shut
down the amplifier. CTC reports an LOS alarm (loss of continuity), while LOS-O and LOS-P are
demoted. For more information on alarms, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting
Guide.
4. The OPT-BST-L card amplifier is shut down within one second.
5. The OSCM laser is shut down.
6. The OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, or OPT-AMP-17-C card automatically shuts down due to a loss of
incoming optical power.
7. The Node A power monitoring photodiode detects an LOS-O on the OPT-BST-L card and the OSCM
card detects an LOS (OC3) at the SONET layer. For more information on alarms, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
8. The Node A power monitoring photodiode detects an LOS-P on the OPT-BST-L card. For more
information on alarms, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
9. On the OPT-BST-L, the simultaneous LOS-O and LOS-P detection triggers a command to shut down
the amplifier. CTC reports an LOS alarm (loss of continuity), while the LOS-O and LOS-P are
demoted. For more information on alarms, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting
Guide.
10. The OPT-BST-L card amplifier is shut down within one second.
11. The OSCM laser is shut down.
12. The Node A OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, or OPT-AMP-17-C card automatically shuts down due to
an LOS for the incoming optical power.
When the fiber is repaired, either an automatic or manual restart at the Node A OPT-BST-L transmitter
or at the Node B OPT-BST-L transmitter is required. A system that has been shut down is reactivated
through the use of a restart pulse. The pulse indicates the optical path is restored and transmission can
begin. For example, when the far end, Node B, receives a pulse, it signals to the Node B OPT-BST-L
transmitter to begin transmitting an optical signal. The OPT-BST-L receiver at Node A receives that
signal and signals the Node A OPT-BST-L transmitter to resume transmitting.
Note During a laser restart pulse, APR ensures that the laser power does not exceed Class 1 limits. See the
“13.11.2 Automatic Power Reduction” section on page 13-31 for more information about APR.
13.11.4.4 Scenario 4: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C (OPT-LINE Mode), 40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards
Figure 13-29 shows nodes using OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C (in OPT-LINE mode),
40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C cards with a fiber cut between them.
13-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
Note A generic reference to the OPT-AMP card refers to the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C,
40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C cards.
Figure 13-29 Nodes Using OPT-AMP Cards
Two photodiodes at Node B monitor the received signal strength for the optical payload and OSC signals.
When the fiber is cut, an LOS is detected at both of the photodiodes. The AND function then indicates
an overall LOS condition, which causes the OPT-AMP card amplifier transmitter and OSCM card OSC
lasers to shut down. This in turn leads to an LOS for both the optical payload and OSC at Node A, which
causes Node A to turn off the OSCM card OSC and OPT-AMP card amplifier lasers. The sequence of
events after a fiber cut is as follows (refer to the numbered circles in Figure 13-29):
1. Fiber is cut.
2. The Node B power monitoring photodiode detects an LOS-P on the OPT-AMP card. For more
information on alarms, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
3. On the OPT-AMP card, the simultaneous LOS-O and LOS-P detection triggers a command to shut
down the amplifier. CTC reports an LOS alarm (loss of continuity), while LOS-O and LOS-P are
demoted. For more information on alarms, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting
Guide.
4. The OPT-AMP card amplifier is shut down within one second.
5. The OSCM card laser is shut down.
OPT-AMP-L OPT-AMP-L
P
P
P
OSCM
P P
OSCM
= power monitoring photodiode
= logical AND function
Node A
Side B
Node B
Side A
X
10
1
7
9
8
11
6
2 3
4
5
2
8
145949
13-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
6. The Node A power monitoring photodiode detects an LOS-O on the OPT-AMP card and the OSCM
card detects an LOS (OC3) at the SONET layer. For more information on alarms, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
7. The Node A power monitoring photodiode detects an LOS-P on the OPT-AMP card. For more
information on alarms, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
8. On the OPT-AMP card, the simultaneous LOS-O and LOS-P detection triggers a command to shut
down the amplifier. CTC reports an LOS alarm (loss of continuity), while LOS-O and LOS-P are
demoted. For more information on alarms, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting
Guide.
9. The OPT-AMP card amplifier is shut down within one second.
10. The OSCM card laser is shut down.
When the fiber is repaired, either an automatic or manual restart at the Node A OPT-AMP card
transmitter or at the Node B OPT-AMP card transmitter is required. A system that has been shut down
is reactivated through the use of a restart pulse. The pulse indicates that the optical path is restored and
transmission can begin. For example, when the far end, Node B, receives a pulse, it signals to the Node B
OPT-AMP card transmitter to begin transmitting an optical signal. The OPT-AMP card receiver at Node
A receives that signal and signals the Node A OPT-AMP card transmitter to resume transmitting.
Note During a laser restart pulse, APR ensures that the laser power does not exceed Class 1 limits. See the
“13.11.2 Automatic Power Reduction” section on page 13-31 for more information about APR.
13.11.4.5 Scenario 5: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using DCN Extension
Figure 13-30 shows a fiber cut scenario for nodes that do not have OSC connectivity. In the scenario,
references to the OPT-BST cards refers to the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-L, OPT-BST-E, OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C cards when provisioned in OPT-LINE
mode.
13-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
Figure 13-30 Fiber Cut With DCN Extension
Two photodiodes at Node B monitor the received signal strength for the optical payload. When the fiber
is cut, an LOS is detected on the channel photodiode while the other one never gets a signal because the
OSC is not present. The AND function then indicates an overall LOS condition, which causes the
OPT-BST amplifier transmitter to shut down. This in turn leads to a LOS for the optical payload at
Node A, which causes Node A to turn off the OPT-BST amplifier lasers.
The sequence of events after a fiber cut is as follows (refer to the numbered circles in Figure 13-30):
1. Fiber is cut.
2. The Node B power monitoring photodiode detects an LOS on the OPT-BST card. Refer to the Cisco
ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for LOS troubleshooting procedures.
3. On the OPT-BST card, the LOS detection triggers a command to shut down the amplifier. Refer to
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for alarm troubleshooting procedures.
4. The OPT-BST card amplifier is shut down within one second.
5. The Node A power monitoring photodiode detects a LOS on the OPT-BST card. Refer to the Cisco
ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for alarm troubleshooting procedures.
6. On the OPT-BST, the LOS detection triggers a command to shut down the amplifier. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
7. The OPT-BST card amplifier is shut down within one second.
When the fiber is repaired, a manual restart with 9 sec restart pulse time (MANUAL RESTART) is
required at the Node A OPT-BST transmitter and at the Node B OPT-BST transmitter. A system that has
been shut down is reactivated through the use of a 9 sec restart pulse. The pulse indicates that the optical
path is restored and transmission can begin.
P
P
P
= power monitoring photodiode
= logical AND function
X
7
1
6
5
2
3
4
159799
Node A
Side B
Node B
Side A
13-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
For example, when the far end, Node B, receives a pulse, it signals to the Node B OPT-BST transmitter
to begin transmitting an optical signal. The OPT-BST receiver at Node A receives that signal and signals
the Node A OPT-BST transmitter to resume transmitting.
Note During a laser restart pulse, APR ensures that the laser power does not exceed Class 1 limits. See the
“13.11.2 Automatic Power Reduction” section on page 13-31 for more information about APR.
13.11.4.6 Scenario 6: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
Figure 13-31 shows a fiber cut scenario for nodes using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards.
Figure 13-31 Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
The sequence of events after a fiber cut is as follows (refer to the numbered circles in Figure 13-31):
1. Fiber is cut in the direction of Node A to Node B.
2. No alarms are initially detected on Node B. The Raman pumps are still in ON state and continue to
pump power on to the broken fiber. The residual Raman noise propagated towards the LINE-RX port
keeps the embedded EDFA active. The LOS alarm is not raised on the DC-TX port because the
EDFA continues to transmit minimum output power to the line amplifier that it is connected to.
3. On Node A, the OPT-RAMP-C card no longer receives the Raman remnant pump signal on the
LINE-TX port. The RAMAN-RX port detects an LOS-R alarm on the OPT-RAMP-C or
OPT-RAMP-CE card. The OSCM card that is connected to the OPT-RAMP-C card detects OSC
failure and raises a LOS alarm at the OC-3 level. For the LOS-R troubleshooting procedures, see the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
4. On the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card, the LOS-R alarm triggers a command to shut down
the Raman pump on Node A.
5. On Node A, the LOS alarm on the OSCM card causes a laser TX shutdown because ALS is always
enabled on the OSCM card. This results in the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card raising the
LOS-O alarm on the OSC-RX port.
LINE-TX Raman remnant pump photodiode
OSC-RX photodiode
LINE-RX C-band photodiode
COM-RX C-band photodiode
1
8
4
3
2
272075
Raman pumps
Embedded EDFA
Node A Node B
7
9
10
11
14
15
13-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
6. Because the Raman pump on Node A is shutdown, the RAMAN-RX port detects an LOS-R alarm
on Node B.
7. The LOS-R alarm triggers a command to shut down the Raman pump on Node B.
8. The embedded EDFA on Node B no longer receives residual power Raman noise. An LOS alarm is
detected on the input port of the EDFA that causes the embedded EDFA to shut down.
9. The LINE-RX port of the line amplifier on Node B that receives the payload signal from the
embedded EDFA of the OPT-RAMP-C card detects an LOS alarm.
10. The LOS alarm triggers an ALS and causes the line amplifier to shut down.
11. The COM-RX port of the OPT-RAMP-C card on Node B and consequently the LINE-TX port that
is connected to Node A through the safe fiber, no longer receive power.
12. Because the OSCM card on Node A is in the ALS condition, there is no OSC signal on the LINE-TX
port of the OSCM card on Node B that raises an LOS alarm.
13. The LOS alarm on the OSCM card causes a laser TX shutdown that raises an LOS-O alarm on the
OSC-RX port of the OPT-RAMP-C card on Node B. The simultaneous presence of an LOS-O alarm
on the OSC-RX port and an LOS-R alarm on the RAMAN-RX port of the OPT-RAMP-C card can
be interpreted as a fiber cut and an LOS alarm is generated on the LINE-RX port.
14. On Node A, the LINE-RX port of the OPT-RAMP-C card detects an LOS alarm because the C-band
payload is absent and triggers a command to shut down the embedded EDFA.
15. The line amplifier that receives the payload signal from the embedded EDFA of the OPT-RAMP-C
card detects an LOS alarm on its LINE-RX port and causes the line amplifier to shut down. The
C-band power is no longer transmitted to the COM-RX port of the OPT-RAMP-C card and
subsequently to the LINE-TX port that connected to the broken fiber.
An Automatic Laser Restart (ALR) on the Raman pump is detected when the fiber is restored. This turns
both the Raman pumps to ON state, on both the nodes. When the power on the Raman pump is restored,
it turns on the embedded EDFA also. The booster amplifiers on both Node A and Node B detect power
on the LINE-RX port. This restarts the booster amplifier.
Once the active TCC of the Raman node detects a stable condition, the link is automatically revaluated.
The TCC initiates a fiber restoration procedure as described in 13.11.4.8 Fiber Cut Recovery in Nodes
Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards, page 13-49. The procedure takes a maximum of one or
two minutes and causes a temporary transient condition on C-band signals.
13-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
13.11.4.7 Scenario 7: Fiber Cut in Optical Line Amplifier Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
In the following sections, fiber cut scenarios for three node layouts are given:
13.11.4.7.1 Scenario 7A—Node Equipped With OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards on Side A and Side B.
Figure 13-32 shows a fiber cut scenario for a node equipped with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE
cards on Side A and Side B.
Figure 13-32 Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards on Side A and B
The sequence of events after a fiber cut is as follows (refer to the numbered circles in Figure 13-32):
1. The fiber that is connected to the LINE-TX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on
Side A of Node A is cut. The Raman link goes down.
2. The RAMAN-RX port detects an LOS-R alarm on the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on
Side A. For LOS-R troubleshooting procedures, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting
Guide.
3. On the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card, the LOS-R alarm triggers a command to shut down
the Raman pump on Side A.
4. No power is detected by the embedded EDFA on the LINE-RX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or
OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side A.
5. The embedded EDFA of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side A is automatically
shutdown.
6. An LOS-P alarm is detected on the COM-RX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on
Side B of Node A.
7. The LOS-P alarm triggers an ALS of the embedded EDFA of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE
card on Side B.
LINE-TX Raman remnant pump photodiode
OSC-RX photodiode
LINE-RX C-band photodiode
COM-RX C-band photodiode
5
254910
Raman pumps
Embedded EDFA
Side A Side B
Node A
OPT-RAMP-C/CE OPT-RAMP-C/CE
3
8
4
6
7
2
1
X
13-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
8. No C-band power is transmitted out of the COM-TX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE
card on Side B, to the COM-RX port and subsequently to the LINE-TX port of the OPT-RAMP-C
or OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side A that is connected to the broken fiber.
For information about fiber cut recovery, see the “13.11.4.8 Fiber Cut Recovery in Nodes Using
OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards” section on page 13-49.
13.11.4.7.2 Scenario 7B—Node Equipped With OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE and Booster Cards on Side A and OPT-RAMP-C
or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards on Side B.
Scenario 1—Fiber cut on the LINE-TX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side A
(Figure 13-33).
Figure 13-33 Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE and Booster Cards on Side A and
OPT-RAMP-CE Cards on Side B - Scenario 1
The sequence of events after a fiber cut is as follows (refer to the numbered circles in Figure 13-33):
1. The fiber that is connected to the LINE-TX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on
Side A of Node A is cut.The Raman link goes down.
2. The RAMAN-RX port detects an LOS-R alarm on the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card. For
LOS-R troubleshooting procedures, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
3. On the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card, the LOS-R alarm triggers a command to shut down
the Raman pump on Side A.
4. No power is detected by the embedded EDFA on the LINE-RX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or
OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side A.
5. The embedded EDFA of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side A is automatically
shutdown.
6. An LOS alarm is detected on the downstream line amplifier on Side A of Node A since it no longer
receives the optical payload from the embedded EDFA of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE
card.
LINE-TX Raman remnant pump photodiode
OSC-RX photodiode
LINE-RX C-band photodiode
COM-RX C-band photodiode
1
5
2
254908
Raman pumps
Embedded EDFA
Side A Side B
3
6
7
4
Node A
OPT-RAMP-C/CE LINE-AMP OPT-RAMP-C/CE
X
13-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
7. The ALS mechanism causes the line amplifier to shut down.
8. The C-band power is no longer transmitted out of the line amplifier to the COM-RX port and
subsequently to the LINE-TX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card that is connected
to the broken fiber.
For information about fiber cut recovery, see the “13.11.4.8 Fiber Cut Recovery in Nodes Using
OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards” section on page 13-49.
Scenario 2—Fiber cut on the LINE-TX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side B
(Figure 13-34).
Figure 13-34 Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE and Booster Cards on Side A and
OPT-RAMP-CE Cards on Side B - Scenario 2
The sequence of events after a fiber cut is as follows (refer to the numbered circles in Figure 13-34):
1. The fiber that is connected to the LINE-TX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on
Side B of Node A is cut.
2. An LOS-R alarm is detected on the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side B because it no
longer receives the Raman remnant signal from Node B.
3. On the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card, the LOS-R alarm triggers a command to shut down
the Raman pump on Side B.
4. The embedded EDFA of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side B no longer receives
residual Raman power and causes it to shut down.
5. A very low C-band signal reaches the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side A. An LOS-P
alarm is detected on the COM-RX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side A.
6. The embedded EDFA of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side A is automatically
shutdown.
LINE-TX Raman remnant pump photodiode
OSC-RX photodiode
LINE-RX C-band photodiode
COM-RX C-band photodiode
6
254909
Raman pumps
Embedded EDFA
Side A Side B
5
4
Node A
OPT-RAMP-C/CE LINE-AMP OPT-RAMP-C/CE
3
7 2 1
X
13-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
7. The C-band power is no longer transmitted to the line amplifier through the DC-TX port of the
OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side A, to the COM-RX port and subsequently to the
LINE-TX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side B that is connected to the
broken fiber.
For information about fiber cut recovery, see the “13.11.4.8 Fiber Cut Recovery in Nodes Using
OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards” section on page 13-49.
13.11.4.7.3 Scenario 7C—Node Equipped With OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE and Booster Cards on Side A and OSC-CSM Cards
on Side B.
Scenario 1—Fiber cut on the LINE-TX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side A
(Figure 13-35).
Figure 13-35 Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE and Booster Cards on Side A and
OSC-CSM Cards on Side B - Scenario 1
The sequence of events after a fiber cut is as follows (refer to the numbered circles in Figure 13-35):
1. The fiber that is connected to the LINE-TX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on
Side A of Node A is cut. The Raman link goes down.
2. The RAMAN-RX port detects an LOS-R alarm on the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card. For
LOS-R troubleshooting procedures, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
3. On the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card, the LOS-R alarm triggers a command to shut down
the Raman pump on Side A.
4. No power is detected by the embedded EDFA on the LINE-RX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or
OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side A.
5. The embedded EDFA of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on Side A is automatically
shutdown.
5
2
254911
Side A Side B
3
6
7
4
Node A
OPT-RAMP-C/CE LINE-AMP OSC-CSM
LINE-TX Raman remnant pump photodiode
OSC-RX photodiode
LINE-RX C-band photodiode
COM-RX C-band photodiode
Raman pumps
Embedded EDFA
1
X
13-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
6. An LOS alarm is detected on the downstream line amplifier on Side A of Node A because it no
longer receives the optical payload from the embedded EDFA of the OPT-RAMP-C or
OPT-RAMP-CE card.
7. The ALS mechanism causes the line amplifier to shut down.
8. The C-band power is no longer transmitted out of the line amplifier to the COM-RX port and
subsequently to the LINE-TX port of the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card that is connected
to the broken fiber on Side A.
For information about fiber cut recovery, see the “13.11.4.8 Fiber Cut Recovery in Nodes Using
OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards” section on page 13-49.
Scenario 2—Fiber cut on the LINE-RX port of the OSC-CSM card on Side B (Figure 13-36).
Figure 13-36 Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE and Booster Cards on Side A and
OSC-CSM Cards on Side B - Scenario 2
The sequence of events after a fiber cut is as follows (refer to the numbered circles in Figure 13-36):
1. The fiber that is connected to the LINE-RX port of the OSC-CSM card on Side B of Node A is cut.
2. An LOS alarm is detected on the OSC-CSM card on Side B because it no longer receives the OSC
signal.
3. The power is shut down by means of a 1x1 optical switch in the OSC-CSM card.
Note During a laser restart pulse, APR ensures that the laser power does not exceed Class 1 limits. For more
information about APR, see the “13.11.2 Automatic Power Reduction” section on page 13-31.
2
254912
Side A Side B
3
Node A
OPT-RAMP-C/CE LINE-AMP OSC-CSM
LINE-TX Raman remnant pump photodiode
OSC-RX photodiode
LINE-RX C-band photodiode
COM-RX C-band photodiode
Raman pumps
Embedded EDFA
1
X
13-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network Optical Safety
13.11.4.8 Fiber Cut Recovery in Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards
A fiber cut recovery procedure is automatically performed after the OCH channels are restored to
measure the actual Raman gain on the span.
1. Node A sends a message through OSC or DCN to Node B to be ready for Raman Gain measurement.
2. The TCC configures the Raman pumps on Node A to operate at APR power (+8 dBm). In this state,
no Raman amplification is generated on the input fiber of Node A and a reliable span loss
measurement is performed. The Raman pumps must not be shut down completely to avoid an
improper fiber cut event.
3. Node B acknowledges the message and reports the value of the Raman power received on the
channel to Node A.
4. On Node A, the TCC configures the line amplifiers in power control mode and APR state (+8 dBm).
The C-band power received with Raman pumps in OFF state is recorded.
5. The TCC turns the Raman pumps to full power maintaining the Raman ratio calculated by the
Raman installation wizard. The Raman total power is adjusted, so that the Raman gain setpoint is
reached. The actual Raman gain is calculated using the C-band power values.
6. When the Raman gain setpoint is reached, the value of the Power field gets updated and the status
of the Fiber Cut Recovery field changes to “Executed” in CTC.
If the provisioned Raman gain setpoint is not reached by setting the Raman total power to the maximum
value of 450 mW, the procedure stops and the RAMAN-G-NOT-REACHED alarm is raised on the
OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card.
13.11.5 Network Optical Safety on RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards
Bidirectional optical safety mechanisms for Raman and C-band signals have been independently
implemented. The Raman pump laser shutdown and restart is managed by the RAMAN-CTP card. The
RAMAN-COP card is controlled by the RAMAN-CTP card using two backplane wires. The
RAMAN-COP card can be absent in some node configurations.
The C-band signal shutdown and restart is managed by an MSTP card, such as 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR-2C,
OPT-EDFA-17, or OPT-EDFA-24.
The optical safety mechanism on the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards is managed by:
• DFB signal (1568.77 nm) and detection of DFB related signals—The RAMAN-CTP card on the
local node transmits a DFB signal and waits for a similar response from the remote side. If a valid
DFB signal is not detected, the RAMAN-CTP card switches off its transmitting DFB laser that
causes a loss of DFB signal on the remote RAMAN-CTP card which in turn switches off its DFB
laser. Both the RAMAN-CTP cards must turn off the DFB signals, when a fiber cut occurs.
• Raman pump laser back reflection mechanism on the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards—This
mechanism uses the ratio between the back-reflected optical power and the total output Raman pump
power to reduce the output power when patchcords are removed. If excessive back-reflection occurs,
a Raman Laser Shutdown (RLS) alarm is raised on the RAMAN port where the failure is detected.
• Photodiode (P8) on the RAMAN-CTP card—The photodiode (P8) detects the Raman pump power
transmitted by the RAMAN-COP card and is used to check for optical continuity between the
RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards. The RAMAN-COP card is shut down if the cards get
disconnected.
13-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network-Level Gain—Tilt Management of Optical Amplifiers
13.12 Network-Level Gain—Tilt Management of Optical Amplifiers
The ability to control and adjust per channel optical power equalization is a principal feature of
ONS 15454 DWDM metro core network applications. A critical parameter to assure optical spectrum
equalization throughout the DWDM system is the gain flatness of erbium-doped fiber amplifiers
(EDFAs).
Two items, gain tilt and gain ripple, are factors in the power equalization of optical amplifier cards such
as the OPT-BST and OPT-PRE. Figure 13-37 shows a graph of the amplifier output power spectrum and
how it is affected by gain tilt and gain ripple.
Figure 13-37 Effect of Gain Ripple and Gain Tilt on Amplifier Output Power
Gain ripple and gain tilt are defined as follows:
• Gain ripple is random and depends on the spectral shape of the amplifier optical components.
• Gain tilt is systematic and depends on the gain setpoint (Gstp) of the optical amplifier, which is a
mathematical function F(Gstp) that relates to the internal amplifier design.
Gain tilt is the only contribution to the power spectrum disequalization that can be compensated at the
card level. A VOA internal to the amplifier can be used to compensate for gain tilt.
An optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) is used to acquire the output power spectrum of an amplifier. The
OSA shows the peak-to-peak difference between the maximum and minimum power levels, and takes
into account the contributions of both gain tilt and gain ripple.
-4
-2
0
2
4
1530.3 1560.6
Wavelength [nm]
Gain Tilt
Amplifier Output Spectrum
1550
Gain Ripple
Per-Channel power [dB]
134393
13-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network-Level Gain—Tilt Management of Optical Amplifiers
Note Peak-to-peak power acquisition using an OSA cannot be used to measure the gain tilt, because gain
ripple itself is a component of the actual measurement.
13.12.1 Gain Tilt Control at the Card Level
The OPT-BST and OPT-PRE amplifier cards have a flat output (gain tilt = 0 dB) for only a specific gain
value (Gdesign), based on the internal optical design (see Figure 13-38).
Figure 13-38 Flat Gain (Gain Tilt = 0 dB)
If the working gain setpoint of the amplifier is different from Gdesign, the output spectrum begins to
suffer a gain tilt variation.
In order to compensate for the absolute value of the increase of the spectrum tilt, the OPT-BST and
OPT-PRE cards automatically adjust the attenuation of the VOA to maintain a flat power profile at the
output, as shown in Figure 13-39.
-3
-2
0
1
1528 1536 1544 1552 1560
-1
Gdesign VOAatt 2
= 0dB
Wavelength [nm]
Gain Tilt = 0 dB
0 dB
Gain Ripple ~ 2dB
134394
Per Channel Power [dB]
13-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network-Level Gain—Tilt Management of Optical Amplifiers
Figure 13-39 Effect of VOA Attenuation on Gain Tilt
The VOA attenuator automatic regulation guarantees (within limits) a zero tilt condition in the EDFA
for a wide range of possible gain setpoint values.
Table 13-2 shows the flat output gain range limits for the OPT-BST and OPT-PRE cards, as well as the
maximum (worst case) values of gain tilt and gain ripple expected in the specific gain range.
If the operating gain value is outside of the range shown in Table 13-2, the EDFA introduces a tilt
contribution for which the card itself cannot directly compensate. This condition is managed in different
ways, depending the amplifier card type:
• OPT-BST—The OPT-BST amplifier is, by design, not allowed to work outside the zero tilt range.
Cisco TransportPlanner network designs use the OPT-BST amplifier card only when the gain is less
than or equal to 20 dB.
• OPT-PRE—Cisco TransportPlanner allows network designs even if the operating gain value is equal
to or greater than 21 dB. In this case, a system-level tilt compensation strategy is adopted by the
DWDM system. A more detailed explanation is given in 13.12.2 System Level Gain Tilt Control,
page 13-52.
13.12.2 System Level Gain Tilt Control
System level gain tilt control for OPT-PRE cards is achievable with two main scenarios:
• Without an ROADM node
-6
-4
-2
0
2
4
1528 1536 1544 1552 1560
Wavelength [nm]
G < Gdesign
VOAatt adjustment
VOA at = 0dB
VOAatt = Gdesign - G
Per Channel Power [dB]
134395
Table 13-2 Flat Output Gain Range Limits
Amplifier
Card Type
Flat Output
Gain Range
Gain Tilt
(Maximum)
Gain Ripple
(Maximum)
OPT-BST G < 20 dB 0.5 dB 1.5 dB
OPT-PRE G < 21 dB 0.5 dB 1.5 dB
13-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network-Level Gain—Tilt Management of Optical Amplifiers
• With an ROADM node
13.12.2.1 System Gain Tilt Compensation Without ROADM Nodes
When an OPT-PRE card along a specific line direction (Side A-to-Side B or Side B-to-Side A) is
working outside the flat output gain range (G > 21 dB), the unregulated tilt is compensated for in spans
that are not connected to ROADM nodes by configuring an equal but opposite tilt on one or more of the
amplifiers in the downstream direction. The number of downstream amplifiers involved depends on the
amount of tilt compensation needed and the gain setpoint of the amplifiers that are involved. See
Figure 13-40.
Figure 13-40 System Tilt Compensation Without an ROADM Node
The proper Tilt Reference value is calculated by Cisco TransportPlanner and inserted in the Installation
Parameter List imported during the node turn-up process (see Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”). For both
OPT-PRE and OPT-BST cards, the provisionable Gain Tilt Reference range is between –3 dB and +3 dB.
During the ANS procedure, the Tilt value for the OPT-BST or OPT-PRE card is provisioned by the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card (see Figure 13-41). The provisioned Tilt Reference
Value is reported in the CTC OPT-PRE or OPT-BST card view (in the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line
> Parameters > Tilt Reference tab).
OPT-BST
GOPT-PRE > 21dB
Unregulated Tilt
SPAN 1 = 25 dB SPAN 2 = 15 dB
OPT-PRE
DCU
Tilt Reference 0
Provisioned Tilt
134396
=
13-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Network-Level Gain—Tilt Management of Optical Amplifiers
Figure 13-41 Cisco TransportPlanner Installation Parameters
13.12.2.2 System Gain Tilt Compensation With ROADM Nodes
When a ROADM node is present in the network, as shown in Figure 13-42, a per channel dynamic gain
equalization can be performed. Both gain tilt and gain ripple are completely compensated using the
following techniques:
• Implementing the per channel VOAs present inside the 32WSS card
• Operating in Power Control Mode with the specific power setpoint designed by
Cisco TransportPlanner
13-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Optical Data Rate Derivations
Figure 13-42 System Tilt Compensation With an ROADM Node
13.13 Optical Data Rate Derivations
This section discusses the derivation of several data rates commonly used in optical networking.
13.13.1 OC-192/STM-64 Data Rate (9.95328 Gbps)
The SONET OC-1 rate is 51.84 Mbps. This rate results from a standard SONET frame, which consists
of 9 rows of 90 columns of 8-bit bytes (810 bytes total). The transmission rate is 8000 frames per second
(125 microseconds per frame). This works out to 51.84 Mbps, as follows:
(9) x (90 bytes/frame) x (8 bits/byte) x (8000 frames/sec) = 51.84 Mbps
OC-192 is 192 x 51.84 Mbps = 9953.28 Mbps = 9.95328 Gbps
STM-64 is an SDH rate that is equivalent to the SONET OC-192 data rate.
13.13.2 10GE Data Rate (10.3125 Gbps)
10.3125 Gbps is the standard 10 Gbps Ethernet LAN rate. The reason the rate is higher than 10.000 Gbps
is due to the 64-bit to 66-bit data encoding. The result is 10 Gbps x 66/64 = 10.3125 Gbps. The reason
for 64-bit to 66-bit encoding is to ensure that there are adequate data transitions to ensure proper
operation of a clock and data recovery circuit at the far end. Additionally, the encoding assures a data
stream that is DC balanced.
13.13.3 10G FC Data Rate (10.51875 Gbps)
The Fibre Channel rate is based on the OC-192 rate of 9.95328 Gbps, with the addition of 64-bit to 66-bit
encoding and WAN Interconnect Sublayer (WIS) overhead bytes.
SPAN 1 = 25 dB
DCU
32 WSS
SPAN 2 SPAN3 SPAN4
OPT-BST
GOPT-PRE > 21dB
Unregulated Tilt
OPT-PRE
Per-channel Tilt Reference = 0
Power Equalization
134397
13-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Optical Data Rate Derivations
The rate is derived from the basic 9.95328 Gbps OC-192 rate. First, it has the 64-bit to 66-bit encoding
added, which brings it to the 10.3125 Gbps rate (10 Gbps x 66/64 = 10.3125 Gbps). Beyond that, the
WIS overhead is added, which is an additional two percent on top of the 10.3125 Gbps. This yields:
10.3125 Gbps x .02 = 0.20625 Gbps
10.3125 Gbps + 0.20625 Gbps = 10.51875 Gbps
13.13.4 ITU-T G.709 Optical Data Rates
To understand optical networking data rates, an understanding of the ITU-T G.709 frame structure,
shown in Figure 13-43, is needed.
Figure 13-43 ITU-T G.709 Frame Structure
Each of the sub-rows in Figure 13-43 contains 255 bytes. Sixteen are interleaved horizontally
(16 x 255 = 4080). This is repeated four times to make up the complete ITU-T G.709 frame.
The Reed Solomon (RS) (255,239) designation indicates the forward error correction (FEC) bytes. There
are 16 FEC, or parity, bytes. The ITU-T G.709 protocol uses one overhead byte and 238 data bytes to
compute 16 parity bytes to form 255 byte blocks—the RS (255,239) algorithm. Interleaving the
information provides two key advantages. First, the encoding rate of each stream is reduced relative to
the line transmission rate and, second, it reduces the sensitivity to bursts of error. The interleaving
combined with the inherent correction strength of the RS (255,239) algorithm enables the correction of
transmission bursts of up to 128 consecutive errored bytes. As a result, the ITU-T G.709 contiguous burst
error correcting capability is enhanced 16 times above the capacity of the RS(255,239) algorithm by
itself.
ITU-T G.709 defines the Optical Transport Unit 2 (OTU2) rate as 10.70923 Gbps. ITU-T G.709 defines
three line rates:
1. 2,666,057.143 kbps—Optical Transport Unit 1 (OTU1)
159457
Sub Row 3
1 239 240 255
Info Bytes RS (255, 239)
Sub Row 2 Info Bytes RS (255, 239)
Sub Row 1
Rows: 1
2
3
4
Columns: 1 17 3825 4080
Info Bytes RS (255, 239)
Info Bytes Payload FEC
13-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Even Band Management
2. 10,709,225.316 kbps—Optical Transport Unit 2 (OTU2)
3. 43,018,413.559 kbps—Optical Transport Unit 3 (OTU3)
The OTU2 rate is higher than OC-192 because the OTU2 has to carry overhead and FEC bytes in its
frame; the bits must be sent faster to carry the payload information at the OC-192 rate.
The ITU-T G.709 frame has two parts. Two are similar to a SDH/SONET frame:
1. Overhead area for operation, administration, and maintenance functions
2. Payload area for customer data
In addition, the ITU-T G.709 frame also includes FEC bytes.
13.13.4.1 OC-192 Packaged Into OTU2 G.709 Frame Data Rate (10.70923 Gbps)
In this case, an OC-192 frame is being transported over a OTU2 G.709 frame, which adds the benefit of
FEC. The OC-192 data rate (9.95328 Gbps) must increase in order to transport more bytes (OC-192 plus
ITU-T G.709 overhead plus ITU-T G.709 FEC bytes) in the same amount of time. In an OTU2
transmission, 237 of the 255 bytes are OC-192 payload. This means the resultant data rate is:
9.95328 x 255/237 = 10.70923 Gbps
13.13.4.2 10GE Packaged Into OTU2 G.709 Frame Data Rate (Nonstandard 11.0957 Gbps)
Encapsulating Ethernet data into an OTU2 G.709 frame is considered nonstandard. The goal is to add
the benefit of ITU-T G.709 encapsulation to achieve better burst error performance. However, this means
adding overhead and FEC bytes, so more bytes must be transmitted in the same amount of time, so the
data rate must increase. The new date rate is:
10.3215 x 255/237 = 11.0957 Gbps
13.13.4.3 10G FC Packaged Into OTU2 G.709 Frame Data Rate (Nonstandard 11.31764 Gbps)
Encapsulating Fibre Channel in an OTU2 frame is considered nonstandard. The rate is higher than the
10.51875 rate because OTU2 includes FEC bytes. The bits must run at a faster rate so that the payload
is provided at the standard Fibre Channel rate. The rate is:
10.51875 x 255/237 = 11.31764 Gbps
13.14 Even Band Management
With the introduction of the following cards, it is now possible to transport 72, 80, 104, or 112
wavelength channels in the same network:
• 40-WSS-CE (40-channel Wavelength Selective Switch, C-band, even channels)
• 40-DMX-CE (40-channel Demultiplexer, C-band, even channels)
By using these new cards along with the 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards (which handle 40 C-band odd
channels), the 32WSS and 32DMX cards (which handle 32 C-band odd channels), and the 32WSS-L and
32DMX-L (which handle 32 L-band odd channels), it is possible to cover 80 C-band channels (40 even
and 40 odd channels) and 32 L-band odd channels, for a maximum of 112 channels. The following
channel coverage combinations are possible:
• 72 C-band channels, using the 32WSS, 32DMX, 40-WSS-CE, and 40-DMX-CE cards
13-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Even Band Management
• 80 C-band channels, using the 40-WSS-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-WSS-CE, and 40-DMX-CE cards
• 104 channels (32 L-band odd channels and 72 C-band channels), using the 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L
cards as a set to cover 32 L-band odd channels and the 32WSS, 32DMX, 40-WSS-CE, and
40-DMX-CE cards as a set to cover 72 C-band odd and even channels
• 112 channels (32 L-band odd channels and 80 C-band even channels), using the 32WSS-L and
32DMX-L cards as a set to cover 32 L-band odd channels and the 40-WSS-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-WSS-CE, and 40-DMX-CE, cards as a set to cover 80 C-band odd and even channels
The following node topologies are available for even channel management or odd-plus-even channel
management:
• Terminal node
• Hub node
• ROADM node
• OSC regeneration and optical line amplification node
The external ONS 15216-ID-50 module is a 50 GHz/100GHz optical interleaver/deinterleaver that is
required to combine or separate odd and even C-band channels. This module increases capacity by
combining two optical data streams into a single, more densely spaced stream. The module can be used
in multiplexer mode to combine two 100-GHz optical signal streams into one 50-GHz stream, and in
demultiplexer mode to separate the 50-GHz stream into two 100-GHz streams.
The ONS 15216-SC-CL module is an external C-band and L-band splitter/combiner module that
combines and separates the C-band odd/even channels and the L-band odd channels.
An example of a 104-channel C-band plus L-band ROADM node is shown in Figure 13-44 on
page 13-59. There are 72 C-band even channels and 32 L-band odd channels. The signal flow from the
left side of the diagram to the right side is given in the following steps. The signal flow from the right
side to the left is identical.
1. All the C-band and L-band signals enter the ONS 15216-SC-CL.
2. When the signals exit the ONS 15216-SC-CL, the 72 C-band even and odd channel signals are sent
to the upper set of blocks and the 32 L-band odd channel signals are sent to the lower set of blocks.
3. The 72 C-band even and odd channel signals pass through a preamplifier, then through an
ONS 15261-ID-50 and wavelength selective switch (WSS). Only the channels to be dropped are sent
to the demultiplexer (DMX) block. There are two such sets of blocks, one set for the 32 odd C-band
channels, and one set for the 40 even C-band channels.
4. The 32 L-band odd channel signals pass through a preamplifier, then through two 32-channel
wavelength selective switch (32WSS-L) cards. Only the channels to be dropped are sent to the
32-channel demultiplexer (32DMX-L) card.
5. At the upper set of blocks, the ONS 15261-ID-50 deinterleaves the 32 C-band odd channels from
the 40 C-band even channels. The 32 C-band odd channels are routed through the top blocks (two
32WSS cards and one 32DMX card), while the 40 C-band even channels are routed through the
lower blocks (two 40-WSS-CE cards and one 40-DMX-CE card).
6. When a signal enters a 32WSS-L or 40-WSS-CE card, it is split. Part of the signal (the channels that
are to be dropped) goes to the32 DMX-L card or 40-DMX-CE card so that channels can be dropped
for use by the client equipment. The other part of the signal goes to the next 32WSS-L card or
40_DMX-CE card, where the channels can be passed through or blocked, and channels can be added
to the stream from the client equipment.
13-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Even Band Management
7. After the channels leave the last 32WSS-L card or 40-WSS-CE card, the C-band even and odd
channels are interleaved back into a single stream by the ONS 15216-ID-50 module, sent through a
booster amplifier, and then they enter the ONS 15216-SC-CL module, where they are combined with
the L-band signals from the lower set of blocks and sent out onto the optical fiber.
Figure 13-44 104-Channel C-Band plus L-Band ROADM Node
Interleaver/Deinterleaver (ONS 15216-ID-50)
Interleaver/Deinterleaver (ONS 15216-ID-50)
C-Band/L-Band Splitter/Combiner (ONS 15216-SC-CL)
40-WSS-CE
40-DMX-CE
1 40
1 40
Add Even Channels
Drop Even Channels
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
32WSS
32DMX
1 32
1 32
Add Odd Channels
Drop Odd Channels
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
32WSS
32DMX
1 . . . . . . . 32
Add Odd Channels
1 32
Drop Odd Channels
. . . . . . .
32WSS-L
32DMX-L
1 32
1 32
Add Odd Channels
Drop Odd Channels
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
32WSS-L
32DMX-L
1 . . . . . . . 32
Add Odd Channels
1 32
Drop Odd Channels
. . . . . . .
40-WSS-CE
40-DMX-CE
1 . . . . . . . 40
Add Even Channels
1 40
Drop Even Channels
. . . . . . .
Preamp
Preamp
Booster
Amplifier
Preamp
Booster
Amplifier
Booster
Amplifier
Preamp
Booster
Amplifier
C-Band/L-Band Splitter/Combiner (ONS 15216-SC-CL)
C-Band
Even and Odd
Channels
C-Band
Even and Odd
Channels
L-Band Odd
Channels
L-Band Odd
Channels
240638
13-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Even Band Management
An example of a 112-channel C-band plus L-band ROADM node is shown in Figure 13-45. It operates
in a similar manner to the 104-channel ROADM node shown in Figure 13-44 on page 13-59, except that
there are 40 odd C-band channels instead of 32.
Figure 13-45 112-Channel C-Band plus L-Band ROADM Node
Interleaver/Deinterleaver (ONS 15216-ID-50)
Interleaver/Deinterleaver (ONS 15216-ID-50)
C-Band/L-Band Splitter/Combiner (ONS 15216-SC-CL)
40-WSS-CE
40-DMX-CE
1 40
1 40
Add Even Channels
Drop Even Channels
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
40-WSS-C
40-DMX-C
1 32
1 40
Add Odd Channels
Drop Odd Channels
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
40-WSS-C
40-DMX-C
1 . . . . . . . 40
Add Odd Channels
1 40
Drop Odd Channels
. . . . . . .
32WSS-L
32DMX-L
1 32
1 32
Add Odd Channels
Drop Odd Channels
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
32WSS-L
32DMX-L
1 . . . . . . . 32
Add Odd Channels
1 32
Drop Odd Channels
. . . . . . .
40-WSS-CE
40-DMX-CE
1 . . . . . . . 40
Add Even Channels
1 40
Drop Even Channels
. . . . . . .
Preamp
Preamp
Booster
Amplifier
Preamp
Booster
Amplifier
Booster
Amplifier
Preamp
Booster
Amplifier
C-Band/L-Band Splitter/Combiner (ONS 15216-SC-CL)
C-Band
Even and Odd
Channels
C-Band
Even and Odd
Channels
L-Band Odd
Channels
L-Band Odd
Channels
240639
13-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Wavelength Drifted Channel Automatic Shutdown
13.15 Wavelength Drifted Channel Automatic Shutdown
The wavelength drifted channel automatic shutdown feature detects wavelength instability or
wavelength drift on the source port of the card connected to an MSTP multiplexer. The channel
photodiode or optical channel monitor (OCM) associated with a variable optical attenuator (VOA) is
used to detect the power fluctuation.
The wavelength drifted channel automatic shutdown feature is supported on 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C,
80-WXC-C, 40-WXC-C, and 40-WSS-C cards. The 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, and 80-WXC-C cards
have the OCM devices connected to the ADD port, which detect the power fluctuation. The 40-WSS-C
and 40-WXC-C cards do not detect the power fluctuation on their ADD ports because the Add
photodiode is located before the filtering stage. The different ports on each card detect the power
fluctuation. Table 13-3 lists the ports on which the power fluctuation is detected.
When the card exceeds the OPT-PWR-DEG-LOW threshold value 16 times in 24 hours, the
WVL-DRIFT-CHAN-OFF alarm is raised. When the WVL-DRIFT-CHAN-OFF alarm is raised, the
VOA associated to that port is moved to the automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) state, which shuts down
the channel.
For more information on the severity level of the conditions and procedure to clear the alarms, see
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
For more information on how to enable or disable this feature, see the “NTP-G315 Enable or Disable the
Wavelength Drifted Channel Automatic Shutdown Feature” procedure on page 11-452.
Table 13-3 Detection of Power Fluctuation
Card Port Circuit
40-SMR1-C
40-SMR2-C
LINE-TX ADD/DROP
EXP/PT
80-WXC-C COM/EAD/AD ADD/DROP
EXP/PT
40-WXC-C COM-TX ADD/DROP
EXP/PT
40-WSS-C CHAN-RX ADD/DROP
PT PT
13-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 13 Network Reference
Wavelength Drifted Channel Automatic Shutdown
CH A P T E R
14-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
14
Turn Up a Node
This chapter explains how to provision a single Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) node and turn it up for service, including assigning the node name, date, and
time; provisioning timing references; provisioning network attributes such as IP address and default
router; setting up users and user security; installing cards; and creating DWDM connections.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Procedures in this chapter require that you have a network plan calculated for your DWDM network with
Cisco Transport Planner, Release 9.2. Cisco Transport Planner is a DWDM planning tool that is available
from your Cisco account representative. Cisco Transport Planner prepares a shelf plan for each network
node and calculates the power and attenuation levels for the DWDM cards installed in the node. For
information about Cisco Transport Planner, contact your Cisco account representative. For instructions
on using Cisco Transport Planner, refer to the Cisco Transport Planner DWDM Operations Guide.
Note Unless otherwise specified, in this document “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI (ONS 15454) and ETSI
(ONS 15454 SDH) shelf assemblies.
Note Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) views referenced in these procedures depend on the ONS 15454 mode.
In single-shelf mode, the views are network, node, and card. In multishelf mode, the views are network,
multishelf, shelf, and card. For more information about CTC views, refer to CTC Enhancements,
Operations, and Shortcuts.
Before You Begin
This section lists the non-trouble procedures (NTPs) needed to turn up a DWDM node. Turn to an NTP
for applicable detail-level procedures (DLPs), known as tasks.
1. NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3—Complete this procedure
first.
2. NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4—Complete this procedure next.
14-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
3. NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information, page 14-6—Complete this procedure
to retrieve the software signature information and version of the digitally signed software. You can
also retrieve the public keys installed on the node using this procedure.s
4. NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8—Complete this procedure as needed.
5. NTP-G23 Create Users and Assign Security, page 14-10—Complete this procedure to create CTC
users and assign their security levels.
6. NTP-G24 Set Up Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information, page 14-13—Continue with this
procedure to set the node name, date, time, location, and contact information.
7. NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15—Continue with this procedure to set
the node battery power thresholds.
8. NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16—Continue with this procedure to provision the
IP address, default router, subnet mask, and other network configuration settings.
9. NTP-G194 Set Up EMS Secure Access to the ONS 15454, page 14-31—Continue with this
procedure to connect the CTC in secure mode.
10. NTP-G27 Set Up the ONS 15454 for Firewall Access, page 14-31—Continue with this procedure if
the ONS 15454 will be accessed behind firewalls.
11. NTP-G28 Create FTP Host, page 14-32—Continue with this procedure if to create FTP host for
ENE database backup.
12. NTP-G132 Provision OSI, page 14-35—Continue with this procedure if the ONS 15454 will be
installed in networks with third-party, Open Systems Interconnection (OSI)-based network elements
(NEs).
13. NTP-G29 Set Up SNMP, page 14-45—Complete this procedure if Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) will be used for network monitoring.
14. “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on
page 14-47—Complete this procedure to preprovision the ONS 15454 slots and install the card and
automatic node setup (ANS) parameters.
15. NTP-G328 Add, Modify, or Delete ANS Parameters, page 14-59—Complete this procedure, as
needed, to add or delete ANS parameters.
16. NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64—Complete this procedure to install the DWDM
cards, including the OSCM, OSC-CSM, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C,
80-WXC-C, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-PRE, 32MUX-O,
40-MUX-C, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 4MD-xx.x, AD-1C-xx.x,
AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x, AD-4B-xx.x, MMU, PSM, TDC-CC and TDC-FC.
17. NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68—Complete this
procedure, as needed, to install a dispersion compensating unit (DCU).
18. NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69—Complete this procedure, as needed, to install
transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G,
or OTU2_XP cards.
19. NTP-G123 Install the Filler Cards, page 14-75—Complete this procedure, as needed, to install
ONS 15454 filler cards.
20. NTP-G239 Add and Delete Passive Units, page 14-76—Complete this procedure, as needed, to add
or delete passive units.
14-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
21. NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78—Complete this
procedure, as needed, to install the fiber-optic cables on the DWDM cards.
22. NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes,
page 14-82—Complete this procedure, as needed, to connect TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP cards to DWDM cards in a terminal, hub, or
reconfigurable optical add-drop multiplexer (ROADM) node through the patch panel.
23. NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes, page 14-101—Complete this
procedure, as needed, to connect 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C cards in a mesh node to the 4-degree or
8-degree patch panel.
24. NTP-G141 Install Fiber-Optic Cables for Y-Cable Protection Modules, page 14-108—Complete
this procedure, as needed, to connect fiber-optic cables to Y-cable modules from client TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
25. NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113—Complete this procedure to
calculate the DWDM cable connections.
26. NTP-G209 Create, Edit, and Delete Optical Sides, page 14-123—Complete this procedure to create,
edit, and delete an optical side.
27. NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126—Complete this procedure next.
28. NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127—Complete this procedure next.
29. NTP-G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power, page 14-129—Complete this procedure next.
30. NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131—Complete this
procedure as needed.
31. NTP-G210 Provision Node for SNMPv3, page 14-133 —Complete this procedure if Simple
Network Management Protocol version 3(SNMPv3) will be used for network monitoring.
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files
Step 1 Verify that you have the Cisco Transport Planner reports and files shown in Table 14-1 for the node that
you will provision. The reports and files can be provided in one of the following ways:
• If you have Cisco Transport Planner, verify that you have the electronic network design plan from
which you can generate the reports in Cisco Transport Planner. For information about generating the
reports, refer to the Cisco Transport Planner DWDM Operations Guide.
• If you do not have Cisco Transport Planner, you must have printouts of all reports listed in
Table 14-1 except the Assisted Configuration Setup file. Assisted Configuration Setup is an
electronic file that will be imported into CTC. You must be able to access it from the CTC computer
used to provision the node
Purpose This procedure verifies that you have the Cisco Transport Planner reports
and files needed to turn up the node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 1, “Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454
M6 Shelf” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Retrieve or higher
14-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• If you not do not have all the reports and files listed in Table 14-1, do not continue. See your site
planner or network planner for the required information and files.
Step 2 Print Table 14-1 for reference. You will need information from the reports during node turn-up.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation
Table 14-1 Cisco Transport Planner Node Setup Information and Files
Source Format Description
Shelf layout JPG file Cisco Transport Planner provides a shelf layout showing the
cards that should be installed in each ONS 15454,
ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 slot. Cisco Transport
Planner can export each of these cards as a JPG file with a
user-defined name.
Installation Parameters Table Provides the target reference values for the variable optical
attenuators (VOAs), output power, optical thresholds, and
amplifier configuration parameters.
Internal Connections Table Identifies the patchcords that must be installed within the shelf.
NE Update
Configuration file
XML file The Cisco Transport Planner NE Update configuration file is
an electronic file with an XML extension and a name assigned
by the network designer for the network you are provisioning.
The file is imported into CTC where it preprovisions internal
patchcords, optical sides and card parameters for optical cards,
transponders, and passive units (DCUs and patch panels). It
configures the ANS parameters based on the network
calculated by Cisco Transport Planner.
Traffic Matrix Table Shows the traffic flow within the node. During node turn-up,
this report is used to identify the location of Y-cable protection
groups.
Cable list Table or list A list of cables needed to provision the node. The list can be
derived from the Internal Connections Report or from the Bill
of Materials report prepared by Cisco Transport Planner.
Purpose This procedure verifies that the Cisco ONS 15454 shelf has two TCC2/
TCC2P/TCC3 cards installed. This procedure also verifies that the Cisco
ONS 15454 M6 and the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 shelves have
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards installed. It also verifies the installation of
the AIC-I and MS-ISC-100T cards, if they are installed.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 1, “Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454
M6 Shelf” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
Required/As Needed Required
14-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Verify the following:
• TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards are installed in Slots 7 and 11 on the ONS 15454 shelf.
• Two TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards are installed in Slots 1 and 8 on the ONS 15454 M6 shelf.
• A stand-alone TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card is installed in Slot 1 on the ONS 15454 M2 shelf.
Step 2 Verify that the FAIL LED is off on both TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards.
Step 3 Verify that the green ACT (active) LED is illuminated on one
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card and that the amber STBY (standby) LED is
illuminated on the other TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
Note If the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards are not installed, or if their LEDs are
not operating as described, do not continue. Complete the “DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P,
or TCC3 Card” or “DLP-G604 Install the TNC TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card” task in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide or refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide to resolve installation problems before proceeding to Step 4.
Step 4 (On 15454-DWDM shelf) If the AIC-I card is installed, verify that it is installed in Slot 9 and that its
ACT (active) LED displays a solid green light.
Note If the AIC-I card is not installed and the card is required by the Cisco Transport Planner shelf
layout, or if it is installed and its LEDs are not operating as described, do not continue. Complete
the “DLP-G34 Install the AIC-I Card” task in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide or refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide to resolve installation
problems before proceeding to Step 5.
Step 5 Verify that the software release shown on the LCD matches the software release required for your
network. On the LCD, the software release is shown under the platform (SONET or SDH) and
date/temperature. If the release does not match, perform one of the following procedures:
• Perform a software upgrade using a ONS 15454 software CD or ONS 15454 SDH software CD.
Refer to the release-specific software upgrade document.
• On ONS 15454, replace the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards with cards containing the correct release.
• On ONS 15454 M6, replace the LCD and TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards with cards containing the
correct release.
• On ONS 15454 M2, replace the power module and TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards with cards
containing the correct release.
Step 6 (On ONS 15454 shelf) If the node will be configured as a multishelf node, verify that redundant
MS-ISC-100T cards are installed (Slots 6 and 12 are recommended) and that the green ACT (active) LED
is illuminated on both cards.
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Retrieve or higher
14-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note If the MS-ISC-100T card is not installed and the card is required by the Cisco Transport Planner
shelf layout, or if the card’s LEDs are not operating as described, do not continue. Complete the
“DLP-G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card” task in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide or refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide to resolve installation
problems before proceeding to the next procedure.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information
Note The DIS information is applicable for TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards in the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS
15454 M6 platforms.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to verify the DIS information.
Step 2 Do the following as applicable:
a. To retrieve the digitally signed software version, go to Step 3.
b. To retrieve the software signature information, go to Step 4.
c. To retrieve the public keys installed on the node, go to Step 5.
Step 3 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click Maintenance > Software
tab to retrieve the digitally signed software version. The following columns appear in the pane:
• Node—Displays the node name or IP address.
• Type—Displays the node type.
• Node Status—Displays the node status, which is based on the highest alarm level at the node.
• Working Version—Displays the working ONS node software version (the general software release
number [n.n.n] followed by the specific software release identification number). For example, 9.2.0
(09.20-X10E-02.06).
Purpose This procedure retrieves the following information on the ONS 15454 M2
and ONS 15454 M6 platforms:
• Software signature information
• Version of the digitally signed software
• Public keys installed
Note In a hybrid multi-shelf configuration involving ONS 15454 and
ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies, DIS information is available for
the ONS 15454 M6 shelf only.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation” task on page 14-4
Required/As Needed As Needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve user
14-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Protect Version—Displays the protect ONS node software version (the general software release
number [n.n.n] followed by the specific software release identification number). For example, 9.2.0
(09.20-X10E-02.06).
• Download Status—Displays the status of any in-progress network software downloads.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), click Maintenance > DIS > Info >
Retrieve Signature Information tab to retrieve signature information. The following information is
displayed in the pane:
• Attribute—The following information is displayed:
– Organization Name—Displays the owner of the software image.
– Organization Unit—Displays the business unit within Cisco.
– Serial Number—Displays the serial number of the certificate with the digital signature.
– Common Name—Displays the name of the platform.
– Hash Algorithm—Displays the hashing algorithm used.
– Image Type—Shows the type of the image-Development or Production.
– Key Version—Indicates the key version used to digitally sign the image. A key version is
identified with an alphabetical character that ranges from A to Z.
– Sign Algorithm—Refers to the RSA algorithm.
• Working Software Information—Displays the signature information of the working software.
• Protect Software Information—Displays the signature information of the protect software.
Note To refresh the signature information, click Refresh Signature Information.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click Maintenance > DIS > Available
Keys > Retrieve All Keys tabs to retrieve public key information. The following information is
displayed in the pane:
• Key Type—Displays the public key available on the system for verification:
– Release Key—Verifies release images.
– Development Key—Verifies the development images.
• Public Key Algorithm—Displays the name of the algorithm used for public key cryptography.
• Exponent—Displays the exponent of the public key algorithm—release or development keys.
• Key Version—Displays the key version used for verification.
• Modulus—Displays the modulus of the public key algorithm with a size of 2048 bits.
Note To refresh the public key information, click Refresh All Keys.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
14-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node
Caution An optical shelf in a multishelf configuration must be provisioned as the node controller shelf and not
as a subtending shelf. Otherwise, traffic will be dropped. If there are no slots available on the optical
shelf to install the MS-ISC-100T cards (needed for a node controller shelf), install and configure the
Cisco Catalyst 2950 or Cisco Catalyst 3560. See the “NTP-G302 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf
Node and Subtending Shelves to a Catalyst 2950” procedure or the “NTP-G295 Connect the ONS 15454
Multishelf Node and Subtending Shelves to a Catalyst 3560” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide. If you are using an ONS 15454 M6, then refer to the applicable procedure
for connecting the ONS 15454 M6 as the node controller in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node that you want to configure as a multishelf node.
Step 2 If you want to set up the login node as the node controller, complete the following steps. If not, continue
with Step 3.
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
General > Multishelf Config tabs.
b. Click Enable as Node Controller.
Purpose This procedure provisions a multishelf node from CTC. A multishelf node
consists of a control node and subtending shelves that are configured to
operate as a single node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
• Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide:
– “NTP-G301 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and
Subtending Shelves to an MS-ISC-100T Card”
– “NTP-G302 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and
Subtending Shelves to a Catalyst 2950”
– “NTP-G295 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and
Subtending Shelves to a Catalyst 3560”
– “NTP-G296 Upgrade the ONS 15454 Multishelf with MS-ISC
Card Configuration Using the Catalyst 3560”
– “NTP-G297 Upgrade the ONS 15454 Multishelf with Catalyst
2950 Configuration Using the Catalyst 3560”
– “NTP-G308 Connect the ONS 15454 M6 Multishelf Node and the
ONS 15454 M6 Subtending Shelves”
– “NTP-G309 Connect the ONS 15454 M6 and the ONS 15454 in a
Mixed Multishelf Configuration”
– NTP-G310 Upgrade the ONS 15454 Multishelf Configuration
using the ONS 15454 M6
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
c. From the LAN Config drop-down list, complete one of the following:
• Choose Ethernet Switch if MS-ISC-100T cards or the Catalyst 2950 or the Catalyst 3560
switches are already installed and configured. Choose the public VLAN ID and private VLAN
ID for the ONS 15454 multishelf node. In case of an ONS 15454 M6, the public VLAN ID and
private VLAN ID are static (1 and 2 respectively).
Note Public VLAN ID is used by the node controller to communicate with the external network.
Private VLAN ID is used by the node controller to communicate with the subtending shelves.
Note If the ONS 15454 M6 shelf is used as the node controller, then you can connect the subtending
shelves directly to the MSM ports on the ECU. However, a Catalyst 3560 switch can also be used
along with the ONS 15454 M6 node controller to extend the number of subtending shelves.
• Choose Stand-Alone if MS-ISC-100T cards are not installed yet but will be included in the final
layout. This option will allow a safe migration of the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card database when the multishelf configuration
is complete.
d. Click Apply.
e. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to allow the node to reboot. The CTC view changes to
network view and the node icon changes to gray. Wait for the reboot to finish. (This might take
several minutes.)
f. After the node reboots, double-click the node. The multishelf view appears.
Note The shelf ID of the node controller is automatically assigned as 1.
Step 3 If you want to add a node as a subtending shelf (either ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 M6) in the multishelf
configuration, complete the following steps. If not, you have completed this procedure.
Note A Cisco ONS 15454 node configured with TCC2P and TCC3 cards must not be added to a multishelf
configuration containing either of the following configurations:
• Cisco ONS 15454 node with TCC3 as the node controller
• Cisco ONS 15454 M6 node with TNC as the node controller
a. In multishelf view, right-click the white space in the rack and choose Add Shelf from the shortcut
menu.
b. Select the type of subtending shelf (ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 M6).
c. In the Shelf ID Selection dialog box, choose a shelf ID (from 2 to 30) from the drop-down list.
d. Click OK. The shelf appears in multishelf view.
e. Disconnect the cross-over (CAT-5) LAN cable from the RJ-45 LAN (TCP/IP) port of the
ONS 15454 subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 11 or Slot 7, or from the EMS RJ-45
LAN (TCP/IP) on the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf that correspond to the
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
14-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
f. Connect your Windows PC or Solaris workstation network interface card (NIC) to the RJ-45 LAN
(TCP/IP) port on the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 11 or Slot 7, or to the EMS RJ-45 LAN
(TCP/IP) on the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf that correspond to the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
card.
g. Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the subtending shelf.
h. Click the Provisioning > General > Multishelf Config tabs.
i. Click Enable as Subtended Shelf.
j. From the Shelf ID drop-down list, choose the shelf ID that you created in Step c.
k. Click Apply.
l. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to reboot the shelf. The CTC view changes to network view
and the node icon changes to gray. Wait for the reboot to finish. (This might take several minutes.)
m. Disconnect your Windows PC or Solaris workstation NIC from the RJ-45 LAN (TCP/IP) port of the
ONS 15454 subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 11 or Slot 7, or from the EMS RJ-45
LAN (TCP/IP) on the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf that correspond to the
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
n. Reconnect the cross-over (CAT-5) LAN cable (disconnected in Step e) to the RJ-45 LAN (TCP/IP)
port of the subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 11 or Slot 7, or to the EMS RJ-45 LAN
(TCP/IP) on the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf that correspond to the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
card.
o. Repeat Steps a through n to set up additional subtending shelves.
Note To connect the subtending shelves to the node controller, refer to the applicable procedures in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
Note Non-LAN connected Multishelf nodes are not manageable from CTC unless SOCKS Proxy is enabled
on the node.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G23 Create Users and Assign Security
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you need to create users. If you are already
logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This procedure creates ONS 15454 users and assigns their security levels.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note You must log in as a Superuser to create additional users. The CISCO15 user provided with each
ONS 15454 can be used to set up other ONS 15454 users. You can add up to 500 users to one
ONS 15454.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G54 Create a New User on a Single Node” task on page 14-11 or the “DLP-G55
Create a New User on Multiple Nodes” task on page 14-12 as needed.
Note You must add the same user name and password to each node that a user will access.
Step 3 If you want to modify the security policy settings, including password aging and idle user timeout
policies, complete the NTP-G88 Modify Users and Change Security procedure.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G54 Create a New User on a Single Node
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Security > Users tabs.
Step 2 In the Users window, click Create.
Step 3 In the Create User dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type the user name. The name must be a minimum of six and a maximum of
20 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. For Transaction Language One (TL1) compatibility, the
user name must be 6 to 10 characters.
• Password—Type the user password. The password length, by default, is set to a minimum of six and
a maximum of 20 characters. You can configure the default values in node view using the
Provisioning > NE Defaults > Node > security > passwordComplexity tabs. The minimum length
can be set to eight, ten or twelve characters, and the maximum length to 80 characters. The password
must be a combination of alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) and special (+, #,%) characters, where at
least two characters are not alphabetic and at least one character is a special character. For TL1
compatibility, the password must be six to ten characters.
Note The password must not contain the user name.
• Confirm Password—Type the password again to confirm it.
Purpose This task creates a new user for one ONS 15454.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Security Level—Choose a security level for the user: RETRIEVE, MAINTENANCE,
PROVISIONING, or SUPERUSER.
Note Each security level has a different idle time. The idle time is the length of time that CTC can
remain idle before the password must be reentered. The defaults are: Retrieve user = unlimited,
Maintenance user = 60 minutes, Provisioning user = 30 minutes, and Superuser = 15 minutes.
To change the idle times, see the NTP-G88 Modify Users and Change Security procedure.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G55 Create a New User on Multiple Nodes
Note All nodes where you want to add users must be accessible in network view.
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Security > Users tabs.
Step 3 In the Users window, click Create.
Step 4 In the Create User dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type the user name. The name must be a minimum of six and a maximum of
20 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. For TL1 compatibility, the user name must be
6 to 10 characters.
• Password—Type the user password. The password length, by default, is set to a minimum of six and
a maximum of 20 characters. You can configure the default values in node view through
Provisioning > NE Defaults > Node > security > passwordComplexity. The minimum length can be
set to eight, ten or twelve characters, and the maximum length to 80 characters. The password must
be a combination of alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) and special (+, #,%) characters, where at least two
characters are not alphabetic and at least one character is a special character. For TL1 compatibility,
the password must be six to ten characters. The password must not contain the user name.
• Confirm Password—Type the password again to confirm it.
• Security Level—Choose a security level for the user: RETRIEVE, MAINTENANCE,
PROVISIONING, or SUPERUSER.
Purpose This task adds a new user to multiple ONS 15454 nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note Each security level has a different idle time. The idle time is the length of time that CTC can
remain idle before it locks up and the password must be reentered. The defaults are: Retrieve
user = unlimited, Maintenance user = 60 minutes, Provisioning user = 30 minutes, and
Superuser = 15 minutes. To change the idle times, refer to the NTP-G88 Modify Users and
Change Security procedure.
Step 5 In the Select Applicable Nodes area, deselect any nodes where you do not want to add the user (all
network nodes are selected by default).
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 In the User Creation Results dialog box, verify that the user was added to all the nodes chosen in Step 5.
If not, click OK and repeat Steps 2 through 6. If the user was added to all nodes, click OK and continue
with the next step.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G24 Set Up Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task for the node you will turn up. If you are already logged in,
continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
General > General tabs.
Step 3 In the Node Name/TID field, type a name for the node. For TL1 compliance, names must begin with an
alpha character and have no more than 20 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
Note To avoid errors when you import the Cisco Transport Planner configuration file using the
“NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on
page 14-47, the CTC node name and the Cisco Transport Planner site name should be the same
(or at least easy to identify).
Step 4 (Optional) In the Contact field, type the name of the node contact person and the phone number, up to
255 characters.
Step 5 (Optional) In the Latitude field, enter the node latitude: N (north) or S (south), degrees, and minutes.
Step 6 (Optional) In the Longitude field, enter the node longitude: E (east) or W (west), degrees, and minutes.
Purpose This procedure provisions identification information for the node,
including the node name, a contact name and phone number, the location
of the node, and the date, time, and time zone.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note The latitude and longitude values only indicate the geographical position of the nodes in the
actual network and not the CTC node position.
Step 7 (Optional) In the Description field, type a description of the node. The description can be a maximum
of 255 characters.
Step 8 (Optional) Check the Use NTP/SNTP Server check box if you want CTC to use a Network Time Protocol
(NTP) or Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server to set the date and time of the node. Using an
NTP or SNTP server ensures that all ONS 15454 network nodes use the same date and time reference.
The server synchronizes the node’s time after power outages or software upgrades.
a. If you check the Use NTP/SNTP Server check box, complete the following fields:
– Use NTP/SNTP Server—Type the IP address of the primary NTP/SNTP server connected to the
ONS 15454 or of another ONS 15454/15600/15310-CL/15310-MA as GNE with NTP/SNTP
enabled that is connected to the ONS 15454 ENE.
– Backup NTP/SNTP Server—Type the IP address of the secondary NTP/SNTP server connected
to the ONS 15454 or of another ONS 15454/15600/15310-CL/15310-MA as GNE with
NTP/SNTP enabled that is connected to the ONS 15454 ENE.
When the primary NTP/SNTP server fails or is not reachable, the node uses the secondary
NTP/SNTP server to synchronize its date and time. If both the primary and secondary
NTP/SNTP servers fail or are not reachable, an SNTP-FAIL alarm is raised. The node checks
for the availability of the primary or secondary NTP/SNTP server at regular intervals until it can
get the time from any one of the NTP/SNTP servers. After the node gets the time from any one
server, it synchronizes its date and time with the server’s date and time and the SNTP-FAIL
alarm is cleared. For each retry and resynchronization, the node checks the availability of the
primary NTP/SNTP server first, followed by the secondary NTP/SNTP server. The node
synchronizes its date and time every hour.
Note You will not be able to identify which NTP/SNTP server is being used for
synchronization.
Note If you plan to check gateway network element (GNE) for the ONS 15454 SOCKS proxy
server (see “DLP-G56 Provision IP Settings” task on page 14-17), external ONS 15454
nodes must reference the gateway ONS 15454 for NTP/SNTP timing. For more information
about the ONS 15454 gateway settings, refer to Chapter 22, “Management Network
Connectivity.”
Caution If you reference another ONS 15454 for the NTP/SNTP server, make sure that the second ONS 15454
references an NTP/SNTP server and not the first ONS 15454 (that is, do not create an NTP/SNTP timing
loop by having two ONS 15454 nodes reference each other).
b. If you do not check Use SNTP/NTP Server, complete the Date and Time fields. The ONS 15454 will
use these fields for alarm dates and times. By default, CTC displays all alarms in the CTC computer
time zone for consistency. To change the display to the node time zone, complete the DLP-G118
Display Alarms and Conditions Using Time Zone task.
14-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Date—Type the current date in the format m/d/yyyy, for example, September 24, 2002 is
9/24/2002.
• Time—Type the current time in the format hh:mm:ss, for example, 11:24:58. The ONS 15454
uses a 24-hour clock, so 10:00 PM is entered as 22:00:00.
Step 9 Click the Time Zone field and choose a city within your time zone from the drop-down list. The list
displays the 80 World Time Zones from –11 through 0 (GMT) to +14. Continental United States time
zones are GMT-05:00 (Eastern), GMT-06:00 (Central), GMT-07:00 (Mountain), and GMT-08:00
(Pacific).
Step 10 Check the Use Daylight Savings Time check box if the time zone that you chose uses Daylight Savings
Time.
Note The Insert AIS-V on STS-1 SD-P and SD-P BER field are not used in DWDM networks.
Step 11 Click Apply.
Step 12 In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
Step 13 Review the node information. If you need to make corrections, repeat Steps 3 through 12 to enter the
corrections. If the information is correct, continue with the “NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor
Thresholds” procedure on page 14-15.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds
Caution The default battery power thresholds are normally not changed. Threshold changes should only be
performed at the direction of your site administrator.
Note When the thresholds are crossed, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card generates
warning alarms in CTC. For ONS 15454 power specifications, see the Hardware Specifications.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task for the node that you will set up. If you are already logged
in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > General >
Power Monitor tabs.
Purpose This procedure provisions extreme high, low, and extreme low input
battery power thresholds within a –48 VDC environment.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note In multishelf mode, power monitor thresholds must be provisioned separately for each shelf
within the multishelf including the node controller and all subtending shelves.
Step 3 To change the extreme low battery voltage threshold in 0.5 VDC increments, choose a voltage from the
ELWBATVGVdc drop-down list.
Step 4 To change the low battery voltage threshold in 0.5 VDC increments, choose a voltage from the
LWBATVGVdc drop-down list.
Step 5 To change the high battery voltage threshold in 0.5 VDC increments, choose a voltage from the
HIBATVGVdc drop-down list.
Step 6 To change the extreme high battery voltage threshold in 0.5 VDC increments, choose a voltage from the
EHIBATVGVdc drop-down list.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G56 Provision IP Settings” task on page 14-17 to provision the ONS 15454 IP
address, subnet mask, default router, DHCP server, IIOP listener port, and SOCKS proxy server settings.
Tip If you cannot log into the node, you can change its IP address, default router, and network mask
by using the LCD on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly (unless LCD provisioning is
suppressed). See the “DLP-G57 Set the IP Address, Default Router, and Network Mask Using
the LCD” task on page 14-22 for instructions. However, you cannot use the LCD to provision
any other network settings. In an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, the LCD is on the fan-tray
assembly. In an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, the LCD is a separate unit installed above the
external connection unit (ECU).
Purpose This procedure provisions network access for a node, including its subnet
mask, default router, Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
server, Internet Inter-Orb Protocol (IIOP) listener port, gateway settings,
static routes, Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol, Routing
Information Protocol (RIP), and designated SOCKS servers.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note When accessing CTC from a machine running Windows XP operating system, CTC may sometimes fail
to reconnect to a GNE when the GNE proxies for several ENE nodes (approximately 15 ENE nodes).
This can happen when there is a side switch or when the LAN is enabled/disabled. This is due to the
Windows XP operating system limiting the number of simultaneous TCP/IP connection attempts. As a
workaround, close the existing CTC session and relaunch CTC on the GNE node. You can configure a
designated socks server list on the CTC to mitigate the problem.
Step 3 If TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards are installed and you want to turn on the ONS 15454
secure mode, which allows two IP addresses to be provisioned for the node, complete the “DLP-G264
Enable Node Security Mode” task on page 14-24. Secure mode is not available if TCC2 cards are
installed.
Step 4 If static routes are needed, complete the “DLP-G58 Create a Static Route” task on page 14-26. For more
information about static routes, refer to Chapter 22, “Management Network Connectivity.”
Step 5 If the ONS 15454 is connected to a LAN or WAN that uses OSPF and you want to share routing
information between the LAN or WAN and the ONS network, complete the “DLP-G59 Set Up or Change
Open Shortest Path First Protocol” task on page 14-27.
Step 6 If the ONS 15454 is connected to a LAN or WAN that uses RIP, complete the “DLP-G60 Set Up or
Change Routing Information Protocol” task on page 14-30.
Step 7 Complete the “DLP-G439 Provision the Designated SOCKS Servers” task on page 14-21 after the
network is provisioned and one or more of the following conditions exist:
• SOCKS proxy is enabled.
• The ratio of ENEs to GNEs is greater than eight to one.
• Most ENEs do not have LAN connectivity.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G56 Provision IP Settings
Caution All network changes should be approved by your network (or LAN) administrator.
Caution Verify that the IPv4 or IPv6 addresses assigned to the node are unique in the network. Duplicate IP
addresses in the same network cause loss of visibility.
Purpose This task provisions IP settings, which includes the IP address, IP address
version, default router, DHCP access, firewall access, and SOCKS proxy
server settings for an ONS 15454 node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Network > General tabs.
Step 2 Complete the following information in the fields listed:
• IP Address—Type the IP address assigned to the ONS 15454 node.
Note If TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards are installed, dual IP addressing is available
using the secure mode. When secure mode is off (sometimes called repeater mode), the IP
address entered in the IP Address field applies to the backplane LAN port (ONS 15454),
EMS RJ-45 port or Craft port on the ECU (ONS 15454 M6), EMS RJ-45 port on the power
module (ONS 15454 M2), and the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE TCP/IP (LAN)
port. When secure mode is on, the IP Address field shows the address assigned to the
TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE TCP/IP (LAN) port and the Superuser can enable or
disable display of the backplane IP address. See the “DLP-G264 Enable Node Security
Mode” task on page 14-24 as needed. Refer to Chapter 22, “Management Network
Connectivity,” for more information about secure mode.
• Net/Subnet Mask Length—Type the subnet mask length (decimal number representing the subnet
mask length in bits) or click the arrows to adjust the subnet mask length. The subnet mask length is
the same for all ONS 15454 nodes in the same subnet.
• MAC Address—(Display only) Displays the ONS 15454 IEEE 802 MAC address.
Note In secure mode, the front and back TCP/IP (LAN) ports are assigned different MAC
addresses, and the backplane information can be hidden or revealed by a Superuser.
• Default Router—If the ONS 15454 is connected to a LAN, enter the IP address of the default router.
The default router forwards packets to network devices that the ONS 15454 cannot directly access.
This field is ignored if any of the following are true:
– The ONS 15454 is not connected to a LAN.
– The SOCKS proxy server is enabled and the ONS 15454 is provisioned as an end network
element (ENE).
– OSPF is enabled on both the ONS 15454 and the LAN where the ONS 15454 is connected.
(OSPF is provisioned in the “DLP-G59 Set Up or Change Open Shortest Path First Protocol”
task on page 14-27.)
• LCD IP Setting—Choose one of the following:
– Allow Configuration—Displays the node IP address on the LCD and allows users to change
the IP settings using the LCD. This option enables the “DLP-G57 Set the IP Address, Default
Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD” task on page 14-22.
– Display Only—Displays the node IP address on the LCD but does not allow users to change the
IP settings using the LCD.
– Suppress Display—Suppresses the node IP address display on the LCD.
• Suppress CTC IP Display—Check this check box if you want to prevent the node IP address from
appearing in CTC to users with Provisioning, Maintenance, or Retrieve security levels. (The IP
address suppression is not applied to users with Superuser security level.)
14-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note IP address suppression is not applied to users with Superuser security level. However, in
secure mode the backplane IP address visibility can be restricted to only a locally connected
Superuser viewing the routing table. In this case, the backplane IP address is not revealed to
any user at any other NE, either on the routing table or in autonomous messages (such as the
TL1 REPT DBCHG message, alarms, and performance monitoring [PM] reporting).
• IPv6 Configuration—Allows provisioning of IPv6 addresses. After you provision an IPv6 address,
you can access the device using the IPv6 address. Configure these settings only if you want to enable
IPv6 on the node. IPv6 cannot be configured using the LCD push buttons.
– Enable IPv6—Select this check box to assign an IPv6 address to the node. The IPv6 Address,
Prefix Length, and IPv6 Default Router fields are enabled only if this check box is selected. The
check box is disabled by default.
Note Enable SOCKS Proxy on Port check box is enabled when you enable IPv6 and can be disabled
only when IPv6 is disabled.
Note By default, when IPv6 is enabled, the node processes both IPv4 and IPv6 packets on the
LAN interface. If you want the node to process only IPv6 packets, you need to disable IPv4
on the node. For more information, see DLP-G317 Change Node Access and PM Clearing
Privilege.
– IPv6 Address—Enter the IPv6 address that you want to assign to the node. This IP address is
the global unicast IPv6 address. This field is disabled if the Enable IPv6 check box is not
selected.
– Prefix Length—Enter the prefix length of the IPv6 address. This field is disabled if the Enable
IPv6 check box is not selected.
– IPv6 Default Router—Enter the IPv6 address of the default router of the IPv6 NE. This is
optional. This field is disabled if the Enable IPv6 check box is not selected.
Note The ONS 15454 DWDM uses NAT-PT internally to support native IPv6. NAT-PT uses the
IPv4 address range 128.0.0.0 to 128.0.1.254 for packet translation. Do not use this address
range when you enable IPv6 feature.
Note You can provision IPv6 in secure or nonsecure mode. To enable secure mode, see
“DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode” task on page 14-24.
• Forward DHCP Request To—Check this check box to enable DHCP. Also, enter the DHCP server
IP address in the Request To field. Unchecked is the default. If you will enable any of the gateway
settings to implement the ONS 15454 SOCKS proxy server features, do not check this check box.
Note If you enable DHCP, computers connected to an ONS 15454 node can obtain temporary IP
addresses from an external DHCP server. The ONS 15454 only forwards DHCP requests; it
does not act as a DHCP server.
14-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Gateway Settings—Provisions the ONS 15454 SOCKS proxy server features. (SOCKS is a standard
proxy protocol for IP-based applications.) Do not change these options until you review Scenario 7
“Provisioning the ONS 15454 Proxy Server” in Chapter 22, “Management Network Connectivity.”
In SOCKS proxy server networks, the ONS 15454 is either an ENE, a GNE, or a proxy-only server.
Provisioning must be consistent for each NE type.
• Enable SOCKS proxy server on port—If checked, the ONS 15454 serves as a proxy for connections
between CTC clients and ONS 15454 nodes that are connected by data communications channels
(DCCs) to the proxy ONS 15454. The CTC client establishes connections to DCC-connected nodes
through the proxy node. The CTC client does not require IP connectivity to the DCC-connected
nodes; it only requires IP connectivity to the proxy ONS 15454. If the Enable SOCKS proxy server
on port check box is unchecked, the node does not proxy for any CTC clients. When this box is
checked, you can provision one of the following options:
– External Network Element (ENE)—Choose this option when the ONS 15454 is not connected
to a LAN but has DCC connections to other ONS nodes. A CTC computer connected to the ENE
through the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card TCP/IP (craft) port can manage
nodes that have DCC connections to the ENE. However, the CTC computer does not have direct
IP connectivity to these nodes or to any LAN or WAN that those nodes might be connected to.
– Gateway Network Element (GNE)—Choose this option when the ONS 15454 is connected to
a LAN and has DCC connections to other nodes. A CTC computer connected to the LAN can
manage all nodes that have DCC connections to the GNE, but the CTC computer does not have
direct IP connectivity to them. The GNE option isolates the LAN from the DCC network so that
IP traffic originating from the DCC-connected nodes and any CTC computers connected to
them is prevented from reaching the LAN.
– SOCKS proxy only—Choose this option when the ONS 15454 is connected to a LAN and the
LAN is separated from the node by a firewall. The SOCKS proxy only option is the same as the
GNE option, except that the SOCKS proxy only option does not isolate the DCC network from
the LAN.
Note If a node is provisioned in secure mode, it is automatically provisioned as a GNE with SOCKS
proxy enabled. However, this provisioning can be overridden, and the secure node can be
changed to an ENE. In secure mode, SOCKS cannot be disabled. For information about
provisioning, including GNE and ENE status, see the “DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode”
task on page 14-24.
Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
The TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards reboot one at a time if changes were made to
the IP address, subnet mask, or gateway settings. During this time (approximately 5 to 6 minutes), the
active and standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card LEDs will blink, turn on, and turn
off at different intervals. Eventually, a “Lost node connection, switching to network view” message
appears.
Step 5 Click OK. The network view appears. The node icon appears in gray, during which time you cannot
access the node.
Step 6 Double-click the node icon when it becomes green.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
14-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G439 Provision the Designated SOCKS Servers
Note To complete this task, you must have either the IP addresses or DNS names of all ONS 15454s in the
network with LAN access that have SOCKS proxy enabled.
Note SOCKS proxy servers can be any accessible ONS network nodes that have LAN access, including the
ONS 15310-MA, ONS 15310-CL, ONS 15454, ONS 15454 SDH, ONS 15600, ONS 15600 SDH, ONS
15454 M6, and ONS 15454 M2 nodes.
Note You must repeat this task any time that changes to SOCKS proxy server nodes occur, for example,
whenever LAN connectivity is added to or removed from a node, or when nodes are added or removed
from the network.
Note If you cannot log into a network node, complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task choosing the Disable
Network Discovery option. Complete this task, then login again with network discovery enabled.
Step 1 From the CTC Edit menu, choose Preferences.
Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, click the SOCKS tab.
Step 3 In the Designated SOCKS Server field, type the IP address or DNS node name of the first ONS 15454
SOCKS server. The ONS 15454 that you enter must have SOCKS proxy server enabled, and it must have
LAN access.
Step 4 Click Add. The node is added to the SOCKS server list. If you need to remove a node on the list, click
Remove.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to add all qualified ONS 15454s within the network. Add all ONS nodes that have
SOCKS proxy enabled and are connected to the LAN.
Step 6 Click Check All Servers. CTC verifies that all nodes can perform as SOCKS servers. Once verified, a
check is placed next to the node IP address or node name in the SOCKS server list. An X placed next to
the node indicates one or more of the following:
Purpose This task identifies the ONS 15454 SOCKS servers in
SOCKS-proxy-enabled networks. Identifying the SOCKS servers reduces
the amount of time required to log into a node and have all NEs appear in
network view (NE discovery time). The task is recommended when the
combined CTC login and NE discovery time is greater than five minutes in
networks with SOCKS proxy enabled. Long (or failed) login and NE
discovery times can occur in networks that have a high ENE-to-GNE ratio
and a low number of ENEs with LAN connectivity.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• The entry does not correspond to a valid DNS name.
• The numeric IP address is invalid.
• The node cannot be reached.
• The node can be reached, but the SOCKS port cannot be accessed, for example, a firewall problem
might exist.
Step 7 Click Apply. The list of ONS 15454 nodes, including ones that received an X in Step 6, are added as
SOCKS servers.
Step 8 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog box.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G57 Set the IP Address, Default Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD
Note You cannot perform this task if the LCD IP Display field on the node view Provisioning > Network tab
is set to Display Only or Suppress Display. See the “DLP-G56 Provision IP Settings” task on page 14-17
to view or change the LCD IP Display field. If the node is locked in secure mode with the LCD display
disabled, you will not be able to change this provisioning unless the lock is disabled by Cisco Technical
Support. Refer to Chapter 22, “Management Network Connectivity,” for more information about secure
mode.
Note The LCD reverts to normal display mode after 5 seconds of button inactivity.
Step 1 On the ONS 15454 front panel, repeatedly press the Slot button until SHELF appears on the first line of
the LCD. You are in the Shelf menu.
Note In an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, the LCD panel and the Slot, Port, and Status buttons are present
on the fan-tray assembly. In an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, the LCD is a separate unit installed above
the external connection unit (ECU); the Slot, Port, and Status buttons are present on the LCD unit.
Step 2 Repeatedly press the Port button until the following information appears:
Purpose This task changes the ONS 15454 IP address, default router, and network
mask using the LCD on the fan-tray assembly. Use this task if you cannot
log into CTC. In an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, the LCD is on the
fan-tray assembly. In an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, the LCD is a
separate unit installed above the external connection unit (ECU).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card” in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
14-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• To change the node IP address, Node Status=IpAddress (Figure 14-1)
• To change the node network mask, Node Status=Net Mask
• To change the default router IP address, Node Status=Default Rtr
Figure 14-1 Selecting the IP Address Option—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly
Step 3 Press the Status button to display the node IP address (Figure 14-2), the node subnet mask length, or the
default router IP address.
Figure 14-2 Changing the IP Address—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly
Step 4 Push the Slot button to move to the digit of the IP address, subnet mask, or default router that you want
to change. The selected digit flashes.
Tip The Slot, Status, and Port button positions correspond to the positions of the commands shown
on the LCD. For example, in Figure 14-2, you press the Slot button to invoke the Next command
and the Status button to invoke the Done command.
Step 5 Press the Port button to cycle the IP address, subnet mask, or default router to the correct digit.
Step 6 When the change is complete, press the Status button to return to the relevant Node Status menu.
Step 7 Repeatedly press the Port button until the Shelf Save Configuration option appears (Figure 14-3).
Figure 14-3 Selecting the Save Configuration Option—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly
Step 8 Press the Status button to choose the Save Configuration option.
A Save and REBOOT message appears (Figure 14-4).
FAN FAIL
Slot
Node
Status=IpAddress
151562
CRIT MAJ MIN
Status Port
FAN FAIL
Slot
172.020.214.107
44090
CRIT MAJ MIN
Status Port
FAN FAIL
Slot
Shelf
Status=Save Cfg.
151563
CRIT MAJ MIN
Status Port
14-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 14-4 Saving and Rebooting the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly
Step 9 Press the Slot button to apply the new IP address, subnet mask, or default router configuration or press
Port to cancel the configuration.
Note The IP address and default router must be on the same subnet. If not, you cannot apply the
configuration.
Step 10 Saving the new configuration causes the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards to reboot.
During the reboot, a “TCC may Reset” message appears on the LCD. The LCD returns to the normal
alternating display after both TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards finish rebooting.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode
Note This task requires TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards. The security mode options described in
this task will not appear in CTC if TCC2 cards are installed.
Caution The IP address assigned to the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE TCP/IP (LAN) port must reside
on a different subnet from the backplane LAN port (ONS 15454) and the EMS port (ONS 15454 M2 and
M6). Verify that the new TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE IP address meets this requirement.
FAN FAIL
Slot
Save and REBOOT?
44092
CRIT MAJ MIN
Status Port
Purpose This task enables the security mode. When security mode is enabled, two
IP addresses are assigned to the node. One address is assigned to the
backplane LAN port (ONS 15454) or to the EMS port (ONS 15454 M2 and
M6). The other address is assigned to the
TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE RJ-45 TCP/IP (LAN) port. The
TCC2 card does not support security mode.
Tools/Equipment TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards must be installed.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
DLP-G46 Log into CTC task
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note The node will reboot after you complete this task, causing a temporary disconnection between the CTC
computer and the node.
Note If an OTS-to-OTS PPC is created between nodes, it will no longer function if the node Security Mode is
enabled (see DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode, page 14-24). The reason for this is that if the
Secure mode is enabled, it is no longer possible for the DCN extension feature to use the LAN interface
to extend the internal network (due to the network isolation in this configuration mode). The result is
that the topology discovery on the OTS-to-OTS PPC no longer operates.
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > Security > Data Comm tabs.
Step 2 Click Change Mode.
Step 3 Review the information on the Change Secure Mode page, then click Next.
Step 4 On the TCC Ethernet Port page, enter the IP address and subnet mask for the
TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE TCP/IP (LAN) port. The IP address cannot reside on the same
subnet as the backplane LAN port (ONS 15454) and the EMS port (ONS 15454 M2 and M6).
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 If needed, on the Backplane Ethernet Port page, modify the backplane IP address, subnet mask, and
default router. (You normally do not modify these fields if no network changes have occurred.)
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 On the SOCKS Proxy Server Settings page, choose one of the following options:
• External Network Element (ENE)—If selected, the CTC computer is only visible to the
ONS 15454 where the CTC computer is connected. The CTC computer is not visible to the nodes
connected to the DCC. In addition, firewall is enabled, which means that the node prevents IP traffic
from being routed between the DCC and the LAN port.
• Gateway Network Element (GNE)—If selected, the CTC computer is visible to other
DCC-connected nodes. The node prevents IP traffic from being routed between the DCC and the
LAN port.
Note The SOCKS proxy server is automatically enabled when you enable secure mode.
Step 9 Click Finish.
Within the next 30 to 40 seconds, the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards reboot. CTC switches
to network view, and the CTC Alerts dialog box appears. In network view, the node changes to gray and
a DISCONNECTED condition appears in the Alarms tab.
Step 10 In the CTC Alerts dialog box, click Close. Wait for the reboot to finish. (This might take several
minutes.)
Step 11 After the DISCONNECTED condition clears, complete the following steps to suppress the backplane IP
address from appearing in CTC and the LCD. If you do not want to suppress the backplane IP address
display, continue with Step 12.
a. Display the node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
b. Click the Provisioning > Security > Data Comm tabs.
14-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
c. In the LCD IP Setting field, choose Suppress Display. The IP address will not appear on the
ONS 15454 LCD.
d. Check the Suppress CTC IP Address check box. The IP address will not appear in the CTC
information area or the Provisioning > Security > Data Comm tabs.
e. Click Apply.
Note After you turn on secure mode, the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE IP address becomes
the node IP address.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G58 Create a Static Route
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Network tabs.
Step 2 Click the Static Routing tab. Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Static Route dialog box, enter the following:
• Destination—Enter the IP address of the computer running CTC. To limit access to one computer,
enter the full IP address and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255. To allow access to all computers on
the 192.168.1.0 subnet, enter 192.168.1.0 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. You can enter a
destination of 0.0.0.0 to allow access to all CTC computers that connect to the router.
Purpose This task creates a static route to establish CTC connectivity to a computer
on another network. This task is performed when one of the following
conditions exists:
• CTC computers on one subnet need to connect to ONS 15454 nodes
that are connected by a router to ONS 15454 nodes residing on another
subnet.
• OSPF is not enabled (the OSPF Active on LAN check box is not
checked on the Provisioning > Network > OSPF tab) and the External
Network Element (ENE) gateway setting is not checked.
• You need to enable multiple CTC sessions among ONS 15454 nodes
residing on the same subnet and the External Network Element (ENE)
gateway setting is not checked.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Mask—Enter a subnet mask. If the destination is a host route (that is, one CTC computer), enter a
32-bit subnet mask (255.255.255.255). If the destination is a subnet, adjust the subnet mask
accordingly, for example, 255.255.255.0. If the destination is 0.0.0.0, CTC automatically enters a
subnet mask of 0.0.0.0 to provide access to all CTC computers. You cannot change this value.
• Next Hop—Enter the IP address of the router port or the node IP address if the CTC computer is
connected to the node directly.
• Cost—Enter the number of hops between the ONS 15454 and the computer.
Step 4 Click OK. Verify that the static route appears in the Static Route window.
Note Static route networking examples are provided in the Chapter 22, “Management Network
Connectivity.”
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G59 Set Up or Change Open Shortest Path First Protocol
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Network > OSPF tabs.
Step 2 On the top left side of the OSPF area, complete the following:
• DCC/GCC OSPF Area ID Table—In dotted decimal format, enter the number that identifies the
ONS 15454 nodes as a unique OSPF area ID. The Area ID can be any number between
000.000.000.000 and 255.255.255.255, but must be unique to the LAN OSPF area.
ANSI Nodes
• SDCC Metric—This value is normally unchanged. It sets a cost for sending packets across the
Section DCC, which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. This value should always
be higher than the LAN metric. The default SDCC metric is 100.
• LDCC Metric—Sets a cost for sending packets across the Line DCC. This value should always be
lower than the SDCC metric. The default LDCC metric is 33. It is usually not changed.
ETSI Nodes
Purpose This task enables the OSPF routing protocol on the ONS 15454. Perform
this task if you want to include the ONS 15454 in OSPF-enabled networks.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
You will need the OSPF Area ID, Hello and Dead intervals, and
authentication key (if OSPF authentication is enabled) provisioned on the
router to which the ONS 15454 is connected.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• RS-DCC Metric—This value is normally unchanged. It sets a cost for sending packets across the
regenerator section DCC (RS-DCC), which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path.
This value should always be higher than the LAN metric. The default RS-DCC metric is 100.
• MS-DCC Metric—Sets a cost for sending packets across the multiplex section DCC (MS-DCC).
This value should always be lower than the SDCC metric. The default MS-DCC metric is 33. It is
usually not changed.
Step 3 In the OSPF on LAN area, complete the following:
• OSPF active on LAN—When checked, enables the ONS 15454 OSPF topology to be advertised to
OSPF routers on the LAN. Enable this field on ONS 15454 nodes that directly connect to OSPF
routers.
• LAN Port Area ID—Enter the OSPF area ID (dotted decimal format) for the router port where the
ONS 15454 is connected. (This number is different from the DCC/GCC OSPF Area ID.)
Step 4 By default, OSPF is set to No Authentication. If the OSPF router requires authentication, complete the
following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Click the No Authentication button.
b. In the Edit Authentication Key dialog box, complete the following:
• Type—Choose Simple Password.
• Enter Authentication Key—Enter the password.
• Confirm Authentication Key—Enter the same password to confirm it.
c. Click OK.
The authentication button label changes to Simple Password.
Step 5 Provision the OSPF priority and interval settings. The OSPF priority and interval defaults are the
defaults most commonly used by OSPF routers. Verify that these defaults match the ones used by the
OSPF router where the ONS 15454 is connected.
• Router Priority—Provision the router priority, which determines the designated router for a subnet.
• Hello Interval (sec)—Provision the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements
sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the default.
• Dead Interval—Provision the number of seconds that will pass while an OSPF router’s packets are
not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the default.
• Transit Delay (sec)—Provision the service speed. One second is the default.
• Retransmit Interval (sec)—Provision the number of seconds that will elapse before a packet is
resent. Five seconds is the default.
• LAN Metric—Provision the cost for sending packets across the LAN. This value should always be
lower than the SDCC or RS-DCC metric. Ten is the default.
Step 6 Under OSPF Area Range Table, create an area range table if one is needed:
Note Area range tables consolidate the information that is outside an OSPF area border. One
ONS 15454 in the ONS 15454 OSPF area is connected to the OSPF router. An area range table
on this node points the router to the other nodes that reside within the ONS 15454 OSPF area.
a. Click Create.
b. In the Create Area Range dialog box, enter the following:
14-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Range Address—Enter the area IP address for the ONS 15454 nodes that reside within the
OSPF area. For example, if the ONS 15454 OSPF area includes nodes with IP addresses
10.10.20.100, 10.10.30.150, 10.10.40.200, and 10.10.50.250, the range address would be
10.10.0.0.
• Range Area ID—Enter the OSPF area ID for the ONS 15454 nodes. This is either the ID in the
DCC OSPF Area ID field or the ID in the Area ID for LAN Port field.
• Mask Length—Enter the subnet mask length. In the Range Address example, this is 16.
• Advertise—Check this box if you want to advertise the OSPF range table.
c. Click OK.
Step 7 All OSPF areas must be connected to Area 0. If the ONS 15454 OSPF area is not physically connected
to Area 0, use the following steps to create a virtual link table that will provide the disconnected area
with a logical path to Area 0:
a. Under the OSPF Virtual Link Table, click Create.
b. In the Create Virtual Link dialog box, complete the following fields. OSPF settings must match
OSPF settings for the ONS 15454 OSPF area:
• Neighbor—Enter the router ID of the Area 0 router.
• Transit Delay (sec)—Enter the service speed. One second is the default.
• Hello Int (sec)—Provision the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements
sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the default.
• Auth Type—If the router where the ONS 15454 is connected uses authentication, choose
Simple Password. Otherwise, choose No Authentication.
• Retransmit Int (sec)—Provision the time that will elapse, in seconds, before a packet is resent.
Five seconds is the default.
• Dead Int (sec)—Provision the number of seconds that will pass while an OSPF router’s packets
are not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the default.
c. Click OK.
Step 8 After entering the ONS 15454 OSPF area data, click Apply.
If you changed the Area ID, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards reset, one at a time.
The reset takes approximately 10 to 15 minutes.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
14-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G60 Set Up or Change Routing Information Protocol
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Network > RIP tabs.
Step 2 Check the RIP Active check box if you are activating RIP.
Step 3 Choose either RIP Version 1 or RIP Version 2 from the drop-down list, depending on which version is
supported in your network.
Step 4 Set the RIP metric. The RIP metric can be set to a number between 1 and 15 and represents the number
of hops.
Step 5 By default, RIP is set to No Authentication. If the router that the ONS 15454 is connected to requires
authentication, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 6.
a. Click the No Authentication button.
b. In the Edit Authentication Key dialog box, complete the following:
• Type—Choose Simple Password.
• Enter Authentication Key—Enter the password.
• Confirm Authentication Key—Enter the same password to confirm it.
c. Click OK.
The authentication button label changes to Simple Password.
Step 6 If you want to complete an address summary, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 7.
Complete the address summary only if the ONS 15454 is a gateway NE with multiple external
ONS 15454 NEs attached with IP addresses in different subnets.
a. In the RIP Address Summary area, click Create.
b. In the Create Address Summary dialog box, complete the following:
• Summary Address—Enter the summary IP address.
• Mask Length—Enter the subnet mask length using the up and down arrows.
• Hops—Enter the number of hops. The smaller the number of hops, the higher the priority.
c. Click OK.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task enables RIP on the ONS 15454. Perform this task if you want to
include the ONS 15454 in RIP-enabled networks.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
You need to create a static route to the router adjacent to the ONS 15454
for the ONS 15454 to communicate its routing information to
non-DCC-connected nodes.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G194 Set Up EMS Secure Access to the ONS 15454
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Security > Access pane.
Step 2 Under the EMS Access area, change the Access State to Secure.
Step 3 Click Apply. The CTC disconnects and reconnects through a secure socket connection.
Step 4 To create a secure connection, enter https://node-address.
Note After setting up a CTC connection in secure mode, http requests are automatically redirected to https
mode.
Step 5 A first time connection is authenticated by the Website Certification is Not Known dialog box. Accept
the certificate and click OK. The Security Error: Domain Name Mismatch dialog box appears. Click
OK to continue.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G27 Set Up the ONS 15454 for Firewall Access
Step 1 Log into a node that is behind the firewall. See the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task for instructions. If you
are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If the ONS 15454 node is in a protected network and the CTC computer is in an external network,
complete the “DLP-G61 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 15454” task on page 14-33.
Figure 14-5 shows ONS 15454 nodes in a protected network and the CTC computer in an external
network. For the computer to access the ONS 15454 nodes, you must provision the IIOP listener port
specified by your firewall administrator on the ONS 15454.
Purpose This procedure provisions ONS 15454s and CTC computers for secure
access.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser
Purpose This procedure provisions ONS 15454 nodes and CTC computers for
access through firewalls.
Tools/Equipment IIOP listener port number provided by your LAN or firewall administrator
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 14-5 Nodes Behind a Firewall
Step 3 If the CTC computer resides behind a firewall, complete the “DLP-G62 Provision the IIOP Listener Port
on the CTC Computer” task on page 14-34.
Figure 14-6 shows a CTC computer and ONS 15454 behind firewalls. For the computer to access the
ONS 15454, you must provision the IIOP port on the CTC computer and on the ONS 15454.
Figure 14-6 CTC Computer and ONS 15454 Nodes Residing Behind Firewalls
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G28 Create FTP Host
55351
CTC computer
External network Protected network
ONS 15454
Unprotected
network
Private
network
IIOP port
IIOP port
Firewall
Port
filtering ONS 15454
55350
CTC computer
Firewall
Port
filtering
Protected network External network Protected network
ONS 15454
Private
network
Unprotected
network
Private
network
IIOP port
IIOP port
IIOP port
Firewall
Port
filtering ONS 15454
Purpose This procedure provisions an FTP Host that you can use to perform
database backup and restore or software download to an End Network
Element (ENE) when proxy or firewall is enabled.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16
NTP-G27 Set Up the ONS 15454 for Firewall Access, page 14-31
Required/As Needed As needed
14-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you want to turn on the ONS 15454 secure mode, which allows two IPv4 addresses to be provisioned
for the node if TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards are installed, complete the “DLP-G264
Enable Node Security Mode” task on page 14-24. Refer to the Chapter 22, “Management Network
Connectivity,” for information about secure mode.
Step 3 In Node view, click the Provisioning > Network > FTP Hosts tabs.
Step 4 Click Create.
Step 5 Enter a valid IP address in the FTP Host Address field. A maximum of 12 host can be entered.
Note In ONS 15454 Software Release 9.1 and later, you can configure an IPv6 address for an FTP server, in
addition to an IPv4 address.
Step 6 The Mask is automatically set according to the Net/Subnet Mask length specified in “DLP-G56
Provision IP Settings” section on page 14-17. To change the Mask, click the Up/Down arrows on the
Length menu.
Step 7 Check the FTP Relay Enable radio button to allow FTP commands at the GNE relay. If you will enable
the relay at a later time, go to Step 9. Certain TL1 commands executed on an ENE require FTP access
into the Data Communication Network (DCN), the FTP relay on the GNE provides this access. The FTP
hosts that you have configured in CTC can be used with the TL1 COPY-RFILE (for database backup and
restore or software download) or COPY-IOSCFG (for Cisco IOS Configuration File backup and restore)
commands.
Step 8 Enter the time, in minutes, that FTP Relay will be enabled. A valid entry is a number between 0 and 60.
The number 0 disallows FTP command relay. After the specified time has elapsed the FTP Relay Enable
flag is unset and FTP command relay is disallowed.
Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat Step 4 through Step 9 to provision additional FTP Hosts.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G61 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 15454
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser
Purpose This task sets the IIOP listener port on the ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2,
and ONS 15454 M6 which enables you to access nodes that reside behind
a firewall.
Tools/Equipment IIOP listener port number provided by your LAN or firewall administrator
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note If the Enable SOCKS proxy on port 1080 check box is checked, CTC will use Port 1080 and ignore the
configured IIOP port setting. If the check box is later unchecked, the configured IIOP listener port will
be used.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Security > Access tabs.
Step 2 In the TCC CORBA (IIOP) Listener Port area, choose a listener port option:
• Default - TCC Fixed—Uses Port 57790 to connect to ONS 15454 nodes on the same side of the
firewall or if no firewall is used (default). This option can be used for access through a firewall if
Port 57790 is available.
• Standard Constant—Uses Port 683, the Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA)
default port number.
• Other Constant—If Port 683 is not used, type the IIOP port specified by your firewall
administrator.
Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 When the Change Network Configuration message appears, click Yes.
The TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards reboot, one at a time. The reboot takes
approximately 15 minutes.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G62 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the CTC Computer
Step 1 From the Edit menu, choose Preferences.
Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, click the Firewall tab.
Step 3 In the CTC CORBA (IIOP) Listener Port area, choose a listener port option:
• Default - Variable—Use to connect to ONS 15454 nodes from within a firewall or if no firewall is
used (default).
• Standard Constant—Use Port 683, the CORBA default port number.
• Other Constant—If Port 683 is not used, enter the IIOP port defined by your administrator.
Step 4 Click Apply. A warning appears telling you that the port change will apply during the next CTC login.
Purpose This task selects the IIOP listener port for CTC and must be completed if
the computer running CTC resides behind a firewall.
Tools/Equipment IIOP listener port number from LAN or firewall administrator
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 In the Preferences dialog box, click OK.
Step 7 To access the ONS 15454 using the IIOP port, log out of CTC then log back in. (To log out, choose Exit
from the File menu).
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G132 Provision OSI
Caution This procedure requires an understanding of OSI protocols, parameters, and functions. Before you begin,
review the OSI reference sections in Chapter 22, “Management Network Connectivity” and ensure that
you know the role of the ONS 15454 within the OSI and IP network.
Note This procedure requires provisioning of non-ONS equipment including routers and third party NEs. Do
not begin until you have the capability to complete that provisioning.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to provision the OSI. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the following tasks:
• DLP-G283 Provision OSI Routing Mode, page 14-36—Complete this task first.
• DLP-G284 Provision the TARP Operating Parameters, page 14-37—Complete this task second.
• DLP-G285 Add a Static TID-to-NSAP Entry to the TARP Data Cache, page 14-39—Complete this
task as needed.
• DLP-G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry, page 14-40—Complete this task as needed.
• DLP-G288 Provision OSI Routers, page 14-41—Complete this task as needed.
• DLP-G289 Provision Additional Manual Area Addresses, page 14-42—Complete this task as
needed.
• DLP-G290 Enable the OSI Subnet on the LAN Interface, page 14-42—Complete this task as
needed.
Purpose This procedure provisions the ONS 15454 so it can be installed in networks
with other vendor NEs that use the OSI protocol stack for data
communications network (DCN) communications. This procedure
provisions the Target Identifier Address Resolution Protocol (TARP), OSI
routers, manual area addresses, subnetwork points of attachment, and
IP-over-Connectionless Network Service (CLNS) tunnels.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures ““NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” section on page 3-34
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• DLP-G291 Create an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel, page 14-43—Complete this task as needed.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G283 Provision OSI Routing Mode
Caution Do not complete this task until you confirm the role of the node within the network. It will be either an
End System, Intermediate System Level 1, or IS Level 1/Level 2. This decision must be carefully
considered. For additional information about OSI provisioning, refer to Chapter 22, “Management
Network Connectivity.”
Caution Link State Protocol (LSP) buffers must be the same at all NEs within the network, or loss of visibility
might occur. Do not modify the LSP buffers unless you confirm that all NEs within the OSI have the
same buffer size.
Caution LSP buffer sizes cannot be greater than the LAP-D maximum transmission unit (MTU) size within the
OSI area.
Note For ONS 15454 nodes, three virtual routers can be provisioned. The node primary Network Service
Access Point (NSAP) address is also the Router 1 primary manual area address. To edit the primary
NSAP, you must edit the Router 1 primary manual area address. After you enable Router 1 on the Routers
subtab, the Change Primary Area Address button is available to edit the address.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > OSI
tabs.
Step 2 Choose a routing mode:
• End System—The ONS 15454 performs OSI end system (ES) functions and relies upon an
intermediate system (IS) for communication with nodes that reside within its OSI area.
Note The End System routing mode is not available if more than one virtual router is enabled.
Purpose This task provisions the OSI routing mode. Complete this task when the
ONS 15454 is connected to networks with third party NEs that use the OSI
protocol stack for DCN communication.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” section on page 3-34”
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Intermediate System Level 1—The ONS 15454 performs OSI IS functions. It communicates with
IS and ES nodes that reside within its OSI area. It depends upon an IS L1/L2 node to communicate
with IS and ES nodes that reside outside its OSI area.
• Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2—The ONS 15454 performs IS functions. It communicates
with IS and ES nodes that reside within its OSI area. It also communicates with IS L1/L2 nodes that
reside in other OSI areas. Before choosing this option, verify the following:
– The node is connected to another IS Level 1/Level 2 node that resides in a different OSI area.
– The node is connected to all nodes within its area that are provisioned as IS L1/L2.
Step 3 If needed, change the LSP data buffers:
• L1 LSP Buffer Size—Adjusts the Level 1 link state protocol data unit (PDU) buffer size. The default
is 512. It should not be changed.
• L2 LSP Buffer Size—Adjusts the Level 2 link state PDU buffer size. The default is 512. It should
not be changed.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G284 Provision the TARP Operating Parameters
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > OSI >
TARP > Config tabs.
Step 2 Provision the following parameters, as needed:
• TARP PDUs L1 Propagation—If checked (default), TARP Type 1 PDUs that are received by the
node and are not excluded by the LDB are propagated to other NEs within the Level 1 OSI area.
(Type 1 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a target identifier [TID] within a Level 1
routing area.) The propagation does not occur if the NE is the target of the Type 1 PDU, and PDUs
are not propagated to the NE from which the PDU was received.
Note The TARP PDUs L1 Propagation parameter is not used when the Node Routing Area (on the
Provisioning > OSI > Main Setup tab) is set to End System.
• TARP PDUs L2 Propagation—If checked (default), TARP Type 2 PDUs that are received by the
node and are not excluded by the LDB are propagated to other NEs within the Level 2 OSI areas.
(Type 2 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a TID within a Level 2 routing area.) The
propagation occurs if the NE is not the target of the Type 2 PDU, and PDUs are not propagated to
the NE from which the PDU was received.
Purpose This task provisions the TARP operating parameters including TARP PDU
propagation, timers, and loop detection buffer (LDB).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note The TARP PDUs L2 Propagation parameter is only used when the Node Routing Area is
provisioned to Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2.
• TARP PDUs Origination—If checked (default), the node performs all TARP origination functions
including:
– TID-to-NSAP resolution requests (originate TARP Type 1 and Type 2 PDUs)
– NSAP-to-TID requests (originate Type 5 PDUs)
– TARP address changes (originate Type 4 PDUs)
Note TARP Echo and NSAP to TID are not supported.
• TARP Data Cache—If checked (default), the node maintains a TARP data cache (TDC). The TDC
is a database of TID-to-NSAP pairs created from TARP Type 3 PDUs received by the node and
modified by TARP Type 4 PDUs (TID-to-NSAP updates or corrections). TARP 3 PDUs are
responses to Type 1 and Type 2 PDUs. The TDC can also be populated with static entries entered
on the TARP > Static TDC tab.
Note TARP Data Cache is only used when the TARP PDUs Origination parameter is enabled.
• L2 TARP Data Cache—If checked (default), the TIDs and NSAPs of NEs originating Type 2
requests are added to the TDC before the node propagates the requests to other NEs.
Note The L2 TARP Data Cache parameter is designed for Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2
nodes that are connected to other Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2 nodes. Enabling the
parameter for Intermediate System Level 1 nodes is not recommended.
• LDB—If checked (default), enables the TARP loop detection buffer. The LDB prevents TARP PDUs
from being sent more than once on the same subnet.
Note The LDB parameter is not used if the Node Routing Mode is provisioned to End System or
if the TARP PDUs L1 Propagation parameter is not enabled.
• LAN TARP Storm Suppression—If checked (default), enables TARP storm suppression. This
function prevents redundant TARP PDUs from being unnecessarily propagated across the LAN
network.
• Send Type 4 PDU on Startup—If checked, a TARP Type 4 PDU is originated during the initial
ONS 15454 startup. Type 4 PDUs indicate that a TID or NSAP change has occurred at the NE. (The
default setting is not enabled.)
• Type 4 PDU Delay—Sets the amount of time that will pass before the Type 4 PDU is generated when
Send Type 4 PDU on Startup is enabled. 60 seconds is the default. The range is 0 to 255 seconds.
Note The Send Type 4 PDU on Startup and Type 4 PDU Delay parameters are not used if TARP
PDUs Origination is not enabled.
14-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• LDB Entry—Sets the TARP loop detection buffer timer. The loop detection buffer time is assigned
to each LDB entry for which the TARP sequence number (tar-seq) is zero. The default is 5 minutes.
The range is 1 to 10 minutes.
• LDB Flush—Sets the frequency period for flushing the LDB. The default is 5 minutes. The range is
0 to 1440 minutes.
• T1—Sets the amount of time to wait for a response to a Type 1 PDU. Type 1 PDUs seek a specific
NE TID within an OSI Level 1 area. The default is 15 seconds. The range is 0 to 3600 seconds.
• T2—Sets the amount of time to wait for a response to a Type 2 PDU. TARP Type 2 PDUs seek a
specific NE TID value within OSI Level 1 and Level 2 areas. The default is 25 seconds. The range
is 0 to 3600 seconds.
• T3—Sets the amount of time to wait for an address resolution request. The default is 40 seconds.
The range is 0 to 3600 seconds.
• T4—Sets the amount of time to wait for an error recovery. This timer begins after the T2 timer
expires without finding the requested NE TID. The default is 20 seconds. The range is
0 to 3600 seconds.
Note The T1, T2, and T4 timers are not used if the TARP PDUs Origination check box is not
checked.
Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G285 Add a Static TID-to-NSAP Entry to the TARP Data Cache
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > OSI >
TARP > Static TDC tabs.
Step 2 Click Add Static Entry.
Step 3 In the Add Static Entry dialog box, enter the following:
• TID—Enter the TID of the NE. (For ONS nodes, the TID is the Node Name parameter on the node
or multishelf view Provisioning > General tab.)
• NSAP—Enter the OSI NSAP address in the NSAP field or, if preferred, click Use Mask and enter
the address in the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box.
Purpose This task adds a static TID-to-NSAP entry to the TDC. The static entries
are required for NEs that do not support TARP and are similar to static
routes. For a specific TID, you must force a specific NSAP.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioner or higher
14-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click OK to close the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box, if used, and then click OK to close the
Add Static Entry dialog box.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > OSI >
TARP > MAT tabs.
Step 2 Click Add.
Step 3 In the Add TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry dialog box, enter the following:
• Level—Sets the TARP Type Code that will be sent:
– Level 1—Indicates that the adjacency is within the same area as the current node. The entry
generates Type 1 PDUs.
– Level 2—Indicates that the adjacency is in a different area than the current node. The entry
generates Type 2 PDUs.
• NSAP—Enter the OSI NSAP address in the NSAP field or, if preferred, click Use Mask and enter
the address in the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box.
Step 4 Click OK to close the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box, if used, and then click OK to close the Add Static
Entry dialog box.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task adds an entry to the TARP manual adjacency table (MAT). Entries
are added to the MAT when the ONS 15454 must communicate across
routers or NEs that lack TARP capability.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G288 Provision OSI Routers
Note Router 1 must be enabled before you can enable and edit the primary manual area addresses for
Routers 2 and 3.
Note The Router 1 manual area address, System ID, and Selector “00” create the node NSAP address.
Changing the Router 1 manual area address changes the node NSAP address.
Note The System ID for Router 1 is the node MAC address. The System IDs for Routers 2 and 3 are created
by adding 1 and 2 respectively to the Router 1 System ID. You cannot edit the System IDs.
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > OSI > Routers > Setup tabs.
Step 2 Chose the router you want provision and click Edit. The OSI Router Editor dialog box appears.
Step 3 In the OSI Router Editor dialog box:
a. Check Enable Router to enable the router and make its primary area address available for editing.
b. Click the manual area address, then click Edit.
c. In the Edit Manual Area Address dialog box, edit the primary area address in the Area Address field.
If you prefer, click Use Mask and enter the edits in the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box. The address
(hexadecimal format) can be 8 to 24 alphanumeric characters (0–9, a–f) in length.
d. Click OK successively to close the following dialog boxes: Masked NSAP Entry (if used), Edit
Manual Area Address, and OSI Router Editor.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task enables an OSI router and edits its primary manual area address.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G289 Provision Additional Manual Area Addresses
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > OSI > Routers > Setup tabs.
Step 2 Chose the router where you want provision an additional manual area address and click Edit. The OSI
Router Editor dialog box appears.
Step 3 In the OSI Router Editor dialog box:
a. Check Enable Router to enable the router and make its primary area address available for editing.
b. Click the manual area address, then click Add.
c. In the Add Manual Area Address dialog box, enter the primary area address in the Area Address
field. If you prefer, click Use Mask and enter the address in the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box.
The address (hexadecimal format) can be 2 to 24 alphanumeric characters (0–9, a–f) in length.
d. Click OK successively to close the following dialog boxes: Masked NSAP Entry (if used), Add
Manual Area Address, and OSI Router Editor.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G290 Enable the OSI Subnet on the LAN Interface
Note When you create communication channels (optical service channel [OSC] or generic communications
channel [GCC]), OSI subnetwork points of attachment are enabled on the communication channels. See
the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 14-126 and the “DLP-G76 Provision
DCC/GCC Terminations” task on page 16-81.
Purpose This task provisions the OSI manual area addresses. One primary area and
two additional manual areas can be created for each virtual router.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
DLP-G288 Provision OSI Routers, page 14-41
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task enables the OSI subnetwork point of attachment on the LAN
interface.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note The OSI subnetwork point of attachment cannot be enabled for the LAN interface if the OSI routing
mode is set to ES.
Note If secure mode is on, the OSI subnet is enabled on the backplane LAN port, not the front
TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE TCP/IP (LAN) port.
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > OSI > Routers > Subnet tabs.
Step 2 Click Enable LAN Subnet.
Step 3 In the Enable LAN Subnet dialog box, complete the following fields:
• ESH—Sets the End System Hello (ESH) propagation frequency. An ES NE transmits ESHs to
inform other ESs and ISs about the NSAPs it serves. The default is 10 seconds. The range is 10 to
1000 seconds.
• ISH—Sets the Intermediate System Hello (ISH) PDU propagation frequency. An intermediate
system NE sends ISHs to other ESs and ISs to inform them about the IS NEs it serves. The default
is 10 seconds. The range is 10 to 1000 seconds.
• IIH—Sets the Intermediate System to Intermediate System Hello (IIH) PDU propagation frequency.
The IS-IS Hello PDUs establish and maintain adjacencies between ISs. The default is 3 seconds. The
range is 1 to 600 seconds.
• IS-IS Cost—Sets the cost for sending packets on the LAN subnet. The IS-IS protocol uses the cost
to calculate the shortest routing path. The default IS-IS cost for LAN subnets is 20. It normally
should not be changed.
• DIS Priority—Sets the designated intermediate system (DIS) priority. In IS-IS networks, one router
is elected to serve as the DIS (LAN subnets only). Cisco router DIS priority is 64. For the
ONS 15454 LAN subnet, the default DIS priority is 63. It normally should not be changed.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G291 Create an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel
Purpose This task creates an IP-over-CLNS tunnel to allow ONS 15454 nodes to
communicate across equipment and networks that use the OSI protocol
stack.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Caution IP-over-CLNS tunnels require two endpoints. You will create one point on an ONS 15454. The other
endpoint is generally provisioned on non-ONS equipment including routers and other vendor NEs.
Before you begin, verify that you have the capability to create an OSI-over-CLNS tunnel on the other
equipment location.
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > OSI > Tunnels tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create IP Over CLNS Tunnel dialog box, complete the following fields:
• Tunnel Type—Choose a tunnel type:
– Cisco—Creates the proprietary Cisco IP tunnel. Cisco IP tunnels add the CLNS header to the
IP packets.
– GRE—Creates a generic routing encapsulation (GRE) tunnel. GRE tunnels add the CLNS
header and a GRE header to the IP packets.
The Cisco proprietary tunnel is slightly more efficient than the GRE tunnel because it does not add
the GRE header to each IP packet. The two tunnel types are not compatible. Most Cisco routers
support the Cisco IP tunnel, while only a few support both GRE and Cisco IP tunnels. You generally
should create Cisco IP tunnels if you are tunneling between two Cisco routers or between a Cisco
router and an ONS node.
Caution Always verify that the IP-over-CLNS tunnel type that you choose is supported by the equipment at the
other end of the tunnel.
• IP Address—Enter the IP address of the IP-over-CLNS tunnel destination.
• IP Mask—Enter the IP address subnet mask of the IP-over-CLNS destination.
• OSPF Metric—Enter the OSPF metric for sending packets across the IP-over-CLNS tunnel. The
OSPF metric, or cost, is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. The default is 110.
Normally, it is not be changed unless you are creating multiple tunnel routes and want to prioritize
routing by assigning different metrics.
• NSAP Address—Enter the destination NE or OSI router NSAP address.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Provision the other tunnel endpoint using the documentation provided by the manufacturer of the third
party vendor NE.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
14-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G29 Set Up SNMP
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to set up SNMP. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > SNMP
tabs.
Step 3 In the Trap Destinations area, click Create.
Step 4 Complete the following in the Create SNMP Trap Destination dialog box (Figure 14-7):
• Destination IP Address—Type the IP address of your network management system (NMS). If the
node you are logged into is an ENE, set the destination address to the GNE.
Note In ONS 15454 Software Release 9.1 and later, you can configure IPv6 addresses for SNMPv2/v3 trap
destinations and SNMPv3 proxy targets, in addition to IPv4 addresses.
• Community—Type the SNMP community name. For a description of SNMP community names,
refer to the SNMP document.
Note The community name is a form of authentication and access control. The community name
assigned to the ONS 15454 is case-sensitive and must match the community name of the
NMS.
• UDP Port—The default User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port for SNMP is 162.
• Trap version—Choose either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2. Refer to your NMS documentation to determine
which version to use.
Figure 14-7 Creating an SNMP Trap
Purpose This procedure provisions the SNMP parameters so that you can use
SNMP management software with the ONS 15454.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
Required/As Needed Required if SNMP is used at your site.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 5 Click OK. The node IP address of the node where you provisioned the new trap destination appears in
the Trap Destinations area.
Step 6 Click the node IP address in the Trap Destinations area. Verify the SNMP information that appears in
the Selected Destination list.
Step 7 If you want the SNMP agent to accept SNMP SET requests on certain MIBs, click the Allow SNMP Sets
check box. If this box is not checked, SET requests are rejected.
Step 8 If you want to set up the SNMP proxy feature to allow network management, message reporting, and
performance statistic retrieval across ONS firewalls, click the Allow SNMP Proxy check box located on
the SNMP tab.
Note The Use Generic MIB check box is normally not checked for MSTP. It is checked only when the
ONS 15454 resides in networks with multiple ONS products, and the network management
system requires MIBs with the same name to have the same object IDs. By default, the
ONS 15454 uses the CERENT-454-MIBs. Other ONS products, such as the ONS 15600, the
ONS 15327, and ONS 15310-CL, use the CERENT-GENERIC-MIBs. If Use Generic MIB is
checked, the ONS 15454 will use the CERENT-GENERIC-MIBs so the object IDs will be the
same for all products.
Note Using the ONS firewall proxy feature effectively breaches the ONS firewall to exchange
management information.
For more information about the SNMP proxy feature, refer to SNMP.
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 If you are setting up SNMP proxies, you can set up to three relays that send SNMP trap error counts back
to the NE for each trap destination address:
a. Click the first trap destination IP address. The address and its community name appear in the
Destination fields.
b. Enter up to three SNMP Proxy relay addresses and community names in the fields for Relay A,
Relay B, and Relay C.
Note The community names specified for each relay node must match one of the provisioned
SNMP community names in the NE.
Note The SNMP proxy directs SNMP traps from this node through Relay A to Relay B to Relay C
to the trap destination. Ensure that you enter the IP addresses in the correct order so that this
sequence runs correctly.
Step 11 Click Apply.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
14-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File
Caution Verify that you have the correct Cisco Transport Planner network file before you begin this procedure.
The file will have an XML extension and a name assigned by your network planner. Check with your
network planner or administrator if you have any questions.
Note The Cisco Transport Planner configuration file contains parameters for the node, shelf, card type, port
(including the card’s wavelength), pluggable port module (PPM), as well as OTN and FEC parameters.
Only the values present in XML format appear in the configuration file parameters; if the values are not
in XML format, a column appears blank. The XML file values are independently reported and do not
affect any configuration changes that you apply.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to import the Cisco Transport
Planner configuration file. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you choose the Provision Node Layout option to preprovision the cards in the shelf, complete the
following steps. If not, continue with Step 3.
a. Display the node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
b. Verify that the common control cards (TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE, AIC-I and
MSC-ISC) cards are the only cards installed. If in single or multishelf mode, verify that each shelf
in the multishelf has two TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards.
• If common control cards are the only cards installed, continue with Step 3.
• If other cards appear, continue with Step c.
c. If a physical card other than the common control cards is installed, remove it from the shelf.
d. If preprovisioned DWDM cards are present, delete them using the “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in
CTC” task on page 14-51, then repeat Steps a and b.
Purpose This procedure imports the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update
configuration file and creates a log file. The configuration file, which is
provided in XML format, provisions internal patchcords, optical sides and
card parameters for optical units, transponders, and passive units (DCUs
and patch panels). Finally, the NE Update file installs the ANS parameters
calculated by Cisco Transport Planner. The log file, which is a text
document records the results of the NE update.
Tools/Equipment A Cisco Transport Planner NE Update file for the network where the node
is installed must be accessible to the CTC computer.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 If you have not created a log file to record the results of the NE update, complete the following steps. If
a log file has been created, continue with Step 4.
a. Open a text editor or word processing application.
b. Create a new text (TXT) document with a file name of your choosing.
c. Save the text document in a directory that is easy to navigate to from CTC.
Step 4 In CTC node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view, click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS >
Node Setup tabs.
Step 5 Choose Load latest installation file from node to reload the latest XML file that was applied and stored
in the node. Continue with Step 8.
Step 6 Choose Load installation file from network repository and navigate to the Cisco Transport Planner
node setup file containing the parameters for the network where the node resides. This option downloads
the XML file from the remote server. Continue with Step 8.
Step 7 In the field under Select XML file, type the path to the Cisco Transport Planner node setup file
containing the parameters for the network where your node resides, or click Browse and navigate to the
file on your computer. Click the file, then click Open. The file will have an XML extension. Continue
with Step 8.
Step 8 In the field under Select Log file, type the path to the text file that you created in Step 3, or click Browse
and navigate to the file on your computer or a network server where you want the node setup results
recorded.
Note The log file records the parameters that were updated successfully and provides an explanation
of why an update could not be completed. Each node setup session overwrites the log file
contents. If you want to save the results from a previous NE update, save the log file with new
name.
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 When Load installation file from network repository option is chosen, the FTP Remote Installation
File Node-Name page appears.
a. When the node is configured as a Gateway Network Element (GNE) node, enter the parameters (host
name, port, user name, password, remote directory, and XML file name of the remote server) and
click Next.
b. When the node is configured as a Elementary Network Element (ENE) node, an additional
parameter called GNE Selector appear. From the GNE Selector drop-down list, select the
appropriate GNE in the network. The FTP relay must be configured on the selected GNE to the
remote server where the XML file is stored. See “NTP-G28 Create FTP Host” procedure on
page 14-32 to configure the FTP relay on the selected GNE.
Step 11 When the Node Setup Selection for Node-Name page appears, complete the following steps. If not,
continue with Step 12.
a. Choose the node profile that you want to apply to the node. The Cisco Transport Planner XML file
contains profiles for all nodes in the network. Choose the profile that applies to the node you are
provisioning.
b. Click Next.
Step 12 On the Node Setup for node name page, choose one or more of the following:
14-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Node Layout—Preprovisions the slots in each shelf in CTC for the cards defined in the network
plan. Choose this option when no DWDM cards are installed. (Errors will occur if cards are installed
or the slots are preprovisioned.) Preprovisioning the slots before the physical cards are installed
ensures that card installers place the cards in the correct slots. Preprovisioning the slots is also useful
if you want to set up the network prior to card installation. The node layout also preprovisions the
chassis and passive units.
• Card Parameters—If checked, provisions the following parameters, if the cards are installed.
– TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP
cards—Provisions the OTN and FEC parameters.
– OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-EDFA-17, OPT-EDFA-24, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards—Provisions the card mode.
• Pluggable Port Modules— If checked, allows the provisioning of PPMs on TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP cards, including PPM payloads.
• Internal Patchcords—If checked, allows creation of internal patchcords among cards provisioned in
the node.
• Optical Sides—If checked, allows the provisioning of optical sides.
• ANS Parameters—If checked, installs the ANS parameters. ANS parameters provision the values
required for the node to function within the specified network design. ANS parameters include span
losses, optical power, optics thresholds, amplifier working mode, gain, tilt, and many others. Refer
to Chapter 12, “Node Reference” for a list of ONS 15454 ANS parameters.
Note If you are importing the Cisco Transport Planner configuration file for the first time, you
normally choose all available options.
• Skip Interactive Mode—If checked, CTC provisions all the chosen setup components automatically
without allowing you to view the results after each one.
• Save Installation Files (XML and log) On Node—If checked, CTC saves the XML and log files on
the node.
Step 13 Click Next. If you chose Skip Interactive Mode, continue with Step 14. If not, the wizard page that
appears depends on the options chosen in Step 12: Complete the steps shown in Table 14-2 for each
option.
14-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Table 14-2 NE Update Wizard Options
NE Update Function
Node/Shelves Layout View the cards and slots on the left side of the page and verify that they are the same as the layout in
the Cisco Transport Planner Shelf Layout (see Table 14-1 on page 14-4). If the cards and slots match,
click Apply. If not, click Cancel. and contact your next level of support to verify that you have the
correct node setup file. If the site has a multishelf configuration, click Next and repeat this step for
each shelf at the site.
CTC preprovisions the slots. (This might take a few seconds.) The results appear in the Log window.
Slots that are successfully provisioned display an “Applied” status. A “Slot not empty” status appears
if slots cannot be provisioned because a card is physically installed or the slot is already provisioned.
If this occurs, complete the following steps. Otherwise, continue with the next NE Update function.
1. Click Cancel, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box. The slot preprovisioning does not
revert when you click Cancel.
2. If a physical card is installed, remove it from the shelf.
3. Perform one of the following steps:
– Delete all the preprovisioned slots using the “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC” task on
page 14-51, then repeat Steps 2 through Step 13.
– Delete the slot where the Slot Not Empty error occurred using the “DLP-G351 Delete a Card
in CTC” task on page 14-51. Complete the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on
page 14-53 to provision the slot manually, then repeat Steps 2 through 13 making sure to
uncheck the Provision Node Layout option in Step 12.
Note When you preprovision a slot, the card is purple in the CTC shelf graphic and “NP” (not
present) appears on the card. After the physical card is installed, the card changes to white and
“NP” is removed from the CTC shelf graphic.
Passive Units Layout 1. Review the passive unit settings.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Next.
Pluggable Port Modules 1. Review the PPM settings for each TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, and
OTU2_XP card.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Next.
Card Parameters 1. Review the OTN, FEC, and card mode settings for each TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, and OTU2_XP card.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Next.
Internal Patchcords 1. Review the internal patchcords.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Next.
14-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 14 Click Finish, then click OK in the Wizard Complete confirmation dialog box. The confirmation box
indicates whether the xml import process was completed successfully.
Note Common control cards are not provisioned by Cisco Transport Planner.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC
Step 1 Verify that the following conditions are not present. (During node turn-up, these conditions are normally
not present):
• The card is a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
• The card is part of a protection group.
• The card has optical channels or overhead circuits provisioned.
• The card is being used for timing.
• The card has an OSC/GCC termination.
Optical Sides 1. Review the optical side assignments.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Next.
ANS Parameters 1. Review the ANS parameters on the left half of the page.
c. Click Apply. The log file displays the results. At the end, a Done status will appear. If a parameter
could not be applied, a Setting Refused status appears. If this occurs, contact your next level of
support.
Select All 1. If checked, selects all the options.
Skip Interactive Mode If checked, CTC provisions all the chosen setup components automatically without allowing you to
view the results after each one.
Save Installation Files
(XML and log) On
Node
If checked, CTC saves the XML and log files on the node.
Table 14-2 NE Update Wizard Options
NE Update Function
Purpose This task deletes a card from an ONS 15454 slot that is provisioned in
CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• A port on the card is being used for a Link Management Protocol (LMP) channel or link.
• The card is part of an optical side.
• The card is assigned to DWDM patchcords.
• If a port on the card is in service.
• If a port on the card is part of a circuit.
If any of these conditions exist, do not continue. You will not be able to delete the card until the card is
removed from protection groups; circuits, DCC, and GCCs are deleted; a different timing source is
provisioned, and the LMP link or channel is deleted.
• To replace a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card, refer to the Cisco
ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
• To delete a protection group, see the NTP-G83 Modify or Delete Card Protection Settings
procedure.
• To delete optical channels see the “DLP-G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections” task on
page 16-26 and the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-46;
to delete overhead circuits, see the “DLP-G112 Delete Overhead Circuits” task on page 16-89.
• To remove the card as a timing source, see the NTP-G87 Change Node Timing Parameters
procedure.
• To remove OSC or GCC terminations, see the NTP-G85 Modify or Delete OSC Terminations, GCC
Terminations, and Provisionable Patchcords procedure.
• To delete LMP channels or links, see “NTP-G164 Configure Link Management Protocol” procedure
on page 15-40.
• To remove a DWDM patchcord, see the “DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord” procedure on
page 14-123.
• To remove an optical side, see the “DLP-G480 Delete an Optical Side” procedure on page 14-125.
Step 2 On the shelf graphic in CTC, right-click the card that you want to remove and choose Delete Card.
Note A deleted card no longer reboots and reappears in CTC after R5.0.
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
14-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), right-click an empty slot where
you want to install a card.
Step 2 From the Add Card shortcut menu, choose the card type that will be installed based on the
Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout (see Table 14-1 on page 14-4). Only cards that can be installed in
the slot appear in the Add Card shortcut menu. Table 14-3 shows the Add Card shortcut menu, submenu,
card groups, and menu options or cards that they reference.
Purpose This task preprovisions a ONS 15454 slot in CTC. Preprovisioning of all
the slots in the shelf is normally performed when you complete the
“NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration
File” procedure on page 14-47. Use this task if you need to manually
preprovision a slot. All slot preprovisioning must be based on the
Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout prepared for your site.
Tools/Equipment Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout table or JPG file.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Table 14-3 CTC Add Card Shortcut Menu for DWDM Cards
Menu Item
Submenu
Category Card Group Submenu Item 1 Submenu Item 2 Cards
DWDM
nXP
Transponder and Muxponder
— 10GE_XP 10GE_XP
— 10GE_XPE 10GE_XPE
— OTU2_XP OTU2_XP
— ADM-10G ADM-10G
— GE_XP GE_XP
— GE_XPE GE_XPE
— MXPP_MR_2.5G MXPP_MR_2.5G
— MXP_2.5G_10E MXP_2.5G_10E
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
— MXP_2.5G_10G MXP_2.5G_10G
— MXP_MR_10DME MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
— MXP_MR_2.5G MXP_MR_2.5G
— TXPP_MR_2.5G TXPP_MR_2.5G
— TXP_MR_10E TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
— TXP_MR_10G TXP_MR_10G
— TXP_MR_2.5G TXP_MR_2.5G
— 40G-MXP-C 40G-MXP-C
— 40E-MXP-C 40E-MXP-C
40ME-MXP-C
— 40E-TXP-C 40E-TXP-C
40ME-TXP-C
— AR_MXP AR_MXP
— AR_XP AR_XP
14-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DWDM MD Multiplexer and
Demultiplexer
C Band 32 DMXO 32DMX-O
40 WSS 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE
32 MUXO 32MUX-O
32 WSS 32WSS
4MD 4MD-xx.x
32 DMX 32DMX
40-MUX-C 40-MUX-C
32 MUXO 32MUX-O
40-DMX-C, or
40-DMX-CE
40-DMX-C, or
40-DMX-CE
L Band 32 WSS L 32WSS-L
32 DMXL 32DMX-L
MESH — C Band 40 WXC 40-WXC-C
80 WXC 80-WXC-C
40 SMR1 C 40-SMR1-C
40 SMR2 C 40-SMR2-C
OSC Optical Service
Channel
— MMU MMU
— OSC-CSM OSC-CSM
OADM Optical Add/Drop
Multiplexer
— AD-1B AD-1B-xx.x
— AD-1C AD-1C-xx.x
— AD-2C AD-2C-xx.x
— AD-4B AD-4B-xx.x
— AD-4C AD-4C-xx.x
Ampli Optical Amplifier C Band OPT-BST E OPT-BST-E
OPT-AMP-17 OPT-AMP-17-C
OPT-RAMP-C OPT-RAMP-C
OPT-RAMP-CE OPT-RAMP-CE
OPT-AMP C OPT-AMP-C
OPT-BST OPT-BST
OPT-PRE OPT-PRE
OPT-EDFA-17 OPT-EDFA-17
OPT-EDFA-24 OPT-EDFA-24
L Band OPT-BST L OPT-BST-L
OPT-AMP L OPT-AMP-L
OTHER — — PSM PSM
Table 14-3 CTC Add Card Shortcut Menu for DWDM Cards (continued)
Menu Item
Submenu
Category Card Group Submenu Item 1 Submenu Item 2 Cards
14-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note When you preprovision a slot, the card appears purple in the CTC shelf graphic (the card appears
as white when a card is installed in the slot). NP on the card graphic indicates that the card is not
physically installed.
Step 3 Repeat Step 2 until all the cards shown in the Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout are provisioned in
CTC.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Ethernet — — — MS-ISC-100T MS-ISC-100T
G1000 G1000
OSCM — — — — OSCM (Slots 8 and 10 only)
TNC
TSC1
— Control Cards — — TNC, TNCE, TSC, and TSCE
1. Choose the menu option TNC for both TNC and TNCE preprovision. The CTC displays the TNC or TNCE card name according to the inserted card. Same
applies for TSCE card also.
Table 14-3 CTC Add Card Shortcut Menu for DWDM Cards (continued)
Menu Item
Submenu
Category Card Group Submenu Item 1 Submenu Item 2 Cards
14-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G320 Configure the Node as a Non-DWDM Network
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 2 From the Selector area, select Network Type.
Step 3 Choose Not-DWDM, from the Value drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 5 Click the Launch ANS button. The relevant ports in the node will be in IS state.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G693 Configure the Amplifier
Step 1 Display the amplifier card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Select the working mode from the Card Working Mode drop-down list.
Step 4 Change to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), then click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 5 From the Selector area, select the amplifier slot. If the default parameters are present, continue with
Step 6. If not, click Add to add the Channel LOS Threshold, Amplifier Tilt, Power, and Amplifier
Working Mode parameters. To add the ANS parameters, see the “DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter”
task on page 14-60 for instructions.
Purpose This tasks configures a node as a Non-DWDM network.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task configures the optical parameters and threshold values of the
amplifier card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 6 Click the value of the ANS parameter that you want to modify and enter the new value specified in
Table 14-4. To modify the ANS parameters, see the “DLP-G681 Modify an ANS Parameter” task on
page 14-61 for instructions.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 9 Click Launch ANS.
Step 10 In the Apply Launch ANS dialog box, click Yes.
Step 11 In the Launch ANS confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Step 12 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 13 Verify the following in the Results column:
• Success - Changed —The parameter has been successfully changed with the ports in IS.
Step 14 Verify that the Set By column displays t he value “ANS” or “APC” as the application that sets the
ANS parameter.
Step 15 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G694 Configure the PSM
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 2 From the Selector area, select the PSM slot. If the default parameters are present, continue with Step 3.
If not, click Add to add the Channel LOS Threshold and VOA Attenuation parameters. To add the ANS
parameters, see the “DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter” task on page 14-60 for instructions.
Table 14-4 Values for the ANS Parameters (amplifier)
Port ANS Parameter Value
Slot 16 (OPT-AMP C).Port COM-RX Channel LOS Threshold 35.0 dBm
Slot 16 (OPT-AMP C).Port LINE-TX Amplifier Working Mode Control Gain
Slot 16 (OPT-AMP C).Port LINE-TX Amplifier Tilt 0.0 dB
Slot 16 (OPT-AMP C).Port LINE-TX Power 1.0 dBm
Purpose This tasks configures the PSM behavior.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 Click the value of the ANS parameter that you want to modify and enter the new value specified in
Table 14-4. To modify the ANS parameters, see the “DLP-G681 Modify an ANS Parameter” task on
page 14-61 for instructions.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 6 Click Launch ANS.
Step 7 In the Apply Launch ANS dialog box, click Yes.
Step 8 In the Launch ANS confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Step 9 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 10 Verify the following in the Results column:
• Success - Changed —The parameter has been successfully changed with the ports in IS.
Step 11 Verify that the Set By column displays t he value “ANS” or “APC” as the application that sets the
ANS parameter.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G328 Add, Modify, or Delete ANS Parameters
Note It is recommended that you use the Cisco Transport Planner XML configuration file to provision the
ANS parameters instead of manually adding all the parameters in CTC. ANS provisioning parameters
must be manually changed only by Cisco qualified personnel. Provisioning the ANS parameters
incorrectly (either as preamplifier or booster input power thresholds) may impact traffic.
Table 14-5 Values for the ANS Parameters (PSM)
Port ANS Parameter Value
Slot 14(PSM).Port W-RX VOA Attenuation 3.0 dB
Slot 14(PSM).Port W-RX Channel LOS Threshold 15.0 dB
Slot 14(PSM).Port P-RX VOA Attenuation 10.0 dB
Slot 14(PSM).Port P-RX Channel LOS Threshold 20.0 dB
Purpose This procedure allows you to add, modify, or delete ANS parameters for a
DWDM node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to add, modify, or delete the ANS
parameters. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the following tasks:
• Complete the “DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter” task on page 14-60.
• Complete the “DLP-G681 Modify an ANS Parameter” task on page 14-61.
• Complete the “DLP-G542 Delete an ANS Parameter” task on page 14-63.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 2 Click Add. The Add ANS Parameter dialog box appears.
Step 3 Select the ANS parameter from the Parameter drop-down list.
Step 4 In the Port Selection area, complete the following fields:
• Type—Displays the card type.
• Shelf—Choose the shelf from the drop-down list.
• Slot—Choose the card from the Slot drop-down list. The drop-down list lists all the cards that
support the ANS parameter selected in Step 3.
• Port—Choose the port from the Port drop-down list. The drop-down list lists all the ports for the
card selected in Step 4 that support the ANS parameter selected in Step 3.
Step 5 Choose the granularity as OTS or OCH from the Granularity drop-down list.
Note Granularity can be set only for the ANS parameters applied to the LINE-RX, LINE-TX,
COM-RX, or COM-TX ports.
Step 6 Type or choose the value for the ANS parameter in the Value field.
Step 7 Click OK.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This tasks adds an ANS parameter.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G681 Modify an ANS Parameter
Note Do not begin this procedure until the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update file is created for the node.
You must import the new NE Update file and run ANS to recalculate the ANS parameters for the node.
Caution Modifying ANS parameters on one node requires ANS upgrades on all the other nodes within the
network. Do not begin this procedure until you are prepared to complete the upgrade on all the network
nodes.
Caution This procedure will affect the service of unprotected circuits that pass through the node.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 2 Click the value of the ANS parameter that you want to modify and enter the new value.
Note If the new or updated value is not within the default range specified in Table 14-6, an error
message is displayed.
Note When you modify the parameter value in the Value field, the active value is updated with the
modified value after you run ANS.
Purpose This task modifies ANS parameters.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 14-6 Ranges, Values, and Edit Options for the ANS Parameters
ANS Parameter Range/Value Editable with Port in IS
OSC LOS Threshold -50.0 to +30.0 dBm Yes
Channel LOS Threshold -50.0 to +30.0 dBm Yes
Amplifier Working Mode Control Power, Control Gain,
Fixed Gain
Yes1
Amplifier Gain 0.0 to 40.0 dB No
Amplifier Tilt -15.0 to +15.0 dB No
OSC Power -24.0 to 0.0 dBm No
14-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 5 Click Launch ANS.
Step 6 In the Apply Launch ANS dialog box, click Yes.
Step 7 In the Launch ANS confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Step 8 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 9 Verify the following in the Results column:
• Success - Changed —The parameter has been successfully changed with the ports in IS.
Step 10 Verify that the Set By column displays t he value “ANS” or “APC” as the application that sets the
ANS parameter.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Raman Ratio 0.0 to 100.0% Yes
Raman Total Power 100 to 450 mW Yes
Raman Expected Gain2 0.0 to 12.0 dB Yes
Power -30.0 to +50 dBm Yes3
WXC Dithering 0 to 33 No
Min Expected Span Loss 0.0 to 60.0 dB No
Max Expected Span Loss 0.0 to 60.0 dB No
VOA Attenuation 0 to 30 dB Yes4
1. Per-channel power and tilt can be edited when the Amplifier Working Mode is Control Gain or Control Power and
Fixed Gain when Amplifier Working Mode is Fixed Gain
2. Editable only on OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards.
3. The APC increases or decreases power by 0.5dB till the new power setpoint is reached. The APC-OUT-OF-RANGE
alarm is raised if the updated power setpoint is outside the expected range.
4. VOA Attenuation associated with a single channel path can be edited when the working mode is
Constant Power Value; VOA Attenuation associated with aggregated paths can be edited when the working mode
is Constant Attenuation Value.
Table 14-6 Ranges, Values, and Edit Options for the ANS Parameters
ANS Parameter Range/Value Editable with Port in IS
14-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G542 Delete an ANS Parameter
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 2 Click the ANS parameter you want to remove.
Note Only threshold related ANS parameters can be removed if the port is in service state.
Step 3 Click Remove, and then Yes.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This tasks removes an ANS parameter.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards
Warning This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you
work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar
with standard practices for preventing accidents. To see translations of the warnings that appear in
this publication, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information document for the
appropriate Cisco chassis. Statement 274
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Warning Class I (CDRH) and Class 1M (IEC) laser products. Statement 1055
Purpose This procedure describes how to install the DWDM multiplexer,
demultiplexer, wavelength selective switch, wavelength cross-connect,
OADM, OSC, PSM, and optical amplifier cards.
Tools/Equipment • Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout
• The following C-band or L-band cards, as required by your site plan:
– C-band: OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, 32MUX-O,
40-MUX-C, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE,
32WSS, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C,
TDC-CC, TDC-FC, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, OPT-AMP-17-C,
OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17,
OPT-EDFA-24, MMU, 4MD-xx.x, AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x,
AD-4C-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x, AD-4B-xx.x, OSCM, OSC-CSM, and
PSM cards (as applicable)
– L-band: 32WSS-L, 32DMX-L, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, and
PSM cards (as applicable)
• The ONS 15454 NE defaults file if the node uses custom NE defaults
Prerequisite Procedures • “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” section on page 3-34
• “NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files,
page 14-3
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update
Configuration File, page 14-47
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector. Do
not view directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments
(for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm may pose an eye
hazard. Statement 1056
Warning High-performance devices on this card can get hot during operation. To remove the card, hold it by
the faceplate and bottom edge. Allow the card to cool before touching any other part of it or before
placing it in an antistatic bag. Statement 201
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge (ESD) wristband when working with a powered
ONS 15454. For detailed instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Electrostatic
Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms.
Note For United States installations, complies with the United States Federal Drug Administration Code of
Federal Regulations Title 21, Sections 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser
Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.
Note If protective clips are installed on the backplane connectors of the cards, remove the clips before
installing the cards.
Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously.
Step 1 If the node requires a custom NE default settings to be installed on the node, complete the “NTP-G136
Import Network Element Defaults” procedure on page 24-24. If not, continue with Step 2. (For
information about the ONS 15454 NE defaults, refer to Appendix H, “Network Element Defaults.”)
Caution If custom NE defaults are required, they must be installed before you install the DWDM cards.
Step 2 Verify that you have one of the following guides for the DWDM card installation:
• The slots that were preprovisioned when you completed the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport
Planner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on page 14-47.
• The Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout report (see Table 14-1 on page 14-4).
Step 3 If the slots are preprovisioned, continue with Step 4. If you are using the Cisco Transport Planner shelf
layout report, complete the “DLP-G348 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Shelf Layout Report” task on
page 14-67.
Step 4 Remove a DWDM card from its packaging, then remove the protective caps from the backplane
connectors. (Safety caps are typically yellow.)
Step 5 Open the card latches/ejectors.
14-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 6 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the slot guide rails until the card plugs into the
receptacle at the back of the slot. The correct slot is designated by the Cisco Transport Planner shelf
layout.
Step 7 Verify that the card is inserted correctly. Simultaneously close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged in. Ensure
that you cannot insert the card any further.
After installing the card, the following LED activity will occur:
• The card’s LEDs will go through a sequence of activities (turn on, turn off, blinking.) This will take
2 to 3 minutes.
• The ACT LED turns on.
• The signal fail (SF) LED might persist until all card ports connect to their far-end counterparts and
a signal is present.
Step 8 If the card does not boot up properly, or the LED activity is not similar to the activity in Step 7, check
the following:
• When a physical card type does not match the type of card provisioned for that slot in CTC, the card
might not boot. If a DWDM card does not boot, open CTC and ensure that the slot is not provisioned
for a different card type before assuming that the card is faulty.
• If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power.
• If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off and a minor
equipment mismatch alarm appears on the CTC Alarms tab.
• If the red FAIL LED is on continuously or the LEDs behave erratically, the card is not installed.
If any of conditions are present, remove the card and repeat Steps 4 to 7. If the card does not boot up
properly the second time, it might be defective. Contact your next level of support.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 5 through 8 until all the DWDM cards are installed in the node.
Step 10 If an OPT-PRE card (or OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-EDFA-17, or OPT-EDFA-24
card in OPT-PRE card mode) is installed, complete one of the following steps for each OPT-PRE card
based on the Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout. If an OPT-PRE is not installed, you have completed
this procedure.
• If the Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout does not include DCUs, install a patchcord and 4-dB
attenuator with a tolerance of +/–1 dB between the OPT-PRE or OPT-AMP-L DC TX and RX ports
for each OPT-PRE or OPT-AMP-L card installed in the shelf.
• If the shelf layout includes DCUs, complete the “NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion
Compensating Units” procedure on page 14-68 for each side of the shelf that requires a DCU.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
14-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G348 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Shelf Layout Report
Step 1 Display the Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout report for your site. The report can be viewed in
Cisco Transport Planner. It can also be viewed as a JPEG graphic. Refer to the Cisco Transport Planner
DWDM Operations Guide for information about generating shelf layout reports.
Step 2 Review the following installation information:
• Rack—Indicates the rack in the node where the cards must be installed.
• Shelf—Indicates the shelf in the rack where the cards must be installed. Shelf options include:
– Flex Shelf—The ONS 15216 FlexLayer mechanical shelf houses Y-cable modules. Flex shelf
positions are numbered 1 to 4 from left to right.
– DCU Shelf—The Cisco ONS 15216 dispersion compensation shelf assembly houses DCUs.
DCU positions are numbered 1 to 2 from left to right.
– Shelf-ANSI-n or Shelf-ETSI-n—The ONS 15454 shelf assembly houses ONS 15454 common,
DWDM, and client cards. Positions in this type of shelf are numbered 1 to 17 from left to right.
Multiple shelves might appear.
• Slot—Indicates the slot in the specific shelf where the cards must be installed:
– Unit Name (Product ID)— Identifies the card by its Product ID.
– Unit Description—Identifies the card by its name.
• Unit Side—Identifies the side of the node that the specific card is serving: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H.
• Unit Plug-in Modules—Identifies the type and number of PPMs that will be used with specific TXP,
MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards.
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task describes how to use the Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout
report to install cards in a DWDM node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units
Warning Class I (CDRH) and Class 1M (IEC) laser products. Statement 1055
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector. Do
not view directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments
(for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm may pose an eye
hazard. Statement 1056
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. For detailed
instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding
Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms.
Note For US installations, complies with the US Federal Drug Administration Code of Federal Regulations
Title 21, Sections 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated
July 26, 2001.
Step 1 Remove the DCU from its packaging, then remove the protective caps from the connectors. (Safety caps
are typically yellow.)
Step 2 Use both hands to push the DCU all the way into the chassis until the connector spring lock on the right
side of the module clicks into place.
Step 3 Open the cover with the laser warning on the connector adapter and then connect the cable connector.
Note The Side A DCU is commonly installed on the left side and the Side B DCU is commonly
installed on the right side.
Note Double-check the placement of the DCU card(s) with your Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout.
If you install the wrong DCU in a slot, remove the DCU and install the correct one.
Purpose This procedure describes how to install the DCUs for DWDM shelves.
Tools/Equipment DCUs
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” section on page 3-34
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Warning Class 1 laser product. Statement 1008
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector. Do
not view directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments
(for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm may pose an eye
hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Class I (CDRH) and Class 1M (IEC) laser products. Statement 1055
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. For detailed
instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding
Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms.
Purpose This procedure describes how to install the ONS 15454 TXP, MXP,
AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G,
and OTU2_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L,
TXP_MR_10EX_C, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, 40E-TXP-C,
40ME-TXP-C, MXP_2.5G_10G, MXPP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C,
MXP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L,
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, 40ME-MXP-C,
AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G,
or OTU2_XP cards (as applicable)
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” section on page 3-34
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
14-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Caution A fan-tray assembly (15454E-CC-FTA for the ETSI shelf or 15454-CC-FTA for the ANSI shelf) must
be installed in a shelf where a GE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card is installed.
Note For US installations, complies with the US Federal Drug Administration Code of Federal Regulations
Title 21, Sections 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated
July 26, 2001.
Note If protective clips are installed on the backplane connectors of the cards, remove the clips before
installing the cards.
Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously.
Step 1 Display the Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout (see Table 14-1 on page 14-4) for the node where you
will install the card.
Step 2 Remove the card from its packaging, then remove the protective clips from the backplane connectors.
Step 3 Open the card latches/ejectors.
Step 4 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails until the card plugs into the
receptacle at the back of the slot designated by the Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout.
Step 5 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and simultaneously close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches and ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the
backplane. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any further.
Note If you install the card in the wrong slot, CTC will raise a MEA (EQPT) alarm. To clear this
alarm, open the latches, slide the card out, then insert it in the correct slot.
After you install the card, the FAIL, ACT, and SF LEDs will go through a sequence of activities. They
will turn on, turn off, and blink at different points. After approximately 2 to 3 minutes, the ACT or
ACT/STBY LED turns on. The SF LED might persist until all card ports connect to their far-end
counterparts and a signal is present.
Note Until a card is provisioned, the card is in the standby condition and the ACT/STBY LED remains
amber in color.
Step 6 If the card does not boot up properly or the LEDs do not progress through the activities described in
Step 5, check the following:
• When a physical card type does not match the type of card provisioned for that slot in CTC, the card
might not boot and CTC will show a MEA (EQPT) alarm. If the card does not boot, open CTC and
ensure that the slot is not provisioned for a different card type before assuming that the card is faulty.
14-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power.
• If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
• If the red FAIL LED is on continuously or the LEDs behave erratically, the card is not installed
properly.
If any of these conditions are present, remove the card and repeat Steps 3 to 5. If the card does not boot
up properly the second time, contact your next level of support.
Step 7 If the card requires a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP) connector, complete one of the
following tasks:
• DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72—Complete this task to install the physical SFP or XFP
into the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
• DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot, page 14-73—(Optional) Complete this task if you do
not have the physical SFP or XFP and need to preprovision the SFP or XFP slot.
Note SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, or line card port to link the port with
the fiber-optic network. For more information, refer to the Hardware Specifications and the
Installing GBIC, SFP, SFP+, and XFP Optics Modules in ONS Platforms documents.
Note PPM provisioning determines how the SFPs and XFPs are used in CTC. PPM provisioning
procedures are provided in Chapter 11, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.”
Step 8 If you need to remove an SFP or XFP, complete the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP” task on
page 14-74.
Note You will provision the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP cards after you complete all node turn-up procedures. TXP and MXP provisioning
procedures are provided in Chapter 11, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.”
Note Until a card is provisioned, the card is in the standby condition and the ACT/STBY LED remains
amber in color.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
14-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP
Warning The intrabuilding ports of the ONS 15454 are suitable for connection to intrabuilding or unexposed
wiring or cabling only. The intrabuilding ports of the ONS 15454 must not be metallically connected
to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as
intrabuilding interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4), and
require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient
protection while connecting these interfaces metallically to the OSP wiring.
Warning The intrabuilding ports of the ONS 15454 are suitable for connection only to shielded intrabuilding
cabling, grounded at both ends.
Note In case of a full C-band tunable XFP, it is mandatory to use optical cables that are fully compliant with
NEBS Telcordia GR-326-CORE, Issue 3 recommendation. The Cisco patchcord indicated by the
Cisco Transport Planner (CTP) tool is fully compliant with NEBS Telcordia GR-326-CORE, Issue 3
recommendation.
Note The CC-FTA fan tray assembly must be installed in a shelf where CWDM and DWDM SFPs or XFPs
are used.
Note SFPs and XFPs are hot-swappable I/O devices that plug into a TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP port to link the port with the fiber-optic
network. For more information, see to the Hardware Specifications and the Installing GBIC, SFP, SFP+,
and XFP Optics Modules in ONS Platforms documents.
Note If you have installed a fan tray lower than CC-FTA on the MSTP unit, you must have the TXP_MR_10E
transponder card (only if you have installed ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP on the TXP_MR_10E card) installed
in Slot 5, 6, 12, or 13. This limitation does not exist for fan-tray versions higher than CC-FTA.
Purpose This task installs SFPs and XFPs into TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP
cards. SFPs and XFPs provide a fiber interface to the card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-73
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note SFPs and XFPs are generically called PPMs in CTC. After installing multirate SFPs or XFPs, multirate
PPMs must be provisioned in CTC. To complete the provisioning of the pluggable port, complete the
“DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on page 11-152.
Step 1 Verify that the SFP or XFP is correct for your network and TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card (see Chapter 11, “Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. Ensure that you are installing compatible SFPs or XFPs, for
example, SX to SX or LX/LH to LX/LH.
Step 2 Install the SFP or XFP:
• For a mylar tab SFP or XFP— Slide the SFP or XFP into the slot.
• For an actuator/button SFP or XFP— Slide the SFP or XFP all the way into the slot until you hear
a click.
• For a bail clasp SFP or XFP— Latch (flip upwards) the bail clasp before inserting the SFP or XFP
into the slot and then slide it into the slot.
Note SFP and XFPs are keyed to prevent incorrect installation.
Do not remove the protective caps from the SFP or XFP until you are ready to attach the network
fiber-optic cable.
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot
Note SFPs and XFPs are generically called PPMs in CTC. After installing multirate SFPs or XFPs, multirate
PPMs must be provisioned in CTC.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the TXP, MXP,
AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you
want to provision SFPs or XFPs.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Purpose This task preprovisions SFPs and XFPs, which connect fiber to TXP, MXP,
AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G,
and OTU2_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-74
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose the PPM slot number where the SFP or XFP is installed from the drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP or XFP from the drop-down list.
The drop-down list displays the number of PPMs that are available for provisioning. If only one port
is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Port Modules pane. The row in the Pluggable
Port Modules pane turns light blue. The Actual Equipment Type column remains blank until the actual
SFP or XFP is installed. After the SFP or XFP is installed, the row in the pane turns white and the
Actual Equipment Type column shows the equipment name.
Step 6 Verify that the PPM appears in the list in the Pluggable Port Modules pane. If it does not, repeat Steps 3
through 5.
Step 7 Repeat the task to provision a second PPM, if needed. If not, continue with Step 8.
Step 8 Click OK.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP
Note This task removes the SFP or XFP hardware. To delete the provisioning for an SFP or XFP, see the
“DLP-G280 Delete a PPM” procedure on page 11-161.
Step 1 If a fiber is connected, disconnect the network fiber cable from the SFP or XFP LC-type connector.
Step 2 Release the SFP or XFP from the slot by performing one of the following actions (depending on which
latch is on the SFP or XFP):
• For a mylar tab SFP or XFP— Pull out the mylar tab.
• For an actuator/button SFP or XFP— Press the actuator/button.
• For a bail clasp SFP or XFP— Unlatch the bail clasp and swing it downward.
Step 3 Slide the SFP or XFP out of the slot.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task removes SFPs and XFPs from TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP
cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-75
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note Removing an SFP from the client ports of a Y-cable protection group card causes an IMPROPRMVL
(PPM) alarm. The working port raises the CR,IMPROPRMVL,SA alarm and the protected port raises
the MN,IMPROPRMVL,NSA alarm. The severity on the client ports is changed according to the
protection switch state.
NTP-G123 Install the Filler Cards
Warning Blank faceplates (filler panels) serve three important functions: they prevent exposure to hazardous
voltages and currents inside the chassis; they contain electromagnetic interference (EMI) that might
disrupt other equipment; and they direct the flow of cooling air through the chassis. Do not operate
the system unless all cards and faceplates are in place. Statement 156
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. For detailed
instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding
Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms.
Caution In an ONS 15454 shelf assembly, a filler card (Cisco P/N 15454-FILLER) can be installed in any unused
traffic or AIC-I card slots (Slots 1 through 6, 9, and 12 through 17). These cards are detected by CTC in
Software Release 6.0 and later.
Note In an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, the line card fillers (15454-M-FILLER) can be installed in any
unused line card slots (Slots 1 through 7), and a control card filler (15454-MT-FILLER) can be installed
in any unused control card slot (Slot 1 or Slot 8). In an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, the line card filler
(15454-M-FILLER) can be installed in any unused line card slots (Slot 2 or Slot 3). CTC does not detect
the filler card in Release 9.2; however, CTC may detect it in later software releases.
Purpose This procedure explains how to install the filler cards (blank faceplates).
The filler card aids in maintaining proper air flow and electro-magnetic
interference (EMI) requirements.
Tools/Equipment Filler cards
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
14-76
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Open the card ejectors.
Step 2 Slide the card along the guide rails into the correct slot.
Step 3 Close the ejectors.
Step 4 Repeat for any remaining unused card slots.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G239 Add and Delete Passive Units
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to an ONS 15454 node on the network.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G543 Add Passive Units Manually” task on page 14-76 to manually preprovision a
passive unit.
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G544 Delete a Passive Unit” task on page 14-77 to delete a passive unit.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G543 Add Passive Units Manually
Purpose This procedure explains how to add or delete passive units on a DWDM
node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task preprovisions passive units (patch panels and DCUs) in CTC.
Preprovisioning of the passive units is normally performed when you
complete the“NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update
Configuration File” section on page 14-47. Use this task if you need to
manually preprovision a passive unit. All slot preprovisioning must be
based upon the Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout prepared for your site.
Tools/Equipment Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout table or JPG file.
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-77
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 In the node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Passive Cards tabs.
Step 2 Click Create. The Create Passive Card dialog box appears.
Step 3 Choose the passive unit from the Card Type drop-down list and click OK.
The passive unit is installed in the first available slot in the rack.
Note You can also add a passive unit in the multishelf view by right-clicking the slot inside the rack.
Refer to the NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node procedure.
Note If you need to view the details of the passive units that have been installed on a node, click the
Inventory tab.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G544 Delete a Passive Unit
Step 1 In the node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Passive Cards tabs.
Step 2 Click the passive unit you want to delete.
Step 3 Click Delete, then click Yes.
Note You can also delete a passive unit in the multi-shelf view. Refer to NTP-G147 Delete a Passive
Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node procedure.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task deletes a passive unit.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-78
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs
Warning Class I (CDRH) and Class 1M (IEC) laser products. Statement 1055
Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS, Issue 5 standard, do not use optical fibers with exposed
metallic ferrules. Exposed metallic ferrules may result in ESD damage to the system and can be service
affecting.
Note For US installations, complies with the US Federal Drug Administration Code of Federal Regulations
Title 21, Sections 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated
July 26, 2001.
Note In this procedure, you will generally connect fibers in an Side B-to-Side A or Side B-to-Side B pattern
only. “Side A” refers to cards and ports in Slots 1 through 8. “Side B” refers to cards and ports installed
in Slots 10 through 17.
Note You will install fiber-optic cables on TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G,
and OTU2_XP cards later in the chapter during the “NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between
Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes” procedure on page 14-82.
Step 1 Refer to the “DLP-G349 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report” task on
page 14-80 to install cables to the DWDM cards.
Step 2 Verify that the appropriate fiber optic cables are available to complete the connections shown in the
Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections report:
a. Count the number of connections listed in the Internal Connections and verify that you have the
same number of cables.
b. Measure the distance between Origination Position and Destination Position for each connection,
then verify that the fiber lengths will fit each one.
Purpose This procedure attaches fiber-optic cables on the DWDM cards and DCUs.
Tools/Equipment Fiber-optic cables
Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68
(as applicable)
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
14-79
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 Complete the for all fiber connections, even new fiber. Dust particles can degrade performance. Put caps
on any fiber connectors that are not used.
Step 4 On the front of the fiber-storage tray (usually installed below the node you are fibering), push the tabs
on the left and right sides inward to release the lock on the tray.
Step 5 Pull the fiber-storage tray away from the shelf until it is fully opened.
Step 6 Open the fold-down door that at the bottom of the shelf assembly to expose the cable-routing channel
(Figure 14-8).
Figure 14-8 Managing Cables on the Front Panel
Step 7 Using the Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report, connect one end of the fiber cable plug
into the Origination Position.
Step 8 Route the fiber cable on the card faceplate through the fiber clip on the faceplate, if provided. (Fiber clips
are factory-attached to the faceplates of 32MUX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-O, OSCM, OSC-CSM, OPT-PRE,
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 cards.)
Step 9 Route the fiber cable through the cable-routing channel and cutout on the appropriate side of the shelf
assembly, as necessary.
Step 10 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in the fiber-storage tray
(Figure 14-9).
FAN FAIL CRIT MAJ MIN
145262
Cable-routing
channel posts
Fold down
front door
14-80
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 14-9 Fiber-Storage Tray
Caution When you close the fiber-storage tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the fiber-storage tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 11 Route the fiber cable out either side of the fiber-storage tray as necessary.
Step 12 Plug the other end of the cable into the Destination position.
Note Cards display an SF LED after the OSC terminations are created (see the “NTP-G38 Provision
OSC Terminations” procedure on page 14-126) if transmit and receive fibers are not connected
correctly. For example, an RX port is connected to another RX port or a TX port is connected to
another TX port.
Step 13 Repeat Steps 4 through 12 until you have connected the intra-shelf fibers according to the
Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections report.
Step 14 To close the fiber-storage tray, push the tray back toward the rack until it locks into place.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G349 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report
134609
West
entry/exit
East
entry/exit
Purpose This task describes how to use the Cisco Transport Planner Internal
Connections report to install cables on the DWDM cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-81
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Display the Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections report for the node that you are provisioning.
The Internal Connections report is presented in two views, a patchcord installation view and a software
provisioning view. The Patchcord installation view lists all the patchcord connections that the installer
has to mechanically cable within the site between the different ports of the DWDM cards. The SW
Provisioning view contains all the connections to be manually set or removed via CTC with respect to
the default connections that are automatically generated by the system software running on the node.
The tables identify the patchcords that you must cable by their endpoints. Starting from the left side of
report, Position identifies the fiber origination point. The location shown in the next Position to right is
the destination point for the fiber connection. The patchcord endpoints are identified by site, assembly
shelf, slot, and port number. Information provided by the Internal Connections Software report includes:
• Name—Displays the name of the site. On the SW provisioning view, this column indicates whether
the connection was automatically set, or should be manually set or removed via CTC.
• Position—The cable origination in the format is Rack.Shelf.Slot. For example, Rack#1.Shelf
Assembly 1.Slot 2 refers to Slot 2 in shelf assembly 1(DWDM) shelf of Rack 1. Refer to the Cisco
Transport Planner Site Dialog box for rack and shelf names and locations.
• Unit—The ONS 15454 DWDM card (unit) that is installed in the Position’s slot. This is where the
patchcord originates.
• Port Number—The port number where the patchcord connection originates.
• Port ID—(Software provisioning view only) The port identifier shown in TL1 for the Position-1
connection.
• Port Label—The name of the physical port printed on the DWDM card’s front panel and shown in
CTC card view.
• Attenuator—If attenuation is required, the product ID (PID) of the bulk fixed attenuator is shown.
“Att-Lpbk-4dB” indicates that the DC TX and DC RX ports on an OPT-PRE (or OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, or OPT-AMP-C card provisioned in OPT-PRE card mode) card are to be connected
with an attenuated loopback that is shipped with the OPT-PRE card. This parameter also indicates
when an internal attenuator must be placed between the OPT-PRE DC-TX and DC-RX ports on the
when a DCU is equipped.
Note If the Attenuator field is blank, no attenuation is needed.
• Position—The cable termination in the format is Rack.Shelf.Slot.
• Unit—The ONS 15454 DWDM card that is installed in the Position’s slot. This is where the cabling
terminates.
• Port—The port number where the patchcord connection terminates.
• Port ID—(Software provisioning view only) The port identifier shown in TL1 for the Position-2
connection.
• Port Label—The name of the physical port printed on the DWDM card’s front panel and shown in
CTC card view.
• P/F—Indicates whether you must create the connection manually in CTC. A Yes appearing in this
column means that you must create the connection manually.
Caution Failure to create the required manual connections will prevent the node from turning up properly
14-82
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes
Step 1 Determine which type of node you are fibering.
The following node types require the listed equipment. The cards and patch panels should already be
installed before you begin this procedure.
• Terminal node:
– One of 32DMX-O card and 32MUX-O card, and one standard or deep patch panel tray
– One of 32WSS card and 32DMX or 32DMX-O card, and one standard or deep patch panel tray
– One of 32WSS-L card and 32DMX-L card, and one standard or deep patch panel tray
– One of 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE card and 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE card, and one standard
or deep patch panel tray
– One of 40-MUX-C card and 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE card, and one standard or deep patch
panel tray
– One 40-SMR1-C card and one 15216-MD-40-ODD,15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD (ONS 15216 40 or 48-channel mux/demux) patch panel
– One 40-SMR2-C card and one 15216-MD-40-ODD,15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD (ONS 15216 40 or 48-channel mux/demux) patch panel
Purpose This procedure routes fiber-optic cables from the DWDM optical cards in
a terminal, hub, or ROADM node to the patch panel, and from the patch
panel to TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment • See Step 1 for a list of equipment specific to each node type.
• All node types require fiber-optic cables, terminated with a single
LC-type connector on each end.
• Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures • In the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
– “DLP-G28 Install the Fiber Patch-Panel Tray”
– “DLP-G29 Install the Fiber-Storage Tray”
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 14-78
• DLP-G348 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Shelf Layout Report,
page 14-67
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
14-83
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
– One 80-WXC-C card, one 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD
unit, and one 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN unit, and
one 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM unit
• Hub node:
– Two of 32MUX-O cards and 32DMX-O or 32DMX cards, and two standard or deep patch panel
trays
– Two of 32WSS cards and 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards, and two standard or deep patch panel
trays
– Two of 32WSS-L cards and 32DMX-L cards, and two standard or deep patch panel trays
– Two of 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE cards and 40-DMX-C or 40DMX-CE cards, and two standard
or deep patch panel trays
– Two 40-SMR1-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panels
– Two 40-SMR2-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panels
• ROADM node:
– Two 32WSS cards, optionally, two 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards, and two standard or deep patch
panel trays
– Two 32WSS-L cards, optionally, two 32DMX-L cards, and two standard or deep patch panel
trays
– Two 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE cards, optionally, two 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE cards, and
two standard or deep patch panel trays
– Two 40-SMR1-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panels
– Two 40-SMR2-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panels
– Two 80-WXC-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD units and 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or
15216-MD-48-EVEN units and two 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM units
• Expanded ROADM node:
– Two of 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE cards and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards, and two 40-channel
patch panel trays, preinstalled with MPO-LC cables
Note If you are using standard patch panels, you will also need eight multifiber push-on (MPO)
cables per standard patch panel. MPO cables are fiber-optic cables terminated on one end
with one MPO connector and with eight LC-type connectors on the other end. Deep patch
panel trays come preinstalled with MPO cables.
Step 2 On the front of the patch panel tray, push the tabs on the left and right sides inward to release the lock
on the tray.
Step 3 Pull the patch panel tray away from the shelf until it is fully opened.
Note The red latch inside the patch panel tray at the top left corner will automatically click and lock
the tray in the open position when you have fully opened the tray.
14-84
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 4 Depending on the type of patch panel tray you are using:
• Standard patch panel tray:
– Complete the “DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and
32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-85.
– Complete the “DLP-G316 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray” task
on page 14-89.
• Deep patch panel tray:
– Complete the “DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and
32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-90.
– Complete the “DLP-G357 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray or
40-Channel Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-97.
• 40-channel patch panel tray:
– As needed, complete the “DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel
Tray” task on page 14-93 to route the MPO cables out of the right side of the tray so they can
be easily connected to cards installed on the right side of the shelf (Slots 12 through 17).
– Complete the “DLP-G428 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and
40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE Cards in an Expanded ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the
40-Channel Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-95.
• 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel:
– Complete the “DLP-G530 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or
80-WXC-C Cards in a ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 15216-MD-40 or 15216-MD-48
Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-99
Step 5 To close the patch panel tray, unlock it by pressing the red latch in the top left corner, and then push the
tray back toward the rack until it locks into place.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
14-85
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray
Note For a ROADM or hub node, two patch panels will be used, one for Side B side and one for Side A. The
Side B 32WSS/32DMX card will connect to the Side B patch panel. The Side A 32WSS/32DMX card
will connect to the Side A patch panel.
Step 1 Choose either the Side B or Side A to cable the 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards (or the 32WSS and
32DMX cards for a ROADM node).
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from 32MUX-O,
32WSS, 32DMX-O, and 32DMX cards in a terminal, hub, or ROADM node
to the standard patch panel.
Tools/Equipment The following node types require the following equipment. The cards and
patch panels should already be installed before you begin this procedure.
Terminal node:
• One 32DMX-O card
• One 32MUX-O card
• One standard patch panel tray
• Eight fiber-optic MPO cables: each MPO cable is terminated on one
end with one MPO connector and on the other end with eight LC-type
connectors
Hub node:
• Two 32DMX-O cards
• Two 32MUX-O cards
• Two standard patch panel trays
• Sixteen fiber-optic MPO cables: each MPO cable is terminated on one
end with one MPO connector and on the other end with eight LC-type
connectors
ROADM node:
• Two 32WSS cards
• Two 32DMX cards
• Two standard patch panel trays
• Sixteen fiber-optic MPO cables: each MPO cable is terminated on one
end with one MPO connector and on the other end with eight LC-type
connectors
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 14-78
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
14-86
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 On the patch panel, pull up firmly on the two latches and use them to slide the patch panel up until it
snaps in place above the tray (Figure 14-10).
Figure 14-10 Using the Patch Panel Latches to Slide the Patch Panel Away from the Tray
Step 3 At the 32WSS or 32MUX-O card in the node, plug the MPO connector of an MPO cable (Figure 14-11)
into the top Add RX (30.3–36.6) port of the card. If you are connecting a subsequent MPO cable, plug
the MPO connector into the first vacant Add RX card port below the last MPO cable that was installed.
134825
Patch-panel
latches
Patch-panel
latches
MXP/TXP-DWDM
connections
MPO fan-out connections
and slack
Patch-panel
bar
14-87
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 14-11 MPO Cable
.
Step 4 Route the MPO cable slack through the patch panel tray as necessary.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 5 While facing the front of the patch panel, at the rear side of the patch panel, plug the eight LC-connector
fan-out cables on the MPO cable into their corresponding connectors on the bottom row of the patch
panel. You should plug the fan-out cables from left to right (as you face the patch panel), following the
numbers tagged (1 through 8) on the cables.
Figure 14-12 shows the patch panel connectors from the rear of the patch panel tray. Figure 14-13 shows
the assigned wavelengths for each port on the patch panel, as indicated at the top of the patch panel bar.
The numbers on the patch panel bar correspond to a wavelength on the ITU grid.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
134826
MPO connector
To the Add/Drop port
on a 32WSS, 40-WSS-C,
or 32-MUX-O card
LC-type connectors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
14-88
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 14-12 Rear View of the Patch Panel
.
Figure 14-13 Top View of the Patch Panel Bar
Step 6 As necessary, repeat Steps 3 through 5 for the remaining three Add RX ports on the 32WSS or
32MUX-O card, until all 32 LC connectors on the bottom row of the rear of the patch panel are
connected.
Step 7 At the adjacent 32DMX or 32DMX-O card in the same side of the shelf, plug the MPO connector of an
MPO cable into the top Drop TX (30.3–36.6) port of the 32DMX or 32DMX-O card. If you are
connecting a subsequent MPO cable, plug the MPO connector into the first vacant Drop TX card port
below the last MPO cable that was installed.
Step 8 Route the MPO cable slack through the patch panel tray as necessary.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 9 While facing the front of the patch panel, at the rear of the patch panel, plug the eight LC-connector
fan-out cables on the MPO cable into their corresponding connectors on the top row of the patch panel.
You should plug the fan-out cables from left to right (as you face the patch panel), following the numbers
tagged (1 through 8) on the cables.
Step 10 As necessary, repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the remaining three Drop TX ports on the 32DMX or DMX-O
card, until all 32 LC connectors on the top row of the rear of the patch panel are connected.
Step 11 For a hub or ROADM node, repeat Steps 2 through 10 to cable the other side of the shelf to the second
patch panel. For a terminal node, go to Step 12.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
134882
DEMUX connectors (TX port [drop] from the 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards)
MUX connectors (RX port [add] to the 32WSS or 32MUX-O cards)
134824
CLIENT
30.3
31.1
31.9
32.6
34.2
35.0
35.8
36.6
CLIENT
38.1
38.9
39.7
40.5
42.1
42.9
43.7
44.5
CLIENT
46.1
46.9
47.7
48.5
50.1
50.9
51.7
52.6
CLIENT
54.1
54.9
55.7
56.5
58.1
58.9
59.7
60.6
14-89
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G316 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray
Step 1 At the appropriate TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP
card, plug one end of a fiber-optic cable into the TX port of the DWDM adapter.
Step 2 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in the fiber-storage tray.
Caution When you close the fiber-storage tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the fiber-storage tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 3 On the DWDM (front) side of the patch panel, plug the other end of the cable into the connector on the
bottom row that corresponds to the wavelength to which the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP port is tuned. (See Figure 14-13 on page 14-88 for a view of the
wavelengths assigned to the patch panel connectors).
Figure 14-14 shows the patch panel connectors from the front of the patch panel tray.
Figure 14-14 Front View of the Patch Panel
.
Step 4 Plug one end of a fiber-optic cable into the RX port of the DWDM adapter on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from the patch panel to
TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP card(s)
Fiber-optic cable(s)
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 14-78
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
134823
DEMUX connectors (to the RX ports on the TXP/MXP cards)
MUX connectors (to the TX ports on the TXP/MXP cards)
14-90
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 5 On the DWDM (front) side of the patch panel, plug the other end of the cable into the connector on the
top row that corresponds to the wavelength to which the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card is tuned.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for all of the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP cards that you want to connect to this patch panel.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
.
DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from 32MUX-O,
32WSS, 32DMX-O, and 32DMX cards in a terminal, hub, or ROADM node
to the deep patch panel tray.
Tools/Equipment The following node types require the following equipment. The cards and
patch panels should already be installed before you begin this procedure.
For terminal nodes, one of the following card sets:
• One 32MUX-O card and one 32DMX-O or 32DMX card
• One 32WSS card and one 32DMX or 32DMX-O card
• One 32WSS-L cards and one 32DMX-L card
Plus one deep patch panel tray, preinstalled with MPO cables (each MPO
cable is terminated on one end with one MPO connector and on the other
end with eight LC-type connectors)
For hub nodes, one of the following card sets:
• Two 32MUX-O cards and two 32DMX-O or 32DMX cards
• Two 32WSS cards and two 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards
• Two 32WSS-L cards and two 32DMX-L cards
Plus two deep patch panel trays, preinstalled with MPO cables (each MPO
cable is terminated on one end with one MPO connector and on the other
end with eight LC-type connectors)
For ROADM nodes, one of the following card sets:
• Two 32WSS cards and two 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards
• Two 32WSS-L cards and two 32DMX-L cards
Plus two deep patch panel trays, preinstalled with MPO cables (each MPO
cable is terminated on one end with one MPO connector and on the other
end with eight LC-type connectors)
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 14-78
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
14-91
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note For a ROADM or hub node, two patch panels will be used, one for Side A (Slots 1 through 6) and one
for Side B (Slots 12 through 17). The Side B 32WSS/32DMX card will connect to the Side B patch panel.
The Side A 32WSS/32DMX card will connect to the Side A patch panel. The MPO cables in the patch
panel are preinstalled and routed out of the right side of the patch panel tray.
Step 1 Choose either Side A or Side B of the shelf to cable the 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards (or the 32WSS
and 32DMX cards for a ROADM node).
Step 2 On the patch panel, locate the MPO connectors (Figure 14-11 on page 14-87).
Step 3 Route the preinstalled MPO cables out of the tray to the right or left (Figure 14-15).
Figure 14-15 Deep Patch Panel Tray
Step 4 At the 32WSS or 32MUX-O card in the node, plug the MPO connector labeled 1 RX on an MPO cable
(Figure 14-11 on page 14-87) into the top Add RX (30.3–36.6) port of the card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 5 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-RX into the Add RX (38.1–44.5) port on the card.
Step 6 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-RX into the Add RX (46.1–52.5) port on the card.
Step 7 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-RX into the Add RX (54.1–60.6) port on the card.
Figure 14-16 shows the deep patch panel ports and corresponding wavelengths.
144679
LC-LC cables MPO-LC Cables
14 -92
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 14-16 Deep Patch Panel Port Wavelengths
Step 8 At the adjacent 32DMX or 32DMX-O card in the same side of the shelf, plug the MPO connector labeled
1 TX on the MPO cable (Figure 14-11 on page 14-87) into the top Drop TX (30.3–36.6) port of the card
(Figure 14-16).
Step 9 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-TX into the Drop TX (38.1–44.5) port on the card.
Step 10 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-TX into the Drop TX (46.1–52.5) port on the card.
Step 11 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-TX into the Drop TX (54.1–60.6) port on the card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 12 For a hub or ROADM node, repeat Steps 2 through 11 to cable the other side of the shelf to the second
patch panel. For a terminal node, go to Step 13.
Step 13 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
1532.6nm
1536.6nm
1531.8nm 1531.1nm 1530.3nm
1535.8nm 1535.0nm 1534.2nm
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
1540.5nm
1544.5nm
1539.7nm 1538.9nm 1538.1nm
1543.7nm 1542.9nm 1542.1nm
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
1548.5nm
1552.5nm
1547.7nm 1546.9nm 1546.1nm
1551.7nm 1550.9nm 1550.1nm
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
1556.5nm
1560.6nm
1555.7nm 1554.9nm 1554.1nm
1559.7nm 1558.9nm 1558.1nm
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
144676
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14-93
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray
Step 1 Carefully unwind all of the MPO cables in the patch panel tray and gently set the cables to the side of
the tray, out of the way of the internal hardware.
Figure 14-17 and Figure 14-18 show the 40-channel patch panel tray.
Figure 14-17 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray, Side View
Purpose This task reroutes the MPO cables that are preinstalled in the 40-channel
patch panel tray. The cables exit to the left when shipped; this task reroutes
the cables out of the right side of the tray. Use this task when you want to
connect these MPO cables to cards installed on the right side of the shelf
(Slots 12 through 17).
Tools/Equipment #2 Phillips screwdriver
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
159817
14-94
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 14-18 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray, Top View
Step 2 Slide each of the ten LC-port adapter packs upward.
Step 3 Unscrew the two screws in the bottom left bending limiter and remove the bending limiter.
Step 4 Remove the single screw below the center of the patch panel to free the patch panel hardware.
Step 5 Slide the patch panel to the left, and reinstall the screw below the center of the patch panel.
Step 6 Install the bending limiter to the right of the patch panel by installing the two screws.
Step 7 Carefully route all of the MPO cables around the bending limiter and out the exit on the right side of the
patch panel tray.
Step 8 Slide each of the ten LC-port adapter packs downward.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
159816
Bending limiter
14-95
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G428 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE Cards in an Expanded ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray
Note For a ROADM node, two patch panels will be used, one for the Side A (Slots 1 through 6) and one for
Side B (Slots 12 through 17). The Side B 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE card will connect to the Side B patch
panel. The Side A 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE will connect to the Side A patch panel. The MPO cables in
the patch panel are preinstalled and routed out of the left side of the patch panel tray.
Step 1 Choose either the Side A or Side B side of the shelf to cable the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and
40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards.
Note If you are cabling cards on Side B of the shelf, you must first perform the “DLP-G427 Reroute
Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-93 to route the MPO
cables out of the right side of the patch panel tray, or route the cables through a fiber storage
panel.
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from
40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards in an
expanded ROADM, terminal, or hub node to the 40-channel (80-port) patch
panel tray (15454-PP-80).
Tools/Equipment The following node types require the following equipment. The cards and
patch panels should already be installed before you begin this procedure.
Expanded terminal nodes:
• One 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE card
• One 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE card
Plus one 40-channel patch panel tray, preinstalled with MPO cables (each
MPO cable is terminated on one end with one MPO connector and on the
other end with eight LC-type connectors)
Expanded hub or ROADM nodes:
• Two 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE cards
• Two 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE cards
Plus two 40-channel patch panel trays, preinstalled with MPO cables (each
MPO cable is terminated on one end with one MPO connector and on the
other end with eight LC-type connectors)
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 14-78
DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray,
page 14-93
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
14-96
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 On the patch panel, locate the MPO cables and connectors.
Step 3 At the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE card in the node, plug the MPO connector labeled 1 RX on an MPO cable
(Figure 14-11 on page 14-87) into the top Add RX (30.3–35.8) port of the card.
Step 4 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-RX into the Add RX (36.6–42.1) port on the card.
Step 5 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-RX into the Add RX (42.9–48.5) port on the card.
Step 6 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-RX into the Add RX (49.3–54.9) port on the card.
Step 7 Plug the MPO connector labeled 5-RX into the Add RX (55.7–61.4) port on the card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Figure 14-19 shows the 40-channel patch panel ports and corresponding wavelengths.
Figure 14-19 40-Channel (15454-PP-80) Patch Panel Port Wavelengths
Step 8 At the adjacent 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE card in the same side of the shelf, plug the MPO connector
labeled 1 TX on the MPO cable into the top Drop TX (30.3–35.8) port of the card.
Step 9 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-TX into the Drop TX (36.6–42.1) port on the card.
Step 10 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-TX into the Drop TX (42.9–48.5) port on the card.
Step 11 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-TX into the Drop TX (49.3–54.9) port on the card.
Step 12 Plug the MPO connector labeled 5-TX into the Drop TX (55.7–61.4) port on the card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 13 Repeat Steps 2 through 12 to cable the other side of the shelf to the second patch panel.
159712
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
1557.3nm
1560.6nm
1558.1nm
1561.4nm
1555.7nm
1558.9nm
1556.5nm
1559.7nm
1548.5nm 1547.7nm 1546.9nm 1546.1nm
1545.3nm 1544.5nm 1543.7nm 1542.9nm
1542.1nm 1541.3nm 1540.5nm 1539.7nm
1538.9nm 1538.1nm 1537.4nm 1536.6nm
1535.8nm 1535.0nm 1534.2nm 1533.4nm
1532.6nm 1531.8nm 1531.1nm 1530.3nm
1551.7nm 1550.9nm 1550.1nm 1549.3nm
1554.9nm 1554.1nm 1553.3nm 1552.5nm
14-97
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 14 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G357 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray or 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray
Step 1 Refer to the Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report to connect the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card to the proper (Side A or Side B) patch
panel. Cisco Transport Planner designates Side A as Slots 1 to 6 and Side B as Slots 12 to 17. At the
appropriate TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card, plug
one end of a fiber-optic cable into the TX port of the DWDM adapter.
Step 2 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in the fiber-storage tray.
Caution When you close the fiber-storage tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the fiber-storage tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 3 Plug the other end of the cable into the RX connector on the patch panel that corresponds to the
wavelength to which the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP port is tuned. (See Figure 14-16 on page 14-92 for a view of the wavelengths assigned to the
deep patch panel connectors or Figure 14-19 on page 14-96 for a view of the wavelengths assigned to
the 40-channel patch panel connectors).
Step 4 On the patch panel tray, slide each of the ten LC-port adapter packs upward.
Step 5 Plug one end of a fiber-optic cable into the RX port of the DWDM adapter on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
Step 6 Plug the other end of the cable into the TX connector on the patch panel that corresponds to the
wavelength to which the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP port is tuned.
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from the deep patch
panel (32-channel) or 40-channel patch panel to TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP card(s)
Deep (32-channel) patch panel tray or 40-channel patch panel tray
Fiber-optic cable(s)
Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 14-78
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
14-98
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 7 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 for each TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP card that you want to connect to this patch panel.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
14-99
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G530 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or 80-WXC-C Cards in a ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 15216-MD-40 or 15216-MD-48 Patch Panel Tray
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from the 40-SMR1-C1,
40-SMR2-C1, or 80-WXC-C2 cards in a ROADM, terminal, or hub node to
the 15216-MD-40 or 15216-MD-48 patch panel tray.
1. The 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards can be connected only to the odd patch panel (15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD).
Tools/Equipment The following node types require the following equipment. The cards and
patch panels should already be installed before you begin this procedure.
Terminal nodes:
• One 40-SMR1-C1 and one 15216 Odd patch panel3
• One 40-SMR2-C1 and one 15216 Odd patch panel3
• One 80-WXC-C2 card, one 15216 Odd patch panel3, and one
15216 Even patch panel4, and one 15216-MD-ID-50 or
15216-MD-48-CM unit
Hub nodes:
• Two 40-SMR1-C1 cards and two 15216 Odd patch panels3
• Two 40-SMR2-C1 cards and two 15216 Odd patch panels3
ROADM nodes:
• Two 40-SMR1-C1 cards and two 15216 Odd patch panels3
• Two 40-SMR2-C1 cards and two 15216 Odd patch panels3
• Two 80-WXC-C2 cards, two 15216 Odd patch panels3, and
15216 Even patch panels4 and 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM
units
Prerequisite Procedures Install and route fiber-optic cables on the patch panel. For more
information, see the required installation guide:
• Installing the Cisco ONS 15216-MD-40-ODD and
15216-MD-40-EVEN Mux/Demux Patch Panels
• Installing the Cisco ONS 15216-EF-40-ODD and 15216-EF-40-EVEN
Mux/Demux Patch Panels
• Installing the Cisco ONS 15216-MD-48-ODD and
15216-MD-48-EVEN Mux/Demux Patch Panels
• Installing Cisco ONS 15216-MD-ID-50 Optical Interleaver and
Deinterleaver Pluggable
• Installing the Cisco ONS 15216-MD-48-CM Interleaver and
Deinterleaver Pluggable
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
14-100
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note For optical interconnections between the odd patch panel, interleaver and deinterleaver module, and the
even patch panel, see the “Installing Cisco ONS 15216-MD-ID-50 Optical Interleaver and Deinterleaver
Pluggable” or “Installing the Cisco ONS 15216-MD-48-CM Interleaver and Deinterleaver Pluggable”
guide.
Note For a ROADM node, two patch panels will be used, one for the Side A (Slots 1 through 6) and one for
Side B (Slots 12 through 17). The Side B 40-SMR1-C1 or 40-SMR2-C1 card will connect to the Side B
patch panel. The Side A 40-SMR1-C1 or 40-SMR2-C1 will connect to the Side A patch panel.
Step 1 Choose Side A or Side B of the shelf to route the cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or
80-WXC-C card.
Step 2 On the 15216 patch panel1,2, locate the COM TX port and insert one end of an LC-LC cable.
Step 3 Route the LC-LC cable through the 15216 patch panel1,2 to the 40-SMR1-C1 card, 40-SMR2-C1 card, or
80-WXC-C2 card on Side A of the node.
Step 4 Connect the other end of the LC-LC cable to the ADD RX port on the 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C cards
or the AD port on the 80-WXC-C card.
Step 5 On the 15216 patch panel1,2, locate the COM RX port and insert one end of an LC-LC cable.
Step 6 Route the LC-LC cable through the 15216 patch panel1,2 to the 40-SMR1-C1, 40-SMR2-C1 or
80-WXC-C2 card on Side A of the node.
Step 7 Connect the other end of the LC-LC cable to the DROP TX port on the 40-SMR1-C1, 40-SMR2-C1, or
80-WXC-C2 card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 8 For a hub or ROADM node, repeat Steps 2 through 7 to cable the other side of the shelf to the second
patch panel. For a terminal node, go to Step 9.
Note For a ROADM node using 40-SMR2-C1 cards, you must use a special reversed MPO cable
(15454-MPO-XMPO-2=) to connect the EXP ports of the Side A 40-SMR2-C1 to the EXP ports of the
Side B 40-SMR2-C1.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
2. The 80-WXC-C card can be connected to the odd patch panel (15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD) and the even patch panel (15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN ) in the
presence of interleaver and deinterleaver pluggable (15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM).
3. 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel.
4. 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel.
14-101
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes
Step 1 Open the patch panel tray:
• 40-channel patch panel tray—On the front of the patch panel tray, push the tabs on the left and right
sides inward to release the lock on the tray. Pull the patch panel tray away from the shelf until it is
fully opened.
• Mesh patch panel tray—On the front of the patch panel tray, push the tabs on the left and right sides
inward to open the front door. Raise the plunger located to the right of the TEST ACCESS TX port
and pull the tray away from the rack.
Purpose This procedure describes how to install fiber-optic cables to create mesh
nodes. You must route fiber-optic cables from:
• 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards in a mesh node to the 40-channel
(80-port) patch panel tray (15454-PP-80)
• 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C cards in a mesh node to one of the mesh
patch panel trays (four-degree or eight-degree)
• 40-SMR2-C cards in a mesh node to the 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel
tray.
Tools/Equipment Mesh nodes require the following equipment. The cards and patch panels
should already be installed before you begin this procedure.
• One 40-MUX-C card per side of the mesh node (up to 8 sides per node)
• One 40-DMX-C card per side of the mesh node (up to 8 sides per node)
• One 40-channel patch panel tray per side of the mesh node (up to 8
sides per node)
• One 40-WXC-C card per side (up to 8 sides per node)
• One 80-WXC-C card per side (up to 8 sides per node)
• One 40-SMR2-C card per side (up to 4 sides per node)
• One MPO-MPO fiber-optic cable per side (up to 8 sides per node)
• One LC-LC fiber-optic cable per side (up to 8 sides per node)
• One PP-MESH-4 (four-degree), PP-MESH-8 (eight-degree), or
15454-PP-4-SMR (four-degree) mesh patch panel tray depending on
the type of mesh node you want to install
Note Use the PP-MESH-4 or PP-MESH-8 mesh patch panel trays for the
40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C cards and the 15454-PP-4-SMR mesh
patch panel tray for the 40-SMR2-C card.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 14-78
DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray,
page 14-93
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
14-102
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G430 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards in a
Mesh Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-102.
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G431 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards in a
Mesh Node to a Mesh Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-104.
Step 4 Close the patch panel tray:
• 40-channel patch panel tray: Push the tray back toward the rack until it locks into place.
• Mesh patch panel tray: Raise the plunger located on the right of the TEST ACCESS Tx port and
push the tray until the plunger locks into the closed position.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G430 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards in a Mesh Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray
Step 1 Choose Side A of the shelf to cable the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards.
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from 40-MUX-C and
40-DMX-C cards in mesh node to the 40-channel (80-port) patch panel tray
(15454-PP-80). In a mesh node, one 40-channel patch panel tray is required
for each direction. The Side A 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards will
connect to the Side A 40-channel patch panel. The Side B 40-MUX-C and
40-DMX-C cards will connect to the Side B 40-channel patch panel, and so
forth, up to a maximum of an eight-degree mesh node (Sides A through H).
Tools/Equipment The cards and patch panels should already be installed before you begin
this procedure.
• One 40-MUX-C card per side of the mesh node
• One 40-DMX-C card per side of the mesh node
• One 40-channel patch panel trays per side of the mesh node,
preinstalled with MPO cables (each MPO cable is terminated on one
end with one MPO connector and on the other end with eight LC-type
connectors)
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 14-78
DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray,
page 14-93
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
14-103
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note If you are cabling any cards from the right side of the shelf (Slots 12 through 17), you must first
perform the “DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray” task
on page 14-93 to route the MPO cables out of the right side of the patch panel tray, or route the
cables through a fiber storage panel.
Step 2 On the patch panel, locate the MPO cables and connectors.
Step 3 At the 40-MUX-C card in the node, plug the MPO connector labeled 1 RX on an MPO cable into the top
Add RX (30.3–35.8) port of the card.
Step 4 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-RX into the Add RX (36.6–42.1) port on the card.
Step 5 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-RX into the Add RX (42.9–48.5) port on the card.
Step 6 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-RX into the Add RX (49.3–54.9) port on the card.
Step 7 Plug the MPO connector labeled 5-RX into the Add RX (55.7–61.4) port on the card.
Step 8 At the adjacent 40-DMX-C card in the same side of the shelf, plug the MPO connector labeled 1 TX on
the MPO cable.
Step 9 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-TX into the Drop TX (36.6–42.1) port on the card.
Step 10 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-TX into the Drop TX (42.9–48.5) port on the card.
Step 11 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-TX into the Drop TX (49.3–54.9) port on the card.
Step 12 Plug the MPO connector labeled 5-TX into the Drop TX (55.7–61.4) port on the card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 13 Repeat Steps 2 through 12 for the remaining sides of the mesh node (Sides B through H, depending on
the type of mesh node you want to cable).
Step 14 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
14-104
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G431 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards in a Mesh Node to a Mesh Patch Panel Tray
Step 1 Choose Side A of the shelf to cable the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C card to the mesh patch panel.
Step 2 On the mesh patch panel, locate the EXP TX A port (for PP-MESH-4 and PP-MESH-8) or EXP-A port
(for 15454-PP-4-SMR) and insert one end of an MPO-MPO cable.
Step 3 Route the MPO cable through the mesh patch panel and out to the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C card on
Side A of the node.
Step 4 Connect the other end of the MPO cable to the EXP RX port on the 40-WXC-C, or EXP port on the
40-SMR2-C card.
Purpose This task connects fiber-optic cables from the 40-WXC-C or 40-SMR2-C
cards in a mesh node to the 4-degree (PP-MESH-4 or 15454-PP-4-SMR) or
8-degree (PP-MESH-8) mesh patch panel. The four-degree patch panel
allows up to 4 sides to be used per node, while the eight-degree patch panel
allows up to 8 sides to be used per node.
Tools/Equipment The cards and patch panel trays should already be installed before you
begin this procedure.
• One 40-WXC-C card per side (up to 8 sides per node)
• One 40-SMR2-C card per side (up to 4 sides per node)
• One MPO-MPO fiber-optic cable per side
• One LC-LC fiber-optic cable per side
• One PP-MESH-4 (four-degree), PP-MESH-8 (eight-degree), or
15454-PP-4-SMR (four-degree) mesh patch panel tray
• Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report
Note Use the PP-MESH-4 or PP-MESH-8 mesh patch panel trays for the
40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C cards and the 15454-PP-4-SMR mesh
patch panel tray for the 40-SMR2-C card.
Prerequisite Procedures • In the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
– “DLP-G28 Install the Fiber Patch-Panel Tray” i
– “DLP-G29 Install the Fiber-Storage Tray”
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 14-78
• DLP-G348 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Shelf Layout Report,
page 14-67
• Install and route fiber-optic cables on the 15454-PP-4-SMR mesh
patch panel. For more information, see the Installing Cisco ONS
15454-PP-4-SMR Patch Panel.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
14-105
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note If you are connecting a 40-SMR2-C card to the 15454-PP-4-SMR mesh patch panel, skip steps
5 through 7.
Step 5 On the PP-MESH-4 or PP-MESH-8 mesh patch panel, locate the COM RX A port and insert one end of
an LC-LC cable.
Step 6 Route the LC cable through the mesh patch panel to the 40-WXC-C card on Side A of the node.
Step 7 Connect the other end of the LC cable to the EXP TX port on the 40-WXC-C.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 as necessary to cable Sides B through D for a 4-degree patch panel, and Sides B
through H for an 8-degree patch panel.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G191 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on Passthrough ROADM Nodes
Step 1 Choose either the East or West side of the first shelf to cable the 32WSS card for the first ROADM node.
Purpose This procedure routes fiber-optic cables from a 32WSS card in a ROADM
node in one shelf to the corresponding 32WSS card in a ROADM node in
another shelf. The purpose of this routing is to connect East and West
intershelf ROADMs in a passthrough configuration.
Tools/Equipment Each ROADM node requires the listed equipment. The cards and
fiber-storage trays should already be installed before you begin this
procedure.
• One 32WSS card
• One fiber-storage tray
• Two 3-meter fiber-optic cables, each terminated with a single LC
connector on each end.
• Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G29 Install the Fiber-Storage Tray” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
DLP-G348 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Shelf Layout Report,
page 14-67
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
14-106
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 Choose the corresponding West or East side of the second shelf to cable the 32WSS card for the second
ROADM node.
Step 3 On the front of the fiber-storage tray that will be used for routing the fiber-optic cable, push the tabs on
the left and right sides inward to release the lock on the tray.
Step 4 Pull the fiber-storage tray away from the shelf until it is fully opened.
Step 5 Open the fold-down door located at the bottom of both shelf assemblies to expose the cable-routing
channels for each (Figure 14-20).
Figure 14-20 Managing Cables on the Front Panel
Step 6 Plug one end of the first 3-meter fiber-optic cable into the EXP-TX connector on the first 32WSS card.
Step 7 Route the fiber-optic cable through the shelf cable-routing channel and cutout on the appropriate side of
the shelf assembly, as necessary.
Step 8 Route the fiber-optic cable through the vertical fiber guide as needed to reach the entry to the
fiber-storage tray.
Step 9 Thread the cable into the fiber-storage tray at the appropriate side and around the first bend radius
delimiter as shown (Figure 14-21).
Step 10 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the slack management cable retainers in the fiber-storage
tray (Figure 14-21).
FAN FAIL CRIT MAJ MIN
145262
Cable-routing
channel posts
Fold down
front door
14-107
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 14-21 Fiber-Storage Tray
Caution When you close the fiber-storage tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the fiber-storage tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 11 Thread the fiber cable through the second bend delimiter and out the appropriate side of the fiber-storage
tray as necessary.
Step 12 Route the fiber-optic cable through the vertical fiber guide as needed to reach the second ROADM shelf
where the second 32WSS is located.
Step 13 Route the fiber-optic cable through the shelf cutout and through the shelf cable routing channel as
needed.
Step 14 Plug the end of the 3-meter fiber-optic cable into the EXP-RX port of the second 32WSS card.
Step 15 Plug one end of the second 3-meter fiber-optic cable into the EXP-TX connector on the second 32WSS
card.
Step 16 Follow Step 7 through Step 14 to connect the EXP-TX connector of the second 32WSS card to the
EXP-RX port of the first 32WSS card.
Step 17 Close the fold-down doors located at the bottom of both shelf assemblies and slide the fiber-storage tray
back into its normal locked position.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
240291
West
entry/exit
Bend radius delimiter Slack management
cable retainers
Bend radius delimiter
East
entry/exit
14-108
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G141 Install Fiber-Optic Cables for Y-Cable Protection Modules
Note For more information about Y-cable protection, see Chapter 1, “Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS
15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf” and Chapter 11, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
Note To use Y-cable protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, the cards must be
provisioned in 10GE MXP, 20GE MXP, or 10GE TXP mode. (See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149.) Y-cable protection cannot be
used for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards that are provisioned in L2-over-DWDM
mode.
Step 1 As needed, complete the “DLP-G375 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the
FlexLayer Shelf” task on page 14-109.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “DLP-G376 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the Y-Cable
Module Tray” task on page 14-110.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure installs and routes fiber-optic cables from the client signal
to the Y-cable protection module (single mode or multimode), and from the
Y-cable module to the transponder node. Using one Y-cable protection
module, you can protect one client signal with two TXP, MXP, AR_MXP,
AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards,
and two client signals with four TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards. You can use Y-cable protection modules
that you have installed in a FleyLayer shelf, or Y-cable modules installed
in a Y-cable module tray.
Tools/Equipment Fiber-optic cables
Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures See Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide:
• “DLP-G32 Install the Y-Cable Protection Modules in the FlexLayer
Shelf”
• “DLP-G377 Install the Y-Cable Protection Modules in the Y-Cable
Module Tray”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
14-109
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G375 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf
Step 1 Referring to the Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report, install a fiber-optic cable between
a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, AR_MXP, or AR_XP card and a Y-cable
module.
If you want to protect one client signal, connect the fiber-optic cables according to either Table 14-7 or
Table 14-8. To protect two client signals using a single Y-cable module, connect the cables according to
both Table 14-7 and Table 14-8.
Purpose This task installs fiber-optic cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, AR_MXP, or AR_XP cards to the
Y-cable modules installed in the FlexLayer shelves, and from the Y-cable
modules to the client devices.
Tools/Equipment Fiber-optic cables
Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G32 Install the Y-Cable Protection Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf”
in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
Table 14-7 Cable Connections for Y-Cable Protection of One Client Signal
From To (Y-Cable Port Number)
Client 1 TX port 10
Client 1 RX port 5
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 1 TX port 1
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 1 RX port 2
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 2TX port 6
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE2RX port 7
Table 14-8 Cable Connections for Y-Cable Protection of a Second Client Signal
From To (Y-Cable Port Number)
Client 2 TX port 12
Client 2 RX port 11
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE3 TX port 3
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 3 RX port 4
14-110
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in the fiber-storage tray as you
install cables between the Y-cable module and the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards (Figure 14-9 on page 14-80).
Caution When you close the fiber-storage tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the fiber-storage tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 3 Install a fiber-optic cable between the client device and the Y-cable module where you just installed a
fiber-optic cable to the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card.
Step 4 Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for each Y-cable module you need to use for Y-cable protection.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G376 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the Y-Cable Module Tray
Step 1 Open the drawer of the tray by pushing inward on the latches located at the left and right front of the tray.
Step 2 On each Y-cable module you will connect, use the tab to slide the module up so that it is fully extended
and easily accessible in the tray.
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 4 TX port 8
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 4 RX port 9
Purpose This task installs fiber-optic cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards to the Y-cable modules installed
in the Y-cable module tray, and from the Y-cable modules to the client
devices.
Tools/Equipment Fiber-optic cables (4-meter [13.12-foot]), single-mode or multimode as
appropriate
Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G32 Install the Y-Cable Protection Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf”
in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
Table 14-8 Cable Connections for Y-Cable Protection of a Second Client Signal (continued)
From To (Y-Cable Port Number)
14-111
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 Referring to the Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report, install a 4-meter (13.12-foot)
fiber-optic cable (single-mode or multimode, as appropriate) between a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card and the Y-cable module installed farthest to the left. Proceed according to
the port label affixed to the front of the tray to identify the ports on each installed module (Figure 14-22).
Figure 14-22 Y-Cable Protection Port Label
Note You can use the label shown in Figure 14-22 to take notes as to which wavelength/port you are
connecting to each Y-cable module. “W” denotes the indicated Working port on the TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card. “P” denotes the indicated Protect port on the
TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card.
Note Protective covers are installed over the third and fourth ports on the Y-cable modules because
they are not used.
As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in theY-cable module tray as
you install cables between the Y-cable module and the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE card (Figure 14-23).
Client TX
Client RX
TXP W TX
TXP W RX TXP W RX TXP W RX TXP W RXTXP W RX TXP W RX TXP W RX TXP W RX
TXP P RX
TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX
TXP P RX TXP P RX TXP P RX TXP P RX TXP P RX TXP P RX TXP P RX
TXP W TX TXP W TX TXP W TX TXP W TX TXP W TX TXP W TX TXP W TX
Client RX Client RX Client RX Client RX Client RX Client RX Client RX
Client TX Client TX Client TX Client TX Client TX Client TX Client TX
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8
144677
14-112
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 14-23 Y-Cable Protection Module Tray
Caution When you close the Y-cable module tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 4 Referring to the Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report, install a fiber-optic cable of
adequate length (single-mode or multimode, as appropriate) between the Y-cable module and the client
signal that you want to protect.
Step 5 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in theY-cable module tray as
you install cables between the Y-cable module and the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE card.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each Y-cable module you need to use for Y-cable protection.
Step 7 To close the tray, unlock the drawer from the open position by depressing the red lock at the back left of
the tray and push the tray closed.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
144678
LC-LC cables
Y cable modules
14-113
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to provision the DWDM cable
connections. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” procedure
on page 14-47 to import the Cisco Transport Planner NE update file.
Step 3 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcords tabs.
Note The Internal Patchcords tab does not show OPT-PRE DCU connections or span connections.
Note The number of rows in the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcords tab are created
dynamically, as per the number of sides present in a node.
Note On the 15454-M2 and the 15454-M6 shelves, you can create internal patchcords between the
TNC and TNCE cards and the optical amplifier cards.
Step 4 Verify that the connections in the Internal Patchcords tab match the connections in the Cisco Transport
Planner Internal Connections Report for the DWDM cards (see the “DLP-G349 Use the Cisco Transport
Planner Internal Connections Report” task on page 14-80). The Internal Patchcords tab will not show
OPT-PRE DCU connections or span connections.
Step 5 Complete the “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually” procedure on page 14-114 for any
connections that require manual provisioning, for example, to create patchcords between TXP and MXP
trunk ports and OCH filter ports. If you need to delete a connection, complete the “DLP-G355 Delete an
Internal Patchcord” task on page 14-123.
Note Connections related to optical bypass circuits must be manually provisioned.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure imports the internal patchcords using the CTP XML file.
Internal patchcords can also be manually provisioned.
Tools/Equipment • Cisco Transport Planner shelf layout
• Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-114
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually
Note Use only one management interface to complete the creation of internal patchcords. For example, do not
begin the internal patchcord creation using the TL1 interface or CTP XML file and end the internal
patchcord creation using CTC.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 Choose one of the following link types for the internal patchcord:
• Trunk to Trunk (L2)—Creates a bidirectional patchcord between the trunk ports of GE_XP and
10GE_XP cards. If you choose this option, complete “DLP-G354 Create an Internal Patchcord
Manually Using the Trunk to Trunk (L2) Option” task on page 14-115.
• OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter—Creates an internal patchcord between an optical channel trunk port on
a TXP/MXP stage card (which includes TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, AR_XP or ITU-T line cards) and an optical channel filter port on
an add/drop stage card (which includes 32MUX, 40-MUX-C, 32WSS, 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE,
32DMX, 32DMX-O, 40DMX, 40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C cards).
You can use this option to also create an internal patchcord between an optical channel trunk port
on a TXP/MXP stage card (which includes TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, AR_XP or ITU-T line cards) and the COM port on a PSM card
in channel protection configuration (where, PSM card is equipped between one TXP/MXP stage and
two add/drop stages). In this case, the Internal Patchcord Creation wizard will prompt you to create
patchcords between the working and protect ports on the PSM card and the ports on the two different
add/drop stage cards (which includes 32MUX, 40-MUX-C, 32WSS, 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE,
32DMX, 32DMX-O, 40DMX, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or 80-WXC-C cards). If you choose this
option, complete “DLP-G547 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Trunk to
OCH-Filter Option” task on page 14-116.
• OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter—Creates an unidirectional or bidirectional internal patchcord between a
MUX input port and a DMX output port. If you choose this option, complete “DLP-G548 Create an
Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter Option” task on page 14-118.
• OTS to OTS—Creates a unidirectional or bidirectional internal patchcord between two optical
transport section (OTS) ports, between two optical cards, between an optical card and a passive card,
between two passive cards, or between the TNC or TNCE cards and an optical amplifier card. This
option also includes OSC ports. If you choose this option, complete “DLP-G549 Create an Internal
Patchcord Manually Using the OTS to OTS Option” task on page 14-120.
Purpose This procedure creates an internal patchcord manually.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-115
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Optical Path—Creates an internal patchcord between two optical cards, or between an optical card
and a passive card. If you choose this option, complete “DLP-G531 Create an Internal Patchcord
Manually Using the Optical Path Option” task on page 14-122.
Note Manual creation of OTS/OCH to OTS/OCH internal patchcords is not required for standard
DWDM nodes. However, manual creation might be required for non-standard nodes, for
example, a hub node that has wavelength selective switches installed. In such cases, manual
creation is recommended by Cisco Transport Planner.
Note To successfully create an internal patchcord between WSS/DMX channel port and TXP trunk
port, choose the TXP as the source endpoint and WSS/DMX as the destination endpoint.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G354 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Trunk to Trunk (L2) Option
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 On the Internal Patchcord Type Selection page, choose the patchcord type as Trunk to Trunk (L2) and
click Next.
Step 4 On the Internal Patchcord Origination page, provision the internal patchcord origination parameters:
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the Internal Patchcord Termination page, provision the internal patchcord termination parameters:
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays the
list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Purpose This task creates a bidirectional internal patchcord between the trunk ports
of two GE_XP or 10GE_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-116
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 Review the display-only information on the Internal Patchcord Origination Reverse page. This page
shows the slot, and port that CTC will use for the opposite internal patchcord origination route.
Step 9 Click Next.
Step 10 Review the information displayed on the Internal Patchcord Termination Reverse page. This
display-only page shows the slot, and port that CTC will use for the reverse internal patchcord
termination route.
Step 11 Click Finish. The new internal patchcord appears in the Internal Patchcord table.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G547 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter Option
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 On the Internal Patchcord Type Selection page, choose the patchcord type as OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter
option and click Next.
Step 4 On the Internal PatchcordOCH Attributes page, provision the following parameters:
• OCHNC Wavelength—Sets the OCHNC wavelength for the OCH trunk to OCH filter internal
patchcord. Use the unnamed band selection box below to display C-band or L-band wavelengths in
the OCHNC Wavelength field. Provision the OCHNC wavelength to the wavelength provisioned for
the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP,
AR_XP or ITU-T line card trunk port.
• PSM Protection—Select this check box if you have provisioned a PSM card in channel protection
configuration.
• Colorless—Select this check box if you want to create a colorless patchcord.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 On the Internal Patchcord Origination page, provision the internal patchcord origination parameters:
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Purpose This task creates a bidirectional internal patchcord between a TXP, MXP,
or XP trunk and a DWDM add and drop channel port.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-117
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 7 In the Internal Patchcord Termination page, provision the internal patchcord termination parameters:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 8 Click Next.
Step 9 In the Internal Patchcord Origination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord origination route:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord originates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
Note Choose the same passive card that you chose in Step 7.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 In the internal Patchcord Termination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord termination route:
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 12 Click Next.
Step 13 Click Finish. The new internal patchcord appears in the Internal Patchcord table.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
14-118
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G548 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter Option
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 On the Internal Patchcord Type Selection page, choose the patchcord type as OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter
option and click Next.
Step 4 On the Internal Patchcord OCH Attributes page, provision the following parameters:
• OCHNC Wavelength—Sets the OCHNC wavelength for the OCH trunk to OCH filter internal
patchcord. Use the unnamed band selection box below to display C-band or L-band wavelengths in
the OCHNC Wavelength field. Provision the OCHNC wavelength to the wavelength provisioned for
the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP,
AR_XP or ITU-T line card trunk port.
• Bidirectional—If checked, creates a bidirectional internal patchcord.
• PSM Protection—Select this check box if you have provisioned a PSM card in channel protection
configuration.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 On the Internal Patchcord Origination page, provision the internal patchcord origination parameters:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 7 In the Internal Patchcord Termination page, provision the internal patchcord termination parameters:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
Purpose This task creates a unidirectional or bidirectional internal patchcord
between two DWDM add and drop channel ports.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-119
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 8 If you did not choose bidirectional in Step 4, continue with Step 13. Otherwise, continue with the next
step.
Step 9 Click Next.
Step 10 In the Internal Patchcord Origination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord origination route:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord originates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
Note Choose the same passive card that you chose in Step 7.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 11 Click Next.
Step 12 In the internal Patchcord Termination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord termination route:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
Note Choose the same passive card that you chose in Step 6.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 13 Click Finish. The new internal patchcord appears in the Internal Patchcord table.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
14-120
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G549 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OTS to OTS Option
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 On the Internal Patchcord Type Selection page, choose the patchcord type as OTS to OTS and click Next.
Step 4 On the Internal Patchcords OTS Attributes page, provision the following parameters:
• Bidirectional—If checked, creates a bidirectional internal patchcord.
• MPO Connection—Creates all the patchcords between two MPO connectors. If this option is
checked, the bidirectional option is disabled.
• Exclude Used Port—If checked, excludes the used ports for patchcord creation. If unchecked, more
than one patchcord can be created starting from the same port.
• Grid Filter—Select the grid option from the drop-down list.
• Port Type—Select the port type from the drop-down list. The options are:
– OSC only—Cards with OSC ports and OSCM cards are available for patchcord creation. The
MPO Connection and Exclude Used Ports checkboxes are disabled and the Bidirectional option
is checked.
– DC only—Cards with DC ports and passive DCUs are available for patchcord creation. The
MPO Connection and Exclude Used Ports checkboxes are disabled and the Bidirectional option
is checked. Allows to create an internal patchcord between an optical card and a passive card.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 On the Internal Patchcord Origination page, provision the internal patchcord origination parameters:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord originates.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
• MPO—Choose the port where the internal patchcord originates.CTC automatically displays the list
of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose. This field is visible only if you
have chosen MPO connection in Step 4.
Step 7 Click Next.
Purpose This task creates a unidirectional or bidirectional internal patchcord
between two optical transport section (OTS) ports.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-121
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 8 In the Internal Patchcord Termination page, provision the internal patchcord termination parameters:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
• MPO—Choose the port where the internal patchcord originates.CTC automatically displays the list
of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose. This field is visible only if you
have chosen MPO connection in Step 4.
Step 9 If you did not choose bidirectional in Step 4, continue with Step 14. Otherwise, continue with the next
step.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 In the Internal Patchcord Origination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord origination route:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord originates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
Note Choose the same passive card that you chose in Step 8.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 12 Click Next.
Step 13 In the internal Patchcord Termination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord termination route:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
Note Choose the same passive card that you chose in Step 6.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
14-122
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 14 Click Finish. The new internal patchcord appears in the Internal Patchcord table.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G531 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Optical Path Option
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 On the Internal Patchcord Type Selection page, choose the patchcord type as Optical Path and click Next.
Step 4 On the Internal Patchcord Card List page, provision the following parameters:
• Card From Selection area:
– Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord originates.
– Shelf—(Multishelf nodes only) Choose the shelf where the internal patchcord originates.
– Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates.
• Card To Selection area:
– Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord
terminates.
– Shelf—(Multishelf nodes only) Choose the shelf where the internal patchcord terminates.
– Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Choose the required patchcord from the list that CTC generates.
Step 5 Click Next to continue creating internal patchcords between cards and repeat Step 4. In the Internal
Patchcord Card List page that follows, CTC automatically populates the Card From Selection fields with
the values you entered in the Card To Selection fields in the previous page.
Step 6 After creating all the internal patchcords between cards, click Finish. The new internal patchcords
appear on the Internal Patchcord table.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task creates an internal patchcord manually between two optical cards
or between an optical card and a passive card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-123
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click the connection you want to delete.
Step 3 Click Delete, then click Yes.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G209 Create, Edit, and Delete Optical Sides
Note For any node type including mesh nodes, the association between the shelf, line card and side is reported
in the left top window of CTC (Vital Status Pane) in the mode view.
Note For mesh nodes, the association between sides and the 40-WXC-C cards can be found in the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcords screen.
For example:
PP-MESH, LC (A): Shelf 1, Slot 3 (40 WXC), port EXP-TX
PP-MESH, MPO (A): Shelf 1, Slot 3 (40 WXC), port EXP-RX
The above rows indicate that the:
WXC port located in Shelf 1, Slot 3 is connected to the LC connector A (Side A) on PP-MESH.
WXC port located in Shelf 1, Slot 3 is connected to the MPO connector A (Side A) on PP-MESH.
Purpose This task deletes an internal patchcord.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This procedure allows you to create, edit, and delete optical sides on a
DWDM node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration
File, page 14-47
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-124
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to provision the optical side. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the following tasks:
• Complete the “DLP-G491 Create an Optical Side” task on page 14-124.
• Complete the “DLP-G492 Edit an Optical Side” task on page 14-125.
• Complete the “DLP-G480 Delete an Optical Side” task on page 14-125.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G491 Create an Optical Side
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Optical Sides tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Side dialog box, enter the following:
• Side ID—Choose a side ID (A, B,C, D, E, F, G, or H) from the drop-down list.
• Line In—Choose an RX port from the drop-down list.
• Line Out—Choose a TX port from the drop-down list.
Note For a terminal node equipped with a PSM card in line or multiplex section protection
configuration, you can only choose the W-RX and W-TX ports while creating an optical side.
After you create the working (w) optical side, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
card automatically creates the protected (p) optical side involving the P-RX and P-TX ports of
the PSM card. CTC refreshes the Optical Sides tab with both the working and protected optical
sides.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task creates an optical side. For more details on optical sides, refer to
Chapter 12, “Node Reference.”.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-125
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G492 Edit an Optical Side
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Optical Sides tabs.
Step 2 Click the optical side that you want to edit.
Step 3 Click Edit.
Step 4 In the Edit Side ID dialog box, choose a side ID (A, B,C, D, E, F, G, or H) from the drop-down list.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G480 Delete an Optical Side
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Optical Sides tabs.
Step 2 Click the optical side that you want to delete.
Step 3 Click Delete.
Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to continue.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task edits the side ID of an optical side.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task deletes an optical side.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-126
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations
Note This procedure automatically turns on any OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, or RAMAN-CTP cards
installed in the DWDM ring.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to provision the OSC
terminations. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Comm Channels > OSC tabs.
Step 3 In the OSC Terminations area, click Create.
Step 4 In the Create OSC Terminations dialog box, choose the ports where you want to create the OSC
termination. To select more than one port, press the Shift key (to select a range of ports) or the Ctrl key
(to select multiple individual ports).
Note The number of OSC terminations that you create depends on the node type defined by
Cisco Transport Planner. Terminal nodes require one OSC termination. Hub, OADM, and
ROADM nodes require two OSC terminations.
Step 5 In the Layer 3 area, check the OSI box if the following conditions are met:
• The OSC termination is between the ONS 15454 and another ONS node.
• Third party NEs that use the OSI protocol stack are on the same network.
If you checked OSI, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 6.
a. Click Next.
b. Provision the following fields:
• Router—Choose the OSI router.
• ESH—Set the ESH propagation frequency. End system NEs transmit ESHs to inform other ESs
and ISs about the NSAPs they serve. The default is 10 seconds. The range is 10 to 1000 seconds.
• ISH—Sets the ISH PDU propagation frequency. Intermediate system NEs send ISHs to other
ESs and ISs to inform them about the IS NETs it serves. The default is 10 seconds. The range
is 10 to 1000 seconds.
Purpose This procedure provisions the OSC terminations. The OSC provides a
bidirectional channel that connects all nodes within a DWDM ring. The
OSC carries a supervisory data channel and synchronizes clocking at
network nodes. The OSC also carries a user data channel.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration
File, page 14-47
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-127
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• IIH—Sets the IIH PDU propagation frequency. The IS-IS Hello PDUs establish and maintain
adjacencies between ISs. The default is 3 seconds. The range is 1 to 600 seconds.
• Metric—Sets the cost for sending packets on the LAN subnet. The IS-IS protocol uses the cost
to calculate the shortest routing path. The default metric cost for LAN subnets is 20. It normally
should not be changed.
Step 6 Click Finish. Ports are automatically placed in service. The following alarms might appear in the node
view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) Alarms tab Description field. They will
remain until all the network OSC connections between the adjacent nodes are created:
• SDCC Termination Failure (ANSI) or RS-DCC Termination Failure (ETSI) on the OSCM or
OSC-CSM card
• LOS on the OC-3 port (Port 1) on the OSCM, OSC-CSM, or OPT-BST card
• OPWR-LFAIL on the OPT-BST or OSC-CSM card
Note After the OSC termination is created, the line ports are placed in service and span power levels
are checked.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup
Note ANS provisioning parameters must be calculated by Cisco Transport Planner. ANS provisioning
parameters must be manually changed only by Cisco qualified personnel. Setting wrong ANS
provisioning (either as preamplifier or booster input power thresholds) may impact traffic.
Purpose This procedure runs the Launch ANS function. Launch ANS applies the
ANS parameters (calculated in the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport
Planner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on page 14-47) to the
node and to the ports for cards installed in the node. The applied ANS
parameters include span loss values, threshold values, power references,
and others. Launch ANS also sets the VOA references based on the
calculated power references.
Tools/Equipment The Cisco Transport Planner Installation Parameters file
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113
NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration
File, page 14-47
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-128
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to run ANS. If you are already
logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Referring to the Cisco Transport Planner Installation Parameters (see Table 14-1 on page 14-4), identify
the parameters that have a Yes in the Manually Set column. If there are no parameters that have a Yes in
the Manually Set column, continue with Step 6.
Step 3 In CTC, display the card where the parameter is to be manually provisioned in card view.
Step 4 Enter the specified Calibration parameter from the Cisco Transport Planner Installation Parameters
table. Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each parameter in the Cisco Transport Planner Installation Parameters table
that displays Yes in the Manually Set field.
Step 6 Change to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 7 Click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 8 Click Launch ANS.
Step 9 In the Apply Launch ANS dialog box, click Yes.
Step 10 In the Launch ANS confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Step 11 Verify that one of the following status appears in the Result column for all the ports:
• Success - Changed—The parameter setpoint was recalculated successfully.
• Success - Unchanged—The parameter setpoint did not need recalculation.
• Not applicable—When ports are not in use.
If one of the following statuses is shown, complete the provided instructions:
• Fail - Out of Range—The calculated setpoint is outside the expected range. If this status appears, do
not continue until you have investigated and cleared the cause. This status might appear because of
an error in the Cisco Transport Planner file. It could also appear because the insertion loss of the
installed cards is greater than the estimated insertion loss calculated by Cisco Transport Planner. If
so, the Cisco Transport Planner file will need to be recalculated. All of these possible causes should
be investigated. Contact your next level of support if you are unable to clear this status.
• Fail - Missing Input Parameter—The parameter could not be calculated because the required
provisioning data is unknown or unavailable. If this status appears, check if the correct Cisco
Transport Planner file was imported.
• Unchanged - Port in IS—The parameter could not be calculated because the port is in service. This
status should normally not appear at this point in node turn-up. If it does, display the card in card
view, change the port administrative state to OOS,DSLB (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI), and
repeat Steps 6 through 11.
Note If the ports that are in service carry circuits, you must delete the circuits before you can place
the ports out of service. See the “DLP-G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections” task
on page 16-26, the “DLP-G418 Delete an Optical Channel Trail” task on page 16-37, or the
“DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-46.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
14-129
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to verify the OSCM or OSC-CSM
transmit power. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Disable automatic laser shutdown (ALS) on Side A or (for terminal nodes) the terminal side OSCM or
OSC-CSM card:
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the Side A or
terminal-side OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. From the ALS Mode drop-down list, choose Disable.
d. Click Apply. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 3 If an OSC-CSM or OSCM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue with
Step 4.
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the Side B
OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. From the ALS Mode drop-down list, choose Disable.
d. Click Apply. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G314 Verify OSCM Transmit Power” task on page 14-130.
Step 5 Change ALS to Auto Restart on the Side A or (for terminal nodes) the terminal side OSCM or OSC-CSM
card:
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the Side A or
terminal-side OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. From the ALS Mode drop-down list, choose Auto Restart.
d. Click Apply. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 6 If an OSC-CSM or OSCM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, you have
completed this procedure.
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click Side B OSCM
or OSC-CSM card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
Purpose This procedure verifies that the transmit power for the ONS 15454 OSCM
and the OSC-CSM cards is correct.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-130
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
c. From the ALS Mode drop-down list, choose Auto Restart.
d. Click Apply. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G314 Verify OSCM Transmit Power
Step 1 Display the OSCM card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Record the Port 3 (OSC TX) Power value: _____.
Step 4 Change to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), then click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 5 Record the OSC Power value under the OSCM card in the tree view.
Step 6 If the power value recorded in Step 3 is not within the range of +/– 0.5 dBm recorded in Step 5, complete
the following steps. Otherwise, continue with Step 7.
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs. Verify that the ALS Command is set to OSRI Off. If not, choose
Off from the drop-down list. Click Apply, then click Yes.
b. Clean the optical connections.
c. Complete the following procedures:
• Delete the two OSC channels using the DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination.
• Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
• Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
d. Repeat Step 3 through Step 6. If the power level is still not within the specified range, contact your
next level of support.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies that the transmit power of the OSCM card is correct.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
14-131
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode
Caution An optical shelf in a multishelf configuration must be provisioned as the node controller shelf and not a
subtending shelf, otherwise traffic will be dropped. If no slots are available on an optical shelf to install
the MS-ISC-100T cards needed for a node controller shelf, install and configure the Cisco Catalyst 2950.
See the “NTP-G302 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending Shelves to a Catalyst
2950” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node that you want to configure as a multishelf node.
Step 2 If you want to configure a shelf as the node controller, continue with Step 3. If you want to configure a
shelf as a subtending shelf, continue with Step 4.
Step 3 To set up the login node as the node controller, complete the following steps:
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
General > Multishelf Config tabs.
b. Click Enable as Node Controller.
c. From the LAN Config drop-down list, complete one of the following:
• Choose Ethernet Switch if MS-ISC-100T cards or the Catalyst 2950 switches are already
installed and configured.
Purpose This procedure upgrades nodes in single-shelf mode to multishelf mode.
Tools/Equipment The node you plan to use as the node controller must be equipped with
optical units and cannot have a cross-connect card installed. Any nodes
that you plan to add to the multishelf configuration as subtending shelves
can be equipped with transponder and muxponder units. For more
information on multishelf configurations, see Chapter 12, “Node
Reference.”
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
One of the following procedures in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide:
• “NTP-G301 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending
Shelves to an MS-ISC-100T Card”, or
• “NTP-G302 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending
Shelves to a Catalyst 2950”
• “NTP-G308 Connect the ONS 15454 M6 Multishelf Node and the
ONS 15454 M6 Subtending Shelves”
• “DLP-G682 Connect the ONS 15454 M6 as the Node Controller in a
Mixed Multishelf Configuration”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
14-132
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Choose Stand-Alone if MS-ISC-100T cards are not installed yet but will be in the final layout
or if this is a line amplifier or an OSC-only site. This option will allow a safe migration of the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE database when the multishelf configuration is
complete.
d. Click Apply.
e. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to allow the node to reboot. The CTC view changes to
network view and the node icon changes to gray. Wait for the reboot to finish. (This might take
several minutes.)
f. After the node reboots, double-click the node. The multishelf view appears.
Note The shelf ID of the node controller is automatically assigned as 1.
Step 4 To add a node as a subtending shelf in the multishelf configuration, complete the following:
a. In multishelf view, right-click in the white space in the rack and choose Add Shelf.
b. Select the type of subtending shelf (ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 M6).
c. In the Shelf ID Selection dialog box, choose a shelf ID (from 2 to 30) from the drop-down list.
d. Click OK. The shelf appears in the multishelf view.
e. Preprovision the new shelf so that it has the same provisioning as the actual shelf that you will add
as the subtending shelf:
Caution If the subtending shelf is not preprovisioned, traffic will be lost.
• Cards, PPMs, administrative states, client and trunk port configuration—For more information
on card and port settings, see Chapter 11, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.”
• Timing—For more information, see the “NTP-G53 Set Up Timing” procedure on page 15-27.
• GCC—For more information, see the “DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations” task on
page 16-81.
f. Disconnect the cross-over (CAT-5) LAN cable from the RJ-45 (LAN) port of the ONS 15454
subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 7 or Slot 11, or from the EMS port of ONS 15454
M6 subtending shelf.
g. Connect your Windows PC or Solaris workstation NIC to the RJ-45 (LAN) port on the subtending
shelf ONS 15454 TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 7 or Slot 11, or to the EMS port of the ONS
15454 M6 subtending shelf.
h. Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the subtending shelf.
i. Click the Provisioning > General > Multishelf Config tabs.
j. Click Enable as Subtended Shelf.
k. Select the appropriate subtending shelf (ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 M6).
l. From the Shelf ID drop-down list, choose the shelf ID that you created in Step c.
m. Click Apply.
n. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to reboot the shelf. The CTC view changes to network view
and the node icon changes to gray. Wait for the reboot to finish. (This might take several minutes.)
14-133
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
o. Disconnect your Windows PC or Solaris workstation network interface card (NIC) from the RJ-45
(LAN) port of the subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 7 or Slot 11, or from the EMS
port of the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf.
p. Reconnect the cross-over (CAT-5) LAN cable (disconnected in Step f) to the RJ-45 (LAN) port of
the subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 7 or Slot 11, or to the EMS port of the ONS
15454 M6 subtending shelf.
Note The Ethernet cable must be connected to the subtended shelf
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card soon after this
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card completes its boot phase (when it
becomes active and its peer TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card starts
rebooting). Connecting it before the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card
completes its boot phase is a risk in the conversion process. Connecting it long time after
completion of the boot phase might affect traffic due to missing provisioning.
q. Repeat Steps a through p to set up additional subtending shelves.
Note Cisco Transport Manager (CTM) users can use the CTM NE Explorer to monitor and configure
single-shelf and multishelf nodes. When the upgrade is complete, the original individual
subtending shelves will remain the CTM network view and must be manually deleted. For
detailed information, refer to the Cisco Transport Manager User Guide, Appendix B, “NE
Explorer Information.”
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G210 Provision Node for SNMPv3
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task on the node on which you want to set up SNMPv3. If you
are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 tabs.
Step 3 Complete the following tasks as required:
• DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User, page 14-138
• DLP-G498 Create Group Access, page 14-139
Purpose This procedure provisions the node to allow SNMPv3 access.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-134
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note A group named default_group is defined in the initial configuration. The default group has read
and notify access to the complete MIB tree.
• DLP-G497 Create MIB Views, page 14-139
Note A view named full_view is defined in the initial configuration. It includes the complete MIB tree
supported on the node.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G211 Provision Node to Send SNMPv3 Traps
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task on the node on which you want to set up SNMPv3. If you
are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 tabs.
Step 3 Complete the following tasks as required:
• DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User, page 14-138
• DLP-G498 Create Group Access, page 14-139
• DLP-G497 Create MIB Views, page 14-139
• DLP-G501 Create Notification Filters, page 14-142
• DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination, page 14-140. When you configure an SNMPv3
trap destination, use the IP address of the NMS, and the port number on which the NMS is listening
for traps.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure provisions a node to send SNMP v3 traps.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-135
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G212 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task on the node on which you want to set up SNMPv3. If you
are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Go to network view.
Step 3 Double-click the ENE.
Step 4 Click Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > General and note the context engine ID. The is required in
Step 8.
Step 5 Double-click the GNE.
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User” task on page 14-138 to create an SNMPv3 user on
the GNE.
Step 7 Complete the following tasks as needed on the ENE:
• DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User, page 14-138
• DLP-G498 Create Group Access, page 14-139
• DLP-G497 Create MIB Views, page 14-139
Step 8 Complete the “DLP-G502 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table” task on
page 14-142. Use the from Step 4, the local user details created in Step 6, and the remote user created in
Step 7.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure describes how to manually configure a GNE/ENE to allow
the NMS to manage an ENE using SNMPv3.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-136
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G213 Automatically Provision a GNE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task on the node on which you want to set up SNMPv3. If you
are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Go to network view.
Step 3 Double-click the GNE.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User” task on page 14-138 to create an SNMPv3 user on
the GNE.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G503 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table” task on
page 14-143. Use the GNE user that you defined in Step 4 when you configure the Proxy Forwarder
table.
Note When you use the automatic procedure, CTC automatically creates an ons_proxy user on the ENE,
provides ENE user details for the proxy configuration, and provides the of the ENE.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G214 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE using SNMPv3
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task on the node on which you want to set up SNMPv3. If you
are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Purpose This procedure describes how to automatically configure a GNE to allow
an NMS to manage an ENE using SNMPv3.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure describes how to manually configure the GNE/ENE to
allow an ENE to send SNMPv3 traps to the NMS.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-137
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 Go to network view.
Step 3 Double-click the GNE.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User” task on page 14-138 to create an SNMPv3 user on
the GNE.
Step 5 On the GNE, complete the “DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination” task on page 14-140. The
target IP address must be the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the NMS. For the UDP Port number, use the port
number on which the NMS is listening for traps. Use the user name configured in Step 4. Also, specify
a target tag name.
Step 6 Double-click the ENE.
Step 7 Complete the “DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User” task on page 14-138 to create an SNMPv3 user on
the ENE.
Step 8 Complete the following tasks as required:
• DLP-G498 Create Group Access, page 14-139 to create a group on the ENE
• DLP-G497 Create MIB Views, page 14-139 to create a MIB view on the ENE
• DLP-G501 Create Notification Filters, page 14-142
Step 9 On the ENE, complete the “DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination” task on page 14-140. The
target IP address should be the IP address of the GNE. The UDP port number is 161. Use the user name
configured in Step 7.
Step 10 From the network view, click the Provisioning > SNMPv3 tabs.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G504 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table” task on
page 14-144.
The source of the trap must be the IP address of the ENE. For the field, provide the of the ENE. Also,
you need to specify the target tag defined in Step 5, and the incoming user details configured in Step 7.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G215 Automatically Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE Using SNMPv3
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task on the node on which you want to set up SNMPv3. If you
are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Go to Network View.
Purpose This procedure describes how to automatically configure the GNE/ENE to
allow an ENE to send SNMPv3 traps to the NMS.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-138
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 Double-click the GNE.
Step 4 Complete the task “DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User” task on page 14-138 to create an SNMPv3 user
on the GNE.
Step 5 On the GNE, complete the following tasks:
• DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination, page 14-140. The target IP address must be the
IPv4 or IPv6 address of the NMS. For the UDP Port number, use the port number on which the NMS
is listening for traps. Also, specify a target tag name.
• DLP-G505 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table, page 14-145. Use
the target tag configured in Step 4. Use the IP address of the ENE as the source of trap. The
following details are created automatically:
– A user named ons_trap_user on the ENE
– Trap destination on the ENE with an IP address of the GNE as the target IP and 161 as the UDP
port number
– Remote user details of the ENE on the GNE
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > User tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create User dialog box, enter the following information:
• User Name—Specify the name of the user on the host that connects to the agent. The user name must
be a minimum of six and a maximum of 20 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. For TL1
compatibility, the user name must be of 6 to 10 characters.
• Group Name—Specify the group to which the user belongs.
• Authentication
– Protocol—Select the authentication algorithm that you want to use. The options are NONE,
MD5, and SHA.
– Password—Enter a password if you select MD5 or SHA. By default, the password length is set
to a minimum of eight characters.
• Privacy—Initiates a privacy authentication level setting session that enables the host to encrypt the
contents of the message that is sent to the agent.
– Protocol—Select NONE or DES as the privacy authentication algorithm.
Purpose This procedure creates an SNMPv3 user.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-139
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
– Password—Enter a password if you select DES.
Step 4 Click OK to save the information.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G497 Create MIB Views
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > MIB views tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Views dialog box, enter the following information:
• Name—Name of the view.
• Subtree OID—The MIB subtree which, when combined with the mask, defines the family of
subtrees.
• Bit Mask—A family of view subtrees. Each bit in the bit mask corresponds to a sub-identifier of the
subtree OID.
• Type—Select the view type. Options are Include and Exclude. Type defines whether the family of
subtrees that are defined by the subtree OID and the bit mask combination are included or excluded
from the notification filter.
Step 4 Click OK to save the information.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G498 Create Group Access
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > Group Access tabs.
Purpose This procedure creates an SNMPv3 MIB view.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure creates a user group and configures the access parameters
for the users in the group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-140
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Group Access dialog box, enter the following information:
• Group Name—The name of the SNMP group, or collection of users, who share a common access
policy.
• Security Level—The security level for which the access parameters are defined. Select from the
following options:
– noAuthNoPriv—Uses a user name match for authentication.
– AuthNoPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
– AuthPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
Provides DES 56-bit encryption based on the CBC-DES (DES-56) standard, in addition to
authentication.
If you select authNoPriv or authPriv for a group, the corresponding user must be configured with an
authentication protocol and password, with privacy protocol and password, or both.
• Views
– Read View Name—Read view name for the group.
– Notify View Name—Notify view name for the group.
• Allow SNMP Sets—Select this check box if you want the SNMP agent to accept SNMP SET
requests. If this check box is not selected, SET requests are rejected.
Note SNMP SET request access is implemented for very few objects.
Step 4 Click OK to save the information.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > Trap Destinations (V3) tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Configure SNMPv3 Trap dialog box, enter the following information:
• Target Address—Target to which the traps should be sent. Use an IPv4 or an IPv6 address.
• UDP Port—UDP port number that the host uses. Default value is 162.
• User Name—Specify the name of the user on the host that connects to the agent.
Purpose This procedure provisions SNMPv3 trap destination.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-141
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Security Level—Select one of the following options:
– noAuthNoPriv—Uses a user name match for authentication.
– AuthNoPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
– AuthPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
Provides DES 56-bit encryption based on the CBC-DES (DES-56) standard, in addition to
authentication.
• Filter Profile—Select this check box and enter the filter profile name. Traps are sent only if you
provide a filter profile name and create a notification filter. For more information, see “DLP-G501
Create Notification Filters” task on page 14-142.
• Proxy Traps Only—If selected, forwards only proxy traps from the ENE. Traps from this node are
not sent to the trap destination identified by this entry.
• Proxy Tags—Specify a list of tags. The tag list is needed on a GNE only if an ENE needs to send
traps to the trap destination identified by this entry, and wants to use the GNE as the proxy.
Step 4 Click OK to save the information.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G500 Delete SNMPv3 Trap Destination
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP> SNMPv3 > Trap Destination tabs.
Step 2 In the Trap Destinations area, select the trap you want to delete.
Step 3 Click Delete. A confirmation dialog box appears.
Step 4 Click Yes.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This procedure deletes an SNMPv3 trap destination.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-142
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G501 Create Notification Filters
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > Notification Filters tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Notify dialog box, enter the following information:
• Filter Profile Name—Specify a name for the filter.
• Subtree OID—The MIB subtree which, when combined with the mask, defines the family of
subtrees.
• Bit Mask—A family of view subtrees. Each bit in the bit mask corresponds to a sub-identifier of the
subtree OID.
• View Type—Select the view type. Options are Include and Exclude. Type defines whether the family
of subtrees that are defined by the subtree OID and the bit mask combination are included or
excluded from the notification filter.
Step 4 Click OK to save the information.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G502 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table
Step 1 In network view, click Provisioning > SNMPv3.
Step 2 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Server area, complete the following:
• Select the GNE to be used as the SNMPv3 proxy server from the drop-down list.
• Select the Enable IPv6 Target/Trap check box if the nodes and the NMS stations are on an IPv6
network.
Step 3 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table area, click Manual Create.
Step 4 In the Manual Configuration of SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder dialog box, enter the following information:
Purpose This procedure creates SNMPv3 notification filters.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure creates an entry in the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-143
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Target IP Address—Target to which the request should be forwarded. Use an IPv4 or an IPv6
address.
• Context Engine ID—The context engine ID of the ENE to which the request is to be forwarded. The
context engine ID should be the same as the context engine ID of the incoming request.
• Proxy Type—Type of SNMP request that needs to be forwarded. The options are Read and Write.
• Local User Details—The details of the local user who proxies on behalf of the ENE user.
– User Name—Specify the name of the user on the host that connects to the agent.
– Local Security Level—Select the security level of the incoming requests that are to be
forwarded. The options are noAuthNoPriv, AuthNoPriv, and AuthPriv.
• Remote User Details—User to which the request is forwarded.
– User Name—Specify the user name of the remote user.
– Remote Security Level—Select the security level of the outgoing requests. The options are
noAuthNoPriv, AuthNoPriv, and AuthPriv.
• Authentication
– Protocol—Select the authentication algorithm you want to use. The options are NONE, MD5,
and SHA.
– Password—Enter the password if you select MD5 or SHA.
• Privacy—Enables the host to encrypt the contents of the message that is sent to the agent.
– Protocol—Select NONE or DES as the privacy authentication algorithm.
– Password—Enter the password if you select DES. The password should not exceed 64
characters.
Step 5 Click OK to save the information.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G503 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table
Step 1 In network view, click Provisioning > SNMPv3 tabs.
Step 2 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Server area, complete the following:
• Select the GNE to be used as the SNMPv3 proxy server from the drop-down list.
• Select the Enable IPv6 Target/Trap check box if the nodes and the NMS stations are on an IPv6
network.
Step 3 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table area, click Auto Create.
Purpose This procedure creates an entry in the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-144
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 4 In the Automatic Configuration of SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder dialog box, enter the following
information:
• Proxy Type—Select the type of proxies to be forwarded. The options are Read and Write.
• Security Level—Select the security level for the incoming requests that are to be forwarded. The
options are:
– noAuthNoPriv—Uses a username match for authentication.
– AuthNoPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
– AuthPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
Provides DES 56-bit encryption based on the CBC-DES (DES-56) standard, in addition to
authentication.
• Target Address List—Select the proxy destination.
• Local User Name—Select the user name from the list of users.
Note When you configure SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table automatically, the default_group is used on the
ENE. The default_group does not have write access. To enable write access and allow SNMP sets, you
need to edit the default_group on ENE.
Step 5 Click OK to save the settings.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G504 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table
Step 1 In network view, click Provisioning > SNMPv3 tabs.
Step 2 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Server area, complete the following:
• Select the GNE to be used as the SNMPv3 proxy server from the drop-down list.
• Select the Enable IPv6 Target/Trap check box if the nodes and the NMS stations are on an IPv6
network.
Step 3 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table area, click Manual Create.
Step 4 In the Manual Configuration of SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder dialog box, enter the following
information:
• Remote Trap Source—Select the IP address from which the traps are sent. If the IP address is not
listed, enter the IP address manually.
Purpose This procedure creates an entry in the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder
Table.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-145
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Context Engine ID—Specify the context engine ID of the ENE from which traps need to be
forwarded. This field is automatically populated if the source of trap is selected. If the source of trap
is not specified, you need to manually enter the context engine ID.
• Target Tag—Specify the tag name. The tag identifies the list of NMS that should receive the
forwarded traps. Traps are forwarded to all GNE Trap destinations whose proxy tags list contains
this tag.
• Remote User Details
– User Name—Specify the user name.
– Security Level—Select the security level for the user. The options are noAuthNoPriv,
AuthNoPriv, and AuthPriv.
• Authentication—Select the authentication algorithm.
– Protocol—Select the authentication algorithm you want to use. The options are NONE, MD5,
and SHA. Default is None.
– Password—Enter the password if you select MD5 or SHA.
• Privacy—Enables the host to encrypt the contents of the message that is sent to the agent.
– Protocol—Select NONE or DES as the privacy authentication algorithm. Encryption is disabled
if NONE is selected.
– Password—Enter the password if you select DES. The password should not exceed 64
characters.
Step 5 Click OK to save the information.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G505 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table
Step 1 In network view, click Provisioning > SNMPv3 tabs.
Step 2 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Server area, complete the following:
• Select the GNE to be used as the SNMPv3 proxy server from the drop-down list.
• Select the Enable IPv6 Target/Trap check box if the nodes and the NMS stations are on an IPv6
network.
Step 3 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table area, click Auto Create.
Step 4 In the Automatic Configuration of SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder dialog box, enter the following
information:
Purpose This procedure creates an entry in the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder
Table automatically.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
14-146
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 14 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Target Tag—Specify the tag name. The tag identifies the list of NMS that should receive the
forwarded traps. All GNE Trap destinations that have this tag in their proxy tags list are chosen.
• Source of Trap—The list of ENEs whose traps are forwarded to the SNMPv3 Trap destinations that
are identified by the Target Tag.
Step 5 Click OK to save the information.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
CH A P T E R
15-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
15
Turn Up a Network
This chapter explains how to turn up and test a Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) network. For DWDM topology reference information and span loss tables, see
Chapter 13, “Network Reference.”
There are two main DWDM network types: metro core, where the channel power is equalized and
dispersion compensation is applied, and metro access, where the channels are not equalized and
dispersion compensation is not applied. The DWDM network topologies supported are hubbed rings,
multihubbed rings, meshed rings, linear configurations, and single-span links. The DWDM node types
supported are hub, terminal, optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM), reconfigurable optical add/drop
multiplexing (ROADM), anti-amplified spontaneous emissions (anti-ASE), and line amplifier. For
DWDM and hybrid node turn-up procedures, see Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node.”
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Note In this chapter, “RAMAN-CTP” refers to the 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP card and “RAMAN-COP” refers
to the 15454-M-RAMAN-COP card.
Before You Begin
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2—Complete this procedure before beginning
network turn-up.
2. NTP-G52 Verify Node-to-Node Connections, page 15-3—Complete this procedure next.
3. NTP-G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link, page 15-4—Complete this procedure to
set the Raman total power and Raman ratio.
4. NTP-G53 Set Up Timing, page 15-27—Complete this procedure next.
5. NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network, page 15-33—Complete this procedure next.
6. NTP-G56 Verify the OSNR, page 15-37—Complete as needed.
15-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
7. NTP-G142 Perform a Protection Switch Test, page 15-38—Complete as needed.
8. NTP-G164 Configure Link Management Protocol, page 15-40—Complete as needed.
9. NTP-G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router
and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node, page 15-47—Complete as needed.
10. NTP-G303 Configure Virtual links on the Cisco 7600 and Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node,
page 15-66—Complete as needed.
11. NTP-G57 Create a Logical Network Map, page 15-69—Complete as needed.
12. NTP-G325 View the Power Levels of Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Nodes, page 15-69—Complete as
needed.
13. NTP-G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Network, page 15-70—Complete as
needed.
NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up
Step 1 Log in to an ONS 15454 node on the network that you will test. See the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task
for instructions. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not turned on. See the DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering task as
necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear (EQPT in the Cond column) indicating equipment failure or
other hardware problems. If equipment failure alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before
continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 3 Verify that the software version shown in the node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view
(multishelf mode) status area matches the version required by your network. (The status area is located
to the left of the shelf graphic.) If the software is not the correct version, perform one of the following
procedures:
• Perform a software upgrade using a Cisco ONS 15454 software CD or Cisco ONS 15454 SDH
software CD. Refer to the release-specific software upgrade document.
• Replace TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards with cards containing the correct
release.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > General tabs. Verify that all general node information settings are correct
according to documentation provided by the network administrator. If not, see the NTP-G80 Change
Node Management Information procedure.
Purpose This procedure verifies that each ONS 15454 is ready for DWDM network
turn-up before adding nodes to a network. This procedure applies to all
ROADM, OADM, and line-amplifier nodes.
Tools/Equipment Network plan provided by your network administrator
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > Network tabs. Ensure that the IP settings and other Cisco Transport Controller
(CTC) network access information is correct according to documentation provided by the network
administrator. If not, see the NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access procedure.
Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs. Verify that all required protection groups have been created
according to documentation provided by the network administrator. If not, see the “NTP-G33 Create a
Y-Cable Protection Group” procedure on page 11-162 or the NTP-G83 Modify or Delete Card Protection
Settings procedure.
Step 7 Click the Provisioning > Security tabs. Verify that all users have been created and that their security
levels are correct according to documentation provided by the network administrator. If not, see the
NTP-G88 Modify Users and Change Security procedure.
Step 8 If Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is provisioned on the node, click the Provisioning >
SNMP tabs. Verify that all SNMP settings are correct according to documentation provided by the
network administrator. If not, see the NTP-G89 Change SNMP Settings procedure.
Step 9 Repeat this procedure at each node in the network.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G52 Verify Node-to-Node Connections
Note In this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Step 1 Check to see if the fibers coming from the adjacent nodes are connected to the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E,
OPT-AMP-17-C (operating in the booster amplifier mode), or OSC-CSM card LINE RX and TX ports.
If yes, continue with Step 2. If adjacent node fibers are not connected to the LINE RX and TX ports, do
not continue. Install the cabling to the adjacent nodes using the “NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on
DWDM Cards and DCUs” procedure on page 14-78.
Step 2 Verify the following network fiber connections:
• The node’s Side A ports (LINE TX and RX) are connected to the Side B ports (LINE RX and TX)
of the adjacent node.
• The node’s Side B ports (LINE RX and TX) are connected to the Side A ports (LINE TX and RX)
of the adjacent node.
Step 3 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the network node that you want to verify.
Purpose This procedure verifies optical service channel (OSC) terminations
between nodes and checks span attenuation. This procedure applies to all
ROADM, OADM, and line-amplifier locations.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > OSC tabs. Verify that OSC terminations appear under the
OSC Terminations area for the Side B and Side A OSC-CSM or OSCM cards and that the port state is
In-Service and Normal (IS-NR [ANSI]/Unlocked-enabled [ETSI]). If so, continue with Step 5. If OSC
terminations are not created, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Step 5 Complete the NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC procedure for all OSC-CSM cards. If the
measured span loss is within the minimum and maximum expected span loss values, continue with
Step 6. If not, clean the fiber connected to the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-AMP-17-C (operating in the
booster amplifier mode), or OSC-CSM cards on both ends of the span, then repeat the NTP-G76 Verify
Optical Span Loss Using CTC procedure. If the span loss is within the minimum and maximum expected
span loss values, continue with Step 6. If not, contact your next level of support.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 at each network node.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link
Step 1 The Raman pump can be configured in the following ways:
• DLP-G468 Configure the Raman Pump Using the Installation Wizard, page 15-5—This procedure
is the preferred and recommended installation process.
• DLP-G690 Configure the Raman Pump Using Manual Day-0 Installation, page 15-19—Use this
procedure to configure and tune RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards, using manual day-0
installation.
• DLP-G474 Configure the Raman Pump by Importing the CTP XML File, page 15-25—Use this
procedure when the span is longer than 42 dB (expand on span). This procedure is not recommended
for spans of 42 dB or less.
• DLP-G489 Configure the Raman Pump by Setting the ANS Parameters Manually, page 15-25—Use
this procedure if the Raman installation wizard fails and expert intervention is required.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure configures the Raman pump on an Multiservice Transport
Platform (MSTP) link.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G468 Configure the Raman Pump Using the Installation Wizard
Note The installation wizard performs optical measurements and data exchange between the nodes. Make sure
that the data communications network (DCN) is stable.
Note Running the installation wizard without setting the automatic node setup (ANS) parameters causes the
wizard to fail. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
Note Running the installation wizard can impact traffic. Make sure that nobody is working on the nodes before
continuing with this procedure.
Caution To perform optical measurements, the installation wizard automatically turns on hardware resources
installed on the nodes. Alarms can occur during the installation process. Following the recommendations
is critical to the success of installation.
Note Make sure that a Muxponder, a WSS, or a tunable transponder is present before you run the Raman
installation wizard.
Note When the span is longer than 42 dB, do not use the Raman installation wizard.
Purpose This procedure configures the Raman Pump on an MSTP link using the
installation wizard.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127.
• Create an optical service channel (OSC) termination link by
completing the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126 or create an optical transport section (OTS) provisionable
patchcord terminations on line ports by completing “NTP-G184
Create a Provisionable Patchcord” procedure on page 16-72, as
required.
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite and remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note A bulk attenuator is not required between the transponder and the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE
card if the Raman installation wizard is started from a Raman only node (line amplifier node equipped
with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card without post-amplifier).
Step 1 From the CTC View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Figure 15-1 shows a sample network view of nodes (terminal or ROADM) connected in the network.
Figure 15-1 Network View of Nodes (Terminal or ROADM)
The Raman pump on the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card can be configured on a single span or
multiple spans.
Step 3 To start the Raman installation wizard, complete one of the following steps:
• To configure Raman amplification on a single span, go to Network view, right-click on a span and
choose Raman Installation Day0 from the shortcut menu. (Figure 15-2). Go to Step 5.
• To configure Raman amplification on multispans, go to Network view, right-click on a specific node,
and choose Raman Installation Day0 Multi-span from the shortcut menu (Figure 15-3).
15-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-2 Installing the Raman Pump on a Single Span
Figure 15-3 Installing the Raman Pump on Multiple Spans
15-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
The Routing page is displayed (Figure 15-4).
Figure 15-4 Selecting Spans for Raman Amplification
The Included Span list box lists all spans that are selected in the network.
Step 4 Select a span from the network to add a span.
If you are setting up multispans, make sure that the span selection is made in a sequence; otherwise, an
error message is displayed. For example, in Figure 15-4, begin with the span between the nodes
WXC_BSTE_Chica-155 and OLA2_CrownP-154, and then the span between OLA2_CrownP-154 and
OLAasym_Batavia-157, and so on.
Step 5 When you have selected the span or spans, click Next.
The Setting Parameters page is displayed (see Figure 15-5).
15-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-5 Setting Raman Calibration Parameter
Note The Hints area displays the status of internal operations.
Note If multiple spans are selected, the applicable nodes are displayed on the left side of the page.
Step 6 Select one or more check boxes as applicable:
• Autorun wizard—The Installation wizard tunes the selected span automatically, requiring no user
intervention. However, if the wizard displays errors, the wizard requests for user
acknowledgements.
• Even Band—This option is used for optical networks that support only even band channels. If the
network supports odd and even channels, the Raman Installation wizard tunes the transponder to the
first tunable odd band channel.
• Auto Skip Tune Path—The Raman Installation wizard skips spans that have been previously tuned
by the wizard.
• Bidirectional Path—This configures the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards in both directions
(source to destination and destination to source)
• MUX/DMUX Present—This option is used if the optical network has transponders connected to
the A/D stage (MUX or WSS).
Several scenarios are discussed in the following section. Select as applicable:
• Check box Bidirectional Path is unchecked and check box MUX/DMUX Present is checked. See
Figure 15-6 and Step 7a.
• Check box Bidirectional Path is unchecked and check box MUX/DMUX Present is unchecked. See
Figure 15-7 and Step 7b.
15-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• Check box Bidirectional Path is checked and check box MUX/DMUX Present is checked. See
Figure 15-8 and Step 7c.
• Check box Bidirectional Path is checked and check box MUX/DMUX Present is unchecked. See
Figure 15-9 and Step 7d.
Note Before you check the MUX/DMUX Present check box, ensure that the following prerequisites are
completed:
• At least one source node is a terminal node or a ROADM node.
• Two transponders/muxponders supporting wavelength of 1530.33 nm and 1560.61 nm, used as
probe signals, are available on the source node for odd channels or wavelengths of 1530.72 nm and
1561.01 nm for even channels.
• Trunk ports are connected to the correct ADD ports.
Note The Raman Wizard does not verify if the selected TXP connections are properly connected. The
calibration process is terminated if a LOS-P alarm is detected on the MUX input port when the trunk
port is turned on.
Note If you do not use the MUX/DMUX Present check box, ensure that the following prerequisites are
completed:
• Connect a UT2-based trunk port (from a transponder/muxponder card) to the COM-RX port of the
booster amplifier connected to the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on the source node.
A full-spectrum, tunable interface allows the system to tune the signal on two required wavelengths
without any human intervention.
• A 10-dB bulk attenuator must be connected between the TXP trunk port and the COM-RX port of
the booster amplifier.
Caution Make sure that the bulk attenuator is removed as soon as installation finishes and the correct fiber is
reconnected to the COM-RX port of the booster amplifier.
Step 7 Perform any one of the following steps, based on your selection in Step 6.
a. Select the two transponders on the source node from the Slot drop-down list. The installation wizard
tunes the transponders to the required wavelengths. (Figure 15-6).
15-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-6 Bidirectional Path Is Unchecked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Checked
b. Select one transponder on the source node from the Slot drop-down list. The installation wizard
verifies if the transponder can tune on the first tunable wavelength. Make sure that the card used is
a tunable C-band transponder and set the transponder to the “first tunable wavelength”. Otherwise,
the wizard fails and the installation must be repeated using a correctly configured tunable
transponder (Figure 15-7).
Note The wizard uses a pre-installed UT-2 based transponder.
15-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-7 Bidirectional Path Is Unchecked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Unchecked
c. Select the two transponders on the source and destination nodes from the Slot drop-down list. The
installation wizard verifies if the transponders are tuned to the expected wavelengths or on the first
tunable wavelength. Otherwise, the wizard fails and the installation must be repeated (Figure 15-8).
15-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-8 Bidirectional Path Is Checked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Checked
d. Select a transponder on the source and destination nodes from the Slot drop-down list. The
installation wizard verifies if the transponder can be tuned on the first tunable wavelength. Make
sure that the transponder is a tunable C-band transponder. Otherwise, the wizard fails and the
installation must be repeated (Figure 15-9).
15-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-9 Bidirectional Path Is Checked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Unchecked
Step 8 Click Next. The Calibrate Raman Page is displayed (Figure 15-10).
15-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-10 Calibrating Raman Amplification
The installation wizard changes the trunk port to the In-Service (IS) state and turns on all the amplifiers.
All the OTS and optical channel (OCH) ports in the span are changed to IS state.
Step 9 As soon as the Raman calibrations are complete, the Next button is enabled. Click Next.
15-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-11 Calibrating Raman Amplification
Step 10 The power received on the destination node when wavelength on the source is turned on is shown. If you
installed Raman amplification on multiple spans, click Next to view results of other spans.
Step 11 If the installation wizard fails, click the Repeat button. The Raman installation wizard recalibrates the
values on the destination node.
Note If you have repeated the calibration several times and the wizard fails, press Cancel to abort the
installation process. Log in to the Cisco Technical Support Website at
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/support/index.html for more information or call Cisco Technical
Support at (800) 553-2447.
Step 12 Click Next. The Accept Results page is displayed (Figure 15-12).
15-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-12 Raman Amplification Results
The calculated Raman power and Raman gain are displayed. (Figure 15-12.)
Step 13 The wizard compares the calculated Raman gain value with the expected results. Your action depends
on the Raman gain values:
• Expected gain (Gt) – 0.5 dB <= (gain) <= (expected gain) + 0.5 dB—If the Raman gain is within
this range, it means that the setup procedure was successful. Go to Step 14.
• (Expected gain) - 3.0 dB <= (gain) <= (expected gain) – 0.5 dB—If the Raman gain is within this
range, it means that the values are slightly outside the range. The wizard recommends that you verify
the span length and cabling, and repeat the installation wizard procedure. If the Raman gain values
are still not within the expected value range even after repeating the installation process, you can
choose to forcibly apply these values by clicking Force Calibration.
Note After you have forced the new calibration, the new value of the Raman gain is applied to the
OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card as the set point; However, the new value does not update
the value of the ANS set point for Raman gain. After the installation is complete, reanalyze the
network in Cisco Transport Planner using this new value for the Raman gain set point and verify
that it results in a good network design. After the CTP analysis is successful, import the updated
CTP XML file again into CTC by completing the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport
Planner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on page 14-47. Launch, run, and apply the
ANS parameters by completing “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 14-127. This resolves the discrepancy between the values of the ANS parameters and the
card parameters.
15-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
However, we recommend that you log in to the Cisco Technical Support Website at
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/support/index.html for more information if the Raman gain values are
still not within the expected value range or call Cisco Technical Support at (800) 553-2447.
• (gain) < (expected gain) – 3.0 dB or if (gain) < (expected gain) + 0.5 dB—If the Raman gain is within
this range and the values calculated are far from the targeted results, the installation fails and the
wizard recommends repeating the installation. If the results do not improve, it means that the
installation process has failed. The Force Calibration option is not available. Click Cancel to abort
the installation and log in to the Cisco Technical Support Website at
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/support/index.html for more information or call Cisco Technical
Support at (800) 553-2447.
Note The reason that the calculated values are not within the range may be due to installation issues
(for example, the actual fiber type is different than the one used by Cisco Transport Planner to
design the link) or procedural issues.
Step 14 Click Exports Data to export the Raman setup tuning data in text format (Figure 15-13).
Step 15 Click Finish.
Note When an error occurs during calibration of multiple spans, the calibration process stops and the Force
Calibration button becomes visible.
Note If an error occurs during calibration of multiple spans when using the AutoRun wizard, the calibration
stops and the Force Calibration button becomes visible. Click Force Calibration to force the results.
15-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-13 Exporting Raman Tuning Data
Step 16 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G690 Configure the Raman Pump Using Manual Day-0 Installation
Purpose This task tunes the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards manually
during day-0 installation.
Tools/Equipment • An optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) must be available at both the local
and remote nodes.
• A 15 dB bulk attenuator
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• Create an optical service channel (OSC) termination link by
completing the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126 or create optical transport section (OTS) provisionable
patchcord terminations on line ports by completing “NTP-G184
Create a Provisionable Patchcord” procedure on page 16-72, as
required. The ONS-SC-OSC-18.0= SFP is supported.
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note Perform the tuning procedure on one fiber at a time. Tune the RAMAN-COP module on the remote node
followed by RAMAN-CTP of the local node.
Note The RAMAN-COP card needs RAMAN-CTP card to operate.
Note If a 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C card is connected to the COM port of the RAMAN-CTP card, the
ADD-RX port of the 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C card must be set to the OOS,MT (ANSI) or locked,
maintenance (ETSI) state to enable the probe signals. Change the administrative state of the ADD-RX
port to IS,AINS (ANSI) or unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) after the tuning procedure is complete.
See the “DLP-G532 Change Optical Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards” task on
page 20-95.
Note If an OPT-EDFA-17, OPT-EDFA-24, OPT-AMP-C, or OPT-BST-E amplifier is used as a line amplifier
during the tuning procedure, the COM-RX port of the amplifier must be set to the OOS,MT (ANSI) or
locked, maintenance (ETSI) state. Change the administrative state of the COM-RX port to IS,AINS
(ANSI) or unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) after the tuning procedure is complete.
Step 1 To tune the RAMAN-COP card on the remote node, complete Steps 3 through 14.
Step 2 To tune the RAMAN-CTP card on the local node, complete Steps 14 through 22.
Step 3 On the local node, perform the following steps:
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the
RAMAN-CTP card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. Choose On from the OSRI drop-down list for the RAMAN-TX port.
d. Click Apply and then click Yes. This forces both the Raman pumps of the RAMAN-CTP card to
shut down.
Note The DFB signal is not affected by the Raman noise because the Raman pumps of the
RAMAN-CTP card are shut down. The Optical Signal to Noise Ratio (OSNR) value remains
above the failure threshold during the RAMAN-COP card tuning procedure, when the Raman
ratio is forced to 100%.
e. Connect the OSA to the COM-TX port of the RAMAN-CTP card using physical patch cords.
f. Set the OSA Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) to 0.2 nm and the OSA Video Bandwidth (RBV) to
100 Hz.
Step 4 On the remote node, perform the following steps:
a. Connect a tunable C-band transponder or muxponder to the COM-RX port of the line amplifier that
is connected to the COM-RX port of the RAMAN-CTP card.
b. Connect a 15 dB bulk attenuator between the TXP trunk port and the COM-RX port of the line
amplifier so that the input power of the line amplifier does not exceed -7 dBm.
15-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
c. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP or MXP
card.
d. Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
e. Select the wavelength as 1530.33 nm for odd band or 1530.73 nm for even band from the wavelength
field.
f. Click Apply to save the changes.
g. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
h. Choose the IS option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
i. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs, and set the ALS mode to Disable. This enables the line
amplifier or the 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C card to detect a valid input power on the COM-RX or
ADD-RX port respectively. The line amplifier starts up in control power mode and reaches the per
channel power set point. A valid signal flows from the node into the fiber.
Step 5 On the remote node, perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the RAMAN-COP
card.
b. Click Maintenance > Manual Setup tabs.
c. Select the High Power First Lambda option.
d. Click the Pump On button. The High Power First Lambda field becomes editable.
Note The Raman pumps at 1428 nm on the RAMAN-COP card are automatically set to a high power
level of 450 mW.
Step 6 On the local node, record the peak optical power level at 1530.33 nm manually. The OSA detects a single
channel at 1530.33 nm.
Step 7 On the remote node, perform the following
a. Enter the peak optical power value recorded in Step 6 in the High Power First Lambda field.
b. Select the Low Power First Lambda option.
c. Click the Pump On button. The Low Power First Lambda field becomes editable.
Note The Raman pumps at 1428 nm on the RAMAN-COP card are automatically set to a low power
level of 200 mW.
Step 8 On the local node, record the peak optical power level at 1530.33 nm manually. The OSA detects a single
channel at 1530.33 nm. The peak optical power level has reduced significantly.
Step 9 On the remote node, enter the peak optical power value recorded in Step 8 in the Low Power First
Lambda field.
Step 10 Switch off the transponder or muxponder card on the remote node and select the last lambda values using
the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP or MXP
card.
b. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
c. Choose the OOS,DSBLD option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
15-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
d. Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
e. Select 1560.61 nm for odd band or 1561.1 nm for even band wavelength from the wavelength field
and then click Apply.
f. Click Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
g. Choose the IS option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
Step 11 Repeat Steps 5 through 10 to edit the High Power Last Lambda and Low Power Last Lambda settings.
Step 12 On the remote node, click Tune to calculate the power, ratio, and actual gain on the RAMAN-COP card.
The results are displayed in the result panel in the Manual Setup > Maintenance tab.
• Power—Displays the optimum total pump power value provisioned on the RAMAN-COP card to
reach the target Raman installation gain.
• Ratio—Displays the optimum pumps ratio value provisioned on the card to reach the target Raman
gain.
Note The newly calculated set points for the power and ratio can be viewed in the Maintenance >
Installation Report tab in the RAMAN-COP card view after the successful execution of Raman
tuning procedure. The newly provisioned values overwrite the values for the power and ratio
ANS parameters and the Origin field displays the value, “AUTOMATIC” in the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab.
• Actual Gain—Displays the current Raman gain calculated using the power and ratio values. If the
calculated gain is less than the Raman installation gain setpoint, a warning message is displayed,
prompting the user to accept the reduced calculated gain.
Step 13 Click the Force button to force the new gain setpoint.
Step 14 On the local node, perform the following:
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the
RAMAN-CTP card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. Choose Off from the OSRI drop-down list for the RAMAN-TX port.
d. Click Apply and then click Yes.
Step 15 On the local node, perform the following steps:
a. Connect the OSA to the COM-TX port of the RAMAN-CTP card using physical patchcords.
b. Set the OSA Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) to 0.2 nm and the OSA Video Bandwidth (RBV) to
100 Hz.
Step 16 On the remote node, perform the following steps:
a. Connect a tunable C-band transponder or muxponder to the COM-RX port of the line amplifier that
is connected to the COM-RX port of the RAMAN-CTP card.
b. Connect a 15 dB bulk attenuator between the TXP trunk port and the COM-RX port of the line
amplifier so that the input power of the line amplifier does not exceed -7 dBm.
c. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP or MXP
card.
d. Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
e. Select the wavelength as 1530.33 nm for odd bands or 1530.73 nm for even bands from the
wavelength field.
15-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
f. Click Apply to save the changes.
g. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
h. Choose the IS option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
i. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs and set the ALS mode to Disable. This enables the line amplifier
to detect a valid input power on the COM-RX port. The line amplifier starts up in control power
mode and reaches the per channel power setpoint. A valid signal flows from the node into the fiber.
Step 17 On the local node, perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the RAMAN-CTP
card.
b. Click the Maintenance > Manual Start tabs.
c. Select the High Power First Lambda option. Raman pump P1 is activated.
d. Click the Pump On button. The High Power First Lambda field becomes editable.
Note The Raman pumps at 1428 nm on the RAMAN-CTP card are automatically set to a high power
level of 450 mW.
e. Record the peak optical power level at 1530.33 nm manually. The OSA detects a single channel at
1530.33 nm.
f. Enter the peak optical power value recorded in Step 17e in the High Power First Lambda field.
g. Select the Low Power First Lambda option.
h. Click the Pump On button. The Low Power First Lambda field becomes editable.
Note The Raman pumps at 1428 nm on the RAMAN-CTP card are automatically set to a high power
level of 200 mW.
i. Record the peak optical power level at 1530.33 nm manually. The OSA detects a single channel at
1530.33 nm. The peak optical power level has reduced significantly.
j. Enter the peak optical power value recorded in Step 17i in the Low Power First Lambda field.
Step 18 Switch off the transponder or muxponder card on the remote node and select the last lambda values using
the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP or MXP
card.
b. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
c. Choose the OOS,DSBLD option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
d. Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
e. Select the wavelength as 1560.61 nm for odd bands and 1561.1 nm for even bands from the
wavelength field and click Apply.
f. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
g. Choose the IS option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
Step 19 Repeat Steps 17 and 18 to edit the High Power Last Lambda and Low Power Last Lambda settings. The
Raman pump P2 is activated and the Raman ratio is 0%.
15-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 20 On the local node, click the Tune button to calculate the power, ratio, and actual gain on the
RAMAN-CTP card. The results are displayed in the result panel in the Manual Setup > Maintenance tab.
• Power—Displays the calculated optimum total pump power value provisioned on the RAMAN-CTP
card to reach the target Raman installation gain.
• Ratio—Displays the optimum pumps ratio value provisioned on the RAMAN-CTP card to reach the
target Raman gain.
Note The newly calculated setpoints for the power and ratio can be viewed in the Maintenance >
Installation Report tab in the RAMAN-CTP card view after the successful execution of Raman
tuning procedure. The newly provisioned values overwrite the values for the power and ratio
ANS parameters and the Origin field displays the value, “AUTOMATIC” in the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab.
• Actual Gain—Displays the current Raman gain calculated using the power and ratio values.
The calculated gain (G) is compared with the expected Raman gain setpoint (GSTP). Your actions
depends on the value of the calculated gain:
– GSTP – 0.5 dB <= G <= GSTP + 0.5 dB—If the calculated gain is within this range, it means that
the tuning procedure was successful.
– GSTP – 2 dB < G < GSTP—A warning message is displayed, prompting you to accept the reduced
calculated gain. Go to Step 21.
– G < GSTP – 2 dB—A failure message is displayed. Go to Step 22.
Step 21 Click the Force button to force the new gain setpoint.
Note After you have forced the new calibration, the new value of the Raman gain is applied to the
RAMAN-CTP card as the set point. The newly provisioned gain setpoint can be viewed in the
Maintenance > Installation Report tab in the RAMAN-CTP card view. However, the newly
provisioned gain setpoint does not automatically change the values of the Value and Origin fields
of the ANS gain setpoint in the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab. After the
installation is complete, reanalyze the network in Cisco Transport Planner using the new value
for the Raman gain set point and verify that it results in a good network design. After the CTP
analysis is successful, import the updated CTP XML file again into CTC by completing the
“NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on
page 14-47. Launch, run, and apply the ANS parameters by completing “NTP-G37 Run
Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127. This resolves the discrepancy between the
values of the ANS parameters and the card parameters.
Step 22 Repeat the Steps 14 through 21 again after cleaning the fibers and checking the node connections.
Note The status field in the Maintenance > Installation Report tab displays the value, “Raman tuned by
WIZARD” after the tuning procedure is complete.
Step 23 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to complete the tuning procedure in the opposite fiber.
Step 24 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
15-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G474 Configure the Raman Pump by Importing the CTP XML File
Step 1 Install the ANS parameters calculated using Cisco Transport Planner, by completing the “NTP-G143
Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on page 14-47.
Step 2 Launch, run, and apply ANS parameters by completing “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup”
procedure on page 14-127.
Step 3 Verify if the Raman pump was configured successfully. Perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-RAMP-C
or OPT-RAMP-CE amplifier to display the card view.
b. Click the Maintenance > Installation tabs.
c. Verify the value of the Raman Ratio and Raman Total Power parameters are consistent with the ANS
set points.
d. Verify if the status of the Raman configuration displays the value as “Tuned by ANS”. If not, go to
Step 1 to repeat the procedure again.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G489 Configure the Raman Pump by Setting the ANS Parameters Manually
Note This procedure can be performed only on a per span basis and not on multiple spans. To configure
multiple spans, repeat this procedure on each span that you want to configure.
Step 1 Provision the ANS parameters manually, by completing the “DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter” task
on page 14-60. The ANS parameters are:
• (Slot i.OPT-RAMP-CE).Port RAMAN-TX.Amplifier Gain
Purpose This procedure configures the Raman pump by importing the Cisco
Transport Planner XML file.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure configures the Raman pump by setting the ANS parameters
manually.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed, when the wizard fails and expert intervention is required.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• (Slot i.OPT-RAMP-CE).Port RAMAN-TX.Raman Ratio
• (Slot i.OPT-RAMP-CE).Port RAMAN-TX.Raman Total Power
ANS parameters are displayed in the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab. For more
information, see Chapter 12, “Node Reference.”
Step 2 Launch, run, and apply ANS parameters by completing “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup”
procedure on page 14-127.
Step 3 Verify if the Raman pump was configured successfully. Perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-RAMP-C
or OPT-RAMP-CE amplifier to display the card view.
b. Click the Maintenance > Installation tabs.
c. Verify the values of the Raman Ratio and Total Pump Power parameters are consistent with the ANS
set points.
d. Verify the status of the Raman configuration displays the value, “Tuned by ANS”. If not, go to Step 1
to repeat the procedure again.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-490 Restore Raman Link After a Fiber Cut Occurs
Note This procedure does not calculate the Raman pump ratio. The Raman pump ratio is not expected to
change after the fiber cut is repaired.
Caution This procedure affects traffic. Ensure that nobody is working on the nodes before you begin.
Step 1 Complete the “NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network” procedure on page 15-33.
Ensure that the network traffic is restored.
Step 2 Verify if the restore procedure was successful. Perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-RAMP-C
or OPT-RAMP-CE amplifier to display the card view.
b. Click the Maintenance > Installation tabs.
c. Verify the value of the Fiber Cut Recovery column. The possible values are:
• Executed— The restore procedure was completed successfully.
Purpose This procedure tunes Raman set points after a fiber cut has been repaired.
The Raman total power value is calculated again, and the original Raman
gain is restored.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• Pending—The restore procedure is incomplete.
• Failed —The system failed to execute the procedure.
d. If the status is Pending or Failed in Step 2c., perform the following steps:
• Click the Maintenance > APC & Restore tabs.
• Click Restore from Fiber Cut. This recalculates the Raman gain on the span and verifies if this
value is consistent with the ANS set point for Raman gain.
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G53 Set Up Timing
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you will set up timing. If you are already
logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G95 Set Up External or Line Timing” task on page 15-27 if an external building
integrated timing supply (BITS) source is available. This is the most common ONS 15454 timing setup
method.
Step 3 If an external BITS source is not available, complete the “DLP-G96 Set Up Internal Timing” task on
page 15-30. This task can provide only Stratum 3 timing.
Step 4 Repeat this procedure at each node in the network.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G95 Set Up External or Line Timing
Step 1 In node view (single-node mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > Timing >
General tabs.
Purpose This procedure provisions Cisco ONS 15454 timing.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task defines the ONS 15454 timing source (external or line).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 2 In the General Timing area, complete the following information:
• Timing Mode—Choose External if the ONS 15454 derives its timing from a BITS source wired to
the backplane pins (ANSI) or a MIC-C/T/P front-mount electrical connection (FMEC) (ETSI);
choose Line if timing is derived from an OSC-CSM or OSCM card that is optically connected to the
timing node. A third option, Mixed, allows you to set both external and line timing references.
Because Mixed timing might cause timing loops, we do not recommend its use. Use this mode with
care.
Note In ONS 15454 M6 the BITS is connected to ECU or ECU2 BITS Connectors. Refer to
“DLP-G296 Install Timing Wires on ONS 15454 M6 - ANSI” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide. In ONS 15454 M2 the BITS is connected to BITS connectors
on the Power Unit.
• SSM Message Set—Choose the Generation 2 synchronization status messaging (SSM) option. See
Timing Reference for more information about SSM, including definitions of the SONET timing
levels.
Note Generation 1 is used only by SONET or SDH ONS 15454 nodes that are connected to
equipment that does not support Generation 2.
• Quality of RES—Sets the timing quality for the user-defined, reserved (RES) S1 byte if your timing
sources supports RES. Most timing sources do not use RES. If it does not support RES, choose
RES=DUS (do not use for timing reference). Qualities are displayed in descending quality order as
ranges. For example, in Generation 1 SSM, ST3 Timing >
General tabs.
Step 2 In the General Timing area, enter the following:
• Timing Mode—Set to External.
• SSM Message Set—Set to Generation 1.
• Quality of RES—Does not apply to internal timing.
• Revertive—Does not apply to internal timing.
• Reversion Time—Does not apply to internal timing.
Step 3 In the Reference Lists area, enter the following information:
• NE Reference
– Ref 1—Set to Internal Clock.
– Ref 2—Set to Internal Clock.
– Ref 3—Set to Internal Clock.
• BITS-1 Out/BITS-2 Out—Set to None.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the BITS Facilities tab.
Step 6 In the BITS Facilities area, change the BITS In state and BITS Out state to OOS for BITS 1 and BITS 2.
Disregard the other BITS Facilities settings; they are not relevant to internal timing.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G350 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report
Step 1 Display a printed copy of the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix report for your network. The report
can be exported in Microsoft Excel (.xls) or HTML format.
Step 2 View the following information:
• Service Demand—Lists the general service demand from site to site.
• Service Circuit—Lists the service circuit.
• OCH-CC Src—Lists the optical channel client connection (OCHCC) source site and the shelf
direction, either Side B or Side A.
Purpose This task describes how to use the Cisco Transport Planner traffic matrix
report to provision and verify a DWDM network.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• OCH-CC Src Position—Lists the OCHCC source rack, shelf, and slot.
• OCH-CC Src Unit—Lists the OCHCC source TXP, MXP, or ITU-T line card.
• OCH-CC Src Port—Lists the OCHCC source port.
• A/D Src Position—Lists the optical channel add/drop card source rack, shelf, and slot.
• A/D Src Unit—Lists the optical channel add/drop card source TXP, MXP, or ITU-T line card.
• A/D Src Port—Lists the optical channel add/drop card source port.
• OCH-CC Dst—Lists the OCHCC destination site and shelf direction, either Side B or Side A.
• OCH-CC Dst Position—Lists the OCHCC destination rack, shelf, and slot.
• OCH-CC Dst Unit—Lists the OCHCC destination TXP, MXP, or ITU-T line card.
• OCH-CC Dst Port—Lists the OCHCC destination port.
• A/D Dst Position—Lists the optical channel add/drop card destination rack, shelf, and slot
• A/D Dst Unit—Lists the optical channel add/drop card destination TXP, MXP, or ITU-T line card.
• A/D Dst Port—Lists the optical channel add/drop card destination port.
– Dest Unit is the product ID of the optical path source card.
– Dest Port is the port label reported on the front panel of the optical path destination card.
• Cl Service Type—Identifies the service type of the optical channel.
• Protection—Identifies the type of protection used for the optical channel:
– Optical paths for unprotected-Side B and unprotected-Side A optical channels are routed along
one direction only in the network.
– Optical paths for Y-cable, fiber-switched, and client 1+1 optical channels are routed along two
independent directions in the network.
• Op Bypass Site Name—Identifies where the optical channel is dropped and reinserted when it is not
terminated on a TXP or MXP card (optical bypass).
Note If the word None appears in the Op Bypass Site Name column, no optical bypass is defined
for the optical channel.
• Wavelength—Identifies the wavelength used for the optical channel. Table 16-6 on page 16-20 lists
the thirty-two available wavelengths.
• DWDM Interface Type—Identifies the DWDM interface type that is used for the optical channel:
– Transponder indicates that a transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), or DWDM pluggable port
module is used for the optical channel.
– Line Card indicates that an ITU line card is used for the optical channel.
• DWDM Card Type—Identifies the type of TXP or line card that is used for the optical channel. For
information about card types supported by Cisco Transport Planner, see Cisco Transport Planner
DWDM Operations Guide.
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
15-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network
Note In this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to an ONS 15454 node on the network.
Step 2 Click the Alarms tab:
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not turned on. See the DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering task, as
necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment (EQPT) alarms appear. If equipment failure alarms appear, investigate and
resolve them before continuing. Refer to Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Step 3 Using the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix (see Table 14-1 on page 14-4) for your site, identify
the first channel (ITU wavelength) to be provisioned. Use the TXP, MXP, or line card that corresponds
to the selected wavelength.
Step 4 For the ITU wavelength identified in Step 3, create an optical channel client connection (OCHCC)
circuit or optical channel network connection (OCHNC) circuit, or optical channel trail circuit using one
of the following tasks:
• DLP-G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections, page 16-17.
• DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-41.
• DLP-G395 Create an Optical Channel Trail, page 16-34.
.After creating the OCHCC or OCHNC circuit, return to this procedure and continue with Step 5.
Purpose This procedure describes how to turn-up an optical service in MSTP
networks. It also provides a guidance to perform an entry-level optical
performances verification of an optical circuit
(OCH-NC/OCH-CC/OCHTrail) created on the MSTP networks.
Tools/Equipment Test set or protocol analyzer
Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards.
Provisioning procedures of these cards are provided in Chapter 11,
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note Every time a channel is created in the DWDM network, the amplifiers automatically calculate
the optical output power needed to maintain a constant power level on each channel when
working in Gain Control. If the amplifier is working in power control, APC tool is used for
amplifiers power level calculation and setting. Automatic power control (APC) runs when you
create new circuits. APC also runs periodically (every 60 minutes) to check and monitor power
levels in all the significant sections of the network. If the span length changes, APC modifies
amplifier gains and modifies express variable optical attenuation (VOA). For more information
about APC, see the Chapter 13, “Network Reference.”
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Circuits tab. Verify that
the OCHCC or OCHNC created in Step 4 has a DISCOVERED status and an IS state. If so, continue
with Step 6. If not, complete “NTP-G183 Diagnose and Fix OCHNC and OCH Trail Circuits” task on
page 16-63.
Step 6 Click the circuit and click Edit.
Step 7 In the Edit Circuit dialog box, click the State tab.
Step 8 In the Cross-Connections table, verify that the circuit path is correct and record all the nodes that appear
in the Node column. The first node is the circuit source, and the last node is the circuit destination. If the
circuit path is incorrect, delete the circuit and go back to Step 4 to create a new circuit.
Step 9 Perform the entry-level performance verification of the optical power levels matching with expected
setpoints for the OCH-circuit identified in Step 8.
Optical verification is done for cards in the OCH-circuit. The verification must be done node by node,
following the logical signal flow from source to destination node.
Verify the power levels on the following:
a. Fixed or reconfigurable add/drop cards.
b. Amplifiers, including the raman cards.
Note You need to verify the power setpoint for OPT-PSM cards in the path protection configuration.
Step 10 Display the circuit source node in node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode).
Following the signal flow from the TXP, MXP, or line card Trunk ports, if an fixed or reconfigurable
add/drop card is installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 11.
Note Use of Node Functional View to identify at a glance, the logical signal flow in complex nodes.
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector area, select the first fixed or reconfigurable add/drop card to be checked. Identify the
power parameter and record the corresponding port and active value from the parameter list.
c. Check the power setpoint on the ports displayed in the Port field in CTC. The add/drop cards must
meet this output power setpoint per channel.
d. Display the selected fixed or reconfigurable add/drop module in card view:
e. Click the Provisioning tabs.
f. Locate the port selected in step b in the CTC menu.
15-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note The CTC displays the name according to the card installed.
g. Identify the row associated to the Port. Check the value reported in Power or Power To column in
CTC.
– If the card value matches the VOA Power Ref. cell or the recorded Power value, with +/- 1 dB
of tolerance, continue with Step 11.
Note VOA Power Ref at card level must be equal to the Power Active Value recorded in step b. If not,
go back to Node view and click the ANS button. Then repeat this procedure.
– If the value is out of tolerance range from the VOA Power Ref, contact your next level of
support.
Step 11 Display the circuit source node in node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode).
Following the signal flow, if an amplifier card is installed, complete the following steps.
Note Use of Node Functional View to identify the logical signal flow in complex nodes at a glance.
If not, continue with Step 12.
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector area, click the amplifier card to be checked. Identify the power parameter and record
the corresponding port and active value from the parameter list.
c. Check the power setpoint on the ports displayed in the Port field in CTC. The add/drop cards must
meet this output power setpoint per channel.
d. Display the selected amplifier in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Identify the row associated to the
Port selected in step b. Check the signal output power value.
– If the value is equal to or greater (due to ASE accumulation) than the value shown in the
Channel Power Ref cell, continue with Step 12.
Note Channel Power Reference at card level must be equal to the Power Active Value noted in step b.
If not, go back to Node view and click the ANS button. Then repeat this procedure.
– If the value is lower than the value shown in the Channel Power Reference cell, contact your
next level of support.
Step 12 Go to the Edit Circuit dialog box and move to the next intermediate node in node view (single-shelf
mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode). Following the signal flow, repeat Step 10 and Step 11 in order
to check fixed or reconfigurable add/drop cards and amplifiers cards.
When all the intermediate nodes have been checked, move to Step 13 to verify the destination node.
Step 13 Display the Destination node in node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode).
Following the signal flow, if an amplifier card is installed, complete the power levels check according
with Step 11.
15-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Complete the power level verification on the fixed or reconfigurable add/drop card that is dropping the
signal using the following steps:
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector area, click the last fixed or reconfigurable drop card to be checked. Identify the drop
power parameter among the optical parameters and record the correspondent Port and Active Value.
c. Check the power setpoint on the ports displayed in the Port field in CTC. The cards must meet this
Drop Power setpoint per channel.
d. Display the selected fixed or reconfigurable add/drop module in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning tabs.
f. Locate the port selected in step b in the CTC menu.
Note The CTC displays the name according to the card installed.
g. Identify the row associated to the Port. Check the value reported in Power or Power To column in
CTC.
– If the card value matches the VOA Power Ref. cell (when present) or the recorded Power Drop
value, with +/- 2 dB of tolerance, continue with Step 14.
Note VOA Power Ref at card level must be equal to the Power Drop Active Value recorded in step b.
If not, go back to Node view and click the ANS button. Then repeat this procedure.
– If the value is out of tolerance range from the VOA Power Ref, contact your next level of
support.
Step 14 Check the received power range on TXP, MXP, or line cards:
a. Navigate to the node where the first TXP, MXP, or line card is installed.
b. Display the TXP, MXP, or line card in card view.
c. Complete the DLP-G136 Clear Selected PM Counts.
d. Click the Performance > Optics PM tabs.
e. Record the values shown in the RX Optical Pwr field.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
g. Verify that the value in Step e falls between the values shown for the RX Power High and
RX Power Low. If so, continue with Step 15. If not, complete one of the following.
– Power lower than range—Clean the trunk fiber at the patch panel and on the TXP or MXP card.
Repeat Steps e through g. If the power is still too low, contact your next level of support.
– Power higher than range—Add attenuation to the fiber and repeat Steps e through g. If the power
still does not fall within the range, contact your next level of support.
Step 15 Perform a short-term bit error rate (BER) test:
a. Complete the DLP-G136 Clear Selected PM Counts for the TXP, MXP, or line card.
b. Display the TXP, MXP, or line card in card view.
c. Click the Performance > Payload PM tabs, or, if OTN is provisioned, the Performance > OTN PM
tabs.
15-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
d. Perform a short-term BER test using a test signal from a test set or protocol analyzer.
e. Monitor the payload performance monitoring (PM) for at least 10 minutes for errors.
Note To see an accurate PM count, the BER test results must be consistent with the transmitted
bit rate for at least 10 minutes.
Note For information about using a test set or protocol analyzer, see the test set or protocol
analyzer user guide.
Step 16 Create a new OCHNC or OCHCC circuit for the next ITU wavelength listed in the Cisco Transport
Planner Traffic Matrix and perform one of the following tasks:
• If the new circuit optical path is not including nodes different from those the first circuits belongs
to, perform only steps from Step 13 to Step 15.
• If the new circuit optical path includes new nodes, do the proper optical checks:
– Step 10 and Step 11 if the new node is the Source node
– Step 12 if the new nodes are intermediate nodes
– Step 13 if the new node is the destination node
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G56 Verify the OSNR
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at an ONS 15454 on the network.
Step 2 Using an optical spectrum analyzer, check the received OSNR for each transmitted channel on both ends
of the span. Identify the last OSC-CSM, OPT-PRE, or OPT-BST MON port that the channel passes
through before it is dropped.
Note The OPT-PRE reference also applies to the OPT-AMP-17-C card operating in OPT-PRE mode
and the OPT-BST reference also applies to the OPT-AMP-17-C card operating in OPT-LINE
mode.
Step 3 If OPT-PRE cards are installed with an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card, use the OPT-PRE
MON port.
Purpose This procedure verifies the optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR). The
OSNR is the ratio between the signal power level and the noise power level.
Tools/Equipment Optical spectrum analyzer
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note For OSNR values for each card class, see Chapter 4, “Optical Amplifier Cards.”
Step 4 If the OSNR is too low, check the following, depending on your node configuration:
Note The purpose of this step is not to improve the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), but to match the
per-channel power level within the RX port power range.
• Check the fiber connections between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the
OPT-PRE amplifier. If needed, clean the connectors. See the NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors
procedure.
• On the near-end OPT-BST amplifier, check the equalization of the added channels at the monitor
output.
• On the OPT-PRE amplifier, check the output power on both COM TX and DC TX ports.
• On the far-end OPT-PRE amplifier, check the amplifier gain tilt at the monitor output.
If the OSNR is still too low, contact your next level of support.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 2 and 4 for all traffic in the network.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G142 Perform a Protection Switch Test
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at an ONS 15454 on the network.
Purpose This procedure tests the optical path, client TXP, MXP, GE_XP and
GE_XPE (when provisioned in 10GE or 20GE MXP mode), 10GE_XP and
10GE_XPE (when provisioned in 10GE TXP mode), and OTU2_XP (when
provisioned in TXP mode) cards and the Y-cable protection groups in your
network for proper operation. The test signals can be generated by either
the actual client device or a test set (whichever is available). We
recommend that you repeat this test at each node in the network where
protection group traffic is dropped.
Tools/Equipment A list of protection groups. This information is provided in the
Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix.
A test set or actual client device that provides the required payload for the
circuits that are provisioned.
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite; personnel are required to be on site at each end of the circuit under
test.
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 2 Identify the Y-cable circuit to be tested by viewing the Traffic Matrix for your site. Locate the TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards in the ONS 15454 node that will be used
for the protection group.
Step 3 Verify that the Y-cable protection group is provisioned:
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Protection tabs.
b. In the Protect and Working areas, confirm that the correct TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards are in the Y-cable protection group by viewing the slot number and
card type.
c. If the required protection group is not provisioned, stop and perform the “NTP-G33 Create a
Y-Cable Protection Group” procedure on page 11-162. Otherwise, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Repeat Step 3 for each Y-cable protection group at the node. When all protection groups are verified,
continue with the next step.
Step 5 Physically connect the transmitter of the client or test set to either Port 10 or Port 12 of the Y-cable
module protecting the test circuit. (See Table 14-7 on page 14-109 and Table 14-8 on page 14-109.)
Step 6 If you connected the transmitter to Port 10, connect the client or test set receiver to Port 5 on the Y-cable
module. If not, connect the client or test set receiver to Port 11 on the Y-cable module.
Step 7 At the far-end site for the test circuit, physically loop the Y-cable module as follows:
a. If this is the first client on the Y-cable module, loop Port 10 to Port 5 on the far-end Y-cable module.
b. If this is the second client on the Y-cable module, loop Ports 11 and 12 on the far-end Y-cable
module.
Step 8 At the near-end site for the test circuit, place the client device or test set into service and begin
transmitting the required payload.
Step 9 In CTC, display the near-end site in node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 10 Click the Maintenance > Protection tabs.
Step 11 In the Protection Groups area, highlight the protection group to be tested.
Step 12 In the Selected Group area, identify the active slot and the standby slot.
Step 13 Verify that the LED s on the physical cards in the shelf match the following:
a. For the active TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card, record the
slot number: _____. Verify that the port LEDs appear as follows:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is green.
b. For the standby TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card, record
the slot number: _____. Verify that the port LEDs appear as follows:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is not illuminated or amber, depending on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card.
Step 14 In the Selected Group area, highlight the active TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
or OTU2_XP slot.
Step 15 From the Switch Commands area below the Selected Group area, click Manual, then click YES.
15-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 16 From the Selected Group area, record the following information and verify that the active and standby
TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP slot numbers are the opposite of
Step 13.
a. For the active TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card, record the
slot number: _____. Verify that the port LEDs appear as follows:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is green.
b. For the standby TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card, record
the slot number: _____. Verify that the port LEDs appear as follows:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is not illuminated or amber, depending on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card.
Step 17 Verify that the LEDs on the physical cards in the shelf match the following:
a. For the active TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP slot LEDs:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is green.
b. For the standby TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP slot LEDs:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is not illuminated.
Step 18 Confirm that the client or test set at the local site is operating normally without alarms. If the test set is
reporting active alarms, contact your next level of support.
Note It is normal to see a traffic hit on the test set during a protection switch.
Step 19 From the Switch Commands area below the Selected Group area, click Clear, then click YES to return
the protection group to the original state.
Step 20 Repeat Steps 5 through 19 for each protection group at your site.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G164 Configure Link Management Protocol
Purpose This procedure configures Link Management Protocol (LMP). LMP
manages the channels and links that are required between nodes for
routing, signaling, and link management.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note This procedure is normally required only when the Cisco ONS 15454 must run traffic to and from a
Calient PXC, a Cisco CRS-1 router, or a Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Note Cisco ONS Software Release 9.4 supports Cisco CRS-1 routers using Cisco IOS XR Software Release
3.9.0 and Cisco ASR 9000 routers using Cisco IOS XR Software Release 4.1.0. If you have an earlier
version of the Cisco IOS XR software, you cannot configure LMP on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 router, and the router will be visible as an unknown node in the CTC network view.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to the ONS 15454 on the network.
Step 2 To enable LMP, complete the “DLP-G372 Enable LMP” task on page 15-41.
Step 3 To set up one or more control channels, complete the “DLP-G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control
Channels” task on page 15-42.
Step 4 To set up one or more traffic engineering (TE) links, complete the “DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete
LMP TE Links” task on page 15-45.
Step 5 To set up one or more data links, complete the “DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links”
task on page 15-46.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G372 Enable LMP
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > General tabs.
Step 2 In the Configuration area, click the Enable LMP check box to enable the LMP function.
Step 3 In the Local Node Id text entry box, enter the local node ID in the form of an IP address.
Note Do not set the LMP Local Node ID to another IP address in use on the network. This introduces
a duplicate IP address in the network for traffic going to the IP address that is used as the LMP
Local Node ID. We recommended to you set the LMP Local Node ID to the node's IP address,
because this does not introduce a duplicate IP address in the network.
Step 4 If you are going to use LMP to manage a control channel between a Calient PXC node and a
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node or between a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node, ensure that the LMP-WDM check box is unchecked.
Purpose This task enables the LMP function on the ONS 15454 node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 5 If you are going to use LMP to manage a control channel between the ONS 15454 nodes, check the
LMP-WDM check box and use the Role field to choose one of the following roles:
• PEER, to use LMP to manage links between two nodes where the other node is configured as OLS.
• OLS, to use LMP to manage links between two nodes where the other node is configured as PEER.
The role selection is available only when LMP-WDM is enabled on the local node. Both the local and
remote nodes must be configured with LMP-WDM enabled.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 In the Status area, verify that the Operational State is Up. This indicates that LMP is enabled and the link
is active.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > Control Channels tabs.
Step 2 To create a control channel, click Create. The Create LMP Control Channel dialog box appears.
Note The values of the Admin State, Requested Hello Interval, Min Hello Interval, Max Hello
Interval, Requested Hello Dead Interval, Min Hello Dead Interval, and Max Hello Dead Interval
fields correspond to the values specified for these fields in the NODE > lmp section of the node
view Provisioning > Defaults tabs. If you change the NODE > lmp values, those values are
reflected as defaults in the Create LMP Control Channel dialog box. You can change the default
values using the dialog box. However, the NODE > lmp values are always used as the initial
defaults.
Step 3 In the Create LMP Control Channel dialog box, complete the following:
• Admin State—Select unlocked (if you are using an ETSI shelf) or IS (if you are using an ANSI
shelf) to establish the control channel; otherwise, select locked, disabled (ETSI) or OOS-DSBLD
(ANSI) to set the control channel to out of service.
• Local Port—Select Routed if the control channel is to be sent over the control plane or management
network; otherwise, if the control channel is to be sent over the same fiber as the traffic (either in
the payload or in the overhead), select one of the available traffic ports.
• Local Port Id—(Display only) Displays the local port identifier assigned by the node.
Purpose This task creates, edits, or deletes one or more LMP control channels
between pairs of Cisco ONS 15454 nodes, between a Calient PXC and a
Cisco ONS 15454, or between a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router
and a Cisco ONS 15454 node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G372 Enable LMP, page 15-41
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• Remote Node Type—Select 15454 or non-CRS1 if you are creating a control channel between two
Cisco ONS 15454 nodes or between a Calient PXC and a Cisco ONS 15454 node; select CRS-1 if
you are creating a control channel between a Cisco CRS-1 router and a Cisco ONS 15454 node;
otherwise, select ASR9K if you are creating a control channel between a Cisco ASR 9000 router
and a Cisco ONS 15454 node.
• Remote Node Address—In dotted-decimal format, enter the number that identifies the IP address of
the remote node (either a Calient PXC peer node, a Cisco CRS-1 router, Cisco ASR 9000 router, or
a Cisco ONS 15454 node) where the control channel will be established.
• Remote Node ID—Initially, CTC autopopulates this value to the remote node IP address that you
just assigned. However, you can change the identifier to any nonzero 32-bit integer in dotted decimal
format (for example, 10.92.29.10).
• Requested Hello Interval—Enter the Requested Hello Interval in milliseconds (ms). Before sending
Hello messages, the Hello Interval and Hello Dead Interval parameters must be established by the
local and remote nodes. These parameters are exchanged in the Config message. The Hello Interval
indicates how frequently LMP Hello messages will be sent; the interval must be in the 300 ms to
5000 ms range. The Min Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Requested Hello Interval,
and the Requested Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Max Hello Interval.
• Min Hello Interval—Enter the minimum Hello Interval in milliseconds. When the two nodes
negotiate for the Hello Interval, the value that you enter here will be the minimum Hello Interval
acceptable for the local node. The Min Hello Interval must be in the 300 ms to 5000 ms range. The
Min Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Requested Hello Interval and the Requested
Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Max Hello Interval.
• Max Hello Interval—Enter the maximum Hello Interval in milliseconds. When the two nodes
negotiate for the Hello Interval, the value that you enter here will be the maximum Hello Interval
acceptable for the local node. The Max Hello Interval must be in the 300 ms to 5000 ms range. The
Min Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Requested Hello Interval and the Requested
Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Max Hello Interval.
• Requested Hello Dead Interval—Enter the Requested Hello Dead Interval in milliseconds. The
Requested Hello Dead Interval indicates how long a device should wait to receive a Hello message
before declaring a control channel dead. The Requested Hello Dead interval must be in the 2000 ms
to 20000 ms range. The Min Hello Dead Interval must be less than or equal to the Requested Hello
Dead Interval and the Requested Hello Dead Interval must be less than or equal to the Max Hello
Dead Interval.
Note The Requested Hello Dead Interval must be at least three times greater than the Requested
Hello Interval.
• Min Hello Dead Interval—Enter the minimum Hello Dead Interval in milliseconds. The minimum
Hello Dead Interval must be in the 2000 ms to 20000 ms range. The minimum Hello Dead Interval
must be less than or equal to the Requested Hello Dead Interval and the Requested Hello Dead
Interval must be less than or equal to the Max Hello Dead Interval. When the two nodes negotiate
for the Hello Dead Interval, the value that you enter here will be the minimum Hello Dead Interval
acceptable for the local node.
Note The value of the Min Hello Dead Interval must be greater than the Min Hello Interval.
15-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• Max Hello Dead Interval—Enter the maximum Hello Dead Interval in milliseconds. This interval
must be in the 2000 ms to 20000 ms range. The Min Hello Dead Interval must be less than or equal
to the Requested Hello Dead Interval and the Requested Hello Dead Interval must be less than or
equal to the Max Hello Dead Interval. When the two nodes negotiate for the Hello Dead Interval,
the value that you enter here will be the maximum Hello Dead Interval acceptable for the local node.
Note The Max Hello Dead Interval must be greater than the Max Hello Interval.
Step 4 Click OK to accept the parameters that you have entered, or click Cancel to return to the Control
Channels tab without creating a control channel.
Step 5 If you have chosen the Remote Node Type as CRS-1 or ASR9K in Step 3 and if you have chosen that
automatic LMP configuration in the “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series,
or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters” task on page 15-50, a confirmation dialog box is displayed to
indicate that this operation will also change the configuration of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
router. Click Yes.
Step 6 If you created a control channel, verify that the parameters for the new Control Channel appear properly
in the Control Channels tab.
Note The Actual Hello Interval and Actual Hello Dead Interval parameters reflect the values of these
parameters as a result of the negotiated agreement of the local and remote nodes. They may be
different than the requested values.
Step 7 After the LMP control channel has been created, observe the status of the channel in the Operational
State column of the Control Channels tab, and take the appropriate action as shown in the following list:
• Up—The control channel contacted the far-end node and successfully negotiated a control channel.
• Down—LMP is enabled and the link is inactive. Ensure that the Admin State of the control channel
is unlocked (ETSI) or IS (ANSI) and not disabled (ETSI) or OOS-DSBLD (ANSI). If the state still
does not transition to Up, the far-end control channel might have disjointed Hello negotiation times
that prevent a control channel from transitioning to the Up state. For example, the local ONS 15454
Min Hello Interval and Max Hello Interval might be 900 to 1000, while the remote Min Hello
Interval and Max Hello Interval is 1100 to 1200.
• Config Send—The connection could not be made to the remote node. Check to make sure that the
remote node address and remote node ID addresses are correct.
• Config Received—The local node sent a configuration request to the remote node and received a
response of either ConfigNack or ConfigAck.
• Unknown
Step 8 To delete a control channel, click the channel row to highlight it and click Delete. A confirmation dialog
box appears that allows you to click OK or Cancel.
Step 9 To edit a control channel, click the channel row to highlight it and click Edit. A dialog box appears that
allows you to change the control channel parameters. You can then click OK or Cancel. If you are
editing a control channel that involves a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router, a confirmation dialog
box is displayed. Click Yes.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
15-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > TE Links tabs.
Step 2 To create a TE link, click Create. The Create LMP TE Link dialog box appears.
Step 3 In the Create LMP TE Link dialog box, complete the following:
• Admin State—Select unlocked (for ETSI shelves) or IS (for ANSI shelves) to put the TE link in
service; otherwise, select locked, disabled (ETSI) or OOS-DSBLD (ANSI) to set the TE link to out
of service.
• Remote Node Id—Select a remote node (either a Calient PXC peer node, a Cisco CRS-1 router, a
Cisco ASR 9000 router, or a Cisco ONS 15454 node) for the other end of the TE link.
• Remote TE Link Id—Enter an unsigned 32-bit value (such as 0x00000001) to identify the remote
node identifier for the other end of the TE link. This option is not available if you have chosen the
automatic LMP configuration in “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series,
or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters” task on page 15-50.
• MUX Capability—Select the MUX capability. This option is not available if you are creating a TE
link that involves a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Step 4 Click OK to accept the parameters that you have entered and create the TE link, or click Cancel to return
to the Control Channels tab without creating a TE link.
Step 5 If you created a TE link, verify that the parameters for the new TE link now appear properly in the TE
Links tab.
Step 6 After the TE link has been created, observe the status of the TE link in the Operational State column of
the TE Links pane, and take the appropriate action as shown in the following list:
• Up—The TE link is active.
• Down—Ensure that the Admin State of the TE link is unlocked (ETSI) or IS (ANSI) and not
disabled (ETSI) or OOS-DSBLD (ANSI). The TE link does not transition to the Up state until a data
link has been provisioned.
• Init—Verify that the Remote Node ID and Remote TE Link ID values are correct for the remote
node. Verify that the remote node is using the Cisco ONS 15454 or the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 router IP address for its remote node IP and that the remote node is using the local TE link
index for its remote TE link index.
Step 7 To delete a TE link, click the link row to highlight it and click Delete. A confirmation dialog box appears
that allows you to click OK or Cancel.
Step 8 To edit a TE link, click the link row to highlight it and click Edit. A dialog box appears that allows you
to change the TE link parameters. You can then click OK or Cancel.
Purpose This task creates, edits, or deletes TE links and their association to
neighboring LMP nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G372 Enable LMP, page 15-41
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links
Note A port cannot be deleted if it is being used by a data link. A card cannot be deleted if any of its ports are
being used by data links. Changing the state of the port impacts the state of a data link using the port.
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > Data Links tabs.
Step 2 To create a data link, click Create. The Create LMP Data Link dialog box appears.
Step 3 In the Create LMP Data Link dialog box, complete the following:
• Local Port—Select one of the available local ports for the data link.
• Local Port Id—(Display only) Displays the local port identifier.
• Data Link Type—Select Port or Component. A data link is considered to be either a port or a
component link on each node where it terminates, depending on the multiplexing capability of the
endpoint on that link; component links are multiplex capable, whereas ports are not multiplex
capable.
• Local TE Link Id—Select an identifier for one of the local TE links that has already been created.
• Remote CRS Port Id—Select one of the available remote Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 ports for
the data link. This option is not available if you are creating a data link between two
Cisco ONS 15454 nodes.
• Remote Port Id—Enter an unsigned 32-bit value (such as 0x00000001) to identify the remote node
identifier for the other end of the data link. This option is not available if you have chosen the
automatic LMP configuration in the “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000
Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters” task on page 15-50.
Step 4 Click OK to accept the parameters you have entered and create the data link, or click Cancel to return
to the Data Links tab without creating a data link.
Step 5 If you are creating a data link that involves a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and if you have
chosen the automatic LMP configuration in the “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR
9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters” task on page 15-50, a confirmation dialog box is
displayed to indicate that this operation will also change the configuration of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco
ASR 9000 router. Click Yes.
Purpose This task creates, edits, or deletes one or more data links, which define the
node’s transport parameters. CTC supports up to 256 LMP data links.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network, page 15-33
DLP-G372 Enable LMP, page 15-41
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 6 If you created a data link, verify that the parameters for the new data link now appear properly in the
Data Links tab.
Step 7 After the data link has been created, observe its status in the Operational State column of the Data Links
tab, and take the appropriate action as shown in the following list:
• Up–Alloc or Up–Free—If the data link state does not transition to Up–Alloc or Up–Free, verify that
the port is in service. Verification must be done using the CTC card view > Provisioning tab for the
cards. (The difference between Up–Alloc and Up–Free is that an Up–Alloc data link is allocated for
data traffic. An Up–Free data link is not allocated for traffic. The far end is either not ready to receive
traffic through this port, or the path is being used as a backup in case some other allocated data link
goes down).
• Down—The data link will be in the Down state if the port is not unlocked or not in-service. Verify
that the remote port ID for the far-end data link is correct. On the far end, verify that the data link
is using the local port ID as its remote port ID.
Step 8 To delete a data link, click the data link row to highlight it and click Delete. A confirmation dialog box
appears that allows you to click OK or Cancel.
Step 9 To edit a data link, click the data link row to highlight it and click Edit. A dialog box appears that allows
you to change the data link parameters. You can then click OK or Cancel. If you are editing a data link
that involves a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router, a confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click
Yes.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node
Note This procedure is normally required only when the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node must run traffic to
and from a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to a DWDM node on the network.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series
Router Parameters” task on page 15-50 to configure the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router
parameters.
Purpose This procedure configures LMP on the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node and
on the corresponding Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 physical layer
interface module (PLIM) port.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Series
Router and Verify Configuration” task on page 15-51 to establish a Telnet session with the Cisco CRS-1
or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G510 Create a Task Group, User Group, and User Account on the Cisco CRS-1 or
Cisco ASR 9000 Series Router” task on page 15-52 to create task groups, user groups, and user accounts
on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Step 5 If you have chosen the automatic LMP configuration in Step 2, complete the “NTP-G234 Automatically
Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco
ONS 15454 DWDM Node” procedure on page 15-48.
If you have chosen the manual LMP configuration in Step 2, complete the “NTP-G207 Manually
Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco
ONS 15454 DWDM Node” procedure on page 15-49.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G234 Automatically Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G372 Enable LMP, page 15-41 to enable the LMP function on the DWDM node.
Step 2 Complete the DLP-G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels, page 15-42 to create the LMP
control channel between the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and the DWDM node.
Step 3 Complete the DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links, page 15-45 to create TE links between
the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and the DWDM node.
Step 4 Complete the DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links, page 15-46 to create a data link,
which define the node’s transport parameters.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure automatically configures LMP on the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM node and on the corresponding Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
PLIM port.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or
Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node,
page 15-47
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
NTP-G207 Manually Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node
Note For more information about the Cisco IOS XR commands used in the DLPs, see the Cisco IOS XR
Command Reference publication at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5845/products_product_indices_list.html.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G372 Enable LMP, page 15-41 to enable the LMP function on the DWDM node.
Step 2 Complete the DLP-G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels, page 15-42 to create the LMP
control channel between the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and the DWDM node.
Step 3 Complete the DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links, page 15-45 to create TE links between
the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and the DWDM node.
Step 4 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > TE Links tab and write down the
value of the Local TE Link field so that it can be used later.
Step 5 Complete the DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links, page 15-46 to create a data link,
which define the node’s transport parameters.
Step 6 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > Data Links tab and write down the
value of the Local Port Id field so that it can be used later.
Step 7 Complete the DLP-G482 Configure a Static Route, page 15-55 to configure a static route.
Step 8 Complete the DLP-G483 Configure Local and Remote TE Links, page 15-56 to configure the local and
remote TE links.
Step 9 Complete the DLP-G484 Enable the LMP Message Exchange, page 15-58 to enable LMP message
exchange with the LMP neighbor.
Step 10 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > Data Links tab and from the Local
Port field, write down the card and the port involved in the LMP link. Double-click the card involved in
the LMP link. In card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs and write down
the value of the Actual Wavelength field for the port involved in the LMP link.
Step 11 Complete the DLP-G511 Configure the Wavelength on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router,
page 15-59 to configure the wavelength on the PLIM port of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Purpose This procedure manually configures LMP on the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM node and on the corresponding Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
PLIM port.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or
Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node,
page 15-47
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 12 If you need RADIUS AAA services, complete the DLP-G494 Configure the RADIUS Server,
page 15-61 to configure a RADIUS server.
Step 13 Complete the DLP-G485 Enable Index Persistency on an SNMP Interface, page 15-62 to enable index
persistency on an SNMP interface.
Step 14 Complete the DLP-G486 Configure the LMP Router ID, page 15-63 to configure LMP router ID.
Step 15 Complete the DLP-G487 Configure the 10 Gigabit Ethernet (GE) or POS Interface, page 15-64 to
configure an interface and specify the IPv4 address for the interface.
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform DLP-G482,
DLP-G483, DLP-G484, DLP-G494, DLP-G485, and DLP-G486. The task privileges required to
perform these DLPs are similar to the privileges required for automatic LMP configuration.
Step 16 Complete the DLP-G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information, page 15-65 to display the
interface resource or a summary of link management information.
Step 17 Complete the DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links, page 15-45 to edit the TE link created
in Step 3. Change the Remote TE Link ID value to the value (Local TE Link ID) noted in Step 1 of the
DLP-G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information, page 15-65.
Step 18 Complete the DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links, page 15-46 to edit the data link
created in Step 5. Change the Remote Port Id value to the value (Local Data Link ID) noted in Step 1 of
the DLP-G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information, page 15-65.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters
Step 1 From the Edit menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, click the Router tab.
Purpose This task configures the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or
Cisco 7600 series router.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network, page 15-33.
• (Cisco CRS-1 and Cisco ASR 9000 series routers only) DLP-G372
Enable LMP, page 15-41.
• DLP-G46 Log into CTC.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 3 (Cisco CRS-1 and Cisco ASR 9000 series routers only) Leave the Skip automatic LMP configuration on
routers check box unchecked if you want CTC to automatically configure an interface on the Cisco
CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router for the data link. Check this check box if you want to manually
configure an interface on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router.
Step 4 In the Router login area, enter the following:
• Username—Specify the name of the user on the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000, or Cisco 7600
router.
• Password—Specify the user password.
• Confirm Password—Specify the password again to confirm it.
Note If you leave the Username and Password fields blank, the CTC login information (username and
password) will be used for the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or Cisco 7600 series router.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration
Purpose This task establishes a Telnet session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 router and verifies the node configuration, SSH, and/or XML module
configuration.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 telnet {ip-address | host-name}
Example:
router# telnet 10.58.41.169
Establishes a Telnet session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
router. When the session is established, you can log in with the
root-system username and password. After you log in, the router
displays the CLI prompt for the Cisco IOS XR software.
Step 2 show install active summary
Example:
router# show install active summary
Displays a summary of the active packages in a system or secure
domain router. Ensure that the output of the show install active
summary command includes the following lines:
hfr-mpls-3.9.x
hfr-k9sec-3.9.x
hfr-mgbl-3.9.x
15-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G510 Create a Task Group, User Group, and User Account on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Series Router
Note Only users who have permission to create new task groups and configure required task privileges, or a
system administrator, can perform this task.
Step 3 show running-config
Example:
router# show running-config
Displays the contents of the currently running configuration and
verifies that Extensible Markup Language (XML) agent service and
Secure Shell (SSH) client are installed on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco
ASR 9000 router. Ensure that the output of the show running-config
command includes the following lines:
ssh server v2
ssh server session-limit sessions
ssh server rate-limit maxsessions_per_minute
vty-pool default first-vty last-vty line-template default
xml agent tty
If the output does not contain the above lines, check the SSH and/or
XML module configuration. Refer to Cisco IOS XR System Security
Command Reference and Cisco IOS XR System Management
Command Reference for details about SSH and XML configuration.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task creates task groups, user groups, and user accounts on the Cisco
CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
15-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 taskgroup taskgroup-name
Example:
router# taskgroup ipodwdmop
Creates a new task group and enters task group configuration
submode.
If you have chosen the automatic LMP configuration in the
DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or
Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters, page 15-50, perform Step 3. If
you have chosen the manual LMP configuration in the DLP-G508
Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or
Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters, page 15-50, perform Step 4.
Step 3 task {read | write | execute | debug}
taskid-name
Example:
router(config-tg)# task read cef
Specifies a task ID to be associated with the task group named in
Step 2. Task IDs grant permission to perform certain tasks.
Ensure that you specify the following task IDs to set up required
privileges for the automatic LMP configuration:
task read cef
task read dwdm
task read ouni
task read snmp
task read static
task read sysmgr
task read logging
task read mpls-te
task read network
task read interface
task read basic-services
task write dwdm
task write ipv4
task write ouni
task write snmp
task write static
task write mpls-te
task write network
task write interface
Step 4 task {read | write | execute | debug}
taskid-name
Example:
router(config-tg)# task read cef
Specifies a task ID to be associated with the task group named in
Step 2. Task IDs grant permission to perform certain tasks.
Ensure that you specify the following task IDs to set up required
privileges for the manual LMP configuration:
task read cef
task read dwdm
task read ouni
task read snmp
task read static
task read sysmgr
task read logging
task read mpls-te
task read network
task read interface
task read basic-services
task write interface
15-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 5 end
Example:
router(config-tg)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to commit
the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes to the
running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 6 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 7 usergroup usergroup-name
Example:
router# usergroup ipodwdmop
Creates a new user group and enters user group configuration
submode.
Step 8 taskgroup taskgroup-name
Example:
router(config-ug)# taskgroup ipodwdmop
Associates the user group named in Step 7 with the task group named
in this step. The user group takes on the configuration attributes (task
ID list and permissions) already defined for the entered task group.
Step 9 end
Example:
router(config-ug)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to commit
the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes to the
running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 10 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 11 username user-name
Example:
router# username user123
Creates a name for a new user (or identifies a current user) and enters
username configuration submode. The user-name argument can be
only one word. Spaces and quotation marks are not allowed.
Note The user that you specify for this command must be the user
you have specified in the DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco
CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router
Parameters, page 15-50.
Step 12 password {0 | 7} password
Example:
router(config-un)# password 0 passwd
Specifies a password for the user named in Step 11. Entering 0
following the password command specifies that an unencrypted
(clear-text) password follows. Entering 7 following the password
command specifies that an encrypted password follows.
Step 13 group group-name
Example:
router(config-un)# group ipodwdmop
Assigns the user named in Step 11 to a user group that has already
been defined through the usergroup command in Step 7.
• The user takes on all attributes of the user group, as defined by
that user group's association to various task groups.
• Each user must be assigned to at least one user group. A user may
belong to multiple user groups.
Command or Action Purpose
15-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G482 Configure a Static Route
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note In the examples shown in this task, the IP address of the DWDM node is 10.58.41.22 and the IP address
of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router is 10.58.41.169. To remove the static route configuration,
use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information about the Cisco IOS XR
commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5845/products_product_indices_list.html.
Step 14 end
Example:
router(config-ug)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to commit
the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes to the
running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 15 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to configure a static route.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 router static
Example:
router(config)# router static
Enters static router configuration mode.
Step 3 address-family ipv4 unicast
Example:
router(config-static)# address-family ipv4
unicast
Enters address family configuration mode while configuring static
routes.
15-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G483 Configure Local and Remote TE Links
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note In the examples shown in this task, the IP address of the DWDM node is 10.58.41.22 and the IP address
of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router is 10.58.41.169. To remove the local and remote TE link
configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information about the
Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5845/products_product_indices_list.html.
Step 4 destination-prefix prefix-mask {ip-address
| interface-type interface-instance}
Example:
router(config-static-afi)# 10.58.41.22/32
MgmtEth 0/RP0/CPU0/0
Establishes static routes in address family configuration mode.
Specify the following options for this command:
• destination-prefix—IP route prefix for the destination (that is,
DWDM node involved in the LMP link).
• prefix-mask—Prefix mask for the destination. The network
mask can be specified as either a four-part, dotted-decimal
address or can be indicated as a slash (/) and number.
• ip-address—(Optional) IP address of the next hop that can be
used to reach that network. The IP address is required, not
optional, if the interface type and number are not specified.
You can specify an IP address and an interface type and
interface number.
• interface-type—(Optional) Interface type.
• interface-instance—(Optional) Either a physical interface
instance or a virtual interface instance.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the management interface that connects the CRS-1 or ASR
9000 router to the DWDM node.
Step 5 end
Example:
router(config-static-afi)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to configure the local and remote TE links.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
15-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 mpls traffic-eng interface interface-type
interface-instance
Example:
router(config)# mpls traffic-eng interface
TenGigE 0/1/0/1
Enables Multiprotocol Label Switching-Traffic Engineering
(MPLS-TE) on an interface and enters MPLS-TE interface
submode.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the optical interface related to the PLIM port involved in
the LMP link.
Step 3 lmp data-link adjacency
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-if)# lmp data-link
adjacency
Enters the LMP neighbor adjacency configuration mode.
Step 4 neighbor neighbor-name
Example:
router(config-mpls-ouni-if-adj)# neighbor
10.58.41.22
Associates an interface with a given LMP neighbor.
Step 5 remote te-link-id unnum identifier
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-if-adj)# remote
te-link-id unnum 1
Configures the LMP neighbor remote TE link ID.
Note Specify the value (converted to decimal format) noted in
Step 4 of NTP-G207 Manually Configure Link
Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node,
page 15-49 for the te-link-id unnum identifier keywords
and argument.
Step 6 remote interface-id unnum identifier
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-if-adj)# remote
interface-id unnum 57410
Configures the LMP neighbor remote interface identifier.
Note Specify the value (converted to decimal format) noted in
Step 6 of NTP-G207 Manually Configure Link
Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node,
page 15-49 for the interface-id unnum identifier
keywords and argument.
Step 7 remote switching-capability fsc
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-if-adj)# remote
switching-capability fsc
Configures the LMP neighbor remote TE interface switching
capability.
Step 8 end
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-if-adj)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
15-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G484 Enable the LMP Message Exchange
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note In the examples shown in this task, the IP address of the DWDM node is 10.58.41.22 and the IP address
of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router is 10.58.41.169. To remove the LMP message exchange
configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information about the
Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5845/products_product_indices_list.html.
Purpose This task explains how to enable the LMP message exchange with the LMP
neighbor.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 mpls traffic-eng signalling advertise
explicit-null
Example:
router(config)# mpls traffic-eng
signalling advertise explicit-null
Specifies that tunnels terminating on a router use explicit-null
labels.
Step 3 mpls traffic-eng lmp neighbor
neighbor-name
Example:
router(config)# mpls traffic-eng lmp
neighbor 10.58.41.22
Configures or updates a new or existing LMP neighbor.
Step 4 ipcc routed
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-nbr-10.58.41.22)#
ipcc routed
Configures a routed Internet Protocol Control Channel (IPCC) for
the LMP neighbor.
15-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G511 Configure the Wavelength on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note To remove the wavelength setting, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information
about the Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5845/products_product_indices_list.html.
Step 5 remote node-id ip-address
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-nbr-10.58.41.22)#
remote node-id 10.58.41.22
Configures the remote node ID for the LMP neighbor (DWDM
node).
Step 6 end
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-nbr-10.58.41.22)#
end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to configure the wavelength on the PLIM port of
the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
15-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 show controllers dwdm interface-instance
wavelength-map
Example:
router# show controllers dwdm 0/1/0/0
wavelength-map
Displays the wavelength information of an interface.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the optical interface related to the PLIM port involved in
the LMP link.
The output of the show command will include the following lines:
Wavelength band: C-band
MSA ITU channel range supported: 3~84
03 196.00 1529.553
----------------------------------------
04 195.95 1529.944
----------------------------------------
05 195.90 1530.334
----------------------------------------
06 195.85 1530.725
----------------------------------------
From the output of the show command, write down the channel
number of the wavelength that matches that of the wavelength
noted in Step 10 of NTP-G207 Manually Configure Link
Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node, page 15-49.
Step 2 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 3 controller dwdm interface-instance
Example:
router(config)# controller dwdm 0/1/0/0
Configures the DWDM controller.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the optical interface related to the PLIM port involved in
the LMP link.
Step 4 wavelength channel-number
Example:
router(config)# wavelength 04
Configures a specific wavelength to the DWDM controller.
Note The channel number that you specify for this command
must be the value noted down in Step 1.
Step 5 end
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-nbr-10.58.41.22)#
end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
15-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G494 Configure the RADIUS Server
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note In the examples shown in this task, the IP address of the RADIUS server is 10.58.39.57. To remove the
RADIUS server configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information
about the Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference document.
Purpose This task explains how to configure the RADIUS server.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
For details on configuring a node for RADIUS authentication, see the
DLP-G281 Configure the Node for RADIUS Authentication task. See the
User Guide for Cisco Secure ACS for Windows Server for more
information about configuring the RADIUS server.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 radius-server host ip-address [auth-port
port-number] [acct-port port-number] [key
string]
Example:
router(config)# radius-server host
10.58.39.57 auth-port 1812 acct-port 1813
key 7 12485043475F
Specifies the RADIUS server host.
Step 3 aaa group server radius group-name
Example:
router(config)# aaa group server radius
radgroup1
Groups different RADIUS server hosts into distinct lists and
enters server group configuration mode.
Step 4 server ip-address [auth-port port-number]
[acct-port port-number]
Example:
router(config-sg-radius)# server
10.58.39.57 auth-port 1812 acct-port 1813
Associates a particular RADIUS server with a defined server
group.
15-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G485 Enable Index Persistency on an SNMP Interface
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note To remove the index persistency configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For
more information about the Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference
document.
Step 5 end
Example:
router(config-sg-radius)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 6 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 7 aaa authentication login {{console |
default} {group group_name | local |
none}}
Example:
router(config)# aaa authentication login
default group radgroup1 local
Configures the authentication method used for login to the Virtual
Firewall (VFW) application CLI.
Step 8 end
Example:
router(config-if)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to enable index persistency on a Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) interface.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
15-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G486 Configure the LMP Router ID
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note In the examples shown in this task, the IP address of the DWDM node is 10.58.41.22 and the IP address
of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router is 10.58.41.169. To remove the LMP router ID
configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information about the
Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference document.
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 snmp-server interface interface-type
interface-instance
Example:
router(config)# snmp-server interface
TenGigE 0/1/0/1
Enables an interface to send SNMP trap notifications and enters
SNMP interface configuration mode.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the optical interface related to the PLIM port involved in
the LMP link.
Step 3 index persistence
Example:
router(config-snmp-if)# index persistence
Enables index persistency on an SNMP interface. This command
must be performed to ensure that the LMP IDs are persistent even
after a system reload.
Step 4 end
Example:
router(config-snmp-if)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to configure the LMP router ID.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G487 Configure the 10 Gigabit Ethernet (GE) or POS Interface
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note To remove the POS interface configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more
information about the Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference document.
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 mpls traffic-eng lmp router-id ip-address
Example:
router(config)# mpls traffic-eng lmp
router-id 10.58.41.169
Configures the LMP router ID.
Step 3 end
Example:
router(config)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to configure the 10 GE or POS interface.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 interface interface-type
interface-instance
Example:
router(config)# interface TenGigE 0/1/0/1
Enters interface configuration mode.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the optical interface related to the PLIM port involved in
the LMP link.
Step 3 ipv4 point-to-point
Example:
router(config-if)# ipv4 point-to-point
Configures a 10 GE interface to act as a point-to-point interface.
Note For a POS interface, skip this step and continue with
Step 4.
Step 4 ipv4 unnumbered interface-type
interface-instance
Example:
router(config-if)# ipv4 unnumbered MgmtEth
0/RP0/CPU0/0
Specifies the MPLS-TE tunnel IPv4 address for the interface.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the management interface that connects the CRS-1 or ASR
9000 router to the DWDM node.
Step 5 end
Example:
router(config-if)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task displays the interface resource or a summary of link management
information.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
NTP-G303 Configure Virtual links on the Cisco 7600 and Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node
Note This procedure is normally required only when the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node must run traffic to
and from a Cisco 7600 router.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G711 Configure SSH Server on Cisco 7600 Series Nodes” task on page 15-67.
Step 2 To enable IPoDWDM using the Cisco 7600 series router, add the attribute “ctc.isC7600Supported=1”
in the /users//.ctcrc file. This should be done prior to launching CTC. By default,
IPoDWDM using the Cisco 7600 series router is disabled.
Step 3 If you need RADIUS AAA services, configure a RADIUS server. For more information, see
“Configuring RADIUS”.
Step 4 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to a DWDM node on the network.
Step 5 Configure the Cisco 7600 series router parameters in CTC. See “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1,
Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters” task on page 15-50”.
Step 6 Add a Cisco 7600 series node to the DWDM network in CTC. See DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current
Session or Login Group.
Step 7 Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 to bring up the second Cisco 7600 series node in the network.
Step 8 Create Provisionable Patchcords between the Cisco 7600 series and DWDM nodes. See “NTP-G184
Create a Provisionable Patchcord” task on page 16-72.”
Step 9 Create an Optical Channel (OCH) trail between the two Cisco 7600 series nodes. See “DLP-G395 Create
an Optical Channel Trail” task on page 16-34”. After creating the OCH trails, traffic can be transmitted
between the Cisco 7600 nodes.
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 show mpls traffic-eng lmp interface
[interface-type interface-instance]
Example:
router(config-if)# show mpls traffic-eng
lmp interface TenGigE 0/1/0/1
Displays the interface resource or a summary of link management
information. From the output of the show command, write down
the value of the Local TE Link ID and the Local Data Link ID
parameters.
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This procedure configures virtual links on the Cisco 7600 and the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G711 Configure SSH Server on Cisco 7600 Series Nodes
Note The user ID and password configured on the ONS 15454 and Cisco 7600 nodes must be the same.
Purpose This procedure configures the Secure Shell (SSH) server and performs
node authentication for Cisco 7600 series nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
• Enter your password if prompted.
Step 2 shell processing full
Example:
router(config)# shell processing full
Enables shell processing.
Step 3 hostname host-name
Example:
router(config)# hostname test124
Configures the host name on the Cisco 7600 series router.
Step 4 aaa new-model
Example:
router(config)# aaa new-model
Enables authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA).
Step 5 username username password password
Example:
router(config)# username cisco password
cisco123
Enables the local username and password on the Cisco 7600 series
router to be used in the absence of other AAA statements.
15-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 6 username username privilege
privilege-level
Example:
router(config)# username cisco
privilege 1
Assigns user name and privilege levels to the CTC user.
Step 7 ip domain-name domain-name
Example:
router(config)# ip domain-name
rtp.cisco.com
Configures the DNS domain of the Cisco 7600 series router.
Step 8 crypto key generate rsa
Example:
router(config)# crypto key generate rsa
Generates the SSH key that is used with the SSH server.
Step 9 ip ssh version 2
Example:
router(config)# ip ssh version 2
Specifies that version 2 of SSH is configured on the Cisco 7600 series
router.
Step 10 ip ssh time-out seconds
Example:
router(config)# ip ssh time-out 60
Indicates the time interval that the Cisco 7600 series router waits for
the SSH client to respond. This setting applies to the SSH negotiation
phase. When the EXEC session starts, the standard timeouts
configured for the vty apply. The value can range from 1 to 120
seconds.
Step 11 ip ssh authentication-retries integer
Example:
router(config)#ip ssh
authentication-retries 2
Indicates the number of attempts after which the interface is reset.
The number of retries can range from 0 to 5.
Step 12 line vty 0 4
Example:
router(config)#line vty 0 4
Indicates that five terminal sessions are possible.
Step 13 transport input ssh
Example:
router(config-line)# transport input
ssh
Disables telnet mode and enables the SSH mode to login to the
Cisco 7600 series router.
Command or Action Purpose
15-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
NTP-G57 Create a Logical Network Map
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at a node on the network where you want to create the
network map. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Change the position of the nodes in the network view according to your site plan:
a. Click a node to select it, then drag and drop the node icon to a new location.
b. Repeat Step a for each node that you need to position.
Step 4 On the network view map, right-click and choose Save Node Position from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Click Yes in the Save Node Position dialog box.
CTC opens a progress bar and saves the new node positions.
Note Retrieve, Provisioning, and Maintenance users can move nodes on the network map, but only
Superusers can save new network map configurations. To restore the view to a previously saved
version of the network map, right-click the network view map and choose Reset Node Position.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G325 View the Power Levels of Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Nodes
Purpose This procedure allows a Superuser to create a consistent network view for
all nodes on the network, meaning that all users see the same network view
on their login nodes.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures This procedure assumes that network turn-up is complete.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This procedure displays the power levels of the ports of the ONS 15454
MSTP nodes that traverse through an OCH or OCHNC trail using the
Photonic Path Trace (PPT). The results are displayed in a histogram.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to an ONS 15454 MSTP node on the network.
Step 2 In the network view, node view (single-node mode), multishelf view (multishelf mode), or card view
click the Circuits tab.
Note An OCHNC or OCH trail circuit must exist on the optical path on which PPT is launched.
Step 3 Select the OCH trail and click Edit. The Edit Circuit window appears.
Step 4 In the Edit Circuit window, click the Photonic Path Trace tab.
Step 5 Click Start to start the PPT. The PPT creates a histogram that displays the power levels of the nodes
versus the threshold levels.
Note The circuit must be in the DISCOVERED state to start the PPT.
Step 6 Click Export to export the data in the form of HTML.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Network
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to an ONS 15454 MSTP node on the network.
Step 2 To assign, modify, delete, or reset the SRLG attributes for the nodes or links, perform the following
steps:
a. Click the Manage SRLGs option in the Tools > Manage IPoDWDM menu. The SRLG Management
wizard appears.
b. Choose one of the following options from the Select Type drop-down list:
– Manage Node SRLG—To add or update the node SRLGs.
– Manage Link SRLG—To add or update the link SRLGs.
c. Click Next.
Purpose This procedure provisions Shared Risk Link Groups (SRLGs) for MSTP
nodes and spans of the currently managed network using the SRLG
management wizard. The SRLG information can be synchronized on Cisco
CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 routers and viewed as reports.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
d. In the Manage SRLG page, complete the following fields:
– If you chose the Manage Node SRLG option in Step b., select the node from the Node
drop-down list. If you the chose Manage Link SRLG option in Step b., select the span from
the Link drop-down list.
– In the Unique SRLG field, an SRLG number is displayed. You can edit the value. If the SRLG
value already exists, a message is displayed.
To reset the SRLG value, click Set Default. A confirmation box is displayed. Click Yes.
Note The unique SRLG range is from 0 to 4294967294.
– To add an additional SRLG, type a numeric value in the Additional SRLG field and click Add.
If the SRLG value already exists, a message is displayed.
Note A maximum of 20 SRLGs can be added to the SRLG list.
– To delete an additional SRLG, choose the value from the SRLG list and click Delete. To reset
the value, click Set Default. A confirmation box is displayed. Click Yes.
e. Click Finish to exit the wizard.
Step 3 To view the SRLG values of the nodes and links, perform the following steps:
• To view the SRLG values for the OTS, OSC, or PPC links, go to the Network view and right-click
the link, or place the mouse pointer over the link to see the SRLG value as a tooltip.
• To view the node SRLG values, click the Provisioning > General tab in the node view (single-shelf
mode) or shelf view (multishelf view).
Step 4 To synchronize the SRLG information on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router, go to Network
view, right-click the router and choose Synchronise IPoDWDM from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G540 View SRLG Reports” section on page 15-71 to view SRLG reports.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G540 View SRLG Reports
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to an ONS 15454 MSTP node on the network.
Purpose This task explains how to view SRLG reports.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Network,
page 15-70
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
15-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 2 To view the SRLG reports, perform the following steps:
• To view the consolidated SRLG report, click the Consolidated SRLG Report option in the Tools
> Manage IPoDWDM > SRLG Report menu. The report displays the following information:
– Resource Name—Displays the node name or link name.
– Resource Type—Displays the resource type (node or link).
– Unique SRLG—Displays the unique SRLG value.
– Additional SRLG—Displays additional SRLG values.
• To view the detailed SRLG report, click the Detailed SRLG Report option in the Tools > Manage
IPoDWDM > SRLG Report menu. The report displays the following information:
– Resource Name—Displays the node name or link name.
– Resource Type—Displays the resource type (node or link).
– SRLG Id—Displays the SRLG value.
– SRLG Type—Displays the SRLG type (unique or additional).
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
CH A P T E R
16-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
16
Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
This chapter explains the Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) optical
channel (OCH) circuit types and virtual patchcords that can be provisioned on the ONS 15454. Circuit
types include the OCH client connection (OCHCC), the OCH trail, and the OCH network connection
(OCHNC). Virtual patchcords include internal patchcords and provisionable (external) patchcords
(PPCs). This chapter also describes 16.3 End-to-End SVLAN Circuit that can be created between
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
This chapter explains how to create Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
optical channel client connections (OCHCCs), optical channel network connections (OCHNCs), optical
trail circuits, and STS circuits. The chapter also tells you how to create provisionable patchcords,
upgrade OCHNCs to OCHCCs, manage SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
cards, and manage overhead circuits.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454" refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Note In this chapter, “RAMAN-CTP” refers to the 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP card. “RAMAN-COP” refers to
the 15454-M-RAMAN-COP card.
Note In this chapter, the “NFV view” refers to the “DWDM Network Functional View (NFV)”. The “GMPLS
view” refers to the “DWDM Network Functional View (GMPLS)”.
16.1 Optical Channel Circuits
The ONS 15454 DWDM optical circuits provide end-to-end connectivity using three OCH circuit types:
• Optical Channel Network Connections (OCHNC)
• Optical Channel Client Connections (OCHCC)
• Optical Channel Trails (OCH Trails)
A graphical representation of OCH circuits is shown in Figure 16-1.
16-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
Optical Channel Circuits
Figure 16-1 Optical Channel Circuits
16.1.1 OCHNC Circuits
OCHNC circuits establish connectivity between two optical nodes on a specified C-band wavelength.
The connection is made through the ports present on the wavelength selective switches, multiplexers,
demultiplexer, and add/drop cards. In an OCHNC circuit, the wavelength from a source OCH port
ingresses to a DWDM system and then egresses from the DWDM system to the destination OCH port.
The source and destination OCH port details are listed in Table 16-1.
R-OADM
Transponder
Muxponder
Transponder
R R-OADM
Muxponder
To client To client
R DWDM
Network
OCH NC
OCH Trail
OCH CC
333333
Table 16-1 OCHNC Ports
Card Source Ports Destination Ports
32WSS
32WSS-L
40-WSS-C
40-WSS-CE
ADD-RX —
32MUX-O
40-MUX-C
CHAN-RX —
32DMX-O
32DMX
32DMX-L
40-DMX-C
40-DMX-CE
— CHAN-TX
4MD
AD-1C-xx.x
AD-4C-xx.x
CHAN-RX CHAN-TX
40-SMR1-C
40-SMR2-C
ADD-RX DROP-TX
15216-MD-40-ODD
15216-MD-40-EVEN
CHAN-RX CHAN-TX
16-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
Optical Channel Circuits
Note When the 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C card operates along with the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD (ONS 15216 40 or 48-channel mux/demux) patch panel, the
OCH ports on the patch panel are the endpoints of the OCHNC circuit.
When the 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C card operates along with the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards,
the endpoints of the OCHNC circuit are on the MUX/DMX cards.
16.1.2 OCHCC Circuits
OCHCC circuits extend the OCHNC to create an optical connection from the source client port to the
destination client port of the TXP/MXP cards. An OCHCC circuit represents the actual end-to-end client
service passing through the DWDM system.
Each OCHCC circuit is associated to a pair of client or trunk ports on the transponder (TXP), muxponder
(MXP), GE_XP (in layer-1 DWDM mode), 10GE_XP (in layer-1 DWDM mode), or ITU-T line card.
The OCHCCs can manage splitter protection as a single protected circuit. However, for the Y-Cable
protection, two OCHCC circuits and two protection groups are required.
16.1.3 OCH Trail Circuits
OCH trail circuits transport the OCHCCs. The OCH trail circuit creates an optical connection from the
source trunk port to the destination trunk port of the Transponder (TXP), Muxponder (MXP), GE_XP,
10GE_XP, or ITU-T line card. The OCH trail represents the common connection between the two cards,
over which all the client OCHCC circuits, SVLAN circuits or STS circuits are carried.
Once an OCHCC is created, a corresponding OCH Trail is automatically created. If the OCHCC is
created between two TXP, MXP, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP cards, two circuits are created in the CTC. These
are:
One OCHCC (at client port endpoints)
One OCH trail (at trunk port endpoints)
If the OCHCC is created between two TXPP or two MXPP cards, three circuits are created in the CTC.
These are:
• One OCHCC (at client port endpoints)
• Two OCH Trails (at trunk port endpoints)
One for the working and other for the protect trunk.
15216-EF-40-ODD
15216-EF-40-EVEN
CHAN-RX CHAN-TX
15216-MD-48-ODD
15216-MD-48-EVEN
CHAN-RX CHAN-TX
15216-FLD-4 CHAN-RX CHAN-TX
Table 16-1 OCHNC Ports (continued)
Card Source Ports Destination Ports
16-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
Optical Channel Circuits
Note On a TXP, MXP, and GE_XP card (in layer 1 DWDM mode), additional OCHCC circuits are created
over the same OCH trail.
Note On a TXP, MXP, GE_XP (in layer 1 DWDM mode), and 10GE_XP (in layer 1 DWDM mode) card, the
OCH trail cannot be created independently, and is created along with the first OCHCC creation on the
card. However, on a GE_XP card (in layer-2 DWDM mode), 10GE_XP card (in layer-2 DWDM mode),
and ADM_10G card, an OCH trail can be created between the trunk ports for the upper layer circuits
(SVLAN in GE_XP/10GE_XP and STS in ADM_10G). No OCHCC is supported in these cases.
If the OCHCC is created between two ITU-T line cards, only one trunk port belongs to the OCHCC at
each end of the circuit. Table 16-2 lists the ports that can be OCHCC and OCH trail endpoints.
Figure 16-2 shows the relationships and optical flow between the OCHCC, OCH trail, and OCHNC
circuits.
Table 16-2 OCHCC and OCH Trail Ports
Card OCHCC OCH Trail
TXPs
MXPs
GE_XP
10GE_XP
ADM-10G
Any client port Any trunk port
ITU-T line cards:
• OC48/STM64 EH
• OC192 SR/STM64
• MRC-12
• MRC-2.5-12
• MRC-2.5G-4
Any trunk port Any trunk port
16-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
Optical Channel Circuits
Figure 16-2 Optical Channel Management
16.1.4 Administrative and Service States
OCHCCs, OCH trails, and OCHNCs occupy three different optical layers. Each OCH circuit has its own
administrative and service states. The OCHCCs impose additional restrictions on changes that can be
made to client card port administrative state.
The OCHCC service state is the sum of the OCHCC service state and the OCH trail service state. When
creating an OCHCC circuit, you can specify an initial state for both the OCHCC and the OCH trail
layers, including the source and destination port states. The ANSI/ETSI administrative states for the
OCHCC circuits and connections are:
• IS/Unlocked
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,AutomaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
OCHCC service states and source and destination port states can be changed independently. You can
manually modify client card port states in all traffic conditions. Setting an OCHCC circuit to
OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled state has no effect on OCHCC client card ports.
An OCH trail is created automatically when you create an OCHCC. OCH trails can be created
independently between OCH-10G cards and GE_XP and 10GE_XP when they are provisioned in
Layer 2 Over DWDM mode. The OCH trail ANSI/ETSI administrative states include:
• IS/Unlocked
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
You can modify OCH trail circuit states from the Edit Circuit window. Placing an OCH trail
OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled causes the following state changes:
OCHCC
Optical Shelf
STS/VT
Back
Panel
OCN Line Card TXP/MXP
ITU-T Line Card
OCN
Port
Back
Panel
Trunk
Port
Trunk
Port
Client
Port
159473
LINE TX
LINE RX
OCH
RX
OCH
TX
OCHNC
OCH Trail
Optical Shelf
LINE TX
LINE RX
OCH
RX
OCH
TX
16-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
Optical Channel Circuits
• The state of the OCH trail ports changes to OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled.
• The OCHNC state changes to OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled.
Changing the OCH trail state to IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService causes the following state
changes:
• The state of the OCH trail trunk ports changes to IS/Unlocked.
• The OCHNC state changes to IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService.
The OCH trail service state is the sum of the OCHCC trunk port state and the OCHNC (if applicable)
state. Changing the client card trunk ports to OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled when the OCH trail state
IS/Unlocked will cause the OCH trail state to change to OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled and its status to
change to Partial.
The OCHNC circuit states are not linked to the OCHCC circuit states. The administrative states for the
OCHNC circuit layer are:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,AutomaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
When you create an OCHNC, you can set the target OCHNC circuit state to IS/Unlocked or
OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled. You can create an OCHNC even if OCHNC source and destination ports
are OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance. The OCHNC circuit state will remain
OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService until the port maintenance state is removed.
During maintenance or laser shutdown, the following behavior occurs:
• If OCHNCs or their end ports move into an AINS/AutomaticInService state because of user
maintenance activity on an OCHCC circuit (for example, you change an optical transport section
(OTS) port to OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled), Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) suppresses the
loss of service (LOS) alarms on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, or ITU-T line card trunk ports
and raises a Trail Signal Fail condition. Line card trunk port alarms are not changed, however.
• If TXP client or trunk port are set to OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled state (for example, a laser is
turned off) and the OCH trunk and OCH filter ports are located in the same node, the OCH filter
LOS alarm is demoted by a Trail Signal Fail condition.
OCHCCs are associated with the client card end ports. Therefore, the following port parameters cannot
be changed when they carry an OCHCC:
• Wavelength
• Service (or payload type)
• Splitter protection
• ITU-T G.709
• Forward error correction (FEC)
• Mapping
Certain OCHCC parameters, such as service type, service size, and OCHNC wavelength can only be
modified by deleting and recreating the OCHCC. If the OCHCC has MXP end ports, you can modify
services and parameters on client ports that are not allocated to the OCHCC. Some client port
parameters, such as Ethernet frame size and distance extension, are not part of an OCHCC so they can
be modified if not restricted by the port state. For addition information about administrative and service
states, see the Administrative and Service States document.
16-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
Virtual Patchcords
16.1.5 Creating and Deleting OCHCCs
To create an OCHCC, you must know the client port states and their parameters. If the client port state
is IS/Unlocked, OCHCC creation will fail if the OTN line parameters (ITU-T G.709, FEC, signal fail bit
error rate (SF BER), and signal degrade bit error rate (SD BER) on the OCHCC differ from what is
provisioned on the trunk port. The port state must be changed to OOS-DSLB/Locked,disabled in order
to complete the OCHCC.
If you delete an OCHCC, you can specify the administrative state to apply to the client card ports. For
example, you can have the ports placed in OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled state after an OCHCC is
deleted. If you delete an OCHCC that originates and terminates on MXP cards, the MXP trunk port states
can only be changed if the trunk ports do not carry other OCHCCs.
16.1.6 OCHCCs and Service and Communications Channels
Although optical service channels (OSCs), generic communications channels (GCCs), and data
communications channels (DCCs) are not managed by OCHCCs, the following restrictions must be
considered when creating or deleting OCHCCs on ports with service or communication channels:
• Creating an OCHCC when the port has a service or a communications channel is present—OCHCC
creation will fail if the OCHCC parameters are incompatible with the GCC/DCC/GCC. For
example, you cannot disable ITU-T G.709 on the OCHCC if a GCC carried by the port requires the
parameter to be enabled.
• Creating a service or communications channel on ports with OCHCCs—OCHCC creation will fail
if the GCC/DCC/GCC parameters are incompatible with the OCHCC.
• Deleting an OCHCC on ports with service or communications channels—If an OSC/GCC/DCC is
present on a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 20GE_XP, or ITU-T line card client or trunk port, you cannot set
these ports to the OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled state after the OCHCC circuit is deleted.
16.1.7 Related Procedures
• NTP-G151 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Client Connections, page 16-15
• NTP-G178 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Trails, page 16-33
• NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40
• NTP-G58 Locate and View Optical Channel Circuits, page 16-65
16.2 Virtual Patchcords
The TXP, MXP, TXPP, MXPP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, and ADM-10G client ports and DWDM filter ports
can be located in different nodes or in the same single-shelf or multishelf node. ITU-T line card trunk
ports and the corresponding DWDM filter ports are usually located in different nodes.
OCHCC provisioning requires a virtual patchcord between the client card trunk ports and the DWDM
filter ports. Depending on the physical layout, this can be an internal patchcord or a provisionable
(external) patchcord (PPC). Both patchcord types are bidirectional. However, each direction is managed
as a separate patchcord.
16-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
Virtual Patchcords
Internal patchcords provide virtual links between the two sides of a DWDM shelf, either in single-shelf
or multishelf mode. They are viewed and managed in the Provisioning > WDM-ANS >
Internal Patchcords tab.
When the NE update file is imported in CTC, the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tab is
populated with the internal patchcords. When you create an internal patchcord manually, the Internal
Patchcord Creation wizard prompts you to choose one of the following internal patchcord types:
• Trunk to Trunk (L2)—Creates an internal patchcord between two trunk ports (in NNI mode) of a
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card provisioned in the L2-over-DWDM mode.
• OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter—Creates an internal patchcord between the trunk port of a TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, or ITU-T line card, and an OCH filter card (wavelength selective switch,
multiplexer, or demultiplexer).
• OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter—Creates an internal patchcord between a MUX input port and a DMX
output port.
• OTS to OTS—Creates an internal patchcord between two OTS ports.
• Optical Path—Creates an internal patchcord between two optical cards, or between an optical card
and a passive card.
Note If a Side-to-Side PPC is created between nodes, it will no longer function if the node Security Mode
mode is enabled (see the “DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode” procedure on page 14-24). When the
Secure mode is enabled, it is no longer possible for the DCN extension feature to use the LAN interface
to extend the internal network (due to the network isolation in this configuration mode). The result is
that the topology discovery on the Side-to-Side PPC no longer operates.
Table 16-3 shows the internal patchcord Trunk (L2), OCH trunk, OCH filter, and OTS/OCH ports.
Table 16-3 Internal Patchcord Ports
Card Trunk (L2) Port OCH Trunk Ports OCH Filter Ports OTS/OCH Ports
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
Trunk port in NNI
mode
Any trunk port — —
TXPs
MXPs
ADM-10G
ITU-T line cards
— Any trunk port — —
OPT-BST
OPT-BST-E
OPT-BST-L
— — — COM-TX
COM-RX
OSC-TX
OSC-RX
16-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
Virtual Patchcords
OPT-AMP-17-C
OPT-AMP-L
— — — COM-TX
COM-RX
OSC-TX1
OSC-RX1
DC-TX1
DC-RX1
OPT-PRE — — — COM-TX
COM-RX
DC-TX
DC-RX
OSCM
OSC-CSM
— — — COM-TX
COM-RX
OSC-TX
OSC-RX
32MUX
32MUX-O
40-MUX-C
— — Any CHAN RX port COM-TX
32DMX
32DMX-L
32DMX-O
40-DMX-C
40-DMX-CE
— — Any CHAN TX port COM-RX
32WSS
32WSS-L
40-WSS-C
40-WSS-CE
— — Any ADD port COM-TX
COM-RX
EXP-TX
EXP-RX
DROP-TX
40-WXC-C — — — ADD-RX
DROP-TX
COM TX
COM RX
Table 16-3 Internal Patchcord Ports (continued)
Card Trunk (L2) Port OCH Trunk Ports OCH Filter Ports OTS/OCH Ports
16-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
Virtual Patchcords
PPCs are created and managed from the network view Provisioning > Provisionable Patchcord (PPC) tab
(Figure 16-3), or from the node view (single-shelf mode) or multiself view (multishelf mode)
Provisioning > Comm Channel > PPC tab.
Figure 16-3 Network View Provisionable Patchcords Tab
80-WXC-C — — — EAD i, i=1 to 8
AD
COM
COM-RX
DROP-TX
EXP-TX
MMU — — — EXP A TX
EXP A RX
1. When provisioned in OPT-PRE mode.
Table 16-3 Internal Patchcord Ports (continued)
Card Trunk (L2) Port OCH Trunk Ports OCH Filter Ports OTS/OCH Ports
16-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
Virtual Patchcords
PPCs are required when the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, ADM-10G, or ITU-T line card is installed
in a different node than the OCH filter ports. They can also be used to create OTS-to-OTS links between
shelves that do not have OSC connectivity. PPCs are routable and can be used to discover network
topologies using Open Shortest Path First (OSPF). GCCs and DCCs are not required for PPC creation.
When you create a PPC, the PPC Creation wizard asks you to choose one of the following PPC types:
• Client/Trunk to Client/Trunk (L2)—Creates a PPC between two client or trunk ports (in NNI mode)
on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards provisioned in the L2-over-DWDM mode.
• Client/Trunk to Client/Trunk—Creates a PPC between two client or trunk ports on TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, ADM_10G, or ITU-T line cards.
• Side to Side (OTS)—Creates a PPC between two OTS ports that belong to a Side. This option
establishes data communications network (DCN) connectivity between nodes that do not have
OSCM or OSC-CSM cards installed and therefore do not have OSC connectivity. CTC selects the
OTS ports after you choose the origination and termination sides.
• OCH Trunk to OCH Filter—Creates a PPC between a OCH trunk port on a TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, ADM-10G, or ITU-T line card and an OCH filter port on a multiplexer, demultiplexer,
or wavelength selective switch card.
Table 16-4 shows the PPC Client/Trunk (L2), Client/Trunk, OTS, and OCH Filter ports.
Table 16-4 Provisionable Patchcord Ports
Card
Client/Trunk (L2)
Port Client/Trunk Port OTS Port OCH Filter Port
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
Client or trunk
port in NNI mode
Any trunk port — —
TXPs
MXPs
ADM-10G
ITU-T line cards
— Any trunk port — —
OPT-BST
OPT-BST-E
OPT-BST-L
— — COM RX1
LINE RX
LINE TX
—
OPT-AMP-17-C
OPT-AMP-L
— — COM RX2
COM TX3
LINE RX3
LINE TX3
—
OPT-PRE — — COM RX4
COM TX4
—
OSC-CSM — — COM RX1
LINE RX
LINE TX
—
16-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
Virtual Patchcords
For related procedure, see NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord, page 16-72
16.2.1 PPC Provisioning Rules
For Client/Trunk to Client/Trunk (L2) PPCs, the following provisioning rules and conditions apply:
• The card must be provisioned in the L2-over-DWDM mode.
• The client or trunk ports must be in the NNI mode.
32MUX
32MUX-O
40-MUX-C
— — — Any CHAN RX
port
32DMX
32DMX-L
32DMX-O
40-DMX-C
40-DMX-CE
— — — Any CHAN TX
port
32WSS
32WSS-L
40-WSS-C
40-WSS-CE
— — — Any ADD port
40-WXC-C — — COM RX
COM TX
—
80-WXC-C — — EAD i, i=1 to 8
AD
COM
COM-RX
DROP-TX
EXP-TX
—
40-SMR1-C
40-SMR2-C
— — LINE RX
LINE TX
—
MMU — — EXP A RX
EXP A TX
—
1. Line nodes only.
2. When card mode is OPT-PRE.
3. When card mode is OPT-LINE.
4. Line nodes with two OPT-PRE cards and no BST cards installed.
Table 16-4 Provisionable Patchcord Ports (continued)
Card
Client/Trunk (L2)
Port Client/Trunk Port OTS Port OCH Filter Port
16-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• PPCs can be created only between NNI ports of the same size (1GE-1GE or 10GE-10GE).
For Client/Trunk to Client/Trunk PPCs, the following provisioning rules and conditions apply:
• Patchcords can be created on preprovisioned or physically installed cards.
• Trunk-to-trunk connections require compatible wavelengths if the port is equipped. A check is
automatically performed during patchcord provisioning to ensure wavelength compatibility of ports.
• For connections involving one or more preprovisioned ports, no compatibility check is performed.
For OCH Trunk to OCH Filter PPCs, the following provisioning rules and conditions apply:
• GCC and DCC links are not required to create a PPC.
• PPCs can be created for preprovisioned or physically installed cards.
• OCH trunk and OCH filter ports must be on the same wavelength. CTC checks the ports for
wavelength compatibility automatically during PPC provisioning.
• For OC-48/STM-16 and OC-192/STM-64 ITU-T line cards, the wavelength compatibility check is
performed only when the cards are installed. The check is not performed for preprovisioned cards.
• For all other preprovisioned cards, a wavelength compatibility check is not performed if card is set
to first tunable wavelength. The wavelength is automatically provisioned on the port, according to
the add/drop port that you chose when you created the PPC.
For related procedures, see NTP-G200 Create, Delete, and Manage STS or VC Circuits for the
ADM-10G Card, page 16-49
16.3 End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
An end-to-end SVLAN circuit can be created between GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
cards through a wizard in CTC. SVLAN circuits created this way are only a snapshot of the SVLAN
settings (NNI and QinQ) of each card in the network. If an end-to-end SVLAN circuit is created via CTC
and the SVLAN settings of the cards are changed manually, CTC does not update the SVLAN circuit
created with the new settings. To update the SVLAN circuit in CTC, the circuit must be refreshed.
However, any changes made to subtended OCH trail circuits are reflected in the SVLAN circuit in CTC.
If an OCH trail becomes incomplete and the current SVLAN circuit snapshot has some SVLAN circuits
that are using it, they remain incomplete. If the snapshot contains incomplete SVLAN circuits and an
OCH trail circuit becomes available, the incomplete SVLAN circuit snapshot in CTC appears to be
complete.
When the destination port of the SVLAN circuit facing the router is configured as a NNI client port, the
outgoing ethernet packets do not drop the SVLAN tag when they exit the MSTP network allowing the
router to determine the origin of the ethernet packet.
SVLAN circuits are stateless circuits; an administrative or service state need not be set.
Note During SVLAN provisioning, if a SVLAN circuit span using UNI ports in transparent mode is over
subscribed, a warning message is displayed. However, the circuit is created. This is supported on channel
groups on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
For related procedure, see:
• NTP-G181 Manage GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card SVLAN Databases,
page 16-78
• NTP-G203 Create End-to-End SVLAN Circuits, page 16-90
16-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
16.3.1 End-to-End SVLAN Provisioning Rules
The following provisioning rules and conditions apply to end-to-end SVLAN circuits:
• GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards must be provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode.
• SVLAN database must be loaded with the SVLAN.
• SVLAN circuits are routed through OCH trail circuits or PPC; Client/Trunk to Client/Trunk (L2).
Therefore, before creating an SVLAN circuit, make sure that the subtended OCH trail circuits
between GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards or PPC links are created.
• For protected SVLAN circuits, create a ring (through OCH trail circuits), define a master node, and
enable the protection role.
For information on how to create end-to-end SVLAN circuit, see the “NTP-G203 Create End-to-End
SVLAN Circuits” section on page 16-90 procedure.
16.3.2 Before You Begin
Before performing any of the following procedures, investigate all alarms and clear any trouble
conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide as necessary.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this section for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to the
Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
This section lists the procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. NTP-G151 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Client Connections,
page 16-15—Complete as needed.
2. NTP-G178 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Trails, page 16-33—Complete as needed.
3. NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections,
page 16-40—Complete as needed.
4. NTP-G200 Create, Delete, and Manage STS or VC Circuits for the ADM-10G Card,
page 16-49—Complete as needed.
5. NTP-G150 Upgrade Optical Channel Network Connections to Optical Channel Client Connections,
page 16-59—Complete as needed.
6. NTP-G183 Diagnose and Fix OCHNC and OCH Trail Circuits, page 16-63—Complete as needed to
verify all conditions are valid before placing OCHNC or OCH trail circuits in service.
7. NTP-G58 Locate and View Optical Channel Circuits, page 16-65—Complete as needed to find,
view, and filter OCHCC, OCHNC, and OCH trail circuits.
8. NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord, page 16-72—Complete as needed.
9. NTP-G181 Manage GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card SVLAN Databases,
page 16-78—Complete as needed.
10. NTP-G60 Create and Delete Overhead Circuits, page 16-81—Complete as needed to create
IP-encapsulated tunnels, firewall tunnels, and proxy tunnels; to create generic communications
channel (GCC) terminations; to provision orderwire; or to create user data channel (UDC) circuits.
11. NTP-G62 Create a J0 Section Trace, page 16-89—Complete as needed to monitor interruptions or
changes to traffic between two nodes.
16-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
12. NTP-G203 Create End-to-End SVLAN Circuits, page 16-90—Complete as needed to create end to
end VLAN circuits.
13. NTP-G229 Provision DCN Extension for a Network Using GCC/DCC, page 16-93—Complete as
needed to provision DCN extension for a network using GCC/DCC.
NTP-G151 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Client Connections
Note This procedure is not applicable to the ADM-10G card or GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
cards that are provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode.
Step 1 As needed, identify the OCHCC to be provisioned using the “DLP-G350 Use the Cisco Transport
Planner Traffic Matrix Report” task on page 15-31.
Step 2 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at a node on the network where you want to manage OCHCCs. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 If you want to assign a name to the OCHCC source and destination ports before you create the circuit,
complete the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16. If not, continue with Step 4.
Tip Naming the client ports help in identifying them correctly later.
Step 4 If the client TXP, MXP, or ITU-T line cards are installed in a multishelf node, continue with Step 5. If
not, complete the following substeps:
a. Use the information obtained from the Cisco Transport Planner traffic matrix report in Step 1 to
complete the “DLP-G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords” task on page 16-61. If
provisionable patchcords (PPCs) exist between the nodes containing the TXP/MXP/ITU-T line
cards and the DWDM nodes at each end of the OCHCC, continue with Step 5. If not, continue with
Step b.
Purpose This procedure creates, deletes, and manages OCHCC circuits. The
OCHCC circuits can be created using the Circuit Creation wizard or the
GMPLS view. OCHCCs create an end-to-end optical management path
between TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE (when
provisioned as TXPs or MXPs), OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, or AR_XP client
ports, or between ITU-T trunk ports. ITU-T line cards include: OC48
ELR/STM64 EH, OC192 SR1/STM64 IO, MRC-12, MRC-2.5-12, and
MRC-2.5G-4. The OCHCC circuit is transported by an OCH trail circuit
that is associated to one or more OCHNC circuits (for example, an OCHCC
circuit passing through a regen node).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
b. Complete the “NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord” task on page 16-72 to create the PPCs
between the OCHCC source and destination nodes.
Step 5 If the client TXP/MXP/ITU-T line cards are installed in a multishelf node, use the information obtained
from the Cisco Transport Planner traffic matrix report in Step 1 to create internal patchcords between
the 32DMX, 32DMX-O, or 32DMX-L ports and the TXP/MXP trunk ports using the “NTP-G242 Create
an Internal Patchcord Manually” task on page 14-114. Create the internal patchcords on both the source
and destination nodes of each OCHCC path. If the TXP/MXP/ITU-T line cards are not installed in a
multishelf node, continue with Step 6.
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G345 Verify OCHCC Client Ports” task on page 16-17 to verify the port rate and
service state.
Step 7 To provision the OCHCC circuit, use either of the following procedures as needed:
• “DLP-G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections” task on page 16-17
• “DLP-G705 Provision GMPLS Optical Channel Client Connections” task on page 16-24
Step 8 Complete the “DLP-G706 Perform Optical Validation of GMPLS Circuits” task on page 16-31, as
needed.
Step 9 Complete the “DLP-G707 Upgrade a Non-GMPLS Circuit to a GMPLS Circuit” task on page 16-32, as
needed.
Step 10 Complete the “DLP-G424 Edit an OCHCC Circuit Name” task on page 16-27, as needed.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G394 Change an OCHCC Administrative State” task on page 16-28, as needed.
Step 12 Complete the “DLP-G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections” task on page 16-26, as needed.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port
Step 1 In node view, double-click the card that has the port that you want to provision. This can be any port on
a traffic-carrying card. The card view opens.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning tab.
Step 3 Double-click the Port Name table cell for the port number where you are assigning a name. The cell
activates and a blinking cursor indicates where you should enter the port name.
Step 4 Enter the port name.
The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. The field is blank by default.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Purpose This task assigns a name to a port on any ONS 15454 card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G345 Verify OCHCC Client Ports
Step 1 In node view, double-click the TXP, MXP, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, AR_XP or ITU-T line card where you
want to verify the client ports. The card view opens.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Maintenance tabs.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 4 Verify that a pluggable port module has been created and that the port rate under the Pluggable Port area
is provisioned. If so, continue with Step 5. If not, complete the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM”
task on page 11-152 and the “DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate” task on page 11-155.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for each TXP, MXP, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, AR_XP or ITU-T line card
containing OCHCC ports that you want to verify.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections
Note OCHCCs can be created on preprovisioned client cards or physically installed client cards.
Purpose This task verifies the rate and service state of the OCHCC client ports.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task creates an OCHCC between two TXP, MXP, GE_XP and
GE_XPE (when configured in TXP or MXP mode), 10GE_XP and
10GE_XPE (when configured in TXP or MXP mode), OTU2_XP,
AR_MXP, or AR_XP client ports, or two ITU-T-compliant line card trunk
ports.
Tools/Equipment Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
DLP-G345 Verify OCHCC Client Ports, page 16-17
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Note Creating an OCHCC circuit automatically creates an OCH trail circuit between the OCHCC source and
destination client card trunk ports. The OCH trail circuit is created for the first OCHCC between two
MXP cards. The OCH trail circuit is used by succeeding OCHCCs created between the MXP cards.
When the OCH trail is created, it is assigned a system-generated name in the format
circuit-type_NE-name::unique sequence number. To edit the OCH trail circuit name, complete the
“DLP-G424 Edit an OCHCC Circuit Name” task on page 16-27.
Note If trunk ports are connected by a peer-to-peer provisionable patchcord (PPC), an OCH trail is not created.
Note The OCH Wlen (wavelength) parameter on the Circuits page can be used to determine the OCHCC and
OCH trail associations.
Note If you want the OCHCC circuit to provision the client card trunk port’s ITU-T G.709, FEC, SD and SF
threshold settings and Mapping parameters, you must place the client card trunk ports out of service. If
any of the trunk ports, including OTU2-XP regen ports, are in-service state, a warning message “Trunk
settings are not applied on any of the trunk ports” is displayed with details of the trunk ports that are in
in-service state.
Note In a node using OTU2_XP cards configured in the regen mode, a single OCHCC circuit can be created
that passes through the OTU2_XP card. Internal patch cords must be created from the OTU2_XP regen
ports to the respective add/drop cards. OCHCC circuit creation through OTU2_XP cards in regen mode
is not supported if different wavelengths are used on the two OTU2_XP regen ports.
Note The OCHCC circuit creation is not supported between different payloads in the 40G-MXP-C,
40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards.
Note The 40G-MXP-C card configured in the unidirectional regen mode does not support OCHCC circuit
creation. Two bidirectional OCHNC circuits can be created, one on either side of the regenerator group
for managing the circuit.
Note In AR_MXP and AR_XP cards, you cannot create the circuits using FICON payload option in Circuit
Creation wizard. Create circuits using FC payload to bring up FICON traffic.
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Circuits tab, then click Create.
Step 3 In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose OCHCC from the Circuit Type list.
Step 4 Click Next.
16-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 5 In the Circuit area of the Circuit Attributes page, provision the OCHCC circuit attributes:
• Name—Assign a name to the OCHCC. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters
(including spaces). Circuit names should be 44 characters or less if you want the ability to create
monitor circuits. If you leave the field blank, Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) assigns a default
name to the circuit.
• Type—(Display only) OCHCC.
• Size—Defines the circuit payload type and rate. Two fields are provided. The first specifies the
payload type. Choose a payload type, then choose the rate in the next field. Table 16-5 provides the
OCHCC payload types and rates.
Note The payload type and rate must match the PPM provisioning on the client cards at the source
and destination nodes.
Table 16-5 OCHCC Client Rates
Payload Type Rates
SONET/SDH OC-192 (ANSI)/STM-64 (ETSI)—9.92 Gbps
OC-48 (ANSI)/STM-12 (ETSI)—2.48 Gbps
OC-12 (ANSI)/STM-4 (ETSI)—622 Mbps
OC-3 (ANSI)/STM-1 (ETSI)—155 Mbps
Ethernet 10GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 11.25 Gbps
1GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps
FC/FICON 10GFC—Fibre Channel 10 Gbps
4GFC—Fibre Channel 4 Gbps
2GFC—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps
1GFC—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps
4GFICON—FICON 4 Gbps
2GFICON—FICON 2.125 Gbps
1GFICON—FICON 1.06 Gbps
Data Storage ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal)
ISC Peer—Inter System Coupling Link 3 (ISC3)
ISC3 Peer 1G—InterSystem Coupling Link 3 (ISC3) 1 Gbps
ISC3 Peer 2G—InterSystem Coupling Link 3 (ISC3) 2 Gbps
ISC COMPAT—InterSystem Coupling Link 1 (ISC1)
ISC1—Inter system connect Link 1 (ISC1)
Video HDTV—High Definition Television
SDI/DI—Serial Digital Interface and Digital Video signal type 1
DV6000—Proprietary signal from video vendor
DVB-ASI—Proprietary signal from video vendor
Other Pass Through—Creates a pass-through OCHCC
16-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• OCHNC Wavelength—Provides three fields to define the wavelength that the OCHCC will use to
travel across the OCH network. Choose a wavelength from the first field. In the second field, you
can change the wavelength band by choosing either C Band or L Band. In the third field, you can
indicate whether odd or even C-band or L-band wavelengths appear. See Table 16-6 and Table 16-7
for C-band and L-band wavelengths.
Note The OCHNC wavelength must match the trunk wavelength provisioned on the source and
destination TXP or MXP cards. If the wavelengths do not match, the card will not appear as
a source or destination.
Table 16-6 OCH C-Band Channels
Channel No. Channel ID Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
1 30.3 195.9 1530.33
2 31.1 195.8 1531.12
3 31.9 195.7 1531.90
4 33.4 195.5 1532.68
5 32.6 195.6 1533.471
6 34.2 195.4 1534.25
7 35.0 195.3 1535.04
8 35.8 195.2 1535.82
9 36.1 195.1 1536.61
10 37.4 195 1537.401
11 38.1 194.9 1538.19
12 38.9 194.8 1538.98
13 39.7 194.7 1539.77
14 40.5 194.6 1540.56
15 41.3 194.5 1541.351
16 42.1 194.4 1542.14
17 42.9 194.3 1542.94
18 43.7 194.2 1543.73
19 44.5 194.1 1544.53
20 44.3 194 1545.321
21 46.1 193.9 1546.12
22 46.9 193.8 1546.92
23 47.7 193.7 1547.72
24 48.5 193.6 1548.51
25 49.3 193.5 1549.321
26 50.1 193.4 1550.12
27 50.9 193.3 1550.92
28 51.7 193.2 1551.72
16-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
29 52.5 193.1 1552.52
30 53.3 193 1553.331
31 54.1 192.9 1554.13
32 54.9 192.8 1544.94
33 55.7 192.7 1555.75
34 56.5 192.6 1556.55
35 57.3 192.5 1557.361
36 58.1 192.4 1558.17
37 58.9 192.3 1558.98
38 59.7 192.2 1559.79
39 60.6 192.1 1560.61
40 61.3 192 1561.421
1. Requires 40-channel MUX or WSS cards, and 40-channel DMX cards.
Table 16-7 OCH L-Band Channels
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46
2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88
3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30
4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73
5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15
6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57
7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99
8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41
9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83
10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26
11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68
12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10
13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52
14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95
15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37
16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79
17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22
18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64
19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06
Table 16-6 OCH C-Band Channels (continued)
Channel No. Channel ID Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm)
16-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• Bidirectional—(Display only) OCHCCs are bidirectional. This field cannot be changed.
• Protection—Check to create a splitter-protected OCHCC (only MXPP/TXPP cards will be
selectable as circuit endpoints) or a protected OCHCC when TXP is connected to a PSM card.
Step 6 In the State area of the Circuit Attributes page, provision the OCHCC state attributes:
• State—Provisions the OCHCC circuit state. The state can be IS (ANSI)/Unlocked (ETSI) or
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI)/Locked,Disabled (ETSI).
• Apply to OCHCC ports—If checked, applies the state chosen in the Apply to OCHCC ports
drop-down list to the OCHCC client ports. For TXP, MXP, TXPP, or MXPP cards, the administrative
state will apply to the client and all trunk ports. For ITU-T-compliant line cards, the administrative
state will apply to the trunk port only. The states that you can apply include:
IS (ANSI)/Unlocked (ETSI), OOS,DSBLD (ANSI)/Locked,Disabled (ETSI), and
IS,AINS (ANSI)/Unlocked,AutomaticInService (ETSI).
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 In the Source area, choose the source node from the Node drop-down list, then choose the source shelf
(multishelf nodes only) from the Shelf drop-down list, the source slot from the Slot drop-down list, and,
if needed, the source port from the Port drop-down list.
20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49
21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91
22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34
23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76
24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19
25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62
26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04
27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47
28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89
29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32
30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75
31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17
32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60
33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03
34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46
35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88
36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31
37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74
38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17
39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60
40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03
Table 16-7 OCH L-Band Channels (continued)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
Channel
Number
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
16-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
If no nodes appear in the Node drop-down list, complete the following steps:
a. Click Back and review your circuit attribute settings. Verify that they are set to the client attributes
provisioned on the client cards. If necessary, click Cancel and complete the “DLP-G345 Verify
OCHCC Client Ports” task on page 16-17 to verify the client settings.
b. If the source and/or destination nodes are not configured for multishelf, complete the “DLP-G344
Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords” task on page 16-61 to verify that the patchcords were
created accurately.
If these steps do not solve the problem, refer to your next level of support.
Step 9 Click Next.
Step 10 In the Destination area, choose the destination node from the Node drop-down list, then choose the
destination shelf (multishelf nodes only) from the Shelf drop-down list, the destination slot from the Slot
drop-down list, and, if needed, the destination port from the Port drop-down list.
If no nodes appear in the Node drop-down list, complete the following steps:
a. Click Back and review your circuit attribute settings. Verify that they are set to the client attributes
provisioned on the client cards. If necessary, click Cancel and complete the “DLP-G345 Verify
OCHCC Client Ports” task on page 16-17 to verify the client settings.
b. If the source and/or destination nodes are not configured for multishelf, complete the “DLP-G344
Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords” task on page 16-61 to verify that the patchcords were
created accurately.
If these steps do not solve the problem, refer to your next level of support.
Step 11 Click Next. If the OCHCC is between ITU-T cards, continue with Step 12. If not, skip to Step 14.
Step 12 Complete the “DLP-G437 Set OCH Circuit Attributes” task on page 16-28.
Step 13 Click Next.
Step 14 Complete the “DLP-G438 Set OCH Routing Preferences” task on page 16-30. Skip this step and
continue with Step 16 if no constraints are needed. If the trunk ports are already connected by an existing
OCH Trail (MXP case) or by a direct PPC link, the OCH Circuit Routing Preferences page appears in
read-only mode; all buttons are disabled. Continue with Step 16.
Step 15 If the circuit is being created for AR_MXP or AR_XP card with MXP_MR (low or high rate) or
MXPP_MR (low or high rate) operating mode, select the ODU1 and the respective time slot within the
selected ODU1. Table 16-8 describes the bandwidth utilization for the selected payload.
Note For the all other cards/card modes, you cannot select the ODU1 and time slot parameters.
Table 16-8 Bandwidth Utilization for the Selected Payload
Payload
Number of ODU1s
required
Number of
Timeslot
required/ODU1
OC3
FE
1 1
OC12 1 4
OC48 1 16
16-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 16 Click Finish. The OCHCC and its OCH trail appear in the Circuits page. After the circuit status has been
verified, the DISCOVERED status appears in the Status column.
If the OCHCC status does not change to DISCOVERED within 2 to 3 minutes, contact your next level
of support.
Step 17 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G705 Provision GMPLS Optical Channel Client Connections
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View and click the FV icon in the toolbar. The NFV view
opens.
Step 2 From the Change Perspective drop-down list in the toolbar, choose GMPLS. The GMPLS view opens.
Step 3 In the Circuit Parameters pane, provision the OCHCC circuit attributes:
a. Name—Assign a name to the circuit. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters
(including spaces).
b. Type—Choose OCHCC.
FC2
ISC3-2G
1 14
ESCON 1 2
GE
FC1
ISC3-1G
1 7
FC4G 2 16
Table 16-8 Bandwidth Utilization for the Selected Payload
Payload
Number of ODU1s
required
Number of
Timeslot
required/ODU1
Purpose This task creates an OCHCC circuit between two TXP, MXP, GE_XP and
GE_XPE (when configured in TXP or MXP mode), 10GE_XP and
10GE_XPE (when configured in TXP or MXP mode), or OTU2_XP client
ports, or two ITU-T-compliant line card trunk ports.
Tools/Equipment Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
DLP-G345 Verify OCHCC Client Ports, page 16-17
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
c. Protected—Check to route the circuit on a protected path. Select the protection type from the
drop-down list. The available options are:
– PSM—When a PSM card is connected to a TXP card.
– Y-CABLE—The circuit is protected by a transponder or muxponder card in a Y-cable protection
group.
– Splitter—When a MXPP/TXPP card is used. The circuit source and destination are on
MXPP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. These cards provides splitter (line-level)
protection.
d. IS—Check to place the trunk ports of the TXP /MXP card in service.
e. OCHNC Wavelength—Provides three fields to define the wavelength for the OCHCC circuit.
Choose a wavelength from the first field. The wavelength band in the second field is set to C Band.
In the third field, indicate whether odd or even C-band wavelengths appear. Table 16-6 lists the
C-band wavelengths.
f. Protected OCHNC Wavelength—Define the wavelength of the protected OCHCC circuit. This field
is visible only when the Protected check box is checked in Step c. The options available are similar
to that of OCHNC Wavelength.
g. Validation—Set the validation mode. For more information about the validation modes, see the
“12.10.1.3 Validation Modes” section on page 12-110.
h. Acceptance threshold—Set the optical validation threshold value for the GMPLS circuit. The circuit
is created if the actual optical validation result is greater than or equal to the value set in this field.
For more information about the acceptance threshold value, see the “12.10.1.2 Acceptance
Thresholds” section on page 12-110.
i. Protection Acceptance Threshold—Sets the optical validation threshold value for the protected
GMPLS circuit.
Step 4 Configure the source and destination ports at the circuit endpoints in the map. For more information
about configuring the source and destination ports, see the “12.10.3.3 Source and Destination Port
Configuration” section on page 12-115.
Note The OCHCC circuit endpoints must be selected on the TXP/MXP cards. If other ports are
selected, a warning dialog box is displayed prompting you to change the circuit type.
Step 5 Define the working or protect port parameters. For more information, see the “12.10.3.3.1 Working and
Protect Port Parameters” section on page 12-117. Click Apply in the Working Port Parameters pane and
Protected Port Parameters pane, to apply the settings.
Step 6 Click Apply in the Circuit Parameters pane.
Step 7 Click Yes in the Create Circuits confirmation dialog box.
The OCHCC and its OCH trail appear in the Circuits tab in the Network Data pane. After the circuit
status has been verified, the DISCOVERED status appears in the Status column. The circuit might take
a few minutes to come up, depending on the size of the network.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
16-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections
Note If you are deleting more than half of all the active OCHCCs, it is recommended that you delete them two
at a time to allow for proper power compensation. You do not need to delete the active OCHCCs two at
a time if you are deleting all them.
Step 1 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” task on page 24-2 to preserve existing settings and, if
you want to recreate the circuits, record the circuit information.
Step 2 Consult your network operations center (NOC) or other appropriate personnel to verify that the OCHCC
can be safely deleted.
Step 3 Investigate all network alarms and resolve any problems that might be affected by the OCHCC deletion.
Step 4 Go to the network view, NFV view, or GMPLS view, and click the Circuits tab.
Step 5 Under the Type column, choose one or more OCHCCs that you want to delete, then click Delete.
Step 6 In the Delete Circuits confirmation dialog box, complete the following:
• Change drop port admin state—Check this box if you want to change the circuit source and
destination port administrative state. After checking the box, choose one of the following
administrative states:
– IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)—Puts the ports in service.
– IS,AINS (ANSI) or UnlockedAutomaticInService (ETSI)—Puts the ports in automatic in
service.
– OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)—Removes the ports from service and
disables them.
– OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)—Removes the ports from service for
maintenance.
• Notify when completed—Checked this box if you want the CTC Alerts confirmation dialog box to
notify you when the OCHCC is deleted. During this time, you cannot perform other CTC functions.
If you are deleting many OCHCCs, waiting for confirmation might take a few minutes. Circuits are
deleted whether or not this check box is checked.
Note The CTC Alerts dialog box will not automatically open to show a deletion error unless you
checked All alerts or Error alerts only in the CTC Alerts dialog box. For more information,
see the DLP-G53 Configure the CTC Alerts Dialog Box for Automatic Popup. If the CTC
Alerts dialog box is not set to open automatically, the red triangle inside the CTC Alerts
toolbar icon indicates that a notification exists.
Step 7 Complete either of the following:
Purpose This task deletes DWDM OCHCC circuits.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• If you checked Notify when completed, the CTC Alerts dialog box appears. If you want to save the
information, continue with Step 8. If you do not want to save the information, continue with Step 9.
• If you did not check Notify when completed, the Circuits page appears. Continue with Step 10.
Step 8 If you want to save the information in the CTC Alerts dialog box, complete the following substeps. If
you do not want to save it, continue with Step 10.
a. Click Save.
b. Click Browse and navigate to the directory where you want to save the file.
c. Type the file name using a TXT file extension, and click OK.
Step 9 Click Close to close the CTC Alerts dialog box.
Step 10 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” task on page 24-2 if you require a backup of your
changes.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G424 Edit an OCHCC Circuit Name
Step 1 Go to the network view, NFV view, or GMPLS view, and click the Circuits tab.
Step 2 To rename the OCHCC circuit, do either of the following.
• Network view—Select the OCHCC circuit in the Circuits tab and click Edit.
• NFV view or GMPLS view—Double-click the circuit in the Circuits tab.
Step 3 In the Edit Circuit dialog box, click the General tab.
Step 4 In the Name field, enter the new OCHCC circuit name.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the name of an OCHCC circuit.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-41
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G394 Change an OCHCC Administrative State
Step 1 Go to the network view, NFV view, or GMPLS view, and click the Circuits tab.
Step 2 To change the administrative state of the OCHCC circuit, do either of the following.
• Network view—Select the OCHCC circuit in the Circuits tab and click Edit.
• NFV view or GMPLS view—Double-click the circuit in the Circuits tab.
Step 3 In the Edit Circuit dialog box, click the State tab.
Step 4 Click the cell in the Admin State column for the card you want to change, and choose an administrative
state from the drop-down list:
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS (ANSI) or Locked (ETSI)
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 If you are changing the OCHCC state to OOS/Locked, click OK in the confirmation dialog box. (No
confirmation dialog box appears when placing OCHCCs in service.)
Note For information about the OCH circuit state transitions, see the Administrative and Service States
document.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G437 Set OCH Circuit Attributes
Purpose This task changes the administrative state of an OCHCC circuit.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections, page 16-17
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task provisions OCH trunk attributes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
The OCH Circuit Attributes page must be open.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 1 In the OCH Circuit Attributes Preferences page, change the trunk settings as necessary. The settings
provisioned here can only be provisioned on the ports when the ports are out of service. If the ports are
in service, these parameters must be the same as the source and destination card ports. If not, the trunk
settings are not editable and are retained as they are on both the trunk ports. An information pop up
window is shown after the circuit creation indicating that the trunk settings are not applied on any of the
trunk ports. You can view the current trunk settings (display only) in the Current Values area.
• To change any of the trunk settings, complete the following in the Provisioning Values area:
– ITU-T G.709 OTN—Choose Enable or Disable to set or disable the IEEE G.709 monitoring on
the optical transport network. If the OCHCC source or destination is an TXP_MR_10EX_C,
40E-TXP-C, 40ME-TXP-C, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L,
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, MXP_MR_10DMEX_C, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, or 40ME-MXP-C
card, the ITU-T G.709 OTN parameter must always be checked. If ITU-T G.709 OTN is
checked, the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards will not appear as OCHCC source
and destination options.
– FEC—Choose the type of FEC: Disabled, Standard, or Enhanced. The options that appear
depend on the card type. If the OCHCC source or destination is an TXP_MR_10EX_C,
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, MXP_MR_10DMEX_C, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, 40ME-MXP-C,
40E-TXP-C, or 40ME-TXP-C card, the ITU-T G.709 OTN parameter must always be checked.
– SD BER—Choose the signal degrade bit error rate. The range of SD BER values supported for
Cisco 7600 router is from 5 to 9.
– (Cisco 7600 series routers only) OPU—Choose the ITU-T G.709 OPU standard. OPU-1E and
OPU-2E standards are supported on the Cisco 7600 series routers.
– SF BER—Choose the signal fail bit error rate.
– Mapping—Sets the mapping for the TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L,
TXP_MR_10EX_C, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
cards: Not Used, ODU Multiplex (client SONET/SDH payload), Asynchronous, or
Synchronous. The choices available depend on the card. If you set mapping to Synchronous,
the client signal is mapped into the OTU2 signal without justification of the payload because
the client signal timing (the timing source) is the same as the trunk output timing. If you set
mapping to Asynchronous, the trunk timing is disconnected from the client timing (because the
network element [NE] is the timing source), so justification is needed to map the client signal
(OC192/STM64) to OTU2 trunk output.
Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous
options. A 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode. This is
necessary to provision a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit.
Note If the OCHCC source or destination is an MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card, the Mapping parameter must always be set to
Synch.
Set the proactive protection attributes. Proactive Protection Regen is supported on OTU2XP ports alone
in Standard Regen and Enhanced FEC mode
Note Proactive protection regen is supported only on CRS-based OCH trails.
16-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• Proactive Protection—Choose Enable or Disable.
• Trigger Threshold—Choose the minimum BER threshold to trigger proactive protection by sending
forward defect indication (FDI).
• Trigger Window—The trigger window value must be in multiples of 10 ms for trigger thresholds
between 1E-3 and 6E-6 or 100 ms for trigger threshold between 5E-6 to 1E-7. Enter the duration to
monitor the BER before triggering the proactive protection. The trigger window must be less than
or equal to 10000 ms.
• Revert Threshold—Choose a BER value, to indicate the threshold at which the FDI is cleared to
allow traffic.
• Revert Window—Enter the duration to monitor the BER for which it should be less than the revert
threshold value before removing the FDI sent to the router.
The revert window must be less than or equal to 10000ms. The revert window value must be at least
2000ms and in multiples of 10ms for a Revert Threshold of 1E-4 to 6E-7, or 100ms for a Revert
Threshold of 5E-7 to 5E-8.
• Set the protection in the Protection area, as needed. The fields in the protection area are disabled if
the OCHCC is not protected and for OCH Trails. Set the following attributes:
– Revertive—If checked, traffic reverts to the working card after failure conditions remain
corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
– Reversion Time—Sets the reversion time when Revertive is checked. The range is 0.5 to 12.0
minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will elapse before
the traffic reverts to the working card after conditions causing the switch are cleared.
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G438 Set OCH Routing Preferences
Step 1 In the OCH Circuit Routing Preferences page, view the circuit route. The new OCH appears with blue
span arrows. Moving your cursor over the arrow displays span information including source, destination,
and span loss. Complete the following steps to manually provision the routing constraints.
a. In the circuit map area, click a node that you want to include or exclude from the circuit route.
b. Click Include or Exclude. The node name will appear under the Included nodes or Excluded nodes
list. Include and Exclude cannot be applied to source or destination nodes.
c. Repeat Steps a and b until the circuit routing constraints are complete. To remove a node from the
Included nodes or Excluded nodes list, click the node in the list and click Remove. To move a node
up or down in the routing sequence, click the node in the list and click Up or Down.
Purpose This task provisions OCH routing preferences.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
The OCH Circuit Routing Preferences page must be open.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Note Use the Reset button as needed to clear the constraints and set the default routing.
d. To force the circuit route through specific links, click Advanced. Select the sides where the circuit
must cross this node and click OK:
– No Side Constraints—Uncheck.
– Side In—Choose the first side from the drop-down list.
– Side Out—Choose the second side from the drop-down list.
Note All forced links appear in yellow.
e. Click Apply. CTC verifies the circuit route. If the route is valid, a “Routing evaluation succeeded.”
message appears. If this message appears, click OK. If the route is not valid, a Route Error dialog
box appears with an error message. If an error message appears, evaluate the error, click Close to
close the error dialog box and repeat Steps a through e until the circuit route is successfully
validated.
f. If the OCHCC is protected, repeat Steps a through e for the protect trunk ports.
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G706 Perform Optical Validation of GMPLS Circuits
Step 1 Go to the network view, NFV view, or GMPLS view, and click the Circuits tab.
Step 2 Select the GMPLS circuit to be re-validated and click Opt Val. The optical validation is performed and
its result is displayed in a pop-up window.
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task performs revalidation of a GMPLS circuit.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G707 Upgrade a Non-GMPLS Circuit to a GMPLS Circuit
Step 1 If the non-GMPLS circuit was provisioned in a release older than R9.40, ensure that fiber attributes are
available in the Provisioning > WDM-ANS -> GMPLS/WSON -> Fiber Attributes tab. For more
information about the Fiber Attributes tab, see the “12.10.3.5 Fiber Attributes and Alien Wavelength
Provisioning” section on page 12-118.
If the Fiber Attributes tab is empty, import the latest Cisco Transport Planner NE Update configuration
file as described in the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File”
task on page 14-47.
Step 2 Define the Alien Wavelength parameters in the Provisioning > WDM-ANS -> GMPLS/WSON ->
Alien Wavelength tab if one of the following conditions exist. If not, continue with Step 3.
• In the non-GMPLS circuit, the TXP or MXP or ITU-T line cards are connected to the add/drop
DWDM ports with provisionable patchcords (PPCs).
• No internal patchcords exist between the TXP/MXP and the add/drop DWDM ports (for example,
in the case of a CRS connected to the add/drop DWDM ports).
For more information about the Alien Wavelength tab, see the “12.10.3.5 Fiber Attributes and Alien
Wavelength Provisioning” section on page 12-118.
Step 3 Go to the network view, NFV view, or GMPLS view, and click the Circuits tab.
Step 4 Select the circuit to be upgraded and click WSON Upgrade.
Note The WSON Upgrade option is available only when a non-GMPLS circuit is selected.
Step 5 Click Yes in the Upgrade Circuits confirmation dialog box. The WSON/GMPLS Circuit Promotion
dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 From the Validation drop-down list, choose the validation mode. For more information about the
validation modes, see the “12.10.1.3 Validation Modes” section on page 12-110.
Step 7 From the Promotion Validation degree drop-down list, choose the optical validation value. For more
information about the acceptance threshold value, see the “12.10.1.2 Acceptance Thresholds” section
on page 12-110.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task upgrades a non-GMPLS circuit to a GMPLS circuit.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
NTP-G178 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Trails
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at a node on the network where you want to manage OCHNCs.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you want to assign a name to the OCHNC source and destination ports before you create the circuit,
complete the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16. If not, continue with the next
step.
Step 3 Complete either of the following procedures as needed, between ADM-10G cards or GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards that are provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode:
• “DLP-G395 Create an Optical Channel Trail” task on page 16-34
• “DLP-G708 Create a GMPLS Optical Channel Trail” task on page 16-36
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G706 Perform Optical Validation of GMPLS Circuits” task on page 16-31, as
needed.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G707 Upgrade a Non-GMPLS Circuit to a GMPLS Circuit” task on page 16-32, as
needed.
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G710 Reroute Wavelength of GMPLS Circuits” task on page 16-48, as needed.
Step 7 Complete the “DLP-G425 Edit an OCH Trail Circuit Name” task on page 16-38, as needed.
Step 8 Complete the “DLP-G419 Change an OCH Trail Administrative State” task on page 16-39, as needed.
Step 9 Complete the “DLP-G418 Delete an Optical Channel Trail” task on page 16-37, as needed.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure creates and deletes DWDM OCH trail circuits and changes
their administrative states. The OCH trail circuits can be created using the
Circuit Creation wizard or the GMPLS view.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G395 Create an Optical Channel Trail
Note OCH trail circuits are created automatically when you provision OCHCC circuits between TXP and
MXP cards.
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Circuits tab, then click Create. The Circuit Creation wizard is displayed.
Step 3 In the Circuit Creation wizard, choose OCHTRAIL from the Circuit Type list.
Step 4 Click Next.
Step 5 In the Circuit area of the Circuit Attributes page, provision the OCH trail circuit attributes:
• Name—Assign a name to the OCH trail. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters
(including spaces). Circuit names should be 44 characters or less if you want the ability to create
monitor circuits. If you leave the field blank, CTC assigns a default name to the circuit.
• Type—(Display only) Displays the OCH trail type—OCHTRAIL.
• Size—(Display only) Equipped non specific is the default.
• OCHNC Wavelength—Choose a band (either C Band or L Band) in the lower drop-down list. Then,
choose the OCHNC wavelength that you want to assign to the OCH trail circuit in the upper
drop-down list. See Table 16-6 on page 16-20 and Table 16-7 on page 16-21 for C-band and L-band
wavelengths.
• Bidirectional—This parameter does not apply to OCH trail circuits.
• State—Provision the OCH trail circuit state. The state can be IS,AINS
(ANSI)/Unlocked automatic inservice (ETSI) or OOS,DSBLD (ANSI)/Locked,Disabled (ETSI).
• Apply to trunk ports—Check this box if you want to provision the administrative state of the OCH
trail trunk ports. If checked, choose the state in the next field, either IS (ANSI)/Unlocked (ETSI) or
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI)/Locked,Disabled (ETSI).
Step 6 Click Next.
Purpose This task creates an OCH trail circuit between ADM-10G cards, CRS-1
routers, or GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when
provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode.
For OCH trails connecting ADM-10G cards, the OCH trail provides the
low-layer path to route STS or VC circuits over ADM-10G cards.
For OCH trails connecting GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
cards in L2-over-DWDM mode, the OCH trail provides the links
associated to the SVLAN entities.
For OCH trails connecting CRS-1 or Cisco 7600 routers, the OCH trail
provides end-to-end circuit connectivity between the CRS-1 or Cisco 7600
routers passing through an MSTP network.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 7 In the Circuit Source area, choose the source node from the Node drop-down list, then choose the source
shelf (multishelf nodes only) from the Shelf drop-down list, the source slot from the Slot drop-down list,
and, if needed, the source port from the Port drop-down list. For most cards, the port will be
automatically chosen.
If you are creating an OCH trail circuit between CRS-1 or Cisco 7600 routers, choose the source CRS-1
or Cisco 7600 router from the Node drop-down list. The Shelf, Slot, and Port fields are not available.
CTC automatically selects the PLIM port depending on the OCHNC Wavelength value specified in
Step 5.
The source In and Out shelf (multishelf nodes only), slot, and port appear under the OTS Lines area.
Step 8 Click Next.
Step 9 In the Circuit Destination area, choose the destination node from the Node drop-down list (only the
source node will be available because the source and destination nodes are the same), then choose the
destination shelf (multishelf nodes only) from the Shelf drop-down list, the destination slot from the Slot
drop-down list, and, if needed, the destination port from Port drop-down list.
If you are creating an OCH trail circuit between CRS-1 or Cisco 7600 routers, choose the destination
CRS-1 or Cisco 7600 router from the Node drop-down list. The Shelf, Slot, and Port fields are not
available. CTC automatically selects the PLIM port depending on the OCHNC Wavelength value
specified in Step 5.
The destination In and Out shelf (multishelf only), slot, and port appear under the OTS Lines area to
show the destination in and out shelf, slots, and ports.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G437 Set OCH Circuit Attributes” task on page 16-28.
Step 12 Click Next.
Step 13 Complete the “DLP-G438 Set OCH Routing Preferences” task on page 16-30. Skip this step and
continue with Step 14 if no constraints are needed. If the trunk ports are already connected by an existing
OCH Trail (MXP case) or by a direct PPC link, the OCH Circuit Routing Preferences page appears in
read-only mode; all buttons are disabled. Continue with Step 14.
Step 14 Click Finish. The Create Circuit wizard closes and the OCH trail circuit appears in the Circuits table
with a DISCOVERED status in the Status column. (The circuit might take a few minutes to come up,
depending on the size of the network.)
Step 15 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
16-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G708 Create a GMPLS Optical Channel Trail
Note OCH trail circuits are created automatically when you provision OCHCC circuits between TXP and
MXP cards.
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View and click the FV icon in the toolbar. The NFV View
opens.
Step 2 From the Change Perspective drop-down list in the toolbar, choose GMPLS. The GMPLS view opens.
Step 3 In the Circuit Parameters pane, provision the OCH Trail circuit attributes:
a. Name—Assign a name to the circuit. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters
(including spaces).
b. Type—Choose OCHTrail.
c. Bidirectional—This parameter does not apply to OCH trail circuits.
d. Protected—This parameter does not apply to OCH trail circuits.
e. IS—Check to place the trunk ports of the TXP /MXP card in service.
f. OCHNC Wavelength—Provides three fields to define the wavelength for the OCHCC circuit.
Choose a wavelength from the first field. In the second field, change the wavelength band by
choosing C Band. In the third field, indicate whether odd or even C-band wavelengths appear.
Table 16-6 lists the C-band wavelengths.
g. Validation—Set the validation mode. For more information about the validation modes, see the
“12.10.1.3 Validation Modes” section on page 12-110.
h. Acceptance threshold—Set the optical validation threshold value for the GMPLS circuit. The circuit
is created if the actual optical validation result is greater than or equal to the value set in this field.
For more information about the acceptance threshold value, see the “12.10.1.2 Acceptance
Thresholds” section on page 12-110.
Purpose This task creates a GMPLS OCH trail circuit between ADM-10G cards,
CRS-1 routers, or GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards
when provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode.
For OCH trails connecting ADM-10G cards, the OCH trail provides the
low-layer path to route STS or VC circuits over ADM-10G cards.
For OCH trails connecting GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
cards in L2-over-DWDM mode, the OCH trail provides the links
associated to the SVLAN entities.
For OCH trails connecting CRS-1 routers, the OCH trail provides
end-to-end circuit connectivity between the CRS-1 routers passing through
an MSTP network.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 4 Configure the source and destination ports at the circuit endpoints in the map. For more information
about configuring the source and destination ports, see the “12.10.3.3 Source and Destination Port
Configuration” section on page 12-115.
Step 5 Define the working or protect port parameters. For more information, see the “12.10.3.3.1 Working and
Protect Port Parameters” section on page 12-117. Click Apply in the Working Port Parameters pane and
Protected Port Parameters pane, to apply the settings.
Step 6 Click Apply in the Circuit Parameters pane.
Step 7 Click Yes in the Create Circuits confirmation dialog box.
The OCH trail appear in the Circuits tab in the Network Data pane. After the circuit status has been
verified, the DISCOVERED status appears in the Status column. The circuit might take a few minutes
to come up, depending on the size of the network.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G418 Delete an Optical Channel Trail
Note If you are deleting more than half of all the active OCH trails, it is recommended that you delete them
two at a time to allow for proper power compensation. You do not need to delete the active OCH trails
two at a time if you are deleting all of them.
Step 1 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” task on page 24-2 to preserve existing settings and, if
you want to recreate the circuits, record the circuit information.
Step 2 Consult your network operations center (NOC) or other appropriate personnel to verify that the OCH
trail can be safely deleted.
Step 3 Investigate all network alarms and resolve any problems that might be affected by the OCH trail deletion.
Step 4 Go to the network view, NFV view, or GMPLS view, and click the Circuits tab.
Step 5 Under the Type column, choose one or more OCH trails that you want to delete, then click Delete.
Step 6 In the Delete Circuits confirmation dialog box, complete the following:
• Change drop port admin state—Check this box if you want to change the administrative state for the
circuit source and destination ports. After checking the box, choose one of the following
administrative states:
– IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)—Puts the ports in service.
– IS,AINS (ANSI) or UnlockedAutomaticInService (ETSI)—Puts the ports in automatic in
service.
Purpose This task deletes DWDM OCH trail circuits.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
– OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)—Removes the ports from service and
disables them.
– OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)—Removes the ports from service for
maintenance.
• Notify when completed—Check this box if you want the CTC Alerts confirmation dialog box to
notify you when the OCH trail is deleted. During this time, you cannot perform other CTC functions.
If you are deleting many OCH trails, waiting for confirmation might take a few minutes. Circuits are
deleted whether or not this check box is checked.
Note The CTC Alerts dialog box will not automatically open to show a deletion error unless you
checked All alerts or Error alerts only in the CTC Alerts dialog box. For more information, see
the DLP-G53 Configure the CTC Alerts Dialog Box for Automatic Popup. If the CTC Alerts
dialog box is not set to open automatically with a notification, the red triangle inside the CTC
Alerts toolbar icon indicates that a notification exists.
Step 7 Complete either of the following:
• If you checked Notify when completed, the CTC Alerts dialog box appears. If you want to save the
information, continue with Step 8. If you do not want to save the information, continue with Step 9.
• If you did not check Notify when completed, the Circuits page appears. Continue with Step 10.
Step 8 If you want to save the information in the CTC Alerts dialog box, complete the following steps. If you
do not want to save it, continue with Step 10.
a. Click Save.
b. Click Browse and navigate to the directory where you want to save the file.
c. Type the file name using a TXT file extension, and click OK.
Step 9 Click Close to close the CTC Alerts dialog box.
Step 10 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” task on page 24-2 if you require a backup of your
changes.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G425 Edit an OCH Trail Circuit Name
Step 1 Go to the network view, NFV view, or GMPLS view, and click the Circuits tab.
Step 2 To rename the OCH trail circuit, do either of the following.
Purpose This task changes the name of an OCH trail circuit.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-41
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• Network view—Select the OCHCC circuit in the Circuits tab and click Edit.
• NFV view or GMPLS view—Double-click the circuit in the Circuits tab.
Step 3 In the Edit Circuit dialog box, click the General tab.
Step 4 In the Name field, enter the new OCH trail circuit name.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G419 Change an OCH Trail Administrative State
Step 1 Go to the network view, NFV view, or GMPLS view, and click the Circuits tab.
Step 2 To change the administrative state of the OCH trail circuit, do either of the following.
• Network view—Select the OCHCC circuit in the Circuits tab and click Edit.
• NFV view or GMPLS view—Double-click the circuit in the Circuits tab.
Step 3 In the Edit Circuit dialog box, click the State tab.
Step 4 Click the cell in the Admin State column for the card you want to change, and choose an administrative
state from the drop-down list:
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,AutomaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked (ETSI)
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 If you are changing the OCH trail state to OOS/Locked, click OK in the confirmation dialog box. (No
confirmation dialog box appears when you place OCH trails in service.)
For information about the OCH circuit state transitions, see the Administrative and Service States
document.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the administrative state of an OCH trail circuit.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G395 Create an Optical Channel Trail, page 16-34
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at a node on the network where you want to manage OCHNCs.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 To provision an OCHNC circuit, use either of the following procedures as needed:
• “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-41
• “DLP-G709 Provision GMPLS Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-43
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G493 Provision Protected Optical Channel Network Connections” task on
page 16-44, as needed.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G706 Perform Optical Validation of GMPLS Circuits” task on page 16-31, as
needed.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G707 Upgrade a Non-GMPLS Circuit to a GMPLS Circuit” task on page 16-32, as
needed.
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G710 Reroute Wavelength of GMPLS Circuits” task on page 16-48, as needed.
Step 7 Complete the “DLP-G426 Edit an OCHNC Circuit Name” task on page 16-47, as needed.
Step 8 Complete the “DLP-G420 Change an OCHNC Administrative State” task on page 16-48, as needed.
Step 9 Complete the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-46, as needed.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure creates and deletes DWDM OCHNC channels and changes
their administrative states. The OCHNC circuits can be created using the
Circuit Creation wizard or the GMPLS view.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections
Note In a node using OTU2_XP cards configured in the regen mode, you must create two OCHNC circuits,
one on either side of the card.
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Circuits tab, then click Create.
Step 3 In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose OCHNC from the Circuit Type list.
Step 4 Click Next.
Step 5 In the Circuit area of the Circuit Attributes page, provision the OCHNC circuit attributes:
• Name—Assign a name to the OCHNC. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters
(including spaces). Circuit names should be 44 characters or less if you want the ability to create
monitor circuits. If you leave the field blank, CTC assigns a default name to the circuit.
• Type—(Display only) OCHNC.
• Size—(Display only) Equipped non specific is the default.
• OCHNC Wavelength—Choose a band (either C Band or L Band) and wavelength number type
(Odd or Even) in the lower drop-down list. Then, choose the wavelength that you want to provision
in the upper drop-down list. See Table 16-6 on page 16-20 for C-band and Table 16-7 on page 16-21
for L-band wavelengths.
• Bidirectional—Check this box to create a bidirectional OCHNC; uncheck it to create a
unidirectional OCHNC.
Purpose This task creates an OCHNC between two optical nodes upon a specified
C-band or L-band wavelength through the ports residing on the 32WSS,
32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 4MD-xx.x, AD-1C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x,
40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, 80-WXC-C, 15216-FLD-4,
15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN, and
15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD
wavelength selective switches, multiplexers, demultiplexers, and add/drop
cards:
OCH trails, which carry OCHCC circuits, are associated to the OCHNCs.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• An OCHNC add port on the source node and an OCHNC drop port on
destination node of the same wavelength
• Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• OCHNC DCN—Check this box to create an OCHNC DCN. The OCHNC DCN establishes
preliminary connectivity between nodes that lack LAN or optical service channel (OSC)
connections. After the OCHNC is created, you create a GCC termination to provide permanent
communications channel between the nodes. See the “DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC
Terminations” task on page 16-81.
• Protection—Check to create a protected OCHNC. For more details, see the “DLP-G493 Provision
Protected Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-44.
• State—Provisions the OCHNC circuit state. The state can be IS,AINS (ANSI)/Unlocked,
automatic in-service (ETSI) or OOS,DSBLD (ANSI)/Locked,Disabled (ETSI).
Step 6 Click Next.
Step 7 In the Circuit Source area, choose the source node from the Node drop-down list, then choose the source
shelf (multishelf nodes only) from the Shelf drop-down list, the source slot from the Slot drop-down list,
and, if needed, the source or ADD/DROP port from the Port drop-down list.
The source In and Out shelf (multishelf nodes only), slot, and port appear under the OTS Lines area.
Step 8 Click Next.
Step 9 In the Circuit Destination area, choose the destination node from the Node drop-down list, then choose
the destination shelf (multishelf nodes only) from the Shelf drop-down list, the destination slot from the
Slot drop-down list, and, if needed, the destination port from the Port drop-down list.
The destination In and Out shelf (multishelf nodes only), slot, and port appear under the OTS Lines area.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 Skip this step and continue with Step 12 if no constraints are needed. If the trunk ports are already
connected by an existing OCH Trail (MXP case) or by a direct PPC link, the OCH Circuit Routing
Preferences page appears in read-only mode; all buttons are disabled. Continue with Step 12. If not,
complete the “DLP-G438 Set OCH Routing Preferences” task on page 16-30.
Step 12 Click Finish. The Circuit Creation wizard closes and the new OCHNC appears in the Circuits table with
a DISCOVERED status in the Status column. (The circuit might take a few minutes to come up,
depending on the size of the network.)
Step 13 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
16-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G709 Provision GMPLS Optical Channel Network Connections
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Parent View. The Network view opens.
Step 2 Open the source node in the Network view either by double-clicking the node or right-clicking the node
and choosing the Open Node option.
Step 3 Select the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > GMPLS/WSON tabs.
Step 4 Define the fiber attributes and alien wavelength parameters for the node in the Fiber Attributes and Alien
Wavelength tabs, as needed. For more information about alien wavelength parameters, see the
“12.10.3.5 Fiber Attributes and Alien Wavelength Provisioning” section on page 12-118.
Step 5 Repeat the Step 1 through Step 3 for the destination node.
Step 6 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View and click the FV icon in the toolbar. The NFV view
opens.
Step 7 From the Change Perspective drop-down list in the toolbar, choose GMPLS. The GMPLS view opens.
Step 8 In the circuit parameters pane, provision the OCHNC circuit attributes:
a. Name—Assign a name to the circuit. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters
(including spaces).
b. Type—Choose OCHNC.
c. Protected—Check to route the circuit on a protected path. Select the protection type from the
drop-down list. The available option is:
– PSM—When a PSM card is connected to a TXP card.
d. OCHNC Wavelength—Provides three fields to define the wavelength for the OCHCC circuit.
Choose a wavelength from the first field. In the second field, change the wavelength band by
choosing C Band. In the third field, indicate whether odd or even C-band wavelengths appear.
Table 16-6 lists the C-band wavelengths.
e. Protected OCHNC Wavelength—Define the wavelength of the protected OCHCC circuit. This field
is visible only when the Protected check box is checked in Step c. The options available are similar
to that of OCHNC Wavelength.
Purpose This task provisions an OCHNC between two optical nodes upon a
specified C-band wavelength through the ports residing on the 32WSS,
40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 32DMX, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE,
40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, 80-WXC-C, 15216-MD-40-EVEN,
15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN, and 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD wavelength selective
switches, multiplexers, demultiplexers, and add/drop cards:
Tools/Equipment Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• An OCHNC add port on the source node and an OCHNC drop port on
destination node of the same wavelength
• DLP-G350 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
f. Validation—Set the validation mode. For more information about the validation modes, see the
“12.10.1.3 Validation Modes” section on page 12-110.
g. Acceptance threshold—Set the optical validation threshold value for the GMPLS circuit. The circuit
is created if the actual optical validation result is greater than or equal to the value set in this field.
For more information about the acceptance threshold value, see the “12.10.1.2 Acceptance
Thresholds” section on page 12-110.
h. Protection Acceptance Threshold—Set the optical validation threshold value for the protected
GMPLS circuit.
Step 9 Configure the source and destination ports in the map. For more information about configuring the
source and destination ports, see the “12.10.3.3 Source and Destination Port Configuration” section on
page 12-115.
Note The OCHNC circuit endpoints must be selected on channel ports, express add/drop ports, or
add/drop ports. If other ports are selected, a warning dialog box is displayed prompting you to
change the circuit type.
After the ports are selected, the Alien Wavelength Selection pane is displayed. This pane displays
options for the RX and TX channels at the endpoints of the circuit.
Step 10 For both RX and TX channels, choose the alien class and the forward error correction (FEC) mode from
the corresponding drop-down lists. For more information about FEC, see “G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes”
section on page G-16. Click Apply in the Alien Wavelength Selection pane.
Step 11 Click Apply in the Circuit Parameters pane.
Step 12 Click Yes in the Create Circuits confirmation dialog box.
The OCHNC circuit appears in the Circuits tab in the Network Data pane. After the circuit status has
been verified, the DISCOVERED status appears in the Status column. The circuit might take a few
minutes to come up, depending on the size of the network.
Step 13 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G493 Provision Protected Optical Channel Network Connections
Purpose This task creates a protected OCHNC circuit when a PSM card is
provisioned at the endpoint nodes of a DWDM network. OCH trails, which
carry OCHCC circuits, are associated to the OCHNCs.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
An OCHNC add port on the source node and an OCHNC drop port on
destination node of the same wavelength
Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Circuits tab, then click Create.
Step 3 In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose OCHNC from the Circuit Type list.
Step 4 Click Next.
Step 5 In the Circuit area of the Circuit Attributes page, provision the OCHNC circuit attributes:
• Name—Assign a name to the OCHNC. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters
(including spaces). Circuit names should be 44 characters or less if you want the ability to create
monitor circuits. If you leave the field blank, CTC assigns a default name to the circuit.
• Type—(Display only) OCHNC.
• Size—(Display only) Equipped non specific is the default.
• OCHNC Wavelength—Choose a band (either C Band or L Band) and wavelength number type
(Odd or Even) in the lower drop-down list. Then, choose the wavelength that you want to provision
in the upper drop-down list. See Table 16-6 on page 16-20 and Table 16-7 on page 16-21 for C-band
and L-band wavelengths.
• Bidirectional—Check this box to create a bidirectional OCHNC; uncheck it to create a
unidirectional OCHNC. This field is not available if you check the Protection option.
• OCHNC DCN—Check this box to create an OCHNC DCN. The OCHNC DCN establishes
preliminary connectivity between nodes that lack LAN or optical service channel (OSC)
connections. After the OCHNC is created, you create a GCC termination to provide permanent
communications channel between the nodes. See the “DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC
Terminations” task on page 16-81.
• Protection—Check to create a protected OCHNC (only endpoint nodes equipped with PSM cards
will be selectable as circuit endpoints).
• State—Provisions the OCHNC circuit state. The state can be IS,AINS (ANSI)/Unlocked,
automatic in-service (ETSI) or OOS,DSBLD (ANSI)/Locked,Disabled (ETSI).
Step 6 Click Next.
Step 7 In the Circuit Source area, choose the source node from the Node drop-down list. Only endpoint nodes
equipped with PSM cards are available for selection in the Node drop-down list. The slot, port, and the
source In and Out OTS lines are automatically chosen by CTC.
Step 8 Click Next.
Step 9 In the Circuit Destination area, choose the destination node from the Node drop-down list. Only endpoint
nodes equipped with PSM cards are available for selection in the Node drop-down list. The slot, port,
and the source In and Out OTS lines are automatically chosen by CTC.
Step 10 Click Next. CTC completes the circuit creation by routing two distinct paths (a working path and a
protected path) from the source node to the destination node. The working path is the one exiting the
In/Out working source OTS lines and entering the In/Out working destination OTS lines. The protected
path is the one exiting the In/Out protected source OTS lines and entering the In/Out protected
destination OTS lines.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G438 Set OCH Routing Preferences” task on page 16-30. Skip this step and
continue with Step 12 if no constraints are needed. If the trunk ports are already connected by an existing
OCH Trail (MXP case) or by a direct PPC link, the OCH Circuit Routing Preferences page appears in
read-only mode; all buttons are disabled. Continue with Step 12.
16-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 12 Click Finish. The Circuit Creation wizard closes and the new OCHNC appears in the Circuits table with
a DISCOVERED status in the Status column. (The circuit might take a few minutes to appear, depending
on the size of the network.)
Step 13 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections
Note If you are deleting more than half of all the active OCHNCs, it is recommended that you delete them two
at a time to allow for proper power compensation. You do not need to delete the active OCHNCs two at
a time if you are deleting all the them.
Step 1 To preserve existing settings you must back up the database of every node on the path of the circuit.
Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” task on page 24-2 to back up the databases for all
nodes on the circuit path. Record the circuit information if you plan to recreate the circuit.
Step 2 Consult your NOC or other appropriate personnel to verify that the OCHNC can be safely deleted.
Step 3 Investigate all network alarms and resolve any problems that might be affected by the OCHNC deletion.
Step 4 Go to the network view, NFV view, or GMPLS view, and click the Circuits tab.
Step 5 In the Circuits table, under the Type column, choose one or more OCHNCs that you want to delete. (To
choose more than one OCHNC, press the Shift or Control keys as you click the circuits.)
Step 6 Click Delete.
Step 7 In the Delete Circuits confirmation dialog box, check Notify when completed, as needed.
If checked, the CTC Alerts confirmation dialog box will alert you when the OCHNC is deleted. During
this time, you cannot perform other CTC functions. If you are deleting many OCHNCs, waiting for
confirmation might take a few minutes. Circuits are deleted whether or not this check box is checked.
Note The CTC Alerts dialog box will not automatically open to show a deletion error unless you
checked All alerts or Error alerts only in the CTC Alerts dialog box. For more information, see
the DLP-G53 Configure the CTC Alerts Dialog Box for Automatic Popup. If the CTC Alerts
dialog box is not set to open automatically with a notification, the red triangle inside the CTC
Alerts toolbar icon indicates that a notification exists.
Step 8 Complete either of the following:
• If you checked Notify when completed, the CTC Alerts dialog box appears. If you want to save the
information, continue with Step 9. If you do not want to save the information, continue with Step 10.
Purpose This task deletes DWDM OCHNC circuits.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• If you did not check Notify when completed, the Circuits page appears. Continue with Step 11.
Step 9 If you want to save the information in the CTC Alerts dialog box, complete the following steps.
a. Click Save.
b. Click Browse and navigate to the directory where you want to save the file.
c. Type the file name using a.txt file extension, and click OK.
Step 10 Click Close to close the CTC Alerts dialog box.
Step 11 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” task on page 24-2 for every node on the path of the
circuit if you require a backup of your changes.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G426 Edit an OCHNC Circuit Name
Step 1 Go to the network view, NFV view, or GMPLS view, and click the Circuits tab.
Step 2 To rename the OCHCC circuit, do either of the following.
• Network view—Select the OCHCC circuit in the Circuits tab and click Edit.
• NFV view or GMPLS view—Double-click the circuit in the Circuits tab.
Step 3 In the Edit Circuit dialog box, click the General tab.
Step 4 In the Name field, enter the new OCHNC circuit name.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the name of an OCHNC circuit.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-41
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G420 Change an OCHNC Administrative State
Step 1 Go to the network view, NFV view, or GMPLS view, and click the Circuits tab.
Step 2 To change the administrative state of the OCHCC circuit, do either of the following.
• Network view—Select the OCHCC circuit in the Circuits tab and click Edit.
• NFV view or GMPLS view—Double-click the circuit in the Circuits tab.
Step 3 In the Edit Circuit dialog box, click the State tab.
Step 4 Choose an administrative state from the drop-down list:
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,AutomaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS (ANSI) or Locked (ETSI)
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 If you are changing the OCHNC state to OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Disabled (ETSI), click OK in
the confirmation dialog box. (No confirmation dialog box appears when you place OCH trails in
service.)
For information about the OCH circuit state transitions, see the Administrative and Service States
document.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G710 Reroute Wavelength of GMPLS Circuits
Note GMPLS OCHCC circuits cannot be rerouted. Only the OCH Trail associated with the OCHCC circuit
can be rerouted.
Purpose This task changes the administrative state of an OCHNC circuit.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-41
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task reroutes an existing GMPLS circuit through an alternate path
based on the specified path constraints.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View and click the FV icon in the toolbar. The NFV view
opens.
Step 2 From the Change Perspective drop-down list in the toolbar, choose GMPLS. The GMPLS view opens.
Step 3 Click the Wavelength re-routing button.
Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to enter the wavelength re-routing view. The Wavelength
re-routing pane is displayed.
Step 5 In the Circuits tab, select the GMPLS circuit to be rerouted.
Step 6 From the Constraint Config drop-down list, select the required constraint type. For more information
about the various constraint types, see the Table 12-18.
Step 7 In the map, select the node or link to which the constraint is to be applied.
Step 8 Repeat Step 5 and Step 6 to apply more constraints, as needed.
Note While applying constraint to include a node or link on the alternate path, the selection of the
nodes or links must be done sequentially, starting form the source to the destination of the
circuit.
Step 9 Click Apply. The circuit is rerouted if a feasible path is found that complies with the specified
constraints. After a successful reroute, a confirmation message is displayed. Otherwise, a failure
notification is displayed.
Step 10 Repeat the reroute process in case the reroute fails in Step 9. Click Clear in the Wavelength re-routing
pane to clear the previous selections. Repeat the Step 6 through Step 9.
Step 11 Click the Wavelength re-routing button on the toolbar to close the Wavelength re-routing pane. In the
confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G200 Create, Delete, and Manage STS or VC Circuits for the ADM-10G Card
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at a node on the network where you want to manage the STS or
VC circuits. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This procedure creates and deletes STS and VC circuits for the ADM-10G
card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 2 If you want to assign a name to the STS or VC source and destination ports before you create the circuit,
complete the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16. If not, continue with the next
step.
Step 3 If you are creating STS or VC circuits on ADM-10G cards across two nodes, you must complete the
“DLP-G395 Create an Optical Channel Trail” task on page 16-34. If not, continue with the next step.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G463 Create an Automatically Routed STS or VC Circuit” task on page 16-50, as
needed.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G464 Create a Manually Routed STS or VC Circuit” task on page 16-53, as needed.
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G467 Edit an STS or VC Circuit Name” task on page 16-58, as needed.
Step 7 Complete the “DLP-G466 Delete an STS or VC Circuit” task on page 16-57, as needed.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G463 Create an Automatically Routed STS or VC Circuit
Note This procedure requires the use of automatic routing. Automatic routing is not available if both the
Automatic Circuit Routing NE default and the Network Circuit Automatic Routing Overridable NE
default are set to FALSE. For a full description of these defaults see the Network Element Defaults.
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Circuits tab, then click Create.
Step 3 In the Circuit Creation dialog box, complete the following fields:
• Circuit Type—Choose STS or VC from the Circuit Type list.
• Number of Circuits—Enter the number of STS or VC circuits that you want to create. The default
is 1. If you are creating multiple circuits with the same slot and sequential port numbers, you can
use Auto-ranged to create the circuits automatically.
• Auto-ranged—This check box is automatically selected if you enter more than 1 in the Number of
Circuits field. Auto-ranging creates identical (same source and destination) sequential circuits
automatically. Uncheck the box if you do not want CTC to create sequential circuits automatically.
Step 4 Click Next.
Step 5 Define the circuit attributes:
Purpose This procedure creates an automatically routed STS or VC circuit for the
ADM-10G card. CTC chooses the circuit route based on the parameters
you specify and on the software version.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• Name—Assign a name to the circuit. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters,
(including spaces). Circuit names should be 43 characters or less if you want the ability to create
monitor circuits. If you leave the field blank, CTC assigns a default name to the circuit.
• Size—Choose the circuit size.
– Available SONET circuits are STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, STS-18c, STS-24c,
STS-36c, STS-48c, and STS-192c.
– Available SDH circuits areVC4, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-6c, VC4-8c, VC4-12c,
VC4-16c, and VC4-64c.
Note For creating a circuit using a Gigabit Ethernet port, choose the circuit size as STS-24c for a
SONET circuit or VC4-8c for a SDH circuit.
Note An equivalent SDH circuit size for STS-1 SONET circuit does not exist.
• Bidirectional—Leave checked for this circuit (default).
• Create cross-connects only (TL1-like)—Check this box if you want to create one or more
cross-connects to complete a signal path for TL1-generated circuits.
• Diagnostic—Leave unchecked.
• State—Choose the administrative state to apply to all of the cross-connects in a circuit:
– IS (ANSI)/Unlocked (ETSI)—Puts the circuit cross-connects in the IS-NR (ANSI) or
unlocked-enabled (ETSI) service state.
– OOS,DSBLD (ANSI)/Locked,Disabled (ETSI)—Puts the circuit cross-connects in the
OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state. Traffic is not passed
on the circuit.
– IS,AINS (ANSI)/Unlocked,AutomaticInService (ETSI)—Puts the circuit cross-connects in the
OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or unlocked-disabled,automaticInService (ETSI) service state and
suppresses alarms and conditions. When the connections receive a valid signal, the service state
automatically changes to IS-NR (ANSI) or unlocked-enabled (ETSI).
– OOS,MT (ANSI)/Locked,maintenance (ETSI)—Puts the circuit cross-connects in the
OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI) service state. The maintenance
state does not interrupt traffic flow; it suppresses alarms and conditions and allows loopbacks
to be performed on the circuit. Use OOS,MT (ANSI) or locked,maintenance (ETSI) for circuit
testing or to suppress circuit alarms temporarily.
• Apply to drop ports—Check this check box if you want to apply the administrative state chosen in
the State field to the circuit source and destination ports. CTC applies the administrative state to the
ports only if the circuit bandwidth is the same as the port bandwidth or, if the port bandwidth is
larger than the circuit, the circuit must be the first circuit to use the port. If not, a Warning dialog
box displays the ports where the administrative state could not be applied. If the check box is
unchecked, CTC does not apply the administrative state to the source and destination ports.
Note If ports managed into the IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI) administrative state are not
receiving signals, loss of signal alarms are generated and the port service state transitions to
OOS-AU,FLT (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,failed (ETSI).
16-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• Protected Drops—Check this box if you want the circuit routed on protected drops only, that is, to
ONS 15454 cards that are in 1:1, 1:N, 1+1, or optimized 1+1 protection. If you check this box, CTC
displays only protected cards and ports as source and destination choices.
Step 6 If the circuit will be routed on a path protection configuration, complete the “DLP-G465 Provision Path
Protection Selectors” task on page 16-56. Otherwise, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 In the Circuit Source area, choose the source node from the Node drop-down list, then choose the source
shelf (multishelf nodes only) from the Shelf drop-down list, the source slot from the Slot drop-down list,
and, if needed, the source port from the Port drop-down list. For most cards, the port will be
automatically chosen.
Step 9 If you need to create a secondary source, for example, a path protection bridge/selector circuit entry
point in a multivendor path protection configuration, click Use Secondary Source and repeat Step 8 to
define the secondary source. If you do not need to create a secondary source, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 In the Circuit Destination area, choose the destination node from the Node drop-down list (only the
source node will be available because the source and destination nodes are the same), then choose the
destination shelf (multishelf nodes only) from the Shelf drop-down list, the destination slot from the Slot
drop-down list, and, if needed, the destination port from Port drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Next.
Step 13 In the Circuit Routing Preferences area, choose Route Automatically. Two options are available; choose
either, both, or none based on your preferences.
• Using Required Nodes/Spans—Check this check box if you want to specify nodes and spans to
include or exclude in the CTC-generated circuit route.
Including nodes and spans for a circuit ensures that those nodes and spans are in the working path
of the circuit (but not the protect path). Excluding nodes and spans ensures that the nodes and spans
are not in the working or protect path of the circuit.
• Review Route Before Creation—Check this check box if you want to review and edit the circuit
route before the circuit is created.
Step 14 To set the circuit path protection, complete one of the following:
• To route the circuit on a protected path, leave Fully Protected Path checked and continue with
Step 15. CTC creates a fully protected circuit route based on the path diversity option you choose.
Fully protected paths might or might not have path protection path segments (with primary and
alternate paths), and the path diversity options apply only to path protection path segments, if any
exist.
• To create an unprotected circuit, uncheck Fully Protected Path and continue with Step 16.
Step 15 If you selected Fully Protected Path in Step 14 and the circuit will be routed on a path protection
configuration, choose one of the following:
• Nodal Diversity Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within path protection
portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse.
• Nodal Diversity Desired—Specifies that node diversity is preferred, but if node diversity is not
possible, CTC creates fiber-diverse paths for the path protection portion of the complete circuit path.
• Link Diversity Only—Specifies that only fiber-diverse primary and alternate paths for path
protection portions of the complete circuit path are needed. The paths might be node-diverse, but
CTC does not check for node diversity.
16-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 16 If you checked Using Required Nodes/Spans in Step 13, complete the following substeps. Otherwise,
continue with Step 17.
a. In the Circuit Constraints for Automatic Routing area, click a node or span on the circuit map.
b. Click Include to include the node or span in the circuit. Click Exclude to exclude the node or span
from the circuit. The order in which you choose included nodes and spans is the order in which the
circuit is routed. Click spans twice to change the circuit direction.
c. Repeat Step b for each node or span you wish to include or exclude.
d. Review the circuit route. To change the circuit routing order, choose a node in the Required
Nodes/Lines or Excluded Nodes Links lists and click the Up or Down buttons to change the circuit
routing order. Click Remove to remove a node or span.
Step 17 Click Next.
Step 18 If you selected Review Route Before Creation in Step 13, complete the following substeps. If not,
continue with Step 19.
a. Click Next.
b. Review the circuit route. To add or delete a circuit span, choose a node on the circuit route. Blue
arrows show the circuit route. Green arrows indicate spans that you can add. Click a span arrowhead,
then click Include to include the span or Remove to remove the span.
c. If the provisioned circuit does not reflect the routing and configuration you want, click Back to
verify and change circuit information. If the circuit needs to be routed to a different path, see the
“DLP-G464 Create a Manually Routed STS or VC Circuit” procedure on page 16-53.
Step 19 Click Finish. One of the following results occurs if you entered more than one circuit in the Number of
Circuits field on the Circuit Creation dialog box.
• If you chose Auto-ranged, CTC automatically creates the number of circuits entered in the Number
of Circuits field. If auto-ranging cannot complete all the circuits, for example, because sequential
ports are unavailable at the source or destination, a dialog box appears. Set the new source or
destination for the remaining circuits, then click Finish to continue auto-ranging. After completing
the circuits, the Circuits window appears.
• If you did not choose Auto-ranged, the Circuit Creation dialog box appears so you can create the
remaining circuits. Repeat Steps 3 through 18 for each additional circuit. After completing the
circuits, the Circuits window appears.
Step 20 In the Circuits window, verify that the new circuits appear in the circuits list.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G464 Create a Manually Routed STS or VC Circuit
Purpose This procedure creates an STS or VC circuit and allows you to provision
the circuit route for the ADM-10G card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Circuits tab, then click Create.
Step 3 In the Circuit Creation dialog box, complete the following fields:
• Circuit Type—Choose STS or VC from the Circuit Type list.
• Number of Circuits—Enter the number of STS or VC circuits that you want to create. The default
is 1.
• Auto-ranged—(Automatically routed circuits only) If you entered more than 1 in the Number of
Circuits field on the Circuit Creation dialog box, uncheck this box. (The box is unavailable if only
one circuit is entered in the Number of Circuits field.)
Step 4 Click Next.
Step 5 Define the circuit attributes:
• Name—Assign a name to the circuit. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters
(including spaces). Circuit names should be 43 characters or less if you want the ability to create
monitor circuits. If you leave the field blank, CTC assigns a default name to the circuit.
• Size—Choose the circuit size.
– Available SONET are STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, STS-18c, STS-24c,
STS-36c, STS-48c, and STS-192c.
– Available SDH circuits are VC4, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-6c, VC4-8c, VC4-12c,
VC4-16c, and VC4-64c.
Note For creating a circuit using a Gigabit Ethernet port, choose the circuit size as STS-24c for a
SONET circuit or VC4-8c for a SDH circuit.
• Bidirectional—Leave checked for this circuit (default).
• Create cross-connects only (TL1-like)—Check this box if you want to create one or more
cross-connects to complete a signal path for TL1-generated circuits.
• State—Choose the administrative state to apply to all of the cross-connects in a circuit:
– IS (ANSI)/Unlocked (ETSI)—Puts the circuit cross-connects in the IS-NR (ANSI) or
unlocked-enabled (ETSI) service state.
– OOS,DSBLD (ANSI)/Locked,Disabled (ETSI)—Puts the circuit cross-connects in the
OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state. Traffic is not passed
on the circuit.
– IS,AINS (ANSI)/Unlocked,AutomaticInService (ETSI)—Puts the circuit cross-connects in the
OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or unlocked-disabled,automaticInService (ETSI) service state and
suppresses alarms and conditions. When the connections receive a valid signal, the service state
automatically changes to IS-NR (ANSI) or unlocked-enabled (ETSI).
– OOS,MT (ANSI)/Locked,maintenance (ETSI)—Puts the circuit cross-connects in the
OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI) service state. The maintenance
state does not interrupt traffic flow; it suppresses alarms and conditions and allows loopbacks
to be performed on the circuit. Use OOS,MT (ANSI) or locked,maintenance (ETSI) for circuit
testing or to suppress circuit alarms temporarily.
• Apply to drop ports—Check this check box if you want to apply the administrative state chosen in
the State field to the circuit source and destination ports. CTC applies the administrative state to the
ports only if the circuit bandwidth is the same as the port bandwidth or, if the port bandwidth is
16-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
larger than the circuit, the circuit must be the first circuit to use the port. If not, a Warning dialog
box displays the ports where the administrative state could not be applied. If the check box is
unchecked, CTC does not apply the administrative state to the source and destination ports.
Note If ports managed into the IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI) administrative state are not
receiving signals, loss of signal alarms are generated and the port service state transitions to
OOS-AU,FLT (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,failed (ETSI).
• Protected Drops—Check this box if you want the circuit routed on protected drops only, that is, to
ONS 15454 cards that are in 1:1, 1:N, 1+1, or optimized 1+1 protection. If you check this box, CTC
shows only protected cards and ports as source and destination choices.
Step 6 If the circuit will be routed on a path protection configuration, complete the “DLP-G465 Provision Path
Protection Selectors” task on page 16-56. Otherwise, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 In the Circuit Source area, choose the source node from the Node drop-down list, then choose the source
shelf (multishelf nodes only) from the Shelf drop-down list, the source slot from the Slot drop-down list,
and, if needed, the source port from the Port drop-down list. For most cards, the port will be
automatically chosen.
Step 9 If you need to create a secondary source, for example, a path protection bridge/selector circuit entry
point in a multivendor path protection configuration, click Use Secondary Source and repeat Step 8 to
define the secondary source. If you do not need to create a secondary source, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 In the Circuit Destination area, choose the destination node from the Node drop-down list (only the
source node will be available because the source and destination nodes are the same), then choose the
destination shelf (multishelf nodes only) from the Shelf drop-down list, the destination slot from the Slot
drop-down list, and, if needed, the destination port from Port drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Next.
Step 13 In the Circuit Routing Preferences area, uncheck Route Automatically.
Step 14 To set the circuit path protection, complete one of the following:
• To route the circuit on a protected path, leave Fully Protected Path checked and continue with
Step 15. Fully protected paths might or might not have path protection path segments (with primary
and alternate paths), and the path diversity options apply only to path protection path segments, if
any exist.
• To create an unprotected circuit, uncheck Fully Protected Path and continue with Step 17.
Step 15 If you selected Fully Protected Path in Step 14 and the circuit will be routed on a path protection
configuration, choose a Node-Diverse Path option:
• Nodal Diversity Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within the path protection
portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse.
• Nodal Diversity Desired—Specifies that node diversity is preferred, but if node diversity is not
possible, CTC creates fiber-diverse paths for the path protection portion of the complete circuit path.
• Link Diversity Only—Specifies that only fiber-diverse primary and alternate paths for path
protection portions of the complete circuit path are needed. The paths might be node-diverse, but
CTC does not check for node diversity.
Step 16 Click Next.
16-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 17 In the Route Review/Edit area, node icons appear for you to route the circuit manually. Click the source
node icon if it is not already selected.
Step 18 Starting with a span on the source node, click the arrow of the span you want the circuit to travel. The
arrow turns yellow. In the Selected Span area, the From and To fields provide span information. The
source STS or VC appears.
Step 19 If you want to change the source STS or VC, adjust the Source STS or VC field; otherwise, continue
with Step 20.
Step 20 Click Add Span. The span is added to the Included Spans list and the span arrow turns blue.
Step 21 If the Fully Protect Path check box is checked in the Circuit Routing Preferences panel, you must add
two spans for all path protection or unprotected portions of the circuit route from the source to the
destination.
Step 22 Repeat Steps 18 through 21 until the circuit is provisioned from the source to the destination node
through all intermediary nodes.
Step 23 Click Finish. CTC compares your manually provisioned circuit route with the specified path diversity
option you chose in Step 15. If the path does not meet the specified path diversity requirement, CTC
displays an error message and allows you to change the circuit path.
Step 24 If you entered more than 1 in the Number of Circuits field on the Circuit Creation dialog box, the Circuit
Creation dialog box appears so you can create the remaining circuits. Repeat Steps 3 through 23 for each
additional circuit.
Step 25 When all the circuits are created, the main Circuits window appears. Verify that the circuits you created
are correct.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G465 Provision Path Protection Selectors
Note Provisioning path signal degrade (SD-P) or path signal fail (SF-P) thresholds in the Circuit Attributes
page of the Circuit Creation wizard sets the values only for path protection-protected spans. The circuit
source and destination use the node default values of 10E-4 for SD-P and 10E-6 for SF-P for unprotected
circuits and for the source and drop of path protection circuits.
Step 1 In the path protection area of the Circuit Attributes page of the Circuit Creation wizard, set the path
protection selectors:
Purpose This task provisions path protection selectors during circuit creation or
during a topology upgrade conversion.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
The Circuit Attributes page of the Circuit Creation wizard must be open.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• Provision working go and return on primary path—Check this box to route the working path on one
fiber pair and the protect path on a separate fiber pair. This feature only applies to bidirectional path
protection circuits.
• Revertive—Check this box if you want traffic to revert to the working path when the conditions that
diverted it to the protect path are repaired. If you do not choose Revertive, traffic remains on the
protect path after the switch.
• Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, click the Reversion time field and choose a reversion time
from the drop-down list. The range is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. This is the
amount of time that will elapse before the traffic reverts to the working path. Traffic can revert when
conditions causing the switch are cleared.
• SF threshold—Set the path protection path-level signal failure bit error rate (BER) thresholds.
• SD threshold—Set the path protection path-level signal degrade BER thresholds.
• Switch on PDI-P—Check this box if you want traffic to switch when an STS or VC payload defect
indicator is received.
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G466 Delete an STS or VC Circuit
Step 1 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” task on page 24-2 to preserve existing settings and, if
you will recreate the circuits, record the circuit information.
Step 2 Verify that traffic is no longer carried on the circuit and that the circuit can be safely deleted.
Step 3 Investigate all network alarms and resolve any problems that might be affected by the circuit deletion.
Step 4 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 5 Click the Circuits tab.
Step 6 Choose one or more STS or VC circuits from the Type column that you want to delete, then click Delete.
Step 7 In the Delete Circuits confirmation dialog box, complete the following:
• Change drop port admin state—Check this box if you want to change the administrative state for the
circuit source and destination ports. After checking the box, choose one of the following
administrative states:
– IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)—Puts the ports in service.
– IS,AINS (ANSI) or UnlockedAutomaticInService (ETSI)—Puts the ports in automatic in
service.
– OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)—Removes the ports from service and
disables them.
Purpose This task deletes STS or VC circuits.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
– OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)—Removes the ports from service for
maintenance.
• Notify when completed—If checked, the CTC Alerts confirmation dialog box indicates when the
circuit is deleted. During this time, you cannot perform other CTC functions. If you are deleting
many circuits, waiting for confirmation might take a few minutes. Circuits are deleted whether or
not this check box is checked.
Note The CTC Alerts dialog box will not automatically open to show a deletion error unless you
checked All alerts or Error alerts only in the CTC Alerts dialog box. For more information, see
the DLP-G53 Configure the CTC Alerts Dialog Box for Automatic Popup. If the CTC Alerts
dialog box is not set to open automatically with a notification, the red triangle inside the CTC
Alerts toolbar icon indicates that a notification exists.
Step 8 Complete one of the following:
• If you checked Notify when completed, the CTC Alerts dialog box appears. If you want to save the
information, continue with Step 8. If you do not want to save the information, continue with Step 9.
• If you did not check Notify when completed, the Circuits page appears. Continue with Step 10.
Step 9 If you want to save the information in the CTC Alerts dialog box, complete the following steps. If you
do not want to save it, continue with Step 10.
a. Click Save.
b. Click Browse and navigate to the directory where you want to save the file.
c. Type the file name using a TXT file extension, and click OK.
Step 10 Click Close to close the CTC Alerts dialog box.
Step 11 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” task on page 24-2 if you require a backup of your
changes.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G467 Edit an STS or VC Circuit Name
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Circuits tab.
Step 3 Click the STS or VC circuit whose name you want to edit, then click Edit. The Edit Circuit dialog box
appears with the General tab displayed.
Step 4 In the Name field, enter the new STS or VC circuit name.
Purpose This task changes the name of an STS or VC circuit.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G150 Upgrade Optical Channel Network Connections to Optical Channel Client Connections
Note During this procedure, the OCHNC is replaced with two circuit types, the OCHCC, which establishes a
connection between the client card client ports, and the OCH trail, which establishes a connection
between the client card trunk ports. The OCH trail is given the same name as the OCHNC. The OCHCC
is given a system-generated name in the format: circuit-type_NE-name::unique sequence number. To
edit the OCHCC circuit name, complete the “DLP-G424 Edit an OCHCC Circuit Name” task on
page 16-27. To edit the OCH trail circuit name, complete the “DLP-G424 Edit an OCHCC Circuit
Name” task on page 16-27.
Note Multiple OCHCCs might use the same OCH trail. The OCH Wlen (wavelength) parameter on the
Circuits page can be used to determine the OCHCC and OCH trail associations.
Step 1 As needed, identify the OCHCC to be provisioned using the “DLP-G350 Use the Cisco Transport
Planner Traffic Matrix Report” task on page 15-31.
Step 2 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at a node on the network where you want to upgrade the OCHNCs.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 4 Click the Circuits tab and find the OCH you want to upgrade.
Step 5 Record the following information:
• OCHNC Wlen (OCHNC wavelength)
• Source node/shelf (if applicable)/slot/port/side (include both Side A and Side B nodes, if present)
• Destination node/shelf (if applicable)/slot/port/side (include both Side A and Side B nodes, if
present)
Step 6 Use the information recorded in Step 5 to complete one of the following
Purpose This procedure upgrades OCHNCs created in earlier software releases to
OCHCCs. It also upgrades an OCHNC circuit to an OCH trail circuit
(without the OCHCC circuit) in case the PPCs or internal patchcords
connect to an ADM_10G or GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
(only in L2-over-DWDM mode) cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-41
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• DLP-G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords, page 16-61—Complete this task if
provisionable patchcords (PPCs) and internal patchcords exist on the network but you are not sure
whether one was created for the OCHNC that you want to upgrade.
• NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord, page 16-72—Complete this procedure if you know
that PPCs were not created between the OCHNC node and the client node. If you recently upgraded
from a previous release, you must create PPCs between the source client and OCHNC node and
between the destination client and OCHNC node.
Step 7 In network view, click the OCHNC that you want to upgrade.
Step 8 From the Tools menu, choose Circuits > Upgrade OCHNC. If the Upgrade OCHNC Initialization
“Completed” status appears (Figure 16-4), continue with Step 9. If the “Failed” status appears
(Figure 16-5), complete the following substeps:
a. Click each failure reason to view the failure details. A common cause of initialization failures is the
absence or incorrect completion of PPCs or internal patchcords between the client nodes and the
optical channel (OCH) nodes.
b. Repeat Steps 3 through 8, verifying that the OCHNC ports and provisionable patchcord (PPC) path
match on both sides. If the upgrade “Failed” status appears again, click Save to save the results to a
local or network computer. (The file can be opened with any text editor.) Then, contact your next
level of support.
Figure 16-4 Upgrade OCHNC Initialization—Completed 151573
Click to display details
16-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Figure 16-5 Upgrade OCHNC Initialization—Failed
Step 9 Click each result to review the details. If you want to save the results, click Save and save the results to
a file on a local or network computer. Click Continue.
Step 10 Review the information in the Upgrade OCHNC dialog box, then click OK.
Step 11 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box, then click OK on the Completed Upgrade OCHNC wizard
page.
Tip To see all of the information in the Source and Destination table cells, increase the column
widths by clicking and dragging the column heading borders to the right or left.
Step 12 View the OCHCC and its OCH trail in the Circuits page. For information and procedures for viewing
and editing OCHCC and OCH trails, see the “NTP-G58 Locate and View Optical Channel Circuits”
procedure on page 16-65.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords
151572
Click to display details
Purpose This task verifies the PPCs that are required between client TXP, MXP,
ADM-10G, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, OTU2_XP,
AR_MXP, AR_XP or ITU-T line cards and OCH DWDM nodes for
OCHCCs. This task is not required for OCHNCs.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Provisionable Patchcords (PPC) tabs.
Step 3 Use one of the following methods to verify that PPCs exist from the client TXP, MXP, ADM-10G,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, AR_XP or ITU-T line card node, slot,
and port to the DWDM OCH node, slot, port, and wavelength:
• Review the Patchcord Terminations table. PPCs should exist from the client TXP, MXP, ADM-10G,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, AR_XP or ITU-T line card node
to the OCH node, slot, and port recorded in the referring procedure.
• Review the network graphic (see Figure 16-6). PPCs are represented by a small hand holding a
lambda symbol. Clicking the PPC line on the graphic displays the PPC source and destination nodes,
slots, and ports in the CTC information area. This information should match the node, slot, and port
recorded in the referring procedure.
Figure 16-6 Viewing the Provisionable Patchcords Table
Step 4 Display the OCHCC source node in node view.
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcords tab.
Step 6 Verify that internal patchcords exist from the source TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, or AR_XP OCH trunk port to the OCH filter port. If so, continue with
Step 7. If not, complete the “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually” task on page 14-114.
Step 7 Display the OCHCC destination node in node view.
Step 8 Click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcords tab.
PPC lines
145784
16-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 9 Verify that internal patchcords exist from the destination TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, or AR_XP trunk port to the OCH filter port. If so, you are completed
with this task. If not, complete the “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually” task on
page 14-114.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G183 Diagnose and Fix OCHNC and OCH Trail Circuits
Note This procedure cannot be used for OCHCC circuits.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at a node on the network where you want to diagnose and fix the
OCHNC or OCH trail circuit. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Note Do not check Disable Circuit Management in the Login dialog box. No circuits appear if this
option is checked.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Circuits tab.
Step 4 Click the OCHNC or OCH trail that you want to diagnose.
Step 5 Click Edit.
Step 6 In the Edit Circuit dialog box, click the Diagnostic and Fix tab.
Step 7 Click Start. The diagnostic checks all OCHNC or OCH trail node connections and displays the results
in an expandable tree view under the OCH diagnostic heading.
Step 8 Double-click OCH diagnostic to display the diagnostic messages.
• No problems are found—A “node: No issues found” message appears, where node is the node name
or IP address of an ONS 15454 containing the OCHNC or OCH trail source, destination, or
pass-through connection. If this message appears for all nodes, continue with Step 9.
• Problems are found—double-click on the nodes with problems and the error messages appear with
a hyperlink labeled Fix or Check. If error messages appear, complete the fixes using the tasks and
procedures listed in Table 16-9.
Purpose This procedure checks nodes that are traversed by an OCHNC or OCH trail
circuit to verify that all conditions required for bringing the circuit in
service are in place. If not, the procedure identifies the invalid condition
and provides links to the location in CTC where it can be fixed.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-41,
or DLP-G395 Create an Optical Channel Trail, page 16-34
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Note Only one error per node is displayed. If multiple errors exist, you must fix the first error,
then rerun the diagnostic to display the next error(s).
Step 9 If you want to save the diagnostic results to a text file, complete the following steps. If not, continue with
Step 10.
a. Click Save.
b. In the Save Diagnostic and Fix to File dialog box, enter the local directory and file name, or click
Browse to navigate to a directory where you want to save the file.
c. Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 7 through 9 until “No issues found” appears for all nodes traversed by the OCHNC or
OCH trail circuit.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Table 16-9 Diagnostic and Fix Errors
Error Message Description/Fix
Invalid connection state
for “circuit name”:
administrative state
The circuit state is not valid. Click Fix to display the State tab of the
Edit Circuit dialog box where you can change the circuit state using the
“DLP-G419 Change an OCH Trail Administrative State” task on
page 16-39 or the “DLP-G420 Change an OCHNC Administrative State”
task on page 16-48.
Invalid admin state:
administrative state
The state of a port traversed by the circuit is not valid, for example, the port
is in service. Click Fix to display the card view Provisioning tab, where
you can change the port administrative state using the appropriate task for
changing the optical line settings in Chapter 20, “Change DWDM Card
Settings.”
ANS couldn’t regulate the
port
ANS could not be regulated for the port. Click Fix to display the node view
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Port Status tab where you can launch ANS
using the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” task on page 14-127.
APC couldn’t regulate the
port
APC could not be regulated for the port. Click Fix to display the network
view Maintenance > APC tab. Double-click the domain to expand the
view. Right-click the node/side and choose the end you want to view. APC
information is displayed on the right side. Read any message that might
explain the failure, or restart APC by completing the DLP-G158 Enable
Automatic Power Control.
APC regulation is running Indicates that APC regulation is running and must be allowed to finish.
Click Check to display the node view Maintenance > DWDM > APC tab
where you can monitor the APC regulation.
APC is not enabled for
this side.
APC is not enabled on an ONS 15454 side. Click Fix to display the
network view Maintenance > APC tab where you can enable APC using
the DLP-G158 Enable Automatic Power Control.
16-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
NTP-G58 Locate and View Optical Channel Circuits
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at a node on the network where you want to view the circuits. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Note Do not check Disable Circuit Management in the Login dialog box. No circuits appear if this
option is checked.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “DLP-G100 Search for Optical Channel Circuits” task on page 16-65.
Step 3 As needed, complete the “DLP-G101 View Optical Channel Circuit Information” task on page 16-66.
Step 4 As needed, complete the “DLP-G102 Filter the Display of Optical Channel Circuits” task on page 16-69.
Step 5 As needed, complete the “DLP-G103 View Optical Channel Circuits on a Span” task on page 16-71.
Step 6 As needed, complete the DLP-G114 Export CTC Data.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G100 Search for Optical Channel Circuits
Step 1 Navigate to the appropriate CTC view:
• To search the entire network, from the View menu choose Go to Network View.
• To search for circuits that originate, terminate, or pass through a specific node, from the View menu
choose Go to Other Node, then choose the node you want to search and click OK.
Purpose This procedure allows you to locate and view OCHNC, OCHCC and OCH
trail circuits. You can also export circuit data into a text file.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-41
DLP-G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections, page 16-17
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This task searches for OCHNC, OCHCC, OCH trail, and ONS 15454
circuits at the network, node, or card level.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
16-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• To search for circuits that originate, terminate, or pass through a specific card, double-click the card
on the shelf graphic in node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode) to open the
card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Circuits tab.
Step 3 If you are in node or card view, choose the scope for the search, Node or Network (All), in the Scope
drop-down list located at the bottom right side of the screen. Choose Node to see all of the circuits on
that node, or choose Network (All) to see all circuits in the network.
Step 4 Click Search if you need to search through the list of circuits.
Step 5 In the Circuit Name Search dialog box, complete the following:
• Find What—Enter the text of the circuit name you want to find. This field is not case-sensitive.
• Match whole word only—Check this check box to instruct CTC to select circuits only if the entire
word matches the text in the Find What field.
• Match case—Check this check box to instruct CTC to select circuits only when the capitalization
matches the capitalization entered in the Find What field.
• Direction—Choose the direction for the search. Searches are conducted up or down from the
currently selected circuit.
Step 6 Click Find Next. If a match is found the circuit will be highlighted in the Circuits page. To continue the
search, click Find Next again to find the next circuit.
Step 7 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until you are finished, then click Cancel.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G101 View Optical Channel Circuit Information
Step 1 Navigate to the appropriate CTC view:
• To view circuits for an entire network, from the View menu choose Go to Network View.
• To view circuits that originate, terminate, or pass through a specific node, from the View menu
choose Go to Other Node, then choose the node you want to search and click OK.
• To view circuits that originate, terminate, or pass through a specific card, in node view (single-shelf
mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the card containing the circuits you want to
view.
Purpose This task provides information about OCHNC, OCHCC, OCH trail, and
ONS 15454 circuits.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
16-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Note In node or card view, you can change the scope of the circuits that appear by choosing Card
(in card view), Node, or Network from the Scope drop-down list in the bottom right corner
of the Circuits page.
Step 2 Click the Circuits tab. The Circuits tab shows the following information:
Note The following order is the default column sequence, the order might be different on your screen,
depending on your individual CTC setup.
• Circuit Name—Name of the circuit. The circuit name can be manually assigned or automatically
generated.
• Type—OCHNC, OCHCC, or OCH-Trail.
Note The following circuit types are not applicable to DWDM nodes: STS, VT, VTT (VT tunnel),
VAP (VT aggregation point), STS-v (STS VCAT circuit), VT-v (VT VCAT circuit), HOP
(high-order circuit), LOP (low-order circuit), VCT (VC low-order tunnel), and VCA
(low-order VCAT circuit).
• Size—Circuit size. OCHNC, OCHCC, and OCH-Trail sizes are Equipped not specific, Multi-rate,
2.5 Gbps No FEC, 2.5 Gbps FEC, 10 Gbps No FEC, and 10 Gbps FEC.
Note The following circuit types under the circuit size column are not applicable to DWDM
nodes: STS, VT, VCAT, VC12, VC11, VC3, and VC4.
• OCHNC Wlen—The wavelength provisioned for the OCHNC, OCHCC, or OCH trail. See
Table 16-6 on page 16-20 for a list of channels and wavelengths.
• Dir—The circuit direction, either two-way or one-way.
• Protection—The type of circuit protection. See Table 16-10 on page 16-68 for a list of protection
types.
• Status—The circuit status. See Table 16-11 on page 16-68 for a list of circuit statuses.
• Source—The circuit source in the format: node/slot/port “port name”. The port name will appear
in quotes only if a name was assigned to it. (To assign names to ports, see the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on page 16-16.)
• Destination—The circuit destination in the format: node/slot/port “port name”. The port name will
appear in quotes only if a name was assigned to it. (To assign names to ports, see the “DLP-G104
Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16.)
• # of VLANS—The number of VLANs used by an Ethernet circuit. VLANs are not applicable to
DWDM nodes.
• # of Spans—The number of internode links that constitute the circuit. Right-clicking the column
title shows a shortcut menu from which you can choose Span Details to show or hide circuit span
detail.
16-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• State—The circuit service state, which is an aggregate of the service states of its cross-connects. For
ANSI shelves, the service state is IS, OOS, or OOS-PARTIAL. For ETSI shelves, the service state
is Unlocked, Locked, or Locked-partial. For more information about ANSI and ETSI service states,
see the Administrative and Service States document.
– IS/Unlocked—All cross-connects are in service and operational.
– OOS/Locked—For ANSI, all cross-connects are OOS-MA,MT and/or OOS-MA,DSBLD. For
ETSI, all cross-connects are Locked-enabled,maintenance and/or Locked-enabled,disabled.
– OOS-PARTIAL/Locked-partial—At least one cross-connect is IS-NR (ANSI) or
Unlocked-enabled (ETSI) and others are out-of-service.
Note Right-clicking a column title (Circuit name, Type, etc.) opens a shortcut menu that allows
you to show or hide circuit details.
• Acpt Threshold—The optical validation acceptance threshold value set for the GMPLS circuit. For
more information on the threshold values, see the “12.10.1.2 Acceptance Thresholds” section on
page 12-110.
• Opt Val—The optical validation result for the GMPLS circuit. For more information on the optical
validation values, see the “12.10.1.3 Validation Modes” section on page 12-110.
Table 16-10 Circuit Protection Types
Protection Type Description
Y-cable (OCHNC and OCH-Trail circuit types only) The circuit is protected by a
transponder or muxponder card Y-cable protection group.
Splitter The circuit is protected by the protect transponder splitter protection.
Unprot A circuit with a source and destination on different nodes is not protected.
N/A A circuit with connections on the same node is not protected.
Unknown A circuit has a source and destination on different nodes and communication
is down between the nodes. This protection type appears if not all circuit
components are known.
Table 16-11 Cisco ONS 15454 Circuit Status
Status Definition/Activity
CREATING CTC is creating a circuit.
DISCOVERED CTC created a circuit. All components are in place and a complete path exists
from the circuit source to the circuit destination.
DELETING CTC is deleting a circuit.
16-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G102 Filter the Display of Optical Channel Circuits
PARTIAL A CTC-created circuit is missing a cross-connect or network span, a complete
path from source to destination(s) does not exist, or an alarm interface panel
(AIP) change occurred on one of the circuit nodes and the circuit is in need
of repair. (AIPs store the node MAC address.)
In CTC, circuits are represented using cross-connects and network spans. If a
network span is missing from a circuit, the circuit status is PARTIAL.
However, a PARTIAL status does not necessarily mean that a circuit traffic
failure has occurred, because traffic might flow on a protect path.
Network spans are in one of two states: up or down. On CTC circuit and
network maps, up spans are shown as green lines, and down spans are shown
as gray lines. If a failure occurs on a network span during a CTC session, the
span remains on the network map but its color changes to gray to indicate the
span is down. If you restart your CTC session while the failure is active, the
new CTC session cannot discover the span and its span line will not appear
on the network map.
Subsequently, circuits routed on a network span that goes down will appear
as DISCOVERED during the current CTC session, but they will appear as
PARTIAL to users who log in after the span failure.
This status does not appear for OCHNC circuit types.
DISCOVERED_TL1 A TL1-created circuit or a TL1-like CTC-created circuit is complete. A
complete path from source to destination(s) exists.
This status does not appear for OCHNC circuit types.
PARTIAL_TL1 A TL1-created circuit or a TL1-like CTC-created circuit is missing a
cross-connect, and a complete path from source to destination(s) does not
exist.
This status does not appear for OCHNC circuit types.
Purpose This task filters the display of OCHNCs, OCHCCs, OCH trails and
SONET or SDH circuits in the Circuits page. You can filter the circuits in
network, node, or card view based on circuit or OCHNC name, size, type,
direction, and other attributes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Table 16-11 Cisco ONS 15454 Circuit Status (continued)
Status Definition/Activity
16-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 1 Navigate to the appropriate CTC view:
• To filter network circuits, from the View menu choose Go to Network View.
• To filter circuits that originate, terminate, or pass through a specific node, from the View menu
choose Go to Other Node, then choose the node you want to search and click OK.
• To filter circuits that originate, terminate, or pass through a specific card, double-click the card on
the shelf graphic in node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode) to open the card
in card view.
Step 2 Click the Circuits tab.
Step 3 Set the attributes for filtering the circuit display:
a. Click the Filter button.
b. In the General tab of the Circuit Filter dialog box, set the following filter attributes, as necessary:
• Name—Enter a complete or partial circuit name to filter circuits based on the circuit name.
• Direction—Choose one: Any (direction not used to filter circuits), 1-way (display only one-way
circuits), or 2-way (display only two-way circuits).
• OCHNC Wlen—(DWDM OCHNCs only) Choose an OCHNC wavelength to filter the circuits.
For example, choosing 1530.33 will display channels provisioned on the 1530.33-nm
wavelength.
• Status—Choose one: Any (status not used to filter circuits) or Discovered (display only
discovered circuits). Other statuses do not apply to OCHNCs.
• State—Choose one: OOS (ANSI) or Locked (ETSI) to display only out-of-service circuits,
IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI) to display only in-service circuits (OCHNCs have IS/Unlocked
states only), or OOS-PARTIAL (ANSI) or Locked-partial (ETSI) to display only circuits with
cross-connects in mixed service states.
• Protection—Enter the circuit protection type to filter circuits based on their protection.
• Shelf—(multishelf nodes only) Enter the shelf name to filter circuits based on that shelf.
• Slot—Enter a slot number to filter circuits based on the source or destination slot.
• Port—Enter a port number to filter circuits based on the source or destination port.
• Type—Choose one: Any (type not used to filter circuits), OCHNC (displays only OCHNCs),
OCHCC (displays only OCHCCs), or OCH-Trail (displays only OCH trail circuits).
Note The following circuit types are not applicable to DWDM nodes: STS, VT, VT Tunnel,
STS-V, VT-V, and VT Aggregation Point, VC_HO_PATH_CIRCUIT,
VC_LO_PATH_CIRCUIT, VC_LO_PATH_TUNNEL, VC_LO_PATH_AGGREGATION,
VC_HO_PATH_VCAT_CIRCUIT, and VC_LO_PATH_VCAT_CIRCUIT.
• Size—Click the appropriate check boxes to filter circuits based on size. The following sizes are
available, depending on the circuit type: Multi-rate, Equipment non specific, 2.5 Gbps FEC,
2.5 Gbps No FEC, 10 Gbps FEC, and 10 Gbps No FEC.
Note VT1.5, STS-1, STS3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, STS-24c, STS-48c, and STS-192c are not
applicable to ANSI DWDM nodes. VC12, VC3, VC4, VC4-2c, VC4-3c, VC4-4c, VC4-6c,
VC4-8c, VC4-9c, VC4-16c, and VC4-64 are not applicable to ETSI DWDM nodes.
16-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
The check boxes shown depend on the Type field selection. If you chose Any, all sizes are
available. If you chose OCHNC as the circuit type, only Multi-rate, Equipment non specific,
2.5 Gbps FEC, 2.5 Gbps No FEC, 10 Gbps FEC, and 10 Gbps No FEC appear. If you choose
OCHCC, only OCHCC is available. If you choose OCH Trail, only Equipment non specific is
available.
Step 4 To set the filter for the ring, node, link, and source and drop types, click the Advanced tab and complete
the following substeps. If you do not want to make advanced filter selections, continue with Step 5.
a. If you made selections on the General tab, click Yes in the confirmation box to apply the settings.
b. In the Advanced tab of the Circuit Filter dialog box, set the following filter attributes as necessary:
• Ring—Choose the ring from the drop-down list.
• Node—Click the check boxes by each node in the network to filter circuits based on node.
• Link—Choose a link in the network.
• Source/Drop—Choose one of the following to filter circuits based on whether they have single
or multiple sources and drops: One Source and One Drop Only or Multiple Sources or
Multiple Drops.
Step 5 Click OK. Circuits matching the attributes in the Filter Circuits dialog box appear in the Circuits page.
Step 6 To turn filtering off, click the Filter icon in the lower right corner of the Circuits page. Click the icon
again to turn filtering on, and click the Filter button to change the filter attributes.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G103 View Optical Channel Circuits on a Span
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), from the View menu choose
Go to Network View. If you are already in network view, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Right-click the green line between the nodes containing the circuits that you want to view and choose
Circuits to view OCHNCs, OCHCCs, or unprotected circuits on the span.
Step 3 In the Circuits on Span dialog box, view information about the circuits that traverse the span. The
information that appears depends on the circuit type. For OCHNCs, the following information appears:
• Type—The type of circuit: OCHNC, OCHCC, or OCH-Trail.
• Size—The circuit size.
• OCHNC Wavelength—The wavelength provisioned for the OCHNC.
• DIR—2-way or 1-way.
Purpose This task allows you to view OCHNCs, OCHCCs, and OCH trails on an
ONS 15454 span.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
16-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• Circuit—The OCHNC circuit name.
• OCHNC Dir—The direction provisioned for the OCHNC, either Side B to Side A or Side A to
Side B.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord
Note If a Side-to-Side PPC is created between nodes, it will no longer function if the node Security Mode
mode is enabled (see “DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode” task on page 14-24). If the Secure mode
is enabled, the DCN extension feature is unable to use the LAN interface to extend the internal network
(due to the network isolation in this configuration mode). The result is that the topology discovery on
the Side-to-Side PPC no longer operates.
Note This task requires data communications channel (DCC) or generic communications channel (GCC)
connectivity between the OCH node and the subtended TXP, MXP, or ITU-T line card client shelves.
Note An optical port requires two patchcords when the remote end is Y-cable protected, or is an add/drop
multiplexer, or multiplexer/demultiplexer port.
Note This procedure automatically turns on any OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards installed.
Step 1 Complete the following tasks, as needed, to verify the cabling between the TXP/MXP/line cards in the
client node and the OCH cards in the DWDM node:
Purpose This procedure creates a provisionable patchcord (PPC), also called a
virtual link. Four types of PPCs can be created:
• Client/Trunk to Client/Trunk (L2)
• Client/Trunk to Client/Trunk
• Side to Side (OTS)
• OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter
PPCs create a virtual connection between the OCH and the client nodes.
(PPCs are not required for OCHNCs.)
Tools/Equipment OC-N, TXP, MXP, OADM, ROADM, multiplexer (MUX), and
demultiplexer (DMX) cards
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-73
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• DLP-G349 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report, page 14-80
• DLP-G350 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report, page 15-31
Step 2 In the node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Comm Channels > PPC tabs. Alternatively, in network view, click the Provisioning > Provisionable
Patchcord (PPC) tabs.
PPCs can be created in either node or network view. However, if you create the PPC in node view, the
PPC origination ports will be restricted to the cards installed on the node. Therefore, choose node view
only if you know that the PPC origination port resides on a card installed in the node.
Note You can create OTS-to-OTS PPC only in the network view.
Step 3 Click Create. The PPC Attributes page of the PPC Creation wizard appears.
Step 4 Choose one of the following PPC link types. Table 16-2 provides a list of ports that serve as PPC
endpoints for each option. However, if Cisco 7600 node is used as the client node, then choose only the
OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter link type.
• Client/Trunk to Client/Trunk (L2)—Creates a PPC between two NNI client or trunk ports on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE cards provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode.
• Client/Trunk to Client/Trunk—Creates a PPC between two optical channel trunk ports on TXP,
MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, or ITU-T line cards.
• Side to Side (OTS)—Creates a PPC between two OTS (optical transport section) ports that belong
to a Side. This option establishes DCN connectivity between nodes that do not have OSCM or
OSC-CSM cards installed or TNC OSC provisioned and therefore do not have OSC connectivity.
CTC selects the OTS ports after you choose the origination and termination sides.
• OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter—Creates a PPC between an optical channel trunk port on a TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, or ITU-T line card, or
Cisco 7600 series node and an optical channel filter port on a MUX, DMX, or WSS card; or
ADD/DROP port of a 15216-FLD-4, or 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN,
15216-MD-48-EVEN , 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD passive
module.
Table 16-12 Provisionable Patchcord Ports
Card Client/Trunk (L2) Port Client/Trunk Port OTS Port OCH Filter Port
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
Client or trunk port in
NNI mode
Any trunk port — —
TXP
MXP
ADM-10G
OTU2_XP
ITU-T
— Any trunk port — —
16-74
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
OPT-BST
OPT-BST-E
OPT-BST-L
— — LINE RX
LINE TX
—
OPT-AMP-17-C
OPT-AMP-C
OPT-AMP-L
— — COM RX1
COM TX1
LINE RX2
LINE TX2
—
OPT-PRE — — COM RX3
COM TX3
—
OPT-RAMP-C
OPT-RAMP-CE
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP
15454-M-RAMAN-COP
— — LINE RX
LINE TX
—
40-SMR1-C
40-SMR2-C
— — LINE RX
LINE TX
—
32MUX
32MUX-O
40-MUX-C
— — — Any CHAN
RX port
32DMX
32DMX-L
32DMX-O
40-DMX-C
40-DMX-CE
— — — Any CHAN
TX port
32WSS
32WSS-L
40-WSS-C
40-WSS-CE
— — — Any ADD port
40-WXC-C — — COM RX
COM TX
—
80-WXC-C — — EAD(i), i=1 to 8
COM
AD
COM RX
DROP TX
EXP TX
—
Table 16-12 Provisionable Patchcord Ports (continued)
Card Client/Trunk (L2) Port Client/Trunk Port OTS Port OCH Filter Port
16-75
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 5 If you chose Client/Trunk to Client/Trunk or OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter in Step 4, complete the
following fields. If you chose Client/Trunk to Client/Trunk (L2) or Side to Side (OTS) (in Step 4,
continue with Step 6.
• OCHNC Wavelength—(OCH Trunk to OCH Filter only) From the drop-down lists, choose the
wavelength band (C or L), wavelength number type (Odd or Even), and then the wavelength.
MMU — — EXP A RX
EXP A TX
—
40-SMR2-C — — — ADD-RX
DROP-RX
EXP-TX
EXPi-RX
40-SMR1-C — — — ADD-RX
DROP-RX
EXP-TX
EXP-RX
LINE-RX
LINE-TX
TDC-CC
TDC-FC
— — — DC-RX
DC-TX
XT-40G
XM-40G
XM-40G-CE
XT-40G-CE
— Any trunk port — —
15216-MD-40-ODD
15216-MD-40-EVEN
— — — Any CHAN
RX/TX port
15216-EF-40-ODD
15216-EF-40-EVEN
— — — Any CHAN
RX/TX port
15216-MD-48-ODD
15216-MD-48-EVEN
— — — Any CHAN
RX/TX port
15216-FLD-4 — — — Any CHAN
RX/TX port
1. When Card Mode is OPT-PRET.
2. When Card Mode is OPT-LINE.
3. Line nodes with two OPT-PRE cards and no BST cards installed.
Table 16-12 Provisionable Patchcord Ports (continued)
Card Client/Trunk (L2) Port Client/Trunk Port OTS Port OCH Filter Port
16-76
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Note Same wavelengths must be set at both the ends of a virtual link (Cisco 7600 node and the DWDM
node). This wavelength must be set on the Cisco 7600 series router port on which the PPC or
virtual link is configured.
• Protected—Check this box if you want only protected cards and ports to appear as options in the
OCHNC origination and termination pages.
Step 6 Click Next.
Step 7 In the PPC Origination page, complete the fields shown in Table 16-13. The table columns indicate
whether the field is provisionable based on the option chosen in Step 4.
Table 16-13 PPC Origination Fields
Field Description
Client/Trunk to
Client/Trunk(L2)
Client/Trunk to
Client/Trunk
OCH-Trunk to
OCH-Filter
Side to
Side (OTS)
Node Choose the node
where the PPC will
originate.
Yes Yes Yes Yes
(IPoDWDM using
Cisco 7600) Choose
the DWDM node as
the PPC termination
node.
No No Yes No
Side Choose the side
where the PPC will
originate.
No No No Yes
Shelf (Multishelf only)
Choose the shelf
where the PPC will
originate.
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Slot Choose the slot
where the PPC will
originate.
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Port Choose the port
where the PPC will
originate.
Yes Yes Yes No
Tx Port (Display only) The
OTS TX port where
the PPC will
originate.
No No No Yes
Rx Port Choose the RX port
where the PPC will
originate.
No No No Yes
Protection (Display only)
Displays the
protection option
chosen in Step 5, if
applicable.
No Yes Yes No
16-77
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 8 Click Next. If you chose Client/Trunk to Client/Trunk or OCH Trunk to OCH Filter with the Protected
option in Step 4, continue with Step 9. If not, continue with Step 11.
Step 9 In the PPC Protect Termination page, provision the ID fields. If you chose OCH Trunk to OCH Trunk in
Step 4, one ID field is available. If you chose OCH Trunk to OCH Filter in Step 4, two ID fields are
available, Rx ID and Tx ID.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 In the PPC Termination page, complete the fields shown in Table 16-14. The OCH Trunk to OCH Trunk,
OCH Trunk to OCH Filter, and Side to Side (OTS) columns indicate whether the field is provisionable.
ID Displays the ID
automatically
assigned to the PPC.
Yes Yes No No
Tx ID Displays the transmit
ID automatically
assigned to the PPC.
No No Yes Yes
Rx ID Displays the receive
ID automatically
assigned to the PPC.
No No Yes Yes
Table 16-14 PPC Termination Fields
Field Description
Client/Trunk to
Client/Trunk (L2)
Client/Trunk
to
Client/Trunk
OCH Trunk to
OCH Filter
Side to
Side
(OTS)
Node Choose the node where the
PPC will terminate.
Yes Yes Yes Yes
(IPoDWDM using
Cisco 7600) Choose the
DWDM node as the PPC
termination node.
No No Yes No
Side Choose the side where the
PPC will terminate.
No No No Yes
Shelf (Multishelf only) Choose
the shelf where the PPC
will terminate.
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Slot Choose the slot where the
PPC will terminate.
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Port Choose the port where the
PPC will terminate.
Yes Yes No No
Tx Port Choose the TX port where
the PPC will terminate.
No No Yes Yes
Rx Port Choose the RX port where
the PPC will terminate.
No No Yes Yes
Table 16-13 PPC Origination Fields (continued)
Field Description
Client/Trunk to
Client/Trunk(L2)
Client/Trunk to
Client/Trunk
OCH-Trunk to
OCH-Filter
Side to
Side (OTS)
16-78
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 12 Click Next. If you chose Client/Trunk to Client/Trunk or OCH Trunk to OCH Filter with the Protected
option in Step 4, continue with Step 13. If not, continue with Step 14.
Step 13 In the PPC Protect Termination page, provision the ID fields. If you chose Client/Trunk to Client/Trunk
in Step 4, one ID field is available. If you chose OCH Trunk to OCH Filter in Step 4, two ID fields are
available, Rx ID and Tx ID.
Step 14 In the PPCs ID page, review the PPC information. If the PPC information is correct, click Finish. If you
need to make corrections, click Back and return to the wizard page where you want to change the
information.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G181 Manage GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card SVLAN Databases
Protection (Display only) Displays
the protection option
chosen in Step 5, if
applicable.
No Yes No No
ID Displays the ID
automatically assigned to
the PPC.
Yes Yes No No
Rx ID Displays the receive ID
automatically assigned to
the PPC.
No No Yes Yes
Tx ID Displays the transmit ID
automatically assigned to
the PPC.
No No Yes Yes
Table 16-14 PPC Termination Fields (continued)
Field Description
Client/Trunk to
Client/Trunk (L2)
Client/Trunk
to
Client/Trunk
OCH Trunk to
OCH Filter
Side to
Side
(OTS)
Purpose This procedure creates a service provider VLAN (SVLAN) database for
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards provisioned in
L2-over-DWDM mode. The procedure stores newly created SVLANs in
the card (each card has its own SVLAN DB). It also loads and merges
SVLAN databases into the VLAN DB tab where they can be edited.
Tools/Equipment OC-N, TXP, MXP, OADM, ROADM, multiplexer (MUX), and
demultiplexer (DMX) cards
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-79
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at the node on the network where you will manage the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE SVLAN databases.
Step 2 As needed, complete the following tasks:
• DLP-G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database, page 16-79
• DLP-G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI
Ports, page 11-396
• DLP-G422 Load or Merge an SVLAN Database, page 16-80
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > SVLAN > SVLAN DB tabs.
Step 3 In the box next to the Add row(s) button, enter the number of SVLANs you want to create.
Step 4 Click Add row(s).
Step 5 For each SVLAN row, enter the following:
• SVLAN ID—Enter the SVLAN ID. The range is 1 to 4093 with the following restrictions:
– 0 indicates an untagged frame.
– The database can contain a maximum of 4092 unprotected SVLANS. However, it can contain a
maximum of 1024 protected SVLANs.
• SVLAN Name—Enter the SVLAN name. It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
• Protection—If this is a protected SVLAN, check the Protection check box. A maximum of 1024
SVLANs can be protected.
• MAC Learning—Enables or disables MAC learning for the port. MAC learning is used by Layer 2
switches to learn the MAC addresses of network nodes so they know where to send traffic. Layer 2
switches including the GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards in L2-over-DWDM mode maintain a MAC
learning table that associates the MAC addresses and VLANs with a given port.
Note MAC address table aging is 300 seconds. It cannot be changed. To set this option, the card mode
must be L2-over-DWDM.
Purpose This task creates an SVLAN for a network of GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
and 10GE_XPE cards provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode. It then stores
the SVLAN database on the card and not on the node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-80
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• IGMP—Enables or disables the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP). By default, IGMP is
disabled.
• IGMP Fast Leave—Enables or disables the IGMP fast leave. By default, IGMP fast leave is disabled.
• IGMP Suppression—Enables or disables the IGMP report suppression. By default, IGMP
Suppression is disabled.
Step 6 Click Store.
Step 7 In the Store SVLAN DB dialog box, choose one of the following:
• To Node(s)—Stores the SVLAN database in one or more network nodes. Choose the network nodes
where you want to store the SVLAN database.
• Shelf—Appears only when the node is provisioned as a multishelf. Choose the shelf where you want
to store the SVLAN database.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the SVLAN database is stored. To choose more
than one slot, press the Shift key, or click Select All.
• To File—Stores the SVLAN database in a file. Enter a file name, then click Browse to navigate to
a local or network drive where you want to store the file.
Step 8 Click OK.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G422 Load or Merge an SVLAN Database
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > SVLAN > SVLAN DB tabs.
Step 3 Click one of the following:
• Load—Loads an SVLAN database from the card or local file and replaces any SVLANs that are in
the network view VLAN DB table.
• Merge—Loads a SVLAN database from the card or local file, but does not replace any SVLANs
that are in the network view VLAN DB table. The loaded database is merged with any SVLANs that
might be in the table.
Step 4 In the Load SVLAN DB dialog box, choose one of the following:
• From Node—Loads the SVLAN database from the card. Choose the card where you want to load
the SVLAN database.
Purpose This task loads or merges an SVLAN database stored on the card or local
file into the VLAN DB tab on the CTC network view.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-81
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• Shelf—Appears only when the node is provisioned as a multishelf. Choose the shelf where you want
to load the SVLAN database.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where you want to load the SVLAN database from.
• From File—Loads the SVLAN database from a file. Enter the file path in the blank field, or click
Browse to navigate to a local or network directory containing the database file.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G60 Create and Delete Overhead Circuits
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at the node where you will create the overhead circuit. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations” task on page 16-81.
Step 3 As needed, complete the “DLP-G97 Provision a Proxy Tunnel” task on page 16-84.
Step 4 As needed, complete the “DLP-G98 Provision a Firewall Tunnel” task on page 16-85.
Step 5 As needed, complete the “DLP-G109 Provision Orderwire” task on page 16-86.
Step 6 As needed, complete the “DLP-G110 Create a User Data Channel Circuit” task on page 16-88.
Step 7 As needed, complete the “DLP-G112 Delete Overhead Circuits” task on page 16-89.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations
Purpose This procedure creates overhead circuits on an ONS 15454 network.
Overhead circuits include ITU-T GCCs, the AIC-I card orderwire, and the
AIC-I card UDC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task creates the DWDM DCC/GCC terminations required for network
setup when using the TXP, MXP, and XP cards. Perform this task before
you create OCHCC or OCHNC circuits for these cards. In this task, you
can also set up the node so that it has direct IP access to a far-end non-ONS
node over the DCC/GCC network.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
16-82
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Note For the OTU2_XP card, you can provision the GCC on any ITU-T G.709-enabled port in Transponder
card configuration and on any port in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC card configuration. The
OTU2_XP card supports a maximum of three GCC terminations (on port 3, port 4, and either port 1 or
2) at a time.
Step 1 If you are provisioning DCC termination on the TXP and MXP card, set the termination mode of the card
as appropriate. See the “G.38 Termination Modes” section on page G-33 for details.
Step 2 If you are provisioning DCC termination, ensure that the OTN is disabled on OTN interfaces (usually
trunk ports). If OTN is enabled, provision GCC instead of DCC termination. For more information about
managing OTN setting on the card, see the “11.23 Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards”
section on page 11-142.
Step 3 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Comm Channels > GCC tabs.
Step 4 Select the DCC or GCC tabs as necessary. Available tabs are:
• GCC (both ANSI and ETSI)
• DCC
– SDCC and LDCC (for ANSI)
– RS-DCC and MS-DCC (for ETSI)
Step 5 Click the Create button. The Create Terminations dialog box appears.
Step 6 Select the ports where you want to create the DCC/GCC termination. To select more than one port, press
the Shift key or the Ctrl key.
Step 7 Under Port Admin State area, select one of the following:
• Leave unchanged—Does not change the DCC/GCC termination port administrative state.
• Set to IS or Set to Unlocked —Puts the DCC/GCC termination port in service.
• Set OOS,DSLBD to IS,AINS (for ANSI) or Set Locked,disabled to
Unlocked,automaticInService (for ETSI)—Changes a port that is currently out of service or locked
to automatic in service.
• Set OOS,DSLBD to OOS,MT (for ANSI) or Set Locked,disabled to Locked,maintenance (for
ETSI)—Changes a port that is currently out of service or locked to out of service for maintenance.
Step 8 For GCC termination, the GCC Rate is set as 192 kbps by default. For AR_MXP and AR_XP cards
provisioned on 15454 ONS M6 and 15454 ONS M2 shelves, the GCC rate can be set to 400 kbps and
1200 kbps for OTU1 and OTU2 ports respectively.
Note Ensure that the same GCC rate is configured at both ends of a GCC channel.
Step 9 Verify that the Disable OSPF on Link is unchecked. If this check box is checked, node discovery through
the link termination will not happen.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-83
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 10 If the DCC/GCC termination includes a non-ONS node, check the Far End is Foreign check box. This
automatically sets the far-end node IP address to 0.0.0.0, which means that any address can be specified
by the far end. To change the default to a specific IP address, see the DLP-G184 Change a GCC
Termination.
Step 11 In the Layer 3 area, perform one of the following options:
• Check the IP box only if the DCC/GCC is between the ONS 15454 and another ONS node and only
ONS nodes reside on the network. The DCC/GCC will use Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).
• Check both the IP box and the OSI box if the DCC/GCC is between the ONS 15454 and another
ONS node, and third-party NEs that use the OSI protocol stack are on the same network. The
DCC/GCC will use PPP.
Step 12 If you checked OSI, complete the following substeps. If you checked IP only, continue with Step 13.
a. Click Next.
b. Provision the following fields:
– Router—Choose the OSI router.
– ESH—Sets the End System Hello (ESH) propagation frequency. End system (ES) NEs transmit
ESHs to inform other ESs and intermediate systems (ISs) about the Network Service Access
Points (NSAPs) that the ES NEs serve. The default is 10 seconds. The range is 10 to 1000
seconds.
– ISH—Sets the Intermediate System Hello (ISH) protocol data unit (PDU) propagation
frequency. IS NEs send ISHs to other ESs and ISs to inform them about the IS NEs that the IS
NEs serve. The default is 10 seconds. The range is 10 to 1000 seconds.
– IIH—Sets the Intermediate System to Intermediate System Hello (IIH) PDU propagation
frequency. The IS-IS Hello PDUs establish and maintain adjacencies between ISs. The default
is 3 seconds. The range is 1 to 600 seconds.
– IS-IS Cost—Sets the cost for sending packets on the LAN subnet. The IS-IS protocol uses the
cost to calculate the shortest routing path. The default metric cost for LAN subnets is 60. The
cost normally should not be changed.
Step 13 Click Finish. The following alarms appear until all the network DCC/GCC terminations are created and
the ports are in service:
• GCC-EOC for GCC termination
• EOC for SDCC termination
• EOC-L for LDCC termination
Step 14 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
16-84
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G97 Provision a Proxy Tunnel
Note If the proxy server is disabled, you cannot set up a proxy tunnel.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Network > Proxy tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Tunnel dialog box, complete the following fields:
• Source Address—Type the IP address of the source node (32-bit length) or source subnet (any other
length).
• Length—Choose the length of the source subnet mask.
• Destination Address—Type the IP address of the destination node (32-bit length) or destination
subnet (any other length).
• Length—Choose the length of the destination subnet mask.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Continue with your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task sets up a proxy tunnel to communicate with a non-ONS far-end
node. Proxy tunnels are only necessary when the proxy server is enabled
and a foreign GCC termination exists, or if static routes exist so that the
GCC network is used to access remote networks or devices. You can
provision a maximum of 12 proxy server tunnels.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations, page 16-81
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
16-85
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G98 Provision a Firewall Tunnel
Note If the proxy server is configured as proxy-only or is disabled, you cannot set up a firewall tunnel.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Network > Firewall tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Tunnel dialog box, complete the following fields:
• Source Address—Type the IP address of the source node (32-bit length) or source subnet (any other
length).
• Length—Choose the length of the source subnet mask.
• Destination Address—Type the IP address of the destination node (32-bit length) or destination
subnet (any other length).
• Length—Choose the length of the destination subnet mask.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Continue with your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G108 Change the Service State for a Port
Purpose This task provisions destinations that will not be blocked by the firewall.
Firewall tunnels are only necessary when the proxy server is enabled and a
foreign GCC termination exists, or if static routes cause the GCC network
to access remote networks or devices. You can provision a maximum of 12
firewall tunnels.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations, page 16-81
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task puts a port in service or removes a port from service. After
creating an IP-encapsulated tunnel, put the ports that are hosting the
IP-encapsulated tunnel in service.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-86
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Note For more information about service states, see the Administrative and Service States document.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode) on the shelf graphic, double-click the
card with the ports you want to put in or out of service. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
Step 3 In the Admin State column for the target port, choose one of the following from the drop-down list:
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)—Puts the port in the IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
service state.
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)—Puts the port in the OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI)
or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state.
For ANSI nodes, traffic is not passed on the port until the service state is changed to IS-NR;
OOS-MA,MT; or Out-of-Service and Autonomous, Automatic In-Service (OOS-AU,AINS). For
ETSI nodes, traffic is not passed on the port until the service state is changed to Unlocked-enabled;
Locked-enabled,maintenance; or Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService.
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)—Puts the port in the
OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance service state. This state does not interrupt traffic flow,
but alarm reporting is suppressed and loopbacks are allowed. Raised fault conditions, whether or not
their alarms are reported, can be retrieved from the CTC Conditions tab or by using the TL1
RTRV-COND command. Use the OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance administrative state
for testing or to suppress alarms temporarily. Change to the IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled or
OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService administrative states when testing is
complete.
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)—Puts the port in the
OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-enabled,automaticInService service state. In this state, alarm reporting is
suppressed, but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed. After the soak period passes, the port
changes to IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled. Raised fault conditions, whether their alarms are reported or
not, can be retrieved from the CTC Conditions tab or by using the TL1 RTRV-COND command.
Step 4 If you set the Admin State field to IS-AINS or Unlocked,automaticInService, set the soak period time in
the AINS Soak field. This is the amount of time that the port will stay in the OOS-AU,AINS or
Unlocked-enabled,automaticInService state after a signal is continuously received. When the soak
period elapses, the port changes to the IS-NR or Unlocked-enabled state.
Step 5 Click Apply. The new port service state appears in the Service State column.
Step 6 As needed, repeat this task for each port.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G109 Provision Orderwire
Purpose This task provisions orderwire on the AIC-I card.
Tools/Equipment An AIC-I card must be installed in Slot 9.
An OSCM, OSC-CSM, MXP_2.5_10E, MXP_2.5_10G,
MXPP_MR_2.5G, or MXP_MR_2.5G card must be installed.
16-87
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Overhead Circuits tabs.
Step 3 Click Create.
Step 4 In the Overhead Circuit Creation dialog box, complete the following fields in the Circuit Attributes area:
• Name—Assign a name to the circuit. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters
(including spaces).
• Circuit Type—Choose either Local Orderwire or Express Orderwire depending on the orderwire
path that you want to create. If regenerators are not used between ONS 15454 nodes, you can use
either local or express orderwire channels. If regenerators exist, use the express orderwire channel.
You can provision up to four ONS 15454 OC-N/STM-N ports for each orderwire path.
• PCM—Choose the Pulse Code Modulation voice coding and companding standard, either Mu_Law
(North America, Japan) or A_Law (Europe). The provisioning procedures are the same for both
types of orderwire.
Caution When provisioning orderwire for ONS 15454 nodes residing in a ring, do not provision a complete
orderwire loop. For example, a four-node ring typically has Side B and Side A ports provisioned at all
four nodes. However, to prevent orderwire loops, provision two orderwire ports (Side B and Side A) at
all but one of the ring nodes.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the Circuit Source area, complete the following information:
• Node—Choose the source node.
• Shelf—(Multishelf mode only) Choose the source shelf.
• Slot—Choose the source slot.
• Port—If applicable, choose the source port.
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 In the Circuit Destination area, complete the following information:
• Node—Choose the destination node.
• Shelf—(Multishelf mode only) Choose the destination shelf.
• Slot—Choose the destination slot.
• Port—If applicable, choose the destination port.
Step 9 Click Finish.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-88
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G110 Create a User Data Channel Circuit
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Overhead Circuits tabs.
Step 3 Click Create.
Step 4 In the Overhead Circuit Creation dialog box, complete the following fields in the Circuit Attributes area:
• Name—Assign a name to the circuit. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters
(including spaces).
• Type—Choose either User Data-F1 or User Data D-4-D-12 from the drop-down list.
(User Data D-4-D-12 is not available if the ONS 15454 is provisioned for DWDM.)
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the Circuit Source area, complete the following information:
• Node—Choose the source node.
• Shelf—(Multishelf mode only) Choose the source shelf.
• Slot—Choose the source slot.
• Port—If applicable, choose the source port.
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 In the Circuit Destination area, complete the following information:
• Node—Choose the destination node.
• Shelf—(Multishelf mode only) Choose the destination shelf.
• Slot—Choose the destination slot.
• Port—If applicable, choose the destination port.
Step 9 Click Finish.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task creates a UDC circuit on the ONS 15454. A UDC circuit allows
you to create a dedicated data channel between nodes.
Tools/Equipment An OSCM, OSC-CSM, MXPP_MR_2.5G, or MXP_MR_2.5G card must
be installed.
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-89
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G112 Delete Overhead Circuits
Caution Deleting overhead circuits is service affecting if the circuits are in service (IS). To put circuits out of
service (OOS), see the “DLP-G108 Change the Service State for a Port” task on page 16-85.
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Overhead Circuits tabs.
Step 3 Click the overhead circuit that you want to delete: local or express orderwire, user data, IP-encapsulated
tunnel, or DCC tunnel.
Step 4 Click Delete.
Step 5 In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to continue.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G62 Create a J0 Section Trace Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at a node on the network where you will create the section trace.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the TXP or MXP card.
Purpose This task deletes overhead circuits. Overhead circuits include
IP-encapsulated tunnels, AIC-I card orderwire, and UDCs.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure creates a repeated, fixed-length string of characters used to
monitor interruptions or changes to traffic between nodes.
Tools/Equipment One TXP or MXP card must be installed.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings, page 11-264
(if necessary)
DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings,
page 11-266
Required/As Needed As needed (optional if path trace is set)
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-90
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the port for the section trace.
Step 5 From the Received Trace Mode drop-down list, enable the section trace expected string by choosing
Manual.
Step 6 In the Transmit Section Trace String Size area, click 1 byte or 16 byte. The 1 byte option allows you to
enter one character and the 16 byte option allows a 15 character string.
Step 7 In the New Transmit String field, enter the string that you want to transmit. Enter a string that makes the
destination port easy to identify, such as the node IP address, node name, or another string. If the
New Transmit String field is left blank, the J0 transmits a string of null characters.
Step 8 If you set the Section Trace Mode field to Manual, enter the string that the destination port should receive
from the source port in the New Expected String field.
Step 9 If the card's Termination mode is set to Line, click the Disable AIS and RDI if TIM-P is detected check
box if you want to suppress the alarm indication signal (AIS) and remote defect indication (RDI) when
the STS Section Trace Identifier Mismatch Path (TIM-P) alarm appears. If the card's Termination mode
is set to Section, the Disable AIS and RDI if TIM-P is detected check box will be grayed out and you
will not be able to select it. Continue on to Step 10. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for descriptions of alarms and conditions.
Step 10 Click Apply.
Step 11 After you set up the section trace, the received string appears in the Received field. The following
options are available:
• Click Hex Mode to display section trace in hexadecimal format. The button name changes to ASCII
Mode. Click ASCII Mode to return the section trace to ASCII format.
• Click the Reset button to reread values from the port.
• Click Default to return to the section trace default settings (Section Trace Mode is set to Off and the
New Transmit and New Expected Strings are null).
Caution Clicking Default will generate alarms if the port on the other end is provisioned with a different string.
The expect and receive strings are updated every few seconds.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G203 Create End-to-End SVLAN Circuits
Purpose This procedure manually creates an end-to-end SVLAN circuit for the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards provisioned in
L2-over-DWDM mode.
Tools/Equipment None
16-91
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Circuits > SVLAN tabs.
Step 3 Click Create.
Step 4 Define the circuit attributes:
• Name—Assign a name to the source SVLAN circuit. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48
characters (including spaces). If you leave the field blank, CTC assigns a default name to the source
cross-connect.
• Type—(Display only) SVLAN.
• SVLAN ID—Displays the SVLAN identifier. Enter a SVLAN ID between 1 and 4093.
Note Do not duplicate SVLAN IDs.
• Protection—Before enabling SVLAN protection be sure to define the master node in the OCH Ring
that contains the circuit. Protection must be enabled in order to have a SVLAN protected circuit
provisioned.
Check/uncheck to enable/disable SVLAN protection. A maximum of 1024 SVLANs can be
protected.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 Provision the circuit source (UNI or NNI client interfaces):
a. From the Node drop-down list, choose the circuit source node.
b. From the Slot drop-down list, choose the slot where the card exists.
c. From the Port drop-down list, choose the port where the circuit must originate (UNI or NNI client
ports).
Step 7 Click QinQ Settings. Provision the IEEE 802.1QinQ VLAN tags on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
or 10GE_XPE cards. See the “DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
QinQ Settings” task on page 11-399.
Step 8 Click Next.
Step 9 Provision the circuit destination (UNI or NNI client interfaces):
a. From the Node drop-down list, choose the circuit destination node.
b. From the Slot drop-down list, choose the slot where the card exists.
c. From the Port drop-down list, choose the port where the circuit must terminate (UNI or NNI client
ports).
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card
Mode, page 11-149
DLP-G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database, page 16-79
NTP-G178 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Trails, page 16-33
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-92
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 10 Click QinQ Settings. Provision the IEEE 802.1QinQ VLAN tags on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
and 10GE_XPE cards. See DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
QinQ Settings, page 11-399.
Step 11 Click Next.
Step 12 The SVLAN Circuit Routing Preview pane provides the following information:
• SVLAN Circuit Path—Nodes and spans. Click a node to select it. Blue arrows show the new SVLAN
route. Move your cursor over the arrow to view span information including source, destination, and
span loss information.
• Selected Node—Node that is currently chosen in the graphic. All actions that are invoked will apply
to this node.
• Included Nodes—Nodes that are included in the circuit path.
• Excluded Nodes—Nodes that are excluded from the circuit path.
• Include—Includes the node displayed in the Selected Node field in the circuit path. Click Apply to
update the circuit with the new constraints. This option is not applicable for protected SVLAN
circuits.
• Exclude—Excludes the node displayed in the Selected Node field from the circuit path. Click Apply
to update the circuit with the new constraints. This option is not applicable for protected SVLAN
circuits.
Step 13 Click Finish to complete the circuit creation.
Step 14 To edit the SVLAN circuit, see instructions described in the “DLP-G472 Edit the End-to-End SVLAN
Circuit” section on page 16-92.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G472 Edit the End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Circuits > SVLAN tabs.
Step 3 Select the SVLAN circuit that you want to edit and click Edit.
The Edit Circuit pane appears.
• Use the General tab to view circuit information (circuit type, size, protection type, and routing
preference), and to modify the circuit name.
• Use the End Points tab to view and define new circuit drops for the SVLAN circuit.
Purpose This task edits an end-to-end SVLAN circuit.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-93
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G229 Provision DCN Extension for a Network Using GCC/DCC
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at a node on the network (for example, Node A) where you want
to provision the DCN extension. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-41, to
create an OCHNC DCN circuit for the wavelength of the transponder (TXP) to be used for the GCC
channel.
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations” task on page 16-81, to create a GCC
service channel on the transponder in Node A.
Step 4 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at another node on the network (for example, Node B) where you
want to provision the DCN extension.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-41, to
create an OCHNC DCN circuit for the wavelength of the transponder to be used for the GCC channel.
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations” task on page 16-81, to create a GCC
service channel on the transponder in Node B.
Step 7 Turn up the circuit by forcing an ALS manual restart on the line-facing amplifier:
a. Double-click the line-facing amplifier card
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. From the ALS Mode drop-down list, choose Manual Restart.
d. Click Apply. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 8 When the circuit is up, CTC discovers the GCC topology and shows the two nodes (Node A and B)
connected by the GCC link.
Step 9 Complete the “NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord” task on page 16-72, to create an
OTS-to-OTS PPC between the two nodes.
Step 10 Complete the “DLP-G472 Merge two OCHNC DCN Circuits” task on page 16-94, to merge the two
OCHNC DCN circuits into a single OCHNC circuit.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure provisions a DCN extension for a network using GCC/DCC
as the communication channel
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-94
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G472 Merge two OCHNC DCN Circuits
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Circuits tab.
Step 3 Select one of the OCHNC DCN circuits that you want to merge and click Edit. The Edit Circuit pane
appears.
Step 4 Click Merge tab.
Step 5 Select the other OCHNC DCN circuit that you want to merge and click Merge.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G245 Create an Automatically Routed VCAT Circuit
Note This procedure requires the use of automatic routing. Automatic routing is not available if both the
Automatic Circuit Routing NE default and the Network Circuit Automatic Routing Overridable NE
default are set to FALSE. To view the NE default values, go to Shelf View and click the
Provisioning->NE Defaults tab. For a full description of these defaults, see the Network Element
Defaults section.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at the node where you would create the VCAT circuit. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 You must provision Ethernet or POS ports first before creating a VCAT circuit. Complete the following
as necessary:
• To provision Ethernet ports for ADM-10G circuits, complete the “DLP-G551 Provision ADM-10G
Ethernet Ports” task on page 16-101.
Purpose This task merges two OCHNC DCN circuits into a single OCHNC circuit
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure creates an automatically routed VCAT circuit.
Tools/Equipment ADM-10G card.
Prerequisite Procedures ADM-10G card must be installed at the nodes used in the VCAT circuit.
Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-95
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• To provision a VCAT circuit that traverses through a third-party network, complete the “DLP-G553
Create a Server Trail” procedure on page 16-102.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 4 Click the Circuits tab, then click Create.
Step 5 In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose STS-V or VC_HO_PATH_VCAT_CIRCUIT from the
Circuit Type drop-down list. Click Next.
Step 6 Define the circuit attributes as follows:
• Name—Type the circuit name. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters (including
spaces). Circuit names should be 43 characters or less if you want the ability to create monitor
circuits. If you leave the field blank, CTC assigns a default name to the circuit. Monitor circuits are
secondary circuits that monitor traffic on primary bidirectional circuits.
• Type—Displays the circuit type you chose in Step 5.
• Bidirectional—Checked by default and creates a bidirectional circuit.
• Create cross-connects only (TL1-like)—Check this check box if you want to create one or more
cross-connects to complete a signal path for TL1-generated circuits.
• Apply to drop ports—Check this check box to apply the IS administrative state to the circuit source
and destination ports. The IS state is applied to the ports only if the circuit bandwidth is the same as
the port bandwidth, or if the port bandwidth is larger than the circuit, the circuit must be the first
circuit to use the port. If not, a Warning dialog box shows the ports where the administrative state
could not be applied. If the check box is unchecked, CTC does not change the service state of the
source and destination ports.
Note If the ports in the IS-state do not receive signals, then the loss of signal alarms are generated.
This transitions the ports from the IS state to OOS-AU,FLT state.
• Symmetric—Checked by default. A bi-directional symmetrical VCAT circuit consists of only one
VCAT member group. All member circuits are bi-directional circuits.
• Open VCAT—Check this check box to create open-ended VCAT circuits.
• Member size—Choose the member size. Choose the size of each member circuit in the VCG.
STS1/STS3c for ANSI and VC4 for ETSI. For information about the member size that ADM-10G
card supports, see Chapter 11, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Num. of members—Choose the number of members. The number of members defines how much
bandwidth is required at the trunk. Thus depending on bandwidth requirements of the ethernet traffic
on the GE ports, choose appropriate number of members. For information about the number of
members that ADM-10G card supports, see Chapter 11, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder
Cards”.
• Mode—Select “None”. The ADM-10G card supports only pure VCAT and does not support
SW-LCAS or HW-LCAS.
Note A failure on one member causes the entire VCAT circuit to fail. For ADM-10G card, you can add or
delete members after creating a VCAT circuit with no protection. But while adding or deleting the
members, the entire VCAT circuit does not carry traffic.
Step 7 Click Next.
16-96
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 8 Complete the “DLP-G555 Provision a VCAT Circuit Source and Destination” task on page 16-105 for
the VCAT circuit you are creating. If you are creating an open-ended VCAT circuit, complete the
“DLP-G556 Provision an Open VCAT Circuit Source and Destination” task on page 16-105.
Step 9 In the VCAT Circuit Routing Preferences area, choose Route Automatically. The following options are
available (choose either, both, or none based on your preferences).
• Using Required Nodes/Spans—Check this check box to specify nodes and spans to include or
exclude in the CTC-generated circuit route.
Including nodes and spans for a circuit ensures that those nodes and spans are in the working path
of the circuit (but not the protect path). Excluding nodes and spans ensures that the nodes and spans
are not in the working or protect path of the circuit.
• Review Route Before Creation—Check this check box to review and edit the circuit route before the
circuit is created (you can see all the spans the circuit is traversing before the circuit creation is
completed).
Step 10 If the VCAT circuit has a source or destination on a ADM-10G card, choose one of the following routing
types.
• Common Routing—Routes the members on the same fiber.
• Split Routing—Allows the individual members to be routed on different fibers or each member to
have different routing constraints. Split routing is required when creating circuits over a path
protection configuration.
If the VCAT circuit does not have a source or destination on a ADM-10G card, common routing is
automatically selected and you cannot change it.
Step 11 If you want to set preferences for individual members, complete the following in the Member
Preferences area. Repeat for each member. To set identical preferences for all members, skip this step
and continue with Step 12:
• Number—Choose a number (between 1 and 256) from the drop-down list to identify the member.
• Name—Type a unique name to identify the member. The name can be alphanumeric and up to
48 characters (including spaces). If you leave the field blank, CTC assigns a default name to the
circuit.
• Protection—Choose the member protection type:
– Fully Protected—Routes the circuit on a protected path.
– Unprotected—Creates an unprotected circuit.
– PCA—Routes the circuit on a BLSR protection channel.
– DRI—(Split routing only) Routes the member on a dual-ring interconnect circuit.
• Node-Diverse Path—(Split routing only) Available for each member when Fully Protected is
chosen.
Step 12 To set preferences for all members, complete the following in the Set Preferences for All Members area:
• Protection—Choose the member protection type:
– Fully Protected—Routes the circuit on a protected path.
– Unprotected—Creates an unprotected circuit.
– PCA—Routes the member on a BLSR protection channel.
– DRI—(Split routing only) Routes the member on a dual-ring interconnect circuit.
• Node-Diverse Path—(Split routing only) Available when Fully Protected is chosen.
16-97
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 13 Click Next. If you chose Fully Protected or PCA, click OK to continue. If not, continue with the next
step.
Step 14 If you selected Using Required Nodes/Spans in Step 9, complete the following substeps. If not, continue
with Step 15:
a. In the Circuit Constraints area, choose the member that you want to route from the Route member
number drop-down list.
b. Click a node or span on the circuit map.
c. Click Include to include the node or span in the circuit, or click Exclude to exclude the node or span
from the circuit. The order in which you choose included nodes and spans is the order in which the
circuit is routed. Click spans twice to change the circuit direction.
d. Repeat Steps b and c for each node or span you wish to include or exclude.
e. Review the circuit route. To change the circuit routing order, choose a node in the Required
Nodes/Lines or Excluded Nodes Links lists, then click the Up or Down buttons to change the circuit
routing order. Click Remove to remove a node or span.
f. Repeat Steps a through e for each member.
Step 15 If you selected Review Route Before Creation in Step 9, complete the following substeps. If not continue
with Step 16:
a. In the Route Review/Edit area, choose the member that you want to route from the Route Member
Number drop-down list.
b. Click a node or span on the circuit map.
c. Review the circuit route. To add or delete a circuit span, choose a node on the circuit route. Blue
arrows indicate the circuit route. Green arrows indicate spans that you can add. Click a span
arrowhead, then click Include to include the span or Remove to remove the span.
d. If the provisioned circuit does not reflect the routing and configuration you want, click Back to
verify and change circuit information. If the circuit needs to be routed to a different path, see the
“NTP-G246 Create a Manually Routed VCAT Circuit” procedure on page 16-98 to assign the circuit
route yourself.
e. Repeat Steps a through d for each member.
Step 16 Click Finish. The Circuits window appears.
Note Depending on the complexity of the network and number of members, the VCAT circuit creation
process can take several minutes.
Step 17 In the Circuits window, verify that the circuit you created appears in the circuits list.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
16-98
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
NTP-G246 Create a Manually Routed VCAT Circuit
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at the node where you would create the circuit. If you are already
logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you want to assign a name to the tunnel source and destination ports before you create the circuit,
complete the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 You must provision Ethernet or POS ports first before creating a VCAT circuit. Complete the following
as necessary:
• To provision Ethernet ports for ADM-10G circuits, complete the “DLP-G551 Provision ADM-10G
Ethernet Ports” task on page 16-101.
• To provision a VCAT circuit that traverses through a third-party network, complete the “DLP-G553
Create a Server Trail” procedure on page 16-102.
Step 4 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 5 In the Circuit Creation dialog box, choose STS-V or VC_HO_PATH_VCAT_CIRCUIT from the
Circuit Type drop-down list. Click Next.
Step 6 Define the circuit attributes as follows:
• Name—Type the circuit name. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters (including
spaces). Circuit names should be 43 characters or less if you want the ability to create monitor
circuits. If you leave the field blank, CTC assigns a default name to the circuit.
• Type—Displays the circuit type you chose in Step 5.
• Bidirectional—Checked by default and creates a bidirectional circuit.
• Create cross-connects only (TL1-like)—Check this check box if you want to create one or more
cross-connects to complete a signal path for TL1-generated circuits.
• Apply to drop ports—Check this check box to apply the IS administrative state to the circuit source
and destination ports. The IS state is applied to the ports only if the circuit bandwidth is the same as
the port bandwidth, or if the port bandwidth is larger than the circuit, the circuit must be the first
circuit to use the port. If not, a Warning dialog box shows the ports where the administrative state
could not be applied. If the check box is unchecked, CTC does not change the service state of the
source and destination ports.
• Symmetric—Checked is the default. A bi-directional symmetrical VCAT circuit consists of only one
VCAT member group. All member circuits are bi-directional circuits.
• Open VCAT—Check this check box to create open-ended VCAT circuits.
• Member size—Choose the member size. Choose the size of each member circuit in the VCG.
STS1/STS3c for ANSI and VC4 for ETSI. For information about the member size that ADM-10G
card supports, see Chapter 11, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
Purpose This procedure creates a manually routed VCAT circuit.
Tools/Equipment ADM-10G card.
Prerequisite Procedures ADM-10G card must be installed at the nodes used in the VCAT circuit.
Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-99
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• Num. of members—Choose the number of members. The number of members defines how much
bandwidth is required at the trunk. Thus depending on bandwidth requirements of the ethernet traffic
on the GE ports, choose appropriate number of members. For information about the number of
members that ADM-10G card supports, see Chapter 11, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder
Cards”.
• Mode—ADM-10G card supports only pure VCAT and does not support SW-LCAS or HW-LCAS.
Note A failure on one member causes the entire VCAT circuit to fail. For ADM-10G card, you can add or
delete members after creating a VCAT circuit with no protection. But while adding or deleting the
members, the entire VCAT circuit does not carry traffic.
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 Complete the “DLP-G555 Provision a VCAT Circuit Source and Destination” task on page 16-105 for
the VCAT circuit you are creating. If you are creating an open-ended VCAT circuit, complete the
“DLP-G556 Provision an Open VCAT Circuit Source and Destination” task on page 16-105.
Step 9 In the Circuit Routing Preferences area, uncheck Route Automatically.
Step 10 If the VCAT circuit has a source or destination on a ADM-10G card, choose one of the following routing
types.
• Common Routing—Routes the members on the same fiber.
• Split Routing—Allows the individual members to be routed on different fibers or each member to
have different routing constraints. Split routing is required when creating circuits over a path
protection configuration.
If the VCAT circuit does not have a source or destination on a ADM-10G card, common routing is
automatically selected and you cannot change it.
Step 11 If you want to set preferences for individual members, complete the following in the Member
Preferences area. Repeat for each member. To set identical preferences for all members, skip this step
and continue with Step 12.
• Number—Choose a number (between 1 and 256) from the drop-down list to identify the member.
• Name—Type a unique name to identify the member. The name can be alphanumeric and up to
48 characters (including spaces). If you leave the field blank, CTC assigns a default name to the
circuit.
• Protection—Choose the member protection type:
– Fully Protected—Routes the circuit on a protected path.
– Unprotected—Creates an unprotected circuit.
– PCA—Routes the member on a BLSR protection channel.
– DRI—(Split routing only) Routes the member on a dual-ring interconnect circuit.
• Node-Diverse Path—(Split routing only) Available for each member when Fully Protected is
chosen.
Step 12 To set preferences for all members, complete the following in the Set Preferences for All Members area:
• Protection—Choose the member protection type:
– Fully Protected—Routes the circuit on a protected path.
– Unprotected—Creates an unprotected circuit.
– PCA—Routes the member on a BLSR protection channel.
16-100
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
– DRI—(Split routing only) Routes the member on a dual-ring interconnect circuit.
• Node-Diverse Path—(Split routing only) Available when Fully Protected is chosen.
Step 13 Click Next. If you chose Fully Protected or PCA, click OK. If not, continue with the next step.
Step 14 In the Route Review and Edit area, node icons appear so you can route the circuit manually.
Step 15 Complete the “DLP-G557 Provision a VCAT Circuit Route” task on page 16-106.
Step 16 Click Finish. If the path does not meet the specified path diversity requirement, CTC displays an error
message and allows you to change the circuit path.
Note Depending on the complexity of the network and number of members, the VCAT circuit creation
process can take several minutes.
Step 17 When all the circuits are created, the main Circuits window appears. Verify that the circuit you created
appears in the window.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G247 Enable or disable Path Performance Monitoring on Intermediate Nodes
Note For PM parameter definitions, see the 11.15.15 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions,
page 11-94 section.
Step 1 In node view, double-click the ADM-10G card to display the card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET STS tabs
Step 3 In the Provisioning->Line->SONET STS pane, check the Enable IPPM check box to enable path
performance monitoring on the STS circuit. Uncheck (default option) the Enable IPPM to disable path
performance monitoring on the STS circuit.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the Performance tab to view PM parameters.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task enables or disables path performance monitoring on STS
circuits of intermediate nodes carrying high volume traffic.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-101
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G551 Provision ADM-10G Ethernet Ports
Step 1 Complete DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port, page 11-150 to provision the PPM.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf view) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card to
display the card view.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ethernet tabs.
Step 4 For each ADM-10G port, provision the following parameters:
• Port Name—Enter a logical name that defines the port.
• Admin State—Select the service state from the drop-down list. See the “DLP-G108 Change the
Service State for a Port” task on page 16-85 for more information.
• MTU—The maximum size of the Ethernet frames accepted by the port. For jumbo size Ethernet
frames, choose jumbo (the valid range is 64-9216) or select 1548 (default).
• Framing Type—Choose GPF-F POS framing (the default) or HDLC POS framing. The framing
type needs to match the framing type of the POS device at the end of the circuit.
• CRC Encap—With GFP-F framing, you can configure a 32-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) or
none (no CRC) (the default). HDLC framing provides a set 16-bit or 32-bit CRC. The encap and
CRC should be set to match the encap and CRC of the POS device on the end of the circuit.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Refresh the statistics to get the current RMON counts:
a. Click the Performance > Statistics tabs.
b. Click Refresh.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task provisions ADM-10G Ethernet ports to carry traffic.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-102
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G553 Create a Server Trail
Note You cannot create server trails on ports with DCC links.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at the node where you would create the circuit. If you are already
logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Server Trails tabs.
Step 4 Click Create.
Step 5 In the Server Trail Creation dialog box, complete the following fields:
• Type—Choose STS or VC.
• Size—Depending on the type selected, choose the server trail size. For STSs, choose STS-1,
STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, or STS-24c; for VCs, choose VC-4, VC-4-2c, VC-4-3c,
VC-4-4c, or VC4-8c
• Protection Type—Choose one of the following protection types: Preemptible, Unprotected, or
Fully Protected. The server trail protection sets the protection type for any circuit that traverses it.
– Preemptible— PCA circuits will use server trails with the Preemptible attribute.
– Unprotected—In Unprotected Server Trail, CTC assumes that the circuits going out from that
specific port will not be protected by provider network and will look for a secondary path from
source to destination if you are creating a protected circuit.
– Fully Protected—In Fully Protected Server Trail, CTC assumes that the circuits going out from
that specific port will be protected by provider network and will not look for a secondary path
from source to destination.
• Number of Trails—Enter the number of server trails. Number of trails determine the number of
circuits that can be created on server trail. You can create a maximum of 3744 server trails on a node.
You can create multiple server trails from the same port. This is determined by how many circuits
of a particular server trail size can be supported on the port.
• SRLG—Enter a value for the Shared Resource Link Group (SRLG). SRLG is used by Cisco
Transport Manager (CTM) to specify link diversity. The SRLG field has no restrictions. If you create
multiple server trails from one port, you can assign the same SRLG value to all the links to indicate
that they originate from the same port.
Step 6 Click Next.
Step 7 In the Source area, complete the following:
• From the Node drop-down list, choose the node where the server trail originates.
Purpose This procedure creates a server trail, which provides a connection between
ONS nodes through a third-party network. You can create server trails
between any two optical ports.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-103
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
• From the Slot drop-down list, choose the slot containing the card where the server trail originates.
(If a card’s capacity is fully utilized, the card does not appear in the list.)
• Depending on the origination card, choose the source port and/or STS or VC from the Port and STS
or VC lists. The Port list is only available if the card contains multiple ports. STSs and VCs do not
appear if they are already in use by other circuits.
Step 8 Click Next.
Step 9 In the Destination area, complete the following:
• From the Node drop-down list, choose the destination node.
• From the Slot drop-down list, choose the slot containing the card where the server trail will
terminate (destination card). (If a card’s capacity is fully utilized, the card does not appear in the
list.)
• Depending on the card selected, choose the destination port and/or STS or VC from the Port and
STS or VC drop-down lists. The Port drop-down list is available only if the card has multiple ports.
The STSs that appear depend on the card, circuit size, and protection scheme.
Step 10 Click Finish.
Note When Server Trails are created on an IPv4 or IPv6 node and the IP address of the node changes, complete
the “DLP-G554 Repair Server Trails” task on page 16-103 to repair the Server Trails.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G554 Repair Server Trails
Note The Server Trail Repair wizard can only fix the IP address changes and cannot fix Server Trail
terminations when you migrate from IPv4 to IPv6 addresses.
Note The Server Trail Repair wizard cannot repair the server trails when IP address of nodes on both ends of
the Server Trail are changed.
Purpose This procedure repairs server trail terminations in cases where the IP
address changes for a node connected by a Server Trail link.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-104
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Note When server trails are created on an IPv4 or IPv6 node and the IP address of the node changes, make
sure that the Server Trail Repair wizard is launched on the IP address of the node that changed. For
example, if the IP address of server trails created on an IPv4 node changes, run the Server Trail Repair
wizard on the IPv4 node and not on the IPv6 node.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at the node where you would repair server trails. If you are already
logged in, continue with Step 2.
Note The Server Trail Repair wizard works only when nodes at both ends of the server trail are added
in the CTC. If CTC is launched after the IP address is changed or if the node on any of the sides
is not discovered automatically, then the node has to be added manually into the CTC.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Choose the Tools > Links > Repair Server Trails option from the tool bar.
The Server Trail Repair wizard appears.
Step 4 Specify the changed IP address.
The Server Trail Repair window provides the following options:
• Try to discover IP address changes—The wizard searches and displays the list of changed IP
addresses.
Note The wizard can discover multiple IP address changes. However, the wizard can repair only
one IP address change at a time. To repair multiple IP address changes, run the Server Trail
Repair wizard multiple times.
• Apply the following IP change—Allows you to specify the changed IP address.
Select the node with the changed IP address and specify old IP address as Original IP Address. The
wizard automatically displays the current IP address.
Step 5 Click Next.
If you selected the “Try to discover IP address changes” option in Step 4, then the wizard displays all
the IP address changes that will be fixed. Click Next.
If you selected the “Apply the following IP change” option in Step 4, continue with Step 6.
Step 6 The Server Trail Terminations to Repair window appears. Click Finish to repair the server trails.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
16-105
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
DLP-G555 Provision a VCAT Circuit Source and Destination
Note After you have selected the circuit properties in the Circuit Source dialog box according to the specific
circuit creation procedure, you are ready to provision the circuit source.
Step 1 From the Node drop-down list (in the Source/Destination selection pane), choose the node where the
circuit originates.
Step 2 From the Slot drop-down list, choose the slot containing the ADM-10G card where the circuit originates.
(If a card’s capacity (bandwidth) is fully utilized, it does not appear in the list.)
Step 3 Depending on the circuit origination card, choose the source port.
Step 4 Click Next.
Step 5 From the Node drop-down list, choose the destination node.
Step 6 From the Slot drop-down list, choose the slot containing the ADM10-G card where the circuit will
terminate (destination card). (If a card’s capacity (bandwidth) is fully utilized, the card does not appear
in the list.)
Step 7 Choose the destination port.
Step 8 Click Next.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G556 Provision an Open VCAT Circuit Source and Destination
Note After you have selected the circuit properties in the Circuit Source dialog box according to the specific
circuit creation procedure, you are ready to provision the circuit source.
Purpose This task provisions a virtual concatenated (VCAT) circuit source and
destination.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task provisions an open virtual concatenated (VCAT) circuit source
and destination.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-106
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 1 From the Node drop-down list (in the Source/Destination selection pane), choose the node where the
circuit originates.
Step 2 From the Slot drop-down list, choose the slot containing the ADM-10G card where the circuit originates.
(If a card’s capacity (bandwidth) is fully utilized, it does not appear in the list.)
Step 3 Depending on the circuit origination card, choose the source port.
Step 4 Click Next.
Step 5 Click the Auto-ranged Destinations check box to select the endpoints (CCAT/VCAT) automatically.
Only the first endpoint needs to be selected; all the other endpoints are automatically created.
If you have not chosen auto-ranged destinations from the card selected in Step 2, then choose the source
port and/or STS. If applicable, choose VC from the Port and STS drop down-lists. The Port drop-down
list is available only if the card has multiple ports. STSs and VCs do not appear if they are already in use
by other circuits.
Step 6 From the Select Destinations For drop-down list, choose the member number.
Step 7 From the Node drop-down list, choose the destination node.
Step 8 From the Slot drop-down list, choose the slot containing the card where the circuit will terminate
(destination card). (If a card’s capacity (bandwidth) is fully utilized, the card does not appear in the list.)
Non-data cards may be used for open VCAT circuits. The cards that do not have ethernet ports are
non-data cards.
Step 9 Click Add Destinations.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 Verify that the open VCAT circuit source and destination appears.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G557 Provision a VCAT Circuit Route
Step 1 In the Circuit Creation wizard in the Route Review and Edit area, choose the member number from the
Route Member Number drop-down list.
Step 2 Click the source node icon if it is not already selected.
Step 3 Starting with a span on the source node, click the arrow of the span you want the circuit to travel. The
arrow turns yellow. In the Selected Span area, the From and To fields provide span information. The
source STS or VC appears.
Step 4 Click Add Span. The span is added to the Included Spans list and the span arrow turns blue.
Purpose This task provisions the circuit route for manually routed VCAT circuits.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
16-107
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the circuit is provisioned from the source to the destination node through all
intermediary nodes.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for each member.
Step 7 Verify that a VCAT circuit route is provisioned.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
16-108
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords
End-to-End SVLAN Circuit
CH A P T E R
17-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
17
Monitor Performance
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See Monitor Performance for the performance
monitoring (PM) parameters and concepts that are defined for dense wavelength division multiplexing
(DWDM) cards in Cisco ONS 15454. PM parameters are used by service providers to gather, store, set
thresholds, and report performance data for early detection of problems. This chapter also explains how
to enable and view PM statistics.
17-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 17 Monitor Performance
CH A P T E R
18-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
18
Manage the Node
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See Manage the Node for information related to
modifying node provisioning for the Cisco ONS 15454 and performing common management tasks such
as monitoring the dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) automatic power control (APC) and
span loss values.
18-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 18 Manage the Node
CH A P T E R
19-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
19
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management
for Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) alarm and threshold crossing alert (TCA) monitoring and
management.
19-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 19 Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management
CH A P T E R
20-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
20
Change DWDM Card Settings
This chapter explains how to change line, performance monitoring (PM), and threshold settings on
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM cards. To install cards, see the “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards”
procedure on page 14-64.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, the term “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies and
card parameters apply to cards installed in both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Before You Begin
Before performing any of the following procedures, investigate all alarms and clear any trouble
conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide as necessary.
Caution Changing card settings can be service affecting. You should make all changes during a scheduled
maintenance window.
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. NTP-G90 Modify OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds,
page 20-2—Complete as needed.
2. NTP-G91 Modify OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds,
page 20-13—Complete as needed.
3. NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27—Complete as needed.
4. NTP-G202 Modify PSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-47—Complete as needed.
5. NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54—Complete as
needed.
20-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
6. NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM
Thresholds, page 20-65—Complete as needed.
7. NTP-G174 Modify the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds,
page 20-79—Complete as needed.
8. NTP-G241 Modify the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds,
page 20-94—Complete as needed.
9. NTP-G149 Modify the MMU Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-114—Complete as needed.
10. NTP-G101 Modify Alarm Interface Controller–International Settings, page 20-117—As needed,
complete this procedure to change settings for external alarms, controls, and orderwire for the AIC-I
card.
11. NTP-G102 Change Card Service State, page 20-120—Complete as needed.
12. NTP-G240 Modify TDC-CC and TDC-FC Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-76
13. NTP-G280 Modify Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE Cards, page 20-121
NTP-G90 Modify OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC procedure at the node where you want to change the OSCM or
OSC-CSM card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G199 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line Settings, page 20-3
• DLP-G200 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line SONET/SDH Thresholds,
page 20-5
• DLP-G201 Change Optical Line Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards, page 20-7
• DLP-G202 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM Optical Line Threshold Settings, page 20-8
• DLP-G203 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM ALS Maintenance Settings, page 20-12
Step 4 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the optical service channel (OSC) and PM
parameters and thresholds for the OSCM and OSC-CSM cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G199 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OSCM or OSC-CSM
card where you want to change the OC-3/STM-1 line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OC3 Line > OC3 Line (ANSI) or Provisioning > STM-1 > STM-1 Line
(ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-1.
Purpose This task changes the OC-3/STM-1 line settings for the OSC signal
transmitted by OSCM and OSC-CSM cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-1 OSCM and OSC-CSM Card OC-3/STM-1 Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 1
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port
a name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin State (Display only) Displays the port administrative
state. For more information about
administrative states, see the Administrative
and Service States document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)—Puts the port in
service. The port service state changes to IS-NR (ANSI)
or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI).
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)—Puts the port in
automatic in-service. The port service state changes to
OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService (ETSI).
20-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition
of the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information about
service states, see the Administrative and
Service States document.
• IS-NR (In-Service and Normal [ANSI]) or
Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)—The port is fully
operational and is performing as provisioned.
• OOS-AU,AINS (Out-Of-Service and Autonomous,
Automatic In-Service [ANSI]) or
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService (ETSI)—The
port is out of service, but traffic is carried. Alarm
reporting is suppressed. The ONS node monitors the
ports for an error-free signal. After an error-free signal
is detected, the port stays in the
OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService
state for the duration of the soak period. After the soak
period ends, the port service state changes to
IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled.
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (Out-of-Service and Management,
Disabled [ANSI]) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)—The port is out of service and unable to carry
traffic.
• OOS-MA,MT (Out-of-Service and Management,
Maintenance [ANSI]) or Locked-enabled,maintenance
(ETSI)—The port is out of service for maintenance.
Alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried and
loopbacks are allowed.
SF BER Sets the signal fail bit error rate. From the drop-down list, choose one of the following:
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. From the drop-down list, choose one of the following:
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Provides
Synch
(Display only) If checked, the card is
provisioned as a network element (NE) timing
reference.
• Checked
• Unchecked
SyncMsgIn Enables synchronization status messages
(SSM) on the S1 byte, which allow the node to
choose the best timing source.
• Checked
• Unchecked
Send Do Not
Use
When checked, sends a Do Not Use for
Synchronization (DUS) message on the S1
byte.
• Checked
• Unchecked
Table 20-1 OSCM and OSC-CSM Card OC-3/STM-1 Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G200 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line SONET/SDH Thresholds Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OSCM or OSC-CSM
card where you want to change the SONET/SDH threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OC3 Line > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or Provisioning > OC3 Line >
SDH Thresholds (ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Thresholds can be set for Near End or Far End directions for either the 15-minute or 1-day intervals. You
can set thresholds for either the Line or Section types. Path thresholds do not apply. Modify any of the
settings described in Table 20-2 (ANSI) or Table 20-3 (ETSI).
PJSTSMon # (Display only) Sets the STS that will be used
for pointer justification.
This parameter is set to Off. It cannot be changed.
AINS Soak (Display only) The automatic in-service soak
period. It is always 00.00.
—
Type Defines the port as SONET or SDH. The
Enable Sync Msg field and the Send Do Not
Use field must be disabled before the port can
be set to SDH.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the following:
• SONET
• SDH
Purpose This task changes the OC-3/STM-1 line SONET/SDH thresholds settings
for the OSC signal transmitted by the OSCM and OSC-CSM cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-2 OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards OC3 Line SONET Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays
the port number.
1
CV Coding violations Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals for
Line or Section (Near and Far End). Select the bullet and click
Refresh.
Table 20-1 OSCM and OSC-CSM Card OC-3/STM-1 Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals for
Line or Section (Near and Far End). Select the bullet and click
Refresh.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals for
Line or Section (Near and Far End). Select the bullet and click
Refresh.
SEFS Severely errored framing
seconds (Section only)
Numeric. Can be set for Far End, for 15-minute or one-day
intervals for Section only. Select the bullet and click Refresh.
FC Failure count (Line only) Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals for
Line (Near and Far End). Select the bullet and click Refresh
UAS Unavailable seconds
(Line only)
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals for
Line (Near and Far End). Select the bullet and click Refresh.
Table 20-3 OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards OC3 Line SDH Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays
the port number.
1
EB Errored block Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals for MS
(Multiplex Section) or RS (Regeneration Section) (Near and
Far End). Select the bullet and click Refresh.
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals for MS
or RS (Near and Far End). Select the bullet and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals for MS
or RS (Near and Far End). Select the bullet and click Refresh.
BBE Background block error Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals for MS
or RS (Near and Far End). Select the bullet and click Refresh.
OFS Out of frame seconds Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals for RS,
Near End. Select the bullet and click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals for MS
or RS (Near and Far End). Select the bullet and click Refresh.
Table 20-2 OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards OC3 Line SONET Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G201 Change Optical Line Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OSCM or OSC-CSM
card where you want to change the optical line parameters.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-4. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table. In the Options column, the SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH
(ETSI) option.
Purpose This task changes the optical line parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM
cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-4 OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Optical Line Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number, port type,
and direction (TX or RX).
OSCM
• 2 (OSC-RX)
• 3 (OSC-TX)
OSC-CSM
• 2 (COM-RX)
• 3 (COM-TX)
• 4 (LINE-RX)
• 5 (LINE-TX)
• 6 (OSC-RX)
• 7 (OSC-TX)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task
on page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port administrative state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more information
about administrative states, see the Administrative
and Service States document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the
following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
20-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G202 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM Optical Line Threshold Settings
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For
more information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
Power (Display only) Shows the current power level per
port.
—
VOA Mode (Display only) Shows the functional mode of the
variable optical attenuator (VOA), when present.
• Constant Attenuation
• Constant Power
VOA Power
Ref
(Display only) Shows the optical power setpoint that
must be reached when a VOA is present and VOA
Mode is set to Constant Power. This parameter can
only be modified by ANS.
—
VOA Power
Calib
Modifies the optical power value of the VOA when
VOA Mode is set to Constant Power.
Numeric. Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
VOA
Attenuation
Ref
(Display only) Shows the VOA attenuation value
when VOA Mode is set to Constant Attenuation.
This parameter can only be modified by ANS.
—
VOA
Attenuation
Calib
Modifies the attenuation value of the VOA when the
VOA Mode is set to Constant Attenuation.
Numeric. Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
Active
Channels
(Display only) Indicates how many channels the
amplifier is carrying. Generally reflects the number
of provisioned channels.
—
OSC Power (Display only) Shows the OSC power level per port. —
Purpose This task changes the optical line threshold settings for OSCM and
OSC-CSM cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-4 OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Optical Line Parameter Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OSCM or OSC-CSM
card where you want to change the optical line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, choose the type of threshold that you want to change, either Warning or Alarm.
Caution Warning thresholds are not monitored by CTC. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Step 4 Click Refresh.
Step 5 Modify any of the warning or alarm threshold settings. Table 20-5 shows the thresholds for warnings.
Table 20-6 shows the thresholds for alarms.
Table 20-5 OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Optical Line Warning Thresholds Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (TX or RX).
OSCM
• 2 (OSC-RX)
• 3 (OSC-TX)
OSC-CSM
• 2 (COM-RX)
• 3 (COM-TX)
• 4 (LINE-RX)
• 5 (LINE-TX)
• 6 (OSC-RX)
• 7 (OSC-TX)
opwrMin
(dBm)
(OSCM only)
Sets the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the parameter,
enter a value, and press Enter.
opwrMax
(dBm)
(OSCM only)
Sets the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
opwrMin OSC
(dBm)
Sets the OSC low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the parameter,
enter a value, and press Enter.
opwrMax OSC
(dBm)
Sets the OSC high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
20-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Table 20-6 OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (TX or RX).
OSCM
• 2 (OSC-RX)
• 3 (OSC-TX)
OSC-CSM
• 2 (COM-RX)
• 3 (COM-TX)
• 4 (LINE-RX)
• 5 (LINE-TX)
• 6 (OSC-RX)
• 7 (OSC-TX)
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the optical power failure low
threshold for the port. If the VOA Mode is
Constant Attenuation, you can manually
change the threshold. The value must be
within the optical power range that is
specified for the card. For more
information, see the Hardware
Specifications document.
If VOA Mode is Constant Power, you
cannot change the threshold manually
because it is based on the Power setpoint
(VOA Power Ref + VOA Power Calib).
To change the threshold, you must change
the VOA Power Calib value. This adjusts
the Power setpoint. The threshold is
automatically set to a value that is 5 dB
lower than the Power setpoint.
You can set the threshold manually at the
COM-RX and LINE-RX ports.
Numeric (dB). Double-click the table
cell, enter a value, then press Enter.
Pwr OSC
Degrade Low
(dBm)
Shows the power degrade low threshold.
This power value applies to the
corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
This threshold applies to a port associated
to a VOA (OSC-VOA) always active in
Constant Power mode.
In this case, the threshold is automatically
linked to the Power setpoint (VOA Power
Ref + VOA Power Calib) that is
provisioned. Changing the setpoint will
result in changing the threshold (always
2 dB lower).
Numeric.
20-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 6 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Pwr OSC
Degrade High
(dBm)
Shows the power degrade high threshold.
This power value applies to the
corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
This threshold applies to a port that is
associated to a VOA (OSC-VOA). In
Constant Power mode, the port is always
active and the threshold is automatically
linked to the Power setpoint (VOA Power
Ref + VOA Power Calib). To change the
threshold, change the Power setpoint. The
threshold will always be 2 dB higher than
the Power setpoint.
Numeric.
Pwr OSC
Failure (dBm)
Shows the optical power failure low
threshold for the port. The threshold is
calculated automatically when you run
ANS. If the VOA Mode is Constant
Attenuation, you can manually change
the threshold. The value must be within
the optical power range that is specified
for the card. For more information, see
the Hardware Specifications document.
If VOA Mode is Constant Power, you
cannot change the threshold manually
because it is based on the Power setpoint
(VOA Power Ref + VOA Power Calib).
To change the threshold, you must change
the VOA Power Calib value. This adjusts
the Power setpoint. The threshold is
automatically set to a value that is 5 dB
lower than the Power setpoint.
Numeric.
VOA Degrade
High (dBm)
Does not apply to OSCM and OSC-CSM
cards.
—
VOA Degrade
Low (dBm)
Does not apply to OSCM and OSC-CSM
cards.
—
Table 20-6 OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G203 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM ALS Maintenance Settings
Note The ALS function should only be disabled temporarily for installation or maintenance reasons. Activate
ALS immediately after maintenance or installation.
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain
optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of
100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OSC-CSM or OSCM
card where you want to change the ALS maintenance settings.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-7. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table.
Purpose This task changes the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) maintenance
settings for the OSC-CSM and OSCM cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-7 OSC-CSM and OSCM ALS Maintenance Settings
Parameter Description Options
OSRI Optical safety remote interlock. When set
to On, the OSC TX output power is shut
down.
From the drop-down list, choose one
of the following:
• On
• Off
ALS Mode Automatic laser shutdown mode. For
OSCM cards, ALS provides the ability to
shut down the OSC TX laser when the
OSC RX detects a loss of signal (LOS).
For OSC-CSM cards, ALS provides the
same functions as the OSCM card and
also enables an optical safety mechanism
at the DWDM network layer. For more
details, see G.2 Automatic Laser
Shutdown, page G-6
From the drop-down list, choose one
of the following:
• Disable—Deactivates ALS.
• Auto Restart—(Default) ALS is
active. The power is
automatically shut down when
needed and automatically tries to
restart using a probe pulse until
the cause of the failure is
repaired.
• Manual Restart
• Manual Restart for Test
20-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G91 Modify OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G204 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers, page 20-14
• DLP-G205 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers,
page 20-15
• DLP-G206 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers,
page 20-19
• DLP-G207 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers,
page 20-21
• DLP-G322 Change the OPT-BST ALS Maintenance Settings, page 20-25
Recovery Pulse
Duration
(Display only) Displays the duration of
the optical power pulse that begins when
an amplifier restarts.
—
Recovery Pulse
Interval
(Display only) Displays the interval
between optical power pulses.
—
Currently
Shutdown
(Display only) Displays whether or not
the laser is currently shut down, either
YES or NO.
—
Request Laser
Restart
If checked, allows you to restart the laser. Checked or unchecked
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for an OPT-PRE,
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-7 OSC-CSM and OSCM ALS Maintenance Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G204 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier where you want to change the optical line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-8. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table. In the Options column, the SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH
(ETSI) option.
Purpose This task changes the optical line settings for an OPT-PRE, OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-8 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Amplifier Optical Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number, port type, and
direction (TX or RX).
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L
• 1 (COM-RX)
• 2 (COM-TX)
• 3 (OSC-RX)
• 4 (OSC-TX)
• 5 (LINE-RX)
OPT-PRE
• 1 (COM-RX)
• 3 (DC-RX)
• 4 (DC-TX)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name. User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default. Double-click
the Port Name table cell, enter the name, and press
Enter.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task
on page 16-16.
20-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G205 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers
Caution Warning thresholds are not monitored by CTC. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier where you want to change the optical line threshold settings.
Admin State Sets the port administrative state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more information
about administrative states, see the Administrative and
Service States document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the
following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled (OPT-PRE
only)
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated
state that gives the overall condition of the port.
Service states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For
more information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
Power (Display only) Shows the current power level per port. —
Active
Channels
(Display only) Indicates how many channels the port is
carrying. Generally reflects the number of provisioned
channels.
—
OSC Power (Display only) Shows the OSC power level per port.
Does not apply to OPT-PRE.
—
Purpose This task changes the optical line threshold settings for an OPT-PRE,
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-8 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Amplifier Optical Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-9.
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm.
b. Click Refresh.
Table 20-9 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Optical Line Warning Threshold
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (TX or RX).
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L
• 1 (COM-RX)
• 2 (COM-TX)
• 3 (OSC-RX)
• 4 (OSC-TX)
• 5 (LINE-RX)
OPT-PRE
• 1 (COM-RX)
• 3 (DC-RX)
4 (DC-TX)
opwrMin
(dBm)
Sets the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the table cell,
enter the name, and press Enter.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Sets the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the table cell, enter the
name, and press Enter.
opwrMin OSC
(dBm)
Sets the OSC low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the table cell,
enter the name, and press Enter.
opwrMax OSC
(dBm)
Sets the OSC high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the table cell, enter the
name, and press Enter.
20-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
c. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-10.
d. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Table 20-10 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Optical Line Alarm Thresholds
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (RX or TX).
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L
• 1 (COM-RX)
• 2 (COM-TX)
• 3 (OSC-RX)
• 4 (OSC-TX)
• 5 (LINE-RX)
OPT-PRE
• 1 (COM-RX)
• 3 (DC-RX)
• 4 (DC-TX)
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the optical power failure low
threshold for the port. The threshold is
calculated automatically when you run
ANS. You can manually change the
threshold. The value must be within the
optical power range that is specified for
the card. For more information, see the
Hardware Specifications document.
For OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L
cards, this parameter applies to the
COM-RX and LINE-RX ports.
Numeric. Double-click the table cell,
enter a value and press Enter.
Power Degrade
High (dBm)
Does not apply to OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E,
OPT-BST-L, and OPT-PRE line
parameters.
—
Power Degrade
Low (dBm)
Does not apply to OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E,
OPT-BST-L, and OPT-PRE line
parameters.
—
20-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Pwr OSC
Degrade Low
(dBm)
Shows the power degrade low threshold.
This power value applies to the
corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
This threshold applies to a port associated
to a VOA (OSC-VOA) always active in
Constant Power mode.
In this case, the threshold is automatically
linked to the Power setpoint (VOA Power
Ref + VOA Power Calib) that is
provisioned. Changing the setpoint will
result in changing the threshold (always
2 dB lower).
Does not apply to OPT-PRE.
Numeric.
Pwr OSC
Degrade High
(dBm)
Shows the power degrade high threshold.
This power value applies to the
corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
This threshold applies to a port that is
associated to a VOA (OSC-VOA). In
Constant Power mode, the port is always
active and the threshold is automatically
linked to the Power setpoint (VOA Power
Ref + VOA Power Calib). To change the
threshold, change the Power setpoint. The
threshold will always be 2 dB higher than
the Power setpoint.
Does not apply to OPT-PRE.
Numeric.
Pwr OSC
Failure (dBm)
Shows the optical power low threshold
for the OSC channel of the port.
You can set the threshold manually at the
LINE-RX port.
—
Gain Degrade
Low (dB)
Does not apply to OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E,
OPT-BST-L, and OPT-PRE line
parameters.
—
Gain Degrade
High (dB)
Does not apply to OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E,
OPT-BST-L, and OPT-PRE line
parameters.
—
Table 20-10 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Optical Line Alarm Thresholds
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G206 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier where you want to change the optical amplifier line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-11. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table. In the Options column, the SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH
(ETSI) option.
Purpose This task changes the optical amplifier line settings for an OPT-PRE,
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-11 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Optical Amplifier Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number, port
type, and direction (TX or RX).
OPT-PRE
• 2 (COM-TX)
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L
• 6 (LINE-TX)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more information about service states,
see the Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
Total Output
Power
(Display only) Shows the current power level per
port.
—
20-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Channel Power
Ref.
(Display only) Shows the optical per-channel
signal power setpoint that must be reached at the
amplifier output when gain control is active.
—
Offset Adjusts the Total Output Power unless network
conditions prevent the adjustment, for example,
the port is in IS state.
Numeric. Double-click the table cell, enter a value, then
press Enter.
Active
Channels
(Display only) Indicates how many channels the
amplifier is carrying. Generally reflects the
number of provisioned channels.
OSC Power Shows the OSC power level per port.
Does not apply to OPT-PRE.
Signal Output
Power
(Display only) Shows the current output power
leaving the amplifier, including the amplified
spontaneous emissions (ASE) contribution.
—
Output Power
Set-Point
(Display only) Shows the output power setpoint. —
Working Mode (Display only) Shows the working mode, either
GAIN or POWER.
—
Gain (Display only) The current gain of the amplifiers. —
Gain Set Point The value of the gain that the amplifier must
achieve. APC can modify this value based on the
number of optical channel network connection
(OCHNC) circuits that are managed by the
amplifier or to compensate for fiber aging
insertion loss. For more information, see
Chapter 13, “Network Reference.”
Display only or numeric depending on mode setting.
When the system is configured as metro core, this field is
display only. When the system is configured as metro
access, this field can be changed by the user.
Tilt Reference (Display only) Shows the default value for the
amplifier tilt. This field can only be modified by
ANS.
—
Tilt Calibration Allows you to manually change the amplifier tilt. Numeric. Double-click the parameter, enter a value, and
press Enter.
DCU Insertion
Loss
(Display only; OPT-PRE cards only) Shows the
dispersion compensation unit (DCU) insertion
loss.
—
Table 20-11 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Optical Amplifier Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G207 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers
Caution Warning thresholds are not monitored by CTC. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier where you want to change the optical amplifier threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Opt Apli Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-12.
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Purpose This task changes the optical amplifier threshold settings for an OPT-PRE,
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-12 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Amplifier Line Warning Threshold
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (TX or RX).
OPT-PRE
• 2 (COM-TX)
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L
• 6 (LINE-TX)
opwrMin
(dBm)
Sets the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the parameter,
enter a value, and press Enter.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Sets the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
20-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Choose the alarm interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
b. Under Types, choose Alarm.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-13.
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
opwrMin OSC
(dBm)
Sets the OSC low power warning level.
Does not apply to OPT-PRE.
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the parameter,
enter a value, and press Enter.
opwrMax OSC
(dBm)
Sets the OSC high power warning level.
Does not apply to OPT-PRE.
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
Table 20-12 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Amplifier Line Warning Threshold
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Table 20-13 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Amplifier Line Alarm Thresholds
Setting
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (TX or RX).
OPT-PRE
• 2 (COM-TX)
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L
• 6 (LINE-TX)
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the optical power failure low
threshold for the port. The threshold is
calculated automatically when you run
ANS. You can manually change the
threshold. The value must be within the
optical power range that is specified for
the card. For more information, see the
Hardware Specifications document.
Numeric. Double-click the parameter,
enter a value, and press Enter.
20-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Power Degrade
High (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the current value of
the optical power degrade high threshold.
This threshold applies only when the
amplifier is active and in constant power
mode.
Power Degrade High refers to the port’s
Signal Output Power value and is
automatically calculated by the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/T
SCE when the amplifier is turned up.
The Power Degrade High threshold is
linked to the Output Power Setpoint on
the Parameters tab. Changing the setpoint
changes the Power Degrade High
threshold. The threshold value is always 2
dB higher than the Output Power Setpoint
value.
APC can modify this value based on the
number of OCHNC circuits that the
amplifier is managing. For more
information, see Chapter 13, “Network
Reference.”
—
Power Degrade
Low (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the current value of
the optical power degrade high threshold
configured in the card. This threshold
applies only when the amplifier is active
and in constant power mode.
Power Degrade Low refers to the port’s
Signal Output Power value and is
automatically calculated by the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/T
SCE when the amplifier is turned up.
The Power Degrade Low threshold is
automatically linked to the Output Power
Setpoint on the Parameters tab. Changing
the setpoint changes the Power Degrade
Low threshold. The threshold value is
always 2 dB lower than the Output Power
Setpoint.
APC can modify this value based on the
number of OCHNC circuits that the
amplifier is managing.
—
Table 20-13 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Amplifier Line Alarm Thresholds
Setting (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Gain Degrade
High (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the current value of
the gain degrade high threshold
configured in the card. This threshold
applies only when the amplifier is active
and in constant gain mode.
Gain Degrade High refers to the port’s
Gain value and is automatically
calculated by the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/T
SCE when the amplifier is turned up.
The Gain Degrade High threshold is
linked to the Gain setpoint. Changing the
setpoint changes the Gain Degrade High
threshold. The threshold value is always
2 dB higher than the Gain Setpoint value.
APC can modify this value based on the
number of OCHNC circuits that the
amplifier is managing and to compensate
for insertion loss due to fiber aging.
—
Gain Degrade
Low (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the current value of
the gain degrade low threshold
configured in the card. This threshold
applies only when the amplifier is active
and in constant gain mode.
Gain Degrade Low refers to the port’s
Gain value and is automatically
calculated by the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/T
SCE when the amplifier is turned up.
The Gain Degrade Low threshold is
automatically linked to the Gain Setpoint
that is provisioned. Changing the setpoint
changes the Gain Degrade Low threshold.
The threshold value is always 2 dB lower
than the Gain Setpoint value.
APC can also modify this value based on
the number of OCHNC circuits that the
amplifier is managing.
—
Table 20-13 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Amplifier Line Alarm Thresholds
Setting (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G322 Change the OPT-BST ALS Maintenance Settings
Note The ALS function should only be disabled temporarily for installation or maintenance reasons. Activate
ALS immediately after maintenance or installation.
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain
optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of
100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L where you want to change the ALS maintenance settings.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance > ALS Mode tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-14. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table.
Purpose This task changes the ALS maintenance settings for the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 20-14 OPT-BST ALS Maintenance Settings
Parameter Description Options
OSRI Optical safety remote interlock. When set
to On, the OPT-BST TX output power is
shut down.
From the drop-down list, choose one
of the following:
• On
• Off
ALS Mode Automatic laser shutdown. For OPT-BST
cards, ALS provides the ability to shut
down the OPT-BST TX laser when the
OPT-BST RX detects an LOS.
ALS also enables an optical safety
mechanism at the DWDM network layer.
For more information, see Appendix G,
“Automatic Laser Shutdown.”
From the drop-down list, choose one
of the following:
• Disable—Deactivates ALS. If
the OPT-BST faces a span
without an OSC connection,
choose this option.
• Auto Restart—(Default) ALS is
active. The power is
automatically shut down when
needed and automatically tries to
restart using a probe pulse until
the cause of the failure is
repaired.
• Manual Restart
• Manual Restart for Test
Recovery Pulse
Duration
(Display only) Displays the duration of
the optical power pulse that begins when
an amplifier restarts.
—
Recovery Pulse
Interval
(Display only) Displays the interval
between optical power pulses.
—
Currently
Shutdown
(Display only) Displays whether or not
the laser is currently shut down, either
YES or NO.
—
Request Laser
Restart
If checked, allows you to restart the laser. Checked or unchecked
20-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP,
15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, or OPT-EDFA-24 amplifier card settings. If you are already
logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Step 3 Set the card working mode:
Caution Do not change the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-EDFA-17, or OPT-EDFA-24
working mode if it is in service and circuits are provisioned.
a. Display the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-EDFA-17, or OPT-EDFA-24 card
view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
c. In the Card Working Mode field, choose one of the following:
• OPT-PRE—Sets the card working mode to optical preamplifier.
• OPT-LINE—Sets the card working mode to optical booster amplifier.
d. Click Apply.
Step 4 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G323 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP,
OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers, page 20-28
• DLP-G324 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C,
OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP,
OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers, page 20-30
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the
OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP,
15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24amplifier
cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
• DLP-G325 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C,
OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers,
page 20-34
• DLP-G326 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C,
OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers,
page 20-36
• DLP-G327 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings of OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP,
OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards, page 20-44
Step 5 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G323 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP,
15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, or OPT-EDFA-24 amplifier where you want to change the
optical line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-15. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table. In the Options column, the SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH
(ETSI) option.
Purpose This task changes the optical line settings for the OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and
OPT-EDFA-24 amplifier cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Table 20-15 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP,
15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifier Optical Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number, port type, and
direction (TX or RX).
• 1 (COM-RX)
• 2 (COM-TX)
• 3 (OSC-RX)
• 4 (OSC-TX)
• 5 (LINE-RX)
• 6 (LINE-TX), OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE only
• 7 (DC-RX), OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE only.
7 (DFB-RX) for 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP only.
• 8 (DC-TX), OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C
only.
8 (DFB-TX) for 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP only.
• 9 (RAMAN-RX), OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE only.
9(ASE-RX) for 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP only.
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name. User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default. Double-click,
enter the name, and press Enter.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task
on page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port administrative state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more information
about administrative states, see the Administrative and
Service States document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the
following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
(OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and
15454-M-RAMAN-COP only)
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated
state that gives the overall condition of the port.
Service states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For
more information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
Power (Display only) Shows the current power level per port. —
20-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G324 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers
Caution Warning thresholds are not monitored by CTC. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP,
15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, or OPT-EDFA-24 amplifier where you want to change the
optical line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
Active Channel (Display only) Indicates how many channels the
amplifier is carrying. Generally reflects the number of
provisioned channels.
—
OSC Power Shows the OSC power level per port.
Does not apply to OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and
15454-M-RAMAN-COP.
—
Purpose This task changes the optical line threshold settings for OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and
OPT-EDFA-24 amplifier cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-15 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP,
15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifier Optical Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-16.
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Table 20-16 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card
Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (TX or RX):
• 1 (COM-RX)
• 2 (COM-TX)
• 3 (OSC-RX)
• 4 (OSC-TX)
4
(LINE-RX)—15454-M-RAMAN-C
TP card only
• 5 (LINE-RX)
5
(LINE-TX)—15454-M-RAMAN-C
TP card only
• 6 (LINE-TX), OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE only
• 7 (DC-RX), OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and
OPT-RAMP-CE only
7
(DFB-RX)—15454-M-RAMAN-CT
P card only
• 8 (DC-TX), OPT-AMP-L and
OPT-AMP-C only
7
(DFB-RX)—15454-M-RAMAN-CT
P card only
• 9 (RAMAN-RX), OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE only
9(ASE-RX)—15454-M-RAMAN-C
TP card only
opwrMin
(dBm)
Sets the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the table cell,
enter the name, and press Enter.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Sets the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the table cell, enter the
name, and press Enter.
20-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm.
b. Click Refresh.
c. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-17.
d. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
opwrMin OSC
(dBm)
Sets the OSC low power warning level.
Does not apply to OPT-RAMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and
15454-M-RAMAN-COP.
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the table cell,
enter the name, and press Enter.
opwrMax OSC
(dBm)
Sets the OSC high power warning level.
Does not apply to OPT-RAMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and
15454-M-RAMAN-COP.
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the table cell, enter the
name, and press Enter.
Table 20-16 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card
Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
20-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Table 20-17 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card
Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Setting
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 1 (COM-RX)
• 2 (COM-TX)
• 3 (OSC-RX)
• 4 (OSC-TX)
4
(LINE-RX)—15454-M-RAMAN-C
TP card only
• 5 (LINE-RX)
5
(LINE-TX)—15454-M-RAMAN-C
TP card only
• 6 (LINE-TX), OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE only
• 7 (DC-RX), OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and
OPT-RAMP-CE only
7
(DFB-RX)—15454-M-RAMAN-CT
P card only
• 8 (DC-TX), OPT-AMP-L and
OPT-AMP-C only
8
(DFB-TX)—15454-M-RAMAN-CT
P card only
• 9 (RAMAN-RX), OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE only
9(ASE-RX)—15454-M-RAMAN-C
TP card only
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the optical power failure low
threshold for the port. The threshold is
calculated automatically when you run
ANS. You can manually change the
threshold. The value must be within the
optical power range that is specified for
the card. For more information, see the
Hardware Specifications document.
You can manually set the threshold at the
COM-RX and LINE-RX ports.
Numeric.
Pwr OSC
Failure (dBm)
Shows the optical power failure low
threshold for the OSC channel of the port.
You can manually set the threshold at the
LINE-RX port.
Numeric.
20-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G325 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17, or OPT-EDFA-24
amplifier where you want to change the optical amplifier line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-18. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table. In the Options column, the SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH
(ETSI) option.
Purpose This task changes the optical amplifier line settings for OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 amplifier cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-18 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Optical Amplifier Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number, port
type, and direction.
6 (LINE-TX)
8 (DC-TX), OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE only
Port Name Assigns a name to the specified port. User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port administrative state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
20-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more information about service states,
see the Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
Total Output
Power
(Display only) Shows the current power level per
port.
—
Channel Power
Ref.
(Display only) Shows the optical per-channel
signal power setpoint that must be reached at the
amplifier output when gain control is active.
—
Offset Adjusts the Total Output Power unless network
conditions prevent the adjustment, for example,
the port is in IS state.
Numeric. Double-click to change.
Signal Output
Power
(Display only) Shows the current output power
leaving the amplifier, including the ASE
contribution.
—
Output Power
Set-Point
(Display only) Shows the output power setpoint.
Does not apply to OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, or
OPT-AMP-17-C.
—
Working Mode (Display only) Shows the working mode, either
Output Power or Control Gain for the
OPT-AMP-L or OPT-AMP-C; Control Power for
the OPT-AMP-17-C; or Control Gain for the
OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE.
—
Gain (Display only) The current gain of the amplifiers. —
Gain Set Point The value of the gain that the amplifier must
achieve. APC can modify this value based on the
number of OCHNC circuits that are managed by
the amplifier or to compensate for fiber aging
insertion loss. For more information, see
Chapter 13, “Network Reference.”
Display only or numeric depending on mode setting.
When the system is configured as metro core, this
field is display only.
Tilt (OPT-AMP-L
and OPT-AMP-C)
(Display only) Shows the default value for the
amplifier tilt. This field cannot be modified.
—
Tilt Reference
(OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-EDFA-17
and
OPT-EDFA-24)
(Display only) Shows the default value for the
amplifier tilt. This field can only be modified by
ANS.
—
Table 20-18 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Optical Amplifier Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
20-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G326 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers
Caution Warning thresholds are not monitored by CTC. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Tilt Calibration
(OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-EDFA-17
and
OPT-EDFA-24)
Allows you to manually change the amplifier tilt. Numeric. Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
DCU Insertion
Loss
(OPT-AMP-L and
OPT-AMP-C)
(Display only) When provisioned as an OPT-PRE
only) Shows the DCU insertion loss.
—
Active Channels (Display only) Indicates how many channels the
amplifier is carrying. Generally reflects the
number of provisioned channels.
—
VOA Attenuation
Ref
(Display only) Indicates the value for the VOA
attenuation setpoint. This field can only be
modified by ANS.
—
VOA Attenuation
Calib
Allows you to manually change the VOA
setpoint.
Numeric. Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
Purpose This task changes the optical channel threshold settings for the
OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 amplifier cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-18 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Optical Amplifier Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
20-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17, or OPT-EDFA-24
amplifier where you want to change the optical amplifier threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Opt Ampli Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-19.
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm.
b. Click Refresh.
c. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-20.
d. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Table 20-19 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17,
and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Amplifier Line Warning Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction.
6 (LINE-TX)
8 (DC-TX), OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE only
opwrMin
(dBm)
Sets the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the parameter,
enter a value, and press Enter.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Sets the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
opwrMin OSC
(dBm)
Sets the OSC low power warning level.
Does not apply to OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE.
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the table cell,
enter the name, and press Enter.
opwrMax OSC
(dBm)
Sets the OSC high power warning level.
Does not apply to OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE.
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the table cell, enter the
name, and press Enter.
20-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Table 20-20 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17,
and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Amplifier Line Alarm Thresholds Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction.
6 (LINE-TX)
8 (DC-TX), OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE only
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the optical power failure low
threshold for the port. The threshold is
calculated automatically when you run
ANS. You can manually change the
threshold. The value must be within the
optical power range that is specified for
the card. For more information, see the
Hardware Specifications document.
Numeric. Double-click to change.
Power Degrade
High (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the current value of
the optical power degrade high threshold.
This threshold applies only when the
amplifier is active and in constant power
mode.
Power Degrade High refers to the port’s
Signal Output Power value and is
automatically calculated by the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/T
SCE when the amplifier is turned up.
The Power Degrade High threshold is
linked to the Output Power Setpoint on
the Parameters tab. Changing the setpoint
changes the Power Degrade High
threshold. The threshold value is always
2 dB higher than the Output Power
Setpoint value.
APC can modify this value based on the
number of OCHNC circuits that the
amplifier is managing. For more
information, see Chapter 13, “Network
Reference.”
—
20-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Power Degrade
Low (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the current value of
the optical power degrade high threshold
configured in the card. This threshold
applies only when the amplifier is active
and in constant power mode.
Power Degrade Low refers to the port’s
Signal Output Power value and is
automatically calculated by the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/T
SCE when the amplifier is turned up.
The Power Degrade Low threshold is
automatically linked to the Output Power
Setpoint on the Parameters tab. Changing
the setpoint changes the Power Degrade
Low threshold. The threshold value is
always 2 dB lower than the Output Power
Setpoint.
APC can modify this value based on the
number of OCHNC circuits that the
amplifier is managing.
—
Table 20-20 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17,
and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Amplifier Line Alarm Thresholds Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Gain Degrade
High (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the current value of
the gain degrade high threshold
configured in the card. This threshold
applies only when the amplifier is active
and in constant gain mode.
Gain Degrade High refers to the port’s
Gain value and is automatically
calculated by the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/T
SCE when the amplifier is turned up.
The Gain Degrade High threshold is
linked to the Gain setpoint. Changing the
setpoint changes the Gain Degrade High
threshold. The threshold value is always
2 dB higher than the Gain Setpoint value.
APC can modify this value based on the
number of OCHNC circuits that the
amplifier is managing and to compensate
for insertion loss due to fiber aging.
—
Gain Degrade
Low (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the current value of
the gain degrade low threshold
configured in the card. This threshold
applies only when the amplifier is active
and in constant gain mode.
Gain Degrade Low refers to the port’s
Gain value and is automatically
calculated by the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/T
SCE when the amplifier is turned up.
The Gain Degrade Low threshold is
automatically linked to the Gain Setpoint
that is provisioned. Changing the setpoint
changes the Gain Degrade Low threshold.
The threshold value is always 2 dB lower
than the Gain Setpoint value.
APC can also modify this value based on
the number of OCHNC circuits that the
amplifier is managing.
—
Table 20-20 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17,
and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Amplifier Line Alarm Thresholds Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G538 Change Optical Raman Line Settings for OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP Amplifiers
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-RAMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, or 15454-M-RAMAN-COP amplifier where you want to
change the optical Raman line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Opt. Raman. Line > Parameters tab.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-21. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table. In the Options column, the SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH
(ETSI) option.
Purpose This task changes the optical Raman line settings for OPT-RAMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP
amplifier cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-21 OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP Optical Raman Line
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number, port
type, and direction.
3 (RAMAN-RX) for 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP and
15454-M-RAMAN-COP cards only
6 (RAMAN-TX) for 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP and
15454-M-RAMAN-COP cards only
10 RAMAN-TX
Port Name Assigns a name to the specified port. User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. This field is blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port administrative state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more information about service states,
see the Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
20-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G539 Change Optical Raman Line Threshold Settings for OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP Amplifiers
Caution Warning thresholds are not monitored by CTC. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-RAMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, or 15454-M-RAMAN-COP amplifier where you want to
change the optical Raman threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Opt. Raman. Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
Power (Display only) Indicates the current Raman
power.
—
Active Channels (Display only) Indicates how many channels the
amplifier is carrying. Generally reflects the
number of provisioned channels. This field can be
modified by ANS or the Raman wizard.
—
Ratio (Display only) Indicates the ratio of the Raman
power setpoint distributed between the two
Raman pumps.
—
Power Setpoint (Display only) Indicates the Raman power
setpoint as the sum of Pump1 and Pump 2 set
points. This field is modified by ANS or the
Raman wizard.
—
Purpose This task changes the optical channel threshold settings for the
OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and
15454-M-RAMAN-COP amplifier cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-21 OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP Optical Raman Line
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-22.
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm.
b. Click Refresh.
c. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-20.
d. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Table 20-22 OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP Card
Raman Line Warning Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction.
3 (RAMAN-RX) for
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP and
15454-M-RAMAN-COP cards only
6 (RAMAN-TX) for
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP and
15454-M-RAMAN-COP cards only
10 RAMAN-TX
opwrMin
(dBm)
Sets the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the parameter,
enter a value, and press Enter.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Sets the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
20-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G327 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings of OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards
Note To perform this task, the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-EDFA-17, or
OPT-EDFA-24 card must be in OPT-LINE mode.
Table 20-23 OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP Card
Raman Line Alarm Thresholds Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction.
3 (RAMAN-RX) for
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP and
15454-M-RAMAN-COP cards only
6 (RAMAN-TX) for
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP and
15454-M-RAMAN-COP cards only
10 RAMAN-TX
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the optical power failure low
threshold for the port. The threshold is
calculated automatically when you run
ANS. You can manually change the
threshold. The value must be within the
optical power range that is specified for
the card. For more information, see the
Hardware Specifications document.
Numeric. Double-click to change.
Purpose This task changes the ALS maintenance settings for the OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and
OPT-EDFA-24 amplifier cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Note The ALS function should only be disabled temporarily for installation or maintenance reasons. Activate
ALS immediately after maintenance or installation.
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain
optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of
100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP,
15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, or OPT-EDFA-24 card where you want to change the ALS
maintenance settings.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-24. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table.
Table 20-24 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 ALS
Maintenance Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction.
10 (RAMAN-RX), OPT-RAMP-C
and OPT-RAMP-CE only
8 (DC-TX), OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE only
6 (RAMAN-TX),
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP and
15454-M-RAMAN-COP only
8 (DFB-TX),
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP only
OSRI Optical safety remote interlock. When set
to On, the OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, or
15454-M-RAMAN-COP TX output
power is shut down.
From the drop-down list, choose one
of the following:
• On
• Off
20-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
ALS Mode Sets the Automatic laser shutdown mode.
For OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C,
OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and
15454-M-RAMAN-COP cards, ALS
provides the ability to shut down the TX
laser when the card RX detects an LOS.
ALS also enables an optical safety
mechanism at the DWDM network layer.
For more information, see Chapter 13,
“Network Reference.”
From the drop-down list, choose one
of the following:
• Disable—Deactivates ALS. If
the OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, or
OPT-AMP-C, faces a span
without an OSC connection,
choose this option.
• Auto Restart—(Default)
Activates ALS. The power is
automatically shut down when
needed and automatically tries to
restart using a probe pulse until
the cause of the failure is
repaired.
• Manual Restart
• Manual Restart for Test
Recovery Pulse
Duration
(Display only) Displays the duration of
the optical power pulse that begins when
an amplifier restarts.
—
Recovery Pulse
Interval
(Display only) Displays the interval
between optical power pulses.
—
Currently
Shutdown
(Display only) Displays the current status
of the laser.
—
Request Laser
Restart
If checked, allows you to restart the laser
for maintenance.
Checked or unchecked
OSC Based Startup If checked, allows the Raman pump to be
turned on even though OSC is the only
detected power and there is no Raman
signal.
Checked or unchecked.
Table 20-24 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE,
15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 ALS
Maintenance Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
NTP-G202 Modify PSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the card settings. If you are
already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G514 Change the PSM Card Mode, page 20-47
• DLP-G476 Change Optical Line Settings for the PSM Card, page 20-48
• DLP-G477 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for the PSM Card, page 20-49
• DLP-G478 Change the PSM ALS Maintenance Settings, page 20-52
Step 4 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G514 Change the PSM Card Mode
Note You cannot change the PSM card mode if any of the PSM ports is in use in the normal configuration,
that is, at least one patchcord is provisioned on the PSM ports.
Step 1 In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the PSM card where
you want to change the card mode.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tab.
Step 3 From the Mode drop-down list, choose one of the following:
• Normal—Sets the PSM card in normal configuration. In this configuration, the PSM card supports
channel protection, line protection, and multiplex section protection configurations.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the PSM card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task changes the PSM card mode.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
• Standalone—Sets the PSM card in standalone configuration. In this configuration, the PSM card can
be equipped in any slot and supports all node configurations. When you select this option, CTC will:
– Not support creation of patchcords
– Set all VOA set points to 0dB attenuation
– Move the administrative state of all ports to IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
Note In the standalone configuration, you cannot change the administrative state of the PSM ports.
However, you can enable optical safety in standalone configuration.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G476 Change Optical Line Settings for the PSM Card
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the PSM card where you
want to change the optical line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-25 on page 20-48. The provisionable parameters are
listed in the Options column.
Purpose This task changes the optical line settings for the PSM card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-25 PSM Card Optical Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number, port type, and
direction (TX or RX).
• 1 (W-RX)
• 2 (W-TX)
• 3 (P-RX)
• 4 (P-TX)
• 5 (COM-RX)
• 6 (COM-TX)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name. User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default. Double-click,
enter the name, and press Enter.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task
on page 16-16.
20-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G477 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for the PSM Card
Admin State Sets the port administrative state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more information
about administrative states, see the Administrative and
Service States document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the
following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated
state that gives the overall condition of the port.
Service states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For
more information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
Power (Display only) Shows the current power level per port. —
VOA Mode (Display only) Shows the functional mode of the VOA,
when present.
Note For W-RX and P-RX ports, the VOA Mode is
always set to Constant Attenuation.
• Constant Attenuation
• Constant Power
VOA
Attenuation
Ref
(Display only) Shows the VOA attenuation value when
VOA Mode is set to Constant Attenuation. This
parameter can only be modified by ANS.
—
VOA
Attenuation
Calib
Modifies the attenuation value of the VOA when the
VOA Mode is set to Constant Attenuation.
Numeric. Double-click the parameter, enter a
value, and press Enter.
Active
Channels
(Display only) Indicates how many channels the PSM
card is carrying. Generally reflects the number of
provisioned channels.
—
Purpose This task changes the optical line threshold settings for the PSM card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-25 PSM Card Optical Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Caution It is recommended that you use the optical line threshold values imported from the Cisco Transport
Planner XML configuration file. If you want to modify the threshold values, consult your network
operations center (NOC) or other appropriate personnel who can understand and set the correct threshold
values.
Caution Warning thresholds are not monitored by CTC. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the PSM card where you
want to change the optical line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-26.
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm.
b. Click Refresh.
c. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-27.
Table 20-26 PSM Card Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (TX or RX)
• 1 (W-RX)
• 2 (W-TX)
• 3 (P-RX)
• 4 (P-TX)
• 5 (COM-RX)
• 6 (COM-TX)
opwrMin
(dBm)
Sets the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the table cell,
enter the value, and press Enter.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Sets the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the table cell, enter the
value, and press Enter.
20-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
d. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Table 20-27 PSM Card Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Setting
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (TX or RX)
• 1 (W-RX)
• 2 (W-TX)
• 3 (P-RX)
• 4 (P-TX)
• 5 (COM-RX)
• 6 (COM-TX)
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the optical power failure low
threshold for the port. You can manually
change the threshold. The value must be
within the optical power range that is
specified for the card. For more
information, see the Hardware
Specifications document.
Numeric. Double-click the table cell,
enter a value, then press Enter.
VOA Degrade
High (dB)
(Display only) Shows the VOA degrade
high threshold. This VOA value applies to
the corresponding port and is
automatically calculated when ANS is
run.
This threshold applies to a port associated
to a VOA that is always active in Constant
Attenuation mode.
The threshold is automatically linked to
the VOA setpoint that is provisioned
(VOA Attenuation Ref + VOA
Attenuation Calib). Changing the setpoint
will result in changing the threshold
(always 2 dB higher).
Numeric.
VOA Degrade
Low (dB)
(Display only) Shows the VOA degrade
low threshold. This VOA value applies to
the corresponding port and is
automatically calculated when ANS is
run.
This threshold applies to a port associated
to a VOA that is always active in Constant
Attenuation mode.
The threshold is automatically linked to
the VOA setpoint that is provisioned
(VOA Attenuation Ref + VOA
Attenuation Calib). Changing the setpoint
will result in changing the threshold
(always 2 dB lower).
Numeric.
20-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G478 Change the PSM ALS Maintenance Settings
Note The ALS function is applicable for a PSM card in line (or path) protection configuration only. It is not
applicable for all other PSM protection configurations.
Note The ALS function should only be disabled temporarily for installation or maintenance reasons. Activate
ALS immediately after maintenance or installation.
Warning Invisible laser radiation could be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.
Do not stare into the beam directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain
optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of
100 mm could pose an eye hazard. Statement 1056
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the PSM card where you
want to change the ALS maintenance settings.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-28. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table.
Purpose This task changes the ALS maintenance settings for the PSM card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 20-28 PSM ALS Maintenance Settings
Parameter Description Options
OSRI Optical safety remote interlock. When set
to On, only the PSM TX output power of
the protect path is shut down.
From the drop-down list, choose one
of the following:
• On
• Off
ALS Mode Automatic laser shutdown. ALS provides
the ability to shut down the PSM TX VOA
when the PSM RX detects an LOS.
ALS also enables an optical safety
mechanism at the DWDM network layer.
For more information, see Chapter G,
“Automatic Laser Shutdown.”
From the drop-down list, choose one
of the following:
• Disable—Deactivates ALS.
• Auto Restart—(Default) ALS is
active. The power is
automatically shut down when
needed and automatically tries to
restart using a probe pulse until
the cause of the failure is
repaired.
• Manual Restart
• Manual Restart for Test
Recovery Pulse
Duration
(Display only) Displays the duration of
the optical power pulse that begins when
the VOA restarts.
—
Recovery Pulse
Interval
(Display only) Displays the interval
between optical power pulses.
—
Currently
Shutdown
(Display only) Displays whether or not
the VOA is currently shut down.
• YES
• NO
• APR—This is a temporary
option that is displayed when the
Currently Shutdown status is
changing from YES to NO.
Request Laser
Restart
If checked, allows you to restart the VOA. Checked or unchecked
20-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds
Note Complete the DLP-G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O,
32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards to view the optical power statistics.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the card settings. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 as needed.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards, page 20-55
• DLP-G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards, page 20-57
• DLP-G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards, page 20-59
• DLP-G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards, page 20-62
Step 4 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and PM parameter threshold settings for
the multiplexer and demultiplexer cards. The cards included in this
category are the 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C,
40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the multiplexer or
demultiplexer card where you want to change the optical line settings.
Step 2 Perform one of the following:
• For 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE cards,
click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
• For 4MD-xx.x cards, click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-29. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table. In the Options column, the SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH
(ETSI) option.
Purpose This task changes the optical line settings for a 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O,
32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x
card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-29 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number, port type,
and direction (TX or RX).
32DMX, 32DMX-O, 32DMX-L
• 33 (COM-RX)
32MUX-O
• 33 (COM-TX)
40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE
• 41 (COM-RX)
40-MUX-C
• 41 (COM-TX)
4MD-xx.x
9 (COM-RX) and 10 (COM-TX)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default. Double-click the
table cell, enter the name, and press Enter.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
20-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Admin State Sets the port administrative state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more information about service states,
see the Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
Power (Display only) Shows the current power level per
port.
—
AINS Soak (Display only) The automatic in-service soak
period. It is always 00.00.
—
VOA Mode (Display only; 32DMX and 32DMX-L cards only)
Shows the functional mode of the VOA, when
present.
• Constant Attenuation
• Constant Power
VOA Power
Ref
(Display only; 32DMX and 32DMX-L cards only)
Shows the optical power setpoint that must be
reached when a VOA is present and VOA Mode is
set to Constant Power. This parameter can only be
modified by ANS.
—
VOA Power
Calib
(32DMX and 32DMX-L cards only) Modifies the
optical power value of the VOA when VOA Mode
is set to Constant Power.
Numeric. Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
VOA
ATTenuation
Ref
(Display only; 32DMX and 32DMX-L cards only)
Shows the VOA attenuation value when VOA Mode
is set to Constant Attenuation. This parameter can
only be modified by ANS.
—
VOA
Attenuation
Calib
(32DMX and 32DMX-L cards only) Modifies the
attenuation value of the VOA when the VOA Mode
is set to Constant Attenuation.
Numeric. Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
Active
Channels
(Display only) Indicates how many channels the
amplifier is carrying. Generally reflects the number
of provisioned channels.
—
Table 20-29 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the multiplexer or
demultiplexer card where you want to change the optical line threshold settings.
Step 2 Perform one of the following:
• For 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 40-MUX-C cards,
click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
• For 4MD-xx.x cards, click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-30.
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Purpose This task changes the optical line threshold settings for a 32MUX-O,
32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 40-MUX-C,
or 4MD-xx.x card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-30 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and description.
• 33 (COM-RX) for 32DMX,
32DMX-O, 32DMX-L
• 33 (COM-TX) for 32MUX-O
• 41 (COM-RX) for
40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE
• 41 (COM-TX) for 40-MUX-C
• 9 (COM-RX) and 10 (COM-TX) for
4MD-xx.x
20-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Caution Warning thresholds are not monitored by CTC. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm.
b. Click Refresh.
c. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-31.
d. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
opwrMin
(dBm)
Sets the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the parameter,
enter a value, and press Enter.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Sets the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
Table 20-30 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings
(continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 20-31 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Optical Line Alarm Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (TX or RX).
32DMX, 32DMX-O, 32DMX-L
• 33 (COM-RX)
32MUX-O
• 33 (COM-TX)
40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE
• 41 (COM-RX)
40-MUX-C
• 41 (COM-TX)
4MD-xx.x
• 9 (COM-RX) and 10 (COM-TX)
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the optical power failure low
threshold for the port. The threshold is
calculated automatically when you run
ANS. You can manually change the
threshold. The value must be within the
optical power range that is specified for the
card. For more information, see the
Hardware Specifications document.
Numeric. Double-click the parameter,
enter a value, and press Enter.
20-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the multiplexer or
demultiplexer card where you want to change the optical channel settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-32. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table. In the Options column, the SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH
(ETSI) option.
Power Degrade
High (dBm)
Not applicable to 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O,
32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, 40-MUX-C, and 4MD-xx.x
cards.
—
Power Degrade
Low (dBm)
Not applicable to 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O,
32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, 40-MUX-C, and 4MD-xx.x
cards.
—
Purpose This task changes the optical channel settings for a 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O,
32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 40-MUX-C, or 4MD-xx.x
card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-31 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Optical Line Alarm Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Table 20-32 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Channel Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number, port type,
and direction (TX or RX).
32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L
• 1 through 32 (CHAN-RX or CHAN-TX)
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE
• 1 through 40 (CHAN-RX or CHAN-TX)
4MD-xx.x
• 1 through 8 (CHAN-RX or CHAN-TX)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default. Double-click,
enter the name, and press Enter.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port administrative state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more information about service states,
see the Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
Power (Display only) Shows the current power level per
port.
—
Actual
Wavelength
(Display only) Shows the wavelength specified by
the manufacturing data. This field cannot be set
manually.
—
Expected
Wavelength
Shows the preprovisioned wavelength. Numeric. This field cannot be changed.
AINS Soak (Display only) The automatic in-service soak
period. It is always 00.00.
—
VOA Mode Not applicable to the 32MUX-O, 32DMX-0,
4MD-xx.x cards. Shows the current functional
mode of the VOA.
• Constant Power
• Constant Attenuation
20-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
VOA Power
Ref.
Not applicable to the 32MUX-O, 32DMX-0,
4MD-xx.x cards. Shows the power setpoint that
must be reached on the path when a VOA is present
and the VOA Mode is Constant Power.
Demultiplexers show the reference value of the
desired optical power going to the client.
Multiplexers show the reference value of the
desired per-channel optical power. This parameter
can only be modified by ANS.
—
VOA Power
Calib.
Not applicable to the 32MUX-O, 32DMX-0,
4MD-xx.x cards. The user can modify the optical
output power to the VOA if necessary. The VOA
power calibration offsets the VOA power reference.
For demultplexers, you can modify the optical
output power to the client if necessary. For
multiplexers, you can modify the output power per
channel.
This feature is normally used when the Network
Type is configured as Access in the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS tab.
Numeric. Double-click the parameter, enter a value
and press Enter.
VOA
Attenuation
Ref.
Not applicable to the 32MUX-O, 32DMX-0,
4MD-xx.x cards. Shows the attenuation value of the
VOA when the VOA is set in attenuation mode.
This parameter can only be modified by ANS and
APC.
—
VOA
Attenuation
Calib.
Not applicable to the 32MUX-O, 32DMX-0, and
4MD-xx.x cards. Allows the user to modify the
attenuation value of the VOA if necessary when the
VOA mode is set for constant attenuation.
Numeric. Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
Table 20-32 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Channel Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards
Caution Warning thresholds are not monitored by CTC. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the multiplexer or
demultiplexer card where you want to change the optical channel threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-33.
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Purpose This task changes the optical channel threshold settings for a 32MUX-O,
32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 40-MUX-C,
or 4MD-xx.x card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm.
b. Click Refresh.
c. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-34.
d. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Table 20-33 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Channel Warning Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (TX or RX).
32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L
• 1 through 32 (CHAN-RX or
CHAN-TX)
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE
• 1 through 40 (CHAN-RX or
CHAN-TX)
4MD-xx.x
• 1 through 8 (CHAN-RX or
CHAN-TX)
opwrMin (dBm) Set the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the
parameter, enter a value, and press
Enter.
opwrMax (dBm) Set the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
30 dBm. Double-click the parameter,
enter a value, and press Enter.
20-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Table 20-34 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Channel Alarm Threshold
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number, port
type, and direction (TX or RX).
32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L
• 1 through 32 (CHAN-RX or
CHAN-TX)
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE
• 1 through 40 (CHAN-RX or
CHAN-TX)
4MD-xx.x
• 1 through 8 (CHAN-RX or
CHAN-TX)
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the power failure low threshold. This
power value applies to the corresponding port
and is automatically calculated when ANS is
run.
This threshold applies to a port associated to a
VOA (OSC-VOA) that is always active in
Constant Power mode.
The threshold is automatically linked to the
Power Setpoint (VOA Power Ref + VOA
Power Calib) that is provisioned. Changing
the setpoint results in changing the threshold
(always 5 dB lower).
The 32DMX and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX/CE are
exceptions. 32DMX and
40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE Power Failure Low
thresholds apply to ports that are not
associated to a VOA. The threshold is
calculated automatically when you run ANS.
You can manually change the threshold. The
value must be within the optical power range
that is specified for the card. For more
information, see the Hardware Specifications
document.
Numeric. Double-click the
parameter, enter a value, and press
Enter.
20-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM Thresholds Power Degrade
High (dBm)
(32MUX-O, 32DMX-0, and 4MD-xx.x cards
only) Shows the power degrade high
threshold. This power value applies to the
corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
This threshold applies to a port associated to a
VOA (OSC-VOA) that is always active in
Constant Power mode.
The threshold is automatically linked to the
Power Setpoint (VOA Power Ref + VOA
Power Calib) that is provisioned. Changing
the setpoint will result in changing the
threshold (always 3 dB higher).
—
Power Degrade
Low (dBm)
(32MUX-O, 32DMX-0, and 4MD-xx.x cards
only) Shows the power degrade low threshold.
This power value applies to the corresponding
port and is automatically calculated when
ANS is run.
This threshold applies to a port associated to a
VOA (OSC-VOA) that is always active in
Constant Power mode.
The threshold is automatically linked to the
Power Setpoint (VOA Power Ref + VOA
Power Calib) that is provisioned. Changing
the setpoint will result in changing the
threshold (always 2 dB lower).
—
Purpose This procedure changes the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or
40-WSS-CE card thresholds and settings.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-34 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Channel Alarm Threshold
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC procedure at the node where you want to change the 32WSS,
32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G212 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel
Parameters, page 20-66
• DLP-G213 Change the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel
Thresholds, page 20-69
Note To use the alarm profile tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management.
• DLP-G214 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line Parameters,
page 20-73
• DLP-G215 Change the 32WSS, 32-WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line
Thresholds, page 20-74
Step 4 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G212 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel Parameters
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 32WSS, 32WSS-L,
40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE card where you want to change the optical channel parameter settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn: Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = one of the
four available groups of eight optical channels.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-35. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table. In the Options column, the SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH
(ETSI) option.
Purpose This task changes the optical channel parameter settings for the 32WSS,
32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Table 20-35 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Optical Channel Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Shows the port number.
Each optical channel (wavelength) has
two logical ports. However, only one is
active at a time depending on the
operating mode provisioned for the
port on the card view Maintenance tab:
either CHAN-RX or
PASS-THROUGH.
For the 32WSS or 32WSS-L, ports 1
through 32 (CHAN-RX) are assigned
to optical channels configured as add
channels.
For the 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE,
CHAN-RX ports are 1 through 40.
32WSS or 32WSS-L ports 33 through
64 (PASS-THROUGH) are assigned to
optical channels configured as
pass-through channels.
40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE ports 41
through 80 are PASS-THROUGH
channels.
—
Port Name Allows a logical name to be assigned
for each of the port.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by
default. Double-click, enter the name, and
press Enter.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port”
task on page 16-16.
Admin
State
Sets the port administrative state unless
network conditions prevent the change.
For more information about
administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the
following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
Service
State
(Display only) Identifies the
autonomously generated state that
gives the overall condition of the port.
Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information
about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,automati
cInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
20-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Power (Display only) Power value read by the
photodiode located after the VOA
associated to the port, and calibrated to
the COM_TX port. For more
information, see the Hardware
Specifications document.
Numeric value (dB)
Actual
Wavelength
(Display only) Displays the actual
wavelength utilized by the channel.
—
Expected
Wavelength
(Display only) Displays the expected
wavelength assigned for the channel.
—
AINS Soak (Display only) The automatic
in-service soak period. It is always
00.00.
—
VOA Mode (Display only) Displays the active
VOA working mode.
• Constant Power
• Constant Attenuation
VOA Power
Reference
(Display only) Shows the value of the
optical power setpoint that must be
reached on the path where a VOA is
present, when VOA Mode is set to
Constant Power. This value is the
desired per-channel optical power. This
parameter can only be modified by
ANS.
Numeric value (dB)
VOA Power
Calibration
Allows you to modify the VOA power
value when VOA Mode is Constant
Power.
Double-click the parameter, enter a value, and
press Enter.
• Numeric value (dB)
• –37 dB to –2 dB
VOA
Attenuation
Reference
(Display only) Shows the attenuation
value of the VOA when the VOA Mode
is Constant Attenuation. This
parameter can only be modified by
ANS.
Numeric value (dB)
VOA
Attenuation
Calibration
Allows you to modify the VOA
attenuation value when VOA Mode is
Constant Attenuation.
Double-click the parameter, enter a value, and
press Enter.
• Numeric value (dB)
• –30 dB to +30 dB
Table 20-35 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Optical Channel Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
20-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G213 Change the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel Thresholds
Caution Warning thresholds are not monitored by CTC. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 32WSS, 32WSS-L,
40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE card where you want to change the optical channel threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn: Optical Connectorn > Optics Thresholds tabs, where n = one
of the four available groups of eight optical channels.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-36.
Power ADD (Display only) Displays a measurement
of the optical power coming in on the
ADD RX port, reported in the
CHAN-RX port column. This is the
power transmitted by the TX laser of
the TXP or MXP card that is connected
to the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C,
or 40-WSS-CE.
Numeric value (dB)
Path Value (Display only) Displays the path value
for the CHAN-RX port column
parameter.
Standby
Purpose This task changes the optical channel threshold settings for the 32WSS,
32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-35 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Optical Channel Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
20-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm.
b. Click Refresh.
c. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-37.
Table 20-36 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Channel Warning Threshold
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Shows the port number,
port type, and direction (RX or TX). Each
optical channel (wavelength) has two
logical ports. However, only one is active
at a time depending on the operating
mode provisioned for the port on the card
view Maintenance tab: either CHAN-RX
or PASS-THROUGH.
—
opwrMin
(dBm)
Set the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. Double-click the
parameter, enter a value, and press Enter.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Set the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. Double-click the
parameter, enter a value, and press Enter.
20-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Table 20-37 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Channel Alarm Threshold
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (RX or TX). For
each optical channel (wavelength), two
logical ports are associated. Only one port
can be active at a time, depending on the
port’s operating mode. The operating
mode, provisioned on the card view
Maintenance tab, is either CHAN RX or
PASS-THROUGH.
32WSS and 32WSS-L ports 1 through 32
(CHAN-RX) are associated to optical
channels configured as add/drop channels.
40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE ports 1 through
40 are the CHAN-RX channels.
32WSS or 32WSS-L ports 33 through 64
(PASS-THROUGH) are associated to
optical channels configured as
pass-through channels.
For the 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE, ports
41 through 80 are the PASS-THROUGH
channels.
—
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the power failure low
threshold. This power value applies to the
corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
This threshold applies to a port associated
to a VOA (OSC-VOA) that is always active
in Constant Power mode.
The threshold is automatically linked to the
Power Setpoint (VOA Power Ref + VOA
Power Calib) that is provisioned. Changing
the setpoint results in changing the
threshold (always 5 dB lower).
The threshold is calculated automatically
when you run ANS. For more information,
see the Hardware Specifications document.
—
20-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
d. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Power Degrade
High (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the power degrade
high threshold. This power value applies to
the corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
This threshold applies to a port associated
to a VOA (OSC-VOA) that is always active
in Constant Power mode.
The threshold is automatically linked to the
Power Setpoint (VOA Power Ref + VOA
Power Calib) that is provisioned. Changing
the setpoint results in changing the
threshold (always 3 dB higher).
—
Power Degrade
Low (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the power degrade
low threshold. This power value applies to
the corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
This threshold applies to a port associated
to a VOA (OSC-VOA) that is always active
in Constant Power mode.
The threshold is automatically linked to the
Power Setpoint (VOA Power Ref + VOA
Power Calib) that is provisioned. Changing
the setpoint results in changing the
threshold (always 2 dB lower).
Numeric
Power ADD
Failure Low
(dBm)
Shows the power add failure low threshold.
This power value applies to the
corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
This threshold applies to the actual
measurement of the optical power on the
ADD RX port. It is reported as CHAN RX,
that is, the power transmitted by the
Trunk-TX laser of the TXP/MXP card
connected to the 32WSS, 32WSS-L,
40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE card.
Numeric. CTC does not allow it to be
changed.
Table 20-37 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Channel Alarm Threshold
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-73
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G214 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line Parameters
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 32WSS, 32WSS-L,
40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE card where you want to change the optical line parameter settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-38. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column. The SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH (ETSI) option.
Purpose This task changes the optical line parameter settings for the 32WSS,
32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-38 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Line Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (RX or TX),
32WSS or 32WSS-L:
• 65 (EXP-TX)
• 66 (EXP-RX)
• 67 (COM-TX)
• 68 (COM-RX)
• 69 (DROP-TX)
40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE:
• 81 (EXP-TX)
• 82 (EXP-RX)
• 83 (COM-TX)
• 84 (COM-RX)
• 85 (DROP-TX)
Port Name Allows you to assign a logical name for
each of the ports shown.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by
default. Double-click, enter the name, and
press Enter.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port”
task on page 16-16.
20-74
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G215 Change the 32WSS, 32-WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line Thresholds
Caution Warning thresholds are not monitored by CTC. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Admin
State
Sets the port administrative state unless
network conditions prevent the change.
For more information about
administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the
following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
Service
State
(Display only) Identifies the
autonomously generated state that gives
the overall condition of the port. Service
states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information
about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
Power (Display only) Power value read by the
photodiode associated with the port.
Numeric value (dB)
AINS Soak (Display only) The automatic in-service
soak period. It is always 00.00.
—
Actual
Channels
Number of active channels carried by the
port (the difference between provisioned
and failed)
—
Purpose This task changes the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE card
optical line threshold settings.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-38 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Line Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
20-75
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 32WSS, 32WSS-L,
40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE card where you want to change the optical line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs for one of the groups of optical
channels that are available.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-39.
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm.
b. Click Refresh.
c. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-40.
Table 20-39 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Line Warning Threshold
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (RX or TX),
32WSS or 32WSS-L:
• 65 (EXP-TX)
• 66 (EXP-RX)
• 67 (COM-TX)
• 68 (COM-RX)
• 69 (DROP-TX)
40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE:
• 81 (EXP-TX)
• 82 (EXP-RX)
• 83 (COM-TX)
• 84 (COM-RX)
• 85 (DROP-TX)
opwrMin
(dBm)
Set the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Set the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
20-76
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
d. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G240 Modify TDC-CC and TDC-FC Line Settings and PM Thresholds
Table 20-40 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Line Alarm Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (RX or TX),
32WSS or 32WSS-L:
• 65 (EXP-TX)
• 66 (EXP-RX)
• 67 (COM-TX)
• 68 (COM-RX)
• 69 (DROP-TX)
40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE:
• 81 (EXP-TX)
• 82 (EXP-RX)
• 83 (COM-TX)
• 84 (COM-RX)
• 85 (DROP-TX)
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the power failure low threshold.
This power value applies to the
corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
You can manually change the threshold.
The value must be within the optical
power range that is specified for the card.
For more information, see the Hardware
Specifications document.
Numeric. Double-click the parameter,
enter a value, and press Enter.
Purpose This procedure changes the TDC-CC or TDC-FC card line settings and PM
thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-77
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to change the TDC-CC or
TDC-FC card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G545 Modify the Chromatic Dispersion Value for the TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards,
page 20-77.
• DLP-G528 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for TDC-CC or TDC-FC Card, page 20-78.
Step 4 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G545 Modify the Chromatic Dispersion Value for the TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards
Step 1 In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TDC-CC or
TDC-FC card.
Step 2 Click Provisioning > Card tab and then select the CD value from the Compensating Value drop-down
list.
Step 3 Click Apply. A warning message appears stating that the change in compensation value could
affect traffic.
Step 4 Click Yes. The compensation value is set.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This procedure modifies the chromatic dispersion (CD) value for the
TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-78
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G528 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for TDC-CC or TDC-FC Card
Caution Warning thresholds are not monitored by CTC. The warning thresholds must be user-provisioned and
monitored through custom alarm profiles.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the TDC-CC or TDC-FC
card where you want to change the optical channel threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-41.
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm.
b. Click Refresh.
c. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-42.
Purpose This task changes the optical line threshold settings for the TDC-CC or
TDC-FC card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-41 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (DC-RX or
DC-TX).
• 1 (DC-RX)
• 2 (DC-TX)
opwrMin
(dBm)
Sets the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the table cell,
enter a value, and press Enter.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Sets the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the table cell, enter a value,
and press Enter.
20-79
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
d. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G174 Modify the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to change the 40-WXC-C or
80-WXC-C card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2. For 40-WXC-C cards,
continue with Step 4. For 80-WXC-C cards, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 Verify the card mode for 80-WXC-C cards. Complete the following steps:
a. Display the 80-WXC-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
c. Verify that the card mode is set to the mode designated by your site plan:
– BIDIRECTIONAL
– MULTIPLEXER
– DE-MULTIPLEXER
Table 20-42 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Setting
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (DC-RX or
DC-TX).
• 1 (DC-RX)
• 2 (DC-TX)
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the optical power failure low
threshold for the port. You can manually
change the threshold. The value must be
within the optical power range that is
specified for the card. For more
information, see the Hardware
Specifications document.
Numeric. Double-click the table cell,
enter a value, and press Enter.
Purpose This procedure changes the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C card thresholds and
settings.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-80
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 If the card mode is set correctly, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the “DLP-G603 Change the
80-WXC-C Card Mode” task on page 20-80.
Step 5 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G406 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card Optical Channel Parameters, page 20-81
• DLP-G407 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Thresholds, page 20-84
Note To use the alarm profile tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management
• DLP-G408 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Parameters, page 20-87
• DLP-G409 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Thresholds, page 20-89
Step 6 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G603 Change the 80-WXC-C Card Mode
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 80-WXC-C card
where you want to change the card mode.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > WXC Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Verify that any provisioned client or trunk ports have an OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state in the Service State column. If so, continue with Step 4.
If not, complete the following substeps.
a. For the first port that is in service, in the Admin State column, choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked,disabled (ETSI).
b. Repeat Step a. for each port that is in service.
c. Click Apply.
Purpose This task changes the card mode of the 80-WXC-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-81
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs. Choose one of the card modes shown in Table 20-43.
Step 5 Click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP)
DLP-G406 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card Optical Channel Parameters
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 40-WXC-C or
80-WXC-C card where you want to change the optical channel parameter settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OCH > Parameters tabs. For 40-WXC-C cards, continue with Step 4. For
80-WXC-C cards, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 Choose a wavelength from the Wavelength drop-down list and click Retrieve to retrieve the OCH
parameters.
Table 20-43 80-WXC-C Card Modes
Mode Description
Bidirectional Provisions the 80-WXC-C card in the
bidirectional mode. Traffic received from any of
the nine input ports(EAD i, i=1 to 8, AD ports)
are multiplexed and sent to the common output
port (COM ports). The pre-amplifer output signal
from the preamplifier is split in a 40%-to-60%
ratio, 40% is sent on the drop path (DROP-TX
port) and 60% is sent pass-through path (EXP-TX
port).
Multiplexer Provisions the 80-WXC-C card in the multiplexer
mode. Traffic received from any of the nine input
ports (EAD i, i=1 to 8, AD ports) are multiplexed
and sent to the common output port (COM port).
Demultiplexer Provisions the 80-WXC-C card in the
demultiplexer mode. Traffic received from
common input port (COM port) is demultiplexed
and sent to the nine output ports (EAD i, i=1 to 8,
AD ports).
Purpose This task changes the optical channel parameter settings for the
40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-82
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-44. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table. In the Options column, the SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH
(ETSI) option.
Table 20-44 40-WXC-C and 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
Circuit Name (Display only) Shows the circuit
name. This is provisioned in the
Circuits tab.
—
Admin State Sets the port administrative state
unless network conditions prevent
the change. For more information
about administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
( 40-WXC-C only)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the
autonomously generated state that
gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the
format: Primary State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary State. For more
information about service states, see
the Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,automat
icInService ( 40-WXC-C only)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disable
d ( 40-WXC-C only)
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenanc
e ( 40-WXC-C only)
From (Display only) The port where the
circuit originated.
—
Power
(40-WXC-C
only)
(Display only) Power value read by
the photodiode located after the VOA
associated to the port, and calibrated
to the COM_TX port. For more
information, see the Hardware
Specifications document.
Numeric value (dB)
Power From
(80-WXC-C
only)
Power on the port where the circuit
originated.
—
To
(80-WXC-C
only)
(Display only) The port where the
circuit terminated.
—
Power To
(80-WXC-C
only)
Power on the port where the circuit
terminated.
—
Force Channel
(80-WXC-C
only)
Starts the channel by moving the
VOA from Open to Closed loop. You
can force a channel only when the
Force Channel Status is in the
Unlocked state.
• OFF
• ON
20-83
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 5 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Force Channel
Status
(80-WXC-C
only)
(Display only) Displays the channel
status.
• Unlocked—Can force channel startup
• Locked—Cannot force channel startup as
the device is under control of other
functions like optical safety
• Forced—Channel startup has already
been forced
Actual
Wavelength
(40-WXC-C
only)
(Display only) Displays the actual
wavelength utilized by the channel.
—
VOA Mode (Display only) Displays the active
VOA working mode.
• Constant Power
• Constant Attenuation
VOA Power
Ref.
(Display only) Shows the value of the
optical power setpoint that must be
reached on the path where a VOA is
present, when VOA Mode is set to
Constant Power. This value is the
desired per-channel optical power.
This parameter can only be modified
by ANS.
Numeric value (dB)
VOA Power
Calib.
Allows you to modify the VOA
power value when VOA Mode is
Constant Power.
Double-click the parameter, enter a value, and
press Enter.
• Numeric value (dB)
• –37 dB to –2 dB
VOA
Attenuation
Ref.
(40-WXC-C
only)
(Display only) Shows the attenuation
value of the VOA when the VOA
Mode is Constant Attenuation. This
parameter can only be modified by
ANS.
Numeric value (dB)
VOA
Attenuation
Calib.
(40-WXC-C
only)
Allows you to modify the VOA
attenuation value when VOA Mode is
Constant Attenuation.
Double-click the parameter, enter a value, and
press Enter.
• Numeric value (dB)
• –30 dB to +30 dB
Table 20-44 40-WXC-C and 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Parameter Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-84
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G407 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Thresholds
Caution Warning thresholds are not monitored by CTC. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 40-WXC-C or
80-WXC-C card where you want to change the optical channel threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OCH > OCH Thresholds tabs, where n = one of the four available groups of
eight optical channels.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day. For 40-WXC-C
card, continue with Step 3c. For 80-WXC-C card, continue with Step 3d.
c. Click Refresh. Continue with Step 3g.
d. Choose a wavelength from the Wavelength drop-down list.
e. In the Port drop-down list, choose an OCH port where you want to change the optical channel
threshold settings.
f. Click Retrieve.
g. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-45.
Purpose This task changes the optical channel threshold settings for the 40-WXC-C
or 80-WXC-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-45 40-WXC-C and 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Warning Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Circuit Name (Display only) Shows the circuit name.
This is provisioned in the Circuits tab.
—
Port Name (Display only) Shows the port name. —
Actual
Wavelength
(Display only) Displays the actual
wavelength utilized by the channel.
—
opwrMin
(dBm)
Set the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. Double-click the
parameter, enter a value, and press Enter.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Set the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. Double-click the
parameter, enter a value, and press Enter.
20-85
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
h. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm. For 40-WXC-C card, continue with Step 4b. For 80-WXC-C card,
continue with Step 4c.
b. Click Refresh. Continue with Step 4f.
c. Choose a wavelength from the Wavelength drop-down list.
d. In the Port drop-down list, choose an OCH port where you want to change the optical channel
threshold settings:
For the 80-WXC-C card, the following ports are available to view:
– 1 (EAD)
– 2 (EAD)
– 3 (EAD)
– 4 (EAD)
– 5 (EAD)
– 6 (EAD)
– 7 (EAD)
– 8 (EAD)
– 9 (AD)
– 10 (COM)
– (DROP-TX) (in BIDI mode)
e. Click Retrieve.
f. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-46.
Table 20-46 40-WXC-C and 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Alarm Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Circuit Name (Display only) Shows the circuit name.
This is provisioned in the Circuits tab.
—
Port Name (Display only) Shows the port name. —
Actual
Wavelength
(Display only) Displays the actual
wavelength utilized by the channel.
—
20-86
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
g. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the power failure low
threshold. This power value applies to the
corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
This threshold applies to a port associated
to a VOA (OSC-VOA) that is always active
in Constant Power mode.
The threshold is automatically linked to the
Power Setpoint (VOA Power Ref + VOA
Power Calib) that is provisioned. Changing
the setpoint results in changing the
threshold (always 5 dB lower).
The threshold is calculated automatically
when you run ANS. For more information,
see the Hardware Specifications document.
—
Power Degrade
High (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the power degrade
high threshold. This power value applies to
the corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
This threshold applies to a port associated
to a VOA (OSC-VOA) that is always active
in Constant Power mode.
The threshold is automatically linked to the
Power Setpoint (VOA Power Ref + VOA
Power Calib) that is provisioned. Changing
the setpoint results in changing the
threshold (always 3 dB higher).
—
Power Degrade
Low (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the power degrade
low threshold. This power value applies to
the corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
This threshold applies to a port associated
to a VOA (OSC-VOA) that is always active
in Constant Power mode.
The threshold is automatically linked to the
Power Setpoint (VOA Power Ref + VOA
Power Calib) that is provisioned. Changing
the setpoint results in changing the
threshold (always 2 dB lower).
Numeric
Table 20-46 40-WXC-C and 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Alarm Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-87
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G408 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Parameters
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 40-WXC-C or
80-WXC-C card where you want to change the optical line parameter settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-47. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column. The SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH (ETSI) option.
Purpose This task changes the optical line parameter settings for 40-WXC-C or
80-WXC-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-47 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (RX or TX),
40-WXC-C card options:
• 10 (DROP-TX)
• 11 (EXP-TX)
• 12 (COM-RX)
• 13 (COM-TX)
80-WXC-C card options:
• 11 (DROP-TX)
• 12 (EXP-TX)
• 13 (COM-RX)
Port Name Allows you to assign a logical name for
each of the ports shown.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by
default. Double-click, enter the name, and
press Enter.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port”
task on page 16-16.
Admin
State
Sets the port administrative state unless
network conditions prevent the change.
For more information about
administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the
following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
20-88
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Service
State
(Display only) Identifies the
autonomously generated state that gives
the overall condition of the port. Service
states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more information about
service states, see the Administrative and
Service States document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
Power
(40-WXCC
only)
(Display only) Power value read by the
photodiode associated with the port.
Numeric value (dB)
Active
Channels
(40-WXCC
only)
Number of active channels carried by the
port (the difference between provisioned
and failed)
—
VOA Mode
(80-WXCC
in BIDI
mode only)
(Display only) Displays the active VOA
working mode.
• Constant Power
• Constant Attenuation
VOA
Attenuatio
n Ref.
(80-WXCC
in BIDI
mode only)
(Display only) Shows the attenuation
value of the VOA when the VOA Mode
is Constant Attenuation. This parameter
can only be modified by ANS.
Numeric value (dB)
VOA
Attenuatio
n Calib.
(80-WXCC
in BIDI
mode only)
Allows you to modify the VOA
attenuation value when VOA Mode is
Constant Attenuation.
Double-click the parameter, enter a value, and
press Enter.
• Numeric value (dB)
• –30 dB to +30 dB
Table 20-47 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Parameter Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-89
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G409 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Thresholds
Caution Warning thresholds are not monitored by CTC. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 40-WXC-C or
80-WXC-C card where you want to change the optical line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs for one of the groups of optical
channels that are available.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-48.
Purpose This task changes the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C card optical line threshold
settings.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-48 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (RX or TX),
40-WXC-C card options:
• 10 (DROP-TX)
• 11 (EXP-TX)
• 12 (COM-RX)
• 13 (COM-TX)
80-WXC-C card options:
• 11 (DROP-TX)
• 12 (EXP-TX)
• 13 (COM-RX
opwrMin
(dBm)
Set the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Set the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
20-90
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm.
b. Click Refresh.
c. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-49.
d. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 20-49 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Alarm Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (RX or TX),
40-WXC-C card options:
• 10 (DROP-TX)
• 11 (EXP-TX)
• 12 (COM-RX)
• 13 (COM-TX)
80-WXC-C card options:
• 11 (DROP-TX)
• 12 (EXP-TX)
• 13 (COM-RX)
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the power failure low threshold.
This power value applies to the
corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
You can manually change the threshold.
The value must be within the optical
power range that is specified for the card.
For more information, see the Hardware
Specifications document.
Numeric. Double-click the parameter,
enter a value, and press Enter.
20-91
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G413 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card WXC Line Parameters
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 40-WXC-C or
80-WXC-C card where you want to change the optical line parameter settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > WXC Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-50. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column. The SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH (ETSI) option.
Purpose This task changes the WXC line parameter settings for 40-WXC-C or
80-WXC-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-92
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Table 20-50 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C WXC Line Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number, port type, and direction (RX or
TX),
40-WXC-C card options:
• 1 (EXP-RX)
• 2 (EXP-RX)
• 3 (EXP-RX)
• 4 (EXP-RX)
• 5 (EXP-RX)
• 6 (EXP-RX)
• 7 (EXP-RX)
• 8 (EXP-RX)
• 9 (ADD-RX)
80-WXC-C card options:
• 1 (EAD)
• 2 (EAD)
• 3 (EAD)
• 4 (EAD)
• 5 (EAD)
• 6 (EAD)
• 7 (EAD)
• 8 (EAD)
• 9 (AD)
• 10 (COM)
Port Name Allows you to assign a logical name for
each of the ports shown.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by
default. Double-click, enter the name, and
press Enter.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port”
task on page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port administrative state unless
network conditions prevent the change.
For more information about
administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the
following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
20-93
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G429 Multiplex a Single Wavelength on 40-WXC-C Card
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 40-WXC-C card
where you want to multiplex a wavelength.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs.
Step 3 Enter the following values:
Target Power (dBm)—Enter the target power. The default is –14.0 dBm.
• Input Port—Choose the EXP-RX or ADD-RX port where you want to multiplex the wavelength
from.
• VOA Attenuation (dB)—Enter the VOA attenuation. The default values are:
– 20 dB for four-way mesh and an EXP-RX input port
– 16 dB for 8-way mesh and an EXP-RX input port
Service State (Display only) Identifies the
autonomously generated state that gives
the overall condition of the port. Service
states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information
about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
Active
Channels
(Display only) Indicates how many
channels the port is carrying. Generally
reflects the number of provisioned
channels.
—
Power
(80-WXC-C
only)
(Display only) Shows the current power
level per port.
—
Purpose This task multiplexes a single wavelength onto the COM-TX port of a
40-WXC-C card. Perform this task for testing and troubleshooting a
40-WXC-C card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-50 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C WXC Line Parameter Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-94
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
– 22 dB for an ADD-RX input port
• Wavelength—Choose the wavelength that you want to multiplex. The supported wavelengths are the
40 channels of the C-band from 1530.33 nm to 1561.32 nm. A “Maintenance” wavelength is also
provided that corresponds to a “Lambda zero” wavelength of 1529.55 nm.
Note You cannot multiplex a wavelength that is already allocated on the COM-TX port.
Step 4 Click Apply. This creates a cross-connection (add or pass-through) for the specified wavelength. This
cross-connection remains active until you click Clear.
Step 5 If you want to multiplex additional channels, click Clear to delete the existing cross-connection, and
repeat Steps 3 and 4. If not, continue with Step 6.
Step 6 To view the actual power on the COM-TX port, click Refresh. Wait 10-15 seconds for the actual power
to appear.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G241 Modify the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to change the 40-SMR1-C or
40-SMR2-C card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G532 Change Optical Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards, page 20-95
• DLP-G533 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards,
page 20-97
• DLP-G534 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards,
page 20-101
• DLP-G535 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards,
page 20-103
• DLP-G536 Change 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Parameters, page 20-108
• DLP-G537 Change the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Optical Channel Thresholds, page 20-110
Purpose This procedure changes the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C card thresholds
and settings.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-95
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Note To use the alarm profile tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management
Step 4 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G532 Change Optical Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 40-SMR1-C or
40-SMR2-C card where you want to change the optical line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-51. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table. In the Options column, the SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH
(ETSI) option.
Purpose This task changes the optical line settings for the 40-SMR1-C and
40-SMR2-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-96
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Table 20-51 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Optical Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number, port type,
and direction (TX or RX).
40-SMR1-C card options:
• 1 (EXP-RX)
• 3 (DC-RX)
• 4 (DC-TX)
• 5 (OSC-RX)
• 6 (OSC-TX
• 7 (ADD-RX)
• 8 (DROP-TX)
• 9 (LINE-RX)
• 10 (LINE-TX)
40-SMR2-C card options:
• 1 (DC-RX)
• 2 (DC-TX)
• 3 (OSC-RX)
• 4 (OSC-TX
• 5 (ADD-RX)
• 6 (DROP-TX)
• 7 (LINE-RX)
• 10 (EXP-RX 1-2)
• 11 (EXP-RX 1-3)
• 12 (EXP-RX 1-4)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port, a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default. Double-click,
enter the name, and press Enter.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task
on page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port administrative state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more information
about administrative states, see the Administrative
and Service States document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the
following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
Note You cannot set the
OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
administrative state for LINE and OSC ports,
and hence the
OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
service state is not applicable for these ports.
20-97
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G533 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated
state that gives the overall condition of the port.
Service states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For
more information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
Note You cannot set the
OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
administrative state for LINE and OSC ports,
and hence the
OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
service state is not applicable for these ports.
Power (Display only) Shows the current power level per port. —
VOA Mode (Display only) Shows the functional mode of the
variable optical attenuator (VOA), when present.
• Constant Attenuation
• Constant Power
VOA
Attenuation
Ref
(Display only) Shows the VOA attenuation value
when VOA Mode is set to Constant Attenuation. This
parameter can only be modified by ANS.
—
VOA
Attenuation
Calib
Modifies the attenuation value of the VOA when the
VOA Mode is set to Constant Attenuation.
Numeric. Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
Active
Channels
(Display only) Indicates how many channels the
amplifier is carrying. Generally reflects the number of
provisioned channels.
—
OSC Power (Display only) Shows the OSC power level per port. —
Purpose This task changes the optical line threshold settings for the 40-SMR1-C
and 40-SMR2-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-51 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Optical Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-98
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Caution CTC does not monitor warning thresholds. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 40-SMR1-C or
40-SMR2-C card where you want to change the optical line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-52.
e. Click Apply. If the change affects service, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
20-99
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Table 20-52 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (TX or RX):
40-SMR1-C card options:
• 1 (EXP-RX)
• 3 (DC-RX)
• 4 (DC-TX)
• 5 (OSC-RX)
• 6 (OSC-TX
• 7 (ADD-RX)
• 8 (DROP-TX)
• 9 (LINE-RX)
• 10 (LINE-TX)
40-SMR2-C card options:
• 1 (DC-RX)
• 2 (DC-TX)
• 3 (OSC-RX)
• 4 (OSC-TX
• 5 (ADD-RX)
• 6 (DROP-TX)
• 7 (LINE-RX)
• 10 (EXP-RX 1-2)
• 11 (EXP-RX 1-3)
• 12 (EXP-RX 1-4)
opwrMin
(dBm)
Sets the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the table cell,
enter the value, and press Enter.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Sets the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the table cell, enter the
value, and press Enter.
opwrMin OSC
(dBm)
Sets the OSC low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the table cell,
enter the value, and press Enter.
opwrMax OSC
(dBm)
Sets the OSC high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the table cell, enter the
value, and press Enter.
20-100
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm.
b. Click Refresh.
c. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-53.
d. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Table 20-53 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Setting
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 40-SMR1-C card options:
• 1 (EXP-RX)
• 3 (DC-RX)
• 4 (DC-TX)
• 5 (OSC-RX)
• 6 (OSC-TX
• 7 (ADD-RX)
• 8 (DROP-TX)
• 9 (LINE-RX)
• 10 (LINE-TX)
40-SMR2-C card options:
• 1 (DC-RX)
• 2 (DC-TX)
• 3 (OSC-RX)
• 4 (OSC-TX
• 5 (ADD-RX)
• 6 (DROP-TX)
• 7 (LINE-RX)
• 10 (EXP-RX 1-2)
• 11 (EXP-RX 1-3)
• 12 (EXP-RX 1-4)
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the optical power failure low
threshold for the port. The threshold is
calculated automatically when you run
ANS. You can manually change the
threshold. The value must be within the
optical power range that is specified for
the card. For more information, see the
Hardware Specifications document.
Numeric.
Power Degrade
High (dBm)
Does not apply to 40-SMR1-C and
40-SMR2-C line parameters.
—
20-101
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G534 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 40-SMR1-C or
40-SMR2-C card where you want to change the optical amplifier line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-54. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table. In the Options column, the SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH
(ETSI) option.
Power Degrade
Low (dBm)
Does not apply to 40-SMR1-C and
40-SMR2-C line parameters.
—
Pwr OSC
Degrade High
(dBm)
Does not apply to 40-SMR1-C and
40-SMR2-C line parameters.
—
Pwr OSC
Degrade Low
(dBm)
Does not apply to 40-SMR1-C and
40-SMR2-C line parameters.
—
Pwr OSC
Failure (dBm)
Shows the optical power failure threshold
for the OSC. The threshold is calculated
automatically when you run ANS. You
can manually change the threshold. The
value must be within the optical power
range that is specified for the card. If
there is a failure, an LOS-O alarm is
raised. For more information, see the
Hardware Specifications document.
Numeric.
Purpose This task changes the optical amplifier line settings for 40-SMR1-C and
40-SMR2-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-53 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Setting (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-102
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Table 20-54 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number, port
type, and direction.
40-SMR1-C card options:
• 2 (EXP-TX)
40-SMR1-C card options:
• 8 (LINE-TX)
• 9 (EXP-TX 1-1)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port, a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port administrative state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
Note You cannot set the
OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
administrative state for LINE-TX and
EXP-TX ports, and hence the
OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
service state is not applicable for these ports.
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more information about service states,
see the Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
Note You cannot set the
OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
administrative state for LINE-TX and
EXP-TX ports, and hence the
OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
service state is not applicable for these ports.
Total Output
Power
(Display only) Shows the current power level per
port.
—
Offset Adjusts the total output power unless network
conditions prevent the adjustment, for example, if
the port is in IS state.
Numeric. Double-click to change.
Active Channels (Display only) Indicates how many channels the
card is carrying. Generally reflects the number of
provisioned channels.
—
OSC Power (Display only) Shows the OSC power level per
port.
—
20-103
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G535 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards
Channel Power
Ref.
(Display only) Shows the optical per channel
signal power setpoint that must be reached at the
amplifier output when gain control is active.
—
Signal Output
Power
(Display only) Shows the current output power
leaving the amplifier, including the ASE
contribution.
—
Output Power
Set-Point
(Display only) Shows the output power setpoint. —
Working Mode (Display only) Shows the working mode, either
Output Power or Control Gain.
—
DCU Insertion
Loss
(Display only) Shows the DCU insertion loss. —
Gain (Display only) The current gain of the amplifiers. —
Gain Set Point (Display only) The value of the gain that the
amplifier must achieve. APC can modify this
value based on the number of OCHNC circuits
that the amplifier manages, or to compensate for
fiber aging insertion loss. For more information,
see Chapter 13, “Network Reference.”
—
Tilt Reference (Display only) Shows the default value for the
amplifier tilt. Only ANS can modify this field.
—
Tilt Calibration Allows you to manually change the amplifier tilt. Numeric. Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
Purpose This task changes the optical channel threshold settings for the
40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-54 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-104
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Caution CTC does not monitor warning thresholds. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 40-SMR1-C or
40-SMR2-C card where you want to change the optical amplifier threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Opt Ampli Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-55.
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm.
b. Click Refresh.
Table 20-55 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Line Warning Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction.
40-SMR1-C card options:
• 2 (EXP-TX)
40-SMR1-C card options:
• 8 (LINE-TX)
• 9 (EXP-TX 1-1)
opwrMin
(dBm)
Sets the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the parameter,
enter a value, and press Enter.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Sets the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
opwrMin OSC
(dBm)
Sets the OSC low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm. Double-click the parameter,
enter a value, and press Enter.
opwrMax OSC
(dBm)
Sets the OSC high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
20-105
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
c. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-56.
d. Click Apply. If the change affects service, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Table 20-56 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Line Alarm Thresholds Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number, port
type, and direction.
40-SMR1-C card options:
• 2 (EXP-TX)
40-SMR1-C card options:
• 8 (LINE-TX)
• 9 (EXP-TX 1-1)
Gain Degrade
Low (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the current value of the gain
degrade low threshold configured in the card. This
threshold applies only when the amplifier is active
and in constant gain mode.
Gain Degrade Low refers to the Gain value of the
port, which the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
automatically calculates when the amplifier is
turned up.
The Gain Degrade Low threshold is automatically
linked to the Gain Setpoint that is provisioned.
Changing the setpoint changes the Gain Degrade
Low threshold. The threshold value is always 2 dB
lower than the Gain Setpoint value.
APC can also modify this value based on the
number of OCHNC circuits that the amplifier is
managing.
—
Gain Degrade
High (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the current value of the gain
degrade high threshold configured in the card.
This threshold applies only when the amplifier is
active and in constant gain mode.
Gain Degrade High refers to the Gain value of the
port, which the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
automatically calculates when the amplifier is
turned up.
The Gain Degrade High threshold is linked to the
Gain setpoint. Changing the setpoint changes the
Gain Degrade High threshold. The threshold value
is always 2 dB higher than the Gain Setpoint
value.
APC can modify this value based on the number of
OCHNC circuits that the amplifier is managing
and to compensate for insertion loss due to fiber
aging.
—
20-106
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the optical power failure low threshold for
the port. The threshold is calculated automatically
when you run ANS. You can manually change the
threshold. The value must be within the optical
power range that is specified for the card. For
more information, see the Hardware
Specifications document.
Numeric. Double-click to
change.
Table 20-56 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Line Alarm Thresholds Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-107
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Power Degrade
High (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the current value of the
optical power degrade high threshold. This
threshold applies only when the amplifier is active
and in constant power mode.
Power Degrade High refers to the Signal Output
Power value of the port, which the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
automatically calculates when the amplifier is
turned up.
The Power Degrade High threshold is linked to the
Output Power Setpoint on the Parameters tab.
Changing the setpoint changes the Power Degrade
High threshold. The threshold value is always
2 dB higher than the output power setpoint value.
APC can modify this value based on the number of
OCHNC circuits that the amplifier is managing.
For more information, see Chapter 13, “Network
Reference.”
Note In Control Power working mode, this
parameter is applicable only on the
EXP-TX port for the 40-SMR2-C card.
—
Power Degrade
Low (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the current value of the
optical power degrade low threshold configured in
the card. This threshold applies only when the
amplifier is active and in constant power mode.
Power Degrade Low refers to the Signal Output
Power value of the port, which the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
automatically calculates when the amplifier is
turned up.
The Power Degrade Low threshold is
automatically linked to the Output Power Setpoint
on the Parameters tab. Changing the setpoint
changes the Power Degrade Low threshold. The
threshold value is always 2 dB lower than the
output power setpoint.
APC can modify this value based on the number of
OCHNC circuits that the amplifier is managing.
Note In Control Power working mode, this
parameter is applicable only on the
EXP-TX port for the 40-SMR2-C card.
—
Table 20-56 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Line Alarm Thresholds Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-108
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G536 Change 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Parameters
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 40-SMR1-C or
40-SMR2-C card where you want to change the optical channel parameter settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OCH > Parameters tab.
Step 3 From the Wavelength drop-down list, choose a wavelength and click Retrieve to retrieve the OCH
parameters.
Step 4 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-57. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table. In the Options column, the SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH
(ETSI) option.
Purpose This task changes the optical channel parameter settings for the
40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-109
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Table 20-57 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
Admin State Sets the port administrative state
unless network conditions prevent the
change. For more information about
administrative states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the
following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
Note You cannot set the
OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
administrative state, and hence the
OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,
maintenance service state is not
applicable.
Service State (Display only) Identifies the
autonomously generated state that
gives the overall condition of the port.
Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information
about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,
disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,
maintenance
Note You cannot set the
OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
administrative state, and hence the
OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,
maintenance service state is not
applicable.
Power (Display only) Power value read by the
photodiode located after the VOA
associated to the port, and calibrated to
the port. For more information, see the
Hardware Specifications document.
Numeric value (dB).
Circuit Name (Display only) Shows the circuit name.
This is provisioned in the Circuits tab.
—
From (Display only) The port where the
circuit originated.
—
To (Display only) The port where the
circuit terminated.
—
Power From Power on the From port where the
circuit originated.
—
Power To Power on the To port where the circuit
terminated.
—
20-110
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 5 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G537 Change the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Optical Channel Thresholds
Force Channel Allows you to move the VOA from
Open to Closed loop to start the
channel.
You can force a channel only when the
Force Channel Status is in the
Unlocked state.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the
following:
• OFF
• ON
VOA Power
Ref.
(Display only) Shows the value of the
optical power setpoint that must be
reached on the path where a VOA is
present, when VOA Mode is set to
Constant Power. This value is the
desired per channel optical power.
Only ANS can modify this field.
Numeric value (dB).
VOA Power
Calib.
Allows you to modify the VOA power
value when VOA Mode is Constant
Power.
Double-click the parameter, enter a value,
and press Enter.
• Numeric value (dB)
• –25 dB to +12 dB
Force Channel
Status
(Display only) Displays the channel
status. The different statuses are:
• Unlocked—Can force channel
startup
• Locked—Cannot force channel
startup as the device is under
control of other functions like
optical safety
• Forced—Channel startup has
already been forced
—
Purpose This task changes the optical channel threshold settings for the
40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-57 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Parameter Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-111
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Caution CTC does not monitor warning thresholds. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the 40-SMR1-C or
40-SMR2-C card where you want to change the optical channel threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OCH > OCH Thresholds tab.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with c..
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
c. Choose a wavelength from the Wavelength drop-down list.
d. In the Port drop-down list, choose an OCH port where you want to change the optical channel
threshold settings:
For the 40-SMR1-C card, the following ports are available to view:
– 1 (EXP-RX)
– 2 (EXP-TX)
– 7 (ADD-RX)
– 8 (DROP-TX)
– 10 (LINE-TX)
For the 40-SMR2-C card, the following ports are available to view:
– 5 (ADD-RX)
– 6 (DROP-TX)
– 8 (LINE-TX)
– 9 (EXP-TX 1-1)
– 10 (EXP-RX 1-2)
– 11 (EXP-RX 1-3)
– 12 (EXP-RX 1-4)
e. Click Retrieve. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in
Table 20-58.
Table 20-58 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Warning Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Circuit Name (Display only) Shows the circuit name.
This is provisioned in the Circuits tab.
—
Port Name (Display only) Shows the port name. —
Actual
Wavelength
(Display only) Displays the actual
wavelength that the channel utilizes.
—
20-112
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
f. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm.
b. Choose a wavelength from the Wavelength drop-down list.
c. In the Port drop-down list, choose an OCH port where you want to change the optical channel
threshold settings.
d. Click Retrieve. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in
Table 20-59.
opwrMin
(dBm)
Set the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. Double-click the
parameter, enter a value, and press Enter.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Set the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. Double-click the
parameter, enter a value, and press Enter.
Table 20-58 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Warning Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Table 20-59 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Alarm Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Circuit Name (Display only) Shows the circuit name.
This is provisioned in the Circuits tab.
—
Port Name (Display only) Shows the port name. —
Actual
Wavelength
(Display only) Displays the actual
wavelength utilized by the channel.
—
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the power failure low threshold.
This power value applies to the
corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
This threshold applies to a port associated
to a VOA (OSC-VOA) that is always active
in Constant Power mode.
The threshold is automatically linked to the
Power Setpoint (VOA Power Ref + VOA
Power Calib) that is provisioned. Changing
the setpoint results in changing the
threshold (always 5 dB lower). For more
information, see the Hardware
Specifications document.
—
20-113
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Power Degrade
High (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the power degrade
high threshold. This power value applies to
the corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
This threshold applies to a port associated
to a VOA (OSC-VOA) that is always active
in Constant Power mode.
The threshold is automatically linked to the
Power Setpoint (VOA Power Ref + VOA
Power Calib) that is provisioned. Changing
the setpoint results in changing the
threshold (always 3 dB higher).
Note This threshold applies only to
certain ports depending on the
working mode you have set.
—
Power Degrade
Low (dBm)
(Display only) Shows the power degrade
low threshold. This power value applies to
the corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
This threshold applies to a port associated
to a VOA (OSC-VOA) that is always active
in Constant Power mode.
The threshold is automatically linked to the
Power Setpoint (VOA Power Ref + VOA
Power Calib) that is provisioned. Changing
the setpoint results in changing the
threshold (always 2 dB lower).
Note This threshold applies only to
certain ports depending on the
working mode you have set.
Numeric
Table 20-59 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Alarm Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
20-114
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
NTP-G149 Modify the MMU Line Settings and PM Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to change the MMU card settings.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
Note To use the alarm profile tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see
Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management
• DLP-G342 Change MMU Optical Line Parameters, page 20-114
• DLP-G343 Change the MMU Optical Line Thresholds, page 20-116
Step 4 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G342 Change MMU Optical Line Parameters
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the MMU card where
you want to change the optical line parameter settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 20-60. The provisionable parameters are listed in the
Options column in the table. In the Options column, the SONET (ANSI) option is followed by the SDH
(ETSI) option.
Purpose This procedure changes the MMU card thresholds and settings.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task changes the optical line parameter settings for the MMU card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-115
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 20-60 MMU Optical Line Parameter Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number, port type,
and direction (RX or TX):
• 1 (EXP-RX)
• 2 (EXP-TX)
• 3 (COM-RX)
• 4 (COM-TX)
• 5 (EXP A-RX)
• 6 (EXP A-TX)
—
Port Name Allows you to assign a logical name for each of the
ports shown.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default. Double-click,
enter the name, and press Enter.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 16-16.
Admin State Sets the port administrative state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more information
about administrative states, see the Administrative
and Service States document.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the following:
• IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService
• OOS,DSBLD/Locked,disabled
• OOS,MT/Locked,maintenance
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For
more information about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States document.
• IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled
• OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• OOS-MA,DSBLD/Locked-enabled,disabled
• OOS-MA,MT/Locked-enabled,maintenance
Power (Display only) Power value read by the photodiode
associated with the port.
Numeric value (dB)
AINS Soak (Display only) The automatic in-service soak period.
It is always 00.00.
—
Actual
Channels
Number of active channels carried by the port (the
difference between provisioned and failed)
—
20-116
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G343 Change the MMU Optical Line Thresholds
Caution Warning thresholds are not monitored by CTC. They must be user-provisioned and monitored through
custom alarm profiles.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the MMU card where
you want to change the optical line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If you want to change the warning thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Under Types, choose Warning.
b. Choose the warning interval that you want to provision, either 15 minutes or 1 Day.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Modify any of the warning thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-61.
e. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 4 If you want to change the alarm thresholds, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Under Types, choose Alarm.
b. Click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the MMU card optical line threshold settings.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-61 MMU Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (RX or TX):
• 1 (EXP-RX)
• 2 (EXP-TX)
• 3 (COM-RX)
• 4 (COM-TX)
• 5 (EXP A-RX)
• 6 (EXP A-TX)
opwrMin
(dBm)
Set the low power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is
–50 dBm.
opwrMax
(dBm)
Set the high power warning level. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. The default is 30 dBm.
20-117
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
c. Modify any of the alarm thresholds shown under the Options column in Table 20-62.
d. Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the
change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G101 Modify Alarm Interface Controller–International Settings
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to change the AIC-I card settings.
If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Table 20-62 MMU Optical Line Alarm Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number,
port type, and direction (RX or TX).
• 1 (EXP-RX)
• 2 (EXP-TX)
• 3 (COM-RX)
• 4 (COM-TX)
• 5 (EXP A-RX)
• 6 (EXP A-TX)
Power Failure
Low (dBm)
Shows the power failure low threshold.
This power value applies to the
corresponding port and is automatically
calculated when ANS is run.
You can manually change the threshold.
The value must be within the optical
power range that is specified for the card.
For more information, see the Hardware
Specifications document.
Numeric. Double-click the parameters,
enter a value, and press Enter.
Purpose This procedure provisions the AIC-I card to receive input from or send
output to external devices wired to the backplane (called external alarms
and controls or environmental alarms), or changes orderwire settings.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G72 Provision External Alarms and Controls on the Alarm Interface
Controller-International Card
DLP-G109 Provision Orderwire, page 16-86
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-118
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G245 Change External Alarms Using the AIC-I Card, page 20-118
• DLP-G246 Change External Controls Using the AIC-I Card, page 20-119
• DLP-G247 Change AIC-I Card Orderwire Settings, page 20-119
Step 4 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G245 Change External Alarms Using the AIC-I Card
Note The procedure is the same if you are using the alarm expansion panel (AEP). In this case, the number of
contacts that are shown on the screen is changed accordingly.
Step 1 Confirm that external-device relays are wired to the ENVIR ALARMS IN pins. See the “DLP-G20
Install Alarm Wires on the MIC-A/P (ETSI Only)” or the “DLP-G23 Install Alarm Wires on the
Backplane (ANSI Only)” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide for more information.
Step 2 Double-click the AIC-I card to display it in card view.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > External Alarms tabs.
Step 4 Modify any of the following fields for each external device wired to the ONS 15454 backplane. For
definitions of these fields, see NTP-G72 Provision External Alarms and Controls on the Alarm Interface
Controller-International Card.
• Enabled
• Alarm Type
• Severity
• Virtual Wire
• Raised When
• Description
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes external alarm settings on the AIC-I card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-119
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G246 Change External Controls Using the AIC-I Card
Note The task is the same if you are using the AEP. In this case, the number of contacts that are shown on the
screen is changed accordingly.
Step 1 Verify the external control relays to the ENVIR ALARMS OUT backplane pins. See the “DLP-G20
Install Alarm Wires on the MIC-A/P (ETSI Only)” or the “DLP-G23 Install Alarm Wires on the
Backplane (ANSI Only)” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the AIC-I card to display
it in card view.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > External Controls tabs.
Step 4 Modify any of the following fields for each external control wired to the ONS 15454 backplane. For
definitions of these fields, see the NTP-G72 Provision External Alarms and Controls on the Alarm
Interface Controller-International Card.
• Enabled
• Trigger Type
• Control Type
• Description
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G247 Change AIC-I Card Orderwire Settings
Purpose This task changes external control settings on the AIC-I card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task changes orderwire settings on the AIC-I card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-120
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Caution When provisioning orderwire for ONS 15454s residing in a ring, do not provision a complete orderwire
loop. For example, a four-node ring typically has Side B and Side A ports provisioned at all four nodes.
However, to prevent orderwire loops, provision two orderwire ports (Side B and Side A) at all but one
of the ring nodes.
Tip Before you begin, make a list of the ONS 15454 slots and ports that require orderwire communication.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the AIC-I card to display
it in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Local Orderwire tabs or the Provisioning > Express Orderwire tabs,
depending on the orderwire path that you want to change. Provisioning steps are the same for both types
of orderwire.
Step 3 If needed, adjust the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) dBm values by moving the slider to the right or left
for the headset type (four-wire or two-wire) that you will use. In general, you should not need to adjust
the dBm values.
Step 4 If you want to turn on the audible alert (buzzer) for the orderwire, check the Buzzer On check box.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G102 Change Card Service State
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to change the card service state.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Inventory tab.
Step 3 Click the cell in the Admin State column for the card you want to change, and choose an administrative
state from the drop-down list:
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled (ETSI)
Step 4 Click Apply.
Purpose This procedure changes a card service state.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64 or
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-121
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 5 If an error message appears indicating that the card state cannot be changed from its current state, click
OK.
For information about the card state transitions, see the Administrative and Service States document.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G280 Modify Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE Cards
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you want to modify the threshold settings.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• “DLP-G609 Modify Optical Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE Cards” task on page 20-121
• “DLP-G610 Modify Line Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE cards” task on page 20-123
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G609 Modify Optical Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the TNC and TNCE
cards where you want to change the optical threshold settings.
Purpose This procedure changes the optical and line threshold settings for the TNC
and TNCE cards on the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and the Cisco ONS 15454
M6 shelves.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
“DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC and TNCE cards” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task changes the optical threshold settings for the TNC and TNCE
cards on the ONS 15454 M2 and the ONS 15454 M6 shelves.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
“DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC and TNCE Cards” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
20-122
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, choose the type of threshold that you want to change, either TCA or Alarm.
Step 4 Click Refresh.
Step 5 Modify any of the threshold settings as needed by double-clicking the threshold value, deleting it,
entering a new value, and hitting Enter. Table 20-63 shows the thresholds for warnings and alarms.
Note You can modify the optics thresholds either for 15 minutes or 1 day. To do so, choose the appropriate
radio button and click Refresh. 15 minutes and 1 day interval are not applicable for alarm thresholds.
Step 6 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 20-63 TNC and TNCE cards Optical Warning and Alarms Thresholds Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and port type.
• port number (OC3)
• port number (FE)
• port number (ONE-GE)
Laser Bias
High (%)
Sets the maximum laser bias. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. Double-click the
parameter, enter a value, and press Enter.
RX Power
High (dBm)
Sets the maximum optical power
received.
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. Double-click the
parameter, enter a value, and press Enter.
RX Power Low
(dBm)
Sets the minimum optical power received. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. Double-click the
parameter, enter a value, and press Enter.
TX Power
High (dBm)
Sets the maximum optical power
transmitted.
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. Double-click the
parameter, enter a value, and press Enter.
TX Power Low
(dBm)
Sets the minimum optical power
transmitted.
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals. Double-click the
parameter, enter a value, and press Enter.
20-123
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
DLP-G610 Modify Line Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the TNC and TNCE
cards where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the threshold settings as described in the following tables. These settings are found in
Ports, OC3 Line, and SONET Thresholds subtabs.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for the TNC and TNCE cards
on the ONS 15454 M2 and the ONS 15454 M6 shelves.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
“DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC and TNCE cards” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 20-64 TNC and TNCE cards Line Threshold Settings (Ports tab)
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and port type.
• port number (OC3)
• port number (FE)
• port number (ONE-GE)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the
specified port a name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32
alphanumeric/special characters. Blank
by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a
Port” task on page 16-16.
Admin State (Display only) Displays the port
administrative state. For more
information about administrative states,
see the Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)—Puts
the port in service. The port service
state changes to IS-NR (ANSI) or
Unlocked-enabled (ETSI).
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI
)—Puts the port in automatic
in-service. The port service state
changes to OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInServi
ce (ETSI).
20-124
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Service State (Display only) Identifies the
autonomously generated state that
displays the overall condition of the port.
Service states appear in these formats:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information
about service states, see the
Administrative and Service States
document.
• IS-NR (In-Service and Normal
[ANSI]) or Unlocked-enabled
(ETSI)—The port is fully operational
and is performing as provisioned.
• OOS-AU,AINS (Out-Of-Service and
Autonomous, Automatic In-Service
[ANSI]) or
Unlocked-disabled,automaticInServi
ce (ETSI)—The port is out of
service, but traffic is carried. Alarm
reporting is suppressed. The ONS
node monitors the ports for an
error-free signal. After an error-free
signal is detected, the port stays in
the
OOS-AU,AINS/Unlocked-disabled,a
utomaticInService state for the
duration of the soak period. After the
soak period ends, the port service
state changes to
IS-NR/Unlocked-enabled.
Reach Indicates the distance from one node to
another node
From the drop-down list, choose one of
the following:
• Auto Provision
• LX
• SX
• CX
• T
• DX
• HX
• ZX
• VX
• CWDM
• DWDM
• LR 2 (SONET)
• L2 (SDH)
• ULH (SDH and SONET)
Table 20-64 TNC and TNCE cards Line Threshold Settings (continued) (Ports tab)
Parameter Description Options
20-125
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Table 20-65 TNC and TNCE cards Line Threshold Settings (OC3 Line tab)
Table 20-66 TNC and TNCE cards Line Threshold Settings (SONET)
Table 20-1
Parameter Description Options
SF BER Sets the signal fail bit error rate. From the drop-down list, choose one of
the following:
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. From the drop-down list, choose one of
the following:
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
ProvidesSync (Display only) If checked, the card is
provisioned as a network element (NE)
timing reference.
• Checked
• Unchecked
SyncMsgIn Enables synchronization status messages
(SSM) on the S1 byte, which allow the
node to choose the best timing source.
• Checked
• Unchecked
SendDoNotUse When checked, sends a “Do Not Use for
Synchronization (DUS)” message on the
S1 byte.
• Checked
• Unchecked
PJSTSMon# (Display only) Sets the STS that will be
used for pointer justification.
This parameter is set to 0. It cannot be
changed.
AINS Soak (Display only) The automatic in-service
soak period. It is always 00.00.
—
Type Defines the port as SONET or SDH. The
ProvidesSync Msg field and the Send Do
Not Use field must be disabled before the
port can be set to SDH.
From the drop-down list, choose one of
the following:
• SONET
• SDH
Table 20-2
Parameter Description Options
CV Coding violations Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals for Line or Section
(Near and Far End).
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals for Line or Section
(Near and Far End).
20-126
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Table 20-67 TNC and TNCE cards Line Threshold Settings (SDH)
Note Far end is not applicable for optics thresholds and Regenerator Section STM1 thresholds (or section
thresholds in OC3).
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals for Line or Section
(Near and Far End).
SEFS Severely errored framing seconds
(Section only)
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals for Section (Near and
Far End).
FC Failure count (Line only) Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals for Line (Near and Far
End).
UAS Unavailable seconds (Line only) Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals for Line (Near and Far
End).
Table 20-2
Parameter Description Options
Table 20-3
Parameter Description Options
RS-OFS Out of frame seconds Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals for Section (Near and
Far End).
EB Errored block Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals for MS (Multiplex
Section) or RS (Regeneration Section)
(Near and Far End). Select the bullet and
click Refresh.
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals for MS or RS (Near and
Far End). Select the bullet and click
Refresh.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals for MS or RS (Near and
Far End). Select the bullet and click
Refresh.
BBE Background block error Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals for MS or RS (Near and
Far End). Select the bullet and click
Refresh.
OFS Out of frame seconds Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals for RS, Near End.
Select the bullet and click Refresh.
20-127
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message appears. Click Yes to complete the change.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
20-128
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 20 Change DWDM Card Settings
Before You Begin
CH A P T E R
21-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
21
Perform Node Acceptance Tests
This chapter provides test procedures to verify that installed cards are operating correctly in a
Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) node. The procedures are optional.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI (SONET) and ETSI (SDH) shelf
assemblies.
Note This chapter does not test the transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card installation. Installation and verification for those cards is performed in
Chapter 11, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.”
Before You Begin
This section lists the non-trouble procedures (NTPs) required to validate a DWDM node. Turn to a
procedure for applicable detailed level procedures (DLPs).
1. NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance
Test, page 21-3—Complete this procedure to test terminal and hub nodes with 32MUX-O and
32DMX-O cards installed.
2. NTP-G168 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance
Test, page 21-8—Complete this procedure to test terminal and hub nodes with 40-MUX-C and
40-DMX-C cards installed. This procedure can also be performed for 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-CE
cards.
3. NTP-G42 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test,
page 21-10—Complete this procedure to test terminal nodes with 32WSS and 32DMX cards
installed.
4. NTP-G167 Perform the Terminal Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test,
page 21-15—Complete this procedure to test terminal nodes with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards
installed. This procedure can also be performed to test terminal nodes for 40-WSS-CE and
40-DMX-CE cards
21-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
5. NTP-G153 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test,
page 21-20—Complete this procedure to test terminal nodes with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards
installed.
6. NTP-G43 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test,
page 21-27—Complete this procedure to test reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexing
(ROADM) nodes with 32WSS and 32DMX cards installed.
7. NTP-G154 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test,
page 21-39—Complete this procedure to test ROADM nodes with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards
installed.
8. NTP-G180 Perform the ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test,
page 21-62—Complete this procedure to test a ROADM node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards
installed. This procedure can also be performed for 40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-CE cards.
9. NTP-G276 Perform the 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node Acceptance Tests,
page 21-67—Complete this procedure to test a n- degree ROADM node with 80-WXC-C cards
installed.
10. NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test, page 21-71—Complete this procedure
to test anti-amplified spontaneous emission (anti-ASE) hub nodes.
11. NTP-G45 Perform the C-Band and L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 21-74—Complete this procedure to test C-band and L-Band line amplifier nodes with
OSCM cards installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
12. NTP-G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test,
page 21-78—Complete this procedure to test C-band line amplifier nodes with OSC-CSM cards
installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
13. NTP-G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test,
page 21-82—Complete this procedure to test L-band line amplifier nodes with OSC-CSM cards
installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
14. NTP-G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 21-86—Complete this procedure to test C-band line amplifier nodes with OSCM and
OSC-CSM cards installed.
15. NTP-G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 21-90—Complete this procedure to test L-band line amplifier nodes with OSCM and
OSC-CSM cards installed.
16. NTP-G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards,
page 21-94—Complete this procedure to test optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) nodes with
OSCM cards installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
17. NTP-G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards, page 21-106—Complete this procedure to test OADM nodes with OSC-CSM and OPT-BST
or OPT-BST-E cards installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
18. NTP-G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards, page 21-112—Complete this procedure to test OADM nodes with OSC-CSM cards installed
on both Side A and Side B of the shelf and no OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards installed.
19. NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel Acceptance Test,
page 21-114—Complete this procedure to test four-degree or eight-degree mesh nodes.
20. NTP-G187 Perform the Multiring Site Acceptance Test, page 21-126—Complete this procedure to
test multiring sites.
21-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
21. NTP-G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test, page 21-134—Complete this
procedure to test native mesh nodes.
22. NTP-G189 Perform the Node Upgrade Acceptance Test, page 21-139—Complete this procedure to
test an upgraded node. The upgraded node connects an existing in-service ROADM node with two
sides (each equipped with MMU cards) to a native mesh node with two sides.
23. NTP-G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards
Acceptance Test, page 21-147—Complete this procedure to test ROADM nodes with 40-SMR-1-C
and OPT-AMP-17-C cards installed.
24. NTP-G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test,
page 21-151—Complete this procedure to test ROADM nodes with 40-SMR-2-C cards installed.
NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance Test
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Note This procedure tests Side A of hub nodes first, then Side B. If you are testing a terminal node, apply
instructions for Side A of the hub node to the terminal side (Side B or Side A) of the terminal node.
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the hub or terminal node that you want to test. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Purpose This procedure tests a DWDM terminal or hub node with 32MUX-O and
32DMX-O cards installed.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. Complete the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as
necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note If optical service channel (OSC) terminations are created, there will be two alarms, one for
low power on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card and one for the OSC channel.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If a different status appears, complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node
Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
Step 5 Create a physical loopback on the Side A (or terminal) OSC-CSM, OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier
by using a patchcord with 10-dB bulk attenuators to connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will appear due to the OSC signal
loopback.
Step 6 Wait approximately two minutes, then verify that the OSC link is active on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card by observing whether or not the LOS alarm on the OSCM or OSC-CSM (and the
OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, if present) clears. (The OSC termination must already be provisioned. If
not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 14-126.)
Note If the LOS alarm does not clear on the OSC-CSM card, verify that the opwrMin (dBm) Optic
Thresholds setting for the OSC-RX port is not higher than the port's Optical Line power value.
In the OSC-CSM card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optic Thresholds tabs
and record the opwrMin (dBm) setting and compare it to the value found in the Power column
for the OSC-RX port in the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Reduce the Optic
Thresholds setting for the opwrMin (dBm) value temporarily until the loopback test has been
completed to clear the LOS alarm. Reset the Optic Thresholds setting to its original value after
clearing the physical loopback.
Step 7 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band
grid (1530.33 nm). Refer to the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G358
Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24.
Step 8 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the CHAN RX 01
port on the Side A (or terminal) 32MUX-O card using the available patch panel.
Step 9 Display the Side A (or terminal) 32MUX-O card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 11 Change the Port 1 administrative state to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 12 Verify that the Port 1 power level reaches the provisioned VOA Power Ref set point.
21-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note The tunable laser minimum optical output power (Pout) must be 6 dBm. If the output power is
lower than the specified value, the 32MUX-O card might not reach the provisioned set point.
Step 13 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L card is installed, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-5 on the Side A (or
terminal) OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L to ensure that the amplifier is working properly. If an
OSC-CSM card is installed, go to Step 15.
Step 14 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6 on the
Side A (or terminal) OPT-PRE card to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 15 Complete the “DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7 to verify
that the 32MUX-O is powered correctly.
Step 16 Complete the “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7 to verify
that the 32DMX-O card is powered correctly.
Step 17 Restore the default IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) administrative state to the
32MUX-O card port that was changed to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) in Step 11.
Step 18 Repeat Steps 7 through 17 for the remaining 31 wavelengths of the 100-GHz grid to verify the correct
behavior of all variable optical attenuators (VOAs) inside the 32MUX-O card.
Step 19 Remove the loopback created in Step 5.
Step 20 If the node is a hub node, repeat Steps 5 through 19 for the Side B cards.
Step 21 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 22 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power
Purpose This task verifies that the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier
laser is on and provisioned to the correct power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G46 Log into CTC”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
21-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node that you want to test. If you are already logged
in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier to display the card view.
Step 3 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs. If the value in the Currently Shutdown field is NO, continue with
Step 4. If not, complete the following steps:
a. Check the optical safety remote interlock (OSRI) setting. If it is set to On, change it to Off. If the
OSRI setting is set to Off and the Currently Shutdown field is Yes, contact your next level of support.
b. Click Apply, then click Yes.
c. Check the Currently Shutdown field. If it changes to NO, continue with Step 4. If not, contact your
next level of support. The amplifier might need to be replaced.
Note The Currently Shutdown field will not change to NO until an active channel is flowing
through the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Opt Ampli Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 5 Click Reset.
Step 6 Scroll to the right and locate the Signal Output Power parameter for Port 6 (LINE-TX). Verify that the
Signal Output Power value is greater than or equal to the Channel Power Ref.
If the Signal Output Power is not greater than or equal to 1.5 dBm, do not continue. Begin
troubleshooting or contact your next level of support.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf view) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OPT-PRE amplifier to
display the card view.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
Step 3 If the value shown in the Currently Shutdown field is NO, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the
following steps:
a. Check the OSRI setting. If it is set to ON, click the table cell and chose OFF from the drop-down
list. If the OSRI setting is set to OFF and the Currently Shutdown field is Yes, contact your next
level of support.
Purpose This task verifies that the OPT-PRE amplifier laser is on and provisioned
to the correct power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G46 Log into CTC”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
21-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Click Apply, then click Yes.
c. Check the Currently Shutdown field. If it changes to NO, continue with Step 4. If not, contact your
next level of support. The amplifier might need to be replaced.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Opt Ampli Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 5 Locate the Signal Output Power parameter for Port 2 (COM-TX). Verify that the Signal Output Power
value is greater than or equal to the Channel Power Ref. If the Signal Output Power is greater than or
equal to the Channel Power Ref, continue with Step 6. If the Signal Output Power is less than the
Channel Power Ref, check your connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber
Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. If this does not change
the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 6 Scroll to the right to locate the DCU Insertion Loss parameter. Verify that the DCU Insertion Loss value
is less than or equal to 10 dB.
If the DCU Insertion Loss is greater than 10 dB, do not continue. Begin troubleshooting or contact your
next level of support.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power
Step 1 Display the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the administrative state of the corresponding port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI).
Step 4 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 5 Check that the value in the Power column for the port reaches the value shown in the VOA Power Ref
column.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power
Purpose This task verifies 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C card power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G46 Log into CTC”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task verifies that the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C card is provisioned to
the correct power.
Tools/Equipment None
21-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 Display the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the administrative state for the appropriate port to OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI).
Step 4 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 5 Verify that the value in the Power table cell is the same as the VOA Power Ref table cell value for the
port under test.
Step 6 Connect a power meter to the CHAN TX 01 port through the patch panel. Verify that the physical optical
power value coming from drop Port 1 on the Side A 32DMX-O card is consistent with the value read
(the maximum allowed error is +/– 0.5 dBm).
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G168 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Note This procedure tests Side A of hub nodes first, then Side B. If you are testing a terminal node, apply
instructions for Side A of the hub node to the terminal side (Side B or Side A) of the terminal node.
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This procedure tests a DWDM terminal or hub node with 40-MUX-C and
40-DMX-C cards installed.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the hub or terminal node that you want to test. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note If OSC terminations are created, there will be two alarms, one for low power on the
OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, and the other an OSC channel alarm.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If a different status appears, complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node
Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
Step 5 Create a physical loopback on the Side A (or terminal) OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier by using a
patchcord with 10-dB bulk attenuators to connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will appear due to the OSC signal
loopback.
Step 6 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSCM or OSC-CSM card. (The OSC termination
must already be provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure
on page 14-126.)
Step 7 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band
grid (1530.33 nm). Refer to the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G358
Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24.
Step 8 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the CHAN RX 01
port on the Side A (or terminal) 40-MUX-C card using the available patch panel.
Step 9 Display the Side A (or terminal) 40-MUX-C card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 11 Change the Port 1 administrative state to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 12 Verify that the Port 1 power level reaches the provisioned VOA Power Ref set point.
Note The tunable laser minimum optical output power (Pout) must be 6 dBm. If the output power is
lower than the specified value, the 40-MUX-C card might not reach the provisioned set point.
21-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 13 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L card is installed, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-5 on the Side A (or
terminal) OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 14 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6 on the
Side A (or terminal) OPT-PRE card to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 15 Complete the “DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7 to verify
that the 40-MUX-C card is powered correctly.
Step 16 Complete the “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7 to verify
that the 40-DMX-C card is powered correctly.
Step 17 Restore the default IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) administrative state to the
40-MUX-C port that was changed to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) in Step 11.
Step 18 Repeat Steps 7 through 17 for the remaining 31 wavelengths of the 100-GHz grid to verify the correct
behavior of all variable optical attenuators (VOAs) inside the 40-MUX-C card.
Step 19 Remove the loopback created in Step 5.
Step 20 If the node is a hub node, repeat Steps 5 through 19 for the Side B cards.
Step 21 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 22 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G42 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a terminal node with 32WSS and 32DMX
cards installed is operating properly before you connect it to the network.
The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also verifies that each
32WSS and 32DMX add/drop and pass-through port operates properly.
The test also checks the power levels at each transmit and receive port to
ensure that power loss in the cabling is within tolerance. If MMU cards are
installed, the test verifies that the MMU insertion loss does not impact add,
drop, or pass-through circuits.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
1 bulk attenuator (10 dB) with LC connectors
21-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Note This procedure creates an optical loopback on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E line. An optical signal is sent
from the 32WSS input (add) to the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E common receive (RX) port and back out
the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E transmit (TX) line. The OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E line receives the looped
signal from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E TX port. It then passes the signal to the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E common TX port and into the OPT-PRE common RX line. The OPT-PRE sends the signal
to the 32DMX card. The optical signal from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card must pass
successfully through the 32WSS card and out the 32DMX card.
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the terminal node that you want to test. If you are already
logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Display the terminal node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms (indicated by EQPT in the Cond column) appear indicating
equipment failure or other hardware problems. If equipment failure alarms appear, investigate and
resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Note If OSC terminations are created, an OSC channel alarm will appear.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If a different status appears, or if errors (indicated in red) appear, delete the
OSC channels and complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
Provision the OSC channels when automatic node setup (ANS) is complete.
Step 5 Create a physical loopback on the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by using a patchcord with
10-dB bulk attenuators to connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will appear due to the OSC signal
loopback. This is observed as an alarm on Port 1 of the OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 6 Wait approximately two minutes, then verify that the OSC link is active on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card by observing whether or not the loss of signal (LOS) alarm on the OSCM or OSC-CSM
(and the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, if present) clears. (The OSC termination must already be
provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 14-126.)
Note If the LOS alarm does not clear on the OSC-CSM card, verify that the opwrMin (dBm) Optic
Thresholds setting for the OSC-RX port is not higher than the port's Optical Line power value.
In the OSC-CSM card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optic Thresholds tabs
and record the opwrMin (dBm) setting and compare it to the value found in the Power column
for the OSC-RX port in the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Reduce the Optic
Thresholds setting for the opwrMin (dBm) value temporarily until the loopback test has been
completed to clear the LOS alarm. Reset the Optic Thresholds setting to its original value after
clearing the physical loopback.
Step 7 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following
substeps. If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 8.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 9.
Step 8 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24 for the TXP containing the
wavelength you will test. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if needed.
Step 9 Using the available patch panel, connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card
DWDM TX port to the CHAN RX 01 port on the 32WSS card.
Note The tunable laser minimum Pout must be –6 dBm. If the output power is lower than –6 dBm, the
32WSS card might not reach the provisioned set point.
Step 10 Display the 32WSS card in card view.
Step 11 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if
needed.
Step 12 Click the Admin State table cell for the add (CHAN-RX) port carrying the tested wavelength, then
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the
tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX)
Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 13 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 9 to OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm (shown
as 1530.3), you would click the Port 33 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or
Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if needed.
Step 14 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 15 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 16 For Channel #1, change the Operating Mode to Add Drop.
Step 17 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 18 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelength under test.
21-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 19 Verify that the actual power coming from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card shown under the
Power column is equal to the specified VOA Power Ref power (+/– 0.2 dB) shown in the same row.
Step 20 Click the Optical Line tab.
Step 21 Verify that the Port 83 (COM-TX) Power column value is the same as the VOA Power Ref set point in
Step 19 (+/– 0.5 dB). This verifies that the optical signal is traveling correctly through the 32WSS card.
Step 22 If an OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-5 on the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 23 If an OSC-CSM is installed, continue with Step 25. If an OPT-BST is installed, verify the connection
between Port 67 (COM-TX) on the 32WSS and Port 1 (COM-RX) on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards:
a. Display the 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 83 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E card and the 32WSS cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact
your next level of support.
Step 24 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L card is installed on the Side A or terminal side, complete
the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on
page 21-5 to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 25 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 67 (COM-TX) on the 32WSS and
Port 2 (COM-RX) on the OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OSC-CSM and
32WSS cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 26 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 2 (COM-TX) on the OPT-PRE card
and Port 33 (COM-RX) on the 32DMX card:
a. Display the OPT-PRE card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > OptAmpliLine > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in Power table cell for Port 2 (COM-TX).
d. Display the 32DMX card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
21-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 33 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-PRE and
32DMX cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 27 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6 on the
OPT-PRE to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 28 Complete the “DLP-G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power” task on page 21-14 to verify that
the 32DMX card is powered correctly.
Step 29 Display the 32WSS in card view.
Step 30 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 31 For the circuit (channel) under test, click the Operating Mode table cell and choose Not Assigned from
the drop-down list.
Step 32 Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 33 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelength under test.
Step 34 Click the Admin State table cell. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance.
Step 35 Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 36 Repeat Steps 7 through 35 for the remaining 31 wavelengths of the 100-Ghz grid to verify the correct
behavior of all VOAs inside the 32WSS card.
Step 37 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the 32WSS card.
Step 38 Remove the loopback created in Step 5.
Step 39 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 40 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power
Purpose This task verifies that the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C card is provisioned to the
correct power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
21-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 Display the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the administrative state for the COM TX (Port 33 for the 32DMX or Port 41 for the 40-DMX-C)
to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Step 4 Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 5 Verify that the value shown in the power column is equal to the specified VOA Power Ref column
(+/- 0.2dB).
Step 6 (Optional) Connect a power meter to the CHAN TX 01 port through the patch panel. Verify that the
physical optical power value coming from the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C drop Port 1 is consistent with the
Power value on the Parameters tab, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 7 Change the administrative state for the COM TX port to IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI).
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G167 Perform the Terminal Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a terminal node with 40-WSS-C and
40-DMX-C cards installed is operating properly before you connect it to
the network. The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also
verifies that each 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C add/drop and pass-through
port operates properly. The test also checks the power levels at each
transmit and receive port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is within
tolerance. If MMU cards are installed, the test verifies that the MMU
insertion loss does not impact add, drop, or pass-through circuits.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
1 bulk attenuator (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note This procedure creates an optical loopback on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E line. An optical signal is sent
from the 40-WSS-C input (add) to the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E common receive (RX) port and back out
the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E transmit (TX) line. The OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E line receives the looped
signal from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E TX port. It then passes the signal to the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E common TX port and into the OPT-PRE common RX line. The OPT-PRE sends the signal
to the 40-DMX-C. The optical signal from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C must pass successfully
through the 40-WSS-C and out the 40-DMX-C.
Note If the shelf is equipped with an OSC-CSM, this procedure creates an optical loopback on the OSC-CSM
line. An optical signal is sent from the 40-WSS-C input (add) to the OSC-CSM common receive (RX)
port and back out the OSC-CSM transmit (TX) line. The OSC-CSM line receives the looped signal from
the OSC-CSM-TX port. It then passes the signal to the OSC-CSM common TX port and sends the signal
to the 40DMX-C. The optical signal from the tunable lase or TXP_MR_!)E_C must pass successfully
through the 40-WSS-C and out the 40DMX-C.
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Warning The OSC-RX port opwrMin (dBm) Optic Thresholds setting provisioned by CTP can be set too high and
generate LOS and Power Fail alarms for this port while performing an optical loopback on the
OSC-CSM card. CTP provisions the opwrMin (dBm) Optic Thresholds value higher than the power
received during the loopback test, because CTP calculates the thresholds based on the incoming
amplified signal from an adjacent node instead of a loopbacked signal from the OSC-CSM card. To
clear the alarms, reduce the Optic Thresholds setting for the opwrMin (dBm) value temporarily until
the loopback test has been completed. Reset the Optic Thresholds setting to its original value after
clearing the physical loopback.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at the terminal node that you want to test. If you are already
logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Display the terminal node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms (indicated by EQPT in the Cond column) appear indicating
equipment failure or other hardware problems. If equipment failure alarms appear, investigate and
resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate LOS alarms on the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-AMP-17-C cards, and on the OSC-CSM and OSCM cards. If OSCM cards
are installed in ANSI shelves, EOC SDCC Termination Failure alarms will appear.
21-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If other statuses appear, or if errors (indicated in red) appear, delete the OSC
channels and complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127. Provision
the OSC channels when ANS is complete.
Step 5 If no OSC terminations are present, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure
on page 14-126.
Step 6 Create a physical loopback on the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-AMP-17, or OSC-CSM card by
connecting a fiber optic jumper between the LINE TX and RX ports. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards,
connect a 10 dB bulk attenuator to each end of the jumper. The OSC-CSM card does not require
attenuation.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC SDCC Termination Failure alarm will appear due to the OSC signal
loopback. This is observed as an alarm on Port 1 of the OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
Step 7 Provision OSC terminations. Complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Step 8 Wait approximately two minutes, then verify that the OSC link is active on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card by observing whether or not the LOS alarm on the OSCM or OSC-CSM (and the
OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, if present) clears. (The OSC termination must already be provisioned. If
not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 14-126.)
Note If the LOS alarm does not clear on the OSC-CSM card, verify that the opwrMin (dBm) Optic
Thresholds setting for the OSC-RX port is not higher than the port's Optical Line power value.
In the OSC-CSM card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optic Thresholds tabs
and record the opwrMin (dBm) setting and compare it to the value found in the Power column
for the OSC-RX port in the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Reduce the Optic
Thresholds setting for the opwrMin (dBm) value temporarily until the loopback test has been
completed to clear the LOS alarm. Reset the Optic Thresholds setting to its original value after
clearing the physical loopback.
Step 9 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following
substeps. If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 10.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 11.
Step 10 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24 for the TXP containing the
wavelength you will test. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if needed.
Step 11 Using the available patch panel, connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card
DWDM TX port to the correct CHAN RX port on the 40-WSS-C card for the wavelength that you want
to test. Refer to Table 4-1 on page 4-28, if needed. For example, if the tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm
(shown as 1530.3), then connect the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Optical Connector
1, CHAN RX 01 port on the 40-WSS-C card.
Note The tunable laser minimum Pout must be –6 dBm. If the output power is lower than –6 dBm, the
40-WSS-C card might not reach the provisioned set point.
21-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 12 Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if
needed.
Step 14 Click the Admin State table cell for the add (CHAN-RX) port carrying the tested wavelength, then
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the
tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX)
Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 15 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 11 to
OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm
(shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 41 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose
OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if needed.
Step 16 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 17 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 18 For Channel #1, change Operating Mode to Add Drop.
Step 19 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 20 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelength under test.
Step 21 Verify that the actual power coming from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card shown under the
Power column is equal to the specified VOA Power Ref power (+/– 0.2 dB) shown in the same row.
Step 22 Click the Optical Line tab.
Step 23 Verify that the Port 83 (COM-TX) Power column value is the same as the VOA Power Ref set point in
Step 21 (+/– 0.5 dB). This verifies that the optical signal is traveling correctly through the 40-WSS-C
card.
Step 24 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L card is installed, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-5 on the OPT-BST
or OPT-BST-E to ensure that the amplifier is working properly. If an OSC-CSM is installed, complete
the “DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power” task on page 21-103.
Step 25 If an OSC-CSM is installed, continue with Step 27. If an OPT-BST is installed, verify the connection
between Port 83 (COM-TX) on the 40-WSS-C and Port 1 (COM-RX) on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E
cards:
a. Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power column for Port 83 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power column for Port 1 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E card and the 40-WSS-C cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact
your next level of support.
Step 26 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L card is installed on the Side A or terminal side, complete
the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on
page 21-5 to ensure that the amplifier is working properly. Continue with Step 29.
21-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 27 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 83 (COM-TX) on the 40-WSS-C and
the Port 2 (COM-RX) on the OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in Power table cell for Port 83 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OSC-CSM and
40-WSS-C cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
Step 28 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 2 (COM-TX) on the OPT-PRE card
and Port 41 (COM-RX) on the 40-DMX-C card:
a. Display the OPT-PRE card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > OptAmpliLine > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the total output power in Power column for Port 2 (COM-TX).
d. Display the 40-DMX-C card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power column for Port 41 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-PRE and
40-DMX-C cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
Step 29 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on the Side A or terminal side, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the
OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6 on the OPT-PRE card to ensure that the
amplifier is working properly. If OSC-CSM cards are installed, complete the “DLP-G84 Verify the
OSC-CSM Incoming Power” task on page 21-103.
Step 30 Complete the “DLP-G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power” task on page 21-14 to verify that
the 40-DMX-C card is powered correctly.
Step 31 Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 32 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 33 For the circuit (channel) under test, click the Operating Mode table cell and choose Not Assigned from
the drop-down list.
Step 34 Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 35 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelength under test.
Step 36 Click the Admin State table cell. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance in Steps 13
and 14 of this procedure. For example, if the tested wavelength is 1430-33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you
would click the Admin State field and choose IS,ANSI (ANSI) or Unlocked,AutomaticInService (ETSI)
from the drop-down list for both Port 1 (CHAN-RX) and Port 41 (PASS-THROUGH).
Step 37 Repeat Steps 9 through 36 for the remaining 39 wavelengths of the 100-Ghz grid to verify the correct
behavior of all VOAs inside the 40-WSS-C card.
21-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 38 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the 40-WSS-C card.
Step 39 Remove the loopback created in Step 6.
Step 40 Complete the“NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 41 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G153 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Note This procedure creates an optical loopback on the OPT-BST-L line. An optical signal is sent from the
32WSS-L input (add) to the OPT-BST-L common RX port and back out the OPT-BST-L TX line. The
OPT-BST-L line receives the looped signal from the OPT-BST-L TX port. It then passes the signal to the
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a terminal node provisioned for L-band
wavelengths is operating properly before you connect it to the network.
The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also verifies that each
add/drop and pass-through port on the 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards
operates properly. The test also checks the power levels at each transmit
and receive port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is within tolerance.
If MMU cards are installed, the test verifies that the MMU insertion loss
does not impact add, drop, or pass-through circuits.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
1 bulk attenuator (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
OPT-BST-L common TX port and into the OPT-AMP-L (when provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) common
RX port. The OPT-AMP-L card sends the signal to the 32DMX-L card. The optical signal from the
tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_L card must pass successfully through the 32WSS-L card and out the
32DMX-L card.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the hub or terminal node that you want to test. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Display the terminal node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note If OSC terminations are created, an OSC channel alarm will appear.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success -
Changed, or Success - Unchanged. If a different status appears, or if errors (indicated in red) appear,
delete the OSC channels and complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 14-127. Provision the OSC channels when ANS is complete.
Step 5 Create a physical loopback on the OPT-BST-L, OCSM, or OSC-CSM card by using a patchcord with
10-dB bulk attenuators to connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will appear due to the OSC signal
loopback. This is observed as an alarm on Port 1 of the OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
Step 6 Wait approximately two minutes, then verify that the OSC link is active on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card by observing whether or not the LOS alarm on the OSCM or OSC-CSM card (and the
OPT-BST-L card, if present) clears. (The OSC termination must already be provisioned. If not, complete
the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 14-126.)
Step 7 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following
substeps. If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 8.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 9.
Step 8 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24 for the TXP containing the
wavelength you will test.
Step 9 Using the available patch panel, connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card
DWDM TX port to the CHAN RX 01 port on the 32WSS-L card.
Note The tunable laser minimum Pout must be –6 dBm. If the output power is lower than –6 dBm, the
32WSS-L card might not reach the provisioned set point.
21-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 10 Display the 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 11 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if
needed.
Step 12 Click the Admin State table cell for the add (CHAN-RX) port carrying the tested wavelength, then
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the
tested wavelength is 1577.86 nm (shown as 1577.8), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX)
Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 13 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 9 to OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1577.86 nm (shown
as 1577.86), you would click the Port 33 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or
Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if needed.
Step 14 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 15 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 16 For channel under test, change Operating Mode to Add Drop.
Step 17 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 18 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters n tabs where n = the optical connector number that
carries the wavelength under test.
Step 19 Verify that the actual power coming from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_L card shown under the
Power column is equal to the specified VOA Power Ref power (+/– 0.2 dB) shown in the same row.
Step 20 Click the Optical Line tab.
Step 21 Verify that the Port 67 (TX COM) has the same Power column value as the VOA Power Ref set point
(+/– 0.5 dB) in Step 19. This verifies that the optical signal is traveling correctly through the 32WSS-L
card.
Step 22 If an OPT-BST-L card is installed, complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L
(OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-25 on the OPT-BST-L card to ensure that
the amplifier is working properly.
Step 23 If an OSC-CSM is installed, continue with Step 24. If an OPT-BST-L card is installed, verify the
connection between Port 67 (COM-TX) on the 32WSS-L and Port 1 (COM-RX) on the OPT-BST-L
cards:
a. Display the 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OPT-BST-L card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L and
32WSS-L cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
Step 24 If an OPT-BST-L card is installed on the Side A or terminal side, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-5 to ensure the
amplifier is working properly.
21-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 25 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 67 (COM-TX) on the 32WSS-L and
the Port 2 (COM-RX) on the OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OSC-CSM and
32WSS-L cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
Step 26 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 2 (COM-TX) on the OPT-AMP-L
card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode and Port 33 (COM-RX) on the 32DMX-L card:
a. Display the OPT-AMP-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > OptAmpliLine > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in Power table cell for Port 2 (COM-TX).
d. Display the 32DMX-L card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 33 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-AMP-L and
32DMX-L cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
Step 27 Complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task
on page 21-25 on the OPT-PRE card to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 28 Complete the “DLP-G361 Verify the 32DMX-L Power” task on page 21-26 to verify that the 32DMX
card is powered correctly.
Step 29 Display the 32WSS-L in card view.
Step 30 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 31 For the circuit (channel) under test, click the Operating Mode table cell and choose Not Assigned from
the drop-down list.
Step 32 Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 33 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelength under test.
Step 34 Click the Admin State table cell. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance.
Step 35 Repeat Steps 7 through 34 for the remaining wavelengths of the 100-Ghz grid to verify the correct
behavior of all VOAs inside the 32WSS-L card.
Step 36 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the 32WSS-L card.
Step 37 Remove the loopback created in Step 5.
Step 38 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 to restore the original
configuration.
21-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 39 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing
Step 1 If you have installed and verified the TXP_MR_10E_L or TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 2.
If you have not installed it, install the cards using the “NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP,
AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards” procedure on
page 14-69.
Step 2 In Cisco Transport Controller (CTC), display the TXP_MR_10E_L or TXP_MR_10E_C card in card
view.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Line > Service-Type tabs.
Step 4 Click the Admin State table cell for the trunk port and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 5 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 7 In the Wavelength field, choose the first wavelength required by the acceptance test.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Click the Provisioning > Line > Service-Type tabs.
Step 10 Click the Admin State table cell for the trunk port and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or
Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 11 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Purpose This procedure provisions a TXP_MR_10E_L and TXP_MR_10E_C cards
for acceptance testing when a tunable laser is not available.
Tools/Equipment TXP_MR_10E_L and TXP_MR_10E_C
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69
NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 14-78
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 12 Connect a power meter to the DWDM TX port. Verify that the output power falls within –4.5 dBm and
1.0 dBm. If it does not fall within this range, replace the card or contact your next level of support.
Step 13 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-BST-L or
OPT-AMP-L amplifier to display the card view.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs. If the value in the Currently Shutdown field is NO, continue with
Step 3. If not, complete the following steps:
a. Check the OSRI setting. If it is set to On, change it to Off and click Apply.
b. Check the Currently Shutdown field. If it changes to NO, continue with Step 3. If not, contact your
next level of support. The amplifier might need to be replaced.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Opt Ampli Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 4 Click Reset.
Step 5 Scroll to the right and locate the Signal Output Power parameter for Port 6. Verify that the Signal Output
Power value is greater than or equal to 1.5 dBm.
If the Signal Output Power is not greater than or equal to 1.5 dBm, do not continue. Begin
troubleshooting or contact your next level of support.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power
Purpose This task verifies that the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (when provisioned
in OPT-Line mode) amplifier laser is on and provisioned to the correct
power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task verifies that the OPT-AMP-L (when provisioned in OPT-PRE
mode) amplifier laser is on and provisioned to the correct power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
21-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf view) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OPT-AMP-L amplifier
to display the card view.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
Step 3 If the value shown in the Currently Shutdown field is NO, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the
following steps:
a. If the OSRI setting is set to ON, click the table cell and choose OFF from the drop-down list.
b. Click Apply.
c. Check the Currently Shutdown field. If it changes to NO, continue with Step 4. If not, contact your
next level of support.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Opt Ampli Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 5 Locate the Signal Output Power parameter for Port 2. Verify that the Signal Output Power value is
greater than or equal to 1.5 dBm. If the optical power is greater than or equal to 1.5 dBm, continue with
Step 6. If the optical power is less than 1.5 dBm, check your connections and clean the fibers using the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 6 Scroll to the right to locate the DCU Insertion Loss parameter. Verify that the DCU Insertion Loss value
is less than or equal to 10 dB.
If the optical power is not greater than or equal to 10 dB, do not continue. Begin troubleshooting or
contact your next level of support.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G361 Verify the 32DMX-L Power
Step 1 Display the 32DMX-L card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the administrative state for Port 33 to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Step 4 Verify that the VOA Power Ref reaches the provisioned set point.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task verifies that the 32DMX-L card is provisioned to the correct
power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
21-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 5 Connect a power meter to the CHAN TX 01 port through the patch panel. Verify that the physical optical
power value coming from drop Port 1 on the Side A 32DMX card is consistent with the value read (the
maximum allowed error is +/– 1.0 dBm).
Step 6 Change the administrative state for Port 1 to OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI).
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G43 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Note Because the node is isolated and no line-side fibers are connected during the test, the power levels going
into the line-side cards will not be the same as the levels after the node is connected to the network.
Therefore, if the ROADM shelf does not contain either OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifiers, and
OPT-PRE amplifiers on both Side B and Side A, lower the OPT-PRE power thresholds so that it turns
on properly. At the end of the test, you will run ANS to configure the node with the correct parameters
for the network acceptance test.
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a ROADM node provisioned for C-band
wavelengths is operating properly before you connect it to the network.
The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also verifies that each
add/drop and pass-through port on the 32WSS and 32DMX cards operates
properly. The test also checks the power levels at each transmit and receive
port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is within tolerance. If MMU
cards are installed, the test verifies that the MMU insertion loss does not
impact add, drop, or pass through circuits.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the ROADM node that you want to test. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Display the ROADM node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 3 Import the Xml file to fully configure node: layout, patchcords, parameters. See the NTP-G143 Import
the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration File as necessary.
Step 4 Install the cards and fiber up the node according with the xml file settings.
Step 5 Run the ANS at node level and verify no errors are present. See “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup”
procedure on page 14-127 as necessary.
In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are either Success - Changed,
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following step: “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node
Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
Step 6 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 14-126.
Step 7 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf: one an LOS alarm on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, and the other an LOS alarm on
the OSC-CSM or OSCM card. If OSCM cards are installed in ANSI shelves, EOC DCC
Termination Failure alarms will appear.
Step 8 Complete the “DLP-G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels with 32WSS and
40-WSS-C Cards” task on page 21-29.
Step 9 Complete the following tasks for channels that will be added or dropped on the node.
• DLP-G311 Verify the Side A or Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS and
40-WSS-C Cards, page 21-34
Step 10 Delete both OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
Step 11 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
Step 12 Create the two OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Step 13 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment failure alarms appear on the node. If alarms appear, investigate and resolve
them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
21-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels with 32WSS and 40-WSS-C Cards
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by connecting the
LINE TX port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator
to the fiber. (OSC-CSM cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 2 If an OPT-PRE amplifier or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side A (where the physical loopback was
created), perform the following steps. If not, continue with Step 3.
a. Display the OPT-PRE card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-PRE card will
appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) and delete the current value.
d. Type a new value of –30.0 and press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Purpose This task verifies the signal flow through a ROADM node for C-band
pass-through channels. Pass-through channels pass through both the
32WSS or both 40-WSS-C cards. The channels pass through the first
32WSS or 40-WSS-C from the COM-RX port to the EXP-TX port. In the
second 32WSS or 40-WSS-C, the channel goes from the EXP-RX port to
the COM-TX port. The channel is not terminated inside the node. If MMU
cards are installed, the channel passes through the MMU COM-RX and
EXP-TX ports to the 32WSS or the 40-WSS-C COM-RX and EXP-TX
ports on one side. On the other side, the channel goes from the 32WSS or
40-WSS-C EXP-RX and COM-TX ports to the MMU EXP-RX and
COM-TX ports.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 3 If an OPT-PRE or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue
with Step 4.
a. Display the Side B OPT-PRE card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-PRE card will
appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) and delete the current value.
d. Type a new value of –30.0 and press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 4 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OSCM or OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST
or OPT-BST-E card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active
on Side A. If the alarms do not clear, contact your next level of support.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC SDCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 5 Create an OCH-DCN circuit for channel 1 on side A related to EXP path.
The circuit is bidirectional and goes from LINE-RX port of the OPT-BST (or OSC-CSM) side B to the
LINE-TX port of the OPT-BST (or OSC-CSM) on the opposite side A.
Step 6 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card TRUNK-TX port to the Side B
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM LINE RX port. If a Side B OPT-PRE is installed, insert a 10-dB
attenuator on the fiber coming from the TXP_MR_10E_C card.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 7 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 8.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 9.
Step 8 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24 for the TXP transmitting the
wavelength you will test.
Step 9 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 10.
a. Display the Side B OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX) (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
(OSC-CSM). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c., +/– 2.0 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
21-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or
OSC-CSM card. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
g. For the Side B OPT-PRE card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 21-6.
Step 10 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps, then continue with Step 12. If an
MMU card is not installed, continue with Step 11
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 3 (COM-RX) power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E,
OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next
level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX) of the Side B MMU card.
m. Display the Side B 32WSS or 40-WSS-C card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and MMU
cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 12.
Step 11 Verify the Side B 32WSS or 40-WSS-C card to OPT-BST, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM card cable
connection:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS or 40-WSS-C in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) (for 32WSS card) or Port 84 (COM-RX) (for 40-WSS-C card) Power
parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
21-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If an OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete Step
g. If not, continue with Step g.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for
Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or g matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS or 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-PRE,
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check the values again. If they still do not match,
contact your next level of support.
Step 12 Verify the EXPRESS cable connection between the two 32WSS or two 40-WSS-C cards:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS or 40-WSS-C in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 65 (EXP-TX) (for 32WSS card) or Port 81 (EXP-TX) (for 40-WSS-C card) Power
parameter. Record the value.
d. Display the Side A 32WSS or 40-WSS-C in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for EXPRESS Port 66 (EXP-RX) (for 32WSS card) or Port 82 (EXP-RX)
(for 40-WSS-C card). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/–1 dB. If not,
use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS or 40-WSS-C cards. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 13 Display the Side A 32WSS or 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the connector
number containing the wavelength you are testing. Refer to Table 21-2 on page 21-64, if needed. Wait
60 to 70 seconds (or click Reset), then locate the Power and VOA Power Ref parameters for the tested
PASS-THROUGH port. Verify that the Power value is equal to the VOA Power Ref value, +/– 1.5 dBm.
If the Power value is not equal to the VOA Power Ref value +/–1.5 dBm, contact your next level of
support.
Step 14 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 15.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS or 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX) (for 32WSS card) or Port 83
(COM-TX) (for 40-WSS-C card).
d. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS or 40-WSS-C
and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
21-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i.
If not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the
MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 18.
Step 15 For OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps.
a. Display the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or the Port 2
(COM-RX) Power parameter (OSC-CSM cards). Record the value.
d. Display the Side A 32WSS or 40-WSS-C in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 67 (COM-TX) (for 32WSS card) or Port 83 (COM-TX) (for
40-WSS-C card). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the
40-WSS-C card. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
Step 16 If on Side A an OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-5. If instead an OSC-CSM is
installed, no action is needed.
Step 17 Repeat steps from Step 9 to Step 16 for the same wavelength running on opposite direction (side A->
side B)
Step 18 Complete Step 13 for the additional wavelengths that you want to test. If you have tested all the
wavelengths, continue with Step 19.
Step 19 Delete the OCH-DCN circuit created on Step 5.
Step 20 If you used a tunable laser or an installed TXP_MR_10E_C card for this test, disconnect it from the Side
A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM line side RX ports.
Step 21 Remove the loopback fiber from the line RX and TX in the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM
card.
Step 22 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
21-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G311 Verify the Side A or Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS and 40-WSS-C Cards
Note Throughout this task Side X refers to side you want to test (Side A or Side B) and Side Y refers to the
opposite side.
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), display the Alarms tab.
Step 2 Create a physical loopback on the Side X OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by connecting the
LINE TX port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator
to the fiber. (OSC-CSM cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 3 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side X OSCM or
OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms
indicates that the OSC link is active on Side X.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 4 Create an OCH-DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side X related to ADD/DROP path. The circuit is
bidirectional and goes from CHAN-RX port (Add) of the 32WSS or 40-WSS-C Side X to the LINE-TX
port of the OPT-BST (or OSC-CSM) on the same side and backward from LINE-RX port of the
OPT-BST (or OSC-CSM) on Side Y to the CHAN-TX port (Drop) of the 32DMX or 40-WSS-C card
belonging to Side X.
Step 5 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with .
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
Purpose This task verifies the signal flow through Side A or Side B of a ROADM
node for C-band add/drop channels.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you are testing, then continue with Step 8.
Step 6 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24 for the TXP transmitting the
wavelength you will test. Refer to Table 11-35 on page 11-148, if needed.
Step 7 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the following steps. If you are using a tunable laser
continue with Step 8.
a. Display the TXP_MR_10E_C in card view.
b. Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
c. Locate the Port 2 (Trunk) table cell for the TX Optical Pwr parameter. Record the value.
Step 8 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side X fiber
patch panel MUX port that is connected to the Side X 32WSS or 40-WSS-C card CHAN RX port
carrying the tested wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 14, “Turn Up
a Node” simply verify the cable connection.)
Step 9 Connect the TXP_MR_10E_C DWDM RX port or the power meter RX port to the Side X fiber patch
panel DMX port that is connected with the Side X 32DMX or 40-DMX-C card CHAN-TX port carrying
the tested wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
simply verify the cable connection.)
Step 10 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 11-35 on page 11-148, if
needed.
Step 11 Find the tested wavelength CHAN RX port, then scroll to the right until you see the Power Add
parameter. Verify that the Power Add value for the tested port CHAN RX is equal to the output power
level of the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_C card measured in Step 7, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 12 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table cell
for Port 67 (COM-TX) for the wavelength under test.
Step 13 Verify that the power value from Step 12 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS or 40-WSS-C).Port
COM-TX. Power set point +/– 1.0 dBm on Side X. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32WSS or 40-WSS-C card on Side X.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS or 40-WSS-C).Port COM-TX. Power parameter on the
right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 12 (+/– 2.0 dBm), contact your next
level of support.
Step 14 If an MMU card is installed on Side X, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side X, continue with Step 15.
a. Display the Side X 32WSS or 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side X MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
21-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS or 40-WSS-C
and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side X OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i.
If not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side X OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the
MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 16.
Step 15 Verify the connection between the 32WSS or 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E or
OSC-CSM cards:
a. Display the Side X 32WSS or 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. If a OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed on Side X, display it in card view and complete Step
e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
f. Display the Side X OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
g. Verify that the value in Step e or f matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If so, continue
with Step 16. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the 32WSS or 40-WSS-C cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 16 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side X, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 17.
a. Display the Side X OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side X OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power value (for OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
Power value (for OSC-CSM cards). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/–
1.5 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454
21-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-PRE card and the
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check the values again. If they still do not match,
contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side X OPT-PRE card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 21-6.
Step 17 If an MMU card is installed on Side X, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side X, continue with Step 18.
a. Display the Side X MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side X, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side X OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display a Side X OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters
tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or
OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
j. Display the Side X MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX).
m. Display the Side X 32WSS or 40-WSS-C card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS or 40-WSS-C
and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
p. Continue with Step 19.
Step 18 Verify the connection between the Side X 32WSS or 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E,
OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the Side X 32WSS or 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side X OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
21-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side X OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side X OSC-CSM card in card view. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS or 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-PRE,
OPT-BST, or OSC-CSM card.
Step 19 Verify the Side X 32WSS or 40-WSS-C and 32DMX or 40-DMX-C connection:
a. Display the Side X 32WSS or 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table
cell for Port 69 (DROP-TX).
c. Display the Side X 32DMX or 40-DMX-C card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the value in the Port 2 for Side A
and Port 33 for Side B for a 32DMX or 40-DMX-C card.
e. (COM-RX) table cell. Verify that the value is equal to the value recorded in b, +/– 1.0 dBm. If not,
use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and 32DMX cards. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 20 Display the Side X 32DMX or 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 21 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab. Record the CHAN-TX port value under the
Power parameter for the wavelength under test.
Step 22 Verify that the power value from Step 21 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX or 40-DMX-C).Port
CHAN-TX.Power set point +/– 2 dBm on Side X. To view this set point:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C card on Side X.
c. Expand the Port CHAN-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX or 40-DMX-C).Port CHAN-TX.Power parameter on
the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 21 (+/– 2 dBm), contact your next level
of support.
Step 23 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, display it in card view. If not, read the values called for in
Step 25 from the optical test set or tunable laser you are using.
Step 24 Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
21-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 25 In the Port 2 (Trunk) column, locate the RX Optical Power value. Verify that the value matches the power
recorded in Step 21, +/– 2 dBm. If the power values do not match (+/– 2 dBm), complete the following
steps:
a. Remove, clean, and replace the cable connecting the TXP_MR_10E_C RX port to the Side X fiber
patch panel DMX port for the tested wavelength. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors”
procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
b. Repeat this step. If the power values still do not match (+/– 2 dBm) contact your next level of
support.
Step 26 Repeat Steps 5 through 25 for the remaining wavelengths.
Step 27 Delete the OCH-DCN circuit created on Step 4
Step 28 If you used a tunable laser or installed a TXP_MR_10E_C card for this test, disconnect it from the
Side X patch panel.
Step 29 Unplug the physical loopback fiber from the line TX and RX in the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM
card.
Step 30 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G154 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a ROADM node provisioned for L-band
wavelengths is operating properly before you connect it to the network.
The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also verifies that each
add/drop and pass-through port on the 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards
operates properly. The test also checks the power levels at each transmit
and receive port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is within tolerance.
If MMU cards are installed, the test verifies that the MMU insertion loss
does not impact add, drop, or pass-through traffic.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Because the node is isolated and no line-side fibers are connected during the test, the power levels going
into the line-side components will not be the same as they would be in a real network setup. Therefore,
if the ROADM shelf does not contain OPT-BST-L and OPT-AMP-L (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode)
amplifiers on both Side B and Side A, you must lower the OPT-AMP-L power thresholds so that it turns
on properly. At the end of the test, you will run ANS to configure the node with the correct parameters
for the network acceptance test.
Step 1 Make a copy of Table 21-1 on page 21-41 and place it in a convenient location for reference throughout
this procedure. The table shows the 32WSS-L ports and the wavelengths assigned to them. The
32 wavelengths are divided among four physical MPO connectors on the 32WSS-L card. Each MPO
connector is assigned eight wavelengths. In CTC, the MPO connector appears in the card view
Provisioning > Optical Connector tab. Each Optical Connector subtab represents an MPO connector.
Ports 1 through 32 are the channel RX (add) ports; Ports 33 through 64 are the pass-through ports.
21-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 2 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC at the ROADM node that you want to test. If you are already
logged in, continue with Step 3.
Table 21-1 32WSS-L Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist
32WSS-L Provisioning
Subtab Port # Wavelength
Tested:
Pass-Through
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side A
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side B
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 1
RX 1, PT 33 1577.86
RX 2, PT 34 1578.69
RX 3, PT 35 1579.52
RX 4, PT 36 1580.35
RX 5, PT 37 1581.18
RX 6, PT 38 1582.02
RX 7, PT 39 1582.85
RX 8, PT 40 1583.69
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 2
RX 9, PT 41 1584.53
RX 10, PT 42 1585.36
RX 11, PT 43 1586.20
RX 12, PT 44 1587.04
RX 13, PT 45 1587.88
RX 14, PT 46 1588.73
RX 15, PT 47 1589.57
RX 16, PT 48 1590.41
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 3
RX 17, PT 49 1591.26
RX 18, PT 50 1592.10
RX 19, PT 51 1592.95
RX 20, PT 52 1593.79
RX 21, PT 53 1594.64
RX 22, PT 54 1595.49
RX 23, PT 55 1596.34
RX 24, PT 56 1597.19
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 4
RX 25, PT 57 1598.04
RX 26, PT 58 1598.89
RX 27, PT 59 1599.75
RX 28, PT 60 1600.60
RX 29, PT 61 1601.46
RX 30, PT 62 1602.31
RX 31, PT 63 1603.17
RX 32, PT 64 1604.03
21-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 3 Display the ROADM node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf, one for an LOS on the OPT-BST-L card, and the other for an LOS on the OSC-CSM or
OSCM card. If OSCM cards are installed on ANSI shelves, EOC DCC Termination Failure
alarms will appear.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Step 6 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 7.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
g. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 7 Display the Side B 32WSS-L in card view.
Step 8 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if
needed.
Step 9 Click the Admin State table cell for the add port carrying the tested wavelength, then choose OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the tested wavelength
is 1530.33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX) Admin State field and choose
OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 10 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 9 to OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1577.86 nm (shown
as 1577.8), you would click the Port 33 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or
Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if needed.
Step 11 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 12 Repeat Steps 8 through 11 for all wavelengths that you will test.
21-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 13 Display the Side A 32WSS-L in card view.
Step 14 Repeat Steps 8 through 12 for the Side A 32WSS-L card.
Step 15 Display the Side B 32DMX-L in card view and complete the following steps:
a. Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
b. For Port 33 (COM-RX), click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or
Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
c. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 16 Repeat Step 15 for the Side A 32DMX-L card.
Step 17 Complete the “DLP-G362 Verify ROADM Node L-Band Pass-Through Channels” task on page 21-44.
Step 18 Complete the following tasks for channels that will be added or dropped on the node.
• DLP-G363 Verify the Side B ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels, page 21-52
• DLP-G364 Verify the Side A ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels, page 21-57
Step 19 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
g. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 20 Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 21 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you tested.
Step 22 Click the Admin State table cell then choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI) from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,Maintenance.
Step 23 Click Apply.
Step 24 Repeat Steps 21 through 23 for all the ports that are OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance on the Side B
32WSS-L card.
Step 25 Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 26 Repeat Steps 21 through 24 for all ports on the Side A 32WSS-L card.
Step 27 Display the Side B 32DMX-L card in card view.
Step 28 Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 29 For Port 33, click the Admin State table cell and choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 30 Click Apply.
Step 31 Display the Side A 32DMX-L card in card view.
Step 32 Repeat Steps 28 through 30 for the Side A 32DMX-L card.
Step 33 Delete both OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
21-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 34 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
Step 35 Create the two OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Step 36 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment failure alarms appear on the node. If alarms appear, investigate and resolve
them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G362 Verify ROADM Node L-Band Pass-Through Channels
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX
port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST-L cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator to the fiber. (OSC-CSM
cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Purpose This task verifies the signal flow through a ROADM node for L-band
pass-through channels. Configuring a channel pass-through mode means
that the channel passes through both 32WSS-L cards. The channel passes
through the first 32WSS-L card from the COM RX port to the EXP TX
port. In the second 32WSS-L card, the channel goes from the EXP RX port
to the COM TX port. The channel is not terminated inside the node. If
MMU cards are installed, the channel passes through the MMU COM RX
and EXP TX ports to the 32WSS-L COM RX and EXP TX ports on one
side. On the other side, the channel goes from the 32WSS-L EXP RX and
32WSS-L COM TX ports to the MMU EXP RX and COM TX.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 2 If an OPT-AMP-L amplifier (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side A (where the physical
loopback was created), perform the following steps. If not, continue with Step 3.
a. Display the OPT-AMP-L card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-AMP-L card
will appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (1-Line-2-1 RX) and delete the current
value.
d. Type a new value of –30. Press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 3 If an OPT-AMP-L amplifier (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side B (where the physical
loopback was created), perform the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Display the OPT-AMP-L card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-AMP-L card
will appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (1-Line-2-1 RX) and delete the current
value.
d. Type a new value of –30. Press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 4 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OSCM or OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST-L
card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A. If the
alarms do not clear, contact your next level of support.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 5 Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 6 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 7 Click the Operating Mode table cell and choose Pass Through from the drop-down list.
Step 8 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 9 Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for the Side B 32WSS-L card.
Step 11 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 12.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 13.
Step 12 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24 for the TXP containing the
wavelength you will test.
21-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 13 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM LINE RX port. If a Side B OPT-AMP-L card is installed, insert a 10-dB
attenuator on the fiber coming from the TXP_MR_10E_L card.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 14 If an OPT-AMP-L card configured as an OPT-PRE is installed on Side B, complete the following steps.
If not, continue with Step 15.
a. Display the Side B OPT-AMP-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1. Record the value.
d. Display the Side B OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 2 (if an OPT-BST-L card) or Port 3 (if an OSC-CSM card). Verify
that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean
Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber
connection between the OPT-AMP-L card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 21-25.
Step 15 If MMU cards are installed complete the following steps. If an MMU cards are not installed, continue
with Step 16.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 3 (COM-RX) power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-AMP-L card provisioned as an OPT-PRE is installed, display it in card view and
complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-AMP-L Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total
Output Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the MMU card and the OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, or
OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX) of the Side B MMU card.
21-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
m. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU
cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 17.
Step 16 Verify the Side B 32WSS-L to OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, or OSC-CSM card cable connection:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-AMP-L card provisioned as an OPT-PRE is installed, display it in card view and
complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2, then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3,
then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2, then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-BST-L,
or OSC-CSM card. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
Step 17 Verify the EXPRESS cable connection between the two 32WSS-L cards:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 65 (EXP-TX) Power parameter. Record the value.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power value for Port 66 (EXP-RX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L cards.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 18 Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 19 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the connector
number containing the wavelength you are testing. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if needed.
Step 20 Wait 60 to 70 seconds, then locate the Power and VOA Power Ref parameters for the tested
PASS-THROUGH port. Verify that the Power value is equal to the VOA Power Ref value, +/– 1.5 dBm.
If the Power value is not equal to the VOA Power Ref value, +/– 1.5 dBm, contact your next level of
support.
21-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 21 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 22.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU
cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If an OPT-BST-L card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step i. If not,
continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card, and the MMU card.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 23.
Step 22 If an OPT-BST-L card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 23.
a. Display the Side B OPT-BST-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 Power parameter. Record the value.
d. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 67. Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c,
+/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L and 32WSS-L
cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 21-5.
Step 23 If a Side A OPT-AMP-L card provisioned as an OPT-PRE is installed, complete the following steps. If
not, continue with Step 24.
a. Display the Side A OPT-AMP-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side A OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
21-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Locate the Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX) (OPT-BST-L) or Port 3 (COM-TX) (OSC-CSM).
Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 2.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115
Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-AMP-L card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card. Check
the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side A OPT-AMP-L card provisioned as an OPT-PRE, complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the
OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-25.
Step 24 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps, then continue with Step 26. If an
MMU card is not installed on Side A, continue with Step 25.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 3 (COM-RX) power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed, display it in card view and
complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-AMP-L Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total
Output Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If an OPT-BST-L card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not,
continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the MMU card and the OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, or
OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX) of the Side A MMU card.
m. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and cards and
the MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 26.
Step 25 Verify the Side A 32WSS-L card to OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, or OSC-CSM card cable connection:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-AMP-L card is installed, display it in card view, and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
21-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view, and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/–1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-BST-L,
or OSC-CSM card. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
Step 26 Verify the EXPRESS cable connection between the two 32WSS-L cards:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 65 (EXP-TX) Power parameter. Record the value.
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power value for Port 66 (EXP-RX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/– 1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L cards.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 27 Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 28 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the connector
number containing the wavelength you are testing. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if needed.
Step 29 Wait 60 to 70 seconds (or click Reset), then locate the Power and VOA Power Ref parameters for the
tested PASS-THROUGH port. Verify that the Power value is equal to the VOA Power Ref value,
+/– 1.5 dBm. If the Power value is not equal to the VOA Power Ref value +/– 1.5 dBm, consult your next
level of support.
Step 30 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 31.
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and MMU
cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
21-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If not, continue
with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 32.
Step 31 If an OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue
with Step 32.
a. Display the Side B OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter (OPT-BST-L card) or the Port 2 (COM-RX) Power
parameter (OSC-CSM card). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 67 (COM-TX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L card and
the OSC-CSM or 32WSS-L card. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your
next level of support.
g. Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 21-5.
Step 32 Repeat Steps 18 through 20 and 27 through 29 for the remaining wavelengths to be tested. If you have
tested all the wavelengths, continue with Step 33.
Step 33 Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 34 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 35 In the Operating Mode, click the table cell and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for all
wavelengths.
Step 36 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 37 Display the Side A 32WSS-L in card view.
Step 38 Repeat Steps 34 through 36 for the Side A 32WSS-L card.
Step 39 Remove the TXP or tunable laser from the Side B OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM line side TX and RX ports.
Step 40 Remove the loopback fiber from the line RX and TX in the Side A OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card.
Step 41 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
21-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G363 Verify the Side B ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), display the Alarms tab.
Step 2 Create a physical loopback on the Side B OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX
port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST-L cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator to the fiber. (OSC-CSM
cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 3 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OSCM or
OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST-L card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the
OSC link is active on Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the OSC
signal loopback.
Step 4 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 5.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you are testing, then continue with Step 7.
Step 5 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24 for the TXP containing the
wavelength you will test. See Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if needed.
Step 6 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the following steps. If you are using a tunable laser,
continue with Step 7.
a. Display the TXP_MR_10E_L in card view.
b. Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
c. Locate the Port 2 (Trunk) table cell for the TX Optical Pwr parameter. Record the value.
Purpose This procedure verifies the signal flow through Side B of a ROADM node
for L-band add/drop channels.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 7 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the Side B fiber
patch panel MUX port that corresponds to the Side B 32WSS-L card port carrying the tested wavelength.
Step 8 Connect the TXP_MR_10E_L DWDM RX port or the power meter RX port to the Side B fiber patch
panel DMX port that is connected with the Side B 32DMX-L card CHAN-TX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_L card was installed during Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 9 Display the 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 11 For each wavelength that you will test, click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose
Add Drop from the drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Apply and then Yes, to confirm.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if
needed.
Step 14 Find the tested wavelength CHAN RX port, then scroll to the right until you see the Power Add
parameter. Verify that the Power Add value for the tested port CHAN RX is equal to the output power
level of the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_L card measured in Step 6, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 15 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table cell
for Port 67 (COM-TX) for the wavelength under test.
Step 16 Verify that the power value from Step 15 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L).Port COM-TX.Power set
+/– 1.0 dBm on Side B. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32WSS-L card on Side B.
c. Expand the COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 15 (+/– 2.0 dBm), contact your next
level of support.
Step 17 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 18.
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and MMU
cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If not, continue
with Step j.
21-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 19.
Step 18 Verify the connection between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM cards:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. If a OPT-BST-L card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
f. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
g. Verify that the value in Step e or f matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If so, continue
with Step 19. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L or
OSC-CSM card and the 32WSS-L cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact
your next level of support.
Step 19 If an OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed on Side B, complete the following
steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side B OPT-AMP-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power value (for OPT-BST-L cards) or Port 3 (COM-TX) Power value
(for OSC-CSM cards). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If
not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-AMP-L card and the OPT-BST-L
or OSC-CSM card. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
g. For the Side B OPT-AMP-L card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 21-6.
Step 20 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 21.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
21-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If an OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed on Side B, display it in card view
and complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters
tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the MMU card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM cards.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX).
m. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and MMU
cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 22.
Step 21 Verify the connection between the Side B 32WSS-L card and the OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L (in
OPT-PRE mode), or OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed, display it in card view and
complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
21-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-BST-L,
or OSC-CSM card.
Step 22 Verify the Side B 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L connection:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table
cell for Port 69 (DROP-TX).
c. Display the Side B 32DMX-L card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the value in the Port 2
(COM-RX) table cell. Verify that the value is equal to the value recorded in b, +/– 1.0 dBm. If not,
use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards. Check
the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 23 Display the Side B 32DMX-L card in card view.
Step 24 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab. Record the CHAN-TX port value under the
Power parameter for the wavelength under test.
Step 25 Verify that the power value from Step 24 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX-L).Port CHAN-TX.Power
set point +/– 2 dBm on Side B. To view this set point:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32DMX-L card.
c. Expand the CHAN-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Side B Shelf i Slot i (32DMX-L).Port CHAN-TX.Power parameter on the right
pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 24 (+/– 2 dBm), contact your next level
of support.
Step 26 Display the TXP_MR_10E_L card in card view.
Step 27 Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Step 28 In the Port 2 (Trunk) column, locate the RX Optical Power value. Verify that the value matches the power
in Step 24, +/– 2 dBm. If the power values do not match (+/– 2 dBm), complete the following steps:
a. Remove, clean, and replace the cable connecting the TXP_MR_10E_C RX port to the Side B fiber
patch panel DMX port for the tested wavelength. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors”
procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
b. Repeat this step. If the power values still do not match (+/– 2 dBm) contact your next level of
support.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 4 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths.
Step 30 Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 31 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 32 Click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 33 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
21-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 34 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side B patch panel.
Step 35 Unplug the physical loopback fiber from the line TX and RX in the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card.
Step 36 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G364 Verify the Side A ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), display the Alarms tab.
Step 2 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX
port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST-L cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator to the fiber. (OSC-CSM
cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 3 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST-L card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the
OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 4 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 5.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you are testing, then continue with Step 7.
Purpose This procedure verifies the signal flow through Side A of a ROADM node
for L-band add/drop channels.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 5 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24 for the TXP containing the
wavelength you will test. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if needed.
Step 6 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the following steps. If you are using a tunable laser,
continue with Step 7.
a. Display the TXP_MR_10E_L in card view.
b. Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
c. Locate the Port 2 (Trunk) table cell for the TX Optical Pwr parameter. Record the value.
Step 7 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the Side A fiber
patch panel MUX port that corresponds to the Side A 32WSS-L card port carrying the tested wavelength.
Step 8 Connect the TXP_MR_10E_L DWDM RX port or the power meter RX port to the Side A fiber patch
panel DMX port that is connected with the Side A 32DMX-L card CHAN-TX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_L card was installed during Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 9 Display the 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 11 For each wavelength that you will test, click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose
Add Drop from the drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Apply and then Yes, to confirm.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if
needed.
Step 14 Find the tested wavelength CHAN RX port, then scroll to the right until you see the Power Add
parameter. Verify that the Power Add value for the tested port CHAN RX is equal to the output power
level of the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_L card measured in Step 6, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 15 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table cell
for Port 67 (COM-TX) for the wavelength under test.
Step 16 Verify that the power value from Step 15 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L).Port COM-TX.Power +/–
1.0 dBm on Side A. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32WSS-L card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 15 (+/– 2.0 dBm), contact your next
level of support.
Step 17 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 18.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
21-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and MMU
cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side A OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If not, continue
with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 19.
Step 18 Verify the connection between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM cards:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. If a OPT-BST-L card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
f. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
g. Verify that the value in Step e or f matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If so, continue
with Step 19. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L or
OSC-CSM card and the 32WSS-L cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact
your next level of support.
Step 19 If an OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed on Side A, complete the following
steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side A OPT-AMP-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side A OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power value (for OPT-BST-L cards) or Port 3 (COM-TX) Power value
(for OSC-CSM cards). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If
not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
21-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-AMP-L card and the OPT-BST-L
or OSC-CSM card. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
g. For the Side A OPT-AMP-L card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 21-6.
Step 20 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 21.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If an OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed on Side A, display it in card view
and complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the MMU card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM cards.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX).
m. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and MMU
cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 22.
Step 21 Verify the connection between the Side A 32WSS-L card and the OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L (in
OPT-PRE mode), or OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed, display it in card view and
complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
21-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. If a Side A OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-BST-L,
or OSC-CSM card.
Step 22 Verify the Side A 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L connection:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table
cell for Port 69 (DROP-TX).
c. Display the Side A 32DMX-L card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the value in the Port 2
(COM-RX) table cell. Verify that the value is equal to the value recorded in b, +/– 1.0 dBm. If not,
use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards. Check
the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 23 Display the Side A 32DMX-L card in card view.
Step 24 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab. Record the CHAN-TX port value under the
Power parameter for the wavelength under test.
Step 25 Verify that the power value from Step 24 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX-L).Port CHAN-TX.Power
set point +/– 2 dBm on Side A. To view this set point:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32DMX-L card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port CHAN-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX-L).Port CHAN-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 24 (+/– 2 dBm), contact your next level
of support.
Step 26 Display the TXP_MR_10E_L card in card view.
Step 27 Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Step 28 In the Port 2 (Trunk) column, locate the RX Optical Power value. Verify that the value matches the power
in Step 24, +/– 2 dBm. If the power values do not match (+/– 2 dBm), complete the following steps:
a. Remove, clean, and replace the cable connecting the TXP_MR_10E_L RX port to the Side A fiber
patch panel DMX port for the tested wavelength. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors”
procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
b. Repeat this step. If the power values still do not match (+/– 2 dBm) contact your next level of
support.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 4 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths.
21-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 30 Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 31 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 32 Click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 33 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 34 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side A patch panel.
Step 35 Unplug the physical loopback fiber from the line TX and RX in the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card.
Step 36 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G180 Perform the ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Note Because the node is isolated and no line-side fibers are connected during the test, the power levels going
into the line-side cards will not be the same as the levels after the node is connected to the network.
Therefore, if the ROADM shelf does not contain either OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifiers, and
OPT-PRE amplifiers on both the Side B and Side A sides, lower the OPT-PRE power thresholds so that
the ROADM shelf turns on properly. At the end of the test, you will run ANS to configure the node with
the correct parameters for the network acceptance test.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a ROADM node provisioned for C-band
wavelengths is operating properly before you connect it to the network.
The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also verifies that each
add/drop and pass-through port on the 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards
operates properly. The test also checks the power levels at each transmit
and receive port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is within tolerance.
If MMU cards are installed, the test verifies that the MMU insertion loss
does not impact add, drop, or pass through circuits.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 Make a copy of Table 21-2 on page 21-64 and place it in a convenient location for reference throughout
this procedure. The table shows the 40-WSS-C ports and the wavelengths assigned to them. The
40 wavelengths are divided among five physical multi-fiber push on (MPO) connectors on the
40-WSS-C card. Each MPO connector is assigned eight wavelengths. In Cisco Transport controller
(CTC), the MPO connector appears in the card view Provisioning > Optical Chn:Optical Connector tab.
Each Optical Connector subtab represents an MPO connector. Ports 1 through 40 are the channel
(CHAN) RX (add) ports; Ports 41 through 80 are the pass-through ports.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the ROADM node that you want to test. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 Display the ROADM node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate LOS alarms on the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-AMP-C cards, and on the OSC-CSM and OSCM cards. If OSCM cards are
installed in ANSI shelves, EOC SDCC Termination Failure alarms will also appear.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are either Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Note The OSC terminations created will generate LOS alarms on the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E,
OPT-AMP-C cards and on the OSC-CSM and OSCM cards. If OSCM cards are installed in
ANSI shelves, EOC DCC Termination Failure alarms will also appear.
Step 6 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 7.
a. Display the Side B MMU in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU in card view.
21-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
g. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 7 Display the Side B 40-WSS-C in card view.
Step 8 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connector n > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 21-2, if needed.
Step 9 Click the Admin State table cell for the add port carrying the tested wavelength, then choose OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the tested wavelength
is 1530.33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX) Admin State field and choose
OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 10 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 9 to OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm (shown
as 1530.3), you would click the Port 33 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or
Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 21-2, if needed.
Table 21-2 40-WSS-C Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist
40-WSS-C Provisioning
Subtab Port # Wavelength
Tested:
Pass-Through
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side A
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side B
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 1
RX 1, PT 41 1530.33
RX 2, PT 42 1531.12
RX 3, PT 43 1531.90
RX 4, PT 44 1532.68
RX 5, PT 45 1533.47
RX 6, PT 46 1533.47
RX 7, PT 47 1535.04
RX 8, PT 48 1535.82
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 2
RX 9, PT 49 1536.81
RX 10, PT 50 1537.40
RX 11, PT 51 1538.19
RX 12, PT 52 1538.98
RX 13, PT 53 1539.77
RX 14, PT 54 1540.56
RX 15, PT 55 1541.35
RX 16, PT 56 1542.14
21-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 11 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 12 Repeat Steps 8 through 11 for each wavelength that you will test.
Step 13 Display the Side A 40-WSS-C in card view.
Step 14 Repeat Steps 8 through 12 for the Side A 40-WSS-C card.
Step 15 Display the Side B 40-DMX-C card in card view and complete the following steps:
a. Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
b. For Port 41 (COM-RX), click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or
Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
c. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 16 Repeat Step 15 for the Side A 40-DMX-C card.
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 3
RX 17, PT 57 1542.19
RX 18, PT 58 1543.73
RX 19, PT 59 1544.53
RX 20, PT 60 1545.32
RX 21, PT 61 1546.12
RX 22, PT 62 1546.92
RX 23, PT 63 1547.72
RX 24, PT 64 1548.51
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 4
RX 25, PT 65 1549.32
RX 26, PT 66 1550.12
RX 27, PT 67 1550.92
RX 28, PT 68 1551.72
RX 29, PT 69 1552.52
RX 30, PT 70 1553.33
RX 31, PT 71 1554.13
RX 32, PT 72 1554.94
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 5
RX 33, PT 73 1555.75
RX 34, PT 74 1556.55
RX 35, PT 75 1557.36
RX 36, PT 76 1558.17
RX 37, PT 77 1558.98
RX 38, PT 78 1559.71
RX 39, PT 79 1560.61
RX 40, PT 80 1561.42
Table 21-2 40-WSS-C Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist
40-WSS-C Provisioning
Subtab Port # Wavelength
Tested:
Pass-Through
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side A
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side B
21-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 17 Complete the “DLP-G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels with 32WSS and
40-WSS-C Cards” task on page 21-29.
Step 18 Complete the following tasks for channels that will be added or dropped on the node.
DLP-G311 Verify the Side A or Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS and
40-WSS-C Cards, page 21-34
Step 19 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side B MMU in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click Admin State for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and choose IS,AINS
(ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
g. Click Admin State for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and choose IS,AINS
(ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 20 Display the Side B 40-WSS-C in card view.
Step 21 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you tested.
Step 22 Click the Admin State table cell then choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI) from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,Maintenance in
Steps 9 and 10.
Step 23 Click Apply.
Step 24 Repeat Steps 21 through 23 for all the ports that are in OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance state on the
Side B 40-WSS-C card.
Step 25 Display the Side A 40-WSS-C in card view.
Step 26 Repeat Steps 21 through 23 for all ports on the Side A 40-WSS-C card.
Step 27 Display the Side B 40-DMX-C in card view.
Step 28 Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 29 For Port 33, click the Admin State table cell and choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 30 Click Apply.
Step 31 Display the Side A 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 32 Repeat Steps 28 through 30 for the Side A 40-DMX-C card.
Step 33 Delete both OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
Step 34 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
Step 35 Create the two OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Step 36 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
21-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Verify that no equipment failure alarms appear on the node. If alarms appear, investigate and resolve
them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G276 Perform the 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node Acceptance Tests
Note Identify the sides that are already carrying traffic and the sides that are going to be tested.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the mesh native node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. Complete the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as
necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(An equipment alarm is indicated in the Alarms tab, Cond column as EQPT.) If equipment failure
alarms are present, investigate and resolve them before continuing. For information on how to clear
an alarm, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Purpose This procedure checks the power values and the optical connections for an
80 channel n-degree ROADM node. Use this test for both existing and new
installations of 80 channel ROADM nodes. Use this procedure to also test
the installation of a new side to a node. This procedure cannot be
performed on the node on which the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE
card is installed.
Tools/Equipment • Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC
patchcord
• 1 LC-LC adapter
• 15dB optical attenuator
• Optical power meter
Prerequisite Procedures • All sides must be completely fibered (including mesh patch panels);
for more information, see Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
• “NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch
Panel Acceptance Test” section on page 21-114 (optional)
• “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 4 Insert a full C-band tunable transponder into an available slot on the side that you want to test.
Note In this procedure Side A through H is referred as Side x.
Step 5 Connect the TX port of the transponder to the EADi (where i=1) port of the 80-WXC-C card on the side
to be tested.
Step 6 Select a wavelength that is not already used by a side carrying traffic. Select 1530.33 nm for a new
installation. Set the transponder wavelength to the selected wavelength yyyy.yy by completing the
“DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 21-124.
Step 7 Place the trunk port of the transponder in the In-Service (IS) state.
Step 8 In node view, click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs and record the Power value of
the COM port of the 80-WXC-C card for the side you are verifying.
Step 9 On Side x, go to the card view of the 80-WXC-C card and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > WXC Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the EADi
port.
b. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs.
• Set the Target Power to the value recorded in Step 8.
Note The target power is not set if the power value recorded in Step 8 is higher than the channel power
that is allocated and equalized.
• From the Port pull-down menu, select EADi and from the Wavelength pull-down menu, select
yyyy.yy
c. Click Refresh and verify that the target power is reached.
d. Place the trunk port of the transponder in OutofService (OOS) state.
Step 10 To check the wavelengths for the EAD1 port, repeat from Step 6 and Step 9d for the remaining 79
wavelengths.
Note It is not mandatory to test the 80 wavelengths for all the ports (EADi where i = 1 to 8).
Step 11 Disconnect the transponder from EADi port and restore the fiber connection to the EADi port.
Step 12 Repeat Step 5 through Step 11 for the remaining EADi ports where i = 2 to 8.
Step 13 Plug a 15-dB LC attenuator into the trunk TX port of the transponder card.
Step 14 Select a wavelength that is not already used by a side carrying traffic. Select 1530.33 nm for a new
installation. Set the transponder wavelength to the selected wavelength yyyy.yy by completing the
“DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 21-124.
Step 15 Connect the optical power meter to the trunk TX port of the transponder card.
Step 16 Complete the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 21-125.
Step 17 Disconnect the optical power meter from the TX port of the transponder card.
Step 18 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-C card configured as LINE for Side x (slot 1 or 17) and complete
the following steps:
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs and from the OSRI pull-down menu, select OFF.
21-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Disable.
Step 19 Make the following connections:
a. Connect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the Line RX port of the booster
amplifier (OPT-AMP-C configured as LINE in slot 1 or 17) on Side x.
b. Connect the optical power meter to the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier (OPT-AMP-C
configured as LINE in slot 1 or 17) on Side x.
c. Use a fiber jumper to connect the DROP-TX port to the AD port of the 80-WXC-C card for Side x.
Step 20 Create an OCHNC DCN circuit for wavelength yyyy.yy from LINE amplifier of Side x to local add/drop
ports of the 80-WXC-C card of Side x using the “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network
Connections” task on page 16-41 and wait till all the alarms clear.
Step 21 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record
the IL02 (LINE RX->COM TX) insertion loss value.
Step 22 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. For the trunk port,
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and
click Apply.
Step 23 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x, and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
b. Verify the power value of the COM-TX port = (Optical power meter value in Step 16) – (LINE
RX->COM TX insertion loss value read in Step 21) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 24 In card view, display the preamplifier card (OPT-AMP-C configured as PRE in slot 2 or 16) for Side x
and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX power value matches the value in Step 23 b(+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Total Output Power
value of the LINE-TX port.
Step 25 In card view, display the 80-WXC-C card for Side x and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the value matches the LINE-TX port power value in Step 24c (+/- 1dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the COM-RX -> EXP-TX insertion loss.
d. Record the COM-RX -> DROP-TX insertion loss.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
f. Record the Power value of the DROP-TX port.
g. Verify that the EXP-TX Power value inStep 25e = (COM-RX value in Step 25a) – (COM-RX ->
EXP-TX value in Step 25c) (+\– 1 dB).
h. Click the Provisioning > WXC Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the AD port.
i. Verify that the value matches the DROP-TX port power value in Step 25f (+/- 1dB).
j. Click the Provisioning > WXC Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the COM
port.
21-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
k. Verify that the power value in Step 25j matches the COM port power value in the node view >
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs for the 80-WXC-C card under test.
Step 26 In card view, display the 80-WXC-C card for a side different from Side x and complete the following
steps:
Note This step must be performed for a single wavelength yyyy.yy only that is not used on any of the installed
sides.
a. Click the Maintenance > Wavelength Power tabs and select PORT EADi, where i depends on the
value of x. (x,i) = (A,1) (B,2) (C,3) (D,4) (E,5) (F,6) (G,7) (H,8)
b. Record the power value for wavelength yyyy.yy.
c. Verify if the power value in Step 26b is equal to the (power value recorded in Step 25e - 8dB) if a
PP-MESH-4 is used or is equal to the (power value recorded in Step 25e - 12dB) if a PP-MESH-8
is used.
Step 27 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x, and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify COM-RX Power value matches the COM Power value in Step 25j (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
LINE-TX port.
d. Verify that the LINE-TX value matches the power on the LINE-TX port power value in node view
> Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs (+\– 2 dB).
e. Record the optical power meter value.
f. Verify that the optical power meter value matches the LINE-TX value in Step 27c (+\– 1 dB).
Step 28 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit on wavelength yyyy.yy from LINE amplifier of Side x to local add/drop
ports of the 80-WXC-C card of Side x using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network
Connections” task on page 16-46.
Step 29 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. For the trunk port,
choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and
click Apply.
Step 30 To test all wavelengths, repeat Step 6 through Step 29 for each wavelength. In Step 6, set the wavelength
to the next wavelength.
Step 31 Remove the fiber jumper connected between the DROP-TX port and the AD port in the 80-WXC-C card
on Side x.
Step 32 Restore the original connections between the AD and DROP-TX ports of the 80-WXC-C card and the
respective ports of the 15216 40 or 48-channel mux/demux patch panel according to the Cisco Transport
Planner Internal Connections Report.
Step 33 Use a fiber jumper to connect the TX port to the RX port associated to the wavelength yyyy.yy to be tested
in the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD or in the 15216-MD-40-EVEN,
15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN unit for Side x (depending on which 15216 40 or
48-channel mux/demux patch panel the wavelength yyyy.yy is managed).
Step 34 Select a wavelength yyyy.yy on the full C band tunable transponder. Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the
Transponder Wavelength” task on page 21-124 to tune the transponder for the selected wavelength
yyyy.yy.
21-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 35 Create an OCHNC DCN circuit on wavelength yyyy.yy from LINE amplifier of side x to local add/drop
ports of the 80-WXC-C card of Side x using the “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network
Connections” task on page 16-41 and wait till all the alarms clear on the node.
Step 36 In card view, display the 80-WXC-C card for Side x and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
DROP-TX port.
b. Click the Provisioning > WXC Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the AD port.
c. Verify that the Power value of the AD port in Step 36b is > the Power value of the DROP-TX port
in Step 36a – 18dB.
Step 37 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit on wavelength yyyy.yy from LINE amplifier of Side x to local add/drop
ports of the 80-WXC-C card of Side x using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network
Connections” task on page 16-46.
Step 38 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. For the trunk port,
choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and
click Apply.
Step 39 Remove the fiber jumper that was connected in Step 33 between the TX and RX ports associated to the
tested wavelength yyyy.yy on the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD or
the 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN unit for Side x.
Step 40 To verify all the 40 ports of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit
and the 40 ports of the 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN unit, repeat
the previous steps from Step 33 through Step 38 by changing the wavelength yyyy.yy to cover all other
79 available wavelengths.
Step 41 Disconnect the optical power meter from the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier of the Side x.
Step 42 Disconnect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) from the LINE-RX port of the
booster amplifier of the Side x.
Step 43 Repeat Step 4 through Step 42 for all the others sides that are being installed.
Step 44 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-C card configured as LINE for Side x (slot 1 or 17) and complete
the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs and from the OSRI pull-down menu, select OFF.
b. From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Auto Restart.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test
Purpose This procedure tests an anti-ASE hub node.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
21-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to perform the acceptance test.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf: one for LOS on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, and the other for LOS on the OSC-CSM
or OSCM card.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are Success - Changed or
Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Step 5 From your Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, identify the dropped and added channels that
are configured in pass-through mode in both directions.
Note Configuring a channel pass-through mode means that the channel is dropped along one direction
by a 32DMX-O/32DMX or 40-DMX-C (15xx.xx TX port) located on one side (Side A or
Side B) of the shelf, and then added by a 32MUX-O/40-DMX-C (1522.22 RX port) on the
opposite side of the shelf but in the same direction. The channel is not terminated inside the site.
Step 6 Create a loopback on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier by connecting a patchcord from the
LINE TX port to the LINE RX port with a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 7 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSCM or OSC-CSM card. (The OSC termination
must already be provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure
on page 14-126.)
Step 8 For pass-through channels, continue with Step 9. For add and drop channels, continue with Step 18.
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-73
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 9 Verify the first channel connection configured in pass-through mode in both directions:
a. If you are using a tunable laser, set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm. If you are
using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step b.
b. Set the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card to a corresponding wavelength on the 100-GHz
ITU-T grid. Refer to the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G358 Provision
TXP_MR_10E_L and TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24.
c. Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the LINE RX
port of the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 10 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6 for the
Side B OPT-PRE amplifier.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7 for the
Side A 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C cards.
Step 12 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 21-5 for the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 13 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6 for the
Side A OPT-PRE amplifier.
Step 14 Complete the “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7 for the
Side A 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C cards.
Step 15 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 21-5 for the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 16 Repeat Steps 9 through 15 for the remaining wavelengths on the 100-GHz grid that are pass-through
wavelengths.
Step 17 If you have add and drop channels, continue with Step 18 to verify the channels. If not, continue with
Step 30.
Step 18 Set the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T grid that is
not a pass-through wavelength. Refer to the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the
“DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on
page 21-24.
Step 19 Connect the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card to the CHAN RX nn port on the Side A 32MUX-O
card, where nn is the first add or drop channel.
Step 20 Display the Side A 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C card in card view.
Step 21 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 22 Change the administrative state of Port nn to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 23 Check that the power value on Port nn reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power Ref).
Step 24 Display the Side A 32DMX-O/32DMX OR 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 25 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 26 Change the administrative state of Port nn to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 27 Check that the power value on Port nn reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power Ref).
Step 28 Connect a power meter to the CHAN TX nn port through the patch panel and verify that the physical
optical power coming out of drop Port nn on the Side A 32DMX-O/32DMX or 40-DMX-C card is
consistent with the value read on the meter within 0.5 dB.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 18 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths on the 100-GHz grid that are not pass-through
wavelengths.
21-74
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 30 Remove the loopback connection on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 31 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 32 Create a loopback on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier by connecting a patchcord from the
LINE TX port to the LINE RX port with 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 33 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side B OSCM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.)
Step 34 Repeat 18 through 31 for Side B add and drop cards.
Step 35 Remove the loopback on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 36 Restore the default administrative state (IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService) on all the ports
previously set to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G45 Perform the C-Band and L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test
Note To perform L-Band line amplifier node with OSCM cards acceptance test, repeat all the procedures in
this NTP by replacing the TXP_MR_10E_C card with TXP_MR_10E_L card and OPT-BST card with
the OPT-BST-L
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Purpose This procedure tests the C-band and L-band line amplifier node with
OSCM cards installed on both the Side B and Side A sides of the shelf by
looping a single wavelength through the shelf.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C for C-band testing
• TXP_MR_10E_L for L-band testing
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-75
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to perform the acceptance test.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_C cards, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Home View.
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf, one for LOS on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card and the other for LOS on the OSCM
card.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Step 6 Create a loopback on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card by using a fiber with a 10-dB bulk
attenuator to connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Step 7 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 8.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 9.
Step 8 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24, for the TXP transmitting the
wavelength you will test. Refer to Table 11-35 on page 11-148, if needed.
Step 9 Connect the tunable laser transmitter, the TXP_MR_10E_C card, or DWDM TX port to the LINE RX
port of the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 10 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E and OSCM cards
have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A.
21-76
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm continues to appear due to the OSC
signal loopback. An LOS-O alarm appears on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, and an
LOS alarm appears on the Side B OCSM card.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 11. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh.
d. Locate the Port 2 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card has
cleared. If so, continue with Step 11. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST card.
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OSCM card has cleared. If so, replace
the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card. If not, replace the OSCM card. See the “NTP-G30 Install the
DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64.
Step 11 If an OPT-PRE card or an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned as an OPT-PRE) is installed on Side B,
complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6. If not,
continue with Step 12.
Step 12 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 21-5 for the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 13 If an OPT-PRE amplifier or an OPT-AMP-L amplifier (provisioned as an OPT-PRE) is installed on
Side A, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6. It
not, continue with continue with Step 14.
Step 14 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 21-5 for the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 15 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 16 Remove the loopback on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card created in Step 6.
Step 17 Create a loopback on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card by connecting a patchcord from the LINE
TX port to the LINE RX port with a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 18 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 19.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 20.
Step 19 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24, for the TXP transmitting the
wavelength you will test. Refer to Table 11-35 on page 11-148, if needed.
21-77
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 20 Connect the tunable laser transmitter, the TXP_MR_10E_C card, or DWDM TX port to the LINE RX
port of the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 21 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card and the Side B
OSCM cards have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active on
Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback. An LOS-O alarm appears on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card,
and an LOS alarm appears on the Side A OCSM card.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 22. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh.
d. Locate the Port 2 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card has
cleared. If so, continue with Step 22. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E card.
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OSCM card has cleared. If so,
replace the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card. If not, replace the OSCM card. See the “NTP-G30 Install
the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64.
Step 22 If an OPT-PRE card or an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side A,
complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6. If not,
continue with Step 23.
Step 23 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 21-5 for the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 24 If an OPT-PRE amplifier or an OPT-AMP-L (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) amplifier is installed on
Side B, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6. It
not, continue with continue with Step 25.
Step 25 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 21-5 for the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 26 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 27 Remove the loopback on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier created in Step 17.
21-78
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 28 Delete both OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
Step 29 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 30 Create the two OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to perform the acceptance test.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_C cards, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Home View.
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Purpose This procedure tests a C-band line amplifier node with OSC-CSM cards
installed on both Side B and Side A of the shelf by looping a single
wavelength through the shelf.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-79
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate an LOS alarm on the
OSC-CSM card.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Step 6 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port to the
LINE RX port with a fiber and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 7 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of
the LOS alarm indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback, and an LOS alarm will appear for the Side B OSC-CSM card, Port 1
(OSC).
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 8. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, replace the OSC-CSM
card.
Step 8 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 9.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
21-80
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 10.
Step 9 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24 for the TXP containing the
wavelength you will test. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if needed.
Step 10 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OSC-CSM LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 11 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser
and Power” task on page 21-6. If not, continue with Step 12.
Step 12 Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 3 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 14 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A of the shelf, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE
Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6. If not, continue with Step 15.
Step 15 Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 16 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 2 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 17 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side B OSC-CSM card.
Step 18 Remove the physical loopback created on the Side A OSC-CSM card in Step 6.
Step 19 Create a loopback on the Side B OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port with LINE RX port
using a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 20 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of
the LOS alarm indicates that the OSC link is active on Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback, and an LOS alarm will appear for the Side A OSC-CSM card, Port 1
(OSC).
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 21. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. Wait 90 to 100 seconds then, in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode),
click the Alarms tab. If the LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 21.
If not, continue with Step c.
21-81
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 21. If not, replace the
OSC-CSM card.
Step 21 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 22.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 23.
Step 22 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24 for the TXP containing the
wavelength you will test. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if needed.
Step 23 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side A
OSC-CSM LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 24 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser
and Power” task on page 21-6. If not, continue with Step 25.
Step 25 Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 26 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 3 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 27 If an OPT-PRE is installed on Side B of the shelf, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE
Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6 for the Side B OPT-PRE amplifier. If not, continue with
Step 28.
Step 28 Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 29 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and locate the Power value for Port 2. Verify
that the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your
connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco
ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level
of support.
Step 30 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the Side A OSC-CSM card.
Step 31 Remove the loopback created on the Side B OSC-CSM card in Step 19.
Step 32 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
Step 33 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 to restore the original
configuration.
21-82
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 34 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 14-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to perform the acceptance test.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_L cards, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Home View.
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate an LOS alarm on the
OSC-CSM card.
Purpose This procedure tests a L-band line amplifier node with OSC-CSM cards
installed on both Side B and Side A of the shelf by looping a single
wavelength through the shelf.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-83
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Step 6 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OSC-CSM by connecting the LINE TX port to the LINE RX
port with a fiber and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 7 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of
the LOS alarm indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback, and an LOS alarm will appear for the Side B OSC-CSM card, Port 1
(OSC).
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 8. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, replace the OSC-CSM
card.
Step 8 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 9.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 10.
Step 9 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24 for the wavelength you will test.
21-84
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 10 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OSC-CSM LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 11 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G360
Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-25. If not,
continue with Step 12.
Step 12 Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 3 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 14 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side A of the shelf, complete the
“DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-25.
If not, continue with Step 15.
Step 15 Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 16 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 2 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 17 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the Side B OSC-CSM card.
Step 18 Remove the physical loopback created on the Side A OSC-CSM card in Step 6.
Step 19 Create a loopback on the Side B OSC-CSM by connecting the LINE TX port with LINE RX port using
a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 20 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of
the LOS alarm indicates that the OSC link is active on Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback, and an LOS alarm will appear for the Side A OSC-CSM card, Port 1
(OSC).
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 21. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. Wait 90 to 100 seconds then, in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode),
click the Alarms tab. If the LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 21.
If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
21-85
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 21. If not, replace the
OSC-CSM card.
Step 21 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 22.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 23.
Step 22 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24 for the wavelength you will test.
Step 23 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the Side A
OSC-CSM LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 24 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side A, complete the
“DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-25.
If not, continue with Step 25.
Step 25 Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 26 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 3 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 27 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G360
Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-25. If not,
continue with Step 28.
Step 28 Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 29 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and locate the Power value for Port 2. Verify
that the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your
connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco
ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level
of support.
Step 30 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the Side A OSC-CSM card.
Step 31 Remove the loopback created on the Side B OSC-CSM card in Step 19.
Step 32 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
Step 33 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 34 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 14-126.
21-86
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Note Because the node is isolated and no line-side fibers are connected during the test, the power levels going
into the line-side cards will not be the same as the levels when the node is connected to the network.
Therefore, if the line amplifier shelf does not contain OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifiers and OPT-PRE
amplifiers on both Side B and Side A, you must lower the OPT-PRE power thresholds so that it turns on
properly. At the end of the test, you will run ANS to configure the node with the correct parameters for
the network acceptance test.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to perform the acceptance test.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_C cards, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 Display the terminal node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
Purpose This procedure tests a C-band line amplifier node provisioned with an
OSC-CSM card installed on one side of the shelf and an OSCM card
installed on the other. This test verifies that a line amplifier node
provisioned is operating properly before you connect it to the network. The
test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and checks the power levels at
each transmit and receive port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is
within tolerance.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser or
• TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-87
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf, one for an LOS on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, and the other for an LOS on the
OSC-CSM or OSCM card.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Step 6 Create a loopback on the OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port using a
patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 7 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of the LOS
alarm indicates that the OSC link is active for this side of the shelf.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 8. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, replace the OSC-CSM card.
21-88
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 8 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 9.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 10.
Step 9 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24 for the TXP containing the
wavelength you will test. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41, if needed.
Step 10 Measure the TXP output power by connecting the TXP DWDM TX port to a test meter. Record the
results for future reference.
Step 11 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E LINE RX port using a fiber patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 12 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on the side opposite the OSC-CSM, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the
OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6. If not, continue with Step 13.
Step 13 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 14 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and locate the Port 2 (COM-RX) Power
value. Verify that the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check
your connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. If this does not change the power value, consult your
next level of support.
Step 15 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on the same Side As the OSC-CSM, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the
OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6. If not, continue with Step 16.
Step 16 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 21-5 for the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 17 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 18 Remove the loopback fiber on the OSC-CSM card.
Step 19 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
Step 20 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 21 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 14-126.
Step 22 Create a loopback on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card by connecting the LINE TX port with LINE RX
port using a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 23 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card and the OSCM card
have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active for this side of the
shelf.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 24. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card in card view.
21-89
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh.
d. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change
the value to –30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 (OSC-TX) Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change
the value to –40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card has cleared.
If so, continue with Step 24. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E
card.
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the OSCM card has cleared. If not, check your
connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. If this does not change the power value, consult
your next level of support.
Step 24 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the OSC-CSM
LINE RX port using a fiber patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 25 If an OPT-PRE is installed on the same side of the shelf as the OSC-CSM, complete the “DLP-G80
Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6. If not, continue with Step 26.
Step 26 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 21-5 for the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 27 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 28 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Verify that the power value on Port 3
(COM-TX) is equal to the optical power from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card (measured in
Step 10) –10 dB, +/– 2 dB. If not, check your connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115
Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. If this does
not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 29 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on the side opposite the OSC-CSM, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the
OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6. If not, continue with Step 30.
Step 30 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the OSC-CSM card.
Step 31 Remove the loopback fiber on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier card.
Step 32 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
Step 33 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 34 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 14-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
21-90
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to perform the acceptance test.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_L cards, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Home View.
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf, one for an LOS on the OPT-BST-L card, and the other for an LOS on the OSC-CSM or
OSCM card. If OSCM cards are installed on ANSI shelves, EOC DCC Termination Failure
alarms will appear.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
Purpose This procedure tests a L-band line amplifier node with an OSC-CSM card
installed on one side of the shelf and an OSCM card installed on the other.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser or
• TXP_MR_10E_L card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-91
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Step 6 Create a loopback on the OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port using a
fiber patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 7 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of the LOS
alarm indicates that the OSC link is active for this side of the shelf.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 8. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, replace the OSC-CSM card.
Step 8 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 9.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 10.
Step 9 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24 for the wavelength you will test.
Step 10 Measure the TXP card output power by connecting the TXP card DWDM TX port to a test meter. Record
the results for future reference.
Step 11 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the OPT-BST-L
LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 12 Display the OPT-BST-L card in card view.
21-92
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Verify that the power value on Port 2
(Out Com) is equal to the optical power from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_L card (measured in
Step 10), +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 14 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on the side opposite the OSC-CSM
card, complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 21-25. If not, continue with Step 15.
Step 15 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 16 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and locate the Port 3 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 17 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on the same Side As the OSC-CSM,
complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task
on page 21-25. If not, continue with Step 18.
Step 18 Complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 21-25 for the OPT-BST-L card.
Step 19 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the OPT-BST-L card.
Step 20 Remove the loopback fiber on the OSC-CSM card.
Step 21 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
Step 22 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 23 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 14-126.
Step 24 Create a loopback on the OPT-BST-L card by connecting the LINE TX port with LINE RX port using a
patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 25 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the OPT-BST-L and OSCM cards have cleared. The
clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active for this side of the shelf.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 26. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the OPT-BST-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh.
d. Locate the Port 2 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the OPT-BST-L card has cleared. If so, continue
with Step 26. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST-L card.
21-93
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode),
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the OSCM card has cleared. If so, replace the
OPT-BST-L card. If not, replace the OSCM card. See the “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards”
procedure on page 14-64.
Step 26 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the OSC-CSM
LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 27 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on the same side of the shelf as the
OSC-CSM, complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 21-25. If not, continue with Step 28.
Step 28 Complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 21-25 for the OPT-BST-L card.
Step 29 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 30 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Verify that the power value on Port 3
(Out Com) is equal to the optical power from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_L card (measured in
Step 10), +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 31 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on the side opposite the OSC-CSM,
complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task
on page 21-25. If not, continue with Step 32.
Step 32 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the OSC-CSM card.
Step 33 Remove the loopback fiber on the OPT-BST-L amplifier card.
Step 34 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task.
Step 35 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 36 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 14-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
21-94
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the OADM node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are Success - Changed or
Success - Unchanged. If not, complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 14-127.
Step 5 Check your Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file to verify the presence of added and dropped
bands (including four channels at 100 GHz) configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a band in pass-through mode means that the band is dropped in one direction by an
AD-xB-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another AD-xB-x.xx
card on the opposite side in the same direction. The band is not terminated inside the node.
Purpose This procedure checks the integrity of all the optical connections inside an
OADM node with OSCM cards installed on both Side B and Side A of the
shelf. Three connection types are tested:
• Express
• Pass-through
• Add/Drop
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-95
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 6 If no bands are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 7. If a band is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections. Band
pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 7 Check the site configuration file from Cisco TransportPlanner to verify the presence of dropped or added
channels configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a channel in pass-through mode means that the channel is dropped in one direction
by an AD-xC-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another
AD-xC-x.xx card on the opposite side in the same direction. The channel is not terminated inside
the node.
Step 8 If no channels are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 9. If a channel is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections.
Channel pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 9 Create a loopback on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card by connecting the LINE TX port to the
LINE RX port using a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 10 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSCM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.) If the OSC link becomes active, continue with Step 11. If the OSC link does not turn up,
complete the following steps:
a. Modify the OSC Fail Low thresholds. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds
tabs and change the Port 4 opwrMin (minimum power) to –40 dBm.
b. Modify the COM TX Fail Low Threshold. Change the Port 2 opwrMin (minimum power) to
–30 dBm.
c. If the OSC link turns up, continue with Step 11. If the OSC link is still down, disconnect the OSCM
card from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
d. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
e. If the OSC link turns up, replace the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card. If the OSC link does not turn
up, replace the OSCM card.
Note Due to the OSC signal loopback, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm might be raised on
ANSI shelves.
Step 11 If the node has express bands or channels, complete the “DLP-G85 Verify Express Channel Connections
on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards” task on page 21-96. If the node does not have express bands or
channels, continue with Step 12.
Step 12 If connections configured in pass-through mode are present (noted in Steps 6 and 8), complete the
“DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections” task on page 21-99. If not,
continue with Step 13.
Step 13 If connections have add/drop connections, complete the “DLP-G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections
on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards” task on page 21-104.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
21-96
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G85 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards
Step 1 If you are using a tunable laser, set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm. If not, continue
with Step 2.
Step 2 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E LINE RX port.
Step 3 Based on the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, tune the tunable laser of the
TXP_MR_10E_C card to a wavelength (on the 100-GHz ITU-T grid) that runs on the express path of all
AD-xB-xx.x and AD-xC-xx.x cards on the Side B-to-Side A and Side A-to-Side B directions. Refer to
the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24.
Step 4 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, insert a 10-dB bulk attenuator on the COM RX port and
complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6. If an
OPT-PRE card is not installed on Side B, continue with Step 5.
Step 5 If AD-xB-xx.x cards are installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output
Express Power” task on page 21-97 for each Side B card. If not, continue with Step 6.
Note If AD-xB-xx.x and AD-xC-xx.x cards are both installed in one direction, the received express
channels will go into the AD-xB-xx.x cards first, then into the AD-xC-xx.x cards.
Step 6 If AD-xC-xx.x cards are installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output
Express Power” task on page 21-97 for each Side B card. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 If AD-xC-xx.x cards are installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output
Common Power” task on page 21-98 for each Side A card. If not, continue with Step 8.
Step 8 If AD-xB-xx.x cards are installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output
Common Power” task on page 21-98 for each Side A card. If not, continue with Step 9.
Step 9 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 21-5 for the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card installed on Side B.
Step 10 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser
and Power” task on page 21-6. If an OPT-PRE card is not installed, continue with Step 11.
Step 11 Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for the AD-xB-xx.x and AD-xC-xx.x cards along the Side A-to-Side B
direction.
Step 12 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 21-5 for the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card installed on Side A.
Purpose This task verifies the express channel connections during an OADM node
acceptance test.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-97
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 13 Return to the originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Express Power
Step 1 Display the AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the Output Express port administrative state to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI). Click Apply.
Step 4 Verify that the Output Express port Power value is greater than the default no-power value of –28 dBm.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Express Power
Step 1 Display the AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the Output Express port administrative state to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI). Click Apply.
Step 4 Verify that the Output Express port Power value is greater than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies the output express power of AD-xB-xx.x cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task verifies the output express power of the AD-xC-xx.x cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
21-98
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Common Power
Step 1 Display the AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Verify that the Output Com port Power value is greater than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Common Power
Step 1 Display the AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Verify that the Output Com port Power value is greater than the default no-power value of –28 dBm.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies the common power of the AD-xC-xx.x cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task verifies the output common power of the AD-xB-xx.x cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
21-99
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections
Step 1 Identify the first band connection configured in pass-through mode in both directions.
Step 2 Set the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card to the wavelength of the band to be tested. Refer to the
tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24.
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G90 Verify an AD-xB-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power” task on page 21-101
for the first pass-through connection.
Step 4 Complete one of the following:
• If OSCM cards are installed, connect a power meter to the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E LINE
TX port and verify that the Side B amplifier is turned on by the pass-through wavelength.
• If OSC-CSM cards are installed, complete the “DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power”
task on page 21-103 for the Side B OSC-CSM card.
Step 5 Complete Steps 2 through 4 for each band connection configured in pass-through mode in both
directions.
Step 6 If channel pass-through connections are not present, continue with Step 15. If channel pass-through
connections are present, continue with one of the following steps:
• If the pass-through channel connections use an AD-xC-xx.x card, continue with Step 7.
• If the pass-through channel connections use a 4MD-xx.x card, continue with Step 11.
Step 7 Tune the tunable laser on a wavelength (1 of 4) belonging to the channel to be tested.
Step 8 Complete the “DLP-G91 Verify an AD-xC-xx.x Pass-Through Connection” task on page 21-102 for the
first pass-through connection.
Step 9 Complete one of the following:
• If an OSCM card is installed, connect a power meter to LINE TX port on the front-pane and verify
that the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier is turned on by the pass-through wavelength.
• If an OSC-CSM card is installed, complete the “DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power”
task on page 21-103 for the Side B OSC-CSM card.
Step 10 If the pass-through connections use a 4MD-xx.x card, continue with Step 11. If not, continue with
Step 15.
Step 11 Identify the first channel connection that is configured in pass-through mode using the 4MD-xx.x cards
in both directions.
Step 12 Tune the tunable laser on the corresponding wavelength.
Step 13 Complete the “DLP-G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power” task on page 21-100.
Step 14 Perform one of the following:
Purpose This task verifies the pass-through channel connections during an OADM
node acceptance test.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-100
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
• If an OSCM card is installed, connect a power meter to LINE TX port on the card front panel and
verify that the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier is turned on by the pass-through
wavelength.
• If an OSC-CSM card is installed, complete the “DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power”
task on page 21-103 for the Side B OSC-CSM card.
Step 15 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power
Step 1 Verify the TX band power on the related Side B AD-xB-xx.x card:
a. Display the Side B AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the BAND TX Power value is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 2 Verify the TX power on the Side B 4MD-xx.x card (Side B-to-Side A):
a. Display the Side B 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the Power value on the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
Step 3 Verify the RX band power on the related Side A AD-xB-xx.x card (Side B-to-Side A):
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the BAND RX Power value is higher than the default no-power values of –30 dBm.
Step 4 Verify the Side A 4MD-xx.x card (Side B-to-Side A):
a. Display the Side A 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the CHAN RX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Purpose This task verifies 4MD-xx.x pass-through connection power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
21-101
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 5 Verify the TX band power on the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card (Side A-to-Side B):
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the BAND TX Power value is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 6 Verify the Side A 4MD-xx.x card (Side A-to-Side B):
a. Display the Side A 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the Power value on the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
Step 7 Verify the Side B 4MD-xx.x card (Side A-to-Side B):
a. Display the Side B 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the CHAN RX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G90 Verify an AD-xB-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power
Step 1 Verify the Side B AD-xB-xx.x band TX power:
a. Display the Side B AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX (Side B-to-Side A) port related to the wavelength
selected on the tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
d. Verify that the BAND TX port Power value is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 2 Verify the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card RX and TX power:
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
Purpose This task verifies an AD-xB-xx.x pass-through connection.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
21-102
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Verify that the Power value of the BAND RX (Side B-to-Side A) port is higher than the default
no-power value of –30 dBm.
d. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX (Side A-to-Side B) port related to the wavelength
selected on the tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
e. Verify that the BAND TX port Power value is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 3 Verify the BAND RX port on the Side B AD-xB-xx.x card:
a. Display the Side B AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the Power value of the BAND RX (Side A-to-Side B) port is higher than the default
no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G91 Verify an AD-xC-xx.x Pass-Through Connection
Step 1 Verify the Side B AD-xC-xx.x channel TX power:
a. Display the Side B AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the power value for the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
d. If the AD-xC-xx.x card is an AD-4C-xx.x card, a VOA (applied to all four channels) is installed
along the drop path and needs to be activated in Step e.
e. Change the administrative state of the CHAN TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
f. Verify that the power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
Step 2 Verify the channel power for the corresponding Side A AD-xC-xx.x card:
a. Display the Side A AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Purpose This task verifies an AD-xC-xx.x pass-through connection.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
21-103
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Change the administrative state of the CHAN TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
f. If the AD-xC-xx.x is an AD-4C-W card, a VOA (applying to all four channels) is installed along the
drop path and needs to be activated in Step g.
g. Change the administrative state of the CHAN TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
h. Verify that the power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
Step 3 Verify the Side B AD-xC-xx.x channel RX power:
a. Display the Side B AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the CHAN RX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power
Step 1 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Verify that the Power value for Port 2 is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm. The
calculated expected power for Port 2 is the OPT-PRE card Pout COM TX value. Normally, this is +
2 dBm.
Note Actual output power is affected by many factors. Always consider the calculated expected power
to be a general guideline and not a precise value.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies the OSC-CSM card incoming power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
21-104
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards
Note In this task, you will verify add and drop connections in the following order: Side B-to-Side A add and
Side A-to-Side B drop, Steps 1 through 15; Side A-to-Side B add and Side B-to-Side A drop, Steps 16
through 17.
Step 1 Based on the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, tune the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C
card to a wavelength (belonging to the 100-GHz ITU-T grid) of the channel running on the first add path
of the first Side A AD-xC-xx.x or Side A 4MD-xx.x card in the Side B-to-Side A direction. Refer to the
tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24.
Step 2 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the corresponding
15xx.x RX port (on the card front panel) of the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card.
Step 3 Verify the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card (Side B-to-Side A):
a. Display the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the CHAN RX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength chosen on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 21-5 on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier to verify that the added wavelength
turns on the laser.
Step 5 If the add connection uses a 4MD-xx.x card, continue with Step 6. If the add connection uses an
AD-xC-xx.x card, move to Step 10.
Step 6 Verify the RX band port on the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card:
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
Step 7 Verify that the BAND RX Power value is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 8 Verify the band TX port on the Side A AD-xB-xx.x (Side A-to-Side B):
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
Purpose This task verifies the add and drop channel connections for an OADM node
with OSCM cards installed.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-105
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C
card.
d. Verify that the Power value of the BAND TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–30 dBm.
Step 9 Verify the Side A 4MD-xx.x card (Side A-to-Side B):
a. Display the Side A 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–30 dBm.
Step 10 Verify the Side A AD-xC-xx.x (Side A-to-Side B) card:
a. Display the Side A AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
b. If the AD-xC-xx.x card is an AD-4C-xx.x card, a VOA (applied to all four channels) is installed
along the drop path and needs to be activated according to Step g.
c. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
e. Display the Side B AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
g. Change the administrative state of the CHAN TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click
Apply.
h. Verify that the power value for the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
i. Perform the output power check.
Step 11 Connect a power meter to the proper 15xx.x TX port on the front panel (the dual port compared with the
port where the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card is connected). Verify that the physical optical
power value from that port is consistent with the value displayed on the Provisioning > Optical Chn >
Parameters tab for the proper CHAN TX power value +/– 0.5 dB.
Step 12 Repeat Steps 5 through 11 for all add paths of any Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x cards along the
Side B-to-Side A direction.
Step 13 Remove the loopback on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier and create a loopback on the
Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 14 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side B OSCM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.) If the OSC link becomes active, continue with Step 15. If the OSC link does not become
active, perform the following steps:
a. Modify the OSC Fail Low thresholds by clicking the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs and changing the Port 2 opwrMin (minimum power) to –40 dBm.
b. If the OSC link turns up, continue with Step 15. If the OSC link remains down, disconnect the
OSCM card from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
c. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
21-106
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. If the OSC link turns up, replace the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card. If the OSC link does not turn
up, replace the OSCM card. See the “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64.
Note Due to the OSC signal loopback, an EOC DCC Termination Failure might be raised on ANSI
shelves.
Step 15 Based on the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, tune the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C
card to a wavelength (belonging to the 100-GHz ITU-T grid) of the channel running on the first add path
of the first add path of the first AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card on the Side A-to-Side B direction. Refer
to the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24.
Step 16 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the correspondent
15xx.x RX port (on the card front panel) of the Side B AD-xC-xx.x or Side B 4MD-xx.x card.
Step 17 Repeat Steps 3 through 15, applying the steps to the Side A-to-Side B direction.
Step 18 Remove the loopback connection and restore the default administrative state (IS,AINS or
Unlocked,automaticInService) on all the ports previously set to OOS,MT (ANSI) or
Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 19 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 to recover the correct
node configuration.
Step 20 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards
Purpose This procedure checks the integrity of all the optical connections in an
OADM node with OSC-CSM cards and OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards
installed on both Side B and Side A of the shelf. Three connection types
are tested:
• Express
• Pass-through
• Add/Drop
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-107
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the OADM node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are Success - Changed or
Success - Unchanged. If not, complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 14-127.
Step 5 Check the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file to verify the presence of added and dropped
bands (including four channels at 100 GHz) configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a band in pass-through mode means that the band is dropped in one direction by an
AD-xB-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another AD-xB-x.xx
card on the opposite side in the same direction. The band is not terminated inside the node.
Step 6 If no bands are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 7. If a band is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections. Band
pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 7 Check the site configuration file from Cisco TransportPlanner to verify the presence of dropped or added
channels configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a channel in pass-through mode means that the channel is dropped in one direction
by an AD-xC-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another
AD-xC-x.xx card on the opposite side in the same direction. The channel is not terminated inside
the node.
Step 8 If no channels are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 9. If a channel is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections.
Channel pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 9 Create a loopback on the Side A OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port
using a patchcord and a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 10 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSC-CSM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.)
21-108
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Due to the OSC signal loopback, an EOC Termination Failure alarm might be raised on ANSI
shelves.
Step 11 If the OSC link becomes active, continue with Step 12. If the OSC link does not turn up, perform the
following troubleshooting steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator between the LINE TX and LINE RX connection. If the OSC link
becomes active, continue with Step 12. If not, continue with Step b.
b. Modify the OSC Fail Low thresholds. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds
tabs and change the Port 6 opwrMin (minimum power) to –40 dBm.
c. Modify the COM TX Fail Low Threshold. Change the Port 3 opwrMin (minimum power) to
–30 dBm.
d. If the OSC link turns up, continue with Step 12. If it does not turn up, replace the OSC-CSM card.
Step 12 If the node has express bands or channels, complete the “DLP-G86 Verify Express Channel Connections
on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on page 21-108. If the node does not have express bands
or channels, continue with Step 13.
Step 13 If connections configured in pass-through mode are present (noted in Steps 6 and 8), complete the
“DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections” task on page 21-99. If not,
continue with Step 14.
Step 14 If connections have add/drop connections, complete the “DLP-G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections
on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on page 21-110.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G86 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards
Step 1 If you are using a tunable laser, set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm. If not, continue
with Step 2.
Step 2 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the LINE RX port
of the Side B OSC-CSM card.
Step 3 If an OPT-PRE amplifier card is installed on Side B, install a 10-dB bulk attenuator on the COM RX
port.
Purpose This task verifies the express channel connections for an OADM node with
OSC-CSM cards during a node acceptance test.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-109
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 4 Based on the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, tune the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C
card to a wavelength (on the 100-GHz ITU-T grid) that runs on the express path of all AD-xB-xx.x and
AD-xC-xx.x cards on the Side B-to-Side A and Side A-to-Side B directions. Refer to the tunable laser
manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and TXP_MR_10E_C
Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6 for the
OPT-PRE amplifier card installed on Side A.
Step 6 If AD-xB-xx.x cards are installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output
Express Power” task on page 21-97 for each Side B card. If not, continue with Step 7.
Note If AD-xB-xx.x and AD-xC-xx.x cards are both installed in one direction, the received express
channels will go into the AD-xB-xx.x cards first, then into the AD-xC-xx.x cards.
Step 7 If AD-xC-xx.x cards are installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output
Express Power” task on page 21-97 for each Side B card. If not, continue with Step 8.
Step 8 If AD-xC-xx.x cards are installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output
Common Power” task on page 21-98 for each Side A card. If not, continue with Step 9.
Step 9 If AD-xB-xx.x cards are installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output
Common Power” task on page 21-98 for each Side A card. If not, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Complete the “DLP-G83 Verify the OSC-CSM Power on OADM Nodes” task on page 21-109 for the
OSC-CSM card installed on Side A.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6 for the
OPT-PRE card installed on Side B.
Step 12 Repeat Steps 6 through 11 for the AD-xB-xx.x and AD-xC-xx.x cards along the Side A-to-Side B
direction.
Step 13 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G83 Verify the OSC-CSM Power on OADM Nodes
Step 1 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Verify that the Power value for Port 3 is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm. The
calculated expected power value for Port 3 is:
Pout COM TX of last AD-xy-xx.x – IL02 OSC-CSM (COM RX > LINE TX) – 10 dB (bulk attenuator)
Purpose This task verifies the OSC-CSM card power on OADM nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
21-110
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 4 Double-check the value.
Note Actual output power is affected by many factors. Always consider the calculated expected power
to be a general guideline and not a precise value.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards
Step 1 Based on the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, tune the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C
card to a wavelength (belonging to the 100-GHz ITU-T grid) of the channel running on the first add path
of the first Side A AD-xC-xx.x or Side A 4MD-xx.x card on the Side B-to-Side A direction. Refer to the
tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24.
Step 2 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the corresponding
15xx.x RX port (on the card front panel) of the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card.
Step 3 Verify the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card (Side B-to-Side A):
a. Display the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the CHAN RX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 21-6 on the
Side A OPT-PRE amplifier to verify that the added wavelength turns on the laser.
Step 5 If the add connection uses a 4MD-xx.x card, continue with Step 6. If the add connection uses an
AD-xC-xx.x card, move to Step 10.
Step 6 Verify the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card:
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
Purpose This task verifies the add and drop channel connections for an OADM node
with OSC-CSM cards installed.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-111
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. Verify that the Power value of the BAND TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–30 dBm.
Step 7 Display the related AD-xB-xx.x card (Side A-to-Side B direction) in card view.
Step 8 Change the administrative state of the drop BAND TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 9 (Optional) Connect a power meter to the proper 15xx.xx TX port on the front panel (the dual port
compared with the port where the tunable laser is connected). Verify that the physical optical power
value from that port is consistent with the value displayed on the Provisioning > Optical Chn >
Parameters tab for the proper CHAN TX power value, +/– 0.5 dB.
Step 10 Verify the Side A AD-xC-xx.x (Side A-to-Side B) card:
a. Display the Side A AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
d. Display the Side B AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the power value for the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
g. If the AD-xC-xx.x card is an AD-4C-xx.x card, a VOA (applied to all four channels) is installed
along the drop path and needs to be activated in Step h.
h. Change the administrative state of the CHAN TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
i. Perform the output power check.
Step 11 (Optional) Connect a power meter to the proper 15xx.xx TX port on the front panel (the dual port
compared with the port where the tunable laser is connected). Verify that the physical optical power
value from that port is consistent with the value on Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab for the
proper CHAN TX power value, +/– 0.5 dB.
Step 12 Repeat Steps 10 through 11 for all add paths of any Side A AD-xC-xx.x cards along the Side B-to-Side A
direction.
Step 13 Remove the loopback on the Side A OSC-CSM card.
Step 14 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 15 Click Launch ANS.
Step 16 Create a loopback on the Side B OSC-CSM card by connecting the OSC-CSM LINE RX and LINE TX
ports using a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 17 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSC-CSM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.)
Note Due to the OSC signal loopback, an EOC Termination Failure alarm might be raised on ANSI
shelves.
21-112
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 18 If the OSC link becomes active, continue with Step 19. If the OSC link does not turn up, perform the
following troubleshooting steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator between the LINE TX and LINE RX connection. If the OSC link
becomes active, continue with Step 19. If not, continue with Step b.
b. Modify the OSC Fail Low thresholds. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds
tabs and change the Port 6 opwrMin (minimum power) to –40 dBm.
c. Modify the COM TX Fail Low Threshold. Change the Port 3 opwrMin (minimum power) to
–30 dBm.
d. If the OSC link turns up, continue with Step 19. If it does not turn up, replace the OSC-CSM card.
Step 19 Check the site configuration file from Cisco TransportPlanner and identify the wavelength (belonging to
the 100 Ghz ITU-T grid) of the channel running on the first add path of the first AD-xC-xx.x or
4MD-xx.x card on the Side A-to-Side B direction.
Step 20 Connect the tunable laser to the corresponding 15xx.x RX port (on the card front panel) of the Side B
AD-xC-xx.x or Side B 4MD-xx.x card.
Step 21 Repeat Steps 3 through 20, applying the steps to the Side B-to-Side A direction.
Step 22 Restore the default administrative state (IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService) on all the ports
previously set to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 23 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 to recover the correct
node configuration.
Step 24 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards
Purpose This procedure checks the integrity of all the optical connections inside an
OADM node with OSC-CSM cards and no OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards
installed on Side B and Side A of the shelf. Three connection types are
tested:
• Express
• Pass-through
• Add/Drop
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-113
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the OADM node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are Success - Changed or
Success - Unchanged. If not, complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 14-127.
Step 5 Check the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file to verify the presence of a dropped or added
bands (including four channels at 100 GHz) configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a band in pass-through mode means that the band is dropped in one direction by an
AD-xB-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another AD-xB x.xx
card on the opposite side in the same direction. The band is not terminated inside the node.
Step 6 If no bands are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 7. If a band is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections. Band
pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 7 Check the site configuration file from Cisco TransportPlanner to verify the presence of dropped or added
channels configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a channel in pass-through mode means that the channel is dropped in one direction
by an AD-xC-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another
AD-xC-x.xx card on the opposite side in the same direction. The channel is not terminated inside
the node.
Step 8 If no channels are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 9. If a channel is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections.
Channel pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 9 Create a loopback on the Side A OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port
using a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 10 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSC-CSM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.)
21-114
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Due to the OSC signal loopback, an EOC Termination Failure alarm might be raised on ANSI
shelves.
Step 11 If the OSC link becomes active, continue with Step 12. If the OSC link does not turn up, perform the
following troubleshooting steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator between the LINE TX and LINE RX connection. If the OSC link
becomes active, continue with Step 12. If not, continue with Step b.
b. Modify the OSC Fail Low thresholds. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds
tabs and change the Port 6 opwrMin (minimum power) to –40 dBm.
c. Modify the COM TX Fail Low Threshold. Change the Port 3 opwrMin (minimum power) to
–30 dBm.
d. If the OSC link turns up, continue with Step 12. If it does not turn up, replace the OSC-CSM card.
Step 12 If the node has express bands or channels, complete the “DLP-G86 Verify Express Channel Connections
on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on page 21-108. If the node does not have express bands
or channels, continue with Step 13.
Step 13 If connections configured in pass-through mode are present (noted in Steps 5 through 8), complete the
“DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections” task on page 21-99. If not,
continue with Step 14.
Step 14 If connections have add/drop connections, complete the “DLP-G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections
on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on page 21-110.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Purpose This procedure checks the insertion loss for a four-degree or eight-degree
patch panel.
Tools/Equipment 1 fully-tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC patchcord
1 optical power meter with LC input connector
1 MPO-LC multicable (LC if the optical power meter has LC input)
Prerequisite Procedures • The mesh patch panel must be installed. See the “DLP-G28 Install the
Fiber Patch-Panel Tray” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-115
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to perform the acceptance test.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 If you are installing a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 21-24. Refer to Table 21-1 on page 21-41,
if needed.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 21-124 to tune the transponder
to a wavelength not used in any of the sides already carrying traffic (1530.33 nm, for example).
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 21-125.
Step 7 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 8 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX A port of the four-degree or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 9 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,MT (ANSI)
or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 10 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side A (Table 21-3).
Step 11 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 12 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX B port of the four-degree or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 13 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 14 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side B (Table 21-4).
Table 21-3 From COM-RX Side A Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 21-11 on page 21-120
EXP B TX Table 21-13 on page 21-121
EXP C TX Table 21-14 on page 21-122
EXP D TX Table 21-15 on page 21-122
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-16 on page 21-122
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-17 on page 21-123
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-18 on page 21-123
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-19 on page 21-124
TEST ACCESS TX Table 21-12 on page 21-121
21-116
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 15 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 16 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX C port of the four-degree or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 17 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 18 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side C (Table 21-5).
Step 19 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 20 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX D port of the four-degree or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 21 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 22 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side D (Table 21-6).
Table 21-4 From COM-RX Side B Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 21-12 on page 21-121
EXP B TX Table 21-11 on page 21-120
EXP C TX Table 21-14 on page 21-122
EXP D TX Table 21-15 on page 21-122
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-16 on page 21-122
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-17 on page 21-123
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-18 on page 21-123
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-19 on page 21-124
TEST ACCESS TX Table 21-13 on page 21-121
Table 21-5 From COM-RX Side C Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 21-12 on page 21-121
EXP B TX Table 21-13 on page 21-121
EXP C TX Table 21-11 on page 21-120
EXP D TX Table 21-15 on page 21-122
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-16 on page 21-122
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-17 on page 21-123
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-18 on page 21-123
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-19 on page 21-124
TAP TX Table 21-14 on page 21-122
21-117
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 23 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 24 If you are testing a four-degree patch panel, continue with Step 77. If you are testing an eight-degree
patch panel, continue with Step 25.
Step 25 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX E port of the eight-degree patch panel.
Step 26 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 27 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side E (Table 21-7).
Step 28 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 29 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX F port of the eight-degree patch panel.
Step 30 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 31 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side F (Table 21-8).
Table 21-6 From COM-RX Side D Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 21-12 on page 21-121
EXP B TX Table 21-13 on page 21-121
EXP C TX Table 21-14 on page 21-122
EXP D TX Table 21-11 on page 21-120
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-16 on page 21-122
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-17 on page 21-123
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-18 on page 21-123
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-19 on page 21-124
TEST ACCESS TX Table 21-15 on page 21-122
Table 21-7 From COM-RX Side E Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 21-12 on page 21-121
EXP B TX Table 21-13 on page 21-121
EXP C TX Table 21-14 on page 21-122
EXP D TX Table 21-15 on page 21-122
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-11 on page 21-120
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-17 on page 21-123
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-18 on page 21-123
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-19 on page 21-124
TEST ACCESS TX Table 21-16 on page 21-122
21-118
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 32 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 33 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX G port of the eight-degree patch panel.
Step 34 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 35 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side G (Table 21-9).
Step 36 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 37 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX H port of the eight-degree patch panel.
Step 38 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 39 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side H (Table 21-10).
Table 21-8 From COM-RX Side F Verification Table
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 21-12 on page 21-121
EXP B TX Table 21-13 on page 21-121
EXP C TX Table 21-14 on page 21-122
EXP D TX Table 21-15 on page 21-122
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-16 on page 21-122
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-11 on page 21-120
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-18 on page 21-123
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-19 on page 21-124
TEST ACCESS TX Table 21-17 on page 21-123
Table 21-9 From COM-RX Side G Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 21-12 on page 21-121
EXP B TX Table 21-13 on page 21-121
EXP C TX Table 21-14 on page 21-122
EXP D TX Table 21-15 on page 21-122
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-16 on page 21-122
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-17 on page 21-123
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-11 on page 21-120
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-19 on page 21-124
TEST ACCESS TX Table 21-18 on page 21-123
21-119
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 40 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 41 Connect the transponder to the test access RX port of the four- or eight-degree patch panel.
Note There are two local access RX ports on the 8-degree patch panel. Select the left Local Access
port for testing.
Step 42 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 43 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP A TX port of the fouror
eight-degree patch-panel.
Step 44 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 1.
Step 45 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 46 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel or less than 8dB for a 4-degree patch panel.
Step 47 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP B TX port of the fouror
eight-degree patch panel.
Step 48 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 2.
Step 49 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 50 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel or less than 8dB for a 4-degree patch panel.
Step 51 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP C TX port of the fouror
eight-degree patch panel.
Step 52 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 3.
Step 53 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 54 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel or less than 8dB for a 4-degree patch panel.
Step 55 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP D TX port of the fouror
eight-degree patch panel.
Step 56 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 4.
Step 57 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Table 21-10 From COM-RX Side H Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 21-12 on page 21-121
EXP B TX Table 21-13 on page 21-121
EXP C TX Table 21-14 on page 21-122
EXP D TX Table 21-15 on page 21-122
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-16 on page 21-122
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-17 on page 21-123
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-18 on page 21-123
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 21-11 on page 21-120
TEST ACCESS TX Table 21-19 on page 21-124
21-120
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 58 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel or less than 8dB for a 4-degree patch panel.
Step 59 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP E TX port of the fouror
eight-degree patch panel.
Step 60 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 5.
Step 61 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 62 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel.
Step 63 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP F TX port of the fouror
eight-degree patch panel.
Step 64 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 6.
Step 65 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 66 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel.
Step 67 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP G TX port of the fouror
eight-degree patch panel.
Step 68 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 7.
Step 69 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 70 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel.
Step 71 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP H TX port of the fouror
eight-degree patch panel.
Step 72 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 8.
Step 73 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 74 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel.
Step 75 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 76 Repeat Steps 41 through 75 for the right side Local Access RX port.
Step 77 Complete the “NTP-G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test” procedure on page 21-134.
The tables below are used for verification in Steps 10 through 39 of this procedure.
Table 21-11 Same Side Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
21-121
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 21-12 Side A Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 IL < 11 dB IL < 8 dB
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 21-13 Side B Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 IL < 11 dB IL < 8 dB
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 21-11 Same Side Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
21-122
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Table 21-14 Side C Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 IL < 11 dB IL < 8 dB
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 21-15 Side D Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 IL < 11 dB IL < 8 dB
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 21-16 Side E Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
21-123
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
IL < 11 dB —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 21-17 Side F Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
IL < 11 dB —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 21-18 Side G Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 21-16 Side E Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
21-124
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength
Step 1 In card view, display the transponder card.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 In the Wavelength field, choose the desired wavelength (C-Band, odd) from the drop-down list.
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
IL < 11 dB —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 21-19 Side H Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
IL < 11 dB —
Table 21-18 Side G Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Purpose This task tunes transponder wavelength.
Tools/Equipment Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC
patchcord
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-125
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module > Pluggable Port Module tabs and click Create to
preprovision a pluggable port module (PPM), if necessary.
Step 6 Click Ok, then Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power
Step 1 Connect the optical power meter to the transponder output.
Step 2 Display card view for the transponder card.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from
the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 4 Record the optical power meter value.
Step 5 Choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 6 Disconnect the optical power meter from the TX port of the transponder card.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task checks and records optical power.
Tools/Equipment Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC
patchcord
Optical power meter
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
ANS successfully completed
All sides completely wired (including patch panels)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-126
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G187 Perform the Multiring Site Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 14,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the multiring node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 Insert a full C-band tunable transponder card into an available slot.
Step 5 Plug a 15 dB LC attenuator to the TX port of the transponder card.
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 21-124 to tune the transponder
to a wavelength yyyy.yy (1530.33 nm, for example).
Step 7 Complete the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 21-125.
Step 8 Disconnect the optical power meter from the TX port of the transponder card.
Purpose This procedure checks the connections and the output power values for a
multiring node. A multiring node connects two existing in-service
two-sides ROADM nodes with two sides (each equipped with MMU
cards).
Tools/Equipment Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source
1 15-dB LC attenuator
1 optical power meter with LC input connector
1 MPO-LC multicable (LC if the optical power meter has LC input)
3 LC-LC adapters
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
All sides must be completely wired (including patch panels), except the
connections with the MMU cards in the existing in-service ROADM node;
for more information, see Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel
Acceptance Test, page 21-114 (as needed)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-127
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 9 Make the following connections:
a. Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15 dB attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card on Side A.
b. Connect the optical power meter to the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A.
c. Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port to the patchcord in the
COM-RX port of the Side B 40-WXC-C card.
d. Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port to the patchcord in the
COM-RX port of the Side C 40-WXC-C card.
e. Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port to the patchcord in the
COM-RX port of the Side D 40-WXC-C card.
Step 10 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs. Complete the following:
a. Record the values of the following parameters:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side A
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side C
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side C
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side D
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side D
b. Change the values of the parameters as follows:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A = 1 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side A = –30 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B = 1 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B = –30 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side C = 1 dBm
21-128
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side C = –30 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side D = 1 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side D = –30 dBm
Step 11 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. Choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 12 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side A and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Power value of the COM-RX
port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX value matches the transponder card optical power meter value recorded in
the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 21-125 (+\–1dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
e. Verify that the EXP-TX port power value = (COM-RX port power value in Step a) – (CRX -> EXP
insertion loss value in Step d) (+\– 1dB).
Step 13 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side A and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 21-131.
Step 14 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side B and complete the following:
a. Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 21-132. Set the
Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 1.
b. Complete the “DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value” task on page 21-133.
Step 15 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side B and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 21-131.
Step 16 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 21-132. Set the
Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 1.
b. Complete the “DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value” task on page 21-133.
Step 17 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side C and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 21-131.
Step 18 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side D and complete the following:
a. Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 21-132. Set the
Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 1.
b. Complete the “DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value” task on page 21-133.
Step 19 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side D and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 21-131.
Step 20 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side A and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C
OCHNC Parameters” task on page 21-132. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert
Value tabs to 2.
21-129
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 21 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side A and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 21-131.
Step 22 Record the optical power meter value and verify that the optical power meter value matches the value
recorded in the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 21-125 (+\– 1dB).
Step 23 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side A. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides B,
C, and D of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 24 To test all wavelengths, repeat Steps 6, 11, 18, and 20 for all supported wavelengths.
Step 25 In card view, display the transponder card and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 26 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port for Side B of
the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 27 Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port with the patchcord in the
COM-RX port for Side A of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 28 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 21-124 to tune the transponder
card to the wavelength set in Step 6.
Step 29 Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15-dB-attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card for Side B.
Step 30 In card view, display the transponder card. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose IS (ANSI)
or Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 31 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 21-132 for Sides C and
D of the 40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 2.
Step 32 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 21-132 for Side B of the
40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 3.
Step 33 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side B. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides A,
C, and D.
Step 34 To test all wavelengths, repeat Steps 28 through 33 (omit Step 29) for all supported wavelengths.
Step 35 In card view, display the transponder card. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 36 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side C of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 37 Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port to the patchcord in the
COM-RX port for Side B of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 38 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 21-124 to tune the transponder
card to the wavelength set in Step 6.
Step 39 Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card for Side C.
Step 40 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 41 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 21-132 for Sides A
and D of the 40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 3.
21-130
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 42 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 21-132 for Side C of the
40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 4.
Step 43 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card and click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the Return
Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides A, B, and
D.
Step 44 To test all wavelengths, repeat Steps 38 through 43 (omit Step 39) for all supported wavelengths.
Step 45 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side D of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 46 Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port to the patchcord in the
COM-RX of Side C of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 47 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 21-124 to tune the transponder
card to the desired wavelength for testing.
Step 48 Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card of Side D.
Step 49 In card view, display the transponder card. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose IS (ANSI)
or Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 50 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 21-132 for Sides A and
B of the 40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 4.
Step 51 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 21-132 for Side C of the
40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 1.
Step 52 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side D. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides
A, B, and C of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 53 To test all wavelengths, repeat Steps 47 through 52 for all supported wavelengths, except Step 48.
Step 54 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs. Restore the values recorded in Step 10a for the following parameters:
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side C
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side C
• Power on the COM-TX port of the pre-amplifier on Side D
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D
21-131
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side D
Step 55 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 56 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side A of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 57 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side B of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 58 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side C of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 59 Restore the connections to the MMU cards of the eight sides using the patchcords tested in this
procedure:
a. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 1.
b. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 1.
c. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 1.
d. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 1.
e. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 2.
f. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 2.
g. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 2.
h. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-434 Record the OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value
Purpose This task records the power value of the OPT-AMP-17 card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value, page 21-133
ANS successfully completed
All sides completely wired (including patch panels)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-132
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 In card view for the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side x, complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify the COM-RX port power value matches the value of the EXP-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card
in the “DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value” task on page 21-133 (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Op. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Total Output Power
value of the COM-TX port.
d. Verify that the value is 1 dBm (+\– 1 dB).
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters
Step 1 In the 40-WXC-C card view for Side x, complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs and set the parameters as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –15.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input Port = x (EXP-RX) (for x, refer to the step in the originating procedure)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 13
– Wavelength = Value set in the originating procedure
b. Click Apply.
c. Click Refresh. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength field, verify that the Actual
Power (dBm) is –15 +\– 0.5dB.
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task sets the OCHNC parameters for the 40-WXC-C card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
ANS successfully completed
All sides completely wired (including patch panels)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-133
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value
Step 1 In card view for the 40-WXC-C card for Side x, complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
b. Verify that the COM-TX port value matches Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength value
retrieved in the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 21-132 (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
d. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss value.
e. Verify that the EXP-TX port power value = (COM-TX port power value) – (CRX -> EXP insertion
loss value) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task records the power value of the 40-WXC-C card for a multiring
configuration.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power, page 21-125
DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters, page 21-132
ANS successfully completed
All sides completely wired (including patch panels)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-134
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test
Step 1 Identify the sides that are already carrying traffic and which sides are going to be tested.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the mesh native node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(An equipment alarm is indicated in the Alarms tab, Cond column as EQPT.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 5 Insert a full C-band tunable transponder into an available slot of the side that you want to test (Side A
through H, referred to as Side x in this procedure).
Step 6 Plug a 15-dB LC attenuator into the trunk TX port of the transponder card.
Step 7 Select a wavelength that is not used on any of the sides for carrying traffic (or 1530.33 nm if it is a new
installation). Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 21-124 to tune
the transponder for the selected wavelength yyyy.yy.
Step 8 Connect the optical power meter to the trunk TX port of the transponder card.
Step 9 Complete the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 21-125.
Step 10 Disconnect the optical power meter from the TX port of the transponder card.
Step 11 In card view, display the OSC-CSM or OSCM card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs and from the OSRI pull-down menu, select OFF.
b. From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Disable.
Purpose This procedure checks the power values and the optical connections for a
native mesh node. Use this test for both new installations and directional
upgrades of native mesh nodes. Use this to also test the installation of a
new side n to a node.
Tools/Equipment • Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC
patchcord
• 1 MPO-LC multicable (LC if the optical power meter has LC input)
• 1 LC-LC adapter
Prerequisite Procedures • All sides must be completely fibered (including mesh patch panels);
for more information, see Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
• NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch
Panel Acceptance Test, page 21-114 (optional)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-135
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 12 Make the following connections:
a. Connect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the Line RX port of the booster
amplifier (OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C, or OSC-CSM) of Side x.
b. Connect the optical power meter to the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier (OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C, or OSC-CSM) of Side x.
c. Use a fiber to connect the 40-DMX-C TX port to the 40-MUX-C RX port for the selected
wavelength yyyy.yy in the 15454-PP-80-LC patch panel for Side x.
Step 13 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs. Complete the following:
a. Record the actual values of the following parameters:
– Power on the COM-TX port of preamplifier on Side X
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
– Power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on Side X
b. Set the previous values of the parameters as follows:
– Power on the COM-TX port of preamplifier on Side X = +8 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X = +8 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X = –18 dBm
– Power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on Side X = –1 dBm
c. Click Apply.
Step 14 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 15 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the VOA Attenuation Ref.
value y.
b. Set the VOA Attenuation Calib. to –y.
c. Choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
d. Click Apply.
Step 16 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side x. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs, and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State
drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 17 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record
the IL02 (LINE RX->COM TX) insertion loss value.
Step 18 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. For trunk port, choose
OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and click
Apply.
Step 19 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x, and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
b. Verify the power value of the COM-TX port = (Optical power meter value in Step 9) – (LINE
RX->COM TX insertion loss value read in Step 17) (+\– 1 dB).
21-136
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 20 In card view, display the preamplifier card (OPT-PRE, OPT-AMP-C, or OPT-AMP-17C) for Side x and
complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX power value matches the value in Step 19b (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Total Output Power
value of the COM-TX port.
d. Verify that the value is +8 dBm (+\– 1 dB).
Step 21 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the value matches the COM-TX port power value in Step 20c (+/- 1dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss.
d. Record the CRX -> DROP insertion loss.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
f. On the same screen, record the Power value of the DROP-TX port.
g. Verify that the EXP-TX Power value in Step 21e = (COM-RX value in Step 21a) – (CRX -> EXP
value in Step 21c) (+\– 1 dB).
h. Verify that the DROP-TX value in Step 21f = (COM-RX value in Step 21a) – (CRX -> DROP value
in Step 21d) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 22 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX power value in Step a matches the value in Step 21f (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the 1RX -> xTX insertion loss (where x is the channel
number associated with yyyy.yy wavelength).
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
CHAN-TX port associated with yyyy.yy wavelength.
e. Verify that the CHAN-TX port Power value = (COM-RX power value in Step 22a) – (1RX -> xTX
insertion loss value in Step 22c) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 23 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
CHAN-RX port associated with the selected yyyy.yy wavelength.
b. Verify that the CHAN-RX value in Step 23a = (CHAN-TX value in Step 22d) (+\– 1.5 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the xRX -> 1TX insertion loss (where x is the channel
number associated with yyyy.yy wavelength).
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs, record the Power value of the COM-TX
port.
e. Verify that the COM-TX Power value = (CHAN-RX value in Step 23a) – (yRX -> 1TX value in
Step 23c) (+\– 1 dB).
21-137
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 24 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs, and in the Insert Value section, set the available parameters
as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –18.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input port = 9 (ADD-RX)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 13
– Wavelength = yyyy.yy (wavelength selected in Step 7)
b. Click Apply.
c. In the Return Value COM-TX section on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and verify that the
Actual Power (dBm) is the Target Power from Step 24a +\– 0.5 dB. If the channel does not come up,
reduce VOA Attenuation by 5dB in Step 24a until the target power is reached.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
e. Verify that the COM-TX Power value matches the Actual Power value in Step 24c (+\– 1 dB).
Step 25 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x, and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify COM-RX Power value matches the COM-TX Power value in Step 24d (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
LINE-TX port.
d. Verify that the LINE-TX value matches the power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on
Side x recorded in Step 13b (+\– 1 dB).
e. Record the optical power meter value.
f. Verify that the optical power meter value matches the LINE-TX value in Step 25c (+\– 1 dB).
Step 26 Select the 40-WXC-C card on Side n where n is A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H but n is not equal to x, go to
the card view and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs, and in the Insert Values section, set the available
parameters as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –22.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input port = x (EXP-RX)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 20
– Wavelength = yyyy.yy (wavelength selected in Step 7)
b. Click Apply.
21-138
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and verify that the
Actual Power (dBm) is Target Power of Step 26a +\– 0.5 dB. If the channel does not come up, reduce
VOA Attenuation by 5dB in Step 26a until the target power is reached.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
e. Verify that the value of the COM-TX port matches the Actual Power value in Step 26c (+\– 1 dB).
f. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area,
click Refresh and then Delete.
Step 27 Repeat Step 26 for all the others of Side n, where n is A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H but n not equal to x.
Step 28 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side x and click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete.
Step 29 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. For trunk port, choose
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 30 To test all wavelengths, repeat Step 7 through Step 29 for each wavelength. In Step 7, set the wavelength
to the next odd wavelength.
Step 31 Disconnect the optical power meter from the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier of the Side x.
Step 32 Disconnect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) from the LINE-RX port of the
booster amplifier of the Side x.
Step 33 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side x and click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs. Complete the following:
a. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the Admin State
drop-down list.
b. Change the VOA Attenuation Calib. from the existing value to 0 (zero).
c. Click Apply.
Step 34 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side x and click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the Admin
State drop-down list and click Apply.
Step 35 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs and restore the values recorded in Step 13a for the following
parameters:
• Power on the COM-TX port of preamplifier on Side X
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C on Side X
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C on Side X
• Power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on Side X
Step 36 Repeat Steps 5 through 35 for all the others sides that are being installed.
Step 37 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
21-139
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G189 Perform the Node Upgrade Acceptance Test
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the upgrade node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 Insert a full C-band tunable transponder into an available slot for the node that you want to test.
Step 5 Plug a 15-dB LC attenuator to the TX port of the transponder.
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 21-124 to tune the transponder
to a wavelength yyyy.yy that is not used in any of the sides already carrying traffic (or 1530.33 nm if it
is a new installation).
Step 7 Complete the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 21-125.
Step 8 Disconnect the optical power meter from the TX port of the transponder card.
Step 9 Make the following connections:
a. Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card on Side A.
b. Connect the optical power meter to the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A.
Purpose This procedure checks the connections and the output power values for a
node in an upgraded ring. The upgraded node connects an existing
in-service ROADM node with two sides (each equipped with MMU cards)
to a native mesh node with two sides.
Tools/Equipment Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC
patchcord
1 15-dB LC attenuator
1 optical power meter with LC input connector
2 LC-LC patchcords (or at least one for each native side)
1 LC-LC adapter
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
All sides completely wired (including patch panels), except the
connections with the MMU cards in the existing in-service ROADM node;
for more information, see Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel
Acceptance Test, page 21-114
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-140
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Connect, using the LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port with the patchcord from
the COM-RX port of the Side B 40-WXC-C card.
Step 10 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs. Complete the following:
a. Record the values of the following parameters:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side A
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B
b. Change the values of the parameters as follows:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A = 1 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side A = –30 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B = 1 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B = –30 dBm
c. Click Apply.
d. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 11 Display card view for the OPT-AMP-17 card on Side A and click the Provisioning > Card tabs. From
the Working Card Mode drop-down list, verify that OPT-PRE appears and if not, choose it. Click Apply.
Repeat for Side B.
Step 12 Display card view for the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. Choose IS (ANSI)
or Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and click Apply.
Step 13 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card of Side A and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Power value of the COM-RX
port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX value matches the transponder card optical power meter value recorded in
Step 7 (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
e. Verify that the EXP-TX port power value = (COM-RX port power value in Step a) - (EXP-TX Power
value in Step d) (+\– 1 dB).
21-141
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 14 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side A and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 21-131.
Step 15 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side B and complete the following:
a. Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 21-132. Set the
Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 1.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
c. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
d. Verify that the COM-RX Power value matches the COM-TX port Power value in b (+\– 1 dB).
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
f. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss value.
g. Verify that the EXP-TX port power value = (COM-RX port power value) - (CRX -> EXP insertion
loss value) (+\– 1 dB)
Step 16 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side B and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 21-131.
Step 17 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side A and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 21-132. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 2.
Step 18 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side C and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 21-132. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 1.
Step 19 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side D and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 21-132. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 1.
Step 20 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side A and click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides B,
C, and D of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 21 Display card view for the transponder card and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 22 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side B of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 23 Connect, using the LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port with the patchcord in the
COM-RX port for Side A of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 24 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 21-124 to tune the transponder
to the wavelength set in Step 6.
Step 25 Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card on Side B.
Step 26 Display card view for the transponder card. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose IS (ANSI)
or Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 27 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side A and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C
OCHNC Parameters” task on page 21-132. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert
Value tabs to 2.
21-142
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 28 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side B and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 21-132. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 1.
Step 29 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side C and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 21-132. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 2.
Step 30 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side D and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 21-132. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 2.
Step 31 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side B and click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides
A, C, and D of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 32 Display the card view for the transponder card. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 33 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs. Restore the values recorded in Step 10a for the following parameters:
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side A
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B
Step 34 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 35 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side A of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 36 Make the following connections:
a. Connect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the LINE-RX port of the booster
amplifier of Side C.
b. Connect the optical power meter to the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier of Side C.
c. Connect the client TX of lambda yyyy.yy to the client RX of lambda yyyy.yy on the Side C patch
panel.
Step 37 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs and complete the following:
a. Record the actual values of the following parameters:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side X
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
– Power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on Side X
b. Set the values of the parameters as follows:
21-143
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side X = 8 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X = 8 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X = –18 dBm
– Power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on Side X = –8 dBm
c. Click Apply.
Step 38 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 39 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the VOA Attenuation Ref.
value y.
b. Set the VOA Attenuation Calib. to –y.
c. Choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
d. Click Apply.
Step 40 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side C and click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs. Choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State
drop-down list and click Apply.
Step 41 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side C. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record
the LINE-RX -> COM TX insertion loss.
Step 42 Display the transponder card in card view and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. Choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and click Apply.
Step 43 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
b. Verify the COM-TX Power value = (Optical power meter value) – (LINE RX -> COM TX insertion
loss value in Step 41) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 44 In card view, display the preamplifier card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX Power value matches the COM-TX port Power value in Step 43a
(+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Total Output Power
value of the COM-TX port.
d. Verify that the COM-TX Total Output Power value is 8 dBm (+\– 1 dB).
Step 45 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX power value matches the Total Output Power value of the COM-TX port
value in Step 44c (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss.
d. Record the CRX -> DROP insertion loss.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
21-144
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
DROP-TX port.
g. Verify that the EXP-TX Power value in Step e = (COM-RX value in Step a) - (CRX -> EXP value
in Step c) (+\– 1 dB).
h. Verify that the DROP-TX value in Step f = (COM-RX value in Step a) - (CRX -> DROP value in
Step d) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 46 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX port Power value in Step a matches the COM-TX port Power value in
Step 45b (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the 1RX -> yTX insertion loss (where y is the channel
number associated with yyyy.yy wavelength).
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
CHAN-TX port associated with yyyy.yy wavelength.
e. Verify that the CHAN-TX Power value = (COM-RX Power value in Step a) - (1RX -> yTX insertion
loss value in Step c) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 47 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
CHAN-RX port associated with yyyy.yy wavelength.
b. Verify that the CHAN-RX value matches the CHAN-TX Power value in Step 46d (+\– 1.5 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the yRX -> 1TX insertion loss (where y is the channel
number associated with yyyy.yy wavelength).
d. In the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs, record the Power value of the COM-TX
port.
e. Verify that the COM-TX Power value = (CHAN-RX Power value in Step a) – (yRX -> 1TX insertion
loss value in Step c) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 48 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side C, and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs, and set the available parameters as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –18.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input port = 9 (ADD-RX)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 13
– Wavelength = yyyy.yy (value set in Step 6)
b. Click Apply.
c. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area,
click Refresh and verify that the Actual Power (dBm) is –18 +\– 0.5 dB.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
21-145
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Verify that the COM-TX Power value matches the Actual Power value in Step c (+\– 1 dB).
Step 49 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side C, and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
LINE-TX port.
c. Verify that the LINE-TX value matches the Side C Tx Amplifier Ch Power recorded in
Step 37a (+\– 1 dB).
d. Record the optical power meter value.
e. Verify that the optical power meter value matches the LINE-TX Power value in Step b (+\– 1 dB).
Step 50 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side C, and click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete.
Step 51 Display Side A of the 40-WXC-C card in card view, and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs, and set the available parameters as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –18.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input port = 3 (EXP-RX)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 13
– Wavelength = yyyy.yy (value set in Step 6)
b. Click Apply.
c. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and verify that the
Actual Power (dBm) is –18 +\– 0.5 dB.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
e. Verify that the value of the COM-TX port matches the Actual Power value in Step c (+\– 1 dB).
f. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area,
click Refresh and then Delete.
Step 52 Repeat Step 51 for the 40-WXC-C card of Side B.
Step 53 Repeat Step 51 for the 40-WXC-C card of Side D.
Step 54 Display card view for the transponder card and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 55 Connect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the Line RX port of the booster
amplifier of Side D.
Step 56 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 21-124 to tune the transponder
to the next odd wavelength after yyyy.yy nm.
Step 57 Disconnect the patchcord between the client TX of lambda yyyy.yy from the client RX of lambda yyyy.yy
on the Side C patch panel. Use this patchcord to connect the client TX of lambda yyyy.yy to the client
RX of lambda yyyy.yy on the Side D patch panel. Note that yyyy.yy was recorded in Step 6.
Step 58 Repeat Steps 37 to 51 for Side D.
21-146
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 59 Display Side A of the 40-WXC-C card in card view, and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs, and set the available parameters as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –18.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input port = 4 (EXP-RX)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 13
– Wavelength = yyyy.yy (value set in Step 6)
b. Click Apply.
c. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and verify that the
Actual Power (dBm) is –18 +\– 0.5 dB.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
e. Verify that the value of the COM-TX port matches the Actual Power value in Step c (+\– 1 dB).
f. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area,
click Refresh and then Delete.
Step 60 Repeat Step 59 for the 40-WXC-C card of Side B.
Step 61 Repeat Step 59 for the 40-WXC-C card of Side C.
Step 62 Disconnect the optical power meter from the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier of Side D.
Step 63 Disconnect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) from the LINE-RX port of the
booster amplifier of the Side x.
Step 64 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side C, and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
b. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the Admin State
drop-down list.
c. Set the VOA Attenuation Calib to 0 (zero).
d. Click Apply.
Step 65 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side C and click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the Admin
State drop-down list and click Apply.
Step 66 Repeat Steps 64 and 65 for Side D.
Step 67 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs and restore the values recorded in Step 37a for the following
parameters for Sides C and D:
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side X
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
Step 68 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
21-147
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 69 Restore the connections to the MMU cards of the four sides using the patchcords tested in this procedure:
a. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM node.
b. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM node.
c. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM node.
d. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM node.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards Acceptance Test
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to perform the acceptance test.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 On the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A, do the following steps:
a. Remove the LC connectors between the ADD/DROP ports of the 40-SMR-1-C card and the MUX
and DMX units.
b. Create a physical loopback by connecting a fiber optic jumper between the ADD and DROP ports.
Purpose This procedure tests a two-degree ROADM node with 40-SMR-1-C and
OPT-AMP-17-C cards installed.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_DME_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration
File” procedure on page 14-47
“NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64
“NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs”
procedure on page 14-78
“NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-148
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 3 Retrieve the power set point of the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A. To view this set
point, do the following:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port DROP-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. Record the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-SMR-1-C).Port DROP-TX.Power parameter in the right
pane.
f. If the value of the Power set point is greater than -6dBm, continue with Step 4, else edit the Power
set point to -6dBm and complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 14-127.
This will ensure there is enough power to perform the optical validation procedure.
Step 4 Display the OPT-AMP-17-C on Side A in card view, and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
b. From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Disable.
Step 5 Connect a tunable laser or a fully tunable TXP_DME_10E_C card to the LINE RX port of the
OPT-AMP-17-C card on Side A. Connect a 10dB bulk attenuator to the fiber or regulate the output power
of the tunable laser to -10dBm.
Step 6 Create an OCHNC DCN for channel 1 on Side A related to the ADD-DROP path using the “DLP-G105
Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-41. The circuit must be bidirectional
connecting the ADD-RX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card to the LINE-TX port of the OPT-AMP-17-C card
and vice-versa (LINE-RX port of the OPT-AMP-17-C card to the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-1-C
card)
Step 7 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state.
Step 8 Verify the power levels of channel 1 by performing the following steps:
a. Check the optical connection between the OPT-AMP-17-C and 40-SMR-1-C cards. The power
difference between the COM-TX port of OPT-AMP-17-C and the LINE-RX port of 40-SMR-1-C
must not exceed of +/- 1.5dB.
b. Check the following parameters of the RX-amplifier in the 40-SMR-1-C card:
– The Working mode on the EXP-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is set
to Gain.
– The total power on the EXP-TX port must be equal to Channel Power Ref. with a tolerance
+/-1.5dB.
– The DCU insertion loss must be equal to the power difference between the DC-TX and DC-RX
ports and the absolute value of the DCU insertion loss must be less than 11dB.
c. Check the parameters of the drop VOA in the 40-SMR-1-C card. The value of the VOA Attenuation
parameter on the DROP-TX port must be equal to the value of the VOA Attenuation Ref. parameter
with a tolerance of +/-1.0dB.
d. Check the following parameters of the add VOA in the 40-SMR-1-C card:
– In the card view, click the Provisioning > OCH > Parameters tabs.
21-149
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
– Select the first channel from the Wavelength drop-down list and click Retrieve. The optical path
from the ADD-RX port to the LINE-TX port is highlighted.
– Verify if the value of the Power To parameter is the same as that of the VOA Power Ref.
parameter with a tolerance +/-1.0dB.
e. Check the optical connection between the 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C card. The power
difference between the LINE-TX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card and the COM-RX port of the
OPT-AMP-17-C card must not exceed +/- 1.5dB.
f. Check the following parameters of the OPT-AMP-17-C card:
– The Working mode on the LINE-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is
set to Gain.
– The value of the Gain parameter must be equal to the Gain set point +/-1.0dB. The gain set point
for the OPT-AMP-17-C card is 17dB.
Step 9 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side A that is related to the ADD-DROP path created
in Step 6 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-46.
Step 10 Create an OCHNC DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side A related to the EXP path using the “DLP-G105
Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-41. The circuit must be bidirectional
and connects the LINE-RX port of the OPT-AMP-17-C card on Side A to the LINE-TX port of the
OPT-AMP-17-C card on Side B.
Step 11 Verify the power levels of channel 1 by performing the following steps:
a. Check the optical connection between the OPT-AMP-17-C and 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A. The
power difference between the COM-TX port of OPT-AMP-17-C and the LINE-RX port of
40-SMR-1-C must not exceed +/- 1.5dB.
b. Check the following parameters of the RX-amplifier in the 40-SMR-1-C card:
– The Working mode on the EXP-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is set
to Gain.
– The total power on the EXP-TX port must be equal to Channel Power Ref. with a tolerance
+/-1.5dB.
– The DCU insertion loss must be equal to the power difference between the DC-TX and DC-RX
ports and the absolute value of the DCU insertion loss must be less than 11dB.
c. Check the optical connection between 40-SMR-1-C on Side A and 40-SMR-1-C on Side B. The
power difference between the EXP-TX port and the EXP-RX port must not exceed +/- 1.5dB.
d. Check the parameters of the pass-through VOA in the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side B:
– In the card view, click the Provisioning > OCH > Parameters tabs.
– Select the first channel from the Wavelength drop-down list and click Retrieve. The optical path
from the EXP-RX port to the LINE-TX port is highlighted.
– Verify if the value of the Power To parameter is the same as the value of the VOA Power Ref.
parameter with a tolerance +/-1.0dB.
e. Check the optical connection between the 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C card on Side B. The
power difference between the LINE-TX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card and the COM-RX port of the
OPT-AMP-17-C card must not exceed +/- 1.5dB.
f. Check the following parameters of the OPT-AMP-17-C card on Side B:
– The Working mode on the LINE-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is
set to Gain.
21-150
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
– The value of the Gain parameter must be equal to the Gain set point +/-1.0dB. The gain set point
for the OPT-AMP-17-C card is 17dB.
Step 12 Turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the TXP card in OutofService (OOS) state and delete the
OCHNC DCN circuit on Side A related to channel 1 created in Step 10 using the “DLP-G106 Delete
Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-46.
Step 13 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the second wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS) state. Repeat
Step 6 through Step 12 for the second wavelength.
Step 14 Repeat Step 13 for the remaining 38 wavelengths on Side A.
Step 15 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit related to channel 40 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel
Network Connections” task on page 16-46 and turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the
TXP_DME_10E_C card in OutofService (OOS) state.
Step 16 On the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A, do the following steps:
a. Remove the physical loopback between the ADD and DROP ports on the 40-SMR-1-C card created
in Step 2.
b. Reconnect the DROP-TX port to the RX port on the DMX side of the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel.
Step 17 On the15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit on Side A, do the
following steps:
a. Create a physical loopback between the MUX and DMX ports on the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit.
b. Connect the TX port on the MUX side of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit to a power meter. If the power meter is not available, reconnect the TX port
of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit to the ADD-RX port
of the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A.
Step 18 Create an OCHNC DCN for channel 1 on Side A related to the ADD-DROP path as done in Step 6.
Step 19 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state.
Step 20 To verify the insertion loss on the optical path of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit, do the following steps:
a. Retrieve the power value on the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card and record it as Pin.
b. Measure the optical power on the power meter or the ADD-RX port and record it as Pout.
c. Verify that the power difference between the power values obtained in step 21 a.and step 21 b. does
not exceed the insertion loss value specified for the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit. (Pin - Pout must be less than 13dB with a tolerance of 1dB).
Step 21 Turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the TXP card in OutofService (OOS) state and delete the
OCHNC DCN circuit on Side A related to channel 1 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel
Network Connections” task on page 16-46.
Step 22 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the next wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state and repeat Step 18 through Step 21 for the new wavelength.
Step 23 Restore the initial configuration after checking all the 40 available wavelengths:
a. Remove the power meter and reconnect the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit to the ADD-RX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card.
21-151
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Remove the physical loopbacks between the MUX and DMX ports on the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit on Side A.
c. Reset the ALS parameter on the 40-SMR-1-C card. Complete the following:
– In card view, display the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A and click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
– From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Auto Restart.
d. Import the CTP XML file again using the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE
Update Configuration File” procedure on page 14-47 to overwrite any manual settings.
e. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 and verify that
there are no errors.
Step 24 Repeat all the steps from Step 2 through Step 23 related to Side B.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to perform the acceptance test.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 On the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A, do the following steps:
a. Remove the LC connectors between the ADD/DROP ports of the 40-SMR-2-C card and the MUX
and DMX units.
b. Create a physical loopback by connecting a fiber optic jumper between the ADD and DROP ports.
Purpose This procedure tests a four-degree ROADM node with 40-SMR-2-C cards
installed.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_DME_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration
File” task on page 14-47
“NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64
“NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs”
procedure on page 14-78
“NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
21-152
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 3 Retrieve the power set point of the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A. To view this set
point, do the following:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port DROP-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. Record the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-SMR-2-C).Port DROP-TX.Power parameter in the right
pane.
f. If the value of the Power set point is greater than -6dBm, continue with Step 4, else edit the Power
set point to -6dBm and complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 14-127.
This will ensure there is enough power to perform the optical validation procedure.
Step 4 Display the 40-SMR-2-C card for Side A in card view and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
b. From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Disable.
Step 5 Connect a tunable laser or a fully tunable TXP_DME_10E_C to the LINE RX port of the 40-SMR-2-C
card on Side A. Connect a bulk attenuator to the fiber or regulate the output power of the tunable laser
to -10dBm.
Step 6 Create an OCHNC DCN on Side A related to the ADD-DROP path of channel 1 using the “DLP-G105
Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-41. The circuit must be bidirectional
connecting the ADD-RX port to the LINE-TX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card and vice-versa (LINE-RX
port to the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card)
Step 7 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state.
Step 8 Verify the power levels of channel 1 by performing the following steps:
a. Check the parameters of the RX-amplifier in the 40-SMR-2-C card:
– The Working mode on the EXP-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is set
to Gain.
– The total power on the EXP-TX port must be equal to the value of the Channel Power Ref.
parameter with a tolerance +/-1.5dB.
– The DCU insertion loss must be equal to the power difference between the DC-TX and DC-RX
ports and the absolute value of the DCU insertion loss must be less than 11dB.
b. Check the parameters of the drop VOA in the 40-SMR-2-C card. The value of the VOA Attenuation
parameter on the DROP-TX port must be the same value as the VOA Attenuation Ref. parameter
with a tolerance +/-1.0dB.
c. Check the parameters of the add VOA in the 40-SMR-2-C card:
– In the card view, click the Provisioning > OCH > Parameters tabs.
– Select the first channel from the Wavelength drop-down list and click Retrieve. The optical path
from the ADD-RX port to the LINE-TX port is highlighted.
– Verify if the value of the Power To parameter is the same as the value of the Channel Power Ref.
parameter with a tolerance +/-1.0dB
21-153
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
– The Working mode on the LINE-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is
set to Gain.
– The value of the Gain parameter must be equal to the Gain set point +/-1.0dB. The gain set point
for the 40-SMR-2-C card is 17dB.
Step 9 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side A related to the ADD-DROP path that was created
in Step 6 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-46.
Step 10 Create an OCHNC DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side A related to the EXP-TX path towards Side B
using the “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-41. The circuit
must be bidirectional and connects the LINE-RX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A to the
LINE-TX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side B.
Step 11 Verify the power levels of channel 1 by performing the following steps:
a. Check the parameters of the RX-amplifier in the 40-SMR-2-C card:
– The Working mode on the EXP-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is set
to Gain.
– The total power on the EXP-TX port must be equal to Channel Power Ref. with a tolerance
+/-1.5dB.
– The DCU insertion loss must be equal to the power difference between the DC-TX and DC-RX
ports and the absolute value of the DCU insertion loss must be less than 11dB.
b. Check the optical connection between Side A and Side B through the 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel.
Depending on the source side, the EXP-i-RX port of the destination side varies. Verify the
connectivity among the different sides using the 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel block diagram in
Chapter 12, “Node Reference”. For example, on Side A, EXP-TX is connected to Side B on
EXP-1-RX, Side C on EXP-2-RX, and Side D on EXP-3-RX. The power difference between the
EXP-TX port and the EXP-i-RX port must be less than 7 dB.
c. Check the parameters of the pass-through VOA and TX-amplifier in the 40-SMR-2-C card on
Side B:
– In the card view, click the Provisioning > OCH > Parameters tabs.
– Select the first channel from the Wavelength drop-down list and click Retrieve. The optical path
from the EXP-i-RX port to the LINE-TX port is highlighted.
– Verify if the value of the Power To parameter is the same as the value of the Channel Power Ref.
parameter with a tolerance +/-1.0dB
– The Working mode on the LINE-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is
set to Gain.
– The value of the Gain parameter on the LINE-TX port must be equal to the Gain set point
+/-1.0dB. The gain set point for the 40-SMR-2-C card is 17dB.
Step 12 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit towards Side B related to channel 1 created in Step 10 using the
“DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-46.
Step 13 Create the OCHNC DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side A related to EXP-TX path towards Side C using
the “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-41. Repeat Step 11
and Step 12 for the circuit that is created.
Step 14 Repeat Step 13 towards Side D, turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card
in OutofService (OOS) state.
Step 15 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the second wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS) state. Repeat
Step 6 through Step 14 for the second wavelength.
21-154
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 16 Repeat Step 15 for the remaining 38 wavelengths on Side A.
Step 17 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit related to channel 40 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel
Network Connections” task on page 16-46 and turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the
TXP_DME_10E_C card in OutofService (OOS) state.
Step 18 On the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A, do the following steps:
a. Remove the physical loopback between the ADD and DROP ports on the 40-SMR-2-C card created
in Step 2.
b. Reconnect the DROP-TX port to the RX port on the DMX side of the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel.
Step 19 On the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit on Side A, do the
following steps:
a. Create a physical loopback between the MUX and DMX ports of the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit that are related to the same wavelength.
b. Connect the TX port on the MUX side of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit to a power meter. If the power meter is not available, reconnect the TX port
of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit to the ADD-RX port
of the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A.
Step 20 Create an OCHNC DCN for channel 1 on Side A related to the ADD-DROP path as done in Step 6.
Step 21 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state.
Step 22 To verify the insertion loss on the optical path of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit on Side A, do the following steps:
a. Retrieve the power value on the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card and record it as Pin.
b. Measure the optical power on the power meter or the ADD-RX port and record it as Pout.
c. Verify that the power difference between the power values obtained in step 21 a.and step 21 b. does
not exceed the insertion loss value specified for the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit. (Pin - Pout must be less than 13dB with a tolerance of 1dB).
Step 23 Turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in OutofService (OOS) state and
delete the OCHNC DCN circuit on Side A related to channel 1 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical
Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-46.
Step 24 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the next wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state and repeat Step 20 through Step 23 for the new wavelength.
Step 25 Restore the initial configuration after checking all the 40 available wavelengths:
a. Remove the power meter and reconnect the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit to the ADD-RX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card.
b. Remove the physical loopbacks between the MUX and DMX ports on the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit on Side A.
c. Reset the ALS parameter on the 40-SMR-2-C card. Complete the following:
– In card view, display the 40-SMR-2-C and click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
– From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Auto Restart.
d. Import the CTP XML file again using the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE
Update Configuration File” procedure on page 14-47 to overwrite any manual settings.
21-155
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 and verify no
errors are present.
Step 26 Repeat all the steps from Step 2 through Step 25 related to Side B.
Step 27 Repeat all the steps from Step 2 through Step 25 related to Side C.
Step 28 Repeat all the steps from Step 2 through Step 25 related to Side D.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
21-156
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
CH A P T E R
22-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
22
Management Network Connectivity
This chapter provides an overview of ONS 15454 data communications network (DCN) connectivity.
Cisco Optical Networking System (ONS) network communication is based on IP, including
communication between Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) computers and ONS 15454 nodes, and
communication among networked ONS 15454 nodes. The chapter shows common Cisco ONS 15454 IP
network configurations and includes detailed data communications network (DCN) case studies that are
based on actual ONS 15454 installations. The chapter provides information about the ONS 15454 IP
routing table, external firewalls, and open gateway network element (GNE) networks.
Although ONS 15454 DCN communication is based on IP, ONS 15454 nodes can be networked to
equipment that is based on the Open System Interconnection (OSI) protocol suites. This chapter also
describes the ONS 15454 OSI implementation and provides scenarios that show how the ONS 15454 can
be networked within a mixed IP and OSI environment.
This chapter does not provide a comprehensive explanation of IP networking concepts and procedures,
nor does it provide IP addressing examples to meet all networked scenarios. For ONS 15454 networking
setup instructions, refer to the “Turn Up a Node” chapter.
Note Unless otherwise specified, in this chapter “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Chapter topics include:
• 22.1 IP Networking Overview, page 22-2
• 22.2 IP Addressing Scenarios, page 22-2
• 22.3 DCN Case Studies, page 22-23
• 22.4 DCN Extension, page 22-37
• 22.5 Routing Table, page 22-39
• 22.6 External Firewalls, page 22-41
• 22.7 Open GNE, page 22-42
• 22.8 TCP/IP and OSI Networking, page 22-45
• 22.9 Link Management Protocol, page 22-49
• 22.10 IPv6 Network Compatibility, page 22-54
• 22.11 IPv6 Native Support, page 22-54
• 22.12 Integration with Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Routers,
page 22-57
• 22.13 Photonic Path Trace, page 22-64
22-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Networking Overview
• 22.14 Shared Risk Link Group, page 22-65
• 22.15 Proactive Protection Regen, page 22-65
Note To connect ONS 15454s to an IP network, you must work with a LAN administrator or other individual
at your site who has IP networking training and experience.
22.1 IP Networking Overview
ONS 15454s can be connected in many different ways within an IP environment:
• They can be connected to LANs through direct connections or a router.
• IP subnetting can create ONS 15454 node groups that allow you to provision nodes in a network that
are not connected with a data communications channel (DCC).
• Different IP functions and protocols can be used to achieve specific network goals. For example,
Proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) enables one LAN-connected ONS 15454 to serve as a
gateway for ONS 15454s that are not connected to the LAN.
• Static routes can be created to enable connections among multiple CTC sessions with ONS 15454s
that reside on the same subnet with multiple CTC sessions.
• ONS 15454s can be connected to Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) networks so ONS 15454 network
information is automatically communicated across multiple LANs and WANs.
• The ONS 15454 proxy server can control the visibility and accessibility between CTC computers
and ONS 15454 element nodes.
22.2 IP Addressing Scenarios
ONS 15454 IP addressing generally has nine common scenarios or configurations. Use the scenarios as
building blocks for more complex network configurations. Table 22-1 provides a general list of items to
check when setting up ONS 15454s in IP networks.
Table 22-1 General ONS 15454 IP Troubleshooting Checklist
Item What to Check
Link integrity Verify that link integrity exists between:
• CTC computer and network hub/switch
• ONS 15454s (backplane [ANSI] or MIC-C/T/P [ETSI] wire-wrap pins or
RJ-45 port) and network hub/switch
• Router ports and hub/switch ports
ONS 15454
hub/switch ports
If connectivity problems occur, set the hub or switch port that is connected to
the ONS 15454 to 10 Mbps half-duplex.
Ping Ping the node to test connections between computers and ONS 15454s.
22-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
22.2.1 Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet
Scenario 1 shows a basic ONS 15454 LAN configuration (Figure 22-1). The ONS 15454s and CTC
computer reside on the same subnet. All ONS 15454s connect to LAN A, and all ONS 15454s have DCC
connections.
Figure 22-1 Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet (ANSI and ETSI)
22.2.2 Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454s Connected to a Router
In Scenario 2, the CTC computer resides on a subnet (192.168.1.0) and attaches to LAN A (Figure 22-2).
The ONS 15454s reside on a different subnet (192.168.2.0) and attach to LAN B. A router connects LAN
A to LAN B. The IP address of router interface A is set to LAN A (192.168.1.1), and the IP address of
router interface B is set to LAN B (192.168.2.1). The routers each have a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
IP addresses/subnet
masks
Verify that ONS 15454 IP addresses and subnet masks are set up correctly.
Optical connectivity Verify that ONS 15454 optical trunk ports are in service and that a DCC is
enabled on each trunk port.
Table 22-1 General ONS 15454 IP Troubleshooting Checklist (continued)
Item What to Check
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = N/A
Host Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.1.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.1.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.1.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
LAN A
Ring
124244
22-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
On the CTC computer, the default gateway is set to router interface A. If the LAN uses Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP), the default gateway and IP address are assigned automatically. In the
Figure 22-2 example, a DHCP server is not available.
Figure 22-2 Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454s Connected to Router (ANSI and ETSI)
22.2.3 Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 Gateway
ARP matches higher-level IP addresses to the physical addresses of the destination host. It uses a lookup
table (called ARP cache) to perform the translation. When the address is not found in the ARP cache, a
broadcast is sent out on the network with a special format called the ARP request. If one of the machines
on the network recognizes its own IP address in the request, it sends an ARP reply back to the requesting
host. The reply contains the physical hardware address of the receiving host. The requesting host stores
this address in its ARP cache so that all subsequent datagrams (packets) to this destination IP address
can be translated to a physical address.
Proxy ARP enables one LAN-connected ONS 15454 to respond to the ARP request for ONS 15454s not
connected to the LAN. (ONS 15454 proxy ARP requires no user configuration.) For this to occur, the
DCC-connected ONS 15454s must reside on the same subnet as the LAN-connected (gateway)
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.2.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = 192.168.2.1
Static Routes = N/A
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1
Host Routes = N/A
Router
IP Address of interface “A” to LAN “A” 192.168.1.1
IP Address of interface “B” to LAN “B” 192.168.2.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Host Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.2.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = 192.168.2.1
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.2.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = 192.168.2.1
Static Routes = N/A
LAN B
LAN A
Int "A"
Int "B"
Ring
124245
22-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
ONS 15454. When a LAN device sends an ARP request to an ONS 15454 that is not connected to the
LAN, the gateway ONS 15454 (the one connected to the LAN) returns its MAC address to the LAN
device. The LAN device then sends the datagram for the remote ONS 15454 to the MAC address of the
proxy ONS 15454. The proxy ONS 15454 uses its routing table to forward the datagram to the non-LAN
ONS 15454.
Scenario 3 is similar to Scenario 1, but only one ONS 15454 (Node 1) connects to the LAN
(Figure 22-3). Two ONS 15454s (Node 2 and Node 3) connect to ONS 15454 Node 1 through the section
DCC. Because all three ONS 15454s are on the same subnet, proxy ARP enables ONS 15454 Node 1 to
serve as a gateway for ONS 15345 Node 2 and Node 3.
Note This scenario assumes all CTC connections are to Node 1. If you connect a laptop to either ONS 15454
Node 2 or Node 3, network partitioning occurs; neither the laptop or the CTC computer can see all nodes.
If you want laptops to connect directly to end network elements (ENEs), you must create static routes
(see the “22.2.5 Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs” section on page 22-8) or enable
the ONS 15454 proxy server (see “22.2.7 Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 Proxy Server”
section on page 22-12).
Be aware that:
• GNE and ENE 15454 proxy ARP is disabled.
• There is exactly one proxy ARP server on any given Ethernet segment; however, there might be more
than one server in an ANSI or ETSI topology.
• The proxy ARP server does not perform the proxy ARP function for any node or host that is on the
same Ethernet segment.
• It is important in Figure 22-3 that the CTC workstation be located within the same subnet and on
the same Ethernet segment as the proxy ARP server.
22-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
Figure 22-3 Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP (ANSI and ETSI)
You can also use proxy ARP to communicate with hosts attached to the craft Ethernet ports of
DCC-connected nodes (Figure 22-4). The node with an attached host must have a static route to the host.
Static routes are propagated to all DCC peers using OSPF. The existing proxy ARP node is the gateway
for additional hosts. Each node examines its routing table for routes to hosts that are not connected to
the DCC network but are within the subnet. The existing proxy server replies to ARP requests for these
additional hosts with the node MAC address. The existence of the host route in the routing table ensures
that the IP packets addressed to the additional hosts are routed properly. Other than establishing a static
route between a node and an additional host, no provisioning is necessary. The following restrictions
apply:
• Only one node acts as the proxy ARP server for any given additional host.
• A node cannot be the proxy ARP server for a host connected to its Ethernet port.
In Figure 22-4, Node 1 announces to Node 2 and 3 that it can reach the CTC host. Similarly, Node 3
announces that it can reach the ONS 152xx. The ONS 152xx is shown as an example; any network
element can be set up as an additional host.
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mark at CTC Workstation 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = N/A
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.1.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.1.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.1.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
LAN A
Ring
124246
22-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
Figure 22-4 Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP with Static Routing (ANSI and ETSI)
22.2.4 Scenario 4: Default Gateway on CTC Computer
Scenario 4 is similar to Scenario 3, but Nodes 2 and 3 reside on different subnets, 192.168.2.0 and
192.168.3.0, respectively (Figure 22-5). Node 1 and the CTC computer are on subnet 192.168.1.0. Proxy
ARP is not used because the network includes different subnets. For the CTC computer to communicate
with Nodes 2 and 3, Node 1 is entered as the default gateway on the CTC computer.
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mark at CTC Workstation 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = N/A
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.1.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.1.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = Destination 192.168.1.100
Mask 255.255.255.0
Next Hop 192.168.1.10
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.1.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = Destination 192.168.1.31
Mask 255.255.255.255
Next Hop 192.168.1.30
ONS 152xx
IP Address 192.168.1.31
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
LAN A
Ring
124247
22-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
Figure 22-5 Scenario 4: Default Gateway on a CTC Computer (ANSI and ETSI)
22.2.5 Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs
Static routes are used for two purposes:
• To connect ONS 15454s to CTC sessions on one subnet connected by a router to ONS 15454s
residing on another subnet. (These static routes are not needed if OSPF is enabled. Scenario 6 shows
an OSPF example.)
• To enable multiple CTC sessions among ONS 15454s residing on the same subnet.
In Figure 22-6, one CTC residing on subnet 192.168.1.0 connects to a router through interface A (the
router is not set up with OSPF). ONS 15454s residing on different subnets are connected through Node 1
to the router through interface B. Because Nodes 2 and 3 are on different subnets, proxy ARP does not
enable Node 1 as a gateway. To connect to CTC computers on LAN A, a static route is created on
Node 1.
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.1.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask at CTC Workstation 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.10
Host Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.2.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.3.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
LAN A
Ring
124248
22-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
Figure 22-6 Scenario 5: Static Route With One CTC Computer Used as a Destination (ANSI and ETSI)
The destination and subnet mask entries control access to the ONS 15454s:
• If a single CTC computer is connected to a router, enter the complete CTC “host route” IP address
as the destination with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255.
• If CTC computers on a subnet are connected to a router, enter the destination subnet (in this example,
192.168.1.0) and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
• If all CTC computers are connected to a router, enter a destination of 0.0.0.0 and a subnet mask of
0.0.0.0. Figure 22-7 shows an example.
The IP address of router interface B is entered as the next hop, and the cost (number of hops from source
to destination) is 2.
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1
Host Routes = N/A
Router
IP Address of interface ”A” to LAN “A” 192.168.1.1
IP Address of interface “B” to LAN “B” 192.168.2.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.3.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.2.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = 192.168.2.1
Static Routes
Destination 192.168.1.0
Mask 255.255.255.0
Next Hop 192.168.2.1
Cost = 2
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.4.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
LAN B
LAN A
Int "A"
Int "B"
Ring
124249
22-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
Figure 22-7 Scenario 5: Static Route With Multiple LAN Destinations (ANSI and ETSI)
22.2.6 Scenario 6: Using OSPF
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) is a link state Internet routing protocol. Link state protocols use a “hello
protocol” to monitor their links with adjacent routers and to test the status of their links to their
neighbors. Link state protocols advertise their directly connected networks and their active links. Each
link state router captures the link state “advertisements” and puts them together to create a topology of
the entire network or area. From this database, the router calculates a routing table by constructing a
shortest path tree. Routes are recalculated when topology changes occur.
ONS 15454s use the OSPF protocol in internal ONS 15454 networks for node discovery, circuit routing,
and node management. You can enable OSPF on the ONS 15454s so that the ONS 15454 topology is
sent to OSPF routers on a LAN. Advertising the ONS 15454 network topology to LAN routers
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1
Host Routes = N/A
Router #1
IP Address of interface ”A” to LAN “A” 192.168.1.1
IP Address of interface “B” to LAN “B” 192.168.2.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.2.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.2.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = 192.168.2.1
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.2.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
LAN B
LAN A
Int "A"
Int "B"
Ring
124250
Static Routes
Destination 0.0.0.0
Mask 0.0.0.0
Next Hop 192.168.2.1
Cost = 2
LAN C
LAN D
Router #3
Router #2
22-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
eliminates the need to manually enter static routes for ONS 15454 subnetworks. Figure 22-8 shows a
network enabled for OSPF. Figure 22-9 shows the same network without OSPF. Static routes must be
manually added to the router for CTC computers on LAN A to communicate with Nodes 2 and 3 because
these nodes reside on different subnets.
OSPF divides networks into smaller regions, called areas. An area is a collection of networked end
systems, routers, and transmission facilities organized by traffic patterns. Each OSPF area has a unique
ID number, known as the area ID. Every OSPF network has one backbone area called “area 0.” All other
OSPF areas must connect to area 0.
When you enable an ONS 15454 OSPF topology for advertising to an OSPF network, you must assign
an OSPF area ID in decimal format to the ONS 15454 network. An area ID is a “dotted quad” value that
appears similar to an IP address. Coordinate the area ID number assignment with your LAN
administrator. All DCC-connected ONS 15454s should be assigned the same OSPF area ID.
Note It is recommended that the number of ONS 15454s in an OSPF area be limited, because this allows faster
loading into a CTC an is less likely to incur any problems.
Figure 22-8 Scenario 6: OSPF Enabled (ANSI and ETSI)
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1
Host Routes = N/A
Router
IP Address of interface “A” to LAN A 192.168.1.1
IP Address of interface “B” to LAN B 192.168.2.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.3.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.2.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = 192.168.2.1
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.4.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
LAN B
LAN A
Int "A"
Int "B"
Ring
124251
22-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
Figure 22-9 Scenario 6: OSPF Not Enabled (ANSI and ETSI)
22.2.7 Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 Proxy Server
The ONS 15454 proxy server is a set of functions that allows you to network ONS 15454s in
environments where visibility and accessibility between ONS 15454s and CTC computers must be
restricted. For example, you can set up a network so that field technicians and network operations center
(NOC) personnel can both access the same ONS 15454s while preventing the field technicians from
accessing the NOC LAN. To do this, one ONS 15454 is provisioned as a GNE and the other ONS 15454s
are provisioned as end ENEs. The GNE ONS 15454 tunnels connections between CTC computers and
ENE ONS 15454s, providing management capability while preventing access for non-ONS 15454
management purposes.
ONS 15454 #1
IP Address 192.168.2.10
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = 192.168.2.1
Static Routes
Destination = 192.168.1.100
Mask = 255.255.255.255
Next Hop = 192.168.2.1
Cost = 2
CTC Workstation
IP Address 192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1
Host Routes = N/A
Router
IP Address of interface “A” to LAN A 192.168.1.1
IP Address of interface “B” to LAN B 192.168.2.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Static Routes = Destination 192.168.3.20 Next Hop 192.168.2.10
Destination 192.168.4.30 Next Hop 192.168.2.10
ONS 15454 #2
IP Address 192.168.3.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
ONS 15454 #3
IP Address 192.168.4.30
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Router = N/A
Static Routes = N/A
LAN B
LAN A
Int "A"
Int "B"
Ring
124252
22-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
The ONS 15454 gateway setting performs the following tasks:
• Isolates DCC IP traffic from Ethernet (craft port) traffic and accepts packets based on filtering rules.
The filtering rules (see Table 22-3 on page 22-17 and Table 22-4 on page 22-17) depend on whether
the packet arrives at the ONS 15454 DCC or TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE Ethernet
interface.
• Processes Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) and Network Time Protocol (NTP) requests.
ONS 15454 ENEs can derive time-of-day from an SNTP/NTP LAN server through the GNE
ONS 15454.
• Processes Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 (SNMPv1) traps. The GNE ONS 15454
receives SNMPv1 traps from the ENE ONS 15454s and forwards or relays the traps to SNMPv1 trap
destinations or ONS 15454 SNMP relay nodes.
The ONS 15454 proxy server is provisioned using the Enable proxy server on port check box on the
Provisioning > Network > General tab. If checked, the ONS 15454 serves as a proxy for connections
between CTC clients and ONS 15454s that are DCC-connected to the proxy ONS 15454. The CTC client
establishes connections to DCC-connected nodes through the proxy node. The CTC client can connect
to nodes that it cannot directly reach from the host on which it runs. If not selected, the node does not
proxy for any CTC clients, although any established proxy connections continue until the CTC client
exits. In addition, you can set the proxy server as an ENE or a GNE:
• External Network Element (ENE)—If set as an ENE, the ONS 15454 neither installs nor advertises
default or static routes that go through its Ethernet port. However, an ENE does install and advertise
routes that go through the DCC. CTC computers can communicate with the ONS 15454 using the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE craft port, but they cannot communicate directly with
any other DCC-connected ONS 15454.
In addition, firewall is enabled, which means that the node prevents IP traffic from being routed
between the DCC and the LAN port. The ONS 15454 can communicate with machines connected to
the LAN port or connected through the DCC. However, the DCC-connected machines cannot
communicate with the LAN-connected machines, and the LAN-connected machines cannot
communicate with the DCC-connected machines. A CTC client using the LAN to connect to the
firewall-enabled node can use the proxy capability to manage the DCC-connected nodes that would
otherwise be unreachable. A CTC client connected to a DCC-connected node can only manage other
DCC-connected nodes and the firewall itself.
• Gateway Network Element (GNE)—If set as a GNE, the CTC computer is visible to other
DCC-connected nodes and firewall is enabled.
• SOCKS Proxy-only—If Proxy-only is selected, firewall is not enabled. CTC can communicate with
any other DCC-connected ONS 15454s.
Note If you launch CTC against a node through a Network Address Translation (NAT) or Port Address
Translation (PAT) router and that node does not have proxy enabled, your CTC session starts and initially
appears to be fine. However CTC never receives alarm updates and disconnects and reconnects every two
minutes. If the proxy is accidentally disabled, it is still possible to enable the proxy during a reconnect
cycle and recover your ability to manage the node, even through a NAT/PAT firewall.
Note ENEs that belong to different private subnetworks do not need to have unique IP addresses. Two ENEs
that are connected to different GNEs can have the same IP address. However, ENEs that connect to the
same GNE must always have unique IP addresses.
22-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
Figure 22-10 shows an ONS 15454 proxy server implementation. A GNE ONS 15454 is connected to a
central office LAN and to ENE ONS 15454s. The central office LAN is connected to a NOC LAN, which
has CTC computers. The NOC CTC computer and craft technicians must both be able to access the
ONS 15454 ENEs. However, the craft technicians must be prevented from accessing or seeing the NOC
or central office LANs.
In the example, the ONS 15454 GNE is assigned an IP address within the central office LAN and is
physically connected to the LAN through its LAN port. ONS 15454 ENEs are assigned IP addresses that
are outside the central office LAN and given private network IP addresses. If the ONS 15454 ENEs are
collocated, the craft LAN ports could be connected to a hub. However, the hub should have no other
network connections.
Figure 22-10 Scenario 7: ONS 15454 Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on the Same Subnet (ANSI
and ETSI)
Table 22-2 shows recommended settings for ONS 15454 GNEs and ENEs in the configuration shown in
Figure 22-10.
Remote CTC
10.10.20.10
10.10.20.0/24
10.10.10.0/24
Interface 0/0
10.10.20.1
Router A
Interface 0/1
10.10.10.1
ONS 15454
Gateway NE
10.10.10.100/24
ONS 15454
End NE
10.10.10.250/24
ONS 15454
End NE
10.10.10.150/24
ONS 15454
End NE
10.10.10.200/24
124253
Local/Craft CTC
192.168.20.20
Ethernet
Optical Fiber
Table 22-2 ONS 15454 Gateway and End NE Settings
Setting ONS 15454 Gateway NE ONS 15454 End NE
OSPF Off Off
22-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
Figure 22-11 shows the same proxy server implementation with ONS 15454 ENEs on different subnets.
The ONS 15454 GNEs and ENEs are provisioned with the settings shown in Table 22-2.
Figure 22-11 Scenario 7: ONS 15454 Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on Different Subnets (ANSI
and ETSI)
SNTP server (if used) SNTP server IP address Set to ONS 15454 GNE IP address
SNMP (if used) SNMPv1 trap destinations Set SNMPv1 trap destinations to
ONS 15454 GNE
Table 22-2 ONS 15454 Gateway and End NE Settings (continued)
Setting ONS 15454 Gateway NE ONS 15454 End NE
124254
Remote CTC
10.10.20.10
10.10.20.0/24
10.10.10.0/24
Interface 0/0
10.10.20.1
Router A
Interface 0/1
10.10.10.1
ONS 15454
Gateway NE
10.10.10.100/24
ONS 15454
End NE
192.168.10.250/24
ONS 15454
End NE
192.168.10.150/24
ONS 15454
End NE
192.168.10.200/24
Local/Craft CTC
192.168.20.20
Ethernet
Optical Fiber
22-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
Figure 22-12 shows the same proxy server implementation with ONS 15454 ENEs in multiple rings.
Figure 22-12 Scenario 7: ONS 15454 Proxy Server With ENEs on Multiple Rings (ANSI and ETSI)
Table 22-3 shows the rules the ONS 15454 follows to filter packets for the firewall when nodes are
configured as ENEs and GNEs. If the packet is addressed to the ONS 15454, additional rules (shown in
Table 22-4) are applied. Rejected packets are silently discarded.
124255
Remote CTC
10.10.20.10
10.10.20.0/24
10.10.10.0/24
Interface 0/0
10.10.20.1
Router A
Interface 0/1
10.10.10.1
ONS 15454
Gateway NE
10.10.10.100/24
ONS 15454
End NE
192.168.10.250/24
ONS 15454
End NE
192.168.10.150/24
ONS 15454
End NE
192.168.10.200/24
Ethernet
Optical Fiber
ONS 15454
Gateway NE
10.10.10.200/24
ONS 15454
End NE
192.168.80.250/24
ONS 15454
End NE
192.168.60.150/24
ONS 15454
End NE
192.168.70.200/24
22-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
If you implement the proxy server, note that all DCC-connected ONS 15454s on the same Ethernet
segment must have the same gateway setting. Mixed values produce unpredictable results, and might
leave some nodes unreachable through the shared Ethernet segment.
If nodes become unreachable, correct the setting by performing one of the following:
• Disconnect the craft computer from the unreachable ONS 15454. Connect to the ONS 15454
through another network ONS 15454 that has a DCC connection to the unreachable ONS 15454.
• Disconnect all DCCs to the node by disabling them on neighboring nodes. Connect a CTC computer
directly to the ONS 15454 and change its provisioning.
22.2.8 Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on a Subnet
The ONS 15454 provides GNE load balancing, which allows CTC to reach ENEs over multiple GNEs
without the ENEs being advertised over OSPF. This feature allows a network to quickly recover from
the loss of GNE, even if the GNE is on a different subnet. If a GNE fails, all connections through that
GNE fail. CTC disconnects from the failed GNE and from all ENEs for which the GNE was a proxy, and
then reconnects through the remaining GNEs. GNE load balancing reduces the dependency on the launch
GNE and DCC bandwidth, both of which enhance CTC performance.
Note Dual GNEs do not need special provisioning
Figure 22-13 shows a network with dual GNEs on the same subnet.
Table 22-3 Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules
Packets Arriving At: Are Accepted if the Destination IP Address is:
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
/TNC/TNCE/TSC/T
SCE Ethernet
interface
• The ONS 15454 itself
• The ONS 15454’s subnet broadcast address
• Within the 224.0.0.0/8 network (reserved network used for standard
multicast messages)
• Subnet mask = 255.255.255.255
DCC interface • The ONS 15454 itself
• Any destination connected through another DCC interface
• Within the 224.0.0.0/8 network
Table 22-4 Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules
Packets Arriving At: Are Rejected If:
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3
/TNC/TNCE/TSC/T
SCE Ethernet
interface
• User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packets addressed to
the SNMP trap relay port
DCC interface • Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) packets
addressed to the proxy server port (1080)
22-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
Figure 22-13 Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on the Same Subnet (ANSI and ETSI)
124256
Remote CTC
10.10.20.10
10.10.20.0/24
10.10.10.0/24
Interface 0/0
10.10.20.1
Router A
Interface 0/1
10.10.10.1
ONS 15454
Gateway NE
10.10.10.100/24
ONS 15454
End NE
10.10.10.250/24
ONS 15454
Gateway NE
10.10.10.150/24
ONS 15454
End NE
10.10.10.200/24
Local/Craft CTC
192.168.20.20
Ethernet
Optical Fiber
22-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
Figure 22-14 shows a network with dual GNEs on different subnets.
Figure 22-14 Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on Different Subnets (ANSI and ETSI)
22.2.9 Scenario 9: IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled
The TCC2, TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, TNCE, TSC, and TSCE cards default to repeater mode. In this mode,
the front and back Ethernet (LAN) ports share a single MAC address and IP address. TCC2P, TCC3,
TNC, TNCE, TSC, and TSCE cards allow you to place a node in secure mode, which prevents a
front-access craft port user from accessing the LAN through the backplane port. Secure mode can be
locked, which prevents the mode from being altered. To place a node in secure mode or to lock secure
node, refer to Manage the Node document.
22.2.9.1 Secure Mode Behavior
Changing a TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE node from repeater mode to secure mode allows
you to provision two IP addresses for the ONS 15454 and causes the node to assign the ports different
MAC addresses. In secure mode, one IP address is provisioned for the ONS 15454 backplane LAN port,
124257
Remote CTC
10.10.20.10
10.10.20.0/24
10.10.10.0/24 10.20.10.0/24
Interface 0/0
10.10.20.1
Router A
Interface 0/1
10.10.10.1
Interface 0/2
10.20.10.1
ONS 15454
Gateway NE
10.10.10.100/24
ONS 15454
End NE
192.168.10.250/24
ONS 15454
Gateway NE
10.20.10.100/24
ONS 15454
End NE
192.168.10.200/24
Local/Craft CTC
192.168.20.20
Ethernet
Optical Fiber
22-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
and the other IP address is provisioned for the card Ethernet port. Both addresses reside on different
subnets, providing an additional layer of separation between the craft access port and the ONS 15454
LAN. If secure mode is enabled, the IP addresses provisioned for the backplane LAN port and card
Ethernet port must follow general IP addressing guidelines and must reside on different subnets from
each other.
In secure mode, the IP address assigned to the backplane LAN port becomes a private address, which
connects the node to an operations support system (OSS) through a central office LAN or private
enterprise network. A Superuser can configure the node to hide or reveal the backplane's LAN IP address
in CTC, the routing table, or TL1 autonomous message reports.
In repeater mode, a node can be a GNE or ENE. Placing the node into secure mode automatically turns
on SOCKS proxy and defaults the node to GNE status. However, the node can be changed back to an
ENE. In repeater mode, an ENE’s SOCKS proxy can be disabled—effectively isolating the node beyond
the LAN firewall—but it cannot be disabled in secure mode. To change a node’s GNE or ENE status and
disable the SOCKS proxy, refer to the “Turn Up a Node” chapter.
Caution Enabling secure mode causes the TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, TNCE, TSC, and TSCE cards to reboot; the card
reboot affects traffic.
Note The secure mode option does not appear in CTC if TCC2 cards are installed. If one TCC2 and one
TCC2P card are installed in a node, secure mode will appear in CTC but it cannot be modified.
Note If both front and backplane access ports are disabled in an ENE and the node is isolated from DCC
communication (due to user provisioning or network faults), the front and backplane ports are
automatically reenabled.
Figure 22-15 shows an example of secure mode ONS 15454 nodes with front-access Ethernet port
addresses that reside on the same subnet.
22-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
Figure 22-15 Scenario 9: ONS 15454 GNE and ENEs on the Same Subnet with Secure Mode
Enabled
Figure 22-16 shows an example of ONS 15454 nodes connected to a router with secure mode enabled.
In each example, the node’s port address (node address) resides on a different subnet from the node
backplane addresses.
Remote CTC
10.10.20.10
10.10.20.0/24
10.10.10.0/24
Interface 0/0
10.10.20.1
Router A
Interface 0/1
10.10.10.1
ONS 15454
GNE
Backplane - 10.10.10.100/24
TCC2P - 176.20.20.40/24
ONS 15454
ENE
Backplane - 10.10.10.250/24
TCC2P - 176.20.20.30/24
ONS 15454
ENE
10.10.10.150/24 - Backplane
176.20.20.10/24 - TCC2P
ONS 15454
ENE
10.10.10.200/24 - Backplane
176.20.20.20/24 - TCC2P
124679
Local/Craft CTC
176.20.20.50
Ethernet
SONET
22-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IP Addressing Scenarios
Figure 22-16 Scenario 9: ONS 15454 GNE and ENEs on Different Subnets with Secure Mode
Enabled
22.2.9.2 Secure Node Locked and Unlocked Behavior
Secure mode can be locked or unlocked on a node operating in secure mode. The default status is
unlocked, and only a Superuser can issue a lock. When secure mode is locked, the node’s configuration
(including Ethernet port status) and lock status cannot be changed by any network user. To have a secure
node’s lock removed, contact Cisco Technical Support to arrange a Return Material Authorization
(RMA) for the shelf assembly. See the “Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security
Guidelines” section on page lv as needed. Enabling a lock makes a permanent change to the shelf’s
EEPROM.
A node’s configuration lock is maintained if the active TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE
card’s database is reloaded. For example, if you attempt to load an unlocked node database onto a locked
node’s standby TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE card for transfer to the active TCC2P, TCC3,
TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE card (an action that is not recommended), the unlocked node’s status (via
the uploaded database) will not override the node’s lock status. If you attempt to load a locked database
onto the standby TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE card of an unlocked secure node, the active
TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE card will upload the database. If the uploaded defaults
indicate a locked status, this will cause the node to become locked. If a software load has been
customized before a lock is enabled, all lockable provisioning features are permanently set to the
customized NE defaults provided in the load and cannot be changed by any user.
71674
Remote CTC
10.10.20.10
10.10.20.0/24
10.10.10.0/24
Interface 0/0
10.10.20.1
Router A
Interface 0/1
10.10.10.1
ONS 15454
GNE
Backplane - 10.10.10.100/24
TCC2P - 176.20.20.40/24
ONS 15454
ENE
Backplane - 192.168.10.250/24
TCC2P - 176.20.20.30/24
ONS 15454
ENE
192.168.10.150/24 - Backplane
176.20.20.10/24 - TCC2P
ONS 15454
ENE
192.168.10.200/24 - Backplane
176.20.20.20/24 - TCC2P
Local/Craft CTC
176.20.20.50
Ethernet
SONET
22-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Case Studies
22.3 DCN Case Studies
The ONS 15454 network is managed over the IP DCN and the optical service channels (OSCs), DCCs,
and generic communications channels (GCCs). ONS 15454s perform many of the same functions as
Layer 3 routers because they manage traffic between the DCN network management system (NMS) and
the dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) optical networks.
This section provides case studies that show different ways an ONS 15454 network can be implemented
within the DCN. The case studies are based on actual field installations. They include the network
problem, the network topology created to solve it, IP addressing examples, and strengths and weaknesses
of the solution. Routing principles followed throughout the case studies include:
• If the ONS 15454 is connected to a DCN router, the default gateway points to the router.
• If the default gateway must advertise to the OSC/DCC/GCC network, a static route is added for the
default gateway.
• If the network element (NE) is not connected to a DCN router, the default gateway is set to 0.0.0.0.
22.3.1 SOCKS Proxy Settings
SOCKS proxy (described in the “22.2.7 Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 Proxy Server” section
on page 22-12) enables the ONS 15454 to serve as a proxy for connections between CTC clients and
ONS 15454 nodes connected by OSCs, GCCs, or DCCs. Although SOCKS proxy can make DCN
implementations easier, it should not be used when any of the following conditions exist:
• Network management is based on SNMP and SNMP traps. The ONS 15454 can proxy SNMP traps,
but if a redundant DCN connection is required, trap duplication on the network management
platform will occur.
• Telnet and debug session are required. These are not possible over SOCKS proxy.
• Direct IP connectivity to every node is required.
If these conditions are not present and no requirement to have direct IP connectivity to every node exists
(that is, management is performed using CTC and/or Cisco Transport Manager [CTM]), Cisco
recommends that you use the SOCKS proxy only option for all nodes that connect to a DCN router.
22.3.2 OSPF
Activating OSPF (described in the “22.2.6 Scenario 6: Using OSPF” section on page 22-10) on the
ONS 15454 LAN interface is another option that can be used to create resilient DCN connections.
However, this option can only be enabled if every element in the network, from the NEs to the NOC,
runs OSPF. This is not always possible, for example, the DCN connections might be on a public network
out of the control of the organization using the ONS 15454 network. If you are considering enabling
OSPF on the LAN, the following limitations must be considered:
• If OSPF is enabled on the LAN, the internal OSC/DCC/GCC OSPF area cannot be 0.0.0.0.
• The ONS 15454 can act as an OSPF area border gateway and support OSPF virtual links. However,
virtual links cannot pass over the OSC/DCC/GCC network.
If all elements in the DCN network are not running OSPF, enabling OSPF on the LAN is very difficult
without creating isolated areas and/or segmentation of OSPF area 0. However, if the DCN network is a
full OSPF network, enabling OSPF on the LAN might be employed for resilient DCN networks.
22-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Case Studies
22.3.3 Management of Non-LAN Connected Multishelf Node
When using dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) multishelf management feature to
subtend shelves from a node controller shelf, the Node Controller must be specially provisioned in case
it does not have direct LAN reachability.
Non-LAN connected Multishelf nodes are not manageable from CTC unless SOCKS Proxy is enabled
on the node. In a GNE/ENE firewall configuration, non-LAN connected network elements must be set
up as end network elements (ENEs) if Firewall is required. If firewall is not required on the non-LAN
connected Multishelf node, then the node must be set up as SOCKS Proxy
LAN-connected network elements (LNEs) can be set up as gateway network elements (GNEs) or as
SOCKS proxies, depending upon network security requirements. If the GNE/ENE firewall feature is
required, the LNE must be set up as a GNE. If the design does not require the firewall feature but does
require all-IP networking, the LNE must be set up as a SOCKS proxy. For procedures to provision a node
or shelf as a GNE, ENE or SOCKS proxy, refer to the “Turn Up a Node” chapter.
22.3.4 DCN Case Study 1: Ring Topology with Two Subnets and Two DCN Connections
DCN Case Study 1 (Figure 22-17) shows an ONS 15454 ring (DWDM or SONET/SDH). The ring is
divided into two subnets and has two DCN connections for resiliency.
Figure 22-17 DCN Case Study 1: ONS 15454 Ring with Two Subnets and Two DCN Connections
159495
192.168.100.0/24 192.168.200.0/24
Node 2
.79
Node 1
.80
Router 1 Router 2
.1 .1
.1 .1
.121
.2 .2
192.168.10.0/24
NOC router
NMS
.113
NOC LAN
10.58.46.64/26
192.168.20.0/24
Node 3
.78
Node 4
.77
22-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Case Studies
During normal operation, this configuration balances the management traffic load over the two available
DCN connections. If one of the two DCN connections fails, the second DCN connection maintains
accessibility so NE management can continue. However, if complete IP connectivity is required, for
example, for SNMP when SOCKS proxy cannot be used, connection resilience is difficult to achieve
because:
• The ONS 15454 does not support route overloading. Configuring different routers with different
costs for the same network destination is not possible.
• The ONS 15454 always tries to route traffic on the LAN interface when its link is up, and the link
on the NE connected to DCN router is always up.
• If the DCN connection fails, the route is longer available.
One solution is to create a generic routing encapsulation (GRE) tunnel to logically connect the remote
Router 1 and remote Router 2 using the OSC/DCC/GCC network (Figure 22-18). With the GRE tunnel,
both remote routers have an alternate path to reach the NOC network in case of DCN failure. However,
the alternate path might become overloaded on the routing tables, resulting in higher costs.
Figure 22-18 DCN Case Study 1: ONS 15454 Ring with Two Subnets, Two DCN Connections, and
GRE Tunnel
22.3.4.1 DCN Case Study 1 IP Configuration
The following sections show sample IP configuration at the routers and ONS 15454 nodes in DCN Case
Study 1.
22.3.4.1.1 NOC Router Configuration
Interface configuration:
interface Ethernet0/0
ip address 10.58.46.121 255.255.255.192
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Ethernet1/0
159496
192.168.100.0/24
192.168.30.0/24
GRE Tunnel
192.168.200.0/24
Router 1 Router 2
.1 .1
.1 .1
.121
.2 .2
.1 .2
192.168.10.0/24
NOC router
NMS
.113
NOC LAN
10.58.46.64/26
192.168.20.0/24
22-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Case Studies
ip address 192.168.20.1 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Ethernet2/0
ip address 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
Static routes with alternate paths at different costs:
ip classless
ip route 192.168.100.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.10.2
ip route 192.168.100.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.20.2 10
ip route 192.168.200.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.20.2
ip route 192.168.200.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.10.2 10
22.3.4.1.2 Router 1 IP Configuration
Interface configuration:
interface Ethernet0/0
ip address 192.168.10.2 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Ethernet1/0
ip address 192.168.100.1 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
GRE tunnel interface configuration:
interface Tunnel0
ip address 192.168.30.1 255.255.255.0
tunnel source Ethernet1/0
tunnel destination 192.168.200.1
Static routes with alternate paths at different costs:
ip classless
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.10.1
ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 192.168.10.1
ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 Tunnel0 10
ip route 192.168.200.0 255.255.255.0 Tunnel0 10
ip route 192.168.200.1 255.255.255.255 192.168.100.80
Note the host route to the peer Router 2 (192.168.200.1) points to the ONS 15454 network (through
192.168.100.80). This is required to set up the GRE tunnel. In this configuration, only the external route
to 10.0.0.0 (that includes the NOC network) is overloaded with the alternate path. However, overloading
might occur on this last-resort route.
22.3.4.1.3 Router 2 IP Configuration
Interface configuration:
interface Ethernet0/0
ip address 192.168.20.2 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Ethernet1/0
ip address 192.168.200.1 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
22-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Case Studies
GRE tunnel interface configuration:
interface Tunnel0
ip address 192.168.30.2 255.255.255.0
tunnel source Ethernet1/0
tunnel destination 192.168.100.1
Static routes with alternate paths at different costs:
ip classless
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.20.1
ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 192.168.20.1
ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 Tunnel0 10
ip route 192.168.100.0 255.255.255.0 Tunnel0 10
ip route 192.168.100.1 255.255.255.255 192.168.200.77
The host routing path to the Router 1 (192.168.100.1) points to the ONS 15454 network (by
192.168.200.77). This is required to set up the GRE tunnel. In this configuration, only the external route
to 10.0.0.0 (that includes the NOC network) is overloaded with the alternate path. However, overloading
the last-resort route might occur. Table 22-5 shows network settings on the four ONS 15454 nodes. The
static routes are created so the DCN-connected nodes advertise their capability to act as last-resort
routers.
22.3.4.2 DCN Case Study 1 Limitations
DCN Case Study 1 shows how a GRE tunnel can be created between two routers to create DCN
connection resiliency. While the resiliency is a benefit, when a DCN failure forces traffic to the GRE
tunnel, the path calculated by the ONS 15454 OSPF algorithm running in the OSC/DCC/GCC network
is no longer the shortest one. Subsequently, the round-trip delay time (RTT) might increase significantly
because the DCN protection in this configuration is transparent to the ONS 15454 network. The ONS
15454 continues to use the same routing table. In addition, if a DCN failure occurs, the routing path that
uses the GRE tunnel adds additional latency because of the number and length of OSC/DCC/GCC spans
that the tunnel has to travel over the ONS 15454 network.
This latency makes this DCN Case Study 1 solution difficult to scale to large networks. If this solution
is used and the network grows significantly, a larger number of DCN-connected NEs are required. For
example, the common rule in ONS 15454 DCN design is that all nodes should be within five section data
communications channel (LDCC)/regeneration section DCC (RS-DCC/OSC or eight line DCC (LDCC)
/multiplex section DCC (MS-DCC) spans from the network attached node. If Case Study 1 design is
implemented, the maximum span numbers should be cut in half. However, if the DCN Case Study 1
design is used in networks that have full IP routing, have connectivity to every NE, and require only
CTC/CTM management, the SOCKS proxy feature can be used to provide the same DCN connectivity
resilience.
Table 22-5 DCN Case Study 1 Node IP Addresses
Node IP Address/Mask Default Gateway
Static Routes:
Destination/Mask – Next Hop
Node 1 192.168.100.80/24 192.168.100.1 0.0.0.0/0 – 192.168.100.1
Node 2 192.168.100.79/24 0.0.0.0 —
Node 3 192.168.100.78/24 0.0.0.0 —
Node 4 192.168.100.77/24 192.168.100.1 0.0.0.0/0 – 192.168.200.1
22-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Case Studies
22.3.5 DCN Case Study 2: Linear Topology with DCN Connections on Both Ends
DCN Case Study 2, shown in Figure 22-19, shows a four-node linear topology with DCN connectivity
at both ends.
Figure 22-19 DCN Case Study 2: ONS 15454 Linear Topology with DCN Connections at Both Ends
To maintain DCN resilience, static routes are used and a GRE tunnel is created between Router 1 and
Router 2 over the DCC/OSC/GCC optical link. In this example, all ONS 15454s are part of the same
subnet. Therefore, the Router 1 and Router 2 static route tables have more entries because alternate paths
must be configured for every host.
22.3.5.1 DCN Case Study 2 IP Configurations
The following sections provide sample IP configurations at routers and ONS 15454 nodes in
DCN Case Study 2.
22.3.5.1.1 NOC Router IP Configuration
Interface configuration:
interface Ethernet0/0
ip address 10.58.46.121 255.255.255.192
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Ethernet1/0
ip address 192.168.20.1 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Ethernet2/0
ip address 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
159497
Router 1 Router 2
.1 .2
.1 .1
.121
.2 .2
192.168.10.0/24
NOC router
NMS
.113
NOC LAN
10.58.46.64/26
192.168.20.0/24
Node 1
.80
Node 2
.79
Node 3
.78
Node 4
.77
22-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Case Studies
Static routes with alternate paths at different costs:
ip classless
ip route 192.168.100.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.10.2
ip route 192.168.100.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.20.2 100
ip route 192.168.100.77 255.255.255.255 192.168.20.2
ip route 192.168.100.77 255.255.255.255 192.168.10.2 10
ip route 192.168.100.78 255.255.255.255 192.168.20.2
ip route 192.168.100.78 255.255.255.255 192.168.10.2 10
ip route 192.168.100.79 255.255.255.255 192.168.10.2
ip route 192.168.100.79 255.255.255.255 192.168.20.2 10
ip route 192.168.100.80 255.255.255.255 192.168.10.2
ip route 192.168.100.80 255.255.255.255 192.168.20.2 10
22.3.5.1.2 Router 1 IP Configuration
Site 1 router interface:
interface Ethernet0/0
ip address 192.168.10.2 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Ethernet1/0
ip address 192.168.100.1 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
GRE tunnel interface configuration:
interface Tunnel0
ip address 192.168.30.1 255.255.255.0
tunnel source Ethernet1/0
tunnel destination 192.168.100.2
Static routes with alternate paths at different costs:
ip classless
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.10.1
ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 192.168.10.1
ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 Tunnel0 10
ip route 192.168.100.2 255.255.255.255 192.168.100.80
Note that the host routing path to the peer DCN router (Site 2, 192.168.100.2) points to the ONS 15454
network (by 192.168.100.80) that is required to set up the GRE tunnel. In this configuration, only the
external route to 10.0.0.0 (that include the NOC network) is overloaded with the alternate path, but
overloading of the last-resort route might also occur.
22.3.5.1.3 Router 2 IP Configuration
Interface configuration:
interface Ethernet0/0
ip address 192.168.20.2 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Ethernet1/0
ip address 192.168.100.2 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
GRE tunnel interface configuration:
interface Tunnel0
ip address 192.168.30.2 255.255.255.0
tunnel source Ethernet1/0
22-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Case Studies
tunnel destination 192.168.100.1
Static routes with alternate paths at different costs:
ip classless
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.20.1
ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 192.168.20.1
ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 Tunnel0 10
ip route 192.168.100.1 255.255.255.255 192.168.100.77
Note that the host route to the Router 1 (192.168.100.1) points to the ONS 15454 network (by
192.168.200.77). This is required to set up the GRE tunnel. In this configuration, only the external route
to 10.0.0.0 (that includes the NOC network) is overloaded with the alternate path. However, overloading
the last-resort route might also occur.
Table 22-6 shows network settings on the four ONS 15454 nodes. The static routes are created so the
DCN-connected nodes advertise their capability to act as last-resort routers.
22.3.5.2 DCN Case Study 2 Limitations
The linear configuration in DCN Case Study 2 does not effectively protect the management network
communication for every fiber failure because the DCN router is not notified of the failures. Therefore,
it continues to send packets on the low-cost path. This problem does not occur in ring topologies where
the fiber failure is internally protected from the optical ring network. However, the OSPF dynamic
routing protocol can be used over the DCN network to provide a solution to this problem. An OSPF
configuration is shown in DCN Case Study 3.
22.3.6 DCN Case Study 3: Linear Topology with DCN Connections on Both Ends Using OSPF Routing
DCN Case Study 3 is the same linear topology as DCN Case Study 2 except OSPF routing is used on the
DCN network. This requires the OSPF active on LAN option, located on the node view (single-shelf
mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) Provisioning > Network > OSPF tab, to be enabled at the
end ONS 15454 nodes. In addition, OSPF must be running between Router 1, Router 2, and the NOC
router.
Because the DCN connection usually passes over a public network where OSPF is not always an option,
the connection between Router 1, Router 2, and the NOC router is configured as a GRE tunnel so OSPF
can run on the tunnel itself.
Figure 22-20 shows the linear configuration with the separate OSPF areas, the tunnel connections, and
the required OSPF virtual link. (The physical connections where the tunnels are passed are not shown in
the figure because they are not directly part of the actual routing path.)
Table 22-6 DCN Case Study 2 Node IP Addresses
Node IP Address/Mask Default Gateway
Static Routes:
Destination/Mask – Next Hop
Node 1 192.168.100.80/24 192.168.100.1 0.0.0.0/0 – 192.168.100.1
Node 2 192.168.100.79/24 0.0.0.0 —
Node 3 192.168.100.78/24 0.0.0.0 —
Node 4 192.168.100.77/24 192.168.100.1 0.0.0.0/0 – 192.168.200.1
22-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Case Studies
Figure 22-20 DCN Case Study 3: ONS 15454 Linear Topology with DCN Connections at Both Ends
Using OSPF
22.3.6.1 DCN Case Study 3 IP Configurations
The following sections provide sample IP configurations at routers and ONS 15454 nodes for
DCN Case Study 3.
22.3.6.1.1 NOC Router IP Configuration
Interface configuration:
interface Ethernet0/0
ip address 10.58.46.121 255.255.255.192
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Ethernet1/0
ip address 192.168.20.1 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
159498
Router 1 Router 2
.1 .2
.121
.2
Tunnel110
.2
Tunnel210
.1
Tunnel110
.1
Tunnel210
192.168.100.0/24
Area 1
Area 100 Area 200
Area 0
NOC router
NMS
.113
NOC LAN
10.58.46.64/26
Node 1
.80
Node 2
.79
Node 3
.78
Node 4
.77
192.168.110.0/24 192.168.210.0/24
22-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Case Studies
!
interface Ethernet2/0
ip address 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Loopback0
ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
GRE tunnel interface configuration:
interface Tunnel110
ip address 192.168.110.1 255.255.255.0
tunnel source Ethernet2/0
tunnel destination 192.168.10.2
!
interface Tunnel210
ip address 192.168.210.1 255.255.255.0
tunnel source Ethernet1/0
tunnel destination 192.168.20.2
!
OSPF routing configuration:
router ospf 1
network 1.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 area 0
network 10.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0
network 192.168.110.0 0.0.0.255 area 100
network 192.168.210.0 0.0.0.255 area 200
area 100 virtual-link 192.168.100.80
area 200 virtual-link 192.168.100.77
!
Note that the OSPF virtual link to the end ONS 15454s is created to connect the DCC/OSC/GCC OSPF
area 1 to the backbone area 0. No static routes are defined on the NOC router.
22.3.6.1.2 Router 1 IP Configuration
Interface configuration:
interface Ethernet0/0
ip address 192.168.10.2 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Ethernet1/0
ip address 192.168.100.1 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
GRE tunnel interface configuration:
interface Tunnel110
ip address 192.168.110.2 255.255.255.0
tunnel source Ethernet0/0
tunnel destination 192.168.10.1
!
OSPF and static routing configuration:
router ospf 1
log-adjacency-changes
network 192.168.100.0 0.0.0.255 area 100
network 192.168.110.0 0.0.0.255 area 100
!
22-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Case Studies
ip classless
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.10.1
22.3.6.1.3 Router 2 IP Configuration
Interface configuration:
interface Ethernet0/0
ip address 192.168.20.2 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Ethernet1/0
ip address 192.168.100.2 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
GRE tunnel interface configuration:
interface Tunnel210
ip address 192.168.210.2 255.255.255.0
tunnel source Ethernet0/0
tunnel destination 192.168.20.1
!
OSPF and static routing configuration:
router ospf 1
network 192.168.100.0 0.0.0.255 area 200
network 192.168.210.0 0.0.0.255 area 200
!
ip classless
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.20.1
Table 22-7 shows network settings on the four ONS 15454 nodes. The static routes are created so the
DCN-connected nodes can advertise their capability to act as last-resort routers.
Table 22-7 DCN Case Study 3 Node IP Addresses
Node IP Address/Mask Default Gateway OSPF Configuration
Node 1 192.168.100.80/24 192.168.100.1 DCC/OSC/GCC area: 0.0.0.1
LAN area: 0.0.0.100
OSPF Area Range Table:
• 192.168.100.79/32 - Area 0.0.0.1
• 192.168.100.78/32 - Area 0.0.0.1
• 192.168.100.77/32 - Area 0.0.0.1
Virtual Link Table: 1.1.1.1
Node 2 192.168.100.79/24 0.0.0.0 DCC/OSC/GCC area: 0.0.0.1
OSPF disabled on LAN
22-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Case Studies
The OSPF virtual link requires its neighbor to be indicated with its router ID, not the physical or tunnel
interface connected to the network. Using a loopback interface on the NOC router makes the router ID
selection independent from real interface IP address.
22.3.6.2 DCN Case Study 3 Limitations
DCN Case Study 3 shows that OSPF can provide better DCN resilience and more efficient routing
choices, which results in better performance. OSPF also provides better network scalability. Some
limitations of using OSPF include:
• OSPF introduces additional complexity, for example, provisioning the OSPF virtual links and
advertisement on the ONS 15454s and routers requires thought and planning.
• OSPF must be enabled on the DCN connection between the NOC and the site routers. This can also
be done through GRE tunnels, as shown in this case study.
• Planning and thought must be given to the separation of the OSPF areas. Creation of virtual links to
overcome the limitations described in the “22.3.2 OSPF” section on page 22-23 and to avoid
isolated areas and segmentation in the backbone area requires planning as well.
22.3.7 DCN Case Study 4: Two Linear Cascaded Topologies With Two DCN Connections
DCN Case Study 4, shown in Figure 22-21, extends the simple linear topology shown in DCN Case
Study 3. However in this example, two linear DCN connections go to the same site router and all the
ONS 15454s are in the same subnet. A GRE tunnel logically connects the remote Router 1 and Router 2
over the OSC/DCC/GCC network, which is similar to the DCN Case Study 1 configuration
(Figure 22-18). The GRE tunnel provides the remote routers with an alternate path to reach the NOC
network in case a DCN failure occurs. However, the alternate paths might overload the router routing
tables and carry a higher cost because all alternate paths are host-based due to the fact the ONS 15454s
reside in the same subnet.
Node 3 192.168.100.78/24 0.0.0.0 DCC/OSC/GCC area: 0.0.0.1
OSPF disabled on LAN
Node 4 192.168.100.77/24 192.168.100.1 DCC/OSC/GCC area: 0.0.0.1
LAN area: 0.0.0.200
OSPF Area Range Table:
• 192.168.100.80/32 - Area 0.0.0.1
• 192.168.100.79/32 - Area 0.0.0.1
• 192.168.100.78/32 - Area 0.0.0.1
Virtual Link Table: 1.1.1.1
Table 22-7 DCN Case Study 3 Node IP Addresses (continued)
Node IP Address/Mask Default Gateway OSPF Configuration
22-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Case Studies
Figure 22-21 DCN Case Study 4: Two Linear Cascaded Topologies with Two DCN Connections
22.3.7.1 DCN Case Study 4 IP Configurations
The following sections provide sample IP configurations at the routers and ONS 15454 nodes for
DCN Case Study 4.
22.3.7.1.1 NOC Router IP Configuration
Interface configuration:
interface Ethernet0/0
ip address 10.58.46.121 255.255.255.192
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Ethernet1/0
ip address 192.168.20.1 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Ethernet2/0
ip address 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
Static routes with alternate paths at different costs:
ip classless
ip route 192.168.100.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.10.2
ip route 192.168.100.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.20.2 100
ip route 192.168.100.77 255.255.255.255 192.168.20.2 10
ip route 192.168.100.77 255.255.255.255 192.168.10.2 20
ip route 192.168.100.78 255.255.255.255 192.168.20.2
ip route 192.168.100.78 255.255.255.255 192.168.10.2 10
ip route 192.168.100.79 255.255.255.255 192.168.20.2
159499
Router 1 Router 2
.1 .2
.1 .1
.121
.2 .2
192.168.10.0/24
192.168.100.0/24
NOC router
NMS
.113
NOC LAN
10.58.46.64/26
192.168.20.0/24
Node 1
.80
Node 2
.79
Node 3
.78
Node 4
.77
22-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Case Studies
ip route 192.168.100.79 255.255.255.255 192.168.10.2 10
ip route 192.168.100.80 255.255.255.255 192.168.10.2
ip route 192.168.100.80 255.255.255.255 192.168.20.2 10
ip route 192.168.200.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.20.2
ip route 192.168.200.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.10.2 100
22.3.7.1.2 Router 1 IP Configuration
Interface configuration:
interface Ethernet0/0
ip address 192.168.10.2 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Ethernet1/0
ip address 192.168.100.1 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
GRE tunnel interface configuration:
interface Tunnel0
ip address 192.168.30.1 255.255.255.0
tunnel source Ethernet1/0
tunnel destination 192.168.100.2
Static routes with alternate paths at different costs:
ip classless
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.10.1
ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 192.168.10.1
ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 Tunnel0 10
ip route 192.168.100.2 255.255.255.255 192.168.100.80
ip route 192.168.100.77 255.255.255.255 Tunnel0 20
ip route 192.168.100.78 255.255.255.255 Tunnel0 10
ip route 192.168.100.79 255.255.255.255 Tunnel0 10
Note that the host routing path to the peer DCN router (Router 2, 192.168.100.2) points to the
ONS 15454 network (by 192.168.100.80). This is required to set up the GRE tunnel. In this
configuration, only the external route to 10.0.0.0 (that includes the NOC network) is overloaded with the
alternate path. However, overloading of the last-resort route could also occur.
22.3.7.1.3 Router 2 IP Configuration
Interface configuration:
interface Ethernet0/0
ip address 192.168.20.2 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Ethernet1/0
ip address 192.168.100.2 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
GRE tunnel interface configuration:
interface Tunnel0
ip address 192.168.30.2 255.255.255.0
tunnel source Ethernet1/0
tunnel destination 192.168.100.1
Static routes with alternate paths at different costs:
ip classless
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.20.1
22-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Extension
ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 192.168.20.1
ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 Tunnel0 10
ip route 192.168.100.1 255.255.255.255 192.168.100.79
ip route 192.168.100.80 255.255.255.255 Tunnel0 10
Note that the host routing path to the peer DCN router (Router, IP 192.168.100.1) points to the
ONS 15454 network (by 192.168.200.79). This is required to set up the GRE tunnel. In this
configuration, only the external route to 10.0.0.0 (that include the NOC network) is overloaded with the
alternate path. However, overloading the last-resort route is also possible.
Table 22-8 shows network settings on the four ONS 15454 nodes. The static routes are created so the
DCN-connected nodes can advertise their capability to act as last-resort routers.
22.3.7.2 DCN Case Study 4 Limitations
Many limitations described in the “22.3.4.2 DCN Case Study 1 Limitations” section on page 22-27 also
apply to this case study. However, the problems are less acute because of the DCN connection in the
middle of the optical network. For DWDM networks, increased latency might became a problem if the
linear topology has many spans with intermediate line amplifier or optical add/drop multiplexing
(OADM) nodes, which is sometimes done to cover long-distance connections. In this case, when one
DCN fails, management packets for nodes near the middle of the span travel 1.5 times the complete
point-to-point connection. The normal routing figure is 0.5. The full connection length of a GRE tunnel
is used as an alternate routing path.
22.4 DCN Extension
ONS 15454 DWDM networks require a communication channel to exchange data among the different
nodes within the network. Until Software Release 7.0, the only usable channel was the optical service
channel (OSC) provided by the OSCM and OSC-CSM cards. In a long DWDM metro network, usage of
OSC channel adds limitations in terms of cost and performance because the OSC channel maximum loss
is 37 dB.
The primary aim of the DCN extension feature is to remove the OSC constraint and leverage on already
available external DCN or traffic matrix that allows nodes to be reached without using an OSC channel.
You can connect two nodes in a DWDM network without using an OSC channel in the following two
methods:
• Using external DCN
• Using GCC/DCC
Table 22-8 DCN Case Study 4 Node IP Addresses
Node IP Address/Mask Default Gateway
Static Routes:
Destination/Mask – Next Hop
Node 1 192.168.100.80/24 192.168.100.1 0.0.0.0/0 – 192.168.100.1
192.168.100.1/32 – 192.168.100.80
Node 2 192.168.100.79/24 192.168.100.2 192.168.100.2/32 – 192.168.100.79
Node 3 192.168.100.78/24 192.168.100.2 0.0.0.0/0 – 192.168.100.2
Node 4 192.168.100.77/24 0.0.0.0 —
22-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
DCN Extension
The following sections describe the different communication methods and the factors to be considered
while provisioning the connectivity.
22.4.1 Network Using OSC
Figure 22-22 shows a point-to-point network that uses OSC as the communication channel.
Figure 22-22 Network Using OSC
In a network using OSC channel, it is possible to supervise all the nodes from the network operations
center (NOC) and all nodes can communicate with each other using the OSC channel. Network topology
discovery is automatic when you use an OSC channel.
22.4.2 Network Using External DCN
Figure 22-23 shows a point-to-point network that uses external DCN as the communication channel.
Figure 22-23 Network Using External DCN
In a network using external DCN, it is possible to supervise all the nodes from the network operations
center (NOC) and all nodes can communicate with each other using external DCN. The NOC is
connected to each node through the external DCN. Since nodes do not have OSC connectivity, you must
DCN
CTC/Management
OSC
Node A Node B
273877
CTC/Management
OTS to OTS PPC
Virtual connection
Node A Node B
273878
DCN
Node connection relies on DCN
22-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Routing Table
create an OTS-to-OTS PPC between the nodes. The OTS-to-OTS PPC creates a DCN connection
between the nodes. Refer to the “Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords” chapter
for instructions on how to provision an OTS-to-OTS PPC.
22.4.3 Network Using GCC/DCC
Figure 22-24 shows a point-to-point network that uses GCC/DCC as the communication channel.
Figure 22-24 Network Using GCC/DCC
In a network using GCC/DCC, one ONS 15454 node (for example, Node A) is provisioned as a gateway
network element (GNE). The NOC is connected only to the GNE. It is possible to supervise all the nodes
from the network operations center (NOC) and all nodes can communicate with each other using
GCC/DCC.
However in such a network, because of the absence of the embedded OSC channel, discovery of the
network topology is not automatic. You must manually provision the adjacency of nodes in order to
configure the correct topology. Refer to the “Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable
Patchcords” chapter for instructions on how to provision DCN extension for a network using GCC/DCC.
22.5 Routing Table
ONS 15454 routing information is displayed on the Maintenance > Routing Table tab. The routing table
provides the following information:
• Destination—Displays the IP address of the destination network or host.
• Mask—Displays the subnet mask used to reach the destination host or network.
• Gateway—Displays the IP address of the gateway used to reach the destination network or host.
• Usage—Shows the number of times the listed route has been used.
• Interface—Shows the ONS 15454 interface used to access the destination. Values are:
– motfcc0—The ONS 15454 Ethernet interface, that is, the RJ-45 jack on the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 and, for ANSI shelves, the LAN 1 pins on the backplane or, for ETSI
shelves, the LAN connection on the MIC-C/T/P.
– pdcc0—An SDCC or RS-DCC interface, that is, an OC-N/STM-N trunk card identified as the
SDCC or RS-DCC termination.
OTS to OTS PPC
GCC
Virtual connection
Node connection relies on GCC/DCC
DCN
CTC/Management
Node A Node B 273879
22-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Routing Table
– lo0—A loopback interface.
Table 22-9 shows sample routing entries for an ONS 15454.
Entry 1 shows the following:
• Destination (0.0.0.0) is the default route entry. All undefined destination network or host entries on
this routing table are mapped to the default route entry.
• Mask (0.0.0.0) is always 0 for the default route.
• Gateway (172.20.214.1) is the default gateway address. All outbound traffic that cannot be found in
this routing table or is not on the node’s local subnet is sent to this gateway.
• Interface (motfcc0) indicates that the ONS 15454 Ethernet interface is used to reach the gateway.
Entry 2 shows the following:
• Destination (172.20.214.0) is the destination network IP address.
• Mask (255.255.255.0) is a 24-bit mask, meaning all addresses within the 172.20.214.0 subnet can
be a destination.
• Gateway (172.20.214.92) is the gateway address. All outbound traffic belonging to this network is
sent to this gateway.
• Interface (motfcc0) indicates that the ONS 15454 Ethernet interface is used to reach the gateway.
Entry 3 shows the following:
• Destination (172.20.214.92) is the destination host IP address.
• Mask (255.255.255.255) is a 32 bit mask, meaning only the 172.20.214.92 address is a destination.
• Gateway (127.0.0.1) is a loopback address. The host directs network traffic to itself using this
address.
• Interface (lo0) indicates that the local loopback interface is used to reach the gateway.
Entry 4 shows the following:
• Destination (172.20.214.93) is the destination host IP address.
• Mask (255.255.255.255) is a 32 bit mask, meaning only the 172.20.214.93 address is a destination.
• Gateway (0.0.0.0) means the destination host is directly attached to the node.
• Interface (pdcc0) indicates that a DCC interface is used to reach the destination host.
Entry 5 shows a DCC-connected node that is accessible through a node that is not directly connected:
• Destination (172.20.214.94) is the destination host IP address.
• Mask (255.255.255.255) is a 32-bit mask, meaning only the 172.20.214.94 address is a destination.
Table 22-9 Sample Routing Table Entries
Entry Destination Mask Gateway Usage Interface
1 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.20.214.1 265103 motfcc0
2 172.20.214.0 255.255.255.0 172.20.214.92 0 motfcc0
3 172.20.214.92 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 54 lo0
4 172.20.214.93 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 16853 pdcc0
5 172.20.214.94 255.255.255.255 172.20.214.93 16853 pdcc0
22-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
External Firewalls
• Gateway (172.20.214.93) indicates that the destination host is accessed through a node with IP
address 172.20.214.93.
• Interface (pdcc0) indicates that a DCC interface is used to reach the gateway.
22.6 External Firewalls
This section provides sample access control lists for external firewalls. Table 22-10 lists the ports that
are used by the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE.
Table 22-10 Ports Used by the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
Port Function Action1
1. D = deny, NA = not applicable, OK = do not deny
0 Never used D
20 FTP D
21 FTP control D
22 SSH D
23 Telnet D
80 HTTP D
111 SUNRPC NA
161 SNMP traps destinations D
162 SNMP traps destinations D
513 rlogin D
683 CORBA IIOP OK
1080 Proxy server (socks) D
2001-2017 I/O card Telnet D
2018 DCC processor on active
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSC
E
D
2361 TL1 D
3082 Raw TL1 D
3083 TL1 D
5001 BLSR server port D
5002 BLSR client port D
7200 SNMP alarm input port D
9100 EQM port D
9401 TCC boot port D
9999 Flash manager D
10240-12287 Proxy client D
57790 Default TCC listener port OK
22-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Open GNE
The following access control list (ACL) example shows a firewall configuration when the proxy server
gateway setting is not enabled. In the example, the CTC workstation's address is 192.168.10.10. and the
ONS 15454 address is 10.10.10.100. The firewall is attached to the GNE, so inbound is CTC to the GNE
and outbound is from the GNE to CTC. The CTC Common Object Request Broker Architecture
(CORBA) Standard constant is 683 and the TCC CORBA Default is TCC Fixed (57790).
access-list 100 remark *** Inbound ACL, CTC -> NE ***
access-list 100 remark
access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.10.10 host 10.10.10.100 eq www
access-list 100 remark *** allows initial contact with ONS 15454 using http (port 80) ***
access-list 100 remark
access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.10.10 host 10.10.10.100 eq 57790
access-list 100 remark *** allows CTC communication with ONS 15454 GNE (port 57790) ***
access-list 100 remark
access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.10.10 host 10.10.10.100 established
access-list 100 remark *** allows ACKs back from CTC to ONS 15454 GNE ***
access-list 101 remark *** Outbound ACL, NE -> CTC ***
access-list 101 remark
access-list 101 permit tcp host 10.10.10.100 host 192.168.10.10 eq 683
access-list 101 remark *** allows alarms etc., from the 15454 (random port) to the CTC
workstation (port 683) ***
access-list 100 remark
access-list 101 permit tcp host 10.10.10.100 host 192.168.10.10 established
access-list 101 remark *** allows ACKs from the 15454 GNE to CTC ***
The following ACL example shows a firewall configuration when the proxy server gateway setting is
enabled. As with the first example, the CTC workstation address is 192.168.10.10 and the ONS 15454
address is 10.10.10.100. The firewall is attached to the GNE, so inbound is CTC to the GNE and
outbound is from the GNE to CTC. CTC CORBA Standard constant is 683 and TCC CORBA Default is
TCC Fixed (57790).
access-list 100 remark *** Inbound ACL, CTC -> NE ***
access-list 100 remark
access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.10.10 host 10.10.10.100 eq www
access-list 100 remark *** allows initial contact with the 15454 using http (port 80) ***
access-list 100 remark
access-list 100 permit tcp host 192.168.10.10 host 10.10.10.100 eq 1080
access-list 100 remark *** allows CTC communication with the 15454 GNE (port 1080) ***
access-list 100 remark
access-list 101 remark *** Outbound ACL, NE -> CTC ***
access-list 101 remark
access-list 101 permit tcp host 10.10.10.100 host 192.168.10.10 established
access-list 101 remark *** allows ACKs from the 15454 GNE to CTC ***
22.7 Open GNE
The ONS 15454 can communicate with non-ONS nodes that do not support Point-to-Point Protocol
(PPP) vendor extensions or OSPF type 10 opaque link-state advertisements (LSA), both of which are
necessary for automatic node and link discovery. An open GNE configuration allows a GCC-based
network to function as an IP network for non-ONS nodes.
To configure an open GNE network, you can provision GCC terminations to include a far-end, non-ONS
node using either the default IP address of 0.0.0.0 or a specified IP address. You provision a far-end,
non-ONS node by checking the Far End is Foreign check box during GCC creation. The default 0.0.0.0
IP address allows the far-end, non-ONS node to identify itself with any IP address; if you set an IP
address other than 0.0.0.0, a link is established only if the far-end node identifies itself with that IP
address, providing an extra level of security.
22-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Open GNE
By default, the proxy server only allows connections to discovered ONS peers and the firewall blocks
all IP traffic between the GCC network and LAN. You can, however, provision proxy tunnels to allow
up to 12 additional destinations for SOCKS version 5 connections to non-ONS nodes. You can also
provision firewall tunnels to allow up to 12 additional destinations for direct IP connectivity between the
GCC network and LAN. Proxy and firewall tunnels include both a source and destination subnet. The
connection must originate within the source subnet and terminate within the destination subnet before
either the SOCKS connection or IP packet flow is allowed. A proxy connection is allowed if the CTC
client is in a source subnet and the requested destination is in the destination subnet. Firewall tunnels
allow IP traffic to route between the node Ethernet and pdcc interfaces. An inbound Ethernet packet is
allowed through the firewall if its source address matches a tunnel source and its destination matches a
tunnel destination. An inbound pdcc packet is allowed through the firewall if its source address matches
a tunnel destination and its destination address matches a tunnel source. Tunnels only affect TCP and
UDP packets.
The availability of proxy and/or firewall tunnels depends on the network access settings of the node:
• If the node is configured with the proxy server enabled in GNE or ENE mode, you must set up a
proxy tunnel and/or a firewall tunnel.
• If the node is configured with the proxy server enabled in proxy-only mode, you can set up proxy
tunnels. Firewall tunnels are not allowed.
• If the node is configured with the proxy server disabled, neither proxy tunnels nor firewall tunnels
are allowed.
Figure 22-25 shows an example of a foreign node connected to the GCC network. Proxy and firewall
tunnels are useful in this example because the GNE would otherwise block IP access between the PC
and the foreign node.
22-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Open GNE
Figure 22-25 Proxy and Firewall Tunnels for Foreign Terminations
Figure 22-26 shows a remote node connected to an ENE Ethernet port. Proxy and firewall tunnels are
useful in this example because the GNE would otherwise block IP access between the PC and foreign
node. This configuration also requires a firewall tunnel on the ENE.
Remote CTC
10.10.20.10
10.10.20.0/24
10.10.10.0/24
Interface 0/0
10.10.20.1
Router A
Interface 0/1
10.10.10.1
ONS 15454
GNE
10.10.10.100/24
ONS 15454
ENE
10.10.10.250/24
Non-ONS node
Foreign NE
130.94.122.199/28
ONS 15454
ENE
10.10.10.150/24
ONS 15454
ENE
10.10.10.200/24
124261
Local/Craft CTC
192.168.20.20
Ethernet
Optical Fiber
22-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
TCP/IP and OSI Networking
Figure 22-26 Foreign Node Connection to an ENE Ethernet Port
22.8 TCP/IP and OSI Networking
ONS 15454 DCN communication is based on the TCP/IP protocol suite. However, ONS 15454s can also
be networked with equipment that uses the OSI protocol suite. While TCP/IP and OSI protocols are not
directly compatible, they do have the same objectives and occupy similar layers of the OSI reference
model. For detailed information about OSI protocols, processes, and scenarios, refer to the
“Management Network Connectivity” chapter in the ONS 15454 Reference Manual. OSI/MultiService
Transport Platform (MSTP) scenarios are provided in the following sections.
In OSI/MSTP Scenario 1 (Figure 22-27), an SDCC or RS-DCC carries an OC-N/STM-N signal from an
OSI-based third-party NE to a transponder (TXP) or muxponder (MXP) card on an ONS NE. It is carried
by GCC to a TXP/MXP card on another MSTP NE and then by SDCC or RS-DCC to a second third-party
NE. This scenario requires TXPs/MXPs whose client interfaces can be provisioned in section or line
termination mode. These include:
• TXP_MR_2.5 and TXPP_MR_2.5 (when equipped with OC-N/STM-N SFPs)
• TXP_MR_10G and TXP_MR_10E (when the client is configured as OC-192/STM-64)
• MXP_2.5_10G and MXP_2.5_10E
Remote CTC
10.10.20.10
10.10.20.0/24
10.10.10.0/24
Interface 0/0
10.10.20.1
Router A
Interface 0/1
10.10.10.1
ONS 15454
GNE
10.10.10.100/24
ONS 15454
ENE
10.10.10.250/24
ONS 15454
ENE
10.10.10.150/24
ONS 15454
ENE
10.10.10.200/24
124262
Local/Craft CTC
192.168.20.20
Ethernet
Optical Fiber
Non-ONS node
Foreign NE
130.94.122.199/28
22-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
TCP/IP and OSI Networking
OSI has to be carried or tunneled to the other TXP/MXP card through an OSC termination, GCC
termination, or both. The third-party NMS has OSI connectivity to its NEs with the MSTP ONS NE
serving as the GNE for third-party vendor, OSI-based SONET equipment.
Figure 22-27 OSI/MSTP Scenario 1
OSI/MSTP Scenario 2 (Figure 22-28) is similar to Scenario 1, except the MSTP NEs do not have
connectivity to an OSI NMS.
Third party OSI
based NMS
OSC
OSC
GCC
OSC
OSC
SDCC/RS-DCC
SDCC/RS-DCC
OSI over SDCC/RS-DCC
OSI over SDCC/RS-DCC
TXP/MXP
TXP/MXP
Other vendor
SONET/SDH
Other vendor
SONET/SDH
DCN (IP/OSI)
MSTP
GNE
MSTP MSTP
MSTP
137656
22-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
TCP/IP and OSI Networking
Figure 22-28 OSI/MSTP Scenario 2
OSI/MSTP Scenario 3 (Figure 22-29) shows the following:
• OSI is carried over an SDCC or RS-DCC termination.
• OSI has to be carried or tunneled to the other peer TXP/MXP through an OSC termination, GCC
termination, or both.
• An OSS has IP connectivity to all the NEs.
• The MSTP NE is a GNE for the third-party OSI-based SONET NEs. The MSTP NEs perform all
mediation functions.
OSC
OSC
OSC OSC
SDCC/RS-DCC
SDCC/RS-DCC
OSI over SDCC/RS-DCC
OSI over SDCC/RS-DCC
TXP/MXP
TXP/MXP
Other vendor
SONET/SDH
Other vendor
SONET/SDH
MSTP
MSTP
MSTP
MSTP
137657
22-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
TCP/IP and OSI Networking
Figure 22-29 OSI/MSTP Scenario 3
OSI/MSTP Scenario 4 (Figure 22-30) shows the following:
• OSI is carried over an SDCC or RS-DCC termination.
• OSI has to be carried or tunneled to the other peer TXP/MXP through an OSC termination, GCC
termination, or both
• An OSS has IP connectivity to all the NEs through third-party NE network.
• The MSTP NE is a GNE for the third-party OSI-based SONET NEs. The MSTP NEs perform all
mediation functions.
• The third-party vendor NE is a GNE for the Cisco MSTP network.
IP OSS
OSC
OSC
GCC
OSC
OSC
SDCC/RS-DCC
SDCC/RS-DCC
OSI over SDCC/RS-DCC
OSI over SDCC/RS-DCC
TXP/MXP
TXP/MXP
Other vendor
SONET/SDH
Other vendor
SONET/SDH
DCN (IP)
MSTP
GNE
MSTP MSTP
MSTP
137658
22-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Link Management Protocol
Figure 22-30 OSI/IP Scenario 4
22.9 Link Management Protocol
This section describes Link Management Protocol1 (LMP) management and configuration. To
troubleshoot specific alarms, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide. To configure
LMP, refer to the “Turn Up a Network” chapter.
Note CTM support is not required for LMP.
LMP is used to establish traffic engineering (TE) links between Cisco ONS 15454 nodes or between
Cisco ONS 15454 nodes and selected non-Cisco nodes that use vendor-specific hardware.
22.9.1 Overview
LMP manages TE links between nodes through the use of control channels. TE links are designed to
define the most efficient paths possible for traffic to flow over a network and through the Internet. Traffic
engineering encompasses traffic management, capacity management, traffic measurement and modeling,
OSC
OSC
GCC
OSC
OSC
SDCC/RS-DCC
SDCC/RS-DCC
OSI over SDCC/RS-DCC
OSI over SDCC/RS-DCC
TXP/MXP
TXP/MXP
Other vendor
SONET/SDH
Other vendor
SONET/SDH
DCN (IPP over
CLNS tunnel)
MSTP
GNE
MSTP MSTP
MSTP
137659
CTM
1. The LMP protocol is specified by the IETF in an Internet-Draft, draft-ietf-ccamp-lmp-10.txt, which was
published as a Proposed Standard, RFC 4204, (http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc4204.txt), on 2005-10-28.
22-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Link Management Protocol
network modeling, and performance analysis. Traffic engineering methods include call routing,
connection routing, quality of service (QoS) resource management, routing table management, and
capacity management.
LMP manages TE links between peer nodes, such as two optical cross-connect (OXC) nodes. Peer nodes
have equivalent signaling and routing. LMP also manages TE links between a node such as an OXC and
an adjacent optical line system (OLS) node. An example of an OLS node is an ONS 15454 DWDM node.
Networks with routers, switches, OXC nodes, DWDM OLS nodes, and add/drop multiplexers (ADM)
use a common control plane such as Generalized Multiprotocol Label Switching (GMPLS) to provision
resources and provide network survivability using protection and restoration techniques. LMP is part of
the GMPLS protocol suite.
A single TE link can be formed from several individual links. Management of TE links can be
accomplished with in-band messaging, as well as with out-of-band methods. The following material
describes the LMP between a pair of nodes that manages TE links. LMP accomplishes the following:
• Maintains control channel connectivity
• Verifies the physical connectivity of the data links
• Correlates the link property information
• Suppresses downstream alarms
• Localizes link failures for protection/restoration purposes in multiple types of networks
DWDM networks often use Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) and GMPLS as common-control
planes to control how packets are routed through the network.
LMP manages the control channel that must exist between nodes for routing, signaling, and link
management. For a control channel to exist, each node must have an IP interface that is reachable from
the other node. Together, the IP interfaces form a control channel. The interface for the control messages
does not have to be the same interface as the one for the data.
22.9.1.1 MPLS
MPLS provides a mechanism for engineering network traffic patterns that is independent of routing
tables and routing protocols. MPLS assigns short labels to network packets that describe how to forward
the packets through the network. The traditional Layer 3 forwarding mechanism requires each hop to
analyze the packet header and determine the next hop based on routing table lookup. With MPLS, the
analysis of the packet header is performed just once, when a packet enters the MPLS cloud. The packet
is then assigned to a stream known as a Label Switch Path (LSP), which is identified with a label. The
short, fixed-length label is an index into a forwarding table, which is more efficient than the traditional
routing table lookup at each hop. Using MPLS, both the control protocol (used to manage the LSPs) and
user data can be carried over the same bearer interfaces.
22.9.1.2 GMPLS
GMPLS is based on MPLS, with protocol extensions to support additional technologies, including time
division multiplexing (TDM) slots (such as SONET and SDH), wavelength division multiplexing
(WDM) wavelengths at Layer 1, and fiber. For MPLS, the control traffic (signaling and routing) can run
over bearer interfaces. This is not the case with GMPLS, where a separate control channel is used. The
GMPLS control channel is managed with LMP. With GMPLS, the control channels between two
adjacent nodes do not need to use the same physical medium as the data links between those nodes.
22-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Link Management Protocol
22.9.2 Configuring LMP
Configuring LMP consists of the following four topics:
• Control channel management
• TE link management
• Link connectivity verification
• Fault management
22.9.2.1 Control Channel Management
Control channel management establishes and maintains control channels between adjacent nodes.
Control channels use a Config message exchange and a fast keep-alive mechanism between the nodes.
The latter is required if lower-level mechanisms are not available to detect control-channel failures. A
maximum of four LMP control channels can be supported.
The nodes initially exchange configuration messages (Config, ConfigAck, and ConfigNack), which are
used to exchange identifiers and negotiate parameters for the keep-alive protocol. The nodes then
perform a continuous rapid exchange of Hello messages, which are used to monitor the health on the
channel.
Note The identifiers are Local Node Id, Remote Node Id, Local Control Channel Id, and Remote
Control Channel Id. The parameters are the HelloInterval and the HelloDeadInterval.
LMP out-of-fiber and LMP out-of-band control channels are supported and terminated on the shelf. An
out-of-fiber control channel includes using the control plane network (Ethernet) for the control channel
because Ethernet is separate from the fiber used for the data plane. An out-of-band control channel
includes using overhead bytes, such as the SDCC and LDCC bytes, for the control channel because
overhead bytes are separate from the payload. In-band means that the control messages are in the same
channel as the data messages; therefore, out-of-band refers to overhead bytes in the same fiber, separate
circuits dedicated to control messages in the same fiber (SONET/SDH circuits), or separate wavelengths
in the same fiber (DWDM).
Note Overhead bytes are SDCC or LDCC for SONET networks, RS-DCC or MS-DCC for SDH
networks, and GCC or OSC for DWDM networks.
Out-of-band implies in-fiber, but not in-band. In-fiber means that the control messages are in the same
fiber as the data messages, and includes both in-band and out-of-band. Out-of-fiber means that the
control messages take a path separate from the data plane. This includes separate fiber and Ethernet.
The control channel management for a peer node to OLS link is the same as that for a link between two
peer nodes.
Note The software supports gracefully taking a control channel down for administration purposes (refer to
Section 3.2.3 of the IETF LMP document). However, there is no provision for a graceful restart (refer to
Section 8 of RFC 4204).
• Graceful means that the nodes participating in the control channel agree that the link should go
down. To gracefully take down a control channel, the node sets the ControlChannelDown flag in its
messages to the other node until either the HelloDeadInterval expires or the other node sends a
22-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Link Management Protocol
message back with the ControlChannelDown flag set. In either case, the node then stops sending
messages for this control channel. Before a control channel is taken down, there should be a backup
control channel in place that can be used to manage the data links.
• Non-graceful means that one of the nodes just stops sending messages. The other side would declare
a failure after the HelloDeadInterval, but would continue to send Hello messages to see if the control
channel will come back up.
22.9.2.2 TE Link Management
LMP ensures that links are grouped into TE links and that the properties of those links are the same at
both endpoints. This is called TE link management, or link property correlation.
Link property correlation is used to synchronize the TE link properties and verify the TE link
configuration. The link property correlation function of LMP aggregates one or more data links into a
TE link and synchronizes the properties of the TE link with the neighbor node. The procedure starts by
sending a LinkSummary message to the neighbor. The LinkSummary message includes the local and
remote Link Identifier, a list of all data links that make up the TE link, and various link properties. It is
mandatory that a LinkSummaryAck or LinkSummaryNack message be sent in response to the receipt of
a LinkSummary message, indicating agreement or disagreement with the link properties.
Note A maximum of 256 LMP TE links is supported.
22.9.2.3 Link Connectivity Verification
Link connectivity verification is not supported in this release, but might be supported in the future.
22.9.2.4 Fault Management
Fault management is particularly useful when the control channels are physically diverse from the data
links. It is used for rapid notification regarding the status of one or more TE-link data channels. The use
of fault management is negotiated as part of the TE link’s LinkSummary exchange. Data links and TE
link failures can be rapidly isolated and fault management supports both unidirectional and bidirectional
LSPs. Transparent devices are useful because traditional methods for monitoring the health of allocated
data links might no longer be appropriate. Instead, fault detection is delegated to the physical layer (for
example, loss of light or optical monitoring of the data) instead of Layer 2 or Layer 3. Fault management
uses the ChannelStatus, ChannelStatusAck, ChannelStatusRequest, and ChannelStatusResponse
messages.
Note The LMP Channel Activation/Deactivation Indication procedures are not supported; they are described
in the IETF LMP document, Sections 6.4 and 6.5.
22-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Link Management Protocol
22.9.3 LMP WDM
LMP manages traffic engineering links between peer nodes (nodes that are peers in signaling and/or
routing). The purpose of the LMP WDM extensions2 is to allow LMP to be used between an OXC node
and an adjacent DWDM OLS node. Figure 22-31 illustrates the relationship between LMP and
LMP-WDM. OXC 1 and OXC 2 are peer nodes whose control channel is managed with LMP.
LMP-WDM manages the control channel between an OXC node and an OLS node.
Figure 22-31 LMP and LMP-WDM Relationship
When the two OLS nodes can communicate their configuration and the current state of their optical link
to the two peer nodes (OXC 1 and OXC 2) through LMP-WDM, network usability is improved through
the reduction of manual configuration and enhanced fault detection and recovery.
22.9.4 LMP Network Implementation
Figure 22-32 shows a network-level LMP implementation. It is an IP-plus-optical network, with
end-to-end routing based on MPLS and GMPLS. The primary network components are:
• Routers
– Cisco Carrier Router System (CSR)
– Cisco Gigabit Switch Router (GSR)
– Cisco ASR 9000 Series Routers
• An OXC node
• Ultra long-haul (ULH) DWDM equipment
LMP and other features allow the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node to fulfill the ULH DWDM role.
Figure 22-32 illustrates the relationship between the network components.
2. LMP-WDM extensions that allow management of links between a peer node and an adjacent OLS node are
described in the following IETF document: Internet-Draft, draft-ietf-ccamp-lmp-wdm-03.txt, published as a
Proposed Standard, RFC 4209 (http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc4209.txt), 2005-11-1
OXC 1 OLS 1 OLS 2 OXC 2
LMP-WDM LMP-WDM
LMP
151937
22-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IPv6 Network Compatibility
Figure 22-32 LMP System Implementation
22.10 IPv6 Network Compatibility
IPv6 simplifies IP configuration and administration and has a larger address space than IPv4 to support
the future growth of the Internet and Internet related technologies. It uses 128-bit addresses as against
the 32-bit used in IPv4 addresses. Also, IPv6 gives more flexibility in designing newer addressing
architectures.
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM can function in an IPv6 network when an Internet router that supports
Network Address Translation-Protocol Translation (NAT-PT) is positioned between the GNE, such as an
ONS 15454 DWDM, and the client workstation. NAT-PT is a migration tool that helps users transition
from IPv4 networks to IPv6 networks. NAT-PT is defined in RFC-2766. IPv4 and IPv6 nodes
communicate with each other using NAT-PT by allowing both IPv6 and IPv4 stacks to interface between
the IPv6 DCN and the IPv4 DCC networks.
Note IPv6 is supported on Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Software R8.0 and later with an external NAT-PT router.
22.11 IPv6 Native Support
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Software R9.0 and later supports native IPv6. ONS 15454 DWDM can be
managed over IPv6 DCN networks by enabling the IPv6 feature. After you enable IPv6 in addition to
IPv4, you can use CTC, TL1, and SNMP over an IPv6 DCN to manage ONS 15454 DWDM. Each NE
can be assigned an IPv6 address in addition to the IPv4 address. You can access the NE by entering the
IPv4 address, an IPv6 address or the DNS name of the device. The IPv6 address is assigned only on the
LAN interface of the NE. DCC/GCC interfaces use the IPv4 address.
Router
(Cisco CRS)
Router
(Cisco CRS)
OXC
OXC OXC
OXC
Cisco ONS 15454
MSTP
TXP
Mux/Demux
Cisco ONS 15454
MSTP
TXP
Mux/Demux
Cisco ONS 15454
MSTP
TXP
Mux/Demux
Cisco ONS 15454
MSTP
TXP
Mux/Demux
LSP 1
LSP 2
LMP LMP LMP
LMP-WDM LMP-WDM
151936
22-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IPv6 Native Support
By default, when IPv6 is enabled, the node processes both IPv4 and IPv6 packets on the LAN interface.
If you want to process only IPv6 packets, you need to disable IPv4 on the node. Before you disable IPv4,
ensure that IPv6 is enabled and the node is not in multishelf mode.
Figure 22-33 shows how an IPv6 DCN interacts with and IPv4 DCC.
Figure 22-33 IPv6-IPv4 Interaction
You can manage MSTP multishelf nodes over IPv6 DCN. RADIUS, FTP, SNTP, and other network
applications support IPv6 DCN. To enable IPv6 addresses, you need to make the necessary configuration
changes from the CTC or TL1 management interface. After you enable IPv6, you can start a CTC or TL1
session using the provisioned IPv6 address. The ports used for all IPv6 connections to the node are the
same as the ports used for IPv4.
An NE can either be in IPv6 mode or IPv4 mode. In IPv4 mode, the LAN interface does not have an IPv6
address assigned to it. An NE, whether it is IPv4 or IPv6, has an IPv4 address and subnet mask.
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards do not reboot automatically when you provision an
IPv6 address, but a change in IPv4 address initiates a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card
reset. Table 22-11 describes the differences between an IPv4 node and an IPv6 node.
270827
IPv6
DCN
DCC IPv4 Network
ENE C
IPv6 Address:
3ffe:b00:ffff:1::4
IPv4 Address:
10.10.10.20
ENE B
IPv6 Address:
3ffe:b00:ffff:1::3
IPv4 Address:
10.10.10.10
GNE A
IPv6 Address:
3ffe:b00:ffff:1::5
IPv4 Address:
10.10.20.40
ENE D
IPv6 Address:
3ffe:b00:ffff:1::6
IPv4 Address:
10.10.20.30
NMS
IPv6 Address:
3ffe:b00:ffff:1::2
Table 22-11 Differences Between an IPv6 Node and an IPv4 Node
IPv6 Node IPv4 Node
Has both IPv6 address and IPv4 address assigned
to its craft Ethernet interface.
Does not have an IPv6 address assigned to its craft
Ethernet interface.
The default router has an IPv6 address for IPv6
connectivity, and an IPv4 address for IPv4
connectivity.
The default router has an IPv4 address.
Cannot enable OSPF on LAN. Cannot change
IPv4 NE to IPv6 NE if OSPF is enabled on the
LAN.
Can enable OSPF on the LAN.
Cannot enable RIP on the LAN. Cannot change
IPv4 NE to IPv6 NE if RIP is enabled on the LAN.
Can enable static routes/RIP on the LAN.
22-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
IPv6 Native Support
22.11.1 IPv6 Enabled Mode
The default IP address configured on the node is IPv4. You can use either CTC or the TL1 management
interface to enable IPv6. For more information about enabling IPv6 from the CTC interface, see the
“Turn Up a Node” chapter. For more information about enabling IPv6 using TL1 commands, see the
Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide or the Cisco ONS SDH TL1 Command Guide.
22.11.2 IPv6 Disabled Mode
You can disable IPv6 either from the CTC or from the TL1 management interface. For more information
about disabling IPv6 from the CTC interface, see the “Turn Up a Node” chapter. For more information
about disabling IPv6 using TL1 commands, see the Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide or the
Cisco ONS SDH TL1 Command Guide.
22.11.3 IPv6 in Non-secure Mode
In non-secure mode, IPv6 is supported on the front and the rear Ethernet interfaces. You can start a CTC
or TL1 session using the IPv6 address provisioned on the on the front and rear ports of the NE.
22.11.4 IPv6 in Secure Mode
In secure mode, IPv6 is only supported on the rear Ethernet interface. The front port only supports IPv4
even if it is disabled on the rear Ethernet interface. For more information about provisioning IPv6
addresses in secure mode, see the “Turn Up a Node” chapter. For more information on secure mode
behavior, see section 22.2.9 Scenario 9: IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled, page 22-19.
22.11.5 IPv6 Limitations
IPv6 has the following configuration restrictions:
• You can provision an NE as IPv6 enabled only if the node is a SOCKS-enabled or firewall-enabled
GNE/ENE.
• IPSec is not supported.
• OSPF/RIP cannot be enabled on the LAN interface if the NE is provisioned as an IPv6 node.
• Static route/firewall/proxy tunnel provisioning is applicable only to IPv4 addresses even if the IPv6
is enabled.
Not supported on static routes, proxy tunnels, and
firewall tunnels.
Supported on static routes, proxy tunnels, and
firewall tunnels.
Routing decisions are based on the default IPv6
router provisioned.
Table 22-11 Differences Between an IPv6 Node and an IPv4 Node
IPv6 Node IPv4 Node
22-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Integration with Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Routers
• In secure mode, IPv6 is supported only on the rear Ethernet interface. IPv6 is not supported on the
front port.
• ONS platforms use NAT-PT internally for providing IPv6 native support. NAT-PT uses the IPv4
address range 128.0.0.0 to 128.0.1.254 for packet translation. Do not use this address range when
you enable IPv6 feature.
22.12 Integration with Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Routers
This section describes the integration of a Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node with a Cisco CRS-1, a
Cisco ASR 9000 series, or a Cisco 7600 series router. To provision end-to-end circuit connectivity
between a DWDM node and a Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series router, or a Cisco 7600 series router,
see the Chapter 15, “Turn Up a Network.”
This feature provides end-to-end circuit provisioning from one Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or
a Cisco 7600 series router to another Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or a Cisco 7600 series router
passing through an MSTP network (without using GMPLS). In other words, you can use CTC to create
an OCH trail circuit that includes the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or a Cisco 7600 series nodes
involved in the MSTP network. With this feature, circuit provisioning is extended to the physical layer
interface module (PLIM) trunk ports of the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or Cisco 7600 series
router.
Note Cisco ONS Software Release 9.4 supports Cisco CRS-1 routers using
Cisco IOS XR Software Release 3.9, and Cisco ASR 9000 series routers using
Cisco IOS XR Software Release 4.1.0, and Cisco 7600 routers using Cisco IOS Software Release 10.0.
If you have an earlier version of the Cisco IOS XR software, you cannot configure LMP on the Cisco
CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router and the router is displayed as an unknown node in the CTC
network view. Similarly, if you have an earlier version of the Cisco IOS software, you cannot configure
virtual links on the Cisco 7600 series router and the router is displayed as an unknown node in the CTC
network view.
Note Cisco 7600 series router does not support LMP provisioning. Therefore, virtual links or the
provisionable patchcords are created to establish connectivity between Cisco 7600 series routers and
DWDM nodes.
Note Interoperability among the Cisco CRS-1 routers, Cisco ASR 9000 series, and Cisco 7600 series routers
is not supported.
For more information about the Cisco CRS-1 router, see the documentation set available at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5763/tsd_products_support_series_home.html.
For more information about the Cisco ASR 9000 series router, see the documentation set available at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps9853/tsd_products_support_series_home.html
For more information about the Cisco 7600 series router, see the documentation set available at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/routers/ps368/tsd_products_support_series_home.html
22-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Integration with Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Routers
22.12.1 Card Compatibility
The following Cisco CRS-1 DWDM PLIMs support this feature:
• 4-10GE-ITU/C
• 1OC768-ITU/C
• 1OC768-DSPK
The following Cisco ASR 9000 series DWDM PLIMS support this feature:
• A9K-8T-L
The following Cisco 7600 series router cards support this feature:
• 76-ES+XT-2TG3CXL
• 76-ES+XT-4TG3CXL
• 76-ES+T-2TG
• 76-ES+T-4TG
• 76-ES+XC-20G3C
• 76-ES+XC-20G3CXL
• 76-ES+XC-40G3C
• 76-ES+XC-40G3CXL
The following ONS 15454 DWDM cards support this feature:
• 32MUX-O
• 32DMX-O
• 32WSS
• 32DMX
• 40-DMX-C
• 40-DMX-CE
• 40-MUX-C
• 40-WSS-C
• 40-WSS-CE
22-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Integration with Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Routers
22.12.2 Node Management
Figure 22-34 depicts a typical network that includes DWDM nodes and Cisco CRS-1 routers.
Figure 22-34 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node and Cisco CRS-1 Router Network
Figure 22-35 depicts a typical network that includes DWDM nodes and Cisco 7600 series routers.
Figure 22-35 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node and Cisco 7600 Series Router Network
IP/MPLS
Internal
Interface
WDM cloud
270861
XML or CLI XML or CLI
CRS1_A CRS1_B
LMP
A
OCH Trail Circuit
Z
LMP
MSTP
MSTP
IP/MPLS
CTC
246924
OCH Trail Circuit
MSTP
MSTP
WDM cloud
PPC
Internal
Interface
CTC
Cisco 7600 CLI Cisco 7600
CLI
IP/MPLS IP/MPLS
A Z
PPC
22-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Integration with Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Routers
22.12.2.1 Physical Connections
The ONS 15454 DWDM node can be connected to CTC in multiple ways, as described in the section
“ONS 15454 Connections”.
The Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or Cisco 7600 series router must be connected to CTC
through TCP/IP, using an Ethernet interface.
There must be two physical connections between the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node and the
Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 900 series, or Cisco 7600 series router for:
• (Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 900 series routers only) LMP Provisioning—This is implemented
through the 10-Mbps Ethernet interface provided by the TCC2P card (on the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM side) and the RP card (on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router side).
• (Cisco 7600 series routers only) Virtual Link or Patch Cord Provisioning—This is implemented
through the 10-Mbps Ethernet interface provided by the TCC2P card (on the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM side) and the Supervisor card (on the Cisco 7600 series router side).
• 10-Gbps and 40-Gbps Traffic Provisioning—This is implemented through the fiber connection
provided from the OCH ports of the multiplexer, demultiplexer, or WSS cards (on the
Cisco ONS 15454 side) and from the trunk ports (on the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or
Cisco 7600 series router side). You must use LC connectors on both the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
side and the Cisco CRS-1 router side.
22.12.2.2 CTC Display
The CTC network view displays Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series routers that have LMP control
channels to the DWDM node that you logged in to, and to the DWDM nodes with DCC connections to
the login node (Figure 22-36). When a data link is established, the network view also displays the link
between the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router and the DWDM node.
For a Cisco 7600 series router, you must manually add the node in CTC to make the router visible in the
network view.
22-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Integration with Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Routers
Figure 22-36 Cisco CRS-1 Router in CTC Network View
The color of the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or Cisco 7600 series router in the network view
depends on the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or Cisco 7600 series router alarm status. The color
of the link between the DWDM node and the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or Cisco 7600 series
router depends on the link status. For more information on node and link colors, see the sections “CTC
Node Colors” and “DCC Links”.
22.12.3 Circuit Management
This section describes LMP provisioning, virtual link provisioning, and optical channel (OCH) trail
circuit provisioning on the DWDM node and the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or Cisco 7600
series router.
22.12.3.1 LMP Provisioning
To provision end-to-end circuit connectivity from one Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router to
another Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router passing through a DWDM network, you must
configure LMP on the OCH ports of the first and last DWDM nodes (those adjacent to the Cisco CRS-1
or Cisco ASR 9000 series router) and on the PLIM trunk ports of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
series router. Configuring LMP involves creating control channels, TE links, and data links. CTC
primarily uses data links to discover circuit routes. For each 10-Gbps or 40-Gbps fiber between the
Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router and the DWDM node, you must create a TE link and a
data link. You must have a dedicated TE link for each data link because the Cisco CRS-1 or
22-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Integration with Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Routers
Cisco ASR 9000 series router does not support link bundling (aggregation of one or more data links into
a single TE link). When the port association is correct (checked using the LinkSummary message), the
operational state of the data link transitions to Up–Free.
During creation of data links between the OCH ports of the DWDM node and the PLIM trunk ports of
the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router, CTC performs lambda tuning, that is, CTC
automatically tunes the PLIM trunk port wavelength to match the supported wavelength on the OCH
ports of the DWDM node. For more information on LMP, see the “22.9 Link Management Protocol”
section on page 22-49.
You can configure LMP on the DWDM node and the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router
through CTC. For details on configuring LMP, see the “Turn Up a Network” chapter.
Note LMP provisioning is not supported on Cisco 7600 series routers.
22.12.3.2 Virtual Link Provisioning
To provision end-to-end circuit connectivity from one Cisco 7600 series router to another Cisco 7600
series router passing through a DWDM network, you must configure virtual links or provisional patch
cords (PPC) on the OCH ports of the first and last DWDM nodes (those adjacent to the Cisco 7600 series
router) and on the trunk ports of the Cisco 7600 series router.
For more information on virtual link (virtual or provisionable patchcord) provisioning, see the
“16.2 Virtual Patchcords” section on page 16-7.
You can configure virtual links on the DWDM node and the Cisco 7600 series router through CTC. For
details on configuring provisionable patchcords, see the “Create Optical Channel Circuits and
Provisionable Patchcords” chapter.
22.12.3.3 OCH Trail Circuit Provisioning
After you have provisioned LMP on the DWDM nodes and the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series
routers, or provisional patchcords on the DWDM nodes and the Cisco 7600 series routers, you can create
an OCH trail circuit from one Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or Cisco 7600 series router to
another Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or Cisco 7600 series router passing through an MSTP
network. The endpoints (source and destination) of the OCH trail circuit must be Cisco CRS-1,
Cisco ASR 9000 series, or Cisco 7600 series routers. CTC does not allow mixed nodes (Cisco CRS-1,
Cisco ASR 9000 series, or Cisco 7600 series router to DWDM node) for OCH trail circuits.
As part of OCH trail circuit creation, you must also define the following optical transport network (OTN)
line parameters must be defined on both endpoints of the circuit:
• ITU-T G.709
Note ITU-T G.709 OPU-1E and OPU-2E standards are supported on Cisco 7600 series routers.
• Forward error correction (FEC)
• Signal fail bit error rate (SF BER)
• Signal degrade bit error rate (SD BER). The range of SD BER values supported for Cisco 7600
series router is from 5 to 9.
22-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Integration with Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Routers
After you define the source and destination nodes for the OCH trail circuit, CTC evaluates the circuit for
a valid route between the two endpoints. If a valid route exists, CTC creates the required connections on
all the impacted nodes.
22.12.4 Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Management from CTC
After you have provisioned LMP on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router and the DWDM
node, the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router gets displayed in the CTC network view. In case
of Cisco 7600 series routers, you must be manually add the node using the Add Node option in the CTC
network view and then provision virtual links (provisionable patchcords) on the Cisco 7600 series router
and the DWDM node.
You can view active alarms, performance monitoring (PM) parameters, and the software version of the
Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router from CTC. To view PM parameters and active alarms for
a specific PLIM port, right-click the Cisco CRS-1, or Cisco ASR 9000 series router in CTC network
view and choose Show Router Port Status > rack/slot/module/port (Figure 22-37).
Performance monitoring (PM) parameters for Cisco 7600 series router cannot be viewed in CTC. To
view active alarms for Cisco 7600 series, right-click the Cisco 7600 series router in CTC network view
and choose Show Router Port Status > rack/slot/module/port.
Figure 22-37 Cisco CRS-1 Router PM Parameters
To view all the active alarms for Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router, right-click the Cisco
CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router in CTC network view and choose Show Active Alarms.
22-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Photonic Path Trace
Note The Loss of Signal (LOS) alarm is not reported as critical for the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series,
or Cisco 7600 router, whereas, it is reported as critical for the ONS 15454 node. To avoid this
inconsistency, you can use Cisco Craft Works Interface (CWI) to manually change the severity of the
LOS alarm of the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or Cisco 7600 series router.
To view the software version, click the Maintenance > Software tabs in the CTC network view. The
working software version for each node is listed in the Working Version column.
22.13 Photonic Path Trace
Photonic Path Trace (PPT) is a protocol that validates an optical path in an ONS 15454 MSTP network.
PPT performs evidence-based path validation and identifies nodes in case of provisioning failure. PPT
uses the power levels on each port to validate the path. For every node in the optical path, PPT reports
the power levels against the threshold values in the form of a histogram. The histogram is displayed in
the Photonic Path Trace tab of the Edit Circuit window in CTC. For each node, a set of power values
collected from all the traversed ports is displayed in the histogram (Figure 22-38).
Figure 22-38 Photonic Path Trace
Note An OCHNC or OCH trail circuit must exist on the optical path on which PPT is started.
22-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Shared Risk Link Group
For information on how to start PPT on an optical path, see the “Turn Up a Network” chapter.
22.14 Shared Risk Link Group
SRLG is a unique 32 bit number that can be assigned to a link or DWDM node. This number can be used
as an identifier of a link or a group of resources that may fail. A set of links constitute a SRLG if they
share a resource (for example, a common fiber) whose failure causes the other links of the group to fail
too. Therefore, the links in the group have a shared risk. A link can belong to multiple SRLGs. SRLG
information is an unordered list of SRLGs that the link belongs to that is used by the router layer for
making routing decisions. For example, if a router traverses through a diverse path, the path computation
ensures that routing does not go through links sharing the same SRLG.
There are two types of SRLGs, unique and additional. Every link or DWDM node must be assigned a
unique SRLG attribute. Additional SRLGs for DWDM nodes or links are optional and can be defined in
CTC. The additional SRLGs for a link compute the additional risks associated with the link. A list of
additional SRLGs for a link can be defined in the Additional Span SRLG information attribute in CTC.
This list can contain up to 20 SRLGs.
When the SRLG value of a DWDM node or link is changed, the SRLG attributes are updated for all the
relevant router ports. When a new router-based OCH trail is created, the SRLG information of the
DWDM nodes and links that are part of the newly created circuit is automatically communicated to the
source and destination router. SRLG information can also be synchronized when the SRLG values on
the router ports differ from the SRLG values on the DWDM nodes. The SRLG information can be viewed
as consolidated or detailed reports in CTC. For more information about provisioning SRLGs on DWDM
nodes and links, refer to the “Turn Up a Network” chapter.
Note SRLG is not supported on Cisco 7600 nodes.
22.15 Proactive Protection Regen
When an optical signal degrades in a DWDM network, the downstream router is unaware of it. When the
FEC limit is reached, there is traffic interruption with significant packet loss and an LOF alarm is raised.
The LOF alarm triggers a Fast Reroute (FRR) mechanism in the router layer that switches traffic to a
backup path.
The Proactive Protection Regen feature achieves a hitless switchover before the traffic is interrupted by
triggering an FRR to backup paths before the LOF alarm is raised.
Proactive protection regen can be enabled on the OTU2_XP card ports when the card is used as a
regenerator in Standard regen or Enhanced FEC mode. Proactive protection regen can also be configured
during creation of OCH trail circuits between two Cisco CRS-1 routers.
As soon as the BER of the optical signal between the upstream router and the ONS node exceeds the
trigger threshold value for the duration set as the trigger window, a PPR-FDI alarm is generated by the
ONS node. The PPR-FDI alarm is sent to the downstream router which in turn triggers the switchover
to the backup path. The downstream router then sends the PPR-BDI alarm to the upstream router to
switch to the backup path.
For more information about configuring proactive protection regen on OTU2_XP cards and OCH trails
in CTC, refer to the “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter.
22-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 22 Management Network Connectivity
Proactive Protection Regen
Note Proactive protection regen is not supported on Cisco 7600 series nodes.
The Proactive Protection Regen can be enabled on the AR_MXP or AR_XP card when the card is in
high-rate RGN_10G card mode. For more information about configuring proactive protection regen on
AR_MXP and AR_XP cards in CTC, refer to the “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”
chapter.
CH A P T E R
23-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
23
Upgrade, Add, and Remove Cards and Nodes
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See Upgrade, Add, and Remove Cards and Nodes
for procedures to add and remove dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) cards and nodes.
23-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 23 Upgrade, Add, and Remove Cards and Nodes
CH A P T E R
24-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
24
Maintain the Node
This chapter provides procedures for maintaining the Cisco ONS 15454, including database backup and
restoration, removing and replacing cards, viewing the ONS 15454 audit trail, and hardware
maintenance procedures such as cleaning fibers, changing the fan tray filter, and other maintenance
procedures.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Before You Begin
Before performing any of the following procedures, investigate all alarms and clear any trouble
conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide as necessary for general
troubleshooting information and alarm or error descriptions.
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure to view its tasks (DLPs).
1. NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2—Complete as needed.
2. NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3—Complete as needed.
3. NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4—Complete as needed to clear the
database and upload a blank database and the latest software.
4. NTP-G133 View and Manage OSI Information, page 24-10—Complete as needed.
5. NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13—Complete as needed to reset the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards and the dense wavelength division multiplexing
(DWDM) cards.
6. NTP-G108 Viewing the Audit Trail Records, page 24-15—Complete as needed.
7. NTP-G109 Off-Load the Audit Trail Record, page 24-16—Complete as needed.
8. NTP-G110 Off-Load the Diagnostics File, page 24-17—Complete as needed.
9. NTP-G112 Change the Node Timing Reference, page 24-18—Complete as needed.
10. NTP-G113 View the ONS 15454 Timing Report, page 24-20—Complete as needed.
24-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
11. NTP-G135 Edit Network Element Defaults, page 24-23—Complete as needed to edit the
factory-configured (default) network element (NE) settings for the Cisco ONS 15454.
12. NTP-G136 Import Network Element Defaults, page 24-24—Complete as needed to import the
factory-configured (default) NE settings for the Cisco ONS 15454.
13. NTP-G137 Export Network Element Defaults, page 24-25—Complete as needed to export the
factory-configured (default) NE settings for the Cisco ONS 15454.
14. NTP-G166 View the Facilities, page 24-26—Complete as needed to view all facilities for the Cisco
ONS 15454.
15. NTP-G119 Power Down the Node, page 24-27—Complete as needed to power down the node.
NTP-G103 Back Up the Database
Note You must back up and restore the database for each node on a circuit path in order to maintain a complete
circuit.
Note The following parameters are not backed up and restored: node name, IP address, subnet mask and
gateway, and Internet Inter-ORB Protocol (IIOP) port. If you change the node name and then restore a
backed up database with a different node name, the circuits map to the new node name. Cisco
recommends keeping a record of the old and new node names.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node you want to back up. If you are already logged
in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Maintenance >
Database tabs.
Step 3 Click Backup.
Step 4 Save the database on the workstation’s hard drive or on network storage. Use an appropriate file name
with the DB file extension; for example, database.db.
Step 5 Click Save.
Step 6 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
Purpose This procedure stores a backup version of the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE (software) database on
the workstation running Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) or on a
network server.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed Required. Cisco recommends performing a database backup at
approximately weekly intervals and prior to and after configuration
changes.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Maintenance or higher
24-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G104 Restore the Database
Note The following parameters are not backed up and restored: node name, IP address, subnet mask and
gateway, and IIOP port. If you change the node name and then restore a backed up database with a
different node name, the circuits map to the new renamed node. Cisco recommends keeping a record of
the old and new node names.
Caution If you are restoring the database on multiple nodes, wait approximately one minute after the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card reboot has completed on each node before
proceeding to the next node.
Caution TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards can be used in single IP address (repeater) and dual IP
address (secure) mode. The secure mode has advanced features that affect database restore. A database
from a secure node cannot be loaded on an unsecure repeater node. A repeater mode database can be
loaded onto a secure node but the database will follow the node characteristics (that is, it will become
secure). A secure database cannot be loaded onto a TCC2; only TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
cards support secure mode. For more information about the dual IP secure mode, see the “NTP-G26 Set
Up CTC Network Access” procedure on page 14-16. Also refer chapter, “Chapter 22, “Management
Network Connectivity.”
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you are restoring the database. If you
are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Circuits tab. Verify that
no optical channel network connection (OCHNC) circuits have a PARTIAL_OOS state. If so, investigate
and resolve the partial state before continuing.
Step 3 Complete the DLP-G157 Disable Automatic Power Control task
Step 4 In multishelf view (multishelf mode) or in node view (single-shelf mode), click the Maintenance >
Database tabs.
Step 5 Click Restore.
Step 6 Locate the database file stored on the workstation hard drive or on network storage.
Purpose This procedure restores the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card software database,
either partially or completely.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
24-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Note To clear all existing provisioning, locate and upload the database found on the latest ONS 15454
software CD.
Step 7 Click the database file to highlight it.
Step 8 Click Open. The DB Restore dialog box appears.
Caution Opening a restore file from another node or from an earlier backup might affect traffic on the login node.
Step 9 If you need a complete database restore, check the Complete database (System and Provisioning)
checkbox. Continue with Step 11.
Note Complete database restore may be used only on a node that is removed from the network, and does not
carry live provisioning traffic. This operation needs to be done by a live operator onsite, and must not
use a remote connection.
Step 10 If you need to restore only the provisioning database (partial restore), do not check the Complete
database (System and Provisioning) checkbox.
Step 11 Click Ok.
The Restore Database dialog box monitors the file transfer.
Step 12 Wait for the file to complete the transfer to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
Step 13 Click OK when the “Lost connection to node, changing to Network View” dialog box appears. Wait for
the node to reconnect.
Step 14 Complete the DLP-G158 Enable Automatic Power Control task.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Note During the database restore process, GMPLS circuits provisioned after the database was backed up may
go into the partial state. When this occurs, delete and recreate the GMPLS circuits to revert to the
discovered state.
NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration
Purpose This procedure reinitializes the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2,and
ONS 15454 M6 using the CTC reinitialization tool. Reinitialization
uploads a new software package to the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards, clears the node
database, and restores the factory default parameters.
Tools/Equipment ONS 15454 System Software CD, Version 9.2
JRE 1.6 is recommended to log into the node after reinitialization is
complete. The reinitialization tool can run on JRE 1.3.1_02, JRE 1.4.2,
or JRE 1.6.
24-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Caution Cisco strongly recommends that you keep different node databases in separate folders. This is because
the reinitialization tool chooses the first product-specific software package in the specified directory if
you use the Search Path field instead of the Package and Database fields. You might accidentally copy
an incorrect database if multiple databases are kept in the specified directory.
Caution Restoring a node to the factory configuration deletes all cross-connects on the node.
Caution Cisco recommends that you save the node database to safe location if you will not be restoring the node
using the database provided on the software CD.
Note The following parameters are not backed up and restored when you delete the database and restore the
factory settings: node name, IP address, subnet mask and gateway, and IIOP port. If you change the node
name and then restore a backed up database with a different node name, the circuits map to the new
renamed node. Cisco recommends keeping a record of the old and new node names.
Note A node will remain locked in secure mode even if it is restored with the factory database. A node locked
in secure mode can only be unlocked by Cisco Technical Support.
Step 1 If you need to install or replace one or more TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards, see the “DLP-G33 Install the
TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card” task on page 3-35. If you need to install one or more
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards, see the “DLP-G604 Install the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card” task
on page 3-42.
Step 2 If you are using Microsoft Windows, complete the “DLP-G248 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the
Database and Upload Software (Windows)” task on page 24-6.
Step 3 If you are using UNIX, complete the “DLP-G249 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database
and Upload Software (UNIX)” task on page 24-8.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
One of the following:
• NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the
ONS 15454
• NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN
Connection to the ONS 15454
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
24-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G248 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (Windows)
Caution Restoring a node to the factory configuration deletes all cross-connects on the node.
Note The ONS 14545 Software CD is if the Reinit.jar file, the CISCO 15454 package file, and the NE
default file are not stored on your computer.
Note A node will remain locked in secure mode after the node’s database is deleted, even if it is
restored with the factory database. A node locked in secure mode can only be unlocked by Cisco
Technical Support.
Step 1 Insert the ONS 15454 System Software CD, Version 9.2, into the computer CD-ROM drive. If the CTC
Installation Wizard appears, click Cancel.
Step 2 From the Windows Start menu, choose Run. In the Run dialog box, click Browse and navigate to the
CISCO15454 or CISCO15454SDH folder on the software CD.
Step 3 In the Browse dialog box Files of Type field, choose All Files.
Step 4 Choose the RE-INIT.jar file and click Open. The NE Re-Initialization window appears.
Step 5 Complete the following fields:
Purpose This task reinitializes the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS
15454 M6 using the CTC reinitialization tool on a Windows computer.
Reinitialization uploads a new software package to the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards, clears the node
database, and restores the factory default parameters.
Tools/Equipment ONS 15454 System Software CD, Version 9.2
JRE 1.6 must be installed on the computer to log into the node at the
completion of the reinitialization. The reinitialization tool can run on
JRE 1.3.1_02, JRE 1.4.2, or JRE 1.6.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
One of the following:
• NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the
ONS 15454
• NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN
Connection to the ONS 15454
Required/As Needed As needed to clear the existing database from the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards and restore the
node default settings.
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
24-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
• GNE IP—If the node you are reinitializing is accessed through another node configured as a gateway
network element (GNE), enter the GNE IP address. If you have a direct connection to the node, leave
this field blank.
• Node IP—Enter the node name or IP address of the node that you are reinitializing.
• User ID—Enter the user ID needed to access the node.
• Password—Enter the password for the user ID.
• Upload Package—Check this box to send the software package file to the node. If unchecked, the
software stored on the node is not modified.
• Force Upload—Check this box to send the software package file to the node even if the node is
running the same software version. If unchecked, reinitialization will not send the software package
if the node is already running the same version.
• Activate/Revert—Check this box to activate the uploaded software (if the software is a later than the
installed version) or revert to the uploaded software (if the software is earlier than the installed
version) as soon as the software file is uploaded. If unchecked, the software is not activated or
reverted after the upload, allowing you to initiate the functions later from the node view
Maintenance > Software tab.
• Re-init Database—Check this box to send a new database to the node. (This is equivalent to the CTC
database restore operation.) If unchecked, the node database is not modified.
• Confirm—Check this box if you want a warning message displayed before any operation is
performed. If unchecked, reinitialization does not display a warning message.
• Search Path—Enter the path to the CISCO15454 folder on the CD drive.
Step 6 Click Go.
Caution Before continuing with the next step, verify that the database to upload is correct. You cannot reverse
the upload process after you click Yes.
Step 7 Review the information in the Confirm NE Re-Initialization dialog box, then click Yes to start the
reinitialization.
The reinitialization begins. After the software is downloaded and activated, and the database is uploaded
to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards, “Complete” appears in the status bar, and the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards reboot. Wait a few minutes for the reboot to
complete.
Step 8 After the reboot is complete, log into the node using the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task.
Step 9 Complete the NTP-G24 Set Up Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information, page 14-13 and the
NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
24-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G249 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (UNIX)
Caution Restoring a node to the factory configuration deletes all cross-connects on the node.
Note A node will remain locked in secure mode after the node’s database is deleted, even if it is restored with
the factory database. A node locked in secure mode can only be unlocked by Cisco Technical Support.
Step 1 Insert the system software CD containing the reinitialization tool, software, and defaults database into
the computer CD-ROM drive. If the CTC Installation Wizard appears, click Cancel.
Step 2 To find the recovery tool file, go to the CISCO15454 directory on the CD (usually
/cdrom/cdrom0/CISCO15454 or /cdrom/cdrom0/CISCO15454SDH).
Step 3 If you are using a file explorer, double-click the RE-INIT.jar file. If you are working with a command
line, run java -jar RE-INIT.jar. The NE Re-Initialization window appears.
Step 4 Complete the following fields:
• GNE IP—If the node you are reinitializing is accessed through another node configured as a GNE,
enter the GNE IP address. If you have a direct connection to the node, leave this field blank.
• Node IP—Enter the node name or IP address of the node that you are reinitializing.
• User ID—Enter the user ID needed to access the node.
• Password—Enter the password for the user ID.
Purpose This task reinitializes the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS
15454 M6 using the CTC reinitialization tool on a UNIX computer.
Reinitialization uploads a new software package to the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards, clears the node
database, and restores the factory default parameters.
Tools/Equipment ONS 15454 SONET System Software CD, Version 9.2
JRE 1.6 must be installed on the computer to log into the node at the
completion of the reinitialization. The reinitialization tool can run on
JRE 1.3.1_02, JRE 1.4.2, or JRE 1.6.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
One of the following:
• NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the
ONS 15454
• NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN
Connection to the ONS 15454
Required/As Needed As needed to clear the existing database from the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards and restore the
node default settings.
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
24-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
• Upload Package—Check this box to send the software package file to the node. If unchecked, the
software stored on the node is not modified.
• Force Upload—Check this box to send the software package file to the node even if the node is
running the same software version. If unchecked, reinitialization will not send the software package
if the node is already running the same version.
• Activate/Revert—Check this box to activate the uploaded software (if the software is a later than the
installed version) or revert to the uploaded software (if the software is earlier than the installed
version) as soon as the software file is uploaded. If unchecked, the software is not activated or
reverted after the upload, allowing you to initiate the functions later from the node view
Maintenance > Software tab.
• Re-init Database—Check this box to send a new database to the node. (This is equivalent to the CTC
database restore operation.) If unchecked, the node database is not modified.
• Confirm—Check this box if you want a warning message displayed before any operation is
performed. If unchecked, reinitialization does not display a warning message.
• Search Path—Enter the path to the CISCO15454 or CISCO15454SDH folder on the CD drive.
Step 5 Click Go.
Caution Before continuing with the next step, verify that the database to upload is correct. You cannot reverse
the upload process after you click Yes.
Step 6 Review the information in the Confirm NE Re-Initialization dialog box, then click Yes to start the
reinitialization.
The reinitialization begins. After the software is downloaded and activated and the database is uploaded
to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards, “Complete” appears in the status bar and the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards will reboot. Wait a few minutes for the reboot to
complete.
Step 7 After the reboot is complete, log into the node using the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task.
Step 8 Complete the NTP-G24 Set Up Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information, page 14-13 and the
NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
24-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G133 View and Manage OSI Information
Note Additional information about the ONS 15454 implementation of OSI is provided in “Chapter 22,
“Management Network Connectivity.”
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G298 View IS-IS Routing Information Base, page 24-10
• DLP-G299 View ES-IS Routing Information Base, page 24-11
• DLP-G300 Manage the TARP Data Cache, page 24-12
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G298 View IS-IS Routing Information Base
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Maintenance > OSI >
IS-IS RIB tabs.
Purpose This procedure allows you to view and manage Open Systems
Interconnection (OSI) including the End System to Intermediate System
(ES-IS) and Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) routing
information tables, the Target Identifier Address Resolution Protocol
(TARP) data cache, and the manual area table.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2
NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
NTP-G132 Provision OSI, page 14-35
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task allows you to view the IS-IS protocol routing information base
(RIB). IS-IS is an OSI routing protocol that floods the network with
information about NEs on the network. Each NE uses the information to
build a complete and consistent picture of a network topology. The IS-IS
RIB shows the network view from the perspective of the IS node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite procedures “DLP-G46 Log into CTC”
Required/As needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
24-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 View the following RIB information for Router 1:
• Subnet Type—Indicates the OSI subnetwork point of attachment type used to access the destination
address. Subnet types include SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, and LAN.
• Location—Indicates the OSI subnetwork point of attachment. For data communications channel
(DCC) subnets, the slot and port are displayed. LAN subnets are shown as LAN.
• Destination Address—The destination Network Service Access Point (NSAP) of the IS.
• MAC Address—For destination NEs that are accessed by LAN subnets, the NE’s MAC address.
Step 3 If additional routers are enabled, you can view their RIBs by choosing the router number in the Router
field and clicking Refresh.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G299 View ES-IS Routing Information Base
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Maintenance > OSI >
ES-IS RIB tabs.
Step 2 View the following RIB information for Router 1:
• Subnet Type—Indicates the OSI subnetwork point of attachment type used to access the destination
address. Subnet types include SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, and LAN.
• Location—Indicates the subnet interface. For DCC subnets, the slot and port are displayed. LAN
subnets are shown as LAN.
• Destination Address—The destination IS NSAP.
• MAC Address—For destination NEs that are accessed by LAN subnets, the NE’s MAC address.
Step 3 If additional routers are enabled, you can view their RIBs by choosing the router number in the Router
field and clicking Refresh.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to view the ES-IS protocol RIB. ES-IS is an OSI
protocol that defines how end systems (hosts) and intermediate systems
(routers) learn about each other. For ESs, the ES-IS RIB shows the network
view from the perspective of the ES node. For ISs, the ES-IS RIB shows the
network view from the perspective of the IS node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite procedures “DLP-G46 Log into CTC”
Required/As needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
24-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G300 Manage the TARP Data Cache
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Maintenance > OSI >
TDC tabs.
Step 2 View the following TDC information:
• TID—The target identifier of the originating NE. For ONS 15454s, the TID is the name entered in
the Node Name/TID field on the Provisioning > General tab.
• NSAP/NET—The NSAP or Network Element Title (NET) of the originating NE.
• Type—Indicates how the TDC entry was created:
– Dynamic—The entry was created through the TARP propagation process.
– Static—The entry was manually created and is a static entry.
Step 3 If you want to query the network for an NSAP that matches a TID, complete the following steps.
Otherwise, continue with Step 4.
Note The TID to NSAP function is not available if the TDC is not enabled on the Provisioning > OSI >
TARP subtab.
a. Click the TID to NSAP button.
b. In the TID to NSAP dialog box, enter the TID you want to map to an NSAP.
c. Click OK, then click OK in the information message box.
d. On the TDC tab, click Refresh.
If TARP finds the TID in its TDC, it returns the matching NSAP. If not, TARP sends protocol data
units (PDUs) across the network. Replies will return to the TDC later, and a check TDC later
message is displayed.
Step 4 If you want to delete all the dynamically generated TDC entries, click the Flush Dynamic Entries
button. If not, continue with Step 5.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to view and manage the TARP data cache (TDC). The
TDC facilitates TARP processing by storing a list of TID to NSAP
mappings.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite procedures “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task
Required/As needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
24-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you are performing the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE reset. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “DLP-G250 Reset the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE Card”
task on page 24-13.
Step 3 As needed, complete the “DLP-G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-14.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G250 Reset the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE Card
Warning Do not reach into a vacant slot or chassis while you install or remove a module or a fan. Exposed
circuitry could constitute an energy hazard. Statement 206
Note Before you reset the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card, you should wait at least 60
seconds after the last provisioning change you made to avoid losing any changes to the database.
Note The ONS 15454 M2 chassis do not have a redundant controller card.
Purpose This procedure resets the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
and DWDM cards using CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card, page 3-35
DLP-G604 Install the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card, page 3-42
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task resets the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card
and switches the node to the redundant
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card, page 3-35
DLP-G604 Install the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card, page 3-42
“DLP-G46 Log into CTC”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
24-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Note (On ONS 15454 shelf) When a software reset is performed on an active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3, the AIC-I
card goes through an initialization process and also resets. The AIC-I card reset is normal and happens
each time an active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card goes through a software-initiated reset.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering as necessary.
b. Verify that no unexplained alarms appear on the network. If alarms appear, investigate and resolve
them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Step 2 In node view, right-click the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card to reveal a shortcut
menu.
Step 3 For TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards, click Reset Card to initiate a soft reset.
For TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards, click Soft-Reset Card to initiate a soft reset.
Note To initiate a hard reset on the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card, right-click the card and click Hard-Reset
Card when the card is in OOS-MT state. See Equipment Inventory for more information.
Step 4 Click Yes when the confirmation dialog box appears.
Step 5 Click Close when the “Lost connection to node, changing to Network View” dialog box appears.
Step 6 Return to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and confirm that the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card LED is amber (standby).
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC
Purpose This task resets the OSCM, OSC-CSM, 32MUX-O, 40-MUX-C,
32DMX-O, 32DMX, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 32WSS, 40-WSS-C,
40-WSS-CE, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, TDC-CC, TDC-FC, OPT-BST,
OPT-PRE, OPT-AMP-17-C, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, AD-xC.xx.x,
AD-xB.xx.x, transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), and ADM-10G
cards using CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards,
page 14-69
“DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
24-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Warning Do not reach into a vacant slot or chassis while you install or remove a module or a fan. Exposed
circuitry could constitute an energy hazard. Statement 206
Note ONS 15454 cards normally do not need to be reset. However, you might occasionally need to reset a card
for testing or as an initial trouble-clearing step. For additional information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Note A software reset of the TXP and MXP card leads to removal of PM data from the PM counters. As a
result, the PM counters do not display any PM data.
Step 1 If you will switch an active TXP or MXP card that is in a Y-cable protection group, complete the
DLP-G179 Apply a Force Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch task. If not, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Right-click the card that you want to reset to reveal a shortcut menu.
Step 3 Click Reset Card.
Step 4 Click Yes when the confirmation dialog box appears.
The card LED on the ONS 15454 shelf graphic will go through the following sequence: Fail (white
LED), Ldg (white LED), and Act (green LED). The reset should complete within 1 to 2 minutes.
Step 5 If you performed a Y-cable protection group switch in Step 1, complete the DLP-G180 Clear a Manual
or Force Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch task. If not, continue with Step 6.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G108 Viewing the Audit Trail Records
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to view the audit trail log. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Maintenance > Audit
tabs.
Step 3 Click Retrieve.
Purpose This procedure explains how to view audit trail records. Audit trail records
are useful for maintaining security, recovering lost transactions, and
enforcing accountability. Accountability refers to tracing user activities;
that is, associating a process or action with a specific user.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
24-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
A window containing the most recent audit trail records appears.
A definition of each column in the audit trail log is listed in Table 24-1.
Left-click the column headings to display the list in ascending-to-descending or
descending-to-ascending order.
Right-click the column heading to display the following options:
• Reset Sorting—Resets the column to the default setting.
• Hide Column—Hides the column from view.
• Sort Column—Sorts the table by the column’s values.
• Sort Column (incremental)—Sorts the table incrementally by multiple columns.
• Reset Columns Order/Visibility—Displays all hidden columns.
• Row Count—Provides a numerical count of log entries.
Shift-click the column heading for an incremental sort of the list.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G109 Off-Load the Audit Trail Record
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to off-load the audit trail log.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click, click the Maintenance >
Audit tabs.
Table 24-1 Audit Trail Column Definitions
Column Definition
Date Date when the action occurred in the format MM/dd/yy HH:mm:ss
Num Incrementing count of actions
User User ID that initiated the action
P/F Pass/Fail (that is, whether or not the action was executed)
Operation Action that was taken
Purpose This procedure describes how to off-load up to 640 audit trail log entries
in a local or network drive file to maintain a record of actions performed
for the node. If the audit trail log is not off-loaded, the oldest entries are
overwritten after the log reaches capacity.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
24-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 Click Retrieve.
Step 4 Click Archive.
Step 5 In the Archive Audit Trail dialog box, navigate to the directory (local or network) where you want to
save the file.
Step 6 Enter a name in the File Name field.
You do not have to give the archive file a particular extension. It is readable in any application that
supports text files, such as WordPad, Microsoft Word (imported), etc.
Step 7 Click Save. Click OK.
The 640 entries are saved in this file. The next entries continue with the next number in the sequence,
rather than starting over.
Note Archiving does not delete entries from the CTC audit trail log. However, entries can be
self-deleted by the system after the log maximum is reached. If you archived the entries, you
cannot reimport the log file back into CTC and will have to view the log in a different
application.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G110 Off-Load the Diagnostics File
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to off-load the diagnostics file.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Maintenance >
Diagnostic tabs.
Step 3 Click Node Diagnostic Logs. The Node Diagnostics dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click OK to continue.
Step 5 In the Select a Filename for the Node Diagnostics Zip Archive dialog box, navigate to the directory
(local or network) where you want to save the file.
Step 6 Enter a name in the File Name field.
You do not have to give the archive file a particular extension. It is a compressed file (.zip) that can be
unzipped and read by Cisco Technical Support.
Purpose This procedure describes how to off-load a diagnostic file. The diagnostic
file contains a set of debug commands that were run on a node and their
results. This file is useful to the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC)
when troubleshooting problems with the node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Maintenance or higher
24-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Step 7 Click Save.
The status window shows a progress bar indicating the percentage of the file being saved.
Step 8 Click OK.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G112 Change the Node Timing Reference
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to enable timing switching. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G259 Manual or Force Switch the Node Timing Reference” task on page 24-18 as
needed.
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G260 Clear a Manual or Force Switch on a Node Timing Reference” task on
page 24-19 as needed.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G259 Manual or Force Switch the Node Timing Reference
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Maintenance > Timing >
Source tabs.
Step 2 From the Reference drop-down list for the desired Clock, choose the desired reference.
Step 3 From the Operation drop-down list for the desired Clock, choose one of the following options:
Purpose This procedure enables automatic timing reference switching or returns
the node timing to normal operation.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Maintenance or higher
Purpose This task commands the node to switch to the timing reference you have
selected.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G46 Log into CTC”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Maintenance or higher
24-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
• Manual—This operation commands the node to switch to the reference you have selected if the
synchronization status message (SSM) quality of the reference is not lower than the current timing
reference.
• Force—This operation commands the node to switch to the reference you have selected, regardless
of the SSM quality (if the reference is valid).
Note For information about the Clear option, see the “DLP-G260 Clear a Manual or Force Switch
on a Node Timing Reference” task on page 24-19.
Step 4 Click Apply next to the timing source.
Step 5 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box. If the selected timing reference is an acceptable valid
reference, the node switches to the selected timing reference. If the selected timing reference is invalid,
a warning dialog box appears. Click OK; the node will not switch to the new timing reference.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G260 Clear a Manual or Force Switch on a Node Timing Reference
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Maintenance > Timing >
Source tabs.
Step 2 Find the Clock reference that is currently set to Manual or Force in the Operation drop-down list.
Step 3 From the Operation drop-down list, choose Clear.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box. If the normal timing reference is an acceptable valid reference,
the node switches back to the normal timing reference as defined by the system configuration. If the
normal timing reference is invalid or has failed, a warning dialog box appears. Click OK; the timing
reference will not revert.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task clears a Manual or Force switch on a node timing reference and
reverts the timing reference to its provisioned reference.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G46 Log into CTC”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Maintenance or higher
24-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G113 View the ONS 15454 Timing Report
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to view the node timing status.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Maintenance > Timing >
Report tabs.
Step 3 In the Timing Report area, you can view node timing information. The date and time of the report appear
at the top of the report. The time stamp is the same as the alarms time stamp and can be configured using
the DLP-G118 Display Alarms and Conditions Using Time Zone task. Table 24-2 describes the report
fields and entries.
Step 4 To update the report, click Refresh.
Purpose This procedure displays the current status of the ONS 15454 timing
references.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Maintenance or higher
Table 24-2 ONS 15454 Timing Report
Item Description Option Option Description
Clock Indicates the
timing clock. The
report section that
follows applies to
the timing clock
indicated.
NE The node timing clock.
BITS-1 Out The BITS-1 Out timing clock.
BITS-2 Out The BITS-2 Out timing clock.
24-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Status Indicates the
status of the
timing clock.
INIT_STATE The timing reference has not been provisioned. For an NE
reference, this status appears just before the first
provisioning messages when the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card is
booting. Timing is provisioned to the internal clock of the
node.
HOLDOVER_STATE The clock was locked onto a valid timing reference for
more than 140 seconds when a failure occurred. Holdover
state timing is a computation based on timing during the
normal state combined with the node’s internal clock. The
node holds onto this frequency until the valid reference is
restored. This status appears for NE references only.
FREERUN_STATE The node is running off its internal clock without any
modification except the calibrated value to bring timing to
0 PPM. Freerun state can occur when a Force switch to the
Internal clock is initiated, when all references fail without
the 140 seconds of holdover data, or when only Internal
timing references are defined. This status appears for NE
references only.
NO_SYNC_STATE A synchronization timing reference is not defined.
BITS-1 Out or BITS-2 Out default to this status until an
OC-N/STM-N card is defined as its reference on the
Provisioning > Timing tab. This status appears for external
references only.
NE_SYNCH_STATE BITS-1 Out and BITS-2 Out use the same timing source as
the NE. This is displayed when NE Reference is selected
in the BITS-1 Out and BITS-2 Out Reference List on the
Provisioning > Timing tab.
NORMAL_STATE The timing reference is locked onto one of its provisioned
references. The reference cannot be Internal or
NO SYNC STATE.
FAST_START_STATE The node has switched references, but the reference is too
far away to reach NORMAL_STATE within an acceptable
amount of time. FAST_START_STATE is a fast
acquisition mode to allow the node to quickly acquire the
reference. After it achieves this goal, the node progresses
to NORMAL_STATE.
FAST_START_FAILED_STATE A timing reference is too far away to reach in normal state.
The FAST_START_STATE could not acquire sufficient
timing information within the allowable amount of time.
Status
Changed
At
Date and time of
the last status
change.
— —
Table 24-2 ONS 15454 Timing Report (continued)
Item Description Option Option Description
24-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Switch
Type
Type of switch. AUTOMATIC The timing switch was system-generated.
Manual The timing switch was a user-initiated Manual switch.
Force The timing switch was user-initiated Force switch.
Reference Indicates the
timing reference.
Three timing references are
available on the Provisioning >
Timing tab.
—
Selected Indicates whether
the reference is
selected.
Selected references are indicated
with an X.
—
Facility Indicates the
timing facility
provisioned for
the reference on
the Provisioning >
Timing tab.
BITS-1 The timing facility is a building integrated timing supply
(BITS) clock attached to the node’s BITS-1 pins.
BITS-2 The timing facility is a BITS clock attached to the node’s
BITS-2 pins.
OC-N/STM-N card with port
number
If the node is set to line timing, this is the OC-N/STM-N
card and port provisioned as the timing reference.
Internal clock The node is using its internal clock.
State Indicates the
timing reference
state.
IS The timing reference is in service.
OOS The timing reference is out of service.
Condition Indicates the
timing reference
state.
OKAY The reference is valid to use as a timing reference.
OOB Out of bounds; the reference is not valid and cannot be
used as a timing reference, for example, a BITS clock is
disconnected.
Condition
Changed
Indicates the date
and time of the
last status change
in MM/DD/YY
HH:MM:SS
format.
— —
SSM Indicates whether
SSM is enabled
for the timing
reference.
Enabled SSM is enabled.
Disabled SSM is not enabled.
SSM
Quality
Indicates the SSM
timing quality.
8 to 10 SSM quality messages
might be displayed.
For a list of SSM message sets, see Chapter 26, “Timing
Reference”.
SSM
Changed
Indicates the date
and time of the
last SSM status
change in
MM/DD/YY
HH:MM:SS
format.
— —
Table 24-2 ONS 15454 Timing Report (continued)
Item Description Option Option Description
24-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G135 Edit Network Element Defaults
Note For a list of NE defaults, see the “Network Element Defaults document.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to edit NE defaults.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Defaults tabs. Wait for the Defaults selector frame to load the defaults. This could take several minutes.
Step 3 Under Defaults Selector, choose either a card (if editing card-level defaults) or NODE (if editing
node-level defaults). Clicking on the node name (at the top of the Defaults Selector column) lists all
available NE defaults (both node- and card-level) under Default Name.
Step 4 Locate a default that you want to change under Default Name.
Step 5 Click in the Default Value column for the default property that you are changing and either choose a
value from the drop-down list (when available), or type in the desired new value.
Note If you click Reset before you click Apply, all values will return to their original settings.
Step 6 Click Apply (click in the Default Name column to activate the Apply button if it is unavailable). You
can modify multiple default values before applying the changes.
A pencil icon will appear next to any default value that will be changed as a result of editing the defaults
file.
Step 7 If you are modifying node-level defaults, a dialog box appears telling you that defaults were successfully
applied to the node. Click Yes.
If you are modifying the IIOP Listener Port setting, a dialog box appears warning you that the node will
reboot and asks if you want to continue. Click Yes.
Purpose This procedure edits the factory-configured NE defaults using the NE
Defaults editor. The new defaults can be applied to the node where they are
edited, or exported to a file to be imported for use on other nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
24-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Note Changes to most node defaults reprovision the node when you click Apply. Changes made to
card settings using the Defaults Editor do not change the settings for cards that are already
installed or slots that are preprovisioned for cards, but rather, change only cards that are installed
or preprovisioned thereafter. To change settings for installed cards or preprovisioned slots, see
Chapter 20, “Change DWDM Card Settings.” To change settings for transponder or muxponder
cards see Chapter 11, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.”
Note Changing some NE defaults can cause CTC disconnection or a reboot of the node in order for
the default to take effect. Before you change a default, view the Side Effects column of the
Defaults editor (right-click a column header and select Show Column > Side Effects) and be
prepared for the occurrence of any side effects listed for that default.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G136 Import Network Element Defaults
Note For a list of NE defaults, refer to the “Network Element Defaults” document.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to import NE defaults.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Defaults tabs.
Step 3 Click Import.
Step 4 If the correct file name and location of the desired file do not appear in the Import Defaults from File
dialog box, click Browse and browse to the file that you are importing.
Step 5 When the correct file name and location appear in the dialog box, click OK. If you are importing the
factory defaults, the correct file name is 15454-defaults.txt for ANSI shelves and 15454SDH-defaults.txt
for ETSI shelves.
A pencil icon will appear next to any default value that will be changed as a result of importing the new
defaults file.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Purpose This procedure imports the NE defaults using the NE Defaults editor. The
defaults can either be imported from the CTC software CD (factory
defaults) or from a customized file exported and saved from a node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
24-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Step 7 If the imported file fails to pass all edits, the problem field shows the first encountered problem default
value that must be fixed. Change the problem default value and click Apply. Repeat until the imported
file passes all edits successfully.
Step 8 If you are modifying node-level defaults, a dialog box appears telling you that defaults were successfully
applied to the node. Click Yes.
Step 9 If you are modifying the IIOP Listener Port setting, a dialog box appears warning you that the node will
reboot and asks if you want to continue. Click Yes.
Note Changes to most node defaults reprovision the node when you click Apply. Changes made to
card settings using the Defaults Editor do not change the settings for cards that are already
installed or slots that are preprovisioned for cards, but rather, change only cards that are installed
or preprovisioned thereafter. To change settings for installed cards or preprovisioned slots,
seeChapter 20, “Change DWDM Card Settings.” To change settings for transponder or
muxponder cards, see Chapter 11, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.”
Note Changing some NE defaults can cause CTC disconnection or a reboot of the node in order for
the default to take effect. Before you change a default, view the Side Effects column of the
Defaults editor (right-click a column header and select Show Column > Side Effects) and be
prepared for the occurrence of any side effects listed for that default.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G137 Export Network Element Defaults
Note The defaults currently displayed are exported whether or not they have been applied to the current node.
Note The NE defaults can also be exported from the File > Export menu. These exported defaults are for
reference only and cannot be imported.
Note For a list of NE defaults, refer to the Network Element Defaults document.
Purpose This procedure exports the NE defaults using the NE Defaults editor. The
exported defaults can be imported to other nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
24-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to export NE defaults.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Defaults editor tabs.
Step 3 Click Export.
Step 4 If the location where you want to export the file does not appear in the Export Defaults to File dialog
box, click Browse and browse to the location.
Step 5 Change the file name to something that is easy to remember (the file name has no extension).
Step 6 Click OK.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G166 View the Facilities
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to view DWDM facilities.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode), shelf view (multishelf mode), or multishelf view (multishelf mode),
click the Maintenance > DWDM> All Facilities tabs.
• Marked—Displays a check mark if you have designated the facility for logical grouping. To mark a
facility to group it with others, go to Step 3.
• Location—Displays the slot number, slot type, port number, and port type of the facility.
• Admin State—Displays the administrative state of the facility.
• Service State—Displays the service state of the facility.
• Power—Displays the power level of the facility.
Step 3 To mark certain facilities to group during column sorting, click the desired row and click Mark. A check
mark appears in the Marked column. Click the Marked column header to group all of the checked
facilities in ascending order. Click the Marked header again to sort in descending order.
Step 4 To sort the facilities by the Location, Admin State, Service State, or Power columns in ascending order,
click on the desired column header. Click the column header again to sort in descending order.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure displays DWDM facility information for all facilities in a
node (single-shelf mode), shelf view (multishelf mode), or multishelf node
(multishelf mode).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Maintenance and higher
24-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G119 Power Down the Node
Warning Do not reach into a vacant slot or chassis while you install or remove a module or a fan. Exposed
circuitry could constitute an energy hazard. Statement 206
Caution The following procedure is designed to minimize traffic outages when powering down nodes, but traffic
will be lost if you delete and recreate circuits that passed through a working node.
Note Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with the Cisco ONS 15454. Plug the wristband
into the ESD jack located on the fan-tray assembly or on the lower right outside edge of the shelf on the
NEBS 3 shelf assembly. To access the ESD plug on the NEBS 3 shelf assembly, open the front door of
the Cisco ONS 15454. The front door is grounded to prevent electrical shock. For detailed instructions
on how to wear the ESD wristband, see the Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT
and Cisco ONS Platforms.
Note The CTC views referenced in this procedure depend on the mode. For more information about CTC
views, see CTC Operation, Information, and Shortcuts.
Step 1 Identify the node that you want to power down. If no cards are installed, go to Step 20. If cards are
installed, log into the node. See the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task for instructions.
Step 2 Choose Go to Network View from the View menu.
Step 3 Verify that the node is not connected to a network.
a. If the node is part of a Software R4.7 or later dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
configuration, see the NTP-G130 Remove a DWDM Node and continue with Step 4.
b. If the node is not connected to a working network and the current configurations are no longer
required, proceed to Step 4.
Note Before the power-down of a DWDM node, the fiber spans connected around it must be
disconnected from the network. This is to prevent the accidental disconnection of
wavelengths that pass through the shelf. A good indication that the shelf has been
disconnected from the network is optical service channel (OSC) alarms, or no OSC channels
provisioned.
Purpose This procedure stops all node activity.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
24-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Note Current configurations will be saved if Steps 4 to 20 are skipped.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Circuits tab and verify
that no circuits appear, then proceed to Step 5. If circuits appear, delete all the circuits that originate or
terminate in the node. Complete the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” section
on page 16-46, the “DLP-G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections” section on page 16-26, or
the “DLP-G112 Delete Overhead Circuits” section on page 16-89 as needed.
Note When deleting circuits from a node, make sure that the node is not connected to any network.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > Protection
tabs and delete all protection groups:
a. Click the protection group that needs to be deleted and click Delete.
b. Click Yes.
Repeat until no protection groups appear.
Step 6 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > Comm
Channels tabs and delete all communications channel terminations:
a. Click the section data communications channel (SDCC), line data communications channel
(LDCC), generic communications channel (GCC), link management protocol (LMP), provisionable
(external) patchcords (PPC), or OSC termination that needs to be deleted and click Delete.
b. Click Yes.
Repeat until no SDCC, LDCC, GCC, or OSC terminations are present.
Step 7 Before deleting any installed DWDM cards, the optical sides and the optical patchcords must be deleted.
In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Optical Side tabs.
a. Select all the connections and click Delete.
b. Click Yes.
Repeat until no optical sides and the optical patchcords are present.
Step 8 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcords tabs.
a. Select all the connections and click Delete.
b. Click Yes.
Repeat until no internal patchcords are present.
Step 9 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs and delete all the ANS parameters.
a. Select all the ANS parameters and click Remove. The Network Type parameter cannot be deleted.
b. Click Yes.
Step 10 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Passive Cards tabs, and delete all the passive cards.
a. Click the passive card you want to delete.
b. Click Delete, then click Yes.
24-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
Step 11 Repeat Step a and Step b for each installed passive card.
Step 12 For each installed channel-bearing card (AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, and AD-4C-xx.x, where xx.x refers
to the specific wavelengths), make sure all lines and bands are not in IS-NR (ANSI) or
Unlocked-Enabled (ETSI) service state:
a. In card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
b. In the Admin State column for each line, make sure that the default state IS, AINS (ANSI), or
Unlocked,automaticInservice (ETSI) is selected.
c. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
d. In the Admin State column for each line, make sure that the default state IS, AINS (ANSI), or
Unlocked,automaticInservice (ETSI) is selected.
Step 13 For each installed DWDM band-bearing card (AD-1B-xx.x and AD-4B-xx.x, where xx.x refers to the
specific wavelengths), make sure all lines and bands are not in the IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-Enabled
(ETSI) service state:
a. In card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
b. In the Admin State column for each line, make sure that the default state IS, AINS (ANSI), or
Unlocked,automaticInservice (ETSI) is selected.
c. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
d. In the Admin State column for each line, make sure that the default state IS, AINS (ANSI), or
Unlocked,automaticInservice (ETSI) is selected.
Step 14 For each installed transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), multiplexer, demultiplexer, amplifier,
OSC-CSM, OSCM, wavelength switch, or single module ROADM card (32MUX-O, 32DMX-0,
32DMX, 32WSS, 4MD-xx.x, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, 40-MUX-C, TDC-CC, TDC-FC, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, OPT-BST, OPT-PRE,
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, 40E-TXP-C, 40ME-TXP-C,
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C,
40ME-MXP-C, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G), make sure all lines are not in
the IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI) service state:
a. In card view, click the appropriate tab depending on the card:
• For MXP_2.5G, MXP_2.5G_10G, TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, click the Provisioning >
Line > SONET tabs if the card was provisioned for a SONET payload, or the Provisioning >
Line > SDH tabs if the card was provisioned for an SDH payload.
• For TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards, click the Provisioning >
Line > SONET tabs.
• For MXP_2.5G_10E cards, click the Provisioning > Line > Trunk tabs.
• For MXP_MR_2.5G cards, click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs.
• For ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, 40E-TXP-C, 40ME-TXP-C, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C,
40ME-MXP-C cards, click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs.
• For 32MUX-O, 32DMX-0, 32DMX, 32WSS, 40MUX, 40DMUX-C, TDC-CC, TDC-FC,
OPT-BST, OPT-PRE cards, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
• For 32DMX, 32DMX-O, 40-DMX-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 4MD cards, click the
Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
• For 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE cards, click the Provisioning > Optical Chn:
Optical Connector x > Parameters tabs.
• For 40-WXC-C cards, click the Provisioning > WXC Line > Parameters tabs.
24-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 24 Maintain the Node
Before You Begin
• For 40-DMX-C, 40-MUX-C, and 40-DMX-CE cards, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs.
• For 4MD-xx.x cards, click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
• For GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, click the Provisioning > Ether Ports
> Ports tabs.
• For OPT-BST and OPT-PRE cards, click the Provisioning > Optical Ampli Line > Parameters
tabs.
• For the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs.
• For OSC-CSM and OSCM cards, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
• For ADM_10G cards, click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs.
b. In the Admin State column for each line, make sure that the default state IS, AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInservice (ETSI) is selected.
c. Repeat Steps a and b for each installed DWDM card.
Note Ports are put in service when circuits are provisioned, and put out of service when circuits are deleted.
When circuits are deleted the Admin State displays as IS, AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInservice
(ETSI) and the Service State displays OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,automaticInService
(ETSI).
Step 15 Remove all fiber connections to the cards.
Step 16 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), right-click an installed card and click
Delete.
Step 17 Click Yes.
Step 18 After you have deleted the card, open the card ejectors and remove it from the node.
Step 19 Repeat Step 15 through Step 18 for each installed card.
Note You cannot delete a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Cisco Transport Controller (CTC). Physically
remove it after all the other cards have been deleted and removed.
Note (On 15454 M2 and 15454 M6) You cannot delete an active TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card in Cisco
Transport Controller (CTC). Physically remove it after all the other cards have been deleted and
removed.
Step 20 Shut off the power from the power supply that feeds the node.
Step 21 Disconnect the node from its external fuse source.
Step 22 Store all of the cards that you removed and update inventory records according to local site practice.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
CH A P T E R
25-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
25
Security Reference
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See Security Reference for information related to
Cisco ONS 15454 user IDs and security levels, user privileges and policies, audit trail, and RADIUS
security.
25-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 25 Security Reference
CH A P T E R
26-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
26
Timing Reference
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See Timing Reference for information about
Cisco ONS 15454 users and node timing parameters, network timing, and Synchronization Status
Messaging (SSM).
26-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 26 Timing Reference
CH A P T E R
27-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
27
SNMP
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See SNMP for information related to Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) implemented in the Cisco ONS 15454.
27-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 27 SNMP
A-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
A P P E N D I X A
CTC Operation, Information, and Shortcuts
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See CTC Operation, Information, and Shortcuts
views, menus options, tool options, shortcuts, table display options, and shelf inventory data presented
in CTC.
A-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix A CTC Operation, Information, and Shortcuts
B-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-01
A P P E N D I X B
Hardware Specifications
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See Hardware Specifications for information related
to hardware and software specifications for the ONS 15454 ANSI and ETSI cards.
B-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-01
Appendix B Hardware Specifications
C-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
A P P E N D I X C
Administrative and Service States
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See Administrative and Service States for an
understanding of administrative and service states for Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) cards, optical payload ports, out-of-band optical service channel (OSC) ports,
optical channel network connections (OCHNCs), and transponder/muxponder cards and ports.
C-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix C Administrative and Service States
D-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
A P P E N D I X D
Configuring GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See Configuring GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI for information on how to provision GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards using Pseudo Command Line Interface (PCLI).
D-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix D Configuring GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI
E-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
A P P E N D I X E
Pseudo Command Line Interface Reference
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See Pseudo Command Line Interface Reference for
information related to Pseudo-IOS command line interface (PCLI) for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards.
E-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix E Pseudo Command Line Interface Reference
F-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-01
A P P E N D I X F
Fiber and Connector Losses in Raman Link Configuration
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See Fiber and Connector Losses in Raman Link
Configuration for important guidelines to be followed when configuring a Raman link regardless of
whether you are configuring the Raman link using the Raman installation wizard or the CiscoTransport
Planner (CTP) XML file.
F-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-01
Appendix F Fiber and Connector Losses in Raman Link Configuration
G-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
A P P E N D I X G
Card Features
This chapter describes features common to the Cisco ONS 15454 suite of cards.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco
ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note In this chapter, “RAMAN-CTP” refers to the 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP card. “RAMAN-COP” refers to
the 15454-M-RAMAN-COP card.
Chapter topics include:
• G.1 Safety Labels, page G-1
• G.35 Card Protection, page G-27
• G.36 Far-End Laser Control, page G-32
• G.37 Jitter Considerations, page G-32
• G.38 Termination Modes, page G-33
G.1 Safety Labels
This section explains the significance of the safety labels attached to some cards. The faceplates of the
cards are clearly labeled with warnings about the laser radiation levels. You must understand all warning
labels before working on these cards.
G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards
The TCC2, TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, TNCE, TSC, TSCE, OSCM, OSC-CSM, 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O,
4MD-xx.x, MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, ADM-10G,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, and OTU2_XP cards are Class 1 laser products.
The labels that appear on these cards are described in the following sections.
G-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Safety Labels
G.1.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Label
The Class 1 Laser Product label is shown in Figure G-1.
Figure G-1 Class 1 Laser Product Label
Class 1 lasers are products whose irradiance does not exceed the Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE)
value. Therefore, for Class 1 laser products the output power is below the level at which it is believed
eye damage will occur. Exposure to the beam of a Class 1 laser will not result in eye injury and can
therefore be considered safe. However, some Class 1 laser products might contain laser systems of a
higher Class but there are adequate engineering control measures to ensure that access to the beam is not
reasonably likely. Anyone who dismantles a Class 1 laser product that contains a higher Class laser
system is potentially at risk of exposure to a hazardous laser beam
G.1.1.2 Hazard Level 1 Label
The Hazard Level 1 label is shown in Figure G-2. This label is displayed on the faceplate of the cards.
Figure G-2 Hazard Level Label
The Hazard Level label warns users against exposure to laser radiation of Class 1 limits calculated in
accordance with IEC60825-1 Ed.1.2.
G.1.1.3 Laser Source Connector Label
The Laser Source Connector label is shown in Figure G-3.
Figure G-3 Laser Source Connector Label
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
145952
HAZARD
LEVEL 1
65542
96635
G-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Safety Labels
This label indicates that a laser source is present at the optical connector where the label has been placed.
G.1.1.4 FDA Statement Labels
The FDA Statement labels are shown in Figure G-4 and Figure G-5. These labels show compliance to
FDA standards and that the hazard level classification is in accordance with IEC60825-1 Am.2 or Ed.1.2.
Figure G-4 FDA Statement Label
Figure G-5 FDA Statement Label
G.1.1.5 Shock Hazard Label
The Shock Hazard label is shown in Figure G-6.
Figure G-6 Shock Hazard Label
This label alerts personnel to electrical hazard within the card. The potential of shock hazard exists when
removing adjacent cards during maintenance, and touching exposed electrical circuitry on the card itself.
96634
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE NO.50,
DATED JULY 26, 2001
282324
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE NO.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
65541
G-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Safety Labels
G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards
The OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17, OPT-EDFA-24, RAMAN-CTP, RAMAN-COP,
TDC-CC, TDC-FC, PSM, AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4c-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x, AD-4B-xx.x, 32WSS,
32WSS-L, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 40-MUX-C, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE,
40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, MMU, TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_2.5G,
MXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, 40E-TXP-C, 40ME-TXP-C,
40G-TXP-C, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, 40ME-MXP-C, AR_MXP, and AR_XP are Class 1M laser
products.
The labels that appear on these cards are described in the following subsections.
G.1.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement
The Class 1M Laser Product statement is shown in Figure G-7.
Figure G-7 Class 1M Laser Product Statement
Class 1M lasers are products that produce either a highly divergent beam or a large diameter beam.
Therefore, only a small part of the whole laser beam can enter the eye. However, these laser products
can be harmful to the eye if the beam is viewed using magnifying optical instruments.
G.1.2.2 Hazard Level 1M Label
The Hazard Level 1M label is shown in Figure G-8. This label is displayed on the faceplate of the cards.
Figure G-8 Hazard Level Label
The Hazard Level label warns users against exposure to laser radiation of Class 1 limits calculated in
accordance with IEC60825-1 Ed.1.2.
CAUTION
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS λ = 1400nm TO 1610nm
145953
HAZARD
LEVEL 1M
145990
G-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Safety Labels
G.1.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label
The Laser Source Connector label is shown in Figure G-9.
Figure G-9 Laser Source Connector Label
This label indicates that a laser source is present at the optical connector where the label has been placed.
G.1.2.4 FDA Statement Labels
The FDA Statement labels are shown in Figure G-10 and Figure G-11. These labels show compliance to
FDA standards and that the hazard level classification is in accordance with IEC60825-1 Am.2 or Ed.1.2.
Figure G-10 FDA Statement Label
Figure G-11 FDA Statement Label
G.1.2.5 Shock Hazard Label
The Shock Hazard label is shown in Figure G-12.
96635
96634
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE NO.50,
DATED JULY 26, 2001
282324
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10
AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR
DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE NO.50,
DATED JUNE 24, 2007
G-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Figure G-12 Shock Hazard Label
This label alerts personnel to electrical hazard within the card. The potential of shock hazard exists when
removing adjacent cards during maintenance, and touching exposed electrical circuitry on the card itself.
G.1.2.6 Burn Hazard Label
The burn hazard label is shown in Figure G-13.
Figure G-13 Burn Hazard Label
This label is displayed on the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards. The label alerts personnel against
skin exposure to radiation that may cause burns. The potential of the burn hazard exists during handling
of fibers.
G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown
The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) procedure is supported on both client and trunk interfaces. On
the client interface, ALS is compliant with ITU-T G.664 (6/99). On the data application and trunk
interface, the switch on and off pulse duration is greater than 60 seconds and is user-configurable.
For information on ALS provisioning, refer the following procedures, as necessary:
• NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings, page 11-448
• DLP-G203 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM ALS Maintenance Settings, page 20-12
• DLP-G322 Change the OPT-BST ALS Maintenance Settings, page 20-25
65541
SKIN EXPOSURE
NEAR APERTURE
MAY CAUSE BURNS
246823
G-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Card-Level Indicators
G.3 Card-Level Indicators
Multiple colored LEDs indicate the status of the card.
Table G-1 lists the three card-level LEDs on the following cards:
• TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
• TXP_MR_10G and TXP_MR_10E
• TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L
• TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G
• 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C
• MXP_2.5G_10G and MXP_2.5G_10E
• MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L
• MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G
• MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L
• 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C
• GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
• ADM-10G
• OTU2_XP
• TXP_MR_10EX_C
• MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
• MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
• PSM
• TDC-CC and TDC-FC
• AR_MXP and AR_XP
Table G-2 lists the card-level LEDs on the AIC-I card.
Table G-1 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level LED Description
FAIL LED (Red) Red indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset.
The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL
LED persists.
ACT/STBY LED
Green (Active)
Amber (Standby)
Green indicates that the card is operational (one or both ports active) and ready
to carry traffic.
Amber indicates that the card is operational and in standby (protect) mode.
SF LED (Amber) Amber indicates a signal failure or condition such as loss of signal (LOS), loss
of frame (LOF), or high bit error rates (BERs) on one or more of the card’s
ports. The amber SF LED is also illuminated if the transmit and receive fibers
are incorrectly connected. If the fibers are properly connected and the link is
working, the LED turns off.
G-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Card-Level Indicators
Table G-3 lists the card-level LEDs on the MS-ISC-100T card.
Table G-4 lists the card-level LEDs on the following cards:
• 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O
• 4MD-xx.x
• OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L
• OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, and OPT-AMP-C
• OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE
• AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x and AD-4B-xx.x
• 32WSS and 32WSS-L
• 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 40-MUX-C
Table G-2 Card-Level Indicators on the AIC-I Card
Card-Level LEDs Description
Red FAIL LED Indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. The FAIL LED is on during
reset and flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL
LED persists.
Green ACT LED Indicates the AIC-I card is provisioned for operation.
Green/Red PWR A LED The PWR A LED is green when a supply voltage within a specified range
has been sensed on supply input A. It is red when the input voltage on supply
input A is out of range.
Green/Red PWR B LED The PWR B LED is green when a supply voltage within a specified range has
been sensed on supply input B. It is red when the input voltage on supply
input B is out of range.
Yellow INPUT LED The INPUT LED is yellow when there is an alarm condition on at least one
of the alarm inputs.
Yellow OUTPUT LED The OUTPUT LED is yellow when there is an alarm condition on at least one
of the alarm outputs.
Green RING LED The RING LED on the local orderwire (LOW) side is flashing green when a
call is received on the LOW.
Green RING LED The RING LED on the express orderwire (EOW) side is flashing green when
a call is received on the EOW.
Table G-3 Card-Level Indicators on the MS-ISC-100T Card
Card-Level LEDs Description
FAIL LED (Red) The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a
catastrophic software failure occurred on the card. As part of the boot
sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card
operational.
ACT LED (Green) The green ACT LED provides the operational status of the card. If the ACT
LED is green, it indicates that the card is active and the software is
operational.
G-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Port-Level Indicators
• 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, and 80-WXC-C
• 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C
• MMU
• OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24
Table G-5 lists the card-level LEDs on the following cards:
• OSCM
• OSC-CSM
G.4 Port-Level Indicators
For the following cards, the status of the card ports is indicated on the LCD screen of the ONS 15454
fan-tray assembly that displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot.
• OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L
• OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, and OPT-AMP-C
• OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE
• RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP
Table G-4 Card-Level Indicators
Card-Level Indicators Description
Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that
there is an internal hardware failure. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED
persists.
Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is
traffic-ready.
Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure on one or more of the card’s
ports. The amber SF LED also illuminates when the transmit and receive
fibers are incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the
light turns off.
Table G-5 Card-Level Indicators on the OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards
Card-Level Indicators Description
Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready or that
there is an internal hardware failure. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED
persists.
Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the OSCM or OSC-CSM is carrying
traffic or is traffic-ready.
Amber SF LED The amber SF LED indicates a signal failure or condition such as loss of
signal (LOS), loss of frame alignment (LOF), line alarm indication signal
(AIS-L), or high BER on one or more of the card’s ports. The amber signal
fail (SF) LED also illuminates when the transmit and receive fibers are
incorrectly connected. When the fibers are properly connected, the light
turns off.
G-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Port-Level Indicators
• OSCM and OSC-CSM
• 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O
• 4MD-xx.x
• AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x, and AD-4B-xx.x
• 32WSS and 32WSS-L
• 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 40-MUX-C
• 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, and 80-WXC-C
• 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C
• MMU
• OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24
In some cards, multiple colored LEDs indicate the status of the port.
Port-Level LEDs for AR_MXP and AR_XP cards depend on the configured card mode.
Table G-6 lists the port-level LEDs on the following cards:
• TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L
• TXP_MR_2.5G and TXP_MR_10EX_C
• 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C
• MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
Table G-7 lists the port-level LEDs on the following cards:
• TXP_MR_10G
• MXP_2.5G_10G
Table G-6 Port-Level Indicators
Port-Level LED Description
Green Client LED1
1. The MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards have four client ports, and so
have four client LEDs.
The green Client LED indicates that the client port is in service and that it is
receiving a recognized signal.
Green DWDM LED The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and that
it is receiving a recognized signal.
Table G-7 Port-Level Indicators on the TXP_MR_10G and MXP_2.5G_10G cards
Port-Level LED Description
Green Client LED
(four LEDs for
MXP_2.5G_10G1)
The green Client LED indicates that the client port is in service and that it is
receiving a recognized signal.
Green DWDM LED The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and that
it is receiving a recognized signal.
G-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Port-Level Indicators
Table G-8 lists the port-level LEDs on the TXPP_MR_2.5G card:
Table G-9 lists the port-level LEDs on the following cards:
• GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
• MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
• 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C
Table G-10 lists the port-level LEDs on the following cards:
• MXP_MR_2.5G
• MXPP_MR_2.5G
Green Wavelength 1
LED
Each port supports two wavelengths on the DWDM side. Each wavelength
LED matches one of the wavelengths. This LED indicates that the card is
configured for Wavelength 1.
Green Wavelength 2
LED
Each port supports two wavelengths on the DWDM side. Each wavelength
LED matches one of the wavelengths. This LED indicates that the card is
configured for Wavelength 2.
1. The MXP_2.5G_10G card has four client ports, and so has four client LEDs.
Table G-7 Port-Level Indicators on the TXP_MR_10G and MXP_2.5G_10G (continued)cards
Port-Level LED Description
Table G-8 Port-Level Indicators on the TXPP_MR_2.5G card
Port-Level LED Description
Green Client LED The green Client LED indicates that the client port is in service and that it is
receiving a recognized signal.
Green DWDM A LED The green DWDM A LED indicates that the DWDM A port is in service and
that it is receiving a recognized signal.
Green DWDM B LED The green DWDM B LED indicates that the DWDM B port is in service and
that it is receiving a recognized signal.
Table G-9 Port-Level Indicators
Port-Level LED Description
Port LEDs
(eight LEDs, four for
each group, one for
each SFP/XFP)
Green/Red/Amber/Off
Green—The client port is either in service and receiving a recognized signal
(that is, no signal fail), or Out of Service and Maintenance (OOS,MT or
locked, maintenance) in which case the signal fail and alarms will be ignored.
Red—The client port is in service but is receiving a signal fail (LOS).
Amber—The port is provisioned and in a standby state.
Off—The SFP is either not provisioned, out of service, not properly inserted,
or the SFP hardware has failed.
Green DWDM LED The green DWDM LED indicates that the DWDM port is in service and that
it is receiving a recognized signal.
G-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Port-Level Indicators
Table G-11 lists the port-level LEDs on the following cards for both client and trunk ports:
• ADM-10G
• OTU2_XP
Note Client or trunk ports can each be in active or standby mode as defined in the related section for each
specific protection type. For example, fiber-switched protection has active or standby trunk ports; 1+1
APS protection has active or standby client ports, and client 1+1 protection does not utilize active or
standby ports.
Table G-10 Port-Level Indicators on the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards
Port-Level LED Description
Client LEDs
(eight LEDs)
Green indicates that the port is carrying traffic (active) on the interface.
Amber indicates that the port is carrying protect traffic (MXPP_MR_2.5G).
Red indicates that the port has detected a loss of signal.
DWDM LED
(MXP_MR_2.5G)
Green (Active)
Red (LOS)
Green indicates that the card is carrying traffic (active) on the interface.
A red LED indicates that the interface has detected an LOS or LOC.
DWDMA and DWDMB
LEDs
(MXPP_MR_2.5G)
Green (Active)
Amber (Protect Traffic)
Red (LOS)
Green indicates that the card is carrying traffic (active) on the interface.
When the LED is amber, it indicates that the interface is carrying protect
traffic in a splitter protection card (MXPP_MR_2.5G).
A red LED indicates that the interface has detected an LOS or LOC.
Table G-11 Port-Level Indicators on the ADM-10G and OTU2_XP cards
Port-Level Status Tri-color LED Description
The port-level LED is
active and unprotected.
• If a port is in OOS/locked state for any reason, the LED is turned off.
• If a port is in IS/unlocked state and the PPM is preprovisioned or is
physically equipped with no alarms, the LED is green.
• If a port is in IS state and the PPM is physically equipped but does have
alarms, the LED is red.
The port-level LED is in
standby.
• If a port is in OOS/locked state for any reason, the LED is turned off.
• If a port is in the IS/unlocked state and the PPM is preprovisioned or is
physically equipped with no alarms, the LED is amber.
• If a port is in IS state and physically equipped but does have alarms, the
LED is red.
G-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Port-Level Indicators
Table G-12 lists the power-level LEDs on the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
Note For ONS 15454 ETSI shelf, the power-level LEDs are either green or red. The LED is green when the
voltage on supply inputs is between the extremely low battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage
thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on supply inputs is above extremely high battery voltage
or below extremely low battery voltage thresholds.
Table G-13 lists the network-level LEDs on the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
Table G-14 lists the ethernet port-level LEDs on the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
Table G-12 Power-Level Indicators on the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards
Power-Level LEDs Definition
Green/Amber/Red
PWR A LED
The PWR A LED is green when the voltage on supply input A is between the
low battery voltage (LWBATVG) and high battery voltage (HIBATVG)
thresholds. The LED is amber when the voltage on supply input A is between
the high battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage (EHIBATVG)
thresholds or between the low battery voltage and extremely low battery
voltage (ELWBATVG) thresholds. The LED is red when the voltage on
supply input A is above extremely high battery voltage or below extremely
low battery voltage thresholds.
Green/Amber/Red
PWR B LED
The PWR B LED is green when the voltage on supply input B is between the
low battery voltage and high battery voltage thresholds. The LED is amber
when the voltage on supply input B is between the high battery voltage and
extremely high battery voltage thresholds or between the low battery voltage
and extremely low battery voltage thresholds. The LED is red when the
voltage on supply input B is above extremely high battery voltage or below
extremely low battery voltage thresholds.
Table G-13 Network-Level Indicators on the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards
System-Level LEDs Definition
Red CRIT LED Indicates critical alarms in the network at the local terminal.
Red MAJ LED Indicates major alarms in the network at the local terminal.
Yellow MIN LED Indicates minor alarms in the network at the local terminal.
Red REM LED Provides first-level alarm isolation. The remote (REM) LED turns red when
an alarm is present in one or more of the remote terminals.
Green SYNC LED Indicates that node timing is synchronized to an external reference.
Green ACO LED After pressing the alarm cutoff (ACO) button, the ACO LED turns green.
The ACO button opens the audible alarm closure on the backplane. ACO is
stopped if a new alarm occurs. After the originating alarm is cleared, the
ACO LED and audible alarm control are reset.
G-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Client Interface
Table G-15 lists the SFP LED indicators.
G.5 Client Interface
The client interface in TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C
cards is implemented with a separately orderable XFP module. The module is a tri-rate transceiver,
providing a single port that can be configured in the field to support an OC-192 SR-1 (Telcordia
GR-253-CORE) or STM-64 I-64.1 (ITU-T G.691) optical interface, as well as 10GE LAN PHY
(10GBASE-LR), 10GE WAN PHY (10GBASE-LW), 10G FC signals or
IB_5G signals (TXP_MR_10EX_C only).
The client side XFP pluggable module supports LC connectors and is equipped with a 1310-nm laser.
The MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards provide
four intermediate- or short-range OC-48/STM-16 ports per card on the client side. Both SR-1 or IR-1
optics can be supported and the ports use SFP connectors. The client interfaces use four wavelengths in
the 1310-nm, ITU 100-MHz-spaced, channel grid.
The client interface in AR_MXP and AR_XP cards are implemented with a separately orderable
XFP/SFP module. The module can be single-rate or multi-rate transceiver, providing a single port that
can be configured in the field to support available payloads. For the list of supported payloads, see
11.20 AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards section.
Table G-14 Ethernet Port-Level Indicators on the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards
Port-Level LEDs Definition
Green LINK LED Indicates the connectivity status.
Amber ACT LED Indicates data reception.
Table G-15 TNC and TNCE SFP Indicators
Port Type Link LED Activity LED
OC3 • RED - No link
• GREEN - Link
—
FE • RED - No link
• GREEN - Link
Blinks on packet flow
GE • RED - No link
• GREEN - Link
Blinks on packet flow
G-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
DWDM Interface
G.6 DWDM Interface
The MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards serve as
an OTN multiplexer, transparently mapping four OC-48 channels asynchronously to ODU1 into one
10-Gbps trunk. The tunable wavelengths for the DWDM trunk is as follows:
• MXP_2.5G_10E—Tunable for transmission over four wavelengths in the 1550-nm, ITU 100-GHz
spaced channel grid.
• MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C—Tunable for transmission over the entire C-band
and the channels are spaced at 50-GHz on the ITU grid.
• MXP_2.5G_10E_L—Tunable for transmission over the entire L-band and the channels are spaced
at 50-GHz on the ITU grid.
• AR_MXP and AR_XP—The wavelengths for the DWDM trunk is based on the pluggable.
Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the card in a loopback on the
trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks as it can cause irreparable damage to the card.
Note On the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card, you cannot disable ITU-T G.709 on the trunk side. If ITU-T G.709 is
enabled, then FEC cannot be disabled.
G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface
On the trunk side, the TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C
cards provide a 10-Gbps STM-64/OC-192 interface. There are four tunable channels available in the
1550-nm band or eight tunable channels available in the 1580-nm band on the 50-GHz ITU grid for the
DWDM interface. The card provides 3R (retime, reshape, and regenerate) transponder functionality for
this 10-Gbps trunk interface. Therefore, the card is suited for use in long-range amplified systems. The
DWDM interface is complaint with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE
standards.
The DWDM trunk port operates at a rate that is dependent on the input signal and the presence or absence
of the ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC. The possible trunk rates are:
• OC192 (9.95328 Gbps)
• OTU2 (10.70923 Gbps)
• 10GE (10.3125 Gbps) or 10GE into OTU2 (ITU G.sup43 11.0957 Gbps)
• 10G FC (10.51875 Gbps) or 10G FC into OTU2 (nonstandard 11.31764 Gbps)
• (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) Proprietary rate at the trunk when the client is provisioned as IB_5G.
The maximum system reach in filterless applications without the use of optical amplification or
regenerators is nominally rated at 23 dB over C-SMF fiber. This rating is not a product specification, but
is given for informational purposes. It is subject to change.
On the trunk side, the AR_MXP and AR_XP cards provide a 10-Gbps OTU2 or 2.5-Gbps OTU1 or
4-Gbps FC interfaces. The trunk wavelength can be tuned to any C-band wavelength, based on the
pluggable inserted. The card provides 3R (retime, reshape, and regenerate) transponder functionality for
this 10-Gbps trunk interface. Therefore, the card is suited for use in the long-range amplified systems.
G-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature
The DWDM interface is complaint with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE
standards. The DWDM trunk port operates at a rate that is dependent on the input signal and the presence
or absence of the ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC.
The maximum system reach in filterless applications without the use of optical amplification or
regenerators is nominally rated at 23 dB over C-SMF fiber. This rating is not a product specification, but
is given for informational purposes. It is subject to change.
G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature
A key feature of the TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, TXP_MR_10EX_C, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards is the
availability to configure the forward error correction in three modes: NO FEC, FEC, and E-FEC. The
output bit rate is always 10.7092 Gbps as defined in ITU-T G.709, but the error coding performance can
be provisioned as follows:
• NO FEC—No forward error correction
• FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975 Reed-Solomon algorithm
• E-FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975.1 I.7, two orthogonally concatenated BCH super FEC code. This
FEC scheme contains three parameterizations of the same scheme of two orthogonally interleaved
BCH. The constructed code is decoded iteratively to achieve the expected performance.
Note The E-FEC of the ONS 15454 and Cisco ASR 9000 are not compatible.
For the AR_MXP and AR_XP cards you can configure forward error correction on 10Gbps trunk XFP
ports in four modes: NO FEC, FEC, I.4 E-FEC, and I.7 E-FEC. The 2.5Gbps SFP OTN ports have only
two modes of operation—NO FEC and FEC. The output bit rate varies depending on the payload
provisioned and FEC configured. Details of error coding performance that can be provisioned are as
follows:
• NO FEC—No forward error correction
• FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975 Reed-Solomon algorithm
• I.4 E-FEC—Standard G.975.1 I.4 two interleaved codes (RS and BCH) super FEC codes
• I.7 E-FEC— Standard G.975.1 I.7 two orthogonally concatenated block (BCH) super FEC codes;
this FEC scheme contains three parameterizations of the same scheme of two BCH codes, with the
constructed code decoded iteratively to achieve the expected performance
Note G.709 OTN is enabled by default for all the trunk ports, except for a 4GFC transponder.
G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes
As client side traffic passes through the TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, TXP_MR_10EX_C or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
card, it can be digitally wrapped using FEC mode, E-FEC mode, or no error correction at all. The FEC
mode setting provides a lower level of error detection and correction than the E-FEC mode setting of the
G-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Client-to-Trunk Mapping
card. As a result, using E-FEC mode allows higher sensitivity (lower optical signal-to-noise ratio
[OSNR]) with a lower bit error rate than FEC mode. E-FEC enables longer distance trunk-side
transmission than with FEC.
The E-FEC feature is one of three basic modes of FEC operation. FEC can be turned off, FEC can be
turned on, or E-FEC can be turned on to provide greater range and lower BER. The default mode is FEC
on and E-FEC off. E-FEC is provisioned using CTC.
Caution Because the transponder has no visibility into the data payload and detect circuits, the TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C cards do not display circuits in card view
in CTC.
G.10 Client-to-Trunk Mapping
The TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, TXP_MR_10EX_C, AR_MXP, and AR_XP
cards can perform ODU2-to-OCh mapping, which allows operators to provision data payloads in a
standard way across 10-Gbps optical links. Additionaly, the AR_MXP, and AR_XP cards can perform
ODU1-to-OCh mapping across 2.5 Gbps optical links.
Digital wrappers that define client side interfaces are called Optical Data Channel Unit 2 (ODU2)
entities in ITU-T G.709. Digital wrappers that define trunk side interfaces are called Optical Channels
(OCh) in ITU-T G.709. ODU2 digital wrappers can include Generalized Multiprotocol Label Switching
(G-MPLS) signaling extensions to ITU-T G.709 (such as Least Significant Part [LSP] and Generalized
Payload Identifier [G-PID] values) to define client interfaces and payload protocols.
G.11 Timing Synchronization
The TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card performs all system-timing functions for each ONS 15454. The
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card performs all the system-timing functions for the 15454-M2 and 15454-M6
shelves.
The TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card monitors the recovered clocks from each traffic
card and two BITS ports for frequency accuracy. The TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card
selects a recovered clock, a BITS, or an internal Stratum 3 reference as the system-timing reference. You
can provision any of the clock inputs as primary or secondary timing sources. A slow-reference tracking
loop allows the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card to synchronize with the recovered
clock, which provides holdover if the reference is lost. The TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card
supports 64/8K composite clock and 6.312 MHz timing output.
Note The TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card supports the BITS-1 and BITS-2 external timing interfaces on the
ONS 15454 M6 shelf. The card supports the BITS-1 interface on the ONS 15454 M2 shelf.
The TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card supports SNTP operation that allows the nodes to synchronize the
system clock automatically with a reference SNTP server following system reboots, card resets, and
software upgrades.
For more information on the timing function, see Timing Reference document.
G-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Multiplexing Function
The MXP_2.5G_10G card is synchronized to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 clock during normal conditions
and transmits the ITU-T G.709 frame using this clock. The TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card can operate from
an external building integrated timing supply (BITS) clock, an internal Stratum 3 clock, or from clock
recovered from one of the four valid client clocks. If clocks from both TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards are
not available, the MXP_2.5G_10G card switches automatically (with errors, not hitless) to an internal
19.44 MHz clock that does not meet SONET clock requirements. This will result in a clock alarm.
The MXP_2.5G_10E and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards are synchronized to the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE clock and the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L
cards are synchronized to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 clock during normal conditions and transmits the
ITU-T G.709 frame using this clock. No holdover function is implemented. If neither
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE clock is available, the cards switch automatically (hitless)
to the first of the four valid client clocks with no time restriction as to how long it can run on this clock.
The cards continue to monitor the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. If a
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card is restored to working order, the cards revert to the
normal working mode of running from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE clock. If no
valid TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE clock is available and all of the client channels
become invalid, the cards wait (no valid frames processed) until the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card supplies a valid clock. In addition, the cards can
select the recovered clock from one active and valid client channel and supply that clock to the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards are able to transparently transport synchronization and timing
information for payload enveloped within ODU-1 and ODU-2. The cards are synchronized to the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC clock during normal conditions and transmit the ITU-T G.709 frame
using this clock. The OTN ports configured as clients shall not be provisionable as timing source.
G.12 Multiplexing Function
The muxponder is an integral part of the reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)
network. The key function of the MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards is to multiplex 4 OC-48/STM16 signals onto one ITU-T G.709 OTU2 optical
signal (DWDM transmission). The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards multiplex the various client signals onto
one ITU-T G.709 optical signal (DWDM transmission). The multiplexing mechanism allows the signal
to be terminated at a far-end node by another similar card.
Termination mode transparency on the muxponder is configured using OTUx and ODUx OH bytes. The
ITU-T G.709 specification defines OH byte formats that are used to configure, set, and monitor frame
alignment, FEC mode, section monitoring, tandem connection monitoring, and termination mode
transparency.
The card performs ODU to OTU multiplexing as defined in ITU-T G.709. The ODU is the framing
structure and byte definition (ITU-T G.709 digital wrapper) used to define the data payload coming into
one of the SONET/SDH client interfaces on the card. The term ODU1 refers to an ODU that operates at
2.5-Gbps line rate. On the card, four client interfaces can be defined using ODU1 framing structure and
format by asserting an ITU-T G.709 digital wrapper.
The output of the muxponder is a single 10-Gbps DWDM trunk interface defined using OTU2. It is
within the OTU2 framing structure that FEC or E-FEC information is appended to enable error checking
and correction.
G-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing
G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing
The MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, AR_MXP, and
AR_XP cards pass the incoming SONET/SDH data stream and its overhead bytes for the client signal
transparently. The card can be provisioned to terminate regenerator section overhead. This is used to
eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help
isolate faults in the network.
G.14 Client Interface Monitoring
The following parameters are monitored on the MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, AR_MXP, and AR_XP cards:
• Laser bias current is measured as a PM parameter
• LOS is detected and signaled
• Transmit (TX) and receive (RX) power are monitored
The following parameters are monitored in real time mode (one second):
• Optical power transmitted (client)
• Optical power received (client)
In case of loss of communication (LOC) at the DWDM receiver or far-end LOS, the client interface
behavior is configurable. AIS can be invoked or the client signal can be squelched.
G.15 Jitter
For SONET and SDH signals, the MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L,
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, AR_MXP, and AR_XP cards comply with Telcordia GR-253-CORE,
ITU-T G.825, and ITU-T G.873 for jitter generation, jitter tolerance, and jitter transfer. For more
information, see the “G.37 Jitter Considerations” section on page G-32.
G.16 Lamp Test
The MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, AR_MXP,
AR_XP, TDC-CC, TDC-FC, TNC, TNCE, TSC, TSCE, RAMAN-CTP, and RAMAN-COP cards support
lamp test function activated from the ONS 15454 front panel or through CTC to ensure that all LEDs are
functional.
G.17 Onboard Traffic Generation
The MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards provide
internal traffic generation for testing purposes according to pseudo-random bit sequence (PRBS),
SONET/SDH, or ITU-T G.709.
G-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Performance Monitoring
G.18 Performance Monitoring
GFP-T performance monitoring (GFP-T PM) in MXP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, AR_MXP, and
AR_XP cards are available via remote monitoring (RMON), and trunk PM is managed according to
Telcordia GR-253-CORE and ITU G.783/826. Client PM is achieved through RMON for FC and GE.
G.19 Distance Extension
In MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards, buffer-to-buffer credit management scheme provides
FC flow control. When this feature is enabled, a port indicates the number of frames that can be sent to
it (its buffer credit), before the sender is required to stop transmitting and wait for the receipt of a “ready”
indication The MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5 cards support FC credit-based flow control with a
buffer-to-buffer credit extension of up to 1600 km (994.2 miles) for 1G FC and up to 800 km (497.1
miles) for 2G FC. The feature can be enabled or disabled, as necessary.
G.20 Slot Compatibility
You can install MXP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, AR_MXP, and AR_XP cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12
to 17. The TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card is the only other card required to be used
with these muxponder cards. Cross-connect cards do not affect the operation of the muxponder cards.
G.21 Interoperability with Cisco MDS Switches
You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_2.5G
and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link association between
that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
G.22 Client and Trunk Ports
The MXP_MR_2.5G card features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm or 850-nm laser
(depending on the SFP) for the client ports. The card contains eight 12.5 degree downward tilt SFP
modules for the client interfaces. For optical termination, each SFP uses two LC connectors, which are
labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. In a MXP_MR_2.5G card, the trunk port is a dual-LC connector
with a 45 degree downward angle. In a MXPP_MR_2.5G card, there are two trunk port connectors (one
for working and one for protect), each a dual-LC connector with a 45-degree downward angle.
G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards
The following section describes the communication and control for the controller cards:
G-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Communication and Control for Controller Cards
G.23.1 TCC2 Card
The TCC2 card terminates up to 32 DCCs. The TCC2 hardware is prepared for up to 84 DCCs, which
will be available in a future software release. The node database, IP address, and system software are
stored in TCC2 nonvolatile memory, which allows quick recovery in the event of a power or card failure.
G.23.2 TCC2P/TCC3 Card
The TCC2P/TCC3 card supports multichannel, high-level data link control (HDLC) processing for the
DCC. Up to 84 DCCs can be routed over the TCC2P/TCC3 card and up to 84 section DCCs can be
terminated at the TCC2P/TCC3 card (subject to the available optical digital communication channels).
The TCC2P selects and processes 84 DCCs to facilitate remote system management interfaces.
The TCC2P/TCC3 card also originates and terminates a cell bus carried over the module. The cell bus
supports links between any two cards in the node, which is essential for peer-to-peer communication.
Peer-to-peer communication accelerates protection switching for redundant cards.
G.23.3 TNC and TNCE Cards
The TNC and TNCE cards act as node controller and shelf controller. The control tasks include system
initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection, and
resolution. The control tasks also include SONET and SDH data communications channel (DCC)
termination, 84 section SDCC and multiplex section MSDCC terminations, 28 SDCC tunnels or
SDCC-to-line LDCC terminations, and system fault detection for the 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves.
The system initialization tasks include assigning the network parameters to the system and loading the
system with the provisioning data stored in the database. The line cards in the system do not boot without
the TNC or TNCE card.
The TNC and TNCE cards support and provide the following:
• OSC communication to implement the Optical DCN, User Data Channels and Voice over IP
interface.
• Supervisory data channel (SDC) for communication between the nodes.
• Two point-to-point Ethernet channels at 10 Mbps to carry Voice over IP traffic.
• Two point-to-point Ethernet channels at 10/100 Mbps to carry UDC traffic.
• Passive inventory of external devices on the 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves.
• Supports OSC, UDC, and VoIP traffic. Two UDC/VoIP ports are present on the external connection
unit that can be configured to carry UDC/VoIP traffic.
Note The TNC and TNCE cards support UDC and VoIP configuration only when OSC is configured on the
ports. To delete the OSC channel on a port, delete the UDC and VoIP configuration on that port. For more
information, refer the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
On the 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves, the TNC and TNCE cards must adhere to the following rules
for SDCC/LDCC allocation:
• SDCC + SDCC Tunnels <= 68
• LDCC <= 28
G-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Interface Ports
• IP Tunnels <= 10
• SDCC + SDCC tunnels + (LDCC * 3) <= 84
G.23.4 TSC and TSCE Cards
The TSC and TSCE cards act as a shelf controller. The control tasks include system initialization,
provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection, and resolution. The
control tasks also include SONET and SDH data communications channel (DCC) termination, 84 section
SDCC and multiplex section MSDCC terminations, 28 SDCC tunnels or SDCC-to-line LDCC
terminations, and system fault detection for the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 shelves.
The system initialization tasks include assigning the network parameters to the system and loading the
system with the provisioning data stored in the database. The line cards in the system do not boot without
the TSC and TSCE cards.
The TSC and TSCE cards support and provides the following:
• Passive inventory of external devices on the 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves.
• 100 Mbps UDC on the 15454-M6 shelf.
On the 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves, the TSC and TSCE cards must adhere to the following rules
for SDCC/LDCC allocation.
• SDCC + SDCC Tunnels <= 68
• LDCC <= 28
• IP Tunnels <= 10
• SDCC + SDCC tunnels + (LDCC * 3) <= 84
G.24 Interface Ports
The TCC2 card has two built-in interface ports for accessing the system: an RJ-45 10BaseT LAN
interface and an EIA/TIA-232 ASCII interface for local craft access. It also has a 10BaseT LAN port for
user interfaces via the backplane.
The TCC2P/TCC3 card has two built-in Ethernet interface ports for accessing the system: one built-in
RJ-45 port on the front faceplate for on-site craft access and a second port on the backplane. The rear
Ethernet interface is for permanent LAN access and all remote access via TCP/IP as well as for
Operations Support System (OSS) access. The front and rear Ethernet interfaces can be provisioned with
different IP addresses using CTC.
Two EIA/TIA-232 serial ports, one on the faceplate and a second on the backplane, allow for craft
interface in TL1 mode.
Note To use the serial port craft interface wire-wrap pins on the backplane, the DTR signal line on the
backplane port wire-wrap pin must be connected and active.
The TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card has three built-in interface ports:
• RJ-45 LAN port
• RJ-45 console port
• RS-232 port (serial port)
G-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
External Alarms and Controls
The RJ-45 LAN port and RS-232 port are located on the faceplate of the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
The RJ-45 console port is behind the faceplate of the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
The front access RJ-45 LAN port provides 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet connectivity to the system. The
RJ-45 LAN port has LEDs to provide link and activity status. The RJ-45 LAN port provides local and
remote access to the Cisco Transport Controller through a common Web interface.
The RJ-45 console port is used to launch a debug session on the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
The RS-232 port is used to connect to the Transaction Language 1 (TL1) management interface. In TL1
mode, the RS-232 port runs at 9.6 Kbps without any flow control.
The front access LAN port and RJ-45 EMS LAN port can be provisioned with different IP addresses by
configuring the TNC and TNCE cards in secure mode using CTC. On 15454 M2, the EMS port is on the
power module. On 15454 M6, the EMS port is on the ECU.
The two SFP ports (SFP1 and SFP2) are used for primary OSC and secondary OSC connections. SFP1
supports OC-3/STM-1, FE, or GE payloads; SFP2 supports FE or GE payloads.
The two SFP ports on the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card are in IS,AINS administrative state during
payload creation. In this state, only the following alarms are raised:
• AS-MT alarm on PPM
• AS-CMD alarm on PPM and facility
• Prov-Mismatch alarm on PPM
The TX power is -40 and RX power is -50 for Ultra long-haul SFPs. The TX power is -40 and RX power
is -40 for other SFPs. When the OSC is created, the two SFP ports move to IS state. In this state, all the
supported alarms are raised.
Note VLAN tagged traffic is not supported on UDC or VoIP ports that are present on the external connection
unit.
G.25 External Alarms and Controls
The TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card provides customer-defined (environmental) alarms and external
controls on the ONS 15454 M6 shelf. The card provides input/output alarm contact closures. The
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card operates in two modes:
• External alarms mode - This is the default mode and up to 14 alarm input ports can be configured.
External alarms (input contacts) are typically used for external sensors such as open doors,
temperature sensors, flood sensors, and other environmental conditions.
• External control mode - Up to 10 alarm input ports and four alarm output ports can be configured.
External controls (output contacts) are typically used to drive visual or audible devices such as bells
and lights, but they can control other devices such as generators, heaters, and fans.
To configure the external alarms and external controls, go to Provisioning -> Alarm Extenders tab in the
CTC node view. To view the external alarms and external controls, go to Maintenance -> Alarm
Extenders tab in the CTC node view. For information on how to configure and view the external alarms
and external controls, refer the Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management document.
Note The LCD module must be present in the ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly to provision alarms from the
ECU, fan-tray assembly, or power modules.
G-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Digital Image Signing (DIS)
For information on pinouts of external alarms and external controls, see the “ONS 15454 ANSI Alarm,
Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
G.26 Digital Image Signing (DIS)
The TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card provides services that authenticate the origin of the software running
on the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, see the “3.8 Digital Image Signing”
section on page 3-20.
G.27 Database Storage
The node database, IP address, and system software are stored in TCC2P/TCC3 card nonvolatile
memory, which allows quick recovery in the event of a power or card failure.
The TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card provides 4 GB of non-volatile database storage (IDE Compact Flash
Module) for communication, provisioning, and system control. This allows full database recovery during
power failure.
The TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card supports writing and reading to and from an external non-volatile
memory device. The card also communicates with the non-volatile memory device through a USB 2.0
standard interface.
The USB-WRITE-FAIL alarm may be raised on the TNC and TNCE cards when synchronization occurs
between Compact Flash and USB Flash. If this alarm does not clear even after 20 minutes duration, it is
recommended to contact TAC.
For information on USB-WRITE-FAIL alarm, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Note The configuration details are stored in the database of the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. The database
restore from a TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card to a TSC/TSC/TSCE card or vice versa is not supported.
G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation
Cisco does not support operation of the ONS 15454 with only one TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. For full
functionality and to safeguard your system, always operate with two TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards.
Install TCC3 cards in Slots 7 and 11 for redundancy. If the active TCC3 card fails, traffic switches to the
protect TCC3 card. All TCC3 card protection switches conform to protection switching standards when
the bit error rate (BER) counts are not in excess of 1 * 10 exp – 3 and completion time is less than 50 ms.
On the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card operates in either simplex or duplex
(redundant) control mode. In redundant control mode, high availability is achieved.
When a second TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card is inserted into a node, it
synchronizes its software, its backup software, and its database with the active
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE. If the software version of the new
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE does not match the version on the active
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE, the newly inserted
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE copies from the active
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE, taking about 15 to 20 minutes to complete. If the backup
software version on the new TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE does not match the version
G-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Optical Service Channel
on the active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE, the newly inserted
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE copies the backup software from the active
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE again, taking about 15 to 20 minutes. Copying the
database from the active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE takes about 3 minutes.
Depending on the software version and backup version the new
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE started with, the entire process can take between 3 and 40
minutes.
G.29 Optical Service Channel
The TNC and TNCE cards support two optical service channels (OSC) through two small-form factor
pluggable (SFP) ports. The two SFP ports are named SFP1 and SFP2. The supported SFPs on TNC and
TNCE ports are ONS-SC-OSC-ULH, ONS-SE-155-1510, and ONS-SC-Z3-1510.
Note When you replace SFPs on the TNC and TNCE cards, provisioning for the current SFP has to be deleted
before the new SFP is plugged in.
SFP1 supports the following payloads:
• OC-3/STM-1
• Fast Ethernet (FE)
• Gigabit Ethernet (GE)
SFP2 supports the following payloads:
• Fast Ethernet (FE)
• Gigabit Ethernet (GE)
G.30 MultiShelf Management
The TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card supports multishelf management of up to 30 shelves including the
node controller. The card supports up to 29 subtending shelves. The subtending shelves can be the ONS
15454 M6 or ONS 15454 shelves. This allows network administrators to isolate faults and provision new
services across the DWDM network.
In the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, there are six FE RJ45 ports on the ECU and each TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
card supports three FE RJ45 connections to connect subtending shelves.
G.31 Protection Schemes
The TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card supports active and redundant architecture. The ONS 15454 M6 shelf
supports 1:1 equipment protection with one TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card acting as active and the other
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card as redundant.
The 15454-M2 shelf supports simplex control mode. In this mode, the active TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
card operates without a redundant TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
G-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Cards Supported by TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
The 15454-M6 shelf supports both simplex and redundant control mode. In redundant control mode, the
active TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card operates with a redundant TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card as the
backup. If the active TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card is removed, system traffic switches to the redundant
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. If the redundant TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card is not present or not in the
standby state, removing the active TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card results in loss of system traffic and
management connectivity.
In redundant control mode, a TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card can protect another TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
card. However, a TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card cannot protect a TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card or vice
versa.
G.32 Cards Supported by TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE
The TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card supports 15454 MSTP line cards except the following cards:
• OSCM
• ISC
• AIC
• AIC-I
The TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card is not interoperable with TCC2 /TCC2P/TCC3 cards. The
TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE and TCC cards cannot be inserted in the same shelf.
The line cards such as Transponder and Muxponder cards can be inserted in the 15454-M2 and
15454-M6 shelves along with the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card.
G.33 Automatic Power Control
A transient gain range of 20 to 23 dB is available to APC in order to permit other amplifiers to reach
their expected set points. However, operation in this range is not continuous. At startup, the
OPT-AMP-17-C card caps the gain at a maximum of 20 dB.
Note When the OPT-AMP-17-C operates as a booster amplifier, APC does not control its gain.
G.34 Alarms and Thresholds
Table G-16 lists the alarms and its related thresholds for the OSC-CSM card.
Table G-16 Alarms and Thresholds
Port Alarms Thresholds
LINE RX LOS None
LOS-P LOS-P Fail Low
LOS-O LOS-O Fail Low
LINE TX None None
G-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Card Protection
G.35 Card Protection
G.35.1 Y-Cable and Splitter Protection
Y-cable and splitter protection are two main forms of card protection that are available for TXP, MXP,
AR_MXP, AR_XP, and Xponder (GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, and OTU2_XP) cards
when they are provisioned in TXP or MXP mode. Y-cable protection is provided at the client port level.
Splitter protection is provided at the trunk port level.
Note GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards use VLAN protection when they are provisioned in
L2-over-DWDM mode. For information, see the “G.35.3 Layer 2 Over DWDM Protection” section on
page G-31. The ADM-10G card uses path protection and 1+1 protection. For more information, see the
“11.15.10 Protection” section on page 11-90.
G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection
Y-cable protection is available for the following ONS 15454 TXP, MXP, and Xponder cards:
• TXP_MR_10G
• TXP_MR_10E
• TXP_MR_2.5G
• 40E-TXP-C
• 40ME-TXP-C
• MXP_2.5G_10G
• MXP_2.5G_10E
• MXP_2.5G_10E_C
• MXP_2.5G_10E_L
• MXP_MR_2.5G
• MXP_MR_10DME_C
• MXP_MR_10DME_L
• 40G-MXP-C
OSC TX OPWR-DEG-HIGH OPWR-DEG-HIGH Th
OPWR-DEG-LOW OPWR-DEG-LOW Th
OPWR-FAIL-LOW OPWR-FAIL-LOW Th
OSC RX None None
COM TX None None
COM RX LOS-P LOS-P Fail Low
Table G-16 Alarms and Thresholds
Port Alarms Thresholds
G-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Card Protection
• 40E-MXP-C
• 40ME-MXP-C
• GE_XP and GE_XPE (when in 10GE or 20GE MXP card mode)
• 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE (when in 10GE TXP card mode)
• OTU2_XP (when in Transponder card configuration)
• AR_MXP
• AR_XP
To create a Y-cable protection, create a Y-cable protection group for two TXP, MXP, or Xponder cards
using the CTC software, then connect the client ports of the two cards physically with a Y-cable. The
single client signal is sent into the RX Y-cable and is split between the two TXP, MXP, or Xponder cards.
The two TX signals from the client side of the TXP, MXP, or Xponder cards are combined in the TX
Y-cable into a single client signal. Only the active card signal passes through as the single TX client
signal. The other card must have its laser turned off to avoid signal degradation where the Y-cable joins.
On the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, and OTU2_XP cards, the Y-cable protection
mechanism is provisionable and can be set ON or OFF (OFF is the default mode). When a signal fault
is detected (LOS, LOF, SD, or SF on the DWDM receiver port in the case of ITU-T G.709 mode) the
protection mechanism software automatically switches between paths. Y-cable protection also supports
revertive and nonrevertive mode.
When an MXP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, AR_MXP, or AR_XP card
that is provisioned with Y-cable protection is used on a storage ISL link (ESCON, FC1G, FC2G, FC4G,
FICON1G, FICON2G, FICON4G, or ISC-3 1/2G), a protection switchover resets the standby port to
active. This reset reinitialises the end-to-end link to avoid any link degradation caused due to loss of
buffer credits during switchover and results in an end-to-end traffic hit of 15 to 20 seconds.
When using the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card, enable the fast switch feature and
use it with a Cisco MDS storage switch to avoid this 15 to 20 second traffic hit. When enabling fast
switch on the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card, ensure that the attached MDS
switches have the buffer-to-buffer credit recovery feature enabled.
You can also use the TXP_MR_2.5G card to avoid this 15 to 20 second traffic hit. When a Y-cable
protection switchover occurs, the storage ISL link does not reinitialize and results in an end-to-end
traffic hit of less than 50 ms.
AR_MXP and AR_XP cards support Y-cable protection on the client ports, which are part of an
unprotected card mode. The Y-cable protection is not supported for video and auto payloads.
When using the AR_MXP or AR_XP card on storage ISL link, use it with a Cisco MDS storage switch
to avoid this 15 to 20 second traffic hit.
Note Y-cable connectors will not work with electrical SFPs because Y-cables are made up of optical
connectors and there is no way to physically connect them to a electrical SFP. Y-cable protection is not
supported on IB_5G.
Note There is a traffic hit of upto a couple hundred milliseconds on the MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXP_MR_10DME cards in Y-cable configuration when a fiber cut or SFP failure occurs on one of the
client ports.
G-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Card Protection
Note If you create a GCC on either card of the protect group, the trunk port stays permanently active,
regardless of the switch state. When you provision a GCC, you are provisioning unprotected overhead
bytes. The GCC is not protected by the protect group.
Figure G-14 on page G-29 shows the Y-cable signal flow.
Note Loss of Signal–Payload (LOS-P) alarms, also called Incoming Payload Signal Absent alarms, can occur
on a split signal if the ports are not in a Y-cable protection group.
Note Removing an SFP from the client ports of a card in a Y-cable protection group card causes an
IMPROPRMVL (PPM) alarm. The working port raises the IMPROPRMVL alarm and the protected port
raises the IMPROPRMVL alarm. The severity on the client ports is changed according to the protection
switch state.
Note On the OTU2_XP card, when the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature is enabled,
Y-cable protection is not supported on the LAN to WAN interface (ports 1 and 3).
Note When using fixed DWDM or tunable XFPs for Y-cable protection, the protection switch time may exceed
50ms.
Figure G-14 Y-Cable Protection
Client
"Working" card
(TXP or MXP)
"Protection" card
(TXP or MXP)
Y cables
TX
RX
Working
Protect
Client
Port
Trunk
Port
Client
Port
Trunk
Port
124080
G-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Card Protection
G.35.1.2 Splitter Protection
Splitter protection, shown in Figure G-15, is provided with TXPP cards, MXPP cards, and OTU2_XP
cards (on trunk ports that are not part of a regenerator group). You can create and delete splitter
protection groups in OTU2_XP card.
To implement splitter protection, a client injects a single signal into the client RX port. An optical splitter
internal to the card then splits the signal into two separate signals and routes them to the two trunk TX
ports. The two signals are transmitted over diverse optical paths. The far-end MXPP or TXPP card uses
an optical switch to choose one of the two trunk RX port signals and injects it into the TX client port.
When using splitter protection with two MXPP or TXPP cards, there are two different optical signals
that flow over diverse paths in each direction. In case of failure, the far-end switch must choose the
appropriate signal using its built-in optical switch. The triggers for a protection switch are LOS, LOF,
SF, or SD.
In the splitter protected 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, AIS-P and LOP-P acts as trigger
(when G.709 is enabled) for the Protection Switch, in addition to the existing switching criteria.
In the OTU2_XP card, the STS parameters such as, SF /SD thresholds, Path PM thresholds, and Path
Trace is set for the working path (Port 3). The same parameters are also applicable for the protected path
(Port 4).
Figure G-15 Splitter Protection
G.35.2 1+1 Protection
The 1+1 protection is available for the GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, and 10GE_XPE cards:
The 1+1 protection is provided in the Layer 2 (L2) card mode to protect against client port and card
failure. 1+1 protection is supported in both single shelf and multishelf setup. This means that the
working card can be in one shelf and the protect card can be in another shelf of a multishelf setup.
Communication between the two cards is across 10 Gigabit Ethernet interconnection interface using
Ethernet packets. The Inter link (ILK) trunk or internal pathcord must be provisioned on both the cards.
This link is used to transmit protection switching messages and data.
Client
Protected Card
Working
Protect
Client
Port
RX
TX
Splitter
Switch
Trunk
Port
Trunk
Port
124079
G-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Card Protection
Note With 1+1 protection mechanisms, the switch time of a copper SFP is 1 second.
With 1+1 protection, ports on the protect card can be assigned to protect the corresponding ports on the
working card. A working card must be paired with a protect card of the same type and number of ports.
The protection takes place on the port level, and any number of ports on the protect card can be assigned
to protect the corresponding ports on the working card.
To make the 1+1 protection scheme fully redundant, enable L2 protection for the entire VLAN ring. This
enables Fast Automatic Protection Switch (FAPS). The VLAN configured on the 1+1 port must be
configured as protected SVLAN.
1+1 protection can be either revertive or nonrevertive. With nonrevertive 1+1 protection, when a failure
occurs and the signal switches from the working card to the protect card, the signal remains on the
protect card until it is manually changed. Revertive 1+1 protection automatically switches the signal
back to the working card when the working card comes back online. 1+1 protection uses trunk ports to
send control traffic between working and protect cards. This trunk port connection is known as ILK trunk
ports and can be provisioned via CTC.
The standby port can be configured to turn ON or OFF but the traffic coming to and from the standby
port will be down. If the laser is ON at the standby port, the other end port (where traffic originates) will
not be down in a parallel connection. Traffic is blocked on the standby port.
1+1 protection is bidirectional and nonrevertive by default; revertive switching can be provisioned using
CTC.
G.35.3 Layer 2 Over DWDM Protection
The Layer 2 Over DWDM protection is available for the following cards:
• GE_XP and GE_XPE
• 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE
When the card is in L2-over-DWDM card mode, protection is handled by the hardware at the Layer 1
and Layer 2 levels. Fault detection and failure propagation is communicated through the ITU-T G.709
frame overhead bytes. For protected VLANs, traffic is flooded around the 10 Gigabit Ethernet DWDM
ring. To set up the Layer 2 protection, you identify a node and the card port that is to serve as the master
node and port for the VLAN ring on the card view Provisioning > Protection tab. If a failure occurs, the
node and port are responsible for opening and closing VLAN loops.
Note The Forced option in the Protection drop-down list converts all the SVLANs to protected SVLANs
irrespective of the SVLAN protection configuration in the SVLAN database. This is applicable to a
point-to-point linear topology. The SVLAN protection must be forced to move all SVLANs, including
protected and unprotected SVLANs, to the protect path irrespective of provisioned SVLAN attributes.
A FAPS switchover happens in the following failure scenarios:
• DWDM line failures caused by a fiber cut
• Unidirectional failure in the DWDM network caused by a fiber cut
• Fiber pull on the master card trunk port followed by a hard reset on the master card
• Hard reset on the master card
• Hard reset on the slave card
G-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Far-End Laser Control
• An OTN failure is detected (LOS, OTUK-LOF, OTUK-LOM, OTUK-LOM, OTUK-SF, or
OTUK-BDI on the DWDM receiver port in the case of ITU-T G.709 mode)
• Trunk ports are moved to OOS,DSBLD (Locked,disabled) state
• Improper removal of XFPs
A FAPS switchover does not happen in the following scenarios:
• Slave card trunk port in OOS,DSBLD (Locked,disabled) state followed by a hard reset of the slave
card
• OTN alarms raised on the slave card trunk port followed by a hard reset of the slave card
G.36 Far-End Laser Control
The 15454 DWDM cards provide a transparent mode that accurately conveys the client input signal to
the far-end client output signal. The client signal is normally carried as payload over the DWDM signals.
Certain client signals, however, cannot be conveyed as payload. In particular, client LOS or LOF cannot
be carried. Far-end laser control (FELC) is the ability to convey an LOS or LOF from the near-end client
input to the far-end client output.
If an LOS is detected on the near-end client input, the near-end trunk sets the appropriate bytes in the
OTN overhead of the DWDM line. These bytes are received by the far-end trunk, and cause the far-end
client laser to be turned off. When the laser is turned off, it is said to be squelched. If the near-end LOS
clears, the near-end trunk clears the appropriate bytes in the OTN overhead, the far-end detects the
changed bytes, and the far-end client squelch is removed.
FELC also covers the situation in which the trunk port detects that it has an invalid signal; the client is
squelched so as not to propagate the invalid signal.
Payload types with the 2R mode preclude the use of OTN overhead bytes. In 2R mode, an LOS on the
client port causes the trunk laser to turn off. The far end detects the LOS on its trunk receiver and
squelches the client.
FELC is not provisionable. It is always enabled when the DWDM card is in transparent termination
mode. However, FELC signaling to the far-end is only possible when ITU-T G.709 is enabled on both
ends of the trunk span.
G.37 Jitter Considerations
Jitter introduced by the SFPs used in the transponders and muxponders must be considered when
cascading several cards. With TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G,
TXP_MR_10E, AR_MXP, and AR_XP cards several transponders can be cascaded before the
cumulative jitter violates the jitter specification. The recommended limit is 20 cards. With
TXP_MR_10G cards, you can also cascade several cards, although the recommended limit is 12 cards.
With MXP_2.5G_10G and MXP_2.5G_10E cards, any number of cards can be cascaded as long as the
maximum reach between any two is not exceeded. This is because any time the signal is demultiplexed,
the jitter is eliminated as a limiting factor.
The maximum reach between one transponder and the other must be halved if a Y cable is used. For more
information on Y-cable operation, see the “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page G-27.
G-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Termination Modes
G.38 Termination Modes
Transponder and muxponder cards have various SONET and SDH termination modes that can be
configured using CTC (see the “11.23 Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards” section on
page 11-142). The termination modes are summarized in Table G-17.
For TXP and MXP cards, adhere to the following conditions while DCC termination provisioning:
• For SDCC/RS-DCC provisioning, the card should be in the Section/RS-DCC or Line/MS-DCC
termination mode.
• For LDCC/MS-DCC provisioning, the card should be in the Line/MS-DCC termination mode.
For more information on enabling termination modes, see the “11.23 Procedures for Transponder and
Muxponder Cards” section on page 11-142.
Table G-17 Termination Modes
Cards Termination Mode Description
All TXP, MXP, and
OTU2_XP cards,
with the exception
of the
MXP_2.5G_10G
card (see next
section of this table)
Transparent Termination All the bytes of the payload pass transparently through the cards.
Section Termination In line termination mode, the section and line overhead bytes for
SONET and the overhead bytes for the SDH multiplex and
regenerator sections are terminated. None of the overhead bytes are
passed through. They are all regenerated, including the SONET
SDCC and line DCC (LDCC) bytes and the SDH RS-DCC and
multiplexer section DCC (MS-DCC) bytes.
MXP_2.5G_10G1
1. Clients operating at the OC48/STM16 rate are multiplexed into an OC192/STM64 frame before going to OTN or DWDM.
Transparent Termination All client bytes pass transparently except the following: B1 is rebuilt,
S1 is rewritten, A1 to A2 are regenerated, and H1 to H3 are
regenerated.
Section Termination The SONET TOH section bytes and the SDH regenerator section
overhead bytes are terminated. None of these section overhead bytes
are passed through. They are all regenerated, including the SONET
TOH section DCC bytes and the SDH RS-DCC bytes. In the section
termination mode, the SONET TOH line and SDH multiplex section
overhead bytes are passed transparently.
Line Termination In the line termination mode, the section and line overhead bytes for
SONET and the overhead bytes for the SDH multiplex and
regenerators sections are terminated. None of the overhead bytes are
passed through. They are all regenerated, including the SONET
SDCC and LDCC bytes and the SDH RS-DCC and MS-DCC bytes.
G-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix G Card Features
Termination Modes
H-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
A P P E N D I X H
Network Element Defaults
The information in this chapter is in a new location. See Network Element Defaults for information
related to factory-configured (default) network element (NE) settings for the Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms.
H-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Appendix H Network Element Defaults
IN-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
INDEX
Numerics
1+1 optical protection, ADM-10G card ports 11-90
10DME_C card. See MXP_MR_10DME_C card
10DME_L card. See MXP_MR_10DME_L card
10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE card
10GE TXP mode 11-149
block diagram 11-64
CFM 11-75
changing card mode 11-149
changing optical transport network settings 11-420
changing RMON thresholds 11-417
committed info rate 11-383
compatibility 11-6
Ethernet OAM 11-77
faceplates 11-64
features 11-60
LACP 11-73
modifying Ethernet settings 11-381
modifying Layer 1 protection settings 11-393
protocol compatibility 11-62
provisioning ITU-T G.709 OTN 11-421
REP 11-79
safety labels 11-10
summary 11-4
Y-cable protection G-28
10GE_XP card
installing 14-69
L2 over DWDM mode 11-149
managing SVLAN databases 16-78
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-416
routing fiber to the standard patch-panel tray 14-89
viewing utilization PMs 11-355
10GE MXP card mode 11-150
10GE TXP card mode 11-149
10G Multirate Transponder Card
pm parameters and thresholds 11-191
15216-PP-4-SMR mesh patch panel 14-101
20GE MXP card mode 11-150
32DMX card
attaching fiber to patch-panel tray 14-85
block diagrams 10-31
changing administrative state 20-56, 20-60
changing optical channel settings 20-59
changing optical channel thresholds 20-62
changing optical line settings 20-55
channel allocation plan 10-32
description 10-29
faceplate 10-30
fiber clip 14-79
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-54
port calibration 10-32
power monitoring 10-32
resetting 24-14
ROADM functionality 10-31
ROADM node acceptance test 21-27
routing fiber to the deep patch-panel tray 14-90
software compatibility 10-4
terminal node acceptance test 21-10
verifying power 21-14
See also DWDM cards
32DMX-L card
block diagrams 10-36
changing administrative state 20-60
changing optical channel settings 20-59
Index
IN-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
changing optical channel thresholds 20-62
changing optical line settings 20-55, 20-56
channel plan 10-37
description 10-34
faceplate 10-35
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-54
port calibration 10-37
power monitoring 10-37
ROADM acceptance test 21-39
ROADM functionality 10-36
software compatibility 10-4
terminal node acceptance test 21-20
verifying power 21-26
See also DWDM cards
32DMX-O card
attaching fiber to patch-panel tray 14-85
block diagrams 6-17
changing administrative state 20-56, 20-60
changing optical channel settings 20-59
changing optical channel thresholds 20-62
changing optical line settings 20-55
deleting 14-51
description 6-14
faceplate 6-16
fiber clip 14-79
input power class 6-3
installing 14-64
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-54
port calibration 6-18
port-level indicators 6-17
power monitoring 6-17
resetting 24-14
routing fiber to the deep patch-panel tray 14-90
software compatibility 6-2
summary 6-2
terminal and hub node acceptance test 21-3
verifying power 21-7
See also DWDM cards
32MUX-O card
attaching fiber to patch-panel tray 14-85
block diagrams 6-11
changing administrative state 20-56, 20-60
changing optical channel settings 20-59
changing optical channel thresholds 20-62
changing optical line settings 20-55
channel plan 6-12
deleting 14-51
description 6-9
faceplate 6-10
fiber clip 14-79
input power class 6-3
installing 14-64
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-54
port calibration 6-13
port-level indicators 6-11
power monitoring 6-13
resetting 24-14
routing fiber to the deep patch-panel tray 14-90
software compatibility 6-2
summary 6-2
terminal and hub node acceptance test 21-3
verifying power 21-7
See also DWDM cards
32WSS card
attaching fiber to patch-panel tray 14-85
block diagrams 10-18 to 10-19
changing administrative state 20-67, 20-74
changing optical channel parameters 20-66
changing optical channel thresholds 20-69
changing optical line parameters 20-73
changing optical line thresholds 20-74
channel allocation plan 10-21
deleting 14-51
description 10-16
faceplate 10-17
installing 14-64
LEDs 10-22
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-65
Index
IN-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
port calibration 10-20
power monitoring 10-20
resetting 24-14
ROADM node acceptance test 21-27
routing fiber to the deep patch-panel tray 14-90
software compatibility 10-4
terminal node acceptance test 21-10
See also DWDM cards
32WSS-L card
block diagrams 10-25 to 10-26
changing administrative state 20-67, 20-74
changing optical channel parameters 20-66
changing optical channel thresholds 20-69
changing optical line parameters 20-73
changing optical line thresholds 20-74
channel plan 10-27, 10-28
deleting 14-51
description 10-22
faceplate 10-24
LEDs 10-29
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-65
port calibration 10-27
power monitoring 10-27
ROADM node acceptance test 21-39
software compatibility 10-4
terminal node acceptance test 21-20
See also DWDM cards
40-DMX-C card
block diagrams 10-41
changing administrative state 20-56, 20-60, 20-62
changing optical line settings 20-55, 20-59
channel plan 10-42
description 10-39
faceplate 10-40
installing 14-64
installing fiber-optic cables between mesh nodes 14-101
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-54
port calibration 10-42
power monitoring 10-42
resetting 24-14
ROADM functionality 10-41
ROADM node acceptance test 21-62
routing fiber to the 40-channel patch-panel tray 14-102
routing fiber to the deep patch-panel tray 14-95
software compatibility 10-4
terminal and hub node acceptance test 21-8
terminal node acceptance test 21-15
verifying power 21-7, 21-14
40-DMX-CE card
block diagrams 10-46
changing optical line settings 20-55
channel plan 10-47
description 10-44
faceplate 10-45
installing fiber-optic cables between mesh nodes 14-101
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-54
port calibration 10-47
power monitoring 10-47
ROADM functionality 10-46
routing fiber to the 40-channel patch-panel tray 14-102
routing fiber to the deep patch-panel tray 14-95
40E-MXP-C 11-52
client interface data rates 11-53
faceplate 11-56
features 11-53
modulation format 11-54
unidirectional regeneration 11-54
wavelength identification 11-57
40E-TXP-C card
block diagram 11-24
See also TXP cards
40G-MXP-C
block diagram 11-56
unidirectional regeneration 11-54
40G-MXP-C card
Index
IN-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
ALS 11-55
block diagram 11-56
changing card settings 11-218, 11-323
client interface data rates 11-53
description 11-52
faceplate 11-56
features 11-53
installing 14-69
modulation format 11-53
port-level LEDs 11-58
trunk wavelengths 11-57
wavelength identification 11-57
Y-cable protection G-27
See also MXP cards
40G-TXP-C card
Y-cable protection G-27
40ME-MXP-C 11-52
block diagram 11-56
client interface data rates 11-53
faceplate 11-56
features 11-53
modulation format 11-54
unidirectional regeneration 11-54
wavelength identification 11-57
40ME-TXP-C card
description 11-23
faceplate 11-24
40-MUX-C card
block diagrams 10-51
changing administrative state 20-56, 20-60, 20-62
changing optical line settings 20-55, 20-59
channel plan 10-52
description 10-49
faceplate 10-50
installing 14-64
installing fiber-optic cables between mesh nodes 14-101
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-54
port calibration 10-52
power monitoring 10-51
resetting 24-14
routing fiber to the 40-channel patch-panel tray 14-102
software compatibility 10-4
terminal and hub node acceptance test 21-8
verifying power 21-7
See also DWDM cards
40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C card
changing optical channel thresholds 20-110
40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards
changing administrative state 20-96
40-SMR1-C card
changing optical amplifier line settings 20-101
changing optical amplifier thresholds 20-103
changing optical channel parameters 20-108
changing optical line settings 20-95
changing optical line thresholds 20-97
description 10-80
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-94
resetting 24-14
resettting 24-14
routing fiber to the 15216-MD-40-ODD patch-panel tray 14-99
software compatibility 10-5
See also DWDM cards
40-SMR2-C card
changing optical amplifier line settings 20-101
changing optical amplifier thresholds 20-103
changing optical channel parameters 20-108
changing optical line thresholds 20-97
description 10-80
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-94
resetting 24-14
routing fiber to the 15216-MD-40-ODD patch-panel tray 14-99
software compatibility 10-5
40-WSS-C card
block diagrams 10-56
changing administrative state 20-67, 20-74
Index
IN-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
changing optical channel parameters 20-66
changing optical channel thresholds 20-69
changing optical line parameters 20-73
changing optical line thresholds 20-74
channel plan 10-58
description 10-54
faceplate 10-55
installing 14-64
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-65
port calibration 10-58
power monitoring 10-57
resettting 24-14
ROADM functionality 10-57
ROADM node acceptance test 21-62
routing fiber to the 40-channel patch-panel tray 14-95
software compatibility 10-4
terminal node acceptance test 21-15
See also DWDM cards
40-WSS-CE card
block diagrams 10-63
changing optical channel thresholds 20-69
changing optical line parameters 20-73
changing optical line thresholds 20-74
channel plan 10-65
description 10-60
faceplate 10-62
LEDs 10-66
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-65
port calibration 10-65
power monitoring 10-64
resetting 24-14
ROADM functionality 10-64
routing fiber to the 40-channel patch-panel tray 14-95
See also DWDM cards
40-WXC-C card
changing administrative state 20-82, 20-87, 20-92, 20-109
changing optical channel parameters 20-81
changing optical channel thresholds 20-84
changing optical line parameters 20-87, 20-91
changing optical line thresholds 20-89
channel plan 10-71, 10-77
description 10-67
faceplate 10-69, 10-82, 10-86
installing 14-64
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-79
multiplexing card channels 20-93
port calibration 10-70, 10-71, 10-84, 10-88
power monitoring 10-70, 10-76
recording power value 21-133
software compatibility 10-4
See also DWDM cards
4MD-xx.x card
block diagram 6-21
changing administrative state 20-56, 20-60
changing optical channel settings 20-59
changing optical channel thresholds 20-62
changing optical line settings 20-55
deleting 14-51
description 6-19
faceplate 6-20
input power 6-3
installing 14-64
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-54
port calibration 6-22
port-level indicators 6-22
power monitoring 6-22
software compatibility 6-2
summary 6-2
verifying pass-through connection power 21-100
wavelength pairs 6-22
80-WXC-C
channel plan 10-77
Functional block diagram 10-75
80-WXC-C card
changing card modes 20-80
changing optical channel parameters 20-81
changing optical channel thresholds 20-84
changing optical line parameters 20-87, 20-91
Index
IN-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
changing optical line thresholds 20-89
description 10-73
faceplate 10-75
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-79
port calibration 10-76, 10-77
resetting 24-14
resettting 24-14
80-WXC-C-C card
software compatibility 10-5
A
acceptance tests
80-channel n-degree ROADM node 21-67
anti-ASE hub node 21-71
C-band line amplifier node with OSC-CSM and OSCM cards 21-86
C-band line amplifier node with OSC-CSM cards 21-78
C-band line amplifier node with OSCM cards 21-74
L-band line amplifier node with OSC-CSM and OSCM cards 21-90
L-band line amplifier node with OSC-CSM cards 21-82
mesh node 21-134
multiring site 21-126
node upgrade 21-139
ROADM node 21-27, 21-39, 21-62
symmetric OADM node with OSC-CSM cards 21-106
symmetric OADM node with OSCM cards 21-94
symmetric passive OADM node with OSC-CSM cards 21-112, 21-114
terminal and hub nodes with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards 21-3
terminal and hub nodes with 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards 21-8
terminal node with 32WSS and 32DMX cards 21-10
terminal node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards 21-20
terminal node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards 21-15
AD-1B-xx.x card
block diagrams 9-22
deleting 14-51
description 9-20
faceplate 9-21
input power 9-4
installing 14-64
port calibration 9-22
power monitoring 9-22
resetting 24-14
verifying output common power 21-98
verifying output express power 21-97
verifying pass-through connection power 21-101
See also DWDM cards
AD-1C-xx.x card
block diagrams 9-11
deleting 14-51
description 9-9
faceplate 9-10
input power 9-4
installing 14-64
port calibration 9-11
power monitoring 9-11
resetting 24-14
verifying output common power 21-98
verifying output express power 21-97
verifying pass-through connection 21-102
See also DWDM cards
AD-2C-xx.x card
block diagrams 9-14
deleting 14-51
description 9-12
faceplate 9-13
input power 9-4
installing 14-64
port calibration 9-15
power monitoring 9-15
resetting 24-14
verifying output common power 21-98
Index
IN-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
verifying output express power 21-97
verifying pass-through connection 21-102
wavelength pairs 9-14
See also DWDM cards
AD-4B-xx.x card
block diagrams 9-25
deleting 14-51
description 9-23
faceplate 9-24
input power 9-4
port calibration 9-26
power monitoring 9-25
resetting 24-14
verifying output common power 21-98
verifying output express power 21-97
verifying pass-through connection power 21-101
See also DWDM cards
AD-4C-xx.x card
block diagram 9-18
deleting 14-51
description 9-16
faceplate 9-17
input power 9-4
installing 14-64
port calibration 9-19
power monitoring 9-19
resetting 24-14
verifying output common power 21-98
verifying output express power 21-97
verifying pass-through connection 21-102
wavelength sets 9-18
See also DWDM cards
adding
firewall tunnels 16-85
proxy tunnels 16-84
static TID-to-NSAP entry to the TDC 14-39
TARP MAT entry 14-40
ADM-10G card 11-247
1+1 optical protection 11-90
block diagram 11-86
changing line settings 11-240
changing line thresholds for 1G Ethernet payloads 11-251
changing line thresholds for SONET payloads 11-247
changing OTN settings 11-256
changing section trace settings 11-245
circuit protection 11-90
client interface 11-87
compatibility 11-6
configuration management 11-88
creating peer group protection 11-238
description 11-83, 11-91
DWDM trunk interface 11-88
faceplate 11-86
features 11-83
GFP interoperability 11-85
installing 14-69
interlink interfaces 11-88
LEX interoperability 11-85
port configuration 11-86
port security 11-90
provision ethernet settings 11-239
provisioning ALS 11-224, 11-242
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-255
provisioning interlink or trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-254
resetting 24-14
routing fiber to the standard patch-panel tray 14-89
safety labels 11-10
summary 11-4
Y-cable protection 11-90
See also DWDM cards
administrative state, changing
during ANS 14-128
for 10G data muxponder cards 11-220, 11-301, 11-324
for 10G multirate transponder cards 11-196
for 2.5G data muxponder cards 11-283
for 2.5G multirate transponder cards 11-174
Index
IN-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
for 32WSS, 32WSS-L, and 40-WSS-C cards 20-67
for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards 20-96
for 40-WXC-C card 20-82, 20-109
for 4x2.5G muxponder cards 11-264
for ADM-10G card 11-224, 11-241
for MMU card 20-115
for multiplexer and demultiplexer cards 20-56
for OPT-AMP-L card 20-29
for OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L cards 20-15
for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards 20-3
for OTU2_XP card 11-429
for PSM card 20-49
in the Inventory tab 20-120
administrative states
changing for OCHNCs 16-48
changing for OCH trails 16-39
AIC-I card
block diagram 3-22
changing external alarms 20-118
changing external controls 20-119
changing orderwire settings 20-119
description 3-20
faceplate 3-22
installing 3-38
LEDs 3-22
modifying settings 20-117
provisioning orderwire 16-86
See also external alarms
See also external controls
AINS soak
10G data muxponder cards 11-307, 11-325
10G multirate transponder cards 11-198
2.5G data muxponder cards 11-289
2.5G multirate transponder cards 11-175
32WSS, 32WSS-L, and 40-WSS-C cards 20-68, 20-74
4x2.5G muxponder cards 11-265, 11-269
ADM-10G card 11-224, 11-243
MMU card 20-115
multiplexer and demultiplexer cards 20-60
OSCM and OSC-CSM cards 20-5
OTU2_XP card 11-430
AIS threshold 15-30
alarm indication signal. See AIS
alarms
troubleshooting. See the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide
ALS
40G-MXP-C card 11-55
provisioning maintenance for transponder, muxponder, GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE and ADM-10G cards 11-448
changing OPT-AMP-17-C card settings 20-44
changing OPT-AMP-C card settings 20-44
changing OPT-AMP-L card settings 20-44
changing OPT-RAMP-CE card settings 20-44
changing settings 20-12
description 13-30
MXP_MR_10DME_C card 11-47
MXP_MR_10DME_L card 11-47
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card 11-115
MXP cards 13-30
OPT-AMP-17-C card 5-25, 13-38
OPT-AMP-C card 5-30, 5-46, 13-38
OPT-AMP-L card 13-38
OPT-BST card 5-12, 13-33
OPT-BST-E card 13-33
OPT-BST-L card 5-16, 13-37
OSC-CSM card 4-6, 13-35
provisioning for 10G data muxponder cards 11-220, 11-302, 11-307, 11-325
provisioning for 10G multirate transponder cards 11-198
provisioning for 2.5G data muxponder cards 11-284, 11-288
provisioning for 4x2.5G muxponder cards 11-265, 11-269
provisioning for ADM-10G card 11-224, 11-242
provisioning for OPT-BST cards 20-25
provisioning for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards 20-12
Index
IN-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
provisioning for OTU2_XP card 11-430
provisioning for PSM card 20-52
provisioning for the OPT-AMP-L card 20-44
provisioning for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards 11-175
TXP_MR_10G card G-6
TXP cards 13-30
AMI 15-29, 15-30
amplifier cards
APR 13-31
compatibility 5-5
See OPT-AMP-17-C
See OPT-AMP-17-C card
See OPT-AMP-C card
See OPT-AMP-L card
See OPT-BST card
See OPT-BST-E card
See OPT-BST-L card
See OPT-PRE card
See OPT-RAMP-C card
See OPT-RAMP-CE card
summary 5-3
ANS 12-98
adding ANS parameters 14-59, 14-60
configuring with Cisco TransportPlanner 14-4, 14-47
deleting ANS parameters 14-59, 14-63
description 12-98
modifying ANS parameters 14-61
parameters 12-99
ranges and values 12-99, 14-58, 14-59, 14-61
Raman node without post-amplifiers 12-103
Raman node with post-amplifiers 12-102
running on a node 14-127
statuses 14-128
WDM-ANS provisioning 12-101
ANS parameters
provisioning using the NE Update file 14-49
anti-ASE acceptance test 21-71
anti-ASE node
description 12-35
meshed rings 13-5
Any Rate Muxponder Cards
Installing 14-69
Any Rate Xponder Cards
Installing 14-69
any-to-any rings 13-4
APC
APR 13-31
at the amplifier card level 13-20
at the shelf controller layer 13-21
description 13-20
managing 13-24
Raman node without post-amplifiers 13-24
Raman node with post-amplifiers 13-23
states 13-24
tab 13-25
APR 13-31
APR. See ALS
AR_MXP card
block diagram 11-125
changing ethernet settings 11-458
changing line RMON threshold settings 11-467
changing OTN settings 11-476
changing section trace settings 11-462
changing SONET or SDH line threshold settings 11-464
changing SONET or SDH settings 11-459
client interface data rates 11-120
description 11-119
enabling auto sensing 11-464
faceplate 11-124
features 11-121
functions 11-141
modifying card line settings and PM thresholds 11-454
operating modes 11-126
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-472
provisioning operating modes 11-454
Index
IN-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA
thresholds 11-471
AR_MXP or AR_XP card
changing card line settings 11-456
AR_XP card
block diagram 11-125
card line settings and PM thresholds 11-454
changing ethernet settings 11-458
changing line RMON threshold settings 11-467
changing OTN settings 11-476
changing section trace settings 11-462
changing SONET or SDH line threshold settings 11-464
changing SONET or SDH settings 11-459
client interface data rates 11-120
description 11-119
enabling auto sensing 11-464
faceplate 11-124
features 11-121
functions 11-141
operating modes 11-126
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-472
provisioning operating modes 11-454
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-471
assigning
port names 16-16
security in CTC 14-10
user security level 14-12
attaching
fiber. See installing
audit trail
off-loading records 24-16
viewing records 24-15
automatic laser shutdown. See ALS
automatic node setup. See ANS
automatic power control
interval 15-34
automatic power control. See APC
automatic power reduction. See APR
B
B8ZS 15-29, 15-30
backing up the CTC database 24-2
battery power monitor thresholds 14-15
BER, bit error rate test 15-36
BITS
BITS Out references 15-28
facilities 15-29
timing setup 15-27
blade. See card
C
cables
See also fiber
See also MPO cable
cabling
DWDM nodes 12-82
hub nodes 12-85
line amplifier nodes 12-87
OADM nodes 12-91
OSC link termination 12-82
OSC regeneration nodes 12-89
ROADM nodes 12-96
terminal nodes 12-87
Calient PXC 15-41
card protection
See splitter protection
See Y-cable protection
cards
changing service states 16-28, 20-120
Class 1 laser safety G-1
Class 1M laser safety 10-15, G-4
interface classes 6-3
provisioning using the NE Update file 14-49
Index
IN-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
resetting with CTC 24-13
C band
line amplifier node with OSC-CSM cards acceptance test 21-78
line amplifier node with OSCM and OSC-CSM cards acceptance test 21-86
line amplifier node with OSCM cards acceptance test 21-74
provisioning for 10G data muxponder cards 11-305
provisioning for 10G multirate transponder cards 11-202
provisioning for 4x2.5G muxponder cards 11-270
verifying east ROADM add/drop channels 21-34
verifying ROADM pass-through channels 21-29
CE-1000-4 card
provisioning Ethernet ports 16-101
CFM
creating a maintenance association profile 11-361
creating a maintenance domain profile 11-359
creating a MEP 11-364
creating a MIP 11-365
deleting a maintenance association profile 11-362
deleting a maintenance domain profile 11-360
deleting a MEP 11-365
deleting a MIP 11-366
description 11-75
enabling or disabling 11-357
limitations and restrictions 11-77
maintenance association 11-76
maintenance domain 11-76
maintenance end points 11-76
maintenance intermediate points 11-76
modifying a maintenance domain profile 11-362
pinging MEP 11-367
traceroute MEP 11-367
changing
10G data muxponder settings 11-147, 11-220, 11-226, 11-301, 11-303, 11-305, 11-306, 11-308, 11-309, 11-311, 11-319, 11-324, 11-326, 11-328, 11-329, 11-331, 11-333, 11-342
10G multirate transponder settings 11-193, 11-195, 11-196, 11-200, 11-201, 11-202, 11-205, 11-212, 11-219, 11-221, 11-225, 11-228, 11-232
2.5G data muxponder settings 11-146, 11-282, 11-283, 11-285, 11-287, 11-288, 11-289, 11-291, 11-292, 11-294
2.5G multirate transponder settings 11-172, 11-173, 11-176, 11-177, 11-178, 11-181, 11-188
32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE card settings 20-74
32WSS, 32WSS-L, and 40-WSS-C card settings 20-66, 20-67, 20-69, 20-73, 20-74
40G multirate muxponder settings 11-218, 11-323
40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C card settings 20-96, 20-97
40-SMR1-C card settings 20-97, 20-101, 20-103, 20-108
40-SMR2-C and 40-SMR2-C card settings 20-110
40-SMR2-C card settings 20-97, 20-101, 20-103, 20-108
40-WXC-C card settings 20-81, 20-82, 20-84, 20-87, 20-89, 20-91, 20-109
4x2.5G muxponder settings 11-262, 11-264, 11-268, 11-269, 11-271, 11-277
80-WXC-C card settings 20-81, 20-84, 20-87, 20-89, 20-91
ADM-10G card line thresholds for 1G Ethernet payloads 11-251
administrative state during ANS 14-128
ALS settings 20-12, 20-25
amplifier card settings 20-14, 20-15, 20-19, 20-21, 20-28
card service states 16-28, 20-120
default router 14-22
external alarms 20-118
external controls 20-119
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card RMON thresholds 11-417
IP address 14-22
MMU card settings 20-114, 20-115, 20-116
multiplexer and demultiplexer optical channel thresholds 20-62
multiplexer and demultiplexer optical line settings 20-55
multiplexer and demultiplexer settings 20-56, 20-57, 20-59, 20-60
network mask 14-22
node timing reference 24-18
Index
IN-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
OCHNC administrative states 16-48
OCH trail administrative states 16-39
OCH trail circuit names 16-38
OPT-AMP-17-C card settings 20-30, 20-34, 20-36, 20-44
OPT-AMP-C card settings 20-30, 20-34, 20-36, 20-42, 20-44
OPT-AMP-L card settings 20-29, 20-30, 20-34, 20-36, 20-41, 20-44, 20-102
optical amplifier card settings 20-19
OPT-RAMP-C card settings 20-30, 20-34, 20-41
OPT-RAMP-CE card settings 20-30, 20-34, 20-36, 20-41, 20-42, 20-44
orderwire settings 20-119
OSCM and OSC-CSM card administrative states 20-3
OSCM and OSC-CSM card settings 20-3, 20-7, 20-8
OSC settings 20-3
OSC thresholds 20-5
OSPF 14-27
OTU2_XP card settings 11-427
OTU2_XP line settings 11-428
OTU2_XP settings 11-429, 11-433, 11-440
port service state 16-85
PSM card optical line thresholds 20-49
PSM card settings 20-49
STS circuit names 16-58
TXP_MR_10G card data rate 11-192
VOA for 32WSS cards 20-68
VOA for 40-WXC-C cards 20-83
See also editing
changing trunk wavelength settings 11-201
channel allocation plan
50-GHz C band 10-13
50-GHz L band 10-14
C band 6-6, 9-7
L band 6-8
channel group
adding or removing ports 11-351
creating 11-346
deleting 11-352
modifying the parameters 11-347
viewing history PM parameters 11-355
viewing PM parameters 11-354
viewing utilization PM parameters 11-355
channels
even band management 13-57
managing add/drop with mesh nodes 12-81 to 12-82
circuits
See also VCAT circuits
changing names for OCH trails 16-38
changing names for STS circuits 16-58
effect of a node name change 24-5
protection on ADM-10G cards 11-90
provisioning path protection selectors 16-56
setting attributes for OCH 16-28
states. See service states
See also OCHCC
See also OCHNC
See also overhead circuits
Cisco MDS switch 11-47, 11-115, G-20
Cisco Transport Controller. See CTC
Cisco TransportPlanner
ANS configuration 14-4, 14-47
anti-ASE node configuration 12-35
importing the configuration file 14-47
installation parameters 13-54
internal connections report 14-80
provisioning a network 15-33
requirement 14-1
shelf layout report 14-67
traffic matrix report 15-31
verifying reports and files 14-3
Class 1 laser safety cards G-1
Class 1M laser safety cards 10-15, G-4
clearing
CTC database for disaster recovery 24-4
Force switch 24-19
Manual switch 24-19
clock
Index
IN-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
setting time 14-15
Committed Info Rate, provisioning 11-386
common control cards
See AIC-I card
See MS-ISC-100T card
See TCC2 card
See TCC2P card
common control cards, list 3-2
compatibility
for amplifiers 5-5
MXP and TXP cards 11-6
OADM cards 9-3
OSC cards 4-2
ROADM cards 10-4
configuration file (Cisco TransportPlanner) 14-47
configuring
ANS with Cisco TransportPlanner 14-4, 14-47
LMP 15-40
NMS IP address during SNMP setup 14-45
SOCKS settings for secure mode 14-25
connected rings 13-5
connecting
32DMX or 32DMX-O card to the patch panel 14-92
32WSS or 32MUX-O cards to the patch panel 14-86, 14-91
40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C card to the patch panel 14-103
40-MUX-C or 40-DMX-C cards to the 40-channel patch panel 14-103
40-WSS-C or 40-DMX-C cards to the patch panel 14-96
ONS nodes through third-party equipment 16-102
Y-cable modules to client devices 14-110
control cards
card compatibility 3-2
control channel management. See LMP
control channels. See LMP
converting OCHNC to OCHCC 16-59
CORBA 14-33
cost 22-9
when creating static routes 14-27
when setting up or changing OSPF 14-28
creating
GMPLS OCHCCs 16-24
GMPLS OCHNCs 16-43
GMPLS OCH trails 16-36
internal patchcord 14-113, 14-114
internal patchcord using Card to Card 14-120, 14-122
IP-over-CLNS tunnels 14-43
J0 section traces 16-89
LMP control channels 15-42
LMP data links 15-46
LMP TE links 15-45
logical network map 15-69
new user on a single node 14-11
new users on multiple nodes 14-12
OCHCCs 16-7, 16-15, 16-17
OCHNCs 16-41
OCH trails 16-24, 16-25, 16-33, 16-34
overhead circuits 16-81
protected OCHNCs 16-44
provisionable patchcords 16-72
server trails 16-102
static route 14-26
STS circuits 16-49, 16-50
SVLAN databases 16-79
user data channels 16-88
cross-connect (circuit)
apply an administrative state 16-51
creating TL1-like cross-connects 16-51
CRS-1 router
automatically configuring LMP 15-48
configuring 10 Gigabit Ethernet or POS interface 15-61, 15-64
configuring LMP router ID 15-63
configuring local and remote TE link 15-56
configuring router parameters 15-50
configuring static route 15-55
configuring wavelength 15-59
Index
IN-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
creating task group, user group, and user
account 15-52
displaying summary of link management information 15-65
enabling index persistency on SNMP interface 15-62
enabling LMP message exchange 15-58
establishing telnet session 15-51
manually configuring LMP 15-49
CTC
assigning security 14-10
database backup 24-2
firewall access 14-31
preventing IP address display 14-18
resetting cards 24-13
Secure Mode 14-31
setting up name, date, time, and contact information 14-13
setting up network access 14-16
verifying software release 3-37, 3-44
customizing the network view 15-69
D
database
backing up 24-2
loading, secure mode vs. repeater mode 24-3
parameters that are not backed up 24-2
parameters that are not restored 24-5
restoring 24-3
restoring node and card defaults 24-4
data communications channel. See DCC
datagrams 22-4
data link. See LMP
data rate, optical 13-55
date
provisioning 14-15
daylight savings time 14-15
DCC
AIC-I compatibility 3-25
deleting terminations 24-28
OCHCC 16-7
pin assignments 3-26
terminations in a multishelf node 12-51
DCN 14-35, 14-36
fiber cuts in nodes using 13-40
linear topology with DCN connections 22-28
linear topology with DCN connections using OSPF 22-30
OSPF activation 22-23
ring topology with two subnets 22-24
SOCKS proxy settings 22-23
two linear cascaded topologies 22-34
DCU
attaching fiber 14-78
hub node 12-32
installing 14-68
OPT-PRE card 5-7
default router
changing using LCD 14-23
entering IP address 14-18
initially provisioning 14-17
deleting
DWDM cards 14-51
internal patchcords 14-123, 14-124, 14-125
LMP control channels 15-44
LMP data links 15-47
LMP TE links 15-45
OCHCCs 16-7, 16-15, 16-26
OCHNCs 16-46
OCH trails 16-33, 16-37
orderwire 16-89
overhead circuits 16-89
PPM provisioning 11-161
SFP provisioning 11-161
STS circuits 16-49, 16-57
terminations 24-28
user data channels 16-89
demultiplexer cards
Index
IN-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
channel allocation plan 6-6
See 32DMX card
See 32DMX-O card
See 40-DMX-C card
dense wavelength division multiplexing. See DWDM
designated intermediate system priority. See DIS priority
destination
host 22-4
routing table 22-39
DHCP
enabling during network setup 14-19
provisioning server 14-17
DHCP scenario 22-4
diagnostics file, off-loading 24-17
disaster recovery 24-4
DIS priority 14-43
drops
protected drops 16-52
DWDM
network applications 13-2
node cabling 12-82
provisioning a network 15-33
topologies 13-1 to 13-55
TXP_MR_10E card trunk interface G-15
DWDM cards
attaching fiber 14-78
channel allocation plan 16-20 to 16-22
deleting 14-51
installing 14-64
LED behavior during installation 14-66
See also individual card names
See also individual DWDM card names
DWDM Network Functional View 12-108
DWDM network functional view 12-108
GMPLS view 12-108, 12-114
NFV view 12-108, 12-110
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. See DHCP
E
east-to-west 12-52
editing
LMP control channels 15-44
LMP data links 15-47
LMP TE links 15-45
NE defaults 24-23
OCH trail circuit names 16-38, 16-58
E-FEC 11-114
40G-MXP-C card 11-54
MXP_2.5G_10E_C card 11-33
MXP_2.5G_10E_L card 11-33
MXP_2.5G_10E card 11-29
MXP_2.5G_10E card modes G-19
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card 11-109
MXP_MR_10DME_C card 11-47
MXP_MR_10DME_L card 11-47
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card 11-114
TXP_MR_10E card G-16
EFM
configuring link monitoring parameters 11-371
configuring parameters 11-370
enabling or disabling 11-369
enabling remote loopback 11-373
egress QoS, provisioning 11-384
Enable or Disable the Wavelength Drifted Channel Automatic Shutdown Feature 11-452
Enable REP and FAPS on the same port 11-453
enabling
DHCP during network setup 14-19
LMP 15-41
OSI subnet on the LAN 14-42
secure mode 14-24
SSM for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards 20-4
Enabling Error Decorrelator 11-452
End System. See ES
End System Hello. See ESH
End System to Intermediate System. See ES-IS
Index
IN-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
ENEs, provisioning in secure mode 14-20
ENEs, secure and repeater mode 22-20
enhanced forward error correction. See E-FEC
entering IP address for default router 14-18
ES 14-36, 14-43
ESH 14-43
ES-IS RIB 24-11
Ethernet OAM
benefits 11-78
components 11-78
description 11-77
features 11-78
limitations and restrictions 11-79
ETR_CLO service, verifying topologies 11-153
even band management 13-57
exporting
NE defaults 24-25
express channel connections 21-96, 21-108
external alarms
changing 20-118
description 3-23
external controls
changing 20-119
description 3-23
external firewall 22-41
external network element 14-20, 14-25
external timing 15-27
F
facilities, viewing 24-26
factory configuration, restoring 24-4
far-end laser control. See FELC
FEC
MXP_2.5G_10E card G-19
TXP_MR_10E card G-16
FEC, provisioning for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards 11-421
FELC G-32
fiber
fiber clips 14-79
fiber-storage tray illustration 14-80, 14-107
installing on DWDM cards and DCUs 14-78
installing on Y-cable modules 14-110
installing on Y-cable protection modules 14-108
installing the fiber patch-panel tray 14-93
Fiber cut
restoring a Raman link 15-26
fiber-optic cables
routing fiber in terminal, hub, or ROADM node 14-82
fiber patch-panel tray
deep patch-panel tray illustration 14-91
installing 14-93
routing fiber to 15216-MD-40-ODD patch-panel tray 14-99
routing fiber to 40-channel patch-panel tray 14-95
routing fiber to deep patch-panel tray 14-90, 14-97
routing fiber to standard patch-panel tray 14-85, 14-89
standard patch-panel tray illustration 14-88, 14-89
fiber stage
cards 12-53
node layouts 12-54
supported configurations 12-54
fiber-storage tray
illustration 14-80, 14-107
routing fiber from DWDM cards and DCUs 14-79, 14-106
routing fiber from the Y-cable modules 14-110
filler cards, installing 14-75
filtering
OCHNCs and OCHCCs 16-69
finding
OCHNCs and OCHCCs 16-65
firewall
external firewall description 22-41
provisioning access 14-17
provisioning IIOP listener port 14-33, 14-34
setting up 14-31
Index
IN-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
SNMP 14-46
firewall tunnels
adding 16-85
FMECs
required for DWDM, TXP, and MXP cards 3-3
foreign node settings
provisioning a proxy tunnel 16-84
provisioning GCC terminations 16-81
foreign node settings, open GNE 22-42
forward error correction. See FEC
four-degree or eight-degree mesh patch panel 14-101
framing 15-29, 15-30
G
gateway
default 22-7
on routing table 22-39
returning MAC address 22-5
gateway network element 14-20, 14-25
gateway network element. See GNE
gateway settings. See proxy server
GCC
deleting GCC terminations 24-28
foreign termination 16-84, 16-85
OCHCC 16-7
provisioning GCC terminations 16-81
terminations in a multishelf node 12-51
GE_XP, 10 GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10 GE_XPE card
adding and removing SVLANs 11-396
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card
changing RMON thresholds 11-417
provisioning CVLAN rate limiting 11-408
provisioning storm control 11-405
provisioning SVLAN rate limiting 11-409
GE_XP and GE_EXP card
modifying Layer 2 protection settings 11-393
GE_XP and GE_XPE card
10GE MXP mode 11-150
20GE MXP mode 11-150
block diagram 11-63
CFM 11-75
changing card mode 11-149
committed info rate 11-383
compatibility 11-6
Ethernet OAM 11-77
faceplates 11-63
features 11-60
LACP 11-73
Layer 2 over DWDM protection G-31
protocol compatibility 11-62
provisioning ITU-T G.709 OTN 11-421
REP 11-79
safety labels 11-10
summary 11-4
Y-cable protection G-28
GE_XP card
installing 14-69
L2 over DWDM mode 11-149
managing SVLAN databases 16-78
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-416
routing fiber to the standard patch-panel tray 14-89
viewing utilization PMs 11-355
GE_XPE card
modifying Electrical Lines settings 11-391
modifying PDH Ethernet settings 11-389
GE card
changing optical transport network settings 11-420
creating SVLAN circuits 16-90
modifying MAC filter settings 11-402
modifying QinQ settings 11-399
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-416
provisioning QoS settings 11-397
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-414
retrieving and clearing MAC addresses 11-403
viewing card MAC addresses 11-404
Index
IN-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
generic communications channel. See GCC
GMPLS 22-50
GMPLS circuits
destination port configuration 12-115
optical validation 16-31
path constraints 12-114
protect port parameters 12-117
source port configuration 12-115
wavelength re-routing 12-117, 16-48
working port parameters 12-117
GMPLS control plane 12-108
acceptance thresholds 12-110
validation modes 12-110
GMPLS OCHCC circuits
creating 16-15
deleting 16-15
managing 16-15
GMPLS OCHCCs
creating 16-24
GMPLS OCHNC circuits
creating 16-40
deleting 16-40
managing 16-40
GMPLS OCHNCs
creating 16-43
provisioning 16-43
GMPLS OCH trail circuits
creating 16-33
deleting 16-33
managing 16-33
GMPLS OCH trails
creating 16-36
GNE
dual GNEs on a subnet 22-17
load balancing 22-17
open GNE 22-42
secure and repeater modes 22-20
GNEs, provisioning in secure mode 14-20
GRE tunnel 14-44
H
hello interval 14-28, 14-29
hop 22-9
hops
when creating static routes 14-27
hubbed rings 13-2
hub node
anti-ASE hub node acceptance test 21-71
cabling 12-85
description 12-31
even band management 13-58
OSC terminations 12-84
routing fiber 14-83
I
idle time 14-12
IIH 14-43, 14-127
IIOP listener port
provisioning on the node 14-33
provisioning on the PC 14-34
importing
Cisco TransportPlanner configuration file 14-47
NE defaults 24-24
inner Ethertype, provisioning 11-387
installing
AIC-I card 3-38
DCUs 14-68
DWDM cards 14-64
fiber on DWDM cards and DCUs 14-78
fiber on Y-cable modules 14-110
fiber on Y-cable protection modules 14-108
fiber-optic cables between mesh nodes 14-101
fiber to the patch-panel 14-85
filler cards 14-75
MS-ISC-100T card 3-39
OTU2_XP card 14-69
SFPs 14-72
Index
IN-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
TCC2/TCC2P card 3-35, 3-42
transponder and muxponder cards 14-69
Integration with Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Routers 22-57
Integration with Cisco CRS-1 Routers 22-57
Interconnected rings 13-9
Interconnected ring scenarios 13-11
Scenario A 13-11
Scenario B 13-13
Scenario C 13-14
Intermediate System Hello. See ISH
Intermediate System Level 1. See IS Level 1
Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2. See IS Level 1/Level 2
Intermediate System to Intermediate System. See IS-IS
internal patchcord
creating 14-113, 14-114
deleting 14-123, 14-124, 14-125
provisioning OCH/OCH to OTS/OCH option 14-114
provisioning OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter option 14-114
provisioning using the NE Update file 14-49
verifying 14-113, 16-61
internal patchcords
description 16-8
ports 16-8
internal patchcord using Card to Card
creating 14-120, 14-122
internal timing 15-30
Internet protocol. See IP
IP
addressing scenarios 22-2 to 22-22
dual IP addresses using secure mode 22-20
environments 22-2
provisioning IP settings 14-17
provisioning settings in secure vs. repeater mode 14-18
requirements 22-2
subnetting 22-2
IP address
configuring for NMS during SNMP setup 14-45
dual-IP address capability. See secure mode
IP address using LCD 14-23
preventing display in CTC 14-18
provisioning dual 14-17
provisioning network information 14-18
restricting visibility 14-19
viewing on LCD with secure mode enabled 14-22
IP-over-CLNS tunnel
creating 14-43
IPv6, network compatibility 22-54
ISC service, verifying topologies 11-153
ISH 14-43
IS-IS
cost 14-43
viewing RIB 24-10
IS Level 1 14-36
IS Level 1/Level 2 14-36, 14-37
ITU-T G.709
optical data rates 13-56
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards 11-19
ITU-T G.709 OTN, provisioning for GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards 11-421
J
J0 section trace 16-89
jitter G-19, G-32
L
L2 over DWDM mode 11-149
labels
Class 1 laser product G-2
FDA statement G-3, G-5
Hazard Level 1 G-2
Hazard Level 1M G-4
laser source connector G-2, G-5
shock hazard G-3, G-5
Index
IN-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
LACP
advantages 11-74
description 11-74
functions 11-74
limitations and restrictions 11-75
modes 11-74
parameters 11-74
unicast hashing schemes 11-75
lambda tuning 22-62
LAN
OSPF activity 14-28
provisioning default router during network setup 14-18
LAP-D 14-36
lasers, shutting down. See ALS
latitude 14-13
L band
line amplifier node with OSC-CSM cards acceptance test 21-82
line amplifier node with OSCM and OSC-CSM cards acceptance test 21-90
provisioning for 10G data muxponder cards 11-305
provisioning for 10G multirate transponder cards 11-202
provisioning for 4x2.5G muxponder cards 11-270
verifying east ROADM add/drop channels 21-52
verifying ROADM node pass-through channels 21-44
verifying Side A ROADM add/drop channels 21-57
LCD
changing IP address, network mask, and default router 14-22
provisioning network settings 14-16
reading the software version on 14-5
suppressing IP address display 14-18
verifying software version 3-37, 3-44
line amplifier node
cabling 12-87
description 12-36
even band management 13-58
verifying node-to-node connections 15-3
linear configurations, description 13-6
line node. See line amplifier node
line termination
mesh node description 12-61, 12-69, 12-75
shelf 12-62, 12-76
line timing 15-27
link management protocol. See LMP
Link State Protocol. See LSP
listener port. See IIOP listener port
LMP
automatically configuring on CRS-1 router 15-48
configuring 15-40
configuring LMP 22-51
control channel management 22-50, 22-51
creating control channels 15-42
creating data links 15-46
creating TE links 15-45
deleting control channels 15-44
deleting data links 15-47
deleting TE links 15-45
editing control channels 15-44
editing data links 15-47
editing TE links 15-45
enabling 15-41
example network implementation 22-53
fault management 22-52
GMPLS 22-50
link connectivity verification 22-52
LMP WDM extensions 22-53
manually configuring on CRS-1 router 15-49
MPLS 22-50
network implementation 22-53
overview 22-49
TE link management 22-52
WDM 22-53
loading SVLAN databases 16-80
logging in
when slow on large networks 14-21
longitude 14-13
Index
IN-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
LSP buffers 14-36, 14-37
M
MAC address
proxy ARP 22-5
TXP_MR_10E incoming MAC address 11-199
viewing 14-18
MAC addresses
clear 11-71
retrieve 11-71
MAC learning, provisioning 11-385
Maintenance user. See security
managing
APC 13-24
card SVLAN databases 16-78
even band channels 13-57
local add/drop using mesh nodes 12-81 to 12-82
network-level gain 13-50
OCHCCs 16-15
OCH trails 16-33
OSI information 24-10
PPMs 11-144
STS circuits 16-49
TDC 24-12
MDS switch. See Cisco MDS switch
merging SVLAN databases 16-80
meshed rings 13-5
meshed traffic topology 13-5
mesh networks
configuring 12-61
description 12-61, 13-7
multiring 13-8
mesh node
eight-degree layout example 12-60
four-degree layout example 12-58
four-degree protected layout example 12-58
four-degree upgrade layout example 12-59, 12-60
four-degree user-defined layout example 12-61
line termination 12-61, 12-69, 12-75
line termination shelf 12-62, 12-76
multishelf four-degree protected layout example 12-59
multishelf protected ROADM layout example 12-57
multishelf ROADM layout example 12-57
using for local add/drop channel management 12-81 to 12-82
XC termination 12-77
mesh node acceptance test 21-134
mesh patch-panel
description 12-78
MetroPlanner. See Cisco TransportPlanner
MIBs, SNMP SET requests 14-46
MIC-A/P FMEC
block diagram 3-30
description 3-29
faceplate 3-29
pinouts 3-30 to 3-32
MIC-C/T/P FMEC
block diagram 3-33
description 3-32
faceplate 3-32
MLSE
Error Decorrelator 11-142
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card
description 11-108
features 11-108
TXP_MR_10EX_C 11-105, 11-142
MLSE UT 11-142
error decorrelator 11-142
MMU card
block diagram 10-93
changing administrative state 20-115
changing optical line parameters 20-114
changing optical line thresholds 20-116
deleting 14-51
description 10-90
faceplate 10-92
Index
IN-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
port calibration 10-93
power monitoring 10-93
software compatibility 10-5
verifying cabling 21-31, 21-32, 21-37, 21-46, 21-48, 21-49, 21-50, 21-54, 21-60
verifying insertion loss 21-10, 21-15, 21-20, 21-27, 21-39, 21-62
modifying
32WSS and 32WSS-L line settings and PM thresholds 20-65
40-SMR1-C line settings and PM thresholds 20-94
40-SMR2-C line settings and PM thresholds 20-94
40-WSS-C and 40WSS-CE line settings and PM thresholds 20-65
40-WXC-C line settings and PM thresholds 20-79
80-WXC-C line settings and PM thresholds 20-79
AIC-I card settings 20-117
amplifier card line settings 20-13
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE card Ethernet settings 11-381
GE_XP card Electrical Lines settings 11-391
GE_XP card PDH Ethernet settings 11-389
multiplexer and demultiplexer line settings and PM thresholds 20-54
See also editing
module. See card
monitoring
power 3-25
MPLS 22-50
MPO cable
connecting a 32DMX or 32DMX-O card to the patch panel 14-88, 14-92
connecting a 32WSS or 32MUX-O card to the patch panel 14-86, 14-91
connecting a 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards to the 40-channel patch panel 14-103
connecting a 40-MUX-C or 40-DMX-C card to the 40-channel patch panel 14-103
connecting a 40-WSS-C or 40-DMX-C card to the patch panel 14-96
illustration 14-87
routing through patch-panel tray 14-87
MS-ISC-100T card
deleting 14-51
description 3-26
faceplate 3-28
installing 3-39
LEDs 3-28
LED sequence 3-40
port assignments 3-27
verifying installation 14-5
MTU 14-36
multi-hubbed rings 13-3
multiplexer cards
channel allocation plan 6-6
See 32MUX-O card
See 40-MUX-C card
See 4MD-xx.x card
multiplexing
40-WXC-C card channels 20-93
See also mulitplexer cards
multiring site acceptance test 21-126
multishelf
DCC/GCC/OSC terminations 12-51
node configuration 12-50
node description 12-50
node layout 12-51
multishelf mode
provisioning a multishelf node 14-8
upgrading from single shelf 14-131
muxponder cards
timing references 15-29
installing 14-69
provisioning GCC terminations 16-81
routing fiber to the standard patch-panel tray 14-89
See also individual muxponder card names
muxponder cards. See MXP cards
MXP 14-69
MXP_2.5G_10E_C card
block diagram 11-35
changing administrative state 11-264, 11-268
Index
IN-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
changing card settings 11-262
changing line OTN settings 11-277
changing line settings 11-264
changing line thresholds 11-271
changing trunk settings 11-268
changing trunk wavelength settings 11-269
deleting 14-51
description 11-32
E-FEC 11-33, 11-109
faceplate 11-35
features 11-33
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-275
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-273
resetting 24-14
trunk wavelengths 11-36
wavelength identification 11-36
Y-cable protection G-27
See also MXP cards
MXP_2.5G_10E_L card
block diagram 11-35
changing administrative state 11-264, 11-268
changing card settings 11-262
changing line OTN settings 11-277
changing line settings 11-264
changing line thresholds 11-271
changing trunk settings 11-268
changing trunk wavelength settings 11-269
deleting 14-51
description 11-32
E-FEC 11-33, 11-109
faceplate 11-35
features 11-33
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-275
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-273
resetting 24-14
trunk wavelengths 11-37
wavelength identification 11-36
Y-cable protection G-27
See also MXP cards
MXP_2.5G_10E card
block diagram 11-31
changing administrative state 11-264, 11-268
changing card settings 11-262
changing line OTN settings 11-277
changing line settings 11-264
changing line thresholds 11-271
changing trunk settings 11-268
changing trunk wavelength settings 11-269
client interface monitoring G-19
deleting 14-51
description 11-28
DWDM interface G-15
E-FEC 11-29
faceplate 11-30
features 11-29
jitter G-19
lamp test G-19
multiplexing function G-18
onboard traffic generation G-19
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-275
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-273
resetting 24-14
SONET/SDH overhead byte processing G-19
trunk wavelengths 11-32
wavelength identification 11-32
Y-cable protection G-27
See also MXP cards
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C 11-142
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card
faceplate 11-110
trunk wavelengths 11-111
wavelength identification 11-111
MXP_2.5G_10G card
Index
IN-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
block diagram 11-28
changing administrative state 11-264, 11-268
changing card settings 11-262
changing line OTN settings 11-277
changing line settings 11-264
changing line thresholds 11-271
changing trunk settings 11-268
changing trunk wavelength settings 11-269
deleting 14-51
description 11-25
faceplate 11-27
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-275
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-273
resetting 24-14
termination modes G-33
timing synchronization G-17
Y-cable protection G-27
See also MXP cards
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MEXP_MR10DME_L Cards
fpga update 11-450
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards
fpga update when the card is part of a protection group 11-451
MXP_MR_10DME_C card
ALS 11-47
block diagram 11-48
changing administrative state 11-220, 11-301, 11-306, 11-324
changing client line settings 11-301, 11-324
changing distance extension settings 11-303
changing line thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 11-311, 11-333
changing OC-48/STM-16 settings 11-306, 11-326
changing OTN settings 11-319, 11-342
changing section trace settings 11-226, 11-308, 11-328, 11-329
changing SONET or SDH line thresholds 11-309, 11-331
changing the port mode 11-147
changing trunk wavelength settings 11-305
client interface data rates 11-45
deleting 14-51
description 11-44
E-FEC 11-47, 11-54, 11-114
faceplates 11-48
features 11-46
port-level LEDs 11-97, 11-104, G-11
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-315, 11-338
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-314, 11-337
resetting 24-14
trunk wavelengths 11-49
wavelength identification 11-49
Y-cable protection G-27
See also MXP cards
MXP_MR_10DME_L card
ALS 11-47
block diagram 11-48
changing administrative state 11-220, 11-301, 11-306, 11-324
changing client line settings 11-301, 11-324
changing distance extension settings 11-303
changing line thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 11-311, 11-333
changing OC-48/STM-16 settings 11-306, 11-326
changing OTN settings 11-319, 11-342
changing section trace settings 11-226, 11-308, 11-328, 11-329
changing SONET or SDH line thresholds 11-309, 11-331
changing the port mode 11-147
changing trunk wavelength settings 11-305
client interface data rates 11-45
deleting 14-51
description 11-44
E-FEC 11-47, 11-54, 11-114
faceplates 11-48
features 11-46
Index
IN-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
port-level LEDs 11-97, 11-104, G-11
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-315, 11-338
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-314, 11-337
resetting 24-14
trunk wavelengths 11-50
wavelength identification 11-49
Y-cable protection G-27
See also MXP cards
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C 11-142
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card
client interface data rates 11-113
description 11-112
faceplates 11-116
features 11-114
trunk wavelengths 11-117
wavelength identification 11-117
MXP_MR_2.5G card
block diagram 11-43
changing administrative state 11-283, 11-288
changing card mode 11-146
changing client line settings 11-283
changing distance extension settings 11-285
changing line settings and PM thresholds 11-282
changing line thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON payloads 11-294
changing OC-48/STM-16 settings 11-287
changing section trace settings 11-289
changing SONET or SDH line thresholds 11-292
changing trunk wavelength settings 11-291
Cisco MDS switch compatibility G-20
client interface data rates 11-40
deleting 14-51
description 11-39
faceplate 11-42
provisioning a UDC circuit 16-88
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-297
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-296
resetting 24-14
versions 11-39
Y-cable protection G-27
See also MXP cards
MXP cards
ALS 13-30
compatibility 11-6
protection G-27 to G-30
required FMECs 3-3
safety labels 11-10, G-4
summary 11-3
termination modes G-33
See also individual MXP card names
MXPP_MR_2.5G card
block diagram 11-43
changing administrative state 11-283, 11-288
changing card mode 11-146
changing client line settings 11-283
changing distance extension settings 11-285
changing line settings and PM thresholds 11-282
changing line thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON payloads 11-294
changing OC-48/STM-16 settings 11-287
changing section trace settings 11-289
changing SONET or SDH line thresholds 11-292
changing trunk wavelength settings 11-291
Cisco MDS switch compatibility G-20
client interface data rates 11-40
deleting 14-51
description 11-39
faceplate 11-42
provisioning a UDC circuit 16-88
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-297
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-296
resetting 24-14
splitter protection G-30
Index
IN-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
versions 11-39
See also MXP cards
N
NE defaults
editing 24-23
exporting 24-25
importing 24-24
restoring 24-4
Network Functional View
export reports 12-120
view optical power values and alarms 12-119
networks
compatibility with IPv6 22-54
connecting ONS nodes through third-party equipment 16-102
DWDM topologies 13-1 to 13-55
gain tilt compensation (without ROADM nodes) 13-53
gain tilt compensation (with ROADM nodes) 13-54
managing gain 13-50
optical performance 13-19
optical safety 13-30
setting up CTC network access 14-16
Network Time Protocol 22-13
network time protocol 14-14
network view
creating a customized network view 15-69
NIM, provisioning the network interface mode 11-384
node
accessing behind a firewall 14-31
cabling for DWDM 12-82
changing timing reference 24-18
locked in secure mode 22-22
provisioning layout using the NE Update file 14-49
removing power 24-27
running ANS 14-127
secure (dual IP address) mode 14-24
setting up name, date, time, and contact information 14-13
upgrade acceptance test 21-139
verifying connections 15-3
verifying turn-up 15-2
node services protocol. See NSP
Non-GMPLS circuits
upgrade to GMPLS circuits 16-32
NSAP
adding a static TID-to-NSAP entry to the TDC 14-39
adding NSAP address to TARP MAT 14-40
provisioning NSAP address in IP-over-CLNS tunnel 14-44
NSP 13-2
NTP 22-13
NTP server 14-14
O
OADM cards
channel allocation plan 9-7
compatibility 9-3
interface classes 9-4
optical interface with 10-Gbps cards 9-5
optical interface with 2.5-Gbps cards 9-6
optical interface with 40-Gbps cards 9-4
summary 9-2
See also ROADM cards
OADM node
acceptance test 21-94, 21-106, 21-112, 21-114
amplified 13-5
cabling 12-91
description 12-9
linear configuration 13-6
passive 13-5
verifying add and drop connections 21-104, 21-110
verifying express channel connections 21-96, 21-108
verifying node-to-node connections 15-3
verifying OSC-CSM power 21-109
Index
IN-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
verifying pass-through channel connections 21-99
OC-48/STM-16 settings
changing for 10G data muxponder cards 11-306, 11-326
changing for 2.5G data muxponder card 11-287
OCHCC
administrative and service states 16-5
channel management 16-5
circuit description 16-1
circuit status 16-68
client rates 16-19
converting from OCHNC 16-59
creating 16-17
creating and deleting 16-7
deleting 16-26
description 16-1
filtering 16-69
finding 16-65
ports 16-4
service and communication channels 16-7
verifying client ports 16-17
viewing 16-66
OCHCCs
creating 16-15
deleting 16-15
editing circuit name 16-27
managing 16-15
setting circuit attributes 16-28
setting routing preferences 16-30
OCHNC
administrative and service states 16-5
channel management 16-5
circuit description 16-1
circuit status 16-68
converting to OCHCC 16-59
creating 16-41
deleting 16-46
description 16-1
edit circuit name 16-47
filtering 16-69
finding 16-65
ports 16-2
provisionable patchcord requirements 16-72
viewing 16-66
viewing on a span 16-71
OCHNCs
changing administrative states 16-48
provisioning 16-41
troubleshooting 16-63
OCH trail
administrative and service states 16-5
creating. See OCHCC
deleting 16-37
description 16-1
edit circuit name 16-38
ports 16-4
proactive protection regen 22-65
viewing 16-66, 16-67
OCH trails
changing administrative states 16-39
changing circuit names 16-38
creating 16-33, 16-34
deleting 16-33
managing 16-33
troubleshooting 16-63
off-loading
audit trail records 24-16
diagnostics file 24-17
OLA nodes with OPT-RAMP-CE card
fiber cut scenario 13-44
open GNE 22-42
Open Shortest Path First. See OSPF
OPT-AMP-17-C
optical power alarms and thresholds 5-7
OPT-AMP-17-C card
ALS 5-25, 13-30, 13-38
changing ALS settings 20-44
changing optical amplifier line settings 20-34
changing optical channel threshold settings 20-36
Index
IN-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
changing optical line settings 20-28
changing optical line thresholds 20-30
description 5-25
faceplate 5-27
fiber cut scenario 13-38
port calibration 5-29
ports 5-26
resetting 24-14
setting the card mode 20-27
OPT-AMP-C
optical power alarms and thresholds 5-7
OPT-AMP-C card
ALS 5-30, 5-46, 13-38
changing ALS settings 20-44
changing optical amplifier line settings 20-34
changing optical channel threshold settings 20-36, 20-42
changing optical line settings 20-28
changing optical line thresholds 20-30
description 5-30
faceplate 5-32
fiber cut scenario 13-38
ports 5-31
power monitoring 5-34, 5-38, 5-49
OPT-AMP-L
optical power alarms and thresholds 5-7
OPT-AMP-L card
ALS 13-30, 13-38
APC 13-20
changing administrative state 20-29, 20-34, 20-41, 20-102
changing ALS settings 20-44
changing optical amplifier line settings 20-34
changing optical channel threshold settings 20-36
changing optical line settings 20-28
changing optical line thresholds 20-30
description 5-20
faceplate 5-22
fiber clip 14-79
fiber cut scenario 13-38
port calibration 5-24, 5-49
ports 5-21
setting the card mode 20-27
verifying laser and power 21-25
See also amplifier cards
OPT-BST
optical power alarms and thresholds 5-7
OPT-BST card
ALS 5-12, 13-30, 13-33
APC 13-20
block diagram 5-14
changing administrative state 20-15, 20-19
changing ALS settings 20-25
changing optical amplifier line settings 20-19
changing optical channel threshold settings 20-21
changing optical line settings 20-14
changing optical line thresholds 20-15
deleting 14-51
description 5-11
faceplate 5-13
fiber clip 14-79
fiber cut scenario 13-33, 13-40
gain tilt control 13-51
installing 14-64
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-13
port calibration 5-15
ports 5-12
resetting 24-14
verifying laser and power 21-5
See also amplifier cards
OPT-BST-E
optical power alarms and thresholds 5-7
OPT-BST-E card
ALS 13-30, 13-33
APC 13-20
changing administrative state 20-15, 20-19
changing ALS settings 20-25
changing optical amplifier line settings 20-19
changing optical channel threshold settings 20-21
Index
IN-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
changing optical line settings 20-14
changing optical line thresholds 20-15
deleting 14-51
fiber clip 14-79
fiber cut scenario 13-33
gain tilt control 13-51
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-13
resetting 24-14
verifying laser and power 21-5
OPT-BST-L
optical power alarms and thresholds 5-7
OPT-BST-L card
ALS 5-16, 13-30, 13-37
APC 13-20
changing administrative state 20-15, 20-19
changing ALS settings 20-25
changing optical amplifier line settings 20-19
changing optical channel threshold settings 20-21
changing optical line settings 20-14
changing optical line thresholds 20-15
deleting 14-51
description 5-15
faceplate 5-17
fiber clip 14-79
fiber cut scenario 13-37
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-13
port calibration 5-19
ports 5-16
resetting 24-14
verifying laser and power 21-5, 21-25
See also amplifier cards
OPT-EDFA-17 5-45
card features 5-47
OPT-EDFA-17 card
description 5-45
faceplate 5-46
optical modules 5-48
OPT-EDFA-24 5-45
card features 5-47
OPT-EDFA-24 card
description 5-45
faceplate 5-46
optical modules 5-48
optical add/drop multiplexer
See AD-1B-xx.x card
See AD-1C-xx.x card
See AD-2C-xx.x card
See AD-4B-xx.x card
See AD-4C-xx.x card
See OADM node
optical channel client connection. See OCHCC
optical channel client connections. See OCHCC
optical channel network connection. See OCHNC
optical channel network connections. See OCHNC
optical data rate derivation 13-55
optical line amplifier node. See line amplifier node
optical performance 13-19
optical service channel. See OSC
optical sides
description 12-52
stages 12-53
optical sides, provisioning using the NE update file 14-49
optical signal-to-noise ratio. See OSNR
OPT-PRE card
APC 13-20
block diagrams 5-10
changing administrative state 20-15, 20-19
changing optical amplifier line settings 20-19
changing optical channel threshold settings 20-21
changing optical line settings 20-14
changing optical line thresholds 20-15
deleting 14-51
description 5-7
faceplate 5-9
fiber clip 14-79
gain tilt control 13-51
installing 14-64
modifying line settings and PM thresholds 20-13
Index
IN-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
port calibration 5-11
resetting 24-14
verifying laser and power 21-6
See also amplifier cards
OPT-RAMP-C
fiber cut restoration 13-49
fiber cut scenario 13-42
OPT-RAMP-C card
changing optical amplifier line settings 20-34, 20-41
changing optical line thresholds 20-30
port calibration 5-38, 5-43, 5-44
supported node configurations 12-41
OPT-RAMP-CE
fiber cut restoration 13-49
OPT-RAMP-CE card
block diagrams 5-36
changing ALS settings 20-44
changing optical amplifier line settings 20-34
changing optical channel threshold settings 20-36
changing optical line settings 20-28
changing optical line thresholds 20-30
changing optical Raman line settings 20-41
changing optical Raman line threshold settings 20-42
description 5-34, 5-45
faceplate 5-35
fiber cut scenario 13-42
network optical safety 13-30
Raman setup and tuning 12-103
supported node configurations 12-41
orderwire
changing settings 20-119
deleting 16-89
description 3-23
OSCM and OSC-CSM cards 4-2
pin assignments 3-24
provisioning 16-86
OSC
deleting OSC terminations 24-28
description 4-1
link termination cabling 12-82
OCHCC 16-7
provisioning OSC terminations 14-126
terminations in a multishelf node 12-51
OSC-CSM card
ALS 4-6, 13-30, 13-35
block diagram 4-9
C-band line amplifier node acceptance test 21-78, 21-86
changing administrative state 20-3, 20-7
changing ALS settings 20-12
changing optical line parameters 20-7
changing optical line thresholds 20-8
changing OSC settings 20-3
changing OSC thresholds 20-5
compatibility 4-2
deleting 14-51
description 4-6
faceplate 4-8
fiber clip 14-79
fiber cut scenario 13-35
L-band line amplifier node acceptance test 21-82, 21-90
provisioning a user data channel 16-88
resetting 24-14
safety labels 4-3
summary 4-2
symmetric OADM node acceptance test 21-106
symmetric passive OADM node acceptance test 21-112, 21-114
verifying add and drop connections 21-110
verifying express channel connections 21-108
verifying incoming power 21-103
verifying power on OADM nodes 21-109
verifying transmit power 14-129
OSCM card
ALS 13-30
C-band line amplifier node acceptance test 21-86
changing administrative state 20-3, 20-7
changing ALS settings 20-12
Index
IN-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
changing optical line parameters 20-7
changing optical line thresholds 20-8
changing OSC settings 20-3
changing OSC thresholds 20-5
compatibility 4-2
deleting 14-51
description 4-3
faceplate 4-4
fiber clip 14-79
L-band line amplifier node acceptance test 21-90
provisioning a user data channel 16-88
resetting 24-14
safety labels 4-3
summary 4-2
symmetric line node acceptance test 21-74
symmetric OADM node acceptance test 21-94
verifying add and drop connections 21-104
verifying transmit card 14-130
verifying transmit power 14-129
OSC regeneration node
cabling 12-89
description 12-40
even band management 13-58
OSI
and MSTP 22-46 to 22-49
and secure mode 14-43
enabling the OSI subnet on the LAN 14-42
networking and TCP/IP 22-45
overview 22-45
primary area address 14-41, 14-42
provisioning additional manual area addresses 14-42
provisioning routers 14-41
provisioning routing mode 14-35, 14-36
tunneling. See IP-over-CLNS tunnel
viewing and managing information 24-10
See also TARP
OSNR, network applications 13-2
OSNR, verifying 15-37
OSPF
alternative to static routes 22-8
in DCNs 22-23
IP addressing scenario 22-10
IP networking overview 22-2
setting up or changing 14-27
OTDR 13-28
OTN
changing 10G data muxponder settings 11-319, 11-342
changing 10G multirate transponder settings 11-212, 11-232
changing 2.5G multirate transponder settings 11-188
changing 4x2.5G muxponder settings 11-277
changing ADM-10G card settings 11-256
changing OTU2_XP settings 11-440
MXP_2.5G_10E_C card in termination mode 11-263
MXP_2.5G_10E_L card in termination mode 11-263
MXP_2.5G_10E card in termination mode 11-263
OTU2_XP Card
change path trace settings 11-446
provision path settings for 10G ethernet lan to wan 11-447
OTU2_XP card
10 GE LAN Phy to WAN Phy 11-97
Barile FPGA 11-100
changing administrative state 11-429
changing card mode 11-151
changing card settings 11-427
changing line settings 11-428
changing line thresholds for 10G Ethernet and 10G FC payloads 11-437
changing line thresholds for SONET or SDH payloads 11-433
changing OTN settings 11-440
client interface 11-101
compatibility 11-6
configuration management 11-102
description 11-97
features 11-97
installing 14-69
lan to wan 11-98
Index
IN-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
port configuration 11-97
port security 11-104
Proactive protection regen 22-65
provisioning ALS 11-430
provisioning port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-435
summary 11-4
Swan FPGA 11-100
termination modes G-33
trunk interface 11-101
Y-cable protection G-28
See also DWDM cards
OTU2-XP card
changing section trace settings 11-432, 11-446
outer Ethertype, provisioning 11-387
overhead circuits
creating 16-81
deleting 16-89
See also orderwire
See also user data channel
OXC node. See LMP
P
passive units
adding 14-76
deleting 14-77
pass-through connections
verifying for OADM channels 21-99
passwords
creating new user 14-11, 14-12
patchcords
internal and provisionable 16-1
patch panel
eight-degree 12-78
four-degree 12-78
path protection, ADM-10G card circuit protection 11-90
path protection configurations
provisioning path selectors 16-56
PCM 3-23, 16-87
PC setup
accessing behind a firewall 14-31
Perform 21-67
performance, optical 13-19
Photonic Path Trace
histogram 15-69
viewing power levels 15-69
photonic path trace
histogram 22-64
power levels 22-64
ping 22-2
pluggable port modules. See PPMs
plug-in unit. See card
ports
assigning names 16-16
default UDP for SNMP 14-45
listener port. See IIOP listener port
OCHCC 16-4
OCHNC 16-2
OCH trail 16-4
placing ports in or out of service 16-85
protection on ADM-10G cards 11-90
provisioning CE-1000-4 Ethernet ports 16-101
See also PPMs
power
monitoring 3-25
setting power monitor thresholds 14-15
verifying 32DMX card power 21-14
verifying 32DMX-L card power 21-26
verifying 32DMX-O card power 21-7
verifying 32MUX-O card power 21-7
verifying 40-DMX-C card power 21-7, 21-14
verifying 40-MUX-C card power 21-7
verifying OPT-BST amplifier power 21-5
verifying OPT-BST-L and OPT-AMP-L amplifier laser and power 21-25
verifying OPT-PRE amplifier power 21-6
verifying OSC-CSM incoming power 21-103
Index
IN-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
verifying OSCM and OSC-CSM card transmit
power 14-129
verifying the OPT-AMP-L card power 21-25
power down the node 24-27
PPMs
deleting provisioning 11-161
managing 11-144
preprovisioning 14-73
provisioning a multirate PPM 11-152
provisioning multirate 11-150
provisioning using the NE Update file 14-49
provision the optical line rate 11-155
verifying for Y-cable protection provisioning 11-165, 11-167
See also SFPs
preferences, designating the SOCKS servers 14-21
preprovisioning
card slots 14-53
PPMs 14-73
preventing IP address display in CTC 14-18
protected OCHNC
creating 16-44
protected OCHNCs
provisioning 16-44
protecting
one client signal with Y-cable protection 14-109
two client signals with Y-cable protection 14-109
protection
10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE card Layer 2 over DWDM G-31
GE_XP and GE_XPE card Layer 2 over DWDM G-31
protection, peer group 11-238
Protection Switching Module 8-1
bidirectional switching 8-4
block diagram 8-2
card-level indicators 8-4
faceplate 8-3
key features 8-2
overview 8-1
standalone 12-49
protocols
DHCP 14-19
IP 22-1
NTP 14-14
Proxy ARP. See Proxy ARP
SNTP 14-14
provisionable patchcord
creating 16-72
functionality when Secure mode is enabled 14-25
verifying 16-61
provisionable patchcords
CTC tab 16-10
description 16-10
options 16-11
ports 16-11
provisioning
10G data muxponder cards 11-322 to 11-345
10G multirate transponder cards 11-191 to 11-202, 11-217 to 11-221, 11-237 to 11-261
2.5G data muxponder cards 11-282 to 11-291
ALS settings 11-448, 20-12, 20-25, 20-44, 20-52
CE-1000-4 Ethernet ports 16-101
DHCP server 14-17
DWDM network 15-33
DWDM networks 15-33
GCC terminations 16-81
GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards 11-423
GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards 11-379
GMPLS OCHNCs 16-43
IIOP listener port 14-33
IP settings 14-17
multirate PPMs 11-152
multishelf nodes 14-8
network settings from the LCD 14-16
networks using Cisco TransportPlanner 15-33
node date 14-15
NSAP addresses in IP-over-CLNS tunnels 14-44
OCHNCs 16-41
Index
IN-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
orderwire 16-86
OSCM and OSC-CSM cards 20-4
OSC terminations 14-126
OSI 14-35
OSI manual area addresses 14-42
OSI routers 14-41
OTU2_XP card line settings 11-426
path protection selectors 16-56
PPMs 11-150 to 11-162
protected OCHNCs 16-44
proxy server 22-12
proxy server gateway settings 14-20
proxy tunnels 16-84
secure mode 14-33
splitter protection group 11-166
subnet mask in a static route 14-27
TARP parameters 14-37
time zone 14-15
TXP_MR_10E_L card for acceptance testing 21-24
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards 11-171 to 11-178
user data channels 16-88
VCAT circuits 16-94, 16-98, 16-105, 16-106
WDM-ANS 12-101
Y-cable protection group 11-162
Provisioning user. See security
Proxy ARP
description 22-2
enabling an ONS 15454 gateway 22-4
use with static routes 22-6
proxy server
configuring SOCKS settings for secure mode 14-25
gateway settings, description 22-13
IP addressing scenario 22-12
provisioning 22-12
provisioning gateway settings 14-20
provisioning settings 14-17
provisioning SOCKS 14-20
proxy tunnels, adding 16-84
PSM card
change card mode 20-47
changing administrative state 20-49
changing ALS settings 20-52
changing mode 20-47
changing optical line settings 20-48
changing optical line thresholds 20-49
modify line settings and PM thresholds 20-47
setting the card optics thresholds 20-47
pulse code modulation 16-87
R
RAMAN-COP
card functions 5-44
Card Start Up 12-106
faceplate 5-41
functional block diagram 5-42
power monitoring 5-44
RAMAN-COP card
description 5-39
RAMAN-CTP
card functions 5-44
Card Start Up 12-106
faceplate 5-40
functional block diagram 5-41
power monitoring 5-43
RAMAN-CTP card
description 5-39
Raman node layouts
without post-amplifiers 12-38
with post-amplifiers 12-37
Raman pump
importing CTP XML file 15-25
installation wizard 15-5
setting ANS parameters manually 15-25
reconfigurable OADM. See ROADM
recording 40-WXC-C card power value 21-133
regeneration node. See OSC regeneration node
Index
IN-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
reinitialization tool
overview 24-4
UNIX 24-8
Windows 24-6
removing
SFPs 14-74
REP
activating vlan load balancing 11-378
configuration sequence 11-81
creating a segment 11-375
deactivating vlan load balancing 11-379
description 11-79
editing a segment 11-377
fast reconvergence 11-80
interfacse 11-81
limitations and restrictions 11-81
link adjacency 11-80
port states 11-80
segment 11-79
segment characteristics 11-80
vlan load balancing 11-81
repairing
server trails 16-103
repeater mode
GNE and ENE 22-20
loading database onto a secure node 24-3
provisioning IP settings 14-18
TCC2/TCC2P card default mode 22-19
resetting
cards using CTC 24-13
restoring
CTC database 24-3
factory configuration 24-4
NE defaults 24-4
NE defaults in UNIX 24-8
node and card defaults 24-4
Retrieve user. See security
revertive switching
path protection circuits 16-57
revertive switching, Y-cable protection 11-168, 11-170
revertive timing, internal or external timing 15-28
rings
any-to-any 13-4
hubbed rings 13-2
meshed DWDM 13-5
multihubbed 13-3
RIP 14-30
RJ-11 connector 3-24
RMON
GE_XP and 10GE_XP card variables 11-418
See also SNMP
ROADM
32DMX-L card 10-36
40 -channel colorless and omni-directional configuration 12-67
40 -channel colorless configuration 12-66
40 -channel omni-directional configuration 12-66
40-DMX-C card 10-41
40-DMX-CE card 10-46
40-WSS-C card 10-57
40-WSS-CE card 10-64
80 -channel colorless and omni-directional configuration 12-73
80 -channel colorless configuration 12-72
80 -channel omni-directional configuration 12-71
card requirements 10-20, 10-27, 10-31, 10-36, 10-41, 10-46, 10-57, 10-64
cards. See 40-DMX-C card
cards. See 40-MUX-C card
even band management 13-58
gain tilt control 13-54
multishelf mesh node layout example 12-57
node acceptance test 21-27, 21-39, 21-62
node cabling 12-96
node description 12-11
routing fiber 14-83
verifying C-band pass-through channels 21-29
verifying east C-band add/drop channels 21-34
verifying east L-band add/drop channels 21-52
Index
IN-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
verifying L-band pass-through channels 21-44
verifying node-to-node connections 15-3
verifying Side A L-band add/drop channels 21-57
verify the side B ROADM L-Band Add/Drop channels 21-52
ROADM cards
32DMX card 10-31
32DMX-L card 10-36
32WSS card 10-16
32WSS-L card 10-22
40-DMX-C card 10-41
40-DMX-CE card 10-46
40-WSS-C card 10-57
40-WSS-CE card 10-64
channel allocation plan 10-12
compatibility 10-4
interface classes 10-6
MXP_2.5G_10E card G-18
safety labels 10-15
summary 10-2
routing
fiber between DWDM cards and transponder/muxponder cards 14-82
fiber from ADM-10G card to the patch panel 14-89
fiber from DWDM cards and DCUs to fiber-storage tray 14-79, 14-106
fiber from GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards to the patch panel 14-89
fiber from the Y-cable modules 14-110
fiber from transponder/muxponder cards to the patch panel 14-89
fiber to standard patch panel 14-85
fiber to the 15216-MD-40-ODD patch-panel tray 14-99
fiber to the 40-channel patch-panel tray 14-95
fiber to the deep patch-panel tray 14-90, 14-97
MPO cable through patch panel 14-87
Routing Information Protocol. See RIP
routing table 22-39
S
safety
ALS 13-30
labels 4-3, 11-10
TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards 7-2
SD BER
provisioning for 10G data muxponder cards 11-307, 11-319, 11-327, 11-343
provisioning for 10G multirate transponder cards 11-197, 11-213, 11-222, 11-233
provisioning for 1OTU2_XP card 11-431, 11-448
provisioning for 2.5G data muxponder cards 11-288
provisioning for 2.5G multirate transponder cards 11-174
provisioning for 4x2.5G muxponder cards 11-265, 11-278
provisioning for ADM-10G card 11-257
provisioning for GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards cards 11-421
provisioning for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards 20-4
provisioning OTU2_XP card 11-441, 11-445
searching. See finding
section trace
changing for 10G data muxponder cards 11-226, 11-308, 11-328, 11-329
changing for 10G multirate transponder cards 11-200, 11-225
changing for 2.5G data muxponder cards 11-289
changing for 2.5G multirate transponder cards 11-176
changing for ADM-10G card 11-245
changing for OTU2_XP card 11-432, 11-446
creating a J0 section trace 16-89
secure mode
and OSI 14-43
backplane IP address 22-20
behavior of locked and unlocked nodes 22-22
enabling 14-24
examples 22-20 to 22-22
GNE and ENE 22-20
IP addressing scenario 22-19
Index
IN-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
loading database onto a repeater node 24-3
provisionable patchcord functionality 14-25
provisioning 14-33
provisioning IP settings 14-18
TCC2P card requirement 14-24
security
ADM-10G card ports 11-90
assigning in CTC 14-10
assigning user security level 14-12
idle times 14-12
IP addressing with secure mode enabled 22-19
OTU2_XP card ports 11-104
PPCs when Secure mode enabled 14-25
See also audit trail
See also secure mode
server trail
creating 16-102
repairing 16-103
service states
changing port service state 16-85
changing the card service state 16-28, 20-120
circuit states list 16-68
setting
battery power monitor thresholds 14-15
clock 14-15
OCHCC routing preferences 16-30
OCH circuit attributes 16-28
OPT-AMP-17-C card mode 20-27
OPT-AMP-L card mode 20-27
PSM card optics threholds 20-47
setting up
CTC network access 14-16
external timing 15-27
firewall access 14-31
internal timing 15-30
name, date, time, and contact information 14-13
nodes automatically 14-127
OSPF 14-27
proxy tunnels 16-84
SNMP 14-45
subtending shelf in a multishelf node 14-9, 14-132
timing 15-27
SF BER
10G multirate transponder cards 11-197, 11-213, 11-222, 11-233
2.5G multirate cards 11-174
ADM-10G card 11-257
OTU2_XP card 11-430, 11-441, 11-448
provisioning for 10G data muxponder cards 11-306, 11-319, 11-327, 11-343
provisioning for 2.5G data muxponder cards 11-288
provisioning for 4x2.5G muxponder cards 11-265, 11-278
provisioning for GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards 11-421
provisioning for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards 20-4
SFPs
deleting provisioning 11-161
description 11-142
installing 14-72
removing 14-74
See also PPMs
shared resource link group 16-102
Shared Risk Link Group 22-65
shared risk link groups 22-65
shutdown, automatic laser. See ALS
sides. See optical sides
Simple Network Time Protocol. See SNTP
single-span link, description 13-7
slots
AIC-I card 14-5
MS-ISC-100T card 14-5
preprovisioning card slots 14-53
preprovisioning SFP and XFP slots 14-73
SNMP
setting up 14-45
SNTP 14-14
SOCKS
designating the SOCKS server 14-21
See also proxy server
Index
IN-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
SOCKS DCN settings 22-23
software
backing up 24-2
verifying software version 3-37, 3-44
SONET payloads 11-247
span loss
description 13-21
verifying 13-28
splitter protection G-30
definition 11-165
provisioning a protection group 11-166
Spurs 13-16
Scenario A 13-16
Scenario B 13-17
Scenario C 13-18
SRLG
Manage Link SRLG option 15-70
Manage Node SRLG option 15-70
provisioning using the SRLG management wizard 15-70
Synchronise IPoDWDM option 15-71
viewing reports 15-71
consolidated SRLG report 15-72
detailed SRLG report 15-72
SSM
enabling 15-29
enabling for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards 20-4
message set 15-28
standard constant 14-34
states
administrative and service for OCHCCs, OCH trails, and OCHNCs 16-5
static route
creating 14-26
RIP prerequisite 14-30
static route IP addressing scenario 22-8
STS circuits
automatically routed 16-50
changing circuit names 16-58
creating 16-49, 16-50
deleting 16-49, 16-57
managing 16-49
manually routed 16-53
subnet
CTC and nodes on different subnets 22-3
CTC and nodes on same subnet 22-3
multiple subnets on the network 22-7
using static routes 22-8
with dual GNEs 22-17
with Proxy ARP 22-4, 22-5
subnet mask
24-bit 22-40
32-bit 22-40
description 22-9
OSPF area range table 14-29
provisioning in a static route 14-27
provisioning subnet mask length during network setup 14-18
routing table 22-39
subtending shelf
setting up in multishelf nodes 14-9, 14-132
upgrading from single shelf 14-131
Superuser
creating a consistent network view for all users 15-69
suppressing
LCD IP address display 14-18
SVLAN
creating and storing databases 16-79
loading databases 16-80
managing card databases 16-78
merging databases 16-80
switch
See external switching commands
See timing
switching
node timing reference 24-18
Index
IN-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
T
TARP
adding a static TID-to-NSAP entry to the TDC 14-39
adding MAT entry 14-40
managing TDC 24-12
provisioning operating parameters 14-37
TARP data cache. See TARP
TCA, provisioning thresholds
for 10G data muxponder cards 11-315, 11-338
for 10G data muxponder card trunk port 11-314, 11-337
for 10G multirate transponder cards 11-209, 11-210, 11-230, 11-231
for 2.5G data muxponder cards 11-296, 11-297
for 2.5G multirate transponder cards 11-182, 11-184
for 4x2.5G muxponder cards 11-273, 11-275
for ADM-10G card 11-254, 11-255
for GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards 11-416
for GE cards 11-414
for OTU2_XP card 11-435
TCC2 card
block diagram 3-5
card-level indicators 3-15, 3-18
clearing the database for disaster recovery 24-4
database backup 24-2
description 3-3
faceplate 3-5
installing 3-35, 3-42
LED sequence 3-35
reboot behavior 14-20
redundant installation G-24
restoring the database 24-3
soft reset 24-13
TCC2P card
block diagram 3-8
clearing the database for disaster recovery 24-4
database backup 24-2
description 3-6
faceplate 3-8
installing 3-35, 3-42
LED sequence 3-36
reboot behavior 14-20
restoring the database 24-3
secure mode 22-20
secure mode option 14-33
soft reset 24-13
See also secure mode
TCC3 card
block diagram 3-11
description 3-9
faceplate 3-11
functionality 3-11
LED sequence 3-37
TCP/IP 22-45
TDC. See TARP
TDC-CC and TDC-FC
modify line settings and PM thresholds 20-76
TDC-CC and TDC-FC card
Block diagram 7-5
Faceplates 7-4
Features 7-3
Monitoring optical performance 7-5
Optical ports 7-4
T-DCU 7-1
Card Overview 7-1
Card Summary 7-2
chromatic dispersion 7-1
TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards 7-2
TE links. See LMP
terminal node
acceptance test 21-10, 21-15, 21-20
cabling 12-87
description 12-2
even band management 13-58
linear configuration 13-6
routing fiber 14-82
single-span link 13-7
termination modes G-33
Index
IN-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
testing
anti-ASE hub node 21-71
C-band line amplifier node 21-74, 21-78, 21-86
hub node 21-3, 21-8
L-band line amplifier node 21-82, 21-90
OADM node 21-94
ROADM node 21-27, 21-39, 21-62
symmetric OADM node 21-106
symmetric passive OADM node 21-112, 21-114
terminal node 21-3, 21-8, 21-10, 21-15, 21-20
Y-cable protection switching 15-38
third-party equipment
creating a server trail through 16-102
timed out. See idle time
time zone
provisioning 14-15
timing
BITS. See BITS
changing node timing reference 24-18
clearing a Manual or Force switch 24-19
mode 15-28
NE reference 15-28
setting node clock 14-15
setting up external 15-27
setting up internal 15-30
setting up line 15-27
switching a reference 24-18
synchronization for the MXP_2.5G_10G card G-17
viewing report 24-20
TNC card
configuring UDC and VoIP 3-45
description 3-12
functions 3-5, 3-15
DIS G-24
external alarms and controls G-23
faceplate and block diagram 3-13
interface ports G-22
multishelf management G-25
supported SFPs G-25
installing 3-41
modifying line threshold settings 20-123
modifying optical threshold settings 20-121
modifying threshold settings 20-121
protection schemes 3-16
provisioning PPM and port 3-45
supported cards 3-16
traffic
on a single span link 13-7
routing 22-39
transponder cards
installing 14-69
provisioning GCC terminations 16-81
recording optical power 21-125
routing fiber to the standard patch-panel tray 14-89
setting the wavelength 21-124
See also individual transponder card names
transponder cards. See TXP cards
TransportPlanner. See Cisco TransportPlanner
trap 14-45
troubleshooting
OCHNC circuits 16-63
OCH trails 16-63
TSC card
description 3-16
faceplate and block diagram 3-17
functions 3-18
installing 3-41
protection schemes G-25
supported cards G-26
tunnels
See firewall tunnels
See IP-encapsulated tunnel
See IP-over-CLNS tunnel
TXP_MR_10E_C card
block diagram 11-17
changing administrative state 11-196
changing card settings 11-193
changing line settings 11-195, 11-221
Index
IN-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
changing line thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
payloads 11-205
changing line thresholds for SONET or SDH payloads 11-202, 11-228
changing OTN settings 11-212, 11-232
changing section trace settings 11-200, 11-225
changing trunk wavelength settings 11-201, 11-219
deleting 14-51
description 11-16
faceplate 11-17
features 11-16
provisioning ALS 11-198
provisioning client port alarm 11-210, 11-231
provisioning TCA thresholds 11-210, 11-231
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-209, 11-230
See also TXP cards
TXP_MR_10E_L card
block diagram 11-17
changing administrative state 11-196
changing card settings 11-193
changing line settings 11-195, 11-221
changing line thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy payloads 11-205
changing line thresholds for SONET or SDH payloads 11-202, 11-228
changing OTN settings 11-212, 11-232
changing section trace settings 11-200, 11-225
changing trunk wavelength settings 11-219
deleting 14-51
description 11-16
faceplate 11-17
features 11-16
provisioning ALS 11-198
provisioning client port alarm 11-210, 11-231
provisioning for acceptance testing 21-24
provisioning TCA thresholds 11-210, 11-231
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-209, 11-230
See also TXP cards
TXP_MR_10E card
block diagram 11-15
changing administrative state 11-196
changing card settings 11-193
changing line settings 11-195, 11-221
changing line thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy payloads 11-205
changing line thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON payloads 11-181
changing line thresholds for SONET or SDH payloads 11-202, 11-228
changing OTN settings 11-212, 11-232
changing section trace settings 11-200, 11-225
changing trunk wavelength settings 11-201, 11-219
client interface G-14
client-to-trunk mapping G-17
deleting 14-51
description 11-14
DWDM trunk interface G-15
E-FEC G-16
faceplate 11-15
features 11-14
installing 14-69
provisioning ALS 11-198
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-210, 11-231
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-209, 11-230
resetting 24-14
Y-cable protection G-27
See also TXP cards
TXP_MR_10EX_C
Key Features 11-106
TXP_MR_10EX_C card
block diagram 11-107
description 11-105
faceplate 11-107
features 11-106
TXP_MR_10G card
ALS G-6
Index
IN-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
block diagram 11-13
changing administrative state 11-196
changing card settings 11-193
changing line settings 11-195, 11-221
changing line thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy payloads 11-205
changing line thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON payloads 11-181
changing line thresholds for SONET or SDH payloads 11-202, 11-228
changing OTN settings 11-212, 11-232
changing section trace settings 11-200, 11-225
changing the data rate 11-192
changing trunk wavelength settings 11-201, 11-219
deleting 14-51
description 11-10
faceplate 11-13
installing 14-69
LEDs G-7
port-level LEDs G-9
provisioning ALS 11-198
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-210, 11-231
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-209, 11-230
resetting 24-14
Y-cable protection G-27
See also TXP cards
TXP_MR_2.5G card
block diagram 11-22
changing administrative state 11-174
changing card settings 11-172
changing line settings 11-173
changing OTN settings 11-188
changing section trace settings 11-176
changing SONET or SDH line threshold settings 11-178
changing trunk wavelength settings 11-177
deleting 14-51
description 11-18
faceplate 11-20
installing 14-69
ITU-T G.709 11-19
port-level LEDs G-11
provisioning ALS 11-175
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-184
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-182
resetting 24-14
Y-cable protection G-27
See also TXP cards
TXP cards
ALS 13-30
compatibility 11-6
protection G-27 to G-30
required FMECs 3-3
safety labels 11-10, G-4
summary 11-3
termination modes G-33
See also individual TXP card names
TXPP_MR_2.5G card
block diagram 11-22
changing administrative state 11-174
changing card settings 11-172
changing line settings 11-173
changing OTN settings 11-188
changing section trace settings 11-176
changing SONET or SDH line threshold settings 11-178
changing trunk wavelength settings 11-177
deleting 14-51
description 11-18
faceplate 11-20
installing 14-69
ITU-T G.709 11-19
port-level LEDs G-11
provisioning ALS 11-175
provisioning client port alarm and TCA thresholds 11-184
Index
IN-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
provisioning trunk port alarm and TCA
thresholds 11-182
resetting 24-14
splitter protection G-30
See also splitter protection
See also TXP cards
U
UDC 3-25
UNIX, restoring NE defaults 24-8
upgrading
to a multishelf configuration 14-131
See also converting
user data channel
creating 16-88
deleting 16-89
user data channel. See UDC
user-defined alarms
See external alarms
See external controls
users
creating on a single node 14-11
creating on multiple nodes 14-12
See also security
V
variable optical attenuator. See VOA
VCAT circuits
provisioning a circuit route 16-106
provisioning a manually routed circuit 16-98
provisioning an automatically routed circuit 16-94
provisioning source and destination 16-105
verifying
32DMX card power 21-14
32DMX-L card power 21-26
32DMX-O card power 21-7
32MUX-O card power 21-7
40-DMX-C card power 21-7, 21-14
4MD-xx.x card pass-through connections 21-100
AD-xB-xx.x card output common power 21-98
AD-xB-xx.x card output express power 21-97
AD-xB-xx.x pass-through connection power 21-101
ADxC-xx.x card output common power 21-98
AD-xC-xx.x card output express power 21-97
AD-xC-xx.x pass-through connections 21-102
Cisco TransportPlanner reports and files 14-3
DWDM network 15-33
east ROADM C-band add/drop channels 21-34
east ROADM L-band add/drop channels 21-52
internal patchcords 14-113, 16-61
MMU card cabling 21-31, 21-32, 21-37, 21-46, 21-48, 21-49, 21-50, 21-54, 21-60
MMU card insertion loss 21-10, 21-15, 21-20, 21-27, 21-39, 21-62
MS-ISC-100T card installation 14-5
node-to-node connections 15-3
node turn-up 15-2
OADM node add and drop connections 21-104, 21-110
OADM node express channel connections 21-96, 21-108
OADM node pass-through channel connections 21-99
OCHCC client ports 16-17
OPT-AMP-L card laser and power 21-25
OPT-BST card laser and power 21-5
OPT-BST-L and OPT-AMP-L card laser and power 21-25
OPT-BST-L card laser and power 21-25
OPT-PRE card laser and power 21-6
OSC-CSM card incoming power 21-103
OSC-CSM power on OADM nodes 21-109
OSCM and OSC-CSM card transmit power 14-129
OSNR 15-37
PPMs for Y-cable protection 11-165, 11-167
provisionable patchcords 16-61
ROADM node C-band pass-through channels 21-29
ROADM node L-band pass-through channels 21-44
Side A ROADM L-band add/drop channels 21-57
Index
IN-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
software version 3-37, 3-44
topologies for ETR_CLP and ISC services 11-153
verifying span loss 13-28
viewing
audit trail records 24-15
facilities 24-26
IS-IS RIB 24-10
MAC address 14-18
OCHNCs and OCHCCs 16-66
OCHNCs on a span 16-71
OCH trail 16-66, 16-67
OSI information 24-10
timing report 24-20
virtual link table (OSPF) 14-29
virtual patchcords 16-7
VOA
adjusting with ANS 12-98
changing for 32WSS, 32WSS-L, and 40-WSS-C cards 20-68
changing for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards 20-97
changing for 40-WXC-C cards 20-83
changing for multiplexer and demultiplexer cards 20-60
changing for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards 20-8
degrade or fail alarm 13-23
gain tilt control 13-50
in the OSCM card 4-5
running ANS 14-127
W
WAN 22-2
WDM-ANS provisioning 12-101
west-to-east 12-52
WRR weight, provisioning 11-398
X
XC termination mesh node 12-77
XFPs
description 11-142
XFPs. See SFPs
XML file 14-47
xponder cards
installing 14-69
See 10GE_XP card
See OTU2_XP card
Y
Y-cable modules
installing fiber 14-108
installing fiber on 14-110
Y-cable protection
ADM-10G card 11-90
definition 11-164
description G-27
performing a protection switch test 15-38
protecting a single client signal 14-109
protecting two client signals 14-109
provisioning a protection group 11-162
See also FlexLayer
See also Y-cable modules
CHAPTER
15-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
15
Turn Up a Network
This chapter explains how to turn up and test a Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) network. For DWDM topology reference information and span loss tables, see
Chapter 13, “Network Reference.”
There are two main DWDM network types: metro core, where the channel power is equalized and
dispersion compensation is applied, and metro access, where the channels are not equalized and
dispersion compensation is not applied. The DWDM network topologies supported are hubbed rings,
multihubbed rings, meshed rings, linear configurations, and single-span links. The DWDM node types
supported are hub, terminal, optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM), reconfigurable optical add/drop
multiplexing (ROADM), anti-amplified spontaneous emissions (anti-ASE), and line amplifier. For
DWDM and hybrid node turn-up procedures, see Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node.”
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Note In this chapter, “RAMAN-CTP” refers to the 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP card and “RAMAN-COP” refers
to the 15454-M-RAMAN-COP card.
Before You Begin
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2—Complete this procedure before beginning
network turn-up.
2. NTP-G52 Verify Node-to-Node Connections, page 15-3—Complete this procedure next.
3. NTP-G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link, page 15-4—Complete this procedure to
set the Raman total power and Raman ratio.
4. NTP-G53 Set Up Timing, page 15-27—Complete this procedure next.
5. NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network, page 15-33—Complete this procedure next.
6. NTP-G56 Verify the OSNR, page 15-37—Complete as needed.15-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
7. NTP-G142 Perform a Protection Switch Test, page 15-38—Complete as needed.
8. NTP-G164 Configure Link Management Protocol, page 15-40—Complete as needed.
9. NTP-G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router
and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node, page 15-47—Complete as needed.
10. NTP-G303 Configure Virtual links on the Cisco 7600 and Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node,
page 15-66—Complete as needed.
11. NTP-G57 Create a Logical Network Map, page 15-69—Complete as needed.
12. NTP-G325 View the Power Levels of Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Nodes, page 15-69—Complete as
needed.
13. NTP-G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Network, page 15-70—Complete as
needed.
NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up
Step 1 Log in to an ONS 15454 node on the network that you will test. See the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task
for instructions. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not turned on. See the DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering task as
necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear (EQPT in the Cond column) indicating equipment failure
or other hardware problems. If equipment failure alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before
continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 3 Verify that the software version shown in the node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view
(multishelf mode) status area matches the version required by your network. (The status area is located
to the left of the shelf graphic.) If the software is not the correct version, perform one of the following
procedures:
• Perform a software upgrade using a Cisco ONS 15454 software CD or Cisco ONS 15454 SDH
software CD. Refer to the release-specific software upgrade document.
• Replace TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards with cards containing the correct
release.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > General tabs. Verify that all general node information settings are correct
according to documentation provided by the network administrator. If not, see the NTP-G80 Change
Node Management Information procedure.
Purpose This procedure verifies that each ONS 15454 is ready for DWDM network
turn-up before adding nodes to a network. This procedure applies to all
ROADM, OADM, and line-amplifier nodes.
Tools/Equipment Network plan provided by your network administrator
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > Network tabs. Ensure that the IP settings and other Cisco Transport Controller
(CTC) network access information is correct according to documentation provided by the network
administrator. If not, see the NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access procedure.
Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs. Verify that all required protection groups have been created
according to documentation provided by the network administrator. If not, see the “NTP-G33 Create a
Y-Cable Protection Group” procedure on page 11-162 or the NTP-G83 Modify or Delete Card
Protection Settings procedure.
Step 7 Click the Provisioning > Security tabs. Verify that all users have been created and that their security
levels are correct according to documentation provided by the network administrator. If not, see the
NTP-G88 Modify Users and Change Security procedure.
Step 8 If Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is provisioned on the node, click the Provisioning >
SNMP tabs. Verify that all SNMP settings are correct according to documentation provided by the
network administrator. If not, see the NTP-G89 Change SNMP Settings procedure.
Step 9 Repeat this procedure at each node in the network.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G52 Verify Node-to-Node Connections
Note In this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Step 1 Check to see if the fibers coming from the adjacent nodes are connected to the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E,
OPT-AMP-17-C (operating in the booster amplifier mode), or OSC-CSM card LINE RX and TX ports.
If yes, continue with Step 2. If adjacent node fibers are not connected to the LINE RX and TX ports, do
not continue. Install the cabling to the adjacent nodes using the “NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on
DWDM Cards and DCUs” procedure on page 14-78.
Step 2 Verify the following network fiber connections:
• The node’s Side A ports (LINE TX and RX) are connected to the Side B ports (LINE RX and TX)
of the adjacent node.
• The node’s Side B ports (LINE RX and TX) are connected to the Side A ports (LINE TX and RX)
of the adjacent node.
Step 3 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the network node that you want to verify.
Purpose This procedure verifies optical service channel (OSC) terminations
between nodes and checks span attenuation. This procedure applies to all
ROADM, OADM, and line-amplifier locations.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > OSC tabs. Verify that OSC terminations appear under the
OSC Terminations area for the Side B and Side A OSC-CSM or OSCM cards and that the port state is
In-Service and Normal (IS-NR [ANSI]/Unlocked-enabled [ETSI]). If so, continue with Step 5. If OSC
terminations are not created, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 14-126.
Step 5 Complete the NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC procedure for all OSC-CSM cards. If the
measured span loss is within the minimum and maximum expected span loss values, continue with
Step 6. If not, clean the fiber connected to the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-AMP-17-C (operating in
the booster amplifier mode), or OSC-CSM cards on both ends of the span, then repeat the NTP-G76
Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC procedure. If the span loss is within the minimum and maximum
expected span loss values, continue with Step 6. If not, contact your next level of support.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 at each network node.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link
Step 1 The Raman pump can be configured in the following ways:
• DLP-G468 Configure the Raman Pump Using the Installation Wizard, page 15-5—This procedure
is the preferred and recommended installation process.
• DLP-G690 Configure the Raman Pump Using Manual Day-0 Installation, page 15-19—Use this
procedure to configure and tune RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards, using manual day-0
installation.
• DLP-G474 Configure the Raman Pump by Importing the CTP XML File, page 15-25—Use this
procedure when the span is longer than 42 dB (expand on span). This procedure is not recommended
for spans of 42 dB or less.
• DLP-G489 Configure the Raman Pump by Setting the ANS Parameters Manually, page 15-25—Use
this procedure if the Raman installation wizard fails and expert intervention is required.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure configures the Raman pump on an Multiservice Transport
Platform (MSTP) link.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G468 Configure the Raman Pump Using the Installation Wizard
Note The installation wizard performs optical measurements and data exchange between the nodes. Make sure
that the data communications network (DCN) is stable.
Note Running the installation wizard without setting the automatic node setup (ANS) parameters causes the
wizard to fail. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127.
Note Running the installation wizard can impact traffic. Make sure that nobody is working on the nodes before
continuing with this procedure.
Caution To perform optical measurements, the installation wizard automatically turns on hardware resources
installed on the nodes. Alarms can occur during the installation process. Following the recommendations
is critical to the success of installation.
Note Make sure that a Muxponder, a WSS, or a tunable transponder is present before you run the Raman
installation wizard.
Note When the span is longer than 42 dB, do not use the Raman installation wizard.
Purpose This procedure configures the Raman Pump on an MSTP link using the
installation wizard.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64
• NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
• NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127.
• Create an optical service channel (OSC) termination link by
completing the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure
on page 14-126 or create an optical transport section (OTS)
provisionable patchcord terminations on line ports by completing
“NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord” procedure on
page 16-72, as required.
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite and remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note A bulk attenuator is not required between the transponder and the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE
card if the Raman installation wizard is started from a Raman only node (line amplifier node equipped
with OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card without post-amplifier).
Step 1 From the CTC View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Figure 15-1 shows a sample network view of nodes (terminal or ROADM) connected in the network.
Figure 15-1 Network View of Nodes (Terminal or ROADM)
The Raman pump on the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card can be configured on a single span or
multiple spans.
Step 3 To start the Raman installation wizard, complete one of the following steps:
• To configure Raman amplification on a single span, go to Network view, right-click on a span and
choose Raman Installation Day0 from the shortcut menu. (Figure 15-2). Go to Step 5.
• To configure Raman amplification on multispans, go to Network view, right-click on a specific
node, and choose Raman Installation Day0 Multi-span from the shortcut menu (Figure 15-3).15-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-2 Installing the Raman Pump on a Single Span
Figure 15-3 Installing the Raman Pump on Multiple Spans15-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
The Routing page is displayed (Figure 15-4).
Figure 15-4 Selecting Spans for Raman Amplification
The Included Span list box lists all spans that are selected in the network.
Step 4 Select a span from the network to add a span.
If you are setting up multispans, make sure that the span selection is made in a sequence; otherwise, an
error message is displayed. For example, in Figure 15-4, begin with the span between the nodes
WXC_BSTE_Chica-155 and OLA2_CrownP-154, and then the span between OLA2_CrownP-154 and
OLAasym_Batavia-157, and so on.
Step 5 When you have selected the span or spans, click Next.
The Setting Parameters page is displayed (see Figure 15-5). 15-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-5 Setting Raman Calibration Parameter
Note The Hints area displays the status of internal operations.
Note If multiple spans are selected, the applicable nodes are displayed on the left side of the page.
Step 6 Select one or more check boxes as applicable:
• Autorun wizard—The Installation wizard tunes the selected span automatically, requiring no user
intervention. However, if the wizard displays errors, the wizard requests for user
acknowledgements.
• Even Band—This option is used for optical networks that support only even band channels. If the
network supports odd and even channels, the Raman Installation wizard tunes the transponder to the
first tunable odd band channel.
• Auto Skip Tune Path—The Raman Installation wizard skips spans that have been previously tuned
by the wizard.
• Bidirectional Path—This configures the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards in both
directions (source to destination and destination to source)
• MUX/DMUX Present—This option is used if the optical network has transponders connected to
the A/D stage (MUX or WSS).
Several scenarios are discussed in the following section. Select as applicable:
• Check box Bidirectional Path is unchecked and check box MUX/DMUX Present is checked. See
Figure 15-6 and Step 7a.
• Check box Bidirectional Path is unchecked and check box MUX/DMUX Present is unchecked. See
Figure 15-7 and Step 7b.15-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• Check box Bidirectional Path is checked and check box MUX/DMUX Present is checked. See
Figure 15-8 and Step 7c.
• Check box Bidirectional Path is checked and check box MUX/DMUX Present is unchecked. See
Figure 15-9 and Step 7d.
Note Before you check the MUX/DMUX Present check box, ensure that the following prerequisites are
completed:
• At least one source node is a terminal node or a ROADM node.
• Two transponders/muxponders supporting wavelength of 1530.33 nm and 1560.61 nm, used as
probe signals, are available on the source node for odd channels or wavelengths of 1530.72 nm and
1561.01 nm for even channels.
• Trunk ports are connected to the correct ADD ports.
Note The Raman Wizard does not verify if the selected TXP connections are properly connected. The
calibration process is terminated if a LOS-P alarm is detected on the MUX input port when the trunk
port is turned on.
Note If you do not use the MUX/DMUX Present check box, ensure that the following prerequisites are
completed:
• Connect a UT2-based trunk port (from a transponder/muxponder card) to the COM-RX port of the
booster amplifier connected to the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card on the source node.
A full-spectrum, tunable interface allows the system to tune the signal on two required wavelengths
without any human intervention.
• A 10-dB bulk attenuator must be connected between the TXP trunk port and the COM-RX port of
the booster amplifier.
Caution Make sure that the bulk attenuator is removed as soon as installation finishes and the correct fiber is
reconnected to the COM-RX port of the booster amplifier.
Step 7 Perform any one of the following steps, based on your selection in Step 6.
a. Select the two transponders on the source node from the Slot drop-down list. The installation wizard
tunes the transponders to the required wavelengths. (Figure 15-6).15-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-6 Bidirectional Path Is Unchecked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Checked
b. Select one transponder on the source node from the Slot drop-down list. The installation wizard
verifies if the transponder can tune on the first tunable wavelength. Make sure that the card used is
a tunable C-band transponder and set the transponder to the “first tunable wavelength”. Otherwise,
the wizard fails and the installation must be repeated using a correctly configured tunable
transponder (Figure 15-7).
Note The wizard uses a pre-installed UT-2 based transponder.15-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-7 Bidirectional Path Is Unchecked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Unchecked
c. Select the two transponders on the source and destination nodes from the Slot drop-down list. The
installation wizard verifies if the transponders are tuned to the expected wavelengths or on the first
tunable wavelength. Otherwise, the wizard fails and the installation must be repeated (Figure 15-8).15-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-8 Bidirectional Path Is Checked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Checked
d. Select a transponder on the source and destination nodes from the Slot drop-down list. The
installation wizard verifies if the transponder can be tuned on the first tunable wavelength. Make
sure that the transponder is a tunable C-band transponder. Otherwise, the wizard fails and the
installation must be repeated (Figure 15-9).15-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-9 Bidirectional Path Is Checked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Unchecked
Step 8 Click Next. The Calibrate Raman Page is displayed (Figure 15-10).15-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-10 Calibrating Raman Amplification
The installation wizard changes the trunk port to the In-Service (IS) state and turns on all the amplifiers.
All the OTS and optical channel (OCH) ports in the span are changed to IS state.
Step 9 As soon as the Raman calibrations are complete, the Next button is enabled. Click Next.15-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-11 Calibrating Raman Amplification
Step 10 The power received on the destination node when wavelength on the source is turned on is shown. If you
installed Raman amplification on multiple spans, click Next to view results of other spans.
Step 11 If the installation wizard fails, click the Repeat button. The Raman installation wizard recalibrates the
values on the destination node.
Note If you have repeated the calibration several times and the wizard fails, press Cancel to abort the
installation process. Log in to the Cisco Technical Support Website at
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/support/index.html for more information or call Cisco Technical
Support at (800) 553-2447.
Step 12 Click Next. The Accept Results page is displayed (Figure 15-12).15-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-12 Raman Amplification Results
The calculated Raman power and Raman gain are displayed. (Figure 15-12.)
Step 13 The wizard compares the calculated Raman gain value with the expected results. Your action depends
on the Raman gain values:
• Expected gain (Gt) – 0.5 dB <= (gain) <= (expected gain) + 0.5 dB—If the Raman gain is within
this range, it means that the setup procedure was successful. Go to Step 14.
• (Expected gain) - 3.0 dB <= (gain) <= (expected gain) – 0.5 dB—If the Raman gain is within this
range, it means that the values are slightly outside the range. The wizard recommends that you verify
the span length and cabling, and repeat the installation wizard procedure. If the Raman gain values
are still not within the expected value range even after repeating the installation process, you can
choose to forcibly apply these values by clicking Force Calibration.
Note After you have forced the new calibration, the new value of the Raman gain is applied to the
OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card as the set point; However, the new value does not update
the value of the ANS set point for Raman gain. After the installation is complete, reanalyze the
network in Cisco Transport Planner using this new value for the Raman gain set point and verify
that it results in a good network design. After the CTP analysis is successful, import the updated
CTP XML file again into CTC by completing the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport
Planner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on page 14-47. Launch, run, and apply the
ANS parameters by completing “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 14-127. This resolves the discrepancy between the values of the ANS parameters and the
card parameters. 15-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
However, we recommend that you log in to the Cisco Technical Support Website at
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/support/index.html for more information if the Raman gain values are
still not within the expected value range or call Cisco Technical Support at (800) 553-2447.
• (gain) < (expected gain) – 3.0 dB or if (gain) < (expected gain) + 0.5 dB—If the Raman gain is
within this range and the values calculated are far from the targeted results, the installation fails and
the wizard recommends repeating the installation. If the results do not improve, it means that the
installation process has failed. The Force Calibration option is not available. Click Cancel to abort
the installation and log in to the Cisco Technical Support Website at
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/web/support/index.html for more information or call Cisco Technical
Support at (800) 553-2447.
Note The reason that the calculated values are not within the range may be due to installation issues
(for example, the actual fiber type is different than the one used by Cisco Transport Planner to
design the link) or procedural issues.
Step 14 Click Exports Data to export the Raman setup tuning data in text format (Figure 15-13).
Step 15 Click Finish.
Note When an error occurs during calibration of multiple spans, the calibration process stops and the Force
Calibration button becomes visible.
Note If an error occurs during calibration of multiple spans when using the AutoRun wizard, the calibration
stops and the Force Calibration button becomes visible. Click Force Calibration to force the results.15-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Figure 15-13 Exporting Raman Tuning Data
Step 16 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G690 Configure the Raman Pump Using Manual Day-0 Installation
Purpose This task tunes the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards manually
during day-0 installation.
Tools/Equipment • An optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) must be available at both the
local and remote nodes.
• A 15 dB bulk attenuator
Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G46 Log into CTC
• Create an optical service channel (OSC) termination link by
completing the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure
on page 14-126 or create optical transport section (OTS) provisionable
patchcord terminations on line ports by completing “NTP-G184
Create a Provisionable Patchcord” procedure on page 16-72, as
required. The ONS-SC-OSC-18.0= SFP is supported.
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note Perform the tuning procedure on one fiber at a time. Tune the RAMAN-COP module on the remote node
followed by RAMAN-CTP of the local node.
Note The RAMAN-COP card needs RAMAN-CTP card to operate.
Note If a 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C card is connected to the COM port of the RAMAN-CTP card, the
ADD-RX port of the 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C card must be set to the OOS,MT (ANSI) or locked,
maintenance (ETSI) state to enable the probe signals. Change the administrative state of the ADD-RX
port to IS,AINS (ANSI) or unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) after the tuning procedure is complete.
See the “DLP-G532 Change Optical Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards” task on
page 20-95.
Note If an OPT-EDFA-17, OPT-EDFA-24, OPT-AMP-C, or OPT-BST-E amplifier is used as a line amplifier
during the tuning procedure, the COM-RX port of the amplifier must be set to the OOS,MT (ANSI) or
locked, maintenance (ETSI) state. Change the administrative state of the COM-RX port to IS,AINS
(ANSI) or unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) after the tuning procedure is complete.
Step 1 To tune the RAMAN-COP card on the remote node, complete Steps 3 through 14.
Step 2 To tune the RAMAN-CTP card on the local node, complete Steps 14 through 22.
Step 3 On the local node, perform the following steps:
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the
RAMAN-CTP card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. Choose On from the OSRI drop-down list for the RAMAN-TX port.
d. Click Apply and then click Yes. This forces both the Raman pumps of the RAMAN-CTP card to
shut down.
Note The DFB signal is not affected by the Raman noise because the Raman pumps of the
RAMAN-CTP card are shut down. The Optical Signal to Noise Ratio (OSNR) value remains
above the failure threshold during the RAMAN-COP card tuning procedure, when the Raman
ratio is forced to 100%.
e. Connect the OSA to the COM-TX port of the RAMAN-CTP card using physical patch cords.
f. Set the OSA Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) to 0.2 nm and the OSA Video Bandwidth (RBV) to
100 Hz.
Step 4 On the remote node, perform the following steps:
a. Connect a tunable C-band transponder or muxponder to the COM-RX port of the line amplifier that
is connected to the COM-RX port of the RAMAN-CTP card.
b. Connect a 15 dB bulk attenuator between the TXP trunk port and the COM-RX port of the line
amplifier so that the input power of the line amplifier does not exceed -7 dBm.15-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
c. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP or MXP
card.
d. Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
e. Select the wavelength as 1530.33 nm for odd band or 1530.73 nm for even band from the
wavelength field.
f. Click Apply to save the changes.
g. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
h. Choose the IS option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
i. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs, and set the ALS mode to Disable. This enables the line
amplifier or the 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C card to detect a valid input power on the COM-RX or
ADD-RX port respectively. The line amplifier starts up in control power mode and reaches the per
channel power set point. A valid signal flows from the node into the fiber.
Step 5 On the remote node, perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the RAMAN-COP
card.
b. Click Maintenance > Manual Setup tabs.
c. Select the High Power First Lambda option.
d. Click the Pump On button. The High Power First Lambda field becomes editable.
Note The Raman pumps at 1428 nm on the RAMAN-COP card are automatically set to a high power
level of 450 mW.
Step 6 On the local node, record the peak optical power level at 1530.33 nm manually. The OSA detects a single
channel at 1530.33 nm.
Step 7 On the remote node, perform the following
a. Enter the peak optical power value recorded in Step 6 in the High Power First Lambda field.
b. Select the Low Power First Lambda option.
c. Click the Pump On button. The Low Power First Lambda field becomes editable.
Note The Raman pumps at 1428 nm on the RAMAN-COP card are automatically set to a low power
level of 200 mW.
Step 8 On the local node, record the peak optical power level at 1530.33 nm manually. The OSA detects a single
channel at 1530.33 nm. The peak optical power level has reduced significantly.
Step 9 On the remote node, enter the peak optical power value recorded in Step 8 in the Low Power First
Lambda field.
Step 10 Switch off the transponder or muxponder card on the remote node and select the last lambda values using
the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP or MXP
card.
b. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
c. Choose the OOS,DSBLD option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.15-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
d. Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
e. Select 1560.61 nm for odd band or 1561.1 nm for even band wavelength from the wavelength field
and then click Apply.
f. Click Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
g. Choose the IS option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
Step 11 Repeat Steps 5 through 10 to edit the High Power Last Lambda and Low Power Last Lambda settings.
Step 12 On the remote node, click Tune to calculate the power, ratio, and actual gain on the RAMAN-COP card.
The results are displayed in the result panel in the Manual Setup > Maintenance tab.
• Power—Displays the optimum total pump power value provisioned on the RAMAN-COP card to
reach the target Raman installation gain.
• Ratio—Displays the optimum pumps ratio value provisioned on the card to reach the target Raman
gain.
Note The newly calculated set points for the power and ratio can be viewed in the Maintenance >
Installation Report tab in the RAMAN-COP card view after the successful execution of Raman
tuning procedure. The newly provisioned values overwrite the values for the power and ratio
ANS parameters and the Origin field displays the value, “AUTOMATIC” in the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab.
• Actual Gain—Displays the current Raman gain calculated using the power and ratio values. If the
calculated gain is less than the Raman installation gain setpoint, a warning message is displayed,
prompting the user to accept the reduced calculated gain.
Step 13 Click the Force button to force the new gain setpoint.
Step 14 On the local node, perform the following:
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the
RAMAN-CTP card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. Choose Off from the OSRI drop-down list for the RAMAN-TX port.
d. Click Apply and then click Yes.
Step 15 On the local node, perform the following steps:
a. Connect the OSA to the COM-TX port of the RAMAN-CTP card using physical patchcords.
b. Set the OSA Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) to 0.2 nm and the OSA Video Bandwidth (RBV) to
100 Hz.
Step 16 On the remote node, perform the following steps:
a. Connect a tunable C-band transponder or muxponder to the COM-RX port of the line amplifier that
is connected to the COM-RX port of the RAMAN-CTP card.
b. Connect a 15 dB bulk attenuator between the TXP trunk port and the COM-RX port of the line
amplifier so that the input power of the line amplifier does not exceed -7 dBm.
c. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP or MXP
card.
d. Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
e. Select the wavelength as 1530.33 nm for odd bands or 1530.73 nm for even bands from the
wavelength field.15-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
f. Click Apply to save the changes.
g. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
h. Choose the IS option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
i. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs and set the ALS mode to Disable. This enables the line amplifier
to detect a valid input power on the COM-RX port. The line amplifier starts up in control power
mode and reaches the per channel power setpoint. A valid signal flows from the node into the fiber.
Step 17 On the local node, perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the RAMAN-CTP
card.
b. Click the Maintenance > Manual Start tabs.
c. Select the High Power First Lambda option. Raman pump P1 is activated.
d. Click the Pump On button. The High Power First Lambda field becomes editable.
Note The Raman pumps at 1428 nm on the RAMAN-CTP card are automatically set to a high power
level of 450 mW.
e. Record the peak optical power level at 1530.33 nm manually. The OSA detects a single channel at
1530.33 nm.
f. Enter the peak optical power value recorded in Step 17e in the High Power First Lambda field.
g. Select the Low Power First Lambda option.
h. Click the Pump On button. The Low Power First Lambda field becomes editable.
Note The Raman pumps at 1428 nm on the RAMAN-CTP card are automatically set to a high power
level of 200 mW.
i. Record the peak optical power level at 1530.33 nm manually. The OSA detects a single channel at
1530.33 nm. The peak optical power level has reduced significantly.
j. Enter the peak optical power value recorded in Step 17i in the Low Power First Lambda field.
Step 18 Switch off the transponder or muxponder card on the remote node and select the last lambda values using
the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP or MXP
card.
b. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
c. Choose the OOS,DSBLD option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
d. Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
e. Select the wavelength as 1560.61 nm for odd bands and 1561.1 nm for even bands from the
wavelength field and click Apply.
f. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
g. Choose the IS option from the Admin State drop-down field and click Apply.
Step 19 Repeat Steps 17 and 18 to edit the High Power Last Lambda and Low Power Last Lambda settings. The
Raman pump P2 is activated and the Raman ratio is 0%.15-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 20 On the local node, click the Tune button to calculate the power, ratio, and actual gain on the
RAMAN-CTP card. The results are displayed in the result panel in the Manual Setup > Maintenance tab.
• Power—Displays the calculated optimum total pump power value provisioned on the RAMAN-CTP
card to reach the target Raman installation gain.
• Ratio—Displays the optimum pumps ratio value provisioned on the RAMAN-CTP card to reach the
target Raman gain.
Note The newly calculated setpoints for the power and ratio can be viewed in the Maintenance >
Installation Report tab in the RAMAN-CTP card view after the successful execution of Raman
tuning procedure. The newly provisioned values overwrite the values for the power and ratio
ANS parameters and the Origin field displays the value, “AUTOMATIC” in the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab.
• Actual Gain—Displays the current Raman gain calculated using the power and ratio values.
The calculated gain (G) is compared with the expected Raman gain setpoint (GSTP). Your actions
depends on the value of the calculated gain:
– G
STP – 0.5 dB <= G <= GSTP + 0.5 dB—If the calculated gain is within this range, it means that
the tuning procedure was successful.
– G
STP – 2 dB < G < GSTP—A warning message is displayed, prompting you to accept the reduced
calculated gain. Go to Step 21.
– G < GSTP – 2 dB—A failure message is displayed. Go to Step 22.
Step 21 Click the Force button to force the new gain setpoint.
Note After you have forced the new calibration, the new value of the Raman gain is applied to the
RAMAN-CTP card as the set point. The newly provisioned gain setpoint can be viewed in the
Maintenance > Installation Report tab in the RAMAN-CTP card view. However, the newly
provisioned gain setpoint does not automatically change the values of the Value and Origin
fields of the ANS gain setpoint in the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab. After the
installation is complete, reanalyze the network in Cisco Transport Planner using the new value
for the Raman gain set point and verify that it results in a good network design. After the CTP
analysis is successful, import the updated CTP XML file again into CTC by completing the
“NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on
page 14-47. Launch, run, and apply the ANS parameters by completing “NTP-G37 Run
Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127. This resolves the discrepancy between the
values of the ANS parameters and the card parameters.
Step 22 Repeat the Steps 14 through 21 again after cleaning the fibers and checking the node connections.
Note The status field in the Maintenance > Installation Report tab displays the value, “Raman tuned by
WIZARD” after the tuning procedure is complete.
Step 23 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to complete the tuning procedure in the opposite fiber.
Step 24 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).15-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G474 Configure the Raman Pump by Importing the CTP XML File
Step 1 Install the ANS parameters calculated using Cisco Transport Planner, by completing the “NTP-G143
Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on page 14-47.
Step 2 Launch, run, and apply ANS parameters by completing “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup”
procedure on page 14-127.
Step 3 Verify if the Raman pump was configured successfully. Perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-RAMP-C
or OPT-RAMP-CE amplifier to display the card view.
b. Click the Maintenance > Installation tabs.
c. Verify the value of the Raman Ratio and Raman Total Power parameters are consistent with the
ANS set points.
d. Verify if the status of the Raman configuration displays the value as “Tuned by ANS”. If not, go to
Step 1 to repeat the procedure again.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G489 Configure the Raman Pump by Setting the ANS Parameters Manually
Note This procedure can be performed only on a per span basis and not on multiple spans. To configure
multiple spans, repeat this procedure on each span that you want to configure.
Step 1 Provision the ANS parameters manually, by completing the “DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter” task
on page 14-60. The ANS parameters are:
• (Slot i.OPT-RAMP-CE).Port RAMAN-TX.Amplifier Gain
Purpose This procedure configures the Raman pump by importing the Cisco
Transport Planner XML file.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure configures the Raman pump by setting the ANS parameters
manually.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed, when the wizard fails and expert intervention is required.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• (Slot i.OPT-RAMP-CE).Port RAMAN-TX.Raman Ratio
• (Slot i.OPT-RAMP-CE).Port RAMAN-TX.Raman Total Power
ANS parameters are displayed in the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tab. For more
information, see Chapter 12, “Node Reference.”
Step 2 Launch, run, and apply ANS parameters by completing “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup”
procedure on page 14-127.
Step 3 Verify if the Raman pump was configured successfully. Perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-RAMP-C
or OPT-RAMP-CE amplifier to display the card view.
b. Click the Maintenance > Installation tabs.
c. Verify the values of the Raman Ratio and Total Pump Power parameters are consistent with the ANS
set points.
d. Verify the status of the Raman configuration displays the value, “Tuned by ANS”. If not, go to
Step 1 to repeat the procedure again.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-490 Restore Raman Link After a Fiber Cut Occurs
Note This procedure does not calculate the Raman pump ratio. The Raman pump ratio is not expected to
change after the fiber cut is repaired.
Caution This procedure affects traffic. Ensure that nobody is working on the nodes before you begin.
Step 1 Complete the “NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network” procedure on page 15-33.
Ensure that the network traffic is restored.
Step 2 Verify if the restore procedure was successful. Perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-RAMP-C
or OPT-RAMP-CE amplifier to display the card view.
b. Click the Maintenance > Installation tabs.
c. Verify the value of the Fiber Cut Recovery column. The possible values are:
• Executed— The restore procedure was completed successfully.
Purpose This procedure tunes Raman set points after a fiber cut has been repaired.
The Raman total power value is calculated again, and the original Raman
gain is restored.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• Pending—The restore procedure is incomplete.
• Failed —The system failed to execute the procedure.
d. If the status is Pending or Failed in Step 2c., perform the following steps:
• Click the Maintenance > APC & Restore tabs.
• Click Restore from Fiber Cut. This recalculates the Raman gain on the span and verifies if this
value is consistent with the ANS set point for Raman gain.
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G53 Set Up Timing
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at the node where you will set up timing. If you are already
logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G95 Set Up External or Line Timing” task on page 15-27 if an external building
integrated timing supply (BITS) source is available. This is the most common ONS 15454 timing setup
method.
Step 3 If an external BITS source is not available, complete the “DLP-G96 Set Up Internal Timing” task on
page 15-30. This task can provide only Stratum 3 timing.
Step 4 Repeat this procedure at each node in the network.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G95 Set Up External or Line Timing
Step 1 In node view (single-node mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > Timing >
General tabs.
Purpose This procedure provisions Cisco ONS 15454 timing.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task defines the ONS 15454 timing source (external or line).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 2 In the General Timing area, complete the following information:
• Timing Mode—Choose External if the ONS 15454 derives its timing from a BITS source wired to
the backplane pins (ANSI) or a MIC-C/T/P front-mount electrical connection (FMEC) (ETSI);
choose Line if timing is derived from an OSC-CSM or OSCM card that is optically connected to the
timing node. A third option, Mixed, allows you to set both external and line timing references.
Because Mixed timing might cause timing loops, we do not recommend its use. Use this mode with
care.
Note In ONS 15454 M6 the BITS is connected to ECU or ECU2 BITS Connectors. Refer to
“DLP-G296 Install Timing Wires on ONS 15454 M6 - ANSI” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide. In ONS 15454 M2 the BITS is connected to BITS connectors
on the Power Unit.
• SSM Message Set—Choose the Generation 2 synchronization status messaging (SSM) option. See
Timing Reference for more information about SSM, including definitions of the SONET timing
levels.
Note Generation 1 is used only by SONET or SDH ONS 15454 nodes that are connected to
equipment that does not support Generation 2.
• Quality of RES—Sets the timing quality for the user-defined, reserved (RES) S1 byte if your timing
sources supports RES. Most timing sources do not use RES. If it does not support RES, choose
RES=DUS (do not use for timing reference). Qualities are displayed in descending quality order as
ranges. For example, in Generation 1 SSM, ST3 Timing >
General tabs.
Step 2 In the General Timing area, enter the following:
• Timing Mode—Set to External.
• SSM Message Set—Set to Generation 1.
• Quality of RES—Does not apply to internal timing.
• Revertive—Does not apply to internal timing.
• Reversion Time—Does not apply to internal timing.
Step 3 In the Reference Lists area, enter the following information:
• NE Reference
– Ref 1—Set to Internal Clock.
– Ref 2—Set to Internal Clock.
– Ref 3—Set to Internal Clock.
• BITS-1 Out/BITS-2 Out—Set to None.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the BITS Facilities tab.
Step 6 In the BITS Facilities area, change the BITS In state and BITS Out state to OOS for BITS 1 and BITS 2.
Disregard the other BITS Facilities settings; they are not relevant to internal timing.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G350 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report
Step 1 Display a printed copy of the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix report for your network. The report
can be exported in Microsoft Excel (.xls) or HTML format.
Purpose This task describes how to use the Cisco Transport Planner traffic matrix
report to provision and verify a DWDM network.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 2 View the following information:
• Service Demand—Lists the general service demand from site to site.
• Service Circuit—Lists the service circuit.
• OCH-CC Src—Lists the optical channel client connection (OCHCC) source site and the shelf
direction, either Side B or Side A.
• OCH-CC Src Position—Lists the OCHCC source rack, shelf, and slot.
• OCH-CC Src Unit—Lists the OCHCC source TXP, MXP, or ITU-T line card.
• OCH-CC Src Port—Lists the OCHCC source port.
• A/D Src Position—Lists the optical channel add/drop card source rack, shelf, and slot.
• A/D Src Unit—Lists the optical channel add/drop card source TXP, MXP, or ITU-T line card.
• A/D Src Port—Lists the optical channel add/drop card source port.
• OCH-CC Dst—Lists the OCHCC destination site and shelf direction, either Side B or Side A.
• OCH-CC Dst Position—Lists the OCHCC destination rack, shelf, and slot.
• OCH-CC Dst Unit—Lists the OCHCC destination TXP, MXP, or ITU-T line card.
• OCH-CC Dst Port—Lists the OCHCC destination port.
• A/D Dst Position—Lists the optical channel add/drop card destination rack, shelf, and slot
• A/D Dst Unit—Lists the optical channel add/drop card destination TXP, MXP, or ITU-T line card.
• A/D Dst Port—Lists the optical channel add/drop card destination port.
– Dest Unit is the product ID of the optical path source card.
– Dest Port is the port label reported on the front panel of the optical path destination card.
• Cl Service Type—Identifies the service type of the optical channel.
• Protection—Identifies the type of protection used for the optical channel:
– Optical paths for unprotected-Side B and unprotected-Side A optical channels are routed along
one direction only in the network.
– Optical paths for Y-cable, fiber-switched, and client 1+1 optical channels are routed along two
independent directions in the network.
• Op Bypass Site Name—Identifies where the optical channel is dropped and reinserted when it is not
terminated on a TXP or MXP card (optical bypass).
Note If the word None appears in the Op Bypass Site Name column, no optical bypass is defined
for the optical channel.
• Wavelength—Identifies the wavelength used for the optical channel. Table 16-6 on page 16-20 lists
the thirty-two available wavelengths.
• DWDM Interface Type—Identifies the DWDM interface type that is used for the optical channel:
– Transponder indicates that a transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), or DWDM pluggable port
module is used for the optical channel.
– Line Card indicates that an ITU line card is used for the optical channel.
• DWDM Card Type—Identifies the type of TXP or line card that is used for the optical channel. For
information about card types supported by Cisco Transport Planner, see Cisco Transport Planner
DWDM Operations Guide.15-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network
Note In this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to an ONS 15454 node on the network.
Step 2 Click the Alarms tab:
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not turned on. See the DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering task, as
necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment (EQPT) alarms appear. If equipment failure alarms appear, investigate and
resolve them before continuing. Refer to Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Step 3 Using the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix (see Table 14-1 on page 14-4) for your site, identify
the first channel (ITU wavelength) to be provisioned. Use the TXP, MXP, or line card that corresponds
to the selected wavelength.
Step 4 For the ITU wavelength identified in Step 3, create an optical channel client connection (OCHCC)
circuit or optical channel network connection (OCHNC) circuit, or optical channel trail circuit using one
of the following tasks:
• DLP-G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections, page 16-17.
• DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-41.
• DLP-G395 Create an Optical Channel Trail, page 16-34.
.After creating the OCHCC or OCHNC circuit, return to this procedure and continue with Step 5.
Purpose This procedure describes how to turn-up an optical service in MSTP
networks. It also provides a guidance to perform an entry-level optical
performances verification of an optical circuit
(OCH-NC/OCH-CC/OCHTrail) created on the MSTP networks.
Tools/Equipment Test set or protocol analyzer
Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards.
Provisioning procedures of these cards are provided in Chapter 11,
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note Every time a channel is created in the DWDM network, the amplifiers automatically calculate
the optical output power needed to maintain a constant power level on each channel when
working in Gain Control. If the amplifier is working in power control, APC tool is used for
amplifiers power level calculation and setting. Automatic power control (APC) runs when you
create new circuits. APC also runs periodically (every 60 minutes) to check and monitor power
levels in all the significant sections of the network. If the span length changes, APC modifies
amplifier gains and modifies express variable optical attenuation (VOA). For more information
about APC, see the Chapter 13, “Network Reference.”
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Circuits tab. Verify
that the OCHCC or OCHNC created in Step 4 has a DISCOVERED status and an IS state. If so, continue
with Step 6. If not, complete “NTP-G183 Diagnose and Fix OCHNC and OCH Trail Circuits” task on
page 16-63.
Step 6 Click the circuit and click Edit.
Step 7 In the Edit Circuit dialog box, click the State tab.
Step 8 In the Cross-Connections table, verify that the circuit path is correct and record all the nodes that appear
in the Node column. The first node is the circuit source, and the last node is the circuit destination. If
the circuit path is incorrect, delete the circuit and go back to Step 4 to create a new circuit.
Step 9 Perform the entry-level performance verification of the optical power levels matching with expected
setpoints for the OCH-circuit identified in Step 8.
Optical verification is done for cards in the OCH-circuit. The verification must be done node by node,
following the logical signal flow from source to destination node.
Verify the power levels on the following:
a. Fixed or reconfigurable add/drop cards.
b. Amplifiers, including the raman cards.
Note You need to verify the power setpoint for OPT-PSM cards in the path protection configuration.
Step 10 Display the circuit source node in node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode).
Following the signal flow from the TXP, MXP, or line card Trunk ports, if an fixed or reconfigurable
add/drop card is installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 11.
Note Use of Node Functional View to identify at a glance, the logical signal flow in complex nodes.
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector area, select the first fixed or reconfigurable add/drop card to be checked. Identify the
power parameter and record the corresponding port and active value from the parameter list.
c. Check the power setpoint on the ports displayed in the Port field in CTC. The add/drop cards must
meet this output power setpoint per channel.
d. Display the selected fixed or reconfigurable add/drop module in card view:
e. Click the Provisioning tabs.
f. Locate the port selected in step b in the CTC menu.15-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note The CTC displays the name according to the card installed.
g. Identify the row associated to the Port. Check the value reported in Power or Power To column in
CTC.
– If the card value matches the VOA Power Ref. cell or the recorded Power value, with +/- 1 dB
of tolerance, continue with Step 11.
Note VOA Power Ref at card level must be equal to the Power Active Value recorded in step b. If not,
go back to Node view and click the ANS button. Then repeat this procedure.
– If the value is out of tolerance range from the VOA Power Ref, contact your next level of
support.
Step 11 Display the circuit source node in node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode).
Following the signal flow, if an amplifier card is installed, complete the following steps.
Note Use of Node Functional View to identify the logical signal flow in complex nodes at a glance.
If not, continue with Step 12.
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector area, click the amplifier card to be checked. Identify the power parameter and record
the corresponding port and active value from the parameter list.
c. Check the power setpoint on the ports displayed in the Port field in CTC. The add/drop cards must
meet this output power setpoint per channel.
d. Display the selected amplifier in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Identify the row associated to the
Port selected in step b. Check the signal output power value.
– If the value is equal to or greater (due to ASE accumulation) than the value shown in the
Channel Power Ref cell, continue with Step 12.
Note Channel Power Reference at card level must be equal to the Power Active Value noted in step
b. If not, go back to Node view and click the ANS button. Then repeat this procedure.
– If the value is lower than the value shown in the Channel Power Reference cell, contact your
next level of support.
Step 12 Go to the Edit Circuit dialog box and move to the next intermediate node in node view (single-shelf
mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode). Following the signal flow, repeat Step 10 and Step 11 in order
to check fixed or reconfigurable add/drop cards and amplifiers cards.
When all the intermediate nodes have been checked, move to Step 13 to verify the destination node.
Step 13 Display the Destination node in node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode).
Following the signal flow, if an amplifier card is installed, complete the power levels check according
with Step 11.15-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Complete the power level verification on the fixed or reconfigurable add/drop card that is dropping the
signal using the following steps:
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector area, click the last fixed or reconfigurable drop card to be checked. Identify the drop
power parameter among the optical parameters and record the correspondent Port and Active Value.
c. Check the power setpoint on the ports displayed in the Port field in CTC. The cards must meet this
Drop Power setpoint per channel.
d. Display the selected fixed or reconfigurable add/drop module in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning tabs.
f. Locate the port selected in step b in the CTC menu.
Note The CTC displays the name according to the card installed.
g. Identify the row associated to the Port. Check the value reported in Power or Power To column in
CTC.
– If the card value matches the VOA Power Ref. cell (when present) or the recorded Power Drop
value, with +/- 2 dB of tolerance, continue with Step 14.
Note VOA Power Ref at card level must be equal to the Power Drop Active Value recorded in step b.
If not, go back to Node view and click the ANS button. Then repeat this procedure.
– If the value is out of tolerance range from the VOA Power Ref, contact your next level of
support.
Step 14 Check the received power range on TXP, MXP, or line cards:
a. Navigate to the node where the first TXP, MXP, or line card is installed.
b. Display the TXP, MXP, or line card in card view.
c. Complete the DLP-G136 Clear Selected PM Counts.
d. Click the Performance > Optics PM tabs.
e. Record the values shown in the RX Optical Pwr field.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
g. Verify that the value in Step e falls between the values shown for the RX Power High and
RX Power Low. If so, continue with Step 15. If not, complete one of the following.
– Power lower than range—Clean the trunk fiber at the patch panel and on the TXP or MXP card.
Repeat Steps e through g. If the power is still too low, contact your next level of support.
– Power higher than range—Add attenuation to the fiber and repeat Steps e through g. If the
power still does not fall within the range, contact your next level of support.
Step 15 Perform a short-term bit error rate (BER) test:
a. Complete the DLP-G136 Clear Selected PM Counts for the TXP, MXP, or line card.
b. Display the TXP, MXP, or line card in card view.
c. Click the Performance > Payload PM tabs, or, if OTN is provisioned, the Performance >
OTN PM tabs. 15-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
d. Perform a short-term BER test using a test signal from a test set or protocol analyzer.
e. Monitor the payload performance monitoring (PM) for at least 10 minutes for errors.
Note To see an accurate PM count, the BER test results must be consistent with the transmitted
bit rate for at least 10 minutes.
Note For information about using a test set or protocol analyzer, see the test set or protocol
analyzer user guide.
Step 16 Create a new OCHNC or OCHCC circuit for the next ITU wavelength listed in the Cisco Transport
Planner Traffic Matrix and perform one of the following tasks:
• If the new circuit optical path is not including nodes different from those the first circuits belongs
to, perform only steps from Step 13 to Step 15.
• If the new circuit optical path includes new nodes, do the proper optical checks:
– Step 10 and Step 11 if the new node is the Source node
– Step 12 if the new nodes are intermediate nodes
– Step 13 if the new node is the destination node
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G56 Verify the OSNR
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at an ONS 15454 on the network.
Step 2 Using an optical spectrum analyzer, check the received OSNR for each transmitted channel on both ends
of the span. Identify the last OSC-CSM, OPT-PRE, or OPT-BST MON port that the channel passes
through before it is dropped.
Note The OPT-PRE reference also applies to the OPT-AMP-17-C card operating in OPT-PRE mode
and the OPT-BST reference also applies to the OPT-AMP-17-C card operating in OPT-LINE
mode.
Step 3 If OPT-PRE cards are installed with an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card, use the OPT-PRE
MON port.
Purpose This procedure verifies the optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR). The
OSNR is the ratio between the signal power level and the noise power level.
Tools/Equipment Optical spectrum analyzer
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note For OSNR values for each card class, see Chapter 4, “Optical Amplifier Cards.”
Step 4 If the OSNR is too low, check the following, depending on your node configuration:
Note The purpose of this step is not to improve the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), but to match the
per-channel power level within the RX port power range.
• Check the fiber connections between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the
OPT-PRE amplifier. If needed, clean the connectors. See the NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors
procedure.
• On the near-end OPT-BST amplifier, check the equalization of the added channels at the monitor
output.
• On the OPT-PRE amplifier, check the output power on both COM TX and DC TX ports.
• On the far-end OPT-PRE amplifier, check the amplifier gain tilt at the monitor output.
If the OSNR is still too low, contact your next level of support.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 2 and 4 for all traffic in the network.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G142 Perform a Protection Switch Test
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at an ONS 15454 on the network.
Purpose This procedure tests the optical path, client TXP, MXP, GE_XP and
GE_XPE (when provisioned in 10GE or 20GE MXP mode), 10GE_XP and
10GE_XPE (when provisioned in 10GE TXP mode), and OTU2_XP (when
provisioned in TXP mode) cards and the Y-cable protection groups in your
network for proper operation. The test signals can be generated by either
the actual client device or a test set (whichever is available). We
recommend that you repeat this test at each node in the network where
protection group traffic is dropped.
Tools/Equipment A list of protection groups. This information is provided in the
Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix.
A test set or actual client device that provides the required payload for the
circuits that are provisioned.
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite; personnel are required to be on site at each end of the circuit under
test.
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 2 Identify the Y-cable circuit to be tested by viewing the Traffic Matrix for your site. Locate the TXP,
MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards in the ONS 15454 node that will
be used for the protection group.
Step 3 Verify that the Y-cable protection group is provisioned:
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Protection tabs.
b. In the Protect and Working areas, confirm that the correct TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards are in the Y-cable protection group by viewing the slot
number and card type.
c. If the required protection group is not provisioned, stop and perform the “NTP-G33 Create a
Y-Cable Protection Group” procedure on page 11-162. Otherwise, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Repeat Step 3 for each Y-cable protection group at the node. When all protection groups are verified,
continue with the next step.
Step 5 Physically connect the transmitter of the client or test set to either Port 10 or Port 12 of the Y-cable
module protecting the test circuit. (See Table 14-7 on page 14-109 and Table 14-8 on page 14-109.)
Step 6 If you connected the transmitter to Port 10, connect the client or test set receiver to Port 5 on the Y-cable
module. If not, connect the client or test set receiver to Port 11 on the Y-cable module.
Step 7 At the far-end site for the test circuit, physically loop the Y-cable module as follows:
a. If this is the first client on the Y-cable module, loop Port 10 to Port 5 on the far-end Y-cable module.
b. If this is the second client on the Y-cable module, loop Ports 11 and 12 on the far-end Y-cable
module.
Step 8 At the near-end site for the test circuit, place the client device or test set into service and begin
transmitting the required payload.
Step 9 In CTC, display the near-end site in node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 10 Click the Maintenance > Protection tabs.
Step 11 In the Protection Groups area, highlight the protection group to be tested.
Step 12 In the Selected Group area, identify the active slot and the standby slot.
Step 13 Verify that the LED s on the physical cards in the shelf match the following:
a. For the active TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card, record the
slot number: _____. Verify that the port LEDs appear as follows:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is green.
b. For the standby TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card, record
the slot number: _____. Verify that the port LEDs appear as follows:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is not illuminated or amber, depending on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card.
Step 14 In the Selected Group area, highlight the active TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
or OTU2_XP slot.
Step 15 From the Switch Commands area below the Selected Group area, click Manual, then click YES.15-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 16 From the Selected Group area, record the following information and verify that the active and standby
TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP slot numbers are the opposite of
Step 13.
a. For the active TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card, record the
slot number: _____. Verify that the port LEDs appear as follows:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is green.
b. For the standby TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card, record
the slot number: _____. Verify that the port LEDs appear as follows:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is not illuminated or amber, depending on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card.
Step 17 Verify that the LEDs on the physical cards in the shelf match the following:
a. For the active TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP slot LEDs:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is green.
b. For the standby TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP slot LEDs:
– DWDM port is green.
– Client port is not illuminated.
Step 18 Confirm that the client or test set at the local site is operating normally without alarms. If the test set is
reporting active alarms, contact your next level of support.
Note It is normal to see a traffic hit on the test set during a protection switch.
Step 19 From the Switch Commands area below the Selected Group area, click Clear, then click YES to return
the protection group to the original state.
Step 20 Repeat Steps 5 through 19 for each protection group at your site.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G164 Configure Link Management Protocol
Purpose This procedure configures Link Management Protocol (LMP). LMP
manages the channels and links that are required between nodes for
routing, signaling, and link management.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Note This procedure is normally required only when the Cisco ONS 15454 must run traffic to and from a
Calient PXC, a Cisco CRS-1 router, or a Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Note Cisco ONS Software Release 9.4 supports Cisco CRS-1 routers using Cisco IOS XR Software Release
3.9.0 and Cisco ASR 9000 routers using Cisco IOS XR Software Release 4.1.0. If you have an earlier
version of the Cisco IOS XR software, you cannot configure LMP on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 router, and the router will be visible as an unknown node in the CTC network view.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to the ONS 15454 on the network.
Step 2 To enable LMP, complete the “DLP-G372 Enable LMP” task on page 15-41.
Step 3 To set up one or more control channels, complete the “DLP-G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control
Channels” task on page 15-42.
Step 4 To set up one or more traffic engineering (TE) links, complete the “DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete
LMP TE Links” task on page 15-45.
Step 5 To set up one or more data links, complete the “DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links”
task on page 15-46.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G372 Enable LMP
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > General tabs.
Step 2 In the Configuration area, click the Enable LMP check box to enable the LMP function.
Step 3 In the Local Node Id text entry box, enter the local node ID in the form of an IP address.
Note Do not set the LMP Local Node ID to another IP address in use on the network. This introduces
a duplicate IP address in the network for traffic going to the IP address that is used as the LMP
Local Node ID. We recommended to you set the LMP Local Node ID to the node's IP address,
because this does not introduce a duplicate IP address in the network.
Step 4 If you are going to use LMP to manage a control channel between a Calient PXC node and a
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node or between a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node, ensure that the LMP-WDM check box is unchecked.
Purpose This task enables the LMP function on the ONS 15454 node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 5 If you are going to use LMP to manage a control channel between the ONS 15454 nodes, check the
LMP-WDM check box and use the Role field to choose one of the following roles:
• PEER, to use LMP to manage links between two nodes where the other node is configured as OLS.
• OLS, to use LMP to manage links between two nodes where the other node is configured as PEER.
The role selection is available only when LMP-WDM is enabled on the local node. Both the local and
remote nodes must be configured with LMP-WDM enabled.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 In the Status area, verify that the Operational State is Up. This indicates that LMP is enabled and the
link is active.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > Control Channels tabs.
Step 2 To create a control channel, click Create. The Create LMP Control Channel dialog box appears.
Note The values of the Admin State, Requested Hello Interval, Min Hello Interval, Max Hello
Interval, Requested Hello Dead Interval, Min Hello Dead Interval, and Max Hello Dead Interval
fields correspond to the values specified for these fields in the NODE > lmp section of the node
view Provisioning > Defaults tabs. If you change the NODE > lmp values, those values are
reflected as defaults in the Create LMP Control Channel dialog box. You can change the default
values using the dialog box. However, the NODE > lmp values are always used as the initial
defaults.
Step 3 In the Create LMP Control Channel dialog box, complete the following:
• Admin State—Select unlocked (if you are using an ETSI shelf) or IS (if you are using an ANSI
shelf) to establish the control channel; otherwise, select locked, disabled (ETSI) or OOS-DSBLD
(ANSI) to set the control channel to out of service.
• Local Port—Select Routed if the control channel is to be sent over the control plane or management
network; otherwise, if the control channel is to be sent over the same fiber as the traffic (either in
the payload or in the overhead), select one of the available traffic ports.
• Local Port Id—(Display only) Displays the local port identifier assigned by the node.
Purpose This task creates, edits, or deletes one or more LMP control channels
between pairs of Cisco ONS 15454 nodes, between a Calient PXC and a
Cisco ONS 15454, or between a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router
and a Cisco ONS 15454 node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G372 Enable LMP, page 15-41
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• Remote Node Type—Select 15454 or non-CRS1 if you are creating a control channel between two
Cisco ONS 15454 nodes or between a Calient PXC and a Cisco ONS 15454 node; select CRS-1 if
you are creating a control channel between a Cisco CRS-1 router and a Cisco ONS 15454 node;
otherwise, select ASR9K if you are creating a control channel between a Cisco ASR 9000 router
and a Cisco ONS 15454 node.
• Remote Node Address—In dotted-decimal format, enter the number that identifies the IP address of
the remote node (either a Calient PXC peer node, a Cisco CRS-1 router, Cisco ASR 9000 router, or
a Cisco ONS 15454 node) where the control channel will be established.
• Remote Node ID—Initially, CTC autopopulates this value to the remote node IP address that you
just assigned. However, you can change the identifier to any nonzero 32-bit integer in dotted
decimal format (for example, 10.92.29.10).
• Requested Hello Interval—Enter the Requested Hello Interval in milliseconds (ms). Before sending
Hello messages, the Hello Interval and Hello Dead Interval parameters must be established by the
local and remote nodes. These parameters are exchanged in the Config message. The Hello Interval
indicates how frequently LMP Hello messages will be sent; the interval must be in the 300 ms to
5000 ms range. The Min Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Requested Hello Interval,
and the Requested Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Max Hello Interval.
• Min Hello Interval—Enter the minimum Hello Interval in milliseconds. When the two nodes
negotiate for the Hello Interval, the value that you enter here will be the minimum Hello Interval
acceptable for the local node. The Min Hello Interval must be in the 300 ms to 5000 ms range. The
Min Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Requested Hello Interval and the Requested
Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Max Hello Interval.
• Max Hello Interval—Enter the maximum Hello Interval in milliseconds. When the two nodes
negotiate for the Hello Interval, the value that you enter here will be the maximum Hello Interval
acceptable for the local node. The Max Hello Interval must be in the 300 ms to 5000 ms range. The
Min Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Requested Hello Interval and the Requested
Hello Interval must be less than or equal to the Max Hello Interval.
• Requested Hello Dead Interval—Enter the Requested Hello Dead Interval in milliseconds. The
Requested Hello Dead Interval indicates how long a device should wait to receive a Hello message
before declaring a control channel dead. The Requested Hello Dead interval must be in the 2000 ms
to 20000 ms range. The Min Hello Dead Interval must be less than or equal to the Requested Hello
Dead Interval and the Requested Hello Dead Interval must be less than or equal to the Max Hello
Dead Interval.
Note The Requested Hello Dead Interval must be at least three times greater than the Requested
Hello Interval.
• Min Hello Dead Interval—Enter the minimum Hello Dead Interval in milliseconds. The minimum
Hello Dead Interval must be in the 2000 ms to 20000 ms range. The minimum Hello Dead Interval
must be less than or equal to the Requested Hello Dead Interval and the Requested Hello Dead
Interval must be less than or equal to the Max Hello Dead Interval. When the two nodes negotiate
for the Hello Dead Interval, the value that you enter here will be the minimum Hello Dead Interval
acceptable for the local node.
Note The value of the Min Hello Dead Interval must be greater than the Min Hello Interval.15-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
• Max Hello Dead Interval—Enter the maximum Hello Dead Interval in milliseconds. This interval
must be in the 2000 ms to 20000 ms range. The Min Hello Dead Interval must be less than or equal
to the Requested Hello Dead Interval and the Requested Hello Dead Interval must be less than or
equal to the Max Hello Dead Interval. When the two nodes negotiate for the Hello Dead Interval,
the value that you enter here will be the maximum Hello Dead Interval acceptable for the local node.
Note The Max Hello Dead Interval must be greater than the Max Hello Interval.
Step 4 Click OK to accept the parameters that you have entered, or click Cancel to return to the Control
Channels tab without creating a control channel.
Step 5 If you have chosen the Remote Node Type as CRS-1 or ASR9K in Step 3 and if you have chosen that
automatic LMP configuration in the “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series,
or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters” task on page 15-50, a confirmation dialog box is displayed to
indicate that this operation will also change the configuration of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
router. Click Yes.
Step 6 If you created a control channel, verify that the parameters for the new Control Channel appear properly
in the Control Channels tab.
Note The Actual Hello Interval and Actual Hello Dead Interval parameters reflect the values of these
parameters as a result of the negotiated agreement of the local and remote nodes. They may be
different than the requested values.
Step 7 After the LMP control channel has been created, observe the status of the channel in the Operational
State column of the Control Channels tab, and take the appropriate action as shown in the following list:
• Up—The control channel contacted the far-end node and successfully negotiated a control channel.
• Down—LMP is enabled and the link is inactive. Ensure that the Admin State of the control channel
is unlocked (ETSI) or IS (ANSI) and not disabled (ETSI) or OOS-DSBLD (ANSI). If the state still
does not transition to Up, the far-end control channel might have disjointed Hello negotiation times
that prevent a control channel from transitioning to the Up state. For example, the local ONS 15454
Min Hello Interval and Max Hello Interval might be 900 to 1000, while the remote Min Hello
Interval and Max Hello Interval is 1100 to 1200.
• Config Send—The connection could not be made to the remote node. Check to make sure that the
remote node address and remote node ID addresses are correct.
• Config Received—The local node sent a configuration request to the remote node and received a
response of either ConfigNack or ConfigAck.
• Unknown
Step 8 To delete a control channel, click the channel row to highlight it and click Delete. A confirmation dialog
box appears that allows you to click OK or Cancel.
Step 9 To edit a control channel, click the channel row to highlight it and click Edit. A dialog box appears that
allows you to change the control channel parameters. You can then click OK or Cancel. If you are
editing a control channel that involves a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router, a confirmation dialog
box is displayed. Click Yes.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).15-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > TE Links tabs.
Step 2 To create a TE link, click Create. The Create LMP TE Link dialog box appears.
Step 3 In the Create LMP TE Link dialog box, complete the following:
• Admin State—Select unlocked (for ETSI shelves) or IS (for ANSI shelves) to put the TE link in
service; otherwise, select locked, disabled (ETSI) or OOS-DSBLD (ANSI) to set the TE link to out
of service.
• Remote Node Id—Select a remote node (either a Calient PXC peer node, a Cisco CRS-1 router, a
Cisco ASR 9000 router, or a Cisco ONS 15454 node) for the other end of the TE link.
• Remote TE Link Id—Enter an unsigned 32-bit value (such as 0x00000001) to identify the remote
node identifier for the other end of the TE link. This option is not available if you have chosen the
automatic LMP configuration in “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series,
or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters” task on page 15-50.
• MUX Capability—Select the MUX capability. This option is not available if you are creating a TE
link that involves a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Step 4 Click OK to accept the parameters that you have entered and create the TE link, or click Cancel to return
to the Control Channels tab without creating a TE link.
Step 5 If you created a TE link, verify that the parameters for the new TE link now appear properly in the TE
Links tab.
Step 6 After the TE link has been created, observe the status of the TE link in the Operational State column of
the TE Links pane, and take the appropriate action as shown in the following list:
• Up—The TE link is active.
• Down—Ensure that the Admin State of the TE link is unlocked (ETSI) or IS (ANSI) and not
disabled (ETSI) or OOS-DSBLD (ANSI). The TE link does not transition to the Up state until a data
link has been provisioned.
• Init—Verify that the Remote Node ID and Remote TE Link ID values are correct for the remote
node. Verify that the remote node is using the Cisco ONS 15454 or the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 router IP address for its remote node IP and that the remote node is using the local TE link
index for its remote TE link index.
Step 7 To delete a TE link, click the link row to highlight it and click Delete. A confirmation dialog box appears
that allows you to click OK or Cancel.
Step 8 To edit a TE link, click the link row to highlight it and click Edit. A dialog box appears that allows you
to change the TE link parameters. You can then click OK or Cancel.
Purpose This task creates, edits, or deletes TE links and their association to
neighboring LMP nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G372 Enable LMP, page 15-41
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links
Note A port cannot be deleted if it is being used by a data link. A card cannot be deleted if any of its ports are
being used by data links. Changing the state of the port impacts the state of a data link using the port.
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > Data Links tabs.
Step 2 To create a data link, click Create. The Create LMP Data Link dialog box appears.
Step 3 In the Create LMP Data Link dialog box, complete the following:
• Local Port—Select one of the available local ports for the data link.
• Local Port Id—(Display only) Displays the local port identifier.
• Data Link Type—Select Port or Component. A data link is considered to be either a port or a
component link on each node where it terminates, depending on the multiplexing capability of the
endpoint on that link; component links are multiplex capable, whereas ports are not multiplex
capable.
• Local TE Link Id—Select an identifier for one of the local TE links that has already been created.
• Remote CRS Port Id—Select one of the available remote Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 ports for
the data link. This option is not available if you are creating a data link between two
Cisco ONS 15454 nodes.
• Remote Port Id—Enter an unsigned 32-bit value (such as 0x00000001) to identify the remote node
identifier for the other end of the data link. This option is not available if you have chosen the
automatic LMP configuration in the “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000
Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters” task on page 15-50.
Step 4 Click OK to accept the parameters you have entered and create the data link, or click Cancel to return
to the Data Links tab without creating a data link.
Step 5 If you are creating a data link that involves a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and if you have
chosen the automatic LMP configuration in the “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR
9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters” task on page 15-50, a confirmation dialog box is
displayed to indicate that this operation will also change the configuration of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco
ASR 9000 router. Click Yes.
Purpose This task creates, edits, or deletes one or more data links, which define the
node’s transport parameters. CTC supports up to 256 LMP data links.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network, page 15-33
DLP-G372 Enable LMP, page 15-41
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 6 If you created a data link, verify that the parameters for the new data link now appear properly in the
Data Links tab.
Step 7 After the data link has been created, observe its status in the Operational State column of the Data Links
tab, and take the appropriate action as shown in the following list:
• Up–Alloc or Up–Free—If the data link state does not transition to Up–Alloc or Up–Free, verify that
the port is in service. Verification must be done using the CTC card view > Provisioning tab for the
cards. (The difference between Up–Alloc and Up–Free is that an Up–Alloc data link is allocated for
data traffic. An Up–Free data link is not allocated for traffic. The far end is either not ready to
receive traffic through this port, or the path is being used as a backup in case some other allocated
data link goes down).
• Down—The data link will be in the Down state if the port is not unlocked or not in-service. Verify
that the remote port ID for the far-end data link is correct. On the far end, verify that the data link
is using the local port ID as its remote port ID.
Step 8 To delete a data link, click the data link row to highlight it and click Delete. A confirmation dialog box
appears that allows you to click OK or Cancel.
Step 9 To edit a data link, click the data link row to highlight it and click Edit. A dialog box appears that allows
you to change the data link parameters. You can then click OK or Cancel. If you are editing a data link
that involves a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router, a confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click
Yes.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco
CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Node
Note This procedure is normally required only when the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node must run traffic to
and from a Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to a DWDM node on the network.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series
Router Parameters” task on page 15-50 to configure the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router
parameters.
Purpose This procedure configures LMP on the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node
and on the corresponding Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 physical layer
interface module (PLIM) port.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Series
Router and Verify Configuration” task on page 15-51 to establish a Telnet session with the Cisco CRS-1
or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G510 Create a Task Group, User Group, and User Account on the Cisco CRS-1 or
Cisco ASR 9000 Series Router” task on page 15-52 to create task groups, user groups, and user accounts
on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Step 5 If you have chosen the automatic LMP configuration in Step 2, complete the “NTP-G234 Automatically
Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco
ONS 15454 DWDM Node” procedure on page 15-48.
If you have chosen the manual LMP configuration in Step 2, complete the “NTP-G207 Manually
Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco
ONS 15454 DWDM Node” procedure on page 15-49.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G234 Automatically Configure Link Management Protocol
on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS
15454 DWDM Node
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G372 Enable LMP, page 15-41 to enable the LMP function on the DWDM node.
Step 2 Complete the DLP-G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels, page 15-42 to create the LMP
control channel between the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and the DWDM node.
Step 3 Complete the DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links, page 15-45 to create TE links between
the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and the DWDM node.
Step 4 Complete the DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links, page 15-46 to create a data link,
which define the node’s transport parameters.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure automatically configures LMP on the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM node and on the corresponding Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
PLIM port.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or
Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node,
page 15-47
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
NTP-G207 Manually Configure Link Management Protocol on
the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS
15454 DWDM Node
Note For more information about the Cisco IOS XR commands used in the DLPs, see the Cisco IOS XR
Command Reference publication at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5845/products_product_indices_list.html.
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G372 Enable LMP, page 15-41 to enable the LMP function on the DWDM node.
Step 2 Complete the DLP-G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels, page 15-42 to create the LMP
control channel between the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and the DWDM node.
Step 3 Complete the DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links, page 15-45 to create TE links between
the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router and the DWDM node.
Step 4 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > TE Links tab and write down the
value of the Local TE Link field so that it can be used later.
Step 5 Complete the DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links, page 15-46 to create a data link,
which define the node’s transport parameters.
Step 6 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > Data Links tab and write down the
value of the Local Port Id field so that it can be used later.
Step 7 Complete the DLP-G482 Configure a Static Route, page 15-55 to configure a static route.
Step 8 Complete the DLP-G483 Configure Local and Remote TE Links, page 15-56 to configure the local and
remote TE links.
Step 9 Complete the DLP-G484 Enable the LMP Message Exchange, page 15-58 to enable LMP message
exchange with the LMP neighbor.
Step 10 In node view, click the Provisioning > Comm Channels > LMP > Data Links tab and from the Local
Port field, write down the card and the port involved in the LMP link. Double-click the card involved
in the LMP link. In card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs and write down
the value of the Actual Wavelength field for the port involved in the LMP link.
Step 11 Complete the DLP-G511 Configure the Wavelength on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router,
page 15-59 to configure the wavelength on the PLIM port of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Purpose This procedure manually configures LMP on the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM node and on the corresponding Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
PLIM port.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or
Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node,
page 15-47
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 12 If you need RADIUS AAA services, complete the DLP-G494 Configure the RADIUS Server,
page 15-61 to configure a RADIUS server.
Step 13 Complete the DLP-G485 Enable Index Persistency on an SNMP Interface, page 15-62 to enable index
persistency on an SNMP interface.
Step 14 Complete the DLP-G486 Configure the LMP Router ID, page 15-63 to configure LMP router ID.
Step 15 Complete the DLP-G487 Configure the 10 Gigabit Ethernet (GE) or POS Interface, page 15-64 to
configure an interface and specify the IPv4 address for the interface.
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform DLP-G482,
DLP-G483, DLP-G484, DLP-G494, DLP-G485, and DLP-G486. The task privileges required to
perform these DLPs are similar to the privileges required for automatic LMP configuration.
Step 16 Complete the DLP-G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information, page 15-65 to display the
interface resource or a summary of link management information.
Step 17 Complete the DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links, page 15-45 to edit the TE link created
in Step 3. Change the Remote TE Link ID value to the value (Local TE Link ID) noted in Step 1 of the
DLP-G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information, page 15-65.
Step 18 Complete the DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links, page 15-46 to edit the data link
created in Step 5. Change the Remote Port Id value to the value (Local Data Link ID) noted in Step 1 of
the DLP-G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information, page 15-65.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or
Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters
Step 1 From the Edit menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, click the Router tab.
Purpose This task configures the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or
Cisco 7600 series router.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network, page 15-33.
• (Cisco CRS-1 and Cisco ASR 9000 series routers only) DLP-G372
Enable LMP, page 15-41.
• DLP-G46 Log into CTC.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 3 (Cisco CRS-1 and Cisco ASR 9000 series routers only) Leave the Skip automatic LMP configuration on
routers check box unchecked if you want CTC to automatically configure an interface on the Cisco
CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router for the data link. Check this check box if you want to manually
configure an interface on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router.
Step 4 In the Router login area, enter the following:
• Username—Specify the name of the user on the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000, or Cisco 7600
router.
• Password—Specify the user password.
• Confirm Password—Specify the password again to confirm it.
Note If you leave the Username and Password fields blank, the CTC login information (username and
password) will be used for the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 series, or Cisco 7600 series router.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
Series Router and Verify Configuration
Purpose This task establishes a Telnet session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 router and verifies the node configuration, SSH, and/or XML module
configuration.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 telnet {ip-address | host-name}
Example:
router# telnet 10.58.41.169
Establishes a Telnet session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
router. When the session is established, you can log in with the
root-system username and password. After you log in, the router
displays the CLI prompt for the Cisco IOS XR software.
Step 2 show install active summary
Example:
router# show install active summary
Displays a summary of the active packages in a system or secure
domain router. Ensure that the output of the show install active
summary command includes the following lines:
hfr-mpls-3.9.x
hfr-k9sec-3.9.x
hfr-mgbl-3.9.x15-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G510 Create a Task Group, User Group, and User Account on the Cisco
CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Series Router
Note Only users who have permission to create new task groups and configure required task privileges, or a
system administrator, can perform this task.
Step 3 show running-config
Example:
router# show running-config
Displays the contents of the currently running configuration and
verifies that Extensible Markup Language (XML) agent service and
Secure Shell (SSH) client are installed on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco
ASR 9000 router. Ensure that the output of the show running-config
command includes the following lines:
ssh server v2
ssh server session-limit sessions
ssh server rate-limit maxsessions_per_minute
vty-pool default first-vty last-vty line-template default
xml agent tty
If the output does not contain the above lines, check the SSH and/or
XML module configuration. Refer to Cisco IOS XR System Security
Command Reference and Cisco IOS XR System Management
Command Reference for details about SSH and XML configuration.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task creates task groups, user groups, and user accounts on the Cisco
CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 series router.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose15-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 taskgroup taskgroup-name
Example:
router# taskgroup ipodwdmop
Creates a new task group and enters task group configuration
submode.
If you have chosen the automatic LMP configuration in the
DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or
Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters, page 15-50, perform Step 3. If
you have chosen the manual LMP configuration in the DLP-G508
Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or
Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters, page 15-50, perform Step 4.
Step 3 task {read | write | execute | debug}
taskid-name
Example:
router(config-tg)# task read cef
Specifies a task ID to be associated with the task group named in
Step 2. Task IDs grant permission to perform certain tasks.
Ensure that you specify the following task IDs to set up required
privileges for the automatic LMP configuration:
task read cef
task read dwdm
task read ouni
task read snmp
task read static
task read sysmgr
task read logging
task read mpls-te
task read network
task read interface
task read basic-services
task write dwdm
task write ipv4
task write ouni
task write snmp
task write static
task write mpls-te
task write network
task write interface
Step 4 task {read | write | execute | debug}
taskid-name
Example:
router(config-tg)# task read cef
Specifies a task ID to be associated with the task group named in
Step 2. Task IDs grant permission to perform certain tasks.
Ensure that you specify the following task IDs to set up required
privileges for the manual LMP configuration:
task read cef
task read dwdm
task read ouni
task read snmp
task read static
task read sysmgr
task read logging
task read mpls-te
task read network
task read interface
task read basic-services
task write interface15-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 5 end
Example:
router(config-tg)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to commit
the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes to the
running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 6 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 7 usergroup usergroup-name
Example:
router# usergroup ipodwdmop
Creates a new user group and enters user group configuration
submode.
Step 8 taskgroup taskgroup-name
Example:
router(config-ug)# taskgroup ipodwdmop
Associates the user group named in Step 7 with the task group named
in this step. The user group takes on the configuration attributes (task
ID list and permissions) already defined for the entered task group.
Step 9 end
Example:
router(config-ug)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to commit
the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes to the
running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 10 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 11 username user-name
Example:
router# username user123
Creates a name for a new user (or identifies a current user) and enters
username configuration submode. The user-name argument can be
only one word. Spaces and quotation marks are not allowed.
Note The user that you specify for this command must be the user
you have specified in the DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco
CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router
Parameters, page 15-50.
Step 12 password {0 | 7} password
Example:
router(config-un)# password 0 passwd
Specifies a password for the user named in Step 11. Entering 0
following the password command specifies that an unencrypted
(clear-text) password follows. Entering 7 following the password
command specifies that an encrypted password follows.
Step 13 group group-name
Example:
router(config-un)# group ipodwdmop
Assigns the user named in Step 11 to a user group that has already
been defined through the usergroup command in Step 7.
• The user takes on all attributes of the user group, as defined by
that user group's association to various task groups.
• Each user must be assigned to at least one user group. A user may
belong to multiple user groups.
Command or Action Purpose15-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G482 Configure a Static Route
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note In the examples shown in this task, the IP address of the DWDM node is 10.58.41.22 and the IP address
of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router is 10.58.41.169. To remove the static route configuration,
use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information about the Cisco IOS XR
commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5845/products_product_indices_list.html.
Step 14 end
Example:
router(config-ug)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to commit
the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes to the
running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 15 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to configure a static route.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 router static
Example:
router(config)# router static
Enters static router configuration mode.
Step 3 address-family ipv4 unicast
Example:
router(config-static)# address-family ipv4
unicast
Enters address family configuration mode while configuring static
routes.15-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G483 Configure Local and Remote TE Links
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note In the examples shown in this task, the IP address of the DWDM node is 10.58.41.22 and the IP address
of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router is 10.58.41.169. To remove the local and remote TE link
configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information about the
Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5845/products_product_indices_list.html.
Step 4 destination-prefix prefix-mask {ip-address
| interface-type interface-instance}
Example:
router(config-static-afi)# 10.58.41.22/32
MgmtEth 0/RP0/CPU0/0
Establishes static routes in address family configuration mode.
Specify the following options for this command:
• destination-prefix—IP route prefix for the destination (that is,
DWDM node involved in the LMP link).
• prefix-mask—Prefix mask for the destination. The network
mask can be specified as either a four-part, dotted-decimal
address or can be indicated as a slash (/) and number.
• ip-address—(Optional) IP address of the next hop that can be
used to reach that network. The IP address is required, not
optional, if the interface type and number are not specified.
You can specify an IP address and an interface type and
interface number.
• interface-type—(Optional) Interface type.
• interface-instance—(Optional) Either a physical interface
instance or a virtual interface instance.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the management interface that connects the CRS-1 or ASR
9000 router to the DWDM node.
Step 5 end
Example:
router(config-static-afi)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to configure the local and remote TE links.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose15-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 mpls traffic-eng interface interface-type
interface-instance
Example:
router(config)# mpls traffic-eng interface
TenGigE 0/1/0/1
Enables Multiprotocol Label Switching-Traffic Engineering
(MPLS-TE) on an interface and enters MPLS-TE interface
submode.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the optical interface related to the PLIM port involved in
the LMP link.
Step 3 lmp data-link adjacency
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-if)# lmp data-link
adjacency
Enters the LMP neighbor adjacency configuration mode.
Step 4 neighbor neighbor-name
Example:
router(config-mpls-ouni-if-adj)# neighbor
10.58.41.22
Associates an interface with a given LMP neighbor.
Step 5 remote te-link-id unnum identifier
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-if-adj)# remote
te-link-id unnum 1
Configures the LMP neighbor remote TE link ID.
Note Specify the value (converted to decimal format) noted in
Step 4 of NTP-G207 Manually Configure Link
Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node,
page 15-49 for the te-link-id unnum identifier keywords
and argument.
Step 6 remote interface-id unnum identifier
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-if-adj)# remote
interface-id unnum 57410
Configures the LMP neighbor remote interface identifier.
Note Specify the value (converted to decimal format) noted in
Step 6 of NTP-G207 Manually Configure Link
Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node,
page 15-49 for the interface-id unnum identifier
keywords and argument.
Step 7 remote switching-capability fsc
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-if-adj)# remote
switching-capability fsc
Configures the LMP neighbor remote TE interface switching
capability.
Step 8 end
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-if-adj)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —15-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G484 Enable the LMP Message Exchange
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note In the examples shown in this task, the IP address of the DWDM node is 10.58.41.22 and the IP address
of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router is 10.58.41.169. To remove the LMP message exchange
configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information about the
Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5845/products_product_indices_list.html.
Purpose This task explains how to enable the LMP message exchange with the LMP
neighbor.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 mpls traffic-eng signalling advertise
explicit-null
Example:
router(config)# mpls traffic-eng
signalling advertise explicit-null
Specifies that tunnels terminating on a router use explicit-null
labels.
Step 3 mpls traffic-eng lmp neighbor
neighbor-name
Example:
router(config)# mpls traffic-eng lmp
neighbor 10.58.41.22
Configures or updates a new or existing LMP neighbor.
Step 4 ipcc routed
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-nbr-10.58.41.22)#
ipcc routed
Configures a routed Internet Protocol Control Channel (IPCC) for
the LMP neighbor.15-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G511 Configure the Wavelength on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
Router
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note To remove the wavelength setting, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more
information about the Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5845/products_product_indices_list.html.
Step 5 remote node-id ip-address
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-nbr-10.58.41.22)#
remote node-id 10.58.41.22
Configures the remote node ID for the LMP neighbor (DWDM
node).
Step 6 end
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-nbr-10.58.41.22)#
end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to configure the wavelength on the PLIM port of
the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose15-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 show controllers dwdm interface-instance
wavelength-map
Example:
router# show controllers dwdm 0/1/0/0
wavelength-map
Displays the wavelength information of an interface.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the optical interface related to the PLIM port involved in
the LMP link.
The output of the show command will include the following lines:
Wavelength band: C-band
MSA ITU channel range supported: 3~84
03 196.00 1529.553
----------------------------------------
04 195.95 1529.944
----------------------------------------
05 195.90 1530.334
----------------------------------------
06 195.85 1530.725
----------------------------------------
From the output of the show command, write down the channel
number of the wavelength that matches that of the wavelength
noted in Step 10 of NTP-G207 Manually Configure Link
Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000
Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node, page 15-49.
Step 2 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 3 controller dwdm interface-instance
Example:
router(config)# controller dwdm 0/1/0/0
Configures the DWDM controller.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the optical interface related to the PLIM port involved in
the LMP link.
Step 4 wavelength channel-number
Example:
router(config)# wavelength 04
Configures a specific wavelength to the DWDM controller.
Note The channel number that you specify for this command
must be the value noted down in Step 1.
Step 5 end
Example:
router(config-mpls-te-nbr-10.58.41.22)#
end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —15-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G494 Configure the RADIUS Server
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note In the examples shown in this task, the IP address of the RADIUS server is 10.58.39.57. To remove the
RADIUS server configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information
about the Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference document.
Purpose This task explains how to configure the RADIUS server.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
For details on configuring a node for RADIUS authentication, see the
DLP-G281 Configure the Node for RADIUS Authentication task. See the
User Guide for Cisco Secure ACS for Windows Server for more
information about configuring the RADIUS server.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 radius-server host ip-address [auth-port
port-number] [acct-port port-number] [key
string]
Example:
router(config)# radius-server host
10.58.39.57 auth-port 1812 acct-port 1813
key 7 12485043475F
Specifies the RADIUS server host.
Step 3 aaa group server radius group-name
Example:
router(config)# aaa group server radius
radgroup1
Groups different RADIUS server hosts into distinct lists and
enters server group configuration mode.
Step 4 server ip-address [auth-port port-number]
[acct-port port-number]
Example:
router(config-sg-radius)# server
10.58.39.57 auth-port 1812 acct-port 1813
Associates a particular RADIUS server with a defined server
group.15-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G485 Enable Index Persistency on an SNMP Interface
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note To remove the index persistency configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For
more information about the Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference
document.
Step 5 end
Example:
router(config-sg-radius)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 6 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 7 aaa authentication login {{console |
default} {group group_name | local |
none}}
Example:
router(config)# aaa authentication login
default group radgroup1 local
Configures the authentication method used for login to the Virtual
Firewall (VFW) application CLI.
Step 8 end
Example:
router(config-if)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to enable index persistency on a Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) interface.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose15-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G486 Configure the LMP Router ID
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note In the examples shown in this task, the IP address of the DWDM node is 10.58.41.22 and the IP address
of the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router is 10.58.41.169. To remove the LMP router ID
configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more information about the
Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference document.
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 snmp-server interface interface-type
interface-instance
Example:
router(config)# snmp-server interface
TenGigE 0/1/0/1
Enables an interface to send SNMP trap notifications and enters
SNMP interface configuration mode.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the optical interface related to the PLIM port involved in
the LMP link.
Step 3 index persistence
Example:
router(config-snmp-if)# index persistence
Enables index persistency on an SNMP interface. This command
must be performed to ensure that the LMP IDs are persistent even
after a system reload.
Step 4 end
Example:
router(config-snmp-if)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to configure the LMP router ID.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G487 Configure the 10 Gigabit Ethernet (GE) or POS Interface
Note Only users with proper task privileges, or a system administrator, can perform this task.
Note To remove the POS interface configuration, use the no form of the Cisco IOS XR command. For more
information about the Cisco IOS XR commands, see the Cisco IOS XR Command Reference document.
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 mpls traffic-eng lmp router-id ip-address
Example:
router(config)# mpls traffic-eng lmp
router-id 10.58.41.169
Configures the LMP router ID.
Step 3 end
Example:
router(config)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task explains how to configure the 10 GE or POS interface.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
DLP-G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Step 2 interface interface-type
interface-instance
Example:
router(config)# interface TenGigE 0/1/0/1
Enters interface configuration mode.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the optical interface related to the PLIM port involved in
the LMP link.
Step 3 ipv4 point-to-point
Example:
router(config-if)# ipv4 point-to-point
Configures a 10 GE interface to act as a point-to-point interface.
Note For a POS interface, skip this step and continue with
Step 4.
Step 4 ipv4 unnumbered interface-type
interface-instance
Example:
router(config-if)# ipv4 unnumbered MgmtEth
0/RP0/CPU0/0
Specifies the MPLS-TE tunnel IPv4 address for the interface.
Note The interface that you specify for this command must be
the management interface that connects the CRS-1 or ASR
9000 router to the DWDM node.
Step 5 end
Example:
router(config-if)# end
Saves configuration changes.
When you enter the end command, the system prompts you to
commit the changes. Enter yes to save the configuration changes
to the running configuration file and return to the EXEC mode.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This task displays the interface resource or a summary of link management
information.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR
9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration, page 15-51
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
NTP-G303 Configure Virtual links on the Cisco 7600 and
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node
Note This procedure is normally required only when the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node must run traffic to
and from a Cisco 7600 router.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G711 Configure SSH Server on Cisco 7600 Series Nodes” task on page 15-67.
Step 2 To enable IPoDWDM using the Cisco 7600 series router, add the attribute “ctc.isC7600Supported=1”
in the /users//.ctcrc file. This should be done prior to launching CTC. By default,
IPoDWDM using the Cisco 7600 series router is disabled.
Step 3 If you need RADIUS AAA services, configure a RADIUS server. For more information, see
“Configuring RADIUS”.
Step 4 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to a DWDM node on the network.
Step 5 Configure the Cisco 7600 series router parameters in CTC. See “DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1,
Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters” task on page 15-50”.
Step 6 Add a Cisco 7600 series node to the DWDM network in CTC. See DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current
Session or Login Group.
Step 7 Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 to bring up the second Cisco 7600 series node in the network.
Step 8 Create Provisionable Patchcords between the Cisco 7600 series and DWDM nodes. See “NTP-G184
Create a Provisionable Patchcord” task on page 16-72.”
Step 9 Create an Optical Channel (OCH) trail between the two Cisco 7600 series nodes. See “DLP-G395 Create
an Optical Channel Trail” task on page 16-34”. After creating the OCH trails, traffic can be transmitted
between the Cisco 7600 nodes.
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 show mpls traffic-eng lmp interface
[interface-type interface-instance]
Example:
router(config-if)# show mpls traffic-eng
lmp interface TenGigE 0/1/0/1
Displays the interface resource or a summary of link management
information. From the output of the show command, write down
the value of the Local TE Link ID and the Local Data Link ID
parameters.
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). —
Purpose This procedure configures virtual links on the Cisco 7600 and the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G711 Configure SSH Server on Cisco 7600 Series Nodes
Note The user ID and password configured on the ONS 15454 and Cisco 7600 nodes must be the same.
Purpose This procedure configures the Secure Shell (SSH) server and performs
node authentication for Cisco 7600 series nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Command or Action Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal
Example:
router# configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
• Enter your password if prompted.
Step 2 shell processing full
Example:
router(config)# shell processing full
Enables shell processing.
Step 3 hostname host-name
Example:
router(config)# hostname test124
Configures the host name on the Cisco 7600 series router.
Step 4 aaa new-model
Example:
router(config)# aaa new-model
Enables authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA).
Step 5 username username password password
Example:
router(config)# username cisco password
cisco123
Enables the local username and password on the Cisco 7600 series
router to be used in the absence of other AAA statements. 15-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 6 username username privilege
privilege-level
Example:
router(config)# username cisco
privilege 1
Assigns user name and privilege levels to the CTC user.
Step 7 ip domain-name domain-name
Example:
router(config)# ip domain-name
rtp.cisco.com
Configures the DNS domain of the Cisco 7600 series router.
Step 8 crypto key generate rsa
Example:
router(config)# crypto key generate rsa
Generates the SSH key that is used with the SSH server.
Step 9 ip ssh version 2
Example:
router(config)# ip ssh version 2
Specifies that version 2 of SSH is configured on the Cisco 7600 series
router.
Step 10 ip ssh time-out seconds
Example:
router(config)# ip ssh time-out 60
Indicates the time interval that the Cisco 7600 series router waits for
the SSH client to respond. This setting applies to the SSH negotiation
phase. When the EXEC session starts, the standard timeouts
configured for the vty apply. The value can range from 1 to 120
seconds.
Step 11 ip ssh authentication-retries integer
Example:
router(config)#ip ssh
authentication-retries 2
Indicates the number of attempts after which the interface is reset.
The number of retries can range from 0 to 5.
Step 12 line vty 0 4
Example:
router(config)#line vty 0 4
Indicates that five terminal sessions are possible.
Step 13 transport input ssh
Example:
router(config-line)# transport input
ssh
Disables telnet mode and enables the SSH mode to login to the
Cisco 7600 series router.
Command or Action Purpose15-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
NTP-G57 Create a Logical Network Map
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task at a node on the network where you want to create the
network map. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Change the position of the nodes in the network view according to your site plan:
a. Click a node to select it, then drag and drop the node icon to a new location.
b. Repeat Step a for each node that you need to position.
Step 4 On the network view map, right-click and choose Save Node Position from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Click Yes in the Save Node Position dialog box.
CTC opens a progress bar and saves the new node positions.
Note Retrieve, Provisioning, and Maintenance users can move nodes on the network map, but only
Superusers can save new network map configurations. To restore the view to a previously saved
version of the network map, right-click the network view map and choose Reset Node Position.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G325 View the Power Levels of Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP
Nodes
Purpose This procedure allows a Superuser to create a consistent network view for
all nodes on the network, meaning that all users see the same network view
on their login nodes.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures This procedure assumes that network turn-up is complete.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This procedure displays the power levels of the ports of the ONS 15454
MSTP nodes that traverse through an OCH or OCHNC trail using the
Photonic Path Trace (PPT). The results are displayed in a histogram.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to an ONS 15454 MSTP node on the network.
Step 2 In the network view, node view (single-node mode), multishelf view (multishelf mode), or card view
click the Circuits tab.
Note An OCHNC or OCH trail circuit must exist on the optical path on which PPT is launched.
Step 3 Select the OCH trail and click Edit. The Edit Circuit window appears.
Step 4 In the Edit Circuit window, click the Photonic Path Trace tab.
Step 5 Click Start to start the PPT. The PPT creates a histogram that displays the power levels of the nodes
versus the threshold levels.
Note The circuit must be in the DISCOVERED state to start the PPT.
Step 6 Click Export to export the data in the form of HTML.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP
Network
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to an ONS 15454 MSTP node on the network.
Step 2 To assign, modify, delete, or reset the SRLG attributes for the nodes or links, perform the following
steps:
a. Click the Manage SRLGs option in the Tools > Manage IPoDWDM menu. The SRLG Management
wizard appears.
b. Choose one of the following options from the Select Type drop-down list:
– Manage Node SRLG—To add or update the node SRLGs.
– Manage Link SRLG—To add or update the link SRLGs.
c. Click Next.
Purpose This procedure provisions Shared Risk Link Groups (SRLGs) for MSTP
nodes and spans of the currently managed network using the SRLG
management wizard. The SRLG information can be synchronized on Cisco
CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 routers and viewed as reports.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
d. In the Manage SRLG page, complete the following fields:
– If you chose the Manage Node SRLG option in Step b., select the node from the Node
drop-down list. If you the chose Manage Link SRLG option in Step b., select the span from
the Link drop-down list.
– In the Unique SRLG field, an SRLG number is displayed. You can edit the value. If the SRLG
value already exists, a message is displayed.
To reset the SRLG value, click Set Default. A confirmation box is displayed. Click Yes.
Note The unique SRLG range is from 0 to 4294967294.
– To add an additional SRLG, type a numeric value in the Additional SRLG field and click Add.
If the SRLG value already exists, a message is displayed.
Note A maximum of 20 SRLGs can be added to the SRLG list.
– To delete an additional SRLG, choose the value from the SRLG list and click Delete. To reset
the value, click Set Default. A confirmation box is displayed. Click Yes.
e. Click Finish to exit the wizard.
Step 3 To view the SRLG values of the nodes and links, perform the following steps:
• To view the SRLG values for the OTS, OSC, or PPC links, go to the Network view and right-click
the link, or place the mouse pointer over the link to see the SRLG value as a tooltip.
• To view the node SRLG values, click the Provisioning > General tab in the node view (single-shelf
mode) or shelf view (multishelf view).
Step 4 To synchronize the SRLG information on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 router, go to Network
view, right-click the router and choose Synchronise IPoDWDM from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G540 View SRLG Reports” section on page 15-71 to view SRLG reports.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G540 View SRLG Reports
Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC task to log in to an ONS 15454 MSTP node on the network.
Purpose This task explains how to view SRLG reports.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Network,
page 15-70
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher15-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4
78-20254-02
Chapter 15 Turn Up a Network
Before You Begin
Step 2 To view the SRLG reports, perform the following steps:
• To view the consolidated SRLG report, click the Consolidated SRLG Report option in the Tools
> Manage IPoDWDM > SRLG Report menu. The report displays the following information:
– Resource Name—Displays the node name or link name.
– Resource Type—Displays the resource type (node or link).
– Unique SRLG—Displays the unique SRLG value.
– Additional SRLG—Displays additional SRLG values.
• To view the detailed SRLG report, click the Detailed SRLG Report option in the Tools > Manage
IPoDWDM > SRLG Report menu. The report displays the following information:
– Resource Name—Displays the node name or link name.
– Resource Type—Displays the resource type (node or link).
– SRLG Id—Displays the SRLG value.
– SRLG Type—Displays the SRLG type (unique or additional).
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Americas Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 527-0883
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide
Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6
Product and Software Release 9.2
July 2012
Text Part Number: 78-19286-02THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL
STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT
SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE
OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required
to correct the interference at their own expense.
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not
installed in accordance with Cisco’s installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Modifying the equipment without Cisco’s written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class A or Class B digital
devices. In that event, your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations, and you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television
communications at your own expense.
You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its
peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:
• Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.
• Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio.
• Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio.
• Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equipment and the television or radio are on circuits
controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.)
Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public
domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH
ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF
DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO
OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this
URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership
relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R)
Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses. Any examples, command display output, and figures included in the
document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and coincidental.
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
Copyright © 2004–2012 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.iii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
CONTENTS
Preface lxix
Revision History lxx
Document Objectives lxxiii
Audience lxxiii
Document Organization lxxiii
Related Documentation lxxv
Document Conventions lxxv
Obtaining Optical Networking Information lxxxi
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information lxxxi
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM lxxxi
Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelines i-lxxxii
CHAPTER 1 Install the CiscoONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf 1-1
CHAPTER 2 Install the Control Cards 2-1
NTP- G15 Install the Common Control Cards 2-1
DLP- G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card 2-2
DLP- G34 Install the AIC-I Card 2-6
DLP- G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card 2-7
NTP- G313 Install and Configure the TNC or TSC Card 2-8
DLP- G604 Install the TNC or TSC Card 2-9
DLP- G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC Card 2-12
DLP- G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC Card 2-12
CHAPTER 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI 3-1
Before You Begin 3-1
NTP- G17 Set Up Computer for CTC 3-2
DLP- G37 Run the CTC Installation Wizard for Windows PCs 3-3
DLP- G38 Run the CTC Installation Wizard for Solaris Workstations 3-6
DLP- G52 Change the JRE Version 3-9
NTP- G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454 3-9
DLP- G39 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 on the Same Subnet Using
Static IP Addresses 3-12Contents
iv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G40 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol 3-15
DLP- G41 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Automatic Host
Detection 3-19
DLP- G42 Set Up a Solaris Workstation for a Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 3-23
NTP- G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection to the ONS 15454 3-25
DLP- G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows) 3-26
DLP- G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris) 3-27
NTP- G21 Log into the GUI 3-28
DLP- G331 Adjust the Java Virtual Memory Heap Size (Windows) 3-29
DLP- G46 Log into CTC 3-30
DLP- G47 Install Public-Key Security Certificate 3-32
DLP- G48 Create Login Node Groups 3-33
DLP- G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group 3-34
DLP- G50 Delete a Node from the Current Session or Login Group 3-35
DLP- G51 Delete a Node from a Specific Login Node Group 3-36
DLP- G53 Configure the CTC Alerts Dialog Box for Automatic Popup 3-36
DLP- G448 Designate ONS 15454 SOCKS GNEs 3-37
NTP- G190 Use the CTC Launcher Application to Manage Multiple ONS Nodes 3-38
DLP- G440 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Software CD 3-39
DLP- G441 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Node 3-39
DLP- G442 Connect to ONS Nodes Using the CTC Launcher 3-40
DLP- G443 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using the CTC Launcher 3-41
DLP- G444 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC 3-42
DLP- G445 View TL1 Tunnel Information 3-43
DLP- G446 Edit a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC 3-44
DLP- G447 Delete a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC 3-45
DLP- G449 Install or Reinstall the CTC JAR Files 3-46
DLP- G450 Configuring Windows Vista or Windows 7 to Support CTC 3-46
CHAPTER 4 Turn Up a Node 4-1
Before You Begin 4-1
NTP- G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files 4-3
NTP- G22 Verify Common Card Installation 4-7
NTP- G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information 4-8
NTP- G144 Provision a Multishelf Node 4-10
NTP- G23 Create Users and Assign Security 4-12
DLP- G54 Create a New User on a Single Node 4-13
DLP- G55 Create a New User on Multiple Nodes 4-14Contents
v
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G24 Set Up Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information 4-15
NTP- G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds 4-17
NTP- G26 Set Up CTC Network Access 4-18
DLP- G56 Provision IP Settings 4-19
DLP- G439 Provision the Designated SOCKS Servers 4-23
DLP- G57 Set the IP Address, Default Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD 4-24
DLP- G264 Enable Node Security Mode 4-26
DLP- G58 Create a Static Route 4-28
DLP- G59 Set Up or Change Open Shortest Path First Protocol 4-29
DLP- G60 Set Up or Change Routing Information Protocol 4-32
NTP- G194 Set Up EMS Secure Access to the ONS 15454 4-33
NTP- G27 Set Up the ONS 15454 for Firewall Access 4-33
NTP- G28 Create FTP Host 4-34
DLP- G61 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 15454 4-35
DLP- G62 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the CTC Computer 4-36
NTP- G132 Provision OSI 4-37
DLP- G283 Provision OSI Routing Mode 4-38
DLP- G284 Provision the TARP Operating Parameters 4-39
DLP- G285 Add a Static TID-to-NSAP Entry to the TARP Data Cache 4-41
DLP- G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry 4-42
DLP- G288 Provision OSI Routers 4-43
DLP- G289 Provision Additional Manual Area Addresses 4-44
DLP- G290 Enable the OSI Subnet on the LAN Interface 4-44
DLP- G291 Create an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel 4-45
NTP- G29 Set Up SNMP 4-47
NTP- G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration File 4-49
DLP- G351 Delete a Card in CTC 4-53
DLP- G353 Preprovision a Slot 4-55
NTP- G320 Configure the Node as a Non-DWDM Network 4-59
DLP- G693 Configure the Amplifier 4-59
DLP- G694 Configure the PSM 4-60
NTP- G328 Add and Delete ANS Parameters 4-61
DLP- G541 Add an ANS Parameter 4-62
DLP- G542 Delete an ANS Parameter 4-63
NTP- G30 Install the DWDM Cards 4-64
DLP- G348 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout Report 4-66
NTP- G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units 4-67Contents
vi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP
Cards 4-69
DLP- G63 Install an SFP or XFP 4-71
DLP- G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot 4-73
DLP- G64 Remove an SFP or XFP 4-74
NTP- G123 Install the Filler Cards 4-75
NTP- G239 Add and Delete Passive Units 4-76
DLP- G543 Add Passive Units Manually 4-76
DLP- G544 Delete a Passive Unit 4-77
NTP- G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs 4-78
DLP- G349 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report 4-80
NTP- G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes 4-82
DLP- G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the
Standard Patch Panel Tray 4-85
DLP- G316 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray 4-89
DLP- G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the
Deep Patch Panel Tray 4-90
DLP- G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-93
DLP- G428 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE
Cards in an Expanded ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-95
DLP- G357 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray or 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-97
DLP- G530 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or 80-WXC-C Cards in a
ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 15216-MD-40 or 15216-MD-48 Patch Panel Tray 4-99
NTP- G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes 4-101
DLP- G430 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards in a Mesh Node to the
40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-102
DLP- G431 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards in a Mesh Node to a
Mesh Patch Panel Tray 4-104
NTP- G191 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on Passthrough ROADM Nodes 4-105
NTP- G141 Install Fiber-Optic Cables for Y-Cable Protection Modules 4-108
DLP- G375 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf 4-109
DLP- G376 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the Y-Cable Module Tray 4-110
NTP- G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords 4-113
NTP- G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually 4-114
DLP- G354 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Trunk to Trunk (L2) Option 4-115
DLP- G547 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter Option 4-116
DLP- G548 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter Option 4-118
DLP- G549 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OTS to OTS Option 4-120Contents
vii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G531 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Optical Path Option 4-122
DLP- G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord 4-123
NTP- G209 Create, Edit, and Delete Optical Sides 4-123
DLP- G491 Create an Optical Side 4-124
DLP- G492 Edit an Optical Side 4-125
DLP- G480 Delete an Optical Side 4-125
NTP- G38 Provision OSC Terminations 4-126
NTP- G37 Run Automatic Node Setup 4-127
NTP- G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power 4-129
DLP- G314 Verify OSCM Transmit Power 4-130
NTP- G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode 4-131
NTP- G210 Provision Node for SNMPv3 4-133
NTP- G211 Provision Node to Send SNMPv3 Traps 4-134
NTP- G212 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3 4-135
NTP- G213 Automatically Provision a GNE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3 4-136
NTP- G214 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE using SNMPv3 4-136
NTP- G215 Automatically Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE Using
SNMPv3 4-137
DLP- G496 Create an SNMPv3 User 4-138
DLP- G497 Create MIB Views 4-139
DLP- G498 Create Group Access 4-139
DLP- G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination 4-140
DLP- G500 Delete SNMPv3 Trap Destination 4-141
DLP- G501 Create Notification Filters 4-142
DLP- G502 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table 4-142
DLP- G503 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table 4-143
DLP- G504 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table 4-144
DLP- G505 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table 4-145
CHAPTER 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests 5-1
Before You Begin 5-1
NTP- G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance Test 5-3
DLP- G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing 5-5
DLP- G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power 5-6
DLP- G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power 5-7
DLP- G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power 5-8
DLP- G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power 5-8Contents
viii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G168 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance
Test 5-9
NTP- G42 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test 5-12
DLP- G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power 5-16
NTP- G167 Perform the Terminal Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 5-17
NTP- G153 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test 5-22
DLP- G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card for Acceptance Testing 5-26
DLP- G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power 5-27
DLP- G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power 5-27
DLP- G361 Verify the 32DMX-L Power 5-28
NTP- G43 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test 5-29
DLP- G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels 5-33
DLP- G311 Verify the Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS Cards 5-41
DLP- G312 Verify the Side A ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS Cards 5-46
NTP- G154 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test 5-51
DLP- G362 Verify ROADM Node L-Band Pass-Through Channels 5-56
DLP- G363 Verify the Side B ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels 5-64
DLP- G364 Verify the Side A ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels 5-69
NTP- G180 Perform the ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 5-74
DLP- G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards 5-79
DLP- G311 Verify the Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards 5-87
DLP- G312 Verify the Side A ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards 5-92
NTP- G276 Perform the 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node Acceptance Tests 5-97
NTP- G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test 5-101
NTP- G45 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test 5-104
NTP- G155 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test 5-108
NTP- G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 5-111
NTP- G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 5-115
NTP- G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test 5-120
NTP- G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test 5-124
NTP- G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards 5-128
DLP- G85 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards 5-130
DLP- G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Express Power 5-131
DLP- G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Express Power 5-131
DLP- G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Common Power 5-132
DLP- G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Common Power 5-132Contents
ix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections 5-133
DLP- G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power 5-134
DLP- G90 Verify an AD-xB-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power 5-135
DLP- G91 Verify an AD-xC-xx.x Pass-Through Connection 5-136
DLP- G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power 5-137
DLP- G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards 5-138
NTP- G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards 5-140
DLP- G86 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards 5-142
DLP- G83 Verify the OSC-CSM Power on OADM Nodes 5-143
DLP- G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards 5-144
NTP- G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards 5-146
NTP- G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel Acceptance Test 5-148
DLP- G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength 5-158
DLP- G433 Record Transponder Optical Power 5-159
NTP- G187 Perform the Multiring Site Acceptance Test 5-160
DLP- 434 Record the OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value 5-165
DLP- 435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters 5-166
DLP- 436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value 5-167
NTP- G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test 5-168
NTP- G189 Perform the Node Upgrade Acceptance Test 5-173
NTP- G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards
Acceptance Test 5-181
NTP- G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test 5-185
CHAPTER 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards 6-1
Before You Begin 6-1
NTP- G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules 6-3
DLP- G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode 6-4
DLP- G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode 6-6
DLP- G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode 6-8
DLP- G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port 6-9
DLP- G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode 6-10
DLP- G277 Provision a Multirate PPM 6-11
DLP- G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services 6-12
DLP- G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate 6-14
DLP- G280 Delete a PPM 6-19
NTP- G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group 6-21Contents
x
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card 6-24
NTP- G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-26
DLP- G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-27
NTP- G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter
Thresholds 6-28
DLP- G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 6-29
DLP- G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 6-30
DLP- G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 6-33
DLP- G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-34
DLP- G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings 6-35
DLP- G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G
FC/FICON Payloads 6-38
DLP- G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-39
DLP- G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-41
DLP- G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 6-45
NTP- G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds 6-48
DLP- G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate 6-49
DLP- G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate 6-50
DLP- G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 6-50
DLP- G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 6-52
DLP- G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 6-56
DLP- G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-58
DLP- G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads
Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy 6-59
DLP- G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
Payloads 6-62
DLP- G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-66
DLP- G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-67
DLP- G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 6-69
NTP- G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters,
and Thresholds 6-74
DLP- G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group 6-75
DLP- G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings 6-76
DLP- G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings 6-77
DLP- G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings 6-83
DLP- G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads 6-84
DLP- G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload 6-88
DLP- G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-91
DLP- G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-92Contents
xi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings 6-93
NTP- G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-98
DLP- G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings 6-99
DLP- G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings 6-101
DLP- G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-103
DLP- G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings 6-105
DLP- G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-107
DLP- G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings 6-108
DLP- G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-111
DLP- G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-112
DLP- G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings 6-114
NTP- G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-119
DLP- G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings 6-120
DLP- G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings 6-122
DLP- G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings 6-124
DLP- G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-126
DLP- G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-128
DLP- G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 6-129
DLP- G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON
Payloads 6-131
DLP- G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-133
DLP- G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-134
NTP- G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-137
DLP- G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings 6-138
DLP- G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings 6-140
DLP- G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-142
DLP- G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings 6-143
DLP- G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-145
DLP- G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 6-146
DLP- G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or
ISC/ISC3 Payloads 6-148
DLP- G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-151
DLP- G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-152
DLP- G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings 6-156
NTP- G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-159
DLP- G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings 6-160
DLP- G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings 6-161
DLP- G667 Change the 40G Muxponder Line SONET (OC-192) or SDH (STM-64), or Ethernet Line
Settings 6-163
DLP- G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-167Contents
xii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 6-168
DLP- G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC
Payloads 6-170
DLP- G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-174
DLP- G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-176
DLP- G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings 6-179
NTP- G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings 6-182
DLP- G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC 6-183
DLP- G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC 6-184
DLP- G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC 6-188
Before You Begin 6-189
DLP- G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC 6-189
DLP- G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC 6-190
DLP- G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Using CTC 6-191
DLP- G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 6-192
DLP- G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 6-192
NTP- G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings 6-193
DLP- G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC 6-194
DLP- G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC 6-195
DLP- G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 6-196
Before You Begin 6-196
DLP- G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 6-197
DLP- G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 6-198
DLP- G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 6-199
DLP- G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 6-199
DLP- G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using
CTC 6-200
DLP- G629 Create a MEP Using CTC 6-201
DLP- G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC 6-202
DLP- G631 Create a MIP Using CTC 6-202
DLP- G632 Delete a MIP Using CTC 6-203
DLP- G633 Ping MEP Using CTC 6-204
DLP- G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC 6-205
NTP- G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings 6-206
DLP- G639 Enable or Disable EFM for Each Port Using CTC 6-206
Before You Begin 6-207
DLP- G640 Configure EFM Parameters Using CTC 6-207Contents
xiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G641 Configure EFM Link Monitoring Parameters Using CTC 6-209
DLP- G642 Enable Remote Loopback for Each Port Using CTC 6-210
NTP- G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings 6-211
DLP- G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC 6-212
DLP- G645 Create a Segment Using CTC 6-213
Before You Begin 6-213
DLP- G646 Edit a Segment Using CTC 6-215
DLP- G647 Activate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC 6-215
DLP- G648 Deactivate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC 6-216
NTP- G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings,
and PM Thresholds 6-217
DLP- G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings 6-218
DLP- G684 Provision the GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings 6-226
DLP- G685 Provision the GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings 6-228
DLP- G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection
Settings 6-230
DLP- G507 Enable a Different GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master
Card 6-231
DLP- G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI
Ports 6-233
DLP- G383 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service
Settings 6-234
DLP- G470 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Class of Service (CoS)
Settings 6-235
DLP- G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings 6-235
DLP- G221 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards 6-237
DLP- G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
CTC 6-238
DLP- G385 Provision the MAC Filter Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Card 6-239
NTP- G237 Retrieve and Clear MAC Addresses on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards 6-240
DLP- G546 View Card MAC Addresses on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-241
NTP- G311 Provision the Storm Control Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards 6-241
NTP- G205 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-243
DLP- G509 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 6-243
NTP- G289 Provision CVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 6-244
NTP- G208 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 6-245Contents
xiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G515 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card
Using CTC 6-246
DLP- G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile 6-246
NTP- G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-247
DLP- G511 Enable IGMP Snooping, IGMP Fast Leave and IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 6-248
NTP- G206 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 6-249
DLP- G513 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC 6-250
DLP- G386 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-251
DLP- G387 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-252
DLP- G388 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card RMON Thresholds 6-254
DLP- G389 Change the Gigabit Ethernet Optical Transport Network Settings 6-257
NTP- G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring 6-260
DLP- G687 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Facing Master Card on a FAPS Ring 6-261
DLP- G688 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Between the Slave Cards on a FAPS Ring 6-262
NTP- G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 6-263
DLP- G453 Change the OTU2_XP Card Settings 6-264
DLP- G454 Change the OTU2_XP Line Settings 6-265
DLP- G455 Change the OTU2_XP Line Section Trace Settings 6-269
DLP- G456 Change the OTU2_XP Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads 6-270
DLP- G457 Provision the OTU2_XP Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-272
DLP- G462 Change the OTU2_XP Line RMON Thresholds for the 10G Ethernet and 10G FC
Payloads 6-274
DLP- G458 Change the OTU2_XP OTN Settings 6-277
DLP- G523 Change the OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings 6-283
DLP- G524 Provision the OTU2_XP Path Settings for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy
Configuration 6-284
NTP- G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings 6-285
NTP- G192 Force FPGA Update 6-286
NTP- G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group 6-288
NTP- G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator 6-289
CHAPTER 7 Turn Up a Network 7-1
Before You Begin 7-1
NTP- G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up 7-2
NTP- G52 Verify Node-to-Node Connections 7-3
NTP- G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link 7-4
DLP- G468 Configure the Raman Pump Using the Installation Wizard 7-4
DLP- G474 Configure the Raman Pump by Importing the CTP XML File 7-19Contents
xv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G489 Configure the Raman Pump by Setting the ANS Parameters Manually 7-20
DLP- 490 Restore Raman Link After a Fiber Cut Occurs 7-21
NTP- G53 Set Up Timing 7-22
DLP- G95 Set Up External or Line Timing 7-22
DLP- G96 Set Up Internal Timing 7-25
DLP- G350 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report 7-26
NTP- G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network 7-27
NTP- G56 Verify the OSNR 7-32
NTP- G142 Perform a Protection Switch Test 7-33
NTP- G164 Configure Link Management Protocol 7-35
DLP- G372 Enable LMP 7-36
DLP- G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels 7-36
DLP- G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links 7-39
DLP- G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links 7-40
NTP- G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Node 7-42
NTP- G234 Automatically Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 Router and the Cisco
ONS 15454 DWDM Node 7-42
NTP- G207 Manually Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 Router and the Cisco ONS
15454 DWDM Node 7-43
DLP- G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1 Router Parameters 7-44
DLP- G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 Router and Verify Configuration 7-45
DLP- G510 Create a Task Group, User Group, and User Account on the Cisco CRS-1 Router 7-46
DLP- G482 Configure a Static Route 7-49
DLP- G483 Configure Local and Remote TE Links 7-50
DLP- G484 Enable the LMP Message Exchange 7-52
DLP- G511 Configure the Wavelength on the Cisco CRS-1 Router 7-53
DLP- G494 Configure the RADIUS Server 7-55
DLP- G485 Enable Index Persistency on an SNMP Interface 7-56
DLP- G486 Configure the LMP Router ID 7-57
DLP- G487 Configure the 10 Gigabit Ethernet (GE) or POS Interface 7-58
DLP- G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information 7-59
NTP- G57 Create a Logical Network Map 7-60
NTP- G325 View the Power Levels of Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Nodes 7-61
NTP- G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Network 7-62
DLP- G540 View SRLG Reports 7-63
CHAPTER 8 Create Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords 8-1
Before You Begin 8-1Contents
xvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G151 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Client Connections 8-2
DLP- G104 Assign a Name to a Port 8-3
DLP- G345 Verify OCHCC Client Ports 8-4
DLP- G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections 8-4
DLP- G689 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections on OTU2_XP Cards 8-10
DLP- G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections 8-11
DLP- G424 Edit an OCHCC Circuit Name 8-12
DLP- G394 Change an OCHCC Administrative State 8-13
DLP- G437 Set OCH Circuit Attributes 8-14
DLP- G438 Set OCH Routing Preferences 8-15
NTP- G178 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Trails 8-16
DLP- G395 Create an Optical Channel Trail 8-17
DLP- G418 Delete an Optical Channel Trail 8-19
DLP- G425 Edit an OCH Trail Circuit Name 8-20
DLP- G419 Change an OCH Trail Administrative State 8-21
NTP- G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections 8-21
DLP- G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections 8-23
DLP- G493 Provision Protected Optical Channel Network Connections 8-25
DLP- G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections 8-26
DLP- G426 Edit an OCHNC Circuit Name 8-27
DLP- G420 Change an OCHNC Administrative State 8-28
NTP- G200 Create, Delete, and Manage STS or VC Circuits for the ADM-10G Card 8-29
DLP- G463 Create an Automatically Routed STS or VC Circuit 8-29
DLP- G464 Create a Manually Routed STS or VC Circuit 8-33
DLP- G465 Provision Path Protection Selectors 8-36
DLP- G466 Delete an STS or VC Circuit 8-37
DLP- G467 Edit an STS or VC Circuit Name 8-38
NTP- G150 Upgrade Optical Channel Network Connections to Optical Channel Client Connections 8-39
DLP- G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords 8-41
NTP- G183 Diagnose and Fix OCHNC and OCH Trail Circuits 8-43
NTP- G58 Locate and View Optical Channel Circuits 8-45
DLP- G100 Search for Optical Channel Circuits 8-45
DLP- G101 View Optical Channel Circuit Information 8-46
DLP- G102 Filter the Display of Optical Channel Circuits 8-49
DLP- G103 View Optical Channel Circuits on a Span 8-51
NTP- G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord 8-52
NTP- G181 Manage GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card SVLAN Databases 8-58
DLP- G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database 8-58
DLP- G422 Load or Merge an SVLAN Database 8-60Contents
xvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G60 Create and Delete Overhead Circuits 8-61
DLP- G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations 8-61
DLP- G97 Provision a Proxy Tunnel 8-63
DLP- G98 Provision a Firewall Tunnel 8-64
DLP- G108 Change the Service State for a Port 8-65
DLP- G109 Provision Orderwire 8-66
DLP- G110 Create a User Data Channel Circuit 8-67
DLP- G112 Delete Overhead Circuits 8-68
NTP- G62 Create a J0 Section Trace 8-69
NTP- G203 Create End-to-End SVLAN Circuits 8-70
DLP- G472 Edit the End-to-End SVLAN Circuit 8-72
NTP- G229 Provision DCN Extension for a Network Using GCC/DCC 8-72
DLP- G472 Merge two OCHNC DCN Circuits 8-73
NTP- G245 Create an Automatically Routed VCAT Circuit 8-74
NTP- G246 Create a Manually Routed VCAT Circuit 8-77
NTP- G247 Enable or disable Path Performance Monitoring on Intermediate Nodes 8-80
DLP- G551 Provision ADM-10G Ethernet Ports 8-80
DLP- G553 Create a Server Trail 8-81
DLP- G554 Repair Server Trails 8-83
DLP- G555 Provision a VCAT Circuit Source and Destination 8-84
DLP- G556 Provision an Open VCAT Circuit Source and Destination 8-85
DLP- G557 Provision a VCAT Circuit Route 8-86
CHAPTER 9 Monitor Performance 9-1
Before You Begin 9-1
NTP- G73 Change the PM Display 9-2
DLP- G131 Refresh PM Counts at 15-Minute Intervals 9-3
DLP- G132 Refresh PM Counts at One-Day Intervals 9-4
DLP- G133 View Near-End PM Counts 9-5
DLP- G134 View Far-End PM Counts 9-5
DLP- G135 Reset Current PM Counts 9-6
DLP- G136 Clear Selected PM Counts 9-7
DLP- G410 Clear All PM Thresholds 9-8
DLP- G137 Set the Auto-Refresh Interval for Displayed PM Counts 9-9
DLP- G138 Refresh PM Counts for a Different Port 9-10
NTP- G279 Monitor TNC Card Performance 9-10
DLP- G607 View Optics PM Parameters for the TNC Card 9-11
DLP- G608 View Payload PM Parameters for the TNC Card 9-11
DLP- G686 Set the TNC Card RMON Thresholds for the FE/ONE_GE Ethernet Payloads 9-12Contents
xviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance 9-15
DLP- G139 View PM Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards 9-16
DLP- G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards 9-16
DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX,
32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE
Cards 9-20
DLP- G479 View Optical Power Statistics for the PSM Card 9-21
DLP- G276 View Optical Power Statistics for 4MD-xx.x Cards 9-21
DLP- G142 View Power Statistics for AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, and AD-4C-xx.x Cards 9-22
DLP- G143 View Power Statistics for AD-1B-xx.x and AD-4B-xx.x Cards 9-23
DLP- G525 View Optical Power Statistics for TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards 9-24
DLP- G475 View the PM Parameters for All Facilities 9-25
NTP- G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 9-26
DLP- G390 View Ethernet Statistic PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
Cards 9-27
DLP- G391 View Ethernet Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
Cards 9-28
DLP- G392 View Ethernet History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
Cards 9-28
DLP- G393 Refresh Ethernet PM Counts at a Different Time Interval for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
and 10GE_XPE Cards 9-29
DLP- G146 View Optics PM Parameters 9-30
DLP- G147 View Payload PM Parameters 9-30
DLP- G148 View OTN PM Parameters 9-32
DLP- G149 View Payload Statistics PM Parameters 9-33
DLP- G150 View Payload Utilization PM Parameters 9-33
DLP- G151 View Payload History PM Parameters 9-34
DLP- G152 View Payload SONET/SDH PM Parameters 9-35
NTP- G193 Enable or Disable AutoPM 9-35
CHAPTER 10 Manage Alarms 10-1
Before You Begin 10-1
NTP- G63 Document Existing Provisioning 10-2
DLP- G113 Print CTC Data 10-3
DLP- G114 Export CTC Data 10-4
NTP- G64 View Alarms, History, Events, and Conditions 10-6
DLP- G115 View Alarms 10-7
DLP- G116 View Alarm or Event History 10-8
DLP- G117 Change the Maximum Number of Session Entries for Alarm History 10-10
DLP- G118 Display Alarms and Conditions Using Time Zone 10-11Contents
xix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G119 Synchronize Alarms 10-12
DLP- G120 View Conditions 10-12
NTP- G65 Delete Cleared Alarms from Display 10-14
NTP- G66 View Alarm-Affected Circuits 10-15
NTP- G67 View Alarm Counts on the LCD for a Node, Shelf, Slot, or Port 10-15
NTP- G68 Create, Download, and Assign Alarm Severity Profiles 10-17
DLP- G121 Create a New or Cloned Alarm Severity Profile 10-18
DLP- G122 Download an Alarm Severity Profile 10-20
DLP- G123 Apply Alarm Profiles to Ports 10-21
DLP- G124 Apply Alarm Profiles to Cards and Nodes 10-22
DLP- G125 Delete Alarm Severity Profiles 10-23
NTP- G69 Enable, Modify, or Disable Alarm Severity Filtering 10-24
DLP- G126 Enable Alarm Filtering 10-25
DLP- G127 Modify Alarm, Condition, and History Filtering Parameters 10-25
DLP- G128 Disable Alarm Filtering 10-26
NTP- G70 Suppress Alarms or Discontinue Alarm Suppression 10-27
DLP- G129 Suppress Alarm Reporting 10-28
DLP- G130 Discontinue Alarm Suppression 10-29
NTP- G72 Provision External Alarms and Controls on the Alarm Interface Controller-International
Card 10-30
NTP- G277 Provision Alarms and Controls on the TNC or TSC Card 10-32
CHAPTER 11 Manage the Node 11-1
Before You Begin 11-1
NTP- G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC 11-2
NTP- G77 Manage Automatic Power Control 11-4
DLP- G157 Disable Automatic Power Control 11-4
DLP- G158 Enable Automatic Power Control 11-5
DLP- G430 Run Automatic Power Control 11-6
DLP- G159 View Node-Level Automatic Power Control Information 11-7
DLP- G431 View Network-Level Automatic Power Control Information 11-8
NTP- G78 View Side Power Monitoring 11-9
NTP- G80 Change Node Management Information 11-11
DLP- G160 Change the Node Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information 11-12
DLP- G161 Change the Login Legal Disclaimer 11-13
NTP- G134 Modify OSI Provisioning 11-14
DLP- G284 Modify the TARP Operating Parameters 11-15
DLP- G286 Remove a Static TID to NSAP Entry from the TARP Data Cache 11-17Contents
xx
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry 11-17
DLP- G292 Remove a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry 11-18
DLP- G293 Change the OSI Routing Mode 11-19
DLP- G294 Edit the OSI Router Configuration 11-20
DLP- G295 Edit the OSI Subnetwork Point of Attachment 11-21
DLP- G296 Edit an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel 11-22
DLP- G297 Delete an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel 11-23
NTP- G81 Change CTC Network Access 11-23
DLP- G162 Change IP Settings 11-24
DLP- G265 Lock Node Security 11-25
DLP- G266 Modify Backplane Port IP Settings in Security Mode 11-26
DLP- G267 Disable Secure Mode 11-28
DLP- G163 Modify a Static Route 11-29
DLP- G164 Delete a Static Route 11-30
DLP- G165 Disable OSPF 11-30
DLP- G167 Delete a Firewall Tunnel 11-31
NTP- G82 Customize the CTC Network View 11-31
DLP- G168 Change the Network View Background Color 11-32
DLP- G169 Change the Default Network View Background Map 11-32
DLP- G170 Apply a Custom Network View Background Map 11-33
DLP- G171 Create Domain Icons 11-34
DLP- G172 Manage Domain Icons 11-34
DLP- G173 Enable Dialog Box Do-Not-Display Option 11-36
DLP- G174 Switch Between TDM and DWDM Network Views 11-36
DLP- G330 Consolidate Links in Network View 11-37
NTP- G83 Modify or Delete Card Protection Settings 11-40
DLP- G175 Modify a Y-Cable Protection Group 11-40
DLP- G176 Modify a Splitter Protection Group 11-41
DLP- G177 Delete a Y-Cable Protection Group 11-42
DLP- G459 Delete a Splitter Protection Group 11-43
NTP- G84 Initiate and Clear Y-Cable and Splitter External Switching Commands 11-43
DLP- G178 Apply a Manual Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch 11-44
DLP- G179 Apply a Force Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch 11-45
DLP- G180 Clear a Manual or Force Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch 11-45
DLP- G181 Apply a Lock-On 11-46
DLP- G182 Apply a Lockout 11-47
DLP- G183 Clear a Lock-On or Lockout 11-47
NTP- G85 Modify or Delete OSC Terminations, DCC/GCC Terminations, and Provisionable
Patchcords 11-48Contents
xxi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G184 Change a DCC/GCC Termination 11-49
DLP- G185 Delete a DCC/GCC Termination 11-49
DLP- G186 Delete an OSC Termination 11-50
DLP- G187 Delete a Provisionable Patchcord 11-51
NTP- G86 Convert a Pass-Through Connection to Add/Drop Connections 11-52
NTP- G87 Change Node Timing Parameters 11-53
NTP- G88 Modify Users and Change Security 11-55
DLP- G188 Change Security Policy for a Single Node 11-56
DLP- G189 Change Security Policy for Multiple Nodes 11-57
DLP- G317 Change Node Access and PM Clearing Privilege 11-58
DLP- G328 Grant Superuser Privileges to a Provisioning User 11-59
DLP- G191 Change User Password and Security Level on a Single Node 11-60
DLP- G192 Change User Password and Security Level for Multiple Nodes 11-61
DLP- G193 Delete a User From a Single Node 11-62
DLP- G194 Delete a User From Multiple Nodes 11-63
DLP- G195 Log Out a User on a Single Node 11-63
DLP- G196 Log Out a User on Multiple Nodes 11-64
DLP- G281 Configure the Node for RADIUS Authentication 11-65
DLP- G282 View and Terminate Active Logins 11-66
NTP- G89 Change SNMP Settings 11-67
DLP- G197 Modify SNMP Trap Destinations 11-68
DLP- G198 Delete SNMP Trap Destinations 11-69
NTP- G231 View Optical Power Values and Alarms Using the Network Functional View 11-69
DLP- G529 Export Network Functional View Reports 11-70
CHAPTER 12 Change DWDM Card Settings 12-1
Before You Begin 12-1
NTP- G90 Modify OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-2
DLP- G199 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line Settings 12-3
DLP- G200 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line SONET/SDH Thresholds 12-5
DLP- G201 Change Optical Line Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards 12-7
DLP- G202 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM Optical Line Threshold Settings 12-8
DLP- G203 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM ALS Maintenance Settings 12-12
NTP- G91 Modify OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-13
DLP- G204 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-14
DLP- G205 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-15
DLP- G206 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-19
DLP- G207 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-21
DLP- G322 Change the OPT-BST ALS Maintenance Settings 12-25Contents
xxii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds 12-27
DLP- G323 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C,
and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-28
DLP- G324 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-30
DLP- G325 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-33
DLP- G326 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C,
OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-35
DLP- G538 Change Optical Raman Line Settings for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE
Amplifiers 12-39
DLP- G539 Change Optical Raman Line Threshold Settings for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE
Amplifiers 12-40
DLP- G327 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings of OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 12-42
NTP- G202 Modify PSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-44
DLP- G514 Change the PSM Card Mode 12-44
DLP- G476 Change Optical Line Settings for the PSM Card 12-45
DLP- G477 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for the PSM Card 12-46
DLP- G478 Change the PSM ALS Maintenance Settings 12-49
NTP- G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and
4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds 12-51
DLP- G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C,
40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-52
DLP- G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-54
DLP- G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C,
40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-57
DLP- G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-59
NTP- G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM
Thresholds 12-62
DLP- G212 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel
Parameters 12-63
DLP- G213 Change the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel
Thresholds 12-66
DLP- G214 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line
Parameters 12-70
DLP- G215 Change the 32WSS, 32-WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line
Thresholds 12-71
NTP- G240 Modify TDC-CC and TDC-FC Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-73
DLP- G545 Modify the Chromatic Dispersion Value for the TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 12-74Contents
xxiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G528 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for TDC-CC or TDC-FC Card 12-75
NTP- G174 Modify the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-76
DLP- G603 Change the 80-WXC-C Card Mode 12-77
DLP- G406 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card Optical Channel Parameters 12-78
DLP- G407 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Thresholds 12-81
DLP- G408 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Parameters 12-84
DLP- G409 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Thresholds 12-86
DLP- G413 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card WXC Line Parameters 12-88
DLP- G429 Multiplex a Single Wavelength on 40-WXC-C Card 12-90
NTP- G241 Modify the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-91
DLP- G532 Change Optical Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-92
DLP- G533 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-94
DLP- G534 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-98
DLP- G535 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C
Cards 12-100
DLP- G536 Change 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Parameters 12-105
DLP- G537 Change the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Optical Channel Thresholds 12-107
NTP- G149 Modify the MMU Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-111
DLP- G342 Change MMU Optical Line Parameters 12-111
DLP- G343 Change the MMU Optical Line Thresholds 12-113
NTP- G101 Modify Alarm Interface Controller–International Settings 12-114
DLP- G245 Change External Alarms Using the AIC-I Card 12-115
DLP- G246 Change External Controls Using the AIC-I Card 12-116
DLP- G247 Change AIC-I Card Orderwire Settings 12-117
NTP- G102 Change Card Service State 12-117
NTP- G280 Modify Threshold Settings for the TNC Card 12-118
DLP- G609 Modify Optical Threshold Settings for the TNC Card 12-119
DLP- G610 Modify Line Threshold Settings for the TNC Card 12-120
CHAPTER 13 Upgrade, Add, and Remove Cards and Nodes 13-1
Before You Begin 13-1
NTP- G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards 13-2
DLP- G254 Place Amplifier Ports Out of Service 13-4
DLP- G318 Place Amplifier Ports In Service 13-5
NTP- G127 Add an AD-xC-xx.x Card to an OADM Node 13-6
NTP- G129 Add a DWDM Node 13-9
NTP- G130 Remove a DWDM Node 13-11
NTP- G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node 13-13Contents
xxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node 13-16
NTP- G173 Convert an OADM Node to a ROADM Node 13-18
NTP- G176 Convert an Line Amplifier Node to an OADM Node 13-21
NTP- G182 Convert a Line Amplifier Node to a ROADM Node 13-23
NTP- G195 Convert a Protected ROADM Node from two Separate Nodes to a Single Multishelf
Node 13-25
NTP- G177 Upgrade ANS Parameters on a DWDM Node 13-32
NTP- G242 Modify the CD setting of TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 13-33
DLP- G526 Modify the CD Value of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC When Connected to OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-PRE, 40-SMR-1 and 40-SMR-2 Cards 13-34
DLP- G527 Modify the CD Value of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards When Connected to OPT-RAMP-C
and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 13-34
NTP- G278 Upgrade the TSC Card to the TNC Card 13-35
CHAPTER 14 Maintain the Node 14-1
Before You Begin 14-1
NTP- G103 Back Up the Database 14-2
NTP- G104 Restore the Database 14-3
NTP- G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration 14-5
DLP- G248 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software
(Windows) 14-6
DLP- G249 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (UNIX) 14-8
NTP- G133 View and Manage OSI Information 14-10
DLP- G298 View IS-IS Routing Information Base 14-10
DLP- G299 View ES-IS Routing Information Base 14-11
DLP- G300 Manage the TARP Data Cache 14-12
NTP- G106 Reset Cards Using CTC 14-13
DLP- G250 Reset the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC Card 14-13
DLP- G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC 14-14
NTP- G108 Viewing the Audit Trail Records 14-15
NTP- G109 Off-Load the Audit Trail Record 14-16
NTP- G110 Off-Load the Diagnostics File 14-17
NTP- G112 Change the Node Timing Reference 14-18
DLP- G259 Manual or Force Switch the Node Timing Reference 14-18
DLP- G260 Clear a Manual or Force Switch on a Node Timing Reference 14-19
NTP- G113 View the ONS 15454 Timing Report 14-20
NTP- G114 Inspect, Clean, and Replace the Air Filter 14-23
NTP- G274 Replace the Air Filter of the ONS 15454M2 Shelf Assembly 14-26Contents
xxv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP- G262 Replace the Air Filter of the ONS 15454M6 Shelf Assembly 14-28
NTP- G263 Replace the Air Filter of the AC Power Module in the ONS 15454M6 Shelf Assembly 14-30
NTP- G115 Clean Fiber Connectors 14-31
DLP- G261 Clean Multi Fiber-Optic Cable Connectors 14-32
DLP- G262 Clean Fiber Connectors with CLETOP 14-33
DLP- G263 Clean the Fiber Adapters 14-33
NTP- G40 Replace the Front Door 14-34
NTP- G116 Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly 14-36
NTP- G272 Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly of the ONS 15454M2 Shelf Assembly 14-41
NTP- G260 Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly of the ONS 15454M6 Shelf Assembly 14-43
NTP- G117 Replace the ANSI Shelf Alarm Interface Panel 14-45
NTP- G118 Replace the ANSI Shelf Plastic Lower Backplane Cover 14-48
NTP- G135 Edit Network Element Defaults 14-50
NTP- G136 Import Network Element Defaults 14-51
NTP- G137 Export Network Element Defaults 14-52
NTP- G166 View the Facilities 14-53
NTP- G119 Power Down the Node 14-53
APPENDIX A CTC Information and Shortcuts A-1
A.1 Multishelf and Single-Shelf Modes A-1
A.2 Display CTC Views A-2
A.3 Node Icons on the Network View Map A-3
A.4 Manage the CTC Window A-6
A.4.1 CTC Menu and Toolbar Options A-6
A.4.2 CTC Mouse Options A-11
A.4.3 Multishelf View Shortcuts A-13
A.4.4 Node View (Single-Shelf Mode) and Shelf View (Multishelf Mode) Shortcuts A-13
A.4.5 Network View Tasks A-14
A.4.6 Table Display Options A-15
A.5 Equipment Inventory A-16
A.6 Facilities View A-17
CHAPTER B Configuring GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-1
Before You Begin B-1
NTP- G222 Access PCLI Text Interface B-2
NTP- G223 Create a Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-4Contents
xxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G517 Create an Ingress Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards Using
PCLI B-4
DLP- G518 Create a Egress Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-5
DLP- G519 Create a Service Instance Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-7
DLP- G520 Apply an Ingress Policy to a Port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-8
DLP- G521 Apply an Egress Policy to a Port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-9
DLP- G522 Apply a Service Instance Policy to a Port on GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-9
NTP- G226 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI B-11
NTP- G216 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-12
NTP- G225 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using
PCLI B-13
NTP- G220 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-14
NTP- G217 Enable IGMP Fast-Leave Processing on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-15
NTP- G218 Configure a Multicast Router Port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-16
NTP- G219 Enable IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-17
NTP- G224 Enable MVR on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-18
NTP- G227 Create SVLAN for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-19
NTP- G228 Create a Service Instance Using PCLI B-20
NTP- G282 Configure the Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-23
DLP- G619 Create a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-24
DLP- G620 Add Ports to a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-25
NTP- G286 Configure EFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-26
DLP- G643 Enable EFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-26
DLP- G644 Configure the EFM Mode on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-27
NTP- G284 Configure CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-28
DLP- G635 Enable CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-29
DLP- G636 Create a Maintenance Domain on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI B-29Contents
xxvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP- G637 Create a Maintenance Intermediate Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards Using PCLI B-30
DLP- G638 Create a Maintenance End Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI B-31
NTP- G288 Configure REP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-32
DLP- G649 Create a Segment on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-33
DLP- G650 Configure STCN on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-34
DLP- G651 Configure Preemption Delay on the Primary Edge Port Using PCLI B-35
DLP- G652 Configure VLAN Load Balancing on the Primary Edge Port Using PCLI B-36
I NDEXContents
xxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02FIGURES
xxix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Figure 2-1 Installing TNC Card on ONS 15454 M6 Shelf 2-11
Figure 3-1 Login Node Group 3-34
Figure 4-1 Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout - ONS 15454 4-5
Figure 4-2 Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout - ONS 5454M2 4-6
Figure 4-3 Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout - ONS 15454M6 4-6
Figure 4-4 Selecting the IP Address Option—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly 4-25
Figure 4-5 Changing the IP Address—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly 4-25
Figure 4-6 Selecting the Save Configuration Option—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly 4-26
Figure 4-7 Saving and Rebooting the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly 4-26
Figure 4-8 Nodes Behind a Firewall 4-34
Figure 4-9 CTC Computer and ONS 15454 Nodes Residing Behind Firewalls 4-34
Figure 4-10 Creating an SNMP Trap 4-47
Figure 4-11 Managing Cables on the Front Panel 4-79
Figure 4-12 Fiber-Storage Tray 4-80
Figure 4-13 Using the Patch Panel Latches to Slide the Patch Panel Away from the Tray 4-86
Figure 4-14 MPO Cable 4-87
Figure 4-15 Rear View of the Patch Panel 4-88
Figure 4-16 Top View of the Patch Panel Bar 4-88
Figure 4-17 Front View of the Patch Panel 4-89
Figure 4-18 Deep Patch Panel Tray 4-91
Figure 4-19 Deep Patch Panel Port Wavelengths 4-92
Figure 4-20 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray, Side View 4-93
Figure 4-21 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray, Top View 4-94
Figure 4-22 40-Channel (15454-PP-80) Patch Panel Port Wavelengths 4-96
Figure 4-23 Managing Cables on the Front Panel 4-106
Figure 4-24 Fiber-Storage Tray 4-107
Figure 4-25 Y-Cable Protection Port Label 4-111
Figure 4-26 Y-Cable Protection Module Tray 4-112
Figure 6-1 Single-Span Topology 6-13
Figure 6-2 Point-to-Point Topology 6-13Figures
xxx
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Figure 6-3 Hubs with No Line Amplifiers 6-14
Figure 6-4 Hubs with Line Amplifiers 6-14
Figure 7-1 Network View of Nodes (Terminal or ROADM) 7-6
Figure 7-2 Installing the Raman Pump on a Single Span 7-7
Figure 7-3 Installing the Raman Pump on Multiple Spans 7-7
Figure 7-4 Selecting Spans for Raman Amplification 7-8
Figure 7-5 Setting Raman Calibration Parameter 7-9
Figure 7-6 Bidirectional Path Is Unchecked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Checked 7-11
Figure 7-7 Bidirectional Path Is Unchecked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Unchecked 7-12
Figure 7-8 Bidirectional Path Is Checked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Checked 7-13
Figure 7-9 Bidirectional Path Is Checked and MUX/DMUX Present Is Unchecked 7-14
Figure 7-10 Calibrating Raman Amplification 7-15
Figure 7-11 Calibrating Raman Amplification 7-16
Figure 7-12 Raman Amplification Results 7-17
Figure 7-13 Force Raman Calibration 7-19
Figure 8-1 Upgrade OCHNC Initialization—Completed 8-40
Figure 8-2 Upgrade OCHNC Initialization—Failed 8-41
Figure 8-3 Viewing the Provisionable Patchcords Table 8-42
Figure 10-1 CTC Preferences Dialog Box 10-11
Figure 10-2 Shelf LCD Panel—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly 10-16
Figure 11-1 Optical Side A Power levels of a Four-degree ROADM Node 11-11
Figure 11-2 Unconsolidated Links in the Network View 11-38
Figure 11-3 Consolidated Links in the Network View 11-38
Figure 11-4 Network View with Local Link Consolidation 11-39
Figure 13-1 ROADM Node 1 Shelf View 13-26
Figure 13-2 ROADM Node 1 Functional View 13-26
Figure 13-3 ROADM Node 2 Shelf View 13-28
Figure 13-4 ROADM Node 2 Functional View 13-28
Figure 13-5 Final Multishelf View of the Node 13-30
Figure 14-1 ANSI Shelf Fan-Tray Air Filter in an External Filter Bracket (Front Door Removed) 14-24
Figure 14-2 ETSI Shelf Fan-Tray Air Filter in an External Filter Bracket (Front Door Removed) 14-25
Figure 14-3 Replacing the Air Filter 14-27
Figure 14-4 Replacing the Air Filter 14-27
Figure 14-5 Replacing the Air Filter 14-28
Figure 14-6 Extracting the Air Filter 14-29Figures
xxxi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Figure 14-7 Replacing the Air Filter 14-29
Figure 14-8 Replacing the Air Filter—AC Power Module 14-31
Figure 14-9 Installing the Door Ground Strap Retrofit Kit 14-34
Figure 14-10 Shelf Assembly with Door Ground Strap Retrofit Kit Installed (ANSI) 14-35
Figure 14-11 Removing or Replacing the Fan-Tray Assembly (Front Door Removed) (ANSI) 14-39
Figure 14-12 Removing or Replacing the Fan-Tray Assembly (Front Door Removed) (ETSI) 14-40
Figure 14-13 Fan-Tray Assembly installed in the ONS 15454M2 Shelf Assembly 14-41
Figure 14-14 Fan -Tray Extracted Partially with Power Connector Disconnected 14-42
Figure 14-15 Fan-Tray Extracted 14-42
Figure 14-16 Extract the Fan-Tray Assembly 14-44
Figure 14-17 Fan-Tray Assembly Extracted Partially with Power Connector Disconnected 14-44
Figure 14-18 Fan-Tray Extracted 14-45
Figure 14-19 Attaching Plastic Lower Backplane Cover 14-49Figures
xxxii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02TABLES
xxxiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 3-1 CTC Computer Setup for Local Craft Connections to the ONS 15454 3-10
Table 3-2 TL1 Tunnels Window 3-43
Table 4-1 Cisco TransportPlanner Node Setup Information and Files 4-4
Table 4-2 NE Update Wizard Options 4-52
Table 4-3 CTC Add Card Shortcut Menu for DWDM Cards 4-56
Table 4-4 Values for the ANS Parameters (amplifier) 4-60
Table 4-5 Values for the ANS Parameters (PSM) 4-61
Table 4-6 Cable Connections for Y-Cable Protection of One Client Signal 4-109
Table 4-7 Cable Connections for Y-Cable Protection of a Second Client Signal 4-109
Table 5-1 32WSS Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist 5-30
Table 5-2 32WSS-L Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist 5-53
Table 5-3 40-WSS-C Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist 5-76
Table 5-4 From COM-RX Side A Verification 5-149
Table 5-5 From COM-RX Side B Verification 5-150
Table 5-6 From COM-RX Side C Verification 5-150
Table 5-7 From COM-RX Side D Verification 5-151
Table 5-8 From COM-RX Side E Verification 5-151
Table 5-9 From COM-RX Side F Verification Table 5-152
Table 5-10 From COM-RX Side G Verification 5-152
Table 5-11 From COM-RX Side H Verification 5-153
Table 5-12 Same Side Verification 5-154
Table 5-13 Side A Power Verification 5-155
Table 5-14 Side B Power Verification 5-155
Table 5-15 Side C Power Verification 5-156
Table 5-16 Side D Power Verification 5-156
Table 5-17 Side E Power Verification 5-156
Table 5-18 Side F Power Verification 5-157
Table 5-19 Side G Power Verification 5-157
Table 5-20 Side H Power Verification 5-158
Table 6-1 10G Data Muxponder Card Port Modes 6-7Tables
xxxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 6-2 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes 6-8
Table 6-3 PPM Port Types 6-16
Table 6-4 Protection Types 6-22
Table 6-5 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Settings 6-30
Table 6-6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Settings 6-31
Table 6-7 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Section Trace
Settings 6-33
Table 6-8 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings 6-35
Table 6-9 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Thresholds Settings
for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Payloads 6-36
Table 6-10 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card 1G Ethernet and 1G FC/FICON
Thresholds 6-38
Table 6-11 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface 6-40
Table 6-12 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Trunk Port TCA Thresholds 6-40
Table 6-13 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds 6-42
Table 6-14 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds 6-43
Table 6-15 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card OTN Line Settings 6-46
Table 6-16 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings 6-46
Table 6-17 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card FEC Threshold Settings 6-47
Table 6-18 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings 6-47
Table 6-19 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Settings 6-51
Table 6-20 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings 6-53
Table 6-21 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Section Trace
Settings 6-57
Table 6-22 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Wavelength
Trunk Settings 6-58
Table 6-23 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold
Settings 6-60
Table 6-24 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card GE LAN Phy
Variables 6-63
Table 6-25 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port TCA Thresholds 6-66
Table 6-26 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds 6-67
Table 6-27 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Client Interface
TCA Thresholds 6-68
Table 6-28 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Client Interface
Alarm Thresholds 6-69Tables
xxxv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 6-29 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card OTN Lines
Settings 6-70
Table 6-30 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card ITU-T G.709
Threshold Settings 6-71
Table 6-31 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card FEC Threshold
Settings 6-72
Table 6-32 10G Multirate Transponder Trail Trace Identifier Settings 6-72
Table 6-33 ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings 6-76
Table 6-34 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings 6-78
Table 6-35 ADM-10G Line SONET or SDH Tab Settings 6-81
Table 6-36 ADM-10G Section Trace Settings 6-83
Table 6-37 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings 6-85
Table 6-38 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds 6-88
Table 6-39 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port TCA Thresholds 6-91
Table 6-40 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds 6-92
Table 6-41 ADM-10G Card OTN Lines Settings 6-94
Table 6-42 ADM-10G Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings 6-95
Table 6-43 ADM-10G Card FEC Threshold Settings 6-96
Table 6-44 ADM-10GTrail Trace Identifier Settings 6-97
Table 6-45 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card
Settings 6-100
Table 6-46 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Settings 6-101
Table 6-47 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Section
Trace Settings 6-104
Table 6-48 MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Trunk Settings 6-106
Table 6-49 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card
Wavelength Trunk Settings 6-107
Table 6-50 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Threshold Settings 6-109
Table 6-51 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port
TCA Thresholds 6-111
Table 6-52 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port
Alarm Thresholds 6-112
Table 6-53 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Client
Interfaces TCA Thresholds 6-113
Table 6-54 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Client Interfaces Alarm
Thresholds 6-114
Table 6-55 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line Tables
xxxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
OTN Settings 6-115
Table 6-56 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C ITU-T G.709
Threshold Settings 6-116
Table 6-57 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C FEC
Threshold Settings 6-117
Table 6-58 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trail Trace
Identifier Settings 6-118
Table 6-59 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings 6-120
Table 6-60 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Distance Extension Settings 6-123
Table 6-61 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line SONET or SDH Settings 6-125
Table 6-62 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Section Trace Settings 6-127
Table 6-63 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings 6-128
Table 6-64 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Threshold Settings 6-129
Table 6-65 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR 2.5G Card 1G Ethernet or 1G, 2G FC/FICON Variables 6-131
Table 6-66 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds 6-135
Table 6-67 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds 6-136
Table 6-68 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Client Settings 6-138
Table 6-69 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Distance Extension
Settings 6-140
Table 6-70 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Wavelength Trunk Settings 6-142
Table 6-71 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line SONET or SDH Settings 6-143
Table 6-72 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line Section Trace Settings 6-145
Table 6-73 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings 6-146
Table 6-74 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Ethernet Variables 6-149
Table 6-75 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L FC/FICON Variables 6-149
Table 6-76 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L ISC and ISC3Variables 6-150
Table 6-77 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L GFP RMON Variables 6-150
Table 6-78 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds 6-153
Table 6-79 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds 6-154
Table 6-80 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card OTN Line Settings 6-156
Table 6-81 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings 6-157
Table 6-82 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card FEC Threshold Settings 6-157
Table 6-83 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings 6-157
Table 6-84 40G-MXP-C Card Settings 6-160
Table 6-85 40G-MXP-C Card Line Client Settings 6-161Tables
xxxvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 6-86 40G-MXP-C Card Line SONET or SDH Settings 6-163
Table 6-87 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C Card 6-164
Table 6-88 40G-MXP-C Card Line Section Trace Settings 6-167
Table 6-89 40G-MXP-C Card Line Threshold Settings 6-169
Table 6-90 40G-MXP-C Ethernet Variables 6-171
Table 6-91 40G-MXP-C FC Variables 6-173
Table 6-92 40G-MXP-C GFP RMON Variables 6-173
Table 6-93 40G-MXP-C Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds 6-176
Table 6-94 40G-MXP-C Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds 6-178
Table 6-95 40G-MXP-C Card OTN Line Settings 6-179
Table 6-96 40G-MXP-C ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings 6-180
Table 6-97 40G-MXP-C Card FEC Threshold Settings 6-181
Table 6-98 40G-MXP-C Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings 6-181
Table 6-99 Channel Group Settings 6-185
Table 6-100 EFM Parameter Settings 6-208
Table 6-101 EFM Link Monitoring Parameter Settings 6-209
Table 6-102 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings 6-219
Table 6-103 Ethertype Behavior 6-225
Table 6-104 GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings 6-226
Table 6-105 Jitter Buffer Values for Various Payload Types 6-227
Table 6-106 GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings 6-228
Table 6-107 Storm Control Settings 6-242
Table 6-108 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Trunk Interface TCA Thresholds 6-251
Table 6-109 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Trunk Interface Alarm Thresholds 6-252
Table 6-110 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds 6-253
Table 6-111 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds 6-253
Table 6-112 Gigabit Ethernet \RMON Variables 6-255
Table 6-113 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card OTN Line Settings 6-258
Table 6-114 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings 6-258
Table 6-115 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card FEC Threshold Settings 6-259
Table 6-116 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPECard Trail Trace Identifier Settings 6-259
Table 6-117 OTU2_XP Card Settings 6-264
Table 6-118 OTU2_XP Line Settings 6-266
Table 6-119 OTU2_XP Section Trace Settings 6-269
Table 6-120 OTU2_XP Card Path Threshold Settings on a 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Mode 6-271Tables
xxxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 6-121 OTU2_XP Card Line Threshold Settings 6-271
Table 6-122 OTU2_XP Port TCA Thresholds 6-273
Table 6-123 OTU2_XP Port Alarm Thresholds 6-274
Table 6-124 OTU2_XP Card 10G Ethernet Variables 6-274
Table 6-125 OTU2_XP Card 10G FC Variables 6-276
Table 6-126 OTU2_XP Card OTN Lines Settings 6-278
Table 6-127 OTU2_XP Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings 6-279
Table 6-128 OTU2_XP Card FEC Threshold Settings 6-280
Table 6-129 OTU2_XP Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings 6-280
Table 6-130 OTU2_XP Card Proactive Protection Regen Settings 6-282
Table 6-131 OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings 6-283
Table 6-132 OTU2_XP Path Settings 6-285
Table 6-133 ALS Settings 6-286
Table 8-1 OCHCC Client Rates 8-6
Table 8-2 OCH C-Band Channels 8-7
Table 8-3 OCH L-Band Channels 8-8
Table 8-4 Diagnostic and Fix Errors 8-44
Table 8-5 Circuit Protection Types 8-48
Table 8-6 Cisco ONS 15454 Circuit Status 8-48
Table 8-7 Provisionable Patchcord Ports 8-53
Table 8-8 PPC Origination Fields 8-56
Table 8-9 PPC Termination Fields 8-57
Table 9-1 TNC Card FE and ONE_GE RMON Thresholds 9-13
Table 9-2 Channel OADM Optical Line Ports 9-22
Table 9-3 Channel OADM Optical Channel Ports 9-23
Table 9-4 OADM Optical Line Ports 9-24
Table 9-5 OADM Optical Band Ports 9-24
Table 10-1 Alarm Column Descriptions 10-7
Table 10-2 Color Codes for Node Alarms and Condition Severities 10-8
Table 11-1 HTML Commands for the Legal Disclaimer 11-13
Table 11-2 Managing Domains 11-35
Table 11-3 Link Classes By Network Scope 11-39
Table 12-1 OSCM and OSC-CSM Card OC-3/STM-1 Line Settings 12-3
Table 12-2 OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards OC3 Line SONET Threshold Settings 12-5
Table 12-3 OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards OC3 Line SDH Threshold Settings 12-6Tables
xxxix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 12-4 OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Optical Line Parameter Settings 12-7
Table 12-5 OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Optical Line Warning Thresholds Settings 12-9
Table 12-6 OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Settings 12-10
Table 12-7 OSC-CSM and OSCM ALS Maintenance Settings 12-12
Table 12-8 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Amplifier Optical Line Settings 12-14
Table 12-9 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-16
Table 12-10 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Settings 12-17
Table 12-11 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Optical Amplifier Line Settings 12-19
Table 12-12 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Amplifier Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-21
Table 12-13 OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L Card Amplifier Line Alarm Thresholds Setting 12-22
Table 12-14 OPT-BST ALS Maintenance Settings 12-26
Table 12-15 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifier Optical Line
Settings 12-29
Table 12-16 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Optical Line Warning
Threshold Settings 12-31
Table 12-17 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Optical Line Alarm
Thresholds Setting 12-32
Table 12-18 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, and OPT-AMP-C Optical Amplifier Line Settings 12-33
Table 12-19 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Amplifier Line Warning
Threshold Settings 12-35
Table 12-20 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Amplifier Line Alarm
Thresholds Settings 12-36
Table 12-21 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Optical Raman Line Settings 12-39
Table 12-22 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Raman Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-41
Table 12-23 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Raman Line Alarm Thresholds Settings 12-41
Table 12-24 OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE ALS Maintenance Settings 12-42
Table 12-25 PSM Card Optical Line Settings 12-45
Table 12-26 PSM Card Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-47
Table 12-27 PSM Card Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Setting 12-48
Table 12-28 PSM ALS Maintenance Settings 12-50
Table 12-29 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Line Settings 12-52
Table 12-30 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-54
Table 12-31 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Optical Line Alarm Threshold Settings 12-56
Table 12-32 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Channel Settings 12-57
Table 12-33 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Channel Warning Threshold Settings 12-60
Table 12-34 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Card Optical Channel Alarm Threshold
Settings 12-61Tables
xl
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 12-35 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Optical Channel Parameter Settings 12-64
Table 12-36 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Channel Warning Threshold Settings 12-67
Table 12-37 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Channel Alarm Threshold
Settings 12-68
Table 12-38 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Line Parameter Settings 12-70
Table 12-39 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-72
Table 12-40 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, and 40-WSS-CE Optical Line Alarm Threshold Settings 12-73
Table 12-41 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-75
Table 12-42 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Setting 12-76
Table 12-43 80-WXC-C Card Modes 12-78
Table 12-44 40-WXC-C and 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Parameter Settings 12-79
Table 12-45 40-WXC-C and 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Warning Threshold Settings 12-81
Table 12-46 40-WXC-C and 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Alarm Threshold Settings 12-82
Table 12-47 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Parameter Settings 12-84
Table 12-48 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-86
Table 12-49 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Alarm Threshold Settings 12-87
Table 12-50 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C WXC Line Parameter Settings 12-89
Table 12-51 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Optical Line Settings 12-93
Table 12-52 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-96
Table 12-53 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Line Alarm Thresholds Setting 12-97
Table 12-54 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Line Settings 12-99
Table 12-55 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-101
Table 12-56 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Line Alarm Thresholds Settings 12-102
Table 12-57 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Parameter Settings 12-106
Table 12-58 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Warning Threshold Settings 12-108
Table 12-59 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Alarm Threshold Settings 12-109
Table 12-60 MMU Optical Line Parameter Settings 12-112
Table 12-61 MMU Optical Line Warning Threshold Settings 12-113
Table 12-62 MMU Optical Line Alarm Threshold Settings 12-114
Table 12-63 TNC Card Optical Warning and Alarms Thresholds Settings 12-119
Table 12-64 TNC Card Line Threshold Settings (Ports tab) 12-120
Table 12-65 TNC Card Line Threshold Settings (OC3 Line tab) 12-123
Table 12-66 TNC Card Line Threshold Settings (SONET) 12-123
Table 12-67 TNC Card Line Threshold Settings (SDH) 12-124
Table 14-1 Audit Trail Column Definitions 14-16
Table 14-2 ONS 15454 Timing Report 14-20Tables
xli
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Table 14-3 Incompatibility Alarms for ONS 15454 ANSI 14-37
Table 14-4 Incompatibility Alarms for ONS 15454 ETSI 14-37
Table A-1 Change CTC Views A-3
Table A-2 Description of Node Icons on Network View Map A-4
Table A-3 CTC Menu and Toolbar Options A-6
Table A-4 CTC Window Mouse Shortcuts A-12
Table A-5 Multishelf View Card-Related Shortcuts A-13
Table A-6 Node/Shelf View Card-Related Shortcuts A-14
Table A-7 Network Management Tasks in Network View A-14
Table A-8 Table Display Options A-15Tables
xlii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02PROCEDURES
xliii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards 2-1
NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC or TSC Card 2-8
NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC 3-2
NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454 3-9
NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection to the ONS 15454 3-25
NTP-G21 Log into the GUI 3-28
NTP-G190 Use the CTC Launcher Application to Manage Multiple ONS Nodes 3-38
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files 4-3
NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation 4-7
NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information 4-8
NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node 4-10
NTP-G23 Create Users and Assign Security 4-12
NTP-G24 Set Up Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information 4-15
NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds 4-17
NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access 4-18
NTP-G194 Set Up EMS Secure Access to the ONS 15454 4-33
NTP-G27 Set Up the ONS 15454 for Firewall Access 4-33
NTP-G28 Create FTP Host 4-34
NTP-G132 Provision OSI 4-37
NTP-G29 Set Up SNMP 4-47
NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration File 4-49
NTP-G320 Configure the Node as a Non-DWDM Network 4-59
NTP-G328 Add and Delete ANS Parameters 4-61
NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards 4-64
NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units 4-67
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards 4-69
NTP-G123 Install the Filler Cards 4-75
NTP-G239 Add and Delete Passive Units 4-76
NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs 4-78
NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes 4-82Procedures
xliv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes 4-101
NTP-G191 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on Passthrough ROADM Nodes 4-105
NTP-G141 Install Fiber-Optic Cables for Y-Cable Protection Modules 4-108
NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords 4-113
NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually 4-114
NTP-G209 Create, Edit, and Delete Optical Sides 4-123
NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations 4-126
NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup 4-127
NTP-G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power 4-129
NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode 4-131
NTP-G210 Provision Node for SNMPv3 4-133
NTP-G211 Provision Node to Send SNMPv3 Traps 4-134
NTP-G212 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3 4-135
NTP-G213 Automatically Provision a GNE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3 4-136
NTP-G214 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE using SNMPv3 4-136
NTP-G215 Automatically Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE Using SNMPv3 4-137
NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance Test 5-3
NTP-G168 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 5-9
NTP-G42 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test 5-12
NTP-G167 Perform the Terminal Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 5-17
NTP-G153 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test 5-22
NTP-G43 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test 5-29
NTP-G154 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test 5-51
NTP-G180 Perform the ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 5-74
NTP-G276 Perform the 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node Acceptance Tests 5-97
NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test 5-101
NTP-G45 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test 5-104
NTP-G155 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test 5-108
NTP-G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 5-111
NTP-G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 5-115
NTP-G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 5-120
NTP-G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 5-124
NTP-G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards 5-128
NTP-G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards 5-140
NTP-G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards 5-146Figures
xlv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel Acceptance Test 5-148
NTP-G187 Perform the Multiring Site Acceptance Test 5-160
NTP-G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test 5-168
NTP-G189 Perform the Node Upgrade Acceptance Test 5-173
NTP-G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards Acceptance
Test 5-181
NTP-G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test 5-185
NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules 6-3
NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group 6-21
NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card 6-24
NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-26
NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-28
NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 6-48
NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds 6-74
NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-98
NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-119
NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-137
NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 6-159
NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings 6-182
NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings 6-193
NTP-G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings 6-206
NTP-G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings 6-211
NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and
PM Thresholds 6-217
NTP-G237 Retrieve and Clear MAC Addresses on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards 6-240
NTP-G311 Provision the Storm Control Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-241
NTP-G205 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-243
NTP-G289 Provision CVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 6-244
NTP-G208 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 6-245
NTP-G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-247
NTP-G206 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 6-249
NTP-G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring 6-260
NTP-G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 6-263
NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings 6-285
NTP-G192 Force FPGA Update 6-286Procedures
xlvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP-G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group 6-288
NTP-G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator 6-289
NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up 7-2
NTP-G52 Verify Node-to-Node Connections 7-3
NTP-G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link 7-4
NTP-G53 Set Up Timing 7-22
NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network 7-27
NTP-G56 Verify the OSNR 7-32
NTP-G142 Perform a Protection Switch Test 7-33
NTP-G164 Configure Link Management Protocol 7-35
NTP-G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Node 7-42
NTP-G234 Automatically Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 Router and the Cisco ONS
15454 DWDM Node 7-42
NTP-G207 Manually Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Node 7-43
NTP-G57 Create a Logical Network Map 7-60
NTP-G325 View the Power Levels of Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Nodes 7-61
NTP-G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Network 7-62
NTP-G151 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Client Connections 8-2
NTP-G178 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Trails 8-16
NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections 8-21
NTP-G200 Create, Delete, and Manage STS or VC Circuits for the ADM-10G Card 8-29
NTP-G150 Upgrade Optical Channel Network Connections to Optical Channel Client Connections 8-39
NTP-G183 Diagnose and Fix OCHNC and OCH Trail Circuits 8-43
NTP-G58 Locate and View Optical Channel Circuits 8-45
NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord 8-52
NTP-G181 Manage GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card SVLAN Databases 8-58
NTP-G60 Create and Delete Overhead Circuits 8-61
NTP-G62 Create a J0 Section Trace 8-69
NTP-G203 Create End-to-End SVLAN Circuits 8-70
NTP-G229 Provision DCN Extension for a Network Using GCC/DCC 8-72
NTP-G245 Create an Automatically Routed VCAT Circuit 8-74
NTP-G246 Create a Manually Routed VCAT Circuit 8-77
NTP-G247 Enable or disable Path Performance Monitoring on Intermediate Nodes 8-80
NTP-G73 Change the PM Display 9-2Figures
xlvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP-G279 Monitor TNC Card Performance 9-10
NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance 9-15
NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 9-26
NTP-G193 Enable or Disable AutoPM 9-35
NTP-G63 Document Existing Provisioning 10-2
NTP-G64 View Alarms, History, Events, and Conditions 10-6
NTP-G65 Delete Cleared Alarms from Display 10-14
NTP-G66 View Alarm-Affected Circuits 10-15
NTP-G67 View Alarm Counts on the LCD for a Node, Shelf, Slot, or Port 10-15
NTP-G68 Create, Download, and Assign Alarm Severity Profiles 10-17
NTP-G69 Enable, Modify, or Disable Alarm Severity Filtering 10-24
NTP-G70 Suppress Alarms or Discontinue Alarm Suppression 10-27
NTP-G72 Provision External Alarms and Controls on the Alarm Interface Controller-International Card 10-30
NTP-G277 Provision Alarms and Controls on the TNC or TSC Card 10-32
NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC 11-2
NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control 11-4
NTP-G78 View Side Power Monitoring 11-9
NTP-G80 Change Node Management Information 11-11
NTP-G134 Modify OSI Provisioning 11-14
NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access 11-23
NTP-G82 Customize the CTC Network View 11-31
NTP-G83 Modify or Delete Card Protection Settings 11-40
NTP-G84 Initiate and Clear Y-Cable and Splitter External Switching Commands 11-43
NTP-G85 Modify or Delete OSC Terminations, DCC/GCC Terminations, and Provisionable Patchcords 11-48
NTP-G86 Convert a Pass-Through Connection to Add/Drop Connections 11-52
NTP-G87 Change Node Timing Parameters 11-53
NTP-G88 Modify Users and Change Security 11-55
NTP-G89 Change SNMP Settings 11-67
NTP-G231 View Optical Power Values and Alarms Using the Network Functional View 11-69
NTP-G90 Modify OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-2
NTP-G91 Modify OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-13
NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Line
Settings and PM Thresholds 12-27
NTP-G202 Modify PSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-44
NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x
Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds 12-51Procedures
xlviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-62
NTP-G240 Modify TDC-CC and TDC-FC Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-73
NTP-G174 Modify the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-76
NTP-G241 Modify the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-91
NTP-G149 Modify the MMU Line Settings and PM Thresholds 12-111
NTP-G101 Modify Alarm Interface Controller–International Settings 12-114
NTP-G102 Change Card Service State 12-117
NTP-G280 Modify Threshold Settings for the TNC Card 12-118
NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards 13-2
NTP-G127 Add an AD-xC-xx.x Card to an OADM Node 13-6
NTP-G129 Add a DWDM Node 13-9
NTP-G130 Remove a DWDM Node 13-11
NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node 13-13
NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node 13-16
NTP-G173 Convert an OADM Node to a ROADM Node 13-18
NTP-G176 Convert an Line Amplifier Node to an OADM Node 13-21
NTP-G182 Convert a Line Amplifier Node to a ROADM Node 13-23
NTP-G195 Convert a Protected ROADM Node from two Separate Nodes to a Single Multishelf Node 13-25
NTP-G177 Upgrade ANS Parameters on a DWDM Node 13-32
NTP-G242 Modify the CD setting of TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 13-33
NTP-G278 Upgrade the TSC Card to the TNC Card 13-35
NTP-G103 Back Up the Database 14-2
NTP-G104 Restore the Database 14-3
NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration 14-5
NTP-G133 View and Manage OSI Information 14-10
NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC 14-13
NTP-G108 Viewing the Audit Trail Records 14-15
NTP-G109 Off-Load the Audit Trail Record 14-16
NTP-G110 Off-Load the Diagnostics File 14-17
NTP-G112 Change the Node Timing Reference 14-18
NTP-G113 View the ONS 15454 Timing Report 14-20
NTP-G114 Inspect, Clean, and Replace the Air Filter 14-23
NTP-G274 Replace the Air Filter of the ONS 15454M2 Shelf Assembly 14-26
NTP-G262 Replace the Air Filter of the ONS 15454M6 Shelf Assembly 14-28
NTP-G263 Replace the Air Filter of the AC Power Module in the ONS 15454M6 Shelf Assembly 14-30Figures
xlix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors 14-31
NTP-G40 Replace the Front Door 14-34
NTP-G116 Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly 14-36
NTP-G272 Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly of the ONS 15454M2 Shelf Assembly 14-41
NTP-G260 Replace the Fan-Tray Assembly of the ONS 15454M6 Shelf Assembly 14-43
NTP-G117 Replace the ANSI Shelf Alarm Interface Panel 14-45
NTP-G118 Replace the ANSI Shelf Plastic Lower Backplane Cover 14-48
NTP-G135 Edit Network Element Defaults 14-50
NTP-G136 Import Network Element Defaults 14-51
NTP-G137 Export Network Element Defaults 14-52
NTP-G166 View the Facilities 14-53
NTP-G119 Power Down the Node 14-53
NTP-G222 Access PCLI Text Interface B-2
NTP-G223 Create a Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-4
NTP-G226 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-11
NTP-G216 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-12
NTP-G225 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using
PCLI B-13
NTP-G220 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-14
NTP-G217 Enable IGMP Fast-Leave Processing on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-15
NTP-G218 Configure a Multicast Router Port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-16
NTP-G219 Enable IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-17
NTP-G224 Enable MVR on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-18
NTP-G227 Create SVLAN for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-19
NTP-G228 Create a Service Instance Using PCLI B-20
NTP-G282 Configure the Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-23
NTP-G286 Configure EFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-26
NTP-G284 Configure CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-28
NTP-G288 Configure REP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-32Procedures
l
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02TASKS
li
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card 2-2
DLP-G34 Install the AIC-I Card 2-6
DLP-G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card 2-7
DLP-G604 Install the TNC or TSC Card 2-9
DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC Card 2-12
DLP-G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC Card 2-12
DLP-G37 Run the CTC Installation Wizard for Windows PCs 3-3
DLP-G38 Run the CTC Installation Wizard for Solaris Workstations 3-6
DLP-G52 Change the JRE Version 3-9
DLP-G39 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 on the Same Subnet Using Static IP
Addresses 3-12
DLP-G40 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol 3-15
DLP-G41 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Automatic Host Detection 3-19
DLP-G42 Set Up a Solaris Workstation for a Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 3-23
DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows) 3-26
DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris) 3-27
DLP-G331 Adjust the Java Virtual Memory Heap Size (Windows) 3-29
DLP-G46 Log into CTC 3-30
DLP-G47 Install Public-Key Security Certificate 3-32
DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups 3-33
DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group 3-34
DLP-G50 Delete a Node from the Current Session or Login Group 3-35
DLP-G51 Delete a Node from a Specific Login Node Group 3-36
DLP-G53 Configure the CTC Alerts Dialog Box for Automatic Popup 3-36
DLP-G448 Designate ONS 15454 SOCKS GNEs 3-37
DLP-G440 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Software CD 3-39
DLP-G441 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Node 3-39
DLP-G442 Connect to ONS Nodes Using the CTC Launcher 3-40
DLP-G443 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using the CTC Launcher 3-41
DLP-G444 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC 3-42
DLP-G445 View TL1 Tunnel Information 3-43Tasks
lii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G446 Edit a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC 3-44
DLP-G447 Delete a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC 3-45
DLP-G449 Install or Reinstall the CTC JAR Files 3-46
DLP-G450 Configuring Windows Vista or Windows 7 to Support CTC 3-46
DLP-G54 Create a New User on a Single Node 4-13
DLP-G55 Create a New User on Multiple Nodes 4-14
DLP-G56 Provision IP Settings 4-19
DLP-G439 Provision the Designated SOCKS Servers 4-23
DLP-G57 Set the IP Address, Default Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD 4-24
DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode 4-26
DLP-G58 Create a Static Route 4-28
DLP-G59 Set Up or Change Open Shortest Path First Protocol 4-29
DLP-G60 Set Up or Change Routing Information Protocol 4-32
DLP-G61 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 15454 4-35
DLP-G62 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the CTC Computer 4-36
DLP-G283 Provision OSI Routing Mode 4-38
DLP-G284 Provision the TARP Operating Parameters 4-39
DLP-G285 Add a Static TID-to-NSAP Entry to the TARP Data Cache 4-41
DLP-G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry 4-42
DLP-G288 Provision OSI Routers 4-43
DLP-G289 Provision Additional Manual Area Addresses 4-44
DLP-G290 Enable the OSI Subnet on the LAN Interface 4-44
DLP-G291 Create an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel 4-45
DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC 4-53
DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot 4-55
DLP-G693 Configure the Amplifier 4-59
DLP-G694 Configure the PSM 4-60
DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter 4-62
DLP-G542 Delete an ANS Parameter 4-63
DLP-G348 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout Report 4-66
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP 4-71
DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot 4-73
DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP 4-74
DLP-G543 Add Passive Units Manually 4-76
DLP-G544 Delete a Passive Unit 4-77Contents
liii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G349 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report 4-80
DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Standard
Patch Panel Tray 4-85
DLP-G316 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray 4-89
DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Deep
Patch Panel Tray 4-90
DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-93
DLP-G428 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE Cards in an
Expanded ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-95
DLP-G357 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray or 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-97
DLP-G530 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or 80-WXC-C Cards in a ROADM,
Terminal, or Hub Node to the 15216-MD-40 or 15216-MD-48 Patch Panel Tray 4-99
DLP-G430 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards in a Mesh Node to the
40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 4-102
DLP-G431 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards in a Mesh Node to a Mesh Patch
Panel Tray 4-104
DLP-G375 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf 4-109
DLP-G376 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the Y-Cable Module Tray 4-110
DLP-G354 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Trunk to Trunk (L2) Option 4-115
DLP-G547 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter Option 4-116
DLP-G548 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter Option 4-118
DLP-G549 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OTS to OTS Option 4-120
DLP-G531 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Optical Path Option 4-122
DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord 4-123
DLP-G491 Create an Optical Side 4-124
DLP-G492 Edit an Optical Side 4-125
DLP-G480 Delete an Optical Side 4-125
DLP-G314 Verify OSCM Transmit Power 4-130
DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User 4-138
DLP-G497 Create MIB Views 4-139
DLP-G498 Create Group Access 4-139
DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination 4-140
DLP-G500 Delete SNMPv3 Trap Destination 4-141
DLP-G501 Create Notification Filters 4-142
DLP-G502 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table 4-142
DLP-G503 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table 4-143Tasks
liv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G504 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table 4-144
DLP-G505 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table 4-145
DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing 5-5
DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power 5-6
DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power 5-7
DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power 5-8
DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power 5-8
DLP-G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power 5-16
DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card for Acceptance Testing 5-26
DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power 5-27
DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power 5-27
DLP-G361 Verify the 32DMX-L Power 5-28
DLP-G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels 5-33
DLP-G311 Verify the Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS Cards 5-41
DLP-G312 Verify the Side A ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS Cards 5-46
DLP-G362 Verify ROADM Node L-Band Pass-Through Channels 5-56
DLP-G363 Verify the Side B ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels 5-64
DLP-G364 Verify the Side A ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels 5-69
DLP-G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards 5-79
DLP-G311 Verify the Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards 5-87
DLP-G312 Verify the Side A ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards 5-92
DLP-G85 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards 5-130
DLP-G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Express Power 5-131
DLP-G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Express Power 5-131
DLP-G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Common Power 5-132
DLP-G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Common Power 5-132
DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections 5-133
DLP-G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power 5-134
DLP-G90 Verify an AD-xB-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power 5-135
DLP-G91 Verify an AD-xC-xx.x Pass-Through Connection 5-136
DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power 5-137
DLP-G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards 5-138
DLP-G86 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards 5-142
DLP-G83 Verify the OSC-CSM Power on OADM Nodes 5-143
DLP-G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards 5-144Contents
lv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength 5-158
DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power 5-159
DLP-434 Record the OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value 5-165
DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters 5-166
DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value 5-167
DLP-G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode 6-4
DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode 6-6
DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode 6-8
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port 6-9
DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode 6-10
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM 6-11
DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services 6-12
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate 6-14
DLP-G280 Delete a PPM 6-19
DLP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-27
DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 6-29
DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 6-30
DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 6-33
DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-34
DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings 6-35
DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON
Payloads 6-38
DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-39
DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-41
DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 6-45
DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate 6-49
DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate 6-50
DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 6-50
DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 6-52
DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 6-56
DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-58
DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy 6-59
DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
Payloads 6-62
DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-66Tasks
lvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-67
DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 6-69
DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group 6-75
DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings 6-76
DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings 6-77
DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings 6-83
DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads 6-84
DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload 6-88
DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-91
DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-92
DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings 6-93
DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings 6-99
DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings 6-101
DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-103
DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings 6-105
DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-107
DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings 6-108
DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-111
DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-112
DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings 6-114
DLP-G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings 6-120
DLP-G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings 6-122
DLP-G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings 6-124
DLP-G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-126
DLP-G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-128
DLP-G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 6-129
DLP-G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads 6-131
DLP-G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-133
DLP-G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-134
DLP-G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings 6-138
DLP-G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings 6-140
DLP-G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 6-142
DLP-G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings 6-143
DLP-G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-145
DLP-G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 6-146Contents
lvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3
Payloads 6-148
DLP-G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-151
DLP-G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-152
DLP-G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings 6-156
DLP-G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings 6-160
DLP-G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings 6-161
DLP-G667 Change the 40G Muxponder Line SONET (OC-192) or SDH (STM-64), or Ethernet Line
Settings 6-163
DLP-G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings 6-167
DLP-G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 6-168
DLP-G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC Payloads 6-170
DLP-G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-174
DLP-G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-176
DLP-G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings 6-179
DLP-G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC 6-183
DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC 6-184
DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC 6-188
DLP-G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC 6-189
DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC 6-190
DLP-G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using
CTC 6-191
DLP-G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Using CTC 6-192
DLP-G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards
Using CTC 6-192
DLP-G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC 6-194
DLP-G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC 6-195
DLP-G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 6-196
DLP-G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 6-197
DLP-G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 6-198
DLP-G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 6-199
DLP-G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 6-199
DLP-G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 6-200
DLP-G629 Create a MEP Using CTC 6-201
DLP-G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC 6-202
DLP-G631 Create a MIP Using CTC 6-202Tasks
lviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G632 Delete a MIP Using CTC 6-203
DLP-G633 Ping MEP Using CTC 6-204
DLP-G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC 6-205
DLP-G639 Enable or Disable EFM for Each Port Using CTC 6-206
DLP-G640 Configure EFM Parameters Using CTC 6-207
DLP-G641 Configure EFM Link Monitoring Parameters Using CTC 6-209
DLP-G642 Enable Remote Loopback for Each Port Using CTC 6-210
DLP-G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC 6-212
DLP-G645 Create a Segment Using CTC 6-213
DLP-G646 Edit a Segment Using CTC 6-215
DLP-G647 Activate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC 6-215
DLP-G648 Deactivate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC 6-216
DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings 6-218
DLP-G684 Provision the GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings 6-226
DLP-G685 Provision the GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings 6-228
DLP-G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection Settings 6-230
DLP-G507 Enable a Different GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master Card 6-231
DLP-G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI Ports 6-233
DLP-G383 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service Settings 6-234
DLP-G470 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Class of Service (CoS) Settings 6-235
DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings 6-235
DLP-G221 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards 6-237
DLP-G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 6-238
DLP-G385 Provision the MAC Filter Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 6-239
DLP-G546 View Card MAC Addresses on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 6-241
DLP-G509 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 6-243
DLP-G515 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using
CTC 6-246
DLP-G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile 6-246
DLP-G511 Enable IGMP Snooping, IGMP Fast Leave and IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 6-248
DLP-G513 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC 6-250
DLP-G386 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-251
DLP-G387 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-252
DLP-G388 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card RMON Thresholds 6-254Contents
lix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G389 Change the Gigabit Ethernet Optical Transport Network Settings 6-257
DLP-G687 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Facing Master Card on a FAPS Ring 6-261
DLP-G688 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Between the Slave Cards on a FAPS Ring 6-262
DLP-G453 Change the OTU2_XP Card Settings 6-264
DLP-G454 Change the OTU2_XP Line Settings 6-265
DLP-G455 Change the OTU2_XP Line Section Trace Settings 6-269
DLP-G456 Change the OTU2_XP Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads 6-270
DLP-G457 Provision the OTU2_XP Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 6-272
DLP-G462 Change the OTU2_XP Line RMON Thresholds for the 10G Ethernet and 10G FC Payloads 6-274
DLP-G458 Change the OTU2_XP OTN Settings 6-277
DLP-G523 Change the OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings 6-283
DLP-G524 Provision the OTU2_XP Path Settings for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Configuration 6-284
DLP-G468 Configure the Raman Pump Using the Installation Wizard 7-4
DLP-G474 Configure the Raman Pump by Importing the CTP XML File 7-19
DLP-G489 Configure the Raman Pump by Setting the ANS Parameters Manually 7-20
DLP-490 Restore Raman Link After a Fiber Cut Occurs 7-21
DLP-G95 Set Up External or Line Timing 7-22
DLP-G96 Set Up Internal Timing 7-25
DLP-G350 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report 7-26
DLP-G372 Enable LMP 7-36
DLP-G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels 7-36
DLP-G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links 7-39
DLP-G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links 7-40
DLP-G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1 Router Parameters 7-44
DLP-G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 Router and Verify Configuration 7-45
DLP-G510 Create a Task Group, User Group, and User Account on the Cisco CRS-1 Router 7-46
DLP-G482 Configure a Static Route 7-49
DLP-G483 Configure Local and Remote TE Links 7-50
DLP-G484 Enable the LMP Message Exchange 7-52
DLP-G511 Configure the Wavelength on the Cisco CRS-1 Router 7-53
DLP-G494 Configure the RADIUS Server 7-55
DLP-G485 Enable Index Persistency on an SNMP Interface 7-56
DLP-G486 Configure the LMP Router ID 7-57
DLP-G487 Configure the 10 Gigabit Ethernet (GE) or POS Interface 7-58
DLP-G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information 7-59Tasks
lx
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G540 View SRLG Reports 7-63
DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port 8-3
DLP-G345 Verify OCHCC Client Ports 8-4
DLP-G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections 8-4
DLP-G689 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections on OTU2_XP Cards 8-10
DLP-G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections 8-11
DLP-G424 Edit an OCHCC Circuit Name 8-12
DLP-G394 Change an OCHCC Administrative State 8-13
DLP-G437 Set OCH Circuit Attributes 8-14
DLP-G438 Set OCH Routing Preferences 8-15
DLP-G395 Create an Optical Channel Trail 8-17
DLP-G418 Delete an Optical Channel Trail 8-19
DLP-G425 Edit an OCH Trail Circuit Name 8-20
DLP-G419 Change an OCH Trail Administrative State 8-21
DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections 8-23
DLP-G493 Provision Protected Optical Channel Network Connections 8-25
DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections 8-26
DLP-G426 Edit an OCHNC Circuit Name 8-27
DLP-G420 Change an OCHNC Administrative State 8-28
DLP-G463 Create an Automatically Routed STS or VC Circuit 8-29
DLP-G464 Create a Manually Routed STS or VC Circuit 8-33
DLP-G465 Provision Path Protection Selectors 8-36
DLP-G466 Delete an STS or VC Circuit 8-37
DLP-G467 Edit an STS or VC Circuit Name 8-38
DLP-G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords 8-41
DLP-G100 Search for Optical Channel Circuits 8-45
DLP-G101 View Optical Channel Circuit Information 8-46
DLP-G102 Filter the Display of Optical Channel Circuits 8-49
DLP-G103 View Optical Channel Circuits on a Span 8-51
DLP-G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database 8-58
DLP-G422 Load or Merge an SVLAN Database 8-60
DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations 8-61
DLP-G97 Provision a Proxy Tunnel 8-63
DLP-G98 Provision a Firewall Tunnel 8-64
DLP-G108 Change the Service State for a Port 8-65Contents
lxi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G109 Provision Orderwire 8-66
DLP-G110 Create a User Data Channel Circuit 8-67
DLP-G112 Delete Overhead Circuits 8-68
DLP-G472 Edit the End-to-End SVLAN Circuit 8-72
DLP-G472 Merge two OCHNC DCN Circuits 8-73
DLP-G551 Provision ADM-10G Ethernet Ports 8-80
DLP-G553 Create a Server Trail 8-81
DLP-G554 Repair Server Trails 8-83
DLP-G555 Provision a VCAT Circuit Source and Destination 8-84
DLP-G556 Provision an Open VCAT Circuit Source and Destination 8-85
DLP-G557 Provision a VCAT Circuit Route 8-86
DLP-G131 Refresh PM Counts at 15-Minute Intervals 9-3
DLP-G132 Refresh PM Counts at One-Day Intervals 9-4
DLP-G133 View Near-End PM Counts 9-5
DLP-G134 View Far-End PM Counts 9-5
DLP-G135 Reset Current PM Counts 9-6
DLP-G136 Clear Selected PM Counts 9-7
DLP-G410 Clear All PM Thresholds 9-8
DLP-G137 Set the Auto-Refresh Interval for Displayed PM Counts 9-9
DLP-G138 Refresh PM Counts for a Different Port 9-10
DLP-G607 View Optics PM Parameters for the TNC Card 9-11
DLP-G608 View Payload PM Parameters for the TNC Card 9-11
DLP-G686 Set the TNC Card RMON Thresholds for the FE/ONE_GE Ethernet Payloads 9-12
DLP-G139 View PM Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards 9-16
DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards 9-16
DLP-G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L,
40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and
40-DMX-CE Cards 9-20
DLP-G479 View Optical Power Statistics for the PSM Card 9-21
DLP-G276 View Optical Power Statistics for 4MD-xx.x Cards 9-21
DLP-G142 View Power Statistics for AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, and AD-4C-xx.x Cards 9-22
DLP-G143 View Power Statistics for AD-1B-xx.x and AD-4B-xx.x Cards 9-23
DLP-G525 View Optical Power Statistics for TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards 9-24
DLP-G475 View the PM Parameters for All Facilities 9-25
DLP-G390 View Ethernet Statistic PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 9-27
DLP-G391 View Ethernet Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Tasks
lxii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Cards 9-28
DLP-G392 View Ethernet History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 9-28
DLP-G393 Refresh Ethernet PM Counts at a Different Time Interval for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards 9-29
DLP-G146 View Optics PM Parameters 9-30
DLP-G147 View Payload PM Parameters 9-30
DLP-G148 View OTN PM Parameters 9-32
DLP-G149 View Payload Statistics PM Parameters 9-33
DLP-G150 View Payload Utilization PM Parameters 9-33
DLP-G151 View Payload History PM Parameters 9-34
DLP-G152 View Payload SONET/SDH PM Parameters 9-35
DLP-G113 Print CTC Data 10-3
DLP-G114 Export CTC Data 10-4
DLP-G115 View Alarms 10-7
DLP-G116 View Alarm or Event History 10-8
DLP-G117 Change the Maximum Number of Session Entries for Alarm History 10-10
DLP-G118 Display Alarms and Conditions Using Time Zone 10-11
DLP-G119 Synchronize Alarms 10-12
DLP-G120 View Conditions 10-12
DLP-G121 Create a New or Cloned Alarm Severity Profile 10-18
DLP-G122 Download an Alarm Severity Profile 10-20
DLP-G123 Apply Alarm Profiles to Ports 10-21
DLP-G124 Apply Alarm Profiles to Cards and Nodes 10-22
DLP-G125 Delete Alarm Severity Profiles 10-23
DLP-G126 Enable Alarm Filtering 10-25
DLP-G127 Modify Alarm, Condition, and History Filtering Parameters 10-25
DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering 10-26
DLP-G129 Suppress Alarm Reporting 10-28
DLP-G130 Discontinue Alarm Suppression 10-29
DLP-G157 Disable Automatic Power Control 11-4
DLP-G158 Enable Automatic Power Control 11-5
DLP-G430 Run Automatic Power Control 11-6
DLP-G159 View Node-Level Automatic Power Control Information 11-7
DLP-G431 View Network-Level Automatic Power Control Information 11-8
DLP-G160 Change the Node Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information 11-12
DLP-G161 Change the Login Legal Disclaimer 11-13Contents
lxiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G284 Modify the TARP Operating Parameters 11-15
DLP-G286 Remove a Static TID to NSAP Entry from the TARP Data Cache 11-17
DLP-G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry 11-17
DLP-G292 Remove a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry 11-18
DLP-G293 Change the OSI Routing Mode 11-19
DLP-G294 Edit the OSI Router Configuration 11-20
DLP-G295 Edit the OSI Subnetwork Point of Attachment 11-21
DLP-G296 Edit an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel 11-22
DLP-G297 Delete an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel 11-23
DLP-G162 Change IP Settings 11-24
DLP-G265 Lock Node Security 11-25
DLP-G266 Modify Backplane Port IP Settings in Security Mode 11-26
DLP-G267 Disable Secure Mode 11-28
DLP-G163 Modify a Static Route 11-29
DLP-G164 Delete a Static Route 11-30
DLP-G165 Disable OSPF 11-30
DLP-G167 Delete a Firewall Tunnel 11-31
DLP-G168 Change the Network View Background Color 11-32
DLP-G169 Change the Default Network View Background Map 11-32
DLP-G170 Apply a Custom Network View Background Map 11-33
DLP-G171 Create Domain Icons 11-34
DLP-G172 Manage Domain Icons 11-34
DLP-G173 Enable Dialog Box Do-Not-Display Option 11-36
DLP-G174 Switch Between TDM and DWDM Network Views 11-36
DLP-G330 Consolidate Links in Network View 11-37
DLP-G175 Modify a Y-Cable Protection Group 11-40
DLP-G176 Modify a Splitter Protection Group 11-41
DLP-G177 Delete a Y-Cable Protection Group 11-42
DLP-G459 Delete a Splitter Protection Group 11-43
DLP-G178 Apply a Manual Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch 11-44
DLP-G179 Apply a Force Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch 11-45
DLP-G180 Clear a Manual or Force Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch 11-45
DLP-G181 Apply a Lock-On 11-46
DLP-G182 Apply a Lockout 11-47
DLP-G183 Clear a Lock-On or Lockout 11-47Tasks
lxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G184 Change a DCC/GCC Termination 11-49
DLP-G185 Delete a DCC/GCC Termination 11-49
DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination 11-50
DLP-G187 Delete a Provisionable Patchcord 11-51
DLP-G188 Change Security Policy for a Single Node 11-56
DLP-G189 Change Security Policy for Multiple Nodes 11-57
DLP-G317 Change Node Access and PM Clearing Privilege 11-58
DLP-G328 Grant Superuser Privileges to a Provisioning User 11-59
DLP-G191 Change User Password and Security Level on a Single Node 11-60
DLP-G192 Change User Password and Security Level for Multiple Nodes 11-61
DLP-G193 Delete a User From a Single Node 11-62
DLP-G194 Delete a User From Multiple Nodes 11-63
DLP-G195 Log Out a User on a Single Node 11-63
DLP-G196 Log Out a User on Multiple Nodes 11-64
DLP-G281 Configure the Node for RADIUS Authentication 11-65
DLP-G282 View and Terminate Active Logins 11-66
DLP-G197 Modify SNMP Trap Destinations 11-68
DLP-G198 Delete SNMP Trap Destinations 11-69
DLP-G529 Export Network Functional View Reports 11-70
DLP-G199 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line Settings 12-3
DLP-G200 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line SONET/SDH Thresholds 12-5
DLP-G201 Change Optical Line Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards 12-7
DLP-G202 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM Optical Line Threshold Settings 12-8
DLP-G203 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM ALS Maintenance Settings 12-12
DLP-G204 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-14
DLP-G205 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-15
DLP-G206 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-19
DLP-G207 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 12-21
DLP-G322 Change the OPT-BST ALS Maintenance Settings 12-25
DLP-G323 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and
OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-28
DLP-G324 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C,
and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-30
DLP-G325 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C,
and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-33
DLP-G326 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C,
OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-35Contents
lxv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G538 Change Optical Raman Line Settings for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 12-39
DLP-G539 Change Optical Raman Line Threshold Settings for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE
Amplifiers 12-40
DLP-G327 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings of OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C,
and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 12-42
DLP-G514 Change the PSM Card Mode 12-44
DLP-G476 Change Optical Line Settings for the PSM Card 12-45
DLP-G477 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for the PSM Card 12-46
DLP-G478 Change the PSM ALS Maintenance Settings 12-49
DLP-G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C,
40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-52
DLP-G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C,
40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-54
DLP-G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C,
40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-57
DLP-G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C,
40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 12-59
DLP-G212 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel Parameters 12-63
DLP-G213 Change the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel Thresholds 12-66
DLP-G214 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line Parameters 12-70
DLP-G215 Change the 32WSS, 32-WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line Thresholds 12-71
DLP-G545 Modify the Chromatic Dispersion Value for the TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 12-74
DLP-G528 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for TDC-CC or TDC-FC Card 12-75
DLP-G603 Change the 80-WXC-C Card Mode 12-77
DLP-G406 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card Optical Channel Parameters 12-78
DLP-G407 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Thresholds 12-81
DLP-G408 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Parameters 12-84
DLP-G409 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Thresholds 12-86
DLP-G413 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card WXC Line Parameters 12-88
DLP-G429 Multiplex a Single Wavelength on 40-WXC-C Card 12-90
DLP-G532 Change Optical Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-92
DLP-G533 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-94
DLP-G534 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-98
DLP-G535 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-100
DLP-G536 Change 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Parameters 12-105
DLP-G537 Change the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Optical Channel Thresholds 12-107
DLP-G342 Change MMU Optical Line Parameters 12-111Tasks
lxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G343 Change the MMU Optical Line Thresholds 12-113
DLP-G245 Change External Alarms Using the AIC-I Card 12-115
DLP-G246 Change External Controls Using the AIC-I Card 12-116
DLP-G247 Change AIC-I Card Orderwire Settings 12-117
DLP-G609 Modify Optical Threshold Settings for the TNC Card 12-119
DLP-G610 Modify Line Threshold Settings for the TNC Card 12-120
DLP-G254 Place Amplifier Ports Out of Service 13-4
DLP-G318 Place Amplifier Ports In Service 13-5
DLP-G526 Modify the CD Value of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC When Connected to OPT-AMP-C, OPT-PRE,
40-SMR-1 and 40-SMR-2 Cards 13-34
DLP-G527 Modify the CD Value of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards When Connected to OPT-RAMP-C and
OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifiers 13-34
DLP-G248 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (Windows) 14-6
DLP-G249 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (UNIX) 14-8
DLP-G298 View IS-IS Routing Information Base 14-10
DLP-G299 View ES-IS Routing Information Base 14-11
DLP-G300 Manage the TARP Data Cache 14-12
DLP-G250 Reset the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC Card 14-13
DLP-G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC 14-14
DLP-G259 Manual or Force Switch the Node Timing Reference 14-18
DLP-G260 Clear a Manual or Force Switch on a Node Timing Reference 14-19
DLP-G261 Clean Multi Fiber-Optic Cable Connectors 14-32
DLP-G262 Clean Fiber Connectors with CLETOP 14-33
DLP-G263 Clean the Fiber Adapters 14-33
DLP-G517 Create an Ingress Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards Using PCLI B-4
DLP-G518 Create a Egress Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-5
DLP-G519 Create a Service Instance Policy on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-7
DLP-G520 Apply an Ingress Policy to a Port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-8
DLP-G521 Apply an Egress Policy to a Port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-9
DLP-G522 Apply a Service Instance Policy to a Port on GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-9
DLP-G619 Create a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-24
DLP-G620 Add Ports to a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-25
DLP-G643 Enable EFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-26
DLP-G644 Configure the EFM Mode on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-27
DLP-G635 Enable CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-29Contents
lxvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
DLP-G636 Create a Maintenance Domain on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-29
DLP-G637 Create a Maintenance Intermediate Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI B-30
DLP-G638 Create a Maintenance End Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using
PCLI B-31
DLP-G649 Create a Segment on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-33
DLP-G650 Configure STCN on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI B-34
DLP-G651 Configure Preemption Delay on the Primary Edge Port Using PCLI B-35
DLP-G652 Configure VLAN Load Balancing on the Primary Edge Port Using PCLI B-36Tasks
lxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02lxix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms
do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration.
Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's
path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not
recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration.
This section explains the objectives, intended audience, and organization of this publication and
describes the conventions that convey instructions and other information.
This section provides the following information:
• Revision History
• Document Objectives
• Audience
• Document Organization
• Related Documentation
• Document Conventions
• Obtaining Optical Networking Information
• Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelineslxx
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Revision History
Date Notes
June 2010 • Updated “DLP-G450 Configuring Windows Vista or Windows 7 to Support
CTC” in the chapter, “Connect the PC and Log into the GUI”.
July 2010 • Updated “NTP-G203 Create End-to-End SVLAN Circuits” in the chapter,
“Create Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords”.
• Updated “DLP-G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database” in the chapter,
“Create Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords”.
• Updated “DLP G431 View Network-Level Automatic Power Control
Information” in the chapter, “Manage the Node”.
• Updated “DLP-G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections” in the
chapter “Create Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords”.
• Updated “NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM
Parameter Thresholds, DLP-G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings,
DLP-G667 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64)
Settings, DLP-G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings,
DLP-G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds,
DLP-G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet,
8G FC, or 10G FC Payloads, DLP-G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk
Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, DLP-G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder
Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, and DLP-G673 Change the 40G
Muxponder OTN Settings” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and
Muxponder Cards”.
• Added “NTP-G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring” in the
chapter, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Added “DLP-G687 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Facing Master Card on a
FAPS Ring” in the chapter, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Added “DLP-G688 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Between the Slave Cards
on a FAPS Ring” in the chapter, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder
Cards”.
• Deleted the section “DLP-G313 Verify OSC-CSM Transmit Power” in the
chapter “Turn Up a Node”.
September 2010 Updated the table “OTU2_XP Card OTN Lines Settings” in the chapter “Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
October 2010 • Updated “NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords” in the chapter,
“Turn Up a Node”.
• Updated “NTP-G207 Create, Edit and Delete Optical Sides” in the chapter,
“Turn Up a Node”.
• Added a note in the “NTP-G114 Inspect, Clean, and Replace the Air Filter”
section of the chapter, “Maintain the node”.
• Updated “DLP-G314 Verify OSCM Transmit Power” in the chapter ,“Turn Up
a Node”.lxxi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
November 2010 • Updated “DLP-G645 Create a Segment Using CTC” in the chapter, Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated step 21 in “NTP-G42 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS and
32DMX Cards Acceptance Test”
• Updated step 22 in "NTP-G153 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS-L and
32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test"
• Updated step 21 in "NTP-G167 Perform the Terminal Node with 40-WSS-C and
40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test"
December 2010 Updated the section "NTP-G110 Off-Load the Diagnostics File" in the chapter
"Maintain the Node".
March 2011 • Updated the description of the rxTotalPkts variable in the chapter, Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards.
• Updated the table “ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds” in the chapter
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Added a note in the sections “Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters”,
“Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test”, and “Perform the Node
Upgrade Acceptance Test”.
April 2011 • Updated the card mode options for the 40G-MXP-C card in the chapter,
Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.
• Added DLP-G689 to the chapter, Create Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords.
• Updated the section “NTP-G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings,
PM Parameters, and Thresholds” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and
Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the purpose in "NTP-G151 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical
Channel Client Connections" and added notes to "DLP-G346 Provision Optical
Channel Client Connections" and "DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel
Network Connections" in the chapter, "Create Circuits and Provisionable
Patchcords".
May 2011 • Updated the note in “DLP-G266 Modify Backplane Port IP Settings in Security
Mode” in the chapter, “Manage the Node” and “DLP-G56 Provision IP
Settings” in the chapter, “Turn Up a Node”.
• Updated step 5 in the procedure “Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace
DWDM Cards” of the chapter, “Upgrade, Add, and Remove Cards and Nodes”.
July 2011 • Added Framing and CRC Encap entries to table in “DLP-G469 Provision the
ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings”.
• Updated “NTP-G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network” to generalize the
steps.
August 2011 • Updated the table “OTU2_XP Line Settings” in the chapter “Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated “DLP-G629 Create a MEP Using CTC” in the chapter “Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
Date Noteslxxii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
September 2011 • Updated a note in “NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and
Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the “NTP-G78 View Side Power Monitoring” procedure.
October 2011 • Updated the “DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE QinQ Settings”, “DLP-G470 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Class of Service (CoS) Settings”, “DLP-G380
Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet
Settings”, and “DLP-G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for
GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards” procedures in the chapter "Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards".
• Updated the MPLS Inner Label and MPLS Outer Label range values in the table
"GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings " in the chapter "Provision Transponder
and Muxponder Cards".
• Updated the “DLP-G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile” in the chapter
"Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards".
• Updated information related to IB_5G in the chapter “Provision Transponder
and Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the section “DLP-G281 Configure the Node for RADIUS
Authentication” in the chapter “Manage the Node”.
November 2011 • Updated the section “DLP-G645 Create a Segment Using CTC” in the chapter
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
December 2011 • Updated the procedure “DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations” in the
chapter “Create Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords”.
• Updated the following procedures in the chapter “Manage the Node”:
– NTP-G85 Modify or Delete OSC Terminations, DCC/GCC Terminations,
and Provisionable Patchcords
– DLP-G184 Change a DCC/GCC Termination
– DLP-G185 Delete a DCC/GCC Termination
February 2012 • Updated the procedure “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and
Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the Mode parameter in the table “ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings”
in the chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the procedure “DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate” in the
chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
March 2012 • Updated the bandwidth parameter in the procedure, “DLP-G383 Provision the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service Settings”.
• Updated the procedure, “NTP-G129 Add a DWDM Node”, in the chapter
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Added a note in the procedure “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord
Manually” in the chapter “Turn Up a Node”.
Date Noteslxxiii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Document Objectives
This document explains installation, turn up, provisioning, and maintenance for Cisco ONS 15454,
Cisco ONS M2, and Cisco ONS M6 systems. Use this document in conjunction with the appropriate
publications listed in the Related Documentation section.
Audience
To use this publication, you should be familiar with Cisco or equivalent optical transmission hardware
and cabling, telecommunications hardware and cabling, electronic circuitry and wiring practices, and
preferably have experience as a telecommunications technician
Document Organization
April 2012 • Added a note in the procedure “DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate
Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings” in the chapter “Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Added a new procedure "DLP-G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports
in a REP Segment Using CTC" and updated "DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings" in the chapter, "Provision
Transponder and Muxponder Cards".
May 2012 • Added a note in the procedure “DLP-G507 Enable a Different GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master Card” in the chapter
“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”.
• Updated the “Set Up SNMP” procedure in the chapter “Turn Up a Node”.
July 2012 Document Part Number revisioned to 78-19286-02 and a full length book-PDF was
generated.
Date Notes
Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapters
Title Summary
Chapter 1, “Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS
15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf”
Explains how to install the Cisco ONS 15454
ETSI, Cisco ONS 15454 ANSI, Cisco ONS 15454
M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies.
Chapter 2, “Install the Control Cards” Explains how to install the control cards needed for
the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and
Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies.
Chapter 3, “Connect the PC and Log into the
GUI”
Explains how to connect Windows PCs and Solaris
workstations to the Cisco ONS 15454 and how to
log into Cisco Transport Controller (CTC)
software.lxxiv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node” Explains how to provision a single
Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) node and turn it up for
service.
Chapter 5, “Perform Node Acceptance Tests” Provides test procedures to verify that installed
cards are operating correctly in a
Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) node.
Chapter 6, “Provision Transponder and
Muxponder Cards”
Explains how to provision transponder (TXP),
muxponder (MXP), Xponder (GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE), and ADM-10G cards.
Chapter 7, “Turn Up a Network” Explains how to turn up and test a
Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) network.
Chapter 8, “Create Circuits and Provisionable
Patchcords”
Explains how to create Cisco ONS 15454 dense
wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
optical channel client connections (OCHCCs),
optical channel network connections (OCHNCs),
and optical trail circuits.
Chapter 9, “Monitor Performance” Explains how to enable and view performance
monitoring (PM) statistics for the
Cisco ONS 15454.
Chapter 10, “Manage Alarms” Contains the procedures for viewing and managing
the alarms and conditions on a Cisco ONS 15454.
Chapter 11, “Manage the Node” Explains how to modify node provisioning for the
Cisco ONS 15454 and perform common
management tasks such as monitoring the dense
wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
automatic power control (APC) and span loss
values.
Chapter 12, “Change DWDM Card Settings” Explains how to change line, performance
monitoring (PM), and threshold settings on
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM cards.
Chapter 13, “Upgrade, Add, and Remove Cards
and Nodes”
Provides procedures for adding and removing
dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
cards and nodes.
Chapter 14, “Maintain the Node” Provides procedures for maintaining the
Cisco ONS 15454, including database backup and
restoration, removing and replacing cards, viewing
the ONS 15454 audit trail, and hardware
maintenance procedures.
Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapters (continued)
Title Summarylxxv
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Related Documentation
Use the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide in conjunction with the following referenced
Release 9.2 publications:
• Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
• Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide
• Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Quick Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS 15454 SDH TL1 Command Guide
• Cisco ONS 15454 SDH TL1 Reference Guide
• Cisco ONS 15454 SDH TL1Command Quick Reference Guide
• Cisco Transport Planner DWDM Operations Guide
• Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 DWDM, Release 9.2
• Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454 SONET and SDH, Release 9.2
For an update on End-of-Life and End-of-Sale notices, refer to
http://cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/optical/ps2006/prod_eol_notices_list.html.
Document Conventions
This publication uses the following conventions:
Appendix A, “CTC Information and Shortcuts” Describes the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC)
views, menus options, tool options, shortcuts, and
table display options.
Appendix B, “Configuring GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI”
Describes how to provision GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards using Pseudo
Command Line Interface (PCLI).
Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapters (continued)
Title Summary
Convention Application
boldface Commands and keywords in body text.
italic Command input that is supplied by the user.
[ ] Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional.lxxvi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the
document.
Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, the user might do something that could result in equipment
damage or loss of data.
{ x | x | x } A choice of keywords (represented by x) appears in braces separated by
vertical bars. The user must select one.
Ctrl The control key. For example, where Ctrl + D is written, hold down the
Control key while pressing the D key.
screen font Examples of information displayed on the screen.
boldface screen font Examples of information that the user must enter.
< > Command parameters that must be replaced by module-specific codes.
Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you
work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar
with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of
each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this
device. Statement 1071
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Waarschuwing BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSINSTRUCTIES
Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan
veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij
elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van de standaard
praktijken om ongelukken te voorkomen. Gebruik het nummer van de verklaring onderaan de
waarschuwing als u een vertaling van de waarschuwing die bij het apparaat wordt geleverd, wilt
raadplegen.
BEWAAR DEZE INSTRUCTIES
Convention Applicationlxxvii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Varoitus TÄRKEITÄ TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA
Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Tilanne voi aiheuttaa ruumiillisia vammoja. Ennen kuin
käsittelet laitteistoa, huomioi sähköpiirien käsittelemiseen liittyvät riskit ja tutustu
onnettomuuksien yleisiin ehkäisytapoihin. Turvallisuusvaroitusten käännökset löytyvät laitteen
mukana toimitettujen käännettyjen turvallisuusvaroitusten joukosta varoitusten lopussa näkyvien
lausuntonumeroiden avulla.
SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET
Attention IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SÉCURITÉ
Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant
entraîner des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez
conscient des dangers liés aux circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures
couramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents. Pour prendre connaissance des traductions des
avertissements figurant dans les consignes de sécurité traduites qui accompagnent cet appareil,
référez-vous au numéro de l'instruction situé à la fin de chaque avertissement.
CONSERVEZ CES INFORMATIONS
Warnung WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE
Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu Verletzungen führen
kann. Machen Sie sich vor der Arbeit mit Geräten mit den Gefahren elektrischer Schaltungen und
den üblichen Verfahren zur Vorbeugung vor Unfällen vertraut. Suchen Sie mit der am Ende jeder
Warnung angegebenen Anweisungsnummer nach der jeweiligen Übersetzung in den übersetzten
Sicherheitshinweisen, die zusammen mit diesem Gerät ausgeliefert wurden.
BEWAHREN SIE DIESE HINWEISE GUT AUF.
Avvertenza IMPORTANTI ISTRUZIONI SULLA SICUREZZA
Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle
persone. Prima di intervenire su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre essere al corrente dei pericoli
relativi ai circuiti elettrici e conoscere le procedure standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.
Utilizzare il numero di istruzione presente alla fine di ciascuna avvertenza per individuare le
traduzioni delle avvertenze riportate in questo documento.
CONSERVARE QUESTE ISTRUZIONI
Advarsel VIKTIGE SIKKERHETSINSTRUKSJONER
Dette advarselssymbolet betyr fare. Du er i en situasjon som kan føre til skade på person. Før du
begynner å arbeide med noe av utstyret, må du være oppmerksom på farene forbundet med
elektriske kretser, og kjenne til standardprosedyrer for å forhindre ulykker. Bruk nummeret i slutten
av hver advarsel for å finne oversettelsen i de oversatte sikkerhetsadvarslene som fulgte med denne
enheten.
TA VARE PÅ DISSE INSTRUKSJONENElxxviii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você está em uma situação que poderá ser causadora de
lesões corporais. Antes de iniciar a utilização de qualquer equipamento, tenha conhecimento dos
perigos envolvidos no manuseio de circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas habituais de
prevenção de acidentes. Utilize o número da instrução fornecido ao final de cada aviso para
localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham este dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES
¡Advertencia! INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
Este símbolo de aviso indica peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física. Antes de manipular
cualquier equipo, considere los riesgos de la corriente eléctrica y familiarícese con los
procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes. Al final de cada advertencia encontrará el
número que le ayudará a encontrar el texto traducido en el apartado de traducciones que acompaña
a este dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES
Varning! VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSANVISNINGAR
Denna varningssignal signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada.
Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och
känna till vanliga förfaranden för att förebygga olyckor. Använd det nummer som finns i slutet av
varje varning för att hitta dess översättning i de översatta säkerhetsvarningar som medföljer denna
anordning.
SPARA DESSA ANVISNINGARlxxix
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você se encontra em uma situação em que há risco de lesões
corporais. Antes de trabalhar com qualquer equipamento, esteja ciente dos riscos que envolvem os
circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas padrão de prevenção de acidentes. Use o
número da declaração fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de
segurança traduzidos que acompanham o dispositivo.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES
Advarsel VIGTIGE SIKKERHEDSANVISNINGER
Dette advarselssymbol betyder fare. Du befinder dig i en situation med risiko for
legemesbeskadigelse. Før du begynder arbejde på udstyr, skal du være opmærksom på de
involverede risici, der er ved elektriske kredsløb, og du skal sætte dig ind i standardprocedurer til
undgåelse af ulykker. Brug erklæringsnummeret efter hver advarsel for at finde oversættelsen i de
oversatte advarsler, der fulgte med denne enhed.
GEM DISSE ANVISNINGERlxxx
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Prefacelxxxi
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Obtaining Optical Networking Information
This section contains information that is specific to optical networking products. For information that
pertains to all of Cisco, refer to the Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security
Guidelines section.
Where to Find Safety and Warning Information
For safety and warning information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and
Compliance Information document that accompanied the product. This publication describes the
international agency compliance and safety information for the Cisco ONS 15454 system. It also
includes translations of the safety warnings that appear in the ONS 15454 system documentation.
Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM
Optical networking-related documentation, including Cisco ONS 15xxx product documentation, is
available in a CD-ROM package that ships with your product. The Optical Networking Product
Documentation CD-ROM is updated periodically and may be more current than printed documentation.lxxxii
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Preface
Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelines
Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security
Guidelines
For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional
information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and
revised Cisco technical documentation, at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html
Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed
and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free
service and Cisco currently supports RSS Version 2.0.CHAPTER
1-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
1
Install the CiscoONS15454, ONS 15454 M2, and
ONS 15454 M6 Shelf
For information on installing the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 shelf, refer:
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.1-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 1 Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 ShelfCHAPTER
2-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
2
Install the Control Cards
This chapter explains how to install the control cards needed for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS
15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 2-1—Complete this procedure to install the
contol cards needed for the ONS 15454 platform.
2. NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC or TSC Card, page 2-8—Complete this procedure to
install the control cards needed for the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 platforms.
NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards
Purpose This procedure describes how to install the control cards needed for the
ONS 15454 platform.
Tools/Equipment Redundant TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards on ONS 15454 shelf (required)
AIC-I card (optional)
MS-ISC-100T (optional; for multishelf node configurations)
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G7 Install the Power and Ground” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher2-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. For detailed
instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Cisco ONS Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
and Grounding Guide.
Note If protective clips are installed on the backplane connectors of the cards, remove the clips before
installing the cards.
Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously.
Step 1 (ONS 15454 only) Complete the “DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card” task on page 2-2.
Note If you install the wrong card in a slot, see the “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and
Replace DWDM Cards” procedure in the “Upgrade, Add and Remove Cards and Nodes” chapter
of the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide.
Step 2 (ONS 15454 only) Complete the “DLP-G34 Install the AIC-I Card” task on page 2-6, if necessary.
Step 3 (ONS 15454 only) Complete the “DLP-G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card” task on page 2-7, if
necessary.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card
Caution Do not remove a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card during the software transfer process, which is indicated by
alternate flashing FAIL and ACT/STBY LEDs. Removing a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 during the software
transfer process will corrupt the system memory.
Purpose This task installs redundant TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards. The first card you
install in the ONS 15454 must be a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card, and it must
initialize before you install any cross-connect or traffic cards.
Cross-connect cards are only required in hybrid nodes.
Tools/Equipment Two TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None2-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Note Allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card.
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors of the first TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card that you will install.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails until the card plugs into the
receptacle at the back of the slot (Slot 7 or 11).
Note In Step 4, you will be instructed to watch the LED activity (sequence) on the front of the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. This activity begins immediately after you close the latches in Step 3.
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the back
panel of the shelf. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any farther.
If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Step 4 As needed, go to Step a to verify the LED activity on the TCC2 card. For the TCC2P go to Step b. For
the TCC3 card go to Step c.
a. For the TCC2 card:
• All LEDs turn on briefly. The red FAIL LED and the yellow ACT/STBY LED turn on for about
15 seconds. (For TCC3 card it takes around 20 to 25 seconds)
• The red FAIL LED and the green ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 40 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds. All LEDs turn on for about 3 seconds before
turning off for about 3 seconds.
• Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds. The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes
before going to steady green.
• While the PWR LEDs are red for two to three minutes, the ACT/STBY turn on.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the ACT/STBY remains
on. (The ACT/STBY LED will be green if this is the first TCC2 card installed, and amber if this
is the second TCC2 card installed.)
Note It might take up to four minutes for the A and B power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Note If you are logged into CTC, the SFTWDOWN alarm might appear as many as two times while
the TCC2 card initializes. The alarm should clear after the card completely boots.2-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TCC2 card automatic upload.
b. For the TCC2P card:
• All LEDs turn on briefly. The red FAIL LED, the yellow ACT/STBY LED, the green SYNC
LED, and the green ACO LED turn on for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED and the green ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 30 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 3 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 10 seconds and then becomes solid.
• All LEDs (including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs) blink once and turn
off for about 5 seconds.
• Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds. The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes
before going to steady green. During this time, the ACT/STBY, MJ, and MN LEDs might turn
on, followed by the SNYC LED briefly.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the yellow ACT/STBY
remains on. (The ACT/STBY LED will be green if this is the first TCC2P card installed, and
yellow if this is the second TCC2P card installed.)
Note It might take up to three minutes for the A and B power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Note If you are logged into CTC, the SFTWDOWN alarm might appear as many as two times while
the TCC2P card initializes. The alarm should clear after the card completely boots.
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TCC2P card automatic
upload.
c. For the TCC3 card:
• All LEDs turn on briefly. The red FAIL LED, the yellow ACT/STBY LED, the green SYNC
LED, and the green ACO LED turn on for about 25 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED and the green ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 15 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 3 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 60 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 15 seconds and then becomes solid (the LED is turned on
for about 20 seconds).
• All LEDs (including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs) blink once and turn
off for about 5 seconds.2-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
• Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds. The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes
before going to steady green. During this time, the ACT/STBY, MJ, and MN LEDs might turn
on, followed by the SNYC LED briefly.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the yellow ACT/STBY
remains on. (The ACT/STBY LED will be green if this is the first TCC3 card installed, and
yellow if this is the second TCC3 card installed.)
Note It might take up to three minutes for the A and B power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Note If you are logged into CTC, the SFTWDOWN alarm might appear as many as two times while
the TCC3 card initializes. The alarm should clear after the card completely boots.
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TCC3 card automatic upload.
Step 5 Verify that the ACT/STBY LED is green if this is the first powered-up TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card
installed, or yellow for standby if this is the second powered-up TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3. The IP address,
temperature of the node, and time of day appear on the LCD. The default time and date is 12:00 AM,
January 1, 1970.
Step 6 The LCD cycles through the IP address (the default is 192.1.0.2), node name, and software version.
Verify that the correct software version is shown on the LCD. The software text string indicates the node
type (SDH or SONET) and software release. (For example: SDH 09.20-05L-20.10 indicates it is an SDH
software load, Release 9.2. The numbers following the release number do not have any significance.)
Step 7 If the LCD shows the correct software version, continue with Step 8. If the LCD does not show the
correct software version, refer to your next level of technical support, upgrade the software, or remove
the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card and install a replacement card.
Refer to the release-specific software upgrade document to replace the software. To replace the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the redundant TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. If both TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards
are already installed, proceed to Step 9.
Tip If you install a standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card that has a different software version than the
active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card, the newly installed standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card
automatically copies the software version from the active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. You do not
need to do anything in this situation. However, the loading TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card does not
boot up in the normal manner. When the standby card is first inserted, the LEDs follow most of
the normal boot-up sequence. However, after the red FAIL LED turns on for about 5 seconds,
the FAIL LED and the ACT/STBY LED begin to flash alternately for up to 30 minutes while the
new software loads onto the active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. After loading the new software,
the upgraded TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card’s LEDs repeat the appropriate bootup sequence, and the
amber ACT/STBY LED turns on.2-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the
Alarms tab.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G34 Install the AIC-I Card
Note When installing cards, allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card.
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors on the card.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails in Slot 9 until the card plugs into
the receptacle at the back of the slot.
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the
backplane. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any further.
Step 4 Verify the following:
• The red FAIL LED blinks for up to 10 seconds.
Note If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power.
• The PWR A and PWR B LEDs become red, the two INPUT/OUTPUT LEDs become amber, and the
ACT LED turns green for approximately 5 seconds.
• The PWR A and PWR B LEDs turn green, the INPUT/OUTPUT LEDs turn off, and the green ACT
LED remains on.
Note It might take up to 3 minutes for the PWR A and PWR B LEDs to update.
Purpose This task installs the AIC-I card. The AIC-I card provides connections for
external alarms and controls (environmental alarms).
Tools/Equipment AIC-I card
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card, page 2-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None2-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, no LEDs turn on.
Note If the red FAIL LED is on continuously or the LEDs act erratically, the card is not installed
properly. Remove the card and repeat Steps 1 to 4.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card
Note When installing cards, allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card.
Note The MS-ISC-100T is not supported in a subtended shelf.
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors on the card.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails into the appropriate slot in the node
controller shelf until the card plugs into the receptacle at the back of the slot. The card can be installed
in any slot from Slot 1 to 6 or 12 to 17. Cisco recommends that you install the MS-ISC-100T cards in
Slot 6 and Slot 12.
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the
backplane. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any further.
Step 4 Verify the LED activity:
• The red FAIL LED blinks for 35 to 45 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for 15 to 20 seconds.
Purpose This task installs redundant MS-ISC-100T cards. The MS-ISC-100T card
is required for a multishelf node configuration. It provides LAN
redundancy on the node controller shelf. An alternative to using the
MS-ISC-100T card is the Cisco Catalyst 2950, although Cisco recommends
using the MS-ISC-100T. For more information on the Catalyst 2950
installation, refer to the Catalyst 2950 product documentation.
Tools/Equipment MS-ISC-100T card (2)
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card, page 2-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None2-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
• The red FAIL LED blinks for approximately 3 minutes.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for approximately 6 minutes.
• The green ACT or ACT/STBY LED turns on. The SF LED can persist until all card ports connect
to their far end counterparts and a signal is present.
Note If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power.
Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the redundant MS-ISC-100T card.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC or TSC Card
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454
M6 shelf assemblies. For detailed instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Cisco ONS
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) and Grounding Guide.
Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G604 Install the TNC or TSC Card” task on page 2-9.
Purpose This procedure describes how to install and configure the TNC or TSC
card. TNC and TSC cards are the control cards needed for the ONS 15454
M2 and ONS 15454 M6 platforms.
Tools/Equipment Redundant TNC/TSC cards on ONS 15454 M6 shelf (required)
Stand-alone TNC/TSC card on ONS 15454 M2 shelf (required)
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G271 Install the Power and Ground to the ONS 15454 M2 Shelf” in
the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher2-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Note If you install the wrong card in a slot, see the “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and
Replace DWDM Cards” task on page 13-2.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC Card” task on page 2-12.
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC Card” task on page 2-12.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G604 Install the TNC or TSC Card
Caution Do not remove the TNC/TSC cards during the software installation process, which is indicated by
alternate flashing FAIL and ACT/STBY LEDs. Removing the TNC/TSC cards during the software
installation process will corrupt the system memory.
Note Allow each TNC/TSC card to boot completely before installing the redundant TNC/TSC card.
Note On the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, install the TNC/TSC cards in slots 1 and 8 for redundancy. On the ONS
15454 M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TNC/TSC card in slot 1. For more information, see the “Card
Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Note You cannot insert the TNC/TSC cards in other slots due to mechanical constraints. To identify the card
slot, match the symbol placed on the lower side of the card front panel with the symbol in the shelf.
Caution To achieve redundancy, two TNC cards or two TSC cards must be installed in the ONS 15454 M6 shelf.
Do not install one TNC card and a redundant TSC card in the same shelf.
Purpose (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) This task installs redundant
TNC/TSC cards on the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and a stand-alone TNC/TSC
card on the ONS 15454 M2 shelf. Install and initialize the TNC/TSC card
before installing any other line cards into the shelf assemblies. On the ONS
15454 M6 shelf, install the TNC/TSC cards in slots 1 and 8 for redundancy.
On the ONS 15454 M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TNC/TSC card in slot
1.
Tools/Equipment Two TNC/TSC cards for the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and one TNC/TSC card
for the ONS 15454 M2 shelf
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None2-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors of the first TNC/TSC card that you will install.
Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card horizontally along the guide rails until the card plugs
into the receptacle at the back of the slot (slot 1 or 8 in the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and slot 1 in the ONS
15454 M2 shelf).
Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly, and close the latches/ejectors on the card.
If you insert a card into a slot assigned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
Step 4 As needed, verify the LED activity on the TNC/TSC card.
• The red FAIL LED, PWR LED turn on briefly.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 10 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED and the amber ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 30 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED blinks for about 10 seconds.
• The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds.
• All the LEDs including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs blink once and
turn off for about 10 seconds.
• ACT/STBY LED blinks for about 1 second.
• All the LEDs including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs turn off for about
10 seconds.
• The ACT/STBY, ACO, and PWR LEDs turn on.
• The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the amber ACT/STBY
remains on. The ACT/STBY LED turns green if this is the first TNC/TSC card installed, and
amber if this is the second TNC/TSC card installed.
Note It might take up to four minutes for the power alarms to clear.
Note Alarm LEDs might be on. After completing the TNC/TSC card installation, log in to CTC and
click the Alarms tab to display the alarms raised on the card. For procedure to clear the alarm,
see the Cisco ONS DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Note During the TNC/TSC card initialization, the SFTWDOWN alarm appears twice. The alarm
clears after the TNC/TSC card boots completely.
Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TNC/TSC card automatic
upload.
Figure 2-1 illustrates the installation of TNC card on ONS 15454 M6 shelf.2-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Figure 2-1 Installing TNC Card on ONS 15454 M6 Shelf
Step 5 Verify that the ACT/STBY LED is green if this is the first powered-up TNC/TSC card installed or amber
if this is the second powered-up TNC/TSC. The IP address, temperature of the node, and time of day
appear on the LCD. The default time and date is 12:00 AM, January 1, 1970.
Step 6 The LCD cycles through the IP address (the default is 192.1.0.2), node name, and software version.
Verify that the correct software version is shown on the LCD. The software text string indicates the node
type (SDH or SONET) and software release. (For example: SDH 09.20-05L-20.10 indicates it is an SDH
software load, Release 9.2. The numbers following the release number do not have any significance.)
Step 7 If the LCD shows the correct software version, continue with Step 8. If the LCD does not show the
correct software version, refer to your next level of technical support, upgrade the software, or remove
the TNC/TSC card and install a replacement card. Refer to the release-specific software upgrade
document to replace the software.
Step 8 (ONS 15454 M6 shelf only) Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the redundant TNC/TSC card.
Tip If you install a standby TNC/TSC card that has a different software version than the active
TNC/TSC card, the standby TNC/TSC card copies the software version from the active
TNC/TSC card. When the standby card is first inserted, the LEDs follow the normal boot-up
sequence. However, after the red FAIL LED turns on for about 5 seconds, the FAIL LED and the
ACT/STBY LED begin to flash alternately for up to 30 minutes. After loading the new software,
the upgraded TNC/TSC cards LEDs repeat the appropriate bootup sequence, and the amber
ACT/STBY LED turns on.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
279119
1 2
TNC card
Guide rail2-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC Card
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TNC card where you
want to provision PPM and port settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose 1 or 2 from the PPM drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Displays the PPM associated with the chosen PPM in the above step.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Port Modules area becomes white when the PPM is inserted and the Actual Equipment Type column lists
the name of PPM.
Step 6 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Port dialog box appears.
Step 7 In the Create Ports dialog box, complete the following:
• Port—Choose the port you want to configure from the Port drop-down list.
• Port Type—Choose the port type, such as OC-3, FE, or ONE-GE from the Port Type drop-down list.
Note OC-3 can be configured only on PPM port 1. FE and ONE-GE can be configured on both the ports.
Step 8 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Ports area. The port type you provisioned is
listed in the Rate column.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 3 through 8 to provision another PPM and port on the TNC card.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC Card
Purpose (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) This task provisions a PPM and
port on a TNC card. PPMs are created to support the OSC function.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None
Purpose (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) This task configures UDC and
VoIP traffic for the TNC card.
Tools/Equipment None2-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control Cards
Note Each TNC card supports UDC/VoIP configuration. You can configure UDC or VoIP on the two SFP ports
present on the TNC card. The TNC card supports the UDC/VoIP configuration only when OSC is
provisioned on the SFP ports.
Note If two nodes are connected through the fiber and if the TNC card in one node has UDC configuration,
the TNC card in the other node must also have UDC configuration. The same rule applies to VoIP
configuration.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TNC card where you
want to configure UDC and VoIP.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > UDC / VOIP tabs.
Step 3 From the Service Type drop-drop list, choose UDC or VOIP.
Note You can configure UDC or VoIP on only one SFP port at a time per TNC card. If you want to configure
UDC or VoIP on the second SFP port, choose NONE from the Service Type drop-down list for the first
port and then choose UDC or VoIP for the second port.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 4-126
DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC Card, page 2-12
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None2-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 2 Install the Control CardsCHAPTER
3-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
3
Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
This chapter explains how to connect Windows PCs and Solaris workstations to the Cisco ONS 15454
and how to log into Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software, which is the ONS 15454 Operation,
Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P) user interface. Procedures for connecting to
the ONS 15454 ANSI using TL1 are provided in the Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide.
Procedures for connecting to the ONS 15454 ETSI using TL1 are provided in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH
and Cisco ONS 15600 SDH TL1 Command Guide.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Before You Begin
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2—Complete this procedure if your Windows PC or
Solaris workstation has never been connected to an ONS 15454.
2. NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454,
page 3-9—Complete this procedure to set up your computer for an onsite craft connection to the
ONS 15454.
3. NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection to the ONS 15454,
page 3-25—Complete this procedure to set up your computer to connect to the ONS 15454 using a
corporate LAN.
4. NTP-G21 Log into the GUI, page 3-28—Complete this procedure to log into CTC.
5. NTP-G190 Use the CTC Launcher Application to Manage Multiple ONS Nodes,
page 3-38—Complete this procedure to use the CTC launcher application.
Note Autonegotiation is enabled on the EMS, craft terminal, and TNC/TSC LAN ports by default. The Layer
2 switch (Cisco or third party equipment) ports where the LAN cables are connected, are also configured
with the autonegotiation enabled.3-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
For an ONS 15454 M6 shelf, we recommend the use of RJ-45 port (craft terminal port or the EMS port)
on the ECU to establish LAN connectivity. The advantages of using the RJ-45 ports on the ECU include:
• CAT-5 Ethernet cable connections can be managed better by routing the cable through the ECU
ejector.
• If the TNC or TSC card fails, the LAN connection is not lost during the TNC or TSC card switch
over.
If the ECU is absent, you can connect a CAT-5 Ethernet cable to the LAN port on the TNC/TSC card to
create an external LAN connection.
NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC
Note JRE 1.6 is required to log into nodes running Software Release 9.2. JRE 1.6 is provided on the Software
R9.2 software CD. Complete the “DLP-G52 Change the JRE Version” task on page 3-9 as needed.
Step 1 If your computer does not have an appropriate browser installed, complete one of the following:
• To install Internet Explorer 6.x, 7.x, or 8.x on a Windows PC, download the browser from
www.microsoft.com
• To install Mozilla 1.7 on a Solaris workstation, download the browser from www.mozilla.org
• To install Safari on a MacOS-X PC, download the browser fromwww.apple.com
Note Internet Explorer 8.x is supported on Windows 7, and Safari is supported on MacOS-X.
Step 2 (Windows PC only) Complete the “DLP-G331 Adjust the Java Virtual Memory Heap Size (Windows)”
task on page 3-29 to increase the size of the JVM heap to improve CTC performance.
Step 3 Complete one of the following:
• If your computer is a Windows PC, complete the “DLP-G37 Run the CTC Installation Wizard for
Windows PCs” task on page 3-3.
• If your computer is a Solaris workstation, complete the “DLP-G38 Run the CTC Installation Wizard
for Solaris Workstations” task on page 3-6.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure configures your Windows PC or Solaris workstation to run
CTC.
Tools/Equipment Cisco ONS 15454 Release 9.2 software CD
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 1, “Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454
M6 Shelf”
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G37 Run the CTC Installation Wizard for Windows PCs
Note If you will log into nodes running CTC software earlier than Release 4.6, install JRE 1.3.1. To run CTC
software R9.2, install JRE 1.6.
Step 1 Verify that your computer has the following:
• Processor—Pentium III, 700 Mhz or faster
• RAM—384 MB recommended, 512 MB optimum
Note Processor and RAM requirements are guidelines. CTC performance is faster if your
computer has a faster processor and more RAM.
• Hard drive—20 GB hard drive recommended with at least 50 MB of space available
• Operating system—Windows 98 (1st and 2nd editions), Windows NT 4.0 (with Service Pack 6a),
Windows 2000 (with Service Pack 3), Windows XP (with Service Pack 1), Windows Vista, or
Windows 7. If your operating system is Windows NT 4.0, go to Step 2. If your operating system is
Windows Vista or Windows 7, go to Step 3. For all others, go to Step 4.
Step 2 Verify that Service Pack 6a or later is installed. From Windows Start menu, choose Programs >
Administrative Tools > Windows NT Diagnostics and check the service pack on the Version tab of the
Windows NT Diagnostics dialog box. If Service Pack 6a or later is not installed, do not continue. Install
Service Pack 6a following the computer upgrade procedures for your site. Go to Step 4.
Step 3 Complete DLP-G450 Configuring Windows Vista or Windows 7 to Support CTC, page 3-46 and go
toStep 4.
Step 4 Insert the Cisco ONS 15454 Release 9.2 software CD into your computer CD drive. The installation
program begins running automatically. If it does not start, navigate to the CD directory and double-click
setup.exe.
The Cisco Transport Controller Installation Wizard displays the components that will be installed on
your computer:
• JRE 1.6
• Acrobat Reader 8.1.2
• Online User Manuals
Purpose This task installs CTC online user manuals, Acrobat Reader 8.1.2, JRE 1.6,
and CTC JAR files on Windows PCs.
Tools/Equipment Cisco ONS 15454 Release 9.2 software CD
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed This task is required if you will use a Windows computer to run CTC and
if any one of the following is true:
• JRE 1.6 is not installed.
• CTC online user manuals are not installed and are needed.
• CTC JAR files are not installed and are needed.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
• CTC JAR files
Note JRE 1.6 is required to run Release 9.2. Preinstalling the CTC JAR files saves time at initial login.
If the JAR files are not installed, they are downloaded from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC
cards the first time you log in.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 Complete one of the following:
• Click Typical to install the JRE, CTC JAR files, online user manuals, and Acrobat Reader. If you
already have JRE 1.6 installed on your computer, choose Custom.
• Click Custom if you want to choose the components that you want to install. By default, Acrobat
Reader and the online user manuals are selected.
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 Complete the following, as applicable:
• If you selected Typical in Step 6, skip this step and continue with Step 9.
• If you selected Custom in Step 6, check the CTC component that you want to install and click Next.
– If you selected Online User Manuals, continue with Step 9.
– If you did not select Online User Manuals, continue with Step 11.
Step 9 The directory where the installation wizard will install the CTC online user manuals appears. The default
is C:\Program Files\Cisco\CTC\Documentation.
• If you want to change the CTC online user manuals directory, type the new directory path in the
Directory Name field, or click Browse to navigate to the directory.
• If you do not want to change the directory, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 Review the components that will be installed. If you want to change the components, complete one of
the following. If not, proceed to Step 12.
• If you selected Typical in Step 6, click Back twice to return to the installation setup type page.
Choose Custom and repeat Steps 7 through 10.
• If you selected Custom in Step 6, click Back once or twice (depending on the components selected)
until the component selection page appears. Repeat Steps 7 through 10.
Step 12 Click Next. It might take a few minutes for the JRE installation wizard to appear. If you selected Custom
in Step 6 and you don’t need to install a JRE, continue with Step 14.
Step 13 To install the JRE, complete the following:
a. In the Java 2 Runtime Environment License Agreement dialog box, view the license agreement and
choose one of the following:
• I accept the terms of the license agreement—Accepts the license agreement. Continue with
Step b.
• I do not accept the terms of the license agreement—Disables the Next button on the Java 2
Runtime Environment License Agreement dialog box. Click Cancel to return to the CTC
installation wizard. CTC will not install the JRE. Continue with Step 14.3-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Note If JRE 1.6 is already installed on your computer, the Java 2 Runtime Environment
License Agreement dialog box does not appear. You must click Next and then choose
Modify to change the JRE installation, or Remove to uninstall the JRE. If you choose
Modify and click Next, continue with Step e. If you choose Remove and click Next,
continue with Step i.
b. Click Next.
c. Choose one of the following:
• Click Typical to install all JRE features. If you select Typical, the JRE version installed will
automatically become the default JRE version for your browsers.
• Click Custom if you want to select the components to install and select the browsers that will
use the JRE version.
d. Click Next.
e. If you selected Typical, continue with Step i. If you selected Custom, click the drop-down list for
each program feature that you want to install and choose the desired setting. The program features
include:
• Java 2 Runtime Environment—(Default) Installs JRE 1.6 with support for European languages.
• Support for Additional Languages—Adds support for non-European languages.
• Additional Font and Media Support—Adds Lucida fonts, Java Sound, and color management
capabilities.
The drop-down list options for each program feature include:
• This feature will be installed on the local hard drive—Installs the selected feature.
• This feature and all subfeatures will be installed on the local hard drive—Installs the selected
feature and all subfeatures.
• Don’t install this feature now—Does not install the feature (not an option for Java 2 Runtime
Environment).
To modify the directory where the JRE version is installed, click Change, navigate to the desired
directory, and click OK.
f. Click Next.
g. In the Browser Registration dialog box, check the browsers that you want to register with the Java
Plug-In. The JRE version will be the default for the selected browsers. It is acceptable to leave both
browser check boxes unchecked.
Note Setting the JRE as the default for these browsers might cause problems with these browsers.
h. Click Next.
i. Click Finish.
Note If you are uninstalling the JRE, click Remove.
Step 14 In the Cisco Transport Controller Installation Wizard, click Next. The online user manuals and/or Adobe
Acrobat Reader are installed.3-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 15 Click Finish.
Step 16 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G38 Run the CTC Installation Wizard for Solaris Workstations
Note If you will log into nodes running CTC software earlier than Release 4.6, install JRE 1.3.1. To run CTC
software R9.2, install JRE 1.6.
Step 1 Verify that your computer has the following:
• RAM—384 MB recommended, 512 MB optimum
• Hard drive—20 GB hard drive recommended with at least 50 MB of space available
• Operating system—Solaris 9 or 10
Note These requirements are guidelines. CTC performance is faster if your computer has a faster
processor and more RAM.
Step 2 Change the directory. Type:
cd /cdrom/cdrom0/
Step 3 From the techdoc454 CD directory, type:
./setup.bat
The Cisco Transport Controller Installation Wizard displays the components that will be installed on
your computer:
• JRE 1.6
• Acrobat Reader 8.1.2
• Online User Manuals
• CTC JAR files
Step 4 Click Next.
Step 5 Complete one of the following:
Purpose This task installs the CTC online user manuals, Acrobat 8.1.2, and JRE 1.6
on Solaris workstations, as necessary.
Tools/Equipment Cisco ONS 15454 Release 9.2 software CD
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed This task is required if you will use a Solaris workstation to run CTC, and
any of the following is true:
• JRE 1.6 is not installed.
• CTC online user manuals are not installed and are needed.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
• Click Typical to install both the JRE and the online user manuals. If you already have JRE 1.6
installed on your computer, choose Custom.
• Click Custom if you want to install either the JRE or the online user manuals.
Step 6 Click Next.
Step 7 Complete the following, as applicable:
• If you selected Typical in Step 5, continue with Step 8.
• If you selected Custom in Step 5, check the CTC component that you want to install and click Next.
– If you selected Online User Manuals, continue with Step 8.
– If you did not select Online User Manuals, continue with Step 10.
Step 8 The directory where the installation wizard will install the CTC online user manuals appears. The default
is /usr/doc/ctc.
• If you want to change the CTC online user manuals directory, type the new directory path in the
Directory Name field, or click Browse to navigate to the directory.
• If you do not want to change the CTC online user manuals directory, skip this step.
Step 9 Click Next.
Step 10 Review the components that will be installed.
• If you selected Typical in Step 5, click Back twice to return to the installation setup type page.
Choose Custom and repeat Steps 6 through 9.
• If you selected Custom in Step 5, click Back once or twice (depending on the components selected)
until you reach the component selection page and check the desired components. Repeat Steps 7
through 9.
Step 11 Click Next. It might take a few minutes for the JRE installation wizard to appear. If you selected Custom
in Step 6 and need to install the JRE, continue with Step 13.
Step 12 To install the JRE, complete the following:
a. In the Java 2 Runtime Environment License Agreement dialog box, view the license agreement and
choose one of the following:
• I accept the terms of the license agreement—Accepts the license agreement. Continue with
Step b.
• I do not accept the terms of the license agreement—Disables the Next button on the Java 2
Runtime Environment License Agreement dialog box. Click Cancel to return to the CTC
installation wizard. CTC will not install the JRE. Continue with Step 13.
Note If JRE 1.6 is already installed on your computer, the Java 2 Runtime Environment
License Agreement dialog box does not appear. You must click Next and then choose
Modify to change the JRE installation or Remove to uninstall the JRE. If you choose
Modify and click Next, continue with Step e. If you choose Remove and click Next,
continue with Step i.
b. Click Next.
c. Choose one of the following:
• Click Typical to install all JRE features. If you select Typical, the JRE version installed will
automatically become the default JRE version for your browsers. 3-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
• Click Custom if you want to select the components to install and select the browsers that will
use the JRE version.
d. Click Next.
e. If you selected Typical, continue with Step i. If you selected Custom, click the drop-down list for
each program feature that you want to install and choose the desired setting. The program features
include:
• Java 2 Runtime Environment—(Default) Installs JRE 1.6 with support for European languages.
• Support for Additional Languages—Adds support for non-European languages.
• Additional Font and Media Support—Adds Lucida fonts, Java Sound, and color management
capabilities.
The drop-down list options for each program feature include:
• This feature will be installed on the local hard drive—Installs the selected feature.
• This feature and all subfeatures will be installed on the local hard drive—Installs the selected
feature and all subfeatures.
• Don’t install this feature now—Does not install the feature (not an option for Java 2 Runtime
Environment).
To modify the directory where the JRE version is installed, click Change, navigate to the desired
directory, and click OK.
f. Click Next.
g. In the Browser Registration dialog box, check the browsers that you want to register with the Java
Plug-In. The JRE version will be the default for the selected browsers. It is acceptable to leave both
browser check boxes unchecked.
Note Setting the JRE version as the default for these browsers might cause problems with these
browsers.
h. Click Next.
i. Click Finish.
Note If you are uninstalling the JRE, click Remove.
Step 13 In the Cisco Transport Controller Installation Wizard, click Next. The online user manuals are installed.
Step 14 Click Finish.
Note Be sure to record the names of the directories you choose for JRE and the online user manuals.
Step 15 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).3-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G52 Change the JRE Version
Step 1 From the Edit menu, choose Preferences.
Step 2 Click the JRE tab. The JRE tab shows the current JRE version and the recommended and supported
versions.
Step 3 Click the Browse button and navigate to the JRE directory on your computer.
Step 4 Choose the JRE version.
Step 5 Click Open, then click OK.
Step 6 From the File menu, choose Exit.
Step 7 In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
Step 8 Log out of the ONS node.
Step 9 In the web browser that you used to log into the node, click Delete CTC Cache.
Step 10 Click Yes on the confirmation dialog then close the browser window.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the
ONS15454
Purpose This task changes the JRE version, which is useful if you would like to
upgrade to a later JRE version from an earlier one without using the
software CD. This does not affect the browser default version. After
selecting the desired JRE version, you must exit CTC. The next time you
log into a node, the new JRE version will be used.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure explains how to set up a PC running Windows or a Solaris
workstation for an onsite local craft connection to the ONS 15454.
Tools/Equipment Network interface card (NIC), also referred to as an Ethernet card
Straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cable
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete one of the CTC computer setup tasks shown in Table 3-1 based on your CTC connection
environment. For initial setup, use Option 1 or 3 if you are setting up a Windows PC. Use Option 4 if
you are setting up a Solaris workstation.
Table 3-1 CTC Computer Setup for Local Craft Connections to the ONS 15454
Option CTC Connection Environment CTC Computer Setup Task
1 • You are connecting from a Windows PC.
• You will connect to one ONS 15454, or ONS 15454 M2, or
ONS 15454 M6.
• You need to access non-ONS 15454 applications such as ping
and tracert (trace route).
DLP-G39 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft
Connection to an ONS 15454 on the Same
Subnet Using Static IP Addresses, page 3-12
2 • You are connecting from a Windows PC.
• Your network uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) for assignment of host IP addresses.
• The CTC computer is provisioned for DHCP.
• The ONS 15454 has DHCP forwarding enabled.
• The ONS 15454 is connected to a DHCP server.
Note The ONS 15454 does not provide IP addresses. If DHCP
is enabled, it passes DCHP requests to an external DHCP
server.
DLP-G40 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft
Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol, page 3-15
Note Do not use this task for initial node
turn-up. Use the task only if DHCP
forwarding is enabled on the
ONS 15454. By default, DHCP is not
enabled. To enable it, see the
“NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network
Access” procedure on page 4-18.3-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 2 Connect a straight-through CAT-5 LAN cable from the Windows PC or Solaris workstation NIC to one
of the following:
• The RJ-45 (LAN) port on the active or standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. Use this method for the
initial shelf turn-up.
• The RJ-45 (LAN) port on a hub or switch to which the ONS 15454 is physically connected.
• For multishelf mode, the DCN RJ-45 (LAN) port on the Ethernet Adapter Panel (EAP) or Port 23
or 24 of the Catalyst 2950 or the Catalyst 3560.
• If you are using an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, you will connect to the TNC/TSC ethernet port
or the EMS port on the power module either directly or through a hub.
• If you are using an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, you will connect to the TNC/TSC ethernet port,
or the EMS port or the craft terminal port on the ECU either directly or through a hub.
3 • You are connecting from a Windows PC.
• You will connect to ONS 15454s at different locations and
times and do not wish to reconfigure your PC’s IP settings
each time.
• You will not access or use non-ONS 15454 applications such
as ping and tracert (trace route).
• If you are using an ANSI shelf, you will connect to the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 Ethernet port or backplane LAN pins
either directly or through a hub.
• If you are using an ETSI shelf, you will connect to the
ONS 15454 Ethernet port or the RJ-45 jack on the MIC-C/T/P
FMEC either directly or through a hub.
• If you are using an ANSI or ETSI multishelf node, you will
connect to the patch panel DCN port or the Catalyst 2950 or
the Catalyst 3560 using a straight-through (CAT 5) LAN
cable.
• If you are using an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, you will
connect to the TNC/TSC ethernet port, or the EMS port or the
craft terminal port on the ECU either directly or through a
hub.
• If you are using an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, you will
connect to the TNC/TSC ethernet port or the EMS port on the
power module either directly or through a hub.
• If you are using an ONS 15454 M6 multishelf node, you will
connect to the patch panel DCN port or the Catalyst 2950 or
Catalyst 3560 using a straight-through (CAT 5) LAN cable.
DLP-G41 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft
Connection to an ONS 15454 Using
Automatic Host Detection, page 3-19
4 • You are connecting from a Solaris workstation.
• You will connect to one ONS 15454.
• You need to access non-ONS 15454 applications such as ping
and tracert (trace route).
DLP-G42 Set Up a Solaris Workstation for a
Craft Connection to an ONS 15454,
page 3-23
Table 3-1 CTC Computer Setup for Local Craft Connections to the ONS 15454 (continued)
Option CTC Connection Environment CTC Computer Setup Task (continued)3-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Note For instructions on crimping your own straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cables, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 3 After setting up your CTC computer, continue with the “NTP-G21 Log into the GUI” procedure on
page 3-28 as needed.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G39 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS15454 on the
Same Subnet Using Static IP Addresses
Step 1 Verify the operating system that is installed on your computer:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
b. In the Control Panel window, double-click the System icon.
c. On the General tab of the System Settings window, verify that the Windows operating system is one
of the following: Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, or
Windows 7.
Step 2 According to the Windows operating system installed on your computer, perform one of the following
steps:
• For Windows 98, complete Step 3.
• For Windows NT 4.0, complete Step 4.
• For Windows 2000, complete Step 5.
• For Windows XP, complete Step 6.
• For Windows Vista, complete Step 7.
• For Windows 7, complete Step 8.
Purpose This task sets up your computer for a local craft connection to the
ONS 15454 when:
• You will connect to one ONS 15454; if you will connect to multiple
ONS 15454s, you might need to reconfigure your computer’s IP
settings each time you connect to an ONS 15454.
• You need to use non-ONS 15454 applications such as ping and tracert
(trace route).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None3-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 3 If you have Windows 98 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
b. In the Control Panel dialog box, click the Network icon.
c. In the Network dialog box, choose TCP/IP for your NIC card, then click Properties.
d. In the TCP/IP Properties dialog box, click the DNS Configuration tab and choose Disable DNS.
e. Click the WINS Configuration tab and choose Disable WINS Resolution.
f. Click the IP Address tab.
g. In the IP Address window, click Specify an IP address.
h. In the IP Address field, enter an IP address that is identical to the ONS 15454 IP address except for
the last octet. The last octet must be 1 or 3 through 254. This IP address appears on the LCD unless
its display is suppressed during node provisioning.
i. In the Subnet Mask field, type the same subnet mask as the ONS 15454. The default is
255.255.255.0 (24 bit).
j. Click OK.
k. In the TCP/IP dialog box, click the Gateway tab.
l. In the New Gateway field, type the ONS 15454 IP address. Click Add.
m. Verify that the IP address appears in the Installed Gateways field, then click OK.
n. When the prompt to restart your PC appears, click Yes.
o. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 4 If you have Windows NT 4.0 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
b. In the Control Panel dialog box, click the Network icon.
c. In the Network dialog box, click the Protocols tab, choose TCP/IP Protocol, then click Properties.
d. Click the IP Address tab.
e. In the IP Address window, click Specify an IP address.
f. In the IP Address field, enter an IP address that is identical to the ONS 15454 IP address shown on
the ONS 15454 LCD except for the last octet. The last octet must be 1 or 3 through 254.
g. In the Subnet Mask field, type 255.255.255.0.
h. Click Advanced.
i. In the Gateways List, click Add. The TCP/IP Gateway Address dialog box appears.
j. Type the ONS 15454 IP address in the Gateway Address field.
k. Click Add.
l. Click OK.
m. Click Apply.
n. In some cases, Windows NT 4.0 prompts you to reboot your PC. If you receive this prompt, click
Yes.
o. Proceed to Step 9.3-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 5 If you have Windows 2000 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Network and Dial-up Connections >
Local Area Connection.
b. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, choose the local area connection connected to the
PC port connected to the ONS 15454.
c. Click Properties.
d. On the General tab, choose Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), then click Properties.
e. Click Use the following IP address.
f. In the IP Address field, enter an IP address that is identical to the ONS 15454 IP address shown on
the ONS 15454 LCD except for the last octet. The last octet must be 1 or 3 through 254.
g. In the Subnet Mask field, type 255.255.255.0.
h. In the Default Gateway field, type the ONS 15454 IP address.
i. Click OK.
j. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
k. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click Close.
l. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 6 If you have Windows XP installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel > Network Connections.
Note If the Network Connections menu is not available, right-click the Windows screen and
choose Properties from the popup menu. Click the Appearance tab, then under Scheme,
choose Classic View.
b. From the Network Connections dialog box, click the Local Area Connection icon.
c. On the General tab of the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, choose Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP), then click Properties.
d. In the IP Address field, enter an IP address that is identical to the ONS 15454 IP address shown on
the ONS 15454 LCD except for the last octet. The last octet must be 1 or 3 through 254.
e. In the Subnet Mask field, type 255.255.255.0.
f. In the Default Gateway field, type the ONS 15454 IP address.
g. Click OK.
h. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
i. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click Close.
j. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 7 If you have Windows Vista installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and
Sharing Center > Manage network connections. The Manage network connections window
appears.3-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
b. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon, then click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties dialog box appears.
c. Click the Networking tab. Under This connection uses the following items, click Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) > Properties. The Networking dialog box appears.
d. Click Use the following IP address and in the IP Address field, enter an IP address that is identical
to the ONS 15454 IP address shown on the ONS 15454 LCD except for the last octet. The last octet
must be 1 or 3 through 254.
e. In the Subnet Mask field, type 255.255.255.0.
f. In the Default Gateway field, type the ONS 15454 IP address.
g. Click OK.
h. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
i. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 8 If you have Windows 7 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel.
b. In the search box, type adapter.
c. Under Network and Sharing Center, click View Network Connections. The Network Connections
dialog box appears.
d. In the Network Connections dialog box, right-click the Local Area Connection icon, then click
Properties. The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears.
e. Click the Networking tab. Under This connection uses the following items, click Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) > Properties. The Networking dialog box appears.
f. Click Use the following IP address and in the IP Address field, enter an IP address that is identical
to the ONS 15454 IP address shown on the ONS 15454 LCD except for the last octet. The last octet
must be 1 or 3 through 254.
g. In the Subnet Mask field, type 255.255.255.0.
h. In the Default Gateway field, type the ONS 15454 IP address.
i. Click OK.
j. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G40 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS15454 Using
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Purpose This task sets up your computer for craft connection to the ONS 15454
using DHCP.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 4-183-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Note Do not use this task for initial node turn-up. Use the task only if DHCP forwarding is enabled on the
ONS 15454. By default, DHCP is not enabled. To enable it, see the “NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network
Access” procedure on page 4-18.
Note The ONS 15454 does not provide the IP addresses. If DHCP forwarding is enabled, it passes DCHP
requests to an external DHCP server.
Step 1 Verify the operating system that is installed on your computer:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
b. In the Control Panel window, double-click the System icon.
c. On the General tab of the System Settings window, verify that the Windows operating system is one
of the following: Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, or
Windows 7.
Step 2 According to the Windows operating system installed on your computer, perform one of the following
steps:
• For Windows 98, complete Step 3.
• For Windows NT 4.0, complete Step 4.
• For Windows 2000, complete Step 5.
• For Windows XP, complete Step 6.
• For Windows Vista, complete Step 7.
• For Windows 7, complete Step 8.
Step 3 If you have Windows 98 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
b. In the Control Panel dialog box, click the Network icon.
c. In the Network dialog box, select TCP/IP for your NIC, then click Properties.
d. In the TCP/IP Properties dialog box, click the DNS Configuration tab and choose Disable DNS.
e. Click the WINS Configuration tab and choose Disable WINS Resolution.
f. Click the IP Address tab.
g. In the IP Address window, click Obtain an IP address automatically.
h. Click OK.
i. When the prompt to restart your PC appears, click Yes.
j. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 4 If you have Windows NT 4.0 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None3-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
b. In the Control Panel dialog box, click the Network icon.
c. In the Network dialog box, click the Protocols tab, choose TCP/IP Protocol, then click Properties.
d. Click the IP Address tab.
e. In the IP Address window, click Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server.
f. Click OK.
g. Click Apply.
h. If Windows prompts you to restart your PC, click Yes.
i. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 5 If you have Windows 2000 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Network and Dial-up Connections >
Local Area Connection.
b. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, choose the local area connection connected to the
PC port connected to the ONS 15454.
c. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click Properties.
d. On the General tab, choose Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), then click Properties.
e. Click Obtain an IP address automatically.
f. Click OK.
g. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
h. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click Close.
i. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 6 If you have Windows XP installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel > Network Connections.
Note If the Network Connections menu is not available, right-click the Windows screen and
choose Properties from the popup menu. Click the Appearance tab, then under Scheme,
choose Classic View.
b. From the Network Connections dialog box, click the Local Area Connection icon.
c. On the General tab of the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click Properties.
d. On the General tab, choose Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), then click Properties.
e. Click Obtain an IP address automatically.
f. Click OK.
g. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
h. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click Close.
i. Proceed to Step 9.3-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 7 If you have Windows Vista installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and
Sharing Center > Manage network connections. The Manage network connections window
appears.
b. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon, then click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties dialog box appears.
c. Click the Networking tab. Under This connection uses the following items, click Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) > Properties. The Networking dialog box appears.
d. Click Obtain an IP address automatically.
e. Click OK.
f. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
g. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 8 If you have Windows 7 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel.
b. In the search box, type adapter.
c. Under Network and Sharing Center, click View Network Connections. The Network Connections
dialog box appears.
d. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon, then click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties dialog box appears.
e. Click the Networking tab. Under This connection uses the following items, click Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) > Properties. The Networking dialog box appears.
f. Click Obtain an IP address automatically.
g. Click OK.
h. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).3-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G41 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS15454 Using
Automatic Host Detection
Step 1 Verify the operating system that is installed on your computer:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel or, for Windows XP, Control
Panel > System.
b. In the Control Panel window, double-click the System icon.
c. On the General tab of the System Settings window, verify that the Windows operating system is one
of the following: Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, or
Windows 7.
Step 2 According to the Windows operating system installed on your computer, perform one of the following
steps:
• For Windows 98, complete Step 3.
• For Windows NT 4.0, complete Step 4.
• For Windows 2000, complete Step 5.
• For Windows XP, complete Step 6.
• For Windows Vista, complete Step 7.
• For Windows 7, complete Step 8.
Purpose This task sets up your computer for local craft connection to the
ONS 15454 when:
• You are using an ANSI shelf, you will connect to the ONS 15454
Ethernet port or backplane LAN pins either directly or through a hub.
• You are using an ETSI shelf, you will connect to the ONS 15454
Ethernet port or the RJ-45 jack on the MIC-C/T/P FMEC either
directly or through a hub.
• You are using an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, you will connect to
the TNC/TSC ethernet port, or the EMS port or the craft terminal port
on the ECU either directly or through a hub.
• You are using an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, you will connect to
the TNC/TSC ethernet port or the EMS port on the power module
either directly or through a hub.
• You will connect to multiple ONS 15454s and do not want to
reconfigure your IP address each time.
• You do not need to access non-ONS 15454 applications such as ping
and tracert (trace route).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None3-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 3 If you have Windows 98 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
b. In the Control Panel dialog box, click the Network icon.
c. In the Network dialog box, select TCP/IP for your NIC, then click Properties.
d. In the TCP/IP Properties dialog box, click the DNS Configuration tab and choose Disable DNS.
e. Click the WINS Configuration tab and choose Disable WINS Resolution.
f. Click the IP Address tab.
g. In the IP Address window, click Specify an IP address.
h. In the IP Address field, enter any legitimate IP address other than the node IP address as indicated
on the LCD of the ONS 15454. The default IP address is 192.1.0.2.
Note You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC. For more information, see the
“DLP-G162 Change IP Settings” task on page 11-24.
i. In the Subnet Mask field, type the same subnet mask as the ONS 15454. The default is
255.255.255.0 (24 bit).
j. Click OK.
k. In the TCP/IP dialog box, click the Gateway tab.
l. In the New Gateway field, type the address entered in Step h. Click Add.
m. Verify that the IP address appears in the Installed Gateways field, then click OK.
n. When the prompt to restart your PC appears, click Yes.
o. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 4 If you have Windows NT 4.0 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Control Panel.
b. In the Control Panel dialog box, click the Network icon.
c. In the Network dialog box, click the Protocols tab, choose TCP/IP Protocol, then click Properties.
d. Click the IP Address tab.
e. In the IP Address window, click Specify an IP address.
f. In the IP Address field, enter any legitimate IP address other than the node IP address as indicated
on the LCD of the ONS 15454. The default IP address is 192.1.0.2.
Note You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC. For more information, see the
“DLP-G162 Change IP Settings” task on page 11-24.
g. In the Subnet Mask field, type the same subnet mask as the ONS 15454. The default is
255.255.255.0 (24 bit).
h. Click Advanced.
i. In the Gateways List, click Add. The TCP/IP Gateway Address dialog box appears.
j. Type the IP address entered in Step f in the Gateway Address field.3-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
k. Click Add.
l. Click OK.
m. Click Apply.
n. Reboot your PC.
o. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 5 If you have Windows 2000 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Network and Dial-up Connections >
Local Area Connection.
b. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click Properties.
c. On the General tab, choose Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), then click Properties.
d. Click Use the following IP address.
e. In the IP Address field, enter any legitimate IP address other than the node IP address as indicated
on the LCD of the ONS 15454. The default IP address is 192.1.0.2.
Note You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC. For more information, see the
“DLP-G162 Change IP Settings” task on page 11-24.
f. In the Subnet Mask field, type the same subnet mask as the ONS 15454. The default is
255.255.255.0 (24 bit).
g. Type the IP address entered in Step e in the Gateway Address field.
h. Click OK.
i. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click OK.
j. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click Close.
k. Proceed to Step 9.
Step 6 If you have Windows XP installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel > Network Connections.
Note If the Network Connections menu is not available, click Switch to Classic View.
b. From the Network Connections dialog box, right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select
Properties.
c. Scroll to the bottom of the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box. Click Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) to select it, then click Properties.
d. In the IP Address field, enter any legitimate IP address other than the node IP address as indicated
on the LCD of the ONS 15454. The default IP address is 192.1.0.2.
e. Select the Use the Following IP Address: radio button.
Note You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC. For more information, see the
“DLP-G162 Change IP Settings” task on page 11-24.3-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
f. In the Subnet Mask field, type the same subnet mask as the ONS 15454. The default is
255.255.255.0 (24 bit).
g. Type the IP address entered in Step d in the Gateway Address field.
h. Click OK.
i. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click Close.
Step 7 If you have Windows Vista installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and
Sharing Center > Manage network connections. The Manage network connections window
appears.
b. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon, then click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties dialog box appears.
c. Click the Networking tab. Under This connection uses the following items, click Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) > Properties. The Networking dialog box appears.
d. Click Use the following IP address and in the IP Address field, enter any legitimate IP address other
than the node IP address indicated on the LCD of the ONS 15454. The default IP address is
192.1.0.2.
Note You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC. For more information, see the
“DLP-G162 Change IP Settings” task on page 11-24.
e. In the Subnet Mask field, type the same subnet mask as the ONS 15454. The default is
255.255.255.0 (24 bit).
f. Type the IP address entered in Step d in the Gateway Address field.
g. Click OK.
h. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click Close.
Step 8 If you have Windows 7 installed on your PC, complete the following steps to change its TCP/IP
configuration:
a. From the Windows Start menu, choose Control Panel.
b. In the search box, type adapter.
c. Under Network and Sharing Center, click View Network Connections. The Network Connections
dialog box appears.
d. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon, then click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties dialog box appears.
e. Click the Networking tab. Under This connection uses the following items, click Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) > Properties. The Networking dialog box appears.
f. Click Use the following IP address and in the IP Address field, enter any legitimate IP address other
than the node IP address indicated on the LCD of the ONS 15454. The default IP address is
192.1.0.2.
Note You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC. For more information, see the
“DLP-G162 Change IP Settings” task on page 11-24.3-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
g. In the Subnet Mask field, type the same subnet mask as the ONS 15454. The default is
255.255.255.0 (24 bit).
h. Type the IP address entered in Step f in the Gateway Address field.
i. Click OK.
j. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click Close.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G42 Set Up a Solaris Workstation for a Craft Connection to an ONS15454
Note This procedure does not apply to the ONS 15454 M6 and ONS 15454 M2 chassis, because they do not
have a backplane TL1 craft port.
Step 1 Log into the workstation as the root user.
Step 2 Check to see if the interface is plumbed by typing:
# ifconfig device
For example:
# ifconfig hme1
• If the interface is plumbed, a message similar to the following appears:
hme1:flags=1000842mtu 1500 index 2 inet 0.0.0.0
netmask 0
If a message similar to this one appears, go to Step 4.
• If the interface is not plumbed, a message similar to the following appears:
ifconfig: status: SIOCGLIFFLAGS: hme1: no such interface.
If a message similar to this one appears, go to Step 3.
Step 3 Plumb the interface by typing:
# ifconfig device plumb
For example:
# ifconfig hme1 plumb
Step 4 Configure the IP address on the interface by typing:
# ifconfig interface ip-address netmask netmask up
Purpose This task sets up a Solaris workstation for a craft connection to the
ONS 15454.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None3-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
For example:
# ifconfig hme0 192.1.0.3 netmask 255.255.255.0 up
Note Enter an IP address that is identical to the ONS 15454 IP address except for the last octet. The
last octet must be 1 or 3 through 254.
Step 5 In the Subnet Mask field, type 255.255.255.0. Skip this step if you checked Craft Access Only on the
Provisioning > Network > General > Gateway Settings tab.
Step 6 Test the connection:
a. Start Mozilla.
b. Enter the ONS 15454 IP address in the web address (URL) field. If the connection is established, a
Java Console window, CTC caching messages, and the Cisco Transport Controller Login dialog box
appear. If this occurs, go to Step 2 of the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 to complete
the login. If the Login dialog box does not appear, complete Steps c and d.
c. At the prompt, type:
ping ONS-15454-IP-address
For example, to connect to an ONS 15454 with a default IP address of 192.1.0.2, type:
ping 192.1.0.2
If your workstation is connected to the ONS 15454, the following message appears:
IP-address is alive
Note Skip this step if you checked the Craft Access Only check box on the Provisioning >
Network > General > Gateway Settings tab.
d. If CTC is not responding, a “no answer from x.x.x.x” message appears. Verify the IP and subnet
mask information. Check that the cables connecting the workstation to the ONS 15454 are securely
attached. Check the link status by typing:
# ndd -set /dev/device instance 0
# ndd -get /dev/device link_status
For example:
# ndd -set /dev/hme instance 0
# ndd -get /dev/hme link_status
A result of “1” means the link is up. A result of “0” means the link is down.
Note Check the man page for ndd. For example, type: # man ndd.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).3-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN
Connection to the ONS15454
Step 1 If your computer is already connected to the corporate LAN, go to Step 3. If you changed your
computer’s network settings for craft access to the ONS 15454, change the settings back to the corporate
LAN access settings. This generally means:
• Set the IP Address on the TCP/IP dialog box back to Obtain an IP address automatically
(Windows 2000 and XP) or Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server (Windows NT 4.0).
• If your LAN requires that Domain Name System (DNS) or Windows Internet Naming Service
(WINS) be enabled, change the setting on the DNS Configuration or WINS Configuration tab of the
TCP/IP dialog box.
Step 2 Connect the ONS 15454 and the computer to the corporate LAN:
• Connect a straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cable from the PC or Solaris workstation NIC card to a
corporate LAN port.
• For a single ONS 15454 shelf node, connect a straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cable from the EMS
or the craft terminal port to the corporate LAN port. For a single ONS 15454 M2 shelf, connect a
straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cable from the EMS or the TNC/TSC Ethernet port to the corporate
LAN port. For a single ONS 15454 M6 shelf, connect a straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cable from
the EMS port, or the craft terminal port, or the TNC/TSC Ethernet port to the corporate LAN.
• For an ONS 15454 M6 multishelf node, connect a straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cable from the
EMS port, or the craft terminal port, or the TNC/TSC Ethernet port. For an ONS 15454, connect the
DCN RJ-45 (LAN) port on the EAP or to Port 23 or 24 of the Catalyst 2950 or the Catalyst 3560 to
corporate LAN port.
Step 3 If your computer is connected to a proxy server, disable proxy service or add the ONS 15454 nodes as
exceptions. To disable or bypass proxy service, complete one of the following tasks, depending on the
web browser that you use:
• DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows), page 3-26
• DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris), page 3-27
Step 4 Continue with the “NTP-G21 Log into the GUI” procedure on page 3-28.
Purpose This procedure sets up your computer to access the ONS 15454 through a
corporate LAN.
Tools/Equipment NIC, also referred to as an Ethernet card
Straight-through (CAT-5) LAN cable
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
• The ONS 15454 must be provisioned for LAN connectivity, including
IP address, subnet mask, default gateway.
• The ONS 15454 must be physically connected to the corporate LAN.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows)
Note If you disable proxy on a TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC node that has secure mode enabled, the node’s
communication with other secure mode nodes may be compromised. For more information about secure
mode, refer to the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
Step 1 From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel.
Note If your computer is running Windows XP, you can select Control Panel directly from the Start
menu. Make sure that you are in Classic View before continuing with this procedure. To switch
to Classic View, right-click the Windows screen and choose Properties from the popup menu.
Click the Appearance tab, then under Scheme, choose Classic View.
Step 2 In the Control Panel window, choose Internet Options.
Step 3 In the Internet Properties dialog box, click Connections > LAN Settings.
Step 4 In the LAN Settings dialog box, complete one of the following tasks:
• Uncheck Use a proxy server to disable the service.
• To bypass the service, leave Use a proxy server selected and click Advanced. In the Proxy Setting
dialog box under Exceptions, enter the IP addresses of ONS 15454 nodes that you will access.
Separate each address with a semicolon. You can insert an asterisk (*) for the host number to include
all the ONS 15454s on your network. Click OK to close each open dialog box.
Note For ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 nodes that have
TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards installed with the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC secure mode
option enabled, enter the backplane LAN port (or the EMS port) IP addresses. If the node is
in secure mode and the configuration has been locked, you will not be able to change the IP
address unless the lock is disabled by Cisco Technical Support. Refer to the “Management
Network Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for more
information about secure mode.
Purpose This task disables or bypasses proxy service for PCs running Internet
Explorer.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed Required if your computer is connected to a network computer proxy
server and your browser is Internet Explorer.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris)
Note If you disable proxy on a TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC node that has secure mode enabled, the node’s
communication with other secure mode nodes may be compromised. For more information about secure
mode, refer to the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
Step 1 Open Mozilla (Solaris).
Step 2 From the Edit menu, choose Tools. The Internet Options dialog box appears.
Step 3 In the Network tab, click Settings. The Connection Settings dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Connection Settings dialog box, set one of the following options:
• Click the No proxy option to disable the proxy server.
• Click the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network option to automatically detect the proxy
settings for the network.
• Click the Manual proxy configuration option to add exceptions to the proxy server. In the No
Proxy For field, enter the IP addresses of the ONS 15454 nodes that you will access. Separate each
address with a comma.
• Click OK to close the Connection Settings dialog box.
• Click OK to close the Internet Options dialog box.
Note For ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, or ONS 15454 M6 nodes that have TCC2P, TCC3, TNC,
or TSC cards installed with the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC secure mode option enabled, enter
the backplane LAN port (or EMS port) IP addresses in the Manual proxy configuration
option. If the node is in secure mode and the configuration has been locked, you will not be
able to change the IP address unless the lock is disabled by Cisco Technical Support.
Information on contacting Cisco Technical Support is provided in the Preface Chapter of
this guide.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task disables or bypasses proxy service for Windows PCs running
Mozilla (Solaris). Required if your computer is connected to a network
computer proxy server and your browser is Mozilla (Solaris).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
NTP-G21 Log into the GUI
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30.
Note For information about navigating in CTC, see Appendix A, “CTC Information and Shortcuts.”
During network topology discovery, CTC polls each node in the network to determine which one
contains the most recent version of the CTC software. If CTC discovers a node in the network that has
a more recent version of the CTC software than the version you are currently running, CTC generates a
message stating that a later version of the CTC has been found in the network. If you have network
discovery disabled, CTC will not seek more recent versions of the software. Unreachable nodes are not
included in the upgrade discovery.
Note Upgrading the CTC software will overwrite your existing software. You must restart CTC after
the upgrade is complete.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups” task on page 3-33. Login node groups
allow you to view and manage nodes that have an IP connection but no data communications channel
(DCC) connection to the login node.
Step 3 As needed, complete the “DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group” task on
page 3-34.
Step 4 As needed, complete the “DLP-G50 Delete a Node from the Current Session or Login Group” task on
page 3-35.
Step 5 As needed, complete the “DLP-G331 Adjust the Java Virtual Memory Heap Size (Windows)” task on
page 3-29.
Step 6 As needed, complete the “DLP-G51 Delete a Node from a Specific Login Node Group” task on
page 3-36.
Step 7 As needed, complete the “DLP-G53 Configure the CTC Alerts Dialog Box for Automatic Popup” task
on page 3-36.
Purpose This procedure logs into CTC, the graphical user interface (GUI) software
used to manage the ONS 15454. This procedure includes optional node
login tasks.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
One of the following procedures:
• NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the
ONS 15454, page 3-9
• NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection
to the ONS 15454, page 3-25
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher3-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G331 Adjust the Java Virtual Memory Heap Size (Windows)
Note The task adjusts the physical memory allocation in the computer RAM so that more space is allocated
for CTC. However, less physical memory will be available for other computer processes and programs.
If you notice performance degradation of non-CTC programs after completing this task, reduce the JVM
allotted to CTC. You may need to repeat the task a few times to find the right balance between JVM
allotted to CTC and to other programs on your computer.
Step 1 From the Windows PC, click Start > Settings > Control Panel. > System, or Start > Control Panel >
System (Windows XP). The Windows Control Panel appears. The System Properties dialog box appears.
Step 2 Click the Advanced tab.
Step 3 Click Environmental Variables. The Environmental Variables dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the User Variables area, check to see whether a CTC_HEAP variable was created. If yes, complete the
following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Check the CTC_HEAP value. If it is 512, continue with Step 12. If not, continue with Step b.
b. Click the CTC_HEAP variable and click Edit.
c. In the Edit User Variable dialog box, enter the new JVM heap size. This can be any number between
256 and 512 MB.
d. Click OK, then continue with Step 9.
Step 5 click New. The New User Variable dialog box appears.
Step 6 Type “CTC_HEAP” in the Variable Name field.
Step 7 Type “512” in the Variable Value field.
Step 8 Click OK to close the New User Variable dialog box.
Step 9 Click OK to close the Environmental Variables dialog box.
Step 10 Click OK to close the System Properties dialog box.
Step 11 Reboot your PC.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to adjust the Java Virtual Memory (JVM) heap size of
a Windows PC from the default 256 MB to the maximum of 512 MB in
order to improve CTC performance.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite procedures None
Required/As needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Note For information about CTC views and navigation, see Appendix A, “CTC Information and Shortcuts.”
Step 1 From the computer connected to the ONS 15454, start Internet Explorer (Windows PC) or Mozilla
(Solaris workstation):
• If you are using a Windows PC, launch Internet Explorer from the Windows Start menu or a shortcut
icon.
• If you are using a Solaris workstation, navigate to the directory where Mozilla was installed, then
type:
# mozilla -install
Step 2 In Internet Explorer or Mozilla web address (URL) field, enter the ONS 15454 IPv4 or IPv6 address. For
initial setup, this is the default IP address, 192.1.0.2.
Note The IP address appears on the LCD. You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC
after you log in. For more information, see the “DLP-G162 Change IP Settings” task on
page 11-24.
Step 3 Press Enter. The browser displays a window with a Delete CTC Cache field and information about the
Cisco Transport Controller Java and System environments.
Note To log into CTC using an IPv6 address, you must first log into CTC using an IPv4 address
and assign an IPv6 address to the node. Then, use the IPv6 address that you assigned to the
node to log into CTC. For more information about configuring IPv6 address, see “DLP-G56
Provision IP Settings” task on page 4-19. Enter the IPv6 address in the address bar of the
browser, enclosed in square brackets.
Purpose This task logs into the graphical user interface (GUI) of CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
One of the following procedures:
• NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the
ONS 15454, page 3-9
• NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection
to the ONS 15454, page 3-25
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher3-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Note The Delete CTC Cache field deletes the CTC JAR (Java Archive) files that are downloaded to
your computer when you log into an ONS 15454. You perform this action if connectivity
problems occur or you want to delete older CTC JAR file versions from your computer. For more
information, refer to the “General Troubleshooting” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide and the “CTC Operations” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
Note If you are logging into ONS 15454 nodes in an operation network that are running different
releases of CTC software, log into the node running the most recent release. If you log into a
node running an older release, you will receive an INCOMPATIBLE-SW alarm for each node in
the network running a new release, and CTC will not be able to manage these nodes. To check
the software version of a node, select About CTC from the CTC Help menu. This will display
the ONS 15454 software version for each node visible on the network view. If the node is not
visible, the software version can be read from the LCD display. To resolve an alarm, refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 4 If a Java Plug-in Security Warning dialog box appears, complete the “DLP-G47 Install Public-Key
Security Certificate” task on page 3-32 to install the public-key security certificate required by Software
Release 4.1 and later.
After you complete the security certificate dialog box (or if the certificate is already installed), a Java
Console window displays the CTC file download status. The web browser displays information about
your Java and system environments. If this is the first login, CTC caching messages appear while CTC
files are downloaded to your computer. The first time you connect to an ONS 15454, this process can
take several minutes. After the download, a warning message window appears.
Step 5 Click OK. The CTC Login dialog box appears.
Step 6 In the Login dialog box, type a user name and password (both are case sensitive). For initial setup, type
the user name CISCO15 and the password otbu+1.
Note The CISCO15 user is provided with every ONS 15454. CISCO15 has Superuser privileges, so
you can create other users. You must create another Superuser before you can delete the
CISCO15 user. CISCO15 is delivered with the otbu+1 password. To change the password for
CISCO15, complete the “DLP-G191 Change User Password and Security Level on a Single
Node” task on page 11-60 after you log in.
Step 7 Each time you log into an ONS 15454, you can select the following login options:
• Additional Nodes—Displays a list of current login node groups. To create a login node group or add
additional groups, see the “DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups” task on page 3-33.
• Disable Network Discovery—Check this box to view only the ONS 15454 (and additional nodes
within the login node group, if any) entered in the Node Name field. Nodes linked to this node
through DCCs are not discovered and will not appear in CTC network view. Using this option can
decrease the CTC startup time in networks with many DCC-connected nodes, and can reduce
memory consumption.
• Disable Circuit Management—Check this box to disable discovery of existing circuits. Using this
option can decrease the CTC initialization time in networks with many existing circuits and reduce
memory consumption. After you are logged in, you can enable circuit discovery at any time by
choosing the Enable Circuit Discovery button on the Circuits tab. 3-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 8 If you keep Disable Network Discovery unchecked, CTC attempts to upgrade the CTC software by
downloading more recent versions of the JAR files it finds during the network discovery. Click Yes to
allow CTC to download the newer JAR files, or No to prevent CTC from downloading the JAR files.
Note Upgrading the CTC software will overwrite your existing software. You must restart CTC after
the upgrade is complete.
Step 9 Click Login.
If the login is successful, the CTC node view window (in single-shelf mode) or multishelf view window
(in multishelf mode) appears. From here, you can navigate to other CTC views to provision and manage
the ONS 15454. If you need to turn up the shelf for the first time, see Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node.” If
login problems occur, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G47 Install Public-Key Security Certificate
Step 1 If the Java Plug-in Security Warning dialog box appears, choose one of the following options:
Note The Java Plug-in Security Warning dialog box options that appear depend on the JRE version
you are using. If you installed JRE 1.6, you will see the following options: Yes, No, Always, and
More Details. If you are using JRE 1.3.1_02, you will see the following options (shown in
parentheses in the following list): Grant This Session, Deny, Grant Always, and
View Certificate.
• Yes (Grant This Session)—Installs the public-key certificate to your PC only for the current session.
After the session is ended, the certificate is deleted. This dialog box will appear the next time you
log into the ONS 15454.
• No (Deny)—Denies permission to install the certificate. If you choose this option, you cannot log
into the ONS 15454.
• Always (Grant Always)—Installs the public-key certificate and does not delete it after the session
is over. Cisco recommends this option.
• More Details (View Certificate)—Allows you to view the public-key security certificate.
Purpose This task installs the ITU Recommendation X.509 public-key security
certificate. The public-key certificate is required to run Software
Release 4.1 or later.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures This task is performed during the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on
page 3-30. You cannot perform it outside of this task.
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP) or task (DLP).
DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups
Step 1 From the Edit menu in node view, choose Preferences.
Step 2 Click Login Node Group and Create Group.
Step 3 Enter a name for the group in the Create Login Group Name dialog box. Click OK.
Step 4 In the Members area, type the IP address (or node name) of a node you want to add to the group. Click
Add. Repeat this step for each node that you want to add to the group.
Note If the ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 that you want to add to the login node
group has TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards installed and the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC secure
mode option is enabled, enter the backplane LAN port (or EMS port) IP address. If the node is
in secure mode and the configuration has been locked, you will not be able to change the IP
address unless the lock is disabled by Cisco Technical Support. Refer to the “Management
Network Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for more
information about secure mode.
Step 5 Click OK.
The next time you log into an ONS 15454, the login node group will be available in the Additional Nodes
list of the Login dialog box. For example, in Figure 3-1, a login node group is created that contains the
IP addresses for Nodes 1, 4, and 5. During login, if you choose this group from the Additional Nodes
list and Disable Network Discovery is not selected, all nodes in the figure appear. If the login group and
Disable Network Discovery are both selected, only Nodes 1, 4, and 5 appear. You can create as many
login node groups as you need. The groups are stored in the CTC preferences file and are not visible to
other users.
Purpose This task creates a login node group to display ONS 15454s that have an IP
connection but not a data channel connection (DCC) to the login node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Figure 3-1 Login Node Group
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group
Step 1 In any CTC view, from the CTC File menu, click Add Node.
Step 2 In the Add Node dialog box, enter the node name (or IP address).
If the ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 that you want to add has
TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards installed and the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC secure mode option is
enabled, enter the backplane LAN port (or the EMS port for the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6)
IP address.
Purpose This task adds a node to the current CTC session or login node group.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
LAN/WAN (Ethernet)
Three node ring Single
Laptop PC
Node 1
IP Address
192.168.106.143
Node 4
IP Address
192.168.105.119
Node 5
IP Address
192.168.104.109
Node 6
IP Address
192.168.103.199
Node 2 Node 3
IP Address
192.168.106.100
55029
Two node ring3-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Note If the node is in secure mode, the backplane IP address display might be disabled. A Superuser
can reenable the IP display. If the node is in secure mode and the configuration has been locked,
you will not be able to change the IP address unless the lock is disabled by Cisco Technical
Support. Refer to the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference Manual for more information about secure mode.
Step 3 If you want to add the node to the current login node group, check Add to current login node group.
Otherwise, leave it unchecked.
Note This check box is active only if you selected a login group when you logged into CTC.
Step 4 Click OK.
After a few seconds, the new node appears on the network view map.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G50 Delete a Node from the Current Session or Login Group
Step 1 From the CTC View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 On the network map, single-click the node that you want to delete.
Step 3 From the CTC File menu, click Delete Selected Node.
After a few seconds, the node disappears from the network view map.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task removes a node from the current CTC session or login node
group. To remove a node from a login node group that is not the current
one, see “DLP-G51 Delete a Node from a Specific Login Node Group” task
on page 3-36.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G51 Delete a Node from a Specific Login Node Group
Step 1 In any CTC view, from the CTC Edit menu, choose Preferences.
Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, click the Login Node Groups tab.
Step 3 Click the login node group tab containing the node you want to remove.
Step 4 Click the node you want to remove, then click Remove.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G53 Configure the CTC Alerts Dialog Box for Automatic Popup
Step 1 Click the CTC Alerts toolbar icon. (The icon is located on the far right of the CTC toolbar.)
Step 2 In the CTC Alerts dialog box, choose one of the following:
• All alerts—Sets the CTC Alerts dialog box to open automatically for all notifications.
• Error alerts only—Sets the CTC Alerts dialog box to open automatically for circuit deletion errors
only.
• Never—Sets the CTC Alerts dialog box to never open automatically.
Step 3 Click Close.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task removes a node from a specific login node group. To remove a
node from the current login node group, see the “DLP-G50 Delete a Node
from the Current Session or Login Group” task on page 3-35.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task sets up the CTC Alerts dialog box to open for all alerts, for circuit
deletion errors only, or never. The CTC Alerts dialog box displays network
disconnection, Send-PDIP inconsistency, circuit deletion status, condition
retrieval errors, and software download failure.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G448 Designate ONS 15454 SOCKS GNEs
Note This task cannot be completed until the ONS 15454 network has been provisioned. It is intended only
for users experiencing long login times, and especially users with Windows XP, Service Pack 2.
Note To complete this task, you will need a list of ONS 15454s (IP addresses or node names) that are
provisioned as GNEs. You must have connectivity to the GNEs.
Step 1 Click the CTC Alerts toolbar icon. (The icon is located on the far right of the CTC toolbar.)
Step 2 In the CTC Alerts dialog box, choose one of the following:
• All alerts—Sets the CTC Alerts dialog box to open automatically for all notifications.
• Error alerts only—Sets the CTC Alerts dialog box to open automatically for circuit deletion errors
only.
• Never—Sets the CTC Alerts dialog box to never open automatically.
Step 3 Click Close.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task designates ONS 15454s GNEs that will serve as SOCKS servers
to facilitate login performance in large networks.
Tools None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
NTP-G190 Use the CTC Launcher Application to Manage
Multiple ONS Nodes
Note JRE 1.6 must be installed on the PC you are using with the CTC Launcher application.
Step 1 As needed, complete one of the following tasks to install the CTC Launcher:
• DLP-G440 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Software CD, page 3-39
• DLP-G441 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Node, page 3-39
Step 2 As needed, complete the “DLP-G442 Connect to ONS Nodes Using the CTC Launcher” task on
page 3-40 to connect to an ONS network element with direct IP connectivity.
Step 3 As needed, complete the “DLP-G449 Install or Reinstall the CTC JAR Files” task on page 3-46.
Step 4 As needed, complete one of the following tasks to create a TL1 tunnel, which enables you to connect to
an ONS network element residing behind OSI-based, third-party GNEs:
• DLP-G443 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using the CTC Launcher, page 3-41
• DLP-G444 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC, page 3-42
Step 5 As needed, complete the “DLP-G445 View TL1 Tunnel Information” task on page 3-43.
Step 6 As needed, complete the “DLP-G446 Edit a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC” task on page 3-44.
Step 7 As needed, complete the “DLP-G447 Delete a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC” task on page 3-45.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure uses the CTC Launcher to start a CTC session with an ONS
NE that has an IP connection to the CTC computer; create TL1 tunnels to
connect to ONS NEs on the other side of third-party, OSI-based GNEs; and
view, manage, and delete TL1 tunnels using CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
One of the following procedures:
• NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the
ONS 15454, page 3-9
• NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection
to the ONS 15454, page 3-25
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G440 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Software CD
Step 1 Insert the Cisco ONS 15454 or Cisco ONS 15454 SDH or Cisco ONS 15310-CL or Cisco ONS
15310-MA Software Release 9.2 CD into your CD drive.
Step 2 Navigate to the CtcLauncher directory.
Step 3 Save the StartCTC.exe file to a local hard drive.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G441 Install the CTC Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Node
Step 1 Using a web browser, go to the following address, where node-name is the DNS name of a node you are
going to access:
http://node-name/fs/StartCTC.exe
The browser File Download dialog box appears.
Step 2 Click Save.
Step 3 Navigate to the location where you want to save the StartCTC.exe file on the local hard drive.
Step 4 Click Save.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task installs the CTC Launcher from a Release 9.2 software CD.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None
Purpose This task installs the CTC Launcher from an ONS 15454 node running
Software R9.2.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
DLP-G442 Connect to ONS Nodes Using the CTC Launcher
Step 1 Start the CTC Launcher:
• Windows: navigate to the directory containing the StartCTC.exe file and double-click it. (You can
also use the Windows Start menu Run command.)
• Solaris: assuming the StartCTC.exe file is accessible from the current shell path, navigate to the
directory containing the StartCTC.exe file and type:
% java -jar StartCTC.exe
Step 2 In the CTC Launcher dialog box, choose Use IP.
Step 3 In the Login Node box, enter the ONS NE node name or IP address. (If the address was entered
previously, you can choose it from the drop-down menu.)
Step 4 Select the CTC version you want to launch from the following choices in the drop-down menu:
• Same version as the login node: Select if you want to launch the same CTC version as the login node
version, even if more recent versions of CTC are available in the cache.
• Latest version available: Select if you want to launch the latest CTC version available. If the cache
has a newer CTC version than the login node, that CTC version will be used. Otherwise the same
CTC version as the login node will be used.
• Version x.xx: Select if you want to launch a specific CTC version.
Note Cisco recommends that you always use the “Same version as the login node” unless the use of
newer CTC versions is needed (for example, when CTC must manage a network containing
mixed version NEs).
Step 5 Click Launch CTC. After the connection is made, the CTC Login dialog box appears.
Step 6 Log into the ONS node.
Note Because each CTC version requires particular JRE versions, the CTC Launcher will prompt the
user for the location of a suitable JRE whenever a new CTC version is launched for the first time
using a file chooser dialog (if a suitable JRE version is not known by the launcher yet). That JRE
information is then saved in the user's preferences file. From the selection dialog, select any
appropriate JRE directory.
After the JRE version is selected, the CTC will be launched. The required jar files will be
downloaded into the new cache if they are missing. The CTC Login window will appear after a
few seconds.
Purpose This task connects the CTC Launcher to ONS nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G443 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using the CTC Launcher
Step 1 Double-click the StartCTC.exe file.
Step 2 Click Use TL1 Tunnel.
Step 3 In the Open CTC TL1 Tunnel dialog box, enter the following:
• Far End TID—Enter the TID of the ONS ENE at the far end of the tunnel. The TID is the name
entered in the Node Name field on the node view Provisioning > General tab.
• Host Name/IP Address—Enter the GNE DNS host name or IP address through which the tunnel will
established. This is the third-party vendor GNE that is connected to an ONS node through an OSI
DCC network. CTC uses TCP/IP over a DCN to reach the GNE. The GNE accepts TL1 connections
from the network and can forward TL1 traffic to the ENEs.
• Choose a port option:
– Use Default TL1 Port—Choose this option if you want to use the default TL1 port 3081 and
3082.
– Use Other TL1 Port—Choose this option if the GNE uses a different TL1 port. Enter the port
number in the box next to the User Other TL1 Port radio button.
• TL1 Encoding Mode—Choose the TL1 encoding:
– LV + Binary Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by LV (length value) headers and TCP
traffic is encapsulated in binary form. Cisco recommends this option because it is the most
efficient encoding mode. However, you must verify that the GNE supports LV + Binary Payload
encoding.
– LV + Base64 Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by LV headers and TCP traffic is
encapsulated using Base64 encoding.
– Raw—TL1 messages are delimited by semi-columns only, and the TCP traffic is encapsulated
using Base64 encoding.
• GNE Login Required—Check this box if the GNE requires a a local TL1 ACT-USER login before
forwarding TL1 traffic to ENEs.
• TID—If the GNE Login Required box is checked, enter the GNE TID.
Step 4 Click OK.
Purpose This task creates a TL1 tunnel using the CTC Launcher, and the tunnel
transports the TCP traffic to and from ONS ENEs through the OSI-based
GNE.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 5 If the GNE Login Required box is checked, complete the following steps. If not, continue Step 6.
a. In the Login to Gateway NE dialog box UID field, enter the TL1 user name.
b. In the PID field, enter the TL1 user password.
c. Click OK.
Step 6 When the CTC Login dialog box appears, complete the CTC login.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G444 Create a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC
Step 1 From the Tools menu, choose Manage TL1 Tunnels.
Step 2 In the TL1 Tunnels window, click Create.
Step 3 In the Create CTC TL1 Tunnel dialog box, enter the following:
• Far End TID—Enter the TID of the ONS ENE at the far end of the tunnel. The ENE must be a
Cisco ONS NE. The TID is the name entered in the Node Name field on the node view Provisioning
> General tab.
• Host Name/IP Address—Enter the GNE DNS host name or IP address through which the tunnel will
established. This is the third-party vendor GNE that is connected to an ONS NE with an OSI DCC.
CTC uses TCP/IP over a DCN to reach the GNE. The GNE accepts TL1 connections from the
network and can forward TL1 traffic to the ENEs.
• Choose a port option:
– Use Default TL1 Port—Choose this option if you want to use the GNE default TL1 port. TL1
uses standard ports, such as 3081 and 3082, unless custom TL1 ports are defined.
– Use Other TL1 Port—Choose this option if the GNE uses a different TL1 port. Enter the port
number in the box next to the User Other TL1 Port radio button.
• TL1 Encoding Mode—Choose the TL1 encoding:
– LV + Binary Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by LV (length value) headers and TCP
traffic is encapsulated in binary form. Cisco recommends this option because it is the most
efficient. However, you must verify that the GNE supports LV + Binary Payload encoding.
– LV + Base64 Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by LV headers and TCP traffic is
encapsulated using Base64 encoding.
– Raw—TL1 messages are delimited by semi-columns only, and the TCP traffic is encapsulated
using Base64 encoding.
Purpose This task creates a TL1 tunnel using CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
• GNE Login Required—Check this box if the GNE requires a a local TL1 ACT-USER login before
forwarding TL1 traffic to ENEs.
• TID—If the GNE Login Required box is checked, enter the GNE TID.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 If the GNE Login Required box is checked, complete the following steps. If not, continue Step 6.
a. In the Login to Gateway NE dialog box UID field, enter the TL1 user name.
b. In the PID field, enter the TL1 user password.
c. Click OK.
Step 6 After the CTC Login dialog box appears, log into CTC.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G445 View TL1 Tunnel Information
Step 1 Log into CTC.
Step 2 From the Tools menu, choose Manage TL1 Tunnels.
Step 3 In the TL1 Tunnels window, view the information shown in Table 3-2.
Purpose This task views a TL1 tunnel created using the CTC Launcher.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Table 3-2 TL1 Tunnels Window
Item Description
Far End TID The Target ID of the NE at the far end of the tunnel. This NE is an ONS NE. It is typically connected with an
OSI DCC to a third-party vender GNE. CTC manages this NE.
GNE Host The GNE host or IP address through which the tunnel is established. This is generally a third-party vendor
GNE that is connected to an ONS NE with an OSI DCC. CTC uses TCP/IP over a DCN to reach the GNE.
The GNE accepts TL1 connections from the network and can forward TL1 traffic to the ENEs.
Port The TCP port number where the GNE accepts TL1 connections coming from the DCN. These port numbers
are standard (such as 3081 and 3082) unless custom port numbers are provisioned on the GNE.3-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G446 Edit a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC
TL1 Encoding Defines the TL1 encoding used for the tunnel:
• LV + Binary Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by an LV (length value) header. TCP traffic is
encapsulated in binary form.
• LV + Base64 Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by an LV header. TCP traffic is encapsulated using
the base 64 encoding.
• Raw—TL1 messages are delimited by semi-columns only, and the TCP traffic is encapsulated using
Base64 encoding.
GNE TID The GNE TID is shown when the GNE requires a local TL1 ACT-USER login before forwarding TL1 traffic
to ENEs. If present, CTC asks the user for the ACT-USER user ID and password when the tunnel is opened.
State Indicates the tunnel state:
OPEN—A tunnel is currently open and carrying TCP traffic.
RETRY PENDING—The TL1 connection carrying the tunnel has been disconnected and a retry to reconnect
it is pending. (CTC automatically attempts to reconnect the tunnel at regular intervals. During that time all
ENEs behind the tunnel are unreachable.)
(empty)—No tunnel is currently open.
Far End IP The IP address of the ONS NE that is at the far end of the TL1 tunnel. This information is retrieved from the
NE when the tunnel is established.
Sockets The number of active TCP sockets that are multiplexed in the tunnel. This information is automatically
updated in real time.
Retries Indicates the number of times CTC tried to reopen a tunnel. If a network problem causes a tunnel to go down,
CTC automatically tries to reopen it at regular intervals. This information is automatically updated in real
time.
Rx Bytes Shows the number of bytes of management traffic that were received over the tunnel. This information is
automatically updated in real time.
Tx Bytes Shows the number of bytes of management traffic that were transmitted over the tunnel. This information is
automatically updated in real time.
Purpose This task edits a TL1 tunnel using CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 3-2 TL1 Tunnels Window (continued)
Item Description3-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 1 From the Tools menu, choose Manage TL1 Tunnels.
Step 2 In the TL1 Tunnels window, click the tunnel you want to edit.
Step 3 Click Edit.
Step 4 In the Edit CTC TL1 Tunnel dialog box, edit the following:
• Use Default TL1 Port—Choose this option if you want to use the GNE default TL1 port. TL1 uses
standard ports, such as 3081 and 3082, unless custom TL1 ports are defined.
• Use Other TL1 Port—Choose this option if the GNE uses a different TL1 port. Enter the port number
in the box next to the User Other TL1 Port radio button.
• TL1 Encoding Mode—Choose the TL1 encoding:
– LV + Binary Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by LV (length value) headers and TCP
traffic is encapsulated in binary form. Cisco recommends this option because it is the most
efficient. However, you must verify that the GNE supports LV + Binary Payload encoding.
– LV + Base64 Payload— TL1 messages are delimited by LV headers and TCP traffic is
encapsulated using Base64 encoding.
– Raw—TL1 messages are delimited by semi-columns only, and the TCP traffic is encapsulated
using Base64 encoding.
• GNE Login Required—Check this box if the GNE requires a a local TL1 ACT-USER login before
forwarding TL1 traffic to ENEs.
• TID—If the GNE Login Required box is checked, enter the GNE TID.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 If the GNE Login Required box is checked, complete login in the Login to Gateway NE dialog box. If
not, continue Step 6.
a. In the UID field, enter the TL1 user name.
b. In the PID field, enter the TL1 user password.
c. Click OK.
Step 7 When the CTC Login dialog box appears, complete the CTC login. Refer to login procedures in the user
documentation for the ONS ENE.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G447 Delete a TL1 Tunnel Using CTC
Step 1 From the Tools menu, choose Manage TL1 Tunnels.
Purpose This task deletes a TL1 tunnel using CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher3-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 2 In the TL1 Tunnels window, click the tunnel you want to delete.
Step 3 Click Delete.
Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G449 Install or Reinstall the CTC JAR Files
Step 1 Insert the Cisco ONS 15454 or Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Software Release 9.2 CD into your CD drive.
Step 2 Navigate to the CacheInstall directory.
Note The CTC cache installer is also available on Cisco.com. If you are downloading the
SetupCtc-version.exe (where version is the release version, for example, SetupCtc-085000.exe) file from
Cisco.com, skip Step 1 and Step 2.
Step 3 Copy the SetupCtc-version.exe file to your local hard drive. Use any location that is convenient for you
to access, such as the Windows desktop. Ensure that you have enough disk space to copy and extract the
SetupCtc-version.exe file.
Step 4 Double-click the SetupCtc-version.exe file. This creates a directory named SetupCtc-version (at the
same location), which contains the LDCACHE.exe file and other CTC files.
Step 5 Double-click the LDCACHE.exe file to install or reinstall the new CTC JAR files into the CTC cache
directory on your PC.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G450 Configuring Windows Vista or Windows 7 to Support CTC
Purpose This task installs or reinstalls the CTC JAR files into the CTC cache
directory on your PC. This is useful when you are using a new CTC version
and want to install or reinstall the CTC JAR files without logging into a
node or using the StartCTC application (StartCTC.exe).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC, page 3-2
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None
Purpose This task describes the configurations that must be done in Windows Vista
or Windows 7 operating system prior to launching CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None3-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the following steps to disable Internet Explorer 7 protected mode:
Note Perform a full installation of the Windows Vista or Windows 7 operating system on your computer. If
Windows Vista or Windows 7 is installed through operating system upgrade, CTC will not work. Refer
to the manufacturer’s user guide for instructions on how to install Windows Vista or Windows 7.
Note This procedure is needed only if CTC is launched from the Internet Explorer browser. If you start CTC
by downloading the CTC Launcher application from the node, perform the “DLP-G441 Install the CTC
Launcher Application from a Release 9.2 Node” task on page 3-39.
a. Open Internet Explorer,
b. Click Tools > Internet Options.
c. Click the Security tab.
d. Select the zone that is appropriate. The available options are: Local Intranet, Internet, and Trusted
Sites.
e. Check the Disable Protect Mode check box.
Step 2 Complete the following steps to Disable TCP Autotuning:
a. From the Windows Start menu, click Search > Search for Files and Folders. The Search window
appears.
b. On the right side of the window in the Search box, type Command Prompt and press Enter.
Windows will search for the Command Prompt application and list it in the search results.
c. Right click cmd and select Run as administrator.
d. Enter the administrator user ID and password and click OK.
e. A Command prompt windows appears. At the command prompt enter the following text:
netsh interface tcp set global autotuninglevel=disabled
Autotuning can be enabled if desired using the following command:
netsh interface tcp set global autotuninglevel=normal
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level None3-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI
Before You BeginCHAPTER
4-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
4
Turn Up a Node
This chapter explains how to provision a single Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) node and turn it up for service, including assigning the node name, date, and
time; provisioning timing references; provisioning network attributes such as IP address and default
router; setting up users and user security; installing cards; and creating DWDM connections.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Procedures in this chapter require that you have a network plan calculated for your DWDM network with
Cisco TransportPlanner, Release 9.2. Cisco TransportPlanner is a DWDM planning tool that is available
from your Cisco account representative. Cisco TransportPlanner prepares a shelf plan for each network
node and calculates the power and attenuation levels for the DWDM cards installed in the node. For
information about Cisco TransportPlanner, contact your Cisco account representative. For instructions
on using Cisco TransportPlanner, refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner DWDM Operations Guide,
Release 9.2.
Note Unless otherwise specified, in this document “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI (ONS 15454) and ETSI
(ONS 15454 SDH) shelf assemblies.
Note Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) views referenced in these procedures depend on the ONS 15454 mode.
In single-shelf mode, the views are network, node, and card. In multishelf mode, the views are network,
multishelf, shelf, and card. For more information about CTC views, refer to Appendix A, “CTC
Information and Shortcuts.”
Before You Begin
This section lists the non-trouble procedures (NTPs) needed to turn up a DWDM node. Turn to an NTP
for applicable detail-level procedures (DLPs), known as tasks.
1. NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3—Complete this procedure
first.
2. NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7—Complete this procedure next.4-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
3. NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information, page 4-8—Complete this procedure to
retrieve the software signature information and version of the digitally signed software. You can also
retrieve the public keys installed on the node using this procedure.
4. NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 4-10—Complete this procedure as needed.
5. NTP-G23 Create Users and Assign Security, page 4-12—Complete this procedure to create CTC
users and assign their security levels.
6. NTP-G24 Set Up Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information, page 4-15—Continue with this
procedure to set the node name, date, time, location, and contact information.
7. NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 4-17—Continue with this procedure to set
the node battery power thresholds.
8. NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 4-18—Continue with this procedure to provision the
IP address, default router, subnet mask, and other network configuration settings.
9. NTP-G194 Set Up EMS Secure Access to the ONS 15454, page 4-33—Continue with this procedure
to connect the CTC in secure mode.
10. NTP-G27 Set Up the ONS 15454 for Firewall Access, page 4-33—Continue with this procedure if
the ONS 15454 will be accessed behind firewalls.
11. NTP-G28 Create FTP Host, page 4-34—Continue with this procedure if to create FTP host for ENE
database backup.
12. NTP-G132 Provision OSI, page 4-37—Continue with this procedure if the ONS 15454 will be
installed in networks with third-party, Open Systems Interconnection (OSI)-based network elements
(NEs).
13. NTP-G29 Set Up SNMP, page 4-47—Complete this procedure if Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) will be used for network monitoring.
14. “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on
page 4-49—Complete this procedure to preprovision the ONS 15454 slots and install the card and
automatic node setup (ANS) parameters.
15. NTP-G328 Add and Delete ANS Parameters, page 4-61—Complete this procedure, as needed, to
add or delete ANS parameters.
16. NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 4-64—Complete this procedure to install the DWDM
cards, including the OSCM, OSC-CSM, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C,
80-WXC-C, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-PRE, 32MUX-O,
40-MUX-C, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 4MD-xx.x, AD-1C-xx.x,
AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x, AD-4B-xx.x, MMU, and PSM.
17. NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 4-67—Complete this
procedure, as needed, to install a dispersion compensating unit (DCU).
18. NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and
OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69—Complete this procedure, as needed, to install transponder (TXP),
muxponder (MXP), GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP cards.
19. NTP-G123 Install the Filler Cards, page 4-75—Complete this procedure, as needed, to install
ONS 15454 filler cards.
20. NTP-G239 Add and Delete Passive Units, page 4-76—Complete this procedure, as needed, to add
or delete passive units.
21. NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 4-78—Complete this
procedure, as needed, to install the fiber-optic cables on the DWDM cards.4-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
22. NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes,
page 4-82—Complete this procedure, as needed, to connect TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP cards to DWDM cards in a terminal, hub, or
reconfigurable optical add-drop multiplexer (ROADM) node through the patch panel.
23. NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes, page 4-101—Complete this procedure,
as needed, to connect 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C cards in a mesh node to the 4-degree or 8-degree
patch panel.
24. NTP-G141 Install Fiber-Optic Cables for Y-Cable Protection Modules, page 4-108—Complete this
procedure, as needed, to connect fiber-optic cables to Y-cable modules from client TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
25. NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 4-113—Complete this procedure to
calculate the DWDM cable connections.
26. NTP-G209 Create, Edit, and Delete Optical Sides, page 4-123—Complete this procedure to create,
edit, and delete an optical side.
27. NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 4-126—Complete this procedure next.
28. NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 4-127—Complete this procedure next.
29. NTP-G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power, page 4-129—Complete this procedure next.
30. NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 4-131—Complete this
procedure as needed.
31. NTP-G210 Provision Node for SNMPv3, page 4-133 —Complete this procedure if Simple Network
Management Protocol version 3(SNMPv3) will be used for network monitoring.
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files
Step 1 Verify that you have the Cisco TransportPlanner reports and files shown in Table 4-1 for the node that
you will provision. The reports and files can be provided in one of the following ways:
• If you have Cisco TransportPlanner, verify that you have the electronic network design plan from
which you can generate the reports in Cisco TransportPlanner. For information about generating the
reports, refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner DWDM Operations Guide.
• If you do not have Cisco TransportPlanner, you must have printouts of all reports listed in Table 4-1
except the Assisted Configuration Setup file. Assisted Configuration Setup is an electronic file that
will be imported into CTC. You must be able to access it from the CTC computer used to provision
the node
• If you not do not have all the reports and files listed in Table 4-1, do not continue. See your site
planner or network planner for the required information and files.
Purpose This procedure verifies that you have the Cisco TransportPlanner reports
and files needed to turn up the node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 1, “Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454
M6 Shelf”
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Retrieve or higher4-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Table 4-1 Cisco TransportPlanner Node Setup Information and Files
Source Format Description
Shelf layout JPG file Cisco TransportPlanner provides a shelf layout showing the
cards that should be installed in each ONS 15454 (Figure 4-1),
ONS 15454 M2 (Figure 4-2), and ONS 15454 M6 (Figure 4-3)
slot. Cisco TransportPlanner can export each of these cards as
a JPG file with a user-defined name.
Installation Parameters Table Provides the target reference values for the variable optical
attenuators (VOAs), output power, optical thresholds, and
amplifier configuration parameters.
Internal Connections Table Identifies the patchcords that must be installed within the shelf.
NE Update
Configuration file
XML file The Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update configuration file is an
electronic file with an XML extension and a name assigned by
the network designer for the network you are provisioning. The
file is imported into CTC where it preprovisions internal
patchcords, optical sides and card parameters for optical cards,
transponders, and passive units (DCUs and patch panels). It
configures the ANS parameters based on the network
calculated by Cisco TransportPlanner.
Traffic Matrix Table Shows the traffic flow within the node. During node turn-up,
this report is used to identify the location of Y-cable protection
groups.
Cable list Table or list A list of cables needed to provision the node. The list can be
derived from the Internal Connections Report or from the Bill
of Materials report prepared by Cisco TransportPlanner.4-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-1 Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout - ONS 154544-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-2 Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout - ONS 5454 M2
Figure 4-3 Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout - ONS 15454 M6
Step 2 Print Table 4-1 for reference. You will need information from the reports during node turn-up.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.4-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation
Step 1 Verify the following:
• TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards are installed in Slots 7 and 11 on the ONS 15454 shelf.
• Two TNC/TSC cards are installed in Slots 1 and 8 on the ONS 15454 M6 shelf.
• A stand-alone TNC/TSC card is installed in Slot 1 on the ONS 15454 M2 shelf.
Step 2 Verify that the FAIL LED is off on both TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards.
Step 3 Verify that the green ACT (active) LED is illuminated on one TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card and
that the amber STBY (standby) LED is illuminated on the other TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card.
Note If the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards are not installed, or if their LEDs are not operating
as described, do not continue. Complete the “DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3
Card” or “DLP-G604 Install the TNC or TSC Card” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide or refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide to resolve
installation problems before proceeding to Step 4.
Step 4 (On 15454-DWDM shelf) If the AIC-I card is installed, verify that it is installed in Slot 9 and that its
ACT (active) LED displays a solid green light.
Note If the AIC-I card is not installed and the card is required by the Cisco Transport Planner shelf
layout, or if it is installed and its LEDs are not operating as described, do not continue. Complete
the “DLP-G34 Install the AIC-I Card” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide or
refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide to resolve installation problems
before proceeding to Step 5.
Step 5 Verify that the software release shown on the LCD matches the software release required for your
network. On the LCD, the software release is shown under the platform (SONET or SDH) and
date/temperature. If the release does not match, perform one of the following procedures:
• Perform a software upgrade using a ONS 15454 software CD or ONS 15454 SDH software CD.
Refer to the release-specific software upgrade document.
• On ONS 15454, replace the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards with cards containing the correct release.
• On ONS 15454 M6, replace the LCD and TNC/TSC cards with cards containing the correct release.
Purpose This procedure verifies that the Cisco ONS 15454 shelf has two TCC2/
TCC2P/TCC3 cards installed. This procedure also verifies that the Cisco
ONS 15454 M6 and the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 shelves have TNC/TSC
cards installed. It also verifies the installation of the AIC-I and
MS-ISC-100T cards, if they are installed.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 1, “Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454
M6 Shelf”
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Retrieve or higher4-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• On ONS 15454 M2, replace the power module and TNC/TSC cards with cards containing the correct
release.
Step 6 (On ONS 15454 shelf) If the node will be configured as a multishelf node, verify that redundant
MS-ISC-100T cards are installed (Slots 6 and 12 are recommended) and that the green ACT (active) LED
is illuminated on both cards.
Note If the MS-ISC-100T card is not installed and the card is required by the Cisco Transport Planner
shelf layout, or if the card’s LEDs are not operating as described, do not continue. Complete the
“DLP-G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide or refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide to resolve installation
problems before proceeding to the next procedure.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information
Note The DIS information is applicable for TNC/TSC cards in the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 sM6
platforms.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to verify the DIS
information.
Step 2 Do the following as applicable:
a. To retrieve the digitally signed software version, go to Step 3.
b. To retrieve the software signature information, go to Step 4.
c. To retrieve the public keys installed on the node, go to Step 5.
Step 3 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click Maintenance > Software
tab to retrieve the digitally signed software version. The following columns appear in the pane:
• Node—Displays the node name or IP address.
Purpose This procedure retrieves the following information on the ONS 15454 M2
and ONS 15454 M6 platforms:
• Software signature information
• Version of the digitally signed software
• Public keys installed
Note In a hybrid multi-shelf configuration involving ONS 15454 and
ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies, DIS information is available for
the ONS 15454 M6 shelf only.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation” task on page 4-7
Required/As Needed As Needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve user4-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Type—Displays the node type.
• Node Status—Displays the node status, which is based on the highest alarm level at the node.
• Working Version—Displays the working ONS node software version (the general software release
number [n.n.n] followed by the specific software release identification number). For example, 9.2.0
(09.20-X10E-02.06).
• Protect Version—Displays the protect ONS node software version (the general software release
number [n.n.n] followed by the specific software release identification number). For example, 9.2.0
(09.20-X10E-02.06).
• Download Status—Displays the status of any in-progress network software downloads.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), click Maintenance > DIS > Info >
Retrieve Signature Information tab to retrieve signature information. The following information is
displayed in the pane:
• Attribute—The following information is displayed:
– Organization Name—Displays the owner of the software image.
– Organization Unit—Displays the business unit within Cisco.
– Serial Number—Displays the serial number of the certificate with the digital signature.
– Common Name—Displays the name of the platform.
– Hash Algorithm—Displays the hashing algorithm used.
– Image Type—Shows the type of the image-Development or Production.
– Key Version—Indicates the key version used to digitally sign the image. A key version is
identified with an alphabetical character that ranges from A to Z.
– Sign Algorithm—Refers to the RSA algorithm.
• Working Software Information—Displays the signature information of the working software.
• Protect Software Information—Displays the signature information of the protect software.
Note To refresh the signature information, click Refresh Signature Information.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click Maintenance > DIS > Available
Keys > Retrieve All Keys tabsto retrieve public key information. The following information is
displayed in the pane:
• Key Type—Displays the public key available on the system for verification:
– Release Key—Verifies release images.
– Development Key—Verifies the development images.
• Public Key Algorithm—Displays the name of the algorithm used for public key cryptography.
• Exponent—Displays the exponent of the public key algorithm—release or development keys.
• Key Version—Displays the key version used for verification.
• Modulus—Displays the modulus of the public key algorithm with a size of 2048 bits.
Note To refresh the public key information, click Refresh All Keys.4-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node
Caution An optical shelf in a multishelf configuration must be provisioned as the node controller shelf and not
as a subtending shelf. Otherwise, traffic will be dropped. If there are no slots available on the optical
shelf to install the MS-ISC-100T cards (needed for a node controller shelf), install and configure the
Cisco Catalyst 2950 or Cisco Catalyst 3560. See the “NTP-G302 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf
Node and Subtending Shelves to a Catalyst 2950” in theCisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
or “NTP-G295 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending Shelves to a Catalyst 3560” in
Purpose This procedure provisions a multishelf node from CTC. A multishelf node
consists of a control node and subtending shelves that are configured to
operate as a single node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
• “NTP-G301 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending
Shelves to an MS-ISC-100T Card” in theCisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
• “NTP-G302 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending
Shelves to a Catalyst 2950” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
• “NTP-G295 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending
Shelves to a Catalyst 3560” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
• “NTP-G296 Upgrade the ONS 15454 Multishelf with MS-ISC Card
Configuration Using the Catalyst 3560” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• “NTP-G297 Upgrade the ONS 15454 Multishelf with Catalyst 2950
Configuration Using the Catalyst 3560” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• “NTP-G308 Connect the ONS 15454 M6 Multishelf Node and the
ONS 15454 M6 Subtending Shelves” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• “NTP-G309 Connect the ONS 15454 M6 and the ONS 15454 in a
Mixed Multishelf Configuration” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
• NTP-G310 Upgrade the ONS 15454 Multishelf Configuration using
the ONS 15454 M6 in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation
Guide
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
theCisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. If you are using an ONS 15454 M6, then refer to the
applicable procedure for connecting the ONS 15454 M6 as the node controller in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node that you want to configure as a
multishelf node.
Step 2 If you want to set up the login node as the node controller, complete the following steps. If not, continue
with Step 3.
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
General > Multishelf Config tabs.
b. Click Enable as Node Controller.
c. From the LAN Config drop-down list, complete one of the following:
• Choose Ethernet Switch if MS-ISC-100T cards or the Catalyst 2950 or the Catalyst 3560
switches are already installed and configured. Choose the public VLAN ID and private VLAN
ID for the ONS 15454 multishelf node. In case of an ONS 15454 M6, the public VLAN ID and
private VLAN ID are static (1 and 2 respectively).
Note Public VLAN ID is used by the node controller to communicate with the external network.
Private VLAN ID is used by the node controller to communicate with the subtending shelves.
Note If the ONS 15454 M6 shelf is used as the node controller, then you can connect the subtending
shelves directly to the MSM ports on the ECU. However, a Catalyst 3560 switch can also be used
along with the ONS 15454 M6 node controller to extend the number of subtending shelves.
• Choose Stand-Alone if MS-ISC-100T cards are not installed yet but will be included in the final
layout. This option will allow a safe migration of the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card
database when the multishelf configuration is complete.
d. Click Apply.
e. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to allow the node to reboot. The CTC view changes to
network view and the node icon changes to gray. Wait for the reboot to finish. (This might take
several minutes.)
f. After the node reboots, double-click the node. The multishelf view appears.
Note The shelf ID of the node controller is automatically assigned as 1.
Step 3 If you want to add a node as a subtending shelf (either ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 M6) in the multishelf
configuration, complete the following steps. If not, you have completed this procedure.
a. In multishelf view, right-click the white space in the rack and choose Add Shelf from the shortcut
menu.
b. Select the type of subtending shelf (ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 M6).
c. In the Shelf ID Selection dialog box, choose a shelf ID (from 2 to 30) from the drop-down list.
d. Click OK. The shelf appears in multishelf view.4-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
e. Disconnect the cross-over (CAT-5) LAN cable from the RJ-45 LAN (TCP/IP) port of the
ONS 15454 subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 11 or Slot 7, or from the MSM ports
on the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf that correspond to the TNC/TSC card in Slot 1 or Slot 8.
f. Connect your Windows PC or Solaris workstation network interface card (NIC) to the RJ-45 LAN
(TCP/IP) port on the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 11 or Slot 7, or to the MSM ports on the
ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf that correspond to the TNC/TSC card in Slot 1 or Slot 8.
g. Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the subtending shelf.
h. Click the Provisioning > General > Multishelf Config tabs.
i. Click Enable as Subtended Shelf.
j. From the Shelf ID drop-down list, choose the shelf ID that you created in Step c.
k. Click Apply.
l. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to reboot the shelf. The CTC view changes to network view
and the node icon changes to gray. Wait for the reboot to finish. (This might take several minutes.)
m. Disconnect your Windows PC or Solaris workstation NIC from the RJ-45 LAN (TCP/IP) port of the
ONS 15454 subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 11 or Slot 7, or from the MSM ports
on the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf that correspond to the TNC/TSC card in Slot 1 or Slot 8.
n. Reconnect the cross-over (CAT-5) LAN cable (disconnected in Step e) to the RJ-45 LAN (TCP/IP)
port of the subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 11 or Slot 7, or to the MSM ports on
the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf that correspond to the TNC/TSC card in Slot 1 or Slot 8.
o. Repeat Steps a through n to set up additional subtending shelves.
Note To connect the subtending shelves to the node controller, refer to the applicable procedures in the Cisco
ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
Note Non-LAN connected Multishelf nodes are not manageable from CTC unless SOCKS Proxy is enabled
on the node.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G23 Create Users and Assign Security
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you need to create users.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This procedure creates ONS 15454 users and assigns their security levels.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note You must log in as a Superuser to create additional users. The CISCO15 user provided with each
ONS 15454 can be used to set up other ONS 15454 users. You can add up to 500 users to one
ONS 15454.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G54 Create a New User on a Single Node” task on page 4-13 or the “DLP-G55
Create a New User on Multiple Nodes” task on page 4-14 as needed.
Note You must add the same user name and password to each node that a user will access.
Step 3 If you want to modify the security policy settings, including password aging and idle user timeout
policies, complete the “NTP-G88 Modify Users and Change Security” procedure on page 11-55.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G54 Create a New User on a Single Node
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Security > Users tabs.
Step 2 In the Users window, click Create.
Step 3 In the Create User dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type the user name. The name must be a minimum of six and a maximum of
20 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. For Transaction Language One (TL1) compatibility, the
user name must be 6 to 10 characters.
• Password—Type the user password. The password length, by default, is set to a minimum of six and
a maximum of 20 characters. You can configure the default values in node view using the
Provisioning > NE Defaults > Node > security > passwordComplexity tabs. The minimum length
can be set to eight, ten or twelve characters, and the maximum length to 80 characters. The password
must be a combination of alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) and special (+, #,%) characters, where at
least two characters are not alphabetic and at least one character is a special character. For TL1
compatibility, the password must be six to ten characters.
Note The password must not contain the user name.
• Confirm Password—Type the password again to confirm it.
Purpose This task creates a new user for one ONS 15454.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Security Level—Choose a security level for the user: RETRIEVE, MAINTENANCE,
PROVISIONING, or SUPERUSER.
Note Each security level has a different idle time. The idle time is the length of time that CTC can
remain idle before the password must be reentered. The defaults are: Retrieve user = unlimited,
Maintenance user = 60 minutes, Provisioning user = 30 minutes, and Superuser = 15 minutes.
To change the idle times, see the “NTP-G88 Modify Users and Change Security” procedure on
page 11-55.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G55 Create a New User on Multiple Nodes
Note All nodes where you want to add users must be accessible in network view.
Step 1 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Security > Users tabs.
Step 3 In the Users window, click Create.
Step 4 In the Create User dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type the user name. The name must be a minimum of six and a maximum of
20 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. For TL1 compatibility, the user name must be
6 to 10 characters.
• Password—Type the user password. The password length, by default, is set to a minimum of six and
a maximum of 20 characters. You can configure the default values in node view through
Provisioning > NE Defaults > Node > security > passwordComplexity. The minimum length can be
set to eight, ten or twelve characters, and the maximum length to 80 characters. The password must
be a combination of alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) and special (+, #,%) characters, where at least two
characters are not alphabetic and at least one character is a special character. For TL1 compatibility,
the password must be six to ten characters. The password must not contain the user name.
• Confirm Password—Type the password again to confirm it.
• Security Level—Choose a security level for the user: RETRIEVE, MAINTENANCE,
PROVISIONING, or SUPERUSER.
Purpose This task adds a new user to multiple ONS 15454 nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note Each security level has a different idle time. The idle time is the length of time that CTC can
remain idle before it locks up and the password must be reentered. The defaults are: Retrieve
user = unlimited, Maintenance user = 60 minutes, Provisioning user = 30 minutes, and
Superuser = 15 minutes. To change the idle times, refer to the “NTP-G88 Modify Users and
Change Security” procedure on page 11-55.
Step 5 In the Select Applicable Nodes area, deselect any nodes where you do not want to add the user (all
network nodes are selected by default).
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 In the User Creation Results dialog box, verify that the user was added to all the nodes chosen in Step 5.
If not, click OK and repeat Steps 2 through 6. If the user was added to all nodes, click OK and continue
with the next step.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G24 Set Up Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 for the node you will turn up. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
General > General tabs.
Step 3 In the Node Name/TID field, type a name for the node. For TL1 compliance, names must begin with an
alpha character and have no more than 20 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
Note To avoid errors when you import the Cisco TransportPlanner configuration file using the
“NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on
page 4-49, the CTC node name and the Cisco TransportPlanner site name should be the same (or
at least easy to identify).
Step 4 (Optional) In the Contact field, type the name of the node contact person and the phone number, up to
255 characters.
Step 5 (Optional) In the Latitude field, enter the node latitude: N (north) or S (south), degrees, and minutes.
Step 6 (Optional) In the Longitude field, enter the node longitude: E (east) or W (west), degrees, and minutes.
Purpose This procedure provisions identification information for the node,
including the node name, a contact name and phone number, the location
of the node, and the date, time, and time zone.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note The latitude and longitude values only indicate the geographical position of the nodes in the
actual network and not the CTC node position.
Step 7 (Optional) In the Description field, type a description of the node. The description can be a maximum
of 255 characters.
Step 8 (Optional) Check the Use NTP/SNTP Server check box if you want CTC to use a Network Time Protocol
(NTP) or Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server to set the date and time of the node. Using an
NTP or SNTP server ensures that all ONS 15454 network nodes use the same date and time reference.
The server synchronizes the node’s time after power outages or software upgrades.
a. If you check the Use NTP/SNTP Server check box, complete the following fields:
– Use NTP/SNTP Server—Type the IP address of the primary NTP/SNTP server connected to the
ONS 15454 or of another ONS 15454/15600/15310-CL/15310-MA as GNE with NTP/SNTP
enabled that is connected to the ONS 15454 ENE.
– Backup NTP/SNTP Server—Type the IP address of the secondary NTP/SNTP server connected
to the ONS 15454 or of another ONS 15454/15600/15310-CL/15310-MA as GNE with
NTP/SNTP enabled that is connected to the ONS 15454 ENE.
When the primary NTP/SNTP server fails or is not reachable, the node uses the secondary
NTP/SNTP server to synchronize its date and time. If both the primary and secondary
NTP/SNTP servers fail or are not reachable, an SNTP-FAIL alarm is raised. The node checks
for the availability of the primary or secondary NTP/SNTP server at regular intervals until it can
get the time from any one of the NTP/SNTP servers. After the node gets the time from any one
server, it synchronizes its date and time with the server’s date and time and the SNTP-FAIL
alarm is cleared. For each retry and resynchronization, the node checks the availability of the
primary NTP/SNTP server first, followed by the secondary NTP/SNTP server. The node
synchronizes its date and time every hour.
Note You will not be able to identify which NTP/SNTP server is being used for
synchronization.
Note If you plan to check gateway network element (GNE) for the ONS 15454 SOCKS proxy
server (see “DLP-G56 Provision IP Settings” task on page 4-19), external ONS 15454 nodes
must reference the gateway ONS 15454 for NTP/SNTP timing. For more information about
the ONS 15454 gateway settings, refer to the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter
in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Caution If you reference another ONS 15454 for the NTP/SNTP server, make sure that the second ONS 15454
references an NTP/SNTP server and not the first ONS 15454 (that is, do not create an NTP/SNTP timing
loop by having two ONS 15454 nodes reference each other).
b. If you do not check Use SNTP/NTP Server, complete the Date and Time fields. The ONS 15454 will
use these fields for alarm dates and times. By default, CTC displays all alarms in the CTC computer
time zone for consistency. To change the display to the node time zone, complete the “DLP-G118
Display Alarms and Conditions Using Time Zone” task on page 10-11.4-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Date—Type the current date in the format m/d/yyyy, for example, September 24, 2002 is
9/24/2002.
• Time—Type the current time in the format hh:mm:ss, for example, 11:24:58. The ONS 15454
uses a 24-hour clock, so 10:00 PM is entered as 22:00:00.
Step 9 Click the Time Zone field and choose a city within your time zone from the drop-down list. The list
displays the 80 World Time Zones from –11 through 0 (GMT) to +14. Continental United States time
zones are GMT-05:00 (Eastern), GMT-06:00 (Central), GMT-07:00 (Mountain), and GMT-08:00
(Pacific).
Step 10 Check the Use Daylight Savings Time check box if the time zone that you chose uses Daylight Savings
Time.
Note The Insert AIS-V on STS-1 SD-P and SD-P BER field are not used in DWDM networks.
Step 11 Click Apply.
Step 12 In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
Step 13 Review the node information. If you need to make corrections, repeat Steps 3 through 12 to enter the
corrections. If the information is correct, continue with the “NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor
Thresholds” procedure on page 4-17.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds
Caution The default battery power thresholds are normally not changed. Threshold changes should only be
performed at the direction of your site administrator.
Note When the thresholds are crossed, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card generates warning alarms in
CTC. For ONS 15454 power specifications, see the “Hardware Specifications” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 for the node that you will set up. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This procedure provisions extreme high, low, and extreme low input
battery power thresholds within a –48 VDC environment.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > General >
Power Monitor tabs.
Note In multishelf mode, power monitor thresholds must be provisioned separately for each shelf
within the multishelf including the node controller and all subtending shelves.
Step 3 To change the extreme low battery voltage threshold in 0.5 VDC increments, choose a voltage from the
ELWBATVGVdc drop-down list.
Step 4 To change the low battery voltage threshold in 0.5 VDC increments, choose a voltage from the
LWBATVGVdc drop-down list.
Step 5 To change the high battery voltage threshold in 0.5 VDC increments, choose a voltage from the
HIBATVGVdc drop-down list.
Step 6 To change the extreme high battery voltage threshold in 0.5 VDC increments, choose a voltage from the
EHIBATVGVdc drop-down list.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30. If you are already logged in, continue with
Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G56 Provision IP Settings” task on page 4-19 to provision the ONS 15454 IP
address, subnet mask, default router, DHCP server, IIOP listener port, and SOCKS proxy server settings.
Tip If you cannot log into the node, you can change its IP address, default router, and network mask
by using the LCD on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly (unless LCD provisioning is
suppressed). See the “DLP-G57 Set the IP Address, Default Router, and Network Mask Using
the LCD” task on page 4-24 for instructions. However, you cannot use the LCD to provision any
other network settings. In an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, the LCD is on the fan-tray
assembly. In an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, the LCD is a separate unit installed above the
external connection unit (ECU).
Purpose This procedure provisions network access for a node, including its subnet
mask, default router, Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
server, Internet Inter-Orb Protocol (IIOP) listener port, gateway settings,
static routes, Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol, Routing
Information Protocol (RIP), and designated SOCKS servers.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note When accessing CTC from a machine running Windows XP operating system, CTC may sometimes fail
to reconnect to a GNE when the GNE proxies for several ENE nodes (approximately 15 ENE nodes).
This can happen when there is a side switch or when the LAN is enabled/disabled. This is due to the
Windows XP operating system limiting the number of simultaneous TCP/IP connection attempts. As a
workaround, close the existing CTC session and relaunch CTC on the GNE node. You can configure a
designated socks server list on the CTC to mitigate the problem.
Step 3 If TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards are installed and you want to turn on the ONS 15454 secure mode,
which allows two IP addresses to be provisioned for the node, complete the “DLP-G264 Enable Node
Security Mode” task on page 4-26. Secure mode is not available if TCC2 cards are installed.
Step 4 If static routes are needed, complete the “DLP-G58 Create a Static Route” task on page 4-28. For more
information about static routes, refer to the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 5 If the ONS 15454 is connected to a LAN or WAN that uses OSPF and you want to share routing
information between the LAN or WAN and the ONS network, complete the “DLP-G59 Set Up or Change
Open Shortest Path First Protocol” task on page 4-29.
Step 6 If the ONS 15454 is connected to a LAN or WAN that uses RIP, complete the “DLP-G60 Set Up or
Change Routing Information Protocol” task on page 4-32.
Step 7 Complete the “DLP-G439 Provision the Designated SOCKS Servers” task on page 4-23 after the
network is provisioned and one or more of the following conditions exist:
• SOCKS proxy is enabled.
• The ratio of ENEs to GNEs is greater than eight to one.
• Most ENEs do not have LAN connectivity.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G56 Provision IP Settings
Caution All network changes should be approved by your network (or LAN) administrator.
Caution Verify that the IPv4 or IPv6 addresses assigned to the node are unique in the network. Duplicate IP
addresses in the same network cause loss of visibility.
Purpose This task provisions IP settings, which includes the IP address, IP address
version, default router, DHCP access, firewall access, and SOCKS proxy
server settings for an ONS 15454 node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Network > General tabs.
Step 2 Complete the following information in the fields listed:
• IP Address—Type the IP address assigned to the ONS 15454 node.
Note If TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards are installed, dual IP addressing is available using the
secure mode. When secure mode is off (sometimes called repeater mode), the IP address
entered in the IP Address field applies to the backplane LAN port (ONS 15454), EMS RJ-45
port or Craft port on the ECU (ONS 15454 M6), EMS RJ-45 port on the power module (ONS
15454 M2), and the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC TCP/IP (LAN) port. When secure mode is on,
the IP Address field shows the address assigned to the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC TCP/IP
(LAN) port and the Superuser can enable or disable display of the backplane IP address. See
the “DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode” task on page 4-26 as needed. Refer to the
“Management Network Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual for more information about secure mode.
• Net/Subnet Mask Length—Type the subnet mask length (decimal number representing the subnet
mask length in bits) or click the arrows to adjust the subnet mask length. The subnet mask length is
the same for all ONS 15454 nodes in the same subnet.
• MAC Address—(Display only) Displays the ONS 15454 IEEE 802 MAC address.
Note In secure mode, the front and back TCP/IP (LAN) ports are assigned different MAC
addresses, and the backplane information can be hidden or revealed by a Superuser.
• Default Router—If the ONS 15454 is connected to a LAN, enter the IP address of the default router.
The default router forwards packets to network devices that the ONS 15454 cannot directly access.
This field is ignored if any of the following are true:
– The ONS 15454 is not connected to a LAN.
– The SOCKS proxy server is enabled and the ONS 15454 is provisioned as an end network
element (ENE).
– OSPF is enabled on both the ONS 15454 and the LAN where the ONS 15454 is connected.
(OSPF is provisioned in the “DLP-G59 Set Up or Change Open Shortest Path First Protocol”
task on page 4-29.)
• LCD IP Setting—Choose one of the following:
– Allow Configuration—Displays the node IP address on the LCD and allows users to change
the IP settings using the LCD. This option enables the “DLP-G57 Set the IP Address, Default
Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD” task on page 4-24.
– Display Only—Displays the node IP address on the LCD but does not allow users to change the
IP settings using the LCD.
– Suppress Display—Suppresses the node IP address display on the LCD.
• Suppress CTC IP Display—Check this check box if you want to prevent the node IP address from
appearing in CTC to users with Provisioning, Maintenance, or Retrieve security levels. (The IP
address suppression is not applied to users with Superuser security level.)4-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note IP address suppression is not applied to users with Superuser security level. However, in
secure mode the backplane IP address visibility can be restricted to only a locally connected
Superuser viewing the routing table. In this case, the backplane IP address is not revealed to
any user at any other NE, either on the routing table or in autonomous messages (such as the
TL1 REPT DBCHG message, alarms, and performance monitoring [PM] reporting).
• IPv6 Configuration—Allows provisioning of IPv6 addresses. After you provision an IPv6 address,
you can access the device using the IPv6 address. Configure these settings only if you want to enable
IPv6 on the node. IPv6 cannot be configured using the LCD push buttons.
– Enable IPv6—Select this check box to assign an IPv6 address to the node. The IPv6 Address,
Prefix Length, and IPv6 Default Router fields are enabled only if this check box is selected. The
check box is disabled by default.
Note Enable SOCKS Proxy on Port check box is enabled when you enable IPv6 and can be disabled
only when IPv6 is disabled.
Note By default, when IPv6 is enabled, the node processes both IPv4 and IPv6 packets on the
LAN interface. If you want the node to process only IPv6 packets, you need to disable IPv4
on the node. For more information, see DLP-G317 Change Node Access and PM Clearing
Privilege, page 11-58
– IPv6 Address—Enter the IPv6 address that you want to assign to the node. This IP address is
the global unicast IPv6 address. This field is disabled if the Enable IPv6 check box is not
selected.
– Prefix Length—Enter the prefix length of the IPv6 address. This field is disabled if the Enable
IPv6 check box is not selected.
– IPv6 Default Router—Enter the IPv6 address of the default router of the IPv6 NE. This is
optional. This field is disabled if the Enable IPv6 check box is not selected.
Note The ONS 15454 DWDM uses NAT-PT internally to support native IPv6. NAT-PT uses the
IPv4 address range 128.0.0.0 to 128.0.1.254 for packet translation. Do not use this address
range when you enable IPv6 feature.
Note You can provision IPv6 in secure or nonsecure mode. To enable secure mode, see
“DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode” task on page 4-26.
• Forward DHCP Request To—Check this check box to enable DHCP. Also, enter the DHCP server
IP address in the Request To field. Unchecked is the default. If you will enable any of the gateway
settings to implement the ONS 15454 SOCKS proxy server features, do not check this check box.
Note If you enable DHCP, computers connected to an ONS 15454 node can obtain temporary IP
addresses from an external DHCP server. The ONS 15454 only forwards DHCP requests; it
does not act as a DHCP server.4-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Gateway Settings—Provisions the ONS 15454 SOCKS proxy server features. (SOCKS is a standard
proxy protocol for IP-based applications.) Do not change these options until you review Scenario 7
“Provisioning the ONS 15454 Proxy Server” in the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter
of the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual. In SOCKS proxy server networks, the
ONS 15454 is either an ENE, a GNE, or a proxy-only server. Provisioning must be consistent for
each NE type.
• Enable SOCKS proxy server on port—If checked, the ONS 15454 serves as a proxy for connections
between CTC clients and ONS 15454 nodes that are connected by data communications channels
(DCCs) to the proxy ONS 15454. The CTC client establishes connections to DCC-connected nodes
through the proxy node. The CTC client does not require IP connectivity to the DCC-connected
nodes; it only requires IP connectivity to the proxy ONS 15454. If the Enable SOCKS proxy server
on port check box is unchecked, the node does not proxy for any CTC clients. When this box is
checked, you can provision one of the following options:
– External Network Element (ENE)—Choose this option when the ONS 15454 is not connected
to a LAN but has DCC connections to other ONS nodes. A CTC computer connected to the ENE
through the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card TCP/IP (craft) port can manage nodes that
have DCC connections to the ENE. However, the CTC computer does not have direct IP
connectivity to these nodes or to any LAN or WAN that those nodes might be connected to.
– Gateway Network Element (GNE)—Choose this option when the ONS 15454 is connected to
a LAN and has DCC connections to other nodes. A CTC computer connected to the LAN can
manage all nodes that have DCC connections to the GNE, but the CTC computer does not have
direct IP connectivity to them. The GNE option isolates the LAN from the DCC network so that
IP traffic originating from the DCC-connected nodes and any CTC computers connected to
them is prevented from reaching the LAN.
– SOCKS proxy only—Choose this option when the ONS 15454 is connected to a LAN and the
LAN is separated from the node by a firewall. The SOCKS proxy only option is the same as the
GNE option, except that the SOCKS proxy only option does not isolate the DCC network from
the LAN.
Note If a node is provisioned in secure mode, it is automatically provisioned as a GNE with SOCKS
proxy enabled. However, this provisioning can be overridden, and the secure node can be
changed to an ENE. In secure mode, SOCKS cannot be disabled. For information about
provisioning, including GNE and ENE status, see the “DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode”
task on page 4-26.
Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
The TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards reboot one at a time if changes were made to the IP address,
subnet mask, or gateway settings. During this time (approximately 5 to 6 minutes), the active and
standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card LEDs will blink, turn on, and turn off at different intervals.
Eventually, a “Lost node connection, switching to network view” message appears.
Step 5 Click OK. The network view appears. The node icon appears in gray, during which time you cannot
access the node.
Step 6 Double-click the node icon when it becomes green.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). 4-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G439 Provision the Designated SOCKS Servers
Note To complete this task, you must have either the IP addresses or DNS names of all ONS 15454s in the
network with LAN access that have SOCKS proxy enabled.
Note SOCKS proxy servers can be any accessible ONS network nodes that have LAN access, including the
ONS 15310-MA, ONS 15310-CL, ONS 15454, ONS 15454 SDH, ONS 15600, and ONS 15600 SDH
nodes.
Note You must repeat this task any time that changes to SOCKS proxy server nodes occur, for example,
whenever LAN connectivity is added to or removed from a node, or when nodes are added or removed
from the network.
Note If you cannot log into a network node, complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30
choosing the Disable Network Discovery option. Complete this task, then login again with network
discovery enabled.
Step 1 From the CTC Edit menu, choose Preferences.
Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, click the SOCKS tab.
Step 3 In the Designated SOCKS Server field, type the IP address or DNS node name of the first ONS 15454
SOCKS server. The ONS 15454 that you enter must have SOCKS proxy server enabled, and it must have
LAN access.
Step 4 Click Add. The node is added to the SOCKS server list. If you need to remove a node on the list, click
Remove.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to add all qualified ONS 15454s within the network. Add all ONS nodes that have
SOCKS proxy enabled and are connected to the LAN.
Purpose This task identifies the ONS 15454 SOCKS servers in
SOCKS-proxy-enabled networks. Identifying the SOCKS servers reduces
the amount of time required to log into a node and have all NEs appear in
network view (NE discovery time). The task is recommended when the
combined CTC login and NE discovery time is greater than five minutes in
networks with SOCKS proxy enabled. Long (or failed) login and NE
discovery times can occur in networks that have a high ENE-to-GNE ratio
and a low number of ENEs with LAN connectivity.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 6 Click Check All Servers. CTC verifies that all nodes can perform as SOCKS servers. Once verified, a
check is placed next to the node IP address or node name in the SOCKS server list. An X placed next to
the node indicates one or more of the following:
• The entry does not correspond to a valid DNS name.
• The numeric IP address is invalid.
• The node cannot be reached.
• The node can be reached, but the SOCKS port cannot be accessed, for example, a firewall problem
might exist.
Step 7 Click Apply. The list of ONS 15454 nodes, including ones that received an X in Step 6, are added as
SOCKS servers.
Step 8 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog box.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G57 Set the IP Address, Default Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD
Note You cannot perform this task if the LCD IP Display field on the node view Provisioning > Network tab
is set to Display Only or Suppress Display. See the “DLP-G56 Provision IP Settings” task on page 4-19
to view or change the LCD IP Display field. If the node is locked in secure mode with the LCD display
disabled, you will not be able to change this provisioning unless the lock is disabled by Cisco Technical
Support. Refer to the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual for more information about secure mode.
Note The LCD reverts to normal display mode after 5 seconds of button inactivity.
Step 1 On the ONS 15454 front panel, repeatedly press the Slot button until SHELF appears on the first line of
the LCD. You are in the Shelf menu.
Purpose This task changes the ONS 15454 IP address, default router, and network
mask using the LCD on the fan-tray assembly. Use this task if you cannot
log into CTC. In an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, the LCD is on the
fan-tray assembly. In an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, the LCD is a
separate unit installed above the external connection unit (ECU).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card” in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note In an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, the LCD panel and the Slot, Port, and Status buttons are present
on the fan-tray assembly. In an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, the LCD is a separate unit installed above
the external connection unit (ECU); the Slot, Port, and Status buttons are present on the LCD unit.
Step 2 Repeatedly press the Port button until the following information appears:
• To change the node IP address, Node Status=IpAddress (Figure 4-4)
• To change the node network mask, Node Status=Net Mask
• To change the default router IP address, Node Status=Default Rtr
Figure 4-4 Selecting the IP Address Option—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly
Step 3 Press the Status button to display the node IP address (Figure 4-5), the node subnet mask length, or the
default router IP address.
Figure 4-5 Changing the IP Address—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly
Step 4 Push the Slot button to move to the digit of the IP address, subnet mask, or default router that you want
to change. The selected digit flashes.
Tip The Slot, Status, and Port button positions correspond to the positions of the commands shown
on the LCD. For example, in Figure 4-5, you press the Slot button to invoke the Next command
and the Status button to invoke the Done command.
Step 5 Press the Port button to cycle the IP address, subnet mask, or default router to the correct digit.
Step 6 When the change is complete, press the Status button to return to the relevant Node Status menu.
Step 7 Repeatedly press the Port button until the Shelf Save Configuration option appears (Figure 4-6).
FAN FAIL
Slot
Node
Status=IpAddress 151562
CRIT MAJ MIN
Status Port
FAN FAIL
Slot
172.020.214.107
44090
CRIT MAJ MIN
Status Port4-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-6 Selecting the Save Configuration Option—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly
Step 8 Press the Status button to choose the Save Configuration option.
A Save and REBOOT message appears (Figure 4-7).
Figure 4-7 Saving and Rebooting the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3—ONS 15454 Shelf Assembly
Step 9 Press the Slot button to apply the new IP address, subnet mask, or default router configuration or press
Port to cancel the configuration.
Note The IP address and default router must be on the same subnet. If not, you cannot apply the
configuration.
Step 10 Saving the new configuration causes the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards to reboot. During the
reboot, a “TCC may Reset” message appears on the LCD. The LCD returns to the normal alternating
display after both TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards finish rebooting.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode
FAN FAIL
Slot
Shelf
Status=Save Cfg. 151563
CRIT MAJ MIN
Status Port
FAN FAIL
Slot
Save and REBOOT?
44092
CRIT MAJ MIN
Status Port
Purpose This task enables the security mode. When security mode is enabled, two
IP addresses are assigned to the node. One address is assigned to the
backplane LAN port (ONS 15454) or to the EMS port (ONS 15454 M2 and
M6). The other address is assigned to the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC RJ-45
TCP/IP (LAN) port. The TCC2 card does not support security mode.
Tools/Equipment TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards must be installed.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 14-2
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note This task requires TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards. The security mode options described in this task will
not appear in CTC if TCC2 cards are installed.
Caution The IP address assigned to the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC TCP/IP (LAN) port must reside on a different
subnet from the backplane LAN port (ONS 15454) and the EMS port (ONS 15454 M2 and M6). Verify
that the new TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC IP address meets this requirement.
Note The node will reboot after you complete this task, causing a temporary disconnection between the CTC
computer and the node.
Note If an OTS-to-OTS PPC is created between nodes, it will no longer function if the node Security Mode is
enabled (see DLP-G264 Enable Node Security Mode, page 4-26). The reason for this is that if the Secure
mode is enabled, it is no longer possible for the DCN extension feature to use the LAN interface to
extend the internal network (due to the network isolation in this configuration mode). The result is that
the topology discovery on the OTS-to-OTS PPC no longer operates.
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > Security > Data Comm tabs.
Step 2 Click Change Mode.
Step 3 Review the information on the Change Secure Mode page, then click Next.
Step 4 On the TCC Ethernet Port page, enter the IP address and subnet mask for the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC
TCP/IP (LAN) port. The IP address cannot reside on the same subnet as the backplane LAN port
(ONS 15454) and the EMS port (ONS 15454 M2 and M6).
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 If needed, on the Backplane Ethernet Port page, modify the backplane IP address, subnet mask, and
default router. (You normally do not modify these fields if no network changes have occurred.)
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 On the SOCKS Proxy Server Settings page, choose one of the following options:
• External Network Element (ENE)—If selected, the CTC computer is only visible to the
ONS 15454 where the CTC computer is connected. The CTC computer is not visible to the nodes
connected to the DCC. In addition, firewall is enabled, which means that the node prevents IP traffic
from being routed between the DCC and the LAN port.
• Gateway Network Element (GNE)—If selected, the CTC computer is visible to other
DCC-connected nodes. The node prevents IP traffic from being routed between the DCC and the
LAN port.
Note The SOCKS proxy server is automatically enabled when you enable secure mode.
Step 9 Click Finish.4-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Within the next 30 to 40 seconds, the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards reboot. CTC switches to network
view, and the CTC Alerts dialog box appears. In network view, the node changes to gray and a
DISCONNECTED condition appears in the Alarms tab.
Step 10 In the CTC Alerts dialog box, click Close. Wait for the reboot to finish. (This might take several
minutes.)
Step 11 After the DISCONNECTED condition clears, complete the following steps to suppress the backplane IP
address from appearing in CTC and the LCD. If you do not want to suppress the backplane IP address
display, continue with Step 12.
a. Display the node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
b. Click the Provisioning > Security > Data Comm tabs.
c. In the LCD IP Setting field, choose Suppress Display. The IP address will not appear on the
ONS 15454 LCD.
d. Check the Suppress CTC IP Address check box. The IP address will not appear in the CTC
information area or the Provisioning > Security > Data Comm tabs.
e. Click Apply.
Note After you turn on secure mode, the TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC IP address becomes the node IP
address.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G58 Create a Static Route
Purpose This task creates a static route to establish CTC connectivity to a computer
on another network. This task is performed when one of the following
conditions exists:
• CTC computers on one subnet need to connect to ONS 15454 nodes
that are connected by a router to ONS 15454 nodes residing on another
subnet.
• OSPF is not enabled (the OSPF Active on LAN check box is not
checked on the Provisioning > Network > OSPF tab) and the External
Network Element (ENE) gateway setting is not checked.
• You need to enable multiple CTC sessions among ONS 15454 nodes
residing on the same subnet and the External Network Element (ENE)
gateway setting is not checked.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Network tabs.
Step 2 Click the Static Routing tab. Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Static Route dialog box, enter the following:
• Destination—Enter the IP address of the computer running CTC. To limit access to one computer,
enter the full IP address and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255. To allow access to all computers on
the 192.168.1.0 subnet, enter 192.168.1.0 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. You can enter a
destination of 0.0.0.0 to allow access to all CTC computers that connect to the router.
• Mask—Enter a subnet mask. If the destination is a host route (that is, one CTC computer), enter a
32-bit subnet mask (255.255.255.255). If the destination is a subnet, adjust the subnet mask
accordingly, for example, 255.255.255.0. If the destination is 0.0.0.0, CTC automatically enters a
subnet mask of 0.0.0.0 to provide access to all CTC computers. You cannot change this value.
• Next Hop—Enter the IP address of the router port or the node IP address if the CTC computer is
connected to the node directly.
• Cost—Enter the number of hops between the ONS 15454 and the computer.
Step 4 Click OK. Verify that the static route appears in the Static Route window.
Note Static route networking examples are provided in the “Management Network Connectivity”
chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G59 Set Up or Change Open Shortest Path First Protocol
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Network > OSPF tabs.
Step 2 On the top left side of the OSPF area, complete the following:
• DCC/GCC OSPF Area ID Table—In dotted decimal format, enter the number that identifies the
ONS 15454 nodes as a unique OSPF area ID. The Area ID can be any number between
000.000.000.000 and 255.255.255.255, but must be unique to the LAN OSPF area.
Purpose This task enables the OSPF routing protocol on the ONS 15454. Perform
this task if you want to include the ONS 15454 in OSPF-enabled networks.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
You will need the OSPF Area ID, Hello and Dead intervals, and
authentication key (if OSPF authentication is enabled) provisioned on the
router to which the ONS 15454 is connected.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
ANSI Nodes
• SDCC Metric—This value is normally unchanged. It sets a cost for sending packets across the
Section DCC, which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. This value should always
be higher than the LAN metric. The default SDCC metric is 100.
• LDCC Metric—Sets a cost for sending packets across the Line DCC. This value should always be
lower than the SDCC metric. The default LDCC metric is 33. It is usually not changed.
ETSI Nodes
• RS-DCC Metric—This value is normally unchanged. It sets a cost for sending packets across the
regenerator section DCC (RS-DCC), which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path.
This value should always be higher than the LAN metric. The default RS-DCC metric is 100.
• MS-DCC Metric—Sets a cost for sending packets across the multiplex section DCC (MS-DCC).
This value should always be lower than the SDCC metric. The default MS-DCC metric is 33. It is
usually not changed.
Step 3 In the OSPF on LAN area, complete the following:
• OSPF active on LAN—When checked, enables the ONS 15454 OSPF topology to be advertised to
OSPF routers on the LAN. Enable this field on ONS 15454 nodes that directly connect to OSPF
routers.
• LAN Port Area ID—Enter the OSPF area ID (dotted decimal format) for the router port where the
ONS 15454 is connected. (This number is different from the DCC/GCC OSPF Area ID.)
Step 4 By default, OSPF is set to No Authentication. If the OSPF router requires authentication, complete the
following steps. If not, continue with Step 5.
a. Click the No Authentication button.
b. In the Edit Authentication Key dialog box, complete the following:
• Type—Choose Simple Password.
• Enter Authentication Key—Enter the password.
• Confirm Authentication Key—Enter the same password to confirm it.
c. Click OK.
The authentication button label changes to Simple Password.
Step 5 Provision the OSPF priority and interval settings. The OSPF priority and interval defaults are the
defaults most commonly used by OSPF routers. Verify that these defaults match the ones used by the
OSPF router where the ONS 15454 is connected.
• Router Priority—Provision the router priority, which determines the designated router for a subnet.
• Hello Interval (sec)—Provision the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements
sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the default.
• Dead Interval—Provision the number of seconds that will pass while an OSPF router’s packets are
not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the default.
• Transit Delay (sec)—Provision the service speed. One second is the default.
• Retransmit Interval (sec)—Provision the number of seconds that will elapse before a packet is
resent. Five seconds is the default.
• LAN Metric—Provision the cost for sending packets across the LAN. This value should always be
lower than the SDCC or RS-DCC metric. Ten is the default.
Step 6 Under OSPF Area Range Table, create an area range table if one is needed:4-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note Area range tables consolidate the information that is outside an OSPF area border. One
ONS 15454 in the ONS 15454 OSPF area is connected to the OSPF router. An area range table
on this node points the router to the other nodes that reside within the ONS 15454 OSPF area.
a. Click Create.
b. In the Create Area Range dialog box, enter the following:
• Range Address—Enter the area IP address for the ONS 15454 nodes that reside within the
OSPF area. For example, if the ONS 15454 OSPF area includes nodes with IP addresses
10.10.20.100, 10.10.30.150, 10.10.40.200, and 10.10.50.250, the range address would be
10.10.0.0.
• Range Area ID—Enter the OSPF area ID for the ONS 15454 nodes. This is either the ID in the
DCC OSPF Area ID field or the ID in the Area ID for LAN Port field.
• Mask Length—Enter the subnet mask length. In the Range Address example, this is 16.
• Advertise—Check this box if you want to advertise the OSPF range table.
c. Click OK.
Step 7 All OSPF areas must be connected to Area 0. If the ONS 15454 OSPF area is not physically connected
to Area 0, use the following steps to create a virtual link table that will provide the disconnected area
with a logical path to Area 0:
a. Under the OSPF Virtual Link Table, click Create.
b. In the Create Virtual Link dialog box, complete the following fields. OSPF settings must match
OSPF settings for the ONS 15454 OSPF area:
• Neighbor—Enter the router ID of the Area 0 router.
• Transit Delay (sec)—Enter the service speed. One second is the default.
• Hello Int (sec)—Provision the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements
sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the default.
• Auth Type—If the router where the ONS 15454 is connected uses authentication, choose
Simple Password. Otherwise, choose No Authentication.
• Retransmit Int (sec)—Provision the time that will elapse, in seconds, before a packet is resent.
Five seconds is the default.
• Dead Int (sec)—Provision the number of seconds that will pass while an OSPF router’s packets
are not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the default.
c. Click OK.
Step 8 After entering the ONS 15454 OSPF area data, click Apply.
If you changed the Area ID, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards reset, one at a time. The reset
takes approximately 10 to 15 minutes.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).4-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G60 Set Up or Change Routing Information Protocol
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Network > RIP tabs.
Step 2 Check the RIP Active check box if you are activating RIP.
Step 3 Choose either RIP Version 1 or RIP Version 2 from the drop-down list, depending on which version is
supported in your network.
Step 4 Set the RIP metric. The RIP metric can be set to a number between 1 and 15 and represents the number
of hops.
Step 5 By default, RIP is set to No Authentication. If the router that the ONS 15454 is connected to requires
authentication, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 6.
a. Click the No Authentication button.
b. In the Edit Authentication Key dialog box, complete the following:
• Type—Choose Simple Password.
• Enter Authentication Key—Enter the password.
• Confirm Authentication Key—Enter the same password to confirm it.
c. Click OK.
The authentication button label changes to Simple Password.
Step 6 If you want to complete an address summary, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 7.
Complete the address summary only if the ONS 15454 is a gateway NE with multiple external
ONS 15454 NEs attached with IP addresses in different subnets.
a. In the RIP Address Summary area, click Create.
b. In the Create Address Summary dialog box, complete the following:
• Summary Address—Enter the summary IP address.
• Mask Length—Enter the subnet mask length using the up and down arrows.
• Hops—Enter the number of hops. The smaller the number of hops, the higher the priority.
c. Click OK.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task enables RIP on the ONS 15454. Perform this task if you want to
include the ONS 15454 in RIP-enabled networks.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
You need to create a static route to the router adjacent to the ONS 15454
for the ONS 15454 to communicate its routing information to
non-DCC-connected nodes.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G194 Set Up EMS Secure Access to the ONS 15454
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > Security > Access pane.
Step 2 Under the EMS Access area, change the Access State to Secure.
Step 3 Click Apply. The CTC disconnects and reconnects through a secure socket connection.
Step 4 To create a secure connection, enter https://node-address.
Note After setting up a CTC connection in secure mode, http requests are automatically redirected to https
mode.
Step 5 A first time connection is authenticated by the Website Certification is Not Known dialog box. Accept
the certificate and click OK. The Security Error: Domain Name Mismatch dialog box appears. Click
OK to continue.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G27 Set Up the ONS15454 for Firewall Access
Step 1 Log into a node that is behind the firewall. See the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 for
instructions. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If the ONS 15454 node is in a protected network and the CTC computer is in an external network,
complete the “DLP-G61 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 15454” task on page 4-35.
Figure 4-8 shows ONS 15454 nodes in a protected network and the CTC computer in an external
network. For the computer to access the ONS 15454 nodes, you must provision the IIOP listener port
specified by your firewall administrator on the ONS 15454.
Purpose This procedure provisions ONS 15454s and CTC computers for secure
access.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 4-18
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser
Purpose This procedure provisions ONS 15454 nodes and CTC computers for
access through firewalls.
Tools/Equipment IIOP listener port number provided by your LAN or firewall administrator
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-8 Nodes Behind a Firewall
Step 3 If the CTC computer resides behind a firewall, complete the “DLP-G62 Provision the IIOP Listener Port
on the CTC Computer” task on page 4-36.
Figure 4-9 shows a CTC computer and ONS 15454 behind firewalls. For the computer to access the
ONS 15454, you must provision the IIOP port on the CTC computer and on the ONS 15454.
Figure 4-9 CTC Computer and ONS 15454 Nodes Residing Behind Firewalls
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G28 Create FTP Host
55351
CTC computer
External network Protected network
ONS 15454
Unprotected
network
Private
network
IIOP port
IIOP port
Firewall
Port
filtering ONS 15454
55350
CTC computer
Firewall
Port
filtering
Protected network External network Protected network
ONS 15454 Private
network
Unprotected
network
Private
network
IIOP port
IIOP port
IIOP port
Firewall
Port
filtering ONS 15454
Purpose This procedure provisions an FTP Host that you can use to perform
database backup and restore or software download to an End Network
Element (ENE) when proxy or firewall is enabled.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 4-18
NTP-G27 Set Up the ONS 15454 for Firewall Access, page 4-33
Required/As Needed As needed4-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30. If you are already logged in, continue with
Step 2.
Step 2 If you want to turn on the ONS 15454 secure mode, which allows two IPv4 addresses to be provisioned
for the node if TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards are installed, complete the “DLP-G264 Enable Node
Security Mode” task on page 4-26. Refer to the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual for information about secure mode.
Step 3 In Node view, click the Provisioning > Network > FTP Hosts tabs.
Step 4 Click Create.
Step 5 Enter a valid IP address in the FTP Host Address field. A maximum of 12 host can be entered.
Note In ONS 15454 Software Release 9.1 and later, you can configure an IPv6 address for an FTP server, in
addition to an IPv4 address.
Step 6 The Mask is automatically set according to the Net/Subnet Mask length specified in “DLP-G56
Provision IP Settings” section on page 4-19. To change the Mask, click the Up/Down arrows on the
Length menu.
Step 7 Check the FTP Relay Enable radio button to allow FTP commands at the GNE relay. If you will enable
the relay at a later time, go to Step 9. Certain TL1 commands executed on an ENE require FTP access
into the Data Communication Network (DCN), the FTP relay on the GNE provides this access. The FTP
hosts that you have configured in CTC can be used with the TL1 COPY-RFILE (for database backup and
restore or software download) or COPY-IOSCFG (for Cisco IOS Configuration File backup and restore)
commands.
Step 8 Enter the time, in minutes, that FTP Relay will be enabled. A valid entry is a number between 0 and 60.
The number 0 disallows FTP command relay. After the specified time has elapsed the FTP Relay Enable
flag is unset and FTP command relay is disallowed.
Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat Step 4 through Step 9 to provision additional FTP Hosts.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G61 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS15454
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser
Purpose This task sets the IIOP listener port on the ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2,
and ONS 15454 M6 which enables you to access nodes that reside behind
a firewall.
Tools/Equipment IIOP listener port number provided by your LAN or firewall administrator
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note If the Enable SOCKS proxy on port 1080 check box is checked, CTC will use Port 1080 and ignore the
configured IIOP port setting. If the check box is later unchecked, the configured IIOP listener port will
be used.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Security > Access tabs.
Step 2 In the TCC CORBA (IIOP) Listener Port area, choose a listener port option:
• Default - TCC Fixed—Uses Port 57790 to connect to ONS 15454 nodes on the same side of the
firewall or if no firewall is used (default). This option can be used for access through a firewall if
Port 57790 is available.
• Standard Constant—Uses Port 683, the Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA)
default port number.
• Other Constant—If Port 683 is not used, type the IIOP port specified by your firewall
administrator.
Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 When the Change Network Configuration message appears, click Yes.
The TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards reboot, one at a time. The reboot takes approximately 15
minutes.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G62 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the CTC Computer
Step 1 From the Edit menu, choose Preferences.
Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, click the Firewall tab.
Step 3 In the CTC CORBA (IIOP) Listener Port area, choose a listener port option:
• Default - Variable—Use to connect to ONS 15454 nodes from within a firewall or if no firewall is
used (default).
• Standard Constant—Use Port 683, the CORBA default port number.
• Other Constant—If Port 683 is not used, enter the IIOP port defined by your administrator.
Step 4 Click Apply. A warning appears telling you that the port change will apply during the next CTC login.
Purpose This task selects the IIOP listener port for CTC and must be completed if
the computer running CTC resides behind a firewall.
Tools/Equipment IIOP listener port number from LAN or firewall administrator
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 In the Preferences dialog box, click OK.
Step 7 To access the ONS 15454 using the IIOP port, log out of CTC then log back in. (To log out, choose Exit
from the File menu).
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G132 Provision OSI
Caution This procedure requires an understanding of OSI protocols, parameters, and functions. Before you begin,
review the OSI reference sections in the “Management Network Connectivity” chapter of the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual and ensure that you know the role of the ONS 15454 within
the OSI and IP network.
Note This procedure requires provisioning of non-ONS equipment including routers and third party NEs. Do
not begin until you have the capability to complete that provisioning.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to provision the
OSI. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the following tasks:
• DLP-G283 Provision OSI Routing Mode, page 4-38—Complete this task first.
• DLP-G284 Provision the TARP Operating Parameters, page 4-39—Complete this task second.
• DLP-G285 Add a Static TID-to-NSAP Entry to the TARP Data Cache, page 4-41—Complete this
task as needed.
• DLP-G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry, page 4-42—Complete this task as needed.
• DLP-G288 Provision OSI Routers, page 4-43—Complete this task as needed.
• DLP-G289 Provision Additional Manual Area Addresses, page 4-44—Complete this task as needed.
• DLP-G290 Enable the OSI Subnet on the LAN Interface, page 4-44—Complete this task as needed.
Purpose This procedure provisions the ONS 15454 so it can be installed in networks
with other vendor NEs that use the OSI protocol stack for data
communications network (DCN) communications. This procedure
provisions the Target Identifier Address Resolution Protocol (TARP), OSI
routers, manual area addresses, subnetwork points of attachment, and
IP-over-Connectionless Network Service (CLNS) tunnels.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• DLP-G291 Create an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel, page 4-45—Complete this task as needed.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G283 Provision OSI Routing Mode
Caution Do not complete this task until you confirm the role of the node within the network. It will be either an
End System, Intermediate System Level 1, or IS Level 1/Level 2. This decision must be carefully
considered. For additional information about OSI provisioning, refer to the “Management Network
Connectivity” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Caution Link State Protocol (LSP) buffers must be the same at all NEs within the network, or loss of visibility
might occur. Do not modify the LSP buffers unless you confirm that all NEs within the OSI have the
same buffer size.
Caution LSP buffer sizes cannot be greater than the LAP-D maximum transmission unit (MTU) size within the
OSI area.
Note For ONS 15454 nodes, three virtual routers can be provisioned. The node primary Network Service
Access Point (NSAP) address is also the Router 1 primary manual area address. To edit the primary
NSAP, you must edit the Router 1 primary manual area address. After you enable Router 1 on the Routers
subtab, the Change Primary Area Address button is available to edit the address.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > OSI
tabs.
Step 2 Choose a routing mode:
• End System—The ONS 15454 performs OSI end system (ES) functions and relies upon an
intermediate system (IS) for communication with nodes that reside within its OSI area.
Purpose This task provisions the OSI routing mode. Complete this task when the
ONS 15454 is connected to networks with third party NEs that use the OSI
protocol stack for DCN communication.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note The End System routing mode is not available if more than one virtual router is enabled.
• Intermediate System Level 1—The ONS 15454 performs OSI IS functions. It communicates with
IS and ES nodes that reside within its OSI area. It depends upon an IS L1/L2 node to communicate
with IS and ES nodes that reside outside its OSI area.
• Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2—The ONS 15454 performs IS functions. It communicates
with IS and ES nodes that reside within its OSI area. It also communicates with IS L1/L2 nodes that
reside in other OSI areas. Before choosing this option, verify the following:
– The node is connected to another IS Level 1/Level 2 node that resides in a different OSI area.
– The node is connected to all nodes within its area that are provisioned as IS L1/L2.
Step 3 If needed, change the LSP data buffers:
• L1 LSP Buffer Size—Adjusts the Level 1 link state protocol data unit (PDU) buffer size. The default
is 512. It should not be changed.
• L2 LSP Buffer Size—Adjusts the Level 2 link state PDU buffer size. The default is 512. It should
not be changed.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G284 Provision the TARP Operating Parameters
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > OSI >
TARP > Config tabs.
Step 2 Provision the following parameters, as needed:
• TARP PDUs L1 Propagation—If checked (default), TARP Type 1 PDUs that are received by the
node and are not excluded by the LDB are propagated to other NEs within the Level 1 OSI area.
(Type 1 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a target identifier [TID] within a Level 1
routing area.) The propagation does not occur if the NE is the target of the Type 1 PDU, and PDUs
are not propagated to the NE from which the PDU was received.
Note The TARP PDUs L1 Propagation parameter is not used when the Node Routing Area (on the
Provisioning > OSI > Main Setup tab) is set to End System.
Purpose This task provisions the TARP operating parameters including TARP PDU
propagation, timers, and loop detection buffer (LDB).
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• TARP PDUs L2 Propagation—If checked (default), TARP Type 2 PDUs that are received by the
node and are not excluded by the LDB are propagated to other NEs within the Level 2 OSI areas.
(Type 2 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a TID within a Level 2 routing area.) The
propagation occurs if the NE is not the target of the Type 2 PDU, and PDUs are not propagated to
the NE from which the PDU was received.
Note The TARP PDUs L2 Propagation parameter is only used when the Node Routing Area is
provisioned to Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2.
• TARP PDUs Origination—If checked (default), the node performs all TARP origination functions
including:
– TID-to-NSAP resolution requests (originate TARP Type 1 and Type 2 PDUs)
– NSAP-to-TID requests (originate Type 5 PDUs)
– TARP address changes (originate Type 4 PDUs)
Note TARP Echo and NSAP to TID are not supported.
• TARP Data Cache—If checked (default), the node maintains a TARP data cache (TDC). The TDC
is a database of TID-to-NSAP pairs created from TARP Type 3 PDUs received by the node and
modified by TARP Type 4 PDUs (TID-to-NSAP updates or corrections). TARP 3 PDUs are
responses to Type 1 and Type 2 PDUs. The TDC can also be populated with static entries entered
on the TARP > Static TDC tab.
Note TARP Data Cache is only used when the TARP PDUs Origination parameter is enabled.
• L2 TARP Data Cache—If checked (default), the TIDs and NSAPs of NEs originating Type 2
requests are added to the TDC before the node propagates the requests to other NEs.
Note The L2 TARP Data Cache parameter is designed for Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2
nodes that are connected to other Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2 nodes. Enabling the
parameter for Intermediate System Level 1 nodes is not recommended.
• LDB—If checked (default), enables the TARP loop detection buffer. The LDB prevents TARP PDUs
from being sent more than once on the same subnet.
Note The LDB parameter is not used if the Node Routing Mode is provisioned to End System or
if the TARP PDUs L1 Propagation parameter is not enabled.
• LAN TARP Storm Suppression—If checked (default), enables TARP storm suppression. This
function prevents redundant TARP PDUs from being unnecessarily propagated across the LAN
network.
• Send Type 4 PDU on Startup—If checked, a TARP Type 4 PDU is originated during the initial
ONS 15454 startup. Type 4 PDUs indicate that a TID or NSAP change has occurred at the NE. (The
default setting is not enabled.)
• Type 4 PDU Delay—Sets the amount of time that will pass before the Type 4 PDU is generated when
Send Type 4 PDU on Startup is enabled. 60 seconds is the default. The range is 0 to 255 seconds.4-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note The Send Type 4 PDU on Startup and Type 4 PDU Delay parameters are not used if TARP
PDUs Origination is not enabled.
• LDB Entry—Sets the TARP loop detection buffer timer. The loop detection buffer time is assigned
to each LDB entry for which the TARP sequence number (tar-seq) is zero. The default is 5 minutes.
The range is 1 to 10 minutes.
• LDB Flush—Sets the frequency period for flushing the LDB. The default is 5 minutes. The range is
0 to 1440 minutes.
• T1—Sets the amount of time to wait for a response to a Type 1 PDU. Type 1 PDUs seek a specific
NE TID within an OSI Level 1 area. The default is 15 seconds. The range is 0 to 3600 seconds.
• T2—Sets the amount of time to wait for a response to a Type 2 PDU. TARP Type 2 PDUs seek a
specific NE TID value within OSI Level 1 and Level 2 areas. The default is 25 seconds. The range
is 0 to 3600 seconds.
• T3—Sets the amount of time to wait for an address resolution request. The default is 40 seconds.
The range is 0 to 3600 seconds.
• T4—Sets the amount of time to wait for an error recovery. This timer begins after the T2 timer
expires without finding the requested NE TID. The default is 20 seconds. The range is
0 to 3600 seconds.
Note The T1, T2, and T4 timers are not used if the TARP PDUs Origination check box is not
checked.
Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G285 Add a Static TID-to-NSAP Entry to the TARP Data Cache
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > OSI >
TARP > Static TDC tabs.
Step 2 Click Add Static Entry.
Step 3 In the Add Static Entry dialog box, enter the following:
Purpose This task adds a static TID-to-NSAP entry to the TDC. The static entries
are required for NEs that do not support TARP and are similar to static
routes. For a specific TID, you must force a specific NSAP.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioner or higher4-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• TID—Enter the TID of the NE. (For ONS nodes, the TID is the Node Name parameter on the node
or multishelf view Provisioning > General tab.)
• NSAP—Enter the OSI NSAP address in the NSAP field or, if preferred, click Use Mask and enter
the address in the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box.
Step 4 Click OK to close the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box, if used, and then click OK to close the
Add Static Entry dialog box.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > OSI >
TARP > MAT tabs.
Step 2 Click Add.
Step 3 In the Add TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry dialog box, enter the following:
• Level—Sets the TARP Type Code that will be sent:
– Level 1—Indicates that the adjacency is within the same area as the current node. The entry
generates Type 1 PDUs.
– Level 2—Indicates that the adjacency is in a different area than the current node. The entry
generates Type 2 PDUs.
• NSAP—Enter the OSI NSAP address in the NSAP field or, if preferred, click Use Mask and enter
the address in the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box.
Step 4 Click OK to close the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box, if used, and then click OK to close the Add Static
Entry dialog box.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task adds an entry to the TARP manual adjacency table (MAT). Entries
are added to the MAT when the ONS 15454 must communicate across
routers or NEs that lack TARP capability.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G288 Provision OSI Routers
Note Router 1 must be enabled before you can enable and edit the primary manual area addresses for
Routers 2 and 3.
Note The Router 1 manual area address, System ID, and Selector “00” create the node NSAP address.
Changing the Router 1 manual area address changes the node NSAP address.
Note The System ID for Router 1 is the node MAC address. The System IDs for Routers 2 and 3 are created
by adding 1 and 2 respectively to the Router 1 System ID. You cannot edit the System IDs.
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > OSI > Routers > Setup tabs.
Step 2 Chose the router you want provision and click Edit. The OSI Router Editor dialog box appears.
Step 3 In the OSI Router Editor dialog box:
a. Check Enable Router to enable the router and make its primary area address available for editing.
b. Click the manual area address, then click Edit.
c. In the Edit Manual Area Address dialog box, edit the primary area address in the Area Address field.
If you prefer, click Use Mask and enter the edits in the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box. The address
(hexadecimal format) can be 8 to 24 alphanumeric characters (0–9, a–f) in length.
d. Click OK successively to close the following dialog boxes: Masked NSAP Entry (if used), Edit
Manual Area Address, and OSI Router Editor.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task enables an OSI router and edits its primary manual area address.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G289 Provision Additional Manual Area Addresses
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > OSI > Routers > Setup tabs.
Step 2 Chose the router where you want provision an additional manual area address and click Edit. The OSI
Router Editor dialog box appears.
Step 3 In the OSI Router Editor dialog box:
a. Check Enable Router to enable the router and make its primary area address available for editing.
b. Click the manual area address, then click Add.
c. In the Add Manual Area Address dialog box, enter the primary area address in the Area Address
field. If you prefer, click Use Mask and enter the address in the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box.
The address (hexadecimal format) can be 2 to 24 alphanumeric characters (0–9, a–f) in length.
d. Click OK successively to close the following dialog boxes: Masked NSAP Entry (if used), Add
Manual Area Address, and OSI Router Editor.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G290 Enable the OSI Subnet on the LAN Interface
Note When you create communication channels (optical service channel [OSC] or generic communications
channel [GCC]), OSI subnetwork points of attachment are enabled on the communication channels. See
the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126 and the “DLP-G76 Provision
DCC/GCC Terminations” task on page 8-61.
Purpose This task provisions the OSI manual area addresses. One primary area and
two additional manual areas can be created for each virtual router.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
DLP-G288 Provision OSI Routers, page 4-43
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task enables the OSI subnetwork point of attachment on the LAN
interface.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note The OSI subnetwork point of attachment cannot be enabled for the LAN interface if the OSI routing
mode is set to ES.
Note If secure mode is on, the OSI subnet is enabled on the backplane LAN port, not the front
TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC TCP/IP (LAN) port.
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > OSI > Routers > Subnet tabs.
Step 2 Click Enable LAN Subnet.
Step 3 In the Enable LAN Subnet dialog box, complete the following fields:
• ESH—Sets the End System Hello (ESH) propagation frequency. An ES NE transmits ESHs to
inform other ESs and ISs about the NSAPs it serves. The default is 10 seconds. The range is 10 to
1000 seconds.
• ISH—Sets the Intermediate System Hello (ISH) PDU propagation frequency. An intermediate
system NE sends ISHs to other ESs and ISs to inform them about the IS NEs it serves. The default
is 10 seconds. The range is 10 to 1000 seconds.
• IIH—Sets the Intermediate System to Intermediate System Hello (IIH) PDU propagation frequency.
The IS-IS Hello PDUs establish and maintain adjacencies between ISs. The default is 3 seconds. The
range is 1 to 600 seconds.
• IS-IS Cost—Sets the cost for sending packets on the LAN subnet. The IS-IS protocol uses the cost
to calculate the shortest routing path. The default IS-IS cost for LAN subnets is 20. It normally
should not be changed.
• DIS Priority—Sets the designated intermediate system (DIS) priority. In IS-IS networks, one router
is elected to serve as the DIS (LAN subnets only). Cisco router DIS priority is 64. For the
ONS 15454 LAN subnet, the default DIS priority is 63. It normally should not be changed.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G291 Create an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel
Purpose This task creates an IP-over-CLNS tunnel to allow ONS 15454 nodes to
communicate across equipment and networks that use the OSI protocol
stack.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Caution IP-over-CLNS tunnels require two endpoints. You will create one point on an ONS 15454. The other
endpoint is generally provisioned on non-ONS equipment including routers and other vendor NEs.
Before you begin, verify that you have the capability to create an OSI-over-CLNS tunnel on the other
equipment location.
Step 1 Click the Provisioning > OSI > Tunnels tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create IP Over CLNS Tunnel dialog box, complete the following fields:
• Tunnel Type—Choose a tunnel type:
– Cisco—Creates the proprietary Cisco IP tunnel. Cisco IP tunnels add the CLNS header to the
IP packets.
– GRE—Creates a generic routing encapsulation (GRE) tunnel. GRE tunnels add the CLNS
header and a GRE header to the IP packets.
The Cisco proprietary tunnel is slightly more efficient than the GRE tunnel because it does not add
the GRE header to each IP packet. The two tunnel types are not compatible. Most Cisco routers
support the Cisco IP tunnel, while only a few support both GRE and Cisco IP tunnels. You generally
should create Cisco IP tunnels if you are tunneling between two Cisco routers or between a Cisco
router and an ONS node.
Caution Always verify that the IP-over-CLNS tunnel type that you choose is supported by the equipment at the
other end of the tunnel.
• IP Address—Enter the IP address of the IP-over-CLNS tunnel destination.
• IP Mask—Enter the IP address subnet mask of the IP-over-CLNS destination.
• OSPF Metric—Enter the OSPF metric for sending packets across the IP-over-CLNS tunnel. The
OSPF metric, or cost, is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. The default is 110.
Normally, it is not be changed unless you are creating multiple tunnel routes and want to prioritize
routing by assigning different metrics.
• NSAP Address—Enter the destination NE or OSI router NSAP address.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Provision the other tunnel endpoint using the documentation provided by the manufacturer of the third
party vendor NE.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).4-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G29 Set Up SNMP
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to set up SNMP.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > SNMP
tabs.
Step 3 In the Trap Destinations area, click Create.
Step 4 Complete the following in the Create SNMP Trap Destination dialog box (Figure 4-10):
• Destination IP Address—Type the IP address of your network management system (NMS). If the
node you are logged into is an ENE, set the destination address to the GNE.
Note In ONS 15454 Software Release 9.1 and later, you can configure IPv6 addresses for SNMPv2/v3 trap
destinations and SNMPv3 proxy targets, in addition to IPv4 addresses.
• Community—Type the SNMP community name. For a description of SNMP community names,
refer to the “SNMP” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Note The community name is a form of authentication and access control. The community name
assigned to the ONS 15454 is case-sensitive and must match the community name of the
NMS.
• UDP Port—The default User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port for SNMP is 162.
• Trap version—Choose either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2. Refer to your NMS documentation to determine
which version to use.
Figure 4-10 Creating an SNMP Trap
Purpose This procedure provisions the SNMP parameters so that you can use
SNMP management software with the ONS 15454.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required if SNMP is used at your site.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 5 Click OK. The node IP address of the node where you provisioned the new trap destination appears in
the Trap Destinations area.
Step 6 Click the node IP address in the Trap Destinations area. Verify the SNMP information that appears in
the Selected Destination list.
Step 7 If you want the SNMP agent to accept SNMP SET requests on certain MIBs, click the Allow SNMP Sets
check box. If this box is not checked, SET requests are rejected.
Step 8 If you want to set up the SNMP proxy feature to allow network management, message reporting, and
performance statistic retrieval across ONS firewalls, click the Allow SNMP Proxy check box located
on the SNMP tab.
Note The Use Generic MIB check box is normally not checked for MSTP. It is checked only when the
ONS 15454 resides in networks with multiple ONS products, and the network management
system requires MIBs with the same name to have the same object IDs. By default, the
ONS 15454 uses the CERENT-454-MIBs. Other ONS products, such as the ONS 15600, the
ONS 15327, and ONS 15310-CL, use the CERENT-GENERIC-MIBs. If Use Generic MIB is
checked, the ONS 15454 will use the CERENT-GENERIC-MIBs so the object IDs will be the
same for all products.
Note Using the ONS firewall proxy feature effectively breaches the ONS firewall to exchange
management information.
For more information about the SNMP proxy feature, refer to the “SNMP” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 If you are setting up SNMP proxies, you can set up to three relays that send SNMP trap error counts back
to the NE for each trap destination address:
a. Click the first trap destination IP address. The address and its community name appear in the
Destination fields.
b. Enter up to three SNMP Proxy relay addresses and community names in the fields for Relay A,
Relay B, and Relay C.
Note The community names specified for each relay node must match one of the provisioned
SNMP community names in the NE.
Note The SNMP proxy directs SNMP traps from this node through Relay A to Relay B to Relay C
to the trap destination. Ensure that you enter the IP addresses in the correct order so that this
sequence runs correctly.
Step 11 Click Apply.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.4-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update
Configuration File
Caution Verify that you have the correct Cisco TransportPlanner network file before you begin this procedure.
The file will have an XML extension and a name assigned by your network planner. Check with your
network planner or administrator if you have any questions.
Note The Cisco TransportPlanner configuration file contains parameters for the node, shelf, card type, port
(including the card’s wavelength), pluggable port module (PPM), as well as OTN and FEC parameters.
Only the values present in XML format appear in the configuration file parameters; if the values are not
in XML format, a column appears blank. The XML file values are independently reported and do not
affect any configuration changes that you apply.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to import the
Cisco TransportPlanner configuration file. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you choose the Provision Node Layout option to preprovision the cards in the shelf, complete the
following steps. If not, continue with Step 3.
a. Display the node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
b. Verify that the common control cards (TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC, AIC-I and MSC-ISC) cards
are the only cards installed. If in single or multishelf mode, verify that each shelf in the multishelf
has two TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC cards.
• If common control cards are the only cards installed, continue with Step 3.
• If other cards appear, continue with Step c.
c. If a physical card other than the common control cards is installed, remove it from the shelf.
d. If preprovisioned DWDM cards are present, delete them using the “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in
CTC” task on page 4-53, then repeat Steps a and b.
Purpose This procedure imports the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update
configuration file and creates a log file. The configuration file, which is
provided in XML format, provisions internal patchcords, optical sides and
card parameters for optical units, transponders, and passive units (DCUs
and patch panels). Finally, the NE Update file installs the ANS parameters
calculated by Cisco TransportPlanner. The log file, which is a text
document records the results of the NE update.
Tools/Equipment A Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update file for the network where the node
is installed must be accessible to the CTC computer.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 If you have not created a log file to record the results of the NE update, complete the following steps. If
a log file has been created, continue with Step 4.
a. Open a text editor or word processing application.
b. Create a new text (TXT) document with a file name of your choosing.
c. Save the text document in a directory that is easy to navigate to from CTC.
Step 4 In CTC node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view, click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS >
Node Setup tabs.
Step 5 Choose Load latest installation file from node to reload the latest XML file that was applied and stored
in the node. Continue with Step 8.
Step 6 Choose Load installation file from network repository and navigate to the Cisco TransportPlanner
node setup file containing the parameters for the network where the node resides. This option downloads
the XML file from the remote server. Continue with Step 8.
Step 7 In the field under Select XML file, type the path to the Cisco TransportPlanner node setup file containing
the parameters for the network where your node resides, or click Browse and navigate to the file on your
computer. Click the file, then click Open. The file will have an XML extension. Continue with Step 8.
Step 8 In the field under Select Log file, type the path to the text file that you created in Step 3, or click Browse
and navigate to the file on your computer or a network server where you want the node setup results
recorded.
Note The log file records the parameters that were updated successfully and provides an explanation
of why an update could not be completed. Each node setup session overwrites the log file
contents. If you want to save the results from a previous NE update, save the log file with new
name.
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 When Load installation file from network repository option is chosen, the FTP Remote Installation
File Node-Name page appears.
a. When the node is configured as a Gateway Network Element (GNE) node, enter the parameters (host
name, port, user name, password, remote directory, and XML file name of the remote server) and
click Next.
b. When the node is configured as a Elementary Network Element (ENE) node, an additional
parameter called GNE Selector appear. From the GNE Selector drop-down list, select the
appropriate GNE in the network. The FTP relay must be configured on the selected GNE to the
remote server where the XML file is stored. See “NTP-G28 Create FTP Host” procedure on
page 4-34 to configure the FTP relay on the selected GNE.
Step 11 When the Node Setup Selection for Node-Name page appears, complete the following steps. If not,
continue with Step 12.
a. Choose the node profile that you want to apply to the node. The Cisco TransportPlanner XML file
contains profiles for all nodes in the network. Choose the profile that applies to the node you are
provisioning.
b. Click Next.
Step 12 On the Node Setup for node name page, choose one or more of the following:
• Node Layout—Preprovisions the slots in each shelf in CTC for the cards defined in the network
plan. Choose this option when no DWDM cards are installed. (Errors will occur if cards are installed
or the slots are preprovisioned.) Preprovisioning the slots before the physical cards are installed 4-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
ensures that card installers place the cards in the correct slots. Preprovisioning the slots is also useful
if you want to set up the network prior to card installation. The node layout also preprovisions the
chassis and passive units.
• Card Parameters—If checked, provisions the following parameters, if the cards are installed.
– TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP
cards—Provisions the OTN and FEC parameters.
– OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
cards—Provisions the card mode.
• Pluggable Port Modules— If checked, allows the provisioning of PPMs on TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP cards, including PPM payloads.
• Internal Patchcords—If checked, allows creation of internal patchcords among cards provisioned in
the node.
• Optical Sides—If checked, allows the provisioning of optical sides.
• ANS Parameters—If checked, installs the ANS parameters. ANS parameters provision the values
required for the node to function within the specified network design. ANS parameters include span
losses, optical power, optics thresholds, amplifier working mode, gain, tilt, and many others. Refer
to the “Node Reference” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for a list of
ONS 15454 ANS parameters.
Note If you are importing the Cisco TransportPlanner configuration file for the first time, you
normally choose all available options.
• Skip Interactive Mode—If checked, CTC provisions all the chosen setup components automatically
without allowing you to view the results after each one.
• Save Installation Files (XML and log) On Node—If checked, CTC saves the XML and log files on
the node.
Step 13 Click Next. If you chose Skip Interactive Mode, continue with Step 14. If not, the wizard page that
appears depends on the options chosen in Step 12: Complete the steps shown in Table 4-2 for each
option.4-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Table 4-2 NE Update Wizard Options
NE Update Function
Node/Shelves Layout View the cards and slots on the left side of the page and verify that they are the same as the layout in
the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout (see Table 4-1 on page 4-4). If the cards and slots match,
click Apply. If not, click Cancel. and contact your next level of support to verify that you have the
correct node setup file. If the site has a multishelf configuration, click Next and repeat this step for
each shelf at the site.
CTC preprovisions the slots. (This might take a few seconds.) The results appear in the Log window.
Slots that are successfully provisioned display an “Applied” status. A “Slot not empty” status appears
if slots cannot be provisioned because a card is physically installed or the slot is already provisioned.
If this occurs, complete the following steps. Otherwise, continue with the next NE Update function.
1. Click Cancel, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box. The slot preprovisioning does not
revert when you click Cancel.
2. If a physical card is installed, remove it from the shelf.
3. Perform one of the following steps:
– Delete all the preprovisioned slots using the “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC” task on
page 4-53, then repeat Steps 2 through Step 13.
– Delete the slot where the Slot Not Empty error occurred using the “DLP-G351 Delete a Card
in CTC” task on page 4-53. Complete the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on page 4-55
to provision the slot manually, then repeat Steps 2 through 13 making sure to uncheck the
Provision Node Layout option in Step 12.
Note When you preprovision a slot, the card is purple in the CTC shelf graphic and “NP” (not
present) appears on the card. After the physical card is installed, the card changes to white and
“NP” is removed from the CTC shelf graphic.
Passive Units Layout 1. Review the passive unit settings.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Next.
Pluggable Port Modules 1. Review the PPM settings for each TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, and
OTU2_XP card.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Next.
Card Parameters 1. Review the OTN, FEC, and card mode settings for each TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, and OTU2_XP card.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Next.
Internal Patchcords 1. Review the internal patchcords.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Next.4-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 14 Click Finish, then click OK in the Wizard Complete confirmation dialog box. The confirmation box
indicates whether the xml import process was completed successfully.
Note Common control cards are not provisioned by Cisco TransportPlanner.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC
Step 1 Verify that the following conditions are not present. (During node turn-up, these conditions are normally
not present):
• The card is a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card.
• The card is part of a protection group.
• The card has optical channels or overhead circuits provisioned.
• The card is being used for timing.
• The card has an OSC/GCC termination.
Optical Sides 1. Review the optical side assignments.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Next.
ANS Parameters 1. Review the ANS parameters on the left half of the page.
c. Click Apply. The log file displays the results. At the end, a Done status will appear. If a parameter
could not be applied, a Setting Refused status appears. If this occurs, contact your next level of
support.
Select All 1. If checked, selects all the options.
Skip Interactive Mode If checked, CTC provisions all the chosen setup components automatically without allowing you to
view the results after each one.
Save Installation Files
(XML and log) On
Node
If checked, CTC saves the XML and log files on the node.
Table 4-2 NE Update Wizard Options
NE Update Function
Purpose This task deletes a card from an ONS 15454 slot that is provisioned in
CTC.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• A port on the card is being used for a Link Management Protocol (LMP) channel or link.
• The card is part of an optical side.
• The card is assigned to DWDM patchcords.
• If a port on the card is in service.
• If a port on the card is part of a circuit.
If any of these conditions exist, do not continue. You will not be able to delete the card until the card is
removed from protection groups; circuits, DCC, and GCCs are deleted; a different timing source is
provisioned, and the LMP link or channel is deleted.
• To replace a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card, refer to the Cisco
ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
• To delete a protection group, see the “NTP-G83 Modify or Delete Card Protection Settings”
procedure on page 11-40.
• To delete optical channels see the “DLP-G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections” task on
page 8-11 and the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-26; to
delete overhead circuits, see the “DLP-G112 Delete Overhead Circuits” task on page 8-68.
• To remove the card as a timing source, see the “NTP-G87 Change Node Timing Parameters”
procedure on page 11-53.
• To remove OSC or GCC terminations, see the “NTP-G85 Modify or Delete OSC Terminations,
DCC/GCC Terminations, and Provisionable Patchcords” procedure on page 11-48.
• To delete LMP channels or links, see “NTP-G164 Configure Link Management Protocol” procedure
on page 7-35.
• To remove a DWDM patchcord, see the “DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord” procedure on
page 4-123.
• To remove an optical side, see the “DLP-G480 Delete an Optical Side” procedure on page 4-125.
Step 2 On the shelf graphic in CTC, right-click the card that you want to remove and choose Delete Card.
Note A deleted card no longer reboots and reappears in CTC after R5.0.
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). 4-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), right-click an empty slot where
you will install a card.
Step 2 From the Add Card shortcut menu, choose the card type that will be installed based on the
Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout (see Table 4-1 on page 4-4). Only cards that can be installed in the
slot appear in the Add Card shortcut menu. Table 4-3 shows the Add Card shortcut menu items and
submenu items, and the card groups and menu options/cards that they reference.
Purpose This task preprovisions a ONS 15454 slot in CTC. Preprovisioning of all
the slots in the shelf is normally performed when you complete the
“NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration
File” procedure on page 4-49. Use this task if you need to manually
preprovision a slot. All slot preprovisioning must be based upon the Cisco
TransportPlanner shelf layout prepared for your site.
Tools/Equipment Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout table or JPG file.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Table 4-3 CTC Add Card Shortcut Menu for DWDM Cards
Menu Item
Submenu
Category Card Group Submenu Item 1 Submenu Item 2 Cards
DWDM nXP Transponder and
Muxponder
— 10GE_XP 10GE_XP
— 10GE_XPE 10GE_XPE
— OTU2_XP OTU2_XP
— ADM-10G ADM-10G
— GE_XP GE_XP
— GE_XPE GE_XPE
— MXPP_MR_2.5G MXPP_MR_2.5G
— MXP_2.5G_10E MXP_2.5G_10E
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
— MXP_2.5G_10G MXP_2.5G_10G
— MXP_MR_10DME MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
— MXP_MR_2.5G MXP_MR_2.5G
— TXPP_MR_2.5G TXPP_MR_2.5G
— TXP_MR_10E TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
— TXP_MR_10G TXP_MR_10G
— TXP_MR_2.5G TXP_MR_2.5G
— 40G-MXP-C 40G-MXP-C4-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DWDM MD Multiplexer and
Demultiplexer
C Band 32 DMXO 32DMX-O
40 WSS 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE
32 MUXO 32MUX-O
32 WSS 32WSS
4MD 4MD-xx.x
32 DMX 32DMX
40-MUX-C 40-MUX-C
32 MUXO 32MUX-O
40-DMX-C, or
40-DMX-CE
40-DMX-C, or
40-DMX-CE
L Band 32 WSS L 32WSS-L
32 DMXL 32DMX-L
MESH — C Band 40 WXC 40-WXC-C
80 WXC 80-WXC-C
40 SMR1 C 40-SMR1-C
40 SMR2 C 40-SMR2-C
OSC Optical Service
Channel
— MMU MMU
— OSC-CSM OSC-CSM
OADM Optical Add/Drop
Multiplexer
— AD-1B AD-1B-xx.x
— AD-1C AD-1C-xx.x
— AD-2C AD-2C-xx.x
— AD-4B AD-4B-xx.x
— AD-4C AD-4C-xx.x
Ampli Optical Amplifier C Band OPT-BST E OPT-BST-E
OPT-AMP-17 OPT-AMP-17-C
OPT-RAMP-C OPT-RAMP-C
OPT-RAMP-CE OPT-RAMP-CE
OPT-AMP C OPT-AMP-C
OPT-BST OPT-BST
OPT-PRE OPT-PRE
L Band OPT-BST L OPT-BST-L
OPT-AMP L OPT-AMP-L
OTHER — — PSM PSM
Ethernet — — — MS-ISC-100T MS-ISC-100T
G1000 G1000
Table 4-3 CTC Add Card Shortcut Menu for DWDM Cards (continued)
Menu Item
Submenu
Category Card Group Submenu Item 1 Submenu Item 2 Cards4-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note When you preprovision a slot, the card appears purple in the CTC shelf graphic (the card appears
as white when a card is installed in the slot). NP on the card graphic indicates that the card is not
physically installed.
Step 3 Repeat Step 2 until all the cards shown in the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout are provisioned in
CTC.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
OSCM — — — — OSCM (Slots 8 and 10 only)
TNC
TSC
— Control Cards — — TNC and TSC
Table 4-3 CTC Add Card Shortcut Menu for DWDM Cards (continued)
Menu Item
Submenu
Category Card Group Submenu Item 1 Submenu Item 2 Cards4-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G320 Configure the Node as a Non-DWDM Network
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 2 From the Selector area, select Network Type.
Step 3 Choose Not-DWDM, from the Value drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 5 Click the Launch ANS button. The relevant ports in the node will be in IS state.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G693 Configure the Amplifier
Step 1 Display the amplifier card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Select the working mode from the Card Working Mode drop-down list.
Step 4 Change to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), then click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 5 From the Selector area, select the amplifier slot. If the default parameters are present, continue with
Step 6. If not, click Add to add the Channel LOS Threshold, Amplifier Tilt, Power, and Amplifier
Working Mode parameters. To add the ANS parameters, see the “DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter”
task on page 4-62 for instructions.
Purpose This tasks configures a node as a Non-DWDM network.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task configures the optical parameters and threshold values of the
amplifier card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 6 Click the value of the ANS parameter that you want to modify and enter the new value specified in
Table 4-4.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 9 Click Launch ANS.
Step 10 In the Apply Launch ANS dialog box, click Yes.
Step 11 In the Launch ANS confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Step 12 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 13 Verify the following in the Results column:
• Success - Changed —The parameter has been successfully changed with the ports in IS.
Step 14 Verify that the Set By column displays t he value “ANS” or “APC” as the application that sets the
ANS parameter.
Step 15 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G694 Configure the PSM
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 2 From the Selector area, select the PSM slot. If the default parameters are present, continue with Step 3.
If not, click Add to add the Channel LOS Threshold and VOA Attenuation parameters. To add the ANS
parameters, see the “DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter” task on page 4-62 for instructions.
Table 4-4 Values for the ANS Parameters (amplifier)
Port ANS Parameter Value
Slot 16 (OPT-AMP C).Port COM-RX Channel LOS Threshold 35.0 dBm
Slot 16 (OPT-AMP C).Port LINE-TX Amplifier Working Mode Control Gain
Slot 16 (OPT-AMP C).Port LINE-TX Amplifier Tilt 0.0 dB
Slot 16 (OPT-AMP C).Port LINE-TX Power 1.0 dBm
Purpose This tasks configures the PSM behavior.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 Click the value of the ANS parameter that you want to modify and enter the new value specified in
Table 4-4.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 6 Click Launch ANS.
Step 7 In the Apply Launch ANS dialog box, click Yes.
Step 8 In the Launch ANS confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Step 9 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 10 Verify the following in the Results column:
• Success - Changed —The parameter has been successfully changed with the ports in IS.
Step 11 Verify that the Set By column displays t he value “ANS” or “APC” as the application that sets the
ANS parameter.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G328 Add and Delete ANS Parameters
Note It is recommended that you use the Cisco TransportPlanner XML configuration file to provision the ANS
parameters instead of manually adding all the parameters in CTC. ANS provisioning parameters must
be manually changed only by Cisco qualified personnel. Setting wrong ANS provisioning (either as
preamplifier or booster input power thresholds) may impact traffic.
Table 4-5 Values for the ANS Parameters (PSM)
Port ANS Parameter Value
Slot 14(PSM).Port W-RX VOA Attenuation 3.0 dB
Slot 14(PSM).Port W-RX Channel LOS Threshold 15.0 dB
Slot 14(PSM).Port P-RX VOA Attenuation 10.0 dB
Slot 14(PSM).Port P-RX Channel LOS Threshold 20.0 dB
Purpose This procedure allows you to add or delete ANS parameters for a DWDM
node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher 4-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to add or delete
ANS parameters. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the following tasks:
• Complete the “DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter” task on page 4-62.
• Complete the “DLP-G542 Delete an ANS Parameter” task on page 4-63.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G541 Add an ANS Parameter
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 2 Click Add. The Add ANS Parameter dialog box appears.
Step 3 Select the ANS parameter from the Parameter drop-down list.
Step 4 In the Port Selection area, complete the following fields:
• Type—Displays the card type.
• Shelf—Choose the shelf from the drop-down list.
• Slot— Choose the card from the Slot drop-down list. The drop-down list lists all the cards that
support the ANS parameter selected in Step 3.
• Port—Choose the port from the Port drop-down list. The drop-down list lists all the ports for the
card selected in Step 4 that support the ANS parameter selected in Step 3.
Step 5 Type or choose the value for the ANS parameter in the Value field.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This tasks adds an ANS parameter.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G542 Delete an ANS Parameter
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 2 Click the ANS parameter you want to remove.
Note Only threshold related ANS parameters can be removed if the port is in service state.
Step 3 Click Remove, and then Yes.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This tasks removes an ANS parameter.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher 4-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards
Warning This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you
work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar
with standard practices for preventing accidents. To see translations of the warnings that appear in
this publication, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information document for the
appropriate Cisco chassis. Statement 274
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Warning Class I (CDRH) and Class 1M (IEC) laser products. Statement 1055
Purpose This procedure describes how to install the DWDM multiplexer,
demultiplexer, wavelength selective switch, wavelength cross-connect,
OADM, OSC, PSM, and optical amplifier cards.
Tools/Equipment • Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout
• The following C-band or L-band cards, as required by your site plan:
– C-band: OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, 32MUX-O,
40-MUX-C, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE,
32WSS, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C,
TDC-CC, TDC-FC, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, OPT-AMP-17-C,
OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, MMU, 4MD-xx.x,
AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x,
AD-4B-xx.x, OSCM, OSC-CSM, and PSM cards (as applicable)
– L-band: 32WSS-L, 32DMX-L, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, and
PSM cards (as applicable)
• The ONS 15454 NE defaults file if the node uses custom NE defaults
Prerequisite Procedures • “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS
15454 Hardware Installation Guide
• “NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
• NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update
Configuration File, page 4-49
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector. Do
not view directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments
(for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm may pose an eye
hazard. Statement 1056
Warning High-performance devices on this card can get hot during operation. To remove the card, hold it by
the faceplate and bottom edge. Allow the card to cool before touching any other part of it or before
placing it in an antistatic bag. Statement 201
Caution Always use the supplied electrostatic discharge (ESD) wristband when working with a powered
ONS 15454. For detailed instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Cisco ONS
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) and Grounding Guide.
Note For United States installations, complies with the United States Federal Drug Administration Code of
Federal Regulations Title 21, Sections 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser
Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.
Note If protective clips are installed on the backplane connectors of the cards, remove the clips before
installing the cards.
Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously.
Step 1 If the node requires a custom NE default settings to be installed on the node, complete the “NTP-G136
Import Network Element Defaults” procedure on page 14-51. If not, continue with Step 2. (For
information about the ONS 15454 NE defaults, refer to the “Network Elements Defaults” appendix in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.)
Caution If custom NE defaults are required, they must be installed before you install the DWDM cards.
Step 2 Verify that you have one of the following guides for the DWDM card installation:
• The slots that were preprovisioned when you completed the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco
TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on page 4-49.
• The Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout report (see Table 4-1 on page 4-4).
Step 3 If the slots are preprovisioned, continue with Step 4. If you are using the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf
layout report, complete the “DLP-G348 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout Report” task on
page 4-66.
Step 4 Remove a DWDM card from its packaging, then remove the protective caps from the backplane
connectors. (Safety caps are typically yellow.)
Step 5 Open the card latches/ejectors. 4-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 6 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the slot guide rails until the card plugs into the
receptacle at the back of the slot. The correct slot is designated by the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf
layout.
Step 7 Verify that the card is inserted correctly. Simultaneously close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged in. Ensure
that you cannot insert the card any further.
After installing the card, the following LED activity will occur:
• The card’s LEDs will go through a sequence of activities (turn on, turn off, blinking.) This will take
2 to 3 minutes.
• The ACT LED turns on.
• The signal fail (SF) LED might persist until all card ports connect to their far-end counterparts and
a signal is present.
Step 8 If the card does not boot up properly, or the LED activity is not similar to the activity in Step 7, check
the following:
• When a physical card type does not match the type of card provisioned for that slot in CTC, the card
might not boot. If a DWDM card does not boot, open CTC and ensure that the slot is not provisioned
for a different card type before assuming that the card is faulty.
• If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power.
• If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off and a minor
equipment mismatch alarm appears on the CTC Alarms tab.
• If the red FAIL LED is on continuously or the LEDs behave erratically, the card is not installed.
If any of conditions are present, remove the card and repeat Steps 4 to 7. If the card does not boot up
properly the second time, it might be defective. Contact your next level of support.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 5 through 8 until all the DWDM cards are installed in the node.
Step 10 If an OPT-PRE card (or the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, or OPT-AMP-C card in OPT-PRE card
mode) are installed, complete one of the following steps for each OPT-PRE card based on the Cisco
TransportPlanner shelf layout. If an OPT-PRE is not installed, you have completed this procedure.
• If the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout does not include DCUs, install a patchcord and 4-dB
attenuator with a tolerance of +/–1 dB between the OPT-PRE or OPT-AMP-L DC TX and RX ports
for each OPT-PRE or OPT-AMP-L card installed in the shelf.
• If the shelf layout includes DCUs, complete the “NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion
Compensating Units” procedure on page 4-67 for each side of the shelf that requires a DCU.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G348 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout Report
Purpose This task describes how to use the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout
report to install cards in a DWDM node.
Tools/Equipment None4-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Display the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout report for your site. The report can be viewed in
Cisco TransportPlanner. It can also be viewed as a JPEG graphic. Refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner
DWDM Operations Guide for information about generating shelf layout reports.
Step 2 Review the following installation information:
• Rack—Indicates the rack in the node where the cards must be installed.
• Shelf—Indicates the shelf in the rack where the cards must be installed. Shelf options include:
– Flex Shelf—The ONS 15216 FlexLayer mechanical shelf houses Y-cable modules. Flex shelf
positions are numbered 1 to 4 from left to right.
– DCU Shelf—The Cisco ONS 15216 dispersion compensation shelf assembly houses DCUs.
DCU positions are numbered 1 to 2 from left to right.
– Shelf-ANSI-n or Shelf-ETSI-n—The ONS 15454 shelf assembly houses ONS 15454 common,
DWDM, and client cards. Positions in this type of shelf are numbered 1 to 17 from left to right.
Multiple shelves might appear.
• Slot—Indicates the slot in the specific shelf where the cards must be installed:
– Unit Name (Product ID)— Identifies the card by its Product ID.
– Unit Description—Identifies the card by its name.
• Unit Side—Identifies the side of the node that the specific card is serving: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H.
• Unit Plug-in Modules—Identifies the type and number of PPMs that will be used with specific TXP,
MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards.
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure describes how to install the DCUs for DWDM shelves.
Tools/Equipment DCUs
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 4-64
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Warning Class I (CDRH) and Class 1M (IEC) laser products. Statement 1055
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector. Do
not view directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments
(for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm may pose an eye
hazard. Statement 1056
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. For detailed
instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Cisco ONS Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
and Grounding Guide.
Note For US installations, complies with the US Federal Drug Administration Code of Federal Regulations
Title 21, Sections 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated
July 26, 2001.
Step 1 Remove the DCU from its packaging, then remove the protective caps from the connectors. (Safety caps
are typically yellow.)
Step 2 Use both hands to push the DCU all the way into the chassis until the connector spring lock on the right
side of the module clicks into place.
Step 3 Open the cover with the laser warning on the connector adapter and then connect the cable connector.
Note The Side A DCU is commonly installed on the left side and the Side B DCU is commonly
installed on the right side.
Note Double-check the placement of the DCU card(s) with your Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout.
If you install the wrong DCU in a slot, remove the DCU and install the correct one.
Stop. You have completed this procedure. 4-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards
Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly
touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94
Warning Class 1 laser product. Statement 1008
Warning Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector. Do
not view directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments
(for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a distance of 100 mm may pose an eye
hazard. Statement 1056
Warning Class I (CDRH) and Class 1M (IEC) laser products. Statement 1055
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. For detailed
instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Cisco ONS Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
and Grounding Guide.
Caution A fan-tray assembly (15454E-CC-FTA for the ETSI shelf or 15454-CC-FTA for the ANSI shelf) must
be installed in a shelf where a GE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card is installed.
Purpose This procedure describes how to install the ONS 15454 TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP
cards.
Tools/Equipment TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L,
TXP_MR_10EX_C, TXP_MR_2.5G, TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXPP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, MXP_MR_2.5G,
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, MXP_MR_10DMEX_C,
40G-MXP-C, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP cards (as applicable)
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note For US installations, complies with the US Federal Drug Administration Code of Federal Regulations
Title 21, Sections 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated
July 26, 2001.
Note If protective clips are installed on the backplane connectors of the cards, remove the clips before
installing the cards.
Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously.
Step 1 Display the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout (see Table 4-1 on page 4-4) for the node where you will
install the card.
Step 2 Remove the card from its packaging, then remove the protective clips from the backplane connectors.
Step 3 Open the card latches/ejectors.
Step 4 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails until the card plugs into the
receptacle at the back of the slot designated by the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout.
Step 5 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and simultaneously close the latches/ejectors on the card.
Note It is possible to close the latches and ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the
backplane. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any further.
Note If you install the card in the wrong slot, CTC will raise a MEA (EQPT) alarm. To clear this
alarm, open the latches, slide the card out, then insert it in the correct slot.
After you install the card, the FAIL, ACT, and SF LEDs will go through a sequence of activities. They
will turn on, turn off, and blink at different points. After approximately 2 to 3 minutes, the ACT or
ACT/STBY LED turns on. The SF LED might persist until all card ports connect to their far-end
counterparts and a signal is present.
Note Until a card is provisioned, the card is in the standby condition and the ACT/STBY LED remains
amber in color.
Step 6 If the card does not boot up properly or the LEDs do not progress through the activities described in
Step 5, check the following:
• When a physical card type does not match the type of card provisioned for that slot in CTC, the card
might not boot and CTC will show a MEA (EQPT) alarm. If the card does not boot, open CTC and
ensure that the slot is not provisioned for a different card type before assuming that the card is faulty.
• If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power.
• If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off.
• If the red FAIL LED is on continuously or the LEDs behave erratically, the card is not installed
properly.4-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
If any of these conditions are present, remove the card and repeat Steps 3 to 5. If the card does not boot
up properly the second time, contact your next level of support.
Step 7 If the card requires a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP) connector, complete one of the
following tasks:
• DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71—Complete this task to install the physical SFP or XFP
into the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
• DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot, page 4-73—(Optional) Complete this task if you do
not have the physical SFP or XFP and need to preprovision the SFP or XFP slot.
Note SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, or line card port to link the port with
the fiber-optic network. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to For more
information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual and the Installing GBIC,
SFP, and XFP Optics Modules in ONS Platforms document.
Note PPM provisioning determines how the SFPs and XFPs are used in CTC. PPM provisioning
procedures are provided in Chapter 6, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.”
Step 8 If you need to remove an SFP or XFP, complete the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP” task on
page 4-74.
Note You will provision the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP
cards after you complete all node turn-up procedures. TXP and MXP provisioning procedures are
provided in Chapter 6, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.”
Note Until a card is provisioned, the card is in the standby condition and the ACT/STBY LED remains amber
in color.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP
Purpose This task installs SFPs and XFPs into TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP cards. SFPs and XFPs
provide a fiber interface to the card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Warning The intrabuilding ports of the ONS 15454 are suitable for connection to intrabuilding or unexposed
wiring or cabling only. The intrabuilding ports of the ONS 15454 must not be metallically connected
to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as
intrabuilding interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4), and
require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient
protection while connecting these interfaces metallically to the OSP wiring.
Warning The intrabuilding ports of the ONS 15454 are suitable for connection only to shielded intrabuilding
cabling, grounded at both ends.
Note In case of a full C-band tunable XFP, it is mandatory to use optical cables that are fully compliant with
NEBS Telcordia GR-326-CORE, Issue 3 recommendation. The Cisco patchcord indicated by the Cisco
Transport Planner (CTP) tool is fully compliant with NEBS Telcordia GR-326-CORE, Issue 3
recommendation.
Note The CC-FTA fan tray assembly must be installed in a shelf where CWDM and DWDM SFPs or XFPs
are used.
Note SFPs and XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. For
more information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual and the Installing GBIC,
SFP, and XFP Optics Modules in ONS Platforms document.
Note If you have installed a fan tray lower than CC-FTA on the MSTP unit, you must have the TXP_MR_10E
transponder card (only if you have installed ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP on the TXP_MR_10E card) installed
in Slot 5, 6, 12, or 13. This limitation does not exist for fan-tray versions higher than CC-FTA.
Note SFPs and XFPs are generically called PPMs in CTC. After installing multirate SFPs or XFPs, multirate
PPMs must be provisioned in CTC. To complete the provisioning of the pluggable port, complete the
“DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on page 6-11.
Step 1 Verify that the SFP or XFP is correct for your network and TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card (see the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for card and SFP/XFP compatibility information). Check
that you are installing compatible SFPs or XFPs, for example, SX to SX or LX/LH to LX/LH.
Step 2 Install the SFP or XFP:
• For a mylar tab SFP or XFP: Slide the SFP or XFP into the slot.
• For an actuator/button SFP or XFP: Slide the SFP or XFP all the way into the slot until you hear a
click.4-73
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• For a bail clasp SFP or XFP: Latch (flip upwards) the bail clasp before inserting the SFP or XFP
into the slot and then slide it into the slot.
Note SFP and XFPs are keyed to prevent incorrect installation.
Step 3 Do not remove the protective caps from the SFP or XFP until you are ready to attach the network
fiber-optic cable.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot
Note SFPs and XFPs are generically called PPMs in CTC. After installing multirate SFPs or XFPs, multirate
PPMs must be provisioned in CTC.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to provision PPM
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose the PPM slot number where the SFP or XFP is installed from the drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP or XFP from the drop-down list.
The drop-down list displays the number of PPMs that are available for provisioning. If only one port
is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Port Modules pane. The row in the Pluggable
Port Modules pane turns light blue. The Actual Equipment Type column remains blank until the actual
SFP or XFP is installed. After the SFP or XFP is installed, the row in the pane turns white and the
Actual Equipment Type column shows the equipment name.
Step 6 Verify that the PPM appears in the list in the Pluggable Port Modules pane. If it does not, repeat Steps 3
through 5.
Step 7 Repeat the task to provision a second PPM, if needed. If not, continue with Step 8.
Step 8 Click OK.
Purpose This task preprovisions SFPs and XFPs, which connect fiber to TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP
cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-74
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP
Note This task removes the SFP or XFP hardware. To delete the provisioning for an SFP or XFP, see the
“DLP-G280 Delete a PPM” procedure on page 6-19.
Step 1 If a fiber is connected, disconnect the network fiber cable from the SFP or XFP LC-type connector.
Step 2 Release the SFP or XFP from the slot by performing one of the following actions (depending which latch
is on the SFP or XFP):
• For a mylar tab SFP or XFP: Pull out the mylar tab.
• For an actuator/button SFP or XFP: Press the actuator/button.
• For a bail clasp SFP or XFP: Unlatch the bail clasp and swing it downward.
Step 3 Slide the SFP or XFP out of the slot.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Note Removing an SFP from the client ports of a Y-cable protection group card causes an IMPROPRMVL
(PPM) alarm. The working port raises the - CR,IMPROPRMVL,SA alarm and the protected port raises
the MN,IMPROPRMVL,NSA alarm. The severity on the client ports is changed according to the
protection switch state.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This task removes SFPs and XFPs from TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-75
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G123 Install the Filler Cards
Warning Blank faceplates (filler panels) serve three important functions: they prevent exposure to hazardous
voltages and currents inside the chassis; they contain electromagnetic interference (EMI) that might
disrupt other equipment; and they direct the flow of cooling air through the chassis. Do not operate
the system unless all cards and faceplates are in place. Statement 156
Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. For detailed
instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Cisco ONS Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
and Grounding Guide.
Note In an ONS 15454 shelf assembly, a filler card (Cisco P/N 15454-FILLER) can be installed in any unused
traffic or AIC-I card slots (Slots 1 through 6, 9, and 12 through 17). These cards are detected by CTC in
Software Release 6.0 and later.
Note In an ONS 15454 M6 shelf assembly, the line card fillers (15454-M-FILLER) can be installed in any
unused line card slots (Slots 1 through 7), and a control card filler (15454-MT-FILLER) can be installed
in any unused control card slot (Slot 1 or Slot 8). In an ONS 15454 M2 shelf assembly, the line card filler
(15454-M-FILLER) can be installed in any unused line card slots (Slot 2 or Slot 3). CTC does not detect
the filler card in Release 9.2; however, CTC may detect it in later software releases.
Step 1 Open the card ejectors.
Step 2 Slide the card along the guide rails into the correct slot.
Step 3 Close the ejectors.
Step 4 Repeat for any remaining unused card slots.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure explains how to install the filler cards (blank faceplates).
The filler card aids in maintaining proper air flow and electro-magnetic
interference (EMI) requirements.
Tools/Equipment Filler cards
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 4-64
NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 4-67
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-76
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G239 Add and Delete Passive Units
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 to log in to an ONS 15454 node on the
network.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G543 Add Passive Units Manually” task on page 4-76 to manually preprovision a
passive unit.
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G544 Delete a Passive Unit” task on page 4-77 to delete a passive unit.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G543 Add Passive Units Manually
Step 1 In the node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Passive Cards tabs.
Step 2 Click Create. The Create Passive Card dialog box appears.
Step 3 Choose the passive unit from the Card Type drop-down list and click OK.
The passive unit is installed in the first available slot in the rack.
Purpose This procedure explains how to add or delete passive units on a DWDM
node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task preprovisions passive units (patch panels and DCUs) in CTC.
Preprovisioning of the passive units is normally performed when you
complete the“NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update
Configuration File” section on page 4-49. Use this task if you need to
manually preprovision a passive unit. All slot preprovisioning must be
based upon the Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout prepared for your site.
Tools/Equipment Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout table or JPG file.
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-77
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note You can also add a passive unit in the multishelf view by right-clicking the slot inside the rack.
Refer to “NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node” section on
page 13-13.
Note If you need to view the details of the passive units that have been installed on a node, click the
Inventory tab.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G544 Delete a Passive Unit
Step 1 In the node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Passive Cards tabs.
Step 2 Click the passive unit you want to delete.
Step 3 Click Delete, then click Yes.
Note You can also delete a passive unit in the multi-shelf view. Refer to “NTP-G147 Delete a Passive
Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node” section on page 13-16.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task deletes a passive unit.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-78
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs
Warning Class I (CDRH) and Class 1M (IEC) laser products. Statement 1055
Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS, Issue 5 standard, do not use optical fibers with exposed
metallic ferrules. Exposed metallic ferrules may result in ESD damage to the system and can be service
affecting.
Note For US installations, complies with the US Federal Drug Administration Code of Federal Regulations
Title 21, Sections 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated
July 26, 2001.
Note In this procedure, you will generally connect fibers in an Side B-to-Side A or Side B-to-Side B pattern
only. “Side A” refers to cards and ports in Slots 1 through 8. “Side B” refers to cards and ports installed
in Slots 10 through 17.
Note You will install fiber-optic cables on TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G,
and OTU2_XP cards later in the chapter during the “NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between
Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes” procedure on page 4-82.
Step 1 Refer to the “DLP-G349 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report” task on
page 4-80 to install cables to the DWDM cards.
Step 2 Verify that the appropriate fiber optic cables are available to complete the connections shown in the
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections report:
a. Count the number of connections listed in the Internal Connections and verify that you have the
same number of cables.
b. Measure the distance between Origination Position and Destination Position for each connection,
then verify that the fiber lengths will fit each one.
Purpose This procedure attaches fiber-optic cables on the DWDM cards and DCUs.
Tools/Equipment Fiber-optic cables
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 4-64
NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 4-67
(as applicable)
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-79
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 Complete the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 for all fiber connections,
even new fiber. Dust particles can degrade performance. Put caps on any fiber connectors that are not
used.
Step 4 On the front of the fiber-storage tray (usually installed below the node you are fibering), push the tabs
on the left and right sides inward to release the lock on the tray.
Step 5 Pull the fiber-storage tray away from the shelf until it is fully opened.
Step 6 Open the fold-down door that at the bottom of the shelf assembly to expose the cable-routing channel
(Figure 4-11).
Figure 4-11 Managing Cables on the Front Panel
Step 7 Using the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report, connect one end of the fiber cable plug
into the Origination Position.
Step 8 Route the fiber cable on the card faceplate through the fiber clip on the faceplate, if provided. (Fiber clips
are factory-attached to the faceplates of 32MUX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-O, OSCM, OSC-CSM, OPT-PRE,
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and
OPT-RAMP-CE cards.)
Step 9 Route the fiber cable through the cable-routing channel and cutout on the appropriate side of the shelf
assembly, as necessary.
Step 10 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in the fiber-storage tray
(Figure 4-12).
FAN FAIL CRIT MAJ MIN
145262
Cable-routing
channel posts
Fold down
front door4-80
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-12 Fiber-Storage Tray
Caution When you close the fiber-storage tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the fiber-storage tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 11 Route the fiber cable out either side of the fiber-storage tray as necessary.
Step 12 Plug the other end of the cable into the Destination position.
Note Cards display an SF LED after the OSC terminations are created (see the “NTP-G38 Provision
OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126) if transmit and receive fibers are not connected
correctly. For example, an RX port is connected to another RX port or a TX port is connected to
another TX port.
Step 13 Repeat Steps 4 through 12 until you have connected the intra-shelf fibers according to the
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections report.
Step 14 To close the fiber-storage tray, push the tray back toward the rack until it locks into place.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G349 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
134609
West
entry/exit
East
entry/exit
Purpose This task describes how to use the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal
Connections report to install cables on the DWDM cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-81
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Display the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections report for the node that you are provisioning.
The Internal Connections report is presented in two views, a patchcord installation view and a software
provisioning view. The Patchcord installation view lists all the patchcord connections that the installer
has to mechanically cable within the site between the different ports of the DWDM cards. The SW
Provisioning view contains all the connections to be manually set or removed via CTC with respect to
the default connections that are automatically generated by the system software running on the node.
The tables identify the patchcords that you must cable by their endpoints. Starting from the left side of
report, Position identifies the fiber origination point. The location shown in the next Position to right is
the destination point for the fiber connection. The patchcord endpoints are identified by site, assembly
shelf, slot, and port number. Information provided by the Internal Connections Software report includes:
• Name—Displays the name of the site. On the SW provisioning view, this column indicates whether
the connection was automatically set, or should be manually set or removed via CTC.
• Position—The cable origination in the format is Rack.Shelf.Slot. For example, Rack#1.Shelf
Assembly 1.Slot 2 refers to Slot 2 in shelf assembly 1(DWDM) shelf of Rack 1. Refer to the Cisco
TransportPlanner Site Dialog box for rack and shelf names and locations.
• Unit—The ONS 15454 DWDM card (unit) that is installed in the Position’s slot. This is where the
patchcord originates.
• Port Number—The port number where the patchcord connection originates.
• Port ID—(Software provisioning view only) The port identifier shown in TL1 for the Position-1
connection.
• Port Label—The name of the physical port printed on the DWDM card’s front panel and shown in
CTC card view.
• Attenuator—If attenuation is required, the product ID (PID) of the bulk fixed attenuator is shown.
“Att-Lpbk-4dB” indicates that the DC TX and DC RX ports on an OPT-PRE (or OPT-AMP-L,
OPT-AMP-17-C, or OPT-AMP-C card provisioned in OPT-PRE card mode) card are to be connected
with an attenuated loopback that is shipped with the OPT-PRE card. This parameter also indicates
when an internal attenuator must be placed between the OPT-PRE DC-TX and DC-RX ports on the
when a DCU is equipped.
Note If the Attenuator field is blank, no attenuation is needed.
• Position—The cable termination in the format is Rack.Shelf.Slot.
• Unit—The ONS 15454 DWDM card that is installed in the Position’s slot. This is where the cabling
terminates.
• Port—The port number where the patchcord connection terminates.
• Port ID—(Software provisioning view only) The port identifier shown in TL1 for the Position-2
connection.
• Port Label—The name of the physical port printed on the DWDM card’s front panel and shown in
CTC card view.
• P/F—Indicates whether you must create the connection manually in CTC. A Yes appearing in this
column means that you must create the connection manually.
Caution Failure to create the required manual connections will prevent the node from turning up properly4-82
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or
ROADM Nodes
Step 1 Determine which type of node you are fibering.
The following node types require the listed equipment. The cards and patch panels should already be
installed before you begin this procedure.
• Terminal node:
– One of 32DMX-O card and 32MUX-O card, and one standard or deep patch panel tray
– One of 32WSS card and 32DMX or 32DMX-O card, and one standard or deep patch panel tray
– One of 32WSS-L card and 32DMX-L card, and one standard or deep patch panel tray
– One of 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE card and 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE card, and one standard
or deep patch panel tray
– One of 40-MUX-C card and 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE card, and one standard or deep patch
panel tray
– One 40-SMR1-C card and one 15216-MD-40-ODD,15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD (ONS 15216 40 or 48-channel mux/demux) patch panel
– One 40-SMR2-C card and one 15216-MD-40-ODD,15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD (ONS 15216 40 or 48-channel mux/demux) patch panel
Purpose This procedure routes fiber-optic cables from the DWDM optical cards in
a terminal, hub, or ROADM node to the patch panel, and from the patch
panel to TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment • See Step 1 for a list of equipment specific to each node type.
• All node types require fiber-optic cables, terminated with a single
LC-type connector on each end.
• Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures • “DLP-G28 Install the Fiber Patch-Panel Tray” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• “DLP-G29 Install the Fiber-Storage Tray” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
• DLP-G348 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout Report,
page 4-66
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-83
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
– One 80-WXC-C card, one 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD
unit, and one 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN unit, and
one 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM unit
• Hub node:
– Two of 32MUX-O cards and 32DMX-O or 32DMX cards, and two standard or deep patch panel
trays
– Two of 32WSS cards and 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards, and two standard or deep patch panel
trays
– Two of 32WSS-L cards and 32DMX-L cards, and two standard or deep patch panel trays
– Two of 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE cards and 40-DMX-C or 40DMX-CE cards, and two standard
or deep patch panel trays
– Two 40-SMR1-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panels
– Two 40-SMR2-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panels
• ROADM node:
– Two 32WSS cards, optionally, two 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards, and two standard or deep patch
panel trays
– Two 32WSS-L cards, optionally, two 32DMX-L cards, and two standard or deep patch panel
trays
– Two 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE cards, optionally, two 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE cards, and
two standard or deep patch panel trays
– Two 40-SMR1-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panels
– Two 40-SMR2-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD patch panels
– Two 80-WXC-C cards and two 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD units and 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or
15216-MD-48-EVEN units and two 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM units
• Expanded ROADM node:
– Two of 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE cards and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards, and two 40-channel
patch panel trays, preinstalled with MPO-LC cables
Note If you are using standard patch panels, you will also need eight multifiber push-on (MPO)
cables per standard patch panel. MPO cables are fiber-optic cables terminated on one end
with one MPO connector and with eight LC-type connectors on the other end. Deep patch
panel trays come preinstalled with MPO cables.
Step 2 On the front of the patch panel tray, push the tabs on the left and right sides inward to release the lock
on the tray.
Step 3 Pull the patch panel tray away from the shelf until it is fully opened.
Note The red latch inside the patch panel tray at the top left corner will automatically click and lock
the tray in the open position when you have fully opened the tray.4-84
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 4 Depending on the type of patch panel tray you are using:
• Standard patch panel tray:
– Complete the “DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and
32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-85.
– Complete the “DLP-G316 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray” task
on page 4-89.
• Deep patch panel tray:
– Complete the “DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and
32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-90.
– Complete the “DLP-G357 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray or
40-Channel Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-97.
• 40-channel patch panel tray:
– As needed, complete the “DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel
Tray” task on page 4-93 to route the MPO cables out of the right side of the tray so they can be
easily connected to cards installed on the right side of the shelf (Slots 12 through 17).
– Complete the “DLP-G428 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and
40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE Cards in an Expanded ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the
40-Channel Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-95.
• 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel:
– Complete the “DLP-G530 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or
80-WXC-C Cards in a ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 15216-MD-40 or 15216-MD-48
Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-99
Step 5 To close the patch panel tray, unlock it by pressing the red latch in the top left corner, and then push the
tray back toward the rack until it locks into place.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.4-85
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and
32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray
Note For a ROADM or hub node, two patch panels will be used, one for Side B side and one for Side A. The
Side B 32WSS/32DMX card will connect to the Side B patch panel. The Side A 32WSS/32DMX card
will connect to the Side A patch panel.
Step 1 Choose either the Side B or Side A to cable the 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards (or the 32WSS and
32DMX cards for a ROADM node).
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from 32MUX-O,
32WSS, 32DMX-O, and 32DMX cards in a terminal, hub, or ROADM node
to the standard patch panel.
Tools/Equipment The following node types require the following equipment. The cards and
patch panels should already be installed before you begin this procedure.
Terminal node:
• One 32DMX-O card
• One 32MUX-O card
• One standard patch panel tray
• Eight fiber-optic MPO cables: each MPO cable is terminated on one
end with one MPO connector and on the other end with eight LC-type
connectors
Hub node:
• Two 32DMX-O cards
• Two 32MUX-O cards
• Two standard patch panel trays
• Sixteen fiber-optic MPO cables: each MPO cable is terminated on one
end with one MPO connector and on the other end with eight LC-type
connectors
ROADM node:
• Two 32WSS cards
• Two 32DMX cards
• Two standard patch panel trays
• Sixteen fiber-optic MPO cables: each MPO cable is terminated on one
end with one MPO connector and on the other end with eight LC-type
connectors
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-86
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 On the patch panel, pull up firmly on the two latches and use them to slide the patch panel up until it
snaps in place above the tray (Figure 4-13).
Figure 4-13 Using the Patch Panel Latches to Slide the Patch Panel Away from the Tray
Step 3 At the 32WSS or 32MUX-O card in the node, plug the MPO connector of an MPO cable (Figure 4-14)
into the top Add RX (30.3–36.6) port of the card. If you are connecting a subsequent MPO cable, plug
the MPO connector into the first vacant Add RX card port below the last MPO cable that was installed.
134825
Patch-panel
latches
Patch-panel
latches
MXP/TXP-DWDM
connections
MPO fan-out connections
and slack
Patch-panel
bar4-87
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-14 MPO Cable
.
Step 4 Route the MPO cable slack through the patch panel tray as necessary.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 5 While facing the front of the patch panel, at the rear side of the patch panel, plug the eight LC-connector
fan-out cables on the MPO cable into their corresponding connectors on the bottom row of the patch
panel. You should plug the fan-out cables from left to right (as you face the patch panel), following the
numbers tagged (1 through 8) on the cables.
Figure 4-15 shows the patch panel connectors from the rear of the patch panel tray. Figure 4-16 shows
the assigned wavelengths for each port on the patch panel, as indicated at the top of the patch panel bar.
The numbers on the patch panel bar correspond to a wavelength on the ITU grid.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
134826
MPO connector
To the Add/Drop port
on a 32WSS, 40-WSS-C,
or 32-MUX-O card
LC-type connectors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
84-88
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-15 Rear View of the Patch Panel
.
Figure 4-16 Top View of the Patch Panel Bar
Step 6 As necessary, repeat Steps 3 through 5 for the remaining three Add RX ports on the 32WSS or
32MUX-O card, until all 32 LC connectors on the bottom row of the rear of the patch panel are
connected.
Step 7 At the adjacent 32DMX or 32DMX-O card in the same side of the shelf, plug the MPO connector of an
MPO cable into the top Drop TX (30.3–36.6) port of the 32DMX or 32DMX-O card. If you are
connecting a subsequent MPO cable, plug the MPO connector into the first vacant Drop TX card port
below the last MPO cable that was installed.
Step 8 Route the MPO cable slack through the patch panel tray as necessary.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 9 While facing the front of the patch panel, at the rear of the patch panel, plug the eight LC-connector
fan-out cables on the MPO cable into their corresponding connectors on the top row of the patch panel.
You should plug the fan-out cables from left to right (as you face the patch panel), following the numbers
tagged (1 through 8) on the cables.
Step 10 As necessary, repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the remaining three Drop TX ports on the 32DMX or DMX-O
card, until all 32 LC connectors on the top row of the rear of the patch panel are connected.
Step 11 For a hub or ROADM node, repeat Steps 2 through 10 to cable the other side of the shelf to the second
patch panel. For a terminal node, go to Step 12.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
134882
DEMUX connectors (TX port [drop] from the 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards)
MUX connectors (RX port [add] to the 32WSS or 32MUX-O cards)
134824
CLIENT
30.3
31.1
31.9
32.6
34.2
35.0
35.8
36.6
CLIENT
38.1
38.9
39.7
40.5
42.1
42.9
43.7
44.5
CLIENT
46.1
46.9
47.7
48.5
50.1
50.9
51.7
52.6
CLIENT
54.1
54.9
55.7
56.5
58.1
58.9
59.7
60.64-89
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G316 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray
Step 1 At the appropriate TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP
card, plug one end of a fiber-optic cable into the TX port of the DWDM adapter.
Step 2 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in the fiber-storage tray.
Caution When you close the fiber-storage tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the fiber-storage tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 3 On the DWDM (front) side of the patch panel, plug the other end of the cable into the connector on the
bottom row that corresponds to the wavelength to which the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP port is tuned. (See Figure 4-16 on page 4-88 for a view of the
wavelengths assigned to the patch panel connectors).
Figure 4-17 shows the patch panel connectors from the front of the patch panel tray.
Figure 4-17 Front View of the Patch Panel
.
Step 4 Plug one end of a fiber-optic cable into the RX port of the DWDM adapter on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from the patch panel to
TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP card(s)
Fiber-optic cable(s)
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
134823
DEMUX connectors (to the RX ports on the TXP/MXP cards)
MUX connectors (to the TX ports on the TXP/MXP cards)4-90
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 5 On the DWDM (front) side of the patch panel, plug the other end of the cable into the connector on the
top row that corresponds to the wavelength to which the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card is tuned.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for all of the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP cards that you want to connect to this patch panel.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
.
DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and
32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from 32MUX-O,
32WSS, 32DMX-O, and 32DMX cards in a terminal, hub, or ROADM node
to the deep patch panel tray.
Tools/Equipment The following node types require the following equipment. The cards and
patch panels should already be installed before you begin this procedure.
For terminal nodes, one of the following card sets:
• One 32MUX-O card and one 32DMX-O or 32DMX card
• One 32WSS card and one 32DMX or 32DMX-O card
• One 32WSS-L cards and one 32DMX-L card
Plus one deep patch panel tray, preinstalled with MPO cables (each MPO
cable is terminated on one end with one MPO connector and on the other
end with eight LC-type connectors)
For hub nodes, one of the following card sets:
• Two 32MUX-O cards and two 32DMX-O or 32DMX cards
• Two 32WSS cards and two 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards
• Two 32WSS-L cards and two 32DMX-L cards
Plus two deep patch panel trays, preinstalled with MPO cables (each MPO
cable is terminated on one end with one MPO connector and on the other
end with eight LC-type connectors)
For ROADM nodes, one of the following card sets:
• Two 32WSS cards and two 32DMX or 32DMX-O cards
• Two 32WSS-L cards and two 32DMX-L cards
Plus two deep patch panel trays, preinstalled with MPO cables (each MPO
cable is terminated on one end with one MPO connector and on the other
end with eight LC-type connectors)
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-91
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note For a ROADM or hub node, two patch panels will be used, one for Side A (Slots 1 through 6) and one
for Side B (Slots 12 through 17). The Side B 32WSS/32DMX card will connect to the Side B patch panel.
The Side A 32WSS/32DMX card will connect to the Side A patch panel. The MPO cables in the patch
panel are preinstalled and routed out of the right side of the patch panel tray.
Step 1 Choose either Side A or Side B of the shelf to cable the 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards (or the 32WSS
and 32DMX cards for a ROADM node).
Step 2 On the patch panel, locate the MPO connectors (Figure 4-14 on page 4-87).
Step 3 Route the preinstalled MPO cables out of the tray to the right or left (Figure 4-18).
Figure 4-18 Deep Patch Panel Tray
Step 4 At the 32WSS or 32MUX-O card in the node, plug the MPO connector labeled 1 RX on an MPO cable
(Figure 4-14 on page 4-87) into the top Add RX (30.3–36.6) port of the card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 5 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-RX into the Add RX (38.1–44.5) port on the card.
Step 6 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-RX into the Add RX (46.1–52.5) port on the card.
Step 7 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-RX into the Add RX (54.1–60.6) port on the card.
Figure 4-19 shows the deep patch panel ports and corresponding wavelengths.
144679
LC-LC cables MPO-LC Cables4-92
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-19 Deep Patch Panel Port Wavelengths
Step 8 At the adjacent 32DMX or 32DMX-O card in the same side of the shelf, plug the MPO connector labeled
1 TX on the MPO cable (Figure 4-14 on page 4-87) into the top Drop TX (30.3–36.6) port of the card
(Figure 4-19).
Step 9 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-TX into the Drop TX (38.1–44.5) port on the card.
Step 10 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-TX into the Drop TX (46.1–52.5) port on the card.
Step 11 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-TX into the Drop TX (54.1–60.6) port on the card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 12 For a hub or ROADM node, repeat Steps 2 through 11 to cable the other side of the shelf to the second
patch panel. For a terminal node, go to Step 13.
Step 13 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
1532.6nm
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
1536.6nm
1531.8nm 1531.1nm 1530.3nm
1535.8nm 1535.0nm 1534.2nm
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
1540.5nm
1544.5nm
1539.7nm 1538.9nm 1538.1nm
1543.7nm 1542.9nm 1542.1nm
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
1548.5nm
1552.5nm
1547.7nm 1546.9nm 1546.1nm
1551.7nm 1550.9nm 1550.1nm
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
1556.5nm
1560.6nm
1555.7nm 1554.9nm 1554.1nm
1559.7nm 1558.9nm 1558.1nm
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
144676
1 3 2 5 4 7 6 84-93
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray
Step 1 Carefully unwind all of the MPO cables in the patch panel tray and gently set the cables to the side of
the tray, out of the way of the internal hardware.
Figure 4-20 and Figure 4-21 show the 40-channel patch panel tray.
Figure 4-20 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray, Side View
Purpose This task reroutes the MPO cables that are preinstalled in the 40-channel
patch panel tray. The cables exit to the left when shipped; this task reroutes
the cables out of the right side of the tray. Use this task when you want to
connect these MPO cables to cards installed on the right side of the shelf
(Slots 12 through 17).
Tools/Equipment #2 Phillips screwdriver
Prerequisite Procedures None
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
1598174-94
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-21 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray, Top View
Step 2 Slide each of the ten LC-port adapter packs upward.
Step 3 Unscrew the two screws in the bottom left bending limiter and remove the bending limiter.
Step 4 Remove the single screw below the center of the patch panel to free the patch panel hardware.
Step 5 Slide the patch panel to the left, and reinstall the screw below the center of the patch panel.
Step 6 Install the bending limiter to the right of the patch panel by installing the two screws.
Step 7 Carefully route all of the MPO cables around the bending limiter and out the exit on the right side of the
patch panel tray.
Step 8 Slide each of the ten LC-port adapter packs downward.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
159816
Bending limiter4-95
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G428 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and
40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE Cards in an Expanded ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to
the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray
Note For a ROADM node, two patch panels will be used, one for the Side A (Slots 1 through 6) and one for
Side B (Slots 12 through 17). The Side B 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE card will connect to the Side B patch
panel. The Side A 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE will connect to the Side A patch panel. The MPO cables in
the patch panel are preinstalled and routed out of the left side of the patch panel tray.
Step 1 Choose either the Side A or Side B side of the shelf to cable the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and
40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards.
Note If you are cabling cards on Side B of the shelf, you must first perform the “DLP-G427 Reroute
Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-93 to route the MPO
cables out of the right side of the patch panel tray, or route the cables through a fiber storage
panel.
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from
40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards in an
expanded ROADM, terminal, or hub node to the 40-channel (80-port) patch
panel tray (15454-PP-80).
Tools/Equipment The following node types require the following equipment. The cards and
patch panels should already be installed before you begin this procedure.
Expanded terminal nodes:
• One 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE card
• One 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE card
Plus one 40-channel patch panel tray, preinstalled with MPO cables (each
MPO cable is terminated on one end with one MPO connector and on the
other end with eight LC-type connectors)
Expanded hub or ROADM nodes:
• Two 40-WSS-C or 40-WSS-CE cards
• Two 40-DMX-C or 40-DMX-CE cards
Plus two 40-channel patch panel trays, preinstalled with MPO cables (each
MPO cable is terminated on one end with one MPO connector and on the
other end with eight LC-type connectors)
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray,
page 4-93
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-96
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 On the patch panel, locate the MPO cables and connectors.
Step 3 At the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE card in the node, plug the MPO connector labeled 1 RX on an MPO cable
(Figure 4-14 on page 4-87) into the top Add RX (30.3–35.8) port of the card.
Step 4 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-RX into the Add RX (36.6–42.1) port on the card.
Step 5 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-RX into the Add RX (42.9–48.5) port on the card.
Step 6 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-RX into the Add RX (49.3–54.9) port on the card.
Step 7 Plug the MPO connector labeled 5-RX into the Add RX (55.7–61.4) port on the card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Figure 4-22 shows the 40-channel patch panel ports and corresponding wavelengths.
Figure 4-22 40-Channel (15454-PP-80) Patch Panel Port Wavelengths
Step 8 At the adjacent 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE card in the same side of the shelf, plug the MPO connector
labeled 1 TX on the MPO cable into the top Drop TX (30.3–35.8) port of the card.
Step 9 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-TX into the Drop TX (36.6–42.1) port on the card.
Step 10 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-TX into the Drop TX (42.9–48.5) port on the card.
Step 11 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-TX into the Drop TX (49.3–54.9) port on the card.
Step 12 Plug the MPO connector labeled 5-TX into the Drop TX (55.7–61.4) port on the card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 13 Repeat Steps 2 through 12 to cable the other side of the shelf to the second patch panel.
159712
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
1557.3nm
1560.6nm
1558.1nm
1561.4nm
1555.7nm
1558.9nm
1556.5nm
1559.7nm
1546.1nm 1546.9nm 1547.7nm 1548.5nm
1542.9nm 1543.7nm 1544.5nm 1545.3nm
1539.7nm 1540.5nm 1541.3nm 1542.1nm
1536.6nm 1537.4nm 1538.1nm 1538.9nm
1533.4nm 1534.2nm 1535.0nm 1535.8nm
1530.3nm 1531.1nm 1531.8nm 1532.6nm
1549.3nm 1550.1nm 1550.9nm 1551.7nm
1552.5nm 1553.3nm 1554.1nm 1554.9nm4-97
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 14 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G357 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray
or 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray
Step 1 Refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report to connect the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card to the proper (Side A or Side B) patch
panel. Cisco TransportPlanner designates Side A as Slots 1 to 6 and Side B as Slots 12 to 17. At the
appropriate TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card, plug
one end of a fiber-optic cable into the TX port of the DWDM adapter.
Step 2 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in the fiber-storage tray.
Caution When you close the fiber-storage tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the fiber-storage tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 3 Plug the other end of the cable into the RX connector on the patch panel that corresponds to the
wavelength to which the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP port is tuned. (See Figure 4-19 on page 4-92 for a view of the wavelengths assigned to the
deep patch panel connectors or Figure 4-22 on page 4-96 for a view of the wavelengths assigned to the
40-channel patch panel connectors).
Step 4 On the patch panel tray, slide each of the ten LC-port adapter packs upward.
Step 5 Plug one end of a fiber-optic cable into the RX port of the DWDM adapter on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
Step 6 Plug the other end of the cable into the TX connector on the patch panel that corresponds to the
wavelength to which the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP port is tuned.
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from the deep patch
panel (32-channel) or 40-channel patch panel to TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP card(s)
Deep (32-channel) patch panel tray or 40-channel patch panel tray
Fiber-optic cable(s)
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-98
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 7 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 for each TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or
OTU2_XP card that you want to connect to this patch panel.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).4-99
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G530 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or
80-WXC-C Cards in a ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 15216-MD-40 or
15216-MD-48 Patch Panel Tray
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from the 40-SMR1-C1
,
40-SMR2-C1
, or 80-WXC-C2
cards in a ROADM, terminal, or hub node to
the 15216-MD-40 or 15216-MD-48 patch panel tray..
1. The 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C cards can be connected only to the odd patch panel (15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD).
Tools/Equipment The following node types require the following equipment. The cards and
patch panels should already be installed before you begin this procedure.
Terminal nodes:
• One 40-SMR1-C1
and one 15216 Odd patch panel3
• One 40-SMR2-C1
and one 15216 Odd patch panel3
• One 80-WXC-C2
card, one 15216 Odd patch panel3
, and one
15216 Even patch panel4
, and one 15216-MD-ID-50 or
15216-MD-48-CM unit
Hub nodes:
• Two 40-SMR1-C1
cards and two 15216 Odd patch panels3
• Two 40-SMR2-C1
cards and two 15216 Odd patch panels3
ROADM nodes:
• Two 40-SMR1-C1
cards and two 15216 Odd patch panels3
• Two 40-SMR2-C1
cards and two 15216 Odd patch panels3
• Two 80-WXC-C2
cards, two 15216 Odd patch panels3
, and
15216 Even patch panels4
and 15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM
units
Prerequisite Procedures Install and route fiber-optic cables on the patch panel. For more
information, see the required installation guide:
• Installing the Cisco ONS 15216-MD-40-ODD and
15216-MD-40-EVEN Mux/Demux Patch Panels
• Installing the Cisco ONS 15216-EF-40-ODD and 15216-EF-40-EVEN
Mux/Demux Patch Panels
• Installing the Cisco ONS 15216-MD-48-ODD and
15216-MD-48-EVEN Mux/Demux Patch Panels
• Installing Cisco ONS 15216-MD-ID-50 Optical Interleaver and
Deinterleaver Pluggable
• Installing the Cisco ONS 15216-MD-48-CM Interleaver and
Deinterleaver Pluggable
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-100
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note For optical interconnections between the odd patch panel, interleaver and deinterleaver module, and the
even patch panel, see the “Installing Cisco ONS 15216-MD-ID-50 Optical Interleaver and Deinterleaver
Pluggable” or “Installing the Cisco ONS 15216-MD-48-CM Interleaver and Deinterleaver Pluggable”
guide.
Note For a ROADM node, two patch panels will be used, one for the Side A (Slots 1 through 6) and one for
Side B (Slots 12 through 17). The Side B 40-SMR1-C1
or 40-SMR2-C1
card will connect to the Side B
patch panel. The Side A 40-SMR1-C1
or 40-SMR2-C1
will connect to the Side A patch panel.
Step 1 Choose Side A or Side B of the shelf to route the cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or
80-WXC-C card.
Step 2 On the 15216 patch panel1,2, locate the COM TX port and insert one end of an LC-LC cable.
Step 3 Route the LC-LC cable through the 15216 patch panel1,2 to the 40-SMR1-C1
card, 40-SMR2-C1
card, or
80-WXC-C2
card on Side A of the node.
Step 4 Connect the other end of the LC-LC cable to the ADD RX port on the 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C cards
or the AD port on the 80-WXC-C card.
Step 5 On the 15216 patch panel1,2, locate the COM RX port and insert one end of an LC-LC cable.
Step 6 Route the LC-LC cable through the 15216 patch panel1,2 to the 40-SMR1-C1
, 40-SMR2-C1
or
80-WXC-C2
card on Side A of the node.
Step 7 Connect the other end of the LC-LC cable to the DROP TX port on the 40-SMR1-C1
, 40-SMR2-C1
, or
80-WXC-C2
card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 8 For a hub or ROADM node, repeat Steps 2 through 7 to cable the other side of the shelf to the second
patch panel. For a terminal node, go to Step 9.
Note For a ROADM node using 40-SMR2-C1
cards, you must use a special reversed MPO cable
(15454-MPO-XMPO-2=) to connect the EXP ports of the Side A 40-SMR2-C to the EXP ports of the
Side B 40-SMR2-C1
.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
2. The 80-WXC-C card can be connected to the odd patch panel (15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD) and the even patch panel (15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN ) in the
presence of interleaver and deinterleaver pluggable (15216-MD-ID-50 or 15216-MD-48-CM).
3. 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel.
4. 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN patch panel.4-101
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes
Step 1 Open the patch panel tray:
• 40-channel patch panel tray—On the front of the patch panel tray, push the tabs on the left and right
sides inward to release the lock on the tray. Pull the patch panel tray away from the shelf until it is
fully opened.
• Mesh patch panel tray—On the front of the patch panel tray, push the tabs on the left and right sides
inward to open the front door. Raise the plunger located to the right of the TEST ACCESS TX port
and pull the tray away from the rack.
Purpose This procedure describes how to install fiber-optic cables to create mesh
nodes. You must route fiber-optic cables from:
• 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards in a mesh node to the 40-channel
(80-port) patch panel tray (15454-PP-80)
• 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C cards in a mesh node to one of the mesh
patch panel trays (four-degree or eight-degree)
• 40-SMR2-C cards in a mesh node to the 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel
tray.
Tools/Equipment Mesh nodes require the following equipment. The cards and patch panels
should already be installed before you begin this procedure.
• One 40-MUX-C card per side of the mesh node (up to 8 sides per node)
• One 40-DMX-C card per side of the mesh node (up to 8 sides per node)
• One 40-channel patch panel tray per side of the mesh node (up to 8
sides per node)
• One 40-WXC-C card per side (up to 8 sides per node)
• One 80-WXC-C card per side (up to 8 sides per node)
• One 40-SMR2-C card per side (up to 4 sides per node)
• One MPO-MPO fiber-optic cable per side (up to 8 sides per node)
• One LC-LC fiber-optic cable per side (up to 8 sides per node)
• One PP-MESH-4 (four-degree), PP-MESH-8 (eight-degree), or
15454-PP-4-SMR (four-degree) mesh patch panel tray depending on
the type of mesh node you want to install
Note Use the PP-MESH-4 or PP-MESH-8 mesh patch panel trays for the
40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C cards and the 15454-PP-4-SMR mesh
patch panel tray for the 40-SMR2-C card.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray,
page 4-93
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-102
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G430 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards in a
Mesh Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-102.
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G431 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards in a
Mesh Node to a Mesh Patch Panel Tray” task on page 4-104.
Step 4 Close the patch panel tray:
• 40-channel patch panel tray: Push the tray back toward the rack until it locks into place.
• Mesh patch panel tray: Raise the plunger located on the right of the TEST ACCESS Tx port and
push the tray until the plunger locks into the closed position.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G430 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards in
a Mesh Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray
Step 1 Choose Side A of the shelf to cable the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards.
Purpose This task describes how to route fiber-optic cables from 40-MUX-C and
40-DMX-C cards in mesh node to the 40-channel (80-port) patch panel tray
(15454-PP-80). In a mesh node, one 40-channel patch panel tray is required
for each direction. The Side A 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards will
connect to the Side A 40-channel patch panel. The Side B 40-MUX-C and
40-DMX-C cards will connect to the Side B 40-channel patch panel, and so
forth, up to a maximum of an eight-degree mesh node (Sides A through H).
Tools/Equipment The cards and patch panels should already be installed before you begin
this procedure.
• One 40-MUX-C card per side of the mesh node
• One 40-DMX-C card per side of the mesh node
• One 40-channel patch panel trays per side of the mesh node,
preinstalled with MPO cables (each MPO cable is terminated on one
end with one MPO connector and on the other end with eight LC-type
connectors)
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray,
page 4-93
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-103
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note If you are cabling any cards from the right side of the shelf (Slots 12 through 17), you must first
perform the “DLP-G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray” task
on page 4-93 to route the MPO cables out of the right side of the patch panel tray, or route the
cables through a fiber storage panel.
Step 2 On the patch panel, locate the MPO cables and connectors.
Step 3 At the 40-MUX-C card in the node, plug the MPO connector labeled 1 RX on an MPO cable into the top
Add RX (30.3–35.8) port of the card.
Step 4 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-RX into the Add RX (36.6–42.1) port on the card.
Step 5 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-RX into the Add RX (42.9–48.5) port on the card.
Step 6 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-RX into the Add RX (49.3–54.9) port on the card.
Step 7 Plug the MPO connector labeled 5-RX into the Add RX (55.7–61.4) port on the card.
Step 8 At the adjacent 40-DMX-C card in the same side of the shelf, plug the MPO connector labeled 1 TX on
the MPO cable.
Step 9 Plug the MPO connector labeled 2-TX into the Drop TX (36.6–42.1) port on the card.
Step 10 Plug the MPO connector labeled 3-TX into the Drop TX (42.9–48.5) port on the card.
Step 11 Plug the MPO connector labeled 4-TX into the Drop TX (49.3–54.9) port on the card.
Step 12 Plug the MPO connector labeled 5-TX into the Drop TX (55.7–61.4) port on the card.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 13 Repeat Steps 2 through 12 for the remaining sides of the mesh node (Sides B through H, depending on
the type of mesh node you want to cable).
Step 14 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).4-104
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G431 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards in
a Mesh Node to a Mesh Patch Panel Tray
Step 1 Choose Side A of the shelf to cable the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C card to the mesh patch panel.
Step 2 On the mesh patch panel, locate the EXP TX A port (for PP-MESH-4 and PP-MESH-8) or EXP-A port
(for 15454-PP-4-SMR) and insert one end of an MPO-MPO cable.
Step 3 Route the MPO cable through the mesh patch panel and out to the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C card on
Side A of the node.
Step 4 Connect the other end of the MPO cable to the EXP RX port on the 40-WXC-C, or EXP port on the
40-SMR2-C card.
Purpose This task connects fiber-optic cables from the 40-WXC-C or 40-SMR2-C
cards in a mesh node to the 4-degree (PP-MESH-4 or 15454-PP-4-SMR) or
8-degree (PP-MESH-8) mesh patch panel. The four-degree patch panel
allows up to 4 sides to be used per node, while the eight-degree patch panel
allows up to 8 sides to be used per node.
Tools/Equipment The cards and patch panel trays should already be installed before you
begin this procedure.
• One 40-WXC-C card per side (up to 8 sides per node)
• One 40-SMR2-C card per side (up to 4 sides per node)
• One MPO-MPO fiber-optic cable per side
• One LC-LC fiber-optic cable per side
• One PP-MESH-4 (four-degree), PP-MESH-8 (eight-degree), or
15454-PP-4-SMR (four-degree) mesh patch panel tray
• Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report
Note Use the PP-MESH-4 or PP-MESH-8 mesh patch panel trays for the
40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C cards and the 15454-PP-4-SMR mesh
patch panel tray for the 40-SMR2-C card.
Prerequisite Procedures • “DLP-G28 Install the Fiber Patch-Panel Tray” in theCisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• “DLP-G29 Install the Fiber-Storage Tray” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
• NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
• DLP-G348 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout Report,
page 4-66
• Install and route fiber-optic cables on the 15454-PP-4-SMR mesh
patch panel. For more information, see the Installing Cisco ONS
15454-PP-4-SMR Patch Panel.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-105
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Note If you are connecting a 40-SMR2-C card to the 15454-PP-4-SMR mesh patch panel, skip steps
5 through 7.
Step 5 On the PP-MESH-4 or PP-MESH-8 mesh patch panel, locate the COM RX A port and insert one end of
an LC-LC cable.
Step 6 Route the LC cable through the mesh patch panel to the 40-WXC-C card on Side A of the node.
Step 7 Connect the other end of the LC cable to the EXP TX port on the 40-WXC-C.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 as necessary to cable Sides B through D for a 4-degree patch panel, and Sides B
through H for an 8-degree patch panel.
Caution When you close the patch panel tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must be
equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the patch panel tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G191 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on Passthrough ROADM
Nodes
Step 1 Choose either the East or West side of the first shelf to cable the 32WSS card for the first ROADM node.
Purpose This procedure routes fiber-optic cables from a 32WSS card in a ROADM
node in one shelf to the corresponding 32WSS card in a ROADM node in
another shelf. The purpose of this routing is to connect East and West
intershelf ROADMs in a passthrough configuration.
Tools/Equipment Each ROADM node requires the listed equipment. The cards and
fiber-storage trays should already be installed before you begin this
procedure.
• One 32WSS card
• One fiber-storage tray
• Two 3-meter fiber-optic cables, each terminated with a single LC
connector on each end.
• Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G29 Install the Fiber-Storage Tray” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
DLP-G348 Use the Cisco TransportPlanner Shelf Layout Report, page 4-66
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-106
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 Choose the corresponding West or East side of the second shelf to cable the 32WSS card for the second
ROADM node.
Step 3 On the front of the fiber-storage tray that will be used for routing the fiber-optic cable, push the tabs on
the left and right sides inward to release the lock on the tray.
Step 4 Pull the fiber-storage tray away from the shelf until it is fully opened.
Step 5 Open the fold-down door located at the bottom of both shelf assemblies to expose the cable-routing
channels for each (Figure 4-23).
Figure 4-23 Managing Cables on the Front Panel
Step 6 Plug one end of the first 3-meter fiber-optic cable into the EXP-TX connector on the first 32WSS card.
Step 7 Route the fiber-optic cable through the shelf cable-routing channel and cutout on the appropriate side of
the shelf assembly, as necessary.
Step 8 Route the fiber-optic cable through the vertical fiber guide as needed to reach the entry to the
fiber-storage tray.
Step 9 Thread the cable into the fiber-storage tray at the appropriate side and around the first bend radius
delimiter as shown (Figure 4-24).
Step 10 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the slack management cable retainers in the fiber-storage
tray (Figure 4-24).
FAN FAIL CRIT MAJ MIN
145262
Cable-routing
channel posts
Fold down
front door4-107
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-24 Fiber-Storage Tray
Caution When you close the fiber-storage tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the fiber-storage tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 11 Thread the fiber cable through the second bend delimiter and out the appropriate side of the fiber-storage
tray as necessary.
Step 12 Route the fiber-optic cable through the vertical fiber guide as needed to reach the second ROADM shelf
where the second 32WSS is located.
Step 13 Route the fiber-optic cable through the shelf cutout and through the shelf cable routing channel as
needed.
Step 14 Plug the end of the 3-meter fiber-optic cable into the EXP-RX port of the second 32WSS card.
Step 15 Plug one end of the second 3-meter fiber-optic cable into the EXP-TX connector on the second 32WSS
card.
Step 16 Follow Step 7 through Step 14 to connect the EXP-TX connector of the second 32WSS card to the
EXP-RX port of the first 32WSS card.
Step 17 Close the fold-down doors located at the bottom of both shelf assemblies and slide the fiber-storage tray
back into its normal locked position.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
240291
West
entry/exit
Bend radius delimiter Slack management
cable retainers
Bend radius delimiter
East
entry/exit4-108
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G141 Install Fiber-Optic Cables for Y-Cable Protection
Modules
Note Refer to the “Shelf Assembly Hardware” and “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapters in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for more information about Y-cable protection.
Note To use Y-cable protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, the cards must be
provisioned in 10GE MXP, 20GE MXP, or 10GE TXP mode. (See the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 6-8.) Y-cable protection cannot be used
for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards that are provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode.
Step 1 As needed, complete the “DLP-G375 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the
FlexLayer Shelf” task on page 4-109.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “DLP-G376 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the Y-Cable
Module Tray” task on page 4-110.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure installs and routes fiber-optic cables from the client signal
to the Y-cable protection module (single mode or multimode), and from the
Y-cable module to the transponder node. Using one Y-cable protection
module, you can protect one client signal with two TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards, and two client
signals with four TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
OTU2_XP cards. You can use Y-cable protection modules that you have
installed in a FleyLayer shelf, or Y-cable modules installed in a Y-cable
module tray.
Tools/Equipment Fiber-optic cables
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G32 Install the Y-Cable Protection Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf”
in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
“DLP-G377 Install the Y-Cable Protection Modules in the Y-Cable Module
Tray” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-109
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G375 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the FlexLayer
Shelf
Step 1 Referring to the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report, install a fiber-optic cable between
a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card and a Y-cable module.
If you want to protect one client signal, connect the fiber-optic cables according to either Table 4-6 or
Table 4-7. To protect two client signals using a single Y-cable module, connect the cables according to
both Table 4-6 and Table 4-7.
Purpose This task installs fiber-optic cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards to the Y-cable modules installed
in the FlexLayer shelves, and from the Y-cable modules to the client
devices.
Tools/Equipment Fiber-optic cables
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G32 Install the Y-Cable Protection Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf”
in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None
Table 4-6 Cable Connections for Y-Cable Protection of One Client Signal
From To (Y-Cable Port Number)
Client 1 TX port 10
Client 1 RX port 5
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 1 TX port 1
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 1 RX port 2
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 2TX port 6
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE2RX port 7
Table 4-7 Cable Connections for Y-Cable Protection of a Second Client Signal
From To (Y-Cable Port Number)
Client 2 TX port 12
Client 2 RX port 11
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE3 TX port 3
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 3 RX port 4
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 4 TX port 8
TXP/MXP/GE_XP/GE_XPE/10GE_XP/10GE_XPE 4 RX port 94-110
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 2 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in the fiber-storage tray as you
install cables between the Y-cable module and the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards (Figure 4-12 on page 4-80).
Caution When you close the fiber-storage tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the fiber-storage tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 3 Install a fiber-optic cable between the client device and the Y-cable module where you just installed a
fiber-optic cable to the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card.
Step 4 Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for each Y-cable module you need to use for Y-cable protection.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G376 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the Y-Cable
Module Tray
Step 1 Open the drawer of the tray by pushing inward on the latches located at the left and right front of the tray.
Step 2 On each Y-cable module you will connect, use the tab to slide the module up so that it is fully extended
and easily accessible in the tray.
Step 3 Referring to the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report, install a 4-meter (13.12-foot)
fiber-optic cable (single-mode or multimode, as appropriate) between a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card and the Y-cable module installed farthest to the left. Proceed according to
the port label affixed to the front of the tray to identify the ports on each installed module (Figure 4-25).
Purpose This task installs fiber-optic cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards to the Y-cable modules installed
in the Y-cable module tray, and from the Y-cable modules to the client
devices.
Tools/Equipment Fiber-optic cables (4-meter [13.12-foot]), single-mode or multimode as
appropriate
Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures “DLP-G32 Install the Y-Cable Protection Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf”
in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level None4-111
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-25 Y-Cable Protection Port Label
Note You can use the label shown in Figure 4-25 to take notes as to which wavelength/port you are
connecting to each Y-cable module. “W” denotes the indicated Working port on the TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card. “P” denotes the indicated Protect port on the
TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card.
Note Protective covers are installed over the third and fourth ports on the Y-cable modules because
they are not used.
As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in theY-cable module tray as
you install cables between the Y-cable module and the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE card (Figure 4-26).
Client TX
Client RX
TXP W TX
TXP W RX TXP W RX TXP W RX TXP W RXTXP W RX TXP W RX TXP W RX TXP W RX
TXP P RX
TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX TXP P TX
TXP P RX TXP P RX TXP P RX TXP P RX TXP P RX TXP P RX TXP P RX
TXP W TX TXP W TX TXP W TX TXP W TX TXP W TX TXP W TX TXP W TX
Client RX Client RX Client RX Client RX Client RX Client RX Client RX
Client TX Client TX Client TX Client TX Client TX Client TX Client TX
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8
1446774-112
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Figure 4-26 Y-Cable Protection Module Tray
Caution When you close the Y-cable module tray, the cables must not be pinched, and the cable bend radius must
be equal to or greater than the minimum radius that is recommended in your site specifications. As you
route each cable through the tray, make sure that adequate cable slack remains.
Step 4 Referring to the Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report, install a fiber-optic cable of
adequate length (single-mode or multimode, as appropriate) between the Y-cable module and the client
signal that you want to protect.
Step 5 As needed, route slack fiber-optic cable around the round cable retainers in theY-cable module tray as
you install cables between the Y-cable module and the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE card.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each Y-cable module you need to use for Y-cable protection.
Step 7 To close the tray, unlock the drawer from the open position by depressing the red lock at the back left of
the tray and push the tray closed.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
144678
LC-LC cables
Y cable modules4-113
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to provision the
DWDM cable connections. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration File” procedure
on page 4-49 to import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE update file.
Step 3 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcords tabs.
Note The Internal Patchcords tab does not show OPT-PRE DCU connections or span connections.
Note The number of rows in the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcords tab are created
dynamically, as per the number of sides present in a node.
Note On the 15454-M2 and the 15454-M6 shelves, you can create internal patchcords between the
TNC card and the optical amplifier cards.
Step 4 Verify that the connections in the Internal Patchcords tab match the connections in the Cisco
TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report for the DWDM cards (see the “DLP-G349 Use the Cisco
TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report” task on page 4-80). The Internal Patchcords tab will not
show OPT-PRE DCU connections or span connections.
Step 5 Complete the “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually” procedure on page 4-114 for any
connections that require manual provisioning, for example, to create patchcords between TXP and MXP
trunk ports and OCH filter ports. If you need to delete a connection, complete the “DLP-G355 Delete an
Internal Patchcord” task on page 4-123.
Note Connections related to optical bypass circuits must be manually provisioned.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure imports the internal patchcords using the CTP XML file.
Internal patchcords can also be manually provisioned.
Tools/Equipment • Cisco TransportPlanner shelf layout
• Cisco TransportPlanner Internal Connections Report
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-114
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually
Note Use only one management interface to complete the creation of internal patchcords. For example, do not
begin the internal patchcord creation using the TL1 interface or CTP XML file and end the internal
patchcord creation using CTC.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 Choose one of the following link types for the internal patchcord:
• Trunk to Trunk (L2)—Creates a bidirectional patchcord between the trunk ports of GE_XP and
10GE_XP cards. If you choose this option, complete “DLP-G354 Create an Internal Patchcord
Manually Using the Trunk to Trunk (L2) Option” task on page 4-115.
• OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter—Creates an internal patchcord between an optical channel trunk port on
a TXP/MXP stage card (which includes TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, or ITU-T line cards) and an optical channel filter port on an add/drop stage
card (which includes 32MUX, 40-MUX-C, 32WSS, 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE, 32DMX, 32DMX-O,
40DMX, 40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C cards).
You can use this option to also create an internal patchcord between an optical channel trunk port
on a TXP/MXP stage card (which includes TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE,
ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, or ITU-T line cards) and the COM port on a PSM card in channel protection
configuration (where, PSM card is equipped between one TXP/MXP stage and two add/drop stages).
In this case, the Internal Patchcord Creation wizard will prompt you to create patchcords between
the working and protect ports on the PSM card and the ports on the two different add/drop stage
cards (which includes 32MUX, 40-MUX-C, 32WSS, 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE, 32DMX, 32DMX-O,
40DMX, 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or 80-WXC-C cards). If you choose this option, complete
“DLP-G547 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter Option”
task on page 4-116.
• OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter—Creates an unidirectional or bidirectional internal patchcord between a
MUX input port and a DMX output port. If you choose this option, complete “DLP-G548 Create an
Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter Option” task on page 4-118.
• OTS to OTS—Creates a unidirectional or bidirectional internal patchcord between two optical
transport section (OTS) ports, between two optical cards, between an optical card and a passive card,
between two passive cards, or between the TNC card and an optical amplifier card. This option also
includes OSC ports. If you choose this option, complete “DLP-G549 Create an Internal Patchcord
Manually Using the OTS to OTS Option” task on page 4-120.
Purpose This procedure creates an internal patchcord manually.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-115
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Optical Path—Creates an internal patchcord between two optical cards, or between an optical card
and a passive card. If you choose this option, complete “DLP-G531 Create an Internal Patchcord
Manually Using the Optical Path Option” task on page 4-122.
Note Manual creation of OTS/OCH to OTS/OCH internal patchcords is not required for standard
DWDM nodes. However, manual creation might be required for non-standard nodes, for
example, a hub node that has wavelength selective switches installed. In such cases, manual
creation is recommended by Cisco Transport Planner.
Note To successfully create an internal patchcord between WSS/DMX channel port and TXP trunk
port, choose the TXP as the source endpoint and WSS/DMX as the destination endpoint.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G354 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Trunk to Trunk (L2)
Option
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 On the Internal Patchcord Type Selection page, choose the patchcord type as Trunk to Trunk (L2) and
click Next.
Step 4 On the Internal Patchcord Origination page, provision the internal patchcord origination parameters:
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the Internal Patchcord Termination page, provision the internal patchcord termination parameters:
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays the
list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Purpose This task creates a bidirectional internal patchcord between the trunk ports
of two GE_XP or 10GE_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-116
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 Review the display-only information on the Internal Patchcord Origination Reverse page. This page
shows the slot, and port that CTC will use for the opposite internal patchcord origination route.
Step 9 Click Next.
Step 10 Review the information displayed on the Internal Patchcord Termination Reverse page. This
display-only page shows the slot, and port that CTC will use for the reverse internal patchcord
termination route.
Step 11 Click Finish. The new internal patchcord appears in the Internal Patchcord table.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G547 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Trunk to
OCH-Filter Option
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 On the Internal Patchcord Type Selection page, choose the patchcord type as OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter
option and click Next.
Step 4 On the Internal PatchcordOCH Attributes page, provision the following parameters:
• OCHNC Wavelength—Sets the OCHNC wavelength for the OCH trunk to OCH filter internal
patchcord. Use the unnamed band selection box below to display C-band or L-band wavelengths in
the OCHNC Wavelength field. Provision the OCHNC wavelength to the wavelength provisioned for
the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, or ITU-T line
card trunk port.
• PSM Protection—Select this check box if you have provisioned a PSM card in channel protection
configuration.
• Colorless—Select this check box if you want to create a colorless patchcord.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 On the Internal Patchcord Origination page, provision the internal patchcord origination parameters:
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Purpose This task creates a bidirectional internal patchcord between a TXP, MXP,
or XP trunk and a DWDM add and drop channel port.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-117
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 7 In the Internal Patchcord Termination page, provision the internal patchcord termination parameters:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 8 Click Next.
Step 9 In the Internal Patchcord Origination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord origination route:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord originates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
Note Choose the same passive card that you chose in Step 7.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 In the internal Patchcord Termination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord termination route:
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 12 Click Next.
Step 13 Click Finish. The new internal patchcord appears in the Internal Patchcord table.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).4-118
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G548 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Filter to
OCH-Filter Option
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 On the Internal Patchcord Type Selection page, choose the patchcord type as OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter
option and click Next.
Step 4 On the Internal Patchcord OCH Attributes page, provision the following parameters:
• OCHNC Wavelength—Sets the OCHNC wavelength for the OCH trunk to OCH filter internal
patchcord. Use the unnamed band selection box below to display C-band or L-band wavelengths in
the OCHNC Wavelength field. Provision the OCHNC wavelength to the wavelength provisioned for
the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, or ITU-T line
card trunk port.
• Bidirectional—If checked, creates a bidirectional internal patchcord.
• PSM Protection—Select this check box if you have provisioned a PSM card in channel protection
configuration.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 On the Internal Patchcord Origination page, provision the internal patchcord origination parameters:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 7 In the Internal Patchcord Termination page, provision the internal patchcord termination parameters:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
Purpose This task creates a unidirectional or bidirectional internal patchcord
between two DWDM add and drop channel ports.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-119
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 8 If you did not choose bidirectional in Step 4, continue with Step 13. Otherwise, continue with the next
step.
Step 9 Click Next.
Step 10 In the Internal Patchcord Origination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord origination route:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord originates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
Note Choose the same passive card that you chose in Step 7.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 11 Click Next.
Step 12 In the internal Patchcord Termination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord termination route:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
Note Choose the same passive card that you chose in Step 6.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 13 Click Finish. The new internal patchcord appears in the Internal Patchcord table.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).4-120
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G549 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OTS to OTS Option
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 On the Internal Patchcord Type Selection page, choose the patchcord type as OTS to OTS and click
Next.
Step 4 On the Internal Patchcords OTS Attributes page, provision the following parameters:
• Bidirectional—If checked, creates a bidirectional internal patchcord.
• MPO Connection—Creates all the patchcords between two MPO connectors. If this option is
checked, the bidirectional option is disabled.
• Exclude Used Port—If checked, excludes the used ports for patchcord creation. If unchecked, more
than one patchcord can be created starting from the same port.
• Grid Filter—Select the grid option from the drop-down list.
• Port Type—Select the port type from the drop-down list. The options are:
– OSC only—Cards with OSC ports and OSCM cards are available for patchcord creation. The
MPO Connection and Exclude Used Ports checkboxes are disabled and the Bidirectional option
is checked.
– DC only—Cards with DC ports and passive DCUs are available for patchcord creation. The
MPO Connection and Exclude Used Ports checkboxes are disabled and the Bidirectional option
is checked. Allows to create an internal patchcord between an optical card and a passive card.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 On the Internal Patchcord Origination page, provision the internal patchcord origination parameters:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord originates.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
• MPO—Choose the port where the internal patchcord originates.CTC automatically displays the list
of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose. This field is visible only if you
have chosen MPO connection in Step 4.
Purpose This task creates a unidirectional or bidirectional internal patchcord
between two optical transport section (OTS) ports.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-121
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 In the Internal Patchcord Termination page, provision the internal patchcord termination parameters:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
• MPO—Choose the port where the internal patchcord originates.CTC automatically displays the list
of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose. This field is visible only if you
have chosen MPO connection in Step 4.
Step 9 If you did not choose bidirectional in Step 4, continue with Step 14. Otherwise, continue with the next
step.
Step 10 Click Next.
Step 11 In the Internal Patchcord Origination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord origination route:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord originates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord originates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
Note Choose the same passive card that you chose in Step 8.
• Tx Port—Choose the TX port where the internal patchcord originates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 12 Click Next.
Step 13 In the internal Patchcord Termination Reverse page, provision the internal patchcord parameters for the
reverse internal patchcord termination route:
• Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Side—Choose the side where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if you have
chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is
visible only if you have chosen the type as Optical Card.
• Unit—Choose the passive card where the internal patchcord terminates. This field is visible only if
you have chosen the type as Passive Card.
Note Choose the same passive card that you chose in Step 6.4-122
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Rx Port—Choose the RX port where the internal patchcord terminates. CTC automatically displays
the list of ports that are available depending on the link type you choose.
Step 14 Click Finish. The new internal patchcord appears in the Internal Patchcord table.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G531 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Optical Path Option
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 On the Internal Patchcord Type Selection page, choose the patchcord type as Optical Path and click
Next.
Step 4 On the Internal Patchcord Card List page, provision the following parameters:
• Card From Selection area:
– Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord originates.
– Shelf—(Multishelf nodes only) Choose the shelf where the internal patchcord originates.
– Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord originates.
• Card To Selection area:
– Type—Choose the type of card (optical or passive card) where the internal patchcord
terminates.
– Shelf—(Multishelf nodes only) Choose the shelf where the internal patchcord terminates.
– Slot—Choose the slot containing the card where the internal patchcord terminates.
• Choose the required patchcord from the list that CTC generates.
Step 5 Click Next to continue creating internal patchcords between cards and repeat Step 4. In the Internal
Patchcord Card List page that follows, CTC automatically populates the Card From Selection fields with
the values you entered in the Card To Selection fields in the previous page.
Step 6 After creating all the internal patchcords between cards, click Finish. The new internal patchcords
appear on the Internal Patchcord table.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task creates an internal patchcord manually between two optical cards
or between an optical card and a passive card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-123
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcord tabs.
Step 2 Click the connection you want to delete.
Step 3 Click Delete, then click Yes.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G209 Create, Edit, and Delete Optical Sides
Note For any node type including mesh nodes, the association between the shelf, line card and side is reported
in the left top window of CTC (Vital Status Pane) in the mode view.
Note For mesh nodes, the association between sides and the 40-WXC-C cards can be found in the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Internal Patchcords screen.
For example:
PP-MESH, LC (A): Shelf 1, Slot 3 (40 WXC), port EXP-TX
PP-MESH, MPO (A): Shelf 1, Slot 3 (40 WXC), port EXP-RX
The above rows indicate that the:
WXC port located in Shelf 1, Slot 3 is connected to the LC connector A (Side A) on PP-MESH.
WXC port located in Shelf 1, Slot 3 is connected to the MPO connector A (Side A) on PP-MESH.
Purpose This task deletes an internal patchcord.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This procedure allows you to create, edit, and delete optical sides on a
DWDM node.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration
File, page 4-49
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-124
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to provision the
optical side. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the following tasks:
• Complete the “DLP-G491 Create an Optical Side” task on page 4-124.
• Complete the “DLP-G492 Edit an Optical Side” task on page 4-125.
• Complete the “DLP-G480 Delete an Optical Side” task on page 4-125.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G491 Create an Optical Side
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Optical Sides tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Side dialog box, enter the following:
• Side ID—Choose a side ID (A, B,C, D, E, F, G, or H) from the drop-down list.
• Line In—Choose an RX port from the drop-down list.
• Line Out—Choose a TX port from the drop-down list.
Note For a terminal node equipped with a PSM card in line or multiplex section protection
configuration, you can only choose the W-RX and W-TX ports while creating an optical side.
After you create the working (w) optical side, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card
automatically creates the protected (p) optical side involving the P-RX and P-TX ports of the
PSM card. CTC refreshes the Optical Sides tab with both the working and protected optical
sides.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task creates an optical side. For more details on optical sides, refer to
the “Node Reference” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-125
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G492 Edit an Optical Side
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Optical Sides tabs.
Step 2 Click the optical side that you want to edit.
Step 3 Click Edit.
Step 4 In the Edit Side ID dialog box, choose a side ID (A, B,C, D, E, F, G, or H) from the drop-down list.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G480 Delete an Optical Side
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Optical Sides tabs.
Step 2 Click the optical side that you want to delete.
Step 3 Click Delete.
Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to continue.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task edits the side ID of an optical side.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task deletes an optical side.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-126
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations
Note This procedure automatically turns on any OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE cards installed in the
DWDM ring.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to provision the
OSC terminations. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Comm Channels > OSC tabs.
Step 3 In the OSC Terminations area, click Create.
Step 4 In the Create OSC Terminations dialog box, choose the ports where you want to create the OSC
termination. To select more than one port, press the Shift key (to select a range of ports) or the Ctrl key
(to select multiple individual ports).
Note The number of OSC terminations that you create depends on the node type defined by
Cisco TransportPlanner. Terminal nodes require one OSC termination. Hub, OADM, and
ROADM nodes require two OSC terminations.
Step 5 In the Layer 3 area, check the OSI box if the following conditions are met:
• The OSC termination is between the ONS 15454 and another ONS node.
• Third party NEs that use the OSI protocol stack are on the same network.
If you checked OSI, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 6.
a. Click Next.
b. Provision the following fields:
• Router—Choose the OSI router.
• ESH—Set the ESH propagation frequency. End system NEs transmit ESHs to inform other ESs
and ISs about the NSAPs they serve. The default is 10 seconds. The range is 10 to 1000 seconds.
• ISH—Sets the ISH PDU propagation frequency. Intermediate system NEs send ISHs to other
ESs and ISs to inform them about the IS NETs it serves. The default is 10 seconds. The range
is 10 to 1000 seconds.
Purpose This procedure provisions the OSC terminations. The OSC provides a
bidirectional channel that connects all nodes within a DWDM ring. The
OSC carries a supervisory data channel and synchronizes clocking at
network nodes. The OSC also carries a user data channel.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration
File, page 4-49
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-127
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• IIH—Sets the IIH PDU propagation frequency. The IS-IS Hello PDUs establish and maintain
adjacencies between ISs. The default is 3 seconds. The range is 1 to 600 seconds.
• Metric—Sets the cost for sending packets on the LAN subnet. The IS-IS protocol uses the cost
to calculate the shortest routing path. The default metric cost for LAN subnets is 20. It normally
should not be changed.
Step 6 Click Finish. Ports are automatically placed in service. The following alarms might appear in the node
view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) Alarms tab Description field. They will
remain until all the network OSC connections between the adjacent nodes are created:
• SDCC Termination Failure (ANSI) or RS-DCC Termination Failure (ETSI) on the OSCM or
OSC-CSM card
• LOS on the OC-3 port (Port 1) on the OSCM, OSC-CSM, or OPT-BST card
• OPWR-LFAIL on the OPT-BST or OSC-CSM card
Note After the OSC termination is created, the line ports are placed in service and span power levels
are checked.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup
Note ANS provisioning parameters must be calculated by Cisco Transport Planner. ANS provisioning
parameters must be manually changed only by Cisco qualified personnel. Setting wrong ANS
provisioning (either as preamplifier or booster input power thresholds) may impact traffic.
Purpose This procedure runs the Launch ANS function. Launch ANS applies the
ANS parameters (calculated in the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco
TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration File” procedure on page 4-49)
to the node and to the ports for cards installed in the node. The applied
ANS parameters include span loss values, threshold values, power
references, and others. Launch ANS also sets the VOA references based on
the calculated power references.
Tools/Equipment The Cisco TransportPlanner Installation Parameters file
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 4-64
NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 4-113
NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration
File, page 4-49
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-128
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to run ANS. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Referring to the Cisco TransportPlanner Installation Parameters (see Table 4-1 on page 4-4), identify the
parameters that have a Yes in the Manually Set column. If there are no parameters that have a Yes in the
Manually Set column, continue with Step 6.
Step 3 In CTC, display the card where the parameter is to be manually provisioned in card view.
Step 4 Enter the specified Calibration parameter from the Cisco TransportPlanner Installation Parameters table.
Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each parameter in the Cisco TransportPlanner Installation Parameters table
that displays Yes in the Manually Set field.
Step 6 Change to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 7 Click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 8 Click Launch ANS.
Step 9 In the Apply Launch ANS dialog box, click Yes.
Step 10 In the Launch ANS confirmation dialog box, click OK.
Step 11 Verify that one of the following status appears in the Result column for all the ports:
• Success - Changed—The parameter setpoint was recalculated successfully.
• Success - Unchanged—The parameter setpoint did not need recalculation.
• Not applicable—When ports are not in use.
If one of the following statuses is shown, complete the provided instructions:
• Fail - Out of Range—The calculated setpoint is outside the expected range. If this status appears, do
not continue until you have investigated and cleared the cause. This status might appear because of
an error in the Cisco TransportPlanner file. It could also appear because the insertion loss of the
installed cards is greater than the estimated insertion loss calculated by Cisco TransportPlanner. If
so, the Cisco TransportPlanner file will need to be recalculated. All of these possible causes should
be investigated. Contact your next level of support if you are unable to clear this status.
• Fail - Missing Input Parameter—The parameter could not be calculated because the required
provisioning data is unknown or unavailable. If this status appears, check if the correct Cisco
TransportPlanner file was imported.
• Unchanged - Port in IS—The parameter could not be calculated because the port is in service. This
status should normally not appear at this point in node turn-up. If it does, display the card in card
view, change the port administrative state to OOS,DSLB (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI), and
repeat Steps 6 through 11.
Note If the ports that are in service carry circuits, you must delete the circuits before you can place
the ports out of service. See the “DLP-G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections” task
on page 8-11, the “DLP-G418 Delete an Optical Channel Trail” task on page 8-19, or the
“DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-26.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.4-129
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to verify the
OSCM or OSC-CSM transmit power. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Disable automatic laser shutdown (ALS) on Side A or (for terminal nodes) the terminal side OSCM or
OSC-CSM card:
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the Side A or
terminal-side OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. From the ALS Mode drop-down list, choose Disable.
d. Click Apply. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 3 If an OSC-CSM or OSCM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue with
Step 4.
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the Side B
OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. From the ALS Mode drop-down list, choose Disable.
d. Click Apply. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G314 Verify OSCM Transmit Power” task on page 4-130.
Step 5 Change ALS to Auto Restart on the Side A or (for terminal nodes) the terminal side OSCM or OSC-CSM
card:
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the Side A or
terminal-side OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
c. From the ALS Mode drop-down list, choose Auto Restart.
d. Click Apply. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 6 If an OSC-CSM or OSCM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, you have
completed this procedure.
a. In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click Side B OSCM
or OSC-CSM card.
b. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
Purpose This procedure verifies that the transmit power for the ONS 15454 OSCM
and the OSC-CSM cards is correct.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 4-127
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-130
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
c. From the ALS Mode drop-down list, choose Auto Restart.
d. Click Apply. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G314 Verify OSCM Transmit Power
Step 1 Display the OSCM card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Record the Port 3 (OSC TX) Power value: _____.
Step 4 Change to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), then click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
Step 5 Record the OSC Power value under the OSCM card in the tree view.
Step 6 If the power value recorded in Step 3 is not within the range of +/– 0.5 dBm recorded in Step 5, complete
the following steps. Otherwise, continue with Step 7.
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs. Verify that the ALS Command is set to OSRI Off. If not, choose
Off from the drop-down list. Click Apply, then click Yes.
b. Clean the optical connections. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on
page 14-31.
c. Complete the following procedures:
• Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
• Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
• Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
d. Repeat Step 3 through 6. If the power level is still not within the specified range, contact your next
level of support.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies that the transmit power of the OSCM card is correct.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only4-131
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf
Mode
Caution An optical shelf in a multishelf configuration must be provisioned as the node controller shelf and not a
subtending shelf, otherwise traffic will be dropped. If no slots are available on an optical shelf to install
the MS-ISC-100T cards needed for a node controller shelf, install and configure the Cisco Catalyst 2950.
See the “NTP-G302 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending Shelves to a Catalyst
2950” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node that you want to configure as a
multishelf node.
Step 2 If you want to configure a shelf as the node controller, continue with Step 3. If you want to configure a
shelf as a subtending shelf, continue with Step 4.
Step 3 To set up the login node as the node controller, complete the following steps:
a. In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
General > Multishelf Config tabs.
b. Click Enable as Node Controller.
c. From the LAN Config drop-down list, complete one of the following:
Purpose This procedure upgrades nodes in single-shelf mode to multishelf mode.
Tools/Equipment The node you plan to use as the node controller must be equipped with
optical units and cannot have a cross-connect card installed. Any nodes
that you plan to add to the multishelf configuration as subtending shelves
can be equipped with transponder and muxponder units. For more
information on multishelf configurations, see the “Node Reference”
chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
One of the following procedures:
• “NTP-G301 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending
Shelves to an MS-ISC-100T Card” in theCisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide, or
• “NTP-G302 Connect the ONS 15454 Multishelf Node and Subtending
Shelves to a Catalyst 2950” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide.
• “NTP-G308 Connect the ONS 15454 M6 Multishelf Node and the
ONS 15454 M6 Subtending Shelves” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide.
• “DLP-G682 Connect the ONS 15454 M6 as the Node Controller in a
Mixed Multishelf Configuration” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only4-132
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Choose Ethernet Switch if MS-ISC-100T cards or the Catalyst 2950 switches are already
installed and configured.
• Choose Stand-Alone if MS-ISC-100T cards are not installed yet but will be in the final layout
or if this is a line amplifier or an OSC-only site. This option will allow a safe migration of the
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC database when the multishelf configuration is complete.
d. Click Apply.
e. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to allow the node to reboot. The CTC view changes to
network view and the node icon changes to gray. Wait for the reboot to finish. (This might take
several minutes.)
f. After the node reboots, double-click the node. The multishelf view appears.
Note The shelf ID of the node controller is automatically assigned as 1.
Step 4 To add a node as a subtending shelf in the multishelf configuration, complete the following:
a. In multishelf view, right-click in the white space in the rack and choose Add Shelf.
b. Select the type of subtending shelf (ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 M6).
c. In the Shelf ID Selection dialog box, choose a shelf ID (from 2 to 30) from the drop-down list.
d. Click OK. The shelf appears in the multishelf view.
e. Preprovision the new shelf so that it has the same provisioning as the actual shelf that you will add
as the subtending shelf:
Caution If the subtending shelf is not preprovisioned, traffic will be lost.
• Cards, PPMs, administrative states, client and trunk port configuration—For more information
on card and port settings, see Chapter 6, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.”
• Timing—For more information, see the “NTP-G53 Set Up Timing” procedure on page 7-22.
• GCC—For more information, see the “DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations” task on
page 8-61.
f. Disconnect the cross-over (CAT-5) LAN cable from the RJ-45 (LAN) port of the ONS 15454
subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 7 or Slot 11, or from the MSM port that
corresponds to the TNC/TSC card in Slot 1 or Slot 8 of the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf.
g. Connect your Windows PC or Solaris workstation NIC to the RJ-45 (LAN) port on the ONS 15454
TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 7 or Slot 11, or to the MSM port that corresponds to the TNC/TSC
card in Slot 1 or Slot 8 of the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf.
h. Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the subtending shelf.
i. Click the Provisioning > General > Multishelf Config tabs.
j. Click Enable as Subtended Shelf.
k. Select the appropriate subtending shelf (ONS 15454 or ONS 15454 M6).
l. From the Shelf ID drop-down list, choose the shelf ID that you created in Step c.
m. Click Apply. 4-133
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
n. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to reboot the shelf. The CTC view changes to network
view and the node icon changes to gray. Wait for the reboot to finish. (This might take several
minutes.)
o. Disconnect your Windows PC or Solaris workstation network interface card (NIC) from the RJ-45
(LAN) port of the subtending shelf TTC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 7 or Slot 11, or from the MSM
port that corresponds to the TNC/TSC card in Slot 1 or Slot 8 of the ONS 15454 M6 subtending
shelf.
p. Reconnect the cross-over (CAT-5) LAN cable (disconnected in Step f) to the RJ-45 (LAN) port of
the subtending shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card in Slot 7 or Slot 11, or to the MSM port that
corresponds to the TNC/TSC card in Slot 1 or Slot 8 of the ONS 15454 M6 subtending shelf.
Note The Ethernet cable must e connected to the subtended shelf TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC
card soon after this TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card completes its boot phase (when it
becomes active and its peer TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card starts rebooting).
Connecting it before the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TSC card completes its boot phase is a
risk in the conversion process. Connecting it long time after completion of the boot phase
might affect traffic due to missing provisioning.
q. Repeat Steps a through p to set up additional subtending shelves.
Note Cisco Transport Manager (CTM) users can use the CTM NE Explorer to monitor and configure
single-shelf and multishelf nodes. When the upgrade is complete, the original individual
subtending shelves will remain the CTM network view and must be manually deleted. For
detailed information, refer to the Cisco Transport Manager User Guide, Appendix B, “NE
Explorer Information.”
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G210 Provision Node for SNMPv3
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 on the node on which you want to set up
SNMPv3. If you are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 tabs.
Step 3 Complete the following tasks as required:
• DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User, page 4-138
Purpose This procedure provisions the node to allow SNMPv3 access.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-134
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• DLP-G498 Create Group Access, page 4-139
Note A group named default_group is defined in the initial configuration. The default group has read
and notify access to the complete MIB tree.
• DLP-G497 Create MIB Views, page 4-139
Note A view named full_view is defined in the initial configuration. It includes the complete MIB tree
supported on the node.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G211 Provision Node to Send SNMPv3 Traps
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 on the node on which you want to set up
SNMPv3. If you are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 tabs.
Step 3 Complete the following tasks as required:
• DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User, page 4-138
• DLP-G498 Create Group Access, page 4-139
• DLP-G497 Create MIB Views, page 4-139
• DLP-G501 Create Notification Filters, page 4-142
• DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination, page 4-140. When you configure an SNMPv3 trap
destination, use the IP address of the NMS, and the port number on which the NMS is listening for
traps.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure provisions a node to send SNMP v3 traps.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-135
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G212 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Manage an ENE
using SNMPv3
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 on the node on which you want to set up
SNMPv3. If you are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Go to network view.
Step 3 Double-click the ENE.
Step 4 Click Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > General and note the context engine ID. The is required in
Step 8.
Step 5 Double-click the GNE.
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User” task on page 4-138 to create an SNMPv3 user on
the GNE.
Step 7 Complete the following tasks as needed on the ENE:
• DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User, page 4-138
• DLP-G498 Create Group Access, page 4-139
• DLP-G497 Create MIB Views, page 4-139
Step 8 Complete the “DLP-G502 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table” task on
page 4-142. Use the from Step 4, the local user details created in Step 6, and the remote user created in
Step 7.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure describes how to manually configure a GNE/ENE to allow
the NMS to manage an ENE using SNMPv3.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-136
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
NTP-G213 Automatically Provision a GNE to Manage an ENE
using SNMPv3
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 on the node on which you want to set up
SNMPv3. If you are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Go to network view.
Step 3 Double-click the GNE.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User” task on page 4-138 to create an SNMPv3 user on
the GNE.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G503 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table” task on
page 4-143. Use the GNE user that you defined in Step 4 when you configure the Proxy Forwarder table.
Note When you use the automatic procedure, CTC automatically creates an ons_proxy user on the ENE,
provides ENE user details for the proxy configuration, and provides the of the ENE.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G214 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3
Traps from an ENE using SNMPv3
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 on the node on which you want to set up
SNMPv3. If you are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Go to network view.
Purpose This procedure describes how to automatically configure a GNE to allow
an NMS to manage an ENE using SNMPv3.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure describes how to manually configure the GNE/ENE to
allow an ENE to send SNMPv3 traps to the NMS.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-137
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 Double-click the GNE.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User” task on page 4-138 to create an SNMPv3 user on
the GNE.
Step 5 On the GNE, complete the “DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination” task on page 4-140. The
target IP address must be the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the NMS. For the UDP Port number, use the port
number on which the NMS is listening for traps. Use the user name configured in Step 4. Also, specify
a target tag name.
Step 6 Double-click the ENE.
Step 7 Complete the “DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User” task on page 4-138 to create an SNMPv3 user on
the ENE.
Step 8 Complete the following tasks as required:
• DLP-G498 Create Group Access, page 4-139 to create a group on the ENE
• DLP-G497 Create MIB Views, page 4-139 to create a MIB view on the ENE
• DLP-G501 Create Notification Filters, page 4-142
Step 9 On the ENE, complete the “DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination” task on page 4-140. The
target IP address should be the IP address of the GNE. The UDP port number is 161. Use the user name
configured in Step 7.
Step 10 From the network view, click the Provisioning > SNMPv3 tabs.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G504 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table” task on
page 4-144.
The source of the trap must be the IP address of the ENE. For the field, provide the of the ENE. Also,
you need to specify the target tag defined in Step 5, and the incoming user details configured in Step 7.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G215 Automatically Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3
Traps from an ENE Using SNMPv3
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 on the node on which you want to set up
SNMPv3. If you are already logged in, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Go to Network View.
Step 3 Double-click the GNE.
Purpose This procedure describes how to automatically configure the GNE/ENE to
allow an ENE to send SNMPv3 traps to the NMS.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 4-7
Required/As Needed Required if you want to implement SNMPv3 on your network.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-138
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 4 Complete the task “DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User” task on page 4-138 to create an SNMPv3 user
on the GNE.
Step 5 On the GNE, complete the following tasks:
• DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination, page 4-140. The target IP address must be the
IPv4 or IPv6 address of the NMS. For the UDP Port number, use the port number on which the NMS
is listening for traps. Also, specify a target tag name.
• DLP-G505 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table, page 4-145. Use the
target tag configured in Step 4. Use the IP address of the ENE as the source of trap. The following
details are created automatically:
– A user named ons_trap_user on the ENE
– Trap destination on the ENE with an IP address of the GNE as the target IP and 161 as the UDP
port number
– Remote user details of the ENE on the GNE
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G496 Create an SNMPv3 User
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > User tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create User dialog box, enter the following information:
• User Name—Specify the name of the user on the host that connects to the agent. The user name must
be a minimum of six and a maximum of 20 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. For TL1
compatibility, the user name must be of 6 to 10 characters.
• Group Name—Specify the group to which the user belongs.
• Authentication
– Protocol—Select the authentication algorithm that you want to use. The options are NONE,
MD5, and SHA.
– Password—Enter a password if you select MD5 or SHA. By default, the password length is set
to a minimum of eight characters.
• Privacy—Initiates a privacy authentication level setting session that enables the host to encrypt the
contents of the message that is sent to the agent.
– Protocol—Select NONE or DES as the privacy authentication algorithm.
– Password—Enter a password if you select DES.
Purpose This procedure creates an SNMPv3 user.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-139
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click OK to save the information.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G497 Create MIB Views
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > MIB views tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Views dialog box, enter the following information:
• Name—Name of the view.
• Subtree OID—The MIB subtree which, when combined with the mask, defines the family of
subtrees.
• Bit Mask—A family of view subtrees. Each bit in the bit mask corresponds to a sub-identifier of the
subtree OID.
• Type—Select the view type. Options are Include and Exclude. Type defines whether the family of
subtrees that are defined by the subtree OID and the bit mask combination are included or excluded
from the notification filter.
Step 4 Click OK to save the information.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G498 Create Group Access
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > Group Access tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Purpose This procedure creates an SNMPv3 MIB view.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure creates a user group and configures the access parameters
for the users in the group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-140
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 3 In the Create Group Access dialog box, enter the following information:
• Group Name—The name of the SNMP group, or collection of users, who share a common access
policy.
• Security Level—The security level for which the access parameters are defined. Select from the
following options:
– noAuthNoPriv—Uses a user name match for authentication.
– AuthNoPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
– AuthPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
Provides DES 56-bit encryption based on the CBC-DES (DES-56) standard, in addition to
authentication.
If you select authNoPriv or authPriv for a group, the corresponding user must be configured with an
authentication protocol and password, with privacy protocol and password, or both.
• Views
– Read View Name—Read view name for the group.
– Notify View Name—Notify view name for the group.
• Allow SNMP Sets—Select this check box if you want the SNMP agent to accept SNMP SET
requests. If this check box is not selected, SET requests are rejected.
Note SNMP SET request access is implemented for very few objects.
Step 4 Click OK to save the information.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > Trap Destinations (V3) tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Configure SNMPv3 Trap dialog box, enter the following information:
• Target Address—Target to which the traps should be sent. Use an IPv4 or an IPv6 address.
• UDP Port—UDP port number that the host uses. Default value is 162.
• User Name—Specify the name of the user on the host that connects to the agent.
• Security Level—Select one of the following options:
Purpose This procedure provisions SNMPv3 trap destination.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-141
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
– noAuthNoPriv—Uses a user name match for authentication.
– AuthNoPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
– AuthPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
Provides DES 56-bit encryption based on the CBC-DES (DES-56) standard, in addition to
authentication.
• Filter Profile—Select this check box and enter the filter profile name. Traps are sent only if you
provide a filter profile name and create a notification filter. For more information, see “DLP-G501
Create Notification Filters” task on page 4-142.
• Proxy Traps Only—If selected, forwards only proxy traps from the ENE. Traps from this node are
not sent to the trap destination identified by this entry.
• Proxy Tags—Specify a list of tags. The tag list is needed on a GNE only if an ENE needs to send
traps to the trap destination identified by this entry, and wants to use the GNE as the proxy.
Step 4 Click OK to save the information.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G500 Delete SNMPv3 Trap Destination
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP> SNMPv3 > Trap Destination tabs.
Step 2 In the Trap Destinations area, select the trap you want to delete.
Step 3 Click Delete. A confirmation dialog box appears.
Step 4 Click Yes.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This procedure deletes an SNMPv3 trap destination.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-142
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
DLP-G501 Create Notification Filters
Step 1 In node view, click the Provisioning > SNMP > SNMP V3 > Notification Filters tabs.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Notify dialog box, enter the following information:
• Filter Profile Name—Specify a name for the filter.
• Subtree OID—The MIB subtree which, when combined with the mask, defines the family of
subtrees.
• Bit Mask—A family of view subtrees. Each bit in the bit mask corresponds to a sub-identifier of the
subtree OID.
• View Type—Select the view type. Options are Include and Exclude. Type defines whether the
family of subtrees that are defined by the subtree OID and the bit mask combination are included or
excluded from the notification filter.
Step 4 Click OK to save the information.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G502 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table
Step 1 In network view, click Provisioning > SNMPv3.
Step 2 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Server area, complete the following:
• Select the GNE to be used as the SNMPv3 proxy server from the drop-down list.
• Select the Enable IPv6 Target/Trap check box if the nodes and the NMS stations are on an IPv6
network.
Step 3 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table area, click Manual Create.
Step 4 In the Manual Configuration of SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder dialog box, enter the following information:
Purpose This procedure creates SNMPv3 notification filters.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This procedure creates an entry in the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-143
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Target IP Address—Target to which the request should be forwarded. Use an IPv4 or an IPv6
address.
• Context Engine ID—The context engine ID of the ENE to which the request is to be forwarded. The
context engine ID should be the same as the context engine ID of the incoming request.
• Proxy Type—Type of SNMP request that needs to be forwarded. The options are Read and Write.
• Local User Details—The details of the local user who proxies on behalf of the ENE user.
– User Name—Specify the name of the user on the host that connects to the agent.
– Local Security Level—Select the security level of the incoming requests that are to be
forwarded. The options are noAuthNoPriv, AuthNoPriv, and AuthPriv.
• Remote User Details—User to which the request is forwarded.
– User Name—Specify the user name of the remote user.
– Remote Security Level—Select the security level of the outgoing requests. The options are
noAuthNoPriv, AuthNoPriv, and AuthPriv.
• Authentication
– Protocol—Select the authentication algorithm you want to use. The options are NONE, MD5,
and SHA.
– Password—Enter the password if you select MD5 or SHA.
• Privacy—Enables the host to encrypt the contents of the message that is sent to the agent.
– Protocol—Select NONE or DES as the privacy authentication algorithm.
– Password—Enter the password if you select DES. The password should not exceed 64
characters.
Step 5 Click OK to save the information.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G503 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table
Step 1 In network view, click Provisioning > SNMPv3 tabs.
Step 2 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Server area, complete the following:
• Select the GNE to be used as the SNMPv3 proxy server from the drop-down list.
• Select the Enable IPv6 Target/Trap check box if the nodes and the NMS stations are on an IPv6
network.
Step 3 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table area, click Auto Create.
Purpose This procedure creates an entry in the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-144
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
Step 4 In the Automatic Configuration of SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder dialog box, enter the following
information:
• Proxy Type—Select the type of proxies to be forwarded. The options are Read and Write.
• Security Level—Select the security level for the incoming requests that are to be forwarded. The
options are:
– noAuthNoPriv—Uses a username match for authentication.
– AuthNoPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
– AuthPriv—Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
Provides DES 56-bit encryption based on the CBC-DES (DES-56) standard, in addition to
authentication.
• Target Address List—Select the proxy destination.
• Local User Name—Select the user name from the list of users.
Note When you configure SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table automatically, the default_group is used on the
ENE. The default_group does not have write access. To enable write access and allow SNMP sets, you
need to edit the default_group on ENE.
Step 5 Click OK to save the settings.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G504 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table
Step 1 In network view, click Provisioning > SNMPv3 tabs.
Step 2 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Server area, complete the following:
• Select the GNE to be used as the SNMPv3 proxy server from the drop-down list.
• Select the Enable IPv6 Target/Trap check box if the nodes and the NMS stations are on an IPv6
network.
Step 3 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table area, click Manual Create.
Step 4 In the Manual Configuration of SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder dialog box, enter the following
information:
• Remote Trap Source—Select the IP address from which the traps are sent. If the IP address is not
listed, enter the IP address manually.
Purpose This procedure creates an entry in the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder
Table.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-145
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Context Engine ID—Specify the context engine ID of the ENE from which traps need to be
forwarded. This field is automatically populated if the source of trap is selected. If the source of trap
is not specified, you need to manually enter the context engine ID.
• Target Tag—Specify the tag name. The tag identifies the list of NMS that should receive the
forwarded traps. Traps are forwarded to all GNE Trap destinations whose proxy tags list contains
this tag.
• Remote User Details
– User Name—Specify the user name.
– Security Level—Select the security level for the user. The options are noAuthNoPriv,
AuthNoPriv, and AuthPriv.
• Authentication—Select the authentication algorithm.
– Protocol—Select the authentication algorithm you want to use. The options are NONE, MD5,
and SHA. Default is None.
– Password—Enter the password if you select MD5 or SHA.
• Privacy—Enables the host to encrypt the contents of the message that is sent to the agent.
– Protocol—Select NONE or DES as the privacy authentication algorithm. Encryption is disabled
if NONE is selected.
– Password—Enter the password if you select DES. The password should not exceed 64
characters.
Step 5 Click OK to save the information.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G505 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table
Step 1 In network view, click Provisioning > SNMPv3 tabs.
Step 2 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Server area, complete the following:
• Select the GNE to be used as the SNMPv3 proxy server from the drop-down list.
• Select the Enable IPv6 Target/Trap check box if the nodes and the NMS stations are on an IPv6
network.
Step 3 In the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table area, click Auto Create.
Step 4 In the Automatic Configuration of SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder dialog box, enter the following
information:
Purpose This procedure creates an entry in the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder
Table automatically.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Provisioning or higher4-146
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 4 Turn Up a Node
Before You Begin
• Target Tag—Specify the tag name. The tag identifies the list of NMS that should receive the
forwarded traps. All GNE Trap destinations that have this tag in their proxy tags list are chosen.
• Source of Trap—The list of ENEs whose traps are forwarded to the SNMPv3 Trap destinations that
are identified by the Target Tag.
Step 5 Click OK to save the information.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).CHAPTER
5-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
5
Perform Node Acceptance Tests
This chapter provides test procedures to verify that installed cards are operating correctly in a
Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) node. The procedures are optional.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI (SONET) and ETSI (SDH) shelf
assemblies.
Note This chapter does not test the transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card installation. Installation and verification for those cards is performed in
Chapter 6, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards.”
Before You Begin
This section lists the non-trouble procedures (NTPs) required to validate a DWDM node. Turn to a
procedure for applicable detailed level procedures (DLPs).
1. NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance
Test, page 5-3—Complete this procedure to test terminal and hub nodes with 32MUX-O and
32DMX-O cards installed.
2. NTP-G168 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance
Test, page 5-9—Complete this procedure to test terminal and hub nodes with 40-MUX-C and
40-DMX-C cards installed. This procedure can also be performed for 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-CE
cards.
3. NTP-G42 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-12—Complete this procedure to test terminal nodes with 32WSS and 32DMX cards
installed.
4. NTP-G167 Perform the Terminal Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-17—Complete this procedure to test terminal nodes with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards
installed. This procedure can also be performed to test terminal nodes for 40-WSS-CE and
40-DMX-CE cards5-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
5. NTP-G153 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-22—Complete this procedure to test terminal nodes with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards
installed.
6. NTP-G43 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-29—Complete this procedure to test reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexing
(ROADM) nodes with 32WSS and 32DMX cards installed.
7. NTP-G154 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-51—Complete this procedure to test ROADM nodes with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards
installed.
8. NTP-G180 Perform the ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-74—Complete this procedure to test a ROADM node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards
installed. This procedure can also be performed for 40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-CE cards.
9. NTP-G276 Perform the 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node Acceptance Tests,
page 5-97—Complete this procedure to test a n- degree ROADM node with 80-WXC-C cards
installed.
10. NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test, page 5-101—Complete this procedure
to test anti-amplified spontaneous emission (anti-ASE) hub nodes.
11. NTP-G45 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-104—Complete this procedure to test C-band line amplifier nodes with OSCM cards
installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
12. NTP-G155 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-108—Complete this procedure to test L-band line amplifier nodes with OSCM cards
installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
13. NTP-G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-111—Complete this procedure to test C-band line amplifier nodes with OSC-CSM cards
installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
14. NTP-G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-115—Complete this procedure to test L-band line amplifier nodes with OSC-CSM cards
installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
15. NTP-G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 5-120—Complete this procedure to test C-band line amplifier nodes with OSCM and
OSC-CSM cards installed.
16. NTP-G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance
Test, page 5-124—Complete this procedure to test L-band line amplifier nodes with OSCM and
OSC-CSM cards installed.
17. NTP-G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards,
page 5-128—Complete this procedure to test optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) nodes with
OSCM cards installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
18. NTP-G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards, page 5-140—Complete this procedure to test OADM nodes with OSC-CSM and OPT-BST
or OPT-BST-E cards installed on both Side A and Side B of the shelf.
19. NTP-G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM
Cards, page 5-146—Complete this procedure to test OADM nodes with OSC-CSM cards installed
on both Side A and Side B of the shelf and no OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards installed.
20. NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel Acceptance Test,
page 5-148—Complete this procedure to test four-degree or eight-degree mesh nodes.5-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
21. NTP-G187 Perform the Multiring Site Acceptance Test, page 5-160—Complete this procedure to
test multiring sites.
22. NTP-G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test, page 5-168—Complete this procedure
to test native mesh nodes.
23. NTP-G189 Perform the Node Upgrade Acceptance Test, page 5-173—Complete this procedure to
test an upgraded node. The upgraded node connects an existing in-service ROADM node with two
sides (each equipped with MMU cards) to a native mesh node with two sides.
24. NTP-G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards
Acceptance Test, page 5-181—Complete this procedure to test ROADM nodes with 40-SMR-1-C
and OPT-AMP-17-C cards installed.
25. NTP-G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test,
page 5-185—Complete this procedure to test ROADM nodes with 40-SMR-2-C cards installed.
NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and
32DMX-O Cards Acceptance Test
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Note This procedure tests Side A of hub nodes first, then Side B. If you are testing a terminal node, apply
instructions for Side A of the hub node to the terminal side (Side B or Side A) of the terminal node.
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the hub or terminal node that you want to
test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Purpose This procedure tests a DWDM terminal or hub node with 32MUX-O and
32DMX-O cards installed.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note If optical service channel (OSC) terminations are created, there will be two alarms, one for
low power on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card and one for the OSC channel.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If a different status appears, complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node
Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
Step 5 Create a physical loopback on the Side A (or terminal) OSC-CSM, OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier
by using a patchcord with 10-dB bulk attenuators to connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will appear due to the OSC signal
loopback.
Step 6 Wait approximately two minutes, then verify that the OSC link is active on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card by observing whether or not the LOS alarm on the OSCM or OSC-CSM (and the
OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, if present) clears. (The OSC termination must already be provisioned. If
not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.)
Note If the LOS alarm does not clear on the OSC-CSM card, verify that the opwrMin (dBm) Optic
Thresholds setting for the OSC-RX port is not higher than the port's Optical Line power value.
In the OSC-CSM card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optic Thresholds tabs
and record the opwrMin (dBm) setting and compare it to the value found in the Power column
for the OSC-RX port in the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Reduce the Optic
Thresholds setting for the opwrMin (dBm) value temporarily until the loopback test has been
completed to clear the LOS alarm. Reset the Optic Thresholds setting to its original value after
clearing the physical loopback.
Step 7 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band
grid (1530.33 nm). Refer to the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268
Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 8 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the CHAN RX 01
port on the Side A (or terminal) 32MUX-O card using the available patch panel.
Step 9 Display the Side A (or terminal) 32MUX-O card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 11 Change the Port 1 administrative state to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 12 Verify that the Port 1 power level reaches the provisioned VOA Power Ref set point. 5-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note The tunable laser minimum optical output power (Pout) must be 6 dBm. If the output power is
lower than the specified value, the 32MUX-O card might not reach the provisioned set point.
Step 13 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L card is installed, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6 on the Side A (or
terminal) OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L to ensure that the amplifier is working properly. If an
OSC-CSM card is installed, go to Step 15.
Step 14 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 on the
Side A (or terminal) OPT-PRE card to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 15 Complete the “DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power” task on page 5-8 to verify
that the 32MUX-O is powered correctly.
Step 16 Complete the “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 5-8 to verify
that the 32DMX-O card is powered correctly.
Step 17 Restore the default IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) administrative state to the
32MUX-O card port that was changed to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) in Step 11.
Step 18 Repeat Steps 7 through 17 for the remaining 31 wavelengths of the 100-GHz grid to verify the correct
behavior of all variable optical attenuators (VOAs) inside the 32MUX-O card.
Step 19 Remove the loopback created in Step 5.
Step 20 If the node is a hub node, repeat Steps 5 through 19 for the Side B cards.
Step 21 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 22 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing
Purpose This task provisions a TXP_MR_10E_C card for acceptance testing when
a tunable laser is not available.
Tools/Equipment TXP_MR_10E_C
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed5-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 If you have installed and verified the TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 2. If not, install the TXP
card using the “NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G,
and OTU2_XP Cards” procedure on page 4-69.
Step 2 Display the TXP_MR_10E_C in card view.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Step 4 Click the Admin State column for the trunk port and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 5 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 7 In the Wavelength field, choose the first wavelength required by the acceptance test.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Step 10 Click the Admin State column for the trunk port and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 11 Click Apply.
Step 12 Connect a power meter to the DWDM TX port. Verify that the output power falls within 4.5 dBm
(+/–1 dBm). If it does not fall within this range, replace the card or contact your next level of support.
Step 13 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and
Power
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node that you want to test. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier to display the card view.
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task verifies that the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier
laser is on and provisioned to the correct power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 3 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs. If the value in the Currently Shutdown field is NO, continue with
Step 4. If not, complete the following steps:
a. Check the optical safety remote interlock (OSRI) setting. If it is set to On, change it to Off. If the
OSRI setting is set to Off and the Currently Shutdown field is Yes, contact your next level of support.
b. Click Apply, then click Yes.
c. Check the Currently Shutdown field. If it changes to NO, continue with Step 4. If not, contact your
next level of support. The amplifier might need to be replaced.
Note The Currently Shutdown field will not change to NO until an active channel is flowing
through the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L amplifier.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Opt Ampli Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 5 Click Reset.
Step 6 Scroll to the right and locate the Signal Output Power parameter for Port 6 (LINE-TX). Verify that the
Signal Output Power value is greater than or equal to the Channel Power Ref.
If the Signal Output Power is not greater than or equal to 1.5 dBm, do not continue. Begin
troubleshooting or contact your next level of support.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node that you want to test. If you are
already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf view) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OPT-PRE amplifier to
display the card view.
Step 3 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
Step 4 If the value shown in the Currently Shutdown field is NO, continue with Step 5. If not, complete the
following steps:
a. Check the OSRI setting. If it is set to ON, click the table cell and chose OFF from the drop-down
list. If the OSRI setting is set to OFF and the Currently Shutdown field is Yes, contact your next
level of support.
b. Click Apply, then click Yes.
Purpose This task verifies that the OPT-PRE amplifier laser is on and provisioned
to the correct power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Check the Currently Shutdown field. If it changes to NO, continue with Step 5. If not, contact your
next level of support. The amplifier might need to be replaced.
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > Opt Ampli Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 6 Locate the Signal Output Power parameter for Port 2 (COM-TX). Verify that the Signal Output Power
value is greater than or equal to the Channel Power Ref. If the Signal Output Power is greater than or
equal to the Channel Power Ref, continue with Step 7. If the Signal Output Power is less than the
Channel Power Ref, check your connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber
Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level
of support.
Step 7 Scroll to the right to locate the DCU Insertion Loss parameter. Verify that the DCU Insertion Loss value
is less than or equal to 10 dB.
If the DCU Insertion Loss is greater than 10 dB, do not continue. Begin troubleshooting or contact your
next level of support.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power
Step 1 Display the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the administrative state of the corresponding port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI).
Step 4 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 5 Check that the value in the Power column for the port reaches the value shown in the VOA Power Ref
column.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power
Purpose This task verifies 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C card power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task verifies that the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C card is provisioned to
the correct power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-305-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 Display the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the administrative state for the appropriate port to OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI).
Step 4 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 5 Verify that the value in the Power table cell is the same as the VOA Power Ref table cell value for the
port under test.
Step 6 Connect a power meter to the CHAN TX 01 port through the patch panel. Verify that the physical optical
power value coming from drop Port 1 on the Side A 32DMX-O card is consistent with the value read
(the maximum allowed error is +/– 0.5 dBm).
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G168 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 40-MUX-C
and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Note This procedure tests Side A of hub nodes first, then Side B. If you are testing a terminal node, apply
instructions for Side A of the hub node to the terminal side (Side B or Side A) of the terminal node.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This procedure tests a DWDM terminal or hub node with 40-MUX-C and
40-DMX-C cards installed.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the hub or terminal node that you want to
test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note If OSC terminations are created, there will be two alarms, one for low power on the
OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, and the other an OSC channel alarm.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If a different status appears, complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node
Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
Step 5 Create a physical loopback on the Side A (or terminal) OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier by using a
patchcord with 10-dB bulk attenuators to connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will appear due to the OSC signal
loopback.
Step 6 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSCM or OSC-CSM card. (The OSC termination
must already be provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure
on page 4-126.)
Step 7 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band
grid (1530.33 nm). Refer to the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268
Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 8 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the CHAN RX 01
port on the Side A (or terminal) 40-MUX-C card using the available patch panel.
Step 9 Display the Side A (or terminal) 40-MUX-C card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 11 Change the Port 1 administrative state to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 12 Verify that the Port 1 power level reaches the provisioned VOA Power Ref set point.
Note The tunable laser minimum optical output power (Pout) must be 6 dBm. If the output power is
lower than the specified value, the 40-MUX-C card might not reach the provisioned set point.5-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 13 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L card is installed, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6 on the Side A (or
terminal) OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 14 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 on the
Side A (or terminal) OPT-PRE card to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 15 Complete the “DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power” task on page 5-8 to verify
that the 40-MUX-C card is powered correctly.
Step 16 Complete the “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 5-8 to verify
that the 40-DMX-C card is powered correctly.
Step 17 Restore the default IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) administrative state to the
40-MUX-C port that was changed to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) in Step 11.
Step 18 Repeat Steps 7 through 17 for the remaining 31 wavelengths of the 100-GHz grid to verify the correct
behavior of all variable optical attenuators (VOAs) inside the 40-MUX-C card.
Step 19 Remove the loopback created in Step 5.
Step 20 If the node is a hub node, repeat Steps 5 through 19 for the Side B cards.
Step 21 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 22 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G42 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS and 32DMX
Cards Acceptance Test
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Note This procedure creates an optical loopback on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E line. An optical signal is sent
from the 32WSS input (add) to the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E common receive (RX) port and back out
the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E transmit (TX) line. The OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E line receives the looped
signal from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E TX port. It then passes the signal to the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E common TX port and into the OPT-PRE common RX line. The OPT-PRE sends the signal
to the 32DMX card. The optical signal from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card must pass
successfully through the 32WSS card and out the 32DMX card.
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the terminal node that you want to test. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Display the terminal node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a terminal node with 32WSS and 32DMX
cards installed is operating properly before you connect it to the network.
The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also verifies that each
32WSS and 32DMX add/drop and pass-through port operates properly.
The test also checks the power levels at each transmit and receive port to
ensure that power loss in the cabling is within tolerance. If MMU cards are
installed, the test verifies that the MMU insertion loss does not impact add,
drop, or pass-through circuits.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
1 bulk attenuator (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Verify that no equipment alarms (indicated by EQPT in the Cond column) appear indicating
equipment failure or other hardware problems. If equipment failure alarms appear, investigate and
resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Note If OSC terminations are created, an OSC channel alarm will appear.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If a different status appears, or if errors (indicated in red) appear, delete the
OSC channels and complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
Provision the OSC channels when automatic node setup (ANS) is complete.
Step 5 Create a physical loopback on the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by using a patchcord with
10-dB bulk attenuators to connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will appear due to the OSC signal
loopback. This is observed as an alarm on Port 1 of the OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
Step 6 Wait approximately two minutes, then verify that the OSC link is active on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card by observing whether or not the loss of signal (LOS) alarm on the OSCM or OSC-CSM
(and the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, if present) clears. (The OSC termination must already be
provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.)
Note If the LOS alarm does not clear on the OSC-CSM card, verify that the opwrMin (dBm) Optic
Thresholds setting for the OSC-RX port is not higher than the port's Optical Line power value.
In the OSC-CSM card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optic Thresholds tabs
and record the opwrMin (dBm) setting and compare it to the value found in the Power column
for the OSC-RX port in the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Reduce the Optic
Thresholds setting for the opwrMin (dBm) value temporarily until the loopback test has been
completed to clear the LOS alarm. Reset the Optic Thresholds setting to its original value after
clearing the physical loopback.
Step 7 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following
substeps. If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 8.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 9.
Step 8 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 9 Using the available patch panel, connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card
DWDM TX port to the CHAN RX 01 port on the 32WSS card.
Note The tunable laser minimum Pout must be –6 dBm. If the output power is lower than –6 dBm, the
32WSS card might not reach the provisioned set point.
Step 10 Display the 32WSS card in card view.5-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 11 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 12 Click the Admin State table cell for the add (CHAN-RX) port carrying the tested wavelength, then
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the
tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX)
Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 13 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 9 to OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm (shown
as 1530.3), you would click the Port 33 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or
Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 14 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 15 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 16 For Channel #1, change the Operating Mode to Add Drop.
Step 17 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 18 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelength under test.
Step 19 Verify that the actual power coming from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card shown under the
Power column is equal to the specified VOA Power Ref power (+/– 0.2 dB) shown in the same row.
Step 20 Click the Optical Line tab.
Step 21 Verify that the power value from Step 19 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS or 32DMX).Port
COM-TX.Power set point +/– 1.0 dBm. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32WSS or 32DMX card.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS or 32DMX).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right
pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 19 (+/– 0.5 dB), contact your next level
of support.
Step 22 If an OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6 on the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 23 If an OSC-CSM is installed, continue with Step 25. If an OPT-BST is installed, verify the connection
between Port 67 (COM-TX) on the 32WSS and Port 1 (COM-RX) on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards:
a. Display the 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 83 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card and the 32WSS cards. Check
the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 24 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L card is installed on the Side A or terminal side, complete
the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on
page 5-6 to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 25 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 67 (COM-TX) on the 32WSS and
Port 2 (COM-RX) on the OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OSC-CSM and 32WSS cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 26 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 2 (COM-TX) on the OPT-PRE card
and Port 33 (COM-RX) on the 32DMX card:
a. Display the OPT-PRE card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > OptAmpliLine > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in Power table cell for Port 2 (COM-TX).
d. Display the 32DMX card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 33 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-PRE and 32DMX cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 27 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 on the
OPT-PRE to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 28 Complete the “DLP-G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power” task on page 5-16 to verify that the
32DMX card is powered correctly.
Step 29 Display the 32WSS in card view.
Step 30 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 31 For the circuit (channel) under test, click the Operating Mode table cell and choose Not Assigned from
the drop-down list.
Step 32 Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 33 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelength under test.
Step 34 Click the Admin State table cell. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance.
Step 35 Click Apply, then Yes.5-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 36 Repeat Steps 7 through 35 for the remaining 31 wavelengths of the 100-Ghz grid to verify the correct
behavior of all VOAs inside the 32WSS card.
Step 37 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the 32WSS card.
Step 38 Remove the loopback created in Step 5.
Step 39 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 40 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power
Step 1 Display the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the administrative state for the COM TX (Port 33 for the 32DMX or Port 41 for the 40-DMX-C)
to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Step 4 Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 5 Verify that the value shown in the power column is equal to the specified VOA Power Ref column
(+/- 0.2dB).
Step 6 (Optional) Connect a power meter to the CHAN TX 01 port through the patch panel. Verify that the
physical optical power value coming from the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C drop Port 1 is consistent with the
Power value on the Parameters tab, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 7 Change the administrative state for the COM TX port to IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI).
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies that the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C card is provisioned to the
correct power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G167 Perform the Terminal Node with 40-WSS-C and
40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 6, and Side B refers to Slots 12 through 17.
Note This procedure creates an optical loopback on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E line. An optical signal is sent
from the 40-WSS-C input (add) to the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E common receive (RX) port and back out
the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E transmit (TX) line. The OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E line receives the looped
signal from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E TX port. It then passes the signal to the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E common TX port and into the OPT-PRE common RX line. The OPT-PRE sends the signal
to the 40-DMX-C. The optical signal from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C must pass successfully
through the 40-WSS-C and out the 40-DMX-C.
Note If the shelf is equipped with an OSC-CSM, this procedure creates an optical loopback on the OSC-CSM
line. An optical signal is sent from the 40-WSS-C input (add) to the OSC-CSM common receive (RX)
port and back out the OSC-CSM transmit (TX) line. The OSC-CSM line receives the looped signal from
the OSC-CSM-TX port. It then passes the signal to the OSC-CSM common TX port and sends the signal
to the 40DMX-C. The optical signal from the tunable lase or TXP_MR_!)E_C must pass successfully
through the 40-WSS-C and out the 40DMX-C.
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a terminal node with 40-WSS-C and
40-DMX-C cards installed is operating properly before you connect it to
the network. The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also
verifies that each 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C add/drop and pass-through
port operates properly. The test also checks the power levels at each
transmit and receive port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is within
tolerance. If MMU cards are installed, the test verifies that the MMU
insertion loss does not impact add, drop, or pass-through circuits.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
1 bulk attenuator (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Warning The OSC-RX port opwrMin (dBm) Optic Thresholds setting provisioned by CTP can be set too high and
generate LOS and Power Fail alarms for this port while performing an optical loopback on the
OSC-CSM card. CTP provisions the opwrMin (dBm) Optic Thresholds value higher than the power
received during the loopback test, because CTP calculates the thresholds based on the incoming
amplified signal from an adjacent node instead of a loopbacked signal from the OSC-CSM card. To
clear the alarms, reduce the Optic Thresholds setting for the opwrMin (dBm) value temporarily until
the loopback test has been completed. Reset the Optic Thresholds setting to its original value after
clearing the physical loopback.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the terminal node that you want to test. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Display the terminal node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms (indicated by EQPT in the Cond column) appear indicating
equipment failure or other hardware problems. If equipment failure alarms appear, investigate and
resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate LOS alarms on the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-AMP-17-C cards, and on the OSC-CSM and OSCM cards. If OSCM cards
are installed in ANSI shelves, EOC SDCC Termination Failure alarms will appear.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If other statuses appear, or if errors (indicated in red) appear, delete the OSC
channels and complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127. Provision
the OSC channels when ANS is complete.
Step 5 If no OSC terminations are present, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure
on page 4-126.
Step 6 Create a physical loopback on the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-AMP-17, or OSC-CSM card by
connecting a fiber optic jumper between the LINE TX and RX ports. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards,
connect a 10 dB bulk attenuator to each end of the jumper. The OSC-CSM card does not require
attenuation.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC SDCC Termination Failure alarm will appear due to the OSC signal
loopback. This is observed as an alarm on Port 1 of the OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
Step 7 Provision OSC terminations. Complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 8 Wait approximately two minutes, then verify that the OSC link is active on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card by observing whether or not the LOS alarm on the OSCM or OSC-CSM (and the
OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, if present) clears. (The OSC termination must already be provisioned. If
not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.)5-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note If the LOS alarm does not clear on the OSC-CSM card, verify that the opwrMin (dBm) Optic
Thresholds setting for the OSC-RX port is not higher than the port's Optical Line power value.
In the OSC-CSM card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optic Thresholds tabs
and record the opwrMin (dBm) setting and compare it to the value found in the Power column
for the OSC-RX port in the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Reduce the Optic
Thresholds setting for the opwrMin (dBm) value temporarily until the loopback test has been
completed to clear the LOS alarm. Reset the Optic Thresholds setting to its original value after
clearing the physical loopback.
Step 9 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following
substeps. If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 10.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 11.
Step 10 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 11 Using the available patch panel, connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card
DWDM TX port to the correct CHAN RX port on the 40-WSS-C card for the wavelength that you want
to test. Refer to Table 4-1 on page 4-28, if needed. For example, if the tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm
(shown as 1530.3), then connect the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Optical Connector
1, CHAN RX 01 port on the 40-WSS-C card.
Note The tunable laser minimum Pout must be –6 dBm. If the output power is lower than –6 dBm, the
40-WSS-C card might not reach the provisioned set point.
Step 12 Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 14 Click the Admin State table cell for the add (CHAN-RX) port carrying the tested wavelength, then
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the
tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX)
Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 15 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 11 to
OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm
(shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 41 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose
OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 16 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 17 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 18 For Channel #1, change Operating Mode to Add Drop.
Step 19 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 20 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelength under test.
Step 21 Verify that the actual power coming from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card shown under the
Power column is equal to the specified VOA Power Ref power (+/– 0.2 dB) shown in the same row.5-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 22 Click the Optical Line tab.
Step 23 Verify that the power value from Step 21 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (40-WSS-C or 40-DMX-C).Port
COM-TX.Power set point +/– 1.0 dBm. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-WSS-C or 40-DMX-C card.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-WSS-C or 40-DMX-C).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on
the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 21 (+/– 0.5 dB), contact your next level
of support.
Step 24 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L card is installed, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6 on the OPT-BST
or OPT-BST-E to ensure that the amplifier is working properly. If an OSC-CSM is installed, complete
the “DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power” task on page 5-137.
Step 25 If an OSC-CSM is installed, continue with Step 27. If an OPT-BST is installed, verify the connection
between Port 83 (COM-TX) on the 40-WSS-C and Port 1 (COM-RX) on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E
cards:
a. Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power column for Port 83 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power column for Port 1 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card and the 40-WSS-C cards.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 26 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L card is installed on the Side A or terminal side, complete
the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on
page 5-6 to ensure that the amplifier is working properly. Continue with Step 29.
Step 27 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 83 (COM-TX) on the 40-WSS-C and
the Port 2 (COM-RX) on the OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in Power table cell for Port 83 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OSC-CSM and 40-WSS-C cards. Check the values again. If
they still do not match, contact your next level of support.5-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 28 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 2 (COM-TX) on the OPT-PRE card
and Port 41 (COM-RX) on the 40-DMX-C card:
a. Display the OPT-PRE card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > OptAmpliLine > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the total output power in Power column for Port 2 (COM-TX).
d. Display the 40-DMX-C card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power column for Port 41 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-PRE and 40-DMX-C cards. Check the values again. If
they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 29 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on the Side A or terminal side, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the
OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 on the OPT-PRE card to ensure that the amplifier
is working properly. If OSC-CSM cards are installed, complete the “DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM
Incoming Power” task on page 5-137.
Step 30 Complete the “DLP-G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power” task on page 5-16 to verify that the
40-DMX-C card is powered correctly.
Step 31 Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 32 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 33 For the circuit (channel) under test, click the Operating Mode table cell and choose Not Assigned from
the drop-down list.
Step 34 Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 35 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelength under test.
Step 36 Click the Admin State table cell. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance in Steps 13
and 14 of this procedure. For example, if the tested wavelength is 1430-33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you
would click the Admin State field and choose IS,ANSI (ANSI) or Unlocked,AutomaticInService (ETSI)
from the drop-down list for both Port 1 (CHAN-RX) and Port 41 (PASS-THROUGH).
Step 37 Repeat Steps 9 through 36 for the remaining 39 wavelengths of the 100-Ghz grid to verify the correct
behavior of all VOAs inside the 40-WSS-C card.
Step 38 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the 40-WSS-C card.
Step 39 Remove the loopback created in Step 6.
Step 40 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 41 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.5-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G153 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS-L and
32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Note This procedure creates an optical loopback on the OPT-BST-L line. An optical signal is sent from the
32WSS-L input (add) to the OPT-BST-L common RX port and back out the OPT-BST-L TX line. The
OPT-BST-L line receives the looped signal from the OPT-BST-L TX port. It then passes the signal to the
OPT-BST-L common TX port and into the OPT-AMP-L (when provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) common
RX port. The OPT-AMP-L card sends the signal to the 32DMX-L card. The optical signal from the
tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_L card must pass successfully through the 32WSS-L card and out the
32DMX-L card.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the hub or terminal node that you want to
test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Display the terminal node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a terminal node provisioned for L-band
wavelengths is operating properly before you connect it to the network.
The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also verifies that each
add/drop and pass-through port on the 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards
operates properly. The test also checks the power levels at each transmit
and receive port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is within tolerance.
If MMU cards are installed, the test verifies that the MMU insertion loss
does not impact add, drop, or pass-through circuits.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
1 bulk attenuator (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note If OSC terminations are created, an OSC channel alarm will appear.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success -
Changed, or Success - Unchanged. If a different status appears, or if errors (indicated in red) appear,
delete the OSC channels and complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 4-127. Provision the OSC channels when ANS is complete.
Step 5 Create a physical loopback on the OPT-BST-L, OCSM, or OSC-CSM card by using a patchcord with
10-dB bulk attenuators to connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will appear due to the OSC signal
loopback. This is observed as an alarm on Port 1 of the OSCM or OSC-CSM card.
Step 6 Wait approximately two minutes, then verify that the OSC link is active on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card by observing whether or not the LOS alarm on the OSCM or OSC-CSM card (and the
OPT-BST-L card, if present) clears. (The OSC termination must already be provisioned. If not, complete
the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.)
Step 7 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following
substeps. If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 8.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 9.
Step 8 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test.
Step 9 Using the available patch panel, connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card
DWDM TX port to the CHAN RX 01 port on the 32WSS-L card.
Note The tunable laser minimum Pout must be –6 dBm. If the output power is lower than –6 dBm, the
32WSS-L card might not reach the provisioned set point.
Step 10 Display the 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 11 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 12 Click the Admin State table cell for the add (CHAN-RX) port carrying the tested wavelength, then
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the
tested wavelength is 1577.86 nm (shown as 1577.8), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX)
Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 13 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 9 to OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1577.86 nm (shown
as 1577.86), you would click the Port 33 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or
Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 14 Click Apply, then click Yes.5-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 15 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 16 For channel under test, change Operating Mode to Add Drop.
Step 17 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 18 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters n tabs where n = the optical connector number that
carries the wavelength under test.
Step 19 Verify that the actual power coming from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_L card shown under the
Power column is equal to the specified VOA Power Ref power (+/– 0.2 dB) shown in the same row.
Step 20 Click the Optical Line tab.
Step 21 Verify that the power value from Step 19 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L or 32DMX-L).Port
COM-TX.Power set point +/– 1.0 dBm. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32WSS-L or 32DMX-L card.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L or 32DMX-L).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the
right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 19 (+/– 0.5 dB), contact your next level
of support.
Step 22 If an OPT-BST-L card is installed, complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L
(OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27 on the OPT-BST-L card to ensure that
the amplifier is working properly.
Step 23 If an OSC-CSM is installed, continue with Step 24. If an OPT-BST-L card is installed, verify the
connection between Port 67 (COM-TX) on the 32WSS-L and Port 1 (COM-RX) on the OPT-BST-L
cards:
a. Display the 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the OPT-BST-L card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L and 32WSS-L cards. Check the values again. If
they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 24 If an OPT-BST-L card is installed on the Side A or terminal side, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6 to ensure the
amplifier is working properly.
Step 25 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 67 (COM-TX) on the 32WSS-L and
the Port 2 (COM-RX) on the OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line tabs.
c. Record the value in Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).5-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OSC-CSM and 32WSS-L cards. Check the values again. If
they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 26 Complete the following steps to verify the connection between Port 2 (COM-TX) on the OPT-AMP-L
card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode and Port 33 (COM-RX) on the 32DMX-L card:
a. Display the OPT-AMP-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > OptAmpliLine > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in Power table cell for Port 2 (COM-TX).
d. Display the 32DMX-L card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 33 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-AMP-L and 32DMX-L cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 27 Complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task
on page 5-27 on the OPT-PRE card to ensure that the amplifier is working properly.
Step 28 Complete the “DLP-G361 Verify the 32DMX-L Power” task on page 5-28 to verify that the 32DMX card
is powered correctly.
Step 29 Display the 32WSS-L in card view.
Step 30 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 31 For the circuit (channel) under test, click the Operating Mode table cell and choose Not Assigned from
the drop-down list.
Step 32 Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 33 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelength under test.
Step 34 Click the Admin State table cell. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance.
Step 35 Repeat Steps 7 through 34 for the remaining wavelengths of the 100-Ghz grid to verify the correct
behavior of all VOAs inside the 32WSS-L card.
Step 36 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the 32WSS-L card.
Step 37 Remove the loopback created in Step 5.
Step 38 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 39 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.5-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card for Acceptance Testing
Step 1 If you have installed and verified the TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 2. If you have not
installed it, install the card using the “NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards” procedure on page 4-69.
Step 2 In Cisco Transport Controller (CTC), display the TXP_MR_10E_L card in card view.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Line > Service-Type tabs.
Step 4 Click the Admin State table cell for the trunk port and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 5 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 7 In the Wavelength field, choose the first wavelength required by the acceptance test.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Click the Provisioning > Line > Service-Type tabs.
Step 10 Click the Admin State table cell for the trunk port and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or
Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 11 Click Apply, then click Yes.
Step 12 Connect a power meter to the DWDM TX port. Verify that the output power falls within –4.5 dBm and
1.0 dBm. If it does not fall within this range, replace the card or contact your next level of support.
Step 13 Repeat Steps 3 through 12 for all the installed TXP cards.
Step 14 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This procedure provisions a TXP_MR_10E_L card for acceptance testing
when a tunable laser is not available.
Tools/Equipment TXP_MR_10E_L
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs,
page 4-78
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier
Laser and Power
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the OPT-BST-L or
OPT-AMP-L amplifier to display the card view.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs. If the value in the Currently Shutdown field is NO, continue with
Step 3. If not, complete the following steps:
a. Check the OSRI setting. If it is set to On, change it to Off and click Apply.
b. Check the Currently Shutdown field. If it changes to NO, continue with Step 3. If not, contact your
next level of support. The amplifier might need to be replaced.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Opt Ampli Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 4 Click Reset.
Step 5 Scroll to the right and locate the Signal Output Power parameter for Port 6. Verify that the Signal Output
Power value is greater than or equal to 1.5 dBm.
If the Signal Output Power is not greater than or equal to 1.5 dBm, do not continue. Begin
troubleshooting or contact your next level of support.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf view) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OPT-AMP-L amplifier
to display the card view.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
Purpose This task verifies that the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (when provisioned
in OPT-Line mode) amplifier laser is on and provisioned to the correct
power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task verifies that the OPT-AMP-L (when provisioned in OPT-PRE
mode) amplifier laser is on and provisioned to the correct power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 3 If the value shown in the Currently Shutdown field is NO, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the
following steps:
a. If the OSRI setting is set to ON, click the table cell and choose OFF from the drop-down list.
b. Click Apply.
c. Check the Currently Shutdown field. If it changes to NO, continue with Step 4. If not, contact your
next level of support.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Opt Ampli Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 5 Locate the Signal Output Power parameter for Port 2. Verify that the Signal Output Power value is
greater than or equal to 1.5 dBm. If the optical power is greater than or equal to 1.5 dBm, continue with
Step 7. If the optical power is less than 1.5 dBm, check your connections and clean the fibers using the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does not change the power value,
consult your next level of support.
Step 6 Scroll to the right to locate the DCU Insertion Loss parameter. Verify that the DCU Insertion Loss value
is less than or equal to 10 dB.
If the optical power is not greater than or equal to 10 dB, do not continue. Begin troubleshooting or
contact your next level of support.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G361 Verify the 32DMX-L Power
Step 1 Display the 32DMX-L card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the administrative state for Port 33 to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Step 4 Verify that the VOA Power Ref reaches the provisioned set point.
Step 5 Connect a power meter to the CHAN TX 01 port through the patch panel. Verify that the physical optical
power value coming from drop Port 1 on the Side A 32DMX card is consistent with the value read (the
maximum allowed error is +/– 1.0 dBm).
Step 6 Change the administrative state for Port 1 to OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI).
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies that the 32DMX-L card is provisioned to the correct
power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G43 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS and 32DMX
Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Note Because the node is isolated and no line-side fibers are connected during the test, the power levels going
into the line-side cards will not be the same as the levels after the node is connected to the network.
Therefore, if the ROADM shelf does not contain either OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifiers, and
OPT-PRE amplifiers on both Side B and Side A, lower the OPT-PRE power thresholds so that it turns
on properly. At the end of the test, you will run ANS to configure the node with the correct parameters
for the network acceptance test.
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 Make a copy of Table 5-1 on page 5-30 and place it in a convenient location for reference throughout
this procedure. The table shows the 32WSS ports and the wavelengths assigned to them. The
32 wavelengths are divided among four physical multifiber push on (MPO) connectors on the 32WSS
card. Each MPO connector is assigned eight wavelengths. In CTC, the MPO connector appears in the
card view Provisioning > Optical Connector tab. Each Optical Connector subtab represents an MPO
connector. Ports 1 through 32 are the RX (add) ports; Ports 33 through 64 are the pass-through ports.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a ROADM node provisioned for C-band
wavelengths is operating properly before you connect it to the network.
The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also verifies that each
add/drop and pass-through port on the 32WSS and 32DMX cards operates
properly. The test also checks the power levels at each transmit and receive
port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is within tolerance. If MMU
cards are installed, the test verifies that the MMU insertion loss does not
impact add, drop, or pass through circuits.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the ROADM node that you want to test. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 3.
Table 5-1 32WSS Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist
32WSS Provisioning
Subtab Port # Wavelength
Tested:
Pass-Through
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side A
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side B
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 1
RX 1, PT 33 1530.33
RX 2, PT 34 1531.12
RX 3, PT 35 1531.90
RX 4, PT 36 1532.68
RX 5, PT 37 1534.25
RX 6, PT 38 1535.04
RX 7, PT 39 1535.82
RX 8, PT 40 1536.61
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 2
RX 9, PT 41 1538.19
RX 10, PT 42 1538.98
RX 11, PT 43 1539.77
RX 12, PT 44 1540.56
RX 13, PT 45 1542.14
RX 14, PT 46 1542.94
RX 15, PT 47 1543.73
RX 16, PT 48 1544.53
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 3
RX 17, PT 49 1546.12
RX 18, PT 50 1546.92
RX 19, PT 51 1547.72
RX 20, PT 52 1548.51
RX 21, PT 53 1550.12
RX 22, PT 54 1550.92
RX 23, PT 55 1551.72
RX 24, PT 56 1552.52
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 4
RX 25, PT 57 1554.13
RX 26, PT 58 1554.94
RX 27, PT 59 1555.75
RX 28, PT 60 1556.55
RX 29, PT 61 1558.17
RX 30, PT 62 1558.98
RX 31, PT 63 1559.79
RX 32, PT 64 1560.615-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 3 Display the ROADM node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf: one an LOS alarm on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, and the other an LOS alarm on
the OSC-CSM or OSCM card. If OSCM cards are installed in ANSI shelves, EOC DCC
Termination Failure alarms will appear.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are either Success - Changed,
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 7.
a. Display the Side B MMU in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
g. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 7 Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
Step 8 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connector n > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 9 Click the Admin State table cell for the add port carrying the tested wavelength, then choose OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the tested wavelength
is 1530.33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX) Admin State field and choose
OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 10 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 9 to OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm (shown
as 1530.3), you would click the Port 33 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or
Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 11 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm. 5-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 12 Repeat Steps 8 through 11 for each wavelength that you will test.
Step 13 Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
Step 14 Repeat Steps 8 through 12 for the Side A 32WSS card.
Step 15 Display the Side B 32DMX card in card view and complete the following steps:
a. Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
b. For Port 33 (COM-RX), click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or
Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
c. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 16 Repeat Step 15 for the Side A 32DMX card.
Step 17 Complete the “DLP-G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels” task on page 5-33.
Step 18 Complete the following tasks for channels that will be added or dropped on the node.
• DLP-G311 Verify the Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS Cards, page 5-41
• DLP-G312 Verify the Side A ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS Cards, page 5-46
Step 19 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click Admin State for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and choose IS,AINS
(ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
g. Click Admin State for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and choose IS,AINS
(ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 20 Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
Step 21 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you tested.
Step 22 Click the Admin State table cell then choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI) from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,Maintenance in
Steps 9 and 10.
Step 23 Click Apply.
Step 24 Repeat Steps 21 through 23 for all the ports that are in OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance state on the
Side B 32WSS card.
Step 25 Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
Step 26 Repeat Steps 21 through 23 for all ports on the Side A 32WSS card.
Step 27 Display the Side B 32DMX card in card view.
Step 28 Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 29 For Port 33, click the Admin State table cell and choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 30 Click Apply.
Step 31 Display the Side A 32DMX card in card view.5-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 32 Repeat Steps 28 through 30 for the Side A 32DMX card.
Step 33 Delete both OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 34 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
Step 35 Create the two OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 36 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment failure alarms appear on the node. If alarms appear, investigate and resolve
them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by connecting the
LINE TX port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator
to the fiber. (OSC-CSM cards do not require attenuation.)
Purpose This task verifies the signal flow through a ROADM node for C-band
pass-through channels. Pass-through channels pass through both 32WSS
cards. The channels pass through the first 32WSS from the COM-RX port
to the EXP-TX port. In the second 32WSS, the channel goes from the
EXP-RX port to the COM-TX port. The channel is not terminated inside
the node. If MMU cards are installed, the channel passes through the MMU
COM-RX and EXP-TX ports to the 32WSS COM-RX and EXP-TX ports
on one side. On the other side, the channel goes from the 32WSS EXP-RX
and COM-TX ports to the MMU EXP-RX and COM-TX ports.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 4-126
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 2 If an OPT-PRE amplifier or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side A (where the physical loopback was
created), perform the following steps. If not, continue with Step 3.
a. Display the OPT-PRE card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-PRE card will
appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) and delete the current value.
d. Type a new value of –30.0 and press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 3 If an OPT-PRE or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue
with Step 4.
a. Display the Side B OPT-PRE card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-PRE card will
appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) and delete the current value.
d. Type a new value of –30.0 and press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 4 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OSCM or OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST
or OPT-BST-E card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active
on Side A. If the alarms do not clear, contact your next level of support.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC SDCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 5 Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
Step 6 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 7 Click the Operating Mode table cell for the wavelength under test and choose Pass Through from the
drop-down list.
Step 8 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 9 Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for the Side B 32WSS card.
Step 11 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 12.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 13.
Step 12 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test.5-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 13 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM LINE RX port. If a Side B OPT-PRE is installed, insert a 10-dB
attenuator on the fiber coming from the TXP_MR_10E_C card.
Note If using a pre-installed TXP_MR-10E_C card that is connected to the 32DMX, there is no need to
connect the TXP_MR_10E_C DWDM TX port to the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM LINE RX
port. Install an optical loopback between the LINE TX and RX ports on the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or
OSC-CSM card.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 14 If an OPT-PRE or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue
with Step 15.
a. Display the Side B OPT-PRE card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX) (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
(OSC-CSM). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 2.0 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side B OPT-PRE card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.
Step 15 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps, then continue with Step 17. If an
MMU card is not installed, continue with Step 16.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 3 (COM-RX) power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.5-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX) of the Side B MMU card.
m. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 17.
Step 16 Verify the Side B 32WSS card to OPT-BST, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM card cable connection:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If an OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete Step
g. If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for
Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 17 Verify the EXPRESS cable connection between the two 32WSS cards:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 65 (EXP-TX) Power parameter. Record the value.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power value for EXPRESS Port 66 (EXP-RX). Verify that the value matches the power
recorded in Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on
page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 18 Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.5-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 19 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn> Parameters tabs, where n = the connector
number containing the wavelength you are testing. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 20 Wait 60 to 70 seconds (or click Reset), then locate the Power and VOA Power Ref parameters for the
tested PASS-THROUGH port. Verify that the Power value is equal to the VOA Power Ref value,
+/– 1.5 dBm. If the Power value is not equal to the VOA Power Ref value +/–1.5 dBm, contact your next
level of support.
Step 21 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 22.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i.
If not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 23.
Step 22 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If
not, continue with Step 23.
a. Display the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or the Port 2
(COM-RX) Power parameter (OSC-CSM cards). Record the value.
d. Display the Side A 32WSS in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 67 (COM-TX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the 32WSS
card. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6.5-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 23 If a OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 24.
a. Display the Side A OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. Display the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX) (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
(OSC-CSM). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 2.0 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side A OPT-PRE, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-7.
Step 24 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps, then continue with Step 26. If an
MMU card is not installed on Side A, continue with Step 25.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 3 (COM-RX) power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX) of the Side A MMU card.
m. Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS cards and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 26.5-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 25 Verify the Side A 32WSS card to OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM card cable
connection:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for
Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 26 Verify the EXPRESS cable connection between the two 32WSS cards:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 65 (EXP-TX) Power parameter. Record the value.
a. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power value for Port 66 (EXP-RX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/– 1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS cards. Check the values again. If they still do not
match, contact your next level of support.
Step 27 Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
Step 28 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn> Parameters tabs, where n = the connector
number containing the wavelength you are testing. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 29 Wait 60 to 70 seconds (or click Reset), then locate the Power and VOA Power Ref parameters for the
tested PASS-THROUGH port. Verify that the Power value is equal to the VOA Power Ref value,
+/– 1.5 dBm. If the Power value is not equal to the VOA Power Ref value +/– 1.5 dBm, consult your next
level of support.
Step 30 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 31.
a. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If
not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 32.
Step 31 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If
not, continue with Step 32.
a. Display the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or the Port 2
(COM-RX) Power parameter (OSC-CSM cards). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 67 (COM-TX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the 32WSS
cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6.
Step 32 Complete Steps 18, 19, 27, and 28 for the additional wavelengths that you want to test. If you have tested
all the wavelengths, continue with Step 33.
Step 33 Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
Step 34 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 35 In the Operating Mode area, click the table cell and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 36 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 37 Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
Step 38 Repeat Steps 34 through 36 for the Side A 32WSS card.
Step 39 If you used a tunable laser or installed a TXP_MR_10E_C card for this test, disconnect it from the Side B
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM line side RX ports.
Step 40 Remove the loopback fiber from the line RX and TX in the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM
card.5-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 41 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G311 Verify the SideB ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS
Cards
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), display the Alarms tab.
Step 2 Create a physical loopback on the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by connecting the
LINE TX port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator
to the fiber. (OSC-CSM cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 3 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OSCM or
OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms
indicates that the OSC link is active on Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 4 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 5.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you are testing, then continue with Step 7.
Step 5 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Purpose This task verifies the signal flow through Side B of a ROADM node for
C-band add/drop channels.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 6 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the following steps. If you are using a tunable laser
continue with Step 7.
a. Display the TXP_MR_10E_C in card view.
b. Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
c. Locate the Port 2 (Trunk) table cell for the TX Optical Pwr parameter. Record the value.
Step 7 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side B fiber
patch panel MUX port that is connected to the Side B 32WSS card CHAN RX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 8 Connect the TXP_MR_10E_C DWDM RX port or the power meter RX port to Side B fiber patch panel
DMX port that is connected with the Side B 32DMX card CHAN-TX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 9 Display the 32WSS card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 11 For each wavelength that you will test, click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose
Add Drop from the drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Apply and then Yes, to confirm.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 14 Find the tested wavelength CHAN RX port, then scroll to the right until you see the Power Add
parameter. Verify that the Power Add value for the tested port CHAN RX is equal to the output power
level of the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_C card measured in Step 6, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 15 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table cell
for Port 67 (COM-TX) for the wavelength under test.
Step 16 Verify that the power value from Step 15 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS).Port COM-TX.Power set
point +/– 1.0 dBm on Side B. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32WSS card on Side B.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 15 (+/– 2.0 dBm), contact your next
level of support.
Step 17 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 18.
a. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If
not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 19.
Step 18 Verify the connection between the 32WSS card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E or OSC-CSM cards:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. If a OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete Step
e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
f. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
g. Verify that the value in Step e or f matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If so, continue
with Step 19. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the 32WSS cards.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 19 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side B OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power value (for OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
Power value (for OSC-CSM cards). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/–
1.5 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the
fiber connection between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side B OPT-PRE card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.5-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 20 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 21.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display a Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters
tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX).
m. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 22.
Step 21 Verify the connection between the Side B 32WSS card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or
OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.5-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, or OSC-CSM card.
Step 22 Verify the Side B 32WSS and 32DMX connection:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table
cell for Port 69 (DROP-TX).
c. Display the Side B 32DMX card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the value in the Port 33
(COM-RX) table cell. Verify that the value is equal to the value recorded in b, +/– 1.0 dBm. If not,
use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS and 32DMX cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact
your next level of support.
Step 23 Display the Side B 32DMX card in card view.
Step 24 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab. Record the CHAN-TX port value under the
Power parameter for the wavelength under test.
Step 25 Verify that the power value from Step 24 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX).Port CHAN-TX.Power set
point +/– 2 dBm on Side B. To view this set point:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32DMX card on Side B.
c. Expand the Port CHAN-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX).Port CHAN-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 24 (+/– 2 dBm), contact your next level
of support.
Step 26 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, display it in card view. If not, read the values called for in
Step 28 from the optical test set or tunable laser you are using.
Step 27 Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Step 28 In the Port 2 (Trunk) column, locate the RX Optical Power value. Verify that the value matches the power
recorded in Step 24, +/– 2 dBm. If the power values do not match (+/– 2 dBm), complete the following
steps:
a. Remove, clean, and replace the cable connecting the TXP_MR_10E_C RX port to the Side B fiber
patch panel DMX port for the tested wavelength. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors”
procedure on page 14-31.
b. Repeat this step. If the power values still do not match (+/– 2 dBm) contact your next level of
support.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 4 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths.
Step 30 Display the Side B 32WSS card in card view.
Step 31 Click the Maintenance tab.5-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 32 Click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 33 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 34 If you used a tunable laser or installed a TXP_MR_10E_C card for this test, disconnect it from the Side B
patch panel.
Step 35 Unplug the physical loopback fiber from the line TX and RX in the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM
card.
Step 36 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G312 Verify the SideA ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS
Cards
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), display the Alarms tab.
Step 2 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by connecting the
LINE TX port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator
to the fiber. (OSC-CSM cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 3 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms
indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Purpose This procedure verifies the signal flow through Side A of an ROADM node
for C-band add/drop channels.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 4 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 5.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you are testing, then continue with Step 7.
Step 5 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 6 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the following steps. If you are using a tunable laser
continue with Step 7.
a. Display the TXP_MR_10E_C in card view.
b. Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
c. Locate the Port 2 (Trunk) table cell for the TX Optical Pwr parameter. Record the value.
Step 7 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side A fiber
patch panel MUX port that is connected to the Side A 32WSS card CHAN RX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 8 Connect the TXP_MR_10E_C DWDM RX port or the power meter RX port to the Side A fiber patch
panel DMX port that is connected with the Side A 32DMX card CHAN-TX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 9 Display the 32WSS card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 11 For each wavelength that you will test, click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose
Add Drop from the drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Apply and then Yes, to confirm.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 14 Find the tested wavelength CHAN RX port, then scroll to the right until you see the Power Add
parameter. Verify that the Power Add value for the tested port CHAN RX is equal to the output power
level of the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_C card measured in Step 6, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 15 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table cell
for Port 67 (COM-TX) for the wavelength under test.
Step 16 Verify that the power value from Step 15 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS).Port COM-TX.Power set
point +/– 1.0 dBm on Side A. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32WSS card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 15 (+/– 2.0 dBm), contact your next
level of support.5-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 17 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 18.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i.
If not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 19.
Step 18 Verify the connection between the 32WSS card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM cards:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. If a OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step
e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
f. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
g. Verify that the value in Step e or f matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If so, continue
with Step 19. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the 32WSS cards.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 19 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side A OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.5-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power value (for OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
Power value (for OSC-CSM cards). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c,
+/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side A OPT-PRE card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.
Step 20 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 21.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX).
m. Display a Side A 32WSS card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 22.
Step 21 Verify the connection between the Side A 32WSS card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or
OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.5-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. If a Side A OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display a Side A OSC-CSM card in card view. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, or OSC-CSM card.
Step 22 Verify the Side A 32WSS and 32DMX connection:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table
cell for Port 69 (DROP-TX).
c. Display the Side A 32DMX card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the value in the Port 2
(COM-RX) table cell. Verify that the value is equal to the value recorded in Step b, +/– 1.0 dBm. If
not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber
connection between the 32WSS and 32DMX cards. Check the values again. If they still do not
match, contact your next level of support.
Step 23 Display the Side A 32DMX card in card view.
Step 24 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab. Record the CHAN-TX port value under the
Power parameter for the wavelength under test.
Step 25 Verify that the power value recorded in Step 24 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX).Port
CHAN-TX.Power set point +/– 2 dBm on Side A. To view this set point:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand 32DMX card on Side A.
c. Expand the CHAN-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX).Port CHAN-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 24 (+/– 2 dBm), contact your next level
of support.
Step 26 Display the TXP_MR_10E_C card in card view.
Step 27 Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Step 28 In the Port 2 (Trunk) column, locate the RX Optical Power value. Verify that the value matches the power
in Step 24, +/– 2 dBm. If the power values do not match (+/– 2 dBm), complete the following steps:
a. Remove, clean, and replace the cable connecting the TXP_MR_10E_C RX port to the Side A fiber
patch panel DMX port for the tested wavelength. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors”
procedure on page 14-31. 5-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Repeat this step. If the power values still do not match (+/– 2 dBm) contact your next level of
support.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 4 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths.
Step 30 Display the Side A 32WSS card in card view.
Step 31 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 32 Click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 33 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 34 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side A patch panel.
Step 35 Unplug the physical loopback fiber from the line TX and RX in the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM
card.
Step 36 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G154 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS-L and
32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a ROADM node provisioned for L-band
wavelengths is operating properly before you connect it to the network.
The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also verifies that each
add/drop and pass-through port on the 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards
operates properly. The test also checks the power levels at each transmit
and receive port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is within tolerance.
If MMU cards are installed, the test verifies that the MMU insertion loss
does not impact add, drop, or pass-through traffic.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Because the node is isolated and no line-side fibers are connected during the test, the power levels going
into the line-side components will not be the same as they would be in a real network setup. Therefore,
if the ROADM shelf does not contain OPT-BST-L and OPT-AMP-L (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode)
amplifiers on both Side B and Side A, you must lower the OPT-AMP-L power thresholds so that it turns
on properly. At the end of the test, you will run ANS to configure the node with the correct parameters
for the network acceptance test.
Step 1 Make a copy of Table 5-2 on page 5-53 and place it in a convenient location for reference throughout
this procedure. The table shows the 32WSS-L ports and the wavelengths assigned to them. The
32 wavelengths are divided among four physical MPO connectors on the 32WSS-L card. Each MPO
connector is assigned eight wavelengths. In CTC, the MPO connector appears in the card view
Provisioning > Optical Connector tab. Each Optical Connector subtab represents an MPO connector.
Ports 1 through 32 are the channel RX (add) ports; Ports 33 through 64 are the pass-through ports. 5-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the ROADM node that you want to test. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 3.
Table 5-2 32WSS-L Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist
32WSS-L Provisioning
Subtab Port # Wavelength
Tested:
Pass-Through
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side A
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side B
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 1
RX 1, PT 33 1577.86
RX 2, PT 34 1578.69
RX 3, PT 35 1579.52
RX 4, PT 36 1580.35
RX 5, PT 37 1581.18
RX 6, PT 38 1582.02
RX 7, PT 39 1582.85
RX 8, PT 40 1583.69
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 2
RX 9, PT 41 1584.53
RX 10, PT 42 1585.36
RX 11, PT 43 1586.20
RX 12, PT 44 1587.04
RX 13, PT 45 1587.88
RX 14, PT 46 1588.73
RX 15, PT 47 1589.57
RX 16, PT 48 1590.41
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 3
RX 17, PT 49 1591.26
RX 18, PT 50 1592.10
RX 19, PT 51 1592.95
RX 20, PT 52 1593.79
RX 21, PT 53 1594.64
RX 22, PT 54 1595.49
RX 23, PT 55 1596.34
RX 24, PT 56 1597.19
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 4
RX 25, PT 57 1598.04
RX 26, PT 58 1598.89
RX 27, PT 59 1599.75
RX 28, PT 60 1600.60
RX 29, PT 61 1601.46
RX 30, PT 62 1602.31
RX 31, PT 63 1603.17
RX 32, PT 64 1604.035-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 3 Display the ROADM node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf, one for an LOS on the OPT-BST-L card, and the other for an LOS on the OSC-CSM or
OSCM card. If OSCM cards are installed on ANSI shelves, EOC DCC Termination Failure
alarms will appear.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 7.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
g. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 7 Display the Side B 32WSS-L in card view.
Step 8 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 9 Click the Admin State table cell for the add port carrying the tested wavelength, then choose OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the tested wavelength
is 1530.33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX) Admin State field and choose
OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 10 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 9 to OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1577.86 nm (shown
as 1577.8), you would click the Port 33 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or
Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 11 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm. 5-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 12 Repeat Steps 8 through 11 for all wavelengths that you will test.
Step 13 Display the Side A 32WSS-L in card view.
Step 14 Repeat Steps 8 through 12 for the Side A 32WSS-L card.
Step 15 Display the Side B 32DMX-L in card view and complete the following steps:
a. Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
b. For Port 33 (COM-RX), click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or
Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
c. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 16 Repeat Step 15 for the Side A 32DMX-L card.
Step 17 Complete the “DLP-G362 Verify ROADM Node L-Band Pass-Through Channels” task on page 5-56.
Step 18 Complete the following tasks for channels that will be added or dropped on the node.
• DLP-G363 Verify the Side B ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels, page 5-64
• DLP-G364 Verify the Side A ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels, page 5-69
Step 19 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
g. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 20 Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 21 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you tested.
Step 22 Click the Admin State table cell then choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI) from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,Maintenance.
Step 23 Click Apply.
Step 24 Repeat Steps 21 through 23 for all the ports that are OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance on the Side B
32WSS-L card.
Step 25 Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 26 Repeat Steps 21 through 24 for all ports on the Side A 32WSS-L card.
Step 27 Display the Side B 32DMX-L card in card view.
Step 28 Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 29 For Port 33, click the Admin State table cell and choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 30 Click Apply.
Step 31 Display the Side A 32DMX-L card in card view.
Step 32 Repeat Steps 28 through 30 for the Side A 32DMX-L card.5-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 33 Delete both OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 34 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
Step 35 Create the two OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 36 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment failure alarms appear on the node. If alarms appear, investigate and resolve
them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G362 Verify ROADM Node L-Band Pass-Through Channels
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX
port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST-L cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator to the fiber. (OSC-CSM
cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Purpose This task verifies the signal flow through a ROADM node for L-band
pass-through channels. Configuring a channel pass-through mode means
that the channel passes through both 32WSS-L cards. The channel passes
through the first 32WSS-L card from the COM RX port to the EXP TX
port. In the second 32WSS-L card, the channel goes from the EXP RX port
to the COM TX port. The channel is not terminated inside the node. If
MMU cards are installed, the channel passes through the MMU COM RX
and EXP TX ports to the 32WSS-L COM RX and EXP TX ports on one
side. On the other side, the channel goes from the 32WSS-L EXP RX and
32WSS-L COM TX ports to the MMU EXP RX and COM TX.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 2 If an OPT-AMP-L amplifier (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side A (where the physical
loopback was created), perform the following steps. If not, continue with Step 3.
a. Display the OPT-AMP-L card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-AMP-L card
will appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (1-Line-2-1 RX) and delete the current
value.
d. Type a new value of –30. Press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 3 If an OPT-AMP-L amplifier (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side B (where the physical
loopback was created), perform the following steps. If not, continue with Step 4.
a. Display the OPT-AMP-L card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-AMP-L card
will appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (1-Line-2-1 RX) and delete the current
value.
d. Type a new value of –30. Press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 4 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OSCM or OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST-L
card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A. If the
alarms do not clear, contact your next level of support.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 5 Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 6 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 7 Click the Operating Mode table cell and choose Pass Through from the drop-down list.
Step 8 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 9 Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for the Side B 32WSS-L card.
Step 11 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 12.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 13.
Step 12 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test.
Step 13 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM LINE RX port. If a Side B OPT-AMP-L card is installed, insert a 10-dB
attenuator on the fiber coming from the TXP_MR_10E_L card.5-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 14 If an OPT-AMP-L card configured as an OPT-PRE is installed on Side B, complete the following steps.
If not, continue with Step 15.
a. Display the Side B OPT-AMP-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1. Record the value.
d. Display the Side B OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 2 (if an OPT-BST-L card) or Port 3 (if an OSC-CSM card). Verify
that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean
Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection between the OPT-AMP-L
card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card. Check the values again. If they still do not match,
contact your next level of support.
g. Complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-27.
Step 15 If MMU cards are installed complete the following steps. If an MMU cards are not installed, continue
with Step 16.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 3 (COM-RX) power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-AMP-L card provisioned as an OPT-PRE is installed, display it in card view and
complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-AMP-L Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total
Output Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX) of the Side B MMU card.
m. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 17.
Step 16 Verify the Side B 32WSS-L to OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, or OSC-CSM card cable connection:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-AMP-L card provisioned as an OPT-PRE is installed, display it in card view and
complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2, then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3,
then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2, then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-BST-L, or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 17 Verify the EXPRESS cable connection between the two 32WSS-L cards:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 65 (EXP-TX) Power parameter. Record the value.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power value for Port 66 (EXP-RX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L cards. Check the values again. If they still do not
match, contact your next level of support.
Step 18 Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 19 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn> Parameters tabs, where n = the connector
number containing the wavelength you are testing. Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 20 Wait 60 to 70 seconds, then locate the Power and VOA Power Ref parameters for the tested
PASS-THROUGH port. Verify that the Power value is equal to the VOA Power Ref value, +/– 1.5 dBm.
If the Power value is not equal to the VOA Power Ref value, +/– 1.5 dBm, contact your next level of
support.
Step 21 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 22.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.5-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If an OPT-BST-L card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step i. If not,
continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card, and the MMU card. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 23.
Step 22 If an OPT-BST-L card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 23.
a. Display the Side B OPT-BST-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 Power parameter. Record the value.
d. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 67. Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c,
+/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the
fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L and 32WSS-L cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-6.
Step 23 If a Side A OPT-AMP-L card provisioned as an OPT-PRE is installed, complete the following steps. If
not, continue with Step 24.
a. Display the Side A OPT-AMP-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side A OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Locate the Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX) (OPT-BST-L) or Port 3 (COM-TX) (OSC-CSM).
Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 2.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115
Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection between the
OPT-AMP-L card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card. Check the values again. If they still do
not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side A OPT-AMP-L card provisioned as an OPT-PRE, complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the
OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27.
Step 24 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps, then continue with Step 26. If an
MMU card is not installed on Side A, continue with Step 25.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 3 (COM-RX) power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed, display it in card view and
complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-AMP-L Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total
Output Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If an OPT-BST-L card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not,
continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX) of the Side A MMU card.
m. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS and cards and the MMU cards. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 26.
Step 25 Verify the Side A 32WSS-L card to OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, or OSC-CSM card cable connection:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-AMP-L card is installed, display it in card view, and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f. 5-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view, and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/–1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-BST-L, or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 26 Verify the EXPRESS cable connection between the two 32WSS-L cards:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 65 (EXP-TX) Power parameter. Record the value.
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power value for Port 66 (EXP-RX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/– 1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L cards. Check the values again. If they still do not
match, contact your next level of support.
Step 27 Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 28 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn> Parameters tabs, where n = the connector
number containing the wavelength you are testing. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 29 Wait 60 to 70 seconds (or click Reset), then locate the Power and VOA Power Ref parameters for the
tested PASS-THROUGH port. Verify that the Power value is equal to the VOA Power Ref value,
+/– 1.5 dBm. If the Power value is not equal to the VOA Power Ref value +/– 1.5 dBm, consult your next
level of support.
Step 30 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 31.
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If not, continue
with Step j.5-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 32.
Step 31 If an OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue
with Step 32.
a. Display the Side B OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter (OPT-BST-L card) or the Port 2 (COM-RX) Power
parameter (OSC-CSM card). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 67 (COM-TX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L card and the OSC-CSM or 32WSS-L card.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-6.
Step 32 Repeat Steps 18 through 20 and 27 through 29 for the remaining wavelengths to be tested. If you have
tested all the wavelengths, continue with Step 33.
Step 33 Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 34 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 35 In the Operating Mode, click the table cell and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for all
wavelengths.
Step 36 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 37 Display the Side A 32WSS-L in card view.
Step 38 Repeat Steps 34 through 36 for the Side A 32WSS-L card.
Step 39 Remove the TXP or tunable laser from the Side B OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM line side TX and RX ports.
Step 40 Remove the loopback fiber from the line RX and TX in the Side A OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card.
Step 41 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).5-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G363 Verify the SideB ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), display the Alarms tab.
Step 2 Create a physical loopback on the Side B OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX
port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST-L cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator to the fiber. (OSC-CSM
cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 3 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OSCM or
OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST-L card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the
OSC link is active on Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the OSC
signal loopback.
Step 4 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 5.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you are testing, then continue with Step 7.
Step 5 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. See
Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 6 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the following steps. If you are using a tunable laser,
continue with Step 7.
a. Display the TXP_MR_10E_L in card view.
b. Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
c. Locate the Port 2 (Trunk) table cell for the TX Optical Pwr parameter. Record the value.
Purpose This procedure verifies the signal flow through Side B of a ROADM node
for L-band add/drop channels.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 7 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the Side B fiber
patch panel MUX port that corresponds to the Side B 32WSS-L card port carrying the tested wavelength.
Step 8 Connect the TXP_MR_10E_L DWDM RX port or the power meter RX port to the Side B fiber patch
panel DMX port that is connected with the Side B 32DMX-L card CHAN-TX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_L card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 9 Display the 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 11 For each wavelength that you will test, click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose
Add Drop from the drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Apply and then Yes, to confirm.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 14 Find the tested wavelength CHAN RX port, then scroll to the right until you see the Power Add
parameter. Verify that the Power Add value for the tested port CHAN RX is equal to the output power
level of the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_L card measured in Step 6, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 15 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table cell
for Port 67 (COM-TX) for the wavelength under test.
Step 16 Verify that the power value from Step 15 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L).Port COM-TX.Power set
+/– 1.0 dBm on Side B. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32WSS-L card on Side B.
c. Expand the COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 15 (+/– 2.0 dBm), contact your next
level of support.
Step 17 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 18.
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If not, continue
with Step j.5-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 19.
Step 18 Verify the connection between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM cards:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. If a OPT-BST-L card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
f. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
g. Verify that the value in Step e or f matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If so, continue
with Step 19. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card and the 32WSS-L cards. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 19 If an OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed on Side B, complete the following
steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side B OPT-AMP-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power value (for OPT-BST-L cards) or Port 3 (COM-TX) Power value
(for OSC-CSM cards). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If
not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber
connection between the OPT-AMP-L card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side B OPT-AMP-L card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.
Step 20 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 21.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.5-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. If an OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed on Side B, display it in card view
and complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters
tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX).
m. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 22.
Step 21 Verify the connection between the Side B 32WSS-L card and the OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L (in
OPT-PRE mode), or OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed, display it in card view and
complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-BST-L, or OSC-CSM card.5-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 22 Verify the Side B 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L connection:
a. Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table
cell for Port 69 (DROP-TX).
c. Display the Side B 32DMX-L card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the value in the Port 2
(COM-RX) table cell. Verify that the value is equal to the value recorded in b, +/– 1.0 dBm. If not,
use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match,
contact your next level of support.
Step 23 Display the Side B 32DMX-L card in card view.
Step 24 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab. Record the CHAN-TX port value under the
Power parameter for the wavelength under test.
Step 25 Verify that the power value from Step 24 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX-L).Port CHAN-TX.Power
set point +/– 2 dBm on Side B. To view this set point:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32DMX-L card.
c. Expand the CHAN-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Side B Shelf i Slot i (32DMX-L).Port CHAN-TX.Power parameter on the right
pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 24 (+/– 2 dBm), contact your next level
of support.
Step 26 Display the TXP_MR_10E_L card in card view.
Step 27 Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Step 28 In the Port 2 (Trunk) column, locate the RX Optical Power value. Verify that the value matches the power
in Step 24, +/– 2 dBm. If the power values do not match (+/– 2 dBm), complete the following steps:
a. Remove, clean, and replace the cable connecting the TXP_MR_10E_C RX port to the Side B fiber
patch panel DMX port for the tested wavelength. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors”
procedure on page 14-31.
b. Repeat this step. If the power values still do not match (+/– 2 dBm) contact your next level of
support.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 4 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths.
Step 30 Display the Side B 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 31 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 32 Click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 33 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 34 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side B patch panel.
Step 35 Unplug the physical loopback fiber from the line TX and RX in the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card.5-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 36 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G364 Verify the SideA ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), display the Alarms tab.
Step 2 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX
port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST-L cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator to the fiber. (OSC-CSM
cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 3 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST-L card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the
OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 4 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 5.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you are testing, then continue with Step 7.
Step 5 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer
to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Purpose This procedure verifies the signal flow through Side A of a ROADM node
for L-band add/drop channels.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 6 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the following steps. If you are using a tunable laser,
continue with Step 7.
a. Display the TXP_MR_10E_L in card view.
b. Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
c. Locate the Port 2 (Trunk) table cell for the TX Optical Pwr parameter. Record the value.
Step 7 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the Side A fiber
patch panel MUX port that corresponds to the Side A 32WSS-L card port carrying the tested wavelength.
Step 8 Connect the TXP_MR_10E_L DWDM RX port or the power meter RX port to the Side A fiber patch
panel DMX port that is connected with the Side A 32DMX-L card CHAN-TX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_L card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 9 Display the 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 11 For each wavelength that you will test, click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose
Add Drop from the drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Apply and then Yes, to confirm.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-53, if needed.
Step 14 Find the tested wavelength CHAN RX port, then scroll to the right until you see the Power Add
parameter. Verify that the Power Add value for the tested port CHAN RX is equal to the output power
level of the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_L card measured in Step 6, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 15 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table cell
for Port 67 (COM-TX) for the wavelength under test.
Step 16 Verify that the power value from Step 15 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L).Port COM-TX.Power +/–
1.0 dBm on Side A. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32WSS-L card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the Shelf i Slot i (32WSS-L).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 15 (+/– 2.0 dBm), contact your next
level of support.
Step 17 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 18.
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side A OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If not, continue
with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 19.
Step 18 Verify the connection between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM cards:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. If a OPT-BST-L card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
f. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
g. Verify that the value in Step e or f matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If so, continue
with Step 19. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card and the 32WSS-L cards. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 19 If an OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed on Side A, complete the following
steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side A OPT-AMP-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side A OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power value (for OPT-BST-L cards) or Port 3 (COM-TX) Power value
(for OSC-CSM cards). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If
not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber
connection between the OPT-AMP-L card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side A OPT-AMP-L card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.5-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 20 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 21.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If an OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed on Side A, display it in card view
and complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again. If they still
do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX).
m. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 32WSS-L and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 22.
Step 21 Verify the connection between the Side A 32WSS-L card and the OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L (in
OPT-PRE mode), or OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-AMP-L card provisioned in OPT-PRE mode is installed, display it in card view and
complete Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST-L card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g. If not, continue
with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.5-73
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS-L card and the OPT-AMP-L, OPT-BST-L, or OSC-CSM card.
Step 22 Verify the Side A 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L connection:
a. Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table
cell for Port 69 (DROP-TX).
c. Display the Side A 32DMX-L card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the value in the Port 2
(COM-RX) table cell. Verify that the value is equal to the value recorded in b, +/– 1.0 dBm. If not,
use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match,
contact your next level of support.
Step 23 Display the Side A 32DMX-L card in card view.
Step 24 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab. Record the CHAN-TX port value under the
Power parameter for the wavelength under test.
Step 25 Verify that the power value from Step 24 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX-L).Port CHAN-TX.Power
set point +/– 2 dBm on Side A. To view this set point:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 32DMX-L card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port CHAN-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (32DMX-L).Port CHAN-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 24 (+/– 2 dBm), contact your next level
of support.
Step 26 Display the TXP_MR_10E_L card in card view.
Step 27 Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Step 28 In the Port 2 (Trunk) column, locate the RX Optical Power value. Verify that the value matches the power
in Step 24, +/– 2 dBm. If the power values do not match (+/– 2 dBm), complete the following steps:
a. Remove, clean, and replace the cable connecting the TXP_MR_10E_L RX port to the Side A fiber
patch panel DMX port for the tested wavelength. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors”
procedure on page 14-31.
b. Repeat this step. If the power values still do not match (+/– 2 dBm) contact your next level of
support.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 4 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths.
Step 30 Display the Side A 32WSS-L card in card view.
Step 31 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 32 Click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 33 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.5-74
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 34 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side A patch panel.
Step 35 Unplug the physical loopback fiber from the line TX and RX in the OPT-BST-L or OSC-CSM card.
Step 36 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G180 Perform the ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C and
40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Note Because the node is isolated and no line-side fibers are connected during the test, the power levels going
into the line-side cards will not be the same as the levels after the node is connected to the network.
Therefore, if the ROADM shelf does not contain either OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifiers, and
OPT-PRE amplifiers on both the Side B and Side A sides, lower the OPT-PRE power thresholds so that
the ROADM shelf turns on properly. At the end of the test, you will run ANS to configure the node with
the correct parameters for the network acceptance test.
Note Throughout this procedure, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Purpose This acceptance test verifies that a ROADM node provisioned for C-band
wavelengths is operating properly before you connect it to the network.
The test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and also verifies that each
add/drop and pass-through port on the 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards
operates properly. The test also checks the power levels at each transmit
and receive port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is within tolerance.
If MMU cards are installed, the test verifies that the MMU insertion loss
does not impact add, drop, or pass through circuits.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-75
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 Make a copy of Table 5-3 on page 5-76 and place it in a convenient location for reference throughout
this procedure. The table shows the 40-WSS-C ports and the wavelengths assigned to them. The
40 wavelengths are divided among five physical multi-fiber push on (MPO) connectors on the
40-WSS-C card. Each MPO connector is assigned eight wavelengths. In Cisco Transport controller
(CTC), the MPO connector appears in the card view Provisioning > Optical Chn:Optical Connector tab.
Each Optical Connector subtab represents an MPO connector. Ports 1 through 40 are the channel
(CHAN) RX (add) ports; Ports 41 through 80 are the pass-through ports.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the ROADM node that you want to test. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 Display the ROADM node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate LOS alarms on the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-AMP-C cards, and on the OSC-CSM and OSCM cards. If OSCM cards are
installed in ANSI shelves, EOC SDCC Termination Failure alarms will also appear.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are either Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Note The OSC terminations created will generate LOS alarms on the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E,
OPT-AMP-C cards and on the OSC-CSM and OSCM cards. If OSCM cards are installed in
ANSI shelves, EOC DCC Termination Failure alarms will also appear.
Step 6 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 7.
a. Display the Side B MMU in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. 5-76
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
g. Click the Admin State table cell for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 7 Display the Side B 40-WSS-C in card view.
Step 8 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connector n > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-3, if needed.
Step 9 Click the Admin State table cell for the add port carrying the tested wavelength, then choose OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list. For example, if the tested wavelength
is 1530.33 nm (shown as 1530.3), you would click the Port 1 (CHAN-RX) Admin State field and choose
OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list.
Step 10 Change the administrative state of the pass-through port corresponding to the port in Step 9 to OOS,MT
(ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). For example, if the tested wavelength is 1530.33 nm (shown
as 1530.3), you would click the Port 33 (PASS-THROUGH) Admin State field and choose OOS,MT or
Locked,maintenance from the drop-down list. Refer to Table 5-3, if needed.
Table 5-3 40-WSS-C Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist
40-WSS-C Provisioning
Subtab Port # Wavelength
Tested:
Pass-Through
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side A
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side B
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 1
RX 1, PT 41 1530.33
RX 2, PT 42 1531.12
RX 3, PT 43 1531.90
RX 4, PT 44 1532.68
RX 5, PT 45 1533.47
RX 6, PT 46 1533.47
RX 7, PT 47 1535.04
RX 8, PT 48 1535.82
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 2
RX 9, PT 49 1536.81
RX 10, PT 50 1537.40
RX 11, PT 51 1538.19
RX 12, PT 52 1538.98
RX 13, PT 53 1539.77
RX 14, PT 54 1540.56
RX 15, PT 55 1541.35
RX 16, PT 56 1542.145-77
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 11 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 12 Repeat Steps 8 through 11 for each wavelength that you will test.
Step 13 Display the Side A 40-WSS-C in card view.
Step 14 Repeat Steps 8 through 12 for the Side A 40-WSS-C card.
Step 15 Display the Side B 40-DMX-C card in card view and complete the following steps:
a. Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
b. For Port 41 (COM-RX), click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or
Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
c. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 16 Repeat Step 15 for the Side A 40-DMX-C card.
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 3
RX 17, PT 57 1542.19
RX 18, PT 58 1543.73
RX 19, PT 59 1544.53
RX 20, PT 60 1545.32
RX 21, PT 61 1546.12
RX 22, PT 62 1546.92
RX 23, PT 63 1547.72
RX 24, PT 64 1548.51
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 4
RX 25, PT 65 1549.32
RX 26, PT 66 1550.12
RX 27, PT 67 1550.92
RX 28, PT 68 1551.72
RX 29, PT 69 1552.52
RX 30, PT 70 1553.33
RX 31, PT 71 1554.13
RX 32, PT 72 1554.94
Optical Chn:
Optical Connector 5
RX 33, PT 73 1555.75
RX 34, PT 74 1556.55
RX 35, PT 75 1557.36
RX 36, PT 76 1558.17
RX 37, PT 77 1558.98
RX 38, PT 78 1559.71
RX 39, PT 79 1560.61
RX 40, PT 80 1561.42
Table 5-3 40-WSS-C Ports and Wavelengths Test Checklist (continued)
40-WSS-C Provisioning
Subtab Port # Wavelength
Tested:
Pass-Through
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side A
Tested:
Add/Drop
Side B5-78
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 17 Complete the “DLP-G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels with 40-WSS-C
Cards” task on page 5-79.
Step 18 Complete the following tasks for channels that will be added or dropped on the node.
• DLP-G311 Verify the Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards,
page 5-87
• DLP-G312 Verify the Side A ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C Cards,
page 5-92
Step 19 If MMU cards are installed, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side B MMU in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Click Admin State for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and choose IS,AINS
(ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
d. Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
e. Display the Side A MMU in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
g. Click Admin State for the COM RX, COM TX, EXP RX, and EXP TX ports and choose IS,AINS
(ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 20 Display the Side B 40-WSS-C in card view.
Step 21 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you tested.
Step 22 Click the Admin State table cell then choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI) from the drop-down list for all ports that were changed to OOS,MT or Locked,Maintenance in
Steps 9 and 10.
Step 23 Click Apply.
Step 24 Repeat Steps 21 through 23 for all the ports that are in OOS,MT or Locked,maintenance state on the
Side B 40-WSS-C card.
Step 25 Display the Side A 40-WSS-C in card view.
Step 26 Repeat Steps 21 through 23 for all ports on the Side A 40-WSS-C card.
Step 27 Display the Side B 40-DMX-C in card view.
Step 28 Choose the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 29 For Port 33, click the Admin State table cell and choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the drop-down list.
Step 30 Click Apply.
Step 31 Display the Side A 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 32 Repeat Steps 28 through 30 for the Side A 40-DMX-C card.
Step 33 Delete both OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 34 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
Step 35 Create the two OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.5-79
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 36 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment failure alarms appear on the node. If alarms appear, investigate and resolve
them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for
procedures.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels with 40-WSS-C
Cards
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by connecting the
LINE TX port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator
to the fiber. (OSC-CSM cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Purpose This task verifies the signal flow through a ROADM node for C-band
pass-through channels. Pass-through channels pass through both
40-WSS-C cards. The channels pass through the first 40-WSS-C from the
COM-RX port to the EXP-TX port. In the second 40-WSS-C, the channel
goes from the EXP-RX port to the COM-TX port. The channel is not
terminated inside the node. If MMU cards are installed, the channel passes
through the MMU COM-RX and EXP-TX ports to the 40-WSS-C
COM-RX and EXP-TX ports on one side. On the other side, the channel
goes from the 40-WSS-C EXP-RX and COM-TX ports to the MMU
EXP-RX and COM-TX ports.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 4-126
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-80
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 2 If an OPT-PRE amplifier is installed on Side A (where the physical loopback was created), perform the
following steps. If not, continue with Step 3.
a. Display the OPT-PRE card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-PRE card will
appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) and delete the current value.
d. Type a new value of –30.0 and press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 3 If an OPT-PRE or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue
with Step 4.
a. Display the Side B OPT-PRE card in card view, then click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs.
b. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh. The alarm thresholds for the OPT-PRE card will
appear.
c. Double-click the Power Failure Low table cell for Port 1 (COM-RX) and delete the current value.
d. Type a new value of –30.0 and press the Enter key.
e. In the CTC window, click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 4 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OSCM or OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST
or OPT-BST-E card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active
on Side A. If the alarms do not clear, contact your next level of support.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC SDCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 5 Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 6 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 7 Click the Operating Mode table cell for the wavelength under test and choose Pass Through from the
drop-down list.
Step 8 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 9 Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for the Side B 40-WSS-C card.
Step 11 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 12.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you will test, then continue with Step 13.
Step 12 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test.
Step 13 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM LINE RX port. If a Side B OPT-PRE is installed, insert a 10-dB
attenuator on the fiber coming from the TXP_MR_10E_C card.5-81
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note If using a pre-installed TXP_MR-10E_C card that is connected to the 40-DMX-C, there is no need to
connect the TXP_MR_10E_C DWDM TX port to the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM LINE RX
port. Install an optical loopback between the LINE TX and RX ports on the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or
OSC-CSM card.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 14 If an OPT-PRE or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue
with Step 15.
a. Display the Side B OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX) (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
(OSC-CSM). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 2.0 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side B OPT-PRE card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.
Step 15 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps, then continue with Step 17. If an
MMU card is not installed, continue with Step 16.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 3 (COM-RX) power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-82
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX) of the Side B MMU card.
m. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 17.
Step 16 Verify the Side B 40-WSS-C card to OPT-BST, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM card cable connection:
a. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 84 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If an OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete Step
g. If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for
Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check
the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 17 Verify the EXPRESS cable connection between the two 40-WSS-C cards:
a. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 81 (EXP-TX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for EXPRESS Port 82 (EXP-RX). Verify that the value matches the power
recorded in Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on
page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C cards. Check the values again. If
they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 18 Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 19 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn> Parameters tabs, where n = the connector
number containing the wavelength you are testing. Refer to Table 5-3 on page 5-76, if needed.
Step 20 Wait 60 to 70 seconds (or click Reset), then locate the Power and VOA Power Ref parameters for the
tested PASS-THROUGH port. Verify that the Power value is equal to the VOA Power Ref value,
+/– 1.5 dBm. If the Power value is not equal to the VOA Power Ref value +/–1.5 dBm, contact your next
level of support.5-83
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 21 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 22.
a. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 83 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i.
If not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 23.
Step 22 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If
not, continue with Step 23.
a. Display the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or the Port 2
(COM-RX) Power parameter (OSC-CSM cards). Record the value.
d. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 83 (COM-TX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the
40-WSS-C card. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
g. For the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6.
Step 23 If a OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 24.
a. Display the Side A OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. Display the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.5-84
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX) (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
(OSC-CSM). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 2.0 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side A OPT-PRE, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-7.
Step 24 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps, then continue with Step 26. If an
MMU card is not installed on Side A, continue with Step 25.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 3 (COM-RX) power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the
values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX) of the Side A MMU card.
m. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 84 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and cards and the MMU cards. Check the values
again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 26.
Step 25 Verify the Side A 40-WSS-C card to OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM card cable
connection:
a. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 84 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.5-85
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. If a Side A OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for
Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card. Check
the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 26 Verify the EXPRESS cable connection between the two 40-WSS-C cards:
a. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 81 (EXP-TX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 82 (EXP-RX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/– 1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C cards. Check the values again. If they still do not
match, contact your next level of support.
Step 27 Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 28 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn> Parameters tabs, where n = the connector
number containing the wavelength you are testing. Refer to Table 5-3 on page 5-76, if needed.
Step 29 Wait 60 to 70 seconds (or click Reset), then locate the Power and VOA Power Ref parameters for the
tested PASS-THROUGH port. Verify that the Power value is equal to the VOA Power Ref value,
+/– 1.5 dBm. If the Power value is not equal to the VOA Power Ref value +/– 1.5 dBm, consult your next
level of support.
Step 30 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 31.
a. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 83 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).5-86
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If
not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 32.
Step 31 If an OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If
not, continue with Step 32.
a. Display the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 1 (COM-RX) Power parameter (OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or the Port 2
(COM-RX) Power parameter (OSC-CSM cards). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Power value for Port 83 (COM-TX). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in
Step c, +/–1 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the
40-WSS-C cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of
support.
g. For the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-6.
Step 32 Complete Steps 18, 19, 27, and 28 for the additional wavelengths that you want to test. If you have tested
all the wavelengths, continue with Step 33.
Step 33 Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 34 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 35 In the Operating Mode column, click the table cell and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list
for all wavelengths.
Step 36 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 37 Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 38 Repeat Steps 34 through 36 for the Side A 40-WSS-C card.
Step 39 If you used a tunable laser or installed a TXP_MR_10E_C card for this test, disconnect it or the tunable
laser from the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM line side RX ports.
Step 40 Remove the loopback fiber from the line RX and TX in the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM
card.
Step 41 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).5-87
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G311 Verify the SideB ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C
Cards
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), display the Alarms tab.
Step 2 Create a physical loopback on the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by connecting the
LINE TX port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator
to the fiber. (OSC-CSM cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 3 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OSCM or
OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms
indicates that the OSC link is active on Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 4 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 5.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you are testing, then continue with Step 7.
Step 5 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 6 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the following steps. If you are using a tunable laser
continue with Step 7.
a. Display the TXP_MR_10E_C in card view.
b. Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Purpose This task verifies the signal flow through Side B of a ROADM node for
C-band add/drop channels.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-88
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Locate the Port 2 (Trunk) table cell for the TX Optical Pwr parameter. Record the value.
Step 7 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side B fiber
patch panel MUX port that is connected to the Side B 40-WSS-C card CHAN RX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 8 Connect the TXP_MR_10E_C DWDM RX port or the power meter RX port to the Side B fiber patch
panel DMX port that is connected with the Side B 40-DMX-C card CHAN-TX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 9 Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 11 For each wavelength that you will test, click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose
Add Drop from the drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Apply and then Yes, to confirm.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 14 Find the tested wavelength CHAN RX port, then scroll to the right until you see the Power Add
parameter. Verify that the Power Add value for the tested port CHAN RX is equal to the output power
level of the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_C card measured in Step 6, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 15 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table cell
for Port 67 (COM-TX) for the wavelength under test.
Step 16 Verify that the power value from Step 15 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (40-WSS-C).Port COM-TX.Power set
point +/– 1.0 dBm on Side B. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-WSS-C card on Side B.
c. Expand the Port COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-WSS-C).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 15 (+/– 2.0 dBm), contact your next
level of support.
Step 17 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 18.
a. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).5-89
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i. If
not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 19.
Step 18 Verify the connection between the 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E or OSC-CSM cards:
a. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. If a OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete
Step e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
f. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
g. Verify that the value in Step e or f matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If so, continue
with Step 19. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the 40-WSS-C
cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 19 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side B OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side B OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power value (for OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
Power value (for OSC-CSM cards). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c, +/–
1.5 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the
fiber connection between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side B OPT-PRE card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.
Step 20 If an MMU card is installed on Side B, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side B, continue with Step 21.
a. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.5-90
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters
tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side B MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX).
m. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 22.
Step 21 Verify the connection between the Side B 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or
OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side B OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, or OSC-CSM card.5-91
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 22 Verify the Side B 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C connection:
a. Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table
cell for Port 69 (DROP-TX).
c. Display the Side B 40-DMX-C card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the value in the Port 33
(COM-RX) table cell. Verify that the value is equal to the value recorded in b, +/– 1.0 dBm. If not,
use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match,
contact your next level of support.
Step 23 Display the Side B 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 24 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab. Record the CHAN-TX port value under the
Power parameter for the wavelength under test.
Step 25 Verify that the power value from Step 24 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (40-DMX-C).Port CHAN-TX.Power
set point +/– 2 dBm on Side B. To view this set point:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-DMX-C card on Side B.
c. Expand the CHAN-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-DMX-C).Port CHAN-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 24 (+/– 2 dBm), contact your next level
of support.
Step 26 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, display it in card view. If not, read the values called for in
Step 28 from the optical test set or tunable laser you are using.
Step 27 Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Step 28 In the Port 2 (Trunk) column, locate the RX Optical Power value. Verify that the value matches the power
recorded in Step 24, +/– 2 dBm. If the power values do not match (+/– 2 dBm), complete the following
steps:
a. Remove, clean, and replace the cable connecting the TXP_MR_10E_C RX port to the Side B fiber
patch panel DMX port for the tested wavelength. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors”
procedure on page 14-31.
b. Repeat this step. If the power values still do not match (+/– 2 dBm) contact your next level of
support.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 4 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths.
Step 30 Display the Side B 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 31 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 32 Click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 33 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.
Step 34 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side B patch panel.
Step 35 Unplug the physical loopback fiber from the line TX and RX in the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM
card.5-92
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 36 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G312 Verify the SideA ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 40-WSS-C
Cards
Note Throughout this task, Side A refers to Slots 1 through 8, and Side B refers to Slots 10 through 17.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), display the Alarms tab.
Step 2 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card by connecting the
LINE TX port to its LINE RX port. For OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards, connect a 10-dB bulk attenuator
to the fiber. (OSC-CSM cards do not require attenuation.)
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 3 Wait 2 to 3 minutes, then click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OSCM or
OSC-CSM card and the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms
indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
Step 4 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 5.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength you are testing, then continue with Step 7.
Step 5 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-3 on page 5-76, if needed.
Purpose This task verifies the signal flow through Side A of an ROADM node for
C-band add/drop channels.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-93
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 6 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the following steps. If you are using a tunable laser
continue with Step 7.
a. Display the TXP_MR_10E_C in card view.
b. Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
c. Locate the Port 2 (Trunk) table cell for the TX Optical Pwr parameter. Record the value.
Step 7 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side A fiber
patch panel MUX port that is connected to the Side A 40-WSS-C card CHAN RX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 8 Connect the TXP_MR_10E_C DWDM RX port or the power meter RX port to the Side A fiber patch
panel DMX port that is connected with the Side A 40-DMX-C card CHAN-TX port carrying the tested
wavelength. (If the TXP_MR_10E_C card was installed during Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node,” simply
verify the cable connection.)
Step 9 Display the 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 10 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 11 For each wavelength that you will test, click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose
Add Drop from the drop-down list.
Step 12 Click Apply and then Yes, to confirm.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn Optical Connectorn > Parameters tabs, where n = the optical
connector number that carries the wavelengths you will test. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 14 Find the tested wavelength CHAN RX port, then scroll to the right until you see the Power Add
parameter. Verify that the Power Add value for the tested port CHAN RX is equal to the output power
level of the tunable laser or the TXP_MR_10E_C card measured in Step 6, +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 15 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table cell
for Port 67 (COM-TX) for the wavelength under test.
Step 16 Verify that the power value from Step 15 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (40-WSS -C).Port COM-TX.Power
set point +/– 1.0 dBm on Side A. To view this set point:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-WSS -C card on Side A.
c. Expand the COM-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-WSS -C).Port COM-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 15 (+/– 2.0 dBm), contact your next
level of support.
Step 17 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 18.
a. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.5-94
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
f. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 1 (EXP-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 4 (COM-TX).
h. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step i.
If not, continue with Step j.
i. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
j. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step k.
k. Verify that the value in Step i or j matches the power recorded in Step g, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the
“NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the MMU cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
l. Continue with Step 19.
Step 18 Verify the connection between the 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM cards:
a. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 67 (COM-TX).
d. If a OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step
e. If not, continue with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 1
(COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
f. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2 (COM-RX), then continue with Step g.
g. Verify that the value in Step e or f matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If so, continue
with Step 19. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card and the 40-WSS-C
cards. Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 19 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 20.
a. Display the Side A OPT-PRE in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Power parameter for Port 1 (COM-RX). Record the value.
d. Display the Side A OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
f. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power value (for OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards) or Port 3 (COM-TX)
Power value (for OSC-CSM cards). Verify that the value matches the power recorded in Step c,
+/– 1.5 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean
the fiber connection between the OPT-PRE card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM card.
Check the values again. If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
g. For the Side A OPT-PRE card, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-7.5-95
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 20 If an MMU card is installed on Side A, complete the following steps. If an MMU card is not installed on
Side A, continue with Step 21.
a. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not,
continue with Step f.
e. Click the OPT-PRE Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Total Output
Power value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view, click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that value in the Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the MMU card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM cards. Check the values again.
If they still do not match, contact your next level of support.
j. Display the Side A MMU card in card view.
k. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
l. Record the value in the Power table cell for Port 2 (EXP-TX).
m. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
n. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
o. Verify that the value in the Power table cell for Port 68 (COM-RX) is equal to the value recorded in
Step l, +/– 1.0 dB. If not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to
clean the fiber connection between the 40-WSS-C and MMU cards. Check the values again. If they
still do not match, contact your next level of support.
p. Continue with Step 22.
Step 21 Verify the connection between the Side A 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-PRE, or
OSC-CSM card:
a. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
c. Locate the Port 68 (COM-RX) Power parameter. Record the value.
d. If a Side A OPT-PRE card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step e. If not, continue
with Step f.
e. Click the Provisioning > Opt.Ampli.Line > Parameters tabs and read the Total Output Power
value for Port 2 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
f. If a Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card is installed, display it in card view and complete Step g.
If not, continue with Step h.
g. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 2
(COM-TX), then continue with Step i.5-96
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs and read the Power value for Port 3 (COM-TX), then continue with Step i.
i. Verify that the value in Step e, g, or h matches the power recorded in Step c, +/– 1.5 dB. If not, use
the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber connection
between the 40-WSS-C card and the OPT-PRE, OPT-BST, or OSC-CSM card.
Step 22 Verify the Side A 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C connection:
a. Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the value in the Power table
cell for Port 69 (DROP-TX).
c. Display the Side A 40-DMX-C card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the value in the Port 2
(COM-RX) table cell. Verify that the value is equal to the value recorded in Step b, +/– 1.0 dBm. If
not, use the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31 to clean the fiber
connection between the 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards. Check the values again. If they still do
not match, contact your next level of support.
Step 23 Display the Side A 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 24 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab. Record the CHAN-TX port value under the
Power parameter for the wavelength under test.
Step 25 Verify that the power value recorded in Step 24 reaches the Shelf i Slot i (40-DMX-C).Port
CHAN-TX.Power set point +/– 2 dBm on Side A. To view this set point:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-DMX-C card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port CHAN-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. View the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-DMX-C).Port CHAN-TX.Power parameter on the right pane.
f. If the power value does not match the value recorded in Step 24 (+/– 2 dBm), contact your next level
of support.
Step 26 Display the TXP_MR_10E_C card in card view.
Step 27 Click the Performance > Optics PM > Current Values tabs.
Step 28 In the Port 2 (Trunk) column, locate the RX Optical Power value. Verify that the value matches the power
in Step 24, +/– 2 dBm. If the power values do not match (+/– 2 dBm), complete the following steps:
a. Remove, clean, and replace the cable connecting the TXP_MR_10E_C RX port to the Side A fiber
patch panel DMX port for the tested wavelength. See the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors”
procedure on page 14-31.
b. Repeat this step. If the power values still do not match (+/– 2 dBm) contact your next level of
support.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 4 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths.
Step 30 Display the Side A 40-WSS-C card in card view.
Step 31 Click the Maintenance tab.
Step 32 Click the table cell in the Operating Mode column and choose Not Assigned from the drop-down list for
all wavelengths.
Step 33 Click Apply, then click Yes to confirm.5-97
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 34 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side A patch panel.
Step 35 Unplug the physical loopback fiber from the line TX and RX in the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OSC-CSM
card.
Step 36 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G276 Perform the 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node
Acceptance Tests
Note Identify the sides that are already carrying traffic and the sides that are going to be tested.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the mesh native node where you want to
perform the acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. Complete the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
Purpose This procedure checks the power values and the optical connections for an
80 channel n-degree ROADM node. Use this test for both existing and new
installations of 80 channel ROADM nodes. Use this procedure to also test
the installation of a new side to a node. This procedure cannot be
performed on the node on which the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE
card is installed.
Tools/Equipment • Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC
patchcord
• 1 LC-LC adapter
• 15dB optical attenuator
• Optical power meter
Prerequisite Procedures • All sides must be completely fibered (including mesh patch panels);
for more information, see Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node.”
• “NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch
Panel Acceptance Test” section on page 5-148 (optional)
• “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-98
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(An equipment alarm is indicated in the Alarms tab, Cond column as EQPT.) If equipment failure
alarms are present, investigate and resolve them before continuing. For information on how to clear
an alarm, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 4 Insert a full C-band tunable transponder into an available slot on the side that you want to test.
Note In this procedure Side A through H is referred as Side x.
Step 5 Connect the TX port of the transponder to the EADi (where i=1) port of the 80-WXC-C card on the side
to be tested.
Step 6 Select a wavelength that is not already used by a side carrying traffic. Select 1530.33 nm for a new
installation. Set the transponder wavelength to the selected wavelength yyyy.yy by completing the
“DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158.
Step 7 Place the trunk port of the transponder in the In-Service (IS) state.
Step 8 In node view, click the Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs and record the Power value of
the COM port of the 80-WXC-C card for the side you are verifying.
Step 9 On Side x, go to the card view of the 80-WXC-C card and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > WXC Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the EADi
port.
b. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs.
• Set the Target Power to the value recorded in Step 8.
• From the Port pull-down menu, select EADi and from the Wavelength pull-down menu, select
yyyy.yy
c. Click Refresh and verify that the target power is reached.
d. Place the trunk port of the transponder in OutofService (OOS) state.
Step 10 To check the wavelengths for the EAD1 port, repeat from Step 6 and Step 9d for the remaining 79
wavelengths.
Note It is not mandatory to test the 80 wavelengths for all the ports (EADi where i = 1 to 8).
Step 11 Disconnect the transponder from EADi port and restore the fiber connection to the EADi port.
Step 12 Repeat Step 5 through Step 11 for the remaining EADi ports where i = 2 to 8.
Step 13 Plug a 15-dB LC attenuator into the trunk TX port of the transponder card.
Step 14 Select a wavelength that is not already used by a side carrying traffic. Select 1530.33 nm for a new
installation. Set the transponder wavelength to the selected wavelength yyyy.yy by completing the
“DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158.
Step 15 Connect the optical power meter to the trunk TX port of the transponder card.
Step 16 Complete the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 5-159.
Step 17 Disconnect the optical power meter from the TX port of the transponder card.
Step 18 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-C card configured as LINE for Side x (slot 1 or 17) and complete
the following steps:
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs and from the OSRI pull-down menu, select OFF.5-99
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Disable.
Step 19 Make the following connections:
a. Connect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the Line RX port of the booster
amplifier (OPT-AMP-C configured as LINE in slot 1 or 17) on Side x.
b. Connect the optical power meter to the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier (OPT-AMP-C
configured as LINE in slot 1 or 17) on Side x.
c. Use a fiber jumper to connect the DROP-TX port to the AD port of the 80-WXC-C card for Side x.
Step 20 Create an OCHNC DCN circuit for wavelength yyyy.yy from LINE amplifier of Side x to local add/drop
ports of the 80-WXC-C card of Side x using the “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network
Connections” task on page 8-23 and wait till all the alarms clear.
Step 21 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record
the IL02 (LINE RX->COM TX) insertion loss value.
Step 22 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. For the trunk port,
choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and
click Apply.
Step 23 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x, and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
b. Verify the power value of the COM-TX port = (Optical power meter value in Step 16) – (LINE
RX->COM TX insertion loss value read in Step 21) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 24 In card view, display the preamplifier card (OPT-AMP-C configured as PRE in slot 2 or 16) for Side x
and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX power value matches the value in Step 23 b(+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Total Output Power
value of the LINE-TX port.
Step 25 In card view, display the 80-WXC-C card for Side x and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the value matches the LINE-TX port power value in Step 24c (+/- 1dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the COM-RX -> EXP-TX insertion loss.
d. Record the COM-RX -> DROP-TX insertion loss.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
f. Record the Power value of the DROP-TX port.
g. Verify that the EXP-TX Power value inStep 25e = (COM-RX value in Step 25a) – (COM-RX ->
EXP-TX value in Step 25c) (+\– 1 dB).
h. Click the Provisioning > WXC Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the AD port.
i. Verify that the value matches the DROP-TX port power value in Step 25f (+/- 1dB).
j. Click the Provisioning > WXC Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the COM
port.5-100
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
k. Verify that the power value in Step 25j matches the COM port power value in the node view >
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs for the 80-WXC-C card under test.
Step 26 In card view, display the 80-WXC-C card for a side different from Side x and complete the following
steps:
Note This step must be performed for a single wavelength yyyy.yy only that is not used on any of the installed
sides.
a. Click the Maintenance > Wavelength Power tabs and select PORT EADi, where i depends on the
value of x. (x,i) = (A,1) (B,2) (C,3) (D,4) (E,5) (F,6) (G,7) (H,8)
b. Record the power value for wavelength yyyy.yy.
c. Verify if the power value in Step 26b is equal to the (power value recorded in Step 25e - 8dB) if a
PP-MESH-4 is used or is equal to the (power value recorded in Step 25e - 12dB) if a PP-MESH-8
is used.
Step 27 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x, and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify COM-RX Power value matches the COM Power value in Step 25j (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
LINE-TX port.
d. Verify that the LINE-TX value matches the power on the LINE-TX port power value in node view
> Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs (+\– 2 dB).
e. Record the optical power meter value.
f. Verify that the optical power meter value matches the LINE-TX value in Step 27c (+\– 1 dB).
Step 28 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit on wavelength yyyy.yy from LINE amplifier of Side x to local add/drop
ports of the 80-WXC-C card of Side x using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network
Connections” task on page 8-26.
Step 29 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. For the trunk port,
choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and
click Apply.
Step 30 To test all wavelengths, repeat Step 6 through Step 29 for each wavelength. In Step 6, set the wavelength
to the next wavelength.
Step 31 Remove the fiber jumper connected between the DROP-TX port and the AD port in the 80-WXC-C card
on Side x.
Step 32 Restore the original connections between the AD and DROP-TX ports of the 80-WXC-C card and the
respective ports of the 15216 40 or 48 -channel mux/demux patch panel according to the Cisco Transport
Planner Internal Connections Report.
Step 33 Use a fiber jumper to connect the TX port to the RX port associated to the wavelength yyyy.yy to be tested
in the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD or in the 15216-MD-40-EVEN,
15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN unit for Side x (depending on which 15216 40 or 48
-channel mux/demux patch panel the wavelength yyyy.yy is managed).
Step 34 Select a wavelength yyyy.yy on the full C band tunable transponder. Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the
Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder for the selected wavelength
yyyy.yy.5-101
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 35 Create an OCHNC DCN circuit on wavelength yyyy.yy from LINE amplifier of side x to local add/drop
ports of the 80-WXC-C card of Side x using the “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network
Connections” task on page 8-23 and wait till all the alarms clear on the node.
Step 36 In card view, display the 80-WXC-C card for Side x and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
DROP-TX port.
b. Click the Provisioning > WXC Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the AD port.
c. Verify that the Power value of the AD port in Step 36b is > the Power value of the DROP-TX port
in Step 36a – 18dB.
Step 37 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit on wavelength yyyy.yy from LINE amplifier of Side x to local add/drop
ports of the 80-WXC-C card of Side x using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network
Connections” task on page 8-26.
Step 38 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. For the trunk port,
choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and
click Apply.
Step 39 Remove the fiber jumper that was connected in Step 33 between the TX and RX ports associated to the
tested wavelength yyyy.yy on the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD or
the 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN unit for Side x.
Step 40 To verify all the 40 ports of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit
and the 40 ports of the 15216-MD-40-EVEN, 15216-EF-40-EVEN, or 15216-MD-48-EVEN unit, repeat
the previous steps from Step 33 through Step 38 by changing the wavelength yyyy.yy to cover all other
79 available wavelengths.
Step 41 Disconnect the optical power meter from the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier of the Side x.
Step 42 Disconnect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) from the LINE-RX port of the
booster amplifier of the Side x.
Step 43 Repeat Step 4 through Step 42 for all the others sides that are being installed.
Step 44 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-C card configured as LINE for Side x (slot 1 or 17) and complete
the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs and from the OSRI pull-down menu, select OFF.
b. From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Auto Restart.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test
Purpose This procedure tests an anti-ASE hub node.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed5-102
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf: one for LOS on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, and the other for LOS on the OSC-CSM
or OSCM card.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are Success - Changed or
Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 5 From your Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, identify the dropped and added channels that
are configured in pass-through mode in both directions.
Note Configuring a channel pass-through mode means that the channel is dropped along one direction
by a 32DMX-O/32DMX or 40-DMX-C (15xx.xx TX port) located on one side (Side A or
Side B) of the shelf, and then added by a 32MUX-O/40-DMX-C (1522.22 RX port) on the
opposite side of the shelf but in the same direction. The channel is not terminated inside the site.
Step 6 Create a loopback on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier by connecting a patchcord from the
LINE TX port to the LINE RX port with a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 7 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSCM or OSC-CSM card. (The OSC termination
must already be provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure
on page 4-126.)
Step 8 For pass-through channels, continue with Step 9. For add and drop channels, continue with Step 18.
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-103
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 9 Verify the first channel connection configured in pass-through mode in both directions:
a. If you are using a tunable laser, set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm. If you are
using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step b.
b. Set the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card to a corresponding wavelength on the 100-GHz
ITU-T grid. Refer to the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268 Provision
TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
c. Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the LINE RX
port of the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 10 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 for the
Side B OPT-PRE amplifier.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 5-8 for the
Side A 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C cards.
Step 12 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 13 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 for the
Side A OPT-PRE amplifier.
Step 14 Complete the “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 5-8 for the
Side A 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C cards.
Step 15 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 16 Repeat Steps 9 through 15 for the remaining wavelengths on the 100-GHz grid that are pass-through
wavelengths.
Step 17 If you have add and drop channels, continue with Step 18 to verify the channels. If not, continue with
Step 30.
Step 18 Set the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T grid that is
not a pass-through wavelength. Refer to the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the
“DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 19 Connect the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card to the CHAN RX nn port on the Side A 32MUX-O
card, where nn is the first add or drop channel.
Step 20 Display the Side A 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C card in card view.
Step 21 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 22 Change the administrative state of Port nn to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 23 Check that the power value on Port nn reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power Ref).
Step 24 Display the Side A 32DMX-O/32DMX OR 40-DMX-C card in card view.
Step 25 Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
Step 26 Change the administrative state of Port nn to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 27 Check that the power value on Port nn reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power Ref).
Step 28 Connect a power meter to the CHAN TX nn port through the patch panel and verify that the physical
optical power coming out of drop Port nn on the Side A 32DMX-O/32DMX or 40-DMX-C card is
consistent with the value read on the meter within 0.5 dB.
Step 29 Repeat Steps 18 through 28 for the remaining wavelengths on the 100-GHz grid that are not pass-through
wavelengths.
Step 30 Remove the loopback connection on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.5-104
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 31 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 32 Create a loopback on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier by connecting a patchcord from the
LINE TX port to the LINE RX port with 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 33 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side B OSCM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.)
Step 34 Repeat 18 through 31 for Side B add and drop cards.
Step 35 Remove the loopback on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 36 Restore the default administrative state (IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService) on all the ports
previously set to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G45 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM
Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 3.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_C cards, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Home View.
Purpose This procedure tests a C-band line amplifier node with OSCM cards
installed on both the Side B and Side A sides of the shelf by looping a
single wavelength through the shelf.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-105
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf, one for LOS on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, and the other for LOS on the OSCM
card.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success -
Changed or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 Create a loopback on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card by using a fiber with a 10-dB bulk
attenuator to connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Step 7 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 8.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 9.
Step 8 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 9 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the LINE RX port
of the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 10 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E and OSCM
cards have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback. An LOS-O alarm appears on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card,
and an LOS alarm appears on the Side B OCSM card.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 11. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card in card view.5-106
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh.
d. Locate the Port 2 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card has
cleared. If so, continue with Step 11. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST card.
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OSCM card has cleared. If so, replace
the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card. If not, replace the OSCM card. See the “NTP-G30 Install the
DWDM Cards” procedure on page 4-64.
Step 11 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser
and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 12.
Step 12 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 13 If an OPT-PRE amplifier is installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier
Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. It not, continue with continue with Step 14.
Step 14 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 15 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 16 Remove the loopback on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card created in Step 6.
Step 17 Create a loopback on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card by connecting a patchcord from the LINE
TX port to the LINE RX port with a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 18 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 19.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 20.
Step 19 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 20 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the LINE RX port
of the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 21 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card and the Side B
OSCM card have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active on Side B. 5-107
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback. An LOS-O alarm appears on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card,
and an LOS alarm appears on the Side A OCSM card.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 22. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh.
d. Locate the Port 2 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card has
cleared. If so, continue with Step 22. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E card.
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OSCM card has cleared. If so,
replace the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card. If not, replace the OSCM card. See the “NTP-G30 Install
the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 4-64.
Step 22 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser
and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 23.
Step 23 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 24 If an OPT-PRE amplifier is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier
Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. It not, continue with continue with Step 25.
Step 25 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 26 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 27 Remove the loopback on the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier created in Step 17.
Step 28 Delete both OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 29 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 30 Create the two OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-108
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G155 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM
Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_L cards, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card for
Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Home View.
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf, one for an LOS on the OPT-BST-L card, and the other for an LOS on the OSCM card.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following steps:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
Purpose This procedure tests a L-band line amplifier node with OSCM cards
installed on both the Side B and Side A sides of the shelf by looping a
single wavelength through the shelf.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-109
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 Create a loopback on the Side A OPT-BST-L card by using a fiber with a 10-dB bulk attenuator to
connect the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port.
Step 7 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 8.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 9.
Step 8 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the wavelength you will test.
Step 9 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the LINE RX port
of the Side B OPT-BST-L card using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 10 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side A OPT-BST-L and OSCM cards have cleared.
The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback. An LOS-O alarm appears on the Side B OPT-BST-L card, and an LOS
alarm appears on the Side B OCSM card.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 11. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the Side A OPT-BST-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh.
d. Locate the Port 2 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OPT-BST-L card has cleared. If so,
continue with Step 11. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST-L card.
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OSCM card has cleared. If so, replace
the OPT-BST-L card. If not, replace the OSCM card. See the “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards”
procedure on page 4-64.
Step 11 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned as an OPT-PRE) is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G360
Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27. If not,
continue with Step 12.5-110
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 12 Complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-27 for the Side A OPT-BST-L amplifier.
Step 13 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned as an OPT-PRE) is installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G360
Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27. It not,
continue with continue with Step 14.
Step 14 Complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-27 for the Side B OPT-BST-L amplifier.
Step 15 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the Side B OPT-BST-L card.
Step 16 Remove the loopback on the Side A OPT-BST-L created in Step 6.
Step 17 Create a loopback on the Side B OPT-BST-L card by connecting a patchcord from the LINE TX port to
the LINE RX port with a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 18 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 19.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 20.
Step 19 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the wavelength you will test.
Step 20 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the LINE RX port
of the Side A OPT-BST-L card using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 21 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OPT-BST-L and OSCM cards have cleared.
The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active on Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback. An LOS-O alarm appears on the Side A OPT-BST-L card, and an LOS
alarm appears on the Side A OCSM card.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 22. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the Side B OPT-BST-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh.
d. Locate the Port 2 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OPT-BST-L card has cleared. If so,
continue with Step 22. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST-L card.5-111
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the Side B OSCM card has cleared. If so,
replace the OPT-BST-L card. If not, replace the OSCM card. See the“NTP-G30 Install the DWDM
Cards” procedure on page 4-64.
Step 22 If an OPT-AMP-L (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) card is installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G80
Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 23.
Step 23 Complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-27 for the Side B OPT-BST-L amplifier.
Step 24 If an OPT-AMP-L (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) card is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G360
Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27. It not,
continue with continue with Step 25.
Step 25 Complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-27 for the Side A OPT-BST-L amplifier.
Step 26 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the Side A OPT-BST-L card.
Step 27 Remove the loopback on the Side B OPT-BST-L amplifier created in Step 17.
Step 28 Delete both OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 29 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 30 Create the two OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with
OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test
Purpose This procedure tests a C-band line amplifier node with OSC-CSM cards
installed on both Side B and Side A of the shelf by looping a single
wavelength through the shelf.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-112
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_C cards, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Home View.
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate an LOS alarm on the
OSC-CSM card.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port to the
LINE RX port with a fiber and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 7 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of
the LOS alarm indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback, and an LOS alarm will appear for the Side B OSC-CSM card, Port 1
(OSC).5-113
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 8. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, replace the OSC-CSM
card.
Step 8 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 9.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 10.
Step 9 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 10 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OSC-CSM LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 11 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser
and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 12.
Step 12 Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 3 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does
not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 14 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A of the shelf, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE
Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 15.
Step 15 Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 16 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 2 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does
not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 17 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the Side B OSC-CSM card.5-114
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 18 Remove the physical loopback created on the Side A OSC-CSM card in Step 6.
Step 19 Create a loopback on the Side B OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port with LINE RX port
using a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 20 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of
the LOS alarm indicates that the OSC link is active on Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback, and an LOS alarm will appear for the Side A OSC-CSM card, Port 1
(OSC).
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 21. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. Wait 90 to 100 seconds then, in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode),
click the Alarms tab. If the LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 21.
If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 21. If not, replace the
OSC-CSM card.
Step 21 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 22.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 23.
Step 22 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 23 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side A
OSC-CSM LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.5-115
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 24 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser
and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 25.
Step 25 Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 26 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 3 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does
not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 27 If an OPT-PRE is installed on Side B of the shelf, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE
Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 for the Side B OPT-PRE amplifier. If not, continue with
Step 28.
Step 28 Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 29 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and locate the Power value for Port 2. Verify
that the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your
connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on
page 14-31. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 30 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the Side A OSC-CSM card.
Step 31 Remove the loopback created on the Side B OSC-CSM card in Step 19.
Step 32 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 33 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 34 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with
OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test
Purpose This procedure tests a L-band line amplifier node with OSC-CSM cards
installed on both Side B and Side A of the shelf by looping a single
wavelength through the shelf.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_MR_10E_L card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-116
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_L cards, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card for
Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Home View.
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate an LOS alarm on the
OSC-CSM card.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 Create a physical loopback on the Side A OSC-CSM by connecting the LINE TX port to the LINE RX
port with a fiber and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 7 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of
the LOS alarm indicates that the OSC link is active on Side A.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback, and an LOS alarm will appear for the Side B OSC-CSM card, Port 1
(OSC).5-117
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 8. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side A OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, replace the OSC-CSM
card.
Step 8 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 9.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 10.
Step 9 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the wavelength you will test.
Step 10 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OSC-CSM LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 11 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G360
Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27. If not,
continue with Step 12.
Step 12 Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 3 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does
not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 14 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side A of the shelf, complete
the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on
page 5-27. If not, continue with Step 15.
Step 15 Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 16 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 2 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does
not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 17 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the Side B OSC-CSM card.5-118
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 18 Remove the physical loopback created on the Side A OSC-CSM card in Step 6.
Step 19 Create a loopback on the Side B OSC-CSM by connecting the LINE TX port with LINE RX port using
a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 20 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of
the LOS alarm indicates that the OSC link is active on Side B.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback, and an LOS alarm will appear for the Side A OSC-CSM card, Port 1
(OSC).
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 21. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. Wait 90 to 100 seconds then, in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode),
click the Alarms tab. If the LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 21.
If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the Side B OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 21. If not, replace the
OSC-CSM card.
Step 21 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 22.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 23.
Step 22 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the wavelength you will test.
Step 23 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the Side A
OSC-CSM LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.5-119
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 24 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side A, complete the
“DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27.
If not, continue with Step 25.
Step 25 Display the Side B OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 26 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Locate the Port 3 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does
not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 27 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G360
Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-27. If not,
continue with Step 28.
Step 28 Display the Side A OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 29 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and locate the Power value for Port 2. Verify
that the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your
connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on
page 14-31. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 30 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the Side A OSC-CSM card.
Step 31 Remove the loopback created on the Side B OSC-CSM card in Step 19.
Step 32 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 33 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 34 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-120
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM
and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Note Because the node is isolated and no line-side fibers are connected during the test, the power levels going
into the line-side cards will not be the same as the levels when the node is connected to the network.
Therefore, if the line amplifier shelf does not contain OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifiers and OPT-PRE
amplifiers on both Side B and Side A, you must lower the OPT-PRE power thresholds so that it turns on
properly. At the end of the test, you will run ANS to configure the node with the correct parameters for
the network acceptance test.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_C cards, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 Display the terminal node in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode).
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Purpose This procedure tests a C-band line amplifier node provisioned with an
OSC-CSM card installed on one side of the shelf and an OSCM card
installed on the other. This test verifies that a line amplifier node
provisioned is operating properly before you connect it to the network. The
test verifies the operation of the amplifiers and checks the power levels at
each transmit and receive port to ensure that power loss in the cabling is
within tolerance.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser or
• TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-121
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf, one for an LOS on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card, and the other for an LOS on the
OSC-CSM or OSCM card.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 Create a loopback on the OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port using a
patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 7 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of the LOS
alarm indicates that the OSC link is active for this side of the shelf.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 8. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, replace the OSC-CSM card.
Step 8 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, continue with Step 9.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm. 5-122
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 10.
Step 9 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5 for the TXP containing the wavelength you will test. Refer to
Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 10 Measure the TXP output power by connecting the TXP DWDM TX port to a test meter. Record the
results for future reference.
Step 11 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the OPT-BST or
OPT-BST-E LINE RX port using a fiber patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 12 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on the side opposite the OSC-CSM, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the
OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 13.
Step 13 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 14 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and locate the Port 2 (COM-RX) Power
value. Verify that the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check
your connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on
page 14-31. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 15 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on the same Side As the OSC-CSM, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the
OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 16.
Step 16 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 17 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 18 Remove the loopback fiber on the OSC-CSM card.
Step 19 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 20 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 21 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.
Step 22 Create a loopback on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card by connecting the LINE TX port with LINE RX
port using a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 23 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card and the OSCM card
have cleared. The clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active for this side of the
shelf.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 24. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh. 5-123
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. Locate the Port 2 (COM-TX) Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change
the value to –30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 (OSC-TX) Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change
the value to –40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card has cleared.
If so, continue with Step 24. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E
card.
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the OSCM card has cleared. If not, check your
connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on
page 14-31. If this does not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 24 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the OSC-CSM
LINE RX port using a fiber patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 25 If an OPT-PRE is installed on the same side of the shelf as the OSC-CSM, complete the “DLP-G80
Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 26.
Step 26 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
Step 27 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 28 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Verify that the power value on Port 3
(COM-TX) is equal to the optical power from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card (measured in
Step 10) –10 dB, +/– 2 dB. If not, check your connections and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115
Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does not change the power value, consult your
next level of support.
Step 29 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on the side opposite the OSC-CSM, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the
OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. If not, continue with Step 30.
Step 30 Disconnect the TXP or tunable laser from the OSC-CSM card.
Step 31 Remove the loopback fiber on the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier card.
Step 32 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 33 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 34 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-124
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM
and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 If you are using TXP_MR_10E_L cards, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card for
Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26. If not, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Home View.
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If alarms appear,
investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Note The OSC terminations created during node turn-up will generate two alarms for each side of the
shelf, one for an LOS on the OPT-BST-L card, and the other for an LOS on the OSC-CSM or
OSCM card. If OSCM cards are installed on ANSI shelves, EOC DCC Termination Failure
alarms will appear.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are listed as Success - Changed
or Success - Unchanged. If any are not, complete the following:
a. Delete the two OSC channels using the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on
page 11-50.
Purpose This procedure tests a L-band line amplifier node with an OSC-CSM card
installed on one side of the shelf and an OSCM card installed on the other.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser or
• TXP_MR_10E_L card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-125
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127.
c. Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.
Step 6 Create a loopback on the OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port using a
fiber patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.
Step 7 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card has cleared. The clearing of the LOS
alarm indicates that the OSC link is active for this side of the shelf.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
If the alarm clears, continue with Step 8. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator on the OSC-CSM LINE TX and LINE RX ports and reconnect
using only the patchcord.
b. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, continue with Step c.
c. Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
e. In the Types area, click Alarm, then click Refresh.
f. Locate the Port 3 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
g. Locate the Port 6 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
h. Click Apply, and then Yes.
i. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Alarms tab. If the
LOS alarm on the OSC-CSM card clears, continue with Step 8. If not, replace the OSC-CSM card.
Step 8 If you are using a tunable laser, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to complete the following steps.
If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, continue with Step 9.
a. Set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm.
b. Set the tuner to the wavelength under test, then continue with Step 10.
Step 9 If you are using a TXP_MR_10E_L card, complete the “DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L Card
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-26 for the wavelength you will test.
Step 10 Measure the TXP card output power by connecting the TXP card DWDM TX port to a test meter. Record
the results for future reference.
Step 11 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the OPT-BST-L
LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Caution Failure to use proper attenuation might damage the equipment.5-126
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 12 Display the OPT-BST-L card in card view.
Step 13 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Verify that the power value on Port 2
(Out Com) is equal to the optical power from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_L card (measured in
Step 10), +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 14 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on the side opposite the OSC-CSM
card, complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-27. If not, continue with Step 15.
Step 15 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 16 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and locate the Port 3 Power value. Verify that
the value is higher than –30 dBm. If the power value is not higher than –30 dBm, check your connections
and clean the fibers using the “NTP-G115 Clean Fiber Connectors” procedure on page 14-31. If this does
not change the power value, consult your next level of support.
Step 17 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on the same Side As the OSC-CSM,
complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task
on page 5-27. If not, continue with Step 18.
Step 18 Complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-27 for the OPT-BST-L card.
Step 19 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the OPT-BST-L card.
Step 20 Remove the loopback fiber on the OSC-CSM card.
Step 21 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 22 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 23 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.
Step 24 Create a loopback on the OPT-BST-L card by connecting the LINE TX port with LINE RX port using a
patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 25 Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) click
the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the OPT-BST-L and OSCM cards have cleared. The
clearing of the LOS alarms indicates that the OSC link is active for this side of the shelf.
Note For ANSI shelves, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm will continue to appear due to the
OSC signal loopback.
If the alarms clear, continue with Step 26. If not, perform the following steps:
a. Display the OPT-BST-L card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds tabs.
c. In the Types area, click Alarms, then click Refresh.
d. Locate the Port 2 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–30 dBm.
e. Locate the Port 4 Power Failure Low parameter. Double-click the table cell and change the value to
–40 dBm.
f. Click Apply, and then Yes.
g. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode)
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarms on the OPT-BST-L card has cleared. If so, continue
with Step 26. If not, disconnect the OSCM card from the OPT-BST-L card.5-127
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
h. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting a patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
i. Wait 90 to 100 seconds, then in node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode),
click the Alarms tab. Verify that the LOS alarm on the OSCM card has cleared. If so, replace the
OPT-BST-L card. If not, replace the OSCM card. See the “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards”
procedure on page 4-64.
Step 26 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_L card DWDM TX port to the OSC-CSM
LINE RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 27 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on the same side of the shelf as the
OSC-CSM, complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-27. If not, continue with Step 28.
Step 28 Complete the “DLP-G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and
Power” task on page 5-27 for the OPT-BST-L card.
Step 29 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 30 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Verify that the power value on Port 3
(Out Com) is equal to the optical power from the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_L card (measured in
Step 10), +/– 1.0 dBm.
Step 31 If an OPT-AMP-L card (provisioned in OPT-PRE mode) is installed on the side opposite the OSC-CSM,
complete the “DLP-G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power” task
on page 5-27. If not, continue with Step 32.
Step 32 Disconnect the TXP card or tunable laser from the OSC-CSM card.
Step 33 Remove the loopback fiber on the OPT-BST-L amplifier card.
Step 34 Delete both OSC channels. See the “DLP-G186 Delete an OSC Termination” task on page 11-50.
Step 35 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to restore the original
configuration.
Step 36 Create the OSC channels using the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on page 4-126.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-128
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a
Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the OADM node where you want to
perform the acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are Success - Changed or
Success - Unchanged. If not, complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 4-127.
Step 5 Check your Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file to verify the presence of added and dropped
bands (including four channels at 100 GHz) configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a band in pass-through mode means that the band is dropped in one direction by an
AD-xB-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another AD-xB-x.xx
card on the opposite side in the same direction. The band is not terminated inside the node.
Purpose This procedure checks the integrity of all the optical connections inside an
OADM node with OSCM cards installed on both Side B and Side A of the
shelf. Three connection types are tested:
• Express
• Pass-through
• Add/Drop
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node.”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-129
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 6 If no bands are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 7. If a band is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections. Band
pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 7 Check the site configuration file from Cisco TransportPlanner to verify the presence of dropped or added
channels configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a channel in pass-through mode means that the channel is dropped in one direction
by an AD-xC-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another
AD-xC-x.xx card on the opposite side in the same direction. The channel is not terminated inside
the node.
Step 8 If no channels are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 9. If a channel is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections.
Channel pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 9 Create a loopback on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card by connecting the LINE TX port to the
LINE RX port using a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 10 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSCM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.) If the OSC link becomes active, continue with Step 11. If the OSC link does not turn up,
complete the following steps:
a. Modify the OSC Fail Low thresholds. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds
tabs and change the Port 4 opwrMin (minimum power) to –40 dBm.
b. Modify the COM TX Fail Low Threshold. Change the Port 2 opwrMin (minimum power) to
–30 dBm.
c. If the OSC link turns up, continue with Step 11. If the OSC link is still down, disconnect the OSCM
card from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
d. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
e. If the OSC link turns up, replace the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card. If the OSC link does not turn
up, replace the OSCM card.
Note Due to the OSC signal loopback, an EOC DCC Termination Failure alarm might be raised on
ANSI shelves.
Step 11 If the node has express bands or channels, complete the “DLP-G85 Verify Express Channel Connections
on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards” task on page 5-130. If the node does not have express bands or
channels, continue with Step 12.
Step 12 If connections configured in pass-through mode are present (noted in Steps 6 and 8), complete the
“DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections” task on page 5-133. If not,
continue with Step 13.
Step 13 If connections have add/drop connections, complete the “DLP-G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections
on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards” task on page 5-138.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-130
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G85 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM
Cards
Step 1 If you are using a tunable laser, set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm. If not, continue
with Step 2.
Step 2 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the Side B
OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E LINE RX port.
Step 3 Based on the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, tune the tunable laser of the
TXP_MR_10E_C card to a wavelength (on the 100-GHz ITU-T grid) that runs on the express path of all
AD-xB-xx.x and AD-xC-xx.x cards on the Side B-to-Side A and Side A-to-Side B directions. Refer to
the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 4 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side B, insert a 10-dB bulk attenuator on the COM RX port and
complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7. If an
OPT-PRE card is not installed on Side B, continue with Step 5.
Step 5 If AD-xB-xx.x cards are installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output
Express Power” task on page 5-131 for each Side B card. If not, continue with Step 6.
Note If AD-xB-xx.x and AD-xC-xx.x cards are both installed in one direction, the received express
channels will go into the AD-xB-xx.x cards first, then into the AD-xC-xx.x cards.
Step 6 If AD-xC-xx.x cards are installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output
Express Power” task on page 5-131 for each Side B card. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 If AD-xC-xx.x cards are installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output
Common Power” task on page 5-132 for each Side A card. If not, continue with Step 8.
Step 8 If AD-xB-xx.x cards are installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output
Common Power” task on page 5-132 for each Side A card. If not, continue with Step 9.
Step 9 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card installed on Side B.
Step 10 If an OPT-PRE card is installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser
and Power” task on page 5-7. If an OPT-PRE card is not installed, continue with Step 11.
Step 11 Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for the AD-xB-xx.x and AD-xC-xx.x cards along the Side A-to-Side B
direction.
Step 12 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 for the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card installed on Side A.
Purpose This task verifies the express channel connections during an OADM node
acceptance test.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-131
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 13 Return to the originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Express Power
Step 1 Display the AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the Output Express port administrative state to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI). Click Apply.
Step 4 Verify that the Output Express port Power value is greater than the default no-power value of –28 dBm.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Express Power
Step 1 Display the AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Change the Output Express port administrative state to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI). Click Apply.
Step 4 Verify that the Output Express port Power value is greater than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies the output express power of AD-xB-xx.x cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task verifies the output express power of the AD-xC-xx.x cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-132
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Common Power
Step 1 Display the AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Verify that the Output Com port Power value is greater than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Common Power
Step 1 Display the AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Verify that the Output Com port Power value is greater than the default no-power value of –28 dBm.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies the common power of the AD-xC-xx.x cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only
Purpose This task verifies the output common power of the AD-xB-xx.x cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-133
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections
Step 1 Identify the first band connection configured in pass-through mode in both directions.
Step 2 Set the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card to the wavelength of the band to be tested. Refer to the
tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for
Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G90 Verify an AD-xB-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power” task on page 5-135
for the first pass-through connection.
Step 4 Complete one of the following:
• If OSCM cards are installed, connect a power meter to the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E LINE
TX port and verify that the Side B amplifier is turned on by the pass-through wavelength.
• If OSC-CSM cards are installed, complete the “DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power”
task on page 5-137 for the Side B OSC-CSM card.
Step 5 Complete Steps 2 through 4 for each band connection configured in pass-through mode in both
directions.
Step 6 If channel pass-through connections are not present, continue with Step 15. If channel pass-through
connections are present, continue with one of the following steps:
• If the pass-through channel connections use an AD-xC-xx.x card, continue with Step 7.
• If the pass-through channel connections use a 4MD-xx.x card, continue with Step 11.
Step 7 Tune the tunable laser on a wavelength (1 of 4) belonging to the channel to be tested.
Step 8 Complete the “DLP-G91 Verify an AD-xC-xx.x Pass-Through Connection” task on page 5-136 for the
first pass-through connection.
Step 9 Complete one of the following:
• If an OSCM card is installed, connect a power meter to LINE TX port on the front-pane and verify
that the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier is turned on by the pass-through wavelength.
• If an OSC-CSM card is installed, complete the “DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power”
task on page 5-137 for the Side B OSC-CSM card.
Step 10 If the pass-through connections use a 4MD-xx.x card, continue with Step 11. If not, continue with
Step 15.
Step 11 Identify the first channel connection that is configured in pass-through mode using the 4MD-xx.x cards
in both directions.
Step 12 Tune the tunable laser on the corresponding wavelength.
Step 13 Complete the “DLP-G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power” task on page 5-134.
Step 14 Perform one of the following:
Purpose This task verifies the pass-through channel connections during an OADM
node acceptance test.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-134
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
• If an OSCM card is installed, connect a power meter to LINE TX port on the card front panel and
verify that the Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier is turned on by the pass-through
wavelength.
• If an OSC-CSM card is installed, complete the “DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power”
task on page 5-137 for the Side B OSC-CSM card.
Step 15 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power
Step 1 Verify the TX band power on the related Side B AD-xB-xx.x card:
a. Display the Side B AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the BAND TX Power value is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 2 Verify the TX power on the Side B 4MD-xx.x card (Side B-to-Side A):
a. Display the Side B 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the Power value on the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
Step 3 Verify the RX band power on the related Side A AD-xB-xx.x card (Side B-to-Side A):
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the BAND RX Power value is higher than the default no-power values of –30 dBm.
Step 4 Verify the Side A 4MD-xx.x card (Side B-to-Side A):
a. Display the Side A 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the CHAN RX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Purpose This task verifies 4MD-xx.x pass-through connection power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-135
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 5 Verify the TX band power on the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card (Side A-to-Side B):
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the BAND TX Power value is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 6 Verify the Side A 4MD-xx.x card (Side A-to-Side B):
a. Display the Side A 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the Power value on the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
Step 7 Verify the Side B 4MD-xx.x card (Side A-to-Side B):
a. Display the Side B 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the CHAN RX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G90 Verify an AD-xB-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power
Step 1 Verify the Side B AD-xB-xx.x band TX power:
a. Display the Side B AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX (Side B-to-Side A) port related to the wavelength
selected on the tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
d. Verify that the BAND TX port Power value is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 2 Verify the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card RX and TX power:
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
Purpose This task verifies an AD-xB-xx.x pass-through connection.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-136
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Verify that the Power value of the BAND RX (Side B-to-Side A) port is higher than the default
no-power value of –30 dBm.
d. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX (Side A-to-Side B) port related to the wavelength
selected on the tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
e. Verify that the BAND TX port Power value is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 3 Verify the BAND RX port on the Side B AD-xB-xx.x card:
a. Display the Side B AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the Power value of the BAND RX (Side A-to-Side B) port is higher than the default
no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G91 Verify an AD-xC-xx.x Pass-Through Connection
Step 1 Verify the Side B AD-xC-xx.x channel TX power:
a. Display the Side B AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the power value for the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
d. If the AD-xC-xx.x card is an AD-4C-xx.x card, a VOA (applied to all four channels) is installed
along the drop path and needs to be activated in Step e.
e. Change the administrative state of the CHAN TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
f. Verify that the power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
Step 2 Verify the channel power for the corresponding Side A AD-xC-xx.x card:
a. Display the Side A AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Purpose This task verifies an AD-xC-xx.x pass-through connection.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-137
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Change the administrative state of the CHAN TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
f. If the AD-xC-xx.x is an AD-4C-W card, a VOA (applying to all four channels) is installed along the
drop path and needs to be activated in Step g.
g. Change the administrative state of the CHAN TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
h. Verify that the power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
Step 3 Verify the Side B AD-xC-xx.x channel RX power:
a. Display the Side B AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the CHAN RX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power
Step 1 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Verify that the Power value for Port 2 is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm. The
calculated expected power for Port 2 is the OPT-PRE card Pout COM TX value. Normally, this is +
2 dBm.
Note Actual output power is affected by many factors. Always consider the calculated expected power
to be a general guideline and not a precise value.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task verifies the OSC-CSM card incoming power.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-138
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards
Note In this task, you will verify add and drop connections in the following order: Side B-to-Side A add and
Side A-to-Side B drop, Steps 1 through 15; Side A-to-Side B add and Side B-to-Side A drop, Steps 16
through 17.
Step 1 Based on the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, tune the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C
card to a wavelength (belonging to the 100-GHz ITU-T grid) of the channel running on the first add path
of the first Side A AD-xC-xx.x or Side A 4MD-xx.x card in the Side B-to-Side A direction. Refer to the
tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for
Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 2 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the corresponding
15xx.x RX port (on the card front panel) of the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card.
Step 3 Verify the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card (Side B-to-Side A):
a. Display the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the CHAN RX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength chosen on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power”
task on page 5-6 on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier to verify that the added wavelength
turns on the laser.
Step 5 If the add connection uses a 4MD-xx.x card, continue with Step 6. If the add connection uses an
AD-xC-xx.x card, move to Step 10.
Step 6 Verify the RX band port on the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card:
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
Step 7 Verify that the BAND RX Power value is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm.
Step 8 Verify the band TX port on the Side A AD-xB-xx.x (Side A-to-Side B):
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
Purpose This task verifies the add and drop channel connections for an OADM node
with OSCM cards installed.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-139
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C
card.
d. Verify that the Power value of the BAND TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–30 dBm.
Step 9 Verify the Side A 4MD-xx.x card (Side A-to-Side B):
a. Display the Side A 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–30 dBm.
Step 10 Verify the Side A AD-xC-xx.x (Side A-to-Side B) card:
a. Display the Side A AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
b. If the AD-xC-xx.x card is an AD-4C-xx.x card, a VOA (applied to all four channels) is installed
along the drop path and needs to be activated according to Step g.
c. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
e. Display the Side B AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
g. Change the administrative state of the CHAN TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click
Apply.
h. Verify that the power value for the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
i. Perform the output power check.
Step 11 Connect a power meter to the proper 15xx.x TX port on the front panel (the dual port compared with the
port where the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C card is connected). Verify that the physical optical
power value from that port is consistent with the value displayed on the Provisioning > Optical Chn >
Parameters tab for the proper CHAN TX power value +/– 0.5 dB.
Step 12 Repeat Steps 5 through 11 for all add paths of any Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x cards along the
Side B-to-Side A direction.
Step 13 Remove the loopback on the Side A OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier and create a loopback on the
Side B OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E amplifier.
Step 14 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side B OSCM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.) If the OSC link becomes active, continue with Step 15. If the OSC link does not become
active, perform the following steps:
a. Modify the OSC Fail Low thresholds by clicking the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Optics Thresholds tabs and changing the Port 2 opwrMin (minimum power) to –40 dBm.
b. If the OSC link turns up, continue with Step 15. If the OSC link remains down, disconnect the
OSCM card from the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card.
c. Create a loopback on the OSCM card by connecting patch cable from the OSC TX port to the
OSC RX port using a 10-dB bulk attenuator.5-140
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. If the OSC link turns up, replace the OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card. If the OSC link does not turn
up, replace the OSCM card. See the “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 4-64.
Note Due to the OSC signal loopback, an EOC DCC Termination Failure might be raised on ANSI
shelves.
Step 15 Based on the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, tune the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C
card to a wavelength (belonging to the 100-GHz ITU-T grid) of the channel running on the first add path
of the first add path of the first AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card on the Side A-to-Side B direction. Refer
to the tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards
for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 16 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the correspondent
15xx.x RX port (on the card front panel) of the Side B AD-xC-xx.x or Side B 4MD-xx.x card.
Step 17 Repeat Steps 3 through 15, applying the steps to the Side A-to-Side B direction.
Step 18 Remove the loopback connection and restore the default administrative state (IS,AINS or
Unlocked,automaticInService) on all the ports previously set to OOS,MT (ANSI) or
Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 19 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to recover the correct
node configuration.
Step 20 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a
Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards
Purpose This procedure checks the integrity of all the optical connections in an
OADM node with OSC-CSM cards and OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards
installed on both Side B and Side A of the shelf. Three connection types
are tested:
• Express
• Pass-through
• Add/Drop
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-141
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the OADM node where you want to
perform the acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are Success - Changed or
Success - Unchanged. If not, complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 4-127.
Step 5 Check the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file to verify the presence of added and dropped
bands (including four channels at 100 GHz) configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a band in pass-through mode means that the band is dropped in one direction by an
AD-xB-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another AD-xB-x.xx
card on the opposite side in the same direction. The band is not terminated inside the node.
Step 6 If no bands are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 7. If a band is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections. Band
pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 7 Check the site configuration file from Cisco TransportPlanner to verify the presence of dropped or added
channels configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a channel in pass-through mode means that the channel is dropped in one direction
by an AD-xC-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another
AD-xC-x.xx card on the opposite side in the same direction. The channel is not terminated inside
the node.
Step 8 If no channels are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 9. If a channel is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections.
Channel pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 9 Create a loopback on the Side A OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port
using a patchcord and a 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 10 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSC-CSM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.)5-142
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Due to the OSC signal loopback, an EOC Termination Failure alarm might be raised on ANSI
shelves.
Step 11 If the OSC link becomes active, continue with Step 12. If the OSC link does not turn up, perform the
following troubleshooting steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator between the LINE TX and LINE RX connection. If the OSC link
becomes active, continue with Step 12. If not, continue with Step b.
b. Modify the OSC Fail Low thresholds. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds
tabs and change the Port 6 opwrMin (minimum power) to –40 dBm.
c. Modify the COM TX Fail Low Threshold. Change the Port 3 opwrMin (minimum power) to
–30 dBm.
d. If the OSC link turns up, continue with Step 12. If it does not turn up, replace the OSC-CSM card.
Step 12 If the node has express bands or channels, complete the “DLP-G86 Verify Express Channel Connections
on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on page 5-142. If the node does not have express bands
or channels, continue with Step 13.
Step 13 If connections configured in pass-through mode are present (noted in Steps 6 and 8), complete the
“DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections” task on page 5-133. If not,
continue with Step 14.
Step 14 If connections have add/drop connections, complete the “DLP-G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections
on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on page 5-144.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G86 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with
OSC-CSM Cards
Step 1 If you are using a tunable laser, set the output power to a nominal value, such as –3 dBm. If not, continue
with Step 2.
Step 2 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the LINE RX port
of the Side B OSC-CSM card.
Step 3 If an OPT-PRE amplifier card is installed on Side B, install a 10-dB bulk attenuator on the COM RX
port.
Purpose This task verifies the express channel connections for an OADM node with
OSC-CSM cards during a node acceptance test.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-143
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 4 Based on the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, tune the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C
card to a wavelength (on the 100-GHz ITU-T grid) that runs on the express path of all AD-xB-xx.x and
AD-xC-xx.x cards on the Side B-to-Side A and Side A-to-Side B directions. Refer to the tunable laser
manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance
Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 for the
OPT-PRE amplifier card installed on Side A.
Step 6 If AD-xB-xx.x cards are installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output
Express Power” task on page 5-131 for each Side B card. If not, continue with Step 7.
Note If AD-xB-xx.x and AD-xC-xx.x cards are both installed in one direction, the received express
channels will go into the AD-xB-xx.x cards first, then into the AD-xC-xx.x cards.
Step 7 If AD-xC-xx.x cards are installed on Side B, complete the “DLP-G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output
Express Power” task on page 5-131 for each Side B card. If not, continue with Step 8.
Step 8 If AD-xC-xx.x cards are installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output
Common Power” task on page 5-132 for each Side A card. If not, continue with Step 9.
Step 9 If AD-xB-xx.x cards are installed on Side A, complete the “DLP-G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output
Common Power” task on page 5-132 for each Side A card. If not, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Complete the “DLP-G83 Verify the OSC-CSM Power on OADM Nodes” task on page 5-143 for the
OSC-CSM card installed on Side A.
Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 for the
OPT-PRE card installed on Side B.
Step 12 Repeat Steps 6 through 11 for the AD-xB-xx.x and AD-xC-xx.x cards along the Side A-to-Side B
direction.
Step 13 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G83 Verify the OSC-CSM Power on OADM Nodes
Step 1 Display the OSC-CSM card in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
Step 3 Verify that the Power value for Port 3 is higher than the default no-power value of –30 dBm. The
calculated expected power value for Port 3 is:
Pout COM TX of last AD-xy-xx.x – IL02 OSC-CSM (COM RX > LINE TX) – 10 dB (bulk attenuator)
Purpose This task verifies the OSC-CSM card power on OADM nodes.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Superuser only5-144
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 4 Double-check the value.
Note Actual output power is affected by many factors. Always consider the calculated expected power
to be a general guideline and not a precise value.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM
Cards
Step 1 Based on the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file, tune the tunable laser or TXP_MR_10E_C
card to a wavelength (belonging to the 100-GHz ITU-T grid) of the channel running on the first add path
of the first Side A AD-xC-xx.x or Side A 4MD-xx.x card on the Side B-to-Side A direction. Refer to the
tunable laser manufacturer’s documentation or the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for
Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5.
Step 2 Connect the tunable laser transmitter or the TXP_MR_10E_C card DWDM TX port to the corresponding
15xx.x RX port (on the card front panel) of the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card.
Step 3 Verify the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card (Side B-to-Side A):
a. Display the Side A AD-xC-xx.x or 4MD-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the CHAN RX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
d. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN RX port reaches the provisioned set point (VOA Power
Ref).
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power” task on page 5-7 on the
Side A OPT-PRE amplifier to verify that the added wavelength turns on the laser.
Step 5 If the add connection uses a 4MD-xx.x card, continue with Step 6. If the add connection uses an
AD-xC-xx.x card, move to Step 10.
Step 6 Verify the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card:
a. Display the Side A AD-xB-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Band > Parameters tabs.
c. Change the administrative state of the BAND TX port to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI) for the channel related to the wavelength selected on the tunable laser.
Purpose This task verifies the add and drop channel connections for an OADM node
with OSC-CSM cards installed.
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-145
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. Verify that the Power value of the BAND TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–30 dBm.
Step 7 Display the related AD-xB-xx.x card (Side A-to-Side B direction) in card view.
Step 8 Change the administrative state of the drop BAND TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 9 (Optional) Connect a power meter to the proper 15xx.xx TX port on the front panel (the dual port
compared with the port where the tunable laser is connected). Verify that the physical optical power
value from that port is consistent with the value displayed on the Provisioning > Optical Chn >
Parameters tab for the proper CHAN TX power value, +/– 0.5 dB.
Step 10 Verify the Side A AD-xC-xx.x (Side A-to-Side B) card:
a. Display the Side A AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
c. Verify that the Power value of the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
d. Display the Side B AD-xC-xx.x card in card view.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs.
f. Verify that the power value for the CHAN TX port is higher than the default no-power value of
–35 dBm.
g. If the AD-xC-xx.x card is an AD-4C-xx.x card, a VOA (applied to all four channels) is installed
along the drop path and needs to be activated in Step h.
h. Change the administrative state of the CHAN TX port related to the wavelength selected on the
tunable laser to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI). Click Apply.
i. Perform the output power check.
Step 11 (Optional) Connect a power meter to the proper 15xx.xx TX port on the front panel (the dual port
compared with the port where the tunable laser is connected). Verify that the physical optical power
value from that port is consistent with the value on Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tab for the
proper CHAN TX power value, +/– 0.5 dB.
Step 12 Repeat Steps 10 through 11 for all add paths of any Side A AD-xC-xx.x cards along the Side B-to-Side A
direction.
Step 13 Remove the loopback on the Side A OSC-CSM card.
Step 14 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs.
Step 15 Click Launch ANS.
Step 16 Create a loopback on the Side B OSC-CSM card by connecting the OSC-CSM LINE RX and LINE TX
ports using a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 17 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSC-CSM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.)
Note Due to the OSC signal loopback, an EOC Termination Failure alarm might be raised on ANSI
shelves.5-146
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 18 If the OSC link becomes active, continue with Step 19. If the OSC link does not turn up, perform the
following troubleshooting steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator between the LINE TX and LINE RX connection. If the OSC link
becomes active, continue with Step 19. If not, continue with Step b.
b. Modify the OSC Fail Low thresholds. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds
tabs and change the Port 6 opwrMin (minimum power) to –40 dBm.
c. Modify the COM TX Fail Low Threshold. Change the Port 3 opwrMin (minimum power) to
–30 dBm.
d. If the OSC link turns up, continue with Step 19. If it does not turn up, replace the OSC-CSM card.
Step 19 Check the site configuration file from Cisco TransportPlanner and identify the wavelength (belonging to
the 100 Ghz ITU-T grid) of the channel running on the first add path of the first AD-xC-xx.x or
4MD-xx.x card on the Side A-to-Side B direction.
Step 20 Connect the tunable laser to the corresponding 15xx.x RX port (on the card front panel) of the Side B
AD-xC-xx.x or Side B 4MD-xx.x card.
Step 21 Repeat Steps 3 through 20, applying the steps to the Side B-to-Side A direction.
Step 22 Restore the default administrative state (IS,AINS/Unlocked,automaticInService) on all the ports
previously set to OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI).
Step 23 Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 to recover the correct
node configuration.
Step 24 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on
a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards
Purpose This procedure checks the integrity of all the optical connections inside an
OADM node with OSC-CSM cards and no OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E cards
installed on Side B and Side A of the shelf. Three connection types are
tested:
• Express
• Pass-through
• Add/Drop
Tools/Equipment A tunable laser or a TXP_MR_10E_C card
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-147
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the OADM node where you want to
perform the acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Verify that all statuses under Link Status are Success - Changed or
Success - Unchanged. If not, complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 4-127.
Step 5 Check the Cisco TransportPlanner site configuration file to verify the presence of a dropped or added
bands (including four channels at 100 GHz) configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a band in pass-through mode means that the band is dropped in one direction by an
AD-xB-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another AD-xB x.xx
card on the opposite side in the same direction. The band is not terminated inside the node.
Step 6 If no bands are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 7. If a band is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections. Band
pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 7 Check the site configuration file from Cisco TransportPlanner to verify the presence of dropped or added
channels configured in pass-through mode in either direction.
Note Configuring a channel in pass-through mode means that the channel is dropped in one direction
by an AD-xC-xx.x card on one side (Side B or Side A) of the node, then added by another
AD-xC-x.xx card on the opposite side in the same direction. The channel is not terminated inside
the node.
Step 8 If no channels are configured in pass-through mode, continue with Step 9. If a channel is configured in
pass-through mode, mark it and skip the related optical test for the express, add, and drop sections.
Channel pass-through connections are verified separately.
Step 9 Create a loopback on the Side A OSC-CSM card by connecting the LINE TX port to the LINE RX port
using a patchcord and 10-dB bulk attenuator.
Step 10 Verify that the OSC link becomes active on the Side A OSC-CSM card. (The OSC termination must be
already provisioned. If not, complete the “NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations” procedure on
page 4-126.)5-148
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Note Due to the OSC signal loopback, an EOC Termination Failure alarm might be raised on ANSI
shelves.
Step 11 If the OSC link becomes active, continue with Step 12. If the OSC link does not turn up, perform the
following troubleshooting steps:
a. Remove the 10-dB bulk attenuator between the LINE TX and LINE RX connection. If the OSC link
becomes active, continue with Step 12. If not, continue with Step b.
b. Modify the OSC Fail Low thresholds. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Optics Thresholds
tabs and change the Port 6 opwrMin (minimum power) to –40 dBm.
c. Modify the COM TX Fail Low Threshold. Change the Port 3 opwrMin (minimum power) to
–30 dBm.
d. If the OSC link turns up, continue with Step 12. If it does not turn up, replace the OSC-CSM card.
Step 12 If the node has express bands or channels, complete the “DLP-G86 Verify Express Channel Connections
on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on page 5-142. If the node does not have express bands
or channels, continue with Step 13.
Step 13 If connections configured in pass-through mode are present (noted in Steps 5 through 8), complete the
“DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections” task on page 5-133. If not,
continue with Step 14.
Step 14 If connections have add/drop connections, complete the “DLP-G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections
on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on page 5-144.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh
Patch Panel Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Purpose This procedure checks the insertion loss for a four-degree or eight-degree
patch panel.
Tools/Equipment 1 fully-tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC patchcord
1 optical power meter with LC input connector
1 MPO-LC multicable (LC if the optical power meter has LC input)
Prerequisite Procedures • The mesh patch panel must be installed. See the “DLP-G28 Install the
Fiber Patch-Panel Tray” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-149
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 If you are installing a TXP_MR_10E_C card, complete the “DLP-G268 Provision TXP_MR_10E_C
Cards for Acceptance Testing” task on page 5-5. Refer to Table 5-1 on page 5-30, if needed.
Step 5 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
to a wavelength not used in any of the sides already carrying traffic (1530.33 nm, for example).
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 5-159.
Step 7 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 8 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX A port of the four-degree or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 9 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,MT (ANSI)
or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 10 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side A (Table 5-4).
Step 11 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 12 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX B port of the four-degree or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 13 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 14 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side B (Table 5-5).
Table 5-4 From COM-RX Side A Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-12 on page 5-154
EXP B TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
EXP C TX Table 5-15 on page 5-156
EXP D TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-17 on page 5-156
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-18 on page 5-157
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-19 on page 5-157
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-20 on page 5-158
TEST ACCESS TX Table 5-13 on page 5-1555-150
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 15 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 16 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX C port of the four-degree or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 17 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 18 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side C (Table 5-6).
Step 19 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 20 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX D port of the four-degree or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 21 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 22 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side D (Table 5-7).
Table 5-5 From COM-RX Side B Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-13 on page 5-155
EXP B TX Table 5-12 on page 5-154
EXP C TX Table 5-15 on page 5-156
EXP D TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-17 on page 5-156
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-18 on page 5-157
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-19 on page 5-157
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-20 on page 5-158
TEST ACCESS TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
Table 5-6 From COM-RX Side C Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-13 on page 5-155
EXP B TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
EXP C TX Table 5-12 on page 5-154
EXP D TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-17 on page 5-156
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-18 on page 5-157
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-19 on page 5-157
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-20 on page 5-158
TAP TX Table 5-15 on page 5-1565-151
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 23 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 24 If you are testing a four-degree patch panel, continue with Step 77. If you are testing an eight-degree
patch panel, continue with Step 25.
Step 25 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX E port of the eight-degree patch panel.
Step 26 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 27 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side E (Table 5-8).
Step 28 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 29 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX F port of the eight-degree patch panel.
Step 30 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 31 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side F (Table 5-9).
Table 5-7 From COM-RX Side D Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-13 on page 5-155
EXP B TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
EXP C TX Table 5-15 on page 5-156
EXP D TX Table 5-12 on page 5-154
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-17 on page 5-156
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-18 on page 5-157
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-19 on page 5-157
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-20 on page 5-158
TEST ACCESS TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
Table 5-8 From COM-RX Side E Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-13 on page 5-155
EXP B TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
EXP C TX Table 5-15 on page 5-156
EXP D TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-12 on page 5-154
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-18 on page 5-157
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-19 on page 5-157
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-20 on page 5-158
TEST ACCESS TX Table 5-17 on page 5-1565-152
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 32 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 33 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX G port of the eight-degree patch panel.
Step 34 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 35 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side G (Table 5-10).
Step 36 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 37 Connect the transponder to the COM-RX H port of the eight-degree patch panel.
Step 38 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 39 Verify the COM-RX port power results for Side H (Table 5-11).
Table 5-9 From COM-RX Side F Verification Table
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-13 on page 5-155
EXP B TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
EXP C TX Table 5-15 on page 5-156
EXP D TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-17 on page 5-156
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-12 on page 5-154
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-19 on page 5-157
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-20 on page 5-158
TEST ACCESS TX Table 5-18 on page 5-157
Table 5-10 From COM-RX Side G Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-13 on page 5-155
EXP B TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
EXP C TX Table 5-15 on page 5-156
EXP D TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-17 on page 5-156
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-18 on page 5-157
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-12 on page 5-154
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-20 on page 5-158
TEST ACCESS TX Table 5-19 on page 5-1575-153
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 40 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 41 Connect the transponder to the test access RX port of the four- or eight-degree patch panel.
Note There are two local access RX ports on the 8-degree patch panel. Select the left Local Access
port for testing.
Step 42 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 43 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP A TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch-panel.
Step 44 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 1.
Step 45 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 46 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel or less than 8dB for a 4-degree patch panel.
Step 47 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP B TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 48 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 2.
Step 49 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 50 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel or less than 8dB for a 4-degree patch panel.
Step 51 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP C TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 52 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 3.
Step 53 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 54 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel or less than 8dB for a 4-degree patch panel.
Step 55 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP D TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 56 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 4.
Step 57 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Table 5-11 From COM-RX Side H Verification
Connect MPO Connector to Patch Panel Port Refer to...
EXP A TX Table 5-13 on page 5-155
EXP B TX Table 5-14 on page 5-155
EXP C TX Table 5-15 on page 5-156
EXP D TX Table 5-16 on page 5-156
EXP E TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-17 on page 5-156
EXP F TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-18 on page 5-157
EXP G TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-19 on page 5-157
EXP H TX (eight-degree patch panel only) Table 5-12 on page 5-154
TEST ACCESS TX Table 5-20 on page 5-1585-154
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 58 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel or less than 8dB for a 4-degree patch panel.
Step 59 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP E TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 60 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 5.
Step 61 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 62 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel.
Step 63 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP F TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 64 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 6.
Step 65 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 66 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel.
Step 67 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP G TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 68 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 7.
Step 69 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 70 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel.
Step 71 Connect the MPO connector of the MPO-LC (FC or SC) multifiber fan-out to EXP H TX port of the four-
or eight-degree patch panel.
Step 72 Connect the optical power meter to the fan-out cable 8.
Step 73 Collect the actual reading from the optical power meter.
Step 74 Verify the IL is less than 11dB for an 8-degree patch panel.
Step 75 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 76 Repeat Steps 41 through 75 for the right side Local Access RX port.
Step 77 Complete the “NTP-G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test” procedure on page 5-168.
The tables below are used for verification in Steps 10 through 39 of this procedure.
Table 5-12 Same Side Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —5-155
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-13 Side A Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 IL < 11 dB IL < 8 dB
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-14 Side B Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 IL < 11 dB IL < 8 dB
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-12 Same Side Verification (continued)
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel5-156
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Table 5-15 Side C Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 IL < 11 dB IL < 8 dB
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-16 Side D Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 IL < 11 dB IL < 8 dB
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-17 Side E Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power5-157
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
IL < 11 dB —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-18 Side F Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
IL < 11 dB —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-19 Side G Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-17 Side E Power Verification (continued)
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel5-158
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength
Step 1 In card view, display the transponder card.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 In the Wavelength field, choose the desired wavelength (C-Band, odd) from the drop-down list.
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
IL < 11 dB —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Table 5-20 Side H Power Verification
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Cable 1 No power No power
Cable 2 No power No power
Cable 3 No power No power
Cable 4 No power No power
Cable 5 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 6 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 7 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
No power —
Cable 8 (eight-degree patch
panel only)
IL < 11 dB —
Table 5-19 Side G Power Verification (continued)
Optical Power Meter Connected
to Fan Out
Power Result for Eight-Degree
Patch Panel
Power Result for Four-Degree
Patch Panel
Purpose This task tunes transponder wavelength.
Tools/Equipment Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC
patchcord
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-159
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module > Pluggable Port Module tabs and click Create to
preprovision a pluggable port module (PPM), if necessary.
Step 6 Click Ok, then Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power
Step 1 Connect the optical power meter to the transponder output.
Step 2 Display card view for the transponder card.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from
the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 4 Record the optical power meter value.
Step 5 Choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 6 Disconnect the optical power meter from the TX port of the transponder card.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task checks and records optical power.
Tools/Equipment Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC
patchcord
Optical power meter
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
ANS successfully completed
All sides completely wired (including patch panels)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-160
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G187 Perform the Multiring Site Acceptance Test
Note Optical power measurements require either a tunable laser or a multirate transponder to generate the
proper optical wavelength. If multirate transponders were installed during completion of Chapter 4,
“Turn Up a Node,” they can be used for this procedure. No additional cabling changes are needed.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the multiring node where you want to
perform the acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 Insert a full C-band tunable transponder card into an available slot.
Step 5 Plug a 15 dB LC attenuator to the TX port of the transponder card.
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
to a wavelength yyyy.yy (1530.33 nm, for example).
Step 7 Complete the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 5-159.
Step 8 Disconnect the optical power meter from the TX port of the transponder card.
Purpose This procedure checks the connections and the output power values for a
multiring node. A multiring node connects two existing in-service
two-sides ROADM nodes with two sides (each equipped with MMU
cards).
Tools/Equipment Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source
1 15-dB LC attenuator
1 optical power meter with LC input connector
1 MPO-LC multicable (LC if the optical power meter has LC input)
3 LC-LC adapters
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
All sides must be completely wired (including patch panels), except the
connections with the MMU cards in the existing in-service ROADM node;
for more information, see Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel
Acceptance Test, page 5-148 (as needed)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-161
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 9 Make the following connections:
a. Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15 dB attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card on Side A.
b. Connect the optical power meter to the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A.
c. Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port to the patchcord in the
COM-RX port of the Side B 40-WXC-C card.
d. Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port to the patchcord in the
COM-RX port of the Side C 40-WXC-C card.
e. Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port to the patchcord in the
COM-RX port of the Side D 40-WXC-C card.
Step 10 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs. Complete the following:
a. Record the values of the following parameters:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side A
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side C
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side C
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side D
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side D
b. Change the values of the parameters as follows:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A = 1 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side A = –30 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B = 1 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B = –30 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side C = 1 dBm 5-162
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side C = –30 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side D = 1 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side D = –30 dBm
Step 11 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. Choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 12 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side A and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Power value of the COM-RX
port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX value matches the transponder card optical power meter value recorded in
the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 5-159 (+\–1dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
e. Verify that the EXP-TX port power value = (COM-RX port power value in Step a) – (CRX -> EXP
insertion loss value in Step d) (+\– 1dB).
Step 13 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side A and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 5-165.
Step 14 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side B and complete the following:
a. Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input
Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 1.
b. Complete the “DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value” task on page 5-167.
Step 15 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side B and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 5-165.
Step 16 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input
Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 1.
b. Complete the “DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value” task on page 5-167.
Step 17 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side C and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 5-165.
Step 18 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side D and complete the following:
a. Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input
Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 1.
b. Complete the “DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value” task on page 5-167.
Step 19 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side D and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 5-165.
Step 20 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side A and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C
OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert
Value tabs to 2.5-163
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 21 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side A and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 5-165.
Step 22 Record the optical power meter value and verify that the optical power meter value matches the value
recorded in the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 5-159 (+\– 1dB).
Step 23 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side A. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides B,
C, and D of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 24 To test all wavelengths, repeat Steps 6, 11, 18, and 20 for all supported wavelengths.
Step 25 In card view, display the transponder card and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 26 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port for Side B of
the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 27 Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port with the patchcord in the
COM-RX port for Side A of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 28 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
card to the wavelength set in Step 6.
Step 29 Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15-dB-attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card for Side B.
Step 30 In card view, display the transponder card. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose IS (ANSI)
or Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 31 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166 for Sides C and D
of the 40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 2.
Step 32 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166 for Side B of the
40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 3.
Step 33 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side B. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides A,
C, and D.
Step 34 To test all wavelengths, repeat Steps 28 through 33 (omit Step 29) for all supported wavelengths.
Step 35 In card view, display the transponder card. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 36 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side C of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 37 Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port to the patchcord in the
COM-RX port for Side B of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 38 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
card to the wavelength set in Step 6.
Step 39 Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card for Side C.
Step 40 In card view for the transponder card, click the Provisioning > Line tabs and choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 41 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166 for Sides A and D
of the 40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 3.
Step 42 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166 for Side C of the
40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 4.5-164
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 43 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card and click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the Return
Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides A, B, and
D.
Step 44 To test all wavelengths, repeat Steps 38 through 43 (omit Step 39) for all supported wavelengths.
Step 45 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side D of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 46 Connect, using an LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port to the patchcord in the
COM-RX of Side C of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 47 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
card to the desired wavelength for testing.
Step 48 Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card of Side D.
Step 49 In card view, display the transponder card. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose IS (ANSI)
or Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 50 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166 for Sides A and B
of the 40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 4.
Step 51 Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166 for Side C of the
40-WXC-C card. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 1.
Step 52 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side D. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides
A, B, and C of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 53 To test all wavelengths, repeat Steps 47 through 52 for all supported wavelengths, except Step 48.
Step 54 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs. Restore the values recorded in Step 10a for the following parameters:
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side C
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side C
• Power on the COM-TX port of the pre-amplifier on Side D
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side D5-165
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 55 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 56 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side A of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 57 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side B of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 58 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side C of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 59 Restore the connections to the MMU cards of the eight sides using the patchcords tested in this
procedure:
a. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 1.
b. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 1.
c. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 1.
d. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 1.
e. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 2.
f. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side C to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 2.
g. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 2.
h. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side D to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM Node 2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-434 Record the OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value
Purpose This task records the power value of the OPT-AMP-17 card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value, page 5-167
ANS successfully completed
All sides completely wired (including patch panels)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-166
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 In card view for the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side x, complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify the COM-RX port power value matches the value of the EXP-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card
in the “DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value” task on page 5-167 (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Op. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Total Output Power
value of the COM-TX port.
d. Verify that the value is 1 dBm (+\– 1 dB).
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters
Step 1 In the 40-WXC-C card view for Side x, complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs and set the parameters as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –15.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input Port = x (EXP-RX) (for x, refer to the step in the originating procedure)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 13
– Wavelength = Value set in the originating procedure
b. Click Apply.
c. Click Refresh. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength field, verify that the Actual
Power (dBm) is –15 +\– 0.5dB.
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task sets the OCHNC parameters for the 40-WXC-C card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
ANS successfully completed
All sides completely wired (including patch panels)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-167
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
DLP-436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value
Step 1 In card view for the 40-WXC-C card for Side x, complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
b. Verify that the COM-TX port value matches Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength value
retrieved in the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166 (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
d. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss value.
e. Verify that the EXP-TX port power value = (COM-TX port power value) – (CRX -> EXP insertion
loss value) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task records the power value of the 40-WXC-C card for a multiring
configuration.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power, page 5-159
DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters, page 5-166
ANS successfully completed
All sides completely wired (including patch panels)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-168
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test
Step 1 Identify the sides that are already carrying traffic and which sides are going to be tested.
Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the mesh native node where you want to
perform the acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 3.
Step 3 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 4 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(An equipment alarm is indicated in the Alarms tab, Cond column as EQPT.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 5 Insert a full C-band tunable transponder into an available slot of the side that you want to test (Side A
through H, referred to as Side x in this procedure).
Step 6 Plug a 15-dB LC attenuator into the trunk TX port of the transponder card.
Step 7 Select a wavelength that is not used on any of the sides for carrying traffic (or 1530.33 nm if it is a new
installation). Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the
transponder for the selected wavelength yyyy.yy.
Step 8 Connect the optical power meter to the trunk TX port of the transponder card.
Step 9 Complete the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 5-159.
Step 10 Disconnect the optical power meter from the TX port of the transponder card.
Step 11 In card view, display the OSC-CSM or OSCM card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs and from the OSRI pull-down menu, select OFF.
b. From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Disable.
Purpose This procedure checks the power values and the optical connections for a
native mesh node. Use this test for both new installations and directional
upgrades of native mesh nodes. Use this to also test the installation of a
new side n to a node.
Tools/Equipment • Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC
patchcord
• 1 MPO-LC multicable (LC if the optical power meter has LC input)
• 1 LC-LC adapter
Prerequisite Procedures • All sides must be completely fibered (including mesh patch panels);
for more information, see Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node.”
• NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch
Panel Acceptance Test, page 5-148 (optional)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-169
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 12 Make the following connections:
a. Connect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the Line RX port of the booster
amplifier (OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C, or OSC-CSM) of Side x.
b. Connect the optical power meter to the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier (OPT-BST,
OPT-BST-E, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C, or OSC-CSM) of Side x.
c. Use a fiber to connect the 40-DMX-C TX port to the 40-MUX-C RX port for the selected
wavelength yyyy.yy in the 15454-PP-80-LC patch panel for Side x.
Step 13 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs. Complete the following:
a. Record the actual values of the following parameters:
– Power on the COM-TX port of preamplifier on Side X
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
– Power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on Side X
b. Set the previous values of the parameters as follows:
– Power on the COM-TX port of preamplifier on Side X = +8 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X = +8 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X = –18 dBm
– Power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on Side X = –1 dBm
c. Click Apply.
Step 14 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 15 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the VOA Attenuation Ref.
value y.
b. Set the VOA Attenuation Calib. to –y.
c. Choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
d. Click Apply.
Step 16 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side x. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs, and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State
drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 17 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record
the IL02 (LINE RX->COM TX) insertion loss value.
Step 18 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. For trunk port, choose
OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and click
Apply.
Step 19 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x, and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
b. Verify the power value of the COM-TX port = (Optical power meter value in Step 9) – (LINE
RX->COM TX insertion loss value read in Step 17) (+\– 1 dB).5-170
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 20 In card view, display the preamplifier card (OPT-PRE, OPT-AMP-C, or OPT-AMP-17C) for Side x and
complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX power value matches the value in Step 19b (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Total Output Power
value of the COM-TX port.
d. Verify that the value is +8 dBm (+\– 1 dB).
Step 21 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the value matches the COM-TX port power value in Step 20c (+/- 1dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss.
d. Record the CRX -> DROP insertion loss.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
f. On the same screen, record the Power value of the DROP-TX port.
g. Verify that the EXP-TX Power value in Step 21e = (COM-RX value in Step 21a) – (CRX -> EXP
value in Step 21c) (+\– 1 dB).
h. Verify that the DROP-TX value in Step 21f = (COM-RX value in Step 21a) – (CRX -> DROP value
in Step 21d) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 22 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX power value in Step a matches the value in Step 21f (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the 1RX -> xTX insertion loss (where x is the channel
number associated with yyyy.yy wavelength).
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
CHAN-TX port associated with yyyy.yy wavelength.
e. Verify that the CHAN-TX port Power value = (COM-RX power value in Step 22a) – (1RX -> xTX
insertion loss value in Step 22c) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 23 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
CHAN-RX port associated with the selected yyyy.yy wavelength.
b. Verify that the CHAN-RX value in Step 23a = (CHAN-TX value in Step 22d) (+\– 1.5 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the xRX -> 1TX insertion loss (where x is the channel
number associated with yyyy.yy wavelength).
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs, record the Power value of the COM-TX
port.
e. Verify that the COM-TX Power value = (CHAN-RX value in Step 23a) – (yRX -> 1TX value in
Step 23c) (+\– 1 dB).5-171
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 24 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side x and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs, and in the Insert Value section, set the available parameters
as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –18.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input port = 9 (ADD-RX)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 13
– Wavelength = yyyy.yy (wavelength selected in Step 7)
b. Click Apply.
c. In the Return Value COM-TX section on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and verify that the
Actual Power (dBm) is the Target Power from Step 24a +\– 0.5 dB. If the channel does not come up,
reduce VOA Attenuation by 5dB in Step 24a until the target power is reached.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
e. Verify that the COM-TX Power value matches the Actual Power value in Step 24c (+\– 1 dB).
Step 25 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side x, and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify COM-RX Power value matches the COM-TX Power value in Step 24d (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
LINE-TX port.
d. Verify that the LINE-TX value matches the power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on
Side x recorded in Step 13b (+\– 1 dB).
e. Record the optical power meter value.
f. Verify that the optical power meter value matches the LINE-TX value in Step 25c (+\– 1 dB).
Step 26 Select the 40-WXC-C card on Side n where n is A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H but n is not equal to x, go to
the card view and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs, and in the Insert Values section, set the available
parameters as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –22.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input port = x (EXP-RX)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 20
– Wavelength = yyyy.yy (wavelength selected in Step 7)
b. Click Apply.5-172
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and verify that the
Actual Power (dBm) is Target Power of Step 26a +\– 0.5 dB. If the channel does not come up, reduce
VOA Attenuation by 5dB in Step 26a until the target power is reached.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
e. Verify that the value of the COM-TX port matches the Actual Power value in Step 26c (+\– 1 dB).
f. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area,
click Refresh and then Delete.
Step 27 Repeat Step 26 for all the others of Side n, where n is A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H but n not equal to x.
Step 28 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side x and click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete.
Step 29 In card view, display the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. For trunk port, choose
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 30 To test all wavelengths, repeat Step 7 through Step 29 for each wavelength. In Step 7, set the wavelength
to the next odd wavelength.
Step 31 Disconnect the optical power meter from the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier of the Side x.
Step 32 Disconnect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) from the LINE-RX port of the
booster amplifier of the Side x.
Step 33 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side x and click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs. Complete the following:
a. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the Admin State
drop-down list.
b. Change the VOA Attenuation Calib. from the existing value to 0 (zero).
c. Click Apply.
Step 34 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side x and click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the Admin
State drop-down list and click Apply.
Step 35 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs and restore the values recorded in Step 13a for the following
parameters:
• Power on the COM-TX port of preamplifier on Side X
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C on Side X
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C on Side X
• Power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on Side X
Step 36 Repeat Steps 5 through 35 for all the others sides that are being installed.
Step 37 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-173
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
NTP-G189 Perform the Node Upgrade Acceptance Test
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the upgrade node where you want to
perform the acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose Go to Network View.
Step 3 Click the Alarms tab.
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no equipment alarms appear indicating equipment failure or other hardware problems.
(Equipment alarms are indicated by an EQPT in the Alarms tab Cond column.) If equipment failure
alarms appear, investigate and resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide for procedures.
Step 4 Insert a full C-band tunable transponder into an available slot for the node that you want to test.
Step 5 Plug a 15-dB LC attenuator to the TX port of the transponder.
Step 6 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
to a wavelength yyyy.yy that is not used in any of the sides already carrying traffic (or 1530.33 nm if it
is a new installation).
Step 7 Complete the “DLP-G433 Record Transponder Optical Power” task on page 5-159.
Step 8 Disconnect the optical power meter from the TX port of the transponder card.
Step 9 Make the following connections:
a. Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card on Side A.
Purpose This procedure checks the connections and the output power values for a
node in an upgraded ring. The upgraded node connects an existing
in-service ROADM node with two sides (each equipped with MMU cards)
to a native mesh node with two sides.
Tools/Equipment Fully C-band tunable transponder or tunable laser source with an LC
patchcord
1 15-dB LC attenuator
1 optical power meter with LC input connector
2 LC-LC patchcords (or at least one for each native side)
1 LC-LC adapter
Prerequisite Procedures Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
All sides completely wired (including patch panels), except the
connections with the MMU cards in the existing in-service ROADM node;
for more information, see Chapter 4, “Turn Up a Node”
NTP-G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel
Acceptance Test, page 5-148
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-174
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Connect the optical power meter to the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A.
c. Connect, using the LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port with the patchcord from
the COM-RX port of the Side B 40-WXC-C card.
Step 10 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs. Complete the following:
a. Record the values of the following parameters:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side A
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B
b. Change the values of the parameters as follows:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A = 1 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side A = –30 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B = 1 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B = –15 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B = –15 dBm
– Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B = –30 dBm
c. Click Apply.
d. In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 11 Display card view for the OPT-AMP-17 card on Side A and click the Provisioning > Card tabs. From
the Working Card Mode drop-down list, verify that OPT-PRE appears and if not, choose it. Click Apply.
Repeat for Side B.
Step 12 Display card view for the transponder card and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. Choose IS (ANSI)
or Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and click Apply.
Step 13 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card of Side A and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs. Record the Power value of the COM-RX
port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX value matches the transponder card optical power meter value recorded in
Step 7 (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.5-175
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Verify that the EXP-TX port power value = (COM-RX port power value in Step a) - (EXP-TX Power
value in Step d) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 14 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side A and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 5-165.
Step 15 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side B and complete the following:
a. Complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input
Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs to 1.
b. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
c. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
d. Verify that the COM-RX Power value matches the COM-TX port Power value in b (+\– 1 dB).
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
f. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss value.
g. Verify that the EXP-TX port power value = (COM-RX port power value) - (CRX -> EXP insertion
loss value) (+\– 1 dB)
Step 16 In card view, display the OPT-AMP-17 card for Side B and complete the “DLP-434 Record the
OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value” task on page 5-165.
Step 17 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side A and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 2.
Step 18 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side C and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 1.
Step 19 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side D and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 1.
Step 20 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side A and click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides B,
C, and D of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 21 Display card view for the transponder card and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 22 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side B of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 23 Connect, using the LC-LC adapter, the patchcord from the COM-TX port with the patchcord in the
COM-RX port for Side A of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 24 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
to the wavelength set in Step 6.
Step 25 Connect the transponder card output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the COM-RX port of the
40-WXC-C card on Side B.
Step 26 Display card view for the transponder card. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose IS (ANSI)
or Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.5-176
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 27 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side A and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C
OCHNC Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert
Value tabs to 2.
Step 28 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side B and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 1.
Step 29 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side C and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 2.
Step 30 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side D and complete the “DLP-435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC
Parameters” task on page 5-166. Set the Input Port on the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs
to 2.
Step 31 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C for Side B and click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete. Repeat for Sides
A, C, and D of the 40-WXC-C card.
Step 32 Display the card view for the transponder card. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs, and choose
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 33 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs. Restore the values recorded in Step 10a for the following parameters:
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side A
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side A
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side B
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B
• Power Fail Low Th on the COM-RX port of the preamplifier on Side B
Step 34 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 35 Disconnect the patchcord in the COM-TX port from the patchcord in the COM-RX port of Side A of the
40-WXC-C card.
Step 36 Make the following connections:
a. Connect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the LINE-RX port of the booster
amplifier of Side C.
b. Connect the optical power meter to the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier of Side C.
c. Connect the client TX of lambda yyyy.yy to the client RX of lambda yyyy.yy on the Side C patch
panel.
Step 37 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs and complete the following:
a. Record the actual values of the following parameters:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side X
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X5-177
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
– Power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on Side X
b. Set the values of the parameters as follows:
– Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side X = 8 dBm
– Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X = 8 dBm
– Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X = –18 dBm
– Power on the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier on Side X = –8 dBm
c. Click Apply.
Step 38 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 39 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the VOA Attenuation Ref.
value y.
b. Set the VOA Attenuation Calib. to –y.
c. Choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
d. Click Apply.
Step 40 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side C and click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs. Choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) from the Admin State
drop-down list and click Apply.
Step 41 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side C. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record
the LINE-RX -> COM TX insertion loss.
Step 42 Display the transponder card in card view and click the Provisioning > Line tabs. Choose IS (ANSI) or
Unlocked (ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list and click Apply.
Step 43 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
b. Verify the COM-TX Power value = (Optical power meter value) – (LINE RX -> COM TX insertion
loss value in Step 41) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 44 In card view, display the preamplifier card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX Power value matches the COM-TX port Power value in Step 43a
(+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Total Output Power
value of the COM-TX port.
d. Verify that the COM-TX Total Output Power value is 8 dBm (+\– 1 dB).
Step 45 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX power value matches the Total Output Power value of the COM-TX port
value in Step 44c (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the CRX -> EXP insertion loss.5-178
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
d. Record the CRX -> DROP insertion loss.
e. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
EXP-TX port.
f. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
DROP-TX port.
g. Verify that the EXP-TX Power value in Step e = (COM-RX value in Step a) - (CRX -> EXP value
in Step c) (+\– 1 dB).
h. Verify that the DROP-TX value in Step f = (COM-RX value in Step a) - (CRX -> DROP value in
Step d) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 46 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Verify that the COM-RX port Power value in Step a matches the COM-TX port Power value in
Step 45b (+\– 1 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the 1RX -> yTX insertion loss (where y is the channel
number associated with yyyy.yy wavelength).
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
CHAN-TX port associated with yyyy.yy wavelength.
e. Verify that the CHAN-TX Power value = (COM-RX Power value in Step a) - (1RX -> yTX insertion
loss value in Step c) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 47 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side C and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Chn > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
CHAN-RX port associated with yyyy.yy wavelength.
b. Verify that the CHAN-RX value matches the CHAN-TX Power value in Step 46d (+\– 1.5 dB).
c. Click the Inventory > Info tabs and record the yRX -> 1TX insertion loss (where y is the channel
number associated with yyyy.yy wavelength).
d. In the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs, record the Power value of the COM-TX
port.
e. Verify that the COM-TX Power value = (CHAN-RX Power value in Step a) – (yRX -> 1TX insertion
loss value in Step c) (+\– 1 dB).
Step 48 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side C, and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs, and set the available parameters as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –18.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input port = 9 (ADD-RX)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 13
– Wavelength = yyyy.yy (value set in Step 6)
b. Click Apply.5-179
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area,
click Refresh and verify that the Actual Power (dBm) is –18 +\– 0.5 dB.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
e. Verify that the COM-TX Power value matches the Actual Power value in Step c (+\– 1 dB).
Step 49 In card view, display the booster amplifier card for Side C, and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-RX port.
b. Click the Provisioning > Opt. Ampli. Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
LINE-TX port.
c. Verify that the LINE-TX value matches the Side C Tx Amplifier Ch Power recorded in
Step 37a (+\– 1 dB).
d. Record the optical power meter value.
e. Verify that the optical power meter value matches the LINE-TX Power value in Step b (+\– 1 dB).
Step 50 In card view, display the 40-WXC-C card for Side C, and click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the
Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and then Delete.
Step 51 Display Side A of the 40-WXC-C card in card view, and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs, and set the available parameters as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –18.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input port = 3 (EXP-RX)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 13
– Wavelength = yyyy.yy (value set in Step 6)
b. Click Apply.
c. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and verify that the
Actual Power (dBm) is –18 +\– 0.5 dB.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
e. Verify that the value of the COM-TX port matches the Actual Power value in Step c (+\– 1 dB).
f. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area,
click Refresh and then Delete.
Step 52 Repeat Step 51 for the 40-WXC-C card of Side B.
Step 53 Repeat Step 51 for the 40-WXC-C card of Side D.
Step 54 Display card view for the transponder card and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI) from the Admin State drop-down list.
Step 55 Connect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) to the Line RX port of the booster
amplifier of Side D.
Step 56 Complete the “DLP-G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength” task on page 5-158 to tune the transponder
to the next odd wavelength after yyyy.yy nm.5-180
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 57 Disconnect the patchcord between the client TX of lambda yyyy.yy from the client RX of lambda yyyy.yy
on the Side C patch panel. Use this patchcord to connect the client TX of lambda yyyy.yy to the client
RX of lambda yyyy.yy on the Side D patch panel. Note that yyyy.yy was recorded in Step 6.
Step 58 Repeat Steps 37 to 51 for Side D.
Step 59 Display Side A of the 40-WXC-C card in card view, and complete the following:
a. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC > Insert Value tabs, and set the available parameters as follows:
– Target Power (dBm) = –18.0
Note The target power is not set if the power value is higher than the channel power that is allocated
and equalized.
– Input port = 4 (EXP-RX)
– VOA Attenuation (dB) = 13
– Wavelength = yyyy.yy (value set in Step 6)
b. Click Apply.
c. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area, click Refresh and verify that the
Actual Power (dBm) is –18 +\– 0.5 dB.
d. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs and record the Power value of the
COM-TX port.
e. Verify that the value of the COM-TX port matches the Actual Power value in Step c (+\– 1 dB).
f. Click the Maintenance > OCHNC tabs. In the Return Value COM-TX on selected Wavelength area,
click Refresh and then Delete.
Step 60 Repeat Step 59 for the 40-WXC-C card of Side B.
Step 61 Repeat Step 59 for the 40-WXC-C card of Side C.
Step 62 Disconnect the optical power meter from the LINE-TX port of the booster amplifier of Side D.
Step 63 Disconnect the transponder output port (with the 15-dB attenuator) from the LINE-RX port of the
booster amplifier of the Side x.
Step 64 In card view, display the 40-DMX-C card for Side C, and complete the following:
a. Click the Provisioning > Optical Line > Parameters tabs.
b. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the Admin State
drop-down list.
c. Set the VOA Attenuation Calib to 0 (zero).
d. Click Apply.
Step 65 In card view, display the 40-MUX-C card for Side C and click the Provisioning > Optical Line >
Parameters tabs. Choose IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) from the Admin
State drop-down list and click Apply.
Step 66 Repeat Steps 64 and 65 for Side D.
Step 67 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs and restore the values recorded in Step 37a for the following
parameters for Sides C and D:
• Power on the COM-TX port of the preamplifier on Side X5-181
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
• Power on the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
• Power on the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side X
Step 68 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
WDM-ANS > Port Status tabs. Click Launch ANS.
Step 69 Restore the connections to the MMU cards of the four sides using the patchcords tested in this procedure:
a. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM node.
b. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side A to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the lowest slot of the upgraded ROADM node.
c. Connect the patchcord from the COM-TX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B to the EXP-A-RX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM node.
d. Connect the patchcord from the COM-RX port of the 40-WXC-C card on Side B to the EXP-A-TX
port of the MMU in the highest slot of the upgraded ROADM node.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with
40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards Acceptance Test
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This procedure tests a two-degree ROADM node with 40-SMR-1-C and
OPT-AMP-17-C cards installed.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_DME_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration
File” task on page 4-49
“NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” task on page 4-64
“NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs” task
on page 4-78
“NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” task on page 4-127
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-182
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 2 On the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A, do the following steps:
a. Remove the LC connectors between the ADD/DROP ports of the 40-SMR-1-C card and the MUX
and DMX units.
b. Create a physical loopback by connecting a fiber optic jumper between the ADD and DROP ports.
Step 3 Retrieve the power set point of the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A. To view this set
point, do the following:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port DROP-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. Record the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-SMR-1-C).Port DROP-TX.Power parameter in the right
pane.
f. If the value of the Power set point is greater than -6dBm, continue with Step 4, else edit the Power
set point to -6dBm and complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 4-127.
This will ensure there is enough power to perform the optical validation procedure.
Step 4 Display the OPT-AMP-17-C on Side A in card view, and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
b. From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Disable.
Step 5 Connect a tunable laser or a fully tunable TXP_DME_10E_C card to the LINE RX port of the
OPT-AMP-17-C card on Side A. Connect a 10dB bulk attenuator to the fiber or regulate the output power
of the tunable laser to -10dBm.
Step 6 Create an OCHNC DCN for channel 1 on Side A related to the ADD-DROP path using the “DLP-G105
Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-23. The circuit must be bidirectional
connecting the ADD-RX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card to the LINE-TX port of the OPT-AMP-17-C card
and vice-versa (LINE-RX port of the OPT-AMP-17-C card to the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-1-C
card)
Step 7 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state.
Step 8 Verify the power levels of channel 1 by performing the following steps:
a. Check the optical connection between the OPT-AMP-17-C and 40-SMR-1-C cards. The power
difference between the COM-TX port of OPT-AMP-17-C and the LINE-RX port of 40-SMR-1-C
must not exceed of +/- 1.5dB.
b. Check the following parameters of the RX-amplifier in the 40-SMR-1-C card:
– The Working mode on the EXP-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is set
to Gain.
– The total power on the EXP-TX port must be equal to Channel Power Ref. with a tolerance
+/-1.5dB.
– The DCU insertion loss must be equal to the power difference between the DC-TX and DC-RX
ports and the absolute value of the DCU insertion loss must be less than 11dB.5-183
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Check the parameters of the drop VOA in the 40-SMR-1-C card. The value of the VOA Attenuation
parameter on the DROP-TX port must be equal to the value of the VOA Attenuation Ref. parameter
with a tolerance of +/-1.0dB.
d. Check the following parameters of the add VOA in the 40-SMR-1-C card:
– In the card view, click the Provisioning > OCH > Parameters tabs.
– Select the first channel from the Wavelength drop-down list and click Retrieve. The optical path
from the ADD-RX port to the LINE-TX port is highlighted.
– Verify if the value of the Power To parameter is the same as that of the VOA Power Ref.
parameter with a tolerance +/-1.0dB.
e. Check the optical connection between the 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C card. The power
difference between the LINE-TX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card and the COM-RX port of the
OPT-AMP-17-C card must not exceed +/- 1.5dB.
f. Check the following parameters of the OPT-AMP-17-C card:
– The Working mode on the LINE-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is
set to Gain.
– The value of the Gain parameter must be equal to the Gain set point +/-1.0dB. The gain set point
for the OPT-AMP-17-C card is 17dB.
Step 9 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side A that is related to the ADD-DROP path created
in Step 6 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-26.
Step 10 Create an OCHNC DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side A related to the EXP path using the “DLP-G105
Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-23. The circuit must be bidirectional
and connects the LINE-RX port of the OPT-AMP-17-C card on Side A to the LINE-TX port of the
OPT-AMP-17-C card on Side B.
Step 11 Verify the power levels of channel 1 by performing the following steps:
a. Check the optical connection between the OPT-AMP-17-C and 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A. The
power difference between the COM-TX port of OPT-AMP-17-C and the LINE-RX port of
40-SMR-1-C must not exceed +/- 1.5dB.
b. Check the following parameters of the RX-amplifier in the 40-SMR-1-C card:
– The Working mode on the EXP-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is set
to Gain.
– The total power on the EXP-TX port must be equal to Channel Power Ref. with a tolerance
+/-1.5dB.
– The DCU insertion loss must be equal to the power difference between the DC-TX and DC-RX
ports and the absolute value of the DCU insertion loss must be less than 11dB.
c. Check the optical connection between 40-SMR-1-C on Side A and 40-SMR-1-C on Side B. The
power difference between the EXP-TX port and the EXP-RX port must not exceed +/- 1.5dB.
d. Check the parameters of the pass-through VOA in the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side B:
– In the card view, click the Provisioning > OCH > Parameters tabs.
– Select the first channel from the Wavelength drop-down list and click Retrieve. The optical path
from the EXP-RX port to the LINE-TX port is highlighted.
– Verify if the value of the Power To parameter is the same as the value of the VOA Power Ref.
parameter with a tolerance +/-1.0dB.5-184
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
e. Check the optical connection between the 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C card on Side B. The
power difference between the LINE-TX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card and the COM-RX port of the
OPT-AMP-17-C card must not exceed +/- 1.5dB.
f. Check the following parameters of the OPT-AMP-17-C card on Side B:
– The Working mode on the LINE-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is
set to Gain.
– The value of the Gain parameter must be equal to the Gain set point +/-1.0dB. The gain set point
for the OPT-AMP-17-C card is 17dB.
Step 12 Turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the TXP card in OutofService (OOS) state and delete the
OCHNC DCN circuit on Side A related to channel 1 created in Step 10 using the “DLP-G106 Delete
Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-26.
Step 13 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the second wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS) state. Repeat
Step 6 through Step 12 for the second wavelength.
Step 14 Repeat Step 13 for the remaining 38 wavelengths on Side A.
Step 15 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit related to channel 40 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel
Network Connections” task on page 8-26 and turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the
TXP_DME_10E_C card in OutofService (OOS) state.
Step 16 On the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A, do the following steps:
a. Remove the physical loopback between the ADD and DROP ports on the 40-SMR-1-C card created
in Step 2.
b. Reconnect the DROP-TX port to the RX port on the DMX side of the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel.
Step 17 On the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit on Side A, do the
following steps:
a. Create a physical loopback between the MUX and DMX ports on the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit.
b. Connect the TX port on the MUX side of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit to a power meter. If the power meter is not available, reconnect the TX
port of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit to the ADD-RX
port of the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A.
Step 18 Create an OCHNC DCN for channel 1 on Side A related to the ADD-DROP path as done in Step 6.
Step 19 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state.
Step 20 To verify the insertion loss on the optical path of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit, do the following steps:
a. Retrieve the power value on the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card and record it as Pin.
b. Measure the optical power on the power meter or the ADD-RX port and record it as Pout.
c. Verify that the power difference between the power values obtained in step 21 a.and step 21 b. does
not exceed the insertion loss value specified for the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit. (Pin - Pout must be less than 13dB with a tolerance of 1dB).
Step 21 Turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the TXP card in OutofService (OOS) state and delete the
OCHNC DCN circuit on Side A related to channel 1 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel
Network Connections” task on page 8-26.5-185
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 22 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the next wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state and repeat Step 18 through Step 21 for the new wavelength.
Step 23 Restore the initial configuration after checking all the 40 available wavelengths:
a. Remove the power meter and reconnect the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit to the ADD-RX port of the 40-SMR-1-C card.
b. Remove the physical loopbacks between the MUX and DMX ports on the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit on Side A.
c. Reset the ALS parameter on the 40-SMR-1-C card. Complete the following:
– In card view, display the 40-SMR-1-C card on Side A and click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
– From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Auto Restart.
d. Import the CTP XML file again using the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE
Update Configuration File” procedure on page 4-49 to overwrite any manual settings.
e. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 and verify that there
are no errors.
Step 24 Repeat all the steps from Step 2 through Step 23 related to Side B.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with
40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test
Purpose This procedure tests a four-degree ROADM node with 40-SMR-2-C cards
installed.
Tools/Equipment One of the following:
• A tunable laser
• TXP_DME_10E_C
An optical power meter or optical spectrum analyzer
Two bulk attenuators (10 dB) with LC connectors
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE Update Configuration
File” task on page 4-49
“NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” task on page 4-64
“NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs” task
on page 4-78
“NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” task on page 4-127
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite
Security Level Superuser only5-186
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to perform the
acceptance test. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 On the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A, do the following steps:
a. Remove the LC connectors between the ADD/DROP ports of the 40-SMR-2-C card and the MUX
and DMX units.
b. Create a physical loopback by connecting a fiber optic jumper between the ADD and DROP ports.
Step 3 Retrieve the power set point of the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A. To view this set
point, do the following:
a. Go to node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode) and click the
Provisioning > WDM-ANS > Provisioning tabs.
b. In the Selector window on the left, expand the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A.
c. Expand the Port DROP-TX category.
d. Select Power.
e. Record the value of the Shelf i Slot i (40-SMR-2-C).Port DROP-TX.Power parameter in the right
pane.
f. If the value of the Power set point is greater than -6dBm, continue with Step 4, else edit the Power
set point to -6dBm and complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on
page 4-127.
This will ensure there is enough power to perform the optical validation procedure.
Step 4 Display the 40-SMR-2-C card for Side A in card view and complete the following steps:
a. Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
b. From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Disable.
Step 5 Connect a tunable laser or a fully tunable TXP_DME_10E_C to the LINE RX port of the 40-SMR-2-C
card on Side A. Connect a bulk attenuator to the fiber or regulate the output power of the tunable laser
to -10dBm.
Step 6 Create an OCHNC DCN on Side A related to the ADD-DROP path of channel 1 using the “DLP-G105
Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-23. The circuit must be bidirectional
connecting the ADD-RX port to the LINE-TX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card and vice-versa (LINE-RX
port to the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card)
Step 7 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state.
Step 8 Verify the power levels of channel 1 by performing the following steps:
a. Check the parameters of the RX-amplifier in the 40-SMR-2-C card:
– The Working mode on the EXP-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is set
to Gain.
– The total power on the EXP-TX port must be equal to the value of the Channel Power Ref.
parameter with a tolerance +/-1.5dB.
– The DCU insertion loss must be equal to the power difference between the DC-TX and DC-RX
ports and the absolute value of the DCU insertion loss must be less than 11dB.
b. Check the parameters of the drop VOA in the 40-SMR-2-C card. The value of the VOA Attenuation
parameter on the DROP-TX port must be the same value as the VOA Attenuation Ref. parameter
with a tolerance +/-1.0dB. 5-187
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
c. Check the parameters of the add VOA in the 40-SMR-2-C card:
– In the card view, click the Provisioning > OCH > Parameters tabs.
– Select the first channel from the Wavelength drop-down list and click Retrieve. The optical path
from the ADD-RX port to the LINE-TX port is highlighted.
– Verify if the value of the Power To parameter is the same as the value of the Channel Power Ref.
parameter with a tolerance +/-1.0dB
– The Working mode on the LINE-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is
set to Gain.
– The value of the Gain parameter must be equal to the Gain set point +/-1.0dB. The gain set point
for the 40-SMR-2-C card is 17dB.
Step 9 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side A related to the ADD-DROP path that was created
in Step 6 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-26.
Step 10 Create an OCHNC DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side A related to the EXP-TX path towards Side B
using the “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-23. The circuit
must be bidirectional and connects the LINE-RX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A to the
LINE-TX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side B.
Step 11 Verify the power levels of channel 1 by performing the following steps:
a. Check the parameters of the RX-amplifier in the 40-SMR-2-C card:
– The Working mode on the EXP-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is set
to Gain.
– The total power on the EXP-TX port must be equal to Channel Power Ref. with a tolerance
+/-1.5dB.
– The DCU insertion loss must be equal to the power difference between the DC-TX and DC-RX
ports and the absolute value of the DCU insertion loss must be less than 11dB.
b. Check the optical connection between Side A and Side B through the 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel.
Depending on the source side, the EXP-i-RX port of the destination side varies. Verify the
connectivity among the different sides using the 15454-PP-4-SMR patch panel block diagram in the
“Node Reference” chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual. For example, on
Side A, EXP-TX is connected to Side B on EXP-1-RX, Side C on EXP-2-RX, and Side D on
EXP-3-RX. The power difference between the EXP-TX port and the EXP-i-RX port must be less
than 7 dB.
c. Check the parameters of the pass-through VOA and TX-amplifier in the 40-SMR-2-C card on
Side B:
– In the card view, click the Provisioning > OCH > Parameters tabs.
– Select the first channel from the Wavelength drop-down list and click Retrieve. The optical path
from the EXP-i-RX port to the LINE-TX port is highlighted.
– Verify if the value of the Power To parameter is the same as the value of the Channel Power Ref.
parameter with a tolerance +/-1.0dB
– The Working mode on the LINE-TX port must be the same as the ANS set point value that is
set to Gain.
– The value of the Gain parameter on the LINE-TX port must be equal to the Gain set point
+/-1.0dB. The gain set point for the 40-SMR-2-C card is 17dB.
Step 12 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit towards Side B related to channel 1 created in Step 10 using the
“DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-26.5-188
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
Step 13 Create the OCHNC DCN circuit for channel 1 on Side A related to EXP-TX path towards Side C using
the “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-23. Repeat Step 11
and Step 12 for the circuit that is created.
Step 14 Repeat Step 13 towards Side D, turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card
in OutofService (OOS) state.
Step 15 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the second wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS) state. Repeat
Step 6 through Step 14 for the second wavelength.
Step 16 Repeat Step 15 for the remaining 38 wavelengths on Side A.
Step 17 Delete the OCHNC DCN circuit related to channel 40 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical Channel
Network Connections” task on page 8-26 and turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the
TXP_DME_10E_C card in OutofService (OOS) state.
Step 18 On the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A, do the following steps:
a. Remove the physical loopback between the ADD and DROP ports on the 40-SMR-2-C card created
in Step 2.
b. Reconnect the DROP-TX port to the RX port on the DMX side of the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD patch panel.
Step 19 On the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit on Side A, do the
following steps:
a. Create a physical loopback between the MUX and DMX ports of the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit that are related to the same wavelength.
b. Connect the TX port on the MUX side of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit to a power meter. If the power meter is not available, reconnect the TX
port of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit to the ADD-RX
port of the 40-SMR-2-C card on Side A.
Step 20 Create an OCHNC DCN for channel 1 on Side A related to the ADD-DROP path as done in Step 6.
Step 21 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the first wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state.
Step 22 To verify the insertion loss on the optical path of the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit on Side A, do the following steps:
a. Retrieve the power value on the DROP-TX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card and record it as Pin.
b. Measure the optical power on the power meter or the ADD-RX port and record it as Pout.
c. Verify that the power difference between the power values obtained in step 21 a.and step 21 b. does
not exceed the insertion loss value specified for the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit. (Pin - Pout must be less than 13dB with a tolerance of 1dB).
Step 23 Turn off the laser or place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in OutofService (OOS) state and
delete the OCHNC DCN circuit on Side A related to channel 1 using the “DLP-G106 Delete Optical
Channel Network Connections” task on page 8-26.
Step 24 Set the tunable laser or the TXP_DME_10E_C card to the next wavelength of the 100-GHz ITU-T
C-band grid (1530.33 nm) and place the trunk port of the TXP_DME_10E_C card in the In-Service (IS)
state and repeat Step 20 through Step 23 for the new wavelength.
Step 25 Restore the initial configuration after checking all the 40 available wavelengths:
a. Remove the power meter and reconnect the 15216-MD-40-ODD, 15216-EF-40-ODD, or
15216-MD-48-ODD unit to the ADD-RX port of the 40-SMR-2-C card.5-189
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You Begin
b. Remove the physical loopbacks between the MUX and DMX ports on the 15216-MD-40-ODD,
15216-EF-40-ODD, or 15216-MD-48-ODD unit on Side A.
c. Reset the ALS parameter on the 40-SMR-2-C card. Complete the following:
– In card view, display the 40-SMR-2-C and click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
– From the ALS Mode pull-down menu, select Auto Restart.
d. Import the CTP XML file again using the “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco TransportPlanner NE
Update Configuration File” procedure on page 4-49 to overwrite any manual settings.
e. Complete the “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 4-127 and verify no errors
are present.
Step 26 Repeat all the steps from Step 2 through Step 25 related to Side B.
Step 27 Repeat all the steps from Step 2 through Step 25 related to Side C.
Step 28 Repeat all the steps from Step 2 through Step 25 related to Side D.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.5-190
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 5 Perform Node Acceptance Tests
Before You BeginCHAPTER
6-1
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
6
Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
This chapter explains how to provision transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), Xponder (GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE), and ADM-10G cards. The provisioning must be performed
before you provision the dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) network and create circuits.
Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to
the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Before You Begin
Before performing any of the following procedures, investigate all alarms and clear any trouble
conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide as necessary.
Caution Provisioning TXP and MXP cards can be service affecting. You should make all changes during a
scheduled maintenance window.
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules, page 6-3—Complete this procedure to provision a
multirate pluggable port module (PPM), provision or change the optical line rate of a PPM, or delete
a PPM. PPMs provide the fiber interface to the TXP, MXP, and ADM-10G cards. With the exception
of the TXP_MR_10G card, all TXPs, MXPs, and ADM-10G cards accept PPMs.
2. NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 6-21—As needed, complete this procedure for
TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards that will be protected
with Y-cable protection.
3. NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card, page 6-24—As needed,
complete this procedure to create a splitter protection group for an OTU2_XP card.
4. NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards,
page 6-26—As needed, complete this procedure to create 1+1 protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.6-2
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
5. NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter
Thresholds, page 6-28—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
6. NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and
Thresholds, page 6-48—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C
cards.
7. NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM
Parameters, and Thresholds, page 6-74—As needed, complete this procedure to provision the
transmission settings for ADM-10G cards.
8. NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 6-98—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
9. NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 6-119—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
10. NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 6-137—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards.
11. NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds,
page 6-159—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for
40G-MXP-C card.
12. NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group
Settings, page 6-182—As needed, complete this procedure to change the channel group settings for
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
13. NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings,
page 6-193—As needed, complete this procedure to change the CFM settings for GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
14. NTP-G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings,
page 6-206—As needed, complete this procedure to change the EFM settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
15. NTP-G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings,
page 6-211—As needed, complete this procedure to change the REP settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
16. NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line
Settings, and PM Thresholds, page 6-217—As needed, complete this procedure to change the
transmission settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
17. NTP-G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring, page 6-260—As needed, complete
this procedure to add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring.
18. NTP-G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds,
page 6-263—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for OTU2_XP
cards.
19. NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings, page 6-285—As needed, complete this
procedure to change the automatic laser shutdown settings for a TXP or MXP card.6-3
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
20. NTP-G192 Force FPGA Update, page 6-286—As needed, complete this procedure to force an
upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards.
21. NTP-G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group, page 6-288—As
needed, complete this procedure to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards when the card is
part of a protection group.
22. NTP-G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator, page 6-289—As needed, complete this procedure to enable
error decorrelator on a TXP_MR_10EX_C, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card.
Note Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM supports IBM's 5G DDR (Double Data Rate) InfiniBand1
interfaces.
NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules
Note If a single-rate PPM is installed, the PPM screen will autoprovision and no further steps are necessary.
Note When you autoprovision a PPM, initial alarm and TCA defaults are supplied by Cisco Transport
Controller (CTC) depending on your port and rate selections and the type of PPM. These default values
can be changed after you install the PPM.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G,
or OTU2_XP card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs
are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network.
Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs,
refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 to log into an ONS 15454 on the network. If
you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
1. 5G DDR InfiniBand is referred to as IB_5G.
Purpose Complete this procedure to provision a multirate PPM, provision the
optical line rate of a multirate PPM, or delete a single-rate or multirate
PPM.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-4
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 2 Click the Alarms tab:
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not turned on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task on
page 10-26 as necessary.
b. Verify that no unexplained conditions appear. If unexplained conditions appear, resolve them before
continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card, complete the “DLP-G235 Change
the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode” task on page 6-4. If not, continue with Step 4
Step 4 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
card, complete the “DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode” task on page 6-6. If not,
continue with Step 5.
Step 5 If you are provisioning a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card, complete the “DLP-G379
Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 6-8. If not, continue
with Step 6.
Step 6 If you are provisioning a OTU2_XP card, complete the “DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode”
task on page 6-10. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 If you are provisioning a PPM on an ADM-10G card, complete the “DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G
PPM and Port” task on page 6-9. If not, continue with Step 8.
Step 8 Complete the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on page 6-11 for TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP ports with multirate PPMs. If you already
preprovisioned the multirate PPM (DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot, page 4-73), skip this
step and continue with Step 9.
Step 9 If you are provisioning an IBM ETR_CLO (External Time Reference – Control Link Oscillator) or
InterSystem Coupling Link (ISC) service on the PPM, complete “DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for
ETR_CLO and ISC Services” task on page 6-12. Otherwise, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Complete the “DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate” task on page 6-14 to assign a line rate to a
TXP, MXP, or OTU2_XP port after the PPM is provisioned. (This task is not performed for GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.)
Step 11 If you need to delete a PPM at any point in this procedure, complete the “DLP-G280 Delete a PPM” task
on page 6-19.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode
Purpose This task changes the card mode for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards. The card mode determines which
PPMs can be provisioned for the card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-5
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If the service state is correct, continue with Step 6. If not,
complete the following steps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance
(ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs.
Step 5 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If the service state is correct, continue with Step 6. If not,
complete the following steps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance
(ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 7 Change the Card Mode as needed:
• FC-GE—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports
1-1 and 2-1 only), FC2G (Port 1-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only), FICON2G (Port 1-1
only), and ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 8-1).
• Mixed—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G and
ONE_GE (Port 1–1 only), ESCON (Ports 5–1 through 8-1 only)
• ESCON—Choose this option if you will provision the ESCON PPM on Ports 1-1 through 8-1.
Note The Provisioning > Card tab also has the display-only Tunable Wavelengths field. This field shows the
supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed in the format:
first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths.
For example, 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).6-6
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode
Note The MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards have two port
mode groups, one for Ports 1 through 4, and the second for Ports 5 through 8. To change the port mode,
all ports within the selected port group must be in OOS (out-of-service) service state. Ports in the second
port group do not need to be in OOS service state if you are not changing the port mode for the second
port group. Before you change the port mode, you must also ensure that any PPM port rate provisioned
for the selected port group is deleted (see “DLP-G280 Delete a PPM” task on page 6-19).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to
change the port mode.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Change the port mode as described in Table 6-1.
Note The PPM port rates are provisioned in the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on
page 6-11.
Purpose This task changes the port mode for the MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards.
The port mode determines which PPMs can be provisioned on the ports.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-7
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note The Provisioning > Cards tab also has a display-only Tunable Wavelengths field which shows the
wavelengths supported by the card. If a MXP_MR_10DME_C card is installed, the 32 C-band
wavelengths appear. If the MXP_MR_10DME_L card is installed, the 32 L-band wavelengths appear. If
the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card is installed, the 82 C-band wavelengths appear.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Note Loopbacks on MXP-MR-10DME are not applicable when Fiber Channel switches are present.
Note If the Fiber Channel switch version is not present then the Distance Extension settings are not supported.
Table 6-1 10G Data Muxponder Card Port Modes
Parameter Description Options
Port 1-4 Mode Sets the mode of
operation for Ports
1-1 through 4-1.
Chose one of the following:
• FC-GE_ISC—Choose this option if you will provision any
of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 1-1 through
4-1), FC2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1
through 4-1), FICON2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only),
ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports
1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1),
and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only).
• FC4G—Choose this option if you will provision an FC4G
or FICON4G PPM (Port 1-1 only).
Port 5-8 Mode Sets the mode of
operation for
Ports 5-1 through
8-1.
Chose one of the following:
• FC-GE_ISC—choose this option if you will provision any
of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 5-1 through
8-1), FC2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 5-1
through 8-1), FICON2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only),
ONE_GE (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports
5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1),
and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only).
• FC4G—choose this option if you will provision an FC4G
or FICON4G PPM port rate (Port 5-1 only).6-8
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the card mode.
Step 2 In card view, click Provisioning > Ether Ports > Ports.
Step 3 Verify that any provisioned client or trunk ports have an OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state in the Service State column. If so, continue with Step 4.
If not, complete the following substeps.
a. For the first port that is not out of service, in the Admin State column, choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI)
or Locked,disabled (ETSI).
b. Repeat Step a for each port that is not out of service.
c. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 5 Choose one of the card modes shown in Table 6-2.
:
Purpose This task changes the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card
mode. 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards can be provisioned as a Layer 2
Ethernet switch or a 10G Ethernet TXP. GE_XP and GE_XPE cards can be
provisioned as a Layer 2 Ethernet switch, 10G Ethernet MXP, or 20G
Ethernet MXP.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-2 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes
Mode Cards Description
L2 over DWDM GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
Provisions the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE as
a Layer 2 switch.
10GE TXP 10GE_XP
10GE_XPE
Provisions the 10GE_XP or 10GE_XPE as a 10 Gigabit
Ethernet transponder. Traffic received on the 10GE client Port
1-1 is sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 3-1, and traffic
received on 10 Gigabit Ethernet client Port 2-1 is sent to
10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 4-1.6-9
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
The GE-XP and GE-XPE cards operating in 10GE MXP mode and configured for 100% traffic flow, do
not drop frames when up to nine ports are in use. However, when all the ten ports are in use, some frames
are dropped. When the tenth port is to be used, configure the Committed Info Rate (CIR) at 55% on any
one of the ports. For more information about configuring the CIR, see the “DLP-G380 Provision the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 6-218.
Step 6 Click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to provision PPM settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose the SFP you want to install from the drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one
port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 6 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Ports dialog box appears.
10GE MXP GE_XP
GE_XPE
Provisions the GE_XP or GE_XPE as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet
muxponder. Traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports
1-1 through 10-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit
Ethernet trunk Port 21-1, and traffic received on Gigabit
Ethernet client Ports 11-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent
to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 22-1.
20GE MXP GE_XP
GE_XPE
Provisions the GE_XP or GE_XPE as a 20 Gigabit Ethernet
muxponder. Traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports
1-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit
Ethernet trunk Port 21-1. Trunk port 22-1 is not used.
Table 6-2 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes
Mode Cards Description
Purpose This task provisions a fixed-rate PPM and port on an ADM-10G PPM card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-10
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 7 In the Create Ports dialog box, complete the following:
• Port—Choose the port you want to configure from the drop-down list.
• Port Type—Choose the port type, such as OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or ONE-GE from the drop-down
list.
– Ports 1 - 8 can only be OC-3, OC-12, or ONE_GE
– Ports 9 - 12 can on be OC-3 or OC-12
– Ports 13 - 16 can only be OC-3, OC-12, or OC-48
Step 8 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Ports area. The port type you provisioned is
listed in the Rate column.
Step 9 If you want to provision a PPM or another port, repeat Steps 4 through 8.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode
Caution Changing the card configuration to 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy automatically replaces the
current port configurations (Ports 1 and 3) to 10G Ethernet and OC192. This resets and reboots the
OTU2_XP card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where
you want to change the card mode.
Step 2 In card view, click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tab.
Step 3 Verify that all provisioned client or trunk ports have an OOS-MA, DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,
disabled (ETSI) service state in the Service State column. If so, continue with Step 4. If not, complete
the following substeps.
a. For the first port that is not out of service, in the Admin State column, choose OOS, DSBLD (ANSI)
or Locked, disabled (ETSI).
b. Repeat Step a for each port that is not out of service.
c. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Card tab.
Step 5 Change the Card Configuration as needed:
• Transponder—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a transponder. Port pairs 1-3
and 2-4 are both configured as transponders. This is the default card configuration.
Purpose This task changes the OTU2_XP card mode. The card mode determines
which PPMs can be provisioned for the card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-11
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
• Standard Regen—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a standard regenerator
(with E-FEC only on one port). Port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 are both configured as regenerators.
• Enhanced FEC—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as an E-FEC regenerator
(with E-FEC on two ports). Port pair 3-4 is configured as enhanced regenerator. Ports 1 and 2 are
not used.
• Mixed—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a transponder and a standard
regenerator (mixed configuration). One of the port pair (1-3 or 2-4) is configured as a transponder
and the other port pair as a standard regenerator.
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card to
enable the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion. Port pair 1-3 supports LAN Phy to WAN
Phy conversion. Port pair 2-4 can be configured either as a transponder or a standard regenerator.
Note If you revert to the previous release (release earlier than 9.10), be sure to disable the 10G
Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature. If you do not disable the 10G Ethernet LAN
Phy to WAN Phy feature, an error message stating that the user needs to disable 10G Ethernet
LAN Phy to WAN Phy feature before reverting to the previous release is displayed.
Note Table 6-125 on page 6-276 lists the Ethernet variables supported on Ports 1 and 3 of the
OTU2_XP card that has the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy enabled. When the card is in
the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, no 10G FC RMONS are supported on Ports 2
and 4.
For more information on OTU2_XP card configuration rules, refer to the “Transponder and
Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 6 Click Apply. Then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM
Note If the PPM was preprovisioned using the “DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot” task on
page 4-73 this task is unnecessary, unless the PPM has an Out-of-Service and Autonomous Management,
Unassigned (OOS-AUMA,UAS) (ANSI) or unlocked-disabled, unassigned (ETSI) service state.
Purpose This task provisions a multirate PPM on a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-12
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to provision PPM
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose the PPM slot number where the SFP is installed from the drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one
port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 6 If you want to provision a PPM on another port, repeat Steps 3 through 5. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services
Step 1 Display your site plan in Cisco TransportPlanner.
Step 2 Verify that the topology where you plan to run the ETR_CLO or ISC service can support the service.
The following topologies support ETR_CLO or ISC:
• Single span—Two terminal sites with no intermediate sites in between and one of the following sets
of cards installed:
– 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
– 32WSS and 32DMX cards
– 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
– 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
– 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Figure 6-1 shows a single-span topology as displayed in Cisco Transport Planner.
Purpose This task verifies that the DWDM network topology can support the IBM
ETR_CLO and ISC services.
Tools/Equipment Cisco TransportPlanner site plan
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-13
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Figure 6-1 Single-Span Topology
• Point-to-Point—Two terminal sites with one of the following sets of cards installed:
– 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
– 32WSS and 32DMX cards
– 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
– 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
– 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Line amplifiers can be installed between the terminal sites, but intermediate (traffic terminating)
sites cannot be installed. Figure 6-2 shows a point-to-point topology as shown in
Cisco TransportPlanner.
Figure 6-2 Point-to-Point Topology
• Two hubs—Two hub nodes in a ring with one of the following sets of cards installed:
– 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
– 32WSS and 32DMX cards
– 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
– 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
– 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Line amplifiers can be installed between the hubs. Figure 6-3 shows two hub nodes with no line
amplifier nodes installed. Figure 6-4 shows two hub nodes with line amplifier nodes installed.
Site 1 Site 4 134361
W E
Site 1 Site 4 134360
Site 2
E W
E
W
Site 3
E
W6-14
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Figure 6-3 Hubs with No Line Amplifiers
Figure 6-4 Hubs with Line Amplifiers
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
Site 1
Site 2
W
E
E
W
134358
Purpose This task provisions the line rate for TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11
DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services, page 6-12,
if you are provisioning an ETR_CLO service.
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
134359
Site 1 Site 2
Site 2
W
E
E
W
W E
E W
Site 46-15
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note The optical line rate for cards with single-rate PPMs is provisioned automatically when you complete
the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on page 6-11 if the trunk port is out of service. If the
optical line rate was provisioned automatically, you do not need to complete this task for the
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card. If the trunk port was in-service when you
provisioned the PPM, complete this task to provision the optical line rate manually for those cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card where you want to provision PPM ports. If the data
rate that you are provisioning is DV-6000, HDTV, ESCON, SDI/D1 Video, ISC1, ISC3 (for
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards), or ETR_CLO, complete the following steps. Otherwise,
continue with Step 4.
a. Click the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tabs.
b. In the ITU-T G.709 OTN field for the respective PPM, choose Disable.
c. In the FEC field for the respective PPM, choose Disable.
d. Click Apply.
Step 2 For the TXP_MR-10G card, click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs. For all other cards, go
to Step 4.
Step 3 In the Data Rate Selection area, click Create and choose the type of port from the drop-down list. The
supported port types are SONET (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy) and 10G Ethernet LAN Phy.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 5 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Port dialog box appears.
Step 6 In the Create Port dialog box, complete the following:
• Port—Choose the port and port number from the drop-down list. The first number indicates the PPM
in the Pluggable Port Modules area, and the second number indicates the port number on the PPM.
For example, the first PPM with one port appears as 1-1 and the second PPM with one port appears
as 2-1. The PPM number can be 1 to 4, but the port number is always 1.
• Port Type—Choose the type of port from the drop-down list. The port type list displays the
supported port rates on your PPM. See Table 6-3 on page 6-16 for definitions of the supported rates
on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card.
Step 7 Click OK. The row in the Pluggable Ports area turns white if the physical SFP is installed and light blue
if the SFP is not installed.
If the optical parameter values differ from the NE Default settings, change the port state to In-Service
(for ANSI) or Unlocked (for ETSI) to synchronize the values with the NE Default settings.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 5 through 7 to configure the rest of the port rates as needed.6-16
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-3 PPM Port Types
Card Port Type
TXP_MR_2.5G
TXPP_MR_2.5G
• OC-3/STM1—155 Mbps
• OC-12/STM4—622 Mbps
• OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps
• ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM
signal)
• DV6000—Proprietary signal from video vendor
• SDI_D1_VIDEO—Serial Digital Interface and Digital Video
signal type 1
• HDTV—High Definition Television
• PASS-THRU—Not specified
• FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps
• FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps
• FICON1G—Fiber connectivity1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
• FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal)
• ETR_CLO—External Time Reference–Control Link Oscillator
• ISC compat—InterSystem Coupling Link 1 (ISC1)
• ISC peer—InterSystem Coupling Link 3 (ISC3)
• DVB-ASI — Proprietary signal from video vendor. Digital
Video Broadcast - Asynchronous Serial Interface
• ISC1— InterSystem Channel 1 Gbps (IBM signal)
MXP_2.5G_10G
MXP_2.5G_10E
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
• OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps1
TXP_MR_10G2
• SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet
WAN Phy
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
• SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet
WAN Phy—10 Gbps
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy—10 Gbps Ethernet
• 10G Fibre Channel—10 Gbps Fibre Channel
• (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G6-17
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
If the card mode is FC_GE:
• FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and 2-1)
• FC2G ISL—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
• FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
(Ports 1-1 and 2-1)
• FICON2G ISL—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal)
(Port 1-1 only)
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and
2-1 only)
If the card mode is Mixed:
• FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
• FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
(Port1-1 only)
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
• ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM
signal) (Ports 5-1 through 8-1)
If the card mode is ESCON:
• ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM
signal) (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
Table 6-3 PPM Port Types (continued)
Card Port Type6-18
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
If the port mode is FC_GE_ISC:
• FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
• FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1
only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1,
6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
• FICON1G—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports
1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port
that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
• ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1
through 8-1)
• ISC COMPAT (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
• ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
• ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not
available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a
PPM provisioned.)
If the port mode is FC4G:
• FC4G—Fibre Channel 4.25 Gbps (Ports 1-1 or 5-1 only; ports
are not available if any of the three ports that follow has a PPM
provisioned.)
• FICON4G—Fiber connectivity 4.25 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports
1-1 or 5-1 only; ports are not available if any of the three ports
that follow has a PPM provisioned.)
40G-MXP-C • SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64)
• FC8G
• FC10G
• TEN_GE
• OTU2
Table 6-3 PPM Port Types (continued)
Card Port Type6-19
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G280 Delete a PPM
Note Before deleting a PPM, delete the PPM from the provisioning pane.
Note This task does not apply to the TXP_MR_10G card. To change the TXP_MR_10G data rate, complete
the “DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate” task on page 6-49.
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
• GE_XP and GE_XPE client ports1
• 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE client and trunk ports; GE_XP and
GE_XPE trunk ports1
OTU2_XP • SONET (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)—10 Gbps
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy—10 Gbps Ethernet
• 10G Fiber Channel—10 Gbps Fibre Channel
• IB_5G—InfiniBand 5 Gbps
Note If you have an OTU2 signal in which the OPU2 has been
generated by multiplexing four ODU1 signals, choose
SONET as the port rate. This allows the OTU2 signal to be
transported transparently in standard or E-FEC regenerator
configuration.
1. Automatically provisioned when the PPM is created if the trunk port is out of service.
2. Provisioned on the Data Rate Selection tab.
Purpose This task deletes PPM provisioning for SFPs or XFPs installed on TXP,
MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP
card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71 or
DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot, page 4-73
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-3 PPM Port Types (continued)
Card Port Type6-20
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note You cannot delete a PPM if the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card
is part of a regenerator group. For OTU2_XP card, you cannot delete a PPM if the card configuration is
in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC mode.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to delete PPM settings.
Step 2 Verify that the PPM port Service State is OOS,DSBLD. If the PPM port is OOS,DSBLD, go to Step 3.
If it is not OOS,DSBLD, follow the tasks in NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules, page 6-3, to
change the Service State of the PPM port to OOS,DSBLD.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 4 To delete a PPM and the associated ports:
a. In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click the PPM that you want to delete. The highlight changes
to dark blue.
b. Click Delete. The Delete PPM dialog box appears.
c. Click Yes. The PPM provisioning is removed from the Pluggable Port Modules area and the
Pluggable Ports area.
Note You cannot delete a PPM until its port is in the OOS,DSBLD state. You cannot delete a client
port if the client is in the In Service and Normal (IS-NR) (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled
(ETSI) service state, is in a protection group, has a generic communications channel (GCC)
or data communications channel (DCC), is a timing source, has circuits or overhead circuits,
or transports Link Management Protocol channels or links. You can delete a client port
(except the last port) if the trunk port is in service and the client port is in the
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state. You can delete the
last client port only if the trunk port is in a OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state for all cards except the MXP_MR_2.5G,
MXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards. For more information about port states, refer to the
“Administrative and Service States” appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
Step 5 Verify that the PPM provisioning is deleted:
• In the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card view,
CTC shows an empty port after the PPM is deleted.
• If the SFP or XFP is physically present when you delete the PPM provisioning, CTC transitions to
the deleted state, the ports (if any) are deleted, and the PPM is represented as a gray graphic in CTC.
The SFP or XFP can be provisioned again in CTC, or the equipment can be removed. If the
equipment is removed, the graphic disappears.
Step 6 If you need to remove the PPM hardware (the SFP or XFP), complete the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or
XFP” task on page 4-74.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). 6-21
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group
Note Y-cable protection is available for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when they are
provisioned in 10GE MXP, 20GE MXP, or 10GE TXP mode. Y-cable protection cannot be provisioned
for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when they are provisioned in
L2-over-DWDM mode. Y-cable protection is available for the OTU2_XP card when it is provisioned in
the TXP card mode. Y-cable protection is not supported on IB_5G.
Note If you are provisioning Y-cable protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, the
Ethernet mode must be set to 1000 and 10000 Mbps respectively. To provision the Ethernet mode, see
the “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings”
task on page 6-218.
Note There is a traffic hit of upto a couple hundred milliseconds on the MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXP_MR_10DME cards in Y-cable configuration when a fiber cut or SFP failure occurs on one of the
client ports.
Note For SONET or SDH payloads, Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) alarms can occur on a split signal if the
ports are not in a Y-cable protection group.
Purpose This procedure creates a Y-cable protection group between the client ports
of two TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
OTU2_XP cards. For additional information about Y-cable protection, see
the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference Manual.
Tools/Equipment Installed TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
OTU2_XP card
Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-22
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 View the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix (see Table 4-1 on page 4-4) for your site. Verify the
TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards that need Y-cable protection
groups. (Cards requiring Y-cable protection are indicated with “Y-Cable” in the Traffic Matrix table
Protection Type column. Refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner DWDM Operations Guide for more
information.)
Step 2 Verify that the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards are installed
according to the requirements specified in Table 4-6 on page 4-109. Table 6-4 lists the protection types
available in the ONS 15454 for DWDM client cards.
Table 6-4 Protection Types
Protection Type Cards Description and Installation Requirements
Y-cable MXP_2.5_10G
MXP_2.5_10E
MXP_2.5_10E_C
MXP_2.5_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
TXP_MR_10G
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_2.5G
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
40G-MXP-C
GE_XP1
10GE_XP2
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
OTU2_XP
Pairs a working transponder or muxponder card or port with a protect
transponder or muxponder card or port. The protect port must be on a
different card than the working port and it must be the same card type as
the working port. The working and protect port numbers must be the
same, that is, Port 1 can only protect Port 1, Port 2 can only protect Port
2, and so on.
Note Working and Protect card must be in the same
shelf for a multishelf node.6-23
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 3 Verify that pluggable ports are provisioned for the same payload and payload rate on the TXP, MXP,
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards where you will create the Y-cable
protection group:
a. Display the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module tab.
c. Verify that a pluggable port is provisioned in the Pluggable Port Module area, and the payload type
and rate is provisioned for it in the Pluggable Ports area. If they are not the same, for example, if the
pluggable port and rate are not the same, you must either delete the provisioned rate and create a
new rate to match using the “DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot” task on page 4-73 or
replace the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) using the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP” task on
page 4-74.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > Protection
tabs.
Step 5 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 6 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z,
0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark
(?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters.
• Type—Choose Y Cable from the drop-down list.
• Protect Port—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port to
the active port. The list displays the available transponder or muxponder ports. If transponder or
muxponder cards are not installed, no ports appear in the drop-down list.
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Ports list. If
no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you can not complete this task until you install the
physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on
page 4-55.
Step 7 From the Available Ports list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in
Protect Ports. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Ports list.
Splitter TXPP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
A splitter protection group is automatically created when a
TXPP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card is installed. You can edit the
splitter protection group name.
OTU2_XP A splitter protection group is configurable for the OTU2_XP card. You
can create a splitter protection group on Ports 3 and 4 of the OTU2_XP
card using the “NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the
OTU2_XP Card” procedure on page 6-24.
1+1 GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
In the Layer 2 (L2) card mode 1+1 protection is provided to protect the
card against client port and card failure.
1. When provisioned in 10GE MXP or 20GE MXP card mode.
2. When provisioned in 10GE TXP card mode.
Table 6-4 Protection Types
Protection Type Cards Description and Installation Requirements6-24
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 8 Complete the remaining fields:
• Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure
conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
• Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range
is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will
elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions
causing the switch are cleared.
Note The Bidirectional switching option is available for Y-cable protection groups only in the following cases:
• On the MXP_MR_10DME card when ISC3_PEER_1G/ISC3_PEER_2G is the client payload.
• On the MXP_MR_10DME and MXP_MR_2.5G cards when Fibre Channel is the client payload. In
this case Bidirectional switching is:
– Automatically enabled when Distance Extension is enabled.
– Automatically disabled when Distance Extension is disabled.
The Bidirectional switching option is available for all SONET and SDH 1+1 protection groups.
Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat this procedure for every Y-cable protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic
Matrix.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP
Card
Purpose This procedure creates a splitter protection group between the trunk ports
of an OTU2_XP card. For additional information about splitter protection,
see the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Tools/Equipment Installed OTU2_XP card
Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-25
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note A splitter protection group is automatically created when a TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, or PSM
card is installed. You can edit the splitter protection group name for these cards. The splitter protection
group is deleted when you delete the TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, or PSM card.
Note Splitter protection is available for the OTU2_XP card when it is provisioned in Transponder
configuration only. In a splitter-protected Transponder configuration, Port 1 is the client port, Port 3 is
the working trunk port, and Port 4 is the standby trunk port.
Note For SONET or SDH payloads, Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) alarms can occur on a split signal if the
ports are not in a splitter protection group.
Step 1 View the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix (see Table 4-1 on page 4-4) for your site. Verify which
OTU2_XP card needs a splitter protection group. (Cards requiring splitter protection are indicated with
“Splitter” in the Traffic Matrix table Protection Type column. Refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner
DWDM Operations Guide for more information.)
Step 2 Verify that the OTU2_XP card is installed according to the requirements specified in Table 4-6 on
page 4-109.
Step 3 Verify that the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is provisioned for the same payload rate as the pluggable
port on the OTU2_XP card where you will create the splitter protection group:
a. Display the OTU2_XP card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module tabs.
c. Verify that a pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is provisioned in the Pluggable Port Module area, and
that the payload rate of the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is same as the payload rate of the
pluggable port on the OTU2_XP card provisioned in the Pluggable Ports area. If they are not the
same, you must either delete the provisioned rate and create a new rate to match using the
“DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot” task on page 4-73 or replace the pluggable port (SFP
or XFP) using the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP” task on page 4-74.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), click the Provisioning > Protection
tabs.
Step 5 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 6 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z,
0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark
(?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters.
• Type—Choose Splitter from the drop-down list.
• Protect Card—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port
to the active port. The list displays the available OTU2_XP ports. If transponder or muxponder cards
are not installed or if the trunk ports of the card are part of a regenerator group, no ports appear in
the drop-down list. 6-26
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Cards list. If
no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you cannot complete this task until you install the
physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on
page 4-55.
Step 7 From the Available Cards list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in
Protect Cards. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Cards list.
Step 8 Complete the remaining fields:
• Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure
conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
• Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range
is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will
elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions
causing the switch are cleared.
Note The Bidirectional Switching option is not applicable for splitter protection groups.
Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat this procedure for every splitter protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic
Matrix.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
or 10GE_XPE Cards
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to protect the
card against client port and card failure. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This procedure creates a 1+1 protection group to protect against client port
and card failure of GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE cards. For
additional information about 1+1 protection, see the “Transponder and
Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures “NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the Cisco ONS 15454
Hardware Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware
Installation Guide
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files, page 4-3
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-27
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed according to the
requirements specified in Table 4-6 on page 4-109.
Step 3 Complete the NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually, page 4-114 by selecting the Trunk to
Trunk (L2) option, at the trunk port where you want to create 1+1 protection.
Step 4 Complete the “DLP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Cards” task on page 6-27 to create a protection group.
Step 5 Configure the standby port behavior, by setting the Protection Action to None or Squelch. For detailed
information on how to configure the standby port behavior, see the, “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 6-218.
Note Do not enable squelch in a 1 + 1 protection group, if the 100FX, 100LX, and ONS-SE-ZE-EL
SFP are used in the protection group and is connected to the peer via the parallel cable (not
Y-cable).
Note When you configure L2 1 + 1 protection on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, set the Protection
Action to None on the client ports. Setting the Protection Action as Squelch results in
unexpected switching behavior.
Step 6 Configure the standby and active port speed, by setting the mode parameter to Auto or 1000 or any other
values. For detailed information on how to configure the standby port behavior, see the “DLP-G380
Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 6-218.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Cards
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning >
Protection tabs.
Step 2 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
• Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z,
0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark
(?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters.
Purpose This procedure creates a 1+1 protection group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE slots where internal patchcords were created.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords, page 8-41
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-28
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
• Type—Choose L2 1+1 (port) from the drop-down list.
• Protect Port—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port
for the active port. The list displays the available transponder or muxponder ports. If transponder or
muxponder cards are not installed, no ports appear in the drop-down list.
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Ports list. If
no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you cannot complete this task until you install the
physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on
page 4-55.
Step 4 From the Available Ports list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in the
Protected Port drop-down list. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Ports list.
Step 5 Complete the remaining fields:
• Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure
conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
• Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range
is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will
elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions
causing the switch are cleared.
The bidirectional switching option is available for SONET and SDH 1+1 protection groups.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Repeat this procedure for every 1+1 protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic
Matrix.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line
Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
transponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G
and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-29
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings, page 6-29
• DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings, page 6-30
• DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings, page 6-33
• DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings,
page 6-35
• DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G
FC/FICON Payloads, page 6-38
• DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 6-39
• DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 6-41
• DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings, page 6-45
• DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 6-34
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-5.
Note The Card subtab Framing Type and Tunable Wavelengths fields are display-only. Framing Type
shows the card framing type, either SONET or SDH, depending on whether the card is installed
in an ANSI or ETSI chassis. The Tunable Wavelengths field shows the tunable wavelengths for
the physical TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G that is installed.
Purpose This task changes the card settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-30
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Table 6-5 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Settings
Parameter Description Options
Termination
Mode
Sets the mode of operation (option only
supported for SONET/SDH payloads).
Refer to the “Transponder and
Muxponder Cards” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual for more details.
• Transparent
• Section (ANSI) or Regeneration
Section (ETSI)
• Line (ANSI) or Multiplex Section
(ETSI)
Regeneration
Peer Slot
Sets the slot containing another
TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card
to create a regeneration peer group. A
regeneration peer group facilitates the
management of two TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are needed to
perform a complete signal regeneration.
The regeneration peer group
synchronizes provisioning of the two
cards. Payload type and ITU-T G.709
optical transport network (OTN) changes
made on one TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card are reflected on the
peer TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G
card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot
be created on TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are in
a regeneration peer group.
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
• 17
Regeneration
Group Name
Sets the regeneration peer group name. User defined
Purpose This task changes the line settings for the client port of the TXP_MR_2.5G
and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-31
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-6.
Note The 2.5G multirate transponder trunk settings are provisioned in the “DLP-G305 Provision the
2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds” task on page 6-39.
Table 6-6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G card only)
Port Name The user can assign a logical name for each of the
ports shown by filling in this field.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task
on page 8-3.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network conditions
prevent the change. For more information about
administrative states, refer to the “Administrative
and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For
more information about service states, refer to the
“Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal
fail bit error rate.
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal
degrade bit error rate.
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-96-32
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
ALS Mode Sets the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. • Disabled (default)
• Auto Restart
• Manual Restart
• Manual Restart for Test
Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the client port. Options: ANSI/ETSI
• Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default)
• SR
• SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance
• IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km
distance
• IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km
distance
• LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
• LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
• LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through
1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse
wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)
spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked by
asterisks (**)
AINS Soak (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the
automatic in-service soak period.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Type (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) The optical
transport type.
• SONET
• SDH
Table 6-6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-33
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Note This task only applies to SONET services.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-7.
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-7 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Section Trace
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm
arises because of a J0 overhead string
mismatch, no alarm indication signal is
sent to downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size6-34
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-8.
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this display updated automatically.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked (default)
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_2.5G
and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-7 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Section Trace
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-35
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line
Threshold Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in Table 6-9.
Table 6-8 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T, C-band spacing. If the card is
installed, the wavelengths it carries
are identified with two asterisks.
Other wavelengths have a dark grey
background. If the card is not
installed, all wavelengths appear
with a dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying OC-3/STM-1,
OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-36
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note Some parameters and options in Table 6-9 do not apply to all TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. If a parameter or option does not apply, that parameter or option does
not appear in CTC.
Table 6-9 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Thresholds Settings
for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Payloads
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
• 1
• 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh. 6-37
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 6-9 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Thresholds Settings
for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Payloads (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI6-38
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for
1GEthernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
Step 1 In card view, display the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line
threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 6-10 for a list of available
Ethernet variables.
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Purpose This task changes the line remote monitoring (RMON) threshold settings
for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying the
1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-10 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card 1G Ethernet and 1G FC/FICON
Thresholds
Variable Description
ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing
them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
8b10bStatsEncodingDispErrors Number of IETF 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel
line side.
8b10bIdleOrderedSets Number of received packets containing idle ordered sets.
8b10bNonIdleOrderedSets Number of received packets containing non-idle ordered sets.
8b10bDataOrderedSets Number of received packets containing data ordered sets.6-39
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Enter the appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Note In this task, trunk port refers to Port 2 for TXP_MR_2.5G cards, and to Ports 2 and 3 for
TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Pluggable Port Modules tab. Under Pluggable Ports, record the Rate that is provisioned.
Step 3 Look up the rate in Table 6-11 and note whether it is 2R or 3R.
Purpose This task changes the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G trunk port
alarm and threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-40
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 5 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 6-12, verify the trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High and RX Power Low
depending on whether the rate is 2R or 3R. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-11 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface
Client Interface Input Bit Rate 3R vs. 2R ITU-T G.709
OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gbps 3R On or Off
DV-6000 2.38 Gbps 2R —
2 Gigabit Fibre Channel (2G-FC)/fiber
connectivity (FICON)
2.125 Gbps 3R1
1. No monitoring
On or Off
High-Definition Television (HDTV) 1.48 Gbps 2R —
Gigabit Ethernet (GE) 1.25 Gbps 3R On or Off
1 Gigabit Fibre Channel (1G-FC)/FICON 1.06 Gbps 3R On or Off
OC-12/STM-4 622 Mbps 3R On or Off
OC-3/STM-1 155 Mbps 3R On or Off
Enterprise System Connection (ESCON) 200 Mbps 2R —
SDI/D1 video 270 Mbps 2R —
ISC-1 Compact 1.06 Gbps 3R Off
ISC-3 1.06 or
2.125 Gbps
2R —
ETR_CLO 16 Mbps 2R —
Table 6-12 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Signal TCA RX Power Low TCA RX Power High
3R –23 dBm –9 dBm
2R –24 dBm –9 dBm6-41
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 9 Verify the trunk port Alarm thresholds for RX Power High is –7 dBm, and for RX Power Low is
–26 dBm. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to
change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 10 Click Apply.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 6-13, verify the Port 1 (client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low,
TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-42
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-13 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA RX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
OC-3 15454-SFP3-1-IR –23 –8 –21 –2
STM-1 15454E-SFP-L.1.1 –24 –10 –21 –2
OC-12 15454-SFP12-4-IR –28 –7 –21 –2
STM-4 15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –28 –8 –21 –2
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –18 –3 –16 3
15454-SFP-OC48-IR –18 0 –11 6
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
–18 –3 –16 3
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ESCON 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–21 –14 –35 –8
DV6000 15454-SFP-OC48-IR –18 0 –11 6
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 –18 –3 –16 3
SDI_D1_
VIDEO
15454-SFP12-4-IR –28 –7 –21 –2
15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –28 –8 –21 –2
HDTV 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
PASS-THRU 2R MODE
(not specified)
————
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–15 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 36-43
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 6-14, verify the Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power
High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as
needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and
hitting Enter.
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–15 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ETR_CLO 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–17 0 –16 3
ISC compat 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ISC peer 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
Table 6-14 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
OC-3 15454-SFP3-1-IR –26 –5 –17 –6
STM-1 15454E-SFP-L.1.1 –27 –7 –17 –6
OC-12 15454-SFP12-4-IR –31 –4 –17 –6
STM-4 15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –31 –5 –17 –6
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –21 0 –12 –1
15454-SFP-OC48-IR –21 3 –7 2
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
–21 0 –12 –1
Table 6-13 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds (continued)
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA RX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High6-44
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
ESCON 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–24 –11 –31 –12
DV6000 15454-SFP-OC48-IR –21 3 –7 2
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 –21 0 –12 –5
SDI_D1_
VIDEO
15454-SFP12-4-IR –31 –4 –17 –6
15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –31 –5 –17 –6
HDTV 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
PASS-THRU 2R MODE
(not specified)
————
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –12 –2
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
Table 6-14 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds (continued)
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High6-45
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or
TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709
Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-15 through 6-18.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM settings
independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-15 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
ETR_CLO 15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
–20 3 –12 –2
ISC compat 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
ISC peer 15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –12 –1
Purpose This task changes the OTN settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and
TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-14 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds (continued)
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High6-46
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-16 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-17 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 6-15 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines to forward error
correction (FEC).
• Enable
• Disable
SF BER (Display only) The signal fail bit error
rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Table 6-16 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port1
1. Latency for a 1G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 4 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 40 microseconds. Latency
for a 2G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 2 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 20 microseconds. Consider these
values when planning a FC network that is sensitive to latency.
(Display only) Port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh. 6-47
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-18 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-17 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
Bit Errors
Corrected
Sets the value for bit errors corrected. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Sets the value for uncorrectable words. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Table 6-18 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 2 (Trunk)
• 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable FDI on
TIM
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm
arises because of a J0 overhead string
mismatch, no alarm indication signal is
sent to downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size6-48
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line
Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Note The TXP_MR_10G card does not support PPMs.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
transponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a TXP_MR_10G card, complete the “DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G
Data Rate” task on page 6-49, and if you are provisioning a TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C card,
complete the “DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate” task on
page 6-50. If not, continue with Step 4.
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for 10G multirate
transponder cards including the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-18 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-49
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings, page 6-50
• DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings, page 6-52
• DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings, page 6-56
• DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads
Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy, page 6-59
• DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN
Phy Payloads, page 6-62
• DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 6-66
• DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds,
page 6-67
• DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings, page 6-69
• DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 6-58
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G card
where you want to change the card data rate settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs.
Step 3 Click Create.
Step 4 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates:
• SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
Step 5 Click Ok.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure.
Purpose This task changes the TXP_MR_10G card data rate.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-50
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10E or
TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the card data rate settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
• PPM—Choose the SFP you want to install from the drop-down list.
• PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one
port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Step 6 Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 7 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Ports dialog box appears.
Step 8 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates:
• SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)
• 10G Ethernet LAN Phy
• 10G FIBER Channel
• (TXP-MR-10EX_C card only) IB_5G
Step 9 Click Ok.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure.
DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Purpose This task changes the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C card data rate.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Purpose This task changes the card settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-51
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the card
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-19.
Table 6-19 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options
Termination
Mode
Sets the mode of operation. (This option is
only available for SONET/SDH payloads).
Refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder
Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference Manual for more details.
• Transparent
• Section (TXP_MR_10E
only)
• Line
• Transparent
• Regeneration Section
(TXP_MR_10E only)
• Multiplex Section
AIS/Squelch
Configuration
(TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C,
TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
only) Sets the transparent termination mode
configuration.
• Squelch
• AIS
• Squelch
• AIS
Regeneration
Peer Slot
Sets the slot containing another
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or
TXP_MR_10EX_C card to create a
regeneration peer group. A regeneration peer
group facilitates the management of two
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or
TXP_MR_10EX_C cards that are needed to
perform a complete signal regeneration.
The regeneration peer group synchronizes
provisioning of the two cards. Payload type
and ITU-T G.709 optical transport network
(OTN) changes made on one TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C,
TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card
are reflected on the peer TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C,
TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot be
created on TXP cards that are in a
regeneration peer group.
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
• 17
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 12
• 13
• 14
• 15
• 16
• 176-52
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET/SDH/Ethernet tabs. SONET is the option for ANSI shelves
when 10G Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, SDH is the option for ETSI shelves when 10G
Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, and Ethernet is the option for ANSI or ETSI shelves when
10GE LAN Phy is the Pluggable Port Rate.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-20.
Regeneration
Group Name
(Display only) The regeneration peer group
name.
— —
Tunable
Wavelengths
(Display only) Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is
installed. For the TXP_MR_10E_C, or
TXP_MR_10E_L cards, the first and last
supported wavelength, frequency spacing, and
number of supported wavelengths are shown in
the format: first wavelength-last
wavelength-frequency spacing-number of
supported wavelengths. For example, the
TXP_MR_10E_C card would show:
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. The
TXP_MR_10E show the four wavelengths
supported by the card that is installed. The
TXP_MR_10G show the two wavelengths
supported by the card that is installed.
— —
Purpose This task changes the line settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-19 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options6-53
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note In Table 6-20, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards.
If a tab does not apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Table 6-20 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Displays
the port number.
• 1 (OC192) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy) (if TXP_MR_10G)
• 1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10G
card)
• 1-1 (OC192) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy on the TXP_MR_10E card)
• 1-1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E
card)
• 1-1 (FC10G) (if 10G fiber channel
is provisioned on the
TXP_MR_10E card)
• 2 (Trunk)
• (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
• 1 (STM-64) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy) (if TXP_MR_10G)
• 1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10G
card)
• 1-1 (STM-64) (10G Ethernet WAN
Phy on the TXP_MR_10E card)
• 1-1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E
card)
• 1-1 (FC10G) (if 10G fiber channel is
provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E
card)
• 2 (Trunk)
• (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
Port Name Provides the ability to
assign the specified port a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/special characters.
Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a
Port” task on page 8-3.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/special characters.
Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a
Port” task on page 8-3.
Admin
State
Sets the port service state.
For more information
about administrative
states, refer to the
“Administrative and
Service States” appendix
in the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS
• IS,AINS
• OOS,DSBLD
• OOS,MT
• Unlocked
• Unlocked,automaticInService
• Locked,disabled
• Locked,maintenance6-54
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Service
State
(Display only) Identifies
the autonomously
generated state that gives
the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear
in the format: Primary
State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more
information about service
states, refer to the
“Administrative and
Service States” appendix
in the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS-NR
• OOS-AU,AINS
• OOS-MA,DSBLD
• OOS-MA,MT
• Unlocked-enabled
• Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• Locked-enabled,disabled
• Locked-enabled,maintenance
SF BER (SONET [ANSI] or SDH
[ETSI] including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy only)
Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER (SONET [ANSI] or SDH
[ETSI] including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy only)
Sets the signal degrade bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Type (SONET [ANSI] or SDH
[ETSI] including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy only)
The optical transport type.
• SONET
• SDH
• SONET
• SDH
Table 6-20 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options6-55
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function
mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS
according to ITU-T G.644
(06/99). ALS can be
disabled, or it can be set
for one of three mode
options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the
laser is not automatically shut down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when
traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the
conditions that caused the outage
are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the
laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be
manually restarted when conditions
that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually
restarts the laser for testing.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the
laser is not automatically shut down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when
traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the
conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when
traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually
restarted when conditions that caused
the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually
restarts the laser for testing.
AINS Soak (SONET [ANSI] or SDH
[ETSI] including 10G
Ethernet WAN Phy only)
Sets the automatic
in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and
use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in
hh.mm format, after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
• Duration of valid input signal, in
hh.mm format, after which the card
becomes in service (IS) automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
ProvidesS
ync
(TXP_MR_10E, OC192
only) Sets the
ProvidesSync card
parameter. If checked, the
card is provisioned as a
network element (NE)
timing reference.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgI
n
(TXP_MR_10E, OC192
only) Sets the EnableSync
card parameter. Enables
synchronization status
messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose
the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Max Size (TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10G LAN Phy
only) Sets the maximum
Ethernet packet size.
• 1548 bytes
• Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
• 1548 bytes
• Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
Table 6-20 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options6-56
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Note The Section Trace tab is available for the 10G Multirate Transponder cards only if no PPMs are
provisioned, or the OC192 PPM is provisioned. The tab is not available if a 10G Ethernet LAN Phy or
10G Fibre Channel PPM is provisioned.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-21.
Incoming
MAC
Address
(TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10G LAN Phy
only) Sets the incoming
MAC address.
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in
hexadecimal format.
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in
hexadecimal format.
Wavelengt
h
Displays the wavelength
of the client port.
• First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 1310 nm
through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU
spacing; coarse wavelength
division multiplexing (CWDM)
spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are
marked by asterisks (**)
• First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 1310 nm
through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU
spacing; coarse wavelength division
multiplexing (CWDM) spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked
by asterisks (**)
Reach Displays the optical reach
distance of the client port.
The Reach options depend on the traffic
type that has been selected.
The Reach options depend on the traffic
type that has been selected.
Purpose This task changes the line section trace settings for the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-20 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options6-57
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 6-21 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options Options — ONS 15454 SDH
Port Sets the port number. • 1-1 (OC192)
• 2—Trunk
• 1-1 (STM64)
• 2—Trunk
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
• Off/None
• Manual
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a
new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. Click Hex to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises
because of a J0 overhead string mismatch,
no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
• Checked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on
TIM-S is not disabled)
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a
new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display
mode. Click Hex to change the display to
hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII
(button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received
string. You can click Refresh to manually
refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep
this panel updated.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked (default) Checked/unchecked (default)6-58
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Note Before modifying the wavelength settings, change the port state to OOS,DSBLD (for ANSI) or
Locked,disabled (for ETSI) and delete the circuit and patchcord provisioning present on the port.
Payload or communication channel provisioning can be retained.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-22.
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-22 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. Port 2 (Trunk)
Band Indicates the wavelength band that can be
provisioned. If the physical
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L,
and TXP_MR_10EX_C is installed, this
field is display-only.
• C—The C-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
• L—The L-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.6-59
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or
SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-23.
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning for TXP_MR_10E_C, and
TXP_MR_10E_L cards. (This field does
not apply to TXP_MR_10G or
TXP_MR_10E cards.)
• Even—Displays even C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
• Odd—Displays odd C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T C-band or L-band spacing,
depending on the card that is
installed. For TXP_MR_10G and
TXP_MR_10E cards, the
wavelengths carried by the card are
identified with two asterisks. If the
card is not installed, all wavelengths
appear with a dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards carrying SONET or SDH payloads,
including the physical 10G Ethernet WAN Phy payload.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-22 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card Wavelength Trunk Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-60
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note Parameters shown in Table 6-23 do not apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards. If the
parameter or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC.
Table 6-23 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold
Settings
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1-1 (OC192)
• 2 (Trunk)
• 1-1 (STM64)
• 2 (Trunk)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh. 6-61
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
OFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Out of frame
seconds
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 6-23 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI6-62
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for
10GEthernet LAN Phy Payloads
Step 1 Display the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or
TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards carrying the physical 10G Ethernet
LAN payload.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-23 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI6-63
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 6-24 for a list of available
Ethernet variables.
Table 6-24 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card GE LAN Phy Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing
characters.
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
ifInMulticastPkts Number of multicast frames received error free.
ifInBroadcastPkts Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to an higher sublayer,
that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.
ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them
from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
ifInErrorBytePkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of receive error bytes.
ifInFramingErrorPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of receive framing error counters.
ifInJunkInterPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of receive interpacket junk counters.
ifOutOctets
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.
txTotalPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of transmit packets.
ifOutMulticastPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of multicast frames transmitted error free.
ifOutBroadcastPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted, and that were addressed to a broadcast address at this
sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
dot3StatsFCSErrors Number of frames with frame check errors, that is, there is an
integral number of octets, but an incorrect Frame Check Sequence
(FCS).
dot3StatsFrameTooLong
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of received frames that were larger than the maximum size
permitted.
etherStatsUndersizePkts Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were
otherwise well formed.6-64
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
etherStatsFragments Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had
either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or
a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to
increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal
occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
etherStatsPkts64Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that
were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsBroadcastPkts Total number of good packets received that were directed to the
broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast
packets.
etherStatsMulticastPkts Total number of good packets received that were directed to a
multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets
directed to the broadcast address.
etherStatsOversizePkts Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were
otherwise well formed.
etherStatsJabbers Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either
a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
etherStatsOctets Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets)
received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
Table 6-24 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card GE LAN Phy Variables (continued)6-65
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Total number of packets received that had a length (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and
1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad FCS with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral
number of octets (Alignment Error).
rxPauseFrames
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of received IETF 802.x pause frames.
rxControlFrames Number of MAC control frames passed by the MAC sublayer to the
MAC control sublayer.
rxUnknownOpcodeFrames
(TXP_MR_10G only)
Number of MAC control frames received that contain an opcode
that is not supported by the device.
Table 6-24 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card GE LAN Phy Variables (continued)6-66
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-25, verify the trunk port (Port 2) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter,
then click Apply.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Purpose This task provisions the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E,
TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C trunk port
alarm and threshold cross alert (TCA) thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-25 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Card
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TXP_MR_10G –8 dBm –18 dBm 7 dBm –1 dBm
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_
C
–9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm6-67
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-26, verify the trunk port (Port 2) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter,
then click Apply.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Table 6-26 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Card
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
TXP_MR_10G –8 dBm –20 dBm 4 dBm 2 dBm
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_
C
–8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-68
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-27, verify the Port 1 (Client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low,
TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing
value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter, then click Apply.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-28, provision the Port 1 (Client) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Table 6-27 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Pluggable Port
Rate Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power
Low
SONET (or
SDH)
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
–1 –11 –1 –6
10G Ethernet
LAN Phy
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
0.5 –14.4 –1 –6
10G Fibre
Channel
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
0.5 –14.4 –1 –6
IB_5G1
1. Only the TXP_MR_10EX_C card supports IB_5G.
TXP_MR_10EX_C uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1 Version 3
1.0 –14.0 5.0 12.06-69
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to
change the OTN settings.
Table 6-28 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
Pluggable Port
Rate
Pluggable Port
Module (XFP)
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
SONET (or SDH) TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
3 –16 1 –8
10G Ethernet
LAN Phy
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
3 –16 1 –8
10G Fibre
Channel
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
3 –16 1 –8
IB_5G1
1. Only the TXP_MR_10EX_C card supports IB_5G.
TXP_MR_10EX_C
uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
Version 3
3.0 –16 1.0 –8
Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings for the TXP_MR_10G,
TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and
TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-70
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-29 through 6-32.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and
SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-29 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 6-30 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-29 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card OTN Lines Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709. Check the box to enable.
For TXP-MR-10EX_C cards, the G.709
OTN should be enabled.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode
can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the
TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can
be enabled to provide greater range and
lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E
cards, Standard is the same as enabling
FEC. For TXP-MR-10EX_C cards, the
FEC should be enabled.
• Enable—(TXP_MR_10G only) FEC
is on.
• Disable—FEC is off.
• Standard—(TXP_MR_10E only)
Standard FEC is on.
• Enhanced—(TXP_MR_10E only)
Enhanced FEC is on.
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
SF BER (Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
Asynch/Synch
Mapping
(TXP_MR_10E only) Sets how the
ODUk (client payload) is mapped to the
optical channel (OTUk).
• Asynch mapping
• Synch mapping6-71
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-30 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
ES Severely errored seconds. Two types of
thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the
SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC,
overhead management, and PM using
OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button
selects path PM using ODUk.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709
optical channel transport unit
order of k overhead frame used
for management and performance
monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the
ITU-T G.709 optical channel data
unit order of k overhead frame
unit used for path performance
monitoring.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh. 6-72
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-31 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 6-32 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 6-30 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 6-31 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C
Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
2
Bit Errors
Corrected
Displays the number of bit errors
corrected during the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Displays the number of uncorrectable
words in the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or one-day intervals.
Table 6-32 10G Multirate Transponder Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1
• 2
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual6-73
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to
the downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)
Table 6-32 10G Multirate Transponder Trail Trace Identifier Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-74
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet
Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
ADM-10G card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 To provision a peer group, complete the “DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group” task on
page 6-75.
Step 4 To provision Ethernet settings, complete the “DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet
Settings” task on page 6-76.
Step 5 To change line settings, complete the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings, page 6-77
• DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings, page 6-83
• DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads, page 6-84
• DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload, page 6-88
Step 6 To change thresholds, complete the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-91
• DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-92
• DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings, page 6-93
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure creates an ADM-10G peer group and changes line settings,
PM parameters, and threshold settings for ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port, page 6-9 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-75
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group
Note You cannot perform this task on a single ADM-10G card; it is only available if a second ADM-10G card
can be accessed through the interlink ports (Port 17 and Port 18).
Note Due to a hardware limitation, you cannot provision the SDCC/LDCC on Port 17.
Note Perform this task on only one of the two peer cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 In the ADM Group Peer drop-down list, choose the slot number (for example, 14) where the companion
ADM-10G card is located.
Step 4 In the ADM Peer Group field, enter a group name.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Note The Card Parameters Tunable Wavelengths area is read-only and does not contain any
wavelengths until circuits are separately provisioned for the card.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task creates peer group protection for two ADM-10G cards within the
same node, located on the same shelf.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69, for two
ADM-10G cards (located on the same shelf) for which a peer group is
desired.
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-76
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the Ethernet settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ethernet tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Ethernet tab as described in Table 6-33. The parameters that appear
depend on the card mode.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the Ethernet settings for the ADM-10G card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-33 ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) The Port number (n-n) and
rate.
—
MTU The maximum size of the Ethernet frames
accepted by the port.
Jumbo. Default: 64 to 9216
Numeric: 1548
Mode Sets the Ethernet mode. 1000 Mbps
Framing Sets the framing type. • GFP-F
• HDLC
CRC Encap Sets the CRC encap values for the framing
type.
CRC encap value for GFP-F:
• None (default)
• 32-Bit
CRC encap value for HDLC:
• 16-Bit
• 32-Bit (default)
AINS Soak Automatic in-service soak time. The duration
of time that must pass with an uninterrupted
signal before the traffic/termination
transitions to the IS-NR (ANSI) or
unlocked-enabled (ETSI) service state.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after
which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments6-77
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-34 as needed.
Note In Table 6-34, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all ADM-10G cards. If a tab does not
apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the line settings for ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-78
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-34 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port (Display only) Displays
the port number.
• 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
• 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support OC192
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM16/G
E)
• 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support STM64
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
Port Name Provides the ability to
assign the specified port
a name.
User-defined. Name can be
up to
32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on
page 8-3.
User-defined. Name can be
up to
32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on
page 8-3.
Admin
State
Sets the port service
state. For more
information about
administrative states,
refer to the
“Administrative and
Service States”
appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS
• IS,AINS
• OOS,DSBLD
• OOS,MT
• Unlocked
• Unlocked,automaticInServ
ice
• Locked,disabled
• Locked,maintenance6-79
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Service
State
(Display only)
Identifies the
autonomously
generated state that
gives the overall
condition of the port.
Service states appear in
the format: Primary
State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more
information about
service states, refer to
the “Administrative and
Service States”
appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS-NR
• OOS-AU,AINS
• OOS-MA,DSBLD
• OOS-MA,MT
• Unlocked-enabled
• Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• Locked-enabled,disabled
• Locked-enabled,maintenan
ce
Table 6-34 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options6-80
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function
mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports
ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99).
ALS can be disabled, or
it can be set for one of
three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS
is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down
when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: (Not
applicable for Gigabit
Ethernet client
interfaces) ALS is on;
the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts
when the conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is
on; the laser
automatically shuts
down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must
be manually restarted
when conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
• Disabled (default): ALS
is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down
when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: (Not
applicable for Gigabit
Ethernet client
interfaces) ALS is on;
the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts
when the conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is
on; the laser
automatically shuts
down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must
be manually restarted
when conditions that
caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic
in-service soak period.
Double-click the time
and use the up and down
arrows to change
settings.
• Duration of valid input
signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service
state is not supported
on interlink ports.
• Duration of valid input
signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service
state is not supported
on interlink ports.
Table 6-34 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options6-81
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET or SDH tabs.
Step 6 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-35 as needed.
Reach Displays the optical
reach distance of the
client port.
The Reach options depend on
the traffic type that has been
selected.
The Reach options depend on
the traffic type that has been
selected.
Wavelength Tunable wavelength. Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port
after the card is installed in
the format: first
wavelength-last
wavelength-frequency
spacing-number of supported
wavelengths. For example,
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50g
Hz-8 are supported
wavelengths.
Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port
after the card is installed in
the format: first
wavelength-last
wavelength-frequency
spacing-number of supported
wavelengths. For example,
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50g
Hz-8 are supported
wavelengths.
Table 6-35 ADM-10G Line SONET or SDH Tab Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port (Display only) Displays
the client and trunk port
number.
• 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
• 17-1 (OC192)
• 18-1 (OC192/Interlink)
• 19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support OC192
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM16/G
E)
• 17-1(STM64)
• 18-1 (STM64/Interlink)
• 19-1 (STM64
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support STM64
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
ProvidesSync When checked, the card is
provisioned as an NE
timing reference.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
Table 6-34 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options6-82
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
SyncMsgIn Enables synchronization
status messages (S1 byte),
which allow the node to
choose the best timing
source.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
SF BER Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
• 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
Send
DoNotUse
When checked, sends a
DUS message on the S1
byte.
Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
• 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Type (Display only) Type of
node.
• SONET
• SDH
• SDH
Admin SSM
In
Overrides the
synchronization status
message (SSM)
synchronization
traceability unknown
(STU) value. If the node
does not receive an SSM
signal, it defaults to STU.
• PRS—Primary Reference
Source (Stratum 1)
• ST2—Stratum 2
• TNC—Transit node clock
• ST3E—Stratum 3E
• ST3—Stratum 3
• SMC—SONET minimum
clock
• ST4—Stratum 4
• DUS—Do not use for
timing synchronization
• RES—Reserved; quality
level set by user
• G811—Primary reference
clock
• STU—Sync traceability
unknown
• G812T—Transit node clock
traceable
• G812L—Local node clock
traceable
• SETS—Synchronous
equipment
• DUS—Do not use for
timing synchronization
Table 6-35 ADM-10G Line SONET or SDH Tab Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options6-83
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings
Note The Section Trace tab is available for ports configured as OC-N (Ports 1 through 16, Ports 17 and 18
[only in a single-card configuration] and Port 19). Section trace is not available on interlink ports.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the section trace settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-36.
Purpose This task changes the line section trace settings for the ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-36 ADM-10G Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/G
E)
• 17-1 (OC 192)
• 18-1 (OC192)
• 19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port
18 are trunk ports
that support
OC192 payload in
a single-card
configuration.
These ports are
interlink ports in a
double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM1
6/GE)
• 17-1 (STM64)
• 18-1 (STM64)
• 19-1 (STM64)
Note Port 17 and Port
18 are trunk ports
that support
STM64 payload
in a single-card
configuration.
These ports are
interlink ports in a
double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
Received
Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
• Off/None
• Manual6-84
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads
Transmit
Section
Trace
String
Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 64 byte
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
• 64 byte
Current Current Transmit String
displays the current
transmit string; New
Transmit String sets a
new transmit string.
Current String Type
allows you to choose
between ASCII or
Hexadecimal format.
Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal
(button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to
change the display to
ASCII (button changes to
Hex).
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Current
Received String displays
the current received
string. You can click
Refresh to manually
refresh this display, or
check the Auto-refresh
every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size String of trace string size
Auto-refr
esh
If checked, automatically
refreshes the display
every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked
(default)
Checked/unchecked
(default)
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for ADM-10G cards carrying
SONET payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Table 6-36 ADM-10G Section Trace Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI)
Options6-85
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the line threshold settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET or SDH Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-37.
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-37 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1-1 to 1-16
(OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
• 17-1 (OC 192)
• 18-1 (OC192)
• 19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port 18
are trunk ports that
support OC192
payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink
ports in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer
group).
• 1-1 to 1-16
(STM1/STM4/STM16/GE)
• 17-1 (STM 64)
• 18-1 (STM64)
• 19-1 (STM64)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are
trunk ports that support
STM64 payload in a
single-card
configuration. These
ports are interlink ports
in a double-card
configuration
(ADM-10G peer group).
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section
or Regeneration Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.6-86
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section
or Regeneration Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Table 6-37 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options6-87
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
FC (Line Section only)
Failure count
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
PSC Protection Switching
Count
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
PSD Protection Switching
Duration
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
—
UAS (Line Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or
Far End
• Interval—15 Min
(minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display
options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far
End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes)
or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section
(near end only)
Choose an option in each
category and click Refresh.
Table 6-37 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options6-88
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1GEthernet
Payload
Note This task can only be performed if the ADM-10G card has at least one PPM port provisioned for Gigabit
Ethernet.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the line RMON thresholds. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose the applicable Ethernet variable. See Table 6-38 for a list of
available Ethernet variables.
Purpose This task changes the line RMON threshold settings for an ADM-10G card
carrying the 1G Ethernet payload.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port, page 6-9
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-38 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds
Variable Description
ifInOctets Total number of octets received on the interface, including
framing characters.
ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing
them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
ifOutOctets Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.
ifInMulticastPkts Number of multicast frames received error-free.
ifInBroadcastPkts Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to a higher layer or
sublayer, that were addressed to a broadcast address at this
sublayer.
ifInErrorBytePkts Number of receive error bytes.
dot3StatsFCSErrors Number of frames with frame check errors; that is, there is an
integral number of octets, but there is also an incorrect frame
check sequence (FCS).
dot3StatsFrameTooLong Number of received frames that were larger than the permitted
maximum size.6-89
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
dot3ControlInUnknownOpcodes A count of MAC control frames received on this interface that
contain an opcode not supported by this device.
dot3InPauseFrames A count of MAC control frames received on this interface with an
opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
dot3OutPauseFrames A count of MAC control frames transmitted on this interface with
an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
etherStatsUndersizePkts Total number of packets received that were well-formed and less
than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits and including FCS
octets).
etherStatsFragments Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had
either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or
a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (alignment error).
Note It is normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is
because it counts both runts (which are normal
occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
etherStatsPkts64Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were 64 octets in length (excluding
framing bits and including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 65 and 127 octets in
length, inclusive.
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted
and received by the interface that were between 128 and 255
octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including
FCS octets.
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 256 and 511 octets in
length, inclusive.
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 512 and 1023 octets
in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS
octets.
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and
received by the interface that were between 1024 and 1518 octets
in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS
octets.
etherStatsBroadcastPkts Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were directed to the broadcast address.
Note Multicast packets are not included.
Table 6-38 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds (continued)6-90
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
etherStatsMulticastPkts Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the
interface that were directed to a multicast address.
Note This number does not include packets directed to the
broadcast address.
etherStatsOversizePkts Total number of packets transmitted and received by the interface
that were well-formed and longer than 1518 octets, excluding
framing bits and including FCS octets.
etherStatsJabbers Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets), and had
a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or a bad
FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (alignment error).
rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmit packets.
Table 6-38 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds (continued)6-91
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the interlink or trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-39, verify the interlink or trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-40, verify the interlink or trunk port alarm thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by
double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing
Enter.
Purpose This task provisions the ADM-10G interlink or trunk port alarm and
threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-39 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Port
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
17-1 and 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
–7.0 dBm –27.0 dBm 6.0 dBm –4.0 dBm
19-1 (Trunk) –7.0 dBm –27.0 dBm 6.0 dBm –4.0 dBm6-92
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-13 on page 6-42 and Table 6-14 on page 6-43, verify the Port 1 to 16 (Client) Alarm
thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client
interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value
you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter.
Table 6-40 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Port
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 17 is a trunk port in single-card
configuration and an interlink port in
double-card configuration (ADM-10G
peer group).
1.0 dBm –13.0 dBm 1.0 dBm –8.0 dBm
18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card
configuration and an interlink port in
double-card configuration (ADM-10G
peer group).
–5.0 dBm –30.0 dBm 5.0 dBm –3.0 dBm
19-1 (Trunk) –5.0 dBm –30.0 dBm 5.0 dBm –3.0 dBm
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
ADM-10G card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-93
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-13 and Table 6-14 on page 6-43, verify the interlink ports 17-1 and 18-1 for RX
Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low settings. Provision new thresholds as
needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and
pressing Enter.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where
you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
ITU-T G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-41 through 6-44.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio buttons and click Refresh.
Table 6-41 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings for the ADM-10G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-94
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-42 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > ITU-T G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-41 ADM-10G Card OTN Lines Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
ITU-TG.709
OTN
Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode
can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the
TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can
be enabled to provide greater range and
lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E
cards, Standard is the same as enabling
FEC.
• Disable—FEC is off.
• Standard—Standard FEC is on.
• Enhanced—Enhanced FEC is on.
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
SF BER (Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
Synch
Mapping
Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is
mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
Synch mapping6-95
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-42 ADM-10G Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
ES Errored seconds. Selecting the SM
(OTUk) radio button selects FEC,
overhead management, and PM using
OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button
selects path PM using ODUk.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709
optical channel transport unit
order of k overhead frame used
for management and performance
monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the
ITU-T G.709 optical channel data
unit order of k overhead frame
unit used for path performance
monitoring.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh. 6-96
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-43 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 6-44 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 6-42 ADM-10G Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 6-43 ADM-10G Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number
and optional name.
• 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
Bit Errors
Corrected
Displays the number of bit errors
corrected during the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or 1 day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Displays the number of uncorrectable
words in the selected time period.
Numeric display. Can be set for
15-minute or 1 day intervals. 6-97
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-44 ADM-10GTrail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. • 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
• 19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in
single-card configuration and an
interlink port in double-card
configuration (ADM-10G peer
group).
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on
Section/Path overhead alarm arises
because of a J0/J1 overhead string
mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication
(FDI) signal is sent to the downstream
nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Transmit Current Transmit String displays the
current transmit string; New sets a new
transmit string. You can click the button
on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display
mode. In Transmit String Type, click Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex).
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Expected Current Expected String displays the
current expected string; New sets a new
expected string. You can click the button
on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display
mode. In Expected String Type, click Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Current Received String
displays the current received string. You
can click Refresh to manually refresh this
display, or check the Auto-refresh every
5 sec check box to keep this panel
updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh
(every 5 sec)
If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 seconds.
Checked/unchecked (default)6-98
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and
PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings, page 6-99
• DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings, page 6-101
• DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 6-103
• DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings, page 6-105
• DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings, page 6-108
• DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-111
• DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-112
• DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings, page 6-114
• DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 6-107
Step 4 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69.
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-99
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-45.
Note Parameters shown in Table 6-45 do not apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder cards. If the parameter
or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the card settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards, including payload type,
termination mode, and wavelength.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-100
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Table 6-45 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Settings
Parameter Description Options
Termination
Mode
Sets the mode of operation. Options that
do not apply to a card do not display.
The MXP_2.5G_10G card is based on
SONET/SDH multiplexing. The
transparent mode terminates and rebuilds
the B1 byte (as well as other bytes) of the
incoming OC-48/STM-16 signal. The B2
byte is not touched.
The MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L,
and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards are fully
transparent in transparent mode based on
the OTN/ITU-T G.709 multiplexing
scheme. It does not terminate the B1 byte
or other bytes.
It encapsulates OC-48/STM-16 bytes into
ODU1 first, then multiplexes them into an
OTU2.
Refer to the “Transponder and
Muxponder Cards” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual for more details.
For ANSI platforms:
• Transparent
• Section (MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only)
• Line (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
For ETSI platforms:
• Transparent
• Multiplex Section (MXP_2.5G_10G,
only)
• Regeneration Section
(MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only)
AIS/Squelch (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only) Sets the
transparent termination mode
configuration.
• Ais
• Squelch
Tunable
Wavelengths
(Display only) Shows the supported
wavelengths of the trunk port after the
card is installed. For the
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or
MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards, the first and
last supported wavelength, frequency
spacing, and number of supported
wavelengths are shown in the format: first
wavelength-last wavelength-frequency
spacing-number of supported
wavelengths. For example, the
MXP_2.5G_10E_C card would show:
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. The
MXP_2.5G_10G and MXP_2.5G_10E
show the four wavelengths supported by
the card that is installed.
—6-101
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Note The SONET tab appears only if you have created a PPM for a given port.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-46.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the line settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-46 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. Ports 1 to 4 are client
ports (OC-48/STM-16). Port 5 is the DWDM trunk
(OC-192/STM-64) that provides wavelength
services. Client ports will not appear of the
pluggable port module is not provisioned for it.
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (Trunk) (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
logical name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 8-3.6-102
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, refer to the
“Administrative and Service States” appendix in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary
State. For more information about service states,
refer to the “Administrative and Service States”
appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can
be set for one of three mode options.
• Disable (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually restarted
when conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Table 6-46 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-103
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Type Sets the optical transport type. • SONET
• SDH
SyncMsgIn Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte),
which allow the node to choose the best timing
source. (This parameter does not appear for the
MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.)
Checked or unchecked
ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked,
the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
(This parameter does not appear for the
MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.)
Checked or unchecked
Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the client
port.
Options: ANSI/ETSI
• Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default)
• SR
• SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance
• IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km
distance
• IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km distance
• LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
• LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
• LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths: 850 nm through 1560.61 nm
100-GHz ITU spacing CWDM spacing
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-46 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-104
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note The Section Trace tab appears only if you have created a PPM for the card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-47.
Table 6-47 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. • 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (Trunk; MXP_2.5G_10G only)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm
arises because of a J0 overhead string
mismatch, no alarm indication signal is
sent to downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. Select either
radio button.
• 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size6-105
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings
Note This task does not apply to the MXP_2.5G_10G card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the
trunk settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Trunk tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-48.
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)
Purpose This task provisions the trunk settings for the MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-47 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Section Trace Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-106
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Table 6-48 MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. Port 5 is
the DWDM trunk (OC-192/STM-64) that provides
wavelength services.
5 (Trunk)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
logical name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task
on page 8-3.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network conditions
prevent the change. For more information about
administrative states, refer to the “Administrative
and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or
Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance
(ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the format: Primary
State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For
more information about service states, refer to the
“Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644
(06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of
three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when traffic outages
(LOS) occur. However, the laser must be
manually restarted when conditions that caused
the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the
laser for testing.
AINS Soak (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the
automatic in-service soak period.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments 6-107
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-49.
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-49 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 5 (Trunk)
Band (Display only) Indicates the wavelength
band available from the card that is
installed. If the card is preprovisioned,
the field can be provisioned to the band of
the card that will be installed.
• C—The C-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
• L—The L-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.6-108
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-50.
Note In Table 6-50, some parameter tabs or selections do not always apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder
cards. If the tabs or selections do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and
MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. (This field
does not apply to MXP_2.5G_10G or
MXP_2.5G_10E cards.)
• Even—Displays even C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
• Odd—Displays odd C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T C-band or L-band spacing,
depending on the card that is
installed. For MXP_2.5G_10G and
MXP_2.5G_10E cards, the
wavelengths carried by the card are
identified with two asterisks. If the
card is not installed, all wavelengths
appear with a dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) line threshold
settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-49 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Wavelength Trunk Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-109
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-50 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5 (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh. 6-110
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 6-50 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line
Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH6-111
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Select TCA (if not already selected), a 15 Min or 1 Day PM interval radio button and then click Refresh.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-51, verify the trunk port (Port 5) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E,
MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C trunk
port alarm and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-51 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Card
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
MXP_2.5G_10G –8 dBm –18 dBm 7 dBm –1 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E –9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_C –9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_L –9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10EX_
C
–9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm6-112
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-52, verify the trunk port (Port 5) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power
Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the
threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Table 6-52 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Card
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
MXP_2.5G_10G –8 dBm –20 dBm 4 dBm 2 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E –8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_C –8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10E_L –8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
MXP_2.5G_10EX_
C
–8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C,
MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-113
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 3 Referring to Table 6-53, verify the client Port N (where N = 1 through 4) TCA thresholds for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 4 Repeat Step 3 to provision each additional client port.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 6-54, verify the client Port N (where N = 1 through 4) Alarm thresholds for RX Power
High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is
provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to
change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 6-53 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –3 –18 3 –16
15454-SFP-OC48-IR 0 –18 6 –11
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –3 –18 3 –16
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 0 –18 6 –116-114
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to provision each additional client port.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you
want to change the line OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
OTN G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-55 through 6-58.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and
SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-55 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Note In Table 6-55, some parameter tabs or values do not always apply to all MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. If the tabs or values do not
apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Table 6-54 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Client
Interfaces Alarm Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 0 –21 0 –13
15454-SFP-OC48-IR 3 –21 3 –8
STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1 0 –21 0 –13
15454E-SFP-L.16.1 3 –21 3 –8
Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings for MXP_2.5G_10G,
MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-115
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-56 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-55 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line OTN Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number.
5 (Trunk)
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN line FEC mode. FEC
mode can be Disabled or Enabled.
With the MXP_2.5G_10E card,
Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) mode can be
enabled to provide greater range and
lower bit error rate. E-FEC applies
only to the MXP_2.5G_10E card.
• Enable—(MXP_2.5G_10G only)
FEC is on.
• Disable—FEC is off.
• Standard—(MXP_2.5G_10E only)
FEC is on.
• Enhanced—(MXP_2.5G_10E only)
Enhanced FEC is on.
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
Asynch/Synch
Mapping
(MXP_2.5G_10E only) The
MXP_2.5G_10E can perform
standard ODU multiplexing
according to ITU-T G.709. The card
uses this to aggregate the four OC-48
client signals.
• ODU Multiplex6-116
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-56 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number 5 (Trunk)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709
optical channel transport unit
order of k overhead frame used
for management and performance
monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the
ITU-T G.709 optical channel data
unit order of k overhead frame
unit used for path performance
monitoring.
SES Severely errored seconds. Two types of
thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the
SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC,
overhead management, and PM using
OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button
selects path PM using ODUk.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh. 6-117
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-57 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 6-58 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 6-56 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 6-57 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 5 (Trunk)
Bit Errors
Corrected
Displays the number of bit errors
corrected during the interval selected.
The interval can be set for 15 minutes or
one day.
Numeric
Uncorrectable
Words
Displays the number of uncorrectable
words during the interval selected. The
interval can be set for 15 minutes or one
day.
Numeric 6-118
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 6-58 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port Sets the port number. The trail trace
identifier is applicable only to the trunk
interface, which handles ITU-T G.709
frames.
5 (Trunk)
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to
the downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec box to keep
this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the
display every 5 minutes.
Checked/unchecked (default)6-119
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings
and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings, page 6-120
• DLP-G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings, page 6-122
• DLP-G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings,
page 6-124
• DLP-G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 6-126
• DLP-G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds, page 6-129
• DLP-G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON
Payloads, page 6-131
• DLP-G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-133
• DLP-G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-134
• DLP-G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 6-128
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see
Chapter 10, “Manage Alarms.”
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-120
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM
provisioning.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in Table 6-59.
Purpose This task changes the client line settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-59 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 1
• 2
Port Name The user can assign a logical name for
each of the ports shown by filling in this
field.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 8-3.
Note You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber
channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards, which allows the MDS Fabric
Manager to create a link association between that SAN port
and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
Admin
State
Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states,
refer to the “Administrative and Service
States” appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454
DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)6-121
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Service
State
Identifies the autonomously generated
state that gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information
about service states, refer to the
“Administrative and Service States”
appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically
shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
• Auto Restart: (MXP_MR_2.5G only) ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the
outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be
manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
Table 6-59 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-122
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the
client port.
The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list depend on the
card:
• Autoprovision—The system to automatically provision the
reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on
the hardware.
• SX—Short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable
for a maximum length of 550 meters. The operating
wavelength range is 770-860 nm.
• LX—Long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a
maximum length of 10 km. The operating wavelength range is
1270-1355 nm.
• CX—Two pairs of 150-ohm shielded twisted pair cable for a
maximum length of 25 meters.
• T—Four pairs of Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair cable
for a maximum length of 100 meters.
• DX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1430-1580 nm.
• HX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1280-1335 nm.
• ZX—Extended wavelength single-mode optical fiber for up to
100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.
• VX—Single mode up to 100 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1500-1580 nm.
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:850 nm through 1560.61 nm; 100-GHz
ITU spacing; CWDM spacing
Purpose This task changes the distance extension settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-59 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-123
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note Distance extension settings can be changed only if the facilities are out of service (OOS,DSBLD).
Note The distance extension parameters only apply to client ports (Ports 1 to 8) and not to the trunk ports
(Port 9 for MXP_MR_2.5G card or Ports 9 and 10 for the MXPP_MR_2.5G card).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the distance extension settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. A client port must be provisioned for the tab to be present.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
Step 3 Locate the Client port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD
(ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If yes, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the following
substeps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance
(ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Line > Distance Extension tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according
to PPM provisioning.
Step 5 Modify any of the settings for the Distance Extension tab as described in Table 6-60.
Table 6-60 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Distance Extension Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number • 1
• 2
Enable
Distance
Extension
Allows end-to-end distances of up to
1600 km for FC1G and up to 800 km for
FC2G. If Distance Extension is enabled,
set the connected Fibre Channel switches
to Interop or Open Fabric mode,
depending on the Fibre Channel switch.
By default, the MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G card will interoperate
with the Cisco Multilayer Director
Switch (MDS) storage products.
Checked or unchecked
Auto Detect
Credits
Allows automatic detection of buffer
credits for Fibre Channel flow control.
Checked or unchecked6-124
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16)
Settings
Note SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) settings apply only to the trunk ports (Port 9 for the MXP_MR_2.5G
card and Ports 9 and 10 for the MXPP_MR_2.5G card.)
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the OC-48/STM-64 settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameter selections vary
according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the SONET or SDH tab as described in Table 6-61.
Credits
Available
(Display only) Displays the number of
buffer credits available.
Numeric (range depends on the client
equipment attached to the card)
Autoadjust
GFP Buffer
Threshold
Allows the threshold of the generic
framing procedure (GFP) buffer between
two MXP_MR_2.5G or two
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards to be
automatically adjusted.
Checked or unchecked
GFP Buffers
Available
Displays the number of GFP buffers
available between two MXP_MR_2.5G
or two MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Numeric
Purpose This task changes the SONET (OC-48) or SDH (STM-16) settings for
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-60 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Distance Extension Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-125
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-61 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 9 (trunk for MXP_MR_2.5G) or 9 and 10 (trunks for
MXPP_MR_2.5G)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 8-3.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, refer to
the “Administrative and Service States” appendix
in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information about
service states, refer to the “Administrative and
Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER1
Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER1
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or
can be set for one of three mode options.
• Disable (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS)
occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually restarted when
conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser
for testing.6-126
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to
PPM provisioning.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Type The optical transport type. • SONET (ANSI)
• SDH (ETSI)
SyncMsgIn Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables
synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked
Send
DoNotUse
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When
checked, sends a DUS message on the S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked
ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If
checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing
reference.
Checked or unchecked
1. SF BER and SD BER thresholds apply only to trunk ports (Port 9 for MXP_MR_2.5G and Ports 9 and 10 for MXPP_MR_2.5G).
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-61 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line SONET or SDH Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-127
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Section Trace tab as described in Table 6-62.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 6-62 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 9 (trunk port for MXP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 and 10 (trunk ports for
MXPP_MR_2.5G)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the received trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to
change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to
Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its
title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to
change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII);
click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to
Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. You can
click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. Checked/unchecked (default)6-128
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-63.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_MR_2.5G
and MXPP_MR_2.5G.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-63 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 9 (Trunk)
10 (Trunk) (MXPP_MR_2.5G only)
Band (Display only) Indicates the wavelength
band that can be provisioned.
C—Only the C band is available
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning. This field does not apply to
MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G
cards
—
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz
ITU-T, C-band spacing. If the card is
installed, the wavelengths it carries
are identified with two asterisks.
Other wavelengths have a dark grey
background. If the card is not
installed, all wavelengths appear
with a dark grey background.6-129
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as shown in Table 6-64.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note In Table 6-64, some parameters or options do not apply to all MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. If the parameters or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-64 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Threshold Settings
Field Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options
Port (Display only)
Port number
• 9 (MXP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 and 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 (MXP_MR_2.5G)
• 9 and 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
EB Path Errored
Block indicates
that one or
more bits are in
error within a
block
— Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
CV Coding
violations
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
—6-130
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
ES Errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
SES Severely
errored seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
BBE Background
block errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
SEFS (Section or
Regeneration
Section only)
Severely
errored framing
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
—
FC (Line or
Multiplex
Section only)
Failure count
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
—
UAS (Line or
Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Regeneration Section (only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh.
Table 6-64 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Field Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options6-131
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or
1G FC/FICON Payloads
Step 1 Display the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold
settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 6-65 for a list of available
Ethernet variables.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for MXP_MR_10G and
MXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying the 1G Ethernet or
1G FC/FICON payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-65 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR 2.5G Card 1G Ethernet or 1G, 2G FC/FICON Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInDiscards Number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded
even though no errors had been detected to prevent their
being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
ifOutDiscards Number of outbound packets that were chosen to be
discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent
their being transmitted.6-132
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of high-level data link control (HDLC)
and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the maximum
transmission unit (MTU). This value is part of HDLC and
GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) errors when HDLC framing is
used.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSets Number of 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel
line side.
8b10bStatsEncodingDispErrors Number of 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel
line side.
Table 6-65 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR 2.5G Card 1G Ethernet or 1G, 2G FC/FICON Variables
(continued)6-133
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Note Throughout this task, trunk port refers to Port 9 (MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G) and Port 10
(MXPP_MR_2.5G only).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Step 3 Verify the trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High is –9 dBm and for RX Power Low is –23 dBm.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 4 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Verify the trunk port Alarm thresholds for RX Power High is –7 dBm and for RX Power Low is –26 dBm.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G trunk port
alarm and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-134
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or
MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 6-66, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) TCA thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-135
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision each additional client port.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-67, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Table 6-66 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port
Module (XFP)
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA RX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–15 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–17 0 –16 3
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–20 –3 –16 3
ESCON ONS-SE-200-MM –21 –14 –32 –116-136
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision each additional client port. When you have finished provisioning client
ports, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Table 6-67 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
Pluggable Port
Module (XFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
ESCON ONS-SE-200-MM –24 –11 –35 –86-137
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings
and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2 to preserve the
existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings, page 6-138
• DLP-G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings, page 6-140
• DLP-G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 6-142
• DLP-G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings,
page 6-143
• DLP-G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 6-145
• DLP-G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds, page 6-146
• DLP-G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON,
or ISC/ISC3 Payloads, page 6-148
• DLP-G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-151
• DLP-G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-152
• DLP-G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings, page 6-156
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see
Chapter 10, “Manage Alarms.”
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (if necessary)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-138
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to
change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM
provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in Table 6-68.
Purpose This task changes the line settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-68 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Client Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 1 through 8
Port Name The user can assign a logical name for each
of the ports shown by filling in this field.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 8-3.
Note You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber
channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_10DME_C,
MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards,
which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link
association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a
Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
Admin
State
Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states,
refer to the Appendix B, “Administrative
and Service States” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Service
State
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall
condition of the port. Service states appear
in the format: Primary State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary State. For more
information about service states, refer to
Appendix B, “Administrative and Service
States” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)6-139
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically
shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be
manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
Reach Sets the optical reach distance of the client
port.
The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list depend on the
card:
• Autoprovision—The system to automatically provision the
reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on
the hardware.
• SX—Short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable
for a maximum length of 550 meters. The operating
wavelength range is 770-860 nm.)
• LX—Long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a
maximum length of 10 km. The operating wavelength range is
1270-1355 nm.)
• CX—Two pairs of 150-ohm shielded twisted pair cable for a
maximum length of 25 meters.)
• T—Four pairs of Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair cable
for a maximum length of 100 meters.)
• DX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1430-1580 nm.)
• HX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1280-1335 nm.)
• ZX—Extended wavelength single-mode optical fiber for up to
100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.)
• VX—Single mode up to 100 km. The operating wavelength
range is 1500-1580 nm.)
Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
850 nm through 1560.61 nm
100-GHz ITU spacing
CWDM spacing
Squelch Shuts down the far-end laser in response to
certain defects. (Squelch does not apply to
ISC COMPACT payloads.)
• Squelch
• Disable
Table 6-68 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-140
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
Note The distance extension parameters only apply to client ports (Ports 1 to 8) and not to the trunk port
(Port 9).
Note The client port must be in the OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) state in order to change
the distance extension settings. If a Y-cable is provisioned on the client port, both the working and
protect client ports must be in OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) state before you change
the distance extension settings.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to
change the distance extension settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Distance Extension tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-69.
Purpose This task changes the distance extension settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder card ports provisioned for Fibre
Channel or FICON payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-69 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Distance
Extension Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. Up to eight
ports might appear based on the number
of pluggable port modules that are
provisioned.
—6-141
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Enable
Distance
Extension
Allows end-to-end distances of up to
1600 km for FC1G and up to 800 km for
FC2G. If Distance Extension is enabled,
set the connected Fibre Channel switches
to Interop or Open Fabric mode,
depending on the Fibre Channel switch.
By default, the MXP_MR_10DME_C
and MXP_MR_10DME_L card will
interoperate with the Cisco MDS storage
products.
Checked or unchecked
Fast Switch If unchecked, the end-to-end fiber
channel link is reinitialized every time a
Y-cable protection switch occurs. If
checked, reinitialization of the link is
avoided when a Y-cable protection switch
occurs, thus reducing the traffic hit
considerably.
This feature is supported for FC1G,
FC2G, FC4G, FICON1G, FICON2G, and
FICON4G trunk failures as well as
user-initiated Y-cable protection switch
such as, Manual, Force, or Lockout. It is
recommended that you do not enable the
Fast Switch option as the link may not
come up after a Y-cable protection switch
in certain cases.
Note This option can be used only if
you have unchecked Enable
Distance Extension option.
Checked or unchecked (default)
Table 6-69 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Distance
Extension Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-142
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the trunk wavelength
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Wavelength Trunk Settings tab as described in Table 6-70.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-70 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. Port 9 (Trunk)
Band Indicates the wavelength band that can be
provisioned. The field is display-only
when a physical MXP_MR_10DME_C or
MXP_MR_10DME_L is installed. If the
card is provisioned in CTC only, you can
provision the band for the card that will
be installed.
• C—The C-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
• L—The L-band wavelengths are
available in the Wavelength field.
Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for
provisioning.
• Even—Displays even C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
• Odd—Displays odd C-band or
L-band wavelengths in the
Wavelength field.
Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU
spacing6-143
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64)
Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the SONET
(OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameter selections vary
according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-71.
Purpose This task changes the OC-192 (ANSI)/STM-64 (ETSI) settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-71 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 9 (Trunk)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a
name.
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/
special characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on
page 8-3.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information about administrative states, refer to
the “Administrative and Service States” appendix
in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService
(ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously
generated state that gives the overall condition of
the port. Service states appear in the format:
Primary State-Primary State Qualifier,
Secondary State. For more information about
service states, refer to the “Administrative and
Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
SF BER1
Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-56-144
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
SD BER1
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Type The optical transport type. • SONET (ANSI)
• SDH (ETSI)
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM
transmitter supports ALS according to
ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or
can be set for one of three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS)
occur.
• Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It
automatically restarts when the conditions that
caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be manually restarted when
conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser
for testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and down
arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If
checked, the card is provisioned as a NE timing
reference.
Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgIn Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables
synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked
Send
DoNotUse
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When
checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on
the S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked
1. SF BER and SD BER thresholds apply only to trunk ports (Port 9 for MXP_MR_2.5G and Ports 9 and 10 for MXPP_MR_2.5G).
Table 6-71 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line SONET or SDH Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-145
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the section trace
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to
PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Section Trace tab as described in Table 6-72.
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C
and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-72 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 9 (trunk only)
Received
Trace Mode
Sets the received trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
If a TIM on section overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to
downstream nodes if this box is checked.
• Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change
the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change
the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click
Refresh to manually refresh this display, or select the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. Checked/unchecked (default)6-146
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the line threshold
settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as shown in Table 6-73.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and
Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note In Table 6-73, some parameters and options do not apply to all MXP_MR_10DME cards. If the
parameter or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Purpose This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-73 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
Port (Display only) Port
number
• 9 (Trunk) • 9 (Trunk)
EB Path Errored Block
indicates that one or
more bits are in error
within a block
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh. 6-147
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
SEFS (Near End Section or
Regeneration Section
only) Severely
errored framing
seconds
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block
errors
— Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Table 6-73 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH6-148
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet,
1GFC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 Payloads
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), display the MXP_MR_10DME_C or
MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port, either the payload port, for example “1-1
(ONE_GE)”, or the equivalent ITU-T G.7041 GFP (Generic Frame Procedure) port.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and
click Refresh.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L cards carrying Ethernet, FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3
payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-73 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH6-149
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet, FC, FICON, or ISC variable. See Table 6-74 for
a list of available Ethernet variables, Table 6-75 for a list of FC and FICON variables, Table 6-76 for a
list of ISC and ISC3 variables, and Table 6-77 for a list of GFP variables.
Table 6-74 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Ethernet Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This
value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC
errors when HDLC framing is used.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSu
m
Number of code violations/running disparity errors in the
8b/10b encoded characters received.
Table 6-75 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L FC/FICON Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
ifOutOversizePkts Total number of oversized packets output from the
interface.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This
value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.6-150
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC
errors when HDLC framing is used.
fcStatsZeroTxCredits This is a count that increments when the FC/FICON Tx
credits go from a non-zero value to zero.
fcStatsRxRecvrReady Number of received RDY (Receive Ready) order set.
fcStatsTxRecvrReady Number of transmitted RDY (Receive Ready) order set.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSu
m
Number of Code Violations/Running Disparity errors in
the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
Table 6-76 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L ISC and ISC3Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSu
m
Number of Code Violations/Running Disparity errors in
the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
Table 6-77 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L GFP RMON Variables
Variable Description
gfpStatsRxSBitErrors Received generic framing protocol (GFP) frames with
single bit errors in the core header (these errors are
correctable).
gfpStatsRxTypeInvalid Received GFP frames with invalid type (these are
discarded). For example, receiving GFP frames that
contain Ethernet data when we expect Fibre Channel data.
gfpStatsRxSblkCRCErrors Total number of superblock CRC errors with the receive
transparent GFP frame. A transparent GFP frame has
multiple superblocks which each contain Fibre Channel
data.
gfpStatsCSFRaised Number of Rx client management frames with Client
Signal Fail indication.
gfpStatsLFDRaised The number of Core HEC CRC Multiple Bit Errors.
Note This count is only for cHEC multiple bit error
when in frame. It is a count of when the state
machine goes out of frame.
Table 6-75 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L FC/FICON Variables (continued)
Variable Description6-151
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold,
the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the
rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every
15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the
rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple
times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and
TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Purpose This task changes the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L
trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-152
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Verify the trunk port (Port 9) TCA thresholds are set at the values shown as follows. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and press Enter.
• RX Power High: –9 dBm
• RX Power Low: –18 dBm
• TX Power High: 9 dBm
• TX Power Low: 0 dBm
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify the trunk port (Port 9) Alarm thresholds are set at the values shown as follows. Provision new
thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a
new value, and press Enter.
• RX Power High: –8 dBm
• RX Power Low: –20 dBm
• TX Power High: 7 dBm
• TX Power Low: 3 dBm
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA
Thresholds
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required6-153
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the client port alarm
and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 6-78, verify the client ports (Ports 1 through 8) TCA thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or
ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs).
SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the
fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more
information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-78 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –17 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –16
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –15 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –166-154
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision each additional client port.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-79, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting
it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –17 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –16
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
0 –17 3 –16
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–3 –20 3 –16
ISC3
PEER 1G
ISC3
PEER 2G
ONS-SE-G2F-SX 0 –17 3 –16
ONS-SE-G2F-LX 0 –20 3 –16
FC4G ONS-SE-4G-MM 0 –12 4 –15
ONS-SE-4G-SM –1 –15 4 –15
FICON4G ONS-SE-4G-MM 0 –12 4 –15
ONS-SE-4G-SM –1 –15 4 –15
Table 6-79 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
Table 6-78 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low6-155
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision each additional client port.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–18 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
–20 3 –13 –1
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
–23 0 –13 0
ISC3
PEER 1G
ISC3
PEER 2G
ONS-SE-G2F-SX –20 3 –13 –1
ONS-SE-G2F-LX –23 0 –13 0
FC4G ONS-SE-4G-MM –15 3 –11 –1
ONS-SE-4G-SM –18 2 –11 0
FICON4G ONS-SE-4G-MM –15 3 –11 –1
ONS-SE-4G-SM –18 2 –11 0
Table 6-79 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds (continued)
PPM Port
Rate
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High6-156
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the
MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709
Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-80 through 6-83.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM independently. To
do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-80 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 6-81 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Purpose This task changes the OTN settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and
MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-80 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 9 (Trunk)
G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines to forward error
correction (FEC).
• Standard
• Enhanced
SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Asynch/Synch
Mapping
Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is
mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
• Asynch mapping
• Synch mapping6-157
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-82 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 6-83 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-81 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port1
1. Latency for a 1G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 4 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 40 microseconds. Latency
for a 2G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 2 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 20 microseconds. Consider these
values when planning a FC network that is sensitive to latency.
(Display only) Port number. 9 (Trunk)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
Table 6-82 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 2
Bit Errors
Corrected
Sets the value for bit errors corrected. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Sets the value for uncorrectable words. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Table 6-83 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 2
Level Sets the level. • Section
• Path
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual6-158
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets
a new transmit string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Disable FDI on
TTIM
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section
overhead alarm arises because of a J0
overhead string mismatch, no Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to
the downstream nodes if this box is
checked.
• Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
• Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not
disabled)
Expected Displays the current expected string; sets
a new expected string. You can click the
button on the right to change the display.
Its title changes, based on the current
display mode. Click Hex to change the
display to hexadecimal (button changes to
ASCII); click ASCII to change the
display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
String of trace string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. You can click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
String of trace string size
Table 6-83 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-159
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and
PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 14-2 to save the existing settings
before modifying.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings, page 6-160
• DLP-G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings, page 6-161
• DLP-G667 Change the 40G Muxponder Line SONET (OC-192) or SDH (STM-64), or Ethernet Line
Settings, page 6-163
• DLP-G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 6-167
• DLP-G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds, page 6-168
• DLP-G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC
Payloads, page 6-170
• DLP-G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-174
• DLP-G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 6-176
• DLP-G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings, page 6-179
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see
Chapter 10, “Manage Alarms.”
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Purpose This procedure changes the line and parameter threshold settings for the
40G-MXP-C muxponder card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 4-71
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (Optional)
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14 (Optional)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-160
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify either of the settings described in Table 6-84.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task changes the card settings for the 40G-MXP-C card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-84 40G-MXP-C Card Settings
Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options
Card Mode Sets the card mode. • Muxponder
• Unidirectional Regen
Set the mode to
Unidirectional Regen
under the following
conditions:
– Trunk port is in
OOS,DSBLD state.
– Pluggable port
modules of the card
must not be
configured for
payload.
– Regeneration peer
slot must be set to
None.
• Muxponder
• Unidirectional Regen
Set the mode to
Unidirectional Regen
under the following
conditions:
– Trunk port is in
locked,disabled
state.
– Pluggable port
modules of the card
must not be
configured for
payload.
– Regeneration peer
slot must be set to
None.
Trunk
Wavelengths
(Display only) Shows supported wavelengths
of the trunk port after the card is installed.
40G-MXP-C show the C-band wavelengths
supported by the card that is installed.
— —6-161
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs. Tabs and parameters vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-85.
Purpose This task changes the line settings for the 40G-MXP-C muxponder card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-85 40G-MXP-C Card Line Client Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. • 1 through 4 (client)
• 5 (trunk)
Port Name A logical name for each of the port. This
field is blank by default.
Type up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters.
For details, see the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task
on page 8-3.
Note You can assign a port name for each fiber
channel/FICON interface on the 40G-MXP-C card,
enabling the MDS Fabric Manager to associate the
SAN port and a SAN port on the
Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
Admin State Sets the port service state unless network
conditions prevent the change. For more
information, see Appendix B,
“Administrative and Service States” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference
Manual.
• IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
• OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
• OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
• IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
Service State (Display only) Shows the general condition
of the port. Service states appear in the
format: Primary State-Primary State
Qualifier, Secondary State. For more
information about service states, see
Appendix B, “Administrative and Service
States” in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
• IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
• OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
• OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI)
• OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance
(ETSI)6-162
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
ALS Mode (client ports only) Activates the ALS mode. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not
automatically shut down during LOS.
• Auto Restart: (OC-192/STM-64 only) ALS is on; the laser
automatically shuts down during LOS. It automatically
restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts
down during LOS. However, the laser must be manually
restarted when conditions that caused the outage are
resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for
testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
Double-click the time and use the up and
down arrows to change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after
which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Reach Sets the optical reach distance of the client
port.
• Autoprovision—The system automatically provisions the
reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value
on the hardware.
• EW
• LW
• SW
• LRM
• ER
• LR
• SR
• ZR
• IR 2
• LR 2
• DWDM
• CWDM40km
Wavelength Provisions the port wavelength. • First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band
spacing. The card wavelengths are marked by asterisks. If
the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a
dark grey background.
Squelch Shuts down the far-end laser in response to
certain defects.
• Squelch (Squelch does not apply to ISC COMPACT
payloads.)
• Disable
Table 6-85 40G-MXP-C Card Line Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-163
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G667 Change the 40G Muxponder Line SONET (OC-192) or SDH (STM-64), or
Ethernet Line Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameters vary according
to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 To modify the line SONET or SDH settings, see Table 6-86. To modify the ethernet line settings see
Table 6-87.
Overclock (trunk port only) Enables or disables
overclock mode on the trunk port.
• OFF (default)
• ON
Rx Wavelength (trunk port only) Provisions the trunk port
wavelength.
• First Tunable Wavelength
• Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band
spacing. The card wavelengths are marked by asterisks. If
the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a
dark grey background.
Purpose This task changes the line SONET OC-192 or SDH STM-64, or ethernet
line settings for the 40G-MXP-C muxponder card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-86 40G-MXP-C Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number. 1 through 4 (client)
Port Name A logical name assigned to a port. This field is
blank by default.
Type up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by
default.
For details, see the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port”
task on page 8-3.
Table 6-85 40G-MXP-C Card Line Client Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-164
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
SF BER Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3
• 1E-4
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
ProvidesSync (Display only) Displays the ProvidesSync card
parameter state.
Checked or unchecked
SyncMsgIn Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables
synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which
allow the node to choose the best timing source.
Checked or unchecked
Send
DoNotUse
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When
checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on
the S1 byte.
Checked or unchecked
Type The optical transport type. • SONET (ANSI)
• SDH (ETSI)
Termination
Mode
(Display-only for Standard Regeneration and
Enhanced FEC card configurations) Sets the
mode of operation.
• Transparent
• Section (ANSI) or Regeneration Section (RS)
(ETSI)
• Line (ANSI) or Multiplex Section (MS) (ETSI)
Table 6-87 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C Card
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port
number.
1 through 4 (client) 1 through 4 (client)
Port Name Provides the ability to assign the
specified port a name.
User-defined. Name can be up to
32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on page 8-3.
User-defined. Name can be up
to 32 alphanumeric/special
characters. Blank by default.
See the “DLP-G104 Assign a
Name to a Port” task on
page 8-3.
Admin State Sets the port service state. For more
information about administrative
states, refer to the “Administrative
and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
• IS
• IS,AINS
• OOS,DSBLD
• OOS,MT
• Unlocked
• Unlocked,automaticInService
• Locked,disabled
• Locked,maintenance
Table 6-86 40G-MXP-C Card Line SONET or SDH Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-165
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Service State (Display only) Identifies the
autonomously generated state that
gives the overall condition of the
port. Service states appear in the
format: Primary State-Primary
State Qualifier, Secondary State.
For more information about service
states, refer to the “Administrative
and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM
Reference Manual.
• IS-NR
• OOS-AU,AINS
• OOS-MA,DSBLD
• OOS-MA,MT
• Unlocked-enabled
• Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
• Locked-enabled,disabled
• Locked-enabled,maintenance
ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The
DWDM transmitter supports ALS
according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99).
ALS can be disabled, or it can be set
for one of three mode options.
• Disabled (default): ALS is off;
the laser is not automatically
shut down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the
laser automatically shuts down
when traffic outages (LOS)
occur. However, the laser must
be manually restarted when
conditions that caused the
outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the laser for
testing.
• Disabled (default): ALS is
off; the laser is not
automatically shut down
when traffic outages (LOS)
occur.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on;
the laser automatically
shuts down when traffic
outages (LOS) occur.
However, the laser must be
manually restarted when
conditions that caused the
outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart for Test:
Manually restarts the laser
for testing.
AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak
period. Double-click the time and
use the up and down arrows to
change settings.
• Duration of valid input signal,
in hh.mm format, after which
the card becomes in service
(IS) automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service state is
not supported on interlink
ports.
• Duration of valid input
signal, in hh.mm format,
after which the card
becomes in service (IS)
automatically
• 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute
increments
Note The AINS service state
is not supported on
interlink ports.
Table 6-87 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C Card
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options6-166
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Reach Displays the optical reach distance
of the client port.
• Autoprovision—The system
automatically provisions the
reach.
• LR
• LR2
• SR
• SR1
• IR 1
• ER
• ZR
• DWDM
• CWDM40km
• IR2
• MM
• Autoprovision—The
system automatically
provisions the reach.
• LR
• I1
• I2
• S2
• ER
• L1
• L2
• DWDM
• MM
• ZR
• IR 1
• CWDM40km
MTU Displays the maximum size of the
Ethernet frames accepted by the
port.
• Jumbo (16384 bytes) • Jumbo (16384 bytes)
Mapping
Mode
Displays the mapping mechanism.
Choose GFP framing (the default)
or WIS framing. The framing type
needs to match the framing type at
the far end.
• GFP
• WIS
• GFP
• WIS
Enable Flow
Control (Only
when the
framing type
is WIS)
Enables/disables flow control
messaging with its peer port. When
enabled, the port can send and
receive PAUSE frames when buffer
congestion occurs. When disabled,
no PAUSE frames are transmitted
and the PAUSE frames received are
discarded.
• ON —Flow control is enabled.
• OFF(default)—Flow control is
disabled.
• ON —Flow control is
enabled.
• OFF(default)—Flow
control is disabled.
Table 6-87 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C Card
Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options6-167
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to
PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-88.
Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for the 40G-MXP-C
muxponder card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-88 40G-MXP-C Card Line Section Trace Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Port number, applicable for only OC192/STM64
payloads.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
Received
Trace Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
Disables alarm indication signal. • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays and sets the current transmit string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. In Transmit String
Type, click Hex Mode to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to
ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode). The supported range for 1
bit Hex TX trace is 20 to 7E. If TX trace is provisioned outside
this range, client transmits 00.
Transmit string size6-168
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings shown in Table 6-89.
Note In Table 6-89, some parameters and options do not apply to all 40-G-MXP-C cards. If the
parameter or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Expected Displays and sets the current expected string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title
changes, based on the current display mode. In Expected String
Type, click Hex Mode to change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to
ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode).
Expected string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. Click Refresh
to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every
5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
Received string size
Auto-refresh Automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. • Checked
• Unchecked (default)
Purpose This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for the
40G-MXP-C muxponder card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-88 40G-MXP-C Card Line Section Trace Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-169
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-89 40G-MXP-C Card Line Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH
Port (Display only) Port
number.
Applicable for only
OC192/STM64
payloads.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
—
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
SES Severely errored
seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.6-170
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet,
8GFC, or 10G FC Payloads
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), display the 40G-MXP-C card where
you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
FC (Line or Multiplex
Section only) Failure
count
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
—
UAS (Line or Multiplex
Section only)
Unavailable seconds
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Line or Section (near end
only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Numeric. Threshold display options
include:
• Direction—Near End or Far End
• Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
• Types—Multiplex Section or
Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each
category and click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default
values.
Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for 40G-MXP-C card carrying
Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC payloads.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-89 40G-MXP-C Card Line Threshold Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options - ONS 15454 Options - ONS 15454 SDH6-171
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port, either the payload port, for example “1-1
(TEN_GE)”, or the equivalent ITU-T G.7041 GFP (Generic Frame Procedure) port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet or FC variable. See Table 6-90 for a list of
available Ethernet variables, Table 6-91 for a list of FC, and Table 6-92 for a list of GFP variables.
Table 6-90 40G-MXP-C Ethernet Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInUcastPkts The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a
higher (sub-)layer, which were not addressed to a multicast
or broadcast address at this sub-layer.
inInMulticastPkts The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a
higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a multicast
address at this sub-layer. For a MAC layer protocol, this
includes both Group and Functional addresses.
ifInBroadcastPkts The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a
higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a broadcast
address at this sub-layer.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
dot3StatsFCSErrors A count of frames received on a particular interface that
are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass
the FCS check.
dot3StatsFrameTooLong A count of frames received on a particular interface that
exceed the maximum permitted frame size.
dot3StatsInPauseFrames A count of frames received on this interface with an
opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
dot3StatsOutPauseFrames A count of MAC Control frames transmitted on this
interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
etherStatsUndersizePkts The total number of packets transmitted and received by
the interface that were less than 64 octets long (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise
well formed.
etherStatsFragments The total number of packets transmitted and received by
the interface that were less than 64 octets in length
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had
either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral.6-172
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
etherStatsPkts The total number of packets (including bad
packets,broadcast packets, and multicast packets)
transmitted and received by the interface.
etherStatsPkts64Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets)
transmitted and received by the interface that were 64
octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets The total number of packets (including error packets)
transmitted and received by the interface that were
between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets (including error packets)
transmitted and received by the interface that were
between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets The total number of packets (including error packets)
transmitted and received by the interface that were
between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets The total number of packets (including error packets)
transmitted and received by the interface that were
between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets The total number of packets (including error packets)
transmitted and received by the interface that were
between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
etherStatsBroadcastPkts The total number of good packets transmitted and received
by the interface that were directed to the broadcast address
etherStatsMulticastPkts The total number of good packets transmitted and received
by the interface that were directed to a multicast address.
Note that this number does not include packets directed to
the broadcast address.
etherStatsOversizePkts The total number of packets transmitted and received by
the interface that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise
well formed.
etherStatsJabbers The total number of packets transmitted and received by
the interface that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets), and were not an
integral number of octets in length or had a bad FCS.
etherStatsOctets The total number of octets of data (including those in bad
packets) transmitted and received by the interface on the
network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Table 6-90 40G-MXP-C Ethernet Variables (continued)6-173
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-91 40G-MXP-C FC Variables
Variable Description
ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
rxTotalPkts Total number of receive packets.
ifInErrors Total number of receive errors.
ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface,
including framing characters.
txTotalPkts Total number of transmitted packets.
ifOutErrors Number of outbound packets or transmission units that
could not be transmitted because of errors.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes.
This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This
value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors
when HDLC framing is used.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC
errors when HDLC framing is used.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesTooLong Total number of transmitted data frames that are less than
5 bytes. This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port
statistics.
mediaIndStatsTxFramesTruncated Number of transmitted data frames that exceed the MTU.
This value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
Table 6-92 40G-MXP-C GFP RMON Variables
Variable Description
gfpStatsRxFrame Total number of received data frames.
gfpStatsTxFrame Total number of transmitted data frames.
gfpStatsRxSblkCRCErrors Total number of superblock CRC errors with the receive
transparent GFP frame. A transparent GFP frame has
multiple superblocks which each contain Fibre Channel
data.
gfpStatsRxOctets Total number of GFP data octets received.
gfpStatsTxOctets Total number of GFP data octets transmitted.
gfpStatsRxSBitErrors Received generic framing protocol (GFP) frames with
single bit errors in the core header (these errors are
correctable).6-174
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, choose an alarm type. The alarm type indicates whether or not an
event is triggered by the type of threshold.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the
threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to
use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type the number of Sample Period occurrences.
Step 9 Type the number of Rising Threshold occurrences.
To trigger alarm, the measured value of a threshold must always move from below the falling threshold
to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network moves from below a rising threshold of 1000
collisions every 15 seconds to 1001 collisions.
Step 10 Type the appropriate number of occurrences for the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling
threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the exact opposite of a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above
the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example,
when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only
799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the
rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again
triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold
is exceeded.
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
gfpStatsRxMBitErrors Received GFP frames with multiple bit errors in the core
header (these errors are not correctable).
gfpStatsRxTypeInvalid Received GFP frames with invalid type (these are
discarded). For example, receiving GFP frames that contain
Ethernet data when we expect Fibre Channel data.
gfpStatsLFDRaised Indicates the count of core HEC CRC multiple bit errors.
Note This count is only of eHec multiple bit errors when
in frame. This can be looked at as a count of when
the state machine goes out of frame.
gfpRxCmfFrame —
gfpTxCmfFrame —
Table 6-92 40G-MXP-C GFP RMON Variables (continued)
Purpose This task changes the 40G-MXP-C trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed6-175
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Verify the trunk port (Port 5) TCA thresholds are set at the values shown as follows:
• Laser Bias High (%): 95.0
• RX Power High (dBm): –9.0
• RX Power Low (dBm): –22.0
• TX Power High (dBm): 9.0
• TX Power Low (dBm): 0.0
Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify the trunk port (Port 5) Alarm thresholds are set at the values shown as follows:
• Laser Bias High (%): 98.0
• RX Power High (dBm): –8.0
• RX Power Low (dBm): –24.0
• TX Power High (dBm): 7.0
• TX Power Low (dBm): 3.0
Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-176
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-93, verify the client ports (Ports 1 through 4) TCA thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button
and click Refresh.
Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the
40G-MXP-C card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 6-14
DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed Required
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-93 40G-MXP-C Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
PPM Port Rate
Pluggable Port Module1
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low
FC8G ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM –9 –22 9.0 0.0
FC10G ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 2.0 –15.8 8.0 –7.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 1.0 –14.0 5.0 –12.0
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM 0.0 0.0 6.0 –6.06-177
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision additional client ports.
Step 7 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 8 Referring to Table 6-94, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High,
RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
10GE ONS-XC-10G-30.3
through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-SR-M
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 2.0 –15.8 8.0 –7.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –7.0 –24.0 6.5 –2.5
OC192 ONS-XC-10G-30.3
through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –9.0 –26.0 8.0 –8.0
ONS-XC-10G-S1 –1.0 –11.0 5.0 –12.0
OTU2 ONS-XC-10G-30.3
through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-L2
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
1. In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the
“Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 6-93 40G-MXP-C Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds (continued)
PPM Port Rate
Pluggable Port Module1
(XFP)
TCA RX
Power High
TCA RX
Power Low
TCA TX
Power High
TCA TX
Power Low6-178
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-94 40G-MXP-C Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
PPM Port Rate
Pluggable Port Module1
(XFP)
1. In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the
“Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Alarm RX
Power Low
Alarm RX
Power High
Alarm TX
Power Low
Alarm TX
Power High
FC8G ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
FC10G ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-S1
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 4.5 –18.3 4.5 –3.5
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –4.5 –26.5 6.5 –2.5
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM 2.0 –2.0 2.0 –2.0
10GE ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-S1
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-I2 4.5 –18.3 4.5 –3.5
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –4.5 –26.5 6.5 –2.5
OC192 ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.0
ONS-XC-10G-L2 –7.0 –28.0 4.0 –4.0
ONS-XC-10G-S1 –1.0 –13.0 1.0 –8.0
OTU2 ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through
ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470
through
ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-S1
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-L2
ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
–9 –22 9.0 0.06-179
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision additional client ports.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card
where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines,
ITU-T G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-95 through 6-98.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM independently. To
do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-95 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Purpose This task changes the OTN settings for the 40G-MXP-C card.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-95 40G-MXP-C Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with
OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
ITU-T G.709
Thresholds
Sets the OTN lines according to
ITU-T G.709.
• Enable
• Disable
FEC Sets the OTN lines to forward error
correction (FEC).
• Standard
• Enhanced6-180
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-96 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-97 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit
error rate.
• 1E-5
SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5
• 1E-6
• 1E-7
• 1E-8
• 1E-9
Table 6-95 40G-MXP-C Card OTN Line Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options
Table 6-96 40G-MXP-C ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the
port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and
ports with OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select radio button individually and
click Refresh.
Click Reset to Default to restore default values.
SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select a radio button individually and
click Refresh.
UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select radio button individually and
click Refresh.
BBE Background block errors Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select radio button individually and
click Refresh.
FC Failure counter Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for
15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or
PM (ODUk). Select radio button individually and
click Refresh.6-181
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Table 6-98 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-97 40G-MXP-C Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with
OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
Bit Errors
Corrected
Sets the value for bit errors corrected. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Uncorrectable
Words
Sets the value for uncorrectable words. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or
one-day intervals.
Table 6-98 40G-MXP-C Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter Description Options
Port (Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with
OTU2 payload.
• 1-1
• 2-1
• 3-1
• 4-1
• 5 (Trunk)
Received Trace
Mode
Sets the trace mode. • Off/None
• Manual
Disable
AIS/RDI on
TIM-S
Disables alarm indication signal. • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
disabled)
• Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is
not disabled)
Transmit
Section Trace
String Size
Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte
• 16 byte
Transmit Displays and sets the current transmit
string.
You can click the button on the right to
change the display. Its title changes,
based on the current display mode. In
Transmit String Type, click Hex Mode to
change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex Mode).
Transmit string size6-182
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
channel group settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
Expected Displays and sets the current expected
string.
You can click the button on the right to
change the display. Its title changes,
based on the current display mode. In
Expected String Type, click Hex Mode to
change the display to hexadecimal
(button changes to ASCII); click ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button
changes to Hex Mode).
Expected string size
Received (Display only) Displays the current
received string. Click Refresh to
manually refresh this display, or check
the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to
keep this panel updated.
Received string size
Auto-refresh Automatically refreshes the display every
5 seconds.
• Checked
• Unchecked (default)
Purpose This procedure changes the channel group settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
• “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 6-8
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher
Table 6-98 40G-MXP-C Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings (continued)
Parameter Description Options6-183
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
• DLP-G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC, page 6-183
• DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC, page 6-184
• DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC, page 6-188
• DLP-G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC, page 6-189
• DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC, page 6-190
• DLP-G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
Cards Using CTC, page 6-191
• DLP-G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC, page 6-192
• DLP-G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC, page 6-192
• DLP-G619 Create a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI, page B-24
• DLP-G620 Add Ports to a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI, page B-25
Step 3 Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC
Note You can create up to 11 channel groups on the GE_XP and GE_XPE cards and up to 2 channel groups
on the 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards. You can create a channel group with ports only when the ports
do not have any UNI QinQ settings or NNI SVLAN settings. Otherwise, the channel group will be
created with empty ports.
For information on interaction of LACP with other protocols, see the Protocol Compatibility list in the
Transponder and Muxponder Cards chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to create a
channel group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed according to the
requirements specified in Table 4-6 on page 4-109.
Purpose This task creates a channel group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-184
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 3 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 4 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 5 Click Create. The Channel Group Creation dialog box appears.
Step 6 Enter the name of the channel group in the Name field.
Step 7 From the Stand Alone list, choose the ports that will belong to this channel group and click the right
arrow button to move the selected ports to the Bundled list.
Step 8 From the LACP Mode drop-down list, choose the LACP mode as needed:
• On—Default mode. In this mode, the ports will not exchange LACP packets with the partner ports.
• Active—In this mode, the ports will send LACP packets at regular intervals to the partner ports.
• Passive—In this mode, the ports will not send LACP packets until the partner ports send LACP
packets. After receiving the LACP packets from the partner ports, the ports will send LACP packets.
Step 9 From the LACP Hashing drop-down list, select the LACP hashing algorithm that the protocol uses to
perform the load balancing task between the bundled ports.
The following hashing algorithms are supported:
• Ucast SA VLAN Incoming Port
• Ucast DA VLAN Incoming Port
• Ucast SA DA VLAN Incoming port
• Ucast Src IP TCP UDP
• Ucast Dst IP TCP UDP
• Ucast Src Dst IP TCP UDP
Step 10 Click Create.
A new row is added in the LACP table and all the other parameters in the channel group are set to default
values. The default values of these parameters are taken from the first port that is attached to the channel
group.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC
Purpose This task modifies the parameters of the channel group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-185
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note Ports cannot be added or removed using this procedure. For adding or removing the ports, see
“DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC” task on
page 6-188.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to modify the
parameters of the channel group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to modify the parameters of the channel group.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 4 Choose a channel group from the existing channel groups.
Step 5 Modify the channel group settings as described in Table 6-99.
Table 6-99 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options
Channel Group (Display only) ID and name of the channel group. N.A.
Name Sets the name of the channel group. —
Ports (Display only) Port number (n-n) and rate (GE or
TEN_GE of the channel group).
N.A.
LACP Mode Sets the LACP mode. The channel group must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• On
• Active
• Passive
Hashing Sets the LACP hashing algorithm. The channel
group must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• Ucast SA VLAN
Incoming Port
• Ucast DA VLAN
Incoming Port
• Ucast SA DA VLAN
Incoming port
• Ucast Src IP TCP
UDP
• Ucast Dst IP TCP
UDP
• Ucast Src Dst IP
TCP UDP
Admin State Sets the administrative state on the channel group. • IS
• OOS, DSBLD
Service State (Display only) Sets the service state that indicates
the operational state of the channel group.
• IS-NR
• OOS-MA, DSBLD6-186
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
MTU Sets the maximum transfer unit (MTU), which sets
the maximum number of bytes per frame accepted
on the port. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state. The default MTU value
in the channel group is taken from the default
settings in the node.
Numeric. Default: 9700
Range: 64 to 9700
Mode Sets the provisional port mode. If the port mode is
Auto, the Expected Speed field determines which
ports can belong to the bundle. The member ports
must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• Auto
• 1000 Mbps
Expected Speed Sets the expected speed of ports of the channel
group. The channel group must be in OOS-DSBLD
admin state.
• 10 Mbps
• 100 Mbps
• 1000 Mbps
Duplex (Display only) Expected duplex capability of ports
of the channel group.
• Full
Committed Info
Rate
Sets the guaranteed information rate as per the service
provider service-level agreement. The channel group
must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
Numeric. Default: 100
Range: 0 to 100%
Committed
Burst Size
Sets the maximum number of bits transferred per
second. The channel group must be in OOS-DSBLD
admin state.
• 4k (default)
• 8k
• 16k
• 32k
• 64k
• 128k
• 256k
• 512k
• 1M
• 2M
• 4M
• 8M
• 16M
Table 6-99 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options6-187
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Excess Burst
Size
Sets the maximum number of bits credited for later
transfer if the committed burst rate cannot be
transmitted. The channel group must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• 4k (default)
• 8k
• 16k
• 32k
• 64k
• 128k
• 256k
• 512k
• 1M
• 2M
• 4M
• 8M
• 16M
NIM Sets the network interface mode (NIM) for the
channel group. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
The channel group NIM is set to UNI or NNI based
on the mode of the first port that is added to the
channel group.
• UNI Mode
(Default)—provisions
the port as a
User-Network
Interface (UNI). This
is the interface that
faces the subscriber.
• NNI
Mode—provisions
the port as a
Network-to-Network
Interface (NNI). This
is the interface that
faces the service
provider network.
Ingress CoS Provisions the IEEE 802.1p ingress class of service
(CoS). Ingress CoS is used to set the priority of the
Ethernet frame in the service provider network. The
member ports must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
• 0
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
• 6
• 7
• Trust
• CVLAN
• DSCP
Table 6-99 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options6-188
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Note When you set the Committed Info Rate above 40% on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, the Committed
Burst Size and Excess Burst Size must be set to at least 32K. The Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst
Size can be increased based on the packet size and Committed Info Rate value.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC
Inner Ethertype
(Hex)
Defines the inner Ethertype field. The Ethertype
field indicates which protocol is being transported
in an Ethernet frame. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state to modify the Inner
Ethertype value to a non-default value.
Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE Std
802.1Q customer VLAN
tag type)
Range: 0x600 to 0xffff.
Outer Ethertype
(Hex)
Defines the outer Ethertype field. The Ethertype
field identifies which protocol is being transported
in an Ethernet frame. The member ports must be in
OOS-DSBLD admin state.
Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE
standard 802.1Q service
provider VLAN tag type)
Range: 0x600 to 0xffff
MAC Learning Enables or disables MAC learning for the port on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE
cards. MAC learning is used by Layer 2 switches to
learn the MAC addresses of network nodes so that
the Layer 2 switches send traffic to the right
location. In GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE cards, enable
MAC address learning per SVLAN.
• Checked—MAC
learning is enabled
for this port.
• Unchecked—(Default)
MAC learning is
disabled for this port.
Table 6-99 Channel Group Settings
Parameter Description Options
Purpose This task adds or removes ports to or from an existing channel group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-189
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Before You Begin
• You can assign up to eight ports to a channel group on GE_XP and GE_XPE cards and up to three
ports on the 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards.
• You can assign the ports to a channel group only if the ports are in OOS-DSBLD admin state. The
ports must not have any UNI QinQ rule or NNI SVLAN configuration.
• If the channel group is configured in UNI mode, only the UNI ports can be added to the channel
group. If the channel group is configured in NNI mode, only the NNI ports can be added to the
channel group.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want add ports to an
existing channel group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to add ports to an existing channel group.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 4 Choose a channel group from the existing channel groups.
Step 5 Click Add/Remove Ports. The Add/Remove Ports dialog box appears.
Step 6 To add ports to an existing channel group, complete the following:
From the Stand Alone list, choose the required ports and click the right arrow button to move the selected
ports to the Bundled list.
Step 7 To remove ports from an existing channel group, complete the following:
From the Bundled list, choose the required ports and click the left arrow button to move the selected ports
to the Stand Alone list.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to delete the
channel group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XP card where you want to delete the channel group.
Purpose This task deletes a channel group.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-190
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 4 Choose a channel group that you want to delete.
Step 5 Click Delete.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using
CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to view and
retrieve information on the channel group, REP, CFM, and EFM. If you are already logged in, continue
with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Maintenance > Show Commands tabs.
Step 4 From the Command drop-down list, choose a command.
The following commands are supported:
• ETH LACP—Displays detailed LACP information from the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards.
• REP TOPO—Displays the topology information for a specific REP segment.
• REP TOPO ARCHIVE—Displays the previous topology information for a specific REP segment.
• REP INTERFACE—Displays information on the REP interface status and configuration. You can
retrieve detailed information for each segment by selecting Detailed from the Level drop-down list
and providing the segment ID.
• OAM DISCOVERY—Displays discovery information for all the EFM interfaces or for a specific
EFM interface.
• OAM SUMMARY—Displays the active EFM sessions on a device.
• OAM STATISTICS—Displays detailed information about the EFM packets.
Purpose This task enables you to view and retrieve information on the channel
group, Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP), Connectivity Fault
Management (CFM), and Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-191
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
• OAM STATUS—Displays information about the EFM configurations for all the EFM interfaces or
for a specific interface.
For more information, see the Pseudo Command Line Interface Reference chapter in the Cisco ONS
15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 5 From the Level drop-down list, choose Normal or Detailed.
Step 6 Click Show. Depending on the command, the appropriate output appears in the text area.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to view the
channel group PM counts on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to view the channel group statistics. The card view
appears.
Step 3 Click the Performance > Channel Groups > Statistics tabs.
Step 4 Click Refresh. Performance monitoring statistics for each channel group on the card appear in the
Statistics tab.
View the PM parameter names in the Param column. The current PM parameter values appear in the Port
# (CHGRP) column. For PM parameter definitions, refer to the “Performance Monitoring” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Note To refresh, reset, or clear PM counts, see the “NTP-G73 Change the PM Display” procedure on
page 9-2.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task enables you to view current statistical performance monitoring
(PM) counts on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards
and channel groups to detect possible performance problems.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-192
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to view the
channel group utilization PM parameters on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 2 In node view, double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to view
the channel group utilization. The card view appears.
Step 3 Click the Performance > Channel Groups > Utilization tabs.
Step 4 Click Refresh. The utilization percentages for each channel group on the card appear in the Utilization
tab.
View the Port # column to find the channel group you want to monitor.
The transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) bandwidth utilization values, for the previous time intervals, appear
in the Prev-n columns. For PM parameter definitions, refer to the “Performance Monitoring” chapter in
the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Note To refresh, reset, or clear PM counts, see the “NTP-G73 Change the PM Display” procedure on
page 9-2.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Purpose This task enables you to view line utilization PM counts on the GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards and channel groups to detect
possible performance problems.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This task enables you to view historical PM counts at selected time
intervals on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards and
channel groups to detect possible performance problems.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-193
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to view the
channel group history PM parameters on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card where you want to view the channel group history PM data. The card
view appears.
Step 3 Click the Performance > Channel Groups > History tabs.
Step 4 From the Port field, choose a channel group.
Step 5 Click Refresh. Performance monitoring statistics for each channel group on the card appear in the
History tab.
View the PM parameter names that appear in the Param column. The PM parameter values appear in the
Prev-n columns. For PM parameter definitions, refer to the “Performance Monitoring” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Note To refresh, reset, or clear PM counts, see the “NTP-G73 Change the PM Display” procedure on
page 9-2.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to change the
CFM settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• DLP-G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC, page 6-194
• DLP-G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC, page 6-195
• DLP-G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC, page 6-196
Purpose This procedure changes the CFM settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE,
10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 4-69
• “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 6-8
• DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 6-11 (if necessary)
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Provisioning or higher6-194
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
• DLP-G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC, page 6-197
• DLP-G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC, page 6-198
• DLP-G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC, page 6-199
• DLP-G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC, page 6-199
• DLP-G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC,
page 6-200
• DLP-G629 Create a MEP Using CTC, page 6-201
• DLP-G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC, page 6-202
• DLP-G631 Create a MIP Using CTC, page 6-202
• DLP-G632 Delete a MIP Using CTC, page 6-203
• DLP-G633 Ping MEP Using CTC, page 6-204
• DLP-G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC, page 6-205
• DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC, page 6-190
• DLP-G635 Enable CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI,
page B-29
• DLP-G636 Create a Maintenance Domain on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Using PCLI, page B-29
• DLP-G637 Create a Maintenance Intermediate Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI, page B-30
• DLP-G638 Create a Maintenance End Point on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE
Cards Using PCLI, page B-31
Step 3 Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC
Note CFM is disabled on the card by default. CFM must be enabled at both card and port levels for the CFM
service to work.
For information on interaction of CFM with other protocols, see the Protocol Compatibility list in the
Transponder and Muxponder Cards chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Purpose This task allows you to enable or disable CFM on GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-195
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to enable or
disable CFM on the card. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Security tab.
Step 4 Uncheck the MAC security check box to disable MAC security.
Step 5 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Global Settings tabs.
Step 6 Check the Enable CFM check box that is present at the bottom of the screen.
Step 7 Choose the value for CC Timer field. The value can be 1 second, 10 seconds, or 1 minute.
Note Continuity Check (CC) messages are periodically exchanged between maintenance end points (MEPs).
The CC Timer field is used to set the time frequency for transmission of CC messages.
Step 8 Click Apply to enable CFM on the card.
Note Uncheck the Enable CFM check box to disable CFM on the card.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC
Note CFM must be enabled at both card and port levels for the CFM service to work. However, CFM is
enabled on all the ports by default.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to enable or
disable CFM for each port. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Global Settings tabs.
Purpose This task allows you to enable or disable CFM for each port on GE_XP,
10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-196
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 4 If you want to enable CFM on a specific port, check the Enable CFM check box against that port.
Step 5 Choose the value for CC Timer field. The value can be 1 second, 10 seconds, or 1 minute.
Note Continuity Check (CC) messages are periodically exchanged between MEPs. The CC Timer field is used
to set the time frequency for transmission of CC messages.
Step 6 Click Apply to enable CFM on the port.
Note Uncheck the Enable CFM check box against the port to disable CFM on the port.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
Before You Begin
• You can create up to eight maintenance domain profiles on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards.
• The maximum number of characters for the maintenance domain profile and the maintenance
association profile must not exceed 43 characters.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to create a
maintenance domain profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Domain Profiles tabs or in
node/network view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > Domain Profiles tabs.
Note Use the network view to store the domain profile on multiple nodes.
Step 4 Click Add row(s).
Purpose This task allows you to create a maintenance domain profile on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-197
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 5 Enter the name of the domain in the Domain Name field.
Step 6 Enter the level of the domain profile in the Level field. The range of the domain profile level is from 0
to 7.
Step 7 Click Store.
Step 8 Choose the card slot where you want to store this domain profile and click OK.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to delete a
maintenance domain profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Domain Profiles tabs or in
node/network view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > Domain Profiles tabs.
Step 4 Select the domain profiles that you want to delete.
Step 5 Check the on Node check box.
Step 6 Click Delete Sel. row(s). The CFM Profile Deleting dialog box appears.
Step 7 Choose the card slot where you want to delete this profile and click OK. The Deleting Profile dialog
box appears.
Step 8 In the Deleting Profile dialog box, click Yes.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to delete a maintenance domain profile on the
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-198
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
Note You can create up to 1500 maintenance association profiles on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or
10GE_XPE cards.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to create a
maintenance association profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA Profiles tabs or in node/network
view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > MA Profiles tabs.
Note Use the network view to store the maintenance association profile on multiple nodes.
Step 4 Click Add row(s).
Step 5 Enter the name of the maintenance association in the Maintenance Profile Name field.
Step 6 Enter the VLAN ID in the VLAN ID field. The range of the VLAN ID is from 1 to 4093.
Step 7 Check the CC Enable check box to receive Continuity Check messages.
Step 8 Click Store.
Step 9 Choose the card slot where you want to store this maintenance association profile and click OK.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Purpose This task allows you to create a maintenance association profile on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-199
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
DLP-G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
Note Ensure that the maintenance association profile you want to modify is not associated with a maintenance
domain profile.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to modify a
maintenance association profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA Profiles tabs or in node/network
view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > MA Profiles tabs.
Step 4 Select the maintenance association profiles that you want to modify.
Step 5 Click Modify Selected Profile(s). The Modify MA Profile dialog box appears.
Step 6 Modify the values as required and click OK.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
Note Ensure that the maintenance association profile you want to delete is not associated with a maintenance
domain profile.
Purpose This task allows you to modify a maintenance association profile on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This task allows you to delete a maintenance association profile on
GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-200
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to delete a
maintenance association profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA Profiles tabs or in node/network
view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > MA Profiles tabs.
Step 4 Select the maintenance association profiles that you want to delete.
Step 5 Check the on Node check box.
Step 6 Click Delete Sel. row(s). The CFM Profile Deleting dialog box appears.
Step 7 Choose the card slot where you want to delete this profile and click OK. The Deleting Profile dialog
box appears.
Step 8 In the Deleting Profile dialog box, click Yes.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain
Profile Using CTC
Note Ensure that you have already created maintenance domain profiles and maintenance association profiles.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to map a
maintenance association profile to a maintenance domain profile. If you are already logged in, continue
with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA-Domain Mapping tabs.
Step 4 From the main drop-down list, choose a maintenance domain profile.
Step 5 Click Link MA Profiles. The Link MA Profiles dialog box appears.
Purpose This task allows you to map a maintenance association profile to a
maintenance domain profile on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and
10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-201
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 6 From the Available Profiles list, choose the required MA profiles and click the right arrow button to
move the MA profiles to the Linked Profiles list and click OK.
Note The maintenance association profiles that are mapped with a specific maintenance domain
profile must have a unique SVLAN ID.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G629 Create a MEP Using CTC
Note You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up to 500
MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to create a MEP.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MEP tabs.
Step 4 Click Create. The Create MEP dialog box appears.
Step 5 From the Port drop-down list, choose a port where you want to create the MEP.
Note CFM must be enabled on the port to create a MEP. The port must not belong to a channel group.
Step 6 From the Domain drop-down list, choose a maintenance domain.
Step 7 Enter the SVLAN ID in the Vlan Id field.
Note The specified VLAN must be configured on the selected port. The specified VLAN must also appear in
the MA-Domain Mapping table.
Step 8 Enter the MP ID (identifier of the maintenance end point) in the MPID field and click OK. The range of
the MP ID is from 1 to 8191.
Purpose This task allows you to create a Maintenance End Point (MEP) for a
given VLAN range on a specific maintenance domain.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-202
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
The MP ID must not be the same between the maintenance end points.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to delete a MEP.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MEP tabs.
Step 4 Select the MEPs that you want to delete.
Step 5 Click Delete.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G631 Create a MIP Using CTC
Note You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up to 500
MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
Purpose This task allows you to delete a MEP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP,
GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher
Purpose This task allows you to create a Maintenance Intermediate Point (MIP)
for a given VLAN range with a specific maintenance level.
Tools/Equipment None
Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC, page 3-30
Required/As Needed As needed
Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote
Security Level Retrieve or higher6-203
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide, Release 9.2
78-19286-02
Chapter 6 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task on page 3-30 at the node where you want to create a MIP.
If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode.
See “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on
page 6-8.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MIP tabs.
Step 4 Click Create. The Create MIP dialog box appears.
Step 5 From the Port drop-down list, choose a port where you want to create the MIP.
Note The port must not belong to a channel group.
Step 6 From the Level drop-down list, choose a maintenance level. The range of the maintenance level is from
0 to 7.
Step 7 Enter the SVLAN range in the Vlan range field. The range of the SVLAN is from 1 to 4093.
Note The specified SVLAN must be configured on the selected port.